Samsung TV Audio / Vidéo 3D UE46D6500VH - Mode d'emploi - Manuel de l'utilisateur - Manuels SAMSUNG sur FNAC.COM  - Liste des manuels utilisateur Samsung - Revenir à l'accueil

Description	Date de distribution	Langue	Fichier
CE DoC	2011.12.08	ANGLAIS	2.03 MB
CE DoC	2011.12.08	ANGLAIS	2.05 MB
Manuel de l'utilisateur	2011.12.08	ANGLAIS	15.31 MB
Manuel de l'utilisateur	2011.12.08	FRANÇAIS	13.53 MB
CE DoC	2011.12.08	FRANÇAIS	0.22 MB
CE DoC	2011.12.08	FRANÇAIS	0.21 MB

Liste des manuels APPLEListe des produits Sony Liste des produits Dell Liste des Manuels Samsung Listes des Manuels Konica Minolta

Manuels Utilisateurs Samsung :

Samsung TV Audio / Vidéo 3D UE32D6300SS

Samsung TV Audio / Vidéo TV LCD LE32A437T2D

Samsung TV Audio / Vidéo TV PDP PS50A466 PS50A466P2M

Samsung TV Audio / Vidéo TV LED UE46EH5300W

Samsung TV Audio / Vidéo TV LED UE37C6000UE37C6000RW

Samsung Informatique Moniteur LCD 770TFT

Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника Плазменные Плазма 51" cерия 5 Full HD PS51E530 PS51E530A3W Russe

Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника LED-телевизоры UE46EH5000W Russe

Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника LED-телевизоры UE46D5000PW Russe

Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника LED-телевизоры Телевизор 26" серия 4 HD LED UE26EH4000UE26EH4000W Russe

Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника Плазменные Плазма 42" Серия 4 HD PS42C431A2 PS42C431A2W Russe

Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника LED-телевизоры Телевизор 46" серия 5 SMART TV Full HD LED UE46EH5300 UE46EH5300W Russe

Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника Плазменные PS42A410C3 Russe

Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника 3D Телевизор 40" серия 6 SMART TV 3D Full HD LED UE40ES6100 UE40ES6100W Russe

Samsung TV Audio / Vidéo TV LCD LE40B651LE40B651T3W

Samsung TV Audio / Vidéo TV LCD LE40B651LE40B651T3W Russe

Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника LED-телевизоры UE55B7000WW Russe

Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника 3D UE40ES7500S Russe

Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника 3D Телевизор 40" серия 6 SMART TV 3D Full HD LED UE40ES6100 UE40ES6100W Russe4

Samsung Мобильные телефоны Мобильные телефоны C3510 TVGT-C3510T Russe

Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника Плазменные PS42B430P2W Russe

Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника 3D UE46D7000LS Russe

Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника 3D LED телевизор 40" Серия 7 3D SMART TV Full HD UE40D7000L UE40D7000LS Russe

Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника LED-телевизоры 37" FULL HD LED телевизор серии 5 UE37EH5007KUE37EH5007K Russe

Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника LED-телевизоры LED телевизор 32" Серия 5 Full HD UE32C5000Q UE32C5000QW Russe

Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника LED-телевизоры Телевизор 46" серия 5 SMART TV Full HD LED UE46EH5307 UE46EH5307K Russe

Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника ЖК-телевизоры ЖК телевизор 40" Серия 5 Full HD LE40C530F1 LE40C530F1W Russe

Samsung Мобильные телефоны Смартфоны Samsung S6012 GT-S5830I Russe

Samsung Мобильные телефоны Смартфоны GT-S5830I Russe

Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника ЖК-телевизоры LE40C530F1W Russe

Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника 3D UA55D6600WR Russe

Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника Плазменные Плазма 43" cерия 4 HD PS43E450PS43E450A1W Russe

Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника LED-телевизоры Телевизор 32" серия 5 Full HD LED UE32EH5040 UE32EH5040W Russe

Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника LED-телевизоры LED телевизор 40" Серия 6 Full HD UE40C6000R UE40C6000RW Russe

Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника ЖК-телевизоры LE32B450C4W Russe

Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника 3D UA40C7000WR Russe

Samsung Бытовая техника Настенное крепление Настенная сплит-система "Стандарт" AQ07RLAQ07RLN Russe

Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника LED-телевизоры UA40C5000QR Russe

TV Audio / Vidéo 3D 40", UE40D6200WXZF, série 6, SMART TV, 3D, FULL HD, LED TV UE40D6200TS

Аудиотехника Видеотехника LED-телевизоры LED телевизор 32" Серия 4 HD UE32C4000P UE32C4000PW Russe

Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника 3D LED телевизор 40" Серия 6 3D SMART TV Full HD UE40D6100S UE40D6100SW Russe

Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника 3D Телевизор 55" серия 8 3D SMART TV Full HD LED UE55ES8007 UE55ES8007U Russe

Аудиотехника Видеотехника LED-телевизоры Телевизор 40" серия 5 SMART TV Full HD LED UE40EH5307 UE40EH5307K

Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника 3D LED телевизор 46" Серия 8 3D SMART TV Full HD UE46D8000Y UE46D8000YS Russe

Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника 3D Телевизор 65" серия 8 SMART TV 3D Full HD LED UE65ES8007 UE65ES8007U Russe

Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника LED-телевизоры UE32D5000PW Russe

Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника 3D Плазма 51" Серия 8 3D SMART TV Full HD PS51D8000F PS51D8000FS Russe

Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника LED-телевизоры Телевизор 40" серия 5 Full HD LED UE40EH5047 UE40EH5047K Russe

Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника LED-телевизоры Телевизор 40" серия 5 SMART TV Full HD LED UE40ES5537 UE40ES5537K Russe

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-YP-GI1EW-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS50C430-PS50C430A1W-Francais-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS50Q96HD-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE46C5100QW-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE46B7020WW-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32C4000PH-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQ09UGFN-Manuels

Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-12-MP-Ecran-LCD-2-7-compact-essentiel-Samsung-ES80-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Lave-linge-frontal-WF1702NHWG-YLE-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-SGH-U100-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-GT-P5100-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-SGH-E570-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40D5720RS-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-de-bureau-DP700A3D-A01FR-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-SGH-R200-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE37A457C1D-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R610-NP-R610-AS06FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R610-NP-R610-AS08FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-X420I-NP-X420-JA05FR-France-Manuels

Samsung-TV-AV-LED-UE40B7000WW-Royaume-Uni-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Couleur-16-4ppm-Multifonction-lasercouleur-CLX-3185FN-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Couleur-16-4ppm-Imprimante-laser-couleur-CLP-300-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R610-NP-R610-AS06FR-Francais-Manuels

Samsung-Monitors-2493HM-USA-Etats-Unis-Manuels

Samsung-Exhibit-4G-Android-Smartphone-SGH-T759-USA-Etats-Unis-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40ES6100W-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV12PSBN-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-55-UE55D7000WXZF-serie-7-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE55D7000LS-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40C7700WS-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE32D6500VQ-Manuels

Samsung-Refrigerators-26-CU-FT-FRENCH-DOOR-REFRIGERATOR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-QX510-NP-QX510-S01FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-monochrome-ML-2165W-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-SF-5800P-Francais-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-Q35-NP-Q35T007-SEF-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-X420I-NP-X420-JA05FR-Francais-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Couleur-CLX-9201NA-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Couleur-CLX-9301NA-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-X420I-NP-X420-JA05FR-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40ES6900-ZF-Slim-LED-40-SMART-TV-3DUE40ES6900S-francais-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-S5150-gold-Open-market-GT-S5150-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Pompe-a-chaleur-Air-Eau-Neo-Forte-EHS-Hybride-NH022NHXEA-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenagers-Front-Loader-WF710Y4BKWQ-EN-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP350V5C-S06FR-Manuels

Samsung-TV-AV-LED-19-D4003-Series-4-LED-TV%20-UE19D4003BW-Royaume-Uni-Manuels

Samsung-PC-Office-Netbook-NP-N220-Royaume-Uni-Manuels

Samsung-PC-Office-Notebook-R519-Royaume-Uni-Manuels

Samsung-Mobile-Phone-Smart-Phone-Galaxy-Camera-EK-GC100-Inde-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-SCX-8123NA-Manuels

Samsung-SCX-3400-Pakistan-Manuels

Samsung-PC-Office-Notebook-ATIV-Smart-PC-XE500T1C-3G-XE500T1C-H01SG-Singapour-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenagers-Front-Loader-WF710Y4BKWQ-EN-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP350V5C-S06FR-Manuels

Samsung-TV-AV-LED-19-D4003-Series-4-LED-TV%20-UE19D4003BW-Royaume-Uni-Manuels

Samsung-PC-Office-Netbook-NP-N220-Royaume-Uni-Manuels

Samsung-PC-Office-Notebook-R519-Royaume-Uni-Manuels

Samsung-Mobile-Phone-Smart-Phone-Galaxy-Camera-EK-GC100-Inde-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-SCX-8123NA-Manuels

Samsung-SCX-3400-Pakistan-Manuels

Samsung-PC-Office-Notebook-ATIV-Smart-PC-XE500T1C-3G-XE500T1C-H01SG-Singapour-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-ML-1674-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE55D6300SS-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS50C430-PS50C430A1W-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-S3100-gris-Open-market-GT-S3100-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32C4000-UE32C4000PW-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-23-Serie-3-Moniteur-LED-TV-T23A350-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32B350F1W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-Blu-ray-BD-P1600-BD-P1600A-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-Blu-ray-HT-C6930W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE26C4000PW-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R719NP-R719-XA01FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-5-550P7C-NP550P7C-T02FR-Manuels

Samsung-Stockage-informatique-SSD-Basic-Kit-64-GoMZ-7PC064B-Manuels

Samsung-Photo-Camescope-NX-Samsung-Smart-Camera-NX210-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Sans-sac-SC8850-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Micro-ondes-Micro-ondes-gril-niche-380-mm-23-L-FG87SST-FG87SST-XEF-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Lave-vaisselle-DW5363PGBSL-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Lave-vaisselle-DW5363PGBWQ-Manuels

Samsung-Mobile-Phone-Feature-Phone-GT-E1175T-Anglais-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE46C530-LE46C530F1W-Manuels

Samsung-Mobile-Phone-Smart-Phone-Galaxy-Nexus-GT-I9250-Royaume-Uni-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-SF-5800P-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-550-noir-Open-market-GT-I5500-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-de-bureau-DP700A3D-S01FR-Manuels

Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-Samsung-WB100-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Micro-Chaine-Hi-Fi-MM-E430D-Micro-chaine-DVD-DivX-Double-Dock-USB-Bluetooth-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-YH-820MW-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S22B150N-Manuels

Samsung-Stockage-informatique-Graveur-DVD-Slim-External-8X-DVD-Writer-SE-208AB-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Plaque-de-cuisson-CTN431SC0S-Manuels

24ppm-Multifonction-laser-couleur-CLX-6250FX-Samsung-Manuels

32-UE32D6200WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE32D6200TS-Samsung-Manuels

35-35ppm-Copieur-couleur-CLX-9350ND-Samsung-Manuels

Galaxy-Y-S5360-AndroidGT-S5360-Manuels-Utilisateur-et-Guides-Rapide-Samsung

Manuels-de-l-Utilisateur-19-UE19D4000WXZF-serie-4-HD-TV-LED-TV-UE19D4000NW-Samsung

N145Plus-NP-N145P-Manuels

Samsung-51-PS51E490WXZF-serie-4-3D-HD-TV-PDP-TV-PS51E490B1W-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-R730-Red-Gloss-NP-R730-JS01FR-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-SGH-I320-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46C7700-UE46C7700WS-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-RV-RV510-NP-RV510-S01FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-3-300E7ANP300E7A-A02FR-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-40-UE40D7000WXZF-serie-7-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE40D7000LS-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-E1150-rouge-Open-market-GT-E1150-Manuels

Samsung-Téléphone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Player-Addict-noir-Open-market-SGH-I900-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R730CE-NP-R730-JT08FR-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Player-Style-Open-market-SGH-F480-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP350V5C-NP350V5C-S03FR-Manuels

Samsung-RV511-NP-RV511-A06MA-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-R590-Crystal-NP-R590-JS01FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R530E-NP-R530-JT50FR-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32C630-LE32C630K1W-Manuels

Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-SAMSUNG-S850-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-55-UE55D6530WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE55D6530WS-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Player-City-blanc-Orange-GT-S5260P-Manuels

Samsung-TV-AV-PDP-2012-PS43E450A1R-43-inch-HD-Ready-Plasma-TV-Emirats-Arabes-Unis-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Robot-Aspirateur-Robot-2-murs-Virtuel-Noir-SR8895-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-E2530-Open-market-GT-E2530-Manuels

Samsung-Peripheriques-pour-PC-Multifonctions-monochromes-SCX-3405W-Manuels

Samsung-I9300-GT-I9300-Afrique-du-Nord-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Player-Addict-noir-Open-market-SGH-I900-Manuels

Samsung-Camera-Camcorder-Compact-ST66-SAMSUNG-ST66-Manuels

Samsung-PC-Office-Mono-Multi-function-SCX-3405FW-Hong-Kong-Manuels

Samsung-Mobile-Phone-Smart-Phone-Samsung-GALAXY-S-III-GALAXY-S3-GT-I9300-Singapour-Manuels

Samsung-Mobile-Phone-Smart-Phone-Galaxy-Music-GT-S6010-Royaume-Uni-Manuels

Samsung-Home-Appliance-Top-Mounted-Fridge-Freezer-SR365TSS-Nouvelle-Zelande-Manuels

Samsung-Home-Appliance-Top-Loader-Top-Load-Washing-Machine-WA10W9-Singapour-Manuels

Samsung-electromenagers-Front-Loader-WF710Y4BKWQ-EN-Belgique-Manuels

Samsung-PC-Office-LCD-LED-S22C200BW-Hong-Kong-Manuels

Samsung-Camaras-Alta-definicion-Videocamara-HD-F80HMX-F80SP-Espagne-Manuels

Samsung-Mobile-Phone-Smart-Phone-Galaxy-Camera-EK-GC100-Emirats-Arabes-Unis-Manuels

Samsung-Sprzet-komputerowy-i-Drukarki-Notebooki-NP-R710-AS04PL-Pologne-Manuels

Samsung-Informatica-LCD-2043SW-Portugues-Portugais-Bresil-Manuels

Samsung-TV-AV-3D-Blu-ray-HT-E3550-English-Anglais-Manuels

Samsung-Camera-Camcorder-Compact-ES90-14.2MP-Digital-Camera-FIND-A-PRODUCT-SAMSUNG-ES90-English-Anglais-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP900X1B-NP900X1B-A01FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-3-300E7A-NP300E7A-S0CFR-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-RT50QMSW-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46EH6030W-Manuels

Samsung-Home-Appliance-Side-by-Side-RSA1STMG-Arabe-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-PS59D6900DS-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40ES6300-ZF-Slim-LED-40-SMART-TV-3DUE40ES6300S-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP700Z7C-NP700Z7C-S02FR-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Side-By-Side-Refrigerateur-Side-By-Side-RS6178UGDSR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP900X4C-NP900X4C-A02FR-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-SGH-S730-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-SGH-E590-Manuels

20ppm-Multifonction-laser-couleur-CLX-6220FX-Samsung-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-SF-5100P-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-RC710E-NP-RC710-S02FR-Francais-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-XE500T1C-A01FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R730CE-NP-R730-JT0BFR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R610-NP-R610-FS02FR-francais-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R610-NP-R610-FS02FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-RC710E-NP-RC710-S02FR-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9100G-francais-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300E5C-NP300E5C-AF5FR-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-C520-Hello-Kitty-Open-marketS-GH-C520-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Autres-Samsung-Player-mini-2GT-C3310-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP530U3C-NP530U3C-A06FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP700Z5C-NP700Z5C-S02FR-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Galaxy-Camera-EK-GC100-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-SGH-Z360-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE46A856-LE46A856S1M-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40B620T2WXXC-LE40B620R3W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A568-LE40A568P3M-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQ18FAN-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE22D450G1W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-46-UE46D6200WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE46D6200TS-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP900X4C-NP900X4C-A02FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP900X4D-A02FR-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-NL22B-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-3-300E7A-NP300E7A-S0BFR-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE46A568-LE46A568P3M-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE65ES8000-ZF-Slim-LED-65-SMART-INTERACTION-3D-UE65ES8000S-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46ES6530S-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-C6625-gris-Open-market-GT-C6625-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE46B8000WW-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Corby-Pro-rouge-Open-market-GT-B5310-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Side-By-Side-Refrigerateur-SBS-A-507-L-Blanc-RSA1TWP-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Micro-Chaine-Hi-Fi-Micro-chaine-MM-D430DWXZF-serie-4-DVD-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A626-LE40A626A3M-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Autres-GT-C3310-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-C3520-GT-C3520-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Side-By-Side-Refrig%C3%A9rateur-SBS-A-510-L-Inox-RSH5TERS-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Micro-ondes-Micro-ondes-mono-23L-SILVER-ME82V-Manuels*

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40D503F7W-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-Imprimante-monochrome-ML-2165-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Side-By-Side-RSA1DTMG-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-SF-6900-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-HT-C5530-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S24B300BL-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-HT-D4200-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R730C-NP-R730-JB03FR-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-R-mix-YP-R1JCP-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-P2470HD-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-Blu-ray-BD-P1600-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-J770-Open-market-SGH-J770-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-Home-cinema-DVD-5.1-HT-D350WXZF-serie-3HT-D350-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Couleur-CLX-6200FX-Manuels

Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-Samsung-Smart-Camera-WB850F-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP700Z5AH-NP700Z5A-S02FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP305V5AD-NP305V5A-S02FR-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46ES6530S-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS50A456-PS50A456P2D-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40D6570WS-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-22-Serie-3-Moniteur-LED-TV-T22A300-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-S2-YP-S2QB-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-24ppm-Imprimante-laser-mono-ML-2580N-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-Imprimante-monochrome-ML-3710ND-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40D5003BW-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-Blu-ray-BD-P2500-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-U600-Open-market-SGH-U600-Manuels

Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Definition-Standard-5-MP-Ecran-LCD-2.7-6.86-cm-Camescope-SD-Samsung-F700-SMX-F700BP-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R710-NP-R710-ASS1FR-Manuels

Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-SAMSUNG-PL101-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-S3-GT-I9300-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A566P1M-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE46D550K1W-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Plusieurs-Pieces-MH026FWEA-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV07PSBN-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS50B850-PS50B850Y1W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE37D5000ZF-UE37D5000PW-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Pompe-a-chaleur-Air-Eau-NH300WHXES-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40ES5700S-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-60-UE60D8000WXZF-serie-8-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE60D8000YS-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32D403E2W-Manuels

Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-ST500-SAMSUNG-ST500-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-GT-S5610-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-S3-GT-I9300-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-27-Serie-3-Moniteur-LED-TV-T27A300-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-GT-E1170-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40R86BD-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE22C350-LE22C350D1W-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-J700-SGH-J700G-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Micro-ondes-Micro-ondes-Gril-23L-SILVER-GS89F-1SPGS89F-1SP-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-3-300E5A-NP300E5A-A02FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-15-6-Serie-4-Gamme-Professionnelle-400B5B-NP400B5B-S02FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-12-5-Serie-4-Gamme-Professionnelle-400B2B-NP400B2B-A01FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-17-3-Serie-RC-RC730-NP-RC730-S05FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-Multifonction-monochrome-SCX-3405W-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-de-bureau-23-Serie-7-All-In-One-700A3B-DP700A3B-A01FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-15-6-Serie-RC-RC530-NP-RC530-S03FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-15-6-Serie-3-300E5-ANP300E5A-S08FR-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-Blu-ray-Lecteur-blu-ray-BD-D6900WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3DBD-D6900-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE37A568-LE37A568P3M-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-24-Serie-3-Moniteur-LED-TV-T24A350-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-G600-Open-market-SGH-G600-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Wireless-Audio-with-Dock-DA-E650-ZF-Double-Dock-Bluetooth-3.0-USB-AUXDA-E650-Manuels

Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Haute-Definition-HMX-QF20BP-Manuels

Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-Samsung-PL90-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32C550-LE32C550J1W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE23R86BD-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE26C450E1W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32A436T1D-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-GT-E1151-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-P3YP-P3JCB-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Couleur-16-4ppm-Multifonction-laser-couleur-CLX-3185W-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique%20Multifonction-Monochrome-24ppm-Multifonction-laser-mono-SCX-4824FN-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-11-6-Serie-7-Slate-PC-700T1A-3G-XE700T1A-H01FR-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9100G-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-F250-Open-market-SGH-F250-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R730-NP-R730-JA05FR-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE26D4003BW-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Player-Duo-noir-Open-market-SGH-D980-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40C5100QW-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-17-3-Serie-7-Gamer-700G7A-NP700G7A-S01FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Nouveau-Serie-9-900X3C-NP900X3C-A01FR-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-Lecteur-Multimedia-Galaxy-S-WiFi-4.0-Blanc-8GoYP-G1CW-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Micro-Chaine-Hi-Fi-Micro-chaine-MM-D470DWXZF-serie-4-DVD-MM-D470D-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Solid-B2100-rouge-Open-market-GT-B2100-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-13-3-Serie-5-ULTRA-530U3B-NP530U3B-A02FR-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Chat-335-gris-Open-market-GT-S3350-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-LE46C750-LE46C750R2W-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-Xcover-GT-S5690-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40B530P7W-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Lave-linge-frontal-WF0702NBE-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-Blu-ray-Home-cinema-blu-ray-HT-D6750WWXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE55C7700-UE55C7700WS-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-Blu-ray-BD-E8300-ZF-Enregistreur-Blu-Ray-320-Go-SMART-HUB-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-LE46C750-LE46C750R2W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Enregistreur-DVD-DVD-SH893-Manuels

Samsung-Photo-Camescope-NX-Systeme-NX-NX100-14-6-MP-Ecran-7-6cm-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Couleur-Imprimante-couleur-CLP-365-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-3-305E5A-NP305E5A-A01FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-15-6-Serie-2-Gamme-Professionnelle-200A5B-NP200B5B-A01FR-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-Samsung-Q3YP-Q3CB-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-B3310bleu-Open-market-GT-B3310-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-U600-Open-market-SGH-U600B-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-E250-Open-market-SGH-E250-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S24B350H-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP350E7C-NP350E7C-S0BFR-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE55ES7000-ZF-Slim-LED-55-SMART-INTERACTION-3D-UE55ES7000S-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP900X4D-NP900X4D-A01FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP700Z7CH-NP700Z7C-S01FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-14-Serie-7-Chronos-700Z3A-NP700Z3A-S02FR-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-SUR40-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE32D6510WS-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-300V3A-NP300V3A-A01FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ultra-Mobilite-NP-NC10-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I5800-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-Imprimante-monochrome-ML-2160-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R720E-NP-R720-JS03FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R730CE-NP-R730-JT07FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R620E-NP-R620-JS02FR-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32D5720RS-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP550P5C-NP550P5C-T04FR-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-55-UE55D8000WXZF-serie-8-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE55D8000YS-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-17-3-Serie-3-300E7A-NP300E7A-A01FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-RV-RV515-NP-RV515-S04FR-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46ES6710-ZF-Slim-LED-46-SMART-TV-3DUE46ES6710S-Manuels

Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-14-2MP-Ecran-3-hVGA-Smart-Camera-Samsung-WB150F-SAMSUNG-WB150F-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40ES6900-ZF-Slim-LED-40-SMART-TV-3DUE40ES6900S-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-HG40EA590LS-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-Blu-ray-HT-E8200-ZF-Barre-de-son-Blu-Ray-3D-Bluetooth-HT-E8200-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Electromenager-Micro-ondes-CE117PPT-Manuels

Samsung-TV-AV-3D-TV-TV-UN50ES6350F-Coree-du-Sud-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-19ppm-Multifonction-laser-mono-SCX-4200-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Couleur-32-32ppm-Imprimante-laser-couleur-CLP-770ND-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Couleur-16-4ppm-Imprimante-laser-couleur-CLP-320-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-32-UE32D5700WXZF-serie-5-SMART-TV-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE32D5700RS-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9000-RW8-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-TC220W-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9001-M8-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-Teos-noir-Bouygues-GT-I5800-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-10.1-Wi-Fi-GT-P5110-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-7.0-GT-P3100-Manuels-Mode-d-emploi

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Galaxy-S-Advance-GT-I9070P-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-LE40C750-LE40C750R2W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32ES5500-ZF-Slim-LED-32-SMART-TV-UE32ES5500W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A676-LE40A676A1M-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-S5230-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40EH5300W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE46B651-LE46B651T3W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE22D5010NW-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-Lecteur-Multimedia-Galaxy-S-WiFi%203.6-Noir-8GoYP-GS1CB-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32EH5000-ZF-LED-32-FULL-HD-UE32EH5000W-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-Note-blanc-SFR-GT-N7000-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-7.0-Wi-FiGT-P3110-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-GT-P7300-M16-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-Note-noir-SFRGT-N7000-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-S5839I-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-PS63C7700-PS63C7700YS-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE50ES6900S-ZF-Slim-LED-50-SMART-TV-3D-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE55D6300SS-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-46-UE46D6500WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TVUE46D6500VS-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32A676-LE32A676A1M-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-PS63C7700-PS63C7700YS-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-55-UE55D6200WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TVUE55D6200TS-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE55ES6540S-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40D6750WS-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32C450E1W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40C530-LE40C530F1W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46D6750WS-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40B6000-UE40B6000VW-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A556P1F-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE46C6710-UE46C6710US-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40C5100QW-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS50C530-PS50C530C1W-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-14-Serie-5-ULTRA-530U4B-NP530U4B-S01FR-Manuels

Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-Samsung-DV90-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-Refrigerateur-DP-A306-L-Silver-RT37GBSS-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-Refrigerateur-DP-A306-L-Silver-RT37GBSS-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-460DR-2-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-RT45JSTS-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-ME32B-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Refrigerateur-une-porte-RZ90HAWW-Samsung-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-RT41MASW-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-GT-P6800-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-C24B550U-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-S5839I-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Lave-linge-frontal-Lave-linge-EcoBubble-12kg-1400tours-WF1124XBC-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Ampli-Tuner-AV-HW-E551-ZF-Barre-de-son-Format-46-Convertible-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9305-Phone-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300E5C-NP300E5C-AF2FR-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV24PSBN-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE46C630K1W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE46C630K1W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE37B6000VW-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A466-LE40A466C2M-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE37A676-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Pompe-a-chaleur-Air-Eau-AVXDUH112EE-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40B651T3P-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Autres-Samsung-S5220GT-S5220-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-9-900X4C-NP900X4C-A01FR-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-RT59NBPN-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9305-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S27B750V-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Refrigerateur-une-porte-RZ90HAWW-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-ME75B-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-RT59PMSW-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-13-3Serie-9-900X3A-NP900X3A-A01FR-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-ME40B-Manuels

Samsung-SGH-D500-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Manuels

Samsung-Table-induction-3-foyers-7-2-KW-CTN463NC01-CTN463NC01-XEF-Manuels

Samsung-RR92HAWW-Refrigerateur-une-porte-Monochrome-Manuels

Samsung-UE40D6510WS-Manuels

Samsung-ML-2160-Imprimante-Monochrome-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-ME46B-Manuels

Samsung-LE37A466-LE37A466C2M-Manuels

Samsung-UE32EH4003W-Manuels

Samsung-LE32D460C9H-Manuels

Samsung-LE40B551A6W-Manuels

Samsung-Zephyr-AQV09YWAN-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-10.1-GT-P5100-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-7.0-GT-P3100-Manuels

Samsung-S22B350B-Manuels

Samsung-51-PS51E490WXZF-serie-4-3D-HD-TV-PDP-TV-PS51E490B1W-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Note-II-GT-N7100-Manuels

Samsung-GT-I9300-Manuels

SAMSUNG/SAMSUNG-DV90-Manuels

Samsung-GT-N8000-Manuels

Samsung-AQV12KBBN-Pologne-Manuels

Samsung-ML-2165W-Roumanie-Manuels

Samsung-Notebook-Serie-7-Chronos-700Z5C-S01-NP700Z5C-S01DE-Manuels

Samsung-Player-One-noir-Open-market-GT-S5230-Manuels

Samsung-LE32E420E2W-Manuels

Samsung-910MP-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-S-SCL-noir-Open-market-GT-I9003-M4-Manuels

Samsung-Samsung-Galaxy-Pro-gris-Open-market-GT-B7510-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Gio-noir-SFR-GT-S5660-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Teos-noir-Bouygues-GT-I5800-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Spica-noir-Bouygues-GT-I5700-Manuels

Samsung-Omnia-Pro-B7610-noir-Open-market-GT-B7610-Manuels

Samsung-S5610-GT-S5610-Manuels

Samsung-LE32C650-LE32C650L1W-Manuels

Samsung-LE26D450G1W-Manuels

Samsung-N145Plus-NP-N145P-Manuels

Samsung-N150-NP-N150-Manuels

Samsung-NP20-NP20FK02BG-SEF-Manuels

Samsung-GT-S5570_UM_Open_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_110726_Screen.pdf-Manuels

Samsung-GT-I9070P_UM_Open_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_120710_Screen.pdf-Manuels

Samsung-GT-I9300_UM_Open_Icecream_Fre_Rev.1.2_120725_Screen.pdf-Manuels

Samsung-LE32D400E1W-Manuels

Samsung-Gainable-Slim-MH026FEEA-Manuels

Samsung-CW21Z573N-Manuels

Samsung-40-UE40D5700WXZF-serie-5-SMART-TV-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE40D5700RS-Manuels

Samsung-UE46C8700-UE46C8790XS-Manuels

Samsung-UE32D5700RS-Manuels

Samsung-UE46ES6300-ZF-Slim-LED-46-SMART-TV-3D-UE46ES6300S-Manuels

Samsung-2012_Skype_Eng-0316-1-Manuels

Samsung-NS140SDXEA-Manuels

Samsung-MH050FXEA2B-Manuels

Samsung-UE75ES9000S-Slim-LED-75-SMART-Interaction-3D-Manuels

Samsung-RR92HAWW-Manuels

Samsung-GT-P6200-Manuels

Samsung-Refrigerateur-1porteA-350-L-Blanc-RR82FHSW-Manuels

Samsung-UE26EH4000-ZF-LED-26-HD-TV-UE26EH4000W-Manuels

Samsung-E-MANUAL-X9DVBEU4E-ENG-Manuel

Samsung-GT-S5360_UM_Open_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_111130_Screen-Manuel

Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-10-1-GT-P7500-M16-Manuel

Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-10-1-GT-P7500-M16-Manuels

Samsung-GT-S5360-Manuels

Samsung-Lecteur-Multimedia-Galaxy-S-WiFi-4-0-Blanc-8Go-YP-G1CW-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-551-noir-Open-marketGT-I5510-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Note-10-1-GT-N8000-Manuels

Samsung-GALAXY-S-II-LTE-SC-03D-JP-Manuels

Samsung-GALAXY-Note-SC-05D-JP-Manuels

Samsung-NP-R530-NP-R530-JA02FR-Manuels

Samsung-UE40C6000-UE40C6000RW-Manuels

Samsung-Congelateur-1porteA-277-L-Blanc-RZ80FHSW-Manuels

Samsung-GT-B5310-Manuels

Nexus-S-noir-Open-market-GT-I9023-GT-B5310-Manuels

Samsung-32-LE32D450WXZF-serie-4-HD-TV-LCD-TV-Manuels

Samsung-46-UE46D5700WXZF-serie-5-SMART-TV-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE46D5700RS-Manuels

Samsung-UE55ES6560S-Manuels

Samsung-UE46ES8000-ZF-Slim-LED-46-SMART-INTERACTION-3D-UE46ES8000S-Manuels

Samsung-UE55ES6300-ZF-Slim-LED-55-SMART-TV-3D-UE55ES6300S-Manuels

Samsung-AQV18UGAX-Manuels

Samsung-UE50EH5300W-Manuels

Samsung-LE46A676-LE46A676A1M-Manuels

Samsung-UE46C7700-UE46C7700WS-Manuels

Samsung-CW21Z503N-Manuels

Samsung-AQ18UGFN-Manuels

Samsung-Refrigerateur-DP-A275-L-Blanc-RT34GBSW-Manuels

Samsung-UE46ES6100W-Manuels

Samsung-RR92HASX-Manuels

Samsung-LE40S71B-Manuels

Samsung-UE32ES6710-ZF-Slim-LED-32-SMART-TV-3DUE32ES6710S-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Ace-noir-Open-market-GT-S5830-Manuels

Samsung-GALAXY-Tab-GT-P1000-GT-P1000-M16-Manuels

Samsung-Omnia-Pro-B7330-noir-Open-market-GT-B7330-Manuels

Samsung-Omnia-Lite-noir-Orange-GT-B7300-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-S2-GT-I9100-Manuels

Samsung-Nexus-S-noir-Open-market-GT-I9023-Manuels

Samsung-Omnia-II-noir-SFRGT-I8000-Manuels

Samsung-Omnia-II-noir-SFR-GT-I8000-Manuels

Samsung-Omnia-7-noir-Open-market-GT-I8700-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-noir-Bouygues-GT-I7500-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-mini-gris-Open-market-GT-S5570-Manuels

Samsung-XE700T1A-HF1FR-Manuels

17,3" Série 3 300E7A - NP300E7A-S01FR - Manuels

40", UE40D6500WXZF, série 6, SMART TV, 3D, FULL HD, LED TV - UE40D6500VS - Manuels

CLX-3185FW Manuels

Galaxy Ace GT-S5830

Galaxy S II GT-I9100

Galaxy Tab 8.9 GT-P7310/M16

Galaxy Tab 10.1 GT-P7500/M16

Galaxy YGT-S5360

LE32C350 LE32C350D1W

LE40C630 LE40C630K1W

MM-C330D

MM-D330D

Micro-chaîne, MM-D330DWXZF, série 3 - MM-D330 - Manuels

N145Plus - NP-N145P - Manuels

N150 - NP-N150 - Manuels

RSH5UEPN

SGH-F490

Samsung Galaxy Ace noir - Open market - GT-S5830 - Manuels

Samsung Galaxy S II noir - Open market - Manuels

Samsung Galaxy S III - GT-I9300 - Manuels

Samsung Galaxy S noir - Open market - GT-I9000 - Manuels

Samsung Galaxy NoteGT-N7000

Samsung Galaxy SGT-I9000

Série 3 300E7A - NP300E7A-S03FR - Manuels

T23A550 T23A550

UE40D6500ZF UE40D6500VS

UE55ES8000/ZF, Slim LED 55", SMART INTERACTION, 3D - UE55ES8000S - Manuels

Wave 575 GT-S5750E

Wave II GT-S8530

16/4ppm Imprimante laser couleur CLP-310 Manuels

16/4ppm Multifonction lasercouleur CLX-3170FN Manuels

16/4ppm Multifonction lasercouleur CLX-3185FW Manuels Samsung

16/4ppm Multifonction laser couleur CLX-3185 Manuels Samsung

samsung-Wave-II-noir-Open-market-GT-S8530-Manuels

Samsung-Wave-noir-Open-market-GT-S8500-Manuels

Samsung-Wave-M-noir-Open-market-GT-S7250-Manuels

Samsung-Wave-578-noir-Open-market-GT-S5780-Manuels

Samsung-Wave-533-noir-Open-market-GT-S5330-Manuels

Samsung-Wave-3-noir-Open-market-GT-S8600-Manuels

Samsung-Player-HD-noir-Open-market-GT-I8910-Manuels

Samsung-Player-Duo-noir-Open-market-SGH-D980-Manuels

Samsung-Player-Addict-noir-Open-market-SGH-I900-Manuels

Samsung-Omnia-W-noir-Open-market-GT-I8350-Manuels

Samsung - Aspirateur robot Navibot SR8845

Samsung - Aspirateur sans sac EcoStyle SC86G0 gris foncé/fuchsia

Samsung - Aspirateur sans sac SC4780 noir

Samsung - Four micro-ondes MW73B - blanc

SAMSUNG - Micro ondes 36 L - Micro ondes 36 L - CP1395ES

SAMSUNG - Micro ondes 42 L - Micro ondes 42 L - CQ1570U

Samsung - Micro-ondes combiné CE117PT-B

SAMSUNG - Micro-ondes Grill simultané GS89F-1SP

Samsung 305U1A 11,6" LED

Samsung 305U1A 11,6" LED + Office Famille et Etudiant 2010 1 poste

Samsung Aspirateur sans sac EcoStyle SC86H0 gris clair/bleu

Samsung B1930HD 18.5" LCD TNT HD

Samsung B5722 Double SIM

Samsung Bac papier supplémentaire ML-S3710A - 520 feuilles

Samsung Batterie ED-BP1310

Samsung batterie IA-BH130LB

Samsung batterie IA-BP420E

Samsung batterie IA-BP85ST

Samsung batterie SLB-10A

Samsung batterie SSB-690 ELS

Samsung BD-E5300

Samsung BD-E5500 3D

Samsung BD-E8300 3D

Samsung C3050 Stratus

Samsung Câble Adaptateur HDTV pour Galaxy Tab 8.9" / 10.1"

Samsung Câble data pour téléphones mobiles Samsung

Samsung Caméra additionnelle de vidéosurveillance SEB-1015RWP EX

Samsung caméra Skype CY-STC1100

Samsung CB20A12

Samsung Ch@t335 - GT-S3350 - Noir

Samsung Chargeur allume-cigares micro-USB

Samsung chargeur de voyage pour SGH-P260 et SGH-G600 - Modèle Noir

Samsung Chargeur secteur de voyage micro-USB

Samsung CLP-325 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir

Samsung CLP-325 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir

Samsung CLP-325 WiFi

Samsung CLP-325 WiFi + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir + MCL Samar câble imprimante USB 2.0

Samsung CLP-620ND - Imprimante Ethernet

Samsung CLP-C300A

Samsung CLP-K300A

Samsung CLP-M300A

Samsung CLP-Y300A

Samsung CLX-3185 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir

Samsung CLX-3185 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir

Samsung CLX-3185 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir

Samsung CLX-3185FW WiFi

Samsung CLX-3185FW WiFi + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir + MCL Samar câble imprimante USB 2.0

Samsung CLX-3185N Ethernet

Samsung CLX-3185W - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi & Ethernet

Samsung CLX-6220FX - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet

Samsung Coque silicone Croisillons pour nexus S

Samsung CY-SMN1000D meuble TV

Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 128 Go MZ-7PC128D 830 Series

Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 128 Go MZ-7PC128N 830 Series

Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 256 Go MZ-7PC256D 830 Series

Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 256 Go MZ-7PC256N 830 Series

Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 64 Go MZ-7PC064D 830 Series

Samsung dongle Wi-Fi WIS12ABGNX

Samsung DP7000A3B 23" LED Tactile USB 3.0

Samsung Duo de 2 coques pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 - 1 Noire + 1 Camel

Samsung Duo de 2 coques pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 - 1 Noire matelassée + 1 Rose

Samsung DV300F Argent/Rouge - WiFi

Samsung DV300F Noir - WiFi

Samsung E1150 - Silver

Samsung E2550

Samsung EcoBlue SC61E0 bleu azur

Samsung ES30 Noir

Samsung ES30 Noir + Carte SD 2 Go

Samsung Etui coque pour Galaxy Note - Noir

Samsung Etui cuir pour Galaxy S II - Noir

Samsung Etui flap en cuir pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 - Noir

Samsung Eui cuir pour i9000 Galaxy S

Samsung Flash SEF15A

Samsung Flash SEF20A

Samsung Galaxy Ace s5830 (sous Androïd)

Samsung Galaxy Mini (sous Android)

Samsung Galaxy Note

Samsung Galaxy Note - Blanc

Samsung Galaxy Note - Rose

Samsung Galaxy S2 (I9100G) - Blanc

Samsung Galaxy S2 (I9100G) - Noir

Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT Blanc 32 Go + Western Digital My Book Live 1 To Ethernet

Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT Blanc 32 Go Wifi

Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT Noir 16 Go 3G

Samsung Galaxy Tab 8,9" TFT Blanc 32 Go Wifi

Samsung Galaxy Xcover s5690 (sous Androïd) - Smartphone Samsung Solide certifié IP67

Samsung Galaxy Y Pro B5510 (sous Androïd)

Samsung Galaxy Y Young s5360 (sous Androïd)

Samsung Graveur DVD Externe Wifi - SE-208BW - Noir

Samsung Housse Folio pour Galaxy Tab 10,1"

Samsung Housse Folio pour Galaxy Tab 8,9"

Samsung HT-D330

Samsung HT-D350

Samsung HT-D423

Samsung HT-D4500

Samsung HT-D5000 3D

Samsung HT-E4200 3D

Samsung HT-E4500 3D

Samsung HT-E5200 3D

Samsung HT-ES6200 3D WiFi

Samsung HW-E450

Samsung I9103 Galaxy R (sous Android)

Samsung Kit de connexion USB & SD pour Galaxy Tab 10.1"

Samsung Kit de vidéosurveillance tout-en-un SDE-3003P/EX

Samsung Kit de vidéosurveillance tout-en-un SME-4220

Samsung Kit Etui + Clavier Bluetooth pour Galaxy Tab 10,1" - Brun foncé

Samsung kit HDMI

Samsung kit HDMI

Samsung kit papier 10 x 15 cm

Samsung kit piéton filaire stéréo Jack 3,5 mm

Samsung LE40D550

Samsung Lot de 2 protections d'écran pour Galaxy S2 - Transparente/Miroir

Samsung Lot de 2 Protections d'écran pour i9000 Galaxy S

Samsung Lunettes 3D SSG-3050GB

SAMSUNG ME106V-SX

Samsung ME82V Micro-onde monofonction

SAMSUNG ME82V-SX

SAMSUNG Micro ondes MW87Y

SAMSUNG Micro-ondes combiné CE117APT B

SAMSUNG Micro-ondes combiné CE137NEMX

SAMSUNG Micro-ondes FW113T002

Samsung ML-1630/SCX4500

Samsung ML-2010D3

Samsung ML-2165 - Imprimante Monochrome

Samsung ML-2165W - Imprimante WiFi

Samsung ML-2545 - Imprimante Monochrome

Samsung ML-2955DW - Imprimante Ethernet & WiFi

Samsung ML-2955ND - Imprimante Ethernet

Samsung ML-3310D - Imprimante Monochrome

Samsung ML-3710DW - Imprimante Ethernet & WiFi

Samsung MLT-D1052S

Samsung MLT-D1082S

Samsung MLT-D1092S

Samsung MM-D430D

Samsung MV800 Noir

Samsung MV800 Noir + Etui Zadig & Voltaire Noir

Samsung NP300E7A-S03FR 17,3" LED

Samsung NP700Z5A-S02FR 15,6" LED

Samsung NX 60 mm f/2.8 ED OIS SSA Macro i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides

Samsung NX 85 mm f/1.4 ED SSA i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides

Samsung NX Pancake 16 mm f/2.4 i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides

Samsung NX Pancake 20 mm f/2.8 i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides

Samsung NX Pancake 30 mm f/2.0; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides

Samsung NX200 Noir + Obj. Samsung NX 18 - 55 mm f/3.5 - 5.6 OIS + Flash SEF-8A NG8

Samsung NX200 Noir + Obj. Samsung NX 20 - 50 mm f/3.5 - 5.6 ED i-Function + Flash SEF-8A NG8

Samsung Oreillette Bluetooth HM1200

Samsung Pack d'accessoire pour Galaxy S II I9100

Samsung Pack étui cuir + chargeur + protection d'écran pour Galaxy S

Samsung PL170 Noir

Samsung PL210 Noir

Samsung PL210 Noir + Carte mémoire Lexar MicroSDHC 8 Go

Samsung PL90 Noir et Rouge

Samsung Player mini 2 c3310 - Gris Métal

Samsung Player Mini C3300 - Noir

Samsung Port parallèle ML-PAR100 pour imprimante

Samsung PS43D450

Samsung PS43E450

Samsung PS43E490 3D

Samsung PS51E450

Samsung PS51E490 3D

Samsung PS59D530

Samsung Q3 rose 4 Go

Samsung RC530-S03FR 15,6" LED

Samsung RC730-S06FR 17,3" LED

Samsung RF712 E7P-C7261 17,3" LED 3D Blu-Ray USB 3.0 + lunettes

Samsung S22A300B 21,5" TFT

Samsung S22B350H 21,5" LED

Samsung S23A750D 23" LED 3D

Samsung S23B350H 23" LED

Samsung S24B300HL Moniteur 23,6" LED

Samsung S27B350H 27" LED

Samsung SC4340 noir ébène

Samsung SC4790 - Aspirateur sans sac - traineau - rouge

Samsung SCX-3405 - Imprimante Multifonctions

Samsung SCX-3405F - Imprimante Multifonctions

Samsung SCX-3405FW - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi & Ethernet

Samsung SCX-3405W - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi

Samsung SCX-4200A

Samsung SCX-4729FD - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet

Samsung SCX-4729FW - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet & WiFi

Samsung SCX-5737FW - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet

Samsung SE-084D graveur DVD externe slim USB 2.0

Samsung SE208AB Graveur DVD externe USB 2.0

Samsung SLB07A pour ST50

Samsung SLB-11A pour Samsung WB1000

Samsung ST65 Noir

Samsung ST65 Rouge

Samsung station d'accueil

Samsung station d'accueil HD2

Samsung Station d'accueil pour tablette Galaxy Tab 10,1"

Samsung Station d'accueil pour tablette Galaxy Tab 8,9"

Samsung station d'accueil SSD-760 E2/EUR

Samsung SyncMaster C23A550U 23" LED

Samsung SyncMaster C23A750X 23" LED

Samsung Syncmaster S23A700D 23" LED 3D

Samsung SyncMaster S24A350H 24" LED

Samsung Syncmaster T22A550 21,5" LED Tuner TNT HD

Samsung Système de vidéosurveillance Baby Monitor SEW-3022WP/ EX

Samsung T22A350 21,5" LED Tuner TNT

Samsung Toner MLT-D101S pour imprimantes Samsung SCX-3405 & ML-2165 - Noir

Samsung UE19D4010 LED

Samsung UE19ES4000 LED

Samsung UE22ES5000 LED

Samsung UE22ES5410 LED

Samsung UE26EH4000 LED

Samsung UE26EH4500 LED

Samsung UE32D5000 LED

Samsung UE32EH4000 LED

Samsung UE32EH5000 LED

Samsung UE32ES5500 LED

Samsung UE32ES6300 LED 3D

Samsung UE32ES6710 LED 3D blanc

Samsung UE40D5000 LED

Samsung UE40D5710 LED

Samsung UE40D6500 LED 3D

Samsung UE40EH5000 LED

Samsung UE40ES5500 LED

Samsung UE40ES6300 LED 3D

Samsung UE40ES6710 LED 3D

Samsung UE46EH5000 LED

Samsung UE46ES5500 LED

Samsung UE46ES6300 LED 3D

Samsung UE46ES6710 LED 3D blanc

Samsung UE55ES6300 LED 3D

Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B-A02 13,3" + Microsoft Explorer Touch Mouse - Souris BlueTrack sans fil

Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B-A02 13,3" LED USB 3.0

Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B-A02 13,3" LED USB 3.0 + CaseLogic Sacoche double pour ordinateurs 14" & tablettes 10,1" - Grise

Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B-A02 13,3" LED USB 3.0 + Samsonite Sac pour ordinateur portable 14,1" S Noir

Samsung ultrabook NP530U4B-S01FR 14" LED + Microsoft Explorer Touch Mouse - Souris BlueTrack sans fil

Samsung ultrabook NP530U4B-S01FR 14" LED USB 3.0

Samsung ultrabook NP530U4B-S01FR 14" LED USB 3.0 + CaseLogic Sacoche double pour ordinateurs 14" & tablettes 10,1" - Grise

Samsung ultrabook NP530U4B-S01FR 14" LED USB 3.0 + Samsonite Sac pour ordinateur portable 14,1" S Noir

Samsung Viseur électronique EVF10

Samsung WB150F Blanc - WiFi

Samsung WB150F Noir - WiFi

Samsung WB700 Noir

Samsung WB750 Noir

Samsung WIS09ABGN LinkStick WLAN-Adapter

Samsung WMN250M accroche murale

Samsung YP-F3 bleu 2 Go

Samsung YP-F3 noir 2 Go

Samsung YP-F3 rose 2 Go

Samsung YP-Q3 rose 8 Go

Samsung YP-Q3 rose 8 Go + Casque JVC HA-S155-P rose

Samsung YP-U6 noir 2 Go

Samsung YP-U6 noir 4 Go

Samsung YP-U6 rose 2 Go

Samsung YP-U6 rose 4 Go

Samsung YP-Z3 blanc 4 Go

Samsung YP-Z3 bleu 4 Go

Samsung YP-Z3 rose 4 Go

http://www.samsung.com/us/support/owners/product/RF266AEBP http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/NP400B5B-S02FR-downloads http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/BD-C8500/XEF-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201004/20100405125800515/01960B-BD-C8200_8500-XEF-FRA-0323.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/MM-D470D/ZF-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201201/20120103150428464/AH68-02345F-MM-D470D-FRA-20120103.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/NP200B5B-A01FR-downloads http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/NP300V3A-A01FR-downloads http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/GT-N7000ZBESFR-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201208/20120809172648710/GT-N7000_UM_Open_Icecream_Fre_Rev.1.0_120716_Screen.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201206/20120611165201603/GT-P3110_UM_Open_Icecream_Fre_Rev.1.0_120608_Screen.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/GT-N7000RWASFR-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201203/20120329200748757/GT-N7000_UM_Open_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.1_120126_Screen.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201112/20111216180827802/GT-N7000_UM_EU_Gingerbread_Eng_Rev.1.1_111104_Screen.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201208/20120809173956440/GT-P7510_UM_Open_Icecream_Fre_Rev.1.0_120809_Screen.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201112/20111205085630494/GT-P7510_UM_Orange_Honeycomb_Fre_Rev.1.0_111202_Screen.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201207/20120713085451049/GT-P7510_UM_EU_Icecream_Eng_Rev.1.0_120710_Screen.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/GT-P7510FKAXEF-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201208/20120802111559199/GT-I9070P_UM_Orange_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_120629_Screen.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201205/20120517111406195/GT-I9070P_UM_EU_Gingerbread_Eng_Rev.1.0_120510_Screen.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201208/20120802111559199/GT-I9070P_UM_Open_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_120710_Screen.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201204/20120424154452484/GT-P3100_UM_EU_Icecream_Eng_Rev.1.0_120424_Screen.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201209/20120917105131603/GT-P3100_UM_Open_Icecream_Fre_Rev.1.0_120801_Screen.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/GT-P5110TSAXEF-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201208/20120810190309322/GT-P5110_UM_Open_Icecream_Fre_Rev.1.0_120808_Screen.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201206/20120614144504602/GT-P5110_UM_EU_Icecream_Eng_Rev.1.0_120614_Screen.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/GT-I5800DKABOG-downloads http://www.samsung.com/uk/support/model/NP-R519-FA06UK-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201008/20100809184447671/GT-I5800_UM_Open_Fre_Rev.1.0_100722_cms.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/EM/201009/20100907222536765/GT-I5800_QSG_Open_Eng_Rev.1.1_100907a_cms.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/EM/201105/20110525183942011/GT-I5800_QSG_EU_Froyo_Eng_UK_Rev.1.1_110525_Screen.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/EM/201105/20110525175249448/GT-I5800_QSG_EU_Froyo_Eng_Rev.1.1_110525_Screen.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201105/20110530173657729/GT-I5800_UM_Open_Froyo_Fre_Rev.1.1_110527_Screen.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/GT-I9001HKDFTM-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201112/20111212155049797/GT-I9001_UM_EU_Gingerbread_Eng_Rev.1.3_111212_Screen.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/LF22TOWHBDN/EN-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/EM/201211/20121102145205481/BN68-03899A-04.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201211/20121108171138109/BN46-00315A-Fre.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201211/20121108171138109/BN46-00315A-Eng.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/NP550P5C-T04FR-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201211/20121113125618982/Win8_Manual_fre.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201211/20121113125618982/Win8_Manual_eng.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/UE32D5720RSXZF-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/EM/201105/20110517143435031/[UD5700-XN]BN68-03506F-03L04-0427.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201112/20111216084511364/Web_W_X6DVBEUA_Fre.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201112/20111216084511364/Web_W_X6DVBEUA_Eng.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/GT-I9000RWYSFR-downloads http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/UE55D8000YSXZF-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201201/20120128101809663/02_FRA_GPDVBEUA-0106.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201201/20120128101809663/01_ENG_GPDVBEUA-0106.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/EM/201203/20120314192959318/[UD8000-XN]BN68-03442T-00L04-0804.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201204/20120405165711377/2012_Skype_Eng-0316-1.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/UE46ES6710SXZF-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201204/20120405165711377/2012_Skype_Eng-0316-1.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201211/20121110095845360/02-XTDVBEUE-FRA-1109.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201211/20121110095845360/01-XTDVBEUE-ENG-1109.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201207/20120712095934377/2012_Skype_FRA-0424.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201207/20120712095934377/2012_Skype_ENG-0424.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/NP-RV515-S04FR-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/CD/201104/20110408115840622/DoC160-RV515-RV415-Scala2-15-14-AMD.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201210/20121026202221731/Win8_Manual_fre.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201210/20121026202221731/Win8_Manual_eng.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201210/20121026104030074/Win8_Manual_fre.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201210/20121026104030074/Win8_Manual_eng.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/NP900X4D-A01FR-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201210/20121028112443918/Win8_Manual_fre.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201210/20121028112443918/Win8_Manual_eng.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/NP350E7C-S0BFR-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201210/20121022141232121/Win8_Manual_fre.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201210/20121022141232121/Win8_Manual_eng.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201205/20120518170921365/EN/english.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/DR/201205/20120521130845677/FR/french.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/ML-2160/SEE-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/EM/201203/20120322160533913/BN68-03304C-00.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201206/20120622172918410/BN46-00030A-Fre.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201206/20120622172918410/BN46-00030A-Eng.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/UE55C7700WSXZF-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201205/20120502130400267/02230C-01-BD-E8900-ZF-0413.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201205/20120502130543045/Smart_Hub-FRA-0309.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201205/20120502133933796/AllShare-FRA-0221.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201004/20100426150918218/7Series_Power_consumption_LED_TV.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201005/20100529095515140/BN68-02590B-03L04-0518.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/NP700G7A-S01FR http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/NP305E5A-A01FR-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201210/20121026193501356/Win8_Manual_eng.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/200904/20090428183905421/YPP3J-COMMON-ENGLISH3.0.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/EM/200904/20090407081834937/YPP3J-02154C-XEF-QG1.0-NOCD.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/200904/20090428183905421/YPP3J-EUROPE-FRENCH3.0.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201005/20100504091945781/GT-E1151_UM_Open_Fre_Rev.1.0_100311.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201003/20100324124741578/BN68-02592F-01L04_0316.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/200805/20080520175711468_BN68-01409H-01L02-0429.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/EM/200805/20080530182204609_Pearl-France-01409H-Eng-0530.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/LT24A350EW/EN-downloads http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/NP300E5A-S08FR-downloads http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/LE22C350D1WXZF-downloads http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/LE40R86BDX/XEC-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/200703/20070322190622750_BN68-01169B-01L08-0313.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/UE40ES5700SXZF-downloads http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/LT22A300EW/EN-downloads http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/SGH-U600HBAXEF-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/EM/200803/20080318192114953_SGH-U600_Eng.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/200903/20090312154510796/SGH-U600_French_090311_Rev1.3.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/200904/20090410095951906/SGH-U600_UG_090311_Rev1.3.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/NP305V5A-S02FR-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201204/20120420172612547/WB850F-CE_DoC_in_French.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/AQ18FAN-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/200703/20070308174715062_FORTE_DB98-27531A_IB_F.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/LE40B620R3WXXC-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/EM/200909/20090925093818484/BN68-02098D-01Eng-0909.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/SGH-Z360ZSAFTM-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/200801/20080108134949406_SGH-Z360_UG_ORA_Fre_Rev.1.1_061123.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/EK-GC100ZWAXEF-downloads http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/NP900X4D-A02FR-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201210/20121026104030074/Win8_Manual_fre.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201210/20121026104030074/Win8_Manual_eng.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/NP700Z7C-S02FR-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201210/20121028112443918/Win8_Manual_fre.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/NP-RC710-S02FR-downloads http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/SGH-E590NSAXEF-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/200706/20070627104827281_SGH-E590_UG_Eng_Rev.1.1_070622.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/RS6178UGDSR/EF-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/EM/201203/20120316175747467/DA99-01779L.pdf https://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/NP300E7A-S0CFR-downloads http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/RT50QMSW1/XEF-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201211/20121119193716527/DA99-01906C_v0.6.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/UE46EH6030WXZF-downloads http://www.samsung.com/sg/support/model/GT-I9300RWDXSP-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201211/20121117090011154/GT-I9300_UM_EU_Jellybean_Eng_Rev.1.1_121113_Screen.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201211/20121122102418917/GT-I9300_UM_SEA_Jellybean_Chi_Rev.1.1_121116_Screen.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201102/20110228142459539/DJ68-00558R_0.0.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/GT-S5260RWPFTM http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/LE32C630K1WXZF-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/EM/201003/20100322135354718/BN68-02802A-00Eng_0310.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/NP-R530-JT50FR-downloads http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/NP-R590-JS01FR-downloads http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/SGH-F480ESAXEF-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201210/20121026124954559/Win8_Manual_fre.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/200805/20080509152035250_SGH-F480_UG_Fre_Rev.1.0_080509.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/200911/20091118083418500/SGH-F480i_UM_Open_Fre_Rev.1.0_090527.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201210/20121026124954559/Win8_Manual_fre.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201004/20100415162800953/UPD_Guide_EN.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201003/20100329103902500/BN68-02655A-00L06-0304.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201003/20100324125247750/BN68-02655D-00L04-0304.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/UE55D6300SSXZF http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201112/20111208190112921/Web_GSDVBEUA_FRE.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201106/20110630112704040/FR/french.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201112/20111208190112921/Web_GSDVBEUA_FRE.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/YH-820MW/ELS http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/200508/20050829114410765_YH820-ELS-FRE0[1].0.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201106/20110630112704040/FR/french.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201207/20120718221859806/WB100_WB101_French.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201112/20111216102348708/SX5DVBEU1A-ENG.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201210/20121009090604327/Win8_Manual_chs.pdf http://www.samsung.com/sg/support/model/XE500T1C-H01SG-downloads http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/DP700A3D-A01FR-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201211/20121129094347177/Win8_Manual_fre.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201112/20111208190558077/Web_GSDVBEUA-RUS.pdf http://www.samsung.com/ru/support/model/UE55ES8007UXRU-downloads http://www.samsung.com/ru/support/model/UE32D5000PWXMS http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201201/20120128102909679/26_RUS_GPDVBEUA-0106.pdf http://www.samsung.com/ru/support/model/UE46D7000LSXBY http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/200911/20091102085239468/BN68-01978J-02Rus_1027.pdf http://www.samsung.com/ru/support/model/UE46EH5300WXRU-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/EM/200805/20080520230647453_Carnelian_P410_W.Europ-0516.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201207/20120712095934377/2012_Skype_RUS-0424.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201003/20100325101925437/BN68-02692E-00L04-0304.pdf http://www.samsung.com/ru/support/model/PS42C431A2WXRU-downloads http://www.samsung.com/ru/support/model/UE46D5000PWXMS-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201201/20120128135824882/UX9DVBEU1A_RUS.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201101/20110105125332353/Maldives_EUR_AQV09P_IBIM_32436A_F_12.28.10.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/LE40C630K1WXZF-downloads http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/PS63B680T6WXXC-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/200910/20091027091933953/BN68-02333J-02L09_1022_CMS.pdf

◀ ▶ Français 2. Insérez l’adaptateur de carte CI dans le port COMMON INTERFACE du produit2. 3. Insérez la carte CI ou CI+CARD Il est conseillé d’insérer la carte CI avant de fixer le téléviseur en position murale. L’insertion peut, en effet, se révéler difficile après le montage. Insérez la carte après avoir connecté le module CI au téléviseur. Il est difficile de connecter le module si vous insérez d’abord la carte.◀ ▶ ◀ Français ■ Utilisation de la “CARTE CI ou CI+” Pour regarder les chaînes payantes, la carte d’interface commune (CI(CI+) CARD) doit être insérée. ● Si vous ne l’insérez pas, certaines chaînes afficheront le message “Signal brouillé”. ● Les informations de pairage contenant un numéro de téléphone, l’ID de la carte d’interface commune (CI ou CI+), l’ID de l’hôte et d’autres informations s’afficheront après 2 ou 3 minutes. Si un message d’erreur s’affiche, contactez votre fournisseur d’accès. ● Lorsque la configuration des informations sur les canaux est terminée, le message “Mise à jour terminée” s’affiche, indiquant que la liste des chaînes est mise à jour.◀ ▶ Français N REMARQUE ● Vous devez vous procurer une carte d’interface commune (CI(CI+) CARD) auprès d’un fournisseur local de diffusion par câble. ● Lorsque vous sortez la carte d’interface commune (CI(CI+) CARD), tirez-la délicatement. Une chute pourrait en effet l’endommager. ● Insérez la carte d’interface commune (CI(CI+) CARD) dans le sens indiqué sur celle-ci. ● L’emplacement de la fente COMMON INTERFACE peut varier en fonction du modèle. ● La carte d’interface commune (CI(CI+) CARD) n’est pas prise en charge dans certains pays et certaines régions ; vérifiez auprès de votre revendeur agréé. ● Si vous rencontrez des problèmes, contactez le fournisseur d’accès. ● Insérez la carte d’interface commune (CI ou CI+ CARD), qui prend en charge les paramètres actuels de l’antenne. L’image sera déformée, voire invisible.◀ ▶ ◀ Français ❑ Teletext Feature (en fonction du pays) La page d’index du télétexte contient des instructions sur l’utilisation du service. Pour que les informations du télétexte s’affichent correctement, la réception des chaînes doit être stable. Autrement, des informations pourraient manquer ou certaines pages ne pas s’afficher. N Vous pouvez changer de page de télétexte en appuyant sur les boutons numériques de la télécommande.◀ ▶ Français / (Télétexte activé / mixte / désactivé) active le mode télétexte pour la chaîne choisie. Appuyez deux fois sur ce bouton pour superposer le mode Télétexte à l’émission en cours de diffusion. Appuyez sur le bouton une nouvelle fois pour quitter le système télétexte. 8 (mémoriser) permet d’enregistrer les pages de télétexte. 4 (taille) permet d’afficher la moitié supérieure de l’écran en caractères deux fois plus grands. Pour afficher le texte dans la moitié inférieure de l’écran, appuyez une nouvelle fois sur ce bouton. Pour rétablir l’affichage normal, appuyez dessus une fois de plus. 9 (en attente) arrête l’affichage sur la page en cours, au cas où plusieurs pages supplémentaires suivraient automatiquement. Pour annuler, appuyez de nouveau sur cette touche.◀ ▶ ◀ Français Boutons de couleur (rouge, vert, jaune, bleu) si la société de radiodiffusion utilise le système FASTEXT, les différents sujets traités dans la page télétexte disposent d’un code couleur et peuvent être sélectionnés à l’aide des boutons de couleur de la télécommande. Appuyez sur la couleur correspondant au sujet de votre choix. Une nouvelle page avec code couleur est affichée. Les éléments peuvent être sélectionnés de la même manière. Pour afficher la page précédente ou la page suivante, appuyez sur le bouton de couleur correspondant. 0 (mode) permet de sélectionner le mode Télétexte (LIST/FLOF). Si vous appuyez sur ce bouton alors que le mode LIST est sélectionné, il passe en mode d’enregistrement de liste. Dans ce mode, vous pouvez enregistrer une page télétexte dans une liste à l’aide du bouton 8 (mémoriser). 1 (page secondaire) (taille) permet d’afficher une page secondaire.◀ ▶ Français 9 (en attente) arrête l’affichage sur la page en cours, au cas où plusieurs pages supplémentaires suivraient automatiquement. Pour annuler, appuyez de nouveau sur cette touche. 2 (haut de page) permet d’afficher la page suivante du télétexte. 6 (index) Permet d’afficher, à tout moment, la page d’index (sommaire) du télétexte. 5 (afficher) affiche le texte masqué (les réponses à un questionnaire, par exemple). Appuyez à nouveau sur ce bouton pour rétablir le mode d’affichage normal. 7 (annuler) Permet de réduire l’écran télétexte pour le superposer sur l’émission en cours.◀ ▶ ◀ Français Page de Télétexte type Catégorie Contenu A Numéro de la page sélectionnée. B Identité de la chaîne émettrice. C Numéro de la page actuelle ou indications de recherche. D Date et heure. E Texte. F Informations sur l’état. Informations FASTEXT.◀ ▶ Français ❑ Verrou antivol Kensington Le verrou antivol Kensington n’est pas fourni par Samsung.Il s’agit d’un dispositif utilisé pour fixer physiquement le système dans le cas d’une utilisation dans un endroit public. L’aspect du verrou et la méthode de verrouillage peuvent différer de l’illustration en fonction du fabricant. Consultez le manuel fourni avec le verrou Kensington pour obtenir des instructions d’utilisation supplémentaires. N Une icône “K” est présente à l’arrière du téléviseur. Un verrou Kensington se trouve à côté de l’icône “K”. 1 ◀ ▶ ◀ Français Pour vérrouiller l’appareil, procédez comme suit : 1. Enroulez le câble de verrouillage Kensington autour d’un objet large et fixe tel qu’un bureau ou une chaise.. 2. Glissez le bout du câble auquel est attaché le verrou dans la boucle du câble de verrouillage Kensington. 3. Insérez le dispositif de verrouillage dans la fente Kensington de l’appareil 1. 4. Fermez la serrure. N Pour de plus amples informations, consultez le manuel d’utilisation fourni avec le dispositif de verrouillage. N Le dispositif de verrouillage est vendu séparément. N L’emplacement du verrou Kensington peut varier en fonction du modèle.◀ ▶ Français ❑ Licence TheaterSound, SRS and symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc. TheaterSound technology is incorporated under license form SRS Lab, Inc. Fabriqué sous licence de Dolby Laboratories. Dolby et le symbole du double D sont des marques de Dolby Laboratories. Manufactured under licence under U.S. Patent #’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS and the Symbol are registered trademarks. & DTS 2.0+ Digital Out and the DTS logos are trademarks of DTS, Inc. Product Includes software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.◀ ▶ Français Trademark: Rovi et Rovi On Screen Guide sont des marques déposées de Rovi Corporation et / ou ses sociétés affiliées. License: Le système Rovi On Screen Guide est fabriqué sous licence de Rovi Corporation et / ou ses sociétés affiliées. Patent: Le système Rovi On Screen Guide est protégé par des brevets et demandes de brevets aux États-Unis, en Europe et dans d’autres pays, dont un ou plusieurs des brevets 6,396,546; 5,940,073; 6,239,794 délivrés par les États-Unis à Rovi Corporation et / ou ses filiales. Disclaimer: Rovi Corporation et / ou ses sociétés affiliées et filiales associées ne sont responsables en aucune manière de l’exactitude ou de la disponibilité des informations relatives aux programmes de télévision ou des autres informations fournies dans le système Rovi On Screen Guide, et ne peuvent pas garantir la disponibilité du service dans votre région. En aucun cas, Rovi Corporation et / ou ses filiales associées ne peuvent être tenues responsables pour tout dommage en relation avec l’exactitude ou la disponibilité des informations relatives aux programmes de télévision ou des autres informations fournies dans le système Rovi On Screen Guide.◀ Français DivX Certified® to play DivX® video up to HD 1080p, including premium content. DivX®, DivX Certified® and associated logos are trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used under licence. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX, Inc. This is an official DivX Certified® device that plays DivX video. Visit www.divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX video. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified® device must be registered in order to play purchased DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) movies. To obtain your registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in your device setup menu. Go to vod.divx.com for more information on how to complete your registration. Covered by one or more of the following U.S. patents : 7,295,673; 7,460,668; 7,515,710; 7,519,274 Avis concernant les Licences libres En cas d’utilisation d’un logiciel libre, des Licences libres sont disponibles dans le menu du produit. L’avis concernant les Licences libres est uniquement disponible en anglais.▶ ◀ Français ❑ Consultation du manuel électronique Vous pouvez lire l’introduction et les instructions relatives aux fonctions de votre TV. O MENUm → Assistance → e-Manual → ENTERE Fonctions de base Changement du Mode Image prédéfini Réglage des paramètres d’image Changement de la taille de l’image Modification des options d’image Configuration du téléviseur avec le PC Aide Index Guide e-Manual◀ ▶ Français Affichage Contenu actuellement diffusé. Changer de catégorie. Appuyez sur le bouton l ou r pour sélectionner la catégorie de votre choix. Affiche la liste des sousmenus. Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE pour sélectionner le sous-menu de votre choix. Boutons d’opération: Index : affiche l’écran d’index. X : permet de quitter le manuel électronique. Aide : affiche le Guide e-Manual ou le Guide Produit. Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. Fonctions de base Aide Index Changement du Mode Image prédéfini Réglage des paramètres d’image Changement de la taille de l’image Modification des options d’image Configuration du téléviseur avec le PC◀ ▶ ◀ Français Utilisation de l’aide Appuyez sur Aide pour afficher le Guide e-Manual et le Guide Produit. Le Guide e-Manual s’affiche comme illustré cidessus. Le Guide des produits s’affiche comme illustré cidessus. Retour Sync media from multiple devices with AllShare AllShare™ synchronise vos appareils numériques de telle sorte que vous puissiez bénéficier, sur votre téléviseur grand écran, de la musique, des films et des photos stockés sur votre ordinateur, votre appareil photo et vos appareils mobiles. Cette fonction vous connecte également à plusieurs ordinateurs. ❑ Consultation du manuel électronique Vous pouvez lire l’introduction et les instructions relatives aux fonctions de votre TV. O MENUm → Image → Mode Image → ENTERE Retour Basic Features Changement du Mode Image prédéfini Réglage des paramètres d’image Changement de la taille de l’image Changement de la taille de l’image Changement de la taille de l’image Aide Retour◀ ▶ Français Comment basculer entre le manuel électronique et le(s) menu(s) correspondant(s) Méthode 1 Méthode 2 1. Sélectionnez Essayer si vous souhaitez exécuter le(s) menu(s) correspondant(s). 2. Pour revenir à l’écran e-Manual, appuyez sur le bouton E-MANUAL. 1. Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE lors de la sélection de la zone de contenu. Le message “Exécuter cette opération?” s’affiche. Sélectionnez Oui et appuyez ensuite sur le bouton ENTERE. La fenêtre des menus à l’écran s’affiche. 2. Pour revenir à l’écran e-Manual, appuyez sur le bouton E-MANUAL. ● Le menu affiché peut varier en fonction du modèle. E-MANUAL Essayer Image Mode Image Standard Rétroéclairage 14 Contraste 99 Luminosité 45 Netteté 50 Couleur 50 Tint (G/R) V 50 R 50 ❑ Changement du Mode Image prédéfini O MENUm → Image → Mode Image → ENTERE ■ Sélectionnez le type d’image que vous préférez. Mode Image t ● Dynamique : adapté à un environnement lumineux. ● Standard : adapté à un environnement normal. ● Naturel: permet de réduire la fatigue oculaire. ● Cinéma : adapté au visionnage de films dans une pièce sombre. ● Loisirs : adapté au visionnage de films et de jeux vidéo. N cette option n’est disponible que si vous connectez un PC. Aide Essayer Accueil Zoom Index◀ ▶ ◀ Français Affichage du contenu Zone de contenu : si vous avez sélectionné un sousmenu, vous pouvez afficher le contenu correspondant. Pour accéder à la page précédente ou suivante, appuyez sur le bouton l ou r. Essayer : affiche le(s) menu(s) correspondant(s). Accueil : permet d’accéder à l’écran d’accueil du manuel électronique. Zoom : agrandit l’écran. Index : affiche l’écran d’index. ❑ Changement du Mode Image prédéfini O MENUm → Image → Mode Image → ENTERE ■ Mode Image t Sélectionnez le type d’image que vous préférez. ● Dynamique : adapté à un environnement lumineux. ● Standard : adapté à un environnement normal. ● Naturel: permet de réduire la fatigue oculaire. ● Cinéma : adapté au visionnage de films dans une pièce sombre. ● Loisirs : adapté au visionnage de films et de jeux vidéo. N cette option n’est disponible que si vous connectez un PC. Aide Essayer Accueil Zoom Index◀ ▶ Français Utilisation du mode Zoom Lors de la consultation des instructions du manuel électronique, sélectionnez l’option Zoom pour agrandir l’écran. Pour parcourir l’écran agrandi, utilisez le bouton u ou d. N Pour revenir à l’écran précédent, appuyez sur le bouton RETURN. ❑ Changement du Mode Image prédéfini O MENUm → Image → Mode Image → ENTERE ■ Mode Image t Sélectionnez le type d’image que vous préférez. ● Dynamique: adapté à un environnement lumineux. ● Standard: adapté à un environnement normal. ● Naturel: permet de réduire la fatigue oculaire. ● Cinéma: adapté au visionnage de films dans une pièce sombre. ● Loisirs: adapté au visionnage de films et de jeux vidéo. N cette option n’est disponible que si vous connectez un PC. Retour◀ Français Recherche d’un mot-clé en utilisant la page d’index 1. Si vous souhaitez rechercher un mot-clé, sélectionnez Index afin d’ouvrir l’écran Index. 2. Appuyez sur le bouton l ou r pour sélectionner l’ordre des caractères de votre choix et appuyez ensuite sur ENTERE. 3. Appuyez sur le bouton u ou d pour sélectionner un mot-clé à afficher et appuyez ensuite sur ENTERE. 4. Vous accédez alors à l’écran d’instructions correspondant du e-Manual. N Pour fermer l’écran Index, appuyez sur le bouton Fermer.▶ Français Guide Produit Une expérience 3D digne des salles obscures Avec les téléviseurs 3D, vous allez découvrir une nouvelle réalité visuelle. Les lunettes 3D actives se synchronisent avec le téléviseur 3D pour produire des images 3D qui crèvent littéralement l’écran. Vous pouvez même transformer vos émissions favorites au format 3D et en temps réel afin de vivre une expérience télévisuelle plus vraie que nature.◀ Français Sync media from multiple devices with AllShare AllShare™ synchronise vos appareils numériques de telle sorte que vous puissiez bénéficier, sur votre téléviseur grand écran, de la musique, des films et des photos stockés sur votre ordinateur, votre appareil photo et vos appareils mobiles. Cette fonction vous connecte également à plusieurs ordinateurs. FRANÇAIS02_ dispositifs Pour la future référence facile écrivez le modèle et le numéro de série. Vous trouverez votre modèle et numéro à côté droit du climatiseur. Modèle # Numéro de série # dispositifs de votre nouveau climatiseur • Design fin et élégant Le design extrêmement fin et compact de ce climatiseur lui permettra de s’intégrer aisément dans tous les types d’intérieur. • La fonction produit l’hydrogène (H) et oxygène(O2) pour attaquer les contaminants indésirables d’air tels que les bactéries, le pollen,et l’odeur. Elle vous fait respirer mieux comme si vous restiez autour des chutes d’eau, de la vague d’océan, des fleuves et des montagnes. • 2 sorties d’air L’appareil possède deux sorties d’air séparées : une pour la réfrigération et l’autre pour le chauffage. L’air chaud sortant de la sortie d’air inférieure se propage uniformément à travers la pièce.L’air est ainsi frais ou chaud dans tous les coins de la pièce. • Système efficace de coût Votre nouveau climatiseur fournit non seulement la force maximum de refroidissement en été, mais peut également être une méthode efficace de chauffage en hiver avec le système avancé de « Pompe à Chaleur ». Cette technologie est jusqu’à 300% plus efficace que le chauffage électrique, ainsi vous pouvez plus loin réduire son coût de fonctionnement. Maintenant, satisfaites les besoins pendant toute l’année avec un climatiseur.information de sûreté _03 FRANÇAIS information de sûreté Pour empêcher la décharge électrique, débranchez le courant avant d’entretenir, nettoyer, et installer l’unité. INFORMATION DE SÛRETÉ Avant d’employer votre nouveau climatiseur, veuillez lire ce manuel complètement pour vous assurer que vous savez comment opérer sans risque efficacement les dispositifs et les fonctions étendus de votre nouvel appareil. Puisque les consignes d’utilisation suivantes couvrent de divers modèles, les caractéristiques de votre climatiseur peuvent différer légèrement de ceux décrits dans ce manuel. Si vous avez des questions, appelez au téléphone votre centre de contact plus proche ou trouvez l’aide et l’information en ligne à www.samsung.com. Ce que les icônes et signes dans ce manuel d’utilisateur veulent dire: AVERTISSEMENT Risque de mort ou de blessures sérieuses. ATTENTION Risque potentiel de blessures ou de dommages matériels. ATTENTION Pour réduire le risque de feu, d’explosion, de décharge électrique, ou de blessures en utilisant votre climatiseur, suivez ces consignes de sûreté de base : NE PAS essayer. NE PAS démonter. NE PAS toucher. Suivez les directions soigneusement. Débranchez la fiche électrique de la prise murale. Assurez-vous que la machine est mise à la terre pour empêcher la décharge électrique. Appelez au téléphone le centre de contact pour l’aide. Consignes recommandées ou information utile pour l’usage. Ces signes d’avertissement sont ici pour empêcher des dommages à vous et à d’autres. Veuillez les suivre soigneusement. Après avoir lu cette section, maintenez-la dans un endroit sûr pour la future référence. SIGNES D’AVERTISSEMENT GRAVE Ne coupez pas la fiche électrique et ne reliez pas à un câble électrique différent. N’essayez jamais de rallonger le câble électrique. • Risque potentiel de feu ou de décharge électrique. Ne tirez pas le câble électrique et ne touchez pas la fiche électrique avec les mains humides. • Risque potentiel de feu ou de décharge électrique. N’utilisez jamais une fiche électrique endommagée, un câble électrique, ou un douille de jack détaché. • Risque potentiel de feu ou de décharge électrique. 04_ information de sûreté information de sûreté SIGNES D’AVERTISSEMENT GRAVE Ne placez pas le climatiseur près des substances dangereuses ou de l’équipement qui libère les flammes libres afin d’éviter des incendies, des explosions ou des dommages. • Risque potentiel de risque d’incendie ou d’explosion. Ne pulvérisez pas les gaz inflammables tels que l’insecticide près du climatiseur. • Risque potentiel de décharge électrique, de feu ou de défaut de fonctionnement d’unité. Ne bloquez pas ou ne placez pas les articles devant le climatiseur. Ne faites pas un pas, n’accrochez pas sur, ou ne placez pas les articles lourds sur le climatiseur. • Risque potentiel de blessures. N’insérez rien tel que des doigts ou des branches dans les passages de climatiseur. • Eloignez les enfants du climatiseur. Risque potentiel de blessures. N’installez pas le climatiseur dans les secteurs exposés à la fuite de gaz inflammable ou au risque potentiel de fuite de gaz. • Risque potentiel de risque d’incendie ou d’explosion. N’installez pas l’unité extérieure à un endroit instable tel que le haut mur externe d’un appartement ou d’un bâtiment et sur un extérieur de terrasse pour éviter de tomber. • Si l’unité extérieure tombe, elle peut causer des blessures ou la perte de propriété. Consultez l’endroit de l’achat ou un centre de contact pour démonter ou réinstaller le climatiseur. • Risque potentiel de défaut de fonctionnement d’unité, de fuite de l’eau, de décharge électrique, ou de feu. Ne reliez pas le climatiseur à l’appareillage de chauffage ou n’essayez pas de le démonter, transformer ou réparer par vous-même. • Risque potentiel de défaut de fonctionnement, de décharge électrique ou de feu. Si les réparations sont nécessaires, consultez le centre de contact. Consultez l’endroit de l’achat ou un centre de contact pour installer le climatiseur. • L’installation inexacte porte un risque de défaut de fonctionnement d’unité, de fuite de l’eau, de décharge électrique ou de feu. • Pour l’installation dans des secteurs spéciaux, tels qu’un complexe d’usine ou un secteur côtier salin, consultez l’endroit de l’achat ou un centre de contact pour les détails spécifiques d’installation. Installez le climatiseur avec le support solidement attaché à l’utilisation pendant une période prolongée. • Si le climatiseur tombe, il peut causer des blessures ou la perte depropriété. Assurez-vous que le climatiseur est installé conformément aux récentes normes nationales de sûreté. Employez un disjoncteur nominal seulement. • N’employez jamais les fils d’acier ou les fils de cuivre comme disjoncteur. Il peut causer le feu, le défaut de fonctionnement d’unité. Employez une source d’énergie exclusive pour le climatiseur. • Risque potentiel de décharge électrique ou de feu. Ne mettez pas l’effort anormal sur le câble électrique ou ne placez pas les objets lourds là-dessus. Ne pliez pas le câble électrique excessivement. • Risque potentiel du feu ou de décharge électrique.information de sûreté _05 FRANÇAIS Si le climatiseur devient humide, coupez le courant immédiatement et appelez votre centre de contact plus proche. • Risque potentiel de feu ou de décharge électrique. Installez un disjoncteur exclusif de circuit et un disjoucteur exclusif de courtcircuit pour le climatiseur. • Risque potentiel de décharge électrique ou de feu. Si le câble ou la corde électrique est endommagé, le fabricant, un technicien qualifié de service doit la remplacer pour éviter un risque potentiel. Déconnectez le climatiseur de l’alimentation d’énergie avant qu’elle soit réparée ou démontée. Employez un réceptacle qui a une borne au sol. Le réceptacle doit être employé exclusivement pour le climatiseur. • La mise à terre incorrecte peut causer la décharge électrique ou le feu. Assurez-vous que la mise à terre appropriée a été établi en installant le climatiseur. Ne reliez pas le câble de masse de l’unité à une pipe de gaz, à une conduite d’eau ou à une ligne téléphonique. • Risque potentiel de décharge électrique. SIGNES D’ATTENTION Assurez-vous que aucune eau entre dans le climatiseur. • Risque potentiel de feu ou de décharge électrique. N’installez pas le climatiseur près des appareils de chauffage pour éviter des dommages. Arrêtez le climatiseur à l’aide de la télécommande ou de l’accessoire de commande (si fourni). Ne débranchez pas pour éteindre l’unité (à moins qu’il y a un danger immédiat). N’ouvrez pas le gril avant lors du fonctionnement. • Risque potentiel de décharge électrique ou de défaut de fonctionnement d’unité. L’air frais ne devrait pas couler directement sur des personnes, des animaux de compagnie, et des plantes. • Il est nocif à votre santé, animaux de compagnie, et plantes. Ne fonctionnez pas le climatiseur pendant une période prolongée dans une chambre avec la porte fermée ou avec bébés, vieilles ou handicapées. • En cas d’application résidentielle, rafraîchissez l’air dans la chambre (de l’air externe pour empêcher le manque de l’oxygène), afin de garantir au moins 1-2 renouvellement/h. Pour l’application différente l’air de renouvellement doit être garantie selon UNI 10339. N’employez pas le climatiseur comme instrument de refroidissement de précision pour la nourriture, les animaux de compagnie, les plantes,les produits de beauté ou les machines. • Risque potentiel de perte de propriété. Ne buvez pas l’eau du climatiseur. • Risque potentiel de risque sanitaire. Ne donnez pas le choc excessif au climatiseur. • Risque potentiel de feu ou de défaut de fonctionnement d’unité. N’exposez pas le filtre de la poussière à la lumière du soleil directe tout en séchant. • La lumière du soleil directe forte peut déformer le filtre de la poussière. Ne pulvérisez pas l’eau directement sur le climatiseur ou n’employez pas le benzène, le diluant ou l’alcool pour nettoyer la surface de l’unité. • Risque potentiel de décharge électrique ou de feu. • Risque potentiel de dommages au climatiseur.06_ information de sûreté information de sûreté SIGNES D’ATTENTION Ne placez pas les récipients avec le liquide ou d’autres objets sur l’unité. Ne touchez pas la pipe reliée au climatiseur. • Risque potentiel de blessures ou de brûlure. Le climatiseur se compose de pièces mobiles. Éloignez les enfants de l’unité pour éviter des dommages physiques. Vérifiez des dommages sur la livraison. Si endommagé, n’installez pas le climatiseur et appelez l’endroit de l’achat immédiatement. Assurez-vous que la tension et la fréquence du système électrique sont compatibles avec le climatiseur. Insérez le filtre de la poussière avant d’opérer le climatiseur. • S’il n’y a aucun filtre de la poussière à l’intérieur du climatiseur, la poussière accumulée peut raccourcir la vie du climatiseur et causer la perte de l’électricité. Maintenez les températures d’intérieur stables et pas extrêmement froides, particulièrement où il y a des enfants, vieilles ou handicapées. Nettoyez le climatiseur après que le ventilateur intérieur cesse le fonctionnement. • Risque potentiel de dommages ou de décharge électrique. Nettoyez le filtre de la poussière toutes les 2 semaines. Nettoyez le filtre plus fréquemment si le climatiseur est actionné dans des secteurs poussiéreux. Inspectez l’état, les raccordements électriques, les pipes et la caisse externe du climatiseur régulièrement par un technician qualifié de service. N’ouvrez pas les portes et les fenêtres dans la chambre étant refroidie lors du fonctionnement à moins que nécessaire. Ne bloquez pas les passages de climatiseur. Si les objets bloquent la circulation d’air, ça peut causer le défaut de fonctionnement d’unité ou l’exécution faible. Les matériaux d’emballage et les batteries utilisées de la télécommande (optional) doivent être disposés selon les normes nationales. Le réfrigérant utilisé dans le climatiseur doit être traité comme perte de produit chimique. Disposez le réfrigérant conformément aux norms nationales. Faites un technicien qualifié de service installer le climatiseur et executer une opération d’essai. Installez le climatiseur loin de l’exposition directe à la lumière du soleil, à l’appareillage de chauffage, et aux endroits humides. • Accrochez un rideau pour amplifier l’efficacité de refroidissement et pour éviter le risque de décharge électrique. Reliez fermement la tuyauterie souple de vidange au climatiseur pour un drainage approprié de l’eau. • Si ce n’est pas drainé bien, l’eau condensée à partir de l’unité d’intérieur peut déborder et fuir dans la salle. Installez l’unité extérieure où le bruit de fonctionnement normal et la vibration résiduelle (paramètres subjectifs) ne dérangeront pas votre voisin et est bien aéré sans l’obstacle. • Risque potentiel de défaut de fonctionnement.information de sûreté _07 FRANÇAIS Installez une pipe dont longueur est conforme à la limite minimum et maximum prescrite dans le manuel d’installation. • avec la longueur différente d’indiqué, la performance et la fiabilité de système soit réduit rigoureusement. Si une panne de la source d’énergie se produit tandis que le climatiseur fonctionne, coupez la source d’énergie immédiatement. En nettoyant l’unité extérieure, touchez les ailerons de radiateur d’échangeur de chaleur avec soin extrême. • Porter les gants épais peut protéger vos mains. Assurez-vous qu’il n’y a aucun obstacle sous l’unité d’intérieur. • Risque potentiel de feu ou de perte de propriété. Assurez-vous que les enfants prennent des précautions contre l’accès au climatiseur et ils ne jouent pas avec l’unité. La puissance et le courant maximum d’entrée et la puissance et le courant d’entrée sont mesurés selon les règles données dans l’IEC/ISO. Assurez à employer la télécommande sans fil jusqu’à une distance environ de 7m de la sonde de télécommande du climatiseur. • Le climatiseur peut ne pas fonctionner au delà de la distance de 7m. Assurez-vous que la couverture ou aucun obstacle n’est près du climatiseur. Permettez l’espace suffisant pour la circulation d’air. • La ventilation insuffisante peut avoir comme conséquence l’exécution faible. Des batteries devraient être enlevées de la télécommande sans fil et être maintenues séparées si inutilisées pour la longue période. Si l’échec ou le dommage se produit dans les conditions d’une utilisation inexacte non suivis du manuel d’installation, les dépenses de réparation ne seront pas couverte par la garantie produit. • Risque potentiel de défaut de fonctionnement, décharge électrique ou feu si des réparations ou les installations sont essayées par un technicien non-qualifié de service. Assurez des commutateurs marche/arrêt et de protection sont correctement installés. N’employez pas le climatiseur si endommagé. Si les problèmes se produisent, arrêtez immédiatement l’opération et démontez la prise de l’alimentation d’énergie. Si le climatiseur ne sera pas employé pendant une période prolongée (par exemple, au-delà de plusieurs mois), débranchez le courant du mur.. Appelez l’endroit de l’achat ou un centre de contact si les réparations sont necessaries • Risque potentiel de feu ou de décharge électrique si le démontage ou les réparations sont essayés par un technician non-qualifié de service. Si vous sentez le plastique brûlant, entendez les bruits étranges,ou voyez la fumée venir à partir de l’unité, débranchez le climatiseur immédiatement et appelez un centre de contact. • Risque potentiel defeu ou de décharge électrique.08_ contenus UTILISATION DES FONCTIONS AVANCÉES 20 20 Réglage de temporisateur 20 On timer 21 Off timer 22 Combinaison de l’On timer et l’Off timer 23 Utilisation de la fonction NETTOYGE ET MAINTIEN DU CLIMATISEUR 25 24 Nettoyage de l’extérieur 24 Nettoyage du filtre 24 Filtre à air 25 Filtre d’Anti-allergie 26 Remplacement du filtre 26 Filtre de désodorisation 26 Entretien du climatiseur ANNEXE 28 27 Dépannage 28 Gamme d’opération contenus VISIONNEMENT DE VOTRE CLIMATISEUR AVANT L’EMPLOI 09 09 Contrôle de l’unité intérieure 09 Pièces principales 10 Indicateur de modes et boutons de contrôle 11 Démontage du panneau frontal 11 Visualisation du bouton d’alimentation et des parties situées sous le panneau 11 Contrôle de l’unité extérieure 12 Contrôle de la télécommande 13 Affichage de télécommande 13 Utilisation de la télécommande 13 Installation des batteries OPÉRATION DE LA FONCTION DE BASE 14 14 Allumer et éteindre le climatiseur 14 Sélectionnement de la mode d’opération 14 Auto 15 Frais 16 Sec 17 Ventilateur 18 Chauffage 19 Ajustement de la direction de circulation d’air 19 Circulation d’air verticale 19 Circulation d’air horizontale contenus _09 FRANÇAIS visionnement de votre climatiseur avant l’emploi Félicitations sur l’achat du climatiseur. Nous espérons que vous apprécierez les dispositifs de votre climatiseur et resterez frais ou chaud avec l’efficacité optimale. Veuillez lire le manuel d’utilisateur pour commencer et pour faire la meilleure utilisation du climatiseur. CONTRÔLE DE L’UNITÉ INTÉRIEURE Déballez soigneusement votre climatiseur, et vérifiez l’unité pour vous assurer qu’il n’est pas endommagé. Pièces principales Votre climatiseur peut légèrement sembler différent de l’illustration montrée ci-dessus selon votre modèle. Entrée d’air Indicateur de modes et boutons de contrôle Sortie d’air (Réfrégiration/chauffage) Sortie d’air (chauffage) Levier des lames d’aération Levier des lames d’aération10_ visionnement visionnement de votre climatiseur avant l’emploi VÉRIFICATION DE L’UNITÉ INTÉRIEURE Indicateur de modes et boutons de contrôle 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A chaque fois que vous appuyez sur un bouton, un “bip” retenti vous indiquant ainsi que l’appareil fonctionne correctement. INDICATEUR L’icone s’éclaire lorsque est opérant. INDICATEUR MODE VENTILATION Cet icône s’éclaire lorsque l’appareil fonctionne en mode ventilation. INDICATEUR TIMER L’icone timer (minuteur) s’éclaire lorsque la fonction minuteur On/Off est activée. INDICATEUR DE DÉGIVRAGE Cet icône s’éclaire lorsque l’appareil commence à dégivrer. BOUTON D’ALIMENTATION Appuyez sur On/Off. Le climatiseur fonctionnera en mode Auto. INDICATEUR POWER L’icône power (en état de marche) s’éclaire lorsque l’appareil est en marche. CAPTEUR DE LA TÉLÉCOMMANDE Dirigez la télécommande en direction de ce capteur situé sur le climatiseur. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 visionnement _11 FRANÇAIS DÉMONTAGE DU PANNEAU FRONTAL Saisissez la partie haute du panneau frontal et tirez-le vers vous-même. Décrochez la ficelle de sécurité et soulevez le panneau frontal. Visualisation du bouton d’alimentation et des parties situées sous le panneau Localisez le bouton Power parmi les autres indicateurs de modes. Ouvrez le panneau frontal afin de visualiser le capteur de température et l’interrupteur Air flow Le capteur de température est localisé sur la partie haute et gauche du climatiseur, juste au dessus de l’emplacement du filtre anti-allergie/désodorisant. L’interrupteur Air flow est situé dans le coin haut et droit du climatiseur. Vous avez la possibilité de faire fonctionner le climatiseur en mode Auto en appuyant sur le bouton Power. Lorsque vous placez l’interrupteur Air flow sur Auto, la sortie d’air s’ouvre que vous soyez en mode réfrigération, chauffage ou ventilation. Cependant, en mode silence, la sortie d’air inférieure se ferme, en mode réfrigération, elle se ferme dans l’heure. Lorsque vous placez l’interrupteur Air flow sur Off, la sortie d’air inférieure se ferme. Le capteur de température ambiante mesure la température ambiante de la pièce. VÉRIFICATION DE L’UNITÉ EXTÉRIEURE Entrée d’air (dos) Valve de raccordement (à l’intérieur) Sortie d’air ���� �� ���� �� ���� �� Utilisation de l’interrupteur Air flow Bouton Power Capteur de température ambiante L’aspect et le design sont sujets à modification selon le modèle.12_ visionnement visionnement de votre climatiseur avant l’emploi VÉRIFICATION DE LA TÉLÉCOMMANDE Vous pouvez activer le climatiseur à l’aide de la télécommande . En utilisant la télécommande, dirigez-la toujours directement au climatiseur. Chaque fois que vous appuyez sur le bouton, un signal sonore court retentira et un indicateur de transmission apparaît sur l’affichage de télécommande. Affichage de télécommande Power Allumer/ éteindre le climatiseur. Mode Régler une des 5 modes d’opération. (voir les pages 14~18 pour des consignes ) Fonction de temporisateur Haut/Bas Augmenter/Diminuer le temps. Régler/Annuler Configurer/Annuler la temporisation en cours. Marche/Arrêt Réglez l’état Marche/Arrêt de temporisateur. Température  Diminuez/augmentez la température de 1˚C. Vitesse de ventillateur Ajustez combien d’air traverse le climatiseur avec les 4 vitesses différentes de ventilateur telles qu’Auto/Bas/Moyen/Haut. Fonction Marche/Arrêt Emit hydrogen(H) and oxygen(O2) in the air to remove polluted substances such harmful particles. Émettez l’hydrogéne(H) et l’oxygéne(O2) dans l’air pour enlever les substances polluées comme des particules nocives. Mode Nettoyage Réglez une des 3 types d’opération . Oscillation d’air Activez/Déactivez le movement de lame de circulation d’air automatiquement en haut et en bas. visionnement _13 FRANÇAIS Affichage de télécommande Indicateur d’oscillation d’air Indicateur de mode d’opération Indicateur de batterie basse Régler l’indicateur de la température Indicateur Indicateur de temporisateur Marche/Arrêt Installation des batteries 1. Glissez la couverture, sur le dos de la télécommande, vers le bas pour ouvrir. 2. Installez deux batteries AAA. Vérifiez et assortissez les signes “+” et “-” en conséquence. Assurezvous que vous avez installé les batteries dans la position correcte. 3. Fermez la couverture en la glissant de nouveau à son position originale. Vous devriez entendre le bruit de clic quand la couverture est bloquée correctement. Indicateur de vitesse de ventillateur Utilisation de la télécommande • Dirigez la télécommande vers la sonde de télécommande de l’unité. • Quand vous appuyez correctement sur le bouton sur la télécommande, vous entendrez le bruit de signal sonore à partir de l’unité. • Le signal ne peut être bien reçu des lampes fluorescentes de modèle d’éclairage électronique, comme les lampes fluorescentes d’inverseur sont dans le meme espace. • Si d’autres produits électriques fonctionnent par la télécommande, appelez votre centre de contact plus proche. Indicateur de transmission14_ opération opération de la fonction de base ALLUMER ET ÉTEINDRE LE CLIMATISEUR Appuyez sur le bouton Power sur la télécommande. Vous entendrez le bruit de sonnerie et le panneau avant seront soulevés vers le haut quand le climatiseur est correctement allumé. L’indicateur. s’allume et s’éteint également. Quand vous éteignez le climatiseur,l’indicateur, s’allume et s’éteint , alors le panneau avant reviendra à sa position fermée. Allumez/éteignez votre climatiseur sans télécommande. Vous pouvez opérer votre climatiseur en appuyant sur le bouton Power au indicateur de mode du climatiseur. SÉLECTIONNEMENT DE LA MODE D’OPÉRATION Auto En mode Auto, le climatiseur règle automatiquement la température et la vitesse de ventilateur selon la temperature ambiante détectée par le senseur de température ambiante. 1. Allumez le climatiseur. Appuyez sur le bouton Power sur la télécommande. 2. Réglez la mode d’opération. Appuyez sur le bouton Mode sur la télécommande jusqu’à ce que l’indicateur de la mode Auto et de vitesse du ventilateur Auto apparaissent sur l’affichage de télécommande. Le climatiseur réglera automatiquement la température et la vitesse de ventilateur pour se refroidir ou chauffer selon la température ambiante courante. Quand vous appuyez sur le bouton Mode, la mode changera par ordre d’Auto, Cool, Dry, Fan et Heat. 3. Réglez la température. Appuyez sur le bouton Temperature ou sur la télécommande pour diminuer ou augmenter la température désirée. Vous pouvez régler la Température désirée entre la gamme de 18˚C~30˚C. Vous pouvez diminuer ou augmenter la température par 1˚C. • Quand le climatiseur fonctionne déjà en une autre mode, appuyez sur le bouton Mode jusqu’à ce que l’indicateur de la mode Auto apparaisse sur l’affichage de télécommande. • Quand vous employez la télécommande, assurez-vous que l’indicateur correct qui s’assortit à votre choix apparaît sur l’affichage de télécommande. • La circulation d’air peut être ajustée manuellement. (voir la page19 pour des instructions.) opération _15 FRANÇAIS Frais En mode Cool le climatiseur refroidira votre pièce. Vous pouvez ajuster la température et la vitesse de ventilateur pour sentir plus frais dans la saison chaude. 1. Allumez le climatiseur. Appuyez sur le bouton Power sur la télécommande. 2. Réglez la mode d’opération. Appuyez sur le bouton Mode sur la télécommande jusqu’à ce que l’indicateur de la mode Cool apparaisse sur l’affichage de télécommande. Le climatiseur fonctionne en mode Cool et abaissera la température dans votre chambre. Quand vous appuyez sur le bouton Mode, la mode changera par ordre d’Auto, Cool, Dry, Fan et Heat. 3. Réglez la température. Appuyez sur le bouton Temperature ou  sur la télécommande pour diminuer ou augmenter la température désirée. Vous pouvez régler la température désirée entre la gamme de 18˚C~30˚C. Vous pouvez diminuer ou augmenter la température par 1˚C. 4. Réglez la vitesse de ventilateur. Appuyez sur le bouton Fan Speed sur la télécommande pour régler la vitesse désirée de ventilateur. Si la température ambiante atteint la valeur désirée, leclimatiseur coupera le refroidissement pendant un moment et le ventilateur fonctionne. Quand vous appuyez sur le bouton Fan Speed, la vitesse de ventilateur changera par ordre d’Auto, Bas, Moyen et Haut. • Quand vous employez la télécommande, assurez-vous que l’indicateur correct qui s’assortit à votre choix apparaît sur l’affichage de télécommande. • La circulation d’air peut être ajustée manuellement. (voir la page19 pour des instructions.) • Si les températures extérieures courantes sont beaucoup plus hautes que la température d’intérieur choisie, cela peut prendre du temps d’apporter la température intérieure à la fraîcheur désirée.16_ opération operation de la fonction de base SÉLECTIONNEMENT DE LA MODE D’OPÉRATION Sec Le climatiseur en mode sec agit comme un déshumidificateur en enlevant l’humidité de l’air d’intérieur. La mode Sec fait l’air se sentir rafraîchissant dans un climat humide. 1. Allumez le climatiseur. Appuyez sur le bouton Power sur la télécommande. 2. Réglez la mode d’opération. Appuyez sur le bouton Mode sur la télécommande jusqu’à ce que l’indicateur de la mode Dry apparaisse sur l’affichage de télécommande. Le climatiseur fonctionne en mode Dry et ajuste automatiquement la vitesse de ventilateur à Auto. Quand vous appuyez sur le bouton Mode, la mode changera par ordre d’Auto, Cool, Dry, Fan et Heat. 3. Réglez la température. Appuyez sur le bouton Temperature ou  sur la télécommande pour diminuer ou augmenter la température désirée. Vous pouvez régler la température désirée entre la gamme de 18˚C~30˚C. Vous pouvez diminuer ou augmenter la température par 1˚C. • Quand vous employez la télécommande, assurez-vous que l’indicateur correct qui s’assortit à votre choix apparaît sur l’affichage de télécommande. • La circulation d’air peut être ajustée manuellement. (voir la page19 pour des instructions.) opération _17 FRANÇAIS Ventilateur La mode de ventilateur peut être choisie pour aérer votre pièce. La mode de ventilateur sera utile de rafraîchir l’air dans votre chambre. 1. Allumez le climatiseur. Appuyez sur le bouton Power sur la télécommande. 2. Réglez la mode d’opération. Appuyez sur le bouton Mode sur la télécommande jusqu’à ce que l’indicateur de mode Fan apparaisse sur l’affichage de télécommande. Le climatiseur fonctionne en mode Ventilateur et ajuste automatiquement la température selon la température ambiante courante. Quand vous appuyez sur le bouton Mode , la mode changera par ordre d’Auto, Cool, Dry, Fan et Heat. 3. Réglez la vitesse de ventilateur. Appuyez sur le bouton Fan Speed sur la télécommande pour régler la vitesse désirée de ventilateur. Quand vous appuyez sur le bouton Fan Speed, la vitesse de ventilateur changera par ordre de Bas, Moyen et Haute. • Quand vous employez la télécommande, assurez-vous que l’indicateur correct qui s’assortit à votre choix apparaît sur l’affichage de télécommande. • La circulation d’air peut être ajustée manuellement. (voir la page19 pour des instructions.)18_ opération opération de la fonction de base SÉLECTIONNEMENT DE LA MODE D’OPÉRATION Chauffage Le climatiseur chauffe comme se refroidit. Chauffez votre pièce avec cet appareil souple dans le froid de l’hiver. 1. Allumez le climatiseur. Appuyez sur le bouton Power sur la télécommande. 2. Réglez la mode d’opération. Appuyez sur le bouton Mode sur la télécommande jusqu’à ce que l’indicateur de mode Heat apparaisse sur l’affichage de télécommande. Le climatiseur fonctionne en mode Heat et chauffe votre pièce. Quand vous appuyez sur le bouton Mode, la mode changera par ordre d’Auto, Cool, Dry, Fan et Heat. 3. Réglez la température. Appuyez sur le bouton Temperature ou  sur la télécommande pour diminuer ou augmenter la température désirée. Vous pouvez régler la température désirée entre la gamme de 18˚C~30˚C.. Vous pouvez diminuer ou augmenter la température par 1˚C. 4. Réglez la vitesse de ventilateur. Appuyez sur le bouton Fan Speed sur la télécommande pour régler la vitesse désirée de ventilateur. Si la température ambiante atteint la valeur désirée, le chauffage s’arrêtera pendant un moment. • Quand vous appuyez sur le bouton Fan Speed, la vitesse de ventilateur changera par ordre d’Auto, Bas, Moyen et Haute. • Le ventilateur peut ne pas fonctionner pendant environ les minutes 3~5 au début pour empêcher tous les souffles froids tandis que le climatiseur réchauffe. • La circulation d’air peut être ajustée manuellement. (voir la page19 pour des instructions.) • Puisque le climatiseur chauffe la pièce en prenant l’énergie calorifique de l’air extérieur, la capacité de chauffage peut diminuer quand les températures extérieures sont extrêmement basses. Si vous vous sentez le climatiseur chauffe insuffisamment, l’utilisation d’un appareil de chauffage additionnel en combination avec le climatiseur est recommandé. opération _19 FRANÇAIS AJUSTEMENT DELA DIRECTION DE CIRCULATION D’AIR La circulation d’air peut être dirigée vers votre position désirée. Circulation d’air verticale Des lames de circulation se déplacent en haut et en bas. 1. Appuyez sur le bouton Air swing sur la télécommande. L’indicateur d’oscillation d’air sera allumé et le nombre de voyants de signalisation se déplacent en haut et en bas. Les lames de circulation d’air se déplacent en haut et en bas sans interruption pour circuler l’air. Pour maintenir la direction de circulation d’air dans une position constante, appuyez sur le bouton Air swing sur latélécommande encore. La direction du flux d’air vertical est ajustable lorsque le climatiseur refroidi la pièce. Circulation d’air horizontale Assurez-vous qu’une des goupilles de lame sortent des lames de circulation d’air ne sont pas cassés. 1. Déplacez le levier de goupille de lame à gauche ou à droit afin de maintenir la direction de circulation d’air dans une position constante que vous préférez. Afin d’éviter tout risque de blessure, déplacez les lames d’aération une fois le mode Air Swing arrêté. Lorsque le climatiseur refroidi la pièce, dirigez les lames d’aération vers le haut. Si le climatiseur fonctionne en mode réfrigération pour une période prolongée avec les lames dirigées vers le bas, la différence de température peut créer de l’humidité et engendrer des électrocutions ou un dysfonctionnement de l’appareil. Cooling/Heating Heating ATTENTION20_ utilisation des functions avancées utilisation des fonctions avancées RÉGLAGE DE TEMPORISATEUR Cette fonction avançée de temporisateur vous permet d’allumer/éteindre votre climatiseur automatiquement meme lorsque vous êtes parti. Réglez simplement l’heure et votre climatiseur s’allume/ s’éteigne automatiquement. On timer Cette fonction vous permet d’allumer le climatiseur automatiquement dans le gammne de temps de 24 heures. Le temporisateur Allumé est disponible tandis que votreclimatiseur est allumé/éteint. 1. Appuyez sur le bouton On sur la télécommande. L’indicateur d’On timer clignote sur l’affichage de télécommande. 2. Réglez l’heure où vous voulez que le climatiseur s’allume automatiquement. Appuyez sur le bouton Up ou Down sur la télécommande pour changer la configuration de temps tandis que l’indicateur d’On timer clignote. Vous pouvez régler l’heure jusqu’à 24 heures, augmentant en l’unité de 30 minutes pour les 3 premières heures et en l’unité horaire après les 3 premières heures. 3. Appuyez sur le bouton Set/Cancel sur la télécommande à l’activer. L’affichage de télécommande montrera le heure(s) que vous avez réglé. Le climatiseur fonctionnera automatiquement au temps préglé et alors l’indicateur d’On timer disparaît. Si l’On timer n’est pas réglé dans 10 secondes, le climatiseur finira le réglage. 4. Réglez la mode d’opération. Appuyez sur le bouton Mode sur la télécommande jusqu’à ce que la mode désirée apparaisse sur l’affichage de télécommande. Le climatiseur fonctionnera en mode que vous réglez. La fonction On timer est disponible dans la mode Auto/ Cool/Dry/Fan/Heat. • La température peut également être ajustée. (voir l’étape 3 à la page 15 pour des instructions.) • Après l’installation tandis que l’unité est éteinte, approximativement après 10 seconds, tout les autres indicateurs diaparaitront excepté l’indicateur On timer et le temps restant. • Le réglage du temps vous permet de changer en appuyant sur le bouton On. Appuyez sur le bouton Up ou Down pour changer la configuration de temps et puis appuyez sur le bouton Set/Cancel à l’activer. utilisation des functions avancées _21 FRANÇAIS Pour déactiver l’On timer 1. Appuyez sur le bouton Set/Cancel sur la télécommande. L’On timer que vous réglez sera annulé et l’indicateur d’On timer disparaîtra. Off timer Cette fonction vous permet d’éteindre le climatiseur automatiquement dans la gamme de temps de 24 heures. L’Off timer est fonctionnel quand l’unité fonctionne. 1. Appuyez sur le bouton Off sur la télécommande. L’indicateur d’Off timer clignote sur l’affichage de télécommande. 2. Réglez l’heure où vous voulez éteindre le climatiseur automatiquement. Appuyez sur le bouton Up ou Down sur la télécommande pour changer la configuration de temps tandis qu l’indicateur d’Off timer clignote. Vous pouvez régler l’heure jusqu’à 24 heures, augmentant en l’unité de 30 minutes pour les 3 premières heures et en l’unité horaire après les 3 premières heures. 3. Appuyez sur le bouton Set/Cancel sur la télécommande à l’activer. L’affichage de télécommande montrera le(s) heure(s) que vous avez réglé. Le climatiseur fonctionnera automatiquement au temps réglé et alors l’indicateur d’Off timer disparaît. Si l’Off timer n’est pas réglé dans 10 secondes, le climatiseur finira le réglage. • Le réglage du temps vous permet de changer en appuyant sur le bouton Off. Appuyez sur le bouton Up ou Down pour changer la configuration de temps et puis appuyez sur le bouton Set/Cancel à l’activer. • Vous pouvez combiner la fonction Off timer avec sur la fonction On timer pour allumer et éteindre ensuite le climatiseur au temps désiré. (voir la page 23 pour des instructions.) Pour déactiver l’Off timer 1. Appuyez sur le bouton Set/Cancel sur la télécommande. L’Off timer que vous avez réglé sera annulé et l’indicateur d’Off timer disparaîtra. La fonction Off timer est disponible dans la mode Auto/Cool/Dry/Fan/Heat.22_ utilisation des functions avancées utilisation des fonctions avancées RÉGLAGE DE TEMPORISATEUR Combinaison de l’On timer et l’Off timer Vous pouvez combiner the On timer et Off timer ensemble pour un usage plus commode de la fonction de temporisateur. 1. Réglez l’On timer. Appuyez sur le bouton On. Réglez l’heure avec le bouton Up et Down. Appuyez sur le bouton Set/Cancel pour activer l’On timer. Voir la page 21 pour plus d’instructions en détail à propos de la configuration d’On timer. 2. Réglez l’Off timer. Appuyez sur le bouton Off. Réglez l’heure avec le bouton Up et Down. Appuyez sur le bouton Set/Cancel pour activer l’Off timer. Quand vous réglez l’heure, il y a deux options possibles: L’On timer est plus court que l’ Off timer Le climatiseur s’allumera et puis s’éteindra automatiquement. La configuration devrait être faite tandis que le climatiseur est éteint. Par exemple, si l’On timer est réglé à 3 heures et l’Off timer à 5 heures, le climatiseur s’éteindra automatiquement 3 heures après le temps réglé et fonctionne alors pendant des 2 heures suivantes avant de s’éteindre automatiquement. L’On timer est plus long que l’ Off timer Le climatiseur s’éteindra et puis s’allumera automatiquement. La configuration devrait être faite tandis que le climatiseur fonctionne. Par exemple, si l’On timer est réglé à 3 heures et l’Off timer à 1 heure, le climatiseur s’éteindra automatiquement une heure après le temps réglé et reste éteint pendant 2 heures avant de s’allumer automatiquement. Voir la page 22 pour plus d’instructions en détail à propos de la configuration de l”Off timer. Pour déactiver la combinaison de temporisateur 1. Appuyez sur le bouton Set/Cancel sur la télécommande. Tous les deux temporisateur On timer et Off timer seront annulés et les indicateurs disparaîtront. utilisation des functions avancées _23 FRANÇAIS UTILISATION DE LA FONCTION MPI, l’ion de micro plasma, la zone produit de l’hydrogène (H) et de l’oxygène (O2 ) pour enlever une substance et une décomposition polluée de telles particules nocives. Il vous fait à respirer mieux comme si vous restiez autour des chutes d’eau, de la vague de mer, des fleuves et des montagnes. L’indicateur sur l’unité intérieure s’allume et s’éteigne continument quand la fonction est activée. 1. Appuyez sur le bouton On/Off sur la télécommande tandis ue le climatiseur est éteint. Lindicateur apparaîtra sur l’affichage de télécommande. Le climatiseur produit de MPI en mode Auto. 2. Réglez le type d’opération. Chaque fois que vous appuyez sur le bouton Clean Mode tandis que le climatiseur est éteint, le type d’opération changera par ordre d’ Auto, Silence et Rapid. Auto : ajuste la vitesse de ventilateur automatiquement. Silence : fonctionne à une vitesse minimum de ventilateur tranquillement. Rapid : fonctionne à une vitesse maximum de ventilateur pour nettoyer et épurer l’air efficacement et rapidement. Le bouton Clean Mode ne fonctionnera pas tandis que le climatiseur est allumé. Quand vous activez la fonction tandis que le climatiseur est allumé,la fonction sera réglée automatiquement à Auto. Pour déactiver la mode 1. Appuyez sur le bouton On/Off sur la télécommande. La mode que vous réglez sera annulé et la lumière bleue s’éteindra.24_ utilisation des functions avancées nettoyage et maintien du climatiseur NETTOYAGE DE L’EXTÉRIEUR 1. Essuyez la surface de l’unité avec un tissu légèrement humide ou sec une fois nécessaire. N’employez pas le benzène, le diluant ou le Clorox TM . Ils peuvent endommager la surface du filtre à air et peuvent créer un risque du feu. NETTOYAGE DU FILTRE En nettoyant le filtre, veillez à débrancher le courant à partir de l’unité. Aucun outil spécial n’est nécessaire pour la nettoyer. Filtre à Air La mousse lavable base sur le filtre à air capture des particules grands de l’air. Le filtre est nettoyé avec un vide ou lavage à la main. L’indicateur de nettoyage du filtre s’éclaire lorsque le filtre nécessite d’être nettoyé. 1. Ouvrir le panneau frontal. Saisissez la partie haute du panneau frontal et tirez-le vers vous-même. Décrochez la ficelle de sécurité et soulevez le panneau frontal. 2. Saisissez la poignée et pressez légèrement le filtre à air vers le bas afin de le courber. Tirez le filtre à air vers vous et soulevezle afin de le retirer. 3. Nettoyez le filtre à air avec un aspirateur ou une brosse molle. Si la poussière est trop lourde, alors rincez-le avec de l’eau courant et séchez-le dans un secteur aéré. • Pour les meilleures conditions, répétez toutes les deux semaines. • Si le filtre à air sèche dans un secteur confiné (ou humide), les odeurs peuvent se produire. S’il se produit, nettoyez de nouveau et séchez-le dans un secteur bien-aéré. 4. Insérez le dos de filtre à air à air dans son position originale. 5. Refermer le panneau frontal. Saisissez la partie haute du panneau frontal et placez sa partie inférieure en premier, puis poussez le panneau. 6. Appuyez sur le bouton Filter Reset situé sur la télécommande. ATTENTION ���� �� ���� �� utilisation des functions avancées _25 FRANÇAIS nettoyage et maintien du climatiseur NETTOYAGE DU FILTRE Filtre d’anti-allergie La mousse lavable basé sur le filtre d’anti-allergie mène à la réduction en allergènes qui prospèrent en air pollué. 1. Ouvrir le panneau frontal. Saisissez la partie haute du panneau frontal et tirez-le vers vous-même. Décrochez la ficelle de sécurité et soulevez le panneau frontal. 2. Saisissez la poignée et pressez légèrement le filtre à air vers le bas afin de le courber. Tirez le filtre à air vers vous et soulevez-le afin de le retirer. 3. Tirez et faite coulissez le filtre d’anti-allergie pour le retirer. 4. Nettoyez le filtre d’anti-allergie avec un aspirateur ou une brosse molle. Alors rincez-le avec de l’eau courante et séchez-le dans un secteur aéré. 5. Installez le dos de filtre d’anti-allergie en position. 6. Refermer le panneau frontal. Saisissez la partie haute du panneau frontal et placez sa partie inférieure en premier, puis poussez le panneau. Nettoyez le filtre d’anti-allergie tous les 3 mois. La limite de nettoyage peut différer sur l’utilisation et les conditions environnementales. 26_ utilisation des functions avancées REMPLACEMENT DU FILTRE Le filter de rechange peut être acheté du magasin de detail au détail ou être commandé du revendeur où vous avez acheté l’unité. Si vous ne pouvez pas trouver un, veuillez appelez un centre de contact. Filtre de désodorisation Le filtre de désodorisation absorbe efficacement la fumée de cigarette, l’odeur des animaux de compagne et d’autres odeurs désagréables. Le nettoyage de filtre de désodorisation est simple, juste enlevez le vieux filtre et installez un neuf. 1. Ouvrir le panneau frontal. Saisissez la partie haute du panneau frontal et tirez-le vers vous-même. Décrochez la ficelle de sécurité et soulevez le panneau frontal. 2. Saisissez la poignée et pressez légèrement le filtre à air vers le bas afin de le courber. Tirez le filtre à air vers vous et soulevez-le afin de le retirer. 3. Tirez et faite coulissez le filtre désodorisant pour le retirer. 4. Installez le dos de nouveau filtre de désodorisation en position. 5. Refermer le panneau frontal. Saisissez la partie haute du panneau frontal et placez sa partie inférieure en premier, puis poussez le panneau. • La synchronisation de remplacement du filtre de désodorisation diffère selon l’utilisation et les conditions environnementales. • Même si des filtres de désodorisation et d’anti-allergie sont installés dans une position inversée, elle n’affectera pas son système de filtration. ENTRETIEN DU CLIMATISEUR Si le climatiseur n’est pas utilisé pendant une période prolongée, séchez-le complètement et déconnecter-le du mur. De l’humidité restant dans les composants peut endommager l’appareil. 1. Avant de stocker le climatiseur, faite-le fonctionner en mode ventilation pendant trois ou quatre heures afin de le sécher complètement. 2. Après une période de stockage, séchez les composants internes du climatiseur une nouvelle fois à l’aide du mode ventilation pendant trois ou quatre heures afin d’éliminer les mauvaises odeurs crées par l’humidité.nettoyage et maintien _27 FRANÇAIS annexe DÉPANNAGE Référez-vous au diagramme suivant si le climatiseur fonctionne anormalement. Ceci peut sauver le temps et les dépenses inutiles. PROBLÈME SOLUTION Le climatiseur ne fonctionne pas juste après qu’il a été remis en marche. • En raison du mécanisme protecteur, l’appareil ne commence pas à fonctionner immédiatement pour garder l’unité à partir de la surcharge. Le climatiseur commencera en 3 minutes. Le climatiseur ne fonctionne pas du tout. • Vérifiez si la prise de courant est correctement reliée. Insérez la prise de courant dans la prise murale correctement. • Vérifiez si le disjoncteur est coupé. • Vérifiez s’il y a une panne de courant. • Vérifiez votre fusible. Assurez-vous qu’il n’est pas cassé. La température ne change pas. • Vérifiez si vous choisissiez la mode Fan. Appuyez sur le bouton Mode sur la télécommande pour choisir une autre mode. L’air frais(tiéde) ne sort pas du climatiseur. • Vérifiez si la température réglé est supérieure (inférieur) à la température courante. Appuyez sur le bouton Temperature sur la télécommande pour changer la température réglée. Appuyez sur le bouton Temperature  ou  pour diminuer ou augmenter la température. • Vérifiez si le filtre à air est bloqué par la saleté. Nettoyez le filtre à air toutes les deux semaines. • Vérifiez si le climatiseur juste a été allumé. Si oui, attendez 3minutes. La vitesse de ventilateur ne change pas. • Vérifiez si vous choisissiez la mode Auto ou Dry. Le climatiseur ajuste automatiquement la vitesse de ventilateur à en mode Auto/Dry. La fonction de temporisateur n’est pas réglée. • Vérifiez si vous appuyez sur le bouton Set/Cancel sur la télécommande après que vous ayez réglé l’heure. Les odeurs imprègnent dans la chambre lors du fonctionnement. • Vérifiez si l’appareil fonctionne dans un secteur fumeux ou s’il y a une odeur entrant de l’extérieur. Opérez le climatiseur en mode Fan ou ouvrez les fenêtres pour aérer la pièce. Le climatiseur fait un bruit de bouillonnement. • Un bruit de bouillonnement peut être entendu quand le refrigerant circule par le compresseur. Laissez le climatiseur fonctionner en mode choisi. L’eau s’égoutte des lames de circulation d’air. • Vérifiez si le climatiseur s’était refroidi pendant une période prolongée avec les lames de circulation d’air dirigées vers le bas. La condensation peut se produire en raison de la différence dans la température. La télécommande ne fonctionne pas. • Vérifiez si vos batteries sont épuisées. • Assurez-vous que des batteries sont correctement installées. • Assurez-vous que rien ne bloque votre sonde de télécommande. • Vérifiez s’il y a les appareillages forts d’éclairage près du climatiseur. La lumière forte qui vient des ampoules fluorescentes ou des signes au néon peut interrompre les vagues électriques.28_ annexe GAMMES D’OPÉRATION La table ci-dessous indique la gamme de la température et des humidités avec lesquelles le climatiseur peuvent être opérées. Référez-vous à la table pour l’usage efficace. MODE CONDTIONS D’OPÉRATION SI EN DEHORS DES CONDITIONS COOL Température intérieure : 16°C~32°C - Un dispositif de sécurité arrêtera continûment le fonctionnement de système ; - La condensation peut se produire sur l’unité d’intérieur avec le risque de laisser de l’eau sur le plancher ; Humidité intérieure : au-dessous de 80% Température extérieure : -5°C~43°C HEAT Température intérieure: audessous de 27°C - Un dispositif de sécurité arrêtera continûment Température extérieure : le fonctionnement de système ; -15°C~24°C DRY Température intérieure : 16°C~32°C - Un dispositif de sécurité arrêtera continûment le fonctionnement de système ; - La condensation peut se produire sur l’unité d’intérieur avec le risque de laisser de l’eau sur le plancher ; Humidité intérieure : au-dessous de 80% Température extérieure : -5°C~43°C POWER SUPPLY Tension nominale monophasé limite minimum et maximum 220V-240V~50Hz 198V min.-264V max. • N’importe quels dommages se produisent hors de la condition indiquée ne peuvent pas être couverte par la garantie de produit.Si le système fonctionne continument en dehors de des conditions, son performace et fiabilité seront compromis. • Si la température extérieure est aussi basse que 0°C, la capacité de chauffage peut chuter selon la condition de fonctionnement.annexe _29 FRANÇAIS BN68-03043A-00 Contact SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE If you have any questions or comments relating to Samsung products, please contact the SAMSUNG customer care centre. Country Customer Care Centre Web Site ArMeNIA 0-800-05-555 - AUSTrIA 0810 - SAMSUNG (7267864, € 0.07/min) www.samsung.com/at AzerBAIjAN 088-55-55-555 - BelArUS 810-800-500-55-500 - BelGIUM 02-201-24-18 www.samsung.com/be (Dutch) www.samsung.com/be_fr (French) CzeCH 800 - SAMSUNG (800-726786) www.samsung.com/cz Samsung Zrt., česká organizační složka, Oasis Florenc, Sokolovská394/17, 180 00, Praha 8 DeNMArK 70 70 19 70 www.samsung.com/dk ESTONIA 800-7267 www.samsung.com FINlAND 030 - 6227 5 15 www.samsung.com/fi FrANCe 01 48 63 00 00 www.samsung.com/fr GerMANY 01805 - SAMSUNG(726-7864 € 0,14/Min) www.samsung.com/de GEOrGIA 8-800-555-555 - HUNGArY 06-80-SAMSUNG(726-7864) www.samsung.com/hu eIre 0818 717100 www.samsung.com/ie ITAlIA 800-SAMSUNG(726-7864) www.samsung.com/it KAzAKHSTAN 8-10-800-500-55-500 - KYrGYzSTAN 00-800-500-55-500 www.samsung.com lATVIA 8000-7267 www.samsung.com lITHUANIA 8-800-77777 www.samsung.com lUXeMBUrG 261 03 710 www.samsung.com/lu MOldOvA 00-800-500-55-500 - NeTHerlANDS 0900-SAMSUNG (0900-7267864) (€ 0,10/Min) www.samsung.com/nl NOrWAY 815-56 480 www.samsung.com/no POlANd 0 801 1SAMSUNG(172678) 022-607-93-33 www.samsung.com/pl POrTUGAl 80820-SAMSUNG(726-7864) www.samsung.com/pt rUSSIA 8-800-555-55-55 www.samsung.com SlOvAKIA 0800-SAMSUNG(726-7864) www.samsung.com/sk SPAIN 902 - 1 - SAMSUNG (902 172 678) www.samsung.com/es SWEdEN 0771 726 7864 (SAMSUNG) www.samsung.com/se SWITZErlANd 0848 - SAMSUNG(7267864, CHF 0.08/min) www.samsung.com/ch www.samsung.com/ch_fr/(French) TADjIKISTAN 8-10-800-500-55-500 www.samsung.com U.K 0845 SAMSUNG (7267864) www.samsung.com/uk UKrAINe 0-800-502-000 www.samsung.ua www.samsung.com/ua_ru UzBeKISTAN 8-10-800-500-55-500 www.samsung.com LCD TV user manual imagine the possibilities Thank you for purchasing this Samsung product. To receive more complete service, please register your product at www.samsung.com/register Model Serial No. LCD TV user manual BN68-03043A-Cover.indd 1 2010-04-26 �� 9:28:28Figures and illustrations in this User Manual are provided for reference only and may differ from actual product appearance. Product design and specifications may be changed without notice. ❑ License TruSurround HD, SrS and symbol are trademarks of SrS labs, Inc. TruSurround HD technology is incorporated under license from SrS labs, Inc. Manufactured under license from dolby laboratories. dolby and the double-d symbol are trademarks of Dolby laboratories. ❑ Digital TV Notice 1. Functionalities related to digital Tv(dvB) are only available in countries/areas where dvB-T (MPEG2 and MPEG4 AvC) digital terrestrial signals are broadcasted or where you are able to access to a compatible dvB-C(MPEG2 and MPEG4 AAC) cableTv service. Please check with your local dealer the possibility to receive dvB-T or dvB-C signal. 2. DVB-T is the DVB european consortium standard for the broadcast transmission of digital terrestrial television and DVBC is that for the broadcast transmission of digital Tv over cable. However, some differentiated features like EPG (Electric Programme Guide), vOd (video on demand) and so on, are not included in this specification. So, they cannot be workable at this moment. 3. Although this TV set meets the latest DVB-T and DVB-C standards, as of [August, 2008], the compatibility with future DVB-T digital terrestrial and DVB-C digital cable broadcasts cannot be guaranteed. 4. Depending on the countries/areas where this TV set is used some cable-TV providers may charge an additional fee for such a service and you may be required to agree to terms and conditions of their business. 5. Some digital Tv functions might be unavailable in some countries or regions and dvB-C might not work correctly with some cable service providers. 6. For more information, please contact your local Samsung customer care centre. ❑ Precautions When Displaying a Still Image A still image may cause permanent damage to the TV screen ● Do not display a still image and partially still on the lCD panel for more than 2 hours as it can cause screen image retention. This image retention is also known as “screen burn”. To avoid such image retention, reduce the degree of brightness and contrast of the screen when displaying a still image. ● Watching the lCd Tv in 4:3 format for a long period of time may leave traces of borders displayed on the left, right and centre of the screen caused by the difference of light emission on the screen. Playing a dvd or a game console may cause a similar effect to the screen. Damages caused by the above effect are not covered by the Warranty. ● displaying still images from video games and PC for longer than a certain period of time may produce partial after-images. To prevent this effect, reduce the ‘brightness’ and ‘contrast’ when displaying still images. © 2010 Samsung electronics Co., ltd. All rights reserved. BN68-03043A.indb 1 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:23English - 1 ❑ Symbol N O T Note One-Touch Button TOOlS Button Press GENERAL INFORMATION ■ viewing the Control Panel ....................................................2 ■ Accessories .........................................................................3 ■ viewing the Connection Panel..............................................4 ■ remote Control ....................................................................6 ■ Installing Batteries in the remote Control ............................6 OPERATION ■ Viewing the menus ...............................................................7 ■ Placing Your Television in Standby Mode.............................8 ■ Plug & Play Feature..............................................................8 ■ Viewing the Display ..............................................................9 CHANNEL CONTROL ■ Configuring the Channel Menu.............................................9 ■ Managing Channels ...........................................................12 PICTURE CONTROL ■ Configuring the Picture Menu.............................................14 ■ Using Your Tv as a Computer (PC) display.......................16 ■ Setting up the Tv with your PC ..........................................17 SOUND CONTROL ■ Configuring the Sound Menu..............................................18 ■ Selecting the Sound Mode .................................................19 SETUP ■ Configuring the Setup Menu...............................................20 INPUT / SUPPORT ■ Configuring the Input Menu ................................................23 ■ Configuring the Support Menu............................................23 RECOMMENDATIONS FOR USE ■ Teletext Feature..................................................................25 ■ How to Adjust the Stand (19inch model only).....................26 ■ How to Adjust the Angle of the Tv (19inch model only)......26 ■ Installing VeSA Compliant Mounting Devices (19inch model only)............................................................27 ■ Using the decoration Covers (19inch model only).............27 ■ Installing the Stand.............................................................28 ■ Installing the Wall Mount Kit ...............................................28 ■ Using the Anti-Theft Kensington lock ................................28 ■ Securing the Installation Space..........................................29 ■ Securing the Tv to the Wall................................................29 ■ Troubleshooting..................................................................30 ■ Specifications .....................................................................33 CONTENTS English BN68-03043A.indb 1 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:23English - 2 GENERAL INFORMATION ¦ Viewing the Control Panel N The product colour and shape may vary depending on the model. N You can use a button by pressing the side panel buttons. 4 1 2 3 5 6 8 8 7 1 SOURCEE: Toggles between all the available input sources. In the on-screen menu, use this button as you would use the ENTERE button on the remote control. 2 MENU: Press to see an on-screen menu of your Tv’s features. 3Y: Press to increase or decrease the volume. In the on-screen menu, use the Y buttons as you would use the ◄ and ► buttons on the remote control. 4Z: Press to change channels. In the on-screen menu, use the Z buttons as you would use the ▼ and ▲ buttons on the remote control. 5 P (POWER): Press to turn the Tv on and off. 6 REMOTE CONTROL SENSOR: Aim the remote control towards this spot on the Tv. 7 POWER INDICATOR: Blinks and turns off when the power is on and lights up in stand-by mode. 8 SPEAKERS BN68-03043A.indb 2 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:23English - 3 ¦ Accessories remote Control & Batteries (AAA x 2) Power Cord Cover-Bottom (22 inch model only) Cleaning Cloth (M4 X l16) Wall Mount kit (19 inch model only) Decoration Cover (19 inch model only) Stand Screw X 4 (22 inch model only) ● Owner’s Instructions ● Warranty card ● Safety Guide N Please make sure the following items are included with your lCd Tv. If any items are missing, contact your dealer. N Warranty card / Safety Guide (Not available in all locations) N The items colour and shape may vary depending on the model. BN68-03043A.indb 3 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:24English - 4 ¦ Viewing the Connection Panel N The product colour and shape may vary depending on the model. N Whenever you connect an external device to your Tv, make sure that power on the unit is turned off. N When connecting an external device, match the colour of the connection terminal to the cable. 1 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) – Connects to a Digital Audio component such as a Home theatre receiver. N When the HdMI IN jacks are connected, the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) jack on the Tv outputs 2 channel audio only. If you want to hear 5.1 channel audio, connect the Optical jack on the dvd / Blu-ray player or Cable / Satellite Box directly to an Amplifier or Home Theatre, not the Tv. 2 SERVICE – Connector for software upgrades. 3 HDMI / PC IN [HDMI (DVI), AUDIO, PC] – Connects to the HdMI jack of a device with an HdMI output. N No additional Audio connection is needed for an HDMI to HDMI connection. N What is HdMI? HdMI(High-definition Multimedia Interface), is an interface that enables the transmission of digital audio and video signals using a single cable. The difference between HdMI and dvI is that the HdMI device is smaller in size, has the HdCP (High Bandwidth digital Copy Protection) coding feature installed, and supports multi - channel digital audio. N Use the HDMI / PC IN [HDMI (DVI)] jack for dvI connection to an external device. Use a dvI to HdMI cable or dvI-HdMI adapter (DVI to HDMI) for video connection and the HDMI / PC IN [AUDIO] jacks for audio. When using an HdMI / dvI cable connection, you must use the HDMI / PC IN [HDMI (DVI)] jack. HDMI / PC IN [AUDIO] – Connect to the audio output jack on your PC. – DVI audio outputs for external devices. HDMI / PC IN [PC] – Connect to the video output jack on your PC. N If your PC supports an HdMI connection, you can connect this to the HDMI / PC IN [HDMI (DVI)] terminal. N If your PC supports a dvI connection, you can connect this to the HDMI / PC IN [HDMI (DVI)] / [AUDIO] terminal. 4 AV IN [VIDEO] / [R-AUDIO-L] – Connect rCA cable to an appropriate external A/V device such as VCr, DVD or Camcorder. – Connect rCA audio cables to [R-AUDIO-L] on your set and the other ends to corresponding audio out connectors on the A/V device. 6 7 1 2 3 4 0 9 8 5 [TV Rear Panel] Power Input BN68-03043A.indb 4 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:24English - 5 5 ANT IN – Connects to an antenna or cable TV system. 6 COMMON INTERFACE Slot • When not inserting ‘CI CArd’ in some channels, ‘Scrambled Signal’ is displayed on the screen. • The pairing information containing a telephone number, CI CArD ID, Host ID and other information will be displayed in about 2~3 minutes. If an error message is displayed, please contact your service provider. • When the channel information configuration has finished, the message ‘Updating Completed’ is displayed, indicating that the channel list is now updated. N You must obtain a CI CArD from a local cable service provider. remove the CI CArD by carefully pulling it out with your hands since dropping the CI CArD may cause damage to it. N Insert the CI-Card in the direction marked on it. N The place of the COMMON INTERFACE Slot may be different depending on its model. N CAM is not supported in some countries and regions, check with your authorized dealer. 7 KENSINGTON LOCK (depending on the model) – The Kensington lock (optional) is a device used to physically fix the system when used in a public place. If you want to use a locking device, contact the dealer where you purchased the Tv. N The location of the Kensington lock may be different depending on its model. 8 Headphones jack – Headphone may be connected to the headphone output on your set. While the head phone is connected, the sound from the built-in speakers will be disabled. 9 COMPONENT IN – Connect component video cables (optional) to component connector (PR, PB, Y) on the rear of your set and the other ends to corresponding component video out connectors on the DTV or DVD. – If you wish to connect both the Set-Top Box and DTV (or DVD), you should connect the Set-Top Box to the DTV (or DVD) and connect the dTv (or dvd) to component connector (PR, PB, Y) on your set. – The PR, PB and Y connectors on your component devices (DTV or DVD) are sometimes labelled Y, B-Y and r-Y or Y, Cb and Cr. – Connect rCA audio cables (optional) to [R-AUDIO-L] on the rear of your set and the other ends to corresponding audio out connectors on the DTV or DVD. 0 EXT (RGB) Connector Input Output Video Audio (l / r) rGB Video + Audio (l / r) EXT O O O Only Tv or dTv output is available. – Inputs or outputs for external devices, such as VCr, DVD, video game device or video disc players. BN68-03043A.indb 5 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:25English - 6 ¦ Remote Control N You can use the remote control up to a distance of about 23 feet from the TV. N The performance of the remote control may be affected by bright light. N The product colour and shape may vary depending on the model. 1 POWER : Television Standby button. 2 NUMERIC BUTTONS : Press to change the channel. 3 FAV.CH : Used to display Favourites Channel lists on the screen. 4Y : Press to increase or decrease the volume. 5 SOURCE : Press to display and select the available video sources. 6 INFO : Press to display information on the TV screen. 7 TOOLS : Use to quickly select frequently used functions. 8 CH LIST : displays the Channel list on screen. 9 COLOURS BUTTONS : Use these buttons in the Channel list menus etc. ! TV : Selects the Tv mode directly. @ PRE-CH : enables you to return to the previous channel you were watching. # MUTEM: Press to temporarily cut off the sound. $ P

: Press to change channels. % MENU : displays the main onscreen menu ^ GUIDE : Electronic Programme Guide (EPG) display & RETURN : returns to the previous menu * UP▲ / DOWN▼ / LEFT◄ / RIGHT► / ENTERE : Use to select on-screen menu items and change menu values. ( EXIT : Press to exit the menu. ) SUBT. : digital subtitle display a AD : Audio description selection. Teletext Functions 5 0 : Teletext mode selection (lIST / FlOF) 6 5 : Teletext reveal 7 4 : Teletext size selection 8 8 : Teletext store 9 Fastext topic selection 0/ : Alternately select Teletext, Double, or Mix. ! :: Exit from the Teletext display @ 1 : Teletext sub page $ 2 : Teletext next page 3 : Teletext previous page % 6 : Teletext index & 9 : Teletext hold ( 7 : Teletext cancel ¦ Installing Batteries in the Remote Control 1. lift the cover at the back of the remote control upward as shown in the figure. 2. Install two AAA size batteries. N Make sure to match the ‘+’ and ‘–’ ends of the batteries with the diagram inside the compartment. 3. replace the cover. N remove the batteries and store them in a cool, dry place if you won’t be using the remote control for a long time. N If the remote control doesn’t work, check the following: ● Is the Tv power on? ● Are the plus and minus ends of the batteries reversed? ● Are the batteries drained? ● Is there a power outage or is the power cord unplugged? ● Is there a special fluorescent light or neon sign nearby? 1 2 4 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 ! @ # $ & * ( ) a % ^ BN68-03043A.indb 6 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:25English - 7 OPERATION ¦ Viewing the menus Before using the TV, follow the steps below to learn how to navigate the menu in order to select and adjust different functions. 1. Press the MENU button. The main menu is displayed on the screen. Its left side has icons: Picture, Sound, Channel , Setup, Input, Application, Support. 2. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select one of the icons. Press the ◄ or ► button to access the icon’s sub-menu. 3. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to move to items in the menu. Press the ENTERE button to enter items in the menu. 4. Press the ▲/▼/◄/► button to change the selected items. N Press the RETURN button to return to the previous menu. 5. Press the EXIT button to exit from the menu. Using the remote control buttons Button Operations Button Operations MENUm Display the main on-screen menu. ▲/▼/◄/►/ ENTERE Move the cursor and select an item. Select the currently selected item. Confirm the setting. RUTURNR return to the previous menu. EXITe exit the on-screen menu. Example: Setting the TV’s Brightness in the Picture Menu „ Adjusting the Brightness to 80 1. Press the MENU button to display the menu. 2. Press the ENTERE button to select Picture. 3. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Brightness. 4. Press the ENTERE button. 5. Press the ◄ or ► button until the brightness becomes 80. 6. Press the ENTERE button. N Press the EXIT button to exit from the menu. Mode : Standard ► Backlight : 7 Contrast : 95 Brightness : 45 Sharpness : 50 Colour : 50 Tint (G / r) : G50 / r50 Picture Mode : Standard ► Backlight : 7 Contrast : 95 Brightness : 45 Sharpness : 50 Colour : 50 Tint (G / r) : G50 / r50 Picture Backlight : 7 Contrast : 95 Brightness : 45 ► Sharpness : 50 Colour : 50 Tint (G / r) : G50 / r50 Advanced Settings Picture Options Picture reset Picture U Move L Adjust E enter R return Brightness 45 U Move L Adjust E enter R return Brightness 80 Mode : Standard ► Backlight : 7 Contrast : 95 Brightness : 45 Sharpness : 50 Colour : 50 Tint (G / r) : G50 / r50 Picture BN68-03043A.indb 7 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:25English - 8 ¦ Placing Your Television in Standby Mode Your set can be placed in standby mode in order to reduce the power consumption. The standby mode can be useful when you wish to interrupt viewing temporarily (during a meal, for example). 1. Press the POWERP button on the remote control. N The screen is turned off and a standby indicator appears on your set. 2. To switch your set back on, simply press the POWERP button again. N Do not leave your set in standby mode for long periods of time (when you are away on holiday, for example). It is best to unplug the set from the mains and aerial. ¦ Plug & Play Feature When the Tv is initially powered on, basic settings proceed automatically and subsequently. 1. Press the POWER button on the remote control. The message You can set the menu language. is displayed. 2. Select the appropriate language by pressing the ▲ or ▼ button. Press the ENTERE button to confirm your choice. 3. Press the ◄ or ► button to select Store Demo or Home Use, then the ENTERE button. N We recommend setting the Tv to Home Use mode for the best picture in your home environment. N Store Demo mode is only intended for use in retail environments. N If the unit is accidentally set to Store Demo mode and you want to return to Home Use (Standard): Press the volume button on the Tv. When the volume OSd is displayed, press and hold the MENU button on the TV for 5 seconds. 4. Press the ENTERE button. Select the appropriate country by pressing the ▲ or ▼ button. Press the ENTERE button to confirm your choice. 5. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Air or Cable, then press the ENTERE button. N Air: Air antenna signal. Cable: Cable antenna signal. 6. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the channel source to memorize. Press the ENTERE button to select Start. N Digital & Analogue: digital and Analogue channels. Digital: digital channels. Analogue: Analogue channels. N When setting the antenna source to Cable, a step appears allowing you to set a value for the digital channel search. For more information, refer to Channel → Auto Store. N The channel search will start and end automatically. N Press the ENTERE button at any time to interrupt the memorization process. N After all the available channels are stored, the message Set the Clock Mode. is displayed. 7. Press the ENTERE button. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Auto, then Press the ENTERE button. N If you select Manual, Set current date and time is displayed. N If you have received a digital signal, the time will be set automatically. If not, select Manual to set the clock. (refer to page 20) 8. The connection method to provide the best quality Hd is offered. After confirming the method, press the ENTERE button. 9. The message Enjoy your TV! is displayed. When you have finished, press the ENTERE button. If you want to reset this feature... 1. Press the MENU button to display the menu. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Setup, then press the ENTERE button. 2. Press the ENTERE button again to select Plug & Play. 3. Enter your 4 digit PIN number. The default PIN number of a new Tv set is 0-0-0-0. N If you want to change PIN number, use the Change PIN function. (refer to page 22) N The Plug & Play feature is only available in the TV mode. Plug & Play You can set the menu language. Menu language : English ► E enter BN68-03043A.indb 8 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:26English - 9 ¦ Viewing the Display The display identifies the current channel and the status of certain audio-video settings. O Press the INFO button to viewing the information. Press the INFO button on the remote control. The TV will display the channel, the type of sound, and the status of certain picture and sound settings. ● ▲, ▼: You can view other channel’s information. If you want to move to the currently selected channel, press ENTERE button. ● ◄, ►: You can view the desired program’s information at the current channel. N Press the INFO button once more or wait approximately 10 seconds and the display disappears automatically. CHANNEL CONTROL ¦ Configuring the Channel Menu ❑ Country N The PIN number input screen appears. Enter your 4 digit PIN number. „ Analogue Channel You can change the country for analogue channels. „ Digital Channel You can change the country for digital channels. ❑ Auto Store You can scan for the frequency ranges available to you (and availability depends on your country). Automatically allocated programme numbers may not correspond to actual or desired programme numbers. N If a channel is locked using the Child Lock function, the PIN input window appears. „ Air / Cable Antenna source to memorize ● Digital & Analogue: digital and Analogue channels. ● Digital: digital channels. ● Analogue: Analogue channels. When selecting ‘Cable → Digital & Analogue’ or ‘Cable → Digital’ Provide a value to scan for cable channels. ● Search Mode → Full / Network / Quick N Quick – Network ID: displays the network identification code. – Frequency: displays the frequency for the channel. (differs in each country) – Modulation: displays available modulation values. – Symbol Rate: displays available symbol rates. N Scans for all channels with active broadcast stations and stores them in the TV’s memory. N If you want to stop Auto Store, press the ENTERE button. The Stop Auto Store? message will be displayed. Select Yes by pressing the ◄ or ► button, then press the ENTERE button. Country ► Auto Store Manual Store Cable Search Option Now & Next Guide Full Guide default Guide : Full Guide Channel DTV Air 15 abc1 18:00 ~ 6:00 18:11 Thu 6 Jan life On venus Avenue Unclassified No Detaild Information ¦ INFO BN68-03043A.indb 9 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:26English - 10 ❑ Manual Store N Scans for a channel manually and stores it in the TV’s memory. N If a channel is locked using the Child Lock function, the PIN input window appears. „ Digital Channel Manual store for digital channels. N Digital Channel is only available in DTV mode. ● Channel: Set the Channel number using the ▲, ▼ or number (0~9) buttons. ● Frequency: Set the frequency using the number buttons. ● Bandwidth: Set the bandwidth using the ▲, ▼ or number (0~9) buttons. N When it has finished, channels are updated in the channel list. „ Analogue Channel Manual store for analogue channel. ● Programme (Programme number to be assigned to a channel): Sets the programme number using the ▲, ▼ or number (0~9) buttons. ● Colour System → Auto / PAL / SECAM / NTSC4.43: Sets the colour system value using the ▲ or ▼ button. ● Sound System → BG / DK / I / L: Sets the sound system value using the ▲ or ▼ button. ● Channel (When you know the number of the channel to be stored): Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select C (Air channel) or S (Cable channel). Press the ► button, then press the ▲, ▼ or number (0~9) buttons to select the required number. N You can also select the channel number directly by pressing the number (0~9) buttons. N If there is abnormal sound or no sound, reselect the sound standard required. ● Search (When you do not know the channel numbers): Press the ▲ or ▼ button to start the search. The tuner scans the frequency range until the first channel or the channel that you selected is received on the screen. ● Store (When you store the channel and associated programme number): Set to OK by pressing the ENTERE button. N Channel mode – P (Programme mode): When completing tuning, the broadcasting stations in your area have been assigned to position numbers from P00 to P99. You can select a channel by entering the position number in this mode. – C (Air channel mode): You can select a channel by entering the assigned number to each air broadcasting station in this mode. – S (Cable channel mode): You can select a channel by entering the assigned number for each cable channel in this mode. ❑ Cable Search Option (depending on the country) Sets additional search options such as the frequency and symbol rate for cable network searches. ● Frequency (Start ~ Stop): displays the frequency for the channel. ● Modulation: displays available modulation values. ● Symbol Rate: displays available symbol rates. ❑ Now & Next Guide / Full Guide The EPG (Electronic Programme Guide) information is provided by the broadcasters. Programme entries may appear blank or out of date as a result of the information broadcast on a given channel. The display will dynamically update as soon as new information becomes available. N For detailed procedures on using Now & Next Guide and Full Guide, refer to the descriptions on page 11. O You can also display the guide menu simply by pressing the GUIDE button. (To configure the Default Guide, refer to the descriptions.) „ Now & Next Guide For the six channels indicated in the left-hand column, displays the Current programme and the Next programme information. „ Full Guide displays the programme information as time ordered One hour segments. Two hours of programme information is displayed which may be scrolled forwards or backwards in time. BN68-03043A.indb 10 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:26English - 11 ❑ Default Guide → Now & Next Guide / Full Guide You can decide whether to display either the Now & Next Guide or the Full Guide when the GUIDE button on the remote control is pressed. ❑ Channel List For detailed procedures on using the Channel List, refer to the ‘Managing Channels’ instructions. O You can select these options by simply pressing the CH LIST button on the remote control. ❑ Channel Mode When press the P >/< button, Channels will be switched within the selected channel list. „ Added Ch. Channels will be switched within the memorized channel list. „ Favourite Ch. Channels will be switched within the favourite channel list. ❑ Fine Tune If the reception is clear, you do not have to fine tune the channel, as this is done automatically during the search and store operation. If the signal is weak or distorted, you may have to fine tune the channel manually. N Fine tuned channels that have been saved are marked with an asterisk ‘*’ on the right-hand side of the channel number in the channel banner. N To reset the fine-tuning, select Reset by pressing the ▲ or ▼ button and then press the ENTERE button. N Only Analogue Tv channels can be fine tuned. Using the Now & Next Guide / Full Guide To... Then... Watch a programme in the EPG list Select a programme by pressing the ▲, ▼, ◄, ► button. exit the guide Press the blue button If the next programme is selected, it is scheduled with the clock icon displayed. If the ENTERE button is pressed again, press the ◄, ► button to select Cancel Schedules, the scheduling is cancelled with the clock icon gone. View programme information Select a programme of your choice by pressing the ▲, ▼, ◄, ► button. Then press the INFO button when the programme of your choice is highlighted. The programme title is on the upper part of the screen centre. Please click on INFO button for detailed information. Channel Number, running Time, Status Bar, Parental level, video Quality Information (HD / SD), Sound Modes, Subtitle or Teletext, languages of Subtitle or Teletext and brief summary of the highlighted programme are included on the detailed information. ‘...’ will be appeared if the summary is long. Toggle between the Now & Next Guide and Full Guide Press the red button repeatedly. In Full Guide Scrolls backwards quickly (24 hours). Scrolls forwards quickly (24 hours). Press the green button repeatedly. Press the yellow button repeatedly. Full Guide dTv Cable 900 f tn 2:10 Tue 1 Jun Freshmen On Campus 2:00 - 2:30 No Detailed Information Aujourd’hui 2:00 - 3:00 3:00 - 4:00 Mint extra loaded Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC The Distillery Smash Hits! Sunday 1 f tn 2 ITv Play 3 Kerrang! 4 Kiss 5 oneword ▼ 6 Smash Hits! No Information Freshmen O.. Watch INFO Information ■ Now/Next ■ +24 Hours ■ Exit Now & Next Guide dTv Cable 900 f tn 2:10 Tue 1 Jun Freshmen On Campus 2:00 - 2:30 No Detailed Information Now Next Mint extra loaded Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC The Distillery Smash Hits! Sunday 1 f tn 2 ITv Play 3 Kerrang! 4 Kiss 5 oneword ▼ 6 Smash Hits! . Kisstory No Information No Information. No Information Street Hypn.. Watch INFO Information ■ Full Guide ■ Exit BN68-03043A.indb 11 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:26English - 12 ¦ Managing Channels Using this menu, you can Add / Delete or set Favourite channels and use the programme guide for digital broadcasts. „ All Channels Shows all currently available channels. „ Added Channels Shows all added channels. „ Favourites Shows all favourite channels. O To select the Favourites channels you have set up, press the FAV.CH button on the remote control. „ Programmed Shows all current reserved programmes. N Select a channel in the All Channels, Added Channels or Favourites screen by pressing the ▲ / ▼ buttons, and pressing the ENTERE button. Then you can watch the selected channel. N Using the Colour buttons with the Channel List – red (Channel Type): Toggle between your TV, Radio, Data / Other and All. – Green (Zoom): Enlarges or shrinks a channel number. – Yellow (Select): Selects multiple channel lists. You can perform the add / delete, add to Favourites / delete from Favourites, or lock / unlock function for multiple channels at the same time. Select the required channels and press the yellow button to set all the selected channels at the same time. The c mark appears to the left of the selected channels. – TOOLS (Tools): displays the Delete (or Add), Add to Favourite (or Delete from Favourite), Lock (or Unlock), Timer Viewing, Edit Channel Name, Sort, Edit Channel Number, Select All (or Deselect All), Auto Store menu. (The Options menus may differ depending on the situation.) N Channel Status Display Icons ● A : An analogue channel. ● c: A channel selected by pressing the yellow button. ● * : A channel set as a Favourite. ● ( : A programme currently being broadcast. ● \ : A locked channel. ● ) : A reserved programme Channel List Option Menu (in All Channels / Added Channels / Favourites) N Press the TOOLS button to use the option menu. N Option menu items may differ depending on the channel status. „ Add / Delete You can delete or add a channel to display the channels you want. N All deleted channels will be shown on All Channels menu. N A gray-coloured channel indicates the channel has been deleted. N The Add menu only appears for deleted channels. N You can also delete a channel from the Added Channels or Favourites menu in the same manner. „ Add to Favourite / Delete from Favourite You can set channels you watch frequently as favourites. T Press the TOOLS button to display the Tools menu. You can also set the add to (or delete from) Favourite by selecting Tools → Add to Favourite (or Delete from Favourite). N The ‘ ’ symbol will be displayed and the channel will be set as a favourite. N All favourite channels will be shown on Favourites menu. 824 UKTV Gold 825 UKTV style A 1 C -- A 2 C -- A 3 ♥ C -- A 4 C -- A 5 C -- A 6 C -- A 7 C -- Added Channels All ■ Channel Type ■ Zoom ■ Select T Tools 824 UKTV Gold 825 UKTV style A 1 C -- A 2 C -- A 3 ♥ C -- A 4 C -- A 5 C -- A 6 C -- A 7 C -- Added Channels All ■ Channel Type ■ Zoom ■ Select T Tools Delete Add to Favourite Lock Timer Viewing Edit Channel Name Sort ▼ BN68-03043A.indb 12 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:27English - 13 „ Lock / Unlock You can lock a channel so that the channel cannot be selected and viewed. This function is available only when the Child Lock is set to On. (see page 22) N The PIN number input screen appears. Enter your 4 digit PIN number. N The default PIN number of a new Tv set is 0-0-0-0. You can change the PIN, by selecting Change PIN from the menu. N The ‘\’ symbol will be displayed and the channel will be locked. „ Timer Viewing If you reserve a programme you want to watch, the channel is automatically switched to the reserved channel in the Channel list; even when you are watching another channel. To reserve a programme, set the current time first. (See page 20) N Only memorized channels can be reserved. N You can set the channel, day, month, year, hour and minute directly by pressing the number buttons on the remote control. N reserving a programme will be shown in the Programmed menu. N Digital Programme Guide and Viewing Reservation When a digital channel is selected, and you press the ► button, the Programme Guide for the channel appears. You can reserve a programme according to the procedures described above. „ Edit Channel Name (analogue channels only) Channels can labelled so that their call letters appear whenever the channel is selected. N The names of digital broadcasting channels are automatically assigned and cannot be labelled. „ Edit Channel Number (digital channels only) You can also edit the channel number by pressing the number buttons on the remote control. „ Sort (analogue channels only) This operation allows you to change the programme numbers of the stored channels. This operation may be necessary after using the auto store. „ Select All / Deselect All ● Select All: You can select all the channels in the channel list. ● Deselect All: You can deselect all the selected channels. N You can only select Deselect All when there is a selected channel. „ Auto Store N For further details on setting up options, refer to page 9. N If a channel is locked using the Child Lock function, the PIN input window appears. Channel List Option Menu (in Programmed ) You can view, modify or delete a reservation. N Press the TOOLS button to use the option menu. „ Change Info Select to change a viewing reservation. „ Cancel Schedules Select to cancel a viewing reservation. „ Information Select to view a viewing reservation. (You can also change the reservation information.) „ Select All Select all reserved programmes. 1 / 1 / 2009 13:59 5 Tv1 Quincy, M.E 18:59 2 Tv3 The equalizer 20:59 2 Tv3 McMillan & Wife Programmed All ■ Zoom ■ Select T Tools E Information Change Info Cancel Schedules Information Select All BN68-03043A.indb 13 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:27English - 14 PICTURE CONTROL ¦ Configuring the Picture Menu ❑ Mode You can select the type of picture which best corresponds to your viewing requirements. T Press the TOOLS button to display the Tools menu. You can also set the picture mode by selecting Tools → Picture Mode. „ Dynamic Selects the picture for high-definition in a bright room. „ Standard Selects the picture for the optimum display in a normal environment. „ Movie Selects the picture for viewing movies in a dark room. ❑ Backlight / Contrast / Brightness / Sharpness / Colour / Tint (G/R) Your television has several setting options that allow you to control the picture quality. ● Backlight: Adjusts the brightness of lCd back light. ● Contrast: Adjusts the contrast level of the picture. ● Brightness: Adjusts the brightness level of the picture ● Sharpness: Adjusts the edge definition of the picture. ● Colour: Adjusts colour saturation of the picture. ● Tint (G/R): Adjusts the colour tint of the picture. N Select a picture mode to be adjusted first. The adjusted values are saved for each picture mode. N When you make changes to Backlight, Contrast, Brightness, Sharpness, Colour or Tint (G/R), the OSd will be adjusted accordingly. N In analogue TV, Ext., AV modes of the PAl system, you cannot use the Tint (G/R) Function. N In PC mode, you can only make changes to Backlight, Contrast and Brightness. N Settings can be adjusted and stored for each external device you have connected to an input of the TV. N The energy consumed during use can be significantly reduced if the brightness level of the picture is reduced, which will reduce the overall running cost. ❑ Advanced Settings Samsung’s new Tvs allow you to make even more precise picture settings than previous models. See below to adjust detailed picture settings. N Advanced Settings is available in Standard or Movie mode. N In PC mode, you can only make changes to Gamma and White Balance from among the Advanced Settings items. „ Black Tone → Off / Dark / Darker / Darkest You can select the black level on the screen to adjust the screen depth. „ Dynamic Contrast → Off / Low / Medium / High You can adjust the screen contrast so that the optimal contrast is provided. „ Gamma You can adjust the Primary Colour (red, Green, Blue) Intensity. „ Colour Space Colour Space is a colour matrix composed of red, green and blue colours. Select your favourite Colour Space to experience the most natural colour. ● Native: Native Colour Space offers deep and rich colour tone. ● Auto: Auto Colour Space automatically adjusts to the most natural colour tone based on programme sources. Mode : Standard ► Backlight : 7 Contrast : 95 Brightness : 45 Sharpness : 50 Colour : 50 Tint (G / r) : G50 / r50 Picture Colour : 50 Tint (G / r) : G50 / r50 Advanced Settings ► Picture Options Picture reset Picture BN68-03043A.indb 14 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:27English - 15 „ White Balance You can adjust the colour temperature for more natural picture colours. ● R-Offset / G-Offset / B-Offset / R-Gain / G-Gain / B-Gain: You can adjust the Colour ‘temperature’ in the light areas by changing the values of r, G, B. recommended for advanced users only. ● Reset: The previously adjusted white balance will be reset to the factory defaults. „ Flesh Tone You can emphasize the pink ‘flesh tone’ in the picture. N Changing the adjustment value will refresh the adjusted screen. „ Edge Enhancement → Off / On You can emphasize object boundaries in the picture. ❑ Picture Options N In PC mode, you can only make changes to the Colour Tone and Size from among the items in Picture Options. „ Colour Tone → Cool / Normal / Warm1 / Warm2 You can select the most comfortable colour tone to your eyes. N Settings can be adjusted and stored for each external device you have connected to an input of the TV. N Warm1 or Warm2 is only activated when the picture mode is Movie. „ Size You can select the picture size which best corresponds to your viewing requirements. T Press the TOOLS button to display the Tools menu. You can also set the size by selecting Tools → Picture Size. ● Auto Wide: Automatically adjusts the picture size to the 16:9 aspect ratio. ● 16:9: Adjusts the picture size to 16:9 appropriate for dvds or wide broadcasting. ● Wide Zoom: Magnify the size of the picture more than 4:3. ● Zoom: Magnifies the 16:9 wide picture (in the vertical direction) to fit the screen size. ● 4:3: This is the default setting for a video movie or normal broadcasting. ● Screen Fit: Use the function to see the full image without any cut-off when HdMI (720p / 1080i) or Component (1080i) signals are input. N Depending on the input source, the picture size options may vary. N The items available may differ depending on the selected mode. N In PC Mode, only 16:9 and 4:3 mode can be adjusted. N Settings can be adjusted and stored for each external device you have connected to an input of the TV. N Temporary image retention may occur when viewing a static image on the set for more than two hours. N Wide Zoom: Press the ► button to Select Position, then press the ENTERE button. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to move the picture up / down. Then press the ENTERE button. N Zoom: Press the ► button to Select Position, then press the ENTERE button. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to move the picture up and down. Then press the ENTERE button. Press the ► button to Select Size, then press the ENTERE button. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to magnify or reduce the picture size in the vertical direction. Then press the ENTERE button. N After selecting Screen Fit in HdMI (1080i) or Component (1080i) mode: Select Position by pressing the ◄ or ► button. Use the ▲, ▼, ◄ or ► button to move the picture. Reset: Press the ◄ or ► button to select Reset, then press the ENTEREbutton. You can initialize the setting. N If you use the Screen Fit function with HdMI 720p input, 1 line will be cut at the top, bottom, left and right as in the Overscan function. „ Screen Mode → 16:9 / Wide Zoom / Zoom / 4:3 When setting the picture size to Auto Wide in a 16:9 wide Tv, you can determine the picture size you want to see the 4:3 WSS (Wide Screen Service) image or nothing. Each individual European country requires different picture size so this function is intended for users to select it. ● 16:9: Sets the picture to 16:9 wide mode. ● Wide Zoom: Magnify the size of the picture more than 4:3. ● Zoom: Magnify the size of the picture vertically on screen. ● 4:3: Sets the picture to 4:3 normal mode. N This function is available in Auto Wide mode. N This function is not available in PC, Component or HDMI mode. BN68-03043A.indb 15 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:27English - 16 „ Digital NR → Off / Low / Medium / High / Auto If the broadcast signal received by your Tv is weak, you can activate the digital Noise reduction feature to help reduce any static and ghosting that may appear on the screen. N When the signal is weak, select one of the other options until the best picture is displayed. „ HDMI Black Level → Normal / Low You can directly select the black level on the screen to adjust the screen depth. N This function is active only when the external input connects to HDMI (rGB signals). „ Film Mode → Off / Auto The Tv can be set to automatically sense and process film signals from all sources and adjust the picture for optimum quality. N Film Mode is supported in TV, AV, COMPONENT(480i / 1080i) and HDMI(480i / 1080i). ❑ Picture Reset → Reset Picture Mode / Cancel resets all picture settings to the default values. N Select a picture mode to be reset. The reset is performed for each picture mode. ● Reset Picture Mode: Current picture values return to default settings. ¦ Using Your TV as a Computer (PC) Display Setting Up Your PC Software (Based on Windows XP) The Windows display-settings for a typical computer are shown below. The actual screens on your PC will probably be different, depending upon your particular version of Windows and your particular video card. However, even if your actual screens look different, the same basic set-up information will apply in almost all cases. (If not, contact your computer manufacturer or Samsung Dealer.) 1. First, click on ‘Control Panel’ on the Windows start menu. 2. When the control panel window appears, click on ‘Appearance and Themes’ and a display dialog-box will appear. 3. When the control panel window appears, click on ‘display’ and a display dialogbox will appear. 4. Navigate to the ‘Settings’ tab on the display dialog-box. The correct size setting (resolution): Optimum-1360 x 768 pixels If a vertical-frequency option exists on your display settings dialog box, the correct value is ‘60’ or ‘60 Hz’. Otherwise, just click ‘OK’ and exit the dialog box. BN68-03043A.indb 16 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:27English - 17 Display Modes Both screen position and size will vary depending on the type of PC monitor and its resolution. The resolutions in the table are recommended. „ D-Sub and HDMI/DVI Input Mode resolution Horizontal Frequency (KHz) Vertical Frequency (Hz) Pixel Clock Frequency (MHz) Sync Polarity (H / V) IBM 640 x 350 31.469 70.086 25.175 +/- 720 x 400 31.469 70.087 28.322 -/+ MAC 640 x 480 35.000 66.667 30.240 -/- 832 x 624 49.726 74.551 57.284 -/- VeSA CVT 720 x 576 35.910 59.950 32.750 -/+ 1280 x 720 44.772 59.855 74.500 -/+ 1280 x 720 56.456 74.777 95.750 -/+ VeSA DMT 640 x 480 31.469 59.940 25.175 -/- 640 x 480 37.500 75.000 31.500 -/- 640 x 480 37.861 72.809 31.500 -/- 800 x 600 37.879 60.317 40.000 +/+ 800 x 600 46.875 75.000 49.500 +/+ 800 x 600 48.077 72.188 50.000 +/+ 1024 x 768 48.363 60.004 65.000 -/- 1024 x 768 56.476 70.069 75.000 -/- 1024 x 768 60.023 75.029 78.750 +/+ 1360 x 768 47.712 60.015 85.500 +/+ VeSA GTF 1280 x 720 52.500 70.000 89.040 -/+ N When using an HdMI/dvI cable connection, you must use the HDMI (DVI) jack. N The interlace mode is not supported. N The set might operate abnormally if a non-standard video format is selected. N Separate and Composite modes are supported. SOG is not supported. ¦ Setting up the TV with your PC N Preset: Press the SOURCE button to select PC mode. ❑ Auto Adjustment Auto Adjustment allows the PC screen of set to self-adjust to the incoming PC video signal. The values of fine, coarse and position are adjusted automatically. N This function does not work in dvI-HdMI mode. T Press the TOOLS button to display the Tools menu. You can also set the Auto Adjustment by selecting Tools → Auto Adjustment. ❑ Screen „ Coarse / Fine The purpose of picture quality adjustment is to remove or reduce picture noise. If the noise is not removed by Fine-tuning alone, then adjust the frequency as best as possible (Coarse) and Fine-tune again. After the noise has been reduced, readjust the picture so that it is aligned on the centre of screen. „ PC Position Adjust the PC’s screen positioning if it does not fit the Tv screen. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to adjusting the vertical-Position. Press the ◄ or ► button to adjust the Horizontal-Position. „ Image Reset You can replace all image settings with the factory default values. Brightness: : 45 Sharpness : 50 Auto Adjustment ► Screen Advanced Settings Picture Options Picture reset Picture BN68-03043A.indb 17 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:28English - 18 SOUND CONTROL ¦ Configuring the Sound Menu ❑ Mode → Standard / Music / Movie / Clear Voice / Custom You can select a sound mode to suit your personal preferences. T Press the TOOLS button to display the Tools menu. You can also configure the sound mode by selecting Tools → Sound Mode. „ Standard Selects the normal sound mode. „ Music emphasizes music over voices. „ Movie Provides the best sound for movies. „ Clear Voice emphasizes voice over other sounds. „ Custom recalls your customized sound settings. ❑ Equalizer The sound settings can be adjusted to suit your personal preferences. „ Mode You can select a sound mode to suit your personal preferences. „ Balance Controls the balance between the right and left speakers. „ 100Hz / 300Hz / 1KHz / 3KHz / 10KHz (Bandwidth Adjustment) To adjust the level of different bandwidth frequencies „ Reset resets the equalizer settings to the default values. ❑ SRS TruSurround HD → Off / On SrS TruSurround HD is a patented SrS technology that solves the problem of playing 5.1 multichannel content over two speakers. TruSurround delivers a compelling, virtual surround sound experience through any two-speaker playback system, including internal television speakers. It is fully compatible with all multichannel formats. ❑ Audio Language (digital channels only) You can change the default value for audio languages. Displays the language information for the incoming stream. N You can only select the language among the actual languages being broadcast. N While viewing a digital channel, this function can be selected. ❑ Audio Format → MPEG / Dolby Digital (digital channels only) When sound is emitted from both the main speaker and the audio receiver, a sound echo may occur due to the decoding speed difference between the main speaker and the audio receiver. In this case, use the Tv Speaker function. N The Audio Format appears according to the broadcasting signal. N While viewing a digital channel, this function can be selected. Mode : Custom ► equalizer SrS TruSurround Hd : Off Audio language : - - - Audio Format : - - - Audio Description Auto volume : Off Sound BN68-03043A.indb 18 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:28English - 19 ❑ Audio Description (digital channels only) This is an auxiliary audio function that provides an additional audio track for visually challenged persons. This function handles the Audio Stream for the AD (Audio Description), when it is sent along with the Main audio from the broadcaster. Users can turn the Audio description On or Off and control the volume. O Press the AD button on the remote control to select Off or On. „ Audio Description → Off / On Turn the audio description function on or off. „ Volume You can adjust the audio description volume. N Volume is active when Audio Description is set to On. ❑ Auto Volume → Off / On each broadcasting station has its own signal conditions, and so it is not easy to adjust the volume every time the channel is changed. This feature lets you automatically adjust the volume of the desired channel by lowering the sound output when the modulation signal is high or by raising the sound output when the modulation signal is low. ❑ Speaker Select → External Speaker / TV Speaker If you want to hear the sound through separate speakers, cancel the internal amplifier. N The volume and MUTE buttons do not operate when the Speaker Select is set to External Speaker. N If you select External Speaker in the Speaker Select menu, the sound settings will be limited. ❑ Sound Reset → Reset All / Reset Sound Mode / Cancel You can restore the Sound settings to the factory defaults. ¦ Selecting the Sound Mode You can set the sound mode in the Tools menu. When you set to Dual l ll, the current sound mode is displayed on the screen. Audio Type Dual 1 / 2 Default A2 Stereo Mono MONO Automatic change Stereo STEREO ↔ MONO Dual DUAL 1 ↔ DUAL 2 DUAL 1 NICAM Stereo Mono MONO Automatic change Stereo MONO ↔ STEREO Dual MONO ↔ DUAL 1 DUAL 2 DUAL 1 N If the stereo signal is weak and an automatic switching occurs, then switch to the mono. N This function is only activated in stereo sound signal. It is deactivated in mono sound signal. N This function is only available in TV mode. BN68-03043A.indb 19 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:28English - 20 SETUP ¦ Configuring the Setup Menu ❑ Menu Language You can set the menu language. ❑ Time „ Clock Setting the clock is necessary in order to use the various timer features of the Tv. N The current time will appear every time you press the INFO button. N If you disconnect the power cord, you have to set the clock again. ● Clock Mode You can set up the current time manually or automatically. – Auto: Set the current time automatically using the time from the digital broadcast. – Manual: Set the current time to a manually specified time. N Depending on the broadcast station and signal, the auto time may not be set correctly. If this occurs, set the time manually. N The Antenna or cable must be connected in order to set the time automatically. ● Clock Set You can set the current time manually. N Set up this item when you have set Clock Mode to Manual. N You can set the day, month, year, hour and minute directly by pressing the number buttons on the remote control. „ Sleep Timer → Off / 30 min / 60 min / 90 min / 120 min / 150 min / 180 min The sleep timer automatically shuts off the Tv after a preset time (30, 60, 90, 120, 150 and 180 minutes). N The TV automatically switches to standby mode when the timer reaches 0. N To cancel the Sleep Timer function, select Off. T Press the TOOLS button to display the Tools menu. You can also set the sleep timer by selecting Tools → Sleep Timer. „ Timer 1 / Timer 2 / Timer 3 Three different on / off timer settings can be made. You must set the clock first. ● On Time: Set the hour, minute, and activate / inactivate. (To activate the timer with the setting you’ve chosen, set to Activate.) ● Off Time: Set the hour, minute, and activate / inactivate. (To activate the timer with the setting you’ve chosen, set to Activate.) ● Volume: Select the desired turn on volume level. ● Antenna: Select Air or Cable. ● Channel: Select the desired channel. ● Repeat: Select Once, Everyday, Mon~Fri, Mon~Sat, Sat~Sun or Manual. N When Manual is selected, press the ► button to select the desired day of the week. Press the ENTERE button over the desired day and the c mark will appear. N You can set the hour, minute and channel by pressing the number buttons on the remote control. N Auto Power Off When you set the timer On, the television will eventually turn off, if no controls are operated for 3 hours after the Tv was turned on by the timer. This function is only available in timer On mode and prevents overheating, which may occur if a Tv is on for too long time. Plug & Play Menu Language : English ► Time Broadcast Security General Setup BN68-03043A.indb 20 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:28English - 21 ❑ Broadcast „ Subtitle You can activate and deactivate the subtitles. Use this menu to set the Subtitle Mode. Normal under the menu is the basic subtitle and Hard of hearing is the subtitle for a hearing-impaired person. ● Subtitle → Off / On : Switches subtitles on or off. ● Mode → Normal / Hard of hearing: Sets the subtitle mode. ● Subtitle Language: Set the subtitle language. N If the programme you are watching does not support the Hard of hearing function, Normal automatically activates even though Hard of hearing mode is selected. N english is the default in cases where the selected language is unavailable in the broadcast. O You can select these options simply by pressing the SUBT. button on the remote control. „ Digital Text → Disable / Enable (UK only) If the programme is broadcast with digital text, this feature is enabled. N MHeG (Multimedia and Hypermedia Information Coding experts Group) An International standard for data encoding systems used in multimedia and hypermedia. This is at a higher level than the MPEG system which includes data-linking hypermedia such as still images, character service, animation, graphic and video files as well as multimedia data. MHEG is user runtime interaction technology and is being applied to various fields including vOd (video-On-demand), ITv (Interactive Tv), EC (Electronic Commerce), tele-education, tele-conferencing, digital libraries and network games. „ Teletext Language You can set the Teletext language by selecting the language type. N english is the default in cases where the selected language is unavailable in the broadcast. „ Preference ● Primary Audio Language / Secondary Audio Language / Primary Subtitle Language / Secondary Subtitle Language / Primary Teletext Language / Secondary Teletext Language Using this feature, users can select one of the languages. The language selected here is the default when the user selects a channel. If you change the language setting, the Subtitle language, Audio language, and the Teletext language of the language menu are automatically changed to the selected language. The Subtitle language, Audio language, and the Teletext language of the language menu show a list of languages supported by the current channel and the selection is highlighted. If you change this language setting, the new selection is only valid for the current channel. The changed setting does not change the setting of the Primary Subtitle language, Primary Audio language, or the Primary Teletext language of the Preference menu. „ Common Interface ● CI Menu This enables the user to select from the CAM-provided menu. Select the CI Menu based on the menu PC Card. ● Application Info. This contains information on CAM inserted in the CI slot and displays it. N The Application Info inserting is about the ‘CI CArd’. You can install the CAM anytime whether the Tv is ON or OFF. 1. Purchase the CI CAM module by visiting your nearest dealer or by phone. 2. Insert the ‘CI CArd’ into the CAM in the direction of the arrow until it fits. 3. Insert the CAM with the ‘CI CArD’ installed into the common interface slot. (Insert the CAM in the direction of the arrow, right up to the end so that it is parallel with the slot.) 4. Check if you can see a picture on a scrambled signal channel. N CAM is not supported in some countries and regions, check with your authorized dealer. BN68-03043A.indb 21 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:28English - 22 ❑ Security N Before the setup screen appears, the PIN number input screen appears. Enter your 4 digit PIN number. N The default PIN number of a new Tv set is 0-0-0-0. You can change the PIN by selecting Change PIN from the menu. „ Child Lock → Off / On This feature allows you to prevent unauthorized users, such as children, from watching unsuitable programme by muting out video and audio. N You can lock some channels in Channel list. (refer to page 13) N Child Lock is available only in TV mode. „ Parental Lock This feature allows you to prevent unauthorized users, such as children, from watching unsuitable programme by a 4-digit PIN (Personal Identification Number) code that is defined by the user. N The Parental lock item differs depending on the country. N When the Parental lock is set, the ‘\’ symbol is displayed. N Allow All: Press to unlock all Tv ratings. Block All: Press to lock all Tv ratings. „ Change PIN You can change your personal ID number that is required to set up the TV. N If you forget the PIN code, press the remote control buttons in the following sequence, which resets the PIN to 0-0-0-0: POWER(Off) → MUTE → 8 → 2 → 4 → POWER(On). ❑ General „ Game Mode → Off / On When connecting to a game console such as PlayStation™ or Xbox™, you can enjoy a more realistic gaming experience by selecting the game menu. N To disconnect the game console and connect another external device, cancel game mode in the setup menu. N If you display the TV menu in Game Mode, the screen shakes slightly. N Game Mode is not available in regular TV and PC mode. N If Game Mode is On: – Picture mode is automatically changed to Standard and users cannot change the mode. – Sound mode is automatically changed to Custom and users cannot change the mode. Adjust the sound using the equalizer. – The reset Sound function is activated. Selecting the reset function after setting the equalizer resets the equalizer settings to the factory defaults. „ Energy Saving → Off / Low / Medium / High / Picture Off / Auto This feature adjusts the brightness of the Tv in order to reduce power consumption. When watching Tv at night, set the Energy Saving mode option to High to reduce eye fatigue as well as power consumption. If you select Picture Off, the screen is turned off and you can only hear the sound. Press any button to get out of Picture Off. N In the Tools menu, Picture Off function is not supported. T Press the TOOLS button to display the Tools menu. You can also set the energy Saving option by selecting Tools → Energy Saving. „ Melody → Off / Low / Medium / High A melody sound can be set to come on when the Tv is powered On or Off. N The Melody does not play – When no sound is output from the Tv because the MUTE button has been pressed. – When no sound is output from the Tv because the (–) Volume button has been pressed. – When the Tv is turned off by Sleep Timer function. BN68-03043A.indb 22 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:28English - 23 INPUT / SUPPORT ¦ Configuring the Input Menu ❑ Source List Use to select TV or other external input sources such as DVD / Blu-ray players / Satellite receivers (Set-Top Box) connected to the TV. Use to select the input source of your choice. O Press the SOURCE button on the remote control to vi7ew an external signal source. TV mode can be selected by pressing the TV button. „ TV / Ext. / AV / Component / PC / HDMI/DVI N You can choose only those external devices that are connected to the TV. In the Source List, connected inputs will be highlighted and sorted to the top. Inputs that are not connected will be sorted to the bottom. N Ext. and PC always stay activated. N TOOLS (Tools): displays the Edit Name and Information menus. ❑ Edit Name Name the device connected to the input jacks to make your input source selection easier. „ VCR / DVD / Cable STB / Satellite STB / PVR STB / AV Receiver / Game / Camcorder / PC / DVI / DVI PC / TV / IPTV / Blu-ray / HD DVD / DMA N When connecting an HdMI/dvI cable to the HDMI (DVI) port, you should set the HDMI/DVI mode to DVI or DVI PC in the Edit Name of the Input mode. In this case, a separate sound connection is required. ¦ Configuring the Support Menu ❑ Self Diagnosis „ Picture Test If you think you have a picture problem, perform the picture test. Check the colour pattern on the screen to see if the problem still exists. ● Yes: If the test pattern does not appear or there is noise in the test pattern, select Yes. There may be a problem with the TV. Contact Samsung’s call centre for assistance. ● No: If the test pattern is properly displayed, select No. There may be a problem with your external equipment. Please check your connections. If the problem still persists, refer to the external device’s user manual. „ Sound Test If you think you have a sound problem, please perform the sound test. You can check the sound by playing a built-in melody sound through the Tv. ‘does the problem still exist with this sound test?’ appears on the screen. N If you hear no sound from the Tv’s speakers, before performing the sound test, make sure Speaker Select is set to TV speaker in the Sound menu. N The melody will be heard during the test even if Speaker Select is set to External Speaker or the sound is muted by pressing the MUTE button. ● Yes: If during the sound test you can hear sound only from one speaker or not at all, select Yes. There may be a problem with the TV. Contact Samsung’s call centre for assistance. ● No: If you can hear sound from the speakers, select No. There may be a problem with your external equipment. Please check your connections. If the problem still persists, refer to the external device’s user manual. „ Signal Information (digital channels only) Unlike analogue channels, which can vary in reception quality from ‘snowy’ to clear, digital (HdTv) channels have either perfect reception quality or you will not receive them at all. So, unlike analogue channels, you cannot fine tune a digital channel. You can, however, adjust your antenna to improve the reception of available digital channels. N If the signal strength meter indicates that the signal is weak, physically adjust your antenna to increase the signal strength. Continue to adjust the antenna until you find the best position with the strongest signal. Source List edit Name Input Self Diagnosis ► Software Upgrade HD Connection Guide Contact Samsung Support BN68-03043A.indb 23 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:29English - 24 ❑ Software Upgrade To keep your product up-to-date with new digital Television features then software upgrades are periodically broadcast as part of the normal Television signal. It will automatically detect these signals and display the software upgrade banner. You are given the option to install the upgrade. „ BY USB Insert a USB drive containing the firmware upgrade into Tv. Please be careful to not disconnect the power or remove the USB drive while upgrades are being applied. The TV will turn off and turn on automatically after completing the firmware upgrade. Please check the firmware version after the update is completed. When software is upgraded, video and audio settings you have made will return to their default (factory) settings. We recommend you write down your settings so that you can easily reset them after the upgrade. „ BY Channel Upgrades the software using the broadcasting signal. N If the function is selected during the software transmission period, this function searches for available software and downloads the software. N The time required to download the software is determined by the signal status. „ Standby Mode Upgrade To continue software upgrade with master power on, Select On by pressing the ▲ or ▼ button. 45 minutes after entering standby mode, a manual upgrade is automatically conducted. Since the power of the unit is turned on internally, the screen may be on slightly for the lCD product. This phenomenon may continue for more than 1 hour until the software upgrade is completed. „ Alternative Software To display the software version information. ❑ HD Connection Guide This menu presents the connection method that provides the optimal quality for the HD TV. refer to this information when connecting external devices to the TV. ❑ Contact Samsung view this information when your Tv does not work properly or when you want to upgrade the software. You can view the information regarding the call centre, product and software file download method. TV Rear Panel USB Drive BN68-03043A.indb 24 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:29English - 25 RECOMMENDATIONS FOR USE ¦ Teletext Feature Most television stations provide written information services via Teletext. The index page of the Teletext service gives you information on how to use the service. In addition, you can select various options to suit your requirements by using the remote control buttons. N For Teletext information to be displayed correctly, channel reception must be stable. Otherwise, information may be missing or some pages may not be displayed. N You can change Teletext pages by pressing the numeric buttons on the remote control. 1 0(mode) Press to select the Teletext mode (lIST/FlOF). If you press it in the lIST mode, it switches into the list save mode. In the list save mode, you can save Teletext page into list using the 8(store) button. 2 5(reveal) Used to display the hidden text (answers to quiz games, for example). To display normal screen, press it again. 3 4(size) Press to display the double-size letters in the upper half of the screen. For lower half of the screen, press it again. To display normal screen, press it once again. 4 8(store) Used to store the Teletext pages. 5 Colour buttons (red/green/yellow/ blue) If the FASTeXT system is used by a broadcasting company, the different topics covered on a Teletext page are colour-coded and can be selected by pressing the coloured buttons. Press one of them corresponding to the required. The page is displayed with other coloured information that can be selected in the same way. To display the previous or next page, press the corresponding coloured button. 6/(Teletext on/mix) Press to activate Teletext mode after selecting the channel providing the Teletext service. Press it twice to overlap the Teletext with the current broadcasting screen. 7 :(exit) exit from the Teletext display. 8 1(sub-page) Used to display the available sub-page. 9 2(page up) Used to display the next Teletext page. 0 3(page down) Used to display the previous Teletext page. ! 9 (hold) Used to hold the display on a given page if the selected page is linked with several secondary pages which follow on automatically. To resume, press it again. @ 6(index) Used to display the index (contents) page at any time while you are viewing Teletext. # 7(cancel) Used to display the broadcast when searching for a page. The Teletext pages are organized according to six categories: Part Contents A Selected page number. B Broadcasting channel identity. C Current page number or search indications. D Date and time. E Text. F Status information. FASTeXT information. 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 0 ! # @ 7 BN68-03043A.indb 25 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:29English - 26 N Teletext information is often divided between several pages displayed in sequence, which can be accessed by: – entering the page number – Selecting a title in a list – Selecting a coloured heading (FASTeXT system) N Teletext level supported by the TV is version 2.5 which is capable of displaying additional graphics or text. N depending upon the transmission, blank side panels can occur when displaying Teletext. N In these cases, additional graphics or text is not transmitted. N Older Tv’s which do not support version 2.5 are not capable of displaying any additional graphics or text, regardless of the Teletext transmission. O Press the TV button to exit from the Teletext display. N Teletext 16:9, picture is 16:9 ¦ How to Adjust the Stand (19inch model only) 1. Place the front of the Tv onto a soft cloth or cushion on a table as in Figure 1. – Align the TV bottom along the table edge. 2. Press on the center of the Tv back. Adjust the stand as in Figure 2 while pressing the button on the back of the stand. 3. Place the Tv on the table so that the Tv sits safely on the table. ¦ How to Adjust the Angle of the TV (19inch model only) N When you adjust the stand, press the button on the back of the stand. 1. Figure 1 shows the adjustment angle (-2°~14°) when you use the lCD on its stand. N excessive tilting can turn the lCD TV over which may cause damage. 2. Figure 2 shows the adjustment angle (14°~80°) when you convert the lCD from stand-based use to wall-mount. 3. Figure 3 shows the adjustment angle (0°~10°) when you mount the lCD TV to a wall. N You will hear a “Click” sound when changing the angle from 1 to 2 or 3 to 2. 1 2 1 Angle adjustment when using the TV on its stand. 2 Angle adjustment when converting from Stand to Wall mount (1→3, 3→1) 3 Angle adjustment when LCD TV is wall-mounted BN68-03043A.indb 26 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:30English - 27 ¦ Installing VESA Compliant Mounting Devices (19inch model only) 1. Place the Tv face down on a soft cloth or cushion on a table. 2. Adjust the stand, pressing the button on the back of the stand. 3. Align the mounting interface pad (not supplied) with the holes in the stand bottom and secure it with the four screws that come with the arm-type base, wall mount hanger or other bases (not supplied). ¦ Using the Decoration Covers (19inch model only) 1. When installing the Tv on the wall without using the stand, insert decoration covers into the holes as described in the picture 1. 2. After inserting the decoration covers, fasten them with 4 screws as described in the picture 2. 1 2 Button Mounting pad (Sold separately) 1 2 BN68-03043A.indb 27 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:30English - 28 ¦ Installing the Stand 1. Attach your lCD TV to the stand. N Two or more people should carry the TV. N Make sure to distinguish between the front and back of the stand when assembling them. N To make sure the Tv is installed on the stand at a proper level, do not apply excess downward pressure to the upper left of right sides of the TV. 2. Fasten two screws at position 1 and then fasten two screw at position 2. N Stand the product up and fasten the screws. If you fasten the screws with the lCD TV placed down, it may lean to one side. ¦ Installing the Wall Mount Kit Wall mount items (sold separately) allow you to mount the Tv on the wall. For detailed information on installing the wall mount, see the instructions provided with the Wall Mount items. Contact a technician for assistance when installing the wall mounted bracket. Samsung electronics is not responsible for any damage to the product or injury to yourself or others if you elect to install the TV on your own. do not install your Wall Mount Kit while your Tv is turned on. It may result in personal injury due to electric shock. ¦ Using the Anti-Theft Kensington Lock The Kensington lock is not supplied by Samsung. It is a device used to physically fix the system when using it in a public place. The appearance and locking method may differ from the illustration depending on the manufacturer. refer to the manual provided with the Kensington lock for additional information on proper use. N Please find a “K” icon on the rear of the Tv. A kensington slot is beside the “K” icon. To lock the product, follow these steps: 1. Wrap the Kensington lock cable around a large, stationary object such as desk or chair. 2. Slide the end of the cable with the lock attached through the looped end of the Kensington 3. Insert the locking device into the Kensington slot on the product (1). 4. lock the lock. N These are general instructions. For exact instructions, see the User manual supplied with the locking device. N The locking device has to be purchased separately. N The location of the Kensington slot may be different depending on the TV model. 1 BN68-03043A.indb 28 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:31English - 29 ¦ Securing the Installation Space Keep the required distances between the product and other objects (e.g. walls) to ensure proper ventilation. Failing to do so may result in fire or a problem with the product due to an increase in the internal temperature of the product. Install the product so the required distances shown in the figure are kept. N When using a stand or wall-mount, use parts provided by Samsung Electronics only. Ҟ If you use parts provided by another manufacturer, it may result in a problem with the product or an injury due to the product falling. Ҟ If you use parts provided by another manufacturer, it may result in a problem with the product or fire due to an increase in the internal temperature of the product due to poor ventilation. N The appearance may differ depending on the product. When installing the product with a stand When installing the product with a wall-mount 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm ¦ Securing the TV to the Wall Caution: Pulling, pushing, or climbing on the Tv may cause the Tv to fall. In particular, ensure your children do not hang over or destabilize the TV; doing so may cause the TV to tip over, causing serious injuries or death. Follow all safety precautions provided on the included Safety Flyer. For added stability, install the anti-fall device for safety purposes, as follows. „ To avoid the TV from falling: 1. Put the screws into the clamps and firmly fasten them onto the wall. Confirm that the screws have been firmly installed onto the wall. N You may need additional material such as an anchor depending on the type of wall. N Since the necessary clamps, screws, and string are not supplied, please purchase these additionally. 2. remove the screws from the centre back of the Tv, put the screws into the clamps, and then fasten the screws onto the TV again. N Screws may not be supplied with the product. In this case, please purchase the screws of the following specifications. N Screw Specifications – For a 17 ~ 29 Inch lCd Tv: M4 X l15 – For a 32 ~ 40 Inch lCd Tv: M6 X l15 3. Connect the clamps fixed onto the Tv and the clamps fixed onto the wall with a strong string and then tie the string tightly. N Install the Tv near to the wall so that it does not fall backwards. N It is safe to connect the string so that the clamps fixed on the wall are equal to or lower than the clamps fixed on the Tv. N Untie the string before moving the TV. 4. verify all connections are properly secured. Periodically check connections for any sign of fatigue for failure. If you have any doubt about the security of your connections, contact a professional installer. Wall Wall BN68-03043A.indb 29 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:32English - 30 ¦ Troubleshooting If you have any questions of Tv, first refer to this list. If none of these troubleshooting tips apply, please visit ‘www.samsung.com’ site, then click on Support or contact Call Centre on list of last page. Issue Solution Picture Quality First of all, please perform the Picture Test to confirm that your Tv is properly displaying test image. ● Go to MENU - Support - Self Diagnosis - Picture Test If the test image is properly displayed, the poor picture may caused by the source or signal. Tv image does not look as good as it did in the store. ● If you have an analogue Cable/Set top box, upgrade to an Box. Use HDMI or Component cables to deliver HD picture quality. ● Cable/Satellite subscriber : Try Hd(High definition) stations from channel line up. ● Antenna connection: Try Hd stations after performing Auto programme. N Many HD channels are upscaled from SD(Standard Definition) contents. ● Adjust Cable/Set top box video output resolution to 1080i or 720p. ● Confirm that you are watching the TV at the minimum distance recomended based on the size and definition of the signal you are displaying. Picture is distorted : macroblock, small block, dots, pixelization ● Compression of video contents may cause picture distortion especially on fast moving pictures such as sports and action movies. ● low signal level or bad quality can cause picture distortion. This is not a TV issue. ● Mobile phones used close to the TV (cca up to 1m) may cause noise in picture on analog and digital TV. Wrong or missing colour with Component connection. ● Make sure the Component cables are connected to the correct jacks. Incorrect or loose connections may cause colour problems or the screen will be blank. Poor colour or brightness. ● Adjust Picture options in the TV menu. (Picture mode, Colour, Brightness, Sharpness) ● Adjust Energy Saving option in Setup menu. ● Try picture reset to view the default picture setting. (Go to MENU - Picture - Picture Reset) Dotted line on the edge of screen. ● If picture size is set to Screen Fit, change to 16:9. ● Change cable/set top box resolution. Picture is black and white with Av (Composite) input only. ● Connect video cable(Yellow) to Green jack of component input 1 of the Tv. Picture freezes or is distorted when changing channels or picture is delayed. ● If connected with cable box, please try to reset cable box. (reconnect AC cord and wait until cable box reboots. It may take up to 20 minutes.) ● Set output resolution of cable box to 1080i or 720p. Sound Quality First of all, please perform the Sound Test to confirm that your Tv audio is properly operating. ● Go to MENU - Support - Self Diagnosis - Sound Test If the audio is OK, the sound problem may caused by the source or signal. No sound or sound is too low at maximum volume. ● Please check the volume of external device connected to your Tv then, adjust the Tv volume accordingly. Picture is good but no sound. ● Set the Speaker Select option to TV speaker in the sound menu. ● Make sure audio cables from an external device are connected to correct audio input jacks on the Tv. ● Check connected device’s audio output option. (ex: You may need to change your cable box’ audio option to HDMI when you have HDMI connected to your TV.) ● If you are using a DVI to HDMI cable, a separate audio cable is required. ● Deactivate SrS function if you are setting the volume over 30 value. ● remove plug from headphone jack. (if available on your Tv) Noise from speaker. ● Check cable connections. Make sure a video cable is not connected to an audio input. ● For Antenna/Cable connection, check signal strength. low signal level may cause sound distortion. BN68-03043A.indb 30 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:32English - 31 Issue Solution No Picture, No video TV won’t turn on. ● Make sure the AC power cord is plugged in securely to the wall outlet and the Tv. ● Make sure the wall outlet is working. ● Try pressing the POWER button on the Tv to make sure the remote is working properly. If the TV turns on, it may be caused by remote Control. To fix the remote problem, refer to ‘remote control does not work’ below. TV turns off automatically. ● Check if the Sleep Timer is set to On in the Setup menu. ● If connected the Tv to your PC, check your PC power settings. ● Make sure the AC power cord is plugged in securely to the wall outlet and the Tv. ● If there is no signal for about 10 ~ 15 minutes with Antenna/Cable connection, the TV will turn off. No picture/Video. ● Check cable connections.(remove and reconnect all cables of Tv and external devices) ● Set your external device’s (Cable/Set top Box, DVD, Blu-ray etc) video output to match the connections to the Tv input. For example, external device’s output: HdMI, Tv’s input: HdMI. ● Make sure your connected device is powered on. ● Make sure to select the Tv’s correct source by pressing the SOURCE button on the TV remote. rF(Cable/Antenna) Connection Cannot receive all channels. ● Make sure Antenna cable is connected securely. ● Please try Plug & Play to add available channels to the channel list. Go to MENU - Setup - Plug & Play and wait for all avaiable channels are stored. ● Verify Antenna is positioned correctly. Picture is distorted: macroblock, small block, dots, pixelization ● Compression of video contents may cause picture distortion especially on fast moving pictures such as sports and action movies. ● low signal level can cause picture distortion. This is not a TV issue. PC Connection ‘Not Supported Mode’ message. ● Set your PC’s output resolution and frequency so it matches the resolutions supported by the TV. PC is always shown on source list even if not connected. ● This is normal; PC is always shown on the source list even though a PC is not connected. video is OK but there is no audio with HDMI connection. ● Check the audio output setting on your PC. BN68-03043A.indb 31 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:32English - 32 Issue Solution Others Picture is not shown in full screen. ● Black bars on each side will be shown on Hd channels when displaying upscaled Sd (4:3) contents. ● Black bars on Top & Bottom will be shown on movies that have aspect ratios different from your TV. ● Adjust picture size option on your external device or TV to full screen. remote control does not work. ● replace the remote control batteries with correct polarity (+ -). ● Clean the transmission window located on the top of the remote. ● Try pointing the remote directly at the TV from 5~6 feet away. Can not control TV power or volume with Cable/Set top box remote control. ● Programme the Cable/Set top box remote control to operate the Tv. refer to Cable/Sat user manual for SAMSUNG TV code. ‘Not Supported Mode’ message. ● Check the supported resolution of the Tv and adjust the external device’s output resolution accordingly. refer to resolution settings in this manual. Plastic smell from Tv. ● This smell is normal and will dissipate over time. TV Signal Information is unavailable in the Self Diagnostic Test menu. ● This function is only available with digital channels with an Antenna (rF/Coax) connection. TV is tilted to right or left side. ● remove the stand base from TV and reassemble. Can not assemble stand base. ● Make sure Tv is placed on flat surface. If can not remove screws from Tv, please use magnetized screw driver. Channel menu is grey out. (unavailable) ● Channel menu is only available when TV source is selected. Your settings are lost after 30 minutes or every time TV is turned off. ● If TV is in the Store Demo mode, it will reset audio and picture settings every 30 minutes. Please change from Store Demo mode to Home Use mode in the Plug & Play procedure. Press the SOURCE button to select TV mode, go to MENU → Setup → Plug & Play → ENTERE. Intermittent loss of audio or video. ● Check cable connections and reconnect. ● Can be caused by using overly rigid or thick cables. Make sure the cables are flexible enough for long term use. If wall mounting, we recommend using cables with 90 degree connectors. You may see small particles if you look closely at the edge of the bezel surrounding the TV screen. ● This is part of the product’s design and is not a defect. ‘Scramble signal’ or ‘Weak Signal/ No Signal’ with CAM CArD(CI). ● Check that CAM has CI Card installed into the common interface slot. ● Pull out CAM from the Tv and insert into the slot again. When turned off and 45 minutes later, TV is turned on itself. ● It is normal, the Tv operate OTA (Over The Air) function itself to upgrade firmware downloaded during watching. recurrent picture/sound issue. ● Check and change signal/source. N This TFT lCD panel uses a panel consisting of sub pixels which require sophisticated technology to produce. However, there may be few bright or dark pixels on the screen. These pixels will have no impact on the performance of the product. BN68-03043A.indb 32 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:32English - 33 ¦ Specifications Model Name LE19C430, LE19C431 LE22C430, LE22C431 Screen Size (Diagonal) 19 inch 22 inch PC Resolution (Optimum) 1360 x 768 @ 60Hz 1360 x 768 @ 60Hz Sound (Output) 3W x 2 3W x 2 Dimensions (WxDxH) Body With stand 477 x 65 x 327 mm 477 x 180 x 362 mm 558 x 75 x 384 mm 558 x 216 x 426 mm Weight With Stand 5 kg 7 kg Environmental Considerations Operating Temperature Operating Humidity Storage Temperature Storage Humidity 10°C to 40°C (50°F to 104°F) 10% to 80%, non-condensing -20°C to 45°C (-4°F to 113°F) 5% to 95%, non-condensing Stand Swivel left / right 0˚ N design and specifications are subject to change without prior notice. N This device is a Class B digital apparatus. N For the power supply and Power Cons BN68-03043A.indb 33 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:33les figures et illustrations contenues dans ce mode d’emploi sont fournies pour référence uniquement. elles peuvent différer de l’aspect réel du produit. la conception et les spécifications du produit sont susceptibles d’être modifiées sans préavis. ❑ Licence TruSurround HD, SrS et le symbole sont des marques de SrS labs, Inc. la technologie TruSurround HD est incorporée sous licence de SrS labs, Inc. Fabriqué sous licence de Dolby laboratories. Dolby et le symbole du double D sont des marques déposées de Dolby laboratories. ❑ Notifications pour le téléviseur numérique 1. les fonctions relatives au téléviseur numérique (DVB) ne sont disponibles que dans les pays ou régions où des signaux terrestres numériques de type dvB-T (MPEG2 et MPEG4 AvC) sont diffusés ou dans lesquels vous avez accès à un service de télévision par câble compatible dvB-C (MPEG2 et MPEG4 AAC). Consultez votre distributeur local pour connaître les possibilités de réception des signaux DVB-T ou DVB-C. 2. DVB-T est la norme du consortium européen pour la diffusion de signaux terrestres de télévision numérique. la norme DVBC est quant à elle prévue pour la diffusion des signaux de télévision numérique par câble. Certaines fonctions particulières, telles que le guide électronique des programmes (Electric Program Guide - EPG), la vidéo à la demande (video on demand - vOd), etc., ne sont toutefois pas incluses dans cette spécification. Elles ne seront par conséquent pas traitées pour l'instant. 3. Bien que ce téléviseur soit conforme aux dernières normes dvB-T et dvB-C (août 2008), il n'est pas garanti qu'il soit compatible avec les futures diffusions de signaux numériques terrestres DVB-T et par câble DVB-C. 4. en fonction du pays ou de la région où vous vous trouvez, certains opérateurs de télévision par câble peuvent facturer des frais supplémentaires pour un tel service. Vous devrez aussi peut-être accepter les termes et conditions de ces sociétés. 5. Il se peut que certaines fonctions de TV numérique ne soient pas disponibles dans certains pays ou certaines régions et que la réception des signaux DVB-C ne soit pas correcte avec tous les opérateurs. 6. Pour plus d'informations, contactez votre service client Samsung. ❑ Précautions à prendre lors de l'affichage d'une image fixe Une image fixe peut occasionner des dommages irrémédiables à l'écran du téléviseur. ● N'affichez pas d'image fixe ou partiellement fixe sur l'écran lCd pendant plus de 2 heures car cela pourrait provoquer une rémanence de l'image à l'écran. Cette rémanence de l'image est également appelée "brûlure de l'écran". Pour l'éviter, réduisez la luminosité et le contraste de l'écran lorsque vous affichez une image fixe. ● l'affichage sur l'écran lCd du téléviseur d'images au format 4:3 pendant une période prolongée peut laisser des traces de bordures à gauche, à droite et au centre de l'écran, dues à la différence d'émission de lumière sur celui-ci. la lecture d'un dvd ou l'utilisation d'une console de jeu peut avoir un effet similaire sur l'écran. les dommages occasionnés par l'effet précité ne sont pas couverts par la garantie. ● l'affichage d'images fixes de jeux vidéo et d'ordinateurs pendant une période excessive peut produire des rémanences. Pour éviter cela, réduisez la "luminosité" et le "contraste" lors de l'affichage d'images fixes. © 2010 Samsung electronics Co., ltd. Tous droits réservés. BN68-03043A.indb 1 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:33❑ Symboles N O T remarque Bouton tactile Bouton TOOlS Appuyez sur INFORMATIONS GÉNÉRALES ■ Présentation du panneau de commande..............................2 ■ Accessoires ..........................................................................3 ■ Présentation du panneau de branchement ..........................4 ■ Télécommande.....................................................................6 ■ Insertion des piles dans la télécommande ...........................6 FONCTIONNEMENT ■ Affichage des menus............................................................7 ■ Mise en mode veille de votre téléviseur ...............................8 ■ Fonction Plug & Play ............................................................8 ■ visualisation de l’affichage ...................................................9 CONTRÔLE DES CHAÎNES ■ Configuration du menu des chaînes.....................................9 ■ Gestion des chaînes ..........................................................12 CONTRÔLE D'IMAGE ■ Configuration du menu Image ............................................14 ■ Utilisation de votre téléviseur comme écran d'ordinateur (PC) ................................................................16 ■ Configuration du téléviseur avec le PC ..............................17 CONTRÔLE DU SON ■ Configuration du menu Sound............................................18 ■ Sélection du mode son.......................................................19 CONFIGURATION ■ Configuration du menu Configuration.................................20 ENTRÉE / ASSISTANCE ■ Configuration du menu Input ..............................................23 ■ Configuration du menu Support..........................................23 RECOMMANDATION D'UTILISATION ■ Fonction Télétexte..............................................................25 ■ Comment ajuster le socle (modèle 19 pouces uniquement)........................................26 ■ Comment ajuster le socle du téléviseur (modèle 19 pouces uniquement)........................................26 ■ Installer des systèmes de montage conformes vESA (modèles 19 pouces uniquement). .....................................27 ■ Utiliser le couvercle de décoration (modèle 19 pouces uniquement)........................................27 ■ Montage du socle ...............................................................28 ■ Installation du kit de montage mural...................................28 ■ Utilisation du verrou antivol Kensington .............................28 ■ Sécurisation de l'emplacement d'installation......................29 ■ Fixation du téléviseur au mur .............................................29 ■ Dépannage.........................................................................30 ■ Caractéristiques..................................................................33 CONTENU Français Français - 1 BN68-03043A.indb 1 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:33INFORMATIONS GÉNÉRALES ¦ Présentation du panneau de commande N la couleur et la forme du produit peuvent varier en fonction du modèle. N Vous pouvez utiliser un bouton en appuyant sur les boutons du panneau latéral. 4 1 2 3 5 6 8 8 7 1 SOURCEE: Bascule entre toutes les sources d'entrée disponibles. dans le menu à l'écran, utilisez ce bouton de la même façon que le bouton ENTERE de la télécommande. 2 MENU : Permet d'afficher un menu à l'écran des fonctions du téléviseur. 3Y : Permet d'augmenter ou de baisser le volume. dans le menu à l'écran, utilisez les boutons Y de la même façon que les boutons ◄ et ► de la télécommande. 4Z: Permet de changer de chaîne. dans le menu à l'écran, utilisez les boutons Z de la même façon que les boutons ▼ et ▲ de la télécommande. 5 P (ALIMENTATION) : Permet d'allumer et d'éteindre le téléviseur. 6 CAPTEUR DE LA TÉLÉCOMMANDE : dirigez la télécommande vers ce point du téléviseur. 7 TÉMOIN D'ALIMENTATION : Clignote et s'éteint lorsqu'il est sous tension et s'allume en mode veille. 8 HAUT-PARLEURS Français - 2 BN68-03043A.indb 2 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:33Français - 3 ¦ Accessoires Télécommande et piles (2 x AAA) Cordon d’alimentation Couvercle-Fond Chiffon de nettoyage (M4 X l16) Kit de montage mural (modèle 19 pouces uniquement) Couvercle décoratif (modèle 19 pouces uniquement) Vis de pied X 4 (modèle 22 pouces uniquement) ● Instructions d’utilisation ● Carte de garantie ● Manuel de sécurité N vérifiez que les éléments suivants sont fournis avec votre téléviseur lCd. S'il manque des éléments, contactez votre revendeur. N Carte de garantie / Manuel de sécurité (non disponible pour tous les pays) N la couleur et la forme des éléments peuvent varier en fonction du modèle. BN68-03043A.indb 3 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:34Français - 4 ¦ Présentation du panneau de branchement N la couleur et la forme du produit peuvent varier en fonction du modèle. N lorsque vous branchez un périphérique externe sur votre téléviseur, assurez-vous que celui-ci est éteint. N lorsque vous branchez un périphérique externe, faites correspondre les couleurs de la borne de connexion et du câble. 1 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) – Pour raccorder un composant audio numérique tel qu'un récepteur home cinéma. N lorsque les prises HDMI IN sont connectées, la prise DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) du téléviseur produit uniquement un signal audio 2 voies. Pour écouter du son canal 5,1, branchez la prise optique du lecteur dvd / Blu-ray ou du décodeur câble/décodeur satellite directement sur un amplificateur ou sur un système home cinéma, et non sur le téléviseur. 2 SERVICE – Connecteur pour mises à niveau logicielles. 3 HDMI / PC IN [HDMI (DVI), AUDIO, PC] – Pour raccorder la fiche HdMI d'un périphérique équipé d'une sortie HdMI. N Aucune connexion audio supplémentaire n’est requise pour une connexion HDMI - HDMI. N Qu’est-ce que HdMI ? HdMI (High-definition Multimedia Interface) est une interface qui permet la transmission des signaux audio et vidéo numériques à l’aide d’un seul câble. la différence entre HdMI et dvI est que le périphérique HdMI est plus petit, dispose de la fonction de codage HdCP (High Bandwidth digital Copy Protection) et prend en charge le son numérique multicanal. N Utilisez un câble ou un adaptateur DVI-HDMI pour la connexion vidéo et les prises PC IN [HDMI (DVI)] pour le son. lorsque vous utilisez une connexion avec câble HDMI/DVI, vous devez utiliser la prise HDMI IN 1 (DVI) HDMI / PC IN [AUDIO] – Pour raccorder la fiche de sortie audio de votre PC. – Sorties audio DVI pour périphériques externes. HDMI / PC IN [PC] – Pour raccorder la fiche de sortie vidéo de votre PC. N Si votre PC dispose d’une prise dvI, vous pouvez la relier à la borne HDMI / PC IN [HDMI (DVI)]. N Si votre PC dispose d’une prise dvI, vous pouvez la relier à la borne HDMI / PC IN [HDMI (DVI)] / [AUDIO]. 4 AV IN [VIDEO] / [R-AUDIO-L] – Branchez un câble rCA à un périphérique externe audio/vidéo approprié tel qu'un magnétoscope, un lecteur dvd ou un caméscope. – Branchez les câbles audio rCA sur la prise [R-AUDIO-L] du téléviseur et leur autre extrémité sur les prises de sortie audio correspondantes du périphérique audio/vidéo. 6 7 1 2 3 4 0 9 8 5 Français - 4 [Panneau arrière du téléviseur] Entrée de l'alimentation BN68-03043A.indb 4 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:34Français - 5 5 ANT IN – Pour raccorder une antenne ou un système de câblodiffusion. 6 emplacement COMMON INTERFACE – Si vous n'insérez pas la carte d'interface commune (CI CArd) dans certains canaux, le message "Scrambled Signal" s'affiche. – les informations de pairage contenant un numéro de téléphone, l'Id de la CI CArd, l'Id de l'hôte et d'autres informations s'afficheront dans 2 ou 3 minutes. Si un message d'erreur s'affiche, contactez votre fournisseur de service. – lorsque la configuration des informations sur les chaînes est terminée, le message "Updating Completed" s'affiche, indiquant que la liste des chaînes est à jour. N vous devez vous procurer une CI CArd auprès d'un fournisseur local de câblodiffusion. Extrayez la CI CArd en la tirant délicatement. Une chute pourrait l'endommager. N Insérez la CI-Card dans le sens indiqué sur celle-ci. N l'emplacement de la fente COMMON INTERFACE peut varier en fonction du modèle. N Il se peut que le module CAM ne soit pas pris en charge dans certains pays ou régions. vérifiez auprès de votre revendeur agréé. 7 Verrou KENSINGTON (en fonction du modèle) – le verrou Kensington (en option) est un dispositif permettant de fixer physiquement le système en cas d'utilisation dans un lieu public. Si vous désirez utiliser un dispositif de verrouillage, contactez le revendeur auquel vous avez acheté le téléviseur. N l'emplacement du verrou Kensington peut varier en fonction du modèle. 8 Prise du casque – le casque peut être branché à la sortie casque sur votre téléviseur. lorsque le casque est branché, le son des hautparleurs intégrés est désactivé. 9 COMPONENT IN – Branchez les câbles vidéo de composant (en option) aux connecteurs de composant (PR, PB, Y) à l'arrière du téléviseur et les autres extrémités aux connecteurs de sortie vidéo de composant correspondants sur le récepteur DTV ou le lecteur DVD. – Si vous souhaitez brancher à la fois le boîtier décodeur et le récepteur dTv (ou lecteur dvd), vous devez brancher le boîtier décodeur au récepteur dTv (ou au lecteur dvd), puis le récepteur dTv (ou lecteur dvd) au connecteur de composant (PR, PB, Y) du téléviseur. – les connecteurs PR, PB et Y de vos composants (récepteur DTV ou lecteur DVD) sont parfois désignés par les lettres Y, B-Y et r-Y ou Y, Cb et Cr. – Branchez les câbles audio rCA (en option) sur la prise [R-AUDIO-L] à l'arrière du téléviseur et leur autre extrémité sur les prises de sortie audio correspondantes du récepteur DTV ou du lecteur DVD. 0 EXT (RGB) Connecteur entrée Sortie Vidéo Audio (G / D) rVB Vidéo + Audio (G / D) EXT O O O Seule la sortie TV ou DTV est disponible. – entrées ou sorties pour périphériques externes tels que des magnétoscopes, des lecteurs DVD, des consoles de jeux vidéo ou des lecteurs de vidéodisques. Français - 5 BN68-03043A.indb 5 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:34Français - 6 ¦ Télécommande N vous pouvez utiliser la télécommande jusqu'à une distance maximale d'environ 7 m du téléviseur. N Une lumière intense peut affecter le bon fonctionnement de la télécommande. N la couleur et la forme du produit peuvent varier en fonction du modèle. 1 POWER : Bouton de mise en veille du téléviseur. 2 TOUCHES NUMÉRIQUES : Permettent de changer de chaîne. 3 FAV.CH : Permet d’afficher la liste des chaînes favorites sur l’écran du téléviseur. 4Y : Permet d'augmenter ou de baisser le volume. 5 SOURCE : Permet d'afficher et de sélectionner les sources vidéo disponibles. 6 INFO : Permet d'afficher des informations sur l'écran du téléviseur. 7 TOOLS : Permet de sélectionner rapidement les fonctions fréquemment utilisées. 8 CH LIST : Affiche la liste des chaînes. 9 BOUTONS DE COULEUR : Utilisez ces boutons dans les menus de Liste des chaînes, etc. ! TV : Sélectionne directement le mode TV. @ PRE-CH : Vous permet de revenir à la chaîne que vous regardiez précédemment. # MUTEM : Vous permet de couper le son temporairement. $ P

: Permet de changer de chaîne. % MENU : Affiche le menu principal à l'écran. ^ GUIDE : Affichage du guide électronique des programmes (EPG). & RETURN : revient au menu précédent * HAUT▲ / BAS▼ / GAUCHE◄ / DROITE► / ENTERE : Permettent de sélectionner des options de menu à l'écran et de modifier des valeurs de menu. ( EXIT : Permet de quitter le menu. ) SUBT. : Affichage numérique des soustitres. a AD : Sélection de la description audio. Fonctions télétexte. 5 0 : Sélection du mode Télétexte (lIST/ FlOF). 6 5 : Activation du télétexte. 7 4 : Sélection de la taille du télétexte. 8 8 : Mémorisation du télétexte. 9 Sélection des rubriques Fastext 0/ : Sélection alternative de Teletext, Double ou Mix. ! :: fermer l'affichage du télétexte. @ 1 : Page secondaire du télétexte. $ 2 : Page de télétexte suivante 3 : Page de télétexte précédente. % 6 : Index du télétexte & 9 : Pause du télétexte. ( 7 : Annulation du télétexte. ¦ Insertion des piles dans la télécommande 1. Soulevez le couvercle au dos de la télécommande comme illustré dans la figure. 2. Placez-y deux piles AAA. N Assurez-vous que les pôles "+" et "–" des piles correspondent au schéma situé à l'intérieur du compartiment. 3. replacez le couvercle. N retirez les piles et stockez-les dans un endroit frais et sec si vous n'utilisez pas la télécommande pendant longtemps. N Si la télécommande ne fonctionne pas, vérifiez les points suivants : ● le téléviseur est-il sous tension ? ● les bornes + et - des piles ne sont-elles pas inversées ? ● les piles sont-elles déchargées ? ● le cordon d'alimentation est-il débranché ou y a-t-il une panne de courant ? ● Une lampe fluorescente ou néon est-elle allumée à proximité ? Français - 6 1 2 4 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 ! @ # $ & * ( ) a % ^ BN68-03043A.indb 6 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:34Français - 7 FONCTIONNEMENT ¦ Affichage des menus Avant d'utiliser le téléviseur, procédez comme suit pour apprendre à naviguer dans le menu afin de sélectionner et de régler les différentes fonctions. 1. Appuyez sur le bouton MENU. le menu principal s'affiche à l'écran. Son côté gauche contient des icônes : Image, Son, Canal, Conf., Entrée, Application, Assistance. 2. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner l'une des icônes. Appuyez sur le bouton ◄ ou ► pour accéder au sous-menu de l'icône. 3. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour déplacer des options dans le menu. Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE pour entrer des options dans le menu. 4. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲/▼/◄/► pour modifier les options sélectionnées. N Appuyez sur le bouton RETURN pour revenir au menu précédent. 5. Appuyez sur le bouton EXIT pour quitter le menu. Utilisation des boutons de télécommande Bouton Opération Bouton Opération MENUm Afficher le menu principal à l'écran. ▲/▼/◄/►/ ENTERE Déplacer le curseur pour sélectionner un élément. Choisir l'élément sélectionné. Confirmer un paramétrage. RUTURNR revenir au menu précédent. EXITe Fermer le menu affiché à l'écran. Exemple : configuration de la luminosité du téléviseur dans le menu Image „ Réglage de la luminosité sur 80 1. Appuyez sur le bouton MENU pour afficher le menu. 2. Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE pour sélectionner Image. 3. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour régler la Luminosité. 4. Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. 5. Appuyez sur le bouton ◄ ou ► jusqu'à ce que la luminosité soit réglée sur 80. 6. Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. N Appuyez sur le bouton EXIT pour quitter le menu. Français - 7 Mode : Standard ► rétroéclairage : 7 Contraste : 95 luminosité : 45 Netteté : 50 Couleur : 50 Teinte (v / r) : v50 / r50 Image Mode : Standard ► rétroéclairage : 7 Contraste : 95 luminosité : 45 Netteté : 50 Couleur : 50 Teinte (v / r) : v50 / r50 Image rétroéclairage : 7 Contraste : 95 Luminosité : 45 ► Netteté : 50 Couleur : 50 Teinte (v / r) : v50 / r50 Paramètres avancés Options d'image réinitialisation de l'image Image U Déplacer L régler E entrer R retour luminosité 45 U Déplacer L régler E entrer R retour luminosité 80 Mode : Standard ► rétroéclairage : 7 Contraste : 95 luminosité : 45 Netteté : 50 Couleur : 50 Teinte (v / r) : v50 / r50 Image BN68-03043A.indb 7 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:35Français - 8 ¦ Mise en mode veille de votre téléviseur Vous pouvez mettre votre téléviseur en mode Veille afin de réduire la consommation électrique. le mode veille peut être utile si vous souhaitez éteindre votre téléviseur temporairement (pendant un repas par exemple). 1. Appuyez sur le bouton POWERP de la télécommande. N l'écran s'éteint et un voyant de veille apparaît sur votre téléviseur. 2. Pour rallumer le téléviseur, appuyez de nouveau sur le bouton POWERP. N Ne laissez pas le téléviseur en mode Veille pendant de longues périodes (lorsque vous êtes en vacances par exemple). Il est conseillé de débrancher le téléviseur du secteur et de l'antenne. ¦ Fonction Plug & Play lorsque vous allumez le téléviseur pour la première fois, des réglages de base s'effectuent l'un après l'autre de manière automatique. 1. Appuyez sur le bouton POWER de la télécommande. le message You can set the menu language. s’affiche. 2. Sélectionnez la langue appropriée en appuyant sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼. Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE pour confirmer votre choix. 3. Appuyez sur le bouton ◄ ou ► pour sélectionner Enr. démo ou Util. domicile, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. N Nous recommandons de régler le téléviseur sur le mode Util. domicile pour une meilleure qualité d'image dans votre environnement personnel. N Enr. démo n'est prévu que pour un usage en magasin. N Si l'unité est accidentellement réglée sur le mode Enr. démo et que vous souhaitez revenir au mode Util. domicile (Standard) : Appuyez sur le bouton volume du téléviseur. lorsque l'affichage écran du volume apparaît, appuyez pendant 5 secondes sur le bouton MENU du téléviseur. 4. Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. Sélectionnez le pays approprié en appuyant sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼. Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE pour confirmer votre choix. 5. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner Hertzien ou Câble, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. N Hertzien: Hertzien signal d'antenne. Câble: Câble signal d'antenne. 6. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner la source de chaîne à mémoriser. Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE pour sélectionner Démarrer. N Numérique et Analogique : Chaînes numériques et analogiques. Numérique : Chaînes numériques. Analogique : Chaînes analogiques. N lors du réglage de la source d'antenne sur Câble, une fenêtre s'affiche, qui vous permet de définir une valeur pour la recherche de chaîne numérique. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à Canal → Mémorisation Auto. N la recherche de chaînes démarre et se termine automatiquement. N Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE à tout moment pour interrompre la mémorisation. N Une fois toutes les chaînes disponibles mémorisées, le message Définit le mode Horloge s'affiche. 7. Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner Auto., puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. N Si vous sélectionnez Manuel, Définit la date et l'heure s'affiche. N Si vous recevez un signal numérique, l'heure se règle automatiquement. Sinon, sélectionnez Manuel pour régler l'horloge (voir page 20). 8. la méthode de connexion pour l'obtention de la meilleure qualité Hd est proposée. Après avoir confirmé la méthode, appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. 9. le message Profitez de votre téléviseur. s'affiche. lorsque vous avez terminé, appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. Si vous souhaitez réinitialiser cette fonction... 1. Appuyez sur le bouton MENU pour afficher le menu. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner Conf., puis sur le bouton ENTERE. 2. Appuyez de nouveau sur le bouton ENTERE pour sélectionner Plug & Play. 3. Entrez votre code PIN à quatre chiffres. le code PIN par défaut d'un nouveau téléviseur est 0-0-0-0. N Si vous voulez modifier le code PIN, utilisez la fonction Modifier PIN. (voir page 22). N la fonction Plug & Play est uniquement disponible en mode TV. Français - 8 Plug & Play You can set the menu language. Menu language : English ► E enter BN68-03043A.indb 8 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:35Français - 9 ¦ Visualisation de l’affichage l’affichage identifie la chaîne en cours et l’état de certains paramètres audio et vidéo. O Appuyez sur le bouton INFO pour afficher les informations. Appuyez sur le bouton INFO de la télécommande. la télévision affiche la chaîne, le type de son et l’état de certains paramètres de son et d’image. ● ▲, ▼: vous pouvez afficher des informations relatives à une autre chaîne. Pour accéder à la chaîne actuellement sélectionnée, appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. ● ◄, ►: vous pouvez afficher les informations relatives au programme souhaité de la chaîne actuelle. N Appuyez de nouveau sur le bouton INFO ou attendez environ 10 secondes pour que l’affichage disparaisse automatiquement. CONTRÔLE DES CHAÎNES ¦ Configuration du menu des chaînes ❑ Pays N l'écran de saisie du code PIN s'affiche. Entrez votre code PIN à quatre chiffres. „ Canal analogique Permet de changer de pays pour les chaînes analogiques. „ Canal numérique Permet de changer de pays pour les chaînes numériques. ❑ Mémorisation Auto Vous pouvez chercher les plages de fréquence disponibles par balayage (leur disponibilité dépend de votre pays). Il est possible que les numéros de programme attribués automatiquement ne correspondent pas aux numéros de programme souhaités ou réels. N Si une chaîne est verrouillée par la fonction Verrouillage Canal, la fenêtre de saisie du code PIN s'affiche. „ Hertzien / Câble Source d'antenne à mémoriser ● Numérique et Analogique : Chaînes numériques et analogiques. ● Numérique : Chaînes numériques. ● Analogique : Chaînes analogiques. Lors de la sélection de ‘Câble → Numérique et Analogique’ ou de ‘Câble → Numérique’ Fournissez une valeur à rechercher pour les chaînes câblées. ● Mode Rech. → Complet / Réseau / Rapide N Rapide – Network ID : affiche le code d'identification du réseau. – Fréquence : affiche la fréquence correspondant au canal (varie d'un pays à l'autre). – Modulation : affiche les valeurs de modulation disponibles. – Taux de symbole : affiche les débits de symboles disponibles. N Cherche toutes les chaînes avec des stations de diffusion actives et les enregistre dans la mémoire du téléviseur. N Pour arrêter la mémorisation automatique, appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. le message Arrêter le programme automatique ? s'affiche. Sélectionnez Oui en appuyant sur le bouton ◄ ou ►, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. Français - 9 Pays ► Mémorisation Auto Mémorisation Manuelle Option de recherche du câble Guide Now & Next Guide Complet Par défaut : Guide Complet Canal DTV Air 15 abc1 18:00 ~ 6:00 18:11 Thu 6 Jan life On venus Avenue Unclassified No Detaild Information ¦ INFO BN68-03043A.indb 9 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:35Français - 10 ❑ Mémorisation Manuelle N Permet de chercher manuellement une chaîne et de l'enregistrer dans la mémoire du téléviseur. N Si une chaîne est verrouillée par la fonction Verrouillage Canal, la fenêtre de saisie du code PIN s'affiche. „ Canal numérique Enregistrement manuel de chaînes numériques. N Canal numérique est uniquement disponible en mode DTV. ● Canal : Sélectionnez le numéro de chaîne à l'aide des boutons ▲, ▼ ou des chiffres (0~9). ● Fréquence : Sélectionnez la fréquence à l'aide des chiffres. ● Bande passante : Sélectionnez la bande passante à l'aide des boutons ▲, ▼ ou des chiffres (0~9). N Au terme de la recherche, les chaînes de la liste sont mises à jour. „ Canal analogique Enregistrement manuel de chaînes analogiques. ● Programme (numéro de programme à attribuer à une chaîne) : Sélectionnez le numéro de chaîne à l'aide des boutons ▲, ▼ ou des touches numériques (0~9). ● Système de Couleur → Auto. / PAL / SECAM / NTSC4.43 : Sélectionnez le système de couleurs à l'aide du bouton ▲ ou ▼. ● Système Sonore → BG / DK / I / L: Sélectionnez le système audio à l'aide du bouton ▲ ou ▼. ● Canal (si vous connaissez le numéro de la chaîne à mémoriser) : Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner C (chaîne hertzienne) ou S (chaîne câblée). Appuyez sur le bouton ►, puis sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ ou un chiffre (0~9) pour sélectionner le numéro de votre choix. N vous pouvez également sélectionner le numéro de chaîne directement en appuyant sur les touches numériques (0~9). N Si aucun son ne sort ou si le son produit est anormal, sélectionnez de nouveau la norme son requise. ● Recherche (lorsque vous ne connaissez pas les numéros de chaîne) : Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour lancer la recherche. le syntoniseur balaie la plage de fréquences jusqu'à ce que vous receviez la première chaîne ou la chaîne que vous avez sélectionnée à l'écran. ● Enr. (permet de mémoriser la chaîne et le numéro de programme correspondant) : Sélectionnez OK en appuyant sur le bouton ENTERE. N Mode des chaînes – P (Mode Programme) : à la fin du réglage, des numéros de position compris entre P00 et P99 sont attribués aux stations de radiodiffusion de votre région. dans ce mode, vous pouvez sélectionner un chaîne en saisissant son numéro de position. – C (Mode chaîne hertzienne) : dans ce mode, vous pouvez sélectionner une chaîne en saisissant le numéro attribué à chacune des stations de télédiffusion. – S (Mode chaîne câblée) : dans ce mode, vous pouvez sélectionner une chaîne en saisissant le numéro attribué à chacune des chaînes câblées. ❑ Option de recherche du câble (en fonction du pays) Définit des options supplémentaires telles que la fréquence et le débit de symboles pour les recherches sur réseau câblé. ● Fréquence (Début ~ Fin) : affiche la fréquence correspondant au canal. ● Modulation : affiche les valeurs de modulation disponibles. ● Taux de symbole : affiche les débits de symboles disponibles. ❑ Guide Now & Next / Guide Complet les informations relatives au guide électronique des programmes (EPG) sont fournies par les diffuseurs. des entrées de programmes peuvent être vides ou ne pas être à jour en raison des informations diffusées sur un canal donné. l'affichage est automatiquement actualisé dès que de nouvelles informations sont disponibles. N Pour obtenir plus de détails sur les procédures d'utilisation du Guide Now & Next et Guide Complet, reportez-vous aux descriptions de la page 11. O vous pouvez aussi afficher le guide en appuyant simplement sur le bouton GUIDE (pour configurer Par défaut, reportez-vous aux descriptions). „ Guide Now & Next Pour les six canaux indiqués dans la colonne de gauche, les informations relatives au programme actuel et au programme suivant sont affichées. „ Guide Complet Affiche le programme heure par heure. deux heures de programme sont affichées et vous pouvez faire défiler le programme en avançant ou en remontant dans le temps. Français - 10 BN68-03043A.indb 10 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:35Français - 11 ❑ Par défaut → Guide Now & Next / Guide Complet vous pouvez choisir d'afficher le Guide Now & Next ou le Guide Complet lorsque vous appuyez sur le bouton GUIDE de la télécommande. ❑ Liste des chaînes Pour obtenir plus de détails sur les procédures d'utilisation de la Liste des chaînes, reportez-vous aux instructions de Managing Channels. O Vous pouvez sélectionner ces options en appuyant sur le bouton CH LIST de la télécommande. ❑ Mode Canal Appuyez sur le bouton P >/<. l’ordre des chaînes affichées change. „ Chaînes ajoutées l’ordre des chaînes change dans la liste des chaînes mémorisées. „ Favoris l’ordre des chaînes change dans la liste des chaînes favorites. ❑ Réglage fin Si la réception est claire, vous n'avez pas besoin d'effectuer une syntonisation fine du canal, car cette opération s'effectue automatiquement pendant la recherche et la mémorisation. Si le signal est faible ou distordu, vous pouvez être amené à effectuer manuellement une syntonisation fine du canal. N les canaux finement syntonisés qui ont été mémorisés sont repérés par un astérisque "*" placé à droite de leur numéro dans la bannière des canaux. N Pour rétablir la syntonisation fine, sélectionnez Réin. à l'aide du bouton ▲ ou ▼, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. N la syntonisation fine n'est possible que pour des chaînes analogiques. Utilisation du Guide Now & Next / Guide Complet Pour… Alors… regarder un programme de la liste du guide électronique des programmes Sélectionnez un programme à l'aide des boutons ▲, ▼, ◄, ►. Quitter le guide Appuyez sur le bouton bleu. Si le programme suivant est sélectionné, il est planifié avec l'icône de l'horloge affichée. Si vous appuyez de nouveau sur le bouton ENTERE puis sur ◄, ► pour sélectionner Annuler progr., la programmation est annulée et l'icône de l'horloge disparaît. Voir les informations relatives aux programmes Sélectionnez un programme à l'aide des boutons ▲, ▼, ◄, ►. Appuyez ensuite sur le bouton INFO lorsque le programme de votre choix apparaît en surbrillance. le titre du programme se trouve dans la partie supérieure du centre de l'écran. Cliquez sur le bouton INFO pour obtenir des informations détaillées. Numéro de canal, temps de fonctionnement du programme, barre d'état, niveau de contrôle parental, informations sur la qualité vidéo (Hd/Sd), modes son, sous-titres ou télétexte, langue des sous-titres ou du télétexte et bref résumé du programme en surbrillance font partie des informations détaillées. “...” s'affiche si le résumé est long. Choisissez entre Guide Now & Next et Guide complet Appuyez à plusieurs reprises sur le bouton rouge. Dans le guide complet reculer rapidement (24 heures). Avancer rapidement (24 heures). Appuyez à plusieurs reprises sur le bouton vert. Appuyez à plusieurs reprises sur le bouton jaune. Guide Complet dTv Cable 900 f tn 2:10 Mar 1 Jui Freshmen On Campus 2:00 - 2:30 No Detailed Information Aujourd’hui 2:00 - 3:00 3:00 - 4:00 Mint extra loaded Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC The Distillery Smash Hits! Sunday 1 f tn 2 ITv Play 3 Kerrang! 4 Kiss 5 oneword ▼ 6 Smash Hits! No Information Freshmen O.. Regarder INFO Information ■ Main/Aprés ■ +24 Heure ■ Quitter Guide Now & Next dTv Cable 900 f tn 2:10 Mar 1 Jui Freshmen On Campus 2:00 - 2:30 No Detailed Information Maintenant Suivant Mint extra loaded Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC The Distillery Smash Hits! Sunday 1 f tn 2 ITv Play 3 Kerrang! 4 Kiss 5 oneword ▼ 6 Smash Hits! . Kisstory No Information No Information. No Information Street Hypn.. Regarder INFO Information ■ Guide Complet ■ Quitter BN68-03043A.indb 11 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:35¦ Gestion des chaînes Ce menu permet d'ajouter/supprimer ou définir des chaînes favorites et d'utiliser le guide des programmes pour les émissions numériques. „ Tous les canaux Affiche toutes les chaînes actuellement disponibles. „ Chaînes ajoutées Affiche toutes les chaînes ajoutées. „ Favoris Affiche toutes les chaînes favorites. O Pour sélectionner les chaînes favorites que vous avez configurées, appuyez sur le bouton FAV.CH de la télécommande. „ Programmé Affiche tous les programmes actuellement réservés. N Sélectionnez une chaîne dans l'écran Tous les canaux, Chaînes ajoutées ou Favoris en appuyant sur les boutons ▲ / ▼, puis sur le bouton ENTERE. vous pouvez alors regarder la chaîne sélectionnée. N Utilisation des boutons de couleur dans la liste des chaînes – rouge (Type de canal) : permet de basculer entre TV, Radio, Donn/autre et Tous. – Vert (Zoom) : Agrandit ou réduit un numéro de chaîne. – jaune (Sélect.) : Sélectionne plusieurs listes de chaînes. vous pouvez appliquer les fonctions d'ajout/suppression, d'ajout / suppression de favoris ou de verrouillage / déverrouillage à plusieurs chaînes à la fois. Sélectionnez les chaînes voulues, puis appuyez sur le bouton jaune pour traiter toutes les chaînes sélectionnées à la fois. la marque c s'affiche à gauche des chaînes sélectionnées. – TOOLS (Outils) : affiche le menu Supprimer (ou Ajouter), Ajouter aux favoris (ou Supprimer des favoris), Verrouil. (ou Déverr.), Rappel de prog., Modif. Nom Canal, Tri des canaux, Modif. numéro chaîne, Sélectionner tout, (ou Désélec. Tout), Mémorisation Auto. (les menus Options peuvent varier en fonction de la situation.) N Icônes d'état des chaînes ● A : Chaîne analogique. ● c : Chaîne sélectionnée en appuyant sur le bouton jaune. ● : Chaîne définie comme favorite. ● ( : Programme en cours de diffusion. ● \ : Chaîne verrouillée. ● ) : Programme réservé. Menu d'options de la liste des chaînes (dans Tous les canaux / Chaînes ajoutées / Favoris) N Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS pour utiliser le menu d'options. N les éléments du menu Options peuvent varier selon l'état de la chaîne. „ Ajouter / Supprimer vous pouvez supprimer ou ajouter une chaîne afin d'afficher les chaînes de votre choix. N Toutes les chaînes supprimées apparaîtront dans le menu Tous les canaux. N Une chaîne grisée est une chaîne qui a été supprimée. N le menu Ajouter s'affiche uniquement pour les chaînes supprimées. N vous pouvez également ajouter une chaîne du menu Chaînes ajoutées ou Favoris de la même manière. „ Ajouter aux favoris / Supprimer des favoris vous pouvez définir comme favorites les chaînes que vous regardez souvent. T Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS pour afficher le menu Outils. vous pouvez également définir l'ajout aux (ou la suppression des) favoris en sélectionnant Outils → Ajouter aux favoris (ou Supprimer des favoris). N le symbole " " s’affiche et la chaîne est définie comme favorite. N Toutes les chaînes favorites apparaîtront dans le menu Favoris. Français - 12 824 UKTV Gold 825 UKTV style A 1 C -- A 2 C -- A 3 ♥ C -- A 4 C -- A 5 C -- A 6 C -- A 7 C -- Chaînes ajoutées Tous ■ Type de Canal ■ Zoom ■ Sélectionnez T utils 824 UKTV Gold 825 UKTV style A 1 C -- A 2 C -- A 3 ♥ C -- A 4 C -- A 5 C -- A 6 C -- A 7 C -- Chaînes ajoutées Tous ■ Type de Canal ■ Zoom ■ Sélection T Outils Supp. Ajouter aux favoris Verrouil. Rappel de prog. Modifi. nom de chaîne Tri des canaux ▼ BN68-03043A.indb 12 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:35„ Verrouil. / Déverr. vous pouvez verrouiller une chaîne afin qu'elle ne puisse pas être sélectionnée ni visualisée. Cette fonction n'est disponible que si l'option Verr Parental est définie sur Marche (Voir page 22). N l'écran de saisie du code PIN s'affiche. Entrez votre code PIN à quatre chiffres. N le code PIN par défaut d'un nouveau téléviseur est 0-0-0-0. vous pouvez modifier le code PIN en sélectionnant Modifier PIN dans le menu. N le symbole "\" s'affiche et la chaîne est verrouillée. „ Rappel de prog. Si vous réservez un programme que vous souhaitez regarder, la chaîne bascule automatiquement vers la chaîne réservée dans la liste de chaînes, même si vous êtes en train de regarder une autre chaîne. Pour réserver un programme, réglez d'abord l'heure actuelle (Voir page 20). N Il n'est possible de réserver que des chaînes mémorisées. N vous pouvez régler directement la chaîne, le jour, le mois, l'heure et les minutes à l'aide des touches numériques de la télécommande. N les programmes réservés apparaissent dans le menu Programme. N Guide des programmes numérique et affichage des réservations Quand une chaîne numérique est sélectionnée et que vous appuyez sur le bouton ►, le Guide des programmes de la chaîne s'affiche. vous pouvez réserver un programme en suivant les procédures décrites ci-dessus. „ Modifi. nom de chaîne (chaînes analogiques uniquement) vous pouvez attribuer aux chaînes un libellé qui s'affiche chaque fois que vous les sélectionnez. N les noms des chaînes numériques leur sont automatiquement attribués ; vous ne pouvez pas les modifier. „ Modif. numéro chaîne (chaînes numériques uniquement) vous pouvez également modifier le numéro de chaîne à l'aide du pavé numérique de la télécommande. „ Tri des canaux (chaînes analogiques uniquement) Cette opération permet de changer les numéros de programme des chaînes mémorisées. Cette opération peut s'avérer nécessaire après l'utilisation de la mémorisation automatique. „ Sélectionner tout / Désélectionner tout ● Sélectionner Tout: vous pouvez sélectionner toutes les chaînes de la liste des chaînes. ● Désélec. Tout: vous pouvez désélectionner toutes les chaînes sélectionnées. N la fonction Désélec. Tout n'est disponible que si au moins une chaîne est sélectionnée. „ Mémorisation Auto N Pour plus d'informations sur le réglage des options, reportez-vous à la page 9. N Si une chaîne est verrouillée par la fonction Verr Parental, la fenêtre de saisie du code PIN s'affiche. Menu d'options de la liste des chaînes (dans Programmé) vous pouvez voir, modifier ou supprimer une réservation. N Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS pour utiliser le menu d'options. „ Infos modif. Permet de modifier une réservation. „ Annuler progr. Permet d'annuler une réservation. „ Information Permet de visualiser une réservation (et d'en modifier les informations). „ Sélectionner tout Permet de sélectionner tous les programmes réservés. Français - 13 1 / 1 / 2009 13:59 5 Tv1 Quincy, M.E 18:59 2 Tv3 The equalizer 20:59 2 Tv3 McMillan & Wife Programmé Tous ■ Zoom ■ Sélection T Outils E Information Infos modif. Annuler progr. Information Sélectionner tout BN68-03043A.indb 13 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:36CONTRÔLE D'IMAGE ¦ Configuration du menu Image ❑ Mode vous pouvez sélectionner le type d'image correspondant le mieux à vos besoins d'affichage. T Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS pour afficher le menu Outils. Vous pouvez également définir le mode d'image en sélectionnant Outils → Mde d'image. „ Dynamique Sélectionne l'image pour un affichage haute définition dans une pièce lumineuse. „ Standard Sélectionne l'image pour un affichage optimal dans un environnement normal. „ Cinéma Sélectionne l'image pour le visionnage de films dans une pièce sombre. ❑ Rétroéclairage / Contraste / Luminosité / Netteté / Couleur / Teinte (V/R) votre téléviseur offre de plusieurs options de paramétrage qui permettent de contrôler la qualité d'image. ● Rétroéclairage : règle la luminosité du rétroéclairage de l'écran lCd. ● Contraste : règle le niveau de contraste de l'image. ● Luminosité : règle le niveau de luminosité de l'image. ● Netteté : règle la définition des bords de l'image. ● Couleur : règle la saturation de couleur de l'image. ● Teinte (V/R) : Ajuste la teinte de couleur de l'image. N Sélectionnez un mode d'image à ajuster. les valeurs ajustées sont enregistrées pour tous les modes d'image. N lorsque vous modifiez les paramètres Rétroéclairage, Contraste, Luminosité, Netteté, Couleur ou Teinte (V/R), l'affichage à l'écran change en conséquence. N Dans les modes analogiques TV, Ext., AV du système PAl, vous ne pouvez pas utiliser la fonction Teinte (V/R). N En mode PC, vous ne pouvez modifier que les options Rétroéclairage, Contraste et Luminosité. N vous pouvez régler et Mémoriser des paramètres pour chaque périphérique externe connecté à une entrée du téléviseur. N vous pouvez réduire sensiblement l'énergie consommée en cours d'utilisation en baissant le niveau de luminosité de l'image, de façon à diminuer le coût de fonctionnement général. ❑ Paramètres avancés les nouveaux téléviseurs Samsung permettent d'effectuer des réglages d'image encore plus précis que les modèles précédents. le réglage des paramètres détaillés de l'image est expliqué ci-dessous. N Paramètres avancés est disponible dans les modes Standard et Cinéma. N En mode PC, vous ne pouvez modifier que les paramètres Gamma et Balance blancs parmi les options de menu Paramètres avancés. „ Nuance de noir → Arrêt / Sombre / Plus sombre / Le plus sombre vous pouvez choisir le niveau de noir pour régler la profondeur de l'écran. „ Contraste Dynam. → Arrêt / Bas / Moyen / Elevé vous pouvez régler le contraste de l'écran pour obtenir un résultat optimal. „ Gamma vous pouvez régler l'intensité des couleurs primaires (rouge, vert, bleu). „ Espace couleur espace couleur de Couleur est une matrice de couleurs composée de rouge, de vert et de bleu. Sélectionnez votre espace de couleur préféré et appréciez la couleur la plus naturelle. ● Natif : offre une nuance de couleur profonde et riche. ● Auto. : règle automatiquement la nuance de couleur la plus naturelle sur la base des sources de programme. Français - 14 Mode : Standard ► rétroéclairage : 7 Contraste : 95 luminosité : 45 Netteté : 50 Couleur : 50 Teinte (v / r) : v50 / r50 Image Couleur : 50 Teinte (v / r) : v50 / r50 Paramètres avancés ► Options d'image réinitialisation de l'image Image BN68-03043A.indb 14 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:36„ Balance blancs Vous pouvez régler la température des Couleur pour que celles-ci soient plus naturelles. ● Aj. Rouge / Aj. Vert / Aj. Bleu / Regl. Rouge / Regl. vert / Regl. bleu : vous pouvez régler la température de couleur des zones claires en modifiant les valeurs r, G et B. recommandé pour les utilisateurs avancés uniquement. ● Réinit. : les valeurs par défaut de l'équilibrage du blanc réglé précédemment sont rétablies. „ Carnation vous pouvez accentuer le "ton chair" de l'image. N la modification des valeurs de réglage actualise l'affichage à l'écran. „ Netteté des contours → Arrêt / Marche vous pouvez faire ressortir les contours des objets dans l'image. ❑ Options d'image N En mode PC, vous ne pouvez modifier que les paramètres Nuance Coul. et Taille parmi les options du menu Options d'image. „ Nuance Coul. → Froide / Normal / Chaude1 / Chaude2 vous pouvez sélectionner la nuance de couleur la plus agréable à l'œil. N vous pouvez régler et enregistrer des paramètres pour chaque périphérique externe connecté à une entrée du téléviseur. N Chaude1 ou Chaude2 ne sont activées que si le mode d'image est Cinéma. „ Taille vous pouvez sélectionner la taille d'image qui correspond le mieux à vos besoins d'affichage. T Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS pour afficher le menu Outils. vous pouvez également définir la taille en sélectionnant Outils → Format de l’image. ● 16/9 auto : règle automatiquement la taille de l'image sur le format 16:9. ● 16:9 : règle la taille de l'image sur 16:9 de façon appropriée pour les dvd ou la diffusion au format cinémascope. ● Zoom large : agrandit l'image à une taille supérieure à 4:3. ● Zoom : agrandit l'image en 16:9 (dans le sens vertical) pour l'adapter à la taille de l'écran. ● 4:3 : paramètre par défaut pour un film vidéo ou une diffusion normale. ● Adapter écran : Permet de voir l'intégralité de l'image sans coupure lors de l'entrée de signaux HdMI (720p / 1080i) ou Composant (1080i). N les options de taille de l'image peuvent varier en fonction de la source d'entrée. N les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction du mode sélectionné. N En mode PC, seuls les modes 16:9 et 4:3 peuvent être réglés. N vous pouvez régler et enregistrer des paramètres pour chaque périphérique externe connecté à une entrée du téléviseur. N Une rémanence temporaire peut se produire si vous affichez une image statique pendant plus de deux heures sur l'écran du téléviseur. N Zoom large : Appuyez sur le bouton ► pour sélectionner Position, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour déplacer l'image vers le haut ou vers le bas. Appuyez ensuite sur le bouton ENTERE. N Zoom : Appuyez sur le bouton ► pour sélectionner Position, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour déplacer l'image vers le haut et vers le bas. Appuyez ensuite sur le bouton ENTERE. Appuyez sur le bouton ► pour sélectionner Taille, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour augmenter ou réduire la hauteur de l'image. Appuyez ensuite sur le bouton ENTERE. N Après avoir sélectionné l'option Adapter écran en mode HDMI (1080i) ou Component (1080i), sélectionnez Position à l'aide du bouton ◄ ou ►. Utilisez le bouton ▲, ▼, ◄ ou ► pour déplacer l'image. Réinit. : Appuyez sur le bouton ◄ ou ► pour sélectionner Réinit., puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. Vous pouvez initialiser le réglage. N Si vous utilisez la fonction Adapter écran avec l'entrée HdMI 720p, une ligne sera coupée en haut, en bas, à gauche et à droite, comme avec la fonction Overscan. „ Mode écran → 16:9 / Zoom large / Zoom / 4:3 lorsque vous réglez la taille de l'image sur 16/9 auto sur un téléviseur 16:9, vous pouvez déterminer la taille d'affichage d'une image 4:3 WSS (Wide Screen Service/service d'écran large) ou choisir de ne rien afficher pour ce format. Chaque pays européen impose une taille d'image différente ; cette fonction permet aux utilisateurs de sélectionner la leur. ● 16:9 : règle l'image en mode large, c'est-à-dire en 16:9. ● Zoom large : agrandit l'image à une taille supérieure à 4:3. ● Zoom : agrandit la taille de l'image sur l'écran dans le sens vertical. ● 4:3 : règle l'image en mode normal, c'est-à-dire en 4:3. N Cette fonction n'est disponible qu'en mode 16/9 auto. N Cette fonction n'est pas disponible en mode PC, Composant ou HDMI. Français - 15 BN68-03043A.indb 15 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:36„ NR numérique → Arrêt / Bas / Moyen / Elevé / Auto. Si le signal de radiodiffusion reçu est faible, vous pouvez activer la fonction Digital Noise reduction pour faciliter la réduction d'images fantômes ou statiques qui peuvent apparaître à l'écran. N lorsque le signal est faible, sélectionnez une autre option jusqu'à obtention de la meilleure image possible. „ Niv. noir HDMI → Normal / Bas vous pouvez choisir le niveau de noir pour régler la profondeur de l'écran. N Cette fonction n'est active que si l'entrée externe se connecte à HdMI (signaux rvB). „ Mode Film → Arrêt / Auto. vous pouvez régler le téléviseur de sorte qu'il détecte et traite automatiquement les signaux de cinéma de toutes les sources et adapte l'image pour obtenir une qualité optimale. N Mode Film n'est prise en charge que dans TV, AV, COMPONENT(480i / 1080i) et HDMI(480i / 1080i). ❑ Réinitialisation de l'image → Réinitial. mode image / Annuler rétablit tous les paramètres des images aux valeurs par défaut. N Sélectionnez un mode d'image à rétablir. la réinitialisation est effectuée pour chaque mode d'image. ● Réinitial. mode image : rétablit les paramètres par défaut pour les valeurs de l'image actuelle. ¦ Utilisation de votre téléviseur comme écran d'ordinateur (PC) Configuration de votre logiciel PC (instructions basées sur Windows XP) les paramètres d'affichage Windows indiqués ci-dessous sont valables pour ordinateur standard. les affichages écran sur votre PC seront probablement différents, en fonction de votre version de Windows et votre carte vidéo. Cependant, même si les affichages réels diffèrent, les mêmes informations de configuration de base s'appliquent dans la plupart des cas. dans le cas contraire, contactez le fabricant de votre ordinateur ou votre revendeur Samsung. 1. dans le menu démarrer de Windows, cliquez sur "Panneau de configuration". 2. dans le Panneau de configuration, cliquez sur "Apparence et thèmes". Une boîte de dialogue s'affiche. 3. Cliquez sur "Affichage". Une nouvelle boîte de dialogue s'affiche. 4. Cliquez sur l'onglet "Paramètres". réglage correct de la taille (résolution) - Optimal : 1360 x 768 pixels. S’il existe une option de fréquence verticale sur votre boîte de dialogue des paramètres d’affichage, la valeur correcte est "60" ou "60 Hz". Sinon, cliquez simplement sur "OK" pour quitter la boîte de dialogue. Français - 16 BN68-03043A.indb 16 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:36Modes d'affichage la taille et la position de l'écran varient en fonction du type de moniteur du PC et de sa résolution. les résolutions indiquées dans le tableau sont recommandées. „ Entrée D-Secondaire et HDMI/DVI Mode Résolution Fréquence horizontale (kHz) Fréquence verticale (Hz) Fréquence d'horloge pixels (MHz) Polarité synchronisée (H/V) IBM 640 x 350 31,469 70,086 25,175 +/- 720 x 400 31,469 70,087 28,322 -/+ MAC 640 x 480 35,000 66,667 30,240 -/- 832 x 624 49,726 74,551 57,284 -/- VeSA CVT 720 x 576 35,910 59,950 32,750 -/+ 1280 x 720 44,772 59,855 74,500 -/+ 1280 x 720 56,456 74,777 95,750 -/+ VeSA DMT 640 x 480 31,469 59,940 25,175 -/- 640 x 480 37,500 75,000 31,500 -/- 640 x 480 37,861 72,809 31,500 -/- 800 x 600 37,879 60,317 40,000 +/+ 800 x 600 46,875 75,000 49,500 +/+ 800 x 600 48,077 72,188 50,000 +/+ 1024 x 768 48,363 60,004 65,000 -/- 1024 x 768 56,476 70,069 75,000 -/- 1024 x 768 60,023 75,029 78,750 +/+ 1360 x 768 47,712 60,015 85,500 +/+ VeSA GTF 1280 x 720 52,500 70,000 89,040 -/+ N lorsque vous utilisez une connexion avec câble HDMI/DVI, vous devez utiliser la prise HDMI (DVI). N le mode entrelacé n'est pas pris en charge. N le téléviseur peut fonctionner de façon anormale si le format vidéo sélectionné n'est pas standard. N les modes Séparé et Composite sont pris en charge. le format SOG (SvSv) n'est pas pris en charge. ¦ Configuration du téléviseur avec le PC N Préréglage: Appuyez sur le bouton SOURCE pour sélectionner le mode PC. ❑ Réglage Automatique le réglage automatique permet l'ajustement automatique de l'écran du PC affiché sur le téléviseur en fonction du signal vidéo entrant du PC. les valeurs des options de réglage fin, de réglage de base et de position sont ajustées automatiquement. N Cette fonction ne s'applique pas en mode dvI-HdMI. T Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS pour afficher le menu Outils. Vous pouvez également définir le réglage automatique en sélectionnant Outils → Réglage Automatique. ❑ Ecran „ Regl. Base / Regl. Prec lorsque vous réglez la qualité de l'image, l'objectif est d'éliminer ou de réduire les parasites visuels. Si vous ne pouvez pas éliminer ces parasites par une syntonisation fine, réglez la fréquence (Regl. Base) au mieux, puis effectuez de nouveau une syntonisation fine. Une fois les parasites réduits, effectuez un nouveau réglage de l'image pour l'aligner au centre de l'écran. „ Position du PC réglez la position d'affichage du PC si elle ne convient pas pour l'écran du téléviseur. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour régler la position verticale. Appuyez sur le bouton ◄ ou ► pour régler la position horizontale. „ Réinitialiser Image vous pouvez rétablir les valeurs par défaut de tous les paramètres d'image. Français - 17 luminosité : 45 Netteté : 50 Réglage Automatique ► ecran Paramètres avancés Options d'image réinitialisation de l'image Image BN68-03043A.indb 17 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:36CONTRÔLE DU SON ¦ Configuration du menu Sound ❑ Mode → Standard / Musique / Cinéma / Voix claire / Personnel vous pouvez sélectionner un mode son conforme à vos préférences. T Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS pour afficher le menu Outils. Vous pouvez également configurer le mode son en sélectionnant Outils → Mode Son. „ Standard Sélectionne le mode son normal. „ Musique Accentue la musique par rapport aux voix. „ Cinéma Offre le meilleur son pour les films. „ Voix claire Accentue les voix par rapport aux autres sons. „ Personnel rétablit vos paramètres de son personnalisés. ❑ Egaliseur vous pouvez régler les paramètres du son en fonction de vos préférences. „ Mode vous pouvez sélectionner un mode son conforme à vos préférences. „ Balance définit la balance entre les haut-parleurs droit et gauche. „ 100Hz / 300Hz / 1KHz / 3KHz / 10KHz (réglage de la bande passante) Permet de régler le niveau de fréquences de la bande passante. „ Réinit. rétablit les valeurs par défaut de l'égaliseur. ❑ SRS TruSurround HD → Arrêt / Marche le SrS TruSurround Hd est une technologie SrS brevetée qui remédie au problème de la lecture de contenu multicanal 5.1 sur deux haut-parleurs. le TruSurround produit un son surround virtuel excellent au moyen de n'importe quel système de lecture à deux haut-parleurs, dont les haut-parleurs internes du téléviseur. Il est totalement compatible avec tous les formats multicanal. ❑ Langue audio (Chaînes numériques.) vous pouvez modifier la langue par défaut des sous-titres et de l'audio. Affiche les informations relatives à la langue pour le flux entrant. N Vous pouvez sélectionner la langue uniquement parmi les langues en cours de diffusion. N Cette fonction peut être sélectionnée pendant que vous regardez une chaîne numérique. ❑ Format Audio → MPEG / Dolby Digital (Chaînes numériques.) lorsque le son est émis à la fois par le haut-parleur principal et le récepteur audio, un effet d'écho peut se produire en raison de la différence de vitesse de décodage entre le haut-parleur principal et le récepteur audio. Dans ce cas, utilisez la fonction TV Speaker (haut-parleur du téléviseur). N le format audio s'affiche en fonction du signal diffusé. N Cette fonction peut être sélectionnée pendant que vous regardez une chaîne numérique. Français - 18 Mode : Personnel ► egaliseur SrS TruSurround Hd : Arrêt langue audio : - - - Format Audio : - - - Description audio volume auto : Arrêt Son BN68-03043A.indb 18 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:36❑ Description audio (Chaînes numériques.) Il s'agit d'une fonction audio auxiliaire qui fournit une piste audio supplémentaire à l'intention des personnes malvoyantes. Cette fonction traite le flux audio relatif à la description audio (Ad) lorsqu'il est envoyé avec le son principal par le radiodiffuseur. les utilisateurs peuvent activer ou désactiver la description audio et régler le volume. O Appuyez sur le bouton AD de la télécommande pour sélectionner Arrêt ou Marche. „ Description audio → Arrêt / Marche Active ou désactive la fonction de description audio. „ Volume Permet d'ajuster le volume de la description audio. N Volume est actif lorsque Description audio est défini sur Marche . ❑ Volume auto → Arrêt / Marche Chaque station de télédiffusion possède ses propres conditions de signal. Il n'est donc pas facile de régler le volume chaque fois que vous changez de chaîne. Cette fonction permet de régler automatiquement le volume du canal désiré en réduisant la sortie son lorsque le signal de modulation est puissant ou en l'augmentant lorsque le signal est faible. ❑ Sélection Haut-parleur → Ht-parl ext / Haut-parleur TV Pour entendre le son par l'intermédiaire d'enceintes séparées, désactivez l'amplificateur interne. N les boutons de volume et MUTE ne fonctionnent pas lorsque la fonction Sélection Haut-parleur est réglée sur Ht-parl ext. N Si vous sélectionnez Ht-parl ext dans le menu Sélection Haut-parleur, les paramètres de son sont limités. ❑ Réinitialisation du son → Réinitial. tout / Réinitial. mode son / Annuler vous pouvez rétablir les valeurs par défaut des paramètres audio. ¦ Sélection du mode son vous pouvez configurer le mode son dans le menu Outils. lorsque vous définissez Dual l ll, le mode son actuel est affiché à l'écran. Type d'audio Dual 1 / 2 Par défaut Stéréo A2 Mono MONO Changement automatique Stéréo STEREO ↔ MONO Double DUAL 1 ↔ DUAL 2 DUAL 1 NICAM Stéréo Mono MONO Changement automatique Stéréo MONO ↔ STEREO Double MONO ↔ DUAL 1 DUAL 2 DUAL 1 N Si le signal stéréo est faible et qu'une commutation automatique se produit, passez alors en Mono. N Cette fonction n'est activée qu'en son stéréo. Elle est désactivée en mode mono. N Cette fonction n'est disponible qu'en mode Tv. Français - 19 BN68-03043A.indb 19 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:36CONFIGURATION ¦ Configuration du menu Configuration ❑ Langue des menus Permet de définir la langue des menus. ❑ Horloge „ Horloge le réglage de l'horloge est nécessaire pour utiliser les différentes fonctions de minuterie de la télévision. N l'heure actuelle s'affiche chaque fois que vous appuyez sur le bouton INFO. N Si vous débranchez le cordon d'alimentation, vous devez régler de nouveau l'horloge. ● Mode Horloge l'heure en cours peut être réglée manuellement ou automatiquement. – Auto. : définit l'heure en cours automatiquement en utilisant l'heure de la transmission numérique. – Manuel : définit l'heure en cours d'après l'heure entrée manuellement. N En fonction de la station de diffusion et du signal diffusé, il se peut que l'heure ne soit pas réglée correctement. Si cela se produit, réglez l'heure manuellement. N Pour que l'heure soit réglée automatiquement, l'antenne ou le câble doit être connecté. ● Réglage Horloge vous pouvez définir l'heure en cours manuellement. N Activez cette option lorsque Mode Horloge est défini sur Manuel. N vous pouvez régler directement le jour, le mois, l'année, l'heure et la minute en appuyant sur les touches numériques de la télécommande. „ Veille → Arrêt / 30 min / 60 min / 90 min / 120 min / 150 min / 180 min la minuterie de mise en veille éteint automatiquement la télévision après une durée préréglée (30, 60, 90, 120, 150 ou 180 minutes). N le téléviseur passe automatiquement en mode veille lorsque la minuterie atteint 0. N Pour annuler la fonction Veille, sélectionnez Arrêt. T Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS pour afficher le menu Outils. Vous pouvez également régler la minuterie de mise en veille en sélectionnant Outils → Veille. „ Minuteur 1 / Minuteur 2 / Minuteur 3 vous pouvez effectuer trois paramétrages différent de la minuterie de marche/arrêt. vous devez d'abord régler l'horloge. ● Période d'activation : Sélectionnez l'heure, la minute et l'action activer/désactiver (Pour activer le minuteur selon les réglages définis, choisissez Activer.) ● Période de désactivation : Sélectionnez l'heure, la minute et l'action activer/désactiver (Pour activer le minuteur selon les réglages définis, choisissez Activer.) ● Volume : Sélectionnez le niveau de volume à la mise sous tension. ● Antenne : Sélectionnez Hertzien ou Câble. ● Canal : Sélectionnez la chaîne désirée. ● Répétition : Sélectionnez Une fois, Ts jours, Lun~Ven, Lun~Sam, Sam~Dim ou Manuel. N lorsque Manuel est sélectionné, appuyez sur le bouton ► pour sélectionner le jour de la semaine. Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE sur le jour de votre choix. le symbole c s'affiche alors. N vous pouvez régler l'heure, la minute et la chaîne directement à l'aide des touches numériques de la télécommande. N Mise hors tension automatique lorsque vous réglez la minuterie sur Marche, le téléviseur s'éteint si aucune commande n'est utilisée dans les 3 heures qui suivent la mise sous tension par le minuteur. Cette fonction est disponible uniquement lorsque la minuterie est réglée sur Marche ; elle permet d'éviter toute surchauffe occasionnée par une utilisation prolongée du téléviseur. Français - 20 Plug & Play Langue des menus: Français ► Horloge Diffuser Sécurité Général Configuration BN68-03043A.indb 20 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:37❑ Diffuser „ Sous-titres vous pouvez activer ou désactiver les sous-titres. Utilisez ce menu pour définir le mode des sous-titres. Normal sélectionne les sous-titres de base ; Malentendants sélectionne les sous-titres pour personnes malentendantes. ● Sous-titres → Arrêt / Marche: Active/désactive les sous-titres. ● Mode → Normal / Malentendants: Sélectionne le mode de la fonction Sous-titres. ● Langue des sous-titres: définit la langue des sous-titres N Si le programme visionné n'offre pas de fonction Malentendants, le mode Normal est automatiquement activé, même si le mode Malentendants est sélectionné. N l'anglais est la langue par défaut si la langue sélectionnée n'est pas diffusée. O Vous pouvez sélectionner ces options en appuyant sur le bouton SUBT. de la télécommande. ■ Texte numérique → Désactiver / Activer (Royaume-Uni uniquement) Si le programme est diffusé avec du texte numérique, cette fonction est activée. N MHeG (Multimedia and Hypermedia Information Coding experts Group) Norme internationale pour les systèmes de codage des données utilisés avec le multimédia et l'hypermédia. Niveau supérieur à celui du système MPEG, qui inclut de l'hypermédia à liaison de données tel que des images fixes, le service de caractères, l'animation, les fichiers graphiques et vidéo et les données multimédia. MHEG est une technologie d'interaction de l'utilisateur en cours d'utilisation appliquée à divers domaines, dont la vidéo à la demande (vOd), la télévision interactive (ITv), le commerce électronique, la téléformation, la téléconférence, les bibliothèques numériques et les jeux en réseau. ■ Langue du télétexte Vous pouvez Sélectionne la langue du télétexte par type de langue. N l'anglais est la langue par défaut si la langue sélectionnée n'est pas diffusée. ■ Préférence ● Première Langue Audio / Deuxième Langue Audio / Langue princ. sous-titres / Langue sec. sous-titres / Première Langue Télétexte / Deuxième Langue Télétexte Cette fonction permet de sélectionner une des langues disponibles. la langue sélectionnée ici est la langue par défaut de la chaîne sélectionnée. Si vous changez la langue, les options Subtitle language, Audio language et Teletext language du menu language sont automatiquement modifiées en conséquence. les options Subtitle language, Audio language et Teletext language du menu language présentent une liste des langues prises en charge par la chaîne actuelle et la langue sélectionnée est affichée en surbrillance. Si vous modifiez le paramètre de la langue, la nouvelle sélection n'est valable que pour la chaîne actuelle. le nouveau paramétrage n'affecte pas le réglage des options Primary Subtitle language, Primary Audio language ou Primary Teletext language du menu Preference. ■ Interface commune ● CI Menu Permet à l'utilisateur d'opérer une sélection dans le menu du module CAM. Sélectionnez le menu CI Menu le menu PC Card. ● Infos sur l’application Contient des informations sur le module CAM inséré dans la fente CI et les affiche. N les informations sur l'application concernent la CI CArd. vous pouvez installer le module CAM que le téléviseur soit allumé ou Arrêt 1. Achetez le module CI CAM chez le revendeur le plus proche ou par téléphone. 2. Insérez la CI CArd dans le module CAM, dans le sens indiqué par la flèche, jusqu'à ce qu'elle se loge en place. 3. Insérez le module CAM avec la CI CArd installée dans la fente de l'interface commune. (Insérez le module CAM dans le sens indiqué par la flèche, à fond, de façon à ce qu'il soit parallèle à la fente.) 4. vérifiez si une image est visible sur une chaîne à signal brouillé. N Il se peut que le module CAM ne soit pas pris en charge dans certains pays ou régions. vérifiez auprès de votre revendeur agréé. Français - 21 BN68-03043A.indb 21 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:37❑ Sécurité l'écran de saisie du code PIN s'affiche avant l'écran de configuration. Entrez votre code PIN à quatre chiffres. le code PIN par défaut d’un nouveau téléviseur est 0-0-0-0. vous pouvez modifier le code PIN en sélectionnant Modifier PIN dans le menu. ■ Verrouillage Canal → Arrêt / Marche Cette fonction permet d'empêcher que des utilisateurs non autorisés, tels que des enfants, regardent des programmes inappropriés, en désactivant la vidéo et l'audio. N vous pouvez verrouiller certaines chaînes dans la liste des chaînes. (voir page 13). N Verrouillage Canal est uniquement disponible en mode TV. ■ Verrouillage parental Cette fonction permet d'empêcher certains utilisateurs, par exemple des enfants, de regarder des émissions inappropriées, en les protégeant à l'aide d’un code de 4 chiffres défini par l'utilisateur. N l’option Verrouillage parental diffère en fonction du les pays. N lorsque le Verrouillage parental est activé, le symbole ‘\’ s’affiche. N Autor.tout : appuyez sur ce bouton pour déverrouiller toutes les évaluations Tv. Bloq. tout : appuyez sur ce bouton pour verrouiller tous les classements Tv. ■ Modifier PIN vous pouvez modifier le code personnel demandé pour pouvoir configurer le téléviseur. N Si vous avez oublié le code, appuyez sur les boutons de la télécommande dans l'ordre suivant, ce qui remet le code à 0-0-0-0 : POWER (Arrêt) → MUTE → 8 → 2 → 4 → POWER (Marche). ❑ Général ■ Mode Jeu → Arrêt / Marche En reliant le téléviseur à une console de jeu telle que PlayStation™ ou Xbox™, vous pouvez profiter d'une expérience de jeu plus réaliste en sélectionnant le menu de jeu. N Pour déconnecter la console de jeu et connecter un autre périphérique externe, annulez le mode Jeu dans le menu de configuration. N Si vous affichez le menu du téléviseur en mode "Mode Jeu", l'écran vacille légèrement. N Mode Jeu n'est pas disponible en mode TV et PC normal. N Si le Mode Jeu est activé : – le mode Picture bascule automatiquement sur Standard et les utilisateurs ne peuvent pas changer de mode. – le mode Sound bascule automatiquement sur Personnel et les utilisateurs ne peuvent pas changer de mode. réglez le son à l'aide de l'égaliseur. N la fonction régler du menu Son est activée. Sélectionner la fonction reset après avoir réglé l’égaliseur rétablit ses paramètres par défaut. ■ Mode éco. → Arrêt / Bas / Moyen / Elevé / Image désactivée / Auto. Cette fonction règle la luminosité du téléviseur afin de réduire la consommation d'énergie. lorsque vous regardez la télévision le soir, réglez l'option du mode Mode éco. sur Elevé pour reposer vos yeux et réduire la consommation d'énergie. Si vous sélectionnez Image désactivée, l’écran s’éteint. Seul le son est émis. Appuyez à nouveau sur ce bouton pour désactiver la fonction Image désactivée. N la function Image désactivée n’est pas prise en charge dans le menu Tools. T Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS pour afficher le menu Outils. vous pouvez également définir l'option d'économie d'énergie en sélectionnant Outils → Mode éco.. ■ Mélodie → Arrêt / Bas / Moyen / Elevé Il est possible de programmer la lecture d'une mélodie lors de la mise sous tension ou hors tension du téléviseur. N Aucune mélodie n'est lue dans les cas suivants : – Aucun son n'est émis par le téléviseur parce que le bouton MUTE a été actionné. – Aucun son n'est émis par le téléviseur parce que le bouton (–) Volume a été actionné. – lorsque le téléviseur est mis hors tension par la fonction de veille. Français - 22 BN68-03043A.indb 22 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:37Français - 23 ENTRÉE / ASSISTANCE ¦ Configuration du menu Input ❑ Liste Source Permet de sélectionner le téléviseur ou d'autres sources d'entrée externes telles que des lecteurs dvd/Blu-ray ou des récepteurs satellite (boîtiers décodeurs) connectées au téléviseur. Permet de sélectionner la source d'entrée de votre choix. O Appuyez sur le bouton SOURCE de la télécommande pour afficher une source de signal externe. Une pression sur le bouton TV sélectionne le mode TV. „ TV / Ext. / AV / Composant / PC / HDMI/DVI N Vous ne pouvez sélectionner que des périphériques externes connectés au téléviseur. Dans Liste Source, les entrées connectées s'affichent en surbrillance en début de liste. les entrées non connectées s'affichent en bas de liste. N les options Ext. et PC sont toujours activées. N TOOLS (Outils) : Affiche les menus Modif. Nom et Information. ❑ Modif. Nom Nommez le périphérique connecté aux prises d'entrée pour faciliter la sélection de source d'entrée. „ Magnétoscope / DVD / Décodeur Câble / Décodeur satellite / Décodeur PVR / Récepteur AV / Jeu / Caméscope / PC / DVI / DVI PC / TV / IPTV/ Blu-ray / HD DVD / DMA N Si vous connectez un câble HDMI/DVI au port HDMI (DVI), vous devez régler le mode HDMI/DVI sur DVI ou DVI PC dans le champ Modif. Nom du mode Entrée. Dans ce cas, une connexion audio séparée est indispensable. ¦ Configuration du menu Support ❑ Diagnostic automatique „ Test de l’image Si vous pensez que l'image n'est pas optimale, exécutez le test d'image. vérifiez la mire de couleur à l'écran pour voir si le problème persiste. ● Oui : si la mire de couleur n'apparaît pas où si elle est parasitée, sélectionnez Oui. Il se peut que le téléviseur soit défaillant. demandez de l'aide au centre d'appel de Samsung. ● Non: si la mire de couleur s'affiche correctement, sélectionnez Non. Il se peut que l'équipement externe soit défaillant. vérifiez les connexions. Si le problème persiste, reportez-vous au mode d'emploi du périphérique externe. „ Test du son Si vous pensez que le son n'est pas optimal, exécutez le test du son. vous pouvez contrôler le son en diffusant une mélodie préenregistrée sur le téléviseur. le message "le problème persiste-t-il pour ce test du son?" s'affiche à l'écran. N Si les haut-parleurs du téléviseur restent muets, avant d'effectuer le test du son, vérifiez que l'option Sélection Haut-parleur est réglée sur Haut-parleur TV dans le menu Sound. N la mélodie est diffusée pendant le test, même si l'option Sélection Haut-parleurt est réglée sur Ht-parl ext ou si le son a été désactivé en appuyant sur le bouton MUTE. ● Oui : si, pendant le test du son, vous n'entendez du son que d'un haut-parleur ou pas de son du tout, sélectionnez Oui. Il se peut que le téléviseur soit défaillant. demandez de l'aide au centre d'appel de Samsung. ● Non : Si vous entendez du son des haut-parleurs, sélectionnez Non. Il se peut que l'équipement externe soit défaillant. vérifiez les connexions. Si le problème persiste, reportez-vous au mode d'emploi du périphérique externe. „ Informations de signal (chaînes numériques uniquement) À l'inverse des chaînes analogiques, dont la qualité de réception peut varier de "neigeuse" à claire, les chaînes numériques (HdTv) présentent une qualité de réception parfaite ou bien vous ne les recevez pas. Contrairement aux chaînes analogiques, vous ne pouvez donc pas syntoniser une chaîne numérique. vous avez toutefois la possibilité de régler votre antenne pour améliorer la réception des chaînes numériques disponibles. N Si l'indicateur d'intensité du signal indique que celui-ci est faible, réglez physiquement votre antenne afin d'en augmenter l'intensité. Continuez à régler l'antenne jusqu'à ce que trouver la position offrant le signal le plus puissant. Diagnostic automatique ► Mise à niveau du logiciel Guide de connexion HD Contacter Samsung Assistance Liste Source Modif. Nom entrée BN68-03043A.indb 23 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:37Français - 24 ❑ Mise à niveau du logiciel Pour garder le produit à jour avec les nouvelles fonctions de télévision numérique, des mises à jour logicielles sont régulièrement diffusées via le signal de télévision normal. le téléviseur détecte automatiquement ces signaux et affiche la bannière de mise à jour logicielle. vous avez le choix d'installer ou non la mise à jour. „ USB Insérez dans le téléviseur un lecteur USB contenant la mise à niveau du microprogramme. veillez à ne pas couper l'alimentation ni retirer le lecteur USB pendant l'application des mises à niveau. Une fois la mise à niveau du micrologiciel terminée, le téléviseur se met automatiquement hors puis sous tension. vérifiez la version du micrologiciel une fois les mises à jour terminées. lorsque le logiciel est mis à niveau, les paramètres vidéo et audio définis reprennent leur valeur par défaut (usine). Il est recommandé de noter les paramétrages afin de pouvoir les rétablir facilement après la mise à niveau. „ Canal Mise à niveau du logiciel à l'aide du signal de diffusion. N Si elle est sélectionnée pendant la période de transmission du logiciel, cette fonction recherche le logiciel disponible et le télécharge. N le temps nécessaire au téléchargement du logiciel dépend de l'état du signal. „ Mise à niveau en mode veille Pour poursuivre la mise à jour du logiciel en gardant le téléviseur sous tension, sélectionnez ON en appuyant sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼. Une mise à jour manuelle a lieu automatiquement 45 minutes après que l'entrée en mode veille. Étant donné que la mise sous tension s'effectue de façon interne, il se peut que l'écran lCd s'allume légèrement. Ce phénomène peut se produire pendant plus d'une heure, jusqu'à ce que la mise à jour logiciel soit terminée. „ Autre logiciel Affiche des informations sur la version du logiciel. ❑ Guide de connexion HD Ce menu indique la méthode de connexion offrant la qualité optimale pour le téléviseur haute définition. Consultez ces informations lors de la connexion de périphériques externes au téléviseur. ❑ Contacter Samsung Consultez ces informations si le téléviseur ne fonctionne pas correctement ou si vous voulez mettre à niveau le logiciel. vous pouvez consulter les informations concernant le centre d'appel, le produit et la méthode de téléchargement du logiciel. Français - 24 Panneau arrière du téléviseur Lecteur USB BN68-03043A.indb 24 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:37Français - 25 RECOMMANDATION D'UTILISATION ¦ Fonction Télétexte la plupart des chaînes de télévision offrent des services d'informations écrites via le télétexte. la page d'index du télétexte contient des instructions sur l'utilisation du service. vous pouvez, en outre, sélectionner différentes options à l'aide des touches de la télécommande. N Pour que les informations du télétexte s'affichent correctement, la réception des chaînes doit être stable. Autrement, des informations pourraient manquer ou certaines pages ne pas s'afficher. N Vous pouvez changer de page de télétexte en appuyant sur les touches numériques de la télécommande. 1 0(mode) Permet de sélectionner le mode Télétexte (lIST/FlOF). Si vous appuyez sur cette touche en mode lISTe, vous basculez en mode d'enregistrement de liste. Dans ce mode, vous pouvez enregistrer une page de télétexte dans une liste à l'aide du bouton 8 (mémoriser). 2 5(révéler) Permet d'afficher le texte masqué (par exemple, les réponses à un questionnaire). Pour rétablir le mode d'affichage normal, appuyez de nouveaux dessus. 3 4(taille) Permet d'afficher la moitié supérieure de l'écran en caractères deux fois plus grands. Pour afficher la moitié inférieure de l'écran, appuyez de nouveau sur cette touche. Pour rétablir le mode d'affichage normal, appuyez dessus une fois de plus. 4 8(mémoriser) Permet d'enregistrer les pages de télétexte. 5 Boutons de couleur (rouge/vert/jaune/ bleu) Si une société de télédiffusion utilise le système FASTEXT, les différentes rubriques d'une page de télétexte sont associées à un code couleur qui permet de les sélectionner à l'aide des touches de couleur de la télécommande. Appuyez sur la touche dont la couleur correspond à celle de la rubrique souhaitée. la page affiche d'autres informations en couleur que vous pouvez sélectionner de la même manière. Pour afficher la page précédente ou la page suivante, appuyez sur la touche de couleur correspondante. 6/(télétexte actif/mixte) Permet d'activer le mode Télétexte après avoir choisi la chaîne diffusant le service télétexte. Appuyez deux fois sur cette touche pour superposer le télétexte à l'émission en cours de diffusion. 7 :(quitter) Quitte l'affichage du télétexte. 8 1(page secondaire) Permet d'afficher une page secondaire. 9 2(page suivante) Permet d'afficher la page de télétexte suivante. 0 3(page précédente) Permet d'afficher la page de télétexte précédente. ! 9 (verrouiller) Permet de bloquer l'affichage sur une page précise, si celle-ci est reliée à plusieurs pages secondaires qui défilent automatiquement. Pour reprendre l'affichage de celles-ci, appuyez de nouveau sur cette touche. @ 6(index) Permet d'afficher la page d'index du télétexte (sommaire) à tout moment. # 7(annuler) Permet d'afficher le programme lors de la recherche d'une page. les pages de télétexte sont organisées en six catégories : Catégorie Contenu A Numéro de la page sélectionnée. B Identité de la chaîne émettrice. C Numéro de la page actuelle ou indications de recherche. D Date et heure. E Texte. F Informations sur l'état. Informations FASTeXT. Français - 25 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 0 ! # @ 7 BN68-03043A.indb 25 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:37Français - 26 N les informations du télétexte sont souvent réparties sur plusieurs pages qui s'affichent successivement. Ces pages sont accessibles en : – entrant le numéro de page ; – sélectionnant un titre dans une liste ; – sélectionnant un titre de couleur (système FASTEXT). N le téléviseur prend en charge le niveau de télétexte 2.5 qui peut afficher des graphiques ou textes supplémentaires. N En fonction de la transmission, des panneaux latéraux vides peuvent apparaître lors de l'affichage du télétexte. N Dans ce cas, les graphiques ou textes supplémentaires ne sont pas transmis. N les téléviseurs plus anciens qui ne prennent pas en charge la version 2.5 ne peuvent pas afficher les graphiques et textes supplémentaires, indépendamment de la transmission télétexte. O Appuyez sur le bouton TV pour quitter l'affichage du télétexte. N Télétexte 16:9 - Format d'image 16:9 ¦ Comment ajuster le socle (modèle 19 pouces uniquement) 1. Placez l'avant du téléviseur sur un tissu doux ou un coussin sur une table comme indiqué à la figure1. – Alignez le bas du téléviseur sur le bord de la table. 2. Appuyez au milieu de l'arrière du téléviseur. réglez le socle comme indiqué à la figure 2 tout en appuyant sur le bouton à l'arrière du socle. 3. Placez le téléviseur en tout sécurité sur la table. ¦ Comment ajuster le socle du téléviseur (modèle 19 pouces uniquement) N Quand vous ajustez le socle, appuyez sur le bouton qui se trouve à l'arrière. 1. la figure 1 indique l'angle de réglage (-2°~14°) quand vous utilisez l'écran lCd sur son socle. N Une inclinaison excessive peut faire se retourner votre téléviseur lCd, ce qui peut l'endommager. 2. la figure 2 indique l'angle de réglage (14°~80°) quand vous convertissez l'écran lCd d'une utilisation sur socle à une murale. 3. la figure 3 indique l'angle de réglage (-0°~10°) quand vous accrochez l'écran lCd à un mur. N vous entendrez un "clic" en changeant l'angle de 1 à 2 ou de 3 à 2. Français - 26 1 2 1 Réglage de l'angle en utilisant le téléviseur sur son socle. 2 Réglage de l'angle en passant d'une utilisation sur socle à un montage mural (1→3, 3→1) 3 Réglage de l'angle quand le téléviseur LCD est monté au mur BN68-03043A.indb 26 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:38Français - 27 ¦ Installer des systèmes de montage conformes VESA (modèles 19 pouces uniquement). 1. Placez l'avant du téléviseur vers le bas sur un tissu doux ou un coussin sur une table. 2. Ajustez le socle en appuyant sur le bouton qui se trouve à l'arrière. 3. Alignez le tampon d'interface de montage (non fourni) avec les trous au pied du socle et fixez-le avec les 4 vis livrées avec la base de type bras, le crochet du support mural ou d'autres bases (non fournies). ¦ Utiliser le couvercle de décoration (modèle 19 pouces uniquement) 1. Quand vous installez le téléviseur sur le mur en utilisant le socle, insérez les couvercles de décoration dans les trous comme indiqué à l'image 1. 2. Après avoir inséré les couvercles de décoration, fixez-les avec 4 vis comme indiqué à l'image 2. 1 2 1 2 Bouton Tampon de montage (vendu séparément) BN68-03043A.indb 27 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:38Français - 28 ¦ Montage du socle 1. Fixez le téléviseur lCD sur le socle. N le téléviseur doit être porté par au moins deux personnes. N veillez à bien faire la distinction entre l'avant et l'arrière du socle lors de l'assemblage. N Pour être certain d'installer le téléviseur sur son socle au niveau approprié, n'exercez pas de pression vers le bas excessive sur ses côtés supérieurs gauche et droit. 2. Insérez deux vis dans l'emplacement 1, puis deux autres dans l'emplacement 2. N redressez le produit et serrez les vis. Si vous serrez les vis tandis que le téléviseur lCd est couché, il se peut qu'il penche d'un côté. ¦ Installation du kit de montage mural des éléments de montage mural (vendus séparément) permettent de fixer le téléviseur au mur. Pour plus d'informations sur l'installation du support mural, reportez-vous aux instructions fournies avec les éléments de montage mural. Faites appel à un technicien pour vous aider à installer le support mural. Samsung Electronics ne saurait être tenu pour responsable d'un endommagement du produit ou d'une blessure si vous choisissez d'effectuer vous-même l'installation murale. N'installez pas le kit de montage mural lorsque le téléviseur est sous tension. Cela pourrait entraîner une blessure par choc électrique. ¦ Utilisation du verrou antivol Kensington l’antivol Kensington est un dispositif utilisé pour fixer physiquement le système lorsqu’il est utilisé dans un endroit public. l’aspect et la méthode de verrouillage peuvent différer de l’illustration en fonction du fabricant. Consultez le manuel fourni avec le verrou Kensington pour obtenir des instructions d’utilisation. N Une icône “K” est présente à l’arrière du téléviseur. Un verrou Kensington se trouve à côté de l’icône “K”. Pour vérouiller l’appareil, procédez comme suit : 1. Enroulez le câble de verrouillage Kensington autour d’un objet large et fixe tel qu’un bureau ou une chaise. 2. Glissez le bout du câble auquel est attaché le verrou dans la boucle du câble de verrouillage Kensington. 3. Insérez le dispositif de verrouillage dans la fente Kensington de l’appareil (1). 4. Fermez le verrou. N Ces instructions sont d’ordre général. Pour de plus amples informations, consultez le manuel d’utilisation fourni avec le dispositif de verrouillage. N le dispositif de verrouillage est vendu séparément. N l’emplacement du verrou Kensington peut varier en fonction du modèle. 1 BN68-03043A.indb 28 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:38Français - 29 ¦ Sécurisation de l'emplacement d'installation respectez les distances requises entre le produit et d'autres objets (p. ex. murs) pour assurer une ventilation adéquate. le non-respect de cette consigne pourrait provoquer un incendie ou un problème avec le produit en raison de l'augmentation de la température interne de ce dernier. Installez le produit de manière à respecter les distances requises indiquées sur la figure. N En cas d'utilisation d'un support ou de montage mural, n'utilisez que des pièces Samsung Electronics. Ҟ l'emploi de pièces d'un autre fabricant risque d'entraîner des problèmes avec le produit ou d'occasionner des blessures dues à la chute du produit. Ҟ l'emploi de pièces d'un autre fabricant risque d'entraîner un problème avec le produit ou de provoquer un incendie en raison de l'augmentation de la température interne du produit due à une ventilation insuffisante. N l'aspect peut varier en fonction du produit. Installation du produit sur un support Montage mural du produit 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm ¦ Fixation du téléviseur au mur Attention : Si vous tirez ou poussez le téléviseur ou si vous grimpez dessus, il risque de tomber. Veillez en particulier, à ce que vos enfants ne se suspendent pas au téléviseur, ni ne le déséquilibrent, car cela pourrait le faire basculer et occasionner des blessures graves pouvant entraîner la mort. respectez toutes les précautions de sécurité indiquées dans la brochure relative à la sécurité. Pour une stabilité accrue, installez le dispositif antichute comme indiqué ci-après. „ Pour éviter toute chute du téléviseur : 1. Glissez les vis dans les colliers, puis fixez-les solidement au mur. Assurez-vous que les vis sont solidement fixées au mur. N en fonction du type de mur, il est possible que vous ayez besoin de matériel supplémentaire, tel que des chevilles. N les colliers, vis et chaînettes n'étant pas fournis, vous devez les acheter séparément. 2. retirez les vis situées sur la partie centrale arrière du téléviseur, glissez-les dans les colliers, puis fixez-les de nouveau sur le téléviseur. N Il est possible que les vis ne soient pas fournies avec le produit. Dans ce cas, achetez des vis présentant les caractéristiques suivantes. N Caractéristiques des vis – Pour un téléviseur lCd 17 à 29 pouces : M4 X l15 – Pour un téléviseur lCd 32 à 40 pouces : M6 X l15 3. reliez les bagues fixées au téléviseur et celles fixées sur le mur à l'aide de chaînettes, puis attachez-les fermement. N Placez le téléviseur à proximité du mur afin qu'il ne bascule pas vers l'arrière. N Il est recommandé de placer la chaînette de façon à ce que les colliers fixés au mur soient placés à même hauteur ou plus bas que ceux fixés au téléviseur. N détachez la chaînette avant de déplacer le téléviseur. 4. vérifiez que toutes les connexions sont fixées correctement. vérifiez régulièrement que les connexions ne présentent aucun signe d'usure. Si vous avez un doute quant à la sécurité des connexions, contactez un installateur professionnel. Mur Mur BN68-03043A.indb 29 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:39Français - 30 ¦ Dépannage Si vous avez des questions relatives au téléviseur, commencez par consulter la liste ci-dessous. Si aucune de ces astuces de dépannage ne s'applique à votre problème, rendez-vous sur le site ‘www.samsung.com’, puis cliquez sur Support ou contactez le centre d'appel dont les coordonnées figurent sur la dernière page. Problème Solution Qualité de l'image Exécutez tout d'abord le Test de l'image pour vérifier que votre téléviseur affiche correctement l'image de test. ● Accédez à MENU - Assistance - Diagnostic automatique - Test de l'image Si l'image de test s'affiche correctement, sa qualité médiocre peut être due à la source ou au signal. la qualité de l'image sur le téléviseur n'est pas aussi bonne que dans le magasin. ● Si vous êtes équipé d'un décodeur câble/boîtier décodeur analogique, procédez à une mise à niveau. Utilisez les câbles HdMI ou Composant pour fournir une qualité d'image Hd. ● Abonné câble/satellite : essayez les chaînes Hd (High definition) à partir de l'alignement des canaux. ● Connexion de l'antenne: essayez les chaînes Hd après avoir exécuté une mémorisation automatique. N de nombreuses chaînes Hd sont mises à niveaux par rapport à du contenu SD (Standard Definition). ● réglez la résolution de sortie vidéo du décodeur câble/boîtier décodeur sur 1080i ou 720p. ● veillez à respecter la distance minimale recommandée entre vous et le téléviseur (distance basée sur la taille et la définition du signal affiché). l'image est déformée : macrobloc, petit bloc, points, pixelisation ● la compression de contenus vidéo peut engendrer une déformation de l'image, en particulier pour les mouvements rapides comme le sport et les films d'action. ● Un niveau de signal faible ou une mauvaise qualité peut déformer l'image. Il ne s'agit pas d'un problème lié au téléviseur. ● Utiliser un téléphone portable à proximité d’un téléviseur (jusqu’à 1 m environ) peut être source de parasites visuels sur les téléviseurs analogiques et numériques. Couleur incorrecte ou manquante avec la connexion Composant. ● Vérifiez que les câbles Composant sont raccordés aux prises appropriées. Des raccordements desserrés ou incorrects peuvent engendrer des problèmes au niveau de la couleur ou de l'écran (vide). luminosité ou couleur médiocre. ● réglez les options Image dans le menu du téléviseur (mode Image, Couleur, Luminosité, Netteté). ● réglez l'option Mode éco. dans le menu Configuration. ● Essayez de réinitialiser l'image pour afficher son paramètre par défaut (accédez à MENU - Image - Réinitialisation de l'image). ligne pointillée sur le bord de l'écran. ● Si la taille de l'image est réglée sur Adapter à l'écran, remplacez la valeur par 16:9. ● Changez la résolution du décodeur câble/boîtier décodeur. l'image est en noir et blanc avec l'entrée Av (Composite) uniquement. ● raccordez le câble vidéo (jaune) à la prise verte de l'entrée Composant 1 du téléviseur. l'image se fige ou est déformée lorsque vous changez de chaînes ou l'image s'affiche avec un décalage. ● en cas de raccordement avec le décodeur câble, essayez de réinitialiser ce dernier (rebranchez le cordon d'alimentation secteur et patientez jusqu'au démarrage du décodeur câble. Cette opération peut durer jusqu'à 20 minutes). ● réglez la résolution de sortie du décodeur câble sur 1080i ou 720p. Qualité sonore Exécutez tout d'abord le Test du son pour vérifier que le système audio de votre téléviseur fonctionne correctement. ● Accédez à MENU - Assistance - Diagnostic automatique - Test du son Si le système audio fonctionne correctement, le problème lié au son peut provenir de la source ou du signal. Aucun son ou son trop faible lorsque le niveau du volume est au maximum. ● vérifiez le volume du périphérique externe connecté à votre téléviseur, puis réglez le volume du téléviseur en conséquence. Image correcte mais absence de son. ● réglez l'option Sélection Haut-parleur sur Haut-parleur TV dans le menu Sound. ● vérifiez que les câbles audio d'un périphérique externe sont raccordés aux prises d'entrée audio appropriées du téléviseur. ● vérifiez l'option de sortie audio du périphérique connecté (par exemple : il se peut que vous deviez remplacer l'option audio de votre décodeur câble par HdMI si vous utilisez la connexion HdMI). ● Si vous utilisez un câble DVI-HDMI, un câble audio distinct est requis. ● désactivez la fonction SrS si le réglage du volume est supérieur à 30. ● retirez la fiche de la prise pour casque (si disponible sur votre téléviseur). Bruit émis par le haut-parleur. ● vérifiez le raccordement des câbles. vérifiez qu'aucun câble vidéo n'est raccordé à une entrée audio. ● Pour la connexion de l'antenne/du câble, vérifiez l'intensité du signal. Un niveau de signal faible peut provoquer une distorsion sonore. BN68-03043A.indb 30 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:39Français - 31 Problème Solution Aucune image, aucune vidéo le téléviseur ne s'allume pas. ● vérifiez que le cordon d'alimentation secteur est branché correctement dans la prise murale et sur le téléviseur. ● Vérifiez que la prise murale est opérationnelle. ● Essayez d'appuyer sur le bouton POWER du téléviseur pour vérifier que la télécommande fonctionne correctement. Si le téléviseur s'allume, la télécommande peut être à l'origine de cette mise sous tension. Pour résoudre le problème lié à la télécommande, reportez-vous au problème ‘la télécommande ne fonctionne pas’ ci-après. le téléviseur s'éteint automatiquement. ● Vérifiez que la fonction Veille est réglée sur Marche dans le menu Configuration. ● Si vous connectez le téléviseur à votre PC, vérifiez les paramètres d'alimentation de votre PC. ● vérifiez que le cordon d'alimentation secteur est branché correctement dans la prise murale et sur le téléviseur. ● En l'absence de signal pendant environ 10 à 15 minutes avec la connexion Antenne/câble, le téléviseur s'éteint. Aucune image/vidéo. ● Vérifiez le raccordement des câbles (retirez tous les câbles du téléviseur et des périphériques externes et rebranchez-les). ● réglez la sortie vidéo de votre périphérique externe (décodeur câble/boîtier décodeur, dvd, Blu-ray, etc.) pour faire correspondre les connexions à l'entrée du téléviseur. Par exemple, sortie du périphérique externe : HdMI, entrée du téléviseur : HdMI. ● Vérifiez que votre périphérique connecté est sous tension. ● veillez à sélectionner la source appropriée du téléviseur en appuyant sur le bouton SOURCE de la télécommande. Connexion rF (câble/antenne) Impossible de recevoir toutes les chaînes. ● vérifiez que le câble de l'antenne est raccordé correctement. ● essayez la fonction Plug & Play pour ajouter des chaînes disponibles à la liste correspondante. Accédez à MENU - Configuration - Plug & Play et attendez que toutes les chaînes disponibles soient mémorisées. ● vérifiez que l'antenne est positionnée correctement. l'image est déformée : macrobloc, petit bloc, points, pixelisation ● la compression de contenus vidéo peut engendrer une déformation de l'image, en particulier pour les mouvements rapides comme le sport et les films d'action. ● Un niveau de signal faible peut déformer l'image. Il ne s'agit pas d'un problème lié au téléviseur. Connexion PC Message ‘Mode non pris en charge’. ● réglez la fréquence et la résolution de sortie de votre PC de sorte à ce qu'il corresponde aux résolutions prises en charge par le téléviseur. le PC apparaît toujours dans la liste source même s'il n'est pas connecté. ● C'est normal ; le PC apparaît toujours dans la liste source même s'il n'est pas connecté. la vidéo fonctionne correctement mais le système audio n'existe pas avec une connexion HDMI. ● vérifiez le paramètre de sortie audio de votre PC. BN68-03043A.indb 31 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:39Français - 32 Problème Solution Autres l'image ne s'affiche pas en plein écran. ● des barres noires s'affichent de chaque côté des chaînes Hd lors de l'affichage du contenu Sd étendu (4:3). ● des barres noires s'affichent en haut et en bas des films dont le format est différent de celui de votre téléviseur. ● réglez l'option de la taille de l'image sur votre périphérique externe ou le téléviseur en plein écran. la télécommande ne fonctionne pas. ● replacez les piles de la télécommande en respectant la polarité (+ -). ● Nettoyez la lentille de la télécommande située en haut de la télécommande. ● Essayez de diriger directement la télécommande vers le téléviseur dans un rayon de 1,5 à 1,8 m. Impossible de contrôler l'alimentation ou le volume du téléviseur avec la télécommande du décodeur câble/boîtier décodeur. ● Programmez la télécommande du décodeur câble/boîtier décodeur pour faire fonctionner le téléviseur. Consultez le manuel de l'utilisateur relatif au câble/satellite pour obtenir le code du téléviseur SAMSUNG. Message ‘Mode non pris en charge’. ● Vérifiez la résolution prise en charge du téléviseur et réglez la résolution de sortie du périphérique externe en conséquence. reportez-vous aux paramètres de résolution indiqués dans ce manuel. Odeur de plastique émise par le téléviseur. ● Cette odeur est normale et s'atténuera au fur et à mesure. Intensité du signal du téléviseur n'est pas disponible dans le menu de test du diagnostic automatique. ● Cette fonction n'est disponible qu'avec des chaînes numériques avec connexion d'antenne (rF/coaxial). le téléviseur penche vers la droite ou la gauche. ● retirez la base du support du téléviseur et réassemblez-la. Impossible d'assembler la base du support. ● veillez à placer le téléviseur sur une surface plane. Si vous ne parvenez pas à retirer les vis du téléviseur, utilisez un tournevis aimanté. le menu des chaînes est grisé (non disponible). ● le menu Canal n’est disponible que si la source du téléviseur est sélectionnée. vos paramètres sont perdus après 30 minutes ou à chaque mise hors tension du téléviseur. ● Si le téléviseur est en mode Enr. démo, les paramètres de l'image et audio sont rétablis toutes les 30 minutes. remplacez le mode Enr. démo par le mode Util. domicile dans la procédure Plug & Play. Appuyez sur le bouton SOURCE pour sélectionner le mode TV, accédez à MENU → Configuration → Plug & Play → ENTERE. Perte intermittente du signal audio ou vidéo. ● Vérifiez le raccordement des câbles ; raccordez-les au besoin. ● Cette perte peut être provoquée par l'utilisation de câbles trop rigides ou épais. veillez à ce que les câbles soient suffisamment souples pour une utilisation à long terme. En cas d'installation murale, nous vous recommandons d'utiliser des câbles avec des connecteurs de 90 degrés. Il se peut que vous voyiez de petites particules si vous regardez de près le bord du cadre de l'écran du téléviseur. ● elles font partie de la conception du produit et ne constituent pas un défaut. ‘Signal brouillé’ ou ‘Aucun signal/signal faible’ avec la carte d’interface (CI) CArD du CAM. ● vérifiez que la carte d'interface commune CICArd est installée dans le CAM dans la fente de l'interface commune. ● Tirez le CAM du téléviseur et insérez-le de nouveau dans la fente. 45 minutes après sa mise hors tension, le téléviseur s'allume. ● Cela est normal car le téléviseur utilise la fonction de liaison radio (OTA) pour mettre à niveau le microprogramme téléchargé pendant son utilisation. Problème récurrent lié à l'image/au son. ● Vérifiez et changez le signal/la source. N Ce téléviseur lCd TFT est équipé d'un écran constitué de sous-pixels dont la fabrication nécessite une technologie sophistiquée. Il se peut toutefois que des points clairs ou sombres apparaissent à l'écran. Ceux-ci n'ont aucune incidence sur les performances du produit. BN68-03043A.indb 32 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:39Français - 33 ¦ Caractéristiques Nom du modèle LE19C430, LE19C431 LE22C430, LE22C431 Taille de l'écran (diagonale) 19 pouces 22 pouces Résolution du PC (optimale) 1360 x 768 à 60 Hz 1360 x 768 à 60 Hz Son (Sortie) 3 W X 2 3 W X 2 Dimensions (LxPxH) Corps Avec socle 477 x 65 x 327 mm 477 x 180 x 362 mm 558 x 75 x 384 mm 558 x 216 x 426 mm Poids Avec socle 5 kg 7 kg Considérations environnementales Température de fonctionnement Humidité en cours de fonctionnement Température de stockage Humidité sur le lieu de stockage 10°C à 40°C (50°F à 104°F) 10 % à 80 %, sans condensation -20°C à 45°C (-4°F à 113°F) 5 % à 95 %, sans condensation Socle orientable Gauche / droite 0˚ N la conception et les spécifications peuvent être modifiées sans préavis. N Ce périphérique est un appareil numérique de classe B. N Concernant l'alimentation et la consommation électrique, reportez-vous à l'étiquette apposée sur le produit. BN68-03043A.indb 33 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:39las figuras y las ilustraciones de este Manual del usuario se proporcionan como referencia solamente y pueden ser diferentes del aspecto real del producto. El diseño y las especificaciones del producto están sujetos a cambios sin previo aviso. ❑ Licencia TruSurround HD, SrS y el símbolo son marcas registradas de SrS labs, Inc. la tecnología TruSurround HD está incorporada bajo licencia de SrS labs, Inc. Fabricado bajo licencia de dolby laboratories. dolby y el símbolo de la doble d son marcas comerciales de Dolby laboratories. ❑ Nota sobre la TV digital 1. las funciones relacionadas con la Tv digital (dvB) sólo están disponibles en países o regiones donde se emitan señales terrestres digitales dvB-T (MPEG2 y MPEG4 AvC) o donde se tenga acceso a servicios de televisión por cable compatibles con dvB-C (MPEG2 y MPEG4 AAC). Póngase en contacto con su distribuidor para conocer si puede recibir señales dvB-T o DVB-C. 2. DVB-T es una norma del consorcio europeo para la transmisión de la televisión digital terrestre y DVB-C lo es para la transmisión de la televisión digital por cable. Sin embargo, en esta especificación no se incluyen algunas funciones diferenciadas, como EPG (Guía electrónica de programas), vOd (vídeo a la carta) y otras. Por ello, en estos momentos aún no están disponibles. 3. Este equipo de televisión cumple las más actuales normas de dvB-T y dvB-C, de [agosto de 2008], pero no se garantiza la compatibilidad con futuras emisiones de televisión digital terrestre DVB-T y por cable DVB-C. 4. Según los países o regiones donde se utilice este equipo de Tv, algunos proveedores de la televisión por cable pueden cobrar un pago adicional por este servicio y pueden exigir al usuario su aceptación de los términos y condiciones de su empresa. 5. Algunas funciones de televisión digital pueden no estar disponibles en algunos países o regiones y dvB-C o puede no funcionar correctamente con algunos proveedores del servicio de cable. 6. Para obtener más información, póngase en contacto con su centro de atención al cliente de SAMSUNG. ❑ Precauciones al mostrar en la pantalla una imagen fija la imagen fija puede causar daños permanentes en la pantalla del televisor. ● No muestre una imagen fija ni parcialmente fija en la pantalla lCd durante más de 2 horas, ya que se podría producir una retención de la imagen en la pantalla. Este fenómeno de retención de imágenes también se denomina “quemadura de pantalla”. Para evitar que se produzca esa persistencia de la imagen, reduzca el nivel de brillo y de contraste de la pantalla cuando muestre imágenes fijas. ● El uso del televisor lCd en formato 4:3 durante un tiempo prolongado puede dejar rastros de bordes en las partes izquierda, derecha y central de la pantalla debido a las diferencias en la emisión lumínica de la pantalla. reproducir un dvd o una videoconsola puede causar un efecto similar en la pantalla. la garantía no cubre estos daños. ● ver imágenes fijas de videojuegos y PC durante más tiempo del indicado puede producir imágenes fantasma parciales. Para evitar este efecto, reduzca el ‘brillo’ y el ‘contraste’ cuando vea imágenes fijas. © 2010 Samsung electronics Co., ltd. reservados todos los derechos. BN68-03043A.indb 1 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:40Español - 1 ❑ Símbolo N O T Nota Botón de una pulsación Botón TOOlS Pulsar INFORMACIÓN GENERAL ■ Aspecto general del panel de control ...................................2 ■ Accesorios............................................................................3 ■ Aspecto general del panel de conexiones............................4 ■ Mando a distancia ................................................................6 ■ Instalación de las pilas en el mando a distancia ..................6 FUNCIONAMIENTO ■ visualización de los menús ..................................................7 ■ Cómo poner el televisor en modo de espera........................8 ■ Función Plug & Play .............................................................8 ■ Visualización de la pantalla ..................................................9 CONTROL DE LOS CANALES ■ Configuración del menú de canales .....................................9 ■ Gestión de los canales ......................................................12 CONTROL DE LA IMAGEN ■ Configuración del menú de imagen....................................14 ■ Uso del televisor como una pantalla de ordenador (PC)....16 ■ Ajuste del televisor con el ordenador .................................17 CONTROL DEL SONIDO ■ Configuración del menú de sonido.....................................18 ■ Selección del modo de sonido............................................19 CONFIGURACIÓN ■ Configuración del menú de configuración ..........................20 ENTRADA / ASISTENCIA TÉCNICA ■ Configuración del menú de entrada ...................................23 ■ Configuración del menú de ayuda......................................23 RECOMENDACIONES DE USO ■ Función de teletexto ...........................................................25 ■ Cómo ajustar el soporte (sólo para el modelo de 19 pulgadas)............................................................................26 ■ Cómo ajustar el ángulo del televisor (sólo el modelo de 19 pulgadas) ........................................26 ■ Instalación de dispositivos de montaje que cumplen las normas vESA (sólo el modelo de 19 pulgadas).................27 ■ Uso de las cubiertas decorativas (sólo para el modelo de 19 pulgadas)................................27 ■ Instalación del soporte........................................................28 ■ Instalación del equipo de montaje en la pared...................28 ■ Uso del bloqueo Kensington antirrobos..............................28 ■ Seguridad en el espacio de instalación..............................29 ■ Fijación del televisor a la pared..........................................29 ■ Solución de problemas.......................................................30 ■ Especificaciones.................................................................33 CONTENIDO Español BN68-03043A.indb 1 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:40Español - 2 INFORMACIÓN GENERAL ¦ Aspecto general del panel de control N El color y la forma del producto pueden variar según el modelo. N Puede usar un botón si pulsa los botones del panel lateral. 4 1 2 3 5 6 8 8 7 1 SOURCE E: Cambia entre todas las fuentes de entrada disponibles. En el menú en pantalla, utilice este botón de igual modo que el botón ENTERE del mando a distancia. 2 MENU: Púlselo para ver un menú en pantalla con las opciones del televisor. 3Y: Púlselos para subir o bajar el volumen. En el menú en pantalla, utilice estos botones Y de igual modo que los botones ◄ y ► del mando a distancia. 4Z: Permiten cambiar de canal. En el menú en pantalla, utilice estos botones Z de igual modo que los botones ▼ y ▲ del mando a distancia. 5 P (ENCENDIDO): Púlselo para encender o apagar el Tv. 6 SENSOR DEL MANDO A DISTANCIA: El mando a distancia debe dirigirse hacia este punto del televisor. 7 INDICADOR DE ALIMENTACIÓN: Parpadea y se apaga cuando se enciende el aparato y se ilumina en el modo en espera. 8 ALTAVOCES BN68-03043A.indb 2 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:40Español - 3 ¦ Accesorios Mando a distancia y 2 pilas AAA Cable de alimentación Cubierta del orificio inferior (sólo modelos de 22 pulgadas) Paño de limpieza (M4 X l16) equipo de montaje mural (sólo modelos de 19 pulgadas) Cubierta decorativa (sólo modelos de 19 pulgadas) Tornillos del soporte x 4 (sólo modelos de 22 pulgadas) ● Owner’s Instructions ● Warranty card ● Safety Guide N Asegúrese de que los siguientes elementos se incluyen con el televisor de pantalla lCd. Si falta alguno, póngase en contacto con su distribuidor. N Tarjeta de garantía/Guía de seguridad (no disponible en todos los lugares) N El color y la forma de los componentes pueden variar según el modelo. BN68-03043A.indb 3 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:41Español - 4 ¦ Aspecto general del panel de conexiones N El color y la forma del producto pueden variar según el modelo. N Cada vez que conecte un dispositivo externo al televisor, compruebe que la unidad esté desconectada de la alimentación. N Cuando conecte un dispositivo externo, debe hacer coincidir los colores del terminal de conexión y del cable. 1 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) – Se conecta a un componente de audio digital como un receptor del sistema Home Cinema. N Cuando los terminales HdMI IN están conectados, el terminal DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) del televisor genera sólo 2 salidas de canales de audio. Para escuchar el audio de 5.1 canales, conecte el terminal Optical del reproductor de dvd/Blu-ray o del decodificador de cable/satélite directamente a un amplificador o a un sistema Home Cinema, no al televisor. 2 SERVICE – Conector para la actualización del software. 3 HDMI / PC IN [HDMI (DVI), AUDIO, PC] – Se conecta al terminal HDMI de un dispositivo con una salida HDMI. N No se necesita conexión de audio adicional para una conexión de HDMI a HDMI. N ¿Qué es HdMI? HdMI, o interfaz multimedia de alta definición, es una interfaz que permite la transmisión de señales digitales de audio y de vídeo mediante un solo cable. la diferencia entre los dispositivos HdMI y dvI es que el HdMI es más pequeño, tiene instalada la función de codificación HdCP (protección alta de la copia digital del ancho de banda) y es compatible con el sonido digital de varios canales. N Use el terminal HDMI / PC IN [HDMI (DVI)] para la conexión de DVI a un dispositivo externo. Use un cable de DVI a HdMI o un adaptador dvI-HdMI (de dvI a HdMI) para la conexión de vídeo y los terminales HDMI / PC IN [AUDIO] para el audio. Cuando se usa una conexión de cable HDMI/DVI, se debe conectar en el terminal HDMI / PC IN [HDMI (DVI)]. HDMI / PC IN [AUDIO] – Permite conectar al terminal de salida de audio del PC. – Salidas de audio DVI para dispositivos externos. HDMI / PC IN [PC] – Se conecta al terminal de salida de vídeo del PC. N Si el ordenador admite una conexión HDMI, se puede conectar ésta al terminal HDMI / PC IN [HDMI (DVI)]. N Si el ordenador admite una conexión DVI, se puede conectar ésta al terminal HDMI / PC IN [HDMI (DVI)] / [AUDIO]. 4 AV IN [VIDEO] / [R-AUDIO-L] – Conecte el cable rCA a un dispositivo A/v externo adecuado, como, por ejemplo, un vídeo, un dvd o una cámara de vídeo. – Conecte los cables de sonido rCA al terminal [R-AUDIO-L] del aparato y los otros extremos a los conectores de salida de sonido correspondientes en el dispositivo A/V. 6 7 1 2 3 4 0 9 8 5 [Panel posterior del TV] Entrada de alimentación BN68-03043A.indb 4 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:42Español - 5 5 ANT IN – Se conecta a un sistema de televisión por cable o antena. 6 ranura COMMON INTERFACE – Si no se inserta una ‘TArJETA CI’ con algunos canales, en la pantalla aparece ‘Señal codificada’. – En 2 o 3 minutos aparecerá en la pantalla la información del enlace que contiene un número telefónico, un identificador de TArJETA CI, un identificador del sistema y demás información. Si aparece un mensaje de error, póngase en contacto con su proveedor de servicios. – Si ha terminado la configuración de la información del canal, aparecerá el mensaje ‘Actualiz. completa’, que indica que la lista de canales ya se ha actualizado. N debe obtener una TArJETA CI en un proveedor local de servicios. Para retirar la TArJETA CI, extráigala cuidadosamente con los dedos, puesto que si cae al suelo se puede dañar. N Inserte la tarjeta CI en la dirección marcada sobre ella. N la ubicación de la ranura COMMON INTERFACE puede variar según los modelos. N El módulo CAM no se admite en algunos países o zonas; consulte a su distribuidor local. 7 BLOQUEO KENSINGTON (según el modelo) – El bloqueo Kensington (opcional) es un dispositivo que se utiliza para fijar físicamente el sistema cuando se utiliza en un sitio público. Si desea usar un dispositivo de bloqueo, póngase en contacto con el distribuidor donde adquirió el televisor. N la ubicación del Bloqueo Kensington puede variar según los modelos. 8 Terminal de los auriculares – los auriculares pueden estar conectados a la salida de auriculares del aparato. Cuando los auriculares están conectados, se desactivará el sonido de los altavoces incorporados. 9 COMPONENT IN – Conecte los cables de vídeo de componentes (opcionales) al conector de componentes (PR, PB, Y) de la parte posterior del equipo y los otros extremos a los conectores de salida de vídeo de los componentes correspondientes en el dTv o DVD. – Si desea conectar tanto el decodificador como el dTv (o dvd), deberá conectar el decodificador al dTv (o dvd) y conectar el dTv (o dvd) al conector de componentes (PR, PB, Y) de su aparato. – los conectores PR, PB e Y de los dispositivos de componentes (dTv o dvd) algunas veces están etiquetados como Y, B-Y y r-Y o Y, Cb y Cr. – Conecte los cables de audio rCA (opcionales) al terminal [R-AUDIO-L] de la parte posterior del aparato y los otros extremos a los conectores de salida de audio correspondientes en el DTV o DVD. 0 EXT (RGB) Conector entrada Salida vídeo Audio (I / D) rGB vídeo + Audio (I / d) EXT O O O Sólo está disponible la salida de Tv o dTv. – Terminales de entrada o salida para dispositivos externos, como aparatos de vídeo, reproductores de dvd, consolas de videojuegos o reproductores de videodiscos. BN68-03043A.indb 5 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:42Español - 6 ¦ Mando a distancia N Puede utilizar el mando a una distancia del televisor de hasta 7 metros. N El exceso de luz puede influir en el rendimiento del mando a distancia. N El color y la forma del producto pueden variar según el modelo. 1 POWER: Botón de suspensión del televisor. 2 BOTONES NUMÉRICOS: Permiten cambiar de canal. 3 FAV.CH : Se usa para mostrar las listas de canales favoritos en la pantalla. 4Y : Púlselos para subir o bajar el volumen. 5 SOURCE : Púlselo para mostrar y seleccionar las fuentes de vídeo disponibles. 6 INFO : Púlselo para mostrar información en la pantalla. 7 TOOLS: Se usa para seleccionar rápidamente las funciones que se usan con mayor frecuencia. 8 CH LIST : Muestra la lista de canales en la pantalla. 9 BOTONES DE COLORES: Use estos botones en la Lista de canales, menús, etc. ! TV: Selecciona directamente el modo TV. @ PRE-CH : Permite volver al canal que se ha estado viendo anteriormente. # MUTEM: Púlselo para cortar temporalmente el sonido. $ P

: Permiten cambiar de canal. % MENU : Muestra el menú principal en pantalla. ^ GUIDE : visualización de la Guía electrónica de programas (EPG). & RETURN : vuelve al menú anterior * ARRIBA▲ / ABAJO▼ / IZQUIERDA◄ / DERECHA► / ENTERE: Úselo para seleccionar los elementos del menú en la pantalla y cambiar los valores del menú. ( EXIT: Púlselo para salir del menú. ) SUBT. : visualización de subtítulos digitales a AD: Selección de la descripción de audio. Funciones de teletexto 5 0 : Selección del modo de teletexto (lIST/FlOF) 6 5 : Mostrar el teletexto 7 4 : Selección del tamaño del teletexto 8 8 : Guardar teletexto 9 Selección de tema de Fastext 0/ : Selecciona alternativamente Teletext, Double o Mix. ! :: Sale de la pantalla de teletexto @ 1 : Página secundaria del teletexto $ 2 : Página siguiente del teletexto 3 : Página anterior del teletexto % 6 : Índice del teletexto & 9 : retener teletexto ( 7 : Cancelar teletexto ¦ Instalación de las pilas en el mando a distancia 1. levante la tapa de la parte posterior del mando a distancia, como se muestra en la ilustración. 2. Inserte dos pilas de tamaño AAA. N respete los extremos ‘+’ y ‘–’ de las pilas que se indican en el diagrama del interior del compartimiento. 3. Vuelva a poner la tapa. N Saque las pilas y guárdelas en un lugar fresco y seco si no va a utilizar el mando a distancia durante un período de tiempo prolongado. N Si el mando a distancia no funciona, haga estas comprobaciones: ● ¿Está encendido el televisor? ● ¿Están intercambiados los polos positivos y negativos de las pilas? ● ¿Se han agotado las pilas? ● ¿Ha habido un corte de luz o el cable está desenchufado? ● ¿Hay un fluorescente o un neón a poca distancia? 1 2 4 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 ! @ # $ & * ( ) a % ^ BN68-03043A.indb 6 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:42Español - 7 FUNCIONAMIENTO ¦ Visualización de los menús Antes de usar el televisor, siga estos pasos para saber cómo desplazarse por el menú, con el fin de seleccionar y ajustar las diferentes funciones. 1. Pulse el botón MENU. Aparece el menú principal en la pantalla. Hay iconos en el lado izquierdo: Imagen, Sonido, Canal, Configuración, Entrada, Aplicación, Asistencia técnica. 2. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar uno de los iconos. Pulse el botón ◄ o ► para acceder al submenú del icono. 3. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para ir a los elementos del menú. Pulse el botón ENTERE para acceder a los elementos del menú. 4. Pulse el botón ▲/▼/◄/► para cambiar los elementos seleccionados. N Pulse el botón RETURN para volver al menú anterior. 5. Pulse el botón EXIT para salir del menú. Uso de los botones del mando a distancia Botón Operaciones Botón Operaciones MENUm Mostrar el menú principal en pantalla. ▲/▼/◄/►/ ENTERE Mover el cursor y seleccionar un elemento. elegir el elemento seleccionado. Confirmar la configuración. RUTURNR volver al menú anterior. EXITe Salir del menú en pantalla. Ejemplo: Configuración del brillo del televisor en el menú Picture „ Ajuste del brillo a 80 1. Pulse el botón MENU para ver el menú. 2. Pulse de nuevo el botón ENTERE para seleccionar Imagen. 3. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar Brillo. 4. Pulse el botón ENTERE. 5. Pulse los botones ◄ o ► hasta que el brillo llegue a 80. 6. Pulse el botón ENTERE. N Pulse el botón EXIT para salir del menú. Modo : Estándar ► luz de fondo : 7 Contraste : 95 Brillo : 45 Nitidez : 50 Color : 50 Matiz (v/r) : v50 / r50 Imagen Modo : Estándar ► luz de fondo : 7 Contraste : 95 Brillo : 45 Nitidez : 50 Color : 50 Matiz (v/r) : v50 / r50 Imagen luz de fondo : 7 Contraste : 95 Brillo : 45 ► Nitidez : 50 Color : 50 Matiz (v/r) : v50 / r50 Configuración avanzada Opciones de imagen reinicio de la imagen Imagen U Mover L Ajustar E entrar R Volver Brillo 45 U Mover L Ajustar E entrar R Volver Brillo 80 Modo : Estándar ► luz de fondo : 7 Contraste : 95 Brillo : 45 Nitidez : 50 Color : 50 Matiz (v/r) : v50 / r50 Imagen BN68-03043A.indb 7 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:43Español - 8 ¦ Cómo poner el televisor en modo de espera El aparato puede ponerse en modo de espera para reducir el consumo eléctrico. El modo de espera es muy útil si desea interrumpir la visualización momentáneamente (durante la comida, por ejemplo). 1. Pulse el botón POWERP del mando a distancia. N la pantalla se apaga y aparece un indicador de modo de espera en el equipo. 2. Para volver a encenderlo, sólo tiene que volver a pulsar el botón POWERP. N No deje el aparato en modo de espera durante períodos largos de tiempo (cuando está de vacaciones, por ejemplo). lo mejor es desenchufar el aparato de la red eléctrica y de la antena. ¦ Función Plug & Play Cuando el televisor se enciende por primera vez, los valores se inician correlativamente de forma automática. 1. Pulse el botón POWER del mando a distancia. Aparece el mensaje You can set the menu language.. 2. Seleccione el idioma con los botones ▲ o ▼. Pulse el botón ENTERE para confirmar la elección. 3. Pulse los botones ◄ o ► para seleccionar Demo tienda o Uso doméstico y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. N Es recomendable configurar el televisor en el modo Uso doméstico para obtener la mejor imagen en un entorno doméstico. N Demo tienda sólo es necesario en los entornos comerciales. N Si accidentalmente se configura la unidad en el modo Demo tienda y se desea volver a Uso doméstico (Estándar): Pulse el botón del volumen del televisor. Cuando se muestra la OSd del volumen, mantenga pulsado el botón MENU del televisor durante 5 segundos. 4. Pulse el botón ENTERE. Seleccione el país pulsando los botones ▲ o ▼. Pulse el botón ENTERE para confirmar la elección. 5. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar Aérea o Cable y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. N Aérea: señal de la antena Aérea. Cable: señal de la antena de Cable. 6. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar la fuente de canal que desea memorizar. Pulse el botón ENTERE para seleccionar Empezar. N Digital y Analógico: Canales digitales y analógicos. Digital: Canales digitales. Analógico: Canales analógicos. N Al configurar la fuente de antena en Cable, se muestra un paso para permitirle configurar un valor para la búsqueda de canales digitales. Para obtener más información, consulte Canal → Guardado automático. N la búsqueda de canales se iniciará y terminará automáticamente. N Pulse el botón ENTERE en cualquier momento para interrumpir el proceso de memorización. N Una vez memorizados todos los canales disponibles, se muestra el mensaje Configurar el modo del reloj.. 7. Pulse el botón ENTERE. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar Auto y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. N Si se selecciona Manual, Configura la fecha y la hora actuales se muestra. N Si ha recibido una señal digital, se ajustará la hora automáticamente. En caso negativo, seleccione Manual para ajustar el reloj. (consulte la página 20) 8. Se ofrece el método de conexión para proporcionar alta definición de la mejor calidad. después de confirmar el método, pulse el botón ENTERE. 9. Aparecerá el mensaje Disfrute de su televisor. Cuando termine, pulse el botón ENTERE. Si desea reiniciar esta función... 1. Pulse el botón MENU para ver el menú. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar Configuración y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. 2. Pulse de nuevo el botón ENTERE para seleccionar Plug & Play. 3. Escriba su código PIN de 4 dígitos. El código PIN predeterminado para un televisor nuevo es 0-0-0-0. N Si desea cambiar el número PIN, utilice la función Cambiar PIN. (consulte la página 22) N la función Plug & Play está disponible sólo en el modo Tv. Plug & Play You can set the menu language. Menu language : English ► E enter BN68-03043A.indb 8 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:43Español - 9 ¦ Visualización de la pantalla la pantalla identifica el canal actual y el estado de algunos ajustes de audio-vídeo. O Pulse el botón INFO para ver la información. Pulse el botón INFO del mando a distancia. El televisor mostrará el canal, el tipo de sonido y el estado de ciertos ajustes de imagen y sonido. ● ▲, ▼: Puede ver otra información del canal. Si desea ir al canal actualmente seleccionado, pulse el botón ENTERE. ● ◄, ►: Puede ver la información de programas del canal actual. N Pulse el botón INFO otra vez o espere unos 10 segundos; la información desaparecerá automáticamente. CONTROL DE LOS CANALES ¦ Configuración del menú de canales ❑ País N Aparece la pantalla para la introducción del número PIN. Escriba su código PIN de 4 dígitos. „ Canal analógico Se puede cambiar el país de los canales analógicos. „ Canal digital Se puede cambiar el país de los canales digitales. ❑ Guardado automático Se puede explorar los rangos de frecuencia disponibles (la disponibilidad depende del país). Puede que los números de programa asignados automáticamente no correspondan a los números de programa reales o deseados. N Si el canal está bloqueado con la función Segur. niños aparece la ventana para la introducción del código PIN. „ Aérea / Cable Fuente de antena que guardar ● Digital y Analógico: Canales digitales y analógicos. ● Digital: Canales digitales. ● Analógico: Canales analógicos. Al seleccionar ‘Cable → Digital y Analógico’ o ‘Cable → Digital’ Proporcione un valor para explorar los canales de cable. ● M. Búsqueda → Completa / Red / Rápida N Rápida – ID red: Muestra el código de identificación de la red. – Frecuencia: Muestra la frecuencia del canal. (Es diferente en cada país) – Modulación: Muestra los valores de modulación disponibles. – Velocidad símbolos: Muestra las velocidades de símbolo disponibles. N Busca todos los canales de las emisoras activas y los memoriza en el televisor. N Si desea detener el guardado automático, pulse el botón ENTERE. Aparece el mensaje ¿Detener programación automática?. Pulse los botones ◄ o ► para seleccionar Sí y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. País ► Guardado automático Guardado manual Opción de búsqueda de cable Guía actual y próxima Guía completa Guía predeterminada : Guía completa Canal DTV Air 15 abc1 18:00 ~ 6:00 18:11 Thu 6 Jan life On venus Avenue Unclassified No Detaild Information ¦ INFO BN68-03043A.indb 9 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:43Español - 10 ❑ Guardado manual N Busca un canal manualmente y lo memoriza en el televisor. N Si el canal está bloqueado con la función Segur. niños aparece la ventana para la introducción del código PIN. „ Canal digital Almacenamiento manual de canales digitales. N Canal digital sólo está disponible en el modo de Tv digital. ● Canal: Establezca el número del canal con los botones ▲, ▼ o numéricos (0~9). ● Frecuencia: Establezca la frecuencia con los botones numéricos. ● Ancho de banda: Establezca el ancho de banda con los botones ▲, ▼ o numéricos (0~9). N Una vez finalizada, la lista de canales se actualiza automáticamente. „ Canal analógico Almacenamiento manual de canales analógicos. ● Programa (número de programa que asignar a un canal): Establezca el número del programa con los botones ▲, ▼ o numéricos (0~9). ● Sistema de color→ Auto / PAL / SECAM / NTSC4.43: Establezca el sistema del color con los botones ▲ o ▼. ● Sistema de sonido → BG / DK / I / L: Establezca el sistema del sonido con los botones ▲ o ▼. ● Canal (si conoce el número de canal que desea guardar): Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar C (canal aéreo) o S (canal por cable). Pulse el botón ► y después ▲, ▼ o los botones numéricos (0~9) para seleccionar el número que desee. N También puede seleccionar el número de canal directamente pulsando los botones numéricos (0~9). N Si se produce un sonido anormal o no se produce sonido, vuelva a seleccionar el estándar de sonido adecuado. ● Buscar (si no se conoce el número de los canales): Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para iniciar la búsqueda. El sintonizador explora el rango de frecuencia hasta que se recibe en la pantalla el primer canal o el canal que se ha seleccionado. ● Guardar (cuando guarde el canal y el número de programa asociado): Establezca OK pulsando el botón ENTERE. N Modo de canal – P (modo de programa): Al finalizar la sintonización, las estaciones de emisión de su zona se habrán asignado a los números de posición comprendidos entre P00 y P99. Puede seleccionar un canal introduciendo el número de posición en este modo. – C (modo de canal aéreo): Puede seleccionar un canal introduciendo el número asignado a cada emisora aérea en este modo. – S (modo de canal por cable): Puede seleccionar un canal introduciendo el número asignado a cada canal por cable en este modo. ❑ Opción de búsqueda de cable (según el país) Establece opciones adicionales de búsqueda, como la frecuencia y la velocidad de símbolo para la búsqueda de red por cable. ● Frecuencia (Empezar ~ Stop): Muestra la frecuencia del canal. ● Modulación: Muestra los valores de modulación disponibles. ● Velocidad símbolos: Muestra las velocidades de símbolo disponibles. ❑ Guía actual y próxima / Guía completa la información de la Guía electrónica de programas (EPG) la proporcionan las emisoras. las entradas de los programas pueden aparecer vacías u obsoletas, según la información proporcionada por un canal determinado. la pantalla se actualiza dinámicamente tan pronto como hay nueva información disponible. N Para obtener una descripción detallada sobre el uso de Guía actual y próxima y Guía completa, consulte la página 11. O También puede ver el menú de la guía pulsando el botón GUIDE. (Para configurar la Guía predeterminada, siga las instrucciones.) „ Guía actual y próxima Se muestra la información del programa actual y siguiente de los seis canales señalados en la columna izquierda. „ Guía completa Muestra la información de los programas ordenados por hora en segmentos de una hora. Muestra la información de dos horas de programa que se puede desplazar adelante o atrás en el tiempo. BN68-03043A.indb 10 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:43Español - 11 ❑ Guía predeterminada → Guía actual y próxima / Guía completa Puede decidir que se muestre la Guía actual y próxima o la Guía completa cuando se pulsa el botón GUIDE del mando a distancia. ❑ Lista de canales Para obtener una descripción detallada sobre el uso de la Lista de canales, consulte las instrucciones de 'Gestión de los canales'. O Puede seleccionar estas opciones simplemente pulsando el botón CH LIST del mando a distancia. ❑ Modo Canal Cuando se pulsa el botón P >/< se cambian los canales en la lista de canales seleccionados. „ Canales añadidos los canales se cambian en la lista de canales memorizados. „ Canales favoritos los canales se cambian en la lista de canales favoritos. ❑ Sintonización fina Si la recepción es clara, no tiene que realizar la sintonización fina del canal, ya que esta operación se hace de forma automática durante la búsqueda y la memorización. Si la señal es débil o está distorsionada, puede que deba realizar manualmente la sintonización fina del canal. N los canales que se han ajustado con sintonización fina se marcan con un asterisco ‘*’ a la derecha del número de canal en la banda del canal. N Para reiniciar la sintonía fina, seleccione Rest. pulsando los botones ▲ o ▼ y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. N Sólo puede ajustarse la sintonización de los canales de televisión analógicos. Uso de Guía actual y próxima / Guía completa Para... Debe... ver un programa en la lista EPG Seleccionar una posición pulsando los botones ▲, ▼, ◄, ►. Salir de la guía Pulsar el botón azul Si el programa siguiente está seleccionado, se concreta con un icono de reloj. Si se vuelve a pulsar el botón ENTERE y se pulsa los botones ◄, ► para seleccionar la Cancelar progr., la programación se cancela y el icono del reloj desaparece. Ver información de los programas Seleccionar un programa pulsando los botones ▲, ▼, ◄, ►. A continuación pulse el botón INFO cuando se resalte el programa deseado. El título del programa se muestra en la parte superior del centro de la pantalla. Pulse el botón INFO para obtener información detallada. En la información detallada se incluye el número del canal, la hora de ejecución, la barra de estado, el nivel del control paterno, la información de calidad del vídeo (Hd/Sd), los modos de sonido, subtítulos o teletexto, los idiomas de los subtítulos o del teletexto y un resumen breve del programa seleccionado. ‘...’ se muestra si el resumen es largo. Intercambiar entre Guía actual y próxima o Guía completa Pulsar el botón rojo varias veces. En Guía completa desplazarse rápidamente hacia atrás (24 horas). desplazarse rápidamente hacia adelante (24 horas). Pulsar el botón verde varias veces. Pulsar el botón amarillo varias veces. Guía completa dTv Cable 900 f tn 2:10 Mar 1 Jun Freshmen On Campus 2:00 - 2:30 No Detailed Information Hoy 2:00 - 3:00 3:00 - 4:00 Mint extra loaded Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC The Distillery Smash Hits! Sunday 1 f tn 2 ITv Play 3 Kerrang! 4 Kiss 5 oneword ▼ 6 Smash Hits! No information Freshmen O. Ver INFO Información ■ actual/próxima ■ +24 Horas ■ Salir Guía actual y próxima dTv Cable 900 f tn 2:10 Mar 1 Jun Freshmen On Campus 2:00 - 2:30 No Detailed Information Actual Siguiente Mint extra loaded Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC The Distillery Smash Hits! Sunday 1 f tn 2 ITv Play 3 Kerrang! 4 Kiss 5 oneword ▼ 6 Smash Hits! Kisstory No information No information No information Street Hypn.. Ver INFO Información ■ Guía completa ■ Salir BN68-03043A.indb 11 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:44Español - 12 ¦ Gestión de los canales Con este menú puede agregar y borrar los canales o configurarlos como favoritos y usar la guía de programas de las emisoras digitales. „ Todos los canales Muestra todos los canales disponibles actualmente. „ Canales añadidos Muestra todos los canales añadidos. „ Favoritos Muestra todos los canales favoritos. O Para seleccionar los canales favoritos que ha configurado, pulse el botón FAV.CH del mando a distancia. „ Programado Muestra todos los programas actualmente reservados. N Seleccione un canal en las pantallas Todos los canales, Canales añadidos o Favoritos con los botones ▲ / ▼ y pulse el botón ENTERE. A continuación puede ver el canal seleccionado. N Uso de los botones de colores en la lista de canales – rojo (Tipo de canal): Cambiar entre TV, Radio, Datos / Otr y Todos. – Verde (Zoom): Aumenta o reduce un número de canal. – Amarillo (Selección ): Selecciona varias listas de canales. Puede realizar las funciones de añadir, borrar, añadir a favoritos, borrar de favoritos, bloquear o desbloquear con varios canales al mismo tiempo. Seleccione los canales que desee y pulse el botón amarillo para configurar los canales seleccionados al mismo tiempo. Aparece la marca c a la izquierda de los canales seleccionados. – TOOLS (Herramientas): Muestra los menús Borrar (o Añadir), Añadir a Favoritos (o Borrar de Favoritos), Bloquear (o Desbloquear), Visual. con temp, Modificac. nombre canal, Ordenar,Modificac. número canal, Seleccionar todos, (o Deselecc. todos), Guardado automático. (los menús de las opciones pueden cambiar, dependiendo de la situación.) N Iconos de la pantalla de estado del canal ● A : Canal analógico. ● c: Canal seleccionado al pulsar el botón amarillo. ● : Canal configurado como favorito. ● ( : Programa que se está emitiendo. ● \ : Canal bloqueado. ● ) : Programa reservado Menú de opciones de la lista de canales (en Todos los canales / Canales añadidos / Favoritos) N Pulse el botón TOOLS para usar el menú de opciones. N los elementos del menú de opciones pueden variar según el estado del canal. „ Añadir / Borrar Puede suprimir o añadir un canal para que se muestren los canales que desee. N Todos los canales borrados se mostrarán en el menú Todos los canales. N Un canal de color gris quiere decir que se ha suprimido. N El menú Añadir sólo aparece con los canales borrados. N También puede borrar un canal en los menús Canales añadidos o Favoritos de la misma manera. „ Añadir a Favoritos / Borrar de Favoritos Puede configurar como favoritos los canales que vea con más frecuencia. T Pulse el botón TOOLS para ver el menú Herramientas. También puede establecer el canal favorito que añadir o suprimir si selecciona Herramientas → Añadir a Favoritos (o Borrar de Favoritos). N Se mostrará el símbolo ‘ ’ y el canal se configurará como favorito. N Todos los canales seleccionados se mostrarán en el menú Favoritos. 824 UKTV Gold 825 UKTV style A 1 C -- A 2 C -- A 3 ♥ C -- A 4 C -- A 5 C -- A 6 C -- A 7 C -- Canales añadidos Todos ■ Tipo de canal ■ Zoom ■ Selección T Herramientas 824 UKTV Gold 825 UKTV style A 1 C -- A 2 C -- A 3 ♥ C -- A 4 C -- A 5 C -- A 6 C -- A 7 C -- Canales añadidos Todos ■ Tipo de canal ■ Zoom ■ Selección T Herramientas Borrar Añadir a Favoritos Bloquear Visualiz. con temporiz. Modificac. nombre canal Ordenar ▼ BN68-03043A.indb 12 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:44Español - 13 „ Bloquear / Desbloquear Se puede bloquear un canal para que no se pueda seleccionar ni visualizar. Está función está disponible sólo cuando Segur. niños está configurado como Act.. (consulte la página 22) N Aparece la pantalla para la introducción del número PIN. Escriba su código PIN de 4 dígitos. N El código PIN predeterminado para un televisor nuevo es 0-0-0-0. Se puede cambiar el PIN seleccionando Change PIN en el menú. N Se muestra el símbolo ‘\’ y el canal queda bloqueado. „ Visualiz. con temporiz. Si reserva un programa que desea ver, el canal se cambia automáticamente al canal reservado en la lista de canales aunque esté viendo otro canal. Para reservar un programa, en primer lugar debe configurar la hora actual. (Consulte la página 20) N Sólo se pueden reservar los canales memorizados. N Puede ajustar el canal, el día, el mes, el año, la hora y el minuto directamente pulsando los botones numéricos del mando a distancia. N la reserva de un programa se muestra en el menú Programa. N Guía de programas digitales y reserva de visualización Si se ha seleccionado un canal digital y se pulsa el botón ► aparece la guía de programas del canal. Se puede reservar un programa mediante el procedimiento descrito anteriormente. „ Modificac. nombre canal (sólo canales analógicos) los canales se pueden etiquetar con el propósito de que al seleccionar éstos se pueda ver su nombre. N los nombres de los canales digitales se asignan automáticamente y no se pueden etiquetar. „ Modificac. número canal (sólo canales digitales) También puede editar el número del canal pulsando los botones numéricos del mando a distancia. „ Ordenar (sólo canales analógicos) Esta operación permite cambiar los números de programa de los canales memorizados. Puede que sea necesario realizarla después de la memorización automática. „ Seleccionar todos / Deseleccionar todo ● Seleccionar todos: Puede seleccionar todos los canales de la lista. ● Deseleccionar todo: Puede anular la selección de todos los canales. N Sólo se puede seleccionar Deseleccionar todo si hay canales seleccionados. „ Guardado automático N Si desea más detalles sobre las opciones de configuración, consulte la página 9. N Si el canal está bloqueado con la función Segur. niños aparece la ventana para la introducción del código PIN. Menú de opciones de la lista de canales (en Programmed) Se puede ver, cambiar o borrar una reserva. N Pulse el botón TOOLS para usar el menú de opciones. „ Cambiar información Selecciónelo para cambiar la reserva de visualización. „ Cancelar progr. Selecciónelo para cancelar la reserva de visualización. „ Información Selecciónelo para ver una reserva de visualización. (También se puede cambiar la información de reserva.) „ Seleccionar todos Seleccionar todos los programas reservados. 1 / 1 / 2009 13:59 5 Tv1 Quincy, M.E 18:59 2 Tv3 The equalizer 20:59 2 Tv3 McMillan & Wife Programado Todos ■ Zoom ■ Selección T Herramientas E Información Cambiar información Cancelar progr. Información Seleccionar todos BN68-03043A.indb 13 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:44Español - 14 CONTROL DE LA IMAGEN ¦ Configuración del menú de imagen ❑ Modo Puede seleccionar el tipo de imagen que mejor cumpla sus requisitos de visualización. T Pulse el botón TOOLS para ver el menú Herramientas. También se puede configurar el modo de la imagen seleccionando Herramientas → Modo imagen. „ Dinámico Selecciona la alta definición en la imagen, en una habitación luminosa. „ Estándar Selecciona la visualización óptima de la imagen, en un entorno normal. „ Película Selecciona la visualización para ver películas en una sala oscura. ❑ Luz de fondo / Contraste / Brillo / Nitidez / Color / Matiz (V/R) El televisor tiene varias opciones de configuración que permiten controlar la calidad de la imagen. ● Luz de fondo: Ajusta el brillo de la luz de fondo de la pantalla lCd. ● Contraste: Ajusta el nivel del contraste de la imagen. ● Brillo: Ajusta el nivel del brillo de la imagen. ● Nitidez: Ajusta la definición de los bordes de la imagen. ● Color: Ajusta la saturación del color de la imagen. ● Matiz (V/R): Ajusta el matiz del color de la imagen. N Seleccione el modo de imagen que desee ajustar en primer lugar. los valores ajustados se guardan para cada modo de imagen. N Cuando se cambian Luz de fondo, Contraste, Brillo, Nitidez, Color o Matiz (V/R), la presentación en la pantalla OSd se ajusta consecuentemente. N en los modos analógicos TV, Ext., AV del sistema PAl no se puede utilizar la función Matiz (V/R). N En el modo PC, sólo se pueden realizar cambios en las opciones Luz de fondo, Contraste y Brillo. N la configuración de cada dispositivo externo conectado a una entrada del televisor se puede ajustar y guardar. N la energía consumida durante el uso se puede reducir significativamente si se disminuye el nivel del brillo de la imagen, lo cual reduce el costo total de funcionamiento. ❑ Configuración avanzada los nuevos televisores Samsung permiten una configuración más precisa aun de la imagen que los modelos anteriores. Consulte más adelante cómo realizar una configuración detallada. N Configuración avanzada está disponible en los modos Estándar o Película. N En el modo PC, sólo se pueden cambiar Gamma y Balance de blanco entre los elementos de Configuración avanzada. „ Tono del negro → Des. / Oscuro / Más oscuro / El más oscuro Se puede seleccionar el nivel de negro en la pantalla para ajustar la profundidad de ésta. „ Contraste dinám. → Des. / Bajo / Medio / Alto Se puede ajustar el contraste de la pantalla para conseguir un contraste óptimo. „ Gamma Se puede ajustar la intensidad de los colores primarios (rojo, verde, azul). „ Gama de colores la gama de colores es una matriz compuesta por los colores rojo, verde y azul. Seleccione su gama favorita de color y disfrute de unos colores auténticamente naturales. ● Original: Proporciona tonos de color profundos y ricos. ● Auto: Ajusta automáticamente al tono de color más natural de acuerdo con las fuentes del programa. Modo : Estándar ► luz de fondo : 7 Contraste : 95 Brillo : 45 Nitidez : 50 Color : 50 Matiz (v/r) : v50 / r50 Imagen Color : 50 Matiz (v/r) : v50 / r50 Configuración avanzada ► Opciones de imagen reinicio de la imagen Imagen BN68-03043A.indb 14 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:45Español - 15 „ Balance de blanco Se puede ajustar la temperatura del color para conseguir colores más naturales. ● Rojo - / Verde - / Azul - / Rojo + / Verde + / Azul +: Puede ajustar la ‘temperatura’ del color en las áreas claras si cambia los valores de r, G, B. Sólo se recomienda para los usuarios avanzados. ● Rest.: El balance de blanco anteriormente ajustado se restablecerá con los valores predefinidos de fábrica. „ Tono de piel Tono piel Permite acentuar el ‘Tono de piel Tono piel’ rosado de las imágenes. N Al cambiar el valor de ajuste se actualizará la pantalla ajustada. „ Mejora del borde → Des. / Act. Permite acentuar los bordes de los objetos en las imágenes. ❑ Opciones de imagen N En el modo PC sólo se pueden hacer cambios en los elementos Tono color y Tamaño del menú Opciones de imagen. „ Tono color → Frío / Normal / Cálido1 / Cálido2 Puede seleccionar el tono de color que le resulte más cómodo para la vista. N la configuración de cada dispositivo externo conectado a una entrada del televisor se puede ajustar y guardar. N Cálido1 o Cálido2 sólo están disponibles cuando el modo de imagen es Película. „ Tamaño Puede seleccionar el tamaño de imagen que mejor se adapte a sus requisitos de visualización. T Pulse el botón TOOLS para ver el menú Herramientas. También se puede configurar el tamaño seleccionando Herramientas → Tamaño de imagen. ● Ancho auto.: Ajusta automáticamente el tamaño de la imagen a la relación de aspecto de la pantalla 16:9. ● 16:9: Ajusta el tamaño de la imagen a 16:9, adecuado para ver los dvd o las emisiones en formato ancho. ● Zoom ancho: Aumenta el tamaño de la imagen más que 4:3. ● Zoom: Amplía la imagen ancha de 16:9 (en sentido vertical) para que la imagen ocupe el tamaño de la pantalla. ● 4:3: Es la configuración predeterminada para una película de vídeo o una emisión normal. ● Ajuste en pantalla Ajuste pantalla: Use la función para ver la imagen completa sin cortes cuando la entrada de la señal sea HDMI (720p / 1080i) o Componente (1080i). N Según la fuente de entrada, las opciones de tamaño de la imagen pueden variar. N las opciones disponibles pueden diferir según el modelo seleccionado. N En el modo PC, sólo se pueden ajustar los modos 16:9 y 4:3. N la configuración de cada dispositivo externo conectado a una entrada del televisor se puede ajustar y guardar. N Puede producirse una retención temporal de imagen cuando se ve una imagen estática durante más de dos horas. N Zoom ancho: Pulse el botón ► para seleccionar Posición y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para desplazar la imagen hacia arriba o hacia abajo. A continuación pulse el botón ENTERE. N Zoom: Pulse el botón ► para seleccionar Posición y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para desplazar la imagen hacia arriba o hacia abajo. A continuación pulse el botón ENTERE. Pulse el botón ► para seleccionar Tamaño y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. Utilice los botones ▲ o ▼ para ampliar o reducir el tamaño de la imagen en dirección vertical. A continuación pulse el botón ENTERE. N Después de seleccionar Ajuste en pantalla Ajuste pantalla en los modos HdMI (1080i) o Component (1080i): Seleccione Posición con los botones ◄ o ►. Use los botones ▲, ▼, ◄ o ► para mover la imagen. Rest.: Pulse los botones ◄ o ► para seleccionar Rest. y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. Puede inicializar la configuración. N Si se usa la función Ajuste en pantalla Ajuste pantalla con la entrada HDMI 720p, en los laterales superior, inferior, izquierdo y derecho de la pantalla se cortará 1 línea como en la función de sobreexploración. „ Modo Pantalla → 16:9 / Zoom ancho / Zoom / 4:3 Cuando se configura el tamaño de la imagen como Ancho auto. en un televisor panorámico 16:9, se puede determinar el tamaño de la imagen para ver una imagen en pantalla panorámica 4:3 WSS o ninguna. Cada país europeo exige un tamaño de imagen diferente, de modo que esta función está concebida con la intención de que los usuarios la seleccionen. ● 16:9: Ajusta la imagen al modo panorámico 16:9. ● Zoom ancho: Aumenta el tamaño de la imagen más que 4:3. ● Zoom: Aumenta el tamaño de la imagen verticalmente en la pantalla. ● 4:3: Ajusta la imagen al modo normal 4:3. N Esta función está disponible en el modo Ancho auto.. N Esta función no está disponible en los modos PC, Componente o HDMI. BN68-03043A.indb 15 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:45Español - 16 „ Digital NR → Des. / Bajo / Medio / Alto / Auto Si la señal de emisión que recibe el televisor es débil, puede activarse la función digital Noise reduction para reducir la estática y las imágenes superpuestas que pueden aparecer en la pantalla. N Cuando la señal sea débil, seleccione alguna de las otras opciones hasta que se vea una imagen de mejor calidad. „ N.neg HDMI → Normal / Bajo Se puede seleccionar directamente el nivel de negro en la pantalla para ajustar la profundidad de ésta. N Esta función sólo está activa cuando se conecta la entrada externa a HdMI (señales rGB). „ Modo de película → Des. / Auto El televisor se puede configurar para que perciba y procese automáticamente las señales de película de todas las fuentes y ajuste la mejor calidad de imagen. N Modo de película es compatible con TV, AV, COMPONENT(480i/1080i) y HDMI(480i/1080i). ❑ Reinicio de la imagen → Rest. modo imagen / Cancelar restablece todos los ajustes predeterminados. N Seleccione un modo de imagen que desee restaurar. la restauración se realiza en cada modo de imagen. ● Rest. modo imagen: los valores actuales de la imagen vuelven a la configuración predeterminada. ¦ Uso del televisor como una pantalla de ordenador (PC) Configuración del software del PC (basado en Windows XP) A continuación se muestra la configuración de pantalla de Windows para un ordenador típico. Probablemente la pantalla real de su PC sea distinta, según la versión concreta de Windows y de la tarjeta de vídeo que tenga. Aunque las pantallas reales sean diferentes, la información de configuración básica que se aplica en casi todos los casos es la misma. (En caso contrario, póngase en contacto con el fabricante del ordenador o con el distribuidor de Samsung.) 1. Primero, haga clic en ‘Panel de control’ en el menú Inicio de Windows. 2. Cuando aparezca la ventana del panel de control, haga clic en ‘Apariencia y temas’ y aparecerá un cuadro de diálogo. 3. Cuando aparezca la ventana del panel de control, haga clic en ‘Pantalla’ y aparecerá un cuadro de diálogo. 4. Seleccione la ficha ‘Configuración’ en el cuadro de diálogo. Configuración correcta del tamaño (resolución): óptima 1360 x 768 píxeles Si existe una opción de frecuencia vertical en el cuadro de diálogo de configuración de la pantalla, el valor correcto es ‘60’ o ‘60 Hz’. En caso contrario, haga clic en ‘OK’ y salga del cuadro de diálogo. BN68-03043A.indb 16 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:45Español - 17 Modos de pantalla Tanto la posición en la pantalla como el tamaño varían dependiendo del tipo de monitor del PC y de su resolución. Se recomiendan las resoluciones de la tabla. „ Entradas D-Sub y HDMI/DVI Modo Resolución Frecuencia horizontal (KHz) Frecuencia vertical (Hz) Frecuencia de reloj de píxeles (MHz) Polaridad sincr. (H/V) IBM 640 x 350 31,469 70,086 25,175 +/- 720 x 400 31,469 70,087 28,322 -/+ MAC 640 x 480 35,000 66,667 30,240 -/- 832 x 624 49,726 74,551 57,284 -/- VeSA CVT 720 x 576 35,910 59,950 32,750 -/+ 1280 x 720 44,772 59,855 74,500 -/+ 1280 x 720 56,456 74,777 95,750 -/+ VeSA DMT 640 x 480 31,469 59,940 25,175 -/- 640 x 480 37,500 75,000 31,500 -/- 640 x 480 37,861 72,809 31,500 -/- 800 x 600 37,879 60,317 40,000 +/+ 800 x 600 46,875 75,000 49,500 +/+ 800 x 600 48,077 72,188 50,000 +/+ 1024 x 768 48,363 60,004 65,000 -/- 1024 x 768 56,476 70,069 75,000 -/- 1024 x 768 60,023 75,029 78,750 +/+ 1360 x 768 47,712 60,015 85,500 +/+ VeSA GTF 1280 x 720 52,500 70,000 89,040 -/+ N Cuando se usa una conexión de cable HDMI/DVI, se debe conectar en el terminal HDMI (DVI). N No se admite el modo entrelazado. N El aparato puede funcionar incorrectamente si se selecciona un formato de vídeo que no sea estándar. N los modos Independiente y Compuesto no se admiten. SOG no se admite. ¦ Ajuste del televisor con el ordenador N Preselección: Pulse el botón SOURCE para seleccionar el modo PC. ❑ Ajuste automático Esta función permite que la pantalla de PC del equipo se ajuste automáticamente a la señal de vídeo del PC. los valores fino, grueso y posición se ajustan automáticamente. N esta función no se puede utilizar en modo DVI-HDMI. T Pulse el botón TOOLS para ver el menú Herramientas. También se puede configurar esta opción seleccionando Herramientas → Ajuste automático. ❑ Pantalla „ Grueso / Fino el objetivo del ajuste de la calidad de imagen es eliminar o reducir las interferencias. Si el ruido no se elimina mediante la sintonización fina, ajuste la frecuencia lo mejor que pueda (Grueso) y vuelva a realizar la sintonización fina. después de reducir el ruido, vuelva a ajustar la imagen para que quede alineada en el centro de la pantalla. „ Posición de PC Ajuste la posición de la pantalla del PC si no se acopla a la pantalla del Tv. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para ajustar la posición vertical. Pulse los botones ◄ o ► para ajustar la posición horizontal. „ Restablecer imagen Puede recuperar todos los ajustes de imagen predeterminados de fábrica. Brillo : 45 Nitidez : 50 Ajuste automático ► Pantalla Configuración avanzada Opciones de imagen reinicio de la imagen Imagen BN68-03043A.indb 17 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:45Español - 18 CONTROL DEL SONIDO ¦ Configuración del menú de sonido ❑ Modo → Estándar / Música / Película / Voz clara / Personal Se puede seleccionar el modo de sonido que se ajuste mejor a las preferencias personales. T Pulse el botón TOOLS para ver el menú Herramientas. También se puede configurar el modo de sonido seleccionando Herramientas → Modo de sonido. „ Estándar Selecciona el modo de sonido normal. „ Música refuerza la música por encima de las voces. „ Película Ofrece el mejor sonido para películas. „ Voz clara refuerza la voz sobre otros sonidos. „ Personal Mantiene los valores personalizados del sonido. ❑ Ecualizador Es posible ajustar los parámetros del sonido según las preferencias personales. „ Modo Se puede seleccionar el modo de sonido que se ajuste mejor a las preferencias personales. „ Balance Ajusta el balance entre los altavoces izquierdo y derecho. „ 100Hz / 300Hz / 1KHz / 3KHz / 10KHz (ajuste de ancho de banda) Para ajustar el nivel de las diferentes frecuencias de ancho de banda „ Rest. restablece todos los ajustes predeterminados del ecualizador. ❑ SRS TruSurround HD → Des. / Act. SrS TruSurround Hd es una tecnología SrS patentada que solventa el problema de reproducir contenido multicanal 5.1 en dos altavoces. TruSurround proporciona una experiencia de sonido virtual convincente a través de cualquier sistema de reproducción con dos altavoces, incluso con los altavoces internos del televisor. es totalmente compatible con todos los formatos multicanal. ❑ Idioma de audio (sólo canales digitales) Se pueden cambiar los valores predeterminados para los idiomas del audio. Muestra la información del idioma para el flujo de entrada. N Sólo se puede seleccionar uno de los idiomas que ofrece la emisora. N Cuando se visualiza un canal digital se puede seleccionar esta opción. ❑ Formato audio → MPEG / Dolby Digital (sólo canales digitales) Cuando el sonido se emite desde un altavoz principal y un receptor de audio, se puede originar un sonido de eco debido a las diferencias en la velocidad de decodificación entre el altavoz principal y el receptor de audio. En tales casos, use la función Altavoz de TV. N El formato de audio aparece según el tipo de señal de emisión. N Cuando se visualiza un canal digital se puede seleccionar esta opción. Modo : Personal ► ecualizador SrS TruSurround Hd : des. Idioma de audio : - - - Formato audio : - - - Descripción de audio volumen automático : des. Sonido BN68-03043A.indb 18 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:45Español - 19 ❑ Descripción de audio (sólo canales digitales) es una función auxiliar de audio que proporciona una pista de audio adicional para personas con problemas de vista. esta función maneja el flujo de audio de Ad (descripción de audio) cuando se envía desde el emisor con el audio principal. los usuarios pueden activar o desactivar la descripción de audio y controlar el volumen. O Pulse el botón AD del mando a distancia para seleccionar Des. o Act.. „ Descripción de audio → Des. / Act. Activa o desactiva la función de descripción del audio. „ Volumen Se puede ajustar el volumen de la descripción de audio. N Volumen está activo cuando Descripción de audio se configura como Act.. ❑ Volumen automático → Des. / Act. Cada emisora tiene sus propias condiciones de señal y resulta incómodo ajustar el volumen cada vez que se cambia de canal. Esta función permite ajustar automáticamente el volumen de un canal disminuyendo la salida de sonido cuando la señal de modulación es alta o aumentando la salida de sonido cuando la señal de modulación es baja. ❑ Seleccionar altavoz → Altavoz externo / Altavoz de TV Si desea usar unos altavoces independientes, cancele el amplificador interno. N los botones del volumen y MUTE no funcionan cuando Seleccionar altavoz está configurado como Altavoz externo. N Si se selecciona Altavoz externo en el menú Seleccionar altavoz se limita la configuración del sonido. ❑ Reinicio del sonido → Restablecer todo / Rest. m. sonido / Cancelar Puede restaurar la configuración del sonido con los valores predeterminados de fábrica. ¦ Selección del modo de sonido Puede definir el modo de sonido en el menú Herramientas. Cuando se configura Dual l ll, el modo de sonido actual se muestra en la pantalla. Tipo de audio Dual 1 / 2 Predeterminado A2 estéreo Mono MONO Cambio automático estéreo ESTÉREO ↔ MONO Dual DUAL 1 ↔ DUAL 2 DUAL 1 NICAM estéreo Mono MONO Cambio automático estéreo MONO ↔ ESTÉREO Dual MONO ↔ DUAL 1 DUAL 2 DUAL 1 N Si la señal de estéreo es débil y el modo cambia de forma automática, cambie a mono. N Esta función sólo está activa en la señal de sonido estéreo. Está desactivada en la señal de sonido monoaural. N Esta función sólo está disponible en el modo Tv. BN68-03043A.indb 19 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:45Español - 20 CONFIGURACIÓN ¦ Configuración del menú de configuración ❑ Idioma del menú Se puede configurar el idioma de los menús. ❑ Hora „ Reloj Para usar las diferentes funciones del temporizador del televisor es necesario configurar el reloj. N la hora actual aparecerá siempre que se pulse el botón INFO. N Si desconecta el cable de alimentación, debe configurar el reloj de nuevo. ● Modo de reloj Se puede configurar la hora actual manual o automáticamente. – Auto: Configure la hora automáticamente mediante la información de la hora de la emisión digital. – Manual: Configure la hora actual manualmente. N Según la emisora y la señal, la hora automática no se puede ajustar correctamente. En tal caso, debe hacerlo manualmente. N la antena y el cable se deben conectar para ajustar la hora automáticamente. ● Ajustar hora Puede ajustar la hora actual manualmente. N Establezca este elemento cuando configure Modo de reloj como Manual. N Puede ajustar el día, el mes, el año, la hora y el minuto directamente pulsando los botones numéricos del mando a distancia. „ Temp. desc. → Des. / 30 min / 60 min / 90 min / 120 min / 150 min / 180 min El temporizador de desconexión apaga automáticamente el televisor después de un período prefijado (30, 60, 90, 120, 150 y 180 minutos). N Cuando el temporizador llega a 0, el televisor pasa al modo de espera de forma automática. N Para cancelar la función Temp. desc. seleccione Des.. T Pulse el botón TOOLS para ver el menú Herramientas. También puede configurar el temporizador seleccionando Herramientas → Temp. desc.. „ Temporizador 1 / Temporizador 2 / Temporizador 3 la activación y desactivación del temporizador se puede configurar de tres maneras. debe ajustar el reloj en primer lugar. ● Hora encendido: Puede configurar la hora y los minutos y activar o desactivar el temporizador. (Para activar el temporizador con la configuración elegida, establézcalo en Activar.) ● Hora apagado: Puede configurar la hora y los minutos y activar o desactivar el temporizador. (Para activar el temporizador con la configuración elegida, establézcalo en Activar.) ● Volumen: Seleccione el nivel de volumen deseado. ● Antena: Selecc. Aérea o Cable. ● Canal: Permite seleccionar el canal deseado. ● Repetir: Seleccione Una vez, Cada día, Lun~Vie, Lun~Sáb, Sáb~Dom o Manual. N Con Manual seleccionado, pulse el botón ► para seleccionar el día de la semana. Pulse el botón ENTERE sobre el día deseado y aparecerá la marcac. N Puede ajustar la hora, los minutos y el canal pulsando los botones numéricos del mando a distancia. N Apagado automático Si activa el temporizador, el televisor se apagará si no se pulsa ningún botón durante 3 horas, después de que el temporizador lo haya puesto en marcha. Esta función sólo está disponible si el temporizador está activado y evita el recalentamiento que se puede producir si el televisor está encendido durante demasiado tiempo. Plug & Play Idioma del menú : Español ► Hora emisión Seguridad General Configuración BN68-03043A.indb 20 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:46Español - 21 ❑ Emisión „ Subtítulos Se pueden activar o desactivar los subtítulos. Use este menú para configurar el modo de subtítulo. Normal es la opción básica y Duro de oído es la opción para personas con problemas de audición. ● Subtítulos → Des. / Act.: Activa o desactiva los subtítulos. ● Modo → Normal / Duro de oído: Establece el modo de los subtítulos. ● Idioma de los subtítulos: Establece el idioma de los subtítulos. N Si el programa que se está viendo no admite la opción Duro de oído, automáticamente se activa Normal aunque se seleccione Duro de oído. N El inglés es el idioma predeterminado cuando en una emisión no está disponible la selección de idiomas. O Puede seleccionar estas opciones pulsando el botón SUBT del mando a distancia. „ Texto digital → Inhabilitar / Habilitar (sólo RU) Si el programa se emite con texto digital, esta opción está activada. N MHEG (Multimedia and Hypermedia Information Coding Experts Group-Grupo de expertos para la codificación de la información hipermedia y multimedia) Es una norma internacional para los sistemas de codificación de datos que se utilizan en hipermedia y multimedia. Es un nivel superior al sistema MPEG que incluye hipermedia vinculado a datos, como imágenes fijas, servicios de caracteres, animaciones, gráficos y archivos de vídeo así como datos multimedia. MHEG es una tecnología de interacción de tiempo de ejecución del usuario que se aplica en varios campos, como vOd (vídeo a la carta), ITv (televisión interactiva), EC (comercio electrónico), educación a distancia, teleconferencias, bibliotecas digitales y juegos de red. „ Idioma del teletexto Se puede configurar el idioma del teletexto seleccionando el tipo de idioma. N El inglés es el idioma predeterminado cuando en una emisión no está disponible la selección de idiomas. „ Preferencia ● Idioma principal audio / Idioma secundario audio / Idioma princ. subtítulos / Idioma sec. subtítulos / Idioma principal del teletexto / Idioma secundario del teletexto Con esta función los usuarios pueden seleccionar uno de los idiomas. El idioma seleccionado aquí se convierte en el predeterminado cuando se selecciona un canal. Si se cambia la configuración del idioma, las opciones de idioma de los subtítulos, del audio o del teletexto del menú de idioma se cambian automáticamente al idioma seleccionado. las opciones de idioma de los subtítulos, del audio y del teletexto, del menú de idioma, muestran una lista de los idiomas admitidos en el canal actual y la selección se resalta. Si cambia la configuración del idioma, ésta sólo es válida en el canal actual. los cambios de configuración no afectan a las opciones de idioma principal de los subtítulos, del audio o del teletexto del menú de preferencias. „ Interfaz común ● Menú CI Permite al usuario realizar selecciones en el menú CAM proporcionado. Seleccione el menú CI según el menú de la tarjeta PC. ● Info. sobre la aplicación la interfaz común contiene y muestra información acerca del CAM insertado en la ranura CI. N la información de la aplicación insertada se refiere a la TArJETA CI. la instalación del CAM puede efectuarse con el televisor encendido o apagado. 1. Puede adquirir el módulo del CAM de CI por teléfono o en el distribuidor más cercano a su domicilio. 2. Inserte la TArjeTA CI en el CAM siguiendo la dirección de la flecha hasta que encaje. 3. Inserte el CAM con la TArJETA CI instalada en la ranura para interfaz común. (Inserte el CAM, siguiendo la dirección de la flecha, hasta el fondo, de modo que quede paralelo a la ranura.) 4. Compruebe si se ven imágenes en un canal de señal codificada. N El módulo CAM no se admite en algunos países o zonas; consulte a su distribuidor local. BN68-03043A.indb 21 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:46Español - 22 ❑ Emisión Antes de que se muestre la pantalla de configuración, aparece la pantalla para la introducción del código PIN. Escriba su código PIN de 4 dígitos. el código PIN predeterminado para un televisor nuevo es 0-0-0-0. Se puede cambiar el PIN seleccionando Cambiar PIN en el menú. „ Segur. niños → Des. / Act. Esta función permite bloquear el vídeo y el audio para evitar que los usuarios no autorizados (por ejemplo, los niños) puedan ver programas poco recomendables. N Se pueden bloquear algunos canales en la lista de canales. (Consulte la página 13.) N Segur. niños sólo está disponible en el modo Tv. „ Bloqueo paterno Con esta función se puede impedir por medio de un código PIN (número de identificación personal) de 4 dígitos definido por el usuario que personas no autorizadas, como los niños, vean programas inadecuados. N el elemento Bloqueo paterno difiere según el país. N Una vez establecido Bloqueo paterno, se muestra el símbolo ‘\’. N Perm. todo: Se pulsa para desbloquear todos los programas de televisión. Bloq. todo: Se pulsa para bloquear todos los programas de televisión. „ Cambiar PIN Se puede cambiar el número Id personal necesario para configurar el televisor. N Si ha olvidado el código PIN, pulse los botones del mando a distancia en la siguiente secuencia para reiniciar el PIN a 0-0-0-0 : POWER (Des.) → MUTE → 8 → 2 → 4 → POWER (Act.). ❑ General „ Modo Juego → Des. / Act. Cuando se conecta una videoconsola como PlayStation™ o Xbox™, se puede experimentar una sensación más realista al seleccionar el menú de juegos. N Para desconectar la videoconsola y conectar otro dispositivo externo, cancele el modo de juegos en el menú de configuración. N Si visualiza el menú de Tv en el Modo Juego la pantalla tiembla ligeramente. N Modo Juego no está disponible en los modos normales de TV y PC. N Si Modo Juego está activado: – El modo de imagen se cambia automáticamente a Estándar y los usuarios no pueden cambiar el modo. – El modo de sonido se cambia automáticamente a Personal y los usuarios no pueden cambiar el modo. Ajuste el sonido con el ecualizador. N la función para establecer el sonido está activada. Si selecciona la función de restablecer el sonido después de configurar el ecualizador, la configuración de éste recupera los parámetros predeterminados de fábrica. „ Ahorro energía → Des. / Bajo / Medio / Alto / Imagen desact. / Auto Esta función ajusta el brillo del televisor, lo cual reduce el consumo de energía. Si desea ver la televisión por la noche, ajuste la opción del modo Ahorro energía en Modo; sus ojos se lo agradecerán y, además, reducirá el consumo de energía. Si se selecciona Imagen desact., la pantalla se apaga y sólo se puede oír el sonido. Pulse cualquier botón para salir de Imagen desact.. N En el menú Tools, la función Imagen desact. no se admite.. T Pulse el botón TOOLS para ver el menú Herramientas. También puede configurar esta opción seleccionando Herramientas→ Ahorro energía. „ Melodía → Des. / Bajo / Medio / Alto Se puede establecer un sonido de melodía que se oiga cuando el televisor se encienda o se apague. N la melodía no se reproduce – Cuando no hay salida de sonido desde el televisor porque se ha activado el botón MUTE. – Cuando no hay salida de sonido desde el televisor porque se ha pulsado el botón del volumen (–). – Cuando la función de temporizador ha apagado el televisor. BN68-03043A.indb 22 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:46Español - 23 ENTRADA / ASISTENCIA TÉCNICA ¦ Configuración del menú de entrada ❑ Fuentes Úselo para seleccionar Tv u otras fuentes de entrada externas como reproductores de dvd/ Blu-ray o receptores de cable y satélite (decodificadores), conectados al televisor. Permite seleccionar la fuente de entrada que se prefiera. O Pulse el botón SOURCE del mando a distancia para ver una fuente de señal externa. el modo TV se puede seleccionar pulsando el botón TV. „ TV / Ext. / AV / Componente / PC / HDMI/DVI N Puede elegir solamente los dispositivos externos que estén conectados al televisor. En Fuentes, las entradas conectadas se resaltan y se ordenan en la parte superior. las entradas que no están conectadas se ordenan en la parte inferior. N Ext. y PC siempre permanecen activados. N TOOLS (Herramientas): Muestra los menús Editar nombre e Información. ❑ Editar nombre dé un nombre al dispositivo conectado en las tomas de entrada; de esta manera será más fácil seleccionar el dispositivo de entrada. „ Vídeo / DVD / Cable STB / Satélite STB / PVR STB / Receptor AV / Juego / Videocámara / PC / DVI / DVI PC / TV / IPTV / Blu- ray / HD DVD / DMA N Cuando se conecta un cable HDMI/DVI al puerto HDMI (DVI), se debe establecer el modo HDMI/DVI como DVI o DVI PC en Editar nombre del modo Entrada. en este caso, se necesita una conexión de sonido independiente. ¦ Configuración del menú de ayuda ❑ Autodiagnóstico „ Prueba de imagen Si cree que tiene un problema con la imagen, efectúe la prueba de imagen. Compruebe el patrón del color en la pantalla para ver si persiste el problema. ● Sí: Si el patrón de prueba no aparece o si hay ruido en el patrón de prueba, seleccione Sí. Puede haber un problema en el televisor. Póngase en contacto con el centro de servicio de Samsung. ● No: Si el patrón de prueba se muestra correctamente, seleccione No. Puede haber un problema en el equipo externo. Compruebe las conexiones. Si persiste el problema, consulte el manual del usuario del dispositivo externo. „ Prueba de sonido Si cree que tiene un problema con el sonido, efectúe la prueba de sonido. Compruebe el sonido reproduciendo una melodía en el televisor. En la pantalla se muestra ‘¿El problema aún existe con esta prueba de sonido?’. N Si no oye sonido en los altavoces del televisor, antes de realizar la prueba de sonido, asegúrese de que Seleccionar altavoz esté configurado como Altavoz de TV en el menú de sonido. N la melodía se oirá durante la prueba aunque Seleccionar altavoz esté establecido como Altavoz externo o se haya silenciado el sonido con el botón MUTE. ● Sí: Si durante la prueba de sonido sólo oye sonido desde un altavoz o no oye ningún sonido, seleccione Sí. Puede haber un problema en el televisor. Póngase en contacto con el centro de servicio de Samsung. ● No: Si oye sonido desde los altavoces, seleccione No. Puede haber un problema en el equipo externo. Compruebe las conexiones. Si persiste el problema, consulte el manual del usuario del dispositivo externo. „ Información de señal (sólo canales digitales) A diferencia de los canales analógicos, en los que puede variar la calidad de la recepción desde 'con nieve' hasta nítida, los canales digitales (HdTv) tienen una calidad de recepción perfecta o no hay recepción. Por ello, a diferencia de los canales analógicos, no se puede realizar una sintonización fina de un canal digital. Se puede, no obstante, ajustar la antena para mejorar la recepción de los canales digitales disponibles. N Si el medidor de la intensidad de la señal indica que ésta es débil, mueva la antena para aumentar la intensidad de la señal. Siga ajustando la antena hasta que encuentre la mejor posición para recibir la señal más fuerte. Autodiagnóstico ► Software superior Guía de conexión Hd Contacto con Samsung Asistencia técnica Fuentes editar nombre entrada BN68-03043A.indb 23 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:46Español - 24 ❑ Software superior Para mantener el producto actualizado con las nuevas funciones de la televisión digital se envían periódicamente actualizaciones de software como parte de la señal normal de televisión. Automáticamente se detectan estas señales y se muestra una pantalla de actualización del software. Se presenta la opción de instalar la actualización. „ POR USB Inserte una unidad USB que contenga la actualización del firmware en el televisor. No desconecte la alimentación ni extraiga la unidad USB mientras se aplican las actualizaciones. El televisor se apagará y se encenderá automáticamente después de completar la actualización del firmware. después de realizar la actualización compruebe la versión del firmware. Cuando se actualiza el software, la configuración de vídeo y audio que se haya efectuado vuelve a la configuración predeterminada (de fábrica). Es aconsejable anotar la configuración para recuperarla fácilmente después de la actualización. „ Por canal Actualiza el software a través de una señal de emisión. N Si selecciona esta función durante la fase de transmisión del software, busca el software disponible y lo descarga. N el tiempo necesario para la descarga del software lo determina el estado de la señal. „ Modo suspensión Para continuar con la actualización del software con el conmutador de encendido principal activado, actívelo pulsando los botones ▲ o ▼. 45 minutos después de haber entrado en el modo de suspensión, se inicia automáticamente una actualización manual. dado que la alimentación de la unidad está activada internamente, la pantalla lCd puede encenderse ligeramente. Este fenómeno puede durar 1 hora mientras la actualización del software se completa. „ Software alternativo Para mostrar la información de la versión del software. ❑ Guía de conexión HD Este menú presenta el método de conexión que ofrece una calidad óptima para la televisión de alta definición. Consulte esta información cuando conecte dispositivos externos al TV. ❑ Contacto con Samsung Consulte esta información si el televisor no funciona adecuadamente o si desea actualizar el software. Puede ver la información relacionada con el centro de servicio, el producto y el método de descarga de archivos de software. Panel posterior del TV Unidad USB BN68-03043A.indb 24 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:46Español - 25 RECOMENDACIONES DE USO ¦ Función de teletexto la mayoría de los canales de televisión proporcionan servicios de información escrita mediante el teletexto. la página de índice de dicho servicio proporciona información sobre el uso de éste. Asimismo, se pueden seleccionar diversas opciones mediante el mando a distancia para ajustar el servicio a las necesidades del usuario. N Para que la información del teletexto se visualice correctamente, la recepción del canal debe ser estable. En caso contrario, puede perderse información o algunas páginas pueden no visualizarse. N Puede cambiar páginas de teletexto pulsando los botones numéricos del mando a distancia. 1 0(modo) Se utiliza para seleccionar el modo de teletexto (lIST/FlOF). Si lo pulsa en el modo lIST, cambia al modo de guardar lista. en dicho modo se puede guardar la página de teletexto en la lista mediante el botón 8 (guardar). 2 5(mostrar) Se usa para mostrar el texto oculto (respuestas a juegos, por ejemplo). Púlselo de nuevo para volver a la presentación normal. 3 4(tamaño) Se utiliza para mostrar caracteres de doble tamaño en la parte superior de la pantalla. Si desea mostrarlos también en la parte inferior, vuelva a pulsar el botón. Púlselo de nuevo una vez para volver a la presentación normal. 4 8(guardar) Se utiliza para guardar las páginas del teletexto. 5 Botones de colores (rojo/verde/ amarillo/azul) Si una emisora utiliza el sistema FASTeXT, los distintos temas cubiertos en una página de teletexto se codificarán en color y podrá seleccionarlos pulsando los botones de color. Pulse el correspondiente al tema deseado. la página muestra otra información con código de color que se puede seleccionar de la misma forma. Pulse el botón del color correspondiente para ver la página anterior o la siguiente. 6 /(activar teletexto/mezcla) Se utiliza para activar el modo de teletexto tras seleccionar el canal que proporciona el servicio. Pulse dos veces para superponer el teletexto a la pantalla de emisión actual. 7 :(salir) Sale de la visualización de teletexto. 8 1(página secundaria) Se utiliza para mostrar la página secundaria disponible. 9 2(avanzar página) Se utiliza para mostrar la siguiente página de teletexto. 0 3(retroceder página) Se utiliza para mostrar la página anterior de teletexto. ! 9 (retener) Se utiliza para retener la presentación en una página determinada si ésta está enlazada con varias páginas secundarias que se muestran automáticamente. Para reanudar, vuelva a pulsar el botón. @ 6(índice) Se utiliza para mostrar la página de índice (contenido) en cualquier momento durante la visualización de teletexto. # 7(cancelar) Se utiliza para visualizar la emisión cuando se busca una página. las páginas de teletexto se organizan en seis categorías: Parte Contenido A Número de página seleccionado. B Identidad del canal. C Número de página actual o indicaciones de la búsqueda. D Fecha y hora. E Texto. F Información de estado. Información FASTeXT. 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 0 ! # @ 7 BN68-03043A.indb 25 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:47Español - 26 N la información de teletexto se suele dividir en varias páginas que aparecen en secuencia y a las que se puede acceder: – Introduciendo el número de página. – Seleccionando un título de la lista. – Seleccionando un encabezado de color (sistema FASTeXT). N El nivel de teletexto que admite el televisor es la versión 2.5, capaz de mostrar texto o gráficos adicionales. N Según la transmisión, puede haber paneles laterales en blanco al mostrar el teletexto. N En estos casos, el texto o los gráficos adicionales no se transmiten. N los televisores más antiguos que no admiten la versión 2.5 no son capaces de mostrar texto o gráficos adicionales, independientemente de la transmisión de teletexto. O Pulse el botón TV para salir de la visualización de teletexto. N Con el teletexto 16:9, la imagen es 16:9 ¦ Cómo ajustar el soporte (sólo para el modelo de 19 pulgadas) 1. Coloque el televisor encima de una mesa con el frontal apoyado sobre un paño suave o un cojín como se muestra en la ilustración 1. – Alinee la parte inferior del televisor con el borde de la mesa. 2. Presione sobre el centro de la parte posterior del televisor. Ajuste el soporte como se muestra en la ilustración 2, mientras presiona el botón de la parte posterior del soporte. 3. Coloque el televisor sobre la mesa de modo que se asiente con seguridad sobre ésta. ¦ Cómo ajustar el ángulo del televisor (sólo el modelo de 19 pulgadas) N Para ajustar el soporte, presione el botón de la parte posterior del soporte. 1. la figura 1 muestra el ángulo de ajuste (-2°~14°) cuando se utiliza el lCd sobre el soporte. N Una inclinación excesiva podría provocar la caída del Tv lCd y dañarlo. 2. la figura 2 muestra el ángulo de ajuste (14°~80°) cuando se pasa de un sistema de uso del lCd basado en un soporte al montaje mural. 3. la figura 3 muestra el ángulo de ajuste (0°~10°) cuando se monta el Tv lCd en una pared. N Oirá un “clic” cuando se cambia el ángulo de 1 a 2 y de 3 a 2. 1 2 1 Ajuste del ángulo cuando se usa el televisor en el soporte. 2 Ajuste del ángulo cuando se pasa de soporte al montaje mural (1→3, 3→1) 3 Ajuste del ángulo cuando el TV LCD se monta en la pared. BN68-03043A.indb 26 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:47Español - 27 ¦ Instalación de dispositivos de montaje que cumplen las normas VESA (sólo el modelo de 19 pulgadas) 1. Coloque el televisor cara abajo sobre un paño suave o un cojín encima de una mesa. 2. Ajuste el soporte presionando el botón de la parte posterior del soporte. 3. Alinee la protección de la interfaz de montaje (no suministrada) con los orificios de la parte inferior del soporte y asegúrela con cuatro tornillos en la base de tipo brazo, soporte de montaje mural u otros tipos de bases (no suministrados). ¦ Uso de las cubiertas decorativas (sólo para el modelo de 19 pulgadas) 1. Cuando instale el televisor en la pared sin utilizar el soporte, inserte las cubiertas decorativas en los orificios, como se muestra en la ilustración 1. 2. después de insertar las cubiertas decorativas, asegúrelas con 4 tornillos como se muestra en la ilustración 2. 1 2 Botón Protección de montaje (se vende por separado) 1 2 BN68-03043A.indb 27 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:48Español - 28 ¦ Instalación del soporte 1. Monte el TV de pantalla lCD en el soporte. N Se necesitan dos o más personas para trasladar el televisor. N Para realizar el montaje debe tener en cuenta cuál es la parte frontal y cuál la posterior del soporte. N Para asegurar que el televisor esté instalado sobre el soporte al nivel adecuado, no ejerza una excesiva presión sobre la parte superior del lateral izquierdo o derecho del televisor. 2. Atornille dos tornillos en la posición 1 y otros dos en la posición2. N levante el producto y apriete los tornillos. Si aprieta los tornillos sin levantar el televisor, éste puede inclinarse hacia uno de los lados. ¦ Instalación del equipo de montaje en la pared los elementos del montaje en la pared (se venden por separado) permiten instalar el televisor en una pared. Si desea más información sobre la instalación de los componentes para montaje en la pared, consulte las instrucciones que se facilitan con dichos elementos. Si necesita ayuda con la instalación del soporte mural, póngase en contacto con un técnico. Samsung electronics no se hace responsable de los daños causados al producto o al usuario si éste ha efectuado la instalación del televisor. No instale el equipo de montaje mural mientras el televisor está encendido. Se podría producir una descarga eléctrica con riesgo de causar lesiones personales. ¦ Uso del bloqueo Kensington antirrobos El bloqueo Kensington es un dispositivo que se utiliza para fijar físicamente el sistema cuando se utiliza en un sitio público. El aspecto y el método de bloqueo pueden ser diferentes a los que se muestran en la ilustración según el fabricante. Consulte el manual proporcionado con el bloqueo Kensington para utilizarlo correctamente. N Busque el icono “K” en la parte posterior del televisor. Junto al icono “K” hay una ranura Kensington. Siga estos pasos para bloquear el producto: 1. Enrolle el cable del bloqueo Kensington en un objeto estático voluminoso, como una mesa o una silla. 2. Deslice el extremo del cable que tiene el cierre a través del extremo enrollado del cable de bloqueo Kensington. 3. Inserte el dispositivo de bloqueo en la ranura Kensington del producto (1). 4. Cierre el bloqueo. N Estas instrucciones son de carácter general. Para obtener instrucciones más exactas, consulte el manual del usuario proporcionado con el dispositivo de bloqueo. N el dispositivo de bloqueo debe adquirirse por separado. N la ubicación del bloqueo Kensington puede variar según los modelos. 1 BN68-03043A.indb 28 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:49Español - 29 ¦ Seguridad en el espacio de instalación Mantenga la distancia requerida entre el producto y otros objetos (por ejemplo, paredes) para asegurar la ventilación adecuada. En caso contrario, se podría producir un incendio por un incremento de la temperatura interna del producto. Instale el producto a la distancia requerida como se muestra en la ilustración. N Cuando utilice un soporte o un montaje mural, use sólo las piezas proporcionadas por Samsung electronics. Ҟ Si utiliza piezas proporcionadas por otros fabricantes, podría tener problemas con el producto o éste se podría caer con el riesgo de cuasar lesiones personales. Ҟ Si utiliza piezas proporcionadas por otros fabricantes, podría tener problemas con el producto o éste se podría incendiar por el incremento de la temperatura interior debido a una mala ventilación. N El aspecto puede variar según el producto. Instalación del producto sobre un soporte Instalación del producto en un montaje mural 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm ¦ Fijación del televisor a la pared Precaución: Tirar del televisor, empujarlo o colgarse de él puede provocar su caída. En especial, procure que los niños no se cuelguen del televisor ni lo desestabilicen; éste podría caerse sobre ellos y causarles lesiones graves o incluso la muerte. Siga las precauciones de seguridad del folleto de seguridad incluido con el producto. Para mejorar la estabilidad instale un dispositivo antivuelco, como se explica a continuación. „ Para impedir que el televisor se caiga: 1. Apriete firmemente las grapas sobre la pared con los tornillos. Asegúrese de que los tornillos estén bien afirmados en la pared. N Según el tipo de pared quizás necesite algún material adicional para el anclaje. N las grapas, los tornillos y la cadena no se suministran con el producto; deberá adquirirlos por separado. 2. Quite los tornillos de la parte central posterior del televisor y con ellos monte las grapas en el televisor. N Quizás con el televisor no vayan incluidos los tornillos. En tal caso debe adquirirlos por separado con estas especificaciones. N Especificaciones de los tornillos – Televisores lCd de 17-29 pulgadas: M4 x l15 – Televisores lCd de 32-40 pulgadas: M6 x l15 3. Monte una cadena fuerte entre las grapas del televisor y de la pared de manera que quede bien tensada. N Instale el televisor cerca de la pared para evitar que caiga hacia atrás. N las grapas de la pared han de estar a la misma o a menor altura que las grapas del televisor. N Cuando desee mover el televisor deberá aflojar la cadena. 4. Compruebe que todas las conexiones estén bien aseguradas. Compruébelas periódicamente para detectar cualquier signo de fatiga o de fallo. Si tiene dudas sobre la seguridad de la instalación, póngase en contacto con un instalador profesional. Pared Pared BN68-03043A.indb 29 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:49Español - 30 ¦ Solución de problemas Si tiene algún problema con el televisor, consulte esta lista en primer lugar. Si ninguno de los consejos funciona, visite ‘www. samsung.com’ y haga clic en Support o llame al centro de atención al cliente que encontrará en la lista de la última página. Problema Solución Calidad de la imagen en primer lugar, ejecute Prueba de imagen para confirmar que el televisor muestra correctamente la imagen de prueba. ● Vaya a MENU - Asistencia técnica - Autodiagnóstico - Prueba de imagen Si la imagen de la prueba se muestra correctamente, la imagen deficiente puede provenir de la fuente o la señal. la imagen del televisor no se ve tan bien como en la tienda. ● Si tiene un receptor de cable/decodificador analógico, cambie a un decodificador. Utilice cables HDMI o de componentes para conseguir la mejor calidad de imagen de alta definición. ● Suscriptor de cable/satélite: Pruebe con emisoras de alta definición (Hd) de la oferta de canales. ● Conexión de antena: Pruebe con emisoras de alta definición (Hd) después de ejecutar la programación automática. N Muchos canales de alta definición (Hd) mejoran los contenidos Sd (definición estándar). ● Ajuste la resolución de la salida de vídeo del receptor de cable/decodificador en 1080i o 720p. ● Compruebe que está viendo la televisión a la distancia mínima recomendada según el tamaño y la definición de la señal que está visualizando. la imagen se ve distorsionada: macrobloques, microbloques, puntos, pixelización ● la compresión de los contenidos de vídeo puede causar imágenes distorsionadas especialmente en las escenas de movimiento rápido, como en los deportes y las películas de acción. ● Un nivel de señal débil o de mala calidad puede causar imágenes distorsionadas. No es un problema del televisor. ● los teléfonos móviles que se utilizan cerca del televisor (aproximadamente a 1 metro) pueden causar interferencias en la imagen del televisor digital y analógico. Color de mala calidad o no hay color en la conexión de componentes. ● Compruebe que los cables de los componentes estén conectados en los terminales correctos. las conexiones incorrectas o sueltas pueden originar problemas en el color o que la pantalla se quede en blanco. Color o brillo de mala calidad. ● Ajuste las opciones de Imagen en el menú del Tv (modo Imagen, Color, Brillo, Nitidez) ● Ajuste la opción Ahorro energía en el menú Configuración. ● Intente reiniciar la imagen para ver la configuración de imagen predeterminada. (Vaya a MENU - Imagen - Reinicio de la imagen) línea de puntos en el borde la pantalla. ● Si el tamaño de la imagen está establecido en Ajuste pantalla, cámbielo a 16:9. ● Cambie la resolución del receptor de cable/decodificador. la imagen se ve sólo en blanco y negro en la entrada AV (compuesto). ● Conecte el cable de vídeo (amarillo) en el terminal verde de la entrada 1 de componentes del televisor. Imágenes congeladas o distorsionadas al cambiar de canal o retraso en la aparición de la imagen. ● Si se ha conectado un decodificador de cable, intente reiniciarlo. (Vuelva a conectar el cable de alimentación y espere a que el decodificador se reinicie. Puede tardar hasta 20 minutos.) ● establezca la resolución de salida del decodificador de cable en 1080i o 720p. Calidad del sonido en primer lugar, ejecute Prueba de sonido para confirmar que el audio del televisor funciona correctamente. ● Vaya a MENU - Asistencia técnica - Autodiagnóstico - Prueba de sonido Si el audio es correcto, el problema del sonido puede provenir de la fuente o la señal. No se percibe ningún sonido, o muy bajo, con el volumen al máximo. ● Compruebe el volumen del dispositivo externo conectado al televisor y ajuste el volumen del televisor según sea más conveniente. la imagen es buena pero no hay sonido. ● establezca la opción Seleccionar altavoz en Altavoz de TV en el menú de sonido. ● Compruebe que los cables de audio del dispositivo externo estén conectados a los terminales de entrada de audio correctos del televisor. ● Compruebe la opción de salida de audio del dispositivo conectado. (Por ejemplo, quizás deba cambiar la opción de audio del decodificador de cable a HdMI si tiene conectado HDMI al televisor.) ● Si se utiliza un cable DVI a HDMI, se necesita un cable de audio independiente. ● Desactive la función SrS si va a ajustar el volumen a un valor superior a 30. ● Desconecte el terminal de los auriculares (si es posible en su televisor) Se oye ruido en el altavoz. ● Compruebe las conexiones de los cables Compruebe que el cable de vídeo no esté conectado en una entrada de audio. ● en la conexión de antena/cable, compruebe la intensidad de la señal. Un nivel de señal débil puede causar sonido distorsionado. BN68-03043A.indb 30 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:50Español - 31 Problema Solución No hay imagen, ni vídeo el televisor no se enciende. ● Compruebe que el cable de alimentación esté bien conectado en la toma de la pared y en el televisor. ● Compruebe que la toma de la pared funciona. ● Pulse el botón POWER del televisor para asegurarse de que el mando a distancia funciona adecuadamente. Si el televisor se enciende, puede ser debido al mando a distancia. Para solucionar el problema del mando a distancia, consulte 'El mando a distancia no funciona' a continuación. el televisor se apaga automáticamente. ● Compruebe si Temp. de desc. está establecido como Act. en el menú Configuración. ● Si el televisor está conectado a un PC, compruebe la configuración de la alimentación de éste. ● Compruebe que el cable de alimentación esté bien conectado en la toma de la pared y en el televisor. ● Si no hay señal durante unos de 10~15 minutos en la conexión de antena/cable, el televisor se apagará. No hay imagen/vídeo. ● Compruebe las conexiones de los cables (desconecte y vuelva a conectar todos los cables del televisor y de los dispositivos externos). ● Establezca la salida de vídeo de los dispositivos externos (receptor de cable/ decodificador, DVD, Blu-ray, etc.) de modo que coincida con las conexiones de la entrada de Tv. Por ejemplo, salida del dispositivo externo: HdMI, entrada del Tv: HDMI. ● Compruebe que el dispositivo externo esté encendido. ● Asegúrese de seleccionar la fuente correcta del Tv pulsando el botón SOURCE del mando a distancia del televisor. Conexión rF (cable/antena) No se reciben todos los canales. ● Compruebe que el cable de antena esté firmemente conectado. ● ejecute Plug & Play para añadir los canales disponibles a la lista de canales. Vaya a MENU - Configuración - Plug & Play y espere hasta que se guarden todos los canales disponibles. ● Compruebe la posición de la antena. la imagen se ve distorsionada: macrobloques, microbloques, puntos, pixelización ● la compresión de los contenidos de vídeo puede causar imágenes distorsionadas especialmente en las escenas de movimiento rápido, como en los deportes y las películas de acción. ● Un nivel de señal débil puede causar imágenes distorsionadas. No es un problema del televisor. Conexión del PC Mensaje ‘Modo no compatible’. ● Establezca la frecuencia y la resolución de salida del PC de modo que coincida con la resolución admitida por el televisor. El PC siempre aparece en la lista de fuentes aunque no esté conectado. ● Esto es normal; el PC siempre aparece en la lista de fuentes aunque no esté conectado. El vídeo es correcto pero no se oye el audio con una conexión HDMI. ● Compruebe la configuración de la salida de audio del PC. BN68-03043A.indb 31 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:50Español - 32 Problema Solución Otros la imagen no se muestra en pantalla completa. ● en cada lado se muestran barras negras en los canales de alta definición cuando se muestran contenidos Sd mejorados (4:3). ● Barras negras en las partes inferior y superior cuando se ven películas que tienen diferentes formatos que el televisor. ● Ajuste la opción del tamaño de imagen del dispositivo externo o del televisor al modo de pantalla completa. el mando a distancia no funciona. ● Sustituya la pilas del mando a distancia con la polaridad correcta (+ -). ● limpie la ventana de transmisión que se encuentra en la parte superior del mando a distancia. ● Apunte con el mando a distancia directamente al televisor desde una distancia de 1,5 -2 metros. No se puede controlar la alimentación o el volumen del televisor con el mando a distancia del receptor de cable/ decodificador. ● Programe el mando a distancia del receptor de cable/decodificador para que haga funcionar el televisor. Consulte el manual del decodificador de cable/satélite para conocer el código del TV SAMSUNG. Mensaje ‘Modo no compatible’. ● Compruebe la resolución admitida del televisor y ajuste consecuentemente la resolución de salida del dispositivo externo. Consulte la configuración de la resolución en este manual. Olor a plástico en el televisor. ● este olor es normal y desaparece con el tiempo. la Información de señal del televisor no está disponible en el menú de prueba de autodiagnóstico. ● Esta función sólo está disponible en los canales digitales con las conexiones de antena (rF/coaxial). El televisor está inclinado hacia la izquierda o hacia la derecha. ● retire la base del soporte de televisor y vuelva a montarla. No se puede montar la base del soporte. ● Compruebe que el televisor esté instalado sobre una superficie plana. Si no puede quitar los tornillos del televisor, utilice un destornillador magnetizado. El menú del canal se ve de color gris (no disponible). ● El menú Canal sólo está disponible cuando está seleccionada la fuente Tv. la configuración se pierde después de 30 minutos o cada vez que se apaga el televisor. ● Si el televisor está en el modo Demo tienda, la configuración del audio y la imagen se restablecerá cada 30 minutos. debe cambiar el modo Demo tienda al modo Uso doméstico en el procedimiento Plug & Play. Pulse el botón SOURCE para seleccionar TV, vaya a MENU → Configuración → Plug & Play → ENTERE. Pérdida intermitente del audio o del vídeo. ● Compruebe las conexiones de los cables y vuelva a conectarlos. ● Se puede deber a que los cables son demasiado rígidos o gruesos. debe asegurarse de que los cables sean lo suficientemente flexibles para un largo periodo de uso. en un montaje mural, es aconsejable utilizar cables con conectores de 90 grados. Puede ver pequeñas partículas si mira de cerca el borde biselado de la pantalla del televisor. ● esto es una particularidad del diseño del producto y no es un defecto. ‘Señal codificada’ o ‘Sin señal/Señal débil’ con TArjeTA (CI) en CAM. ● Compruebe que el CAM tenga la tarjeta CI instalada en la ranura para interfaz común. ● retire el CAM del televisor e insértelo de nuevo en la ranura. el televisor se enciende por su cuenta cuando lleva 45 minutos apagado. ● Esto es normal, ya que el televisor ejecuta la función OTA (en el aire) por sí solo a fin de actualizar el firmware descargado mientras se veía la televisión. Problema de imagen/sonido recurrente. ● Compruebe y cambie la señal/fuente. N El panel lCd TFT utiliza un panel que consta de píxeles de ínfimo tamaño que requieren de una tecnología altamente sofisticada para su fabricación. No obstante, puede que existan unos cuantos píxeles brillantes u oscuros en la pantalla. Estos píxeles no influirán en el rendimiento del aparato. BN68-03043A.indb 32 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:50Español - 33 ¦ Especificaciones Nombre del modelo LE19C430, LE19C431 LE22C430, LE22C431 Tamaño de pantalla (Diagonal) 19 pulg 22 pulg Resolución de PC (Óptima) 1360 x 768 a 60Hz 1360 x 768 a 60Hz Sonido (Salida) 3W X 2 3W X 2 Dimensiones (AnxPrxAl) Cuerpo principal Con el soporte 477 x 65 x 327 mm 477 x 180 x 362 mm 558 x 75 x 384 mm 558 x 216 x 426 mm Peso Con el soporte 5 kg 7 kg Consideraciones medioambientales Temperatura de funcionamiento Humedad de funcionamiento Temperatura de almacenamiento Humedad de almacenamiento 10 °C a 40 °C (50 °F a 104 °F) 10% al 80%, sin condensación -20 °C a 45 °C (-4 °F a 113 °F) 5% al 95%, sin condensación Soporte giratorio izquierda/derecha 0˚ N El diseño y las especificaciones pueden cambiar sin previo aviso. N este dispositivo es un aparato digital de la Clase B. N Para conocer la fuente de alimentación y el consumo de energía, consulte la etiqueta adherida al producto. BN68-03043A.indb 33 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:50As imagens e ilustrações neste manual do utilizador servem apenas de referência e podem ser diferentes do produto real. O design e as especificações do produto podem ser alterados sem aviso prévio. ❑ Licença TruSurround HD, SrS e símbolo são marcas comerciais da SrS labs, Inc. A tecnologia TruSurround HD está incorporada na licença da SrS labs, Inc. Fabricado sob a licença da dolby laboratories. dolby e o símbolo de duplo d são marcas comerciais da Dolby laboratories. ❑ Aviso sobre a televisão digital 1. As funcionalidades relacionadas com a televisão digital (dvB) apenas estão disponíveis em países/áreas onde os sinais digitais terrestres dvB-T (MPEG2 e MPEG4 AvC) sejam transmitidos, ou onde consiga aceder a um serviço de televisão por cabo compatível com dvB-C (MPEG2 e MPEG4 AAC). Confirme com o seu representante local a possibilidade de receber sinal DVB-T ou DVB-C. 2. DVB-T é a norma de consórcio europeia DVB para a transmissão de televisão digital terrestre e DVB-C é a norma para a transmissão de televisão digital por cabo. Existem, contudo, algumas funções diferenciadas como o EPG (Guia electrónico de programação), vOd (vídeo a pedido), entre outras, que não estão incluídas nesta especificação. Por esse motivo, não são suportadas de momento. 3. Embora este televisor cumpra as mais recentes normas dvB-T e dvB-C [Agosto de 2008], não é possível garantir a compatibilidade com as futuras transmissões digitais terrestres DVB-T e transmissões digitais por cabo DVB-C. 4. dependendo do país/área onde este televisor é utilizado, alguns fornecedores de televisão por cabo podem cobrar uma taxa adicional por esses serviços e poderá ser necessário concordar com os termos e condições dos seus negócios. 5. Algumas funções da televisão digital podem estar indisponíveis em alguns países ou regiões e o dvB-C poderá não funcionar correctamente com alguns fornecedores de serviços por cabo. 6. Para mais informações, contacte o centro local de assistência ao cliente da SAMSUNG. ❑ Precauções a ter ao ver imagens fixas Uma imagem fixa pode danificar permanentemente o ecrã do televisor ● Uma imagem fixa e parcialmente fixa não deve permanecer no painel lCd durante mais do que 2 horas pois pode provocar uma retenção de imagem no ecrã. Esta retenção de imagem também é conhecida como “queimadura de ecrã”. Para evitar a retenção de imagem, diminua o grau de brilho e de contraste do ecrã ao visualizar uma imagem fixa. ● A utilização do televisor lCd no formato 4:3 durante um longo período de tempo pode deixar vestígios de margens na parte esquerda, direita e central do ecrã, devido a diferenças de emissão de luz. reproduzir um dvd ou ligar uma consola de jogos pode causar efeitos semelhantes no ecrã. Os danos causados pelo efeito acima mencionado não são cobertos pela garantia. ● A visualização de imagens fixas de jogos de vídeo ou de PC durante um longo período de tempo pode produzir pós-imagens parciais. Para evitar este efeito, reduza o ‘brilho’ e o ‘contraste’ quando visualizar imagens fixas. © 2010 Samsung electronics Co., ltd. Todos os direitos reservados. BN68-03043A.indb 1 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:51Português - 1 ❑ Símbolo N O T Nota Tecla rápida Botão TOOlS Carregue INFORMAÇÃO GERAL ■ Apresentação do painel de controlo.....................................2 ■ Acessórios............................................................................3 ■ Apresentação do painel de ligação ......................................4 ■ Telecomando ........................................................................6 ■ Colocar pilhas no telecomando ............................................6 FUNCIONAMENTO ■ Aceder aos menus................................................................7 ■ definir o televisor para modo de espera...............................8 ■ Função Plug & Play..............................................................8 ■ Visualização no ecrã ............................................................9 CONTROLO DOS CANAIS ■ Configurar o menu Canais....................................................9 ■ Gerir canais .......................................................................12 CONTROLO DA IMAGEM ■ Configurar o menu Imagem................................................14 ■ Utilizar o televisor como monitor de computador (PC).......16 ■ Configurar o televisor com o PC.........................................17 CONTROLO DO SOM ■ Configurar o menu Som .....................................................18 ■ Seleccionar o modo de Som ..............................................19 CONFIGURAÇÃO ■ definir o menu Configurar ..................................................20 ENTRADA / SUPORTE ■ Configurar o menu de Entrada ...........................................23 ■ Configurar o menu Suporte ................................................23 RECOMENDAÇÕES PARA A UTILIZAÇÃO ■ Funcionalidade de teletexto................................................25 ■ Como ajustar a base (apenas para os modelos de 19 polegadas)....26 ■ Como ajustar o ângulo do televisor (apenas para os modelos de 19 polegadas)......................26 ■ Instalar Dispositivos de Montagem de acordo com os padrões vESA (apenas para modelos de 19 polegadas)...27 ■ Utilizar as tampas decorativas (apenas para modelos de 19 polegadas)...........................27 ■ Instalar a base....................................................................28 ■ Instalar o kit de montagem na parede................................28 ■ Utilizar o Bloqueio anti-roubo Kensington ..........................28 ■ Manter um espaço de instalação seguro............................29 ■ Fixar o televisor à parede...................................................29 ■ resolução de problemas....................................................30 ■ Características técnicas .....................................................33 CONTEúDO Português BN68-03043A.indb 1 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:51Português - 2 INFORMAÇÃO GERAL ¦ Apresentação do painel de controlo N A cor e a forma do produto podem variar consoante o modelo. N Pode utilizar um botão, carregando num dos botões do painel lateral. 4 1 2 3 5 6 8 8 7 1 SOURCE E: alterna entre todas as fontes de entrada disponíveis. No menu no ecrã, utilize este botão tal como utiliza o botão ENTERE do telecomando. 2 MENU: carregue para ver o menu das funções do televisor no ecrã. 3Y: carregue para aumentar ou diminuir o volume. No menu no ecrã, utilize os botões Y tal como utiliza os botões ◄ e ► do telecomando. 4Z: carregue para mudar de canal. No menu no ecrã, utilize os botões Z tal como utiliza os botões ▼ e ▲ do telecomando. 5 P (Ligar/Desligar): Carregue para ligar e desligar o televisor. 6 SENSOR DO TELECOMANDO: aponte o telecomando para este ponto no televisor. 7 INDICADOR DE CORRENTE: pisca e apaga-se quando o aparelho está ligado, e acende-se quando está no modo de espera. 8 ALTIFALANTES BN68-03043A.indb 2 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:51Português - 3 ¦ Acessórios Telecomando e pilhas (2 pilhas AAA) Cabo de alimentação Tampa da parte inferior (apenas nos modelos de 22 polegadas) Pano de limpeza (M4 X l16) Kit de montagem na parede (apenas nos modelos de 19 polegadas) Tampa decorativa (apenas nos modelos de 19 polegadas) 4 parafusos para a base (apenas nos modelos de 22 polegadas) ● Owner’s Instructions ● Warranty card ● Safety Guide N verifique se os seguintes acessórios estão incluídos no televisor lCd. Se faltar algum dos acessórios, contacte o revendedor. N Cartão de garantia / Manual de segurança (não estão disponíveis em todos os locais) N A cor e a forma dos acessórios podem variar consoante o modelo. BN68-03043A.indb 3 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:52Português - 4 ¦ Apresentação do painel de ligação N A cor e a forma do produto podem variar consoante o modelo. N Antes de ligar um dispositivo externo ao televisor, este tem de estar desligado. N Quando ligar um dispositivo externo, faça a correspondência de cores entre o terminal e o respectivo cabo. 1 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) – estabelece a ligação com um componente de Áudio Digital, tal como um receptor Home theatre. N Quando as tomadas HdMI IN estiverem ligadas, a tomada DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) do televisor disponibiliza apenas som de 2 canais. Se quiser ouvir áudio de 5.1 canais, ligue a tomada Óptica ao leitor de dvd / Blu-ray ou da box de Televisão por cabo/ Satélite directamente a um Amplificador ou Home Theatre e não ao televisor. 2 SERVICE – Conector para actualizações de software. 3 HDMI / PC IN [HDMI (DVI), AUDIO, PC] – Estabelece a ligação à tomada HdMI de um dispositivo com uma saída HdMI. N Não é necessária nenhuma ligação Áudio adicional para uma ligação HdMI a HdMI. N O que é HdMI? HdMI (High-definition Multimedia Interface - Interface multimédia de alta definição) é uma interface que permite a transmissão de sinais de áudio e vídeo digital através de um único cabo. HdMI e dvI diferem pois o dispositivo HdMI é mais pequeno, tem a função de codificação HdCP (High Bandwidth digital Copy Protection - Protecção de banda larga para conteúdos digitais) instalada e suporta som digital multi-canal. N Utilize a tomada HDMI / PC IN [HDMI (DVI)] para a ligação DVI a um dispositivo externo. Utilize um cabo DVI para HDMI ou um adaptador de dvI-HdMI (dvI para HdMI) para uma ligação de vídeo e as tomadas HDMI / PC IN [AUDIO] para áudio. Quando utilizar uma ligação de cabo HdMI / dvI, tem de utilizar a tomada HDMI / PC IN [HDMI (DVI)]. HDMI / PC IN [AUDIO] – ligar à tomada de saída de áudio no PC. – Saídas de áudio dvI para dispositivos externos. HDMI / PC IN [PC] – ligar à tomada de saída de áudio e de vídeo no PC. N Se o seu PC suportar uma ligação HdMI, pode ligar ao terminal HDMI / PC IN [HDMI (DVI)]. N Se o seu PC suportar uma ligação HdMI, pode ligar ao terminal HDMI / PC IN [HDMI (DVI)] / [AUDIO]. 4 AV IN [VIDEO] / [R-AUDIO-L] – ligar um cabo rCA a um dispositivo de A/V externo adequado, como por exemplo, um videogravador, um leitor de DVD ou uma câmara de vídeo. – ligar os cabos de áudio rCA a [R-AUDIO-L] no televisor e as outras extremidades aos conectores de saída de áudio correspondentes no dispositivo A/V. 6 7 1 2 3 4 0 9 8 5 [Painel posterior do televisor] Entrada de energia BN68-03043A.indb 4 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:53Português - 5 5 ANT IN – estabelece a ligação com uma antena ou sistema de televisão por cabo. 6 ranhura COMMON INTERFACE – Ao não introduzir o "CI CArd" em determinados canais, a mensagem "Sinal codificado" é apresentada no ecrã. – As informações de associação incluindo um número de telefone, Id do CI CArd, Id do anfitrião e outras informações são apresentadas cerca de 2 a 3 minutos depois. Se for apresentada uma mensagem de erro, contacte o seu fornecedor de serviços. – Assim que concluir a configuração das informações dos canais, a mensagem "Actualização concluída" é apresentada, indicando que a lista de canais já está actualizada. N Tem de solicitar um CI CArD ao fornecedor de serviços por cabo local. retire o CI CArD puxando-o com cuidado para não o deixar cair e danificá-lo. N Introduza o CI Card na direcção indicada. N A localização da ranhura COMMON INTERFACE pode ser diferente consoante o modelo. N Uma vez que CAM não é suportado nalguns países e regiões, verifique esta situação junto do seu revendedor autorizado. 7 DISPOSITIVO DE BLOQUEIO KENSINGTON (consoante o modelo) – O dispositivo de bloqueio Kensington (opcional) serve para fixar fisicamente o sistema quando utilizado em locais públicos. Se quiser utilizar um dispositivo de bloqueio, contacte o revendedor onde adquiriu o televisor. N A localização do dispositivo de Bloqueio Kensington pode ser diferente consoante o modelo. 8 Tomada de auscultadores – Pode ligar auscultadores à saída de auscultadores no seu equipamento. Quando os auscultadores estão ligados, o som dos altifalantes incorporados é desactivado. 9 COMPONENT IN – ligar os cabos de vídeo de componente (opcionais) ao conector de componente (PR, PB, Y) na parte de trás do televisor, e as outras extremidades aos conectores correspondentes de saída de vídeo no dTv ou no leitor de dvd. – Para ligar o Set-Top Box e o dTv (ou o leitor de dvd), deve ligar o Set-Top Box ao dTv (ou ao leitor de dvd) e o dTv (ou o leitor de dvd) ao conector de componente (PR, PB, Y) no televisor. – Os conectores PR, PB e Y dos dispositivos para componentes (dTv ou leitor de dvd) são por vezes identificados como Y, B-Y e r-Y ou Y, Cb e Cr. – ligar os cabos de áudio rCA (opcionais) a [R-AUDIO-L] na parte de trás do televisor, e as outras extremidades aos conectores correspondentes de saída de áudio no dTv ou no leitor de dvd. 0 EXT (RGB) Conector entrada Saída vídeo Áudio (e / D) rGB vídeo + Áudio (E / d) EXT O O O Apenas está disponível a saída Tv ou dTv. – Entradas ou saídas para dispositivos externos, tais como videogravadores, consolas de jogos ou leitores de dvd. BN68-03043A.indb 5 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:53Português - 6 ¦ Telecomando N Pode utilizar o telecomando até aproximadamente 7 metros de distância do televisor. N O funcionamento do telecomando pode ser afectado por luzes fortes. N A cor e a forma do produto podem variar consoante o modelo. 1 POWER : botão Standby do televisor. 2 BOTÕES NUMÉRICOS : carregue para mudar de canal. 3 FAV.CH : Utilizado para mostrar a lista de canais favoritos no ecrã. 4Y : carregue para aumentar ou diminuir o volume. 5 SOURCE : carregue para seleccionar as fontes de vídeo disponíveis. 6 INFO : carregue para apresentar informações no ecrã do televisor. 7 TOOLS : utilize para seleccionar funções frequentemente utilizadas. 8 CH LIST : apresenta a lista de canais no ecrã 9 BOTÕES COLORIDOS : utilize nos menus da Lista canais, etc. ! TV : selecciona o modo Tv directamente. @ PRE-CH : permite-lhe regressar ao canal estava a ver anteriormente. # MUTEM: carregue para tirar o som ao televisor. $ P

: carregue para mudar de canal. % MENU : apresenta o menu principal no ecrã. ^ GUIDE : visualização do Guia de programação electrónico (EPG) & RETURN : volta ao menu anterior * PARA CIMA▲ / PARA BAIXO▼ / ESQUERDA◄ / DIREITA► / ENTERE : utilize para seleccionar as opções de menu no ecrã e alterar os respectivos valores. ( EXIT : carregue para sair do menu. ) SUBT. : visualização de legendas digitais a AD : Selecção da descrição áudio. Funções de teletexto 5 0 : selecção do modo de Teletexto (lIST / FlOF) 6 5 : mostrar teletexto 7 4 : selecção de tamanho de teletexto 8 8 : memorizar teletexto 9 Selecção de tópicos Fastext 0/ : seleccionar alternadamente Teletexto, Dobragem, ou Sobreposto. ! :: sair da visualização de teletexto @ 1 : página secundária de teletexto $ 2 : página seguinte do teletexto 3 : página anterior do teletexto % 6 : índice do teletexto & 9 : modo de espera de teletexto ( 7 : cancelar teletexto ¦ Colocar pilhas no telecomando 1. levante a tampa na parte de trás do telecomando tal como apresentado na figura. 2. Coloque duas pilhas de tamanho AAA. N Faça corresponder os pólos ‘+’ e ‘–’ das pilhas com o diagrama existente no compartimento. 3. Volte a colocar a tampa. N Se não tencionar utilizar o telecomando durante muito tempo, retire as pilhas e guardeas num local fresco e seco. N Se o telecomando não funcionar, verifique os itens abaixo: ● O televisor está ligado? ● Os pólos + e - das pilhas estão invertidos? ● As pilhas estão gastas? ● Houve um corte de energia ou o cabo de alimentação está desligado? ● Há alguma lâmpada fluorescente especial ou luz de néon por perto? 1 2 4 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 ! @ # $ & * ( ) a % ^ BN68-03043A.indb 6 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:53Português - 7 FUNCIONAMENTO ¦ Aceder aos menus Antes de utilizar o televisor, siga os passos seguintes para saber como navegar no menu e seleccionar ou ajustar diferentes funções. 1. Carregue no botão MENU. O menu principal aparece no ecrã. No lado esquerdo estão alguns ícones: Imagem, Som, Canal, Configurar, Entrada., Aplicação, Assistência. 2. Carregue nos botões ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar um dos ícones. Carregue nos botões ◄ ou ► para aceder aos ícones do menu secundário. 3. Carregue nos botões ▲ ou ▼ para percorrer as opções do menu. Carregue no botão ENTERE para introduzir opções no menu. 4. Carregue nos botões ▲/▼/◄/► para alterar as opções seleccionadas. N Carregue no botão RETURN para voltar ao menu anterior. 5. Carregue no botão EXIT para sair do menu. Utilizar os botões do telecomando Botão Acção Botão Acção MENUm Mostrar o menu principal no ecrã. ▲/▼/◄/►/ ENTERE Movimentar o cursor e seleccionar uma opção. Seleccionar a opção actualmente seleccionada. Confirmar a definição. RUTURNR Voltar ao menu anterior. EXITe Sair do menu no ecrã. Exemplo: Definir o brilho do televisor no menu Imagem „ Ajustar o brilho para 80 1. Carregue no botão MENU para visualizar o menu. 2. Carregue no botão ENTERE para seleccionar Imagem. 3. Carregue nos botões ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar Brilho. 4. Carregue no botão ENTERE. 5. Carregue nos botões ◄ ou ► até o nível de brilho ser 80. 6. Carregue no botão ENTERE. N Carregue no botão EXIT para sair do menu. Modo : Standard ► retroiluminação : 7 Contraste : 95 Brilho : 45 Nitidez : 50 Cor : 50 Matiz (vd/vm) : vd50 / vm50 Imagem Modo : Standard ► retroiluminação : 7 Contraste : 95 Brilho : 45 Nitidez : 50 Cor : 50 Matiz (vd/vm) : vd50 / vm50 Imagem retroiluminação : 7 Contraste : 95 Brilho : 45 ► Nitidez : 50 Cor : 50 Matiz (vd/vm) : vd50 / vm50 definições avançadas Opções de imagem reposição de imagem Imagem U Mover L Ajustar E enter R Voltar Brilho 45 U Mover L Ajustar E enter R Voltar Brilho 80 Modo : Standard ► retroiluminação : 7 Contraste : 95 Brilho : 45 Nitidez : 50 Cor : 50 Matiz (vd/vm) : vd50 / vm50 Imagem BN68-03043A.indb 7 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:54Português - 8 ¦ Definir o televisor para modo de espera Pode definir o seu televisor para o modo de espera, para reduzir o consumo de energia. O modo de espera é útil quando precisa e interromper a visualização temporariamente (por exemplo, durante a refeição). 1. Carregue no botão POWERP no telecomando. N O ecrã apaga-se e aparece o indicador luminoso do modo de espera no televisor. 2. Para voltar a ligar o televisor, basta carregar no botão POWERP novamente. N Não deixe o televisor em modo de espera durante longos períodos de tempo (por exemplo, quando vai de férias). Aconselha-se que desligue o televisor da corrente eléctrica e da antena. ¦ Função Plug & Play Quando ligar o televisor pela primeira vez, as definições básicas são utilizadas de forma automática e subsequente. 1. Carregue no botão POWER no telecomando. Aparece a mensagem You can set the menu language.. 2. Seleccione o idioma apropriado carregando nos botões ▲ ou ▼. Carregue no botão ENTERE para confirmar a escolha. 3. Carregue nos botões ◄ ou ► para seleccionar Demo Loja ou Uso Doméstico e em seguida no botão ENTERE. N recomendamos a configuração do televisor para o modo Uso Doméstico de modo a usufruir da melhor imagem em sua casa. N Demo Loja destina-se apenas para locais de venda a retalho. N Se o televisor for acidentalmente configurado para o modo Demo Loja e quiser voltar ao modo Uso Doméstico (Standard): carregue no botão de volume no televisor. Quando aparecer o OSd de volume, carregue sem largar o botão MENU no televisor durante 5 segundos. 4. Carregue no botão ENTERE. Seleccione o país apropriado carregando nos botões ▲ ou ▼. Carregue no botão ENTERE para confirmar a escolha. 5. Carregue nos botões ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar Antena ou Cabo e em seguida no botão ENTERE. N Antena: Sinal de Antena. Cabo: Sinal de Cabo. 6. Carregue nos botões ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar a fonte do canal a memorizar. Carregue no botão ENTERE para seleccionar Iniciar. N Digital e Analógico: canais digitais e analógicos. Digital: canais digitais. Analógico: canais analógicos. N Ao definir a fonte de antena para Cabo, pode definir um valor para a procura de canais digitais. Para mais informações, consulte Canal→ Memor. auto.. N A procura de canais começa e termina automaticamente. N Carregue no botão ENTERE a qualquer altura para interromper o processo de memorização. N depois de todos os canais disponíveis terem sido memorizados, a mensagem Ajustar o Modo Relógio é apresentada. 7. Carregue no botão ENTERE. Carregue nos botões ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar Auto. e em seguida no botão ENTERE. N Se seleccionar Manual, Ajustar data e hora actuais é apresentado. N Se receber um sinal digital, a hora será definida automaticamente. Se esta não for apresentada, seleccione Manual para acertar o relógio. (consulte a página 20) 8. O método de ligação para oferecer a melhor qualidade Hd é fornecido. depois de confirmar o método, carregue no botão ENTERE. 9. A Mensag. Desfrute do seu televisor. é apresentada. Quando tiver terminado, carregue no botão ENTERE. Se quiser repor esta função... 1. Carregue no botão MENU para visualizar o menu. Carregue nos botões ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar Configurar e em seguida no botão ENTERE. 2. Carregue novamente no botão ENTERE para seleccionar Plug & Play. 3. Introduza o número PIN de 4 dígitos. O número PIN predefinido de um televisor novo é 0-0-0-0. N Se quiser alterar o número PIN, utilize a função Alterar PIN. (consulte a página 22) N A função Plug & Play só está disponível no modo Tv. Plug & Play You can set the menu language. Menu language : English ► E enter BN68-03043A.indb 8 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:54Português - 9 ¦ Visualização no ecrã A visualização no ecrã identifica o canal actual e o estado de determinadas definições de áudio-vídeo. O Carregue no botão INFO para visualizar as informações. Carregue no botão INFO no telecomando. O canal, o tipo de som e o estado de determinadas definições de imagem e som são apresentados no televisor. ● ▲, ▼: pode visualizar outras informações do canal. Se quer passar para o canal actualmente seleccionado, carregue no botão ENTERE. ● ◄, ►: pode visualizar as informações do programa pretendido no canal actual. N Carregue novamente no botão INFO ou espere aproximadamente 10 segundos e o ecrã desaparece automaticamente. CONTROLO DOS CANAIS ¦ Configurar o menu Canais ❑ País N É apresentado o ecrã para a introdução do número PIN. Introduza o número PIN de 4 dígitos. „ Canal analógico Pode alterar o país nos canais analógicos. „ Canal digital Pode alterar o país nos canais digitais. ❑ Memor. auto. Pode procurar os intervalos de frequência disponíveis (a disponibilidade depende do país em que se encontra). Os números de programas atribuídos automaticamente podem não corresponder aos números de programas existentes ou pretendidos. N Se o canal estiver bloqueado utilizando a função Canal bloqueado a janela para a introdução do PIN é apresentada. „ Antena / Cabo Fonte de antena a memorizar ● Digital e Analógico: canais digitais e analógicos. ● Digital: canais digitais. ● Analógico: canais analógicos. Ao seleccionar ‘Cabo→ Digital e Analógico’ ou ‘Cabo→ Digital’ Indique um valor para procurar canais de cabo. ● Modo de procura → Completa / Rede / Rápida N Rápida – ID de rede: apresenta o código de identificação de rede. – Frequência: apresenta a frequência para o canal. (difere de país para país) – Modulação: apresenta os valores de modulação disponíveis. – Taxa de símbolos: apresenta as taxas de símbolos disponíveis. N Procura todos os canais com estações de transmissão activas e guarda-os na memória do televisor. N Se pretende parar a Memorização automática, carregue no botão ENTERE. A mensagem Parar a programação automática? será apresentada. Seleccione Sim carregando nos botões ◄ ou ► e em seguida no botão ENTERE. País ► Memor. auto. Memor. manual Opção de Procura por Cabo Guia act. e posterior Guia completo Guia predef. : Guia completo Canal DTV Air 15 abc1 18:00 ~ 6:00 18:11 Thu 6 Jan life On venus Avenue Unclassified No Detaild Information ¦ INFO BN68-03043A.indb 9 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:54Português - 10 ❑ Memor. manual N Procura o canal manualmente e guarda-o na memória do televisor. N Se o canal estiver bloqueado utilizando a função Canal bloqueado a janela para a introdução do PIN é apresentada. „ Canal digital Memorização manual dos canais digitais. N Canal digital só está disponível no modo dTv. ● Canal: defina o número do canal utilizando o botão ▲, ▼ ou os botões numéricos (0~9). ● Frequência: defina a frequência utilizando os botões numéricos. ● Largura banda: defina a banda utilizando o botão ▲, ▼ ou os botões numéricos (0~9). N Quando concluído, os canais são actualizados na lista de canais. „ Canal analógico Memorização manual dos canais analógicos. ● Programa (Número do programa a ser atribuído a um canal): define o número do programa utilizando os botões ▲,▼ ou numéricos (0~9). ● Sistema cores → Auto. / PAL / SECAM / NTSC4.43: define os valores do sistema de cores utilizando os botões ▲ ou ▼. ● Sistema som → BG / DK / I / L: define os valores do sistema de som utilizando os botões ▲ ou ▼. ● Canal(Se souber o número do canal a memorizar): carregue nos botões ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar C (Canal de antena) ou S (Canal de cabo). Carregue no botão ► e em seguida, nos botões ▲, ▼ ou numéricos (0~9) para seleccionar o número pretendido. N Também pode seleccionar o número do canal directamente ao carregar nos botões numéricos (0~9). N Se não ouvir som ou se este não estiver em condições, volte a seleccionar o padrão de som pretendido. ● Busca (Se não souber os números dos canais): carregue nos botões ▲ ou ▼ para iniciar a procura. O sintonizador procura a amplitude de frequências até aparecer no ecrã o primeiro canal, ou o canal seleccionado. ● Memorizar (Quando memoriza o canal e o número do programa associado): defina para OK carregando no botão ENTERE. N Canal Modo – P (Modo de programa): ao concluir a sintonização, já terão sido atribuídos números de posição (de P00 a P99) às estações emissoras da sua área. Pode seleccionar um canal, introduzindo o número da posição neste modo. – C (Modo de canal de antena): pode seleccionar um canal, introduzindo o número atribuído a cada estação emissora neste modo. – S (Modo de canal de cabo): pode seleccionar um canal, introduzindo o número atribuído a cada canal de cabo neste modo. ❑ Opção de Procura por Cabo (dependendo do país) define opções de procura adicionais, como a frequência e a taxa de símbolos, para procuras de rede por cabo. ● Frequência (Iniciar ~ Parar): apresenta a frequência para o canal. ● Modulação: apresenta os valores de modulação disponíveis. ● Taxa de símbolos: apresenta as taxas de símbolos disponíveis. ❑ Guia act. e posterior / Guia completo As informações do EPG (Guia de programação electrónico) são fornecidas pelas estações emissoras. Pode haver entradas de programas em branco ou desactualizadas em consequência da transmissão de informações de um determinado canal. O ecrã é actualizado de forma dinâmica à medida que novas informações ficam disponíveis. N Para procedimentos detalhados sobre a utilização de Guia act. e posterior e Guia completo, consulte as descrições na página 11. O Também pode aceder ao menu do guia carregando no botão GUIDE. (Para configurar o Guia predef., consulte as descrições.) „ Guia act. e posterior Mostra informações sobre o programa actual e o posterior em relação aos seis canais indicados na coluna do lado esquerdo. „ Guia completo Apresenta as informações sobre os programas de hora em hora. São apresentadas informações de duas horas de programação, que pode percorrer para a frente ou para trás no tempo. BN68-03043A.indb 10 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:54Português - 11 ❑ Guia predef. → Guia act. e posterior / Guia completo Pode decidir entre apresentar o Guia act. e posterior ou o Guia completo ao carregar no botão GUIDE do telecomando. ❑ Lista canais Para procedimentos detalhados sobre a utilização de Lista canais,consulte as instruções de ‘Gerir canais’. O Pode seleccionar estas opções ao carregar no botão CH LIST no telecomando. ❑ Modo Canal Quando carrega no botão P >/<, os canais são alterados de acordo com a lista de canais seleccionados. „ Canais adicionados os canais alternam de acordo com a lista de canais memorizados. „ Canais favoritos os canais alternam de acordo com a lista de canais favoritos. ❑ Sintonia fina Se a recepção for nítida, não precisa de fazer a sintonização fina do canal, uma vez que é feita automaticamente durante a procura e memorização. No entanto, se o sinal for fraco ou estiver distorcido, pode ser necessário fazer uma sintonização fina manual dos canais. N Os canais memorizados onde foi efectuada a sintonização fina estão marcados com um asterisco ‘*’ no lado direito do número do canal na banda de canais. N Para repor a sintonização fina, seleccione Reiniciar carregando nos botões ▲ ou ▼ e em seguida no botão ENTERE. N A sintonização fina apenas pode ser utilizada nos canais analógicos. Utilizar o Guia act. e posterior / Guia completo Para... Escolha... ver um programa da lista EPG Seleccionar um programa carregando nos botões ▲, ▼, ◄, ►. Sair do guia Carregar no botão azul Se seleccionar o programa seguinte, este fica agendado com o ícone de relógio visível. Se carregar de novo no botão ENTERE, carregue nos botões ◄, ► para seleccionar Cancelar planos. Os agendamentos são cancelados e o ícone do relógio desaparece. Ver as informações dos programas Seleccionar um programa à sua escolha, carregando nos botões ▲, ▼, ◄, ►. Carregue depois no botão INFO quando o programa que escolheu estiver realçado. O nome do programa é apresentado na parte de superior do centro do ecrã. Carregue no botão INFO para obter informações detalhadas. Nas informações detalhadas estão incluídos aspectos como o Número do canal, duração do programa, Barra de estado, Autoridade parental, Informação sobre a qualidade de vídeo (Hd / Sd), Modos de som, legendas ou Teletexto, Idiomas das legendas ou do teletexto, e um breve resumo sobre o programa realçado. ‘...’ é apresentado se o resumo for demasiado longo. Alternar entre Guia act. e posterior e Guia completo Carregar várias vezes no botão vermelho. No Guia completo Andar rapidamente para trás (24 horas). Andar rapidamente para a frente (24 horas). Carregar várias vezes no botão verde. Carregar várias vezes no botão amarelo. Guia completo dTv Cable 900 f tn 2:10 Ter 1 Jun Freshmen On Campus 2:00 - 2:30 No Detailed Information Hoje 2:00 - 3:00 3:00 - 4:00 Mint extra loaded Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC The Distillery Smash Hits! Sunday 1 f tn 2 ITv Play 3 Kerrang! 4 Kiss 5 oneword ▼ 6 Smash Hits! No Information Freshmen O.. Ver INFO Informação ■ Act./Post ■ +24 Horas ■ Sair Guia act. e posterior dTv Cable 900 f tn 2:10 Ter 1 Jun Freshmen On Campus 2:00 - 2:30 No Detailed Information Agora Seguinte Mint extra loaded Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC The Distillery Smash Hits! Sunday 1 f tn 2 ITv Play 3 Kerrang! 4 Kiss 5 oneword ▼ 6 Smash Hits! Kisstory No Information No Information No Information Street Hypn.. Ver INFO Informação ■ Guia completo ■ Sair BN68-03043A.indb 11 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:55Português - 12 ¦ Gerir canais Ao utilizar este menu, pode Adicionar / Eliminar ou definir os canais Favoritos e utilizar o guia de programas para transmissões digitais. „ Todos os canais Mostra todos os canais disponíveis. „ Canais adicionados Mostra todos os canais adicionados. „ Favoritos Mostra todos os canais favoritos. O Para seleccionar os canais definidos como Favoritos, carregue no botão FAV.CH do telecomando. „ Programado Mostra todos os programas actualmente reservados. N Seleccione um canal no ecrã Todos os canais, Canais adicionados ou Favoritos carregando nos botões ▲ / ▼ e em seguida no botão ENTERE. Pode então ver o canal seleccionado. N Utilizar os botões coloridos com a Lista de canais – Vermelho (Canal Tipo): Alternar entre TV, Rádio, Dados / Outros e Todas. – Verde (Zoom): Aumenta ou diminui o número de um canal. – Amarelo (Selecionar): selecciona várias listas de canais. Pode executar as funções adicionar / eliminar, adicionar aos Favoritos / eliminar dos Favoritos ou bloquear / desbloquear para vários canais ao mesmo tempo. Seleccione os canais pretendidos e carregue ao mesmo tempo no botão amarelo para definir todos os canais seleccionados. A marca c é apresentada à esquerda dos canais seleccionados. – TOOLS (Ferramentas): Apresenta o menu Apagar (ou Adicionar), Adicionar aos favoritos (ou Apagar dos favoritos), Bloquear (ou Desbloq.), Visual. Temporizador, Editar nome, Ordenar, Edição do Canal nº, Selec. Todos (ou Anular selecção), Memor. auto.. (O menu Opções pode variar consoante a situação.) N Ícones do ecrã sobre o estado do canal ● A : um canal analógico. ● c : um canal seleccionado ao carregar no botão amarelo. ● * : um canal definido como Favorito. ● ( : um programa que está a ser transmitido. ● \ : um canal bloqueado. ● ) : um programa reservado Menu Opções de lista de canais (em Todos os canais / Canais adicionados / Favoritos) N Carregue no botão TOOLS para utilizar o menu de opções. N O menu de opções pode variar dependendo do estado do canal. „ Adicionar / Apagar Pode eliminar ou adicionar um canal a ser apresentado nos canais pretendidos. N Todos os canais eliminados são apresentados no menu Todos os canais. N Um canal a cinzento indica que este foi eliminado. N O menu Adicionar só é apresentado para canais eliminados. N Também pode, do mesmo modo, eliminar um canal do menu Canais adicionados ou Favoritos. „ Adicionar aos favoritos / Apagar dos favoritos Pode definir os canais que vê frequentemente como favoritos. T Carregue no botão TOOLS para visualizar o menu Ferramentas. Também pode definir a função adicionar aos (ou eliminar dos) Favoritos, seleccionando Ferramentas→ Adicionar aos favoritos(ou Apagar dos favoritos). N O símbolo ‘ ’ é apresentado e o canal é definido como favorito. N Todos os canais favoritos são apresentados no menu Favoritos. 824 UKTV Gold 825 UKTV style A 1 C -- A 2 C -- A 3 ♥ C -- A 4 C -- A 5 C -- A 6 C -- A 7 C -- Canais adicionados Todos ■ Canal Tipo ■ Zoom ■ Selecionar T Ferramentas 824 UKTV Gold 825 UKTV style A 1 C -- A 2 C -- A 3 ♥ C -- A 4 C -- A 5 C -- A 6 C -- A 7 C -- Canais adicionados Todos ■ Canal Tipo ■ Zoom ■ Selecionar T Ferramentas Apagar Adicionar aos favoritos Bloquear Visual. Temporizador Editar nome de canal Ordenar ▼ BN68-03043A.indb 12 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:55Português - 13 „ Bloquear / Desbloq. Pode bloquear um canal para que o mesmo não seja nem seleccionado nem visualizado. Esta função está disponível apenas quando Bloq. crianças está definido para Lig.. (consulte a página 22) N É apresentado o ecrã para a introdução do número PIN. Introduza o número PIN de 4 dígitos. N O número PIN predefinido de um televisor novo é 0-0-0-0. Pode alterar o PIN, seleccionando a opção Alterar PIN no menu. N O símbolo “\” é apresentado e o canal é bloqueado. „ Visual. Temporizador Se reservar um programa que queira assistir, o televisor muda automaticamente para o canal da lista onde tinha reservado o programa, mesmo que esteja a visualizar outro canal. Para reservar um programa, defina em primeiro lugar a hora actual. (Consulte a página 20) N Apenas canais memorizados podem ser reservados. N Pode definir directamente o canal, o dia, o mês, o ano, a hora e o minuto, ao carregar nos botões numéricos do telecomando. N A reserva de um programa é apresentada no menu Programa. N Guia de programas digitais e Reservas de visualização Se carregar no botão ►, quando seleccionar um canal digital, o Guia de programas desse canal é apresentado. Pode reservar um programa se seguir os procedimentos descritos acima. „ Editar nome de canal (apenas canais analógicos) Os canais podem ser etiquetados de modo a que as letras que os definem sejam apresentadas quando os mesmos são seleccionados. N Os nomes dos canais digitais são atribuídos automaticamente e não podem ser etiquetados. „ Edição do Canal nº (apenas canais digitais) Pode também editar o número do canal se carregar nos botões numéricos do telecomando. „ Ordenar (apenas canais analógicos) Esta operação permite alterar os números de programa dos canais memorizados. Esta operação pode ser necessária depois de utilizar a memorização automática. „ Selec. Todos / Anular selecção ● Selec. Todos: pode seleccionar todos os canais da lista de canais. ● Anular selecção: pode retirar a selecção a todos os canais anteriormente seleccionados. N Apenas pode seleccionar Anular selecção quando existe um canal seleccionado. „ Memor. auto. N Para mais informações sobre a configuração das opções, consulte a página 9. N Se o canal estiver bloqueado utilizando a função Canal bloqueado a janela para a introdução do PIN é apresentada. Menu de opções de lista de canais (em Programado) Pode visualizar, modificar ou eliminar uma reserva. N Carregue no botão TOOLS para utilizar o menu de opções. „ Alterar informações Seleccione esta opção para alterar uma reserva em visualização. „ Cancelar planos Seleccione esta opção para cancelar uma reserva em visualização. „ Informação Seleccione esta opção para visualizar uma reserva em visualização. (Também pode alterar as informações de reserva.) „ Selec. Todos Seleccione todos os programas reservados. 1 / 1 / 2009 13:59 5 Tv1 Quincy, M.E 18:59 2 Tv3 The equalizer 20:59 2 Tv3 McMillan & Wife Programado Todos ■ Zoom ■ Selecionar T Ferramentas E Informação Alterar informações Cancelar planos Informação Selec. Todos BN68-03043A.indb 13 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:55Português - 14 CONTROLO DA IMAGEM ¦ Configurar o menu Imagem ❑ Modo Pode seleccionar o tipo de imagem que melhor se adeqúe aos seus requisitos de visualização. T Carregue no botão TOOLS para visualizar o menu Ferramentas. Também pode definir o modo de imagem ao seleccionar Ferramentas → Imagem Modo. „ Dinâmico Selecciona a imagem para que seja exibida com alta definição numa sala clara. „ Standard Selecciona a imagem para que seja exibida em condições ideais num ambiente normal. „ Filme Selecciona a imagem para a visualização de filmes numa sala escura. ❑ Retroiluminação / Retroiluminação / Brilho / Nitidez / Cor / Matiz (Vd/Vm) O televisor tem várias opções de definição que permitem controlar a qualidade da imagem. ● Retroiluminação: ajusta o brilho da retro-iluminação do lCd. ● Contraste: ajusta o nível de contraste da imagem. ● Brilho: ajusta o nível de brilho da imagem ● Nitidez: ajusta a definição das extremidades da imagem. ● Cor: ajusta a saturação da cor da imagem. ● Matiz (Vd/Vm): ajusta a matiz da cor da imagem. N Seleccione o modo de imagem a ser ajustado em primeiro lugar. Os valores de ajuste são gravados para cada modo de imagem. N Quando faz alterações a Retroiluminação, Contraste, Brilho, Nitidez, Cor ou Matiz (Vd/Vm), o OSd ajusta-se em conformidade. N Nos modos TV, Ext., AV analógicos do sistema PAl, não pode utilizar a função Matiz (Vd/Vm). N No modo PC, apenas pode fazer alterações a Retroiluminação, Contraste e Brilho. N As definições podem ser ajustadas e guardadas para cada dispositivo externo que ligar a uma entrada do televisor. N O consumo de energia durante a utilização pode ser reduzido de forma significativa se o nível de brilho da imagem for reduzido, o que significa uma redução no custo geral de funcionamento. ❑ Definições avançadas O novo televisor da Samsung permite-lhe definir de modo mais preciso as imagens do que os modelos anteriores. veja abaixo como ajustar as definições detalhadas das imagens. N Definições avançadas está disponível no modo Standard ou Filme. N No modo PC, apenas pode fazer alterações a Gama e Equilíb. branco de entre as opções Definições avançadas. „ Tonalidade de preto → Deslig. / Escuro / Mais escuro / Muito escuro Pode seleccionar o nível de preto no ecrã para ajustar a intensidade. „ Contraste dinâm. → Deslig. / Baixo / Médio / Alto Pode ajustar o contraste do ecrã até obter o contraste ideal. „ Gama Pode ajustar a intensidade das Cores primárias (vermelho, verde, azul). „ Matriz de cores A Matriz de cores é um esquema de cores composto por vermelho, verde e azul. Seleccione a sua Matriz de cores favorita para obter uma cor mais natural. ● Nativo: a Matriz de cores nativa fornece uma tonalidade mais rica e profunda. ● Auto.: a Matriz de cores automática ajusta automaticamente a tonalidade de cor mais natural com base em fontes de programa. Modo : Standard ► retroiluminação : 7 Contraste : 95 Brilho : 45 Nitidez : 50 Cor : 50 Matiz (vd/vm) : vd50 / vm50 Imagem Cor : 50 Matiz (vd/vm) : vd50 / vm50 Definições avançadas ► Opções de imagem reposição de imagem Imagem BN68-03043A.indb 14 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:56Português - 15 „ Equilíb. branco Pode ajustar a temperatura da cor de modo a obter imagens com cores mais naturais. ● Vrm-Offset / Verde-Offset / Azul-Offset / Vrm-Gain / Verde-Gain / Azul-Gain: Pode ajustar a "temperatura" da cor nas áreas claras alternando os valores r (vermelho), G (verde) e B (azul). recomendado apenas para utilizadores avançados. ● Reiniciar: o equilíbrio do branco ajustado anteriormente volta às predefinições. „ Tom de pele Pode realçar o tom de pele na imagem. N Se alterar os valores de ajuste, será efectuada a actualização do ecrã. „ Melhor. extremid. → Deslig. / Lig. Pode realçar os limites dos objectos na imagem. ❑ Opções de imagem N No modo PC, apenas pode efectuar alterações a Tonalidade e Tamanho de entre as opções em Opções de imagem”. „ Tonalidade → CoresFr / Normal / C. quentes1 / C. quentes2 Pode seleccionar a tonalidade mais confortável para si. N As definições podem ser ajustadas e guardadas para cada dispositivo externo que ligar a uma entrada do televisor. N C. quentes1 ou C. quentes2 apenas estão activados quando o modo de imagem é Filme. „ Tamanho Pode seleccionar o tamanho de imagem que melhor se adeqúe aos seus requisitos de visualização. T Carregue no botão TOOLS para visualizar o menu Ferramentas. Também pode definir o tamanho ao seleccionar Ferramentas → Imagem Tamanho. ● Wide Automático: ajusta automaticamente o tamanho da imagem para o formato 16:9. ● 16:9: ajusta o tamanho da imagem para 16:9, apropriado para dvd ou transmissão em banda larga. ● Zoom amplo: aumenta o tamanho da imagem para mais de 4:3. ● Zoom: amplia a imagem de formato 16:9 (na direcção vertical) para se ajustar ao tamanho do ecrã. ● 4:3: esta é a predefinição para um filme de vídeo ou para uma transmissão normal. ● Ajustar ao ecrã: Utilize esta função para ver a imagem inteira sem cortes durante a recepção dos sinais HDMI (720p / 1080i) ou Componente (1080i). N As opções de tamanho da imagem podem variar consoante a fonte de entrada. N As opções disponíveis podem variar consoante o modo seleccionado. N No modo PC, apenas os modos 16:9 e 4:3 podem ser ajustados. N As definições podem ser ajustadas e guardadas para cada dispositivo externo que ligar a uma entrada do televisor. N Pode ocorrer uma retenção temporária da imagem ao visualizar uma imagem fixa por um período superior a duas horas. N Zoom amplo: carregue no botão ► para seleccionar Posição em seguida carregue no botão ENTERE. carregue nos botões ▲ ou ▼ para mover a imagem para cima e para baixo. Em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE. N Zoom: carregue no botão ► para seleccionar Posição em seguida carregue no botão ENTERE. carregue nos botões ▲ ou ▼ para deslocar a imagem para cima e para baixo. Em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE. Carregue no botão ► para seleccionar Tamanho e em seguida no botão ENTERE. Carregue nos botões ▲ ou ▼ para ampliar ou reduzir o tamanho da imagem na vertical. em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE. N Depois de seleccionar Ajustar ao ecrã nos modos HdMI (1080i) ou Componente (1080i): seleccione Posição carregando nos botões ◄ ou ►. Utilize os botões ▲, ▼, ◄ ou ► para mover a imagem. Reiniciar: carregue nos botões ◄ ou ► para seleccionar Reiniciar e em seguida no botão ENTERE. Pode inicializar a definição. N Se utilizar a função Ajustar ao ecrã com uma entrada HdMI 720p, é cortada uma linha na parte de cima, na parte de baixo, à esquerda e à direita como na função de Procura. „ Modo de ecrã → 16:9 / Zoom amplo / Zoom / 4:3 Ao definir o tamanho da imagem para Wide Automático num televisor panorâmico 16:9, pode determinar o tamanho que pretende ver imagem 4:3 WSS (Wide Screen Service) ou nenhuma. Cada país europeu requer um tamanho de imagem diferente pelo que esta função permite aos utilizadores seleccionar o tamanho. ● 16:9: define a imagem para o modo panorâmico 16:9. ● Zoom amplo: aumenta o tamanho da imagem para mais de 4:3. ● Zoom: aumenta o tamanho da imagem na vertical. ● 4:3: define a imagem para o modo normal 4:3. N Esta função está disponível no modo Wide Automático. N Esta função não está disponível nos modos PC, Componente ou HDMI. BN68-03043A.indb 15 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:56Português - 16 „ NR Digital → Deslig. / Baixo / Médio / Alto / Auto. Se o sinal de transmissão recebido pelo seu televisor for fraco, pode activar a função de redução do ruído digital para ajudar a diminuir os efeitos da electricidade estática ou de fantasma que possam aparecer no ecrã. N Se o sinal for fraco, seleccione uma das outras opções até que apareça no ecrã a melhor imagem. „ Nv.pr.HDMI → Normal / Baixo Pode seleccionar directamente o nível de preto no ecrã para ajustar a intensidade. N Esta função apenas está activa quando ligar a entrada externa a HdMI (sinais rGB). „ Modo Filme → Deslig. / Auto. O televisor pode ser definido para detectar e processar automaticamente sinais de filme de todas as fontes, e ajustar a imagem a uma qualidade ideal. N Modo Filme é suportado em TV, AV, COMPONENTE(480i / 1080i) e HDMI(480i / 1080i). ❑ Reposição de imagem → Repor modo de imagem / Cancelar repõe os valores predefinidos das definições de imagem. N Seleccione o modo de imagem a ser reposto. A reposição é feita para cada modo de imagem. ● Repor modo de imagem: Os valores actuais da imagem voltam para a predefinição de fábrica. ¦ Utilizar o televisor como monitor de computador (PC) Configurar o software do PC (com base em Windows XP) As definições de visualização do Windows num computador normal são apresentadas abaixo. Os ecrãs que aparecem no monitor do seu PC são provavelmente diferentes, dependendo da sua versão do Windows e da placa de vídeo. Contudo, mesmo que os ecrãs sejam diferentes, em quase todos os casos, aplicam-se as mesmas informações de configuração básicas. (Se tal não acontecer, contacte o fabricante do computador ou um revendedor Samsung.) 1. Em primeiro lugar, clique em "Painel de controlo" no menu Iniciar do Windows. 2. Quando a janela do painel de controlo for apresentada, clique em "Aspecto e Temas" e surgirá uma janela de diálogo. 3. Quando a janela do painel de controlo for apresentada, clique em ‘"visualização" e surgirá uma janela de diálogo. 4. Navegue pelo separador "definições" na janela de diálogo de visualização. definição de tamanho correcta (resolução): óptima - 1360 x 768 pixels Se existir uma opção de frequência vertical na janela de diálogo das definições da visualização, o valor correcto é "60" ou "60 Hz". Se não for o caso, basta clicar em ‘"OK" e sair da caixa de diálogo. BN68-03043A.indb 16 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:56Português - 17 Modos de visualização A posição e o tamanho do ecrã variam de acordo com o tipo de monitor do PC e a respectiva resolução. recomendam-se as resoluções apresentadas na tabela. „ Entrada D-Sub e HDMI/DVI Modo Resolução Frequência horizontal (KHz) Frequência vertical (Hz) Frequência do relógio em pixels (MHz) Polaridade de sincronização (H/V) IBM 640 x 350 31,469 70,086 25,175 +/- 720 x 400 31,469 70,087 28,322 -/+ MAC 640 x 480 35,000 66,667 30,240 -/- 832 x 624 49,726 74,551 57,284 -/- VeSA CVT 720 x 576 35,910 59,950 32,750 -/+ 1280 x 720 44,772 59,855 74,500 -/+ 1280 x 720 56,456 74,777 95,750 -/+ VeSA DMT 640 x 480 31,469 59,940 25,175 -/- 640 x 480 37,500 75,000 31,500 -/- 640 x 480 37,861 72,809 31,500 -/- 800 x 600 37,879 60,317 40,000 +/+ 800 x 600 46,875 75,000 49,500 +/+ 800 x 600 48,077 72,188 50,000 +/+ 1024 x 768 48,363 60,004 65,000 -/- 1024 x 768 56,476 70,069 75,000 -/- 1024 x 768 60,023 75,029 78,750 +/+ 1360 x 768 47,712 60,015 85,500 +/+ VeSA GTF 1280 x 720 52,500 70,000 89,040 -/+ N Quando utilizar uma ligação de cabo HdMI/dvI, tem de utilizar a tomada HDMI (DVI). N O modo entrelaçado não é suportado. N O aparelho pode não funcionar correctamente se for seleccionado um formato de vídeo não padrão. N São suportados os modos Separado e Composto. SOG não é suportado. ¦ Configurar o televisor com o PC N Predefinição: carregue no botão SOURCE para seleccionar o modo PC. ❑ Ajuste auto. O Ajuste automático permite que o monitor do PC se ajuste automaticamente ao sinal de vídeo recebido de um PC. Os valores fino, grosso e posição são ajustados automaticamente. N Esta função não está disponível no modo dvI-HdMI. T Carregue no botão TOOLS para visualizar o menu Ferramentas. Também pode definir o Ajuste automático ao seleccionar Ferramentas → Ajuste auto.. ❑ Ecr㠄 Grosso / Fino O objectivo do ajuste da qualidade da imagem é o de remover ou reduzir o ruído da imagem. Se não conseguir retirar o ruído fazendo apenas a sintonização fina, ajuste a frequência o melhor possível (Grosso) e volte a fazer a sintonização fina. depois de reduzido o ruído, volte a ajustar a imagem de forma a ficar alinhada no centro do ecrã. „ Posição do PC Pode ajustar a posição do ecrã do PC se esta não se ajustar por completo ao televisor. Carregue nos botões ▲ ou ▼ para ajustar a Posição vertical. Carregue nos botões ◄ ou ► para ajustar a Posição horizontal. „ Repor imagem Pode substituir todas as definições da imagem pelos valores predefinidos. Brilho : 45 Nitidez : 50 Ajuste auto. ► ecrã definições avançadas Opções de imagem reposição de imagem Imagem BN68-03043A.indb 17 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:56Português - 18 CONTROLO DO SOM ¦ Configurar o menu Som ❑ Modo → Standard / Música / Filme / Voz nítida / Personal. Pode seleccionar o modo de som de acordo com as suas preferências pessoais. T Carregue no botão TOOLS para visualizar o menu Ferramentas. Também pode configurar o modo de som se seleccionar Ferramentas → Modo Som. „ Standard Selecciona o modo de som normal. „ Música dá ênfase à música em detrimento das vozes. „ Filme Proporciona a melhor qualidade de som para filmes. „ Voz nítida dá ênfase à voz, em detrimento de outros sons. „ Personal. Memoriza as suas definições de som. ❑ Equalizador Pode ajustar as definições de som de acordo com as suas preferências pessoais. „ Modo Pode seleccionar o modo de som de acordo com as suas preferências pessoais. „ Balanço Controla o equilíbrio entre os altifalantes esquerdo e direito. „ 100Hz / 300Hz / 1KHz / 3KHz / 10KHz (Ajuste de banda larga) Para ajustar o nível de diferentes frequências de largura de banda „ Reiniciar repõe os valores predefinidos do equalizador. ❑ SRS TruSurround HD → Deslig. / Lig. TruSurround Hd é uma tecnologia patenteada da SrS que permite reproduzir conteúdos 5.1 multi-canais apenas com dois altifalantes. A tecnologia TruSurround proporciona um excelente som surround virtual, através de qualquer sistema de reprodução com dois altifalantes, incluindo os altifalantes internos de televisores. É totalmente compatível com todos os formatos multi-canal. ❑ Idioma de áudio (apenas canais digitais) Pode alterar o valor predefinido dos idiomas de áudio. Apresenta as informações do idioma da transmissão a ser recebida. N Apenas pode seleccionar de entre os idiomas disponíveis pela transmissão. N Quando estiver a ver um canal digital, pode seleccionar esta função. ❑ Formato áudio → MPEG / Dolby Digital (apenas canal digital) Se o som for emitido tanto pelo altifalante principal como pelo receptor de áudio, pode ouvir-se um eco devido à diferença na velocidade de descodificação entre o altifalante principal e o receptor de áudio. Neste caso, utilize a função Altifalante do televisor. N O Formato de áudio é apresentado consoante o sinal de transmissão. N Quando estiver a ver um canal digital, pode seleccionar esta função. Modo : Personal. ► equalizador SrS TruSurround Hd : deslig. Idioma de áudio : - - - Formato áudio : - - - descrição áudio volume auto. : deslig. Som BN68-03043A.indb 18 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:57Português - 19 ❑ Descrição áudio (apenas canais digitais) Esta é uma função auxiliar de áudio que fornece uma faixa de áudio adicional para pessoas com deficiências visuais. Esta função gere o Fluxo de áudio para o Ad (descrição de áudio), quando é enviado pelo transmissor juntamente com o Áudio principal. Os utilizadores podem ligar ou desligar a descrição de áudio e regular o volume. O Carregue no botão AD no telecomando para seleccionar Deslig. ou Lig.. „ Descrição áudio → Deslig. / Lig. ligue e desligue a função de descrição de áudio. „ Volume Pode regular o volume da descrição de áudio. N Volume está activo quando Descrição áudio está definido Lig.. ❑ Volume auto. → Deslig. / Lig. Cada estação emissora tem condições de sinal específicas e, por isso, não é fácil regular o volume sempre que muda de canal. Esta função permite regular automaticamente o volume do canal pretendido, baixando o som quando o sinal de modulação está alto, ou aumentando o som quando o sinal de modulação está baixo. ❑ Seleccionar Altifalante → Altifalante Exter. / Altifalante do tv. Se quiser ouvir som através de altifalantes separados, cancele o amplificador interno. N Os botões de volume e MUTE não funcionam Seleccionar Altifalante está definido para Altifalante Exter.. N Se seleccionar Altifalante Exter.1 no menu Seleccionar Altifalante, as definições de som são limitadas. ❑ Reposição de som → Repor tudo / Repor modo de som / Cancelar Pode repor as definições de Som predefinidas. ¦ Seleccionar o modo de Som Pode configurar o modo de som no menu Ferramentas. Quando define para Dual l ll, é apresentado no ecrã o modo de som actual. Tipo de áudio Dual 1 / 2 Predefinido estéreo A2 Mono MONO Mudança automática estéreo ESTÉREO ↔ MONO Dual DUAL 1 ↔ DUAL 2 DUAL 1 NICAM estéreo Mono MONO Mudança automática estéreo MONO ↔ ESTÉREO Dual MONO ↔ DUAL 1 DUAL 2 DUAL 1 N Se o sinal de estéreo for fraco e ocorrer uma mudança automática, mude para o modo mono. N Está função apenas está activa no sinal de som estéreo. Está desactivada no sinal de som mono. N Esta função apenas está disponível no modo Tv. BN68-03043A.indb 19 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:57Português - 20 CONFIGURAÇÃO ¦ Definir o menu Configurar ❑ Idioma do Menu Pode definir o idioma do menu. ❑ Tempo „ Relógio Tem de acertar o relógio de modo a que possa utilizar todas as funcionalidades do temporizador do televisor. N A hora actual é apresentada sempre que carregar no botão INFO. N Se desligar o cabo de alimentação, tem de acertar novamente o relógio. ● Modo Relógio Pode definir a hora actual de forma manual ou automática. – Auto.: defina automaticamente a hora actual, utilizando a hora da transmissão digital. – Manual: defina manualmente a hora actual para uma hora específica. N Consoante a estação de transmissão e o sinal, a hora actual pode não ser acertada correctamente. Se tal acontecer, acerte a hora manualmente. N A antena ou cabo devem estar ligados para que a hora seja acertada automaticamente. ● Ajuste o Relógio Pode definir manualmente a hora actual. N Configure esta opção ao ter definido Modo Relógio para Manual. N Pode definir directamente o dia, o mês, o ano, a hora e o minuto, ao carregar nos botões numéricos do telecomando. „ Temporizador → Deslig. / 30 min / 60 min / 90 min / 120 min / 150 min / 180 min O temporizador desliga automaticamente o televisor após o tempo predefinido (30, 60, 90, 120, 150 e 180 minutos). N O televisor passa automaticamente para o modo de espera quando o temporizador atinge o 0. N Para cancelar a função Temporizador, seleccione Deslig.. T Carregue no botão TOOLS para visualizar o menu Ferramentas. Também pode definir o temporizador ao seleccionar Ferramentas → Temporizador. „ Temporizador 1 / Temporizador 2 / Temporizador 3 Pode configurar três definições diferentes para ligar/desligar através do temporizador. Em primeiro lugar, deve acertar o relógio. ● Ligar à hora definida: defina a hora, o minuto e activar / desactivar. (Para activar o temporizador com a definição escolhida, defina para Activate.) ● Desligar à hora definida: defina a hora, o minuto e activar / desactivar. (Para activar o temporizador com a definição escolhida, defina para Activate.) ● Volume: seleccione o nível do volume para quando o televisor é ligado. ● Antena: Seleccione Antena ou Cabo. ● Canal: seleccione o canal pretendido. ● Repetir: Seleccione Uma vez, Diaria., Seg~Sex, Seg~Sáb, Sáb~Dom, ou Manual. N Quando Manual está seleccionado, carregue no botão ► para seleccionar o dia da semana pretendido. Carregue no botão ENTERE sobre o dia pretendido e será apresentada a marca c. N Pode acertar as horas, os minutos e o canal carregando nos botões numéricos do telecomando. N Desligar automaticamente Quando o programar o temporizador para ligado, o televisor acabará por se desligar se não carregar em nenhum comando durante 3 horas depois de o temporizador ter ligado o televisor. Esta função apenas está disponível no modo ligado do temporizador e permite evitar sobreaquecimentos, que podem ocorrer se o televisor permanecer ligado durante muito tempo. Plug & Play Idioma do Menu : Português ► Tempo Transmissão Segurança Geral Configurar BN68-03043A.indb 20 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:57Português - 21 ❑ Transmissão „ Legenda Pode activar e desactivar as legendas. Utilize este menu para definir o modo de legendas. Normal no menu refere-se às legendas normais e Surdos são as legendas para pessoas com deficiências auditivas. ● Legenda → Deslig./ Lig.: activa ou desactiva as legendas. ● Modo → Normal / Surdos: define o modo de legenda. ● Idioma das legendas: define o idioma da legenda. N Se o programa que estiver a ver não suportar a função Surdos, a opção Normal é automaticamente activada, mesmo que o modo Surdos esteja seleccionado. N O inglês é a predefinição para os casos em que o idioma seleccionado não esteja disponível na transmissão. O Para seleccionar estas opções basta carregar no botão SUBT. do telecomando. „ Texto digital → Desactivar / Activar (Apenas Reino Unido) Se o programa for transmitido com texto digital, esta função é activada. N MHeG (Multimedia and Hypermedia Information Coding experts Group) É uma norma internacional para sistemas de codificação de dados utilizada em multimédia e hipermédia. Funciona a um nível mais elevado do que o sistema MPEG, incluindo hipermédia de ligação de dados, como imagens fixas, serviço de caracteres, animação, gráficos e ficheiros de vídeo, bem como dados multimédia. MHEG é uma tecnologia de interacção com o utilizador em tempo de execução e está a ser aplicada a diversos campos, incluindo vOd (video-On- demand), ITv (Interactive Tv), eC (electronic Commerce), tele-educação, teleconferência, bibliotecas digitais e jogos em rede. „ Idioma do teletexto Pode definir o idioma do Teletexto seleccionando o idioma. N O inglês é a predefinição para os casos em que o idioma seleccionado não esteja disponível na transmissão. „ Preferência ● Idioma principal / Idioma secundário / Idioma princ. Legendas / Idioma secund. Legendas / Idioma principal do teletexto / Idioma secund. Teletexto Ao utilizar esta funcionalidade, os utilizadores podem seleccionar um dos idiomas. O idioma seleccionado aqui é o predefinido para quando o utilizador selecciona um canal. Se alterar a definição de idioma, o Idioma das legendas, o Idioma de áudio e o Idioma do teletexto do menu Idioma mudam automaticamente para o idioma seleccionado. O Idioma de áudio, o Idioma das legendas e o Idioma do teletexto do menu Idioma apresentam uma lista de idiomas suportados pelo canal actual e a selecção é realçada. Se alterar esta definição, a nova selecção só é válida para o canal actual. A definição alterada não muda a definição do Idioma principal, do Idioma principal das legendas, nem do Idioma principal do teletexto no menu Preferência. „ Interface comum ● Menu CI Permite ao utilizador seleccionar a partir do menu fornecido pelo CAM. Seleccione o Menu CI com base no menu PC Card. ● Informação sobre aplicações Contém informações sobre o CAM introduzido na ranhura CI e apresenta-as no ecrã. N Os dados apresentados em neste menu referem-se ao CI CArd. Pode instalar o CAM em qualquer altura, independentemente de o televisor estar ligado ou desligado. 1. Adquira o módulo CI CAM no revendedor mais próximo ou por telefone. 2. Introduza o CI CArD no CAM na direcção da seta até ficar encaixado. 3. Introduza o CAM, com o CI CArD colocado, na ranhura da interface comum. (Introduza completamente o CAM na direcção da seta, de modo a ficar paralelo à ranhura.) 4. Verifique se consegue ver uma imagem num canal de sinal codificado. N Uma vez que CAM não é suportado nalguns países e regiões, verifique esta situação junto do seu revendedor autorizado. BN68-03043A.indb 21 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:57Português - 22 ❑ Segurança Antes de a janela de configuração ser apresentada, surge o ecrã para a introdução do número PIN. Introduza o número PIN de 4 dígitos. O número PIN predefinido de um novo televisor é 0-0-0-0. Pode alterar o PIN seleccionando Alterar PIN no menu. „ Bloq. crianças → Deslig. / Lig. esta função impede que utilizadores não autorizados, como crianças, vejam programas não apropriados, cortando a imagem e o som. N Pode bloquear canais da lista de canais. (consulte a página 13) N Bloq. crianças só está disponível no modo Tv. „ Bloqueio para crianças esta função impede que que utilizadores não autorizados, como crianças, assistam a programas não apropriados através de um código PIN (número de identificação pessoal) de 4 dígitos definido pelo utilizador. N O item de Bloqueio para crianças varia consoante o país. N Quando o Bloqueio para crianças está activado, o símbolo ‘\’ é apresentado. N Perm. Tudo: carregue para desbloquear as classificações do televisor. Bloq. Tudo: carregue para bloquear as classificações do televisor. „ Alterar PIN Pode alterar o seu número de identificação pessoal necessário para configurar o televisor. N Caso se esqueça do código PIN, carregue nos botões do telecomando pela seguinte sequência, repondo o PIN para 0-0-0-0: POWER (deslig.) → MUTE → 8 → 2 → 4 → POWER (lig.). ❑ Geral „ Modo Jogo → Deslig. / Lig. Ao ligar uma consola de jogos como a PlayStation™ ou Xbox™, pode tirar partido de uma experiência de jogo mais realista seleccionando o menu jogo. N Para desligar a consola de jogos e ligar outro dispositivo externo, cancele o modo jogo no menu de configuração. N Se visualizar o menu TV no Modo Jogo o ecrã treme ligeiramente. N Modo Jogo não está disponível nos modos TV e PC. N Se o Modo Jogo estiver ligado: – o modo Imagem muda automaticamente para Standard e os utilizadores não podem alterá-lo. – o modo Som muda automaticamente para Personal. e os utilizadores não podem alterá-lo. regule o som utilizando o equalizador. N A função reset Sound é activada. Se seleccionar a função reset depois de definir o equalizador, repõe os valores de fábrica. „ Poupança energ. → Deslig. / Baixo / Médio / Alto / Imagem Desligada / Auto. Esta função ajusta o brilho do televisor para reduzir o consumo de energia. Quando estiver a ver televisão à noite, defina o modo Poupança energ. para Alto, de forma a reduzir a fadiga ocular, bem como o consumo de energia. Se seleccionar Imagem Desligada, o ecrã desliga-se e apenas conseguirá ouvir o som. Carregue em qualquer botão para sair da função Imagem Desligada. N No menu Tools, a função Imagem Desligada não é suportada. T Carregue no botão TOOLS para visualizar o menu Ferramentas. Também pode definir o modo Poupança de energia ao seleccionar Ferramentas → Poupança energ.. „ Melodia → Deslig. / Baixo / Médio / Alto O som da melodia pode ser definido para quando o televisor é ligado ou desligado. N A Melodia não toca – Quando o televisor não emite som porque carregou no botão MUTE. – Quando o televisor não emite som porque carregou no botão (–) do Volume. – Quando o televisor é desligado pela função Temporizador. BN68-03043A.indb 22 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:57Português - 23 ENTRADA / SUPORTE ¦ Configurar o menu de Entrada ❑ Lista de fontes Utilize para seleccionar o televisor ou outras fontes de entrada externas como leitores de DVD/Blu-ray/receptores de satélite (SetTop Box) ligadas ao televisor. Utilize para seleccionar a sua fonte de entrada preferida. O Carregue no botão SOURCE do telecomando para ver uma fonte de sinal externo. O modo TV pode ser seleccionado carregando no botão TV. „ TV / Ext. / AV / Componente / PC / HDMI(DVI) N Pode escolher apenas os dispositivos externos que estão ligados ao televisor. Em Lista de fontes, as entradas ligadas são realçadas e ordenadas no topo. As entradas que não estejam ligadas serão ordenadas na parte de baixo. N Ext. e PC permanecem sempre activados. N TOOLS (Ferramentas): apresenta os menus Editar nome e Informação. ❑ Editar nome Atribua um nome ao dispositivo ligado às tomadas de entrada para facilitar a selecção da fonte de entrada. „ VCR / DVD / STB Cabo / Satélite STB / STB PVR / Receptor AV / Jogos / Câmara de Vídeo / PC / DVI / DVI PC / TV / IPTV / Blu- ray / HD DVD / DMA N Quando ligar um cabo HdMI/dvI à porta HDMI (DVI), deve definir o modo HDMI/DVI para DVI ou DVI PC em Editar nome do modo de Entrada. Neste caso, é necessário uma ligação de som separada. ¦ Configurar o menu Suporte ❑ Auto-diagnóstico „ Teste de imagem Caso tenha algum problema com a qualidade da imagem, execute o teste de imagem. verifique o padrão de cores no ecrã para ver se o problema persiste. ● Sim: se o padrão de teste não aparecer ou se houver interferências no mesmo, seleccione Sim. Pode haver algum problema com o televisor. Contacte o centro de atendimento da Samsung para obter assistência. ● Não: se o padrão de teste for visualizado correctamente, seleccione Não. Pode haver algum problema com o equipamento externo. verifique as ligações. Se o problema persistir, consulte o manual do utilizador do dispositivo externo. „ Teste de som Caso tenha algum problema com o som, execute o teste de som. Pode verificar o som ao reproduzir uma melodia através do televisor. A mensagem "O problema do teste de som persiste?" é apresentada no ecrã. N Se não ouvir som a partir dos altifalantes do televisor, antes de executar um teste de som, certifique-se de que Seleccionar Altifalante está definido para Altifalante do tv. no menu Som. N A melodia será ouvida durante o teste se Seleccionar Altifalante estiver definido para “Altifalante Exter. ou, se não houver som, ao carregar no botão MUTE. ● Sim: se durante o teste de som apenas conseguir ouvir som de um altifalante ou de nenhum, seleccione Sim. Pode haver algum problema com o televisor. Contacte o centro de atendimento da Samsung para obter assistência. ● Não: se conseguir ouvir som a partir dos altifalantes, seleccione Não. Pode haver algum problema com o equipamento externo. verifique as ligações. Se o problema persistir, consulte o manual do utilizador do dispositivo externo. „ Informações sobre o sinal (apenas canais digitais) Ao contrário dos canais analógicos, cuja qualidade de recepção pode variar entre "com interferências" a "clara", os canais digitais (HdTv) ou têm qualidade de recepção perfeita, ou então não têm qualquer recepção. Por isso, ao contrário dos canais analógicos, não pode fazer a sintonização fina aos canais digitais. Pode, contudo, ajustar a antena para melhorar a recepção dos canais digitais disponíveis. N Se o medidor da intensidade do sinal indicar que o sinal é fraco, ajuste fisicamente a antena para aumentar a intensidade do sinal. Continue a ajustar a antena até encontrar a melhor posição com o sinal mais forte. Auto-diagnóstico ► Actualização do software Guia de ligação HD Contactar a Samsung Assistência Lista de fontes editar nome entrada BN68-03043A.indb 23 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:57Português - 24 ❑ Actualização do software Para manter o produto actualizado com novas funções da Televisão digital, são transmitidas periodicamente actualizações de software como parte do sinal de televisão normal. O televisor detecta automaticamente estes sinais e apresenta a faixa de actualização do software. Tem a opção de instalar, ou não, a actualização. „ Por USB Introduza no televisor a unidade USB que contém a actualização do firmware. Tenha cuidado para não desligar a corrente ou retirar a unidade USB enquanto as actualizações estiverem a ser executadas. O televisor desliga-se e volta a ligar automaticamente após terminar a actualização do firmware. verifique a versão de firmware depois de concluída a actualização. Quando o software é actualizado, as definições de áudio e de vídeo que fez voltam às predefinições (de fábrica). recomenda-se que anote as suas definições para que possa facilmente repô-las depois da actualização. „ Por um canal Actualiza o software através do sinal de transmissão. N Se a função for seleccionada durante o período de transmissão de software, esta função procura software disponível e transfere-o. N O tempo necessário para a transferência do software é determinado pelo estado do sinal. „ Actual. no Modo de Espera Para continuar a actualizar o software com o interruptor de corrente principal ligado, seleccione ligado, carregando nos botões ▲ ou ▼. 45 minutos depois de entrar no modo de espera, uma actualização manual é iniciada automaticamente. dado que o aparelho está ligado internamente, o lCd pode ficar aceso durante algum tempo. Este fenómeno pode persistir durante mais de 1 hora até a actualização do software ficar concluída. „ Software Alternativo Para visualizar as informações da versão de software. ❑ Guia de ligação HD este menu apresenta o método de ligação que proporciona a melhor qualidade para um televisor HD. Consulte esta informação quando ligar dispositivos externos ao televisor. ❑ Contactar a Samsung leia esta informação quando o televisor não funcionar correctamente ou caso queira actualizar o software. Esta informação ser-lhe-á útil no que diz respeito ao centro de atendimento e aos métodos de transferência de ficheiros de software e produtos. Painel posterior do televisor USB Drive BN68-03043A.indb 24 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:58Português - 25 RECOMENDAÇÕES PARA A UTILIZAÇÃO ¦ Funcionalidade de teletexto A maioria das estações de televisão fornece serviços de informação por escrito através da função de Teletexto. A página de índice do serviço de teletexto fornece informações sobre como utilizar o serviço. Além disso, pode seleccionar várias opções de acordo com os seus requisitos, utilizando os botões do telecomando. N Para que as informações de teletexto sejam apresentadas correctamente, é preciso que a recepção dos canais se processe em boas condições. Caso contrário, podem faltar informações ou podem não aparecer algumas páginas. N Pode mudar as páginas do teletexto com os botões numéricos do telecomando. 1 0(modo) Carregue neste botão para seleccionar o modo de Teletexto (lIST/FlOF). Se carregar no modo lIST, muda para o modo de lista de memorização. No modo de lista de memorização, pode guardar a página de teletexto na lista utilizando o botão 8(guardar). 2 5(mostrar) Utilizado para visualizar o texto oculto (respostas a jogos de perguntas e respostas, por exemplo). Para ver o ecrã normal, carregue novamente no botão. 3 4(tamanho) Carregue neste botão para visualizar as letras com o dobro do tamanho na metade superior do ecrã. Para que seja apresentada a metade inferior do ecrã, carregue novamente. Para visualizar o ecrã normal, carregue novamente no botão. 4 8(guardar) Utilizado para guardar as páginas de teletexto. 5 Botões coloridos (vermelho/verde/ amarelo/azul) Se a estação emissora utilizar o sistema FASTeXT, os diferentes tópicos apresentados na página de teletexto aparecem codificados com cores e podem ser seleccionados ao carregar nos botões coloridas. Carregue num dos botões que corresponda à cor pretendida. A página inclui outras informações a cores que podem ser seleccionadas da mesma forma. Para visualizar a página anterior ou a página seguinte, carregue no botão colorido correspondente. 6/(activar teletexto/sobrepor) Carregue para activar o modo de Teletexto depois de seleccionar o canal com o serviço de teletexto. Carregue duas vezes para sobrepor o ecrã de transmissão actual ao teletexto. 7 :(sair) Para sair da apresentação de teletexto. 8 1(página secundária) Utilizado para visualizar a página secundária disponível. 9 2(página para cima) Utilizado para ver a página seguinte do teletexto. 0 3(página abaixo) Utilizado para ver a página anterior do teletexto. ! 9 (modo de espera) Utilizado para manter o ecrã numa determinada página, se esta estiver ligada a várias páginas secundárias que aparecem automaticamente em sequência. Para continuar, carregue novamente neste botão. @ 6(índice) Utilizado para ver a página de índice (conteúdos) a qualquer momento, enquanto está a visualizar o teletexto. # 7(cancelar) Utilizado para ver a emissão enquanto procura uma página. As páginas do teletexto estão divididas em seis categorias: Parte Conteúdo A Número da página seleccionada. B Nome da estação emissora. C Número da página actual ou indicações da procura. D Data e hora. E Texto. F Informações sobre o estado. Informações FASTeXT. 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 0 ! # @ 7 BN68-03043A.indb 25 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:58Português - 26 N As informações de teletexto estão muitas vezes divididas em várias páginas apresentadas em sequência e às quais pode aceder: – introduzindo o número da página – seleccionando um título numa lista – seleccionando um título a cores (sistema FASTEXT) N O nível de teletexto suportado pelo televisor é a versão 2.5 que permite também a visualização de gráficos ou textos adicionais. N Dependendo da transmissão, painéis laterais em branco podem ocorrer ao visualizar o teletexto. N Nestes casos, gráficos ou textos adicionais não são transmitidos. N Os televisores mais antigos que não suportam a versão 2.5 não permitem a visualização de gráficos ou textos adicionais, independentemente da transmissão de teletexto. O Carregue no botão TV para sair do teletexto. N Teletexto 16:9, imagem 16:9 ¦ Como ajustar a base (apenas para os modelos de 19 polegadas) 1. Coloque a parte frontal do televisor em cima de um pano ou almofada macios sobre uma mesa como indicado na Figura 1. – Alinhe a parte inferior do televisor na extremidade da mesa. 2. Carregue no centro da parte de trás do televisor. Ajuste a base como indicado na Figura 2 enquanto carrega no botão na parte de trás da base. 3. Coloque o televisor em cima da mesa de modo a que este se apoie na mesma com segurança. ¦ Como ajustar o ângulo do televisor (apenas para os modelos de 19 polegadas) N Ao ajustar a base, carregue no botão na parte de trás da mesma. 1. A figura 1 apresenta o ângulo de ajuste (-2°~14°) quando utiliza o lCD sobre a sua base. N Uma inclinação excessiva pode fazer com que o televisor lCd caia e se danifique. 2. A figura 2 apresenta o ângulo de ajuste (14°~80°) quando converte o lCD da utilização da base para montagem na parede. 3. A figura 3 apresenta o ângulo de ajuste (-2°~14°) quando monta o televisor lCD numa parede. N Ouvirá um "clique" ao alterar o ângulo de 1 para 2 e ou de 3 para 2. 1 2 1 Ajuste de ângulo ao utilizar o televisor sobre a base do mesmo. 2 Ajuste de ângulo ao converter a base para montagem na parede (1→3, 3→1) 3 Ajuste de ângulo quando o televisor LCD está montado na parede BN68-03043A.indb 26 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:59Português - 27 ¦ Instalar Dispositivos de Montagem de acordo com os padrões VESA (apenas para modelos de 19 polegadas) 1. Coloque o televisor com a parte frontal para baixo em cima de um pano ou almofada macios sobre uma mesa. 2. Ajuste a base, carregando no botão na parte de trás da mesma. 3. Alinhe o painel de interface de montagem (não fornecido) com os orifícios na parte inferior da base e fixe-a com os quatro parafusos fornecidos com a base tipo braço, suporte para pendurar na parede ou outras bases (não fornecido). ¦ Utilizar as tampas decorativas (apenas para modelos de 19 polegadas) 1. Ao montar o televisor na parede sem utilizar a base, introduza as tampas decorativas nos orifícios como indicado na imagem 1. 2. depois de introduzir as tampas decorativas, fixe-as com os 4 parafusos como indicado na imagem 2. 1 2 Botão Painel de montagem (Vendido em separado) 1 2 BN68-03043A.indb 27 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:59Português - 28 ¦ Instalar a base 1. Coloque o televisor lCD na base. N São necessárias duas ou mais pessoas para pegar no televisor. N Certifique-se de que distingue a parte da frente da parte de trás da base quando está a montá-la. N Para se assegurar que o televisor está colocado na base a um nível apropriado, não aplique demasiada pressão na parte superior esquerda ou direita do televisor. 2. Atarraxe dois parafusos na posição 1 e os outros dois na posição 2. N Coloque o produto de pé e aperte os parafusos. Se apertar os parafusos com o televisor lCd deitado, este pode ficar inclinado. ¦ Instalar o kit de montagem na parede Os acessórios de montagem na parede (vendidos em separado) permitem montar o televisor na parede. Para saber mais sobre como instalar o kit de montagem na parede, consulte as instruções que acompanham os respectivos acessórios. Contacte um técnico para obter assistência na instalação do suporte de montagem na parede. Se a instalação for feita pelo cliente, a Samsung electronics não se responsabiliza por quaisquer danos no produto nem por ferimentos sofridos pelo cliente ou por outras pessoas. Não instale o kit de montagem na parede com o televisor ligado. Pode resultar em ferimentos devido a choques eléctricos. ¦ Utilizar o Bloqueio anti-roubo Kensington O dispositivo de bloqueio Kensington serve para fixar fisicamente o sistema quando o utilizar num local público. O aspecto e o método de bloqueio podem ser diferentes da ilustração, consoante o fabricante. Consulte o manual fornecido com o dispositivo de bloqueio Kensington para uma utilização correcta. N localize o ícone “K” na parte de trás do televisor. Existe uma ranhura Kensington ao lado do ícone “K”. Quando bloquear o produto, siga estes passos: 1. Prenda o cabo do dispositivo de bloqueio Kensington à volta de um objecto grande e pesado, como uma mesa ou cadeira. 2. Faça deslizar a extremidade do cabo com a peça de bloqueio através da outra extremidade em arco do dispositivo de bloqueio Kensington. 3. Insira o dispositivo de bloqueio na ranhura Kensington do produto (1). 4. Feche o dispositivo de bloqueio. N Estas são as instruções gerais. Para instruções mais precisas, consulte o Manual do utilizador fornecido com o dispositivo de bloqueio. N dispositivo de bloqueio tem de ser adquirido separadamente. N localização do dispositivo de bloqueio Kensington pode variar consoante o modelo. 1 BN68-03043A.indb 28 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:00Português - 29 ¦ Manter um espaço de instalação seguro Mantenha as distâncias recomendadas, entre o produto e outros objectos (por exemplo, uma parede) para garantir a ventilação adequada. Caso contrário, pode provocar um incêndio ou danificar o produto devido ao aumento de temperatura no interior do mesmo. Instale o produto de modo a que as distâncias recomendadas, assinaladas na figura seguinte, sejam respeitadas. N Se utilizar uma base ou suporte para montagem na parede, utilize apenas as peças fornecidas pela Samsung electronics. Ҟ O facto de utilizar peças fornecidas por outro fabricante, pode resultar em danos materiais ou ferimentos graves em caso de queda do produto. Ҟ O facto de utilizar peças fornecidas por outro fabricante, pode resultar em danos materiais ou provocar um incêndio devido ao aumento de temperatura no interior do produto por ventilação inadequada. N O aspecto exterior pode ser diferente, dependendo do produto. Se instalar o produto com uma base Se instalar o produto com um suporte para montagem na parede 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm ¦ Fixar o televisor à parede Atenção: puxar, empurrar, ou subir para cima do televisor pode provocar a queda do mesmo. em especial, certifique-se de que as crianças não se penduram ou desestabilizam o televisor, o que poderia provocar a queda do mesmo e resultar em acidentes graves ou morte. Siga todas as precauções de segurança fornecidas no Folheto de segurança incluído. Para estabilidade adicional, instale o dispositivo anti-queda por razões de segurança, como descrito em seguida. „ Para evitar a queda do televisor: 1. Introduza os parafusos nos grampos e aparafuse-os com firmeza à parede. verifique se os parafusos foram aparafusados com firmeza à parede. N Pode necessitar de material adicional, tal como um suporte, consoante o tipo de parede. N Uma vez que os grampos, parafusos e fios não são fornecidos, adquira-os em separado. 2. retire os parafusos da parte posterior central do televisor, introduza os parafusos nos grampos e aparafuse os parafusos ao televisor novamente. N Os parafusos podem não ser fornecidos com o produto. Se for esse o caso, adquira os parafusos com as seguintes especificações. N Especificações dos parafusos – Para um lCd entre 17 e 29 polegadas: M4 X l15 – Para um lCd entre 32 e 40 polegadas: M6 X l15 3. ligue os grampos fixados ao televisor e os grampos fixados à parede com um fio forte, depois aperte-o muito bem. N Instale o televisor perto da parede de forma a não cair para trás. N É mais seguro ligar o fio de modo a que os grampos fixados à parede estejam ao mesmo nível ou abaixo dos grampos fixados ao televisor. N desaperte o fio antes de transportar o televisor. 4. verifique se todas as ligações estão devidamente presas. verifique regularmente as ligações para evitar qualquer sinal de gasto ou falha. Se tiver alguma dúvida sobre a segurança das suas ligações, contacte um instalador profissional. Parede Parede BN68-03043A.indb 29 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:01Português - 30 ¦ Resolução de problemas Se tiver alguma dúvida sobre o televisor, consulte primeiro esta lista. Se nenhuma destas sugestões para resolução de problemas se aplicar, consulte o site ‘www.samsung.com’ e, em seguida, clique em Assistência ou contacte o Centro de atendimento na lista da última página. Problema Solução Qualidade de imagem Primeiro, execute oTeste de imagempara confirmar se o televisor está a apresentar correctamente a imagem de teste. ● vá para o MENU - Assistência - Auto-diagnóstico - Teste de imagem Se a imagem de teste for apresentada correctamente, a imagem de má qualidade pode ser provocada pela fonte ou sinal. A imagem do televisor não parece ser de tão boa qualidade como na loja. ● Se tiver uma caixa de televisão por cabo/set top box analógica actualize-a. Utilize cabos HDMI ou de Componente para obter uma qualidade de imagem HD. ● Subscritor de cabo/satélite: Tente estações Hd (Alta definição) a partir de canais codificados. ● ligação de antena: Tente estações Hd após executar o Programa automático. N vários canais Hd são actualizados a partir de conteúdos Sd (definição standard). ● Ajuste a resolução de saída de vídeo da caixa de televisão por cabo/set top box para 1080i ou 720p. ● Certifique-se de que está a ver televisão à distância mínima recomendada, com base no tamanho e na definição do sinal que está a visualizar. A imagem está distorcida: macrobloco, bloco pequeno, pontos, pixelização ● A compressão de conteúdos de vídeo pode causar uma distorção na imagem, especialmente nas imagens de movimentos rápidos como no desporto e filmes de acção. ● Um nível de sinal baixo ou uma má qualidade pode causar distorção de imagem. Não é um problema do televisor. ● A utilização de telemóveis na proximidade do televisor (até cerca de 1 m) pode causar ruído na imagem, tanto na televisão analógica, como na digital. Cor errada ou inexistente com a ligação de Componente. ● Certifique-se de que os cabos de Componente estão ligados às tomadas correctas. As ligações incorrectas ou soltas podem provocar problemas na cor ou o ecrã pode ficar em branco. Cor ou brilho fracos. ● Ajuste as opções de Imagem no menu do televisor. (ModoImagem, Cor, Brilho, Nitidez) ● Ajuste a opção de Poupança energ. no menu Configurar. ● Tente a reposição de imagem para visualizar as predefinições da imagem. (vá para MENU - Imagem - Reposição de imagem) linha pontilhada na extremidade do ecrã. ● Se o tamanho da imagem estiver definido para Ajustar ao ecrã, altere o mesmo para 16:9. ● Altere a resolução da caixa de televisão por cabo/set top box. A imagem é a preto e branco apenas com entrada AV (Composto). ● ligue o cabo de vídeo (amarelo) à tomada verde da entrada de componente 1 do televisor. A imagem fica bloqueada ou distorcida quando muda de canais ou a imagem está atrasada. ● Se estiver ligado a uma caixa de televisão por cabo, tente reiniciar a caixa de televisão por cabo. (ligue novamente o cabo de CA e espere até que a caixa de televisão cabo reinicie. Pode demorar até 20 minutos.) ● defina a resolução de saída da caixa de televisão por cabo para 1080i ou 720p. Qualidade do som Primeiro, execute o Teste de som para confirmar se o áudio do televisor está a funcionar correctamente. ● vá para o MENU - Assistência - Auto-diagnóstico - Teste de som Se o áudio estiver a funcionar correctamente, o problema de som pode ser provocado pela fonte ou sinal. Não se ouve som ou o som é demasiado baixo mesmo com o volume no máximo. ● Verifique o volume do dispositivo externo ligado ao televisor e, em seguida, ajuste o volume do mesmo. A imagem é boa, mas não tem som. ● Defina a opção Seleccionar Altifalante para Altifalante do tv. no menu do som. ● Certifique-se de que os cabos de áudio do dispositivo externo estão ligados às tomadas de entrada de áudio correctas no televisor. ● verifique a opção de s aída de áudio do dispositivo ligado. (ex: Pode ser necessário alterar a opção de áudio da caixa de televisão por cabo para HdMI quando tiver o cabo HDMI ligado ao televisor.) ● Se estiver a utilizar um cabo dvI para HdMI, é necessário um cabo de áudio suplementar. ● Desactive a função SrS se definir o volume acima do valor 30. ● remova a ficha da tomada dos auscultadores. (se disponível no televisor) ruído nos auscultadores. ● verifique as ligações dos cabos. Certifique-se de que um cabo de vídeo não está ligado à entrada de áudio. ● Para ligações antena/cabo, verifique a intensidade do sinal. Um nível de sinal baixo pode causar distorção de imagem. BN68-03043A.indb 30 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:01Português - 31 Problema Solução Sem imagem, sem vídeo O televisor não liga. ● Certifique-se de que o cabo de alimentação CA está ligado correctamente à tomada de parede e ao televisor. ● verifique se a tomada de parede está a funcionar devidamente. ● Tente carregar no botão POWER no televisor para ter a certeza de que o telecomando está a funcionar correctamente. Se o televisor ligar, o problema pode ser causado pelo telecomando. Para resolver o problema do telecomando, consulte ‘O telecomando não funciona’ abaixo. O televisor desliga-se automaticamente. ● Verifique se o Temporizador está definido para Lig. no menu Configurar. ● Se ligar o televisor ao PC, verifique as definições de alimentação do PC. ● Certifique-se de que o cabo de alimentação CA está ligado correctamente à tomada de parede e ao televisor. ● Se não houver qualquer sinal durante 10 a 15 minutos com a ligação por antena/cabo, o televisor desliga-se. Sem imagem/vídeo. ● Verifique as ligações dos cabos (remova e ligue novamente todos os cabos do televisor e dispositivos externos) ● defina a saída de vídeo do dispositivo externo (cabo/set top box, dvd, Blu-ray, etc.) para corresponder às ligações de entrada do televisor. Por exemplo, saída do dispositivo externo: HdMI, entrada do televisor: HdMI. ● Certifique-se de que o dispositivo está ligado. ● Certifique-se de que selecciona a fonte correcta do televisor, carregando no botão SOURCE do telecomando. ligação rF (cabo/antena) Impossível receber todos os canais. ● Certifique-se de que o cabo de antena está correctamente ligado. ● Tente Plug & Play para adicionar canais disponíveis à lista de canais. vá para MENU - Configurar - Plug & Play e aguarde até que todos os canais disponíveis sejam memorizados. ● verifique se a antena está na posição correcta. A imagem está distorcida: macrobloco, bloco pequeno, pontos, pixelização ● A compressão de conteúdos de vídeo pode causar uma distorção na imagem, especialmente nas imagens de movimentos rápidos como no desporto e filmes de acção. ● Um nível de sinal baixo pode causar distorção de imagem. Não é um problema do televisor. ligação ao PC Mensagem ‘Função Não disponível’. ● defina a resolução de saída do computador e frequência para que corresponda às resoluções suportadas pelo televisor. O computador é sempre apresentado na lista de fontes mesmo que não esteja ligado. ● Isto é normal; o computador é sempre apresentado na lista de fontes mesmo que um computador não esteja ligado. O vídeo está a funcionar correctamente, mas não há áudio com ligação HDMI. ● verifique as definições da saída de áudio no seu computador. BN68-03043A.indb 31 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:01Português - 32 Problema Solução Outros A imagem não é apresentada em ecrã inteiro. ● Serão apresentadas barras pretas em ambos os lados nos canais HD sempre que forem apresentados conteúdos Sd (4:3) actualizados. ● Serão apresentadas barras pretas na parte superior e inferior dos filmes que tenham um formato diferente do seu televisor. ● Ajuste a opção de tamanho da imagem no seu dispositivo externo ou televisor para ecrã inteiro. O telecomando não funciona. ● Substitua as pilhas do telecomando com o tipo de polaridade correcto (+ -). ● limpe a janela de transmissão localizada na parte de cima do telecomando. ● Tente apontar o telecomando directamente para o televisor a 5-6 pés (1,5 m a 1,8 m) de distância. Não é possível controlar o volume e a energia do televisor com o telecomando da caixa de televisão por cabo/set top box. ● Programe o telecomando da caixa de televisão por cabo/set top box para funcionar com o televisor. Consulte o manual do utilizador cabo/satélite para identificar o código do televisor SAMSUNG. Mensagem ‘Função Não disponível’. ● verifique a resolução suportada pelo televisor e ajuste a resolução de saída do dispositivo externo em conformidade. Consulte as definições de resolução neste manual. Cheiro a plástico proveniente do televisor. ● este cheiro é normal e dissipa-se com o passar do tempo. TV Informações sobre o sinal não se encontra disponível no menu Auto-diagnóstico. ● Esta função encontra-se apenas disponível para canais digitais com uma ligação de antena (rF/coaxial). O televisor está inclinado para a esquerda ou para a direita. ● remova a base do suporte do televisor e monte novamente. Não é possível montar a base do suporte. ● Certifique-se de que o televisor se encontra sobre uma superfície plana. Se não conseguir retirar os parafusos do televisor, utilize uma chave de parafusos magnetizada. O menu do canal está a cinzento. (indisponível) ● O menu Canal só está disponível quando a fonte de Tv está seleccionada. Perde as suas definições após 30 minutos ou sempre que o televisor for desligado. ● Se o televisor estiver no modo Demo Loja, as definições de áudio e imagem são repostas a cada 30 minutos. Altere o modo Demo Loja para o modo Uso Doméstico no procedimento Plug & Play. Prima o botão SOURCE para seleccionar o modo TV, vá até MENU → Configurar → Plug & Play → ENTERE. Perda intermitente de áudio ou vídeo. ● Verifique as ligações dos cabos e ligue novamente. ● Pode ser devido à utilização de cabos excessivamente rígidos ou finos. Certifique-se de que os cabos são suficientemente flexíveis para uma utilização a longo prazo. Para montagem na parede, recomenda-se a utilização de cabos com conectores de 90 graus. Pode ver pequenas partículas se olhar de perto para a extremidade da moldura em volta do ecrã do televisor. ● Tal faz parte do design do produto e não constitui um defeito. ‘Sinal codificado’ ou ‘Sem sinal/ Sinal fraco’ com CAM CArD (CI). ● Verifique se o CAM tem o CI CArD colocado na ranhura da interface comum. ● retire o CAM do televisor e introduza-o na ranhura novamente. Quando desligado e após 45 minutos, o televisor liga-se. ● É normal, o televisor utiliza a função OTA (Over The Air) para actualizar o firmware transferido enquanto vê televisão. Problema imagem/som recorrente. ● Verifique e altere o sinal/fonte. N O lCd TFT utiliza um painel composto por pixels secundários que requerem tecnologia sofisticada para serem reproduzidos. No entanto, podem existir alguns pixels claros ou escuros no ecrã. estes pixels não afectam o desempenho do produto. BN68-03043A.indb 32 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:02Português - 33 ¦ Características técnicas Nome do modelo LE19C430, LE19C431 LE22C430, LE22C431 Tamanho do Ecrã (Diagonal) 19 " 22 " Resolução do PC (Ideal) 1360 x 768 @ 60Hz 1360 x 768 @ 60Hz Som (Saída) 3W X 2 3W X 2 Dimensões (LxAxP) Caixa Com base 477 x 65 x 327 mm 477 x 180 x 362 mm 558 x 75 x 384 mm 558 x 216 x 426 mm Peso Com base 5 kg 7 kg Considerações ambientais Temperatura de funcionamento Humidade de funcionamento Temperatura de armazenamento Humidade de armazenamento 10°C a 40°C (50°F a 104°F) 10% a 80%, sem condensação -20°C a 45°C (-4°F a 113°F) 5% a 95%, sem condensação Base rotativa esquerda / Direita 0˚ N O design e as características técnicas estão sujeitos a alterações sem aviso prévio. N Trata-se de um aparelho digital de Classe B. N Para informações sobre a fonte de alimentação e o consumo de energia, veja a etiqueta colada ao produto. BN68-03043A.indb 33 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:02Slike in ilustracije v tem uporabniškem priročniku so samo za referenco: dejanski izdelek je lahko videti drugačen. Obliko in tehnične lastnosti lahko spremenimo brez predhodnega obvestila. ❑ Licenca TruSurround HD, SrS in simbol so blagovne znamke podjetja SrS labs, Inc. Tehnologija TruSurround HD je vgrajena pod licenco podjetja SrS labs, Inc. Izdelano pod licenco podjetja dolby laboratories. dolby in simbol dd sta blagovni znamki podjetja dolby laboratories. ❑ Obvestilo o digitalni televiziji 1. Funkcije, ki so povezane z digitalnim televizijskim signalom (dvB), so na voljo samo v državah/na območjih, kjer se oddajajo digitalni prizemni signali (MPEG2 in MPEG4 AvC), ali kjer je mogoč dostop do združljive storitve kabelske televizije dvB-C (MPEG2 in MPEG4 AAC). Pri lokalnem trgovcu preverite, ali imate dostop do signala dvB-T ali dvB-C. 2. dvB-T je standard dvB evropskega konzorcija za oddajanje digitalne prizemne televizije, dvB-C pa je standard za oddajanje digitalne televizije prek kabla. v tej specifikaciji pa niso vključene nekatere funkcije, kot so EPG (elektronski programski vodnik), vOd (video na zahtevo) itd. Torej jih zaenkrat še ni mogoče uporabljati. 3. Čeprav je televizor v skladu z najnovejšima standardoma dvB-T in dvB-C [avgust 2008], ni mogoče jamčiti združljivosti s prihodnjimi sistemi digitalne prizemne televizije in digitalne kabelske televizije. 4. Nekateri ponudniki kabelske televizije morda takšno storitev dodatno zaračunavajo in se boste zato morda morali strinjati z določbami in pogoji njihovega poslovanja. To je odvisno od države/območja, kjer uporabljate televizor. 5. v nekaterih državah ali regijah nekatere funkcije digitalne televizije morda niso na voljo in digitalna kabelska televizija morda ne bo delovala pravilno pri nekaterih ponudnikih kabelskih storitev. 6. Za dodatne informacije se obrnite na lokalni center SAMSUNG za pomoč strankam. ❑ Varnostni ukrepi pri prikazu mirujoče slike Mirujoča slika lahko trajno poškoduje televizijski zaslon ● Mirujoče in delno mirujoče slike ne prikazujte na zaslonu lCd dlje kot 2 uri, saj lahko povzroči zadrževanje slike na zaslonu. Tako zadrževanje slike se imenuje tudi “ožig zaslona”. da bi se izognili takemu zadrževanju slike, pri prikazovanju mirujoče slike zmanjšajte stopnjo svetlosti in kontrasta zaslona. ● dolgotrajno gledanje slike z razmerjem stranic 4:3 na televizorju lCd lahko na levi in desni strani ter na sredini zaslona povzroči sledi okvirja zaradi različnega svetlobnega oddajanja na zaslonu. Predvajanje dvdja ali uporaba igralne konzole ima lahko podobne učinke. Garancija ne vključuje poškodb, ki so nastale na tak način. ● Če je na zaslonu dlje časa prikazana mirujoča računalniška slika ali slika iz video igrice, to lahko povzroči delni prikaz zakasnele slike. Ta učinek preprečite tako, da pri prikazovanju mirujočih slih zmanjšate svetlost in kontrast. © 2010 Samsung electronics Co., ltd. All rights reserved. BN68-03043A.indb 1 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:02Slovenščina - 1 ❑ Simbol N O T Opomba Gumb na dotik Gumb TOOlS Pritisnite SPLOŠNE INFORMACIJE ■ Ogled nadzorne plošče.........................................................2 ■ Dodatna oprema...................................................................3 ■ Ogled plošče s priključki.......................................................4 ■ daljinski upravljalnik .............................................................6 ■ vstavljanje baterij v daljinski upravljalnik..............................6 UPRAVLJANJE ■ Ogled menijev.......................................................................7 ■ Preklop televizorja v stanje pripravljenosti............................8 ■ Funkcija Plug & Play.............................................................8 ■ Ogled prikaza .......................................................................9 UPRAVLJANJE KANALOV ■ Konfiguriranje menija Channel .............................................9 ■ Upravljanje kanalov ...........................................................12 UPRAVLJANJE SLIKE ■ Konfiguriranje menija Picture..............................................14 ■ Uporaba televizorja kot računalniškega zaslona ................16 ■ Nastavitev televizorja z računalnikom ................................17 UPRAVLJANJE ZVOKA ■ Konfiguriranje menija Sound ..............................................18 ■ Izbira zvočnega načina.......................................................19 NASTAVITEV ■ Konfiguriranje menija Setup ...............................................20 VHOD / PODPORA ■ Konfiguriranje menija Input.................................................23 ■ Konfiguriranje menija Support ............................................23 PRIPOROČILA ZA UPORABO ■ Funkcija teleteksta..............................................................25 ■ Nastavitev stojala (samo 19-palčni model).........................26 ■ Nastavitev kota televizorja (samo 19-palčni model)...........26 ■ Namestitev naprav, skladnih s standardom vESA (samo 19-palčni model)......................................................27 ■ Uporaba okrasnih pokrovov (samo 19-palčni model).........27 ■ Namestitev stojala ..............................................................28 ■ Namestitev kompleta za pritrditev na steno........................28 ■ Uporaba ključavnice Kensington proti kraji.........................28 ■ Zaščita prostora za namestitev...........................................29 ■ Pritrditev televizorja na steno .............................................29 ■ Odpravljanje težav..............................................................30 ■ Specifikacije........................................................................33 VSEBINA Slovenščina BN68-03043A.indb 1 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:03Slovenščina - 2 SPLOŠNE INFORMACIJE ¦ Ogled nadzorne plošče N Barva in oblika izdelka sta odvisni od modela. N Gumb lahko uporabite tako, da pritisnete gumbe na stranski plošči. 4 1 2 3 5 6 8 8 7 1 SOURCE E: Za preklapljanje med vsemi razpoložljivimi vhodnimi viri. Ta gumb v meniju na zaslonu uporabljajte kot gumb ENTERE na daljinskem upravljalniku. 2 MENU: Pritisnite za ogled menija na zaslonu s funkcijami televizorja. 3Y: Pritisnite za znižanje ali zvišanje glasnosti. Na meniju na zaslonu uporabljajte gumba Y, kot uporabljate gumba ◄ in ► na daljinskem upravljalniku. 4Z: Pritisnite za menjavo kanalov. Na meniju na zaslonu uporabljajte gumba Z, kot uporabljate gumba ▼ in ▲ na daljinskem upravljalniku. 5 P (Napajanje): Pritisnite za vklop in izklop televizorja. 6 SENZOR DALJINSKEGA UPRAVLJALNIKA: daljinski upravljalnik usmerite proti tej točki na televizorju. 7 INDIKATOR NAPAJANJA: Utripa in se izklopi, ko je napajanje vklopljeno, in začne svetiti v stanju pripravljenosti. 8 ZVOČNIKA BN68-03043A.indb 2 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:03Slovenščina - 3 ¦ Dodatna oprema daljinski upravljalnik in bateriji (AAA x 2) Napajalni kabel Pokrov za podstavek (samo 22-palčni model) Čistilna krpa (M4 X l16) Oprema za pritrditev na steno (samo 19-palčni model) Okrasni pokrov (samo 19-palčni model) vijak za stojalo x 4 (samo 22-palčni model) ● Uporabnikova navodila ● Garancijska kartica ● varnostni priročnik N Preverite, ali so televizorju lCd priloženi naslednji predmeti. Če kateri predmet manjka, se obrnite na prodajalca. N Garancijska kartica, varnostni priročnik (ni na voljo na vseh lokacijah) N Barva in oblika predmetov sta odvisni od modela. BN68-03043A.indb 3 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:04Slovenščina - 4 ¦ Ogled plošče s priključki N Barva in oblika izdelka sta odvisni od modela. N vsakič ko na televizor priključite zunanjo napravo, mora biti napajanje enote izklopljeno. N Ko priključujete zunanjo napravo, mora biti barva priključka enaka barvi kabla. 1 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) – Za povezavo z digitalno avdio komponento, kot je sprejemnik domačega kina. N Če so povezane vtičnice HdMI IN, potem vtičnica DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) na televizorju omogoča samo izhod 2-kanalnega zvoka. Za 5.1-kanalni zvok povežite optično vtičnico na predvajalniku dvd/Blu-ray ali kabelskem/satelitskem sprejemniku neposredno z ojačevalnikom ali domačim kinom in ne s televizorjem. 2 SERVICE – Spojnik za nadgradnjo programske opreme. 3 HDMI / PC IN [HDMI (DVI), AUDIO, PC] – Za povezavo z vtičnico HdMI naprave z izhodom HdMI. N za povezavo med HDMI in HDMI ne potrebujete dodatne avdio povezave. N Kaj je HdMI? vmesnik HdMI (High-definition Multimedia Interface) omogoča prenos digitalnih avdio in video signalov prek enega kabla. HdMI in dvI se razlikujeta v tem, da je naprava HdMI manjša, da ima vgrajeno funkcijo kodiranja HdCP (zaščita pred kopiranjem za širokopasovno digitalno vsebino) in da podpira večkanalni digitalni avdio. N vtičnico HDMI / PC IN [HDMI(DVI)] uporabite za povezavo dvI z zunanjo napravo. U Za video povezavo uporabite kabel za povezavo vrat DVI in HDMI ali adapter DVI-HDMI (povezava vrat DVI in HDMI), za avdio povezavo pa uporabite vtičnico HDMI / PC IN [AUDIO]. Če uporabljate kabel HdMI/dvI, uporabite vtičnico HDMI / PC IN [HDMI (DVI)]. HDMI / PC IN [AUDIO] – Za povezavo z vtičnico za avdio izhod na računalniku. – Avdio izhodi DVI za zunanje naprave. HDMI / PC IN [PC] – Za povezavo z vtičnico za video izhod na računalniku. N Če vaš računalnik podpira povezavo HdMI, ga lahko povežete s priključkom HDMI / PC IN [HDMI (DVI)]. N Če vaš računalnik podpira povezavo dvI, ga lahko povežete s priključkom HDMI / PC IN [HDMI (DVI)] / [AUDIO]. 4 AV IN [VIDEO] / [R-AUDIO-L] – Priključite kabel rCA na ustrezno zunanjo napravo A/v, kot je videorekorder, predvajalnik dvd ali videokamera. – Priključite avdio kabla rCA na [R-AUDIO-L] na televizorju in druga konca na ustrezne spojnike avdio izhoda na napravi A/V. 6 7 1 2 3 4 0 9 8 5 [Hrbtna plošča televizorja] Vhod za napajanje BN68-03043A.indb 4 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:04Slovenščina - 5 5 ANT IN – Za povezavo z antenskim ali kabelskim televizijskim sistemom. 6 reža za SPLOŠNI VMESNIK – Če pri nekaterih kanalih ni vstavljena ‘kartica za splošni vmesnik’, se na zaslonu prikaže sporočilo ‘Scrambled Signal’. – v 2–3 minutah se prikažejo informacije o združitvi s telefonsko številko, Id-jem kartice za splošni vmesnik, Id-jem gostitelja in druge informacije. Če se prikaže sporočilo o napaki, se obrnite na ponudnika storitev. – Ko je konfiguracija informacij o kanalih končana, se prikaže sporočilo ‘Updating Completed’, kar pomeni, da je seznam kanalov posodobljen. N Kartico za splošni vmesnik dobite pri lokalnem ponudniku kabelske televizije. Kartico za splošni vmesnik odstranite tako, da jo previdno izvlečete z rokami, saj se pri padcu lahko poškoduje. N Kartico za splošni vmesnik vstavite v smeri, ki je označena na njej. N Kje se nahaja reža COMMON INTERFACE, je odvisno od modela. N CAM ni podprt v nekaterih državah in regijah. Preverite pri pooblaščenem prodajalcu. 7 KLJUČAVNICA KENSINGTON (odvisno od modela) – Ključavnica Kensington (izbirno) je naprava, ki se uporablja za fizično pritrditev sistema pri uporabi na javnem mestu. Če želite uporabljati napravo za zaklepanje, se obrnite na trgovca, pri katerem ste kupili televizor. N Kam se namesti ključavnico Kensington, je odvisno od modela. 8 Vtič za slušalke – Slušalke lahko priključite na izhod za slušalke na televizorju. Ko so priključene slušalke, je zvok iz vgrajenih zvočnikov onemogočen. 9 COMPONENT IN – Priključite komponentne video kable (izbirno) na spojnik komponente (PR, PB, Y) na hrbtni strani televizorja in druge konce na ustrezne spojnike video izhoda komponente na dTv ali predvajalniku dvd. – Če želite priključiti tako sprejemnik kot dTv (ali predvajalnik dvd), priključite sprejemnik na dTv (ali predvajalnik dvd) ter dTv (ali predvajalnik dvd) priključite na spojnik komponente (PR, PB, Y) na televizorju. – Spojniki PR, PB in Y na komponentnih napravah (dTv ali predvajalnik dvd) imajo včasih oznako Y, B-Y in r-Y ali Y, Cb in Cr. – Priključite avdio kabla rCA (izbirno) na [R-AUDIO-L] na hrbtni strani televizorja in druga konca na ustrezne spojnike avdio izhoda na dTv ali predvajalniku dvd. 0 EXT (RGB) Spojnik Input Izhod Video Avdio (l / D) rGB Video + avdio (l / D) EXT O O O Na voljo je samo izhod televizorja ali DTV. – vhodi oziroma izhodi za zunanje naprave, kot so videorekorder, predvajalnik dvd, video igralna naprava ali predvajalnik video plošč. BN68-03043A.indb 5 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:04Slovenščina - 6 ¦ Daljinski upravljalnik N daljinski upravljalnik lahko uporabljate do oddaljenosti približno 7 m od televizorja. N Na delovanje daljinskega upravljalnika lahko vpliva močna svetloba. N Barva in oblika izdelka sta odvisni od modela. 1 POWER: Gumb za televizor v stanju pripravljenosti. 2 ŠTEVILSKI GUMBI : Pritisnite za menjavo kanala. 3 FAV.CH: Za prikaz seznamov priljubljenih kanalov na zaslonu. 4Y: Pritisnite za znižanje ali zvišanje glasnosti. 5 SOURCE: Pritisnite za prikaz in izberite video vire, ki so na voljo. 6 INFO : Pritisnite za prikaz informacij na televizijskem zaslonu. 7 TOOLS: Za hitro izbiro pogosto uporabljenih funkcij. 8 CH LIST: Za prikaz seznama kanalov na zaslonu 9 BARVNI GUMBI: Te gumbe uporabljajte v menijih Channel list itd. ! TV : Za neposredno izbiro načina televizorja. @ PRE-CH: za vrnitev na prej gledani kanal. # MUTEM: Pritisnite za začasen izklop zvoka. $ P

: Pritisnite za menjavo kanalov. % MENU: Za prikaz glavnega menija na zaslonu. ^ GUIDE: Prikaz elektronskega programskega vodnika (EPG) & RETURN: Za vrnitev na prejšnji meni * NAVZGOR▲ / NAVZDOL▼ / LEVO◄ / DESNO► / ENTERE: Uporabite za izbiranje elementov menija na zaslonu in spreminjanje vrednosti menija. ( EXIT: Pritisnite za izhod iz menija. ) SUBT. : Prikaz digitalnih podnapisov a AD: Izbira zvočnega opisa. Funkcije teleteksta 5 0: za izbiro načina teleteksta (lIST/ FlOF) 6 5: za prikaz teleteksta 7 4: za izbiro velikosti teleteksta 8 8: za shranjevanje teleteksta 9 za izbiro teme Fastext 0/: izmenična izbira možnosti Teletext, Double ali Mix. ! :: za izhod iz teleteksta @ 1 : podstran teleteksta $ 2 : naslednja stran teleteksta 3 : prejšnja stran teleteksta % 6 : za kazalo teleteksta & 9 : za zadržanje strani teleteksta ( 7 : Za preklic teleteksta ¦ Vstavljanje baterij v daljinski upravljalnik 1. Odprite pokrovček na hrbtni strani daljinskega upravljalnika, kot je prikazano na sliki. 2. Vstavite dve bateriji AAA. N Poskrbite, da sta pola ‘+’ in ‘–’ baterije usmerjena skladno s prikazom v predelu za baterije. 3. Pokrovček namestite nazaj. N Če daljinskega upravljalnika ne boste uporabljali dalj časa, odstranite baterije in jih shranite na hladnem in suhem mestu. N Če daljinski upravljalnik ne deluje, preverite naslednje: ● Ali je televizor vklopljen? ● Ali so poli baterij ‘plus’ in ‘minus’ zamenjani? ● Ali sta bateriji prazni? ● Ali je prišlo do izpada napajanja oziroma je napajalni kabel izključen? ● Ali je v bližini posebna fluorescentna luč ali neonska tabla? 1 2 4 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 ! @ # $ & * ( ) a % ^ BN68-03043A.indb 6 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:05Slovenščina - 7 UPRAVLJANJE ¦ Ogled menijev Pred uporabo televizorja sledite spodnjim korakom, da se naučite krmariti po meniju in izbrati in prilagoditi različne funkcije. 1. Pritisnite gumb MENU. Na zaslonu se prikaže glavni meni. Na levi strani so ikone: Picture, Sound, Channel , Setup, Input, Application, Support. 2. Za izbiro ene od ikon pritiskajte gumb ▲ ali ▼. Za dostop do podmenija ikone pritiskajte gumb ◄ ali ►. 3. Pritiskajte gumb ▲ ali ▼ za pomik na menijske elemente. za odprtje elementov v meniju pritisnite gumb ENTERE. 4. Pritiskajte gumb ▲/▼/◄/►, da spremenite izbrane elemente. N Za vrnitev na prejšnji meni pritisnite gumb RETURN. 5. Pritisnite gumb EXIT za izhod iz menija. Uporaba gumbov na daljinskem upravljalniku Gumb Delovanje Gumb Delovanje MENUm Za prikaz glavnega menija na zaslonu. ▲/▼/◄/►/ ENTERE Za premikanje kazalca in izbiro elementa. za izbiro trenutno izbranega elementa. za potrditev nastavitve. RUTURNR Za vrnitev v prejšnji meni. EXITe za izhod iz menija na zaslonu. Primer: nastavitev svetlosti televizorja v slikovnem meniju „ Nastavitev svetlosti na 80 1. Za prikaz menija pritisnite gumb MENU. 2. Pritisnite gumb ENTERE, da izberete Picture. 3. S pritiskom gumba ▲ ali ▼ izberite Brightness. 4. Pritisnite gumb ENTERE. 5. Pritiskajte gumb ◄ ali ►, da svetlost nastavite na 80. 6. Pritisnite gumb ENTERE. N Pritisnite gumb EXIT za izhod iz menija. Mode : Standard ► Backlight : 7 Contrast : 95 Brightness : 45 Sharpness : 50 Colour : 50 Tint (G / r) : G50 / r50 Picture Mode : Standard ► Backlight : 7 Contrast : 95 Brightness : 45 Sharpness : 50 Colour : 50 Tint (G / r) : G50 / r50 Picture Backlight : 7 Contrast : 95 Brightness : 45 ► Sharpness : 50 Colour : 50 Tint (G / r) : G50 / r50 Napredne nastavitve Picture Options Picture reset Picture U Move L Adjust E enter R return Brightness 45 U Move L Adjust E enter R return Brightness 80 Mode : Standard ► Backlight : 7 Contrast : 95 Brightness : 45 Sharpness : 50 Colour : 50 Tint (G / r) : G50 / r50 Picture BN68-03043A.indb 7 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:05Slovenščina - 8 ¦ Preklop televizorja v stanje pripravljenosti Televizor lahko preklopite v stanje pripravljenosti in s tem zmanjšate porabo energije. Stanje pripravljenosti je uporabno, če želite začasno prekiniti gledanje (na primer med jedjo). 1. Pritisnite gumb POWERP na daljinskem upravljalniku. N Zaslon se izklopi in na televizorju začne svetiti indikator stanja pripravljenosti. 2. Za ponoven vklop televizorja enostavno znova pritisnite gumb POWERP. N Televizorja ne puščajte v stanju pripravljenosti dlje časa (na primer, ko greste na dopust). Priporočamo tudi, da izključite napajanje in anteno. ¦ Funkcija Plug & Play Pri prvem vklopu televizorja se samodejno prikažejo osnovne nastavitve. 1. Pritisnite gumb POWER na daljinskem upravljalniku. Prikaže se sporočilo You can set the menu language.. 2. Z gumbom ▲ ali ▼ izberite ustrezen jezik. Za potrditev izbire pritisnite gumb ENTERE. 3. Z gumbom ◄ ali ► izberite Store Demo ali Home Use, nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE. N Priporočamo, da televizor nastavite na način Home Use, saj to zagotavlja najboljšo sliko v domačem okolju. N Store Demo je namenjen samo uporabi v trgovinah. N Če je naprava po pomoti nastavljena na način Store Demo in se želite vrniti na Home Use (Standard): Na Tv-ju pritisnite gumb za glasnost. Ko je na zaslonu prikaz glasnosti, 5 sekund držite pritisnjen gumb MENU na televizorju. 4. Pritisnite gumb ENTERE. S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼ izberite ustrezno državo. Za potrditev izbire pritisnite gumb ENTERE. 5. Pritiskajte gumb ▲ ali ▼, da izberete Air ali Cable, nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE. N Air: Air kot vrsta signala antene. Cable: Cable kot vrsta signala antene. 6. S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali▼ izberite kanal, ki ga želite shraniti. Pritisnite gumb ENTERE, da izberete Start. N Digital & Analogue: digitalni in analogni kanali. Digital: digitalni kanali. Analogue: analogni kanali. N Ko vir antene nastavljate na Cable, pridete do koraka, pri katerem lahko nastavite vrednost za iskanje digitalnih kanalov. Za več informacij si oglejte Channel → Auto Store. N Iskanje kanalov se bo samodejno začelo in končalo. N Če želite shranjevanje kadar koli prekiniti, pritisnite gumb ENTERE. N Ko so shranjeni vsi kanali, ki so na voljo, se prikaže sporočilo Set the Clock Mode.. 7. Pritisnite gumb ENTERE. Z gumbom ▲ ali ▼ izberite Auto, nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE. N Če izberete Manual, se prikaže Set current date and time. N Če ste prejeli digitalni signal, se bo čas samodejno nastavil. Če se ne, izberite Manual, da nastavite uro. (Oglejte si 20. stran.) 8. Na voljo je način povezave za najboljšo kakovost visoke ločljivosti. Ko potrdite način, pritisnite gumb ENTERE. 9. Prikaže se sporočilo Enjoy your TV!. Ko končate, pritisnite gumb ENTERE. Za ponastavitev te funkcije ... 1. Za prikaz menija pritisnite gumb MENU. S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼ izberite Setup, nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE. 2. znova pritisnite gumb ENTERE, da izberete Plug & Play. 3. vnesite 4-mestno kodo PIN. Privzeta koda PIN novega televizorja je 0-0-0-0. N Če želite spremeniti številko PIN, uporabite funkcijo Change PIN. (Oglejte si 22. stran.) N Funkcija Plug & Play je na voljo samo v načinu televizorja. Plug & Play You can set the menu language. Menu language : English ► E enter BN68-03043A.indb 8 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:05Slovenščina - 9 ¦ Ogled prikaza Prikaz označuje trenutni kanal in stanje določenih zvočnih in slikovnih nastavitev. O za ogled informacij pritisnite gumb INFO. Pritisnite gumb INFO na daljinskem upravljalniku. Na televizorju se bodo prikazali kanal, vrsta zvoka in stanje določenih slikovnih in zvočnih nastavitev. ● ▲, ▼: Za ogled drugih informacij o kanalu. Če se želite pomakniti na trenutno izbran kanal, pritisnite gumb ENTERE. ● ◄, ►: Ogledate si lahko informacije o želeni oddaji na trenutnem kanalu. N znova pritisnite gumb INFO ali počakajte približno 10 sekund, da prikaz samodejno izgine. UPRAVLJANJE KANALOV ¦ Konfiguriranje menija Channel ❑ Country N Prikaže se zaslon za vnos kode PIN. vnesite 4-mestno kodo PIN. „ Analogue Channel Spremenite lahko državo analognih kanalov. „ Digital Channel Spremenite lahko državo digitalnih kanalov. ❑ Auto Store Poiščete lahko razpoložljive frekvenčne razpone (razpoložljivost je odvisna od države). Samodejno dodeljene številke programov mogoče ne ustrezajo dejanskim ali želenim številkam programov. N Če je kanal zaklenjen s funkcijo Child Lock, se prikaže okno za vnos PIN-a. „ Air / Cable Vir antene za shranjevanje ● Digital & Analogue: digitalni in analogni kanali. ● Digital: digitalni kanali. ● Analogue: analogni kanali. Če izberete ‘Cable → Digital & Analogue’ ali ‘Cable → Digital’ vnesite vrednost za iskanje kabelskih kanalov. ● Search Mode → Full / Network / Quick N Quick – Network ID: za prikaz identifikacijske kode omrežja. – Frequency: za prikaz frekvence kanala. (razlikuje se od države do države.) – Modulation: za prikaz vrednosti modulacije, ki so na voljo. – Symbol Rate: za prikaz razpoložljivih simbolnih hitrosti. N Poišče vse kanale aktivnih televizijskih postaj in jih shrani v pomnilnik televizorja. N Če želite ustaviti izvajanje funkcije Auto Store, pritisnite gumb ENTERE. Prikaže se sporočilo Stop Auto Store?. S pritiskanjem gumba ◄ ali ► izberite Yes, nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE. Country ► Auto Store Manual Store Cable Search Option Now & Next Guide Full Guide default Guide : Full Guide Channel DTV Air 15 abc1 18:00 ~ 6:00 18:11 Thu 6 Jan life On venus Avenue Unclassified No Detaild Information ¦ INFO BN68-03043A.indb 9 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:06Slovenščina - 10 ❑ Manual Store N ročno poišče kanal in ga shrani v pomnilnik televizorja. N Če je kanal zaklenjen s funkcijo Child Lock, se prikaže okno za vnos PIN-a. „ Digital Channel ročno shranjevanje digitalnih kanalov. N Digital Channel je na voljo samo v načinu dTv. ● Channel: Z gumboma ▲, ▼ ali številskimi gumbi (0~9) nastavite številko kanala. ● Frequency: s številskimi gumbi nastavite frekvenco. ● Bandwidth: Z gumboma ▲, ▼ ali številskimi gumbi (0~9) nastavite pasovno širino. N Ko se iskanje dokonča, so posodobljeni kanali v seznamu kanalov. „ Analogue Channel ročno shranjevanje analognega kanala. ● Programme (številka programa, ki naj bo dodeljena kanalu): z gumbom ▲, ▼ ali številskimi gumbi (0~9) nastavite številko programa. ● Colour System → Auto / PAL / SECAM / NTSC4.43: z gumbom ▲ ali ▼ nastavite vrednost barvnega sistema. ● Sound System → BG / DK / I / L: z gumbom ▲ ali ▼ nastavite vrednost zvočnega sistema. ● Channel (če poznate številko kanala za shranjevanje): S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼ izberite C (običajna antena) ali S (kabelski kanal). Pritisnite gumb ► in nato s pritiskanjem gumbov ▲, ▼ ali številskih gumbov (0~9) izberite želeno številko. N Številko kanala lahko izberete tudi neposredno s pritiskanjem številskih gumbov (0~9). N Če ni zvoka ali le-ta ni normalen, znova izberite zahtevani zvočni standard. ● Search (če ne poznate številk kanalov): za začetek iskanja pritisnite gumb ▲ ali ▼. Kanalnik pregleda frekvenčni razpon, dokler se na zaslonu ne prikaže prvi kanal ali izbrani kanal. ● Store (če shranite kanal in z njim povezano številko programa): Nastavite na OK s pritiskanjem gumba ENTERE. N Kanalni način – P (programski način): Po končani naravnavi so oddajnim postajam na vašem območju dodeljene številke položajev od P00 do P99. Kanal lahko izberete z vnosom številke položaja v tem načinu. – C (način zunanje antene): Kanal lahko izberete z vnosom dodeljene številke za posamezno oddajno postajo v tem načinu. – S (način kabelskega kanala): Kanal lahko izberete z vnosom dodeljene številke za vsak kabelski kanal v tem načinu. ❑ Cable Search Option (odvisno od države) Za nastavitev dodatnih možnosti iskanja za kabelsko omrežje, kot sta frekvenca in hitrost simbolov. ● Frequency (Start ~ Stop): za prikaz frekvence kanala. ● Modulation: za prikaz vrednosti modulacije, ki so na voljo. ● Symbol Rate: za prikaz razpoložljivih simbolnih hitrosti. ❑ Now & Next Guide / Full Guide Informacije EPG (elektronski programski vodnik) posredujejo izdajatelji televizijskega programa. Informacije o programu so lahko zastarele ali jih ni, kar je posledica oddajanja informacij določene televizijske postaje. Zaslon se bo dinamično posodobil takoj, ko bodo na voljo nove informacije. N Za podrobne postopke uporabe funkcij Now & Next Guide in Full Guide si oglejte opise na 11. strani. O Meni vodnika lahko prikažete tudi enostavno s pritiskom gumba GUIDE. (Za konfiguriranje funkcije Default Guide si oglejte opise.) „ Now & Next Guide Za šest kanalov, ki so navedeni v levem stolpcu, prikaže informacije o trenutnem in naslednjem programu. „ Full Guide Informacije o programu so prikazane za eno uro. Prikazane so informacije o dveh urah programa, po katerih se lahko pomikate naprej ali nazaj glede na čas. BN68-03043A.indb 10 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:06Slovenščina - 11 ❑ Default Guide → Now & Next Guide / Full Guide Odločite se lahko, ali želite prikazati Now & Next Guide ali Full Guide, ko pritisnete gumb GUIDE na daljinskem upravljalniku. ❑ Channel List Za podrobne postopke uporabe možnosti Channel List si oglejte navodila ‘Upravljanje kanalov’. O Te možnosti lahko enostavno izberete s pritiskom gumba CH LIST na daljinskem upravljalniku. ❑ Channel Mode Ko pritisnete gumb P >/<, preklopite med kanali, ki so na seznamu izbranih kanalov. „ Added Ch. preklop med kanali, ki so na seznamu shranjenih kanalov. „ Favourite Ch. preklop med kanali, ki so na seznamu priljubljenih kanalov. ❑ Fine Tune Če je sprejem jasen, fina naravnava kanala ni potrebna, ker se samodejno izvede med iskanjem in shranjevanjem. Če je signal šibak ali popačen, boste kanal mogoče morali ročno fino naravnati. N Shranjeni fino naravnani kanali so označeni z zvezdico ‘*’ na desni strani številke kanala na traku s kanalom. N Če želite ponastaviti fino naravnavo, izberite Reset s pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼ in nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE. N Fino naravnavo je mogoče uporabiti samo pri analognih Tv-kanalih. Uporaba Now & Next Guide / Full Guide Za ... Storite naslednje ... Gledanje programa s seznama EPG S pritiskanjem gumbov ▲, ▼, ◄, ► izberite program. Izhod iz vodnika Pritisnite modri gumb Če je izbran naslednji program, je dodan na razpored s prikazano ikono ure. Če znova pritisnete gumb ENTERE, s pritiskanjem gumbov ◄, ► izberite Cancel Schedules. določanje razporeda se prekliče in ikona ure izgine. Ogled informacij o programu S pritiskanjem gumbov ▲, ▼, ◄, ► izberite želeni program. Ko je označen želeni program, pritisnite gumb INFO. Naslov programa je na zgornjem osrednjem delu zaslona. Za podrobne informacije kliknite gumb INFO. Podrobne informacije vključujejo številko kanala, čas predvajanja, informacije o statusni vrstici, starševskem nadzoru, kakovosti videa (Hd/Sd), zvočnih načinih, podnaslovih ali teletekstu, jeziku podnaslovov ali teleteksta ter kratek povzetek označenega programa. “...” se prikaže, če je povzetek dolg. Preklapljanje med možnostima Now & Next Guide in Full Guide Pritiskajte rdeči gumb. v možnosti Full Guide Hiter pomik nazaj (24 ur). Hiter pomik naprej (24 ur). Pritiskajte zeleni gumb. Pritiskajte rumeni gumb. Now & Next Guide dTv Cable 900 f tn 2:10 Tue 1 Jun Freshmen On Campus 2:00 - 2:30 No Detailed Information Now Next Mint extra loaded Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC The Distillery Smash Hits! Sunday 1 f tn 2 ITv Play 3 Kerrang! 4 Kiss 5 oneword ▼ 6 Smash Hits! Kisstory No Information No Information No Information Street Hypn.. Watch INFO Information ■ Full Guide ■ Exit Full Guide dTv Cable 900 f tn 2:10 Tue 1 Jun Freshmen On Campus 2:00 - 2:30 No Detailed Information Today 2:00 - 3:00 3:00 - 4:00 Mint extra loaded Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC The Distillery Smash Hits! Sunday 1 f tn 2 ITv Play 3 Kerrang! 4 Kiss 5 oneword ▼ 6 Smash Hits! No Information Freshmen O.. Watch INFO Information ■ Now / Next ■ +24 Hours ■ Exit BN68-03043A.indb 11 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:06Slovenščina - 12 ¦ Upravljanje kanalov S tem menijem lahko dodate/izbrišete ali nastavite priljubljene kanale in uporabljate programski vodnik za digitalne prenose. „ All Channels Prikaže vse trenutno razpoložljive kanale. „ Added Channels Prikaz vseh dodanih kanalov. „ Favourites Prikaz vseh priljubljenih kanalov. O Če želite izbrati priljubljene kanale, ki ste jih nastavili, pritisnite gumb FAV.CH na daljinskem upravljalniku. „ Programmed Prikaz trenutno rezerviranih oddaj. N Izberite kanal na zaslonu All Channels, Added Channels ali Favourites s pritiskanjem gumba ▲/▼ in pritiskom gumba ENTERE. Nato lahko gledate izbrani kanal. N Uporaba barvnih gumbov skupaj z možnostjo Channel List – rdeči (Channel Type): Preklapljanje med možnostmi TV, Radio, Data / Other in All. – zeleni (Zoom): Povečanje ali pomanjšanje številke kanala. – rumeni (Select): Izbira več seznamov kanalov. Istočasno lahko dodate/izbrišete več kanalov, jih dodate priljubljenim/ izbrišete izmed priljubljenih ali jih zaklenete/odklenete. Če želite istočasno nastaviti vse izbrane kanale, izberite želene kanale in pritisnite rumeni gumb. levo od izbranih kanalov se prikaže znak c. – TOOLS (Tools): Za prikaz menija Delete (ali Add), Add to Favourite (ali Delete from Favourite), Lock (ali Unlock), Timer Viewing, Edit Channel Name, Sort, Edit Channel Number, Select All (ali Deselect All), Auto Store. (Meniji možnosti so lahko drugačni, odvisno od okoliščin.) N Ikone stanja kanala ● A : analogni kanal. ● c: kanal, izbran s pritiskom rumenega gumba. ● : kanal, ki je nastavljen kot priljubljeni. ● ( : oddaja, ki se trenutno predvaja. ● \ : zaklenjen kanal. ● ) : rezervirana oddaja. Meni z možnostmi seznama kanalov (v možnosti All Channels/Added Channels/Favourites) N Če želite uporabljati meni z možnostmi, pritisnite gumb TOOLS. N Elementi menija z možnostmi se lahko razlikujejo, odvisno od stanja kanala. „ Add/Delete lahko izbrišete ali dodate kanal, da prikažete želene kanale. N vsi izbrisani kanali bodo prikazani v meniju All Channels. N Če je kanal obarvan sivo, to pomeni, da je bil izbrisan. N Meni Add se prikaže samo pri izbrisanih kanalih. N Na enak način lahko izbrišete kanal v meniju Added Channels ali Favourite. „ Add to Favourite / Delete from Favourite Kanale, ki jih pogosto gledate, lahko nastavite kot priljubljene. T Pritisnite gumb TOOLS, da prikažete meni Tools. Nastavite lahko tudi dodajanje (ali brisanje izmed) priljubljenih, tako, da izberete Tools → Add to Favourite (ali Delete from Favourite). N Prikazan bo simbol ‘ ’ in kanal bo nastavljen kot priljubljeni. N vsi izbrisani kanali bodo prikazani v meniju Favourite. 824 UKTV Gold 825 UKTV style A 1 C -- A 2 C -- A 3 ♥ C -- A 4 C -- A 5 C -- A 6 C -- A 7 C -- Added Channels All ■ Channel Type ■ Zoom ■ Select T Tools 824 UKTV Gold 825 UKTV style A 1 C -- A 2 C -- A 3 ♥ C -- A 4 C -- A 5 C -- A 6 C -- A 7 C -- Added Channels All ■ Channel Type ■ Zoom ■ Select T Tools Delete Add to Favourite Lock Timer Viewing Edit Channel Name Sort ▼ BN68-03043A.indb 12 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:07Slovenščina - 13 „ Lock/Unlock Kanal lahko zaklenete, tako da ga ni mogoče izbrati in gledati. Ta funkcija je na voljo samo, če je možnost Child Lock nastavljena na On. (Oglejte si 22. stran.) N Prikaže se zaslon za vnos kode PIN. vnesite 4-mestno kodo PIN. N Privzeta koda PIN novega televizorja je 0-0-0-0. Kodo PIN lahko spremenite tako, da v meniju izberete Change PIN. N Prikazan bo simbol ‘\’ in kanal bo zaklenjen. „ Timer Viewing Če rezervirate oddajo, ki si jo želite ogledati, se kanal na seznamu kanalov samodejno preklopi v rezerviranega, tudi če gledate drug kanal. Če želite rezervirati oddajo, najprej nastavite trenutni čas. (Oglejte si 20. stran.) N rezervirati je mogoče samo shranjene kanale. N Kanal, dan, mesec, leto, uro in minute lahko nastavite neposredno s pritiskanjem številskih gumbov na daljinskem upravljalniku. N rezerviranje programa bo prikazano v meniju Programmed. N Programski vodnik za digitalne kanale in rezerviranje oddaj Če je izbran digitalni kanal in pritisnete gumb ►, se prikaže programski vodnik za ta kanal. Oddajo lahko rezervirate po zgoraj opisanih postopkih. „ Edit Channel Name (samo pri analognih kanalih) Kanale lahko označite, tako da se vsakič, ko izberete določen kanal, prikaže njegovo ime. N digitalnim kanalom so imena samodejno dodeljena in jih ni mogoče določiti. „ Edit Channel Number (samo pri digitalnih kanalih) Urejate lahko tudi številke kanalov, in sicer s pritiskanjem številskih gumbov na daljinskem upravljalniku. „ Sort (samo pri analognih kanalih) Ta postopek omogoča spreminjanje številk programov shranjenih kanalov. To postopek boste mogoče morali izvesti po uporabi funkcije samodejnega shranjevanja. „ Select All/Deselect All ● Select All: izberete lahko vse kanale na seznamu kanalov. ● Deselect All: prekličete lahko izbor vseh izbranih kanalov. N Možnost Deselect All lahko izberete samo, če je kateri kanal izbran. „ Auto Store N Za podrobnosti o nastavitvah možnosti si oglejte 9. stran. N Če je kanal zaklenjen s funkcijo Child Lock, se prikaže okno za vnos PIN-a. Meni z možnostmi seznama kanalov (v možnosti Programmed) rezervacijo si lahko ogledate, jo spremenite ali izbrišete. N Če želite uporabljati meni z možnostmi, pritisnite gumb TOOLS. „ Change Info za spremembo rezervacije oddaje. „ Cancel Schedules Za preklic rezervacije oddaje. „ Information Za ogled rezervacije oddaje. (lahko tudi spremenite podatke o rezervaciji.) „ Select All za izbiro vseh rezerviranih oddaj. 1 / 1 / 2009 13:59 5 Tv1 Quincy, M.E 18:59 2 Tv3 The equalizer 20:59 2 Tv3 McMillan & Wife Programmed All ■ Zoom ■ Select T Tools E Information Change Info Cancel Schedules Information Select All BN68-03043A.indb 13 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:07Slovenščina - 14 UPRAVLJANJE SLIKE ¦ Konfiguriranje menija Picture ❑ Mode Izberete lahko vrsto slike, ki najbolj ustreza vašim zahtevam. T Pritisnite gumb TOOLS, da prikažete meni Tools. Slikovni način lahko nastavite tudi z izbiro možnosti Tools → Picture Mode. „ Dynamic Za izbiro slike za visoko ločljivost v svetlem prostoru. „ Standard Za izbiro slike za optimalen prikaz v normalnem okolju. „ Movie Za izbiro slike za gledanje filmov v temnem prostoru. ❑ Backlight / Contrast / Brightness / Sharpness / Colour / Tint (G/R) Televizor ima več možnosti nastavitev za nadzor kakovosti slike. ● Backlight: za prilagoditev svetlosti osvetlitve lCd-ja. ● Contrast: za prilagoditev ravni kontrasta slike. ● Brightness: za prilagoditev ravni svetlosti slike. ● Sharpness: za prilagoditev nastavitve robov slike. ● Colour: za prilagoditev nasičenosti barv slike. ● Tint (G/R): za prilagoditev barvnega odtenka slike. N Izberite slikovni način, ki ga želite najprej prilagoditi. Prilagojene vrednosti se shranijo za vse slikovne načine. N Če spremenite možnosti Backlight, Contrast, Brightness, Sharpness, Colour ali Tint (G/R), se prikaz na zaslonu ustrezno prilagodi. N v analognih načinih sistema PAl TV, Ext., AV funkcije Tint (G/R) ni mogoče uporabljati. N v načinu računalnika je mogoče spreminjati samo možnosti Backlight, Contrast in Brightness. N Spreminjate in shranjujete lahko nastavitve vseh zunanjih naprav, ki so povezane na vhod televizorja. N Količino porabljene energije lahko opazno zmanjšate, če znižate raven svetlosti slike, s čimer boste tudi znižali celotne tekoče stroške. ❑ Napredne nastavitve Novi Samsungov televizor omogoča še natančnejše slikovne nastavitve kot prejšnji modeli. Če želite prilagoditi podrobne slikovne nastavitve, si oglejte spodnje besedilo. N Advanced Settings je na voljo v načinu Standard ali Movie. N v načinu računalnika je med elementi Advanced Settings mogoče spreminjati samo možnosti Gamma in White Balance. „ Black Tone → Off / Dark / Darker / Darkest Na zaslonu lahko izberete raven črne in tako prilagodite globino zaslona. „ Dynamic Contrast → Off / Low / Medium / High Prilagodite lahko kontrast zaslona, tako da je optimalen. „ Gamma Nastavite lahko intenzivnost primarnih barv (rdeče, zelene, modre). „ Colour Space Barvni prostor je barvna matrika, ki je sestavljena iz rdeče, zelene in modre barve. Izberite najljubši barvni prostor za prikaz najnaravnejših barv. ● Native: nastavitev naravnega barvnega prostora omogoča globoke in bogate barvne tone. ● Auto: samodejni barvni prostor se samodejno prilagodi na najnaravnejši barvni ton glede na programske vire. Mode : Standard ► Backlight : 7 Contrast : 95 Brightness : 45 Sharpness : 50 Colour : 50 Tint (G / r) : G50 / r50 Picture Colour : 50 Tint (G / r) : G50 / r50 Advanced Settings ► Picture Options Picture reset Picture BN68-03043A.indb 14 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:07Slovenščina - 15 „ White Balance Prilagodite lahko barvno temperaturo za naravnejše barve slike. ● R-Offset / G-Offset / B-Offset / R-Gain / G-Gain / B-Gain: Prilagodite lahko barvno ‘temperaturo’ na svetlih območjih, tako, da spremenite vrednosti r, G in B. Priporočljivo samo za napredne uporabnike. ● Reset: predhodno prilagojena izravnava belin bo ponastavljena na tovarniške vrednosti. „ Flesh Tone Poudarite lahko rožnati ton slike. N Če spremenite vrednost nastavitve, se osveži prilagojeni zaslon. „ Edge Enhancement → Off / On Poudarite lahko robove predmetov na sliki. ❑ Picture Options N v načinu računalnika je med elementi Picture Options mogoče spreminjati samo Colour Tone in Size . „ Colour Tone → Cool / Normal / Warm1 / Warm2 Izberete lahko barvni ton, ki je najudobnejši za vaše oči. N Spreminjate in shranjujete lahko nastavitve vseh zunanjih naprav, ki so povezane na vhod televizorja. N Warm1 ali Warm2 je aktivna samo, če je slikovni način nastavljen na Movie. „ Size Izberete lahko velikost slike, ki najbolj ustreza vašim zahtevam. T Pritisnite gumb TOOLS, da prikažete meni Tools. velikost lahko nastavite tudi z izbiro možnosti Tools → Picture Size. ● Auto Wide: velikost slike se samodejno prilagodi razmerju stranic 16:9. ● 16:9: velikost slike prilagodi razmerju stranic 16:9, ki je primerno za dvd-je in širokozaslonsko oddajanje. ● Wide Zoom: povečava slike nad 4:3. ● Zoom: povečava slike, široke 16:9, da jo prilagodi velikosti zaslona (v navpični smeri). ● 4:3: privzeta nastavitev za video film in običajno oddajanje. ● Screen Fit: to funkcijo uporabite za ogled celotne slike brez prirezovanja pri vhodnem signalu HdMI (720p/1080i) ali Component (1080i). N Možnosti velikosti slike se lahko razlikujejo glede na vhodni vir. N razpoložljivi elementi se lahko razlikujejo glede na izbrani način. N v načinu računalnika je mogoče prilagajati samo načina 16:9 in 4:3. N Spreminjate in shranjujete lahko nastavitve vseh zunanjih naprav, ki so povezane na vhod televizorja. N Če je na televizorju več kot dve uri prikazana negibna slika, se lahko pojavi začasno zadržanje slike. N Wide Zoom: S pritiskanjem gumba ► izberite Position, nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE. S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼ pomaknite sliko navzgor/navzdol. Nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE. N Zoom: S pritiskanjem gumba ► izberite Position, nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE. S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼ pomaknite sliko navzgor ali navzdol. Nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE. S pritiskanjem gumba ► izberite Size, nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE. Pritiskajte gumb ▲ ali ▼, da povečate ali zmanjšate velikost slike v navpični smeri. Nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE. N Po izbiri možnosti Screen Fit v načinu HdMI (1080i) ali Component (1080i): s pritiskanjem gumba ◄ ali ► izberite Position. Z gumbom ▲, ▼, ◄ ali ► pomaknite sliko. Reset: S pritiskanjem gumba ◄ ali ► izberite Reset, nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE. Nastavitev lahko inicializirate. N Če funkcijo Screen Fit uporabite pri vhodu HdMI 720p, bo odrezana po 1 vrstica zgoraj, spodaj, levo in desno, kot pri funkciji zmanjšanja prevelike slike. „ Screen Mode → 16:9 / Wide Zoom / Zoom / 4:3 Ko pri širokozaslonskem televizorju 16:9 velikost slike nastavite na Auto Wide, lahko določite velikost za sliko 4:3 WSS ali pa ne določite teh nastavitev. v posameznih evropskih državah so zahtevane različne velikosti slike, zato to funkcijo izbere uporabnik. ● 16:9: nastavitev slike na široki način 16:9. ● Wide Zoom: povečava slike nad 4:3. ● Zoom: navpična povečava slike na zaslonu. ● 4:3: nastavitev slike na običajni način 4:3. N Ta funkcija je na voljo v načinu Auto Wide. N Funkcija ni na voljo v načinih PC, Component in HDMI. BN68-03043A.indb 15 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:07Slovenščina - 16 „ Digital NR → Off / Low / Medium / High / Auto Če je sprejeti televizijski signal šibak, lahko aktivirate funkcijo digitalnega odpravljanja šumov za zmanjšanje statičnih motenj in odsevov na zaslonu. N Če je signal šibak, izberite eno od ostalih možnosti, tako da je slika prikazana z največjo kakovostjo. „ HDMI Black Level → Normal / Low Neposredno lahko na izberete raven črne na zaslonu, da prilagodite globino zaslona. N Funkcija je aktivna samo, kadar je zunanji vhod povezan s HdMI (signali rGB). „ Film Mode → Off / Auto Televizor lahko nastavite tako, da samodejno zazna in obdela filmske signale iz vseh virov in prilagodi sliko na optimalno kakovost. N Film Mode je podprta v načinih TV, AV, COMPONENT (480i/1080i) in HDMI (480i/1080i). ❑ Picture Reset → Reset Picture Mode / Cancel Ponastavitev vseh slikovnih nastavitev na privzete vrednosti. N Izberite slikovni način, ki ga želite ponastaviti. Ponastavitev se izvede za vse slikovne načine. ● Reset Picture Mode: trenutne slikovne vrednosti se vrnejo na privzete nastavitve. ¦ Uporaba televizorja kot računalniškega zaslona Nastavitev programske opreme računalnika (v okolju Windows XP) Spodaj so prikazane nastavitve zaslona za tipični računalnik v OS Windows. dejanski prikazi na računalniškem zaslonu bodo najbrž drugačni, odvisno od različice operacijskega sistema Windows in grafične kartice. Četudi se dejanski prikazi razlikujejo, v večini primerov veljajo iste osnovne nastavitvene informacije. (Sicer se obrnite na proizvajalca računalnika ali Samsungovega prodajalca.) 1. Najprej kliknite možnost ‘Nadzorna plošča’ v meniju Start v OS Windows. 2. Ko se prikaže okno nadzorne plošče, kliknite ‘videz in teme’ in prikazalo se bo pogovorno okno zaslona. 3. Ko se prikaže okno nadzorne plošče, kliknite ‘Zaslon’ in prikazalo se bo pogovorno okno zaslona. 4. Pomaknite se na zavihek ‘Nastavitve’ v pogovornem oknu zaslona. Pravilna nastavitev velikosti (ločljivost): Optimalno – 1360 x 768 slikovnih pik Če je v pogovornem oknu nastavitev zaslona na voljo možnost za navpično frekvenco, je njena ustrezna vrednost ‘60’ ali ‘60 Hz’. Sicer samo kliknite ‘v redu’ in zaprite pogovorno okno. BN68-03043A.indb 16 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:08Slovenščina - 17 Načini zaslona Položaj in velikost zaslona se razlikujeta glede na vrsto računalniškega monitorja in njegovo ločljivost. Priporočene so ločljivosti v tabeli. „ Vhod D-Sub in HDMI/DVI Mode Ločljivost Vodoravna frekvenca (kHz) Navpična frekvenca (Hz) Točkovna ura (MHz) Polariteta sinhr. (V/N) IBM 640 x 350 31,469 70,086 25,175 +/- 720 x 400 31,469 70,087 28,322 -/+ MAC 640 x 480 35,000 66,667 30,240 -/- 832 x 624 49,726 74,551 57,284 -/- VeSA CVT 720 x 576 35,910 59,950 32,750 -/+ 1280 x 720 44,772 59,855 74,500 -/+ 1280 x 720 56,456 74,777 95,750 -/+ VeSA DMT 640 x 480 31,469 59,940 25,175 -/- 640 x 480 37,500 75,000 31,500 -/- 640 x 480 37,861 72,809 31,500 -/- 800 x 600 37,879 60,317 40,000 +/+ 800 x 600 46,875 75,000 49,500 +/+ 800 x 600 48,077 72,188 50,000 +/+ 1024 x 768 48,363 60,004 65,000 -/- 1024 x 768 56,476 70,069 75,000 -/- 1024 x 768 60,023 75,029 78,750 +/+ 1360 x 768 47,712 60,015 85,500 +/+ VeSA GTF 1280 x 720 52,500 70,000 89,040 -/+ N Če uporabljate kabel HdMI/dvI, uporabite vtičnico HDMI (DVI). N Način prepletanja ni podprt. N Če izberete nestandardno obliko video zapisa, televizor morda ne bo deloval pravilno. N Podprta sta načina za ločeno in kompozitno. SOG ni podrt. ¦ Nastavitev televizorja z računalnikom N Prednastavitev: Pritisnite gumb SOURCE, da izberete način računalnika. ❑ Auto Adjustment Samodejna prilagoditev omogoča računalniškemu zaslonu, da se samodejno prilagodi vhodnemu video signalu računalnika. vrednosti za fino, grobo in položaj se samodejno prilagodijo. N Ta funkcija ne deluje v načinu dvI-HdMI. T Pritisnite gumb TOOLS, da prikažete meni Tools. Samodejno prilagoditev lahko nastavite tudi z izbiro možnosti Tools → Auto Adjustment. ❑ Screen „ Coarse/Fine Namen prilagajanja kakovosti slike je odstraniti ali zmanjšati šum slike. Če šum ni odstranjen s fino naravnavo, čim bolje nastavite frekvenco (Coarse) in znova fino naravnajte. Po zmanjšanju šumov znova nastavite sliko tako, da bo poravnana na sredino zaslona. „ PC Position nastavite položaj računalniškega zaslona, če se ta ne prilega televizijskemu zaslonu. S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼ prilagodite navpični položaj. S pritiskanjem gumba ◄ ali ► prilagodite vodoravni položaj. „ Image Reset vse slikovne nastavitve lahko zamenjate s tovarniškimi vrednostmi. Brightness : 45 Sharpness : 50 Auto Adjustment ► Screen Advanced Settings Picture Options Picture reset Picture BN68-03043A.indb 17 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:08Slovenščina - 18 UPRAVLJANJE ZVOKA ¦ Konfiguriranje menija Sound ❑ Mode → Standard / Music / Movie / Clear Voice / Custom Izberete lahko zvočni način, ki vam najbolj ustreza. T Pritisnite gumb TOOLS, da prikažete meni Tools. Zvočni način lahko nastavite tudi z izbiro možnosti Tools → Sound Mode. „ Standard Za izbiro običajnega zvočnega načina. „ Music Glasba je bolj poudarjena kot glasovi. „ Movie Za najboljši zvok za filme. „ Clear Voice Glas je bolj poudarjen kot drugi zvoki. „ Custom Za priklic zvočnih nastavitev po meri. ❑ Equalizer Zvočne nastavitve lahko prilagodite, kot vam najbolj ustreza. „ Mode Izberete lahko zvočni način, ki vam najbolj ustreza. „ Balance Nadzor ravnovesja med desnim in levim zvočnikom. „ 100Hz / 300Hz / 1KHz / 3KHz / 10KHz (nastavitev pasovne širine) Nastavitev ravni frekvenc različnih pasovnih širin. „ Reset Ponastavitev nastavitev izenačevalnika na privzete vrednosti. ❑ SRS TruSurround HD → Off / On SrS TruSurround Hd je patentirana tehnologija SrS za predvajanje 5.1-večkanalne vsebine preko dveh zvočnikov. TruSurround proizvaja odličen, navidezni prostorski na katerem koli sistemu z dvema zvočnikoma, tudi prek notranjih zvočnikov televizorja. Tehnologija je popolnoma združljiva z vsemi večkanalnimi oblikami zapisa. ❑ Audio Language (samo pri digitalnih kanalih) Spremenite lahko privzeto vrednost za jezik avdia. Prikaže informacije o jeziku za dohodni tok. N Izbirate lahko samo med jeziki, ki so dejansko oddajani. N To funkcijo je mogoče izbrati pri gledanju digitalnega kanala. ❑ Audio Format → MPEG / Dolby Digital (samo pri digitalnih kanalih) Pri istočasnem oddajanju zvoka iz glavnega zvočnika in avdio sprejemnika lahko pride do odmeva zaradi različne hitrosti odkodiranja za glavni zvočnik in avdio sprejemnik. v tem primeru uporabite funkcijo zvočnika televizorja. N Možnost Audio Format je prikazana v skladu z oddajanim signalom. N To funkcijo je mogoče izbrati pri gledanju digitalnega kanala. Mode : Custom ► equalizer SrS TruSurround Hd : Off Audio language : - - - Audio Format : - - - Audio Description Auto volume : Off Sound BN68-03043A.indb 18 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:08Slovenščina - 19 ❑ Audio Description (samo pri digitalnih kanalih) To je dodatna funkcija za zvok, ki omogoča dodatne zvočne posnetke za slabovidne. Ta funkcija je namenjena zvočnemu toku za Ad (Audio description), če jo oddajnik pošlje skupaj z glavnim zvokom. Uporabniki lahko zvočni opis vklopijo in izklopijo ter upravljajo glasnost. O S pritiskom gumba AD na daljinskem upravljalniku izberite Off ali On. „ Audio Description → Off / On vklop ali izklop funkcije zvočnega opisa. „ Volume Prilagodite lahko glasnost zvočnega opisa. N Volume je aktivna, če je možnost Audio Description nastavljena na On. ❑ Auto Volume → Off / On Stanje signalov posameznih postaj se razlikuje, zato ni enostavno prilagajati glasnosti ob vsaki zamenjavi kanala. Ta funkcija omogoča samodejno prilagajanje glasnosti želenega kanala z znižanjem glasnosti v primeru visokega modulacijskega signala ali zvišanjem glasnosti v primeru nizkega modulacijskega signala. ❑ Speaker Select → External Speaker / TV Speaker Če želite slišati zvok iz ločenih zvočnikov, izklopite notranji ojačevalnik. N Gumba za glasnost in gumb MUTE ne delujejo, če je možnost Speaker Select nastavljena na External Speaker. N Če izberete External Speaker v meniju Speaker Select, bodo zvočne nastavitve omejene. ❑ Sound Reset → Reset All / Reset Sound Mode / Cancel Zvočne nastavitve lahko obnovite na tovarniške vrednosti. ¦ Izbira zvočnega načina Način zvoka lahko nastavite v meniju Tools. Če nastavite na Dual l ll, se na zaslonu prikaže trenutni zvočni način. Vrsta zvoka Dual 1/2 Privzeto A2 Stereo Mono MONO Samodejen preklop Stereo STEREO ↔ MONO Dual DUAL 1 ↔ DUAL 2 DUAL 1 NICAM Stereo Mono MONO Samodejen preklop Stereo MONO ↔ STEREO Dual MONO ↔ DUAL 1 DUAL 2 DUAL 1 N Če je stereo signal šibak in pride do samodejnega preklopa, preklopite na Mono. N Ta funkcija je aktivirana samo v stereo zvočnem signalu. v mono zvočnem signalu je deaktivirana. N Ta funkcija je na voljo samo v načinu televizorja. BN68-03043A.indb 19 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:08Slovenščina - 20 NASTAVITEV ¦ Konfiguriranje menija Setup ❑ Menu Language Nastavite lahko jezik menija. ❑ Time „ Clock Uro morate nastaviti, da lahko uporabljate različne funkcije časovnika televizorja. N Ob vsakem pritisku gumba INFO se bo prikazal trenutni čas. N Če izključite napajalni kabel, morate uro znova nastaviti. ● Clock Mode Trenutni čas lahko nastavite ročno ali samodejno. – Auto: samodejna nastavitev trenutnega časa z uporabo digitalno oddajanega časa. – Manual: ročna nastavitev trenutnega časa. N Samodejni čas morda ne bo pravilen, odvisno od oddajne postaje in signala. v tem primeru čas nastavite ročno. N da je mogoča samodejna nastavitev časa, mora biti povezana antena ali kabel. ● Clock Set Trenutni čas lahko nastavite ročno. N Ta element nastavite, če ste možnost Clock Mode nastavili na Manual. N dan, mesec, leto, uro in minute lahko nastavite neposredno s pritiskanjem številskih gumbov na daljinskem upravljalniku. „ Sleep Timer → Off / 30 min / 60 min / 90 min / 120 min / 150 min / 180 min Izklopni časovnik samodejno izklopi televizor po prednastavljenem času (30, 60, 90, 120, 150 in 180 minut). N Ko časovnik doseže 0, se televizor samodejno preklopi v stanje pripravljenosti. N Če želite preklicati delovanje funkcije Sleep Timer, izberite Off. T Pritisnite gumb TOOLS, da prikažete meni Tools. Izklopni časovnik lahko nastavite tudi z izbiro možnosti Tools → Sleep Timer. „ Timer 1 / Timer 2 / Timer 3 Opravite lahko tri različne nastavitve vklopa/izklopa časovnika. Najprej morate nastaviti uro. ● On Time: nastavitev ure, minut in aktiviranje/deaktiviranje. (Če želite aktivirati časovnik z izbrano nastavitvijo, nastavite na možnost Activate.) ● Off Time: nastavitev ure, minut in aktiviranje/deaktiviranje. (Če želite aktivirati časovnik z izbrano nastavitvijo, nastavite na možnost Activate.) ● Volume: Izberite želeno raven glasnosti. ● Antenna: izberite Air ali Cable. ● Channel: za izbiro želenega kanala. ● Repeat: Izberite Once, Everyday, Mon~Fri, Mon~Sat, Sat~Sun ali Manual. N Če je izbrana možnost Manual, s pritiskanjem gumba ► izberite želeni dan v tednu. Za želeni dan pritisnite gumb ENTERE in prikazala se bo oznaka c. N Uro, minute in kanal lahko nastavite s pritiskanjem številskih gumbov na daljinskem upravljalniku. N Samodejni izklop Če vklopite časovnik, se bo televizor izklopil, če tri ure potem, ko je časovnik vklopil televizor, ni bila pritisnjena nobena kontrola. Ta funkcija je na voljo samo, ko je vklopljen časovnik, in preprečuje pregrevanje, do katerega lahko pride, če je televizor predolgo vklopljen. Plug & Play Menu Language : English ► Time Broadcast Security General Setup BN68-03043A.indb 20 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:08Slovenščina - 21 ❑ Broadcast „ Subtitle Aktivirate in deaktivirate lahko podnapise. S tem menijem nastavite način podnapisov. Menijska možnost Normal predstavlja osnovne podnapise, Hard of hearing pa podnapise za osebe z okvaro sluha. ● Subtitle → Off / On vklop ali izklop podnapisov. ● Mode → Normal / Hard of hearing nastavitev načina podnapisov. ● Subtitle Language nastavitev jezika podnapisov. N Če program, ki ga gledate, ne podpira funkcije Hard of hearing, se samodejno vklopi način Normal, čeprav je izbran način Hard of hearing. N Če program ne omogoča izbranega jezika, je privzeti jezik angleščina. O Te možnosti lahko enostavno izberete s pritiskom gumba SUBT. na daljinskem upravljalniku. „ Digital Text → Disable / Enable (samo v VB) Ta funkcija je omogočena, če je program oddajan z digitalnim besedilom. N MHeG (Multimedia and Hypermedia Information Coding experts Group) Mednarodni standard za sisteme za kodiranje podatkov, ki se uporablja za večpredstavnost in hiperpredstavnost. Je na višjem nivoju kot sistem MPEG in vključuje hiperpredstavnost s povezanimi podatki, kot so slike, znakovne storitve, animacije, grafike in video datoteke ter večpredstavnostne podatke. MHEG je tehnologija, ki omogoča sodelovanje uporabnika med delovanjem, in se uporablja na različnih področjih, kot so vOd (video na zahtevo), ITv (interaktivna Tv), EC (elektronsko poslovanje), teleizobraževanje, telekonference, digitalne knjižnice in omrežne igre. „ Teletext Language Nastavite lahko jezik teleteksta, in sicer tako, da izberete vrsto jezika. N Če program ne omogoča izbranega jezika, je privzeti jezik angleščina. „ Preference ● Primary Audio Language / Secondary Audio Language / Primary Subtitle Language / Secondary Subtitle Language / Primary Teletext Language / Secondary Teletext Language S to funkcijo lahko uporabnik izbere enega od jezikov. Tukaj izbrani jezik je privzeti jezik, ko uporabnik izbere kanal. Če spremenite nastavitev jezika, se možnosti menija language Subtitle language, Audio language in Teletext language samodejno spremenijo v izbrani jezik. Možnosti menija language Subtitle language, Audio language in Teletext language prikazujejo seznam jezikov, ki jih podpira trenutni kanal; označen je izbor. Če spremenite to nastavitev jezika, nov izbor velja samo za trenutni kanal. S spremembo nastavitve se ne spremenijo nastavitve menija Preference: Primary Subtitle language, Primary Audio language in Primary Teletext language. „ Common Interface ● CI Menu Uporabniku omogoča, da lahko izbira iz menija, ki ga omogoča CAM. Meni splošnega vmesnika izberite glede na računalniško kartico. ● Application Info. Prikaže informacije o CAM-u, ki je vstavljen v režo za splošni vmesnik. N Informacije o aplikaciji se nanašajo na kartico splošnega vmesnika. CAM lahko namestite kadar koli, ne glede na to, ali je televizor vKlOPlJEN ali IZKlOPlJEN. 1. Modul CI CAM kupite pri najbližjem prodajalcu ali po telefonu. 2. Kartico za splošni vmesnik vstavite v CAM v smeri puščici, da se zaskoči na mestu. 3. CAM z nameščeno kartico za splošni vmesnik vstavite v režo za splošni vmesnik. (CAM vstavite v smeri puščice do konca, tako da je vzporeden z režo.) 4. Preverite, ali na kanalu z motenim signalom vidite sliko. N CAM ni podprt v nekaterih državah in regijah. Preverite pri pooblaščenem prodajalcu. BN68-03043A.indb 21 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:09Slovenščina - 22 ❑ Security Preden se prikaže nastavitveni zaslon, se prikaže zaslon za vnos kode PIN. vnesite 4-mestno kodo PIN. Privzeta koda PIN novega televizorja je 0-0-0-0. Kodo PIN lahko spremenite tako, da v meniju izberete Change PIN. „ Child Lock → Off / On Ta funkcija preprečuje gledanje neprimernega programa nepooblaščenim uporabnikom (na primer otrokom) tako, da prepreči predvajanje slike in zvoka. N Zaklenete lahko nekatere kanale na seznamu kanalov. (Oglejte si 13 stran.) N Child Lock je na voljo samo v načinu televizorja. „ Parental Lock Ta funkcija nepooblaščenim uporabnikom, na primer otrokom, preprečuje gledanje neprimernega programa, in sicer s 4- mestno kodo PIN (osebna identifikacijska številka), ki jo določi uporabnik. N element Parental Lock se razlikuje od države do države. N Ko je vklopljena funkcija starševskega nadzora Parental Lock, je prikazan znak ‘\’. N Allow All: pritisnite, da odklenete vse oznake televizorja. Block All: pritisnite, da zaklenete vse oznake televizorja. „ Change PIN Spremenite lahko osebno identifikacijsko številko, ki je potrebna za nastavitev televizorja. N Če PIN pozabite, pritisnite gumbe na daljinskem upravljalniku v naslednjem zaporedju, s čimer PIN ponastavite na 0-0-0-0: POWER (Izklop) → MUTE → 8 → 2 → 4 → POWER (vklop). ❑ General „ Game Mode → Off / On Pri povezavi z igralno konzolo, kot je PlayStation™ ali Xbox™, lahko uživate v bolj realistični izkušnji tako, da izberete meni iger. N Če želite izključiti igralno konzolo in priključiti drugo zunanjo napravo, v nastavitvenem meniju prekličite način iger. N Če meni televizorja prikažete v načinu Game Mode, se zaslon rahlo trese. N Game Mode ni na voljo v običajnem načinu TV in PC. N Če je možnost Game Mode vklopljena: – slikovni način se samodejno spremeni v Standard in uporabniki ne morejo spremeniti načina. – zvočni način se samodejno spremeni v Custom in uporabniki ne morejo spremeniti načina. Z izenačevalnikom prilagodite zvok. N Aktivira se funkcija ponastavitve zvoka. Če po nastavitvi izenačevalnika izberete funkcijo ponastavitve, se nastavitve izenečevalnika ponastavijo na tovarniške vrednosti. „ Energy Saving → Off / Low / Medium / High / Picture Off / Auto Ta funkcija prilagodi svetlost televizorja, tako da se zmanjša poraba energije. Če televizor gledate ponoči, nastavite možnost načina Energy Saving na High, da zmanjšate utrujanje oči in tudi porabo energije. Če izberete Picture Off, se izklopi slika in predvaja se samo zvok. Za izklop funkcije Picture Off pritisnite kateri koli gumb. N V meniju Tools funkcija Picture Off ni podprta. T Pritisnite gumb TOOLS, da prikažete meni Tools. Možnost varčevanja energije lahko nastavite tudi z izbiro možnosti Tools → Energy Saving. „ Melody → Off / Low / Medium / High Nastavite lahko, da se ob vklopu ali izklopu televizorja predvaja melodija. N Melodija se ne predvaja – Ko iz televizorja ne prihaja zvok, ker ste pritisnili gumb MUTE. – Ko iz televizorja ne prihaja zvok, ker ste pritisnili gumb za glasnost (–). – Ko se televizor izklopi s funkcijo izklopnega časovnika. BN68-03043A.indb 22 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:09Slovenščina - 23 VHOD / PODPORA ¦ Konfiguriranje menija Input ❑ Source List Za izbiro televizorja ali drugih zunanjih vhodnih virov, ki so povezani s televizorjem, na primer predvajalnikov dvd/Blu-ray/satelitskih sprejemnikov. Uporabite za izbiro želenega vhodnega vira. O Če si želite ogledati zunanji signalni vir, pritisnite gumb SOURCE na daljinskem upravljalniku. Način Tv lahko izberete s pritiskom gumba TV. „ TV / Ext. / AV / Component / PC / HDMI/DVI N Izberete lahko samo zunanje naprave, ki so povezane s televizorjem. Na seznamu Source List se bodo povezani vhodi označili in pomaknili na vrh. Nepovezani vhodi pa se bodo pomaknili na dno. N Možnosti Ext. in PC sta vedno aktivirani. N TOOLS (Tools): prikaz menijev Edit Name in Information. ❑ Edit Name Poimenujte napravo, ki je priključena na vhodne vtičnice, da boste lažje izbrali vhodne vire. „ VCR / DVD / Cable STB / Satellite STB / PVR STB / AV Receiver / Game / Camcorder / PC / DVI / DVI PC / TV / IPTV / Blu-ray / HD DVD / DMA N Po priklopu kabla HdMI/dvI na vrata HDMI (DVI) nastavite način HDMI/DVI na DVI ali DVI PC v možnosti Edit Name načina Input. v tem primeru je potrebna ločena avdio povezava. ¦ Konfiguriranje menija Support ❑ Self Diagnosis „ Picture Test Če menite, da imate težave s sliko, izvedite preskus slike. Oglejte si barvni vzorec na zaslonu, da preverite, ali težava še vedno obstaja. ● Yes: Če se poskusni vzorec ne prikaže ali pa je na njem šum, izberite Yes. vzrok težave je morda televizor. Za pomoč pokličite Samsungov klicni center. ● No: Če je poskusni vzorec pravilno prikazan, izberite No. vzrok težave je morda zunanja oprema. Preverite povezave. Če težave niste odpravili, si oglejte uporabniški priročnik za zunanjo napravo. „ Sound Test Če menite, da imate težave z zvokom, izvedite preskus zvoka. Zvok lahko preverite s predvajanjem vgrajene melodije prek televizorja. Na zaslonu se prikaže ‘does the problem still exist with this sound test?’. N Če iz zvočnikov televizorja ne prihaja zvok, pred izvedbo preskusa zvoka preverite, ali je možnost Speaker Select nastavljena na TV speaker v meniju zvoka. N Med preskusom se melodija predvaja tudi, če je možnost Speaker Select nastavljena na External Speaker ali če je bil zvok izklopljen s pritiskom gumba MUTE. ● Yes: Če med preskusom zvoka slišite zvok samo iz enega zvočnika ali pa ga ne slišite, izberite Yes. vzrok težave je morda televizor. Za pomoč pokličite Samsungov klicni center. ● No: če slišite zvok iz zvočnikov, izberite No. vzrok težave je morda zunanja oprema. Preverite povezave. Če težave niste odpravili, si oglejte uporabniški priročnik za zunanjo napravo. „ Signal Information (samo pri digitalnih kanalih) Za razliko od analognih kanalov, pri katerih lahko kakovost sprejetega signala sega od ‘sneženja’ do jasne slike, je kakovost sprejetih digitalnih kanalov (HdTv) popolna ali pa sploh ni slike. Zato digitalnega kanala ni mogoče fino naravnati, kot je to mogoče pri analognem. lahko pa prilagodite anteno, da izboljšate sprejem digitalnih kanalov, ki so na voljo. N Če merilnik jakosti signalov kaže, da je signal šibek, fizično prilagodite anteno, da povečate jakost signalov. Nadaljujte s prilagajanjem antene, dokler ne najdete najboljšega položaja z najmočnejšim signalom. Self Diagnosis ► Software Upgrade HD Connection Guide Contact Samsung Support Source List edit Name Input BN68-03043A.indb 23 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:09Slovenščina - 24 ❑ Software Upgrade da bi bil izdelek opremljen z najnovejšimi funkcijami digitalne televizije, so nadgradnje programske opreme redno oddajane kot del običajnega televizijskega signala. Televizor samodejno zazna take signale in prikaže obvestilo o nadgradnji programske opreme. Imate možnost namestitve nadgradnje. „ BY USB Pogon USB, na katerem je nadgradnja vdelane programske opreme, vstavite v televizor. Pazite, da med posodobitvijo ne odklopite napajanja ali odstranite pogona USB. Ko bo nadgradnja vdelane programske opreme končana, se bo televizor samodejno izklopil in znova vklopil. Po končani posodobitvi preverite različico vdelane programske opreme. Ko je programska oprema nadgrajena, se uporabniške nastavitve videa in zvoka vrnejo na privzete (tovarniške) vrednosti. Priporočamo, da si zapišete vaše nastavitve, tako da jih boste po nadgradnji brez težav ponastavili. „ BY Channel Nadgradnja programske opreme z uporabo oddajnega signala. N Če med časom prenosa programske opreme izberete to funkcijo, zaženete iskanje in prenos razpoložljive programske opreme. N Koliko časa se prenaša programska oprema, je odvisno od stanja signala. „ Standby Mode Upgrade Če želite nadaljevati nadgradnjo programske opreme z vklopljenim glavnim napajanjem, s pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼ izberite On. 45 minut po preklopu v stanje pripravljenosti se samodejno izvede ročna nadgradnja. Ker je napajanje enote vklopljeno notranje, lahko zaslon izdelka lCd rahlo sveti. Ta pojav lahko traja več kot 1 uro, dokler se nadgradnja programske opreme ne dokonča. „ Alternative Software Prikaz informacij o različici programske opreme. ❑ HD Connection Guide Ta meni predstavlja način povezave za optimalno kakovost televizorja visoke ločljivosti. Te informacije si oglejte, če na televizor povezujete zunanje naprave. ❑ Contact Samsung Te informacije si oglejte, če televizor ne deluje pravilno ali če želite nadgraditi programsko opremo. Ogledate si lahko informacije o klicnih centrih, izdelku in načinu prenosa datoteke s programsko opremo. Hrbtna plošča televizorja Pogon USB BN68-03043A.indb 24 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:09Slovenščina - 25 PRIPOROČILA ZA UPORABO ¦ Funkcija teleteksta večina televizijskih postaj nudi informacije v pisni obliki prek teleteksta. Na začetni stran teleteksta boste dobili informacije o tem, kako uporabljati storitev. Poleg tega lahko z gumbi na daljinskem upravljalniku izbirate različne možnosti, ki bodo zadovoljile vaše potrebe. N Za pravilen prikaz informacij teleteksta mora biti sprejem kanala stabilen. Sicer lahko manjkajo informacije ali pa nekatere strani ne morejo biti prikazane. N Strani teleteksta lahko spremenite s pritiskom številskih gumbov na daljinskem upravljalniku. 1 0(način) Pritisnite za izbiro načina teleteksta (lIST/FlOF). Če ga pritisnete v načinu lIST, bo preklopil v način list save. v načinu list save lahko z gumbom 8 (shrani) shranite stran teleteksta na seznam. 2 5(razkrij) Uporabite za prikaz skritega besedila (na primer odgovori na vprašanja iz kviza). Za prikaz običajnega zaslona pritisnite znova. 3 4(velikost) Pritisnite za prikaz črk dvojne velikosti na zgornji polovici zaslona. za spodnjo polovico zaslona pritisnite znova. za prikaz običajnega zaslona pritisnite še enkrat. 4 8(shrani) Uporabite za shranjevanje strani teleteksta. 5 Barvni gumbi (rdeči/zeleni/rumeni/ modri) Če televizijska postaja uporablja sistem FASTEXT, so različne teme na strani teleteksta označene z različnimi barvami, izberete pa jih lahko s pritiskom na barvne gumbe. Pritisnite enega od njih, odvisno od vaših želja. Prikaže se stran z ostalimi obarvanimi informacijami, ki jih lahko izberete na isti način. Za prikaz prejšnje ali naslednje strani pritisnite ustrezni barvni gumb. 6/(teletekst vklopljen/mešano) Ko ste izbrali kanal, ki omogoča storitev teleteksta, pritisnite ta gumb, da aktivirate teletekst. Pritisnite dvakrat, da teletekst prekrijete s trenutno sliko. 7 :(izhod) Izhod iz prikaza teleteksta. 8 1(podstran) Za prikaz podstrani, ki je na voljo. 9 2(stran gor) Za prikaz naslednje strani teleteksta. 0 3(stran dol) Za prikaz prejšnje strani teleteksta. ! 9(zadrži) Uporabite, da zadržite prikazano stran, če je izbrana stran povezana z več drugimi stranmi, ki sledijo samodejno. Za nadaljevanje gumb znova pritisnite. @ 6(kazalo) Za prikaz strani s kazalom kadar koli, ko gledate teletekst. # 7(prekliči) Za prikaz oddaje med iskanjem strani. Strani teleteksta so organizirane v šestih kategorijah: Del Vsebina A Številka izbrane strani. B Identiteta televizijskega kanala. C Številka trenutne strani ali indikatorji iskanja. D datum in čas. E Besedilo. F Informacije o stanju. Informacije FASTeXT. 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 0 ! # @ 7 BN68-03043A.indb 25 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:10Slovenščina - 26 N Informacije teleteksta so pogosto razdeljene na več zaporednih strani, do katerih imate dostop z: – vnosom številke strani – Izbiro naslova na seznamu – Izbiro obarvanega naslova (sistem FASTeXT) N Televizor podira različico teleteksta 2.5, v kateri je mogoče prikazati dodatne grafike ali besedilo. N Teletekst je lahko prikazan s praznimi deli strani, odvisno od prenosa. N v teh primerih dodatne grafike ali besedilo ni oddajano. N Starejši televizorji, ki ne podpirajo različice 2.5, ne morejo prikazati dodatnih grafik ali besedila, ne glede na to, ali se le-to oddaja. O Pritisnite gumb TV za izhod iz teleteksta. N Pri teletekstu z razmerjem stranic 16:9 je prikazana slika z razmerjem stranic 16:9 ¦ Nastavitev stojala (samo 19-palčni model) 1. Položite televizor s sprednjim delom na mehko tkanino ali blazino na mizi, kot je prikazano na sliki 1. – Spodnji del televizorja poravnajte z robom mize. 2. Pritisnite na sredino hrbtnega dela televizorja. Nastavite stojalo, kot je prikazano na sliki 2, medtem ko držite pritisnjen gumb na hrbtnem delu stojala. 3. Televizor pokonci in varno postavite na mizo. ¦ Nastavitev kota televizorja (samo 19-palčni model) N Nastavite stojalo s pritiskanjem gumba na njegovi hrbtni strani. 1. Slika 1 prikazuje kot nastavitve (-2°–14°) pri uporabi lCd-ja na stojalu. N S prekomernim nagibanjem lahko televizor lCd prevrnete in ga tako poškodujete. 2. Slika 2 prikazuje kot nastavitve (14°–80°) pri spreminjanju stojala lCd-ja v stenski nosilec. 3. Slika 3 prikazuje kot nastavitve (0°–10°) pri namestitvi televizorja lCd na steno. N Ko kot spremenite iz 1 v 2 ali iz 3 v 2, zaslišite klik. 1 2 1 Nastavitev kota, če televizor uporabljate na stojalu. 2 Nastavitev kota, če stojalo spremenite v stenski nosilec (1→3, 3→1) 3 Nastavitev kota, če je televizor LCD pritrjen na steno BN68-03043A.indb 26 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:10Slovenščina - 27 ¦ Namestitev naprav, skladnih s standardom VESA (samo 19-palčni model) 1. Postavite navzdol obrnjen televizor na mehko blago ali blazino na mizi. 2. Nastavite stojalo s pritiskanjem gumba na njegovi hrbtni strani. 3. Poravnajte pritrjevalno podlogo (ni priložena) z odprtinami na spodnjem delu stojala in ga pritrdite s štirimi vijaki, priloženimi podstavku v obliki roke, obešalu za pritrditev na steno ali drugim podstavkom (niso priloženi). ¦ Uporaba okrasnih pokrovov (samo 19-palčni model) 1. Če televizor namestite na steno, ne da bi uporabili stojalo, v odprtine vstavite okrasne pokrove, kot je prikazano na sliki 1. 2. vstavljene okrasne pokrove pritrdite s 4 vijaki, kot je prikazano na sliki 2. 1 2 Gumb Pritrjevalna podloga (naprodaj posebej) 1 2 BN68-03043A.indb 27 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:11Slovenščina - 28 ¦ Namestitev stojala 1. Pritrdite televizor lCd na stojalo. N Televizor naj nosita vsaj dve osebi. N Pri sestavljanju bodite pozorni na sprednji in hrbtni del stojala. N da bo televizor nameščen na stojalo na ustrezni višini, ne pritiskajte preveč na zgornjo levo ali desno stran televizorja. 2. Privijte dva vijaka v položaj 1 in nato še dva vijaka v položaj 2. N Izdelek postavite pokonci in privijte vijake. Če vijake privijete na ležečem televizorju lCd, se le-ta lahko nagne v eno stran. ¦ Namestitev kompleta za pritrditev na steno Z elementi za pritrditev na steno (naprodaj posebej) lahko televizor pritrdite na steno. Za podrobne informacije o pritrditvi na steno si oglejte navodila, ki so priložena elementom za pritrditev na steno. Če nameščate nosilec za pritrditev na steno, se za pomoč obrnite na tehnika. Samsung Electronics ne odgovarja za poškodovanje izdelka ali telesne poškodbe, če se odločite, da boste sami namestiti televizor. Kompleta za pritrditev na steno ne nameščajte, ko je televizor vklopljen. To lahko povzroči telesne poškodbe zaradi električnega šoka. ¦ Uporaba ključavnice Kensington proti kraji Ključavnica Kensington je naprava, ki se uporablja za fizično pritrditev sistema, ko se ta uporablja na javnem mestu. videz in način zaklepanja se lahko razlikujeta od slike, odvisno od proizvajalca. Za pravilno uporabo si oglejte priročnik, ki je priložen ključavnici Kensington. N Poiščite ikono “K” na hrbtni strani televizorja. reža Kensington je poleg ikone “K”. Izdelek zaklenete po naslednjem postopku: 1. Kabel ključavnice Kensington ovijte okoli velikega, nepremičnega predmeta, kot je miza ali stol. 2. Konec kabla, na katerem je zaklep, potisnite skozi zančni konec kabla ključavnice Kensington. 3. vstavite napravo za zaklepanje v režo Kensington na izdelku (1). 4. Zaklenite zaklep. N To so splošna navodila. Za natančna navodila so oglejte uporabniški priročnik, priložen napravi za zaklepanje. N Napravo za zaklep je treba kupiti posebej. N Mesto namestitve ključavnice Kensington je odvisno od modela. 1 BN68-03043A.indb 28 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:12Slovenščina - 29 ¦ Zaščita prostora za namestitev Izdelek mora biti na zahtevani oddaljenosti od ostalih predmetov (npr. sten), da zagotovite ustrezno prezračevanje. Sicer lahko pride do požara ali težave z izdelkom zaradi povišanja notranje temperature izdelka. Izdelek namestite na zahtevani oddaljenosti, ki je navedena na sliki. N Če želite uporabiti stojalo ali opremo za pritrditev na steno, uporabite samo dele, ki jih nudi podjetje Samsung Electronics. Ҟ Čer uporabite dele drugih proizvajalcev, lahko pride do težav z izdelkom ali do telesne poškodbe zaradi padca izdelka. Ҟ Če uporabite dele drugih proizvajalcev, lahko pride do težav z izdelkom ali do požara zaradi povišanja notranje temperature izdelka, ki je posledica slabega prezračevanja. N videz se lahko razlikuje glede na izdelek. Namestitev izdelka s stojalom Namestitev izdelka z opremo za pritrditev na steno 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm ¦ Pritrditev televizorja na steno Pozor: Televizorja ni dovoljeno vleči, potiskati ali nanj plezati, saj lahko pade. Posebno bodite pozorni na to, da se na televizor ne nagibajo ali ga premikajo otroci, saj se lahko prevrne, kar lahko povzroči težje poškodbe ali smrt. Upoštevajte varnostne ukrepe, navedene na priloženem letaku z varnostnimi ukrepi. da zagotovite več stabilnosti, namestite varnostni pripomoček za preprečevanje padcev, kot je opisano v nadaljevanju. „ Da preprečite padec televizorja: 1. Namestite vijaka v objemki in ju trdno privijte na steno. Preverite, ali sta vijaka trdno privita na steno. N Morda boste potrebovali dodaten material, kot je sidrni vložek, odvisno od vrste stene. N Ker vijaka, objemki in vrvica, ki so potrebni za to, niso priloženi, jih kupite posebej. 2. Odstranite vijaka iz osrednjega dela hrbtne strani televizorja, namestite ju v objemki in privijte nazaj na televizor. N vijaka morda nista priložena izdelku. v tem primeru kupite vijaka z naslednjimi specifikacijami. N Specifikacije vijakov – For a 17 ~ 29 Inch lCd Tv: M4 X l15 – For a 32 ~ 40 Inch lCd Tv: M6 X l15 3. Objemki, nameščeni na televizorju, in objemki, pritrjeni na steno, povežite z močno vrvico in jo zavežite. N Televizor namestite blizu stene, tako da ne more pasti nazaj. N vrvico je varno privezati tako, da sta objemki na steni v višini objemk na televizorju ali nižje. N Preden televizor premaknete, odvežite vrvico. 4. Preverite, ali so vsi spoji trdni. redno preverjajte, ali so spoji poškodovani. Če niste prepričani o varni namestitvi, se obrnite na strokovnjaka za namestitev. Stena Stena BN68-03043A.indb 29 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:12Slovenščina - 30 ¦ Odpravljanje težav Če imate vprašanja glede televizorja, si najprej oglejte ta seznam. Če noben od nasvetov za odpravljanje težav ni ustrezen, obiščite spletno mesto ‘www.samsung.com’ in nato kliknite Support ali pa pokličite klicni center, ki je na seznamu na zadnji strani. Težava Rešitev Kakovost slike Najprej izvedite Picture Test, da preverite, ali televizor pravilno prikazuje preskusno sliko. ● Pojdite na MENU - Support - Self Diagnosis - Picture test Če je preskusna slika pravilno prikazana, je slika morda slabe kakovosti zaradi vira ali signala. Televizijska slika ni videti tako dobro kot v trgovini. ● Če imate analogni kabelski/običajni sprejemnik, nadgradite na sprejemnik. Za sliko visoke ločljivosti uporabite kabel HdMI ali komponentni kabel. ● Naročnik na kabelsko/satelitsko televizijo: Poskusite s postajami visoke ločljivosti (Hd (High definition)) od kanala navzgor. ● Povezava antene: Izvedite samodejni program in nato poskusite s postajami visoke ločljivosti. N Številni kanali visoke ločljivosti prikazujejo izboljšano vsebino standardne ločljivosti. ● Prilagodite ločljivost video izhoda kabelskega/običajnega sprejemnika na 1080i ali 720p. ● Prepričajte se, da televizijo gledate vsaj z minimalne razdalje, priporočene glede velikosti in ločljivosti prikazanega signala. Slika je popačena: veliki bloki, majhni bloki, slikovne pike ● Pri stiskanju video vsebine lahko pride so popačenja slike, še posebej pri gibljivih slikah, kot so pri športu ali akcijskih filmih. ● Slika je lahko popačena zaradi nizke stopnje signala ali slabe kakovosti. Ne gre za okvaro televizorja. ● Mobilni telefoni, uporabljeni v bližini analognega ali digitalnega televizorja (do pribl. 1 m), lahko povzročijo šume na sliki. Ko je povezana komponenta, je barva napačna ali pa je ni. ● Preverite, ali so komponentni kabli priključeni na ustrezne vtičnice. Nepravilna ali slaba povezava povezava lahko povzroči težave z barvami ali prazen zaslon. Blede barve ali šibka svetlost. ● v meniju televizorja prilagodite možnosti Picture. (način Picture, Color, Brightness, Sharpness) ● Prilagodite možnost Energy Saving v meniju Setup. ● Poskusite s ponastavitvijo slike, da si ogledate privzeto nastavitev slike. (Pojdite na MENU - Picture - Picture Reset.) Na robu zaslona je pikčasta črta. ● Če je velikost slike nastavljena na Screen Fit, jo spremenite na 16:9. ● Spremenite ločljivost kabelskega/običajnega sprejemnika. Samo pri vhodnem signalu AV (kompozitnem) je slika črno-bela. ● Povežite video kabel (rumeni) na zelena vrata komponentnega vhoda 1 na televizorju. Slika zmrzne ali je popačena pri preklapljanju kanalov ali pa je zakasnjena. ● Če je priključen kabelski sprejemnik, ga ponastavite. (Znova povežite kabel za izmenični tok in počakajte, da se kabelski sprejemnik znova zažene. To lahko traja do 20 minut.) ● Nastavite ločljivost izhoda kabelskega sprejemnika na 1080i ali 720p. Kakovost zvoka Najprej izvedite Sound Test, da preverite, ali zvok televizorja pravilno deluje. ● Pojdite na MENU - Support - Self Diagnosis - Sound Test Če je zvok v redu, težavo z zvokom morda povzroča vir ali signal. Ni zvoka ali zvok je pri največji glasnosti pretih. ● Preverite glasnost zunanje naprave, ki je povezana na televizor, nato ustrezno prilagodite glasnost televizorja. Slika je dobra, vendar ni zvoka. ● v meniju zvoka nastavite možnost Speaker Select na TV speaker. ● Prepričajte se, da so avdio kabli zunanje naprave priključeni na ustrezne avdio vtičnice na televizorju. ● Preverite možnost avdio izhoda povezane naprave. (Npr.: če imate na televizor priključen HdMI, je potrebno možnost zvoka kabelskega sprejemnika spremeniti na HdMI.) ● Če uporabljate kabel za povezavo vrat dvI in HdMI, potrebujete ločeni avdio kabel. ● Če je glasnost višja od vrednosti 30, izklopite funkcijo SrS. ● Izključite vtič iz vtičnice za slušalke. (Če je ta na televizorju.) Iz zvočnika prihaja hrup. ● Preverite, ali so kabli ustrezno povezani. Preverite, ali je video kabel priključen na avdio vhod. ● Pri povezavi antene/kabelske televizije preverite moč signala. Zaradi nizke stopnje signala je lahko popačen zvok. BN68-03043A.indb 30 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:13Slovenščina - 31 Težava Rešitev Ni slike, ni videa Televizorja ni mogoče vklopiti. ● Poskrbite, da je napajalni kabel za izmenični tok trdno priključen na stensko vtičnico in televizor. ● Preverite, ali stenska vtičnica deluje. ● Pritisnite gumb POWER na televizorju, da preverite, ali daljinski upravljalnik deluje pravilno. Če se televizor vklopi, je morda razlog daljinski upravljalnik. Za odpravo težave z daljinskim upravljalnikom si oglejte spodnji razdelek ‘daljinski upravljalnik ne deluje’. Televizor se samodejno izklopi. ● Preverite, ali je možnost Sleep Timer nastavljena na On v meniju Setup. ● Če je televizija povezana z računalnikom, preverite nastavitve napajanja v računalniku. ● Poskrbite, da je napajalni kabel za izmenični tok trdno priključen na stensko vtičnico in televizor. ● Če pri povezavi antene/kabelske televizije 10–15 minut ni signala, se televizor izklopi. Ni slike/videa. ● Preverite povezavo kablov (izključite in znova priključite vse kable televizorja in zunanjih naprav.) ● Nastavite video izhod zunanje naprave (kabelskega/običajnega sprejemnika, predvajalnika dvd, Blu-ray itd.) tako, da ustreza povezavam vhoda televizorja. Na primer: izhod zunanje naprave: HdMI, izhod televizorja: HdMI. ● Preverite, ali se povezana naprava napaja. ● S pritiskom gumba SOURCE na daljinskem upravljalniku izberite ustrezen vir televizorja. Povezava rF (kabelska televizija/antena) Sprejem vseh signalov ni mogoč. ● Poskrbite, da je kabel antene ustrezno priključen. ● Poskusite z uporabo funkcije Plug & Play, da dodate razpoložljive kanale na seznam kanalov. Pojdite na MENU - Setup - Plug & Play in počakajte, da se shranijo vsi razpoložljivi kanali. ● Preverite, ali je antena ustrezno postavljena. Slika je popačena: veliki bloki, majhni bloki, slikovne pike ● Pri stiskanju video vsebine lahko pride so popačenja slike, še posebej pri gibljivih slikah, kot so pri športu ali akcijskih filmih. ● Zaradi nizke stopnje signala je lahko popačena slika. Ne gre za okvaro televizorja. Povezava računalnika Sporočilo ‘Način ni podprt’. ● Nastavite ločljivost in frekvenco izhoda računalnika tako, da ustrezata ločljivostim, ki jih podpira televizor. računalnik je ves čas prikazan na seznamu virov, tudi če ni povezan. ● To je normalno, računalnik je prikazan na seznamu virov, tudi če ni povezan. Pri povezavi HdMI je video v redu, vendar ni zvoka. ● Preverite nastavitev avdio izhoda v računalniku. BN68-03043A.indb 31 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:13Slovenščina - 32 Težava Rešitev Drugo Slika ni prikazana celozaslonsko. ● Na kanalih visoke ločljivosti je pri prikazu izboljšane vsebine standardne ločljivosti (4:3) na obeh straneh zaslona črna obroba. ● Pri filmih z drugačnim razmerjem stranic slike, kot je razmerje na televizorju, je nad sliko in pod njo prikazana črna obroba. ● Prilagodite možnost velikosti slike na zunanji napravi ali televizorju na celozaslonsko. daljinski upravljalnik ne deluje. ● Znova namestite bateriji v daljinski upravljalnik tako, da je polariteta (+ -) pravilna. ● Očistite oddajno okno na zgornjem delu daljinskega upravljalnika. ● Poskusite z usmeritvijo daljinskega upravljalnika neposredno v televizor na oddaljenosti 1,5–1,8 metra. Z daljinskim upravljalnikom kabelskega/običajnega sprejemnika ne morem upravljati napajanja ali glasnosti televizorja. ● daljinski upravljalnik kabelskega/običajnega sprejemnika Tv programirajte tako, da bo z njim mogoče upravljati televizor. v uporabniškem priročniku kabelskega/satelitskega sprejemnika poiščite kodo televizorja SAMSUNG. Sporočilo ‘Način ni podprt’. ● Preverite, katere ločljivosti podpira televizor, in ustrezno prilagodite ločljivost izhoda zunanje naprave. v tem priročniku si preberite o nastavitvah ločljivosti. Televizor oddaja vonj po plastiki. ● Ta vonj je normalen in bo sčasoma izginil. Možnost televizorja Signal Information ni na voljo v meniju preskusa samodiagnostike. ● Ta funkcija je na voljo samo pri digitalnih kanalih s povezavo antene (rF/koaksialni kabel). Televizor je nagnjen desno ali levo. ● Odstranite spodnji del stojala s televizorja in ga znova sestavite. Spodnjega dela stojala ni mogoče sestaviti. ● Zagotovite, da je televizor na ravni površini. Če ne uspete odstraniti vijakov s televizorja, uporabite magnetizirani izvijač. Meni kanalov je siv (ni na voljo). ● Meni Channel je na voljo samo, če je izbran vir televizorja. Nastavitve se izbrišejo po 30 minutah ali ob vsakem izklopu televizorja. ● Če je televizor v načinu Store Demo, se bodo nastavitve zvoka in slike ponastavile vsakih 30 minut. Način Store Demo preklopite v način Home Use v postopku Plug & Play. S pritiskanjem gumba SOURCE izberite način TV, nato pojdite na MENU → Setup → Plug & Play → ENTERE. Ponavljajoča se izguba avdio ali video signala. ● Preverite, ali so kabli ustrezno povezani, in jih znova povežite. ● razlog so lahko premalo upogljivi ali predebeli kabli. Zagotovite, da so kabli dovolj upogljivi za dolgotrajno uporabo. Pri stenski namestitvi priporočamo uporabo kablov z 90-stopinjskimi priključki. Če od blizu pogledate rob okvirja televizijskega zaslona, boste morda videli delce. ● To je del zasnove izdelka in ni napaka. Pri uporabi kartice CAM-a za splošni vmesnik je prikazano ‘Kodiran signal’ ali ‘Šibek signal ali ni signala’. ● Preverite, ali je v reži CAM-a za splošni vmesnik nameščena kartica za splošni vmesnik. ● Izvlecite CAM iz televizorja in ga znova vstavite v režo. Televizor se 45 minut po izklopu znova vklopi. ● To je normalno. Televizor sam upravlja funkcijo OTA (Over The Air), da nadgradi vgrajeno programsko opremo, ki se je prenesla med gledanjem. Ponavljajoča se težava s sliko/ zvokom. ● Preverite in spremenite signal/vir. N Ta plošča TFT lCd uporablja ploščo, ki je sestavljena iz osnovnih slikovnih pik, za izdelavo katerih je potrebna posebna tehnologija. Kljub temu je lahko na zaslonu nekaj svetlih ali temnih slikovnih pik. Te svetlobne pike ne bodo vplivale na delovanje izdelka. BN68-03043A.indb 32 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:13Slovenščina - 33 ¦ Specifikacije Ime modela LE19C430, LE19C431 LE22C430, LE22C431 Velikost zaslona (diagonala) 19 palcev 22 palcev Ločljivost računalnika (optimalno) 1360 x 768 pri 60Hz 1360 x 768 pri 60Hz Zvok (izhod) 3 W X 2 3 W X 2 Dimenzije (ŠxGxV) Osrednji del S stojalom 477 x 65 x 327 mm 477 x 180 x 362 mm 558 x 75 x 384 mm 558 x 216 x 426 mm Teža S stojalom 5 kg 7 kg Okoljski vidiki Delovna temperatura delovna vlažnost Temperatura shranjevanja vlažnost pri shranjevanju 10 °C do 40 °C (50 °F do 104 °F) 10 % do 80 %, brez kondenzacije -20 °C do 45 °C (-4 °F do 113 °F) 5 % do 95 %, brez kondenzacije Vrtenje stojala levo/desno 0˚ N Zasnovo in specifikacije lahko spremenimo brez obvestila. N Naprava je digitalni aparat razreda B. N Za napajanje in porabo energije si oglejte nalepko na izdelku. BN68-03043A.indb 33 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:13Bu Kullanıcı Kılavuzundaki şekiller ve resimler yalnızca referans amaçlı verilmiştir ve gerçek ürünün görünümünden farklı olabilir. Ürün tasarımı ve belirtimleri herhangi bir bildirim yapılmaksızın değiştirilebilir. ❑ License TruSurround HD, SrS and symbol are trademarks of SrS labs, Inc. TruSurround HD technology is incorporated under license from SrS labs, Inc. Manufactured under license from dolby laboratories. dolby and the double-d symbol are trademarks of Dolby laboratories. ❑ Dijital TV Uyarılar 1. digital Tv(dvB) ile ilgili olan işlevler, yalnız dvB-T (MPEG2 ve MPEG4 AvC) dijital yer üstü sinyallerinin yayınlandığı ya da uyumlu bir dvB-C(MPEG2 ve MPEG4 AAC) kablolu Tv servisine erişiminizin olduğu ülkelerde/alanlarda kullanılabilir. lütfen bölgenizdeki dvB-T ya da dvB-C sinyallerinin alınma olasılığı hakkında yerel bayiniz ile görüşünüz. 2. dvB-T; dijital yer üstü televizyonların yayını için bir dvB Avrupa Birliği standardıdır ve dvB-C ise, kablolu dijital Tv'lerin yayını içindir Ancak, EPG (Elektrikli Program Kılavuzu), vOd (Talep üzerine video) ve diğerleri gibi bazı ayrıştırılmış özellikler, bu spesifikasyona dahil edilmemiştir. Bu nedenle, şu anda desteklenmemektedirler. 3. Bu Tv seti [Ağustos, 2008] itibarıyla geçerli dvB-T ve dvB-C standartlarını karşılasa bile, gelecekteki dvB-T dijital karasal yayın ve dvB-C dijital kablo yayınları ile uyumluluğu garanti edilemez. 4. Bu Tv setinin kullanıldığı ülkelere bağlı olarak bazı kablolu Tv sağlayıcıları, bu tür bir hizmet için ek ödeme talep edebilirler ve onların koşullarına ve durumlarına uymanız gerekebilir. 5. Bazı dijital Tv fonksiyonları, bazı ülkelerde ya da bölgelerde kullanımda olmayabilir ve dvB-C, kablolu hizmet sağlayıcılarından bazıları ile doğru şekilde çalışmayabilir. 6. daha fazla bilgi için lütfen yerel SAMSUNG müşteri hizmetleri merkeziniz ile iletişim kurun. ❑ Sabit Görüntünün Gösterilmesiyle ilgili Önlemler Sabit görüntü Tv ekranında kalıcı hasara neden olabilir ● Ekranda görüntü takılmasına neden olabileceğinden lCd panelde tamamı veya bir bölümü sabit bir görüntüyü 2 saatten fazla tutmayın. Bu görüntü takılmasına "ekran yanması" da denir. Bu tür bir görüntü takılmasını önlemek için hareketsiz bir görüntü ekrandayken parlaklık ve kontrast değerlerini düşük bir seviyeye ayarlayın. ● lCd televizyonu uzun süre 4:3 formatında izlemek, farklı ışık emisyonundan dolayı ekranın solunda, sağında ve ortasında çizgi şeklinde izler bırakabilir. dvd ya da oyun konsolunu oynatmak da ekranda benzer etkiye yol açabilir. Yukarıdaki etkinin neden olduğu hasarlar Garanti kapsamında değildir. ● video oyunlarından ve bilgisayardan uzun süre durağan resimlerin görüntülenmesi kısmi görüntü izi oluşturabilir. Bu etkiyi önlemek için, durağan görüntüleri görüntülerken 'parlaklık' ve 'kontrast' derecelerini azaltın. © 2010 Samsung Electronics Co., ltd. Tüm hakları saklıdır. BN68-03043A.indb 1 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:14Türkçe - 1 ❑ Sembol N O T Not Tek Basmalı düğme TOOlS düğmesi Basın GENEL BİLGİ ■ Kontrol Paneline Bakış .........................................................2 ■ Aksesuarlar...........................................................................3 ■ Bağlantı Paneline Bakış .......................................................4 ■ Uzaktan Kumanda................................................................6 ■ Uzaktan Kumandaya Pil Takma............................................6 ÇALIŞTIRMA ■ Menülere bakış.....................................................................7 ■ Televizyonunuzun Bekleme Moduna Alınması .....................8 ■ Plug & Play Özelliği ..............................................................8 ■ Monitöre Bakış......................................................................9 KANAL KONTROLÜ ■ Kanal Menüsünü Yapılandırma ............................................9 ■ Kanalları Yönetme .............................................................12 RESİM KONTROLÜ ■ resim Menüsünü Yapılandırma .........................................14 ■ Tv'nizi Bilgisayar (PC) Ekranı Olarak Kullanma.................16 ■ Tv'nizin PC'nizle Ayarlanması............................................17 SES KONTROLÜ ■ Ses Menüsünü Yapılandırma .............................................18 ■ Ses Modunun Seçilmesi.....................................................19 KURULUM ■ Kurulum Menüsünün Yapılandırılması................................20 GİRİŞ / DESTEK ■ Giriş Menüsünü Yapılandırma ............................................23 ■ destek Menüsünü Yapılandırma ........................................23 KULLANIM ÖNERİLERİ ■ Teletekst Özelliği.................................................................25 ■ Standın Ayarlanması (yalnızca 19 inç modeli)....................26 ■ Tv Açısının Ayarlanması (yalnızca 19 inç modeli)..............26 ■ vESA Uyumlu Montaj Araçlarının Takılması (yalnızca 19 inç modeli)......................................................27 ■ dekoratif Kapakları Kullanma (yalnızca 19 inç modeli)......27 ■ Standı Takma......................................................................28 ■ duvara Montaj Kitinin Takılması .........................................28 ■ Hırsıza Karşı Kensington Kilidini Kullanma ........................28 ■ Kurulum Alanının Sabitlenmesi ..........................................29 ■ Tv'yi duvara Sabitleme ......................................................29 ■ Sorun Giderme ...................................................................30 ■ Teknik Özellikler..................................................................33 İÇINDEKILER Türkçe BN68-03043A.indb 1 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:14Türkçe - 2 GENEL BİLGİ ¦ Kontrol Paneline Bakış N Ürünün rengi ve şekli, modele bağlı olarak farklılık gösterebilir. N düğmeleri yan panel düğmelerine basarak kullanabilirsiniz. 4 1 2 3 5 6 8 8 7 1 SOURCE E: Mevcut tüm giriş kaynakları arasında geçiş yapar. Ekran menüsünde, bu düğmeyi uzaktan kumanda üzerindeki ENTERE düğmesini kullandığınız gibi kullanın. 2 MENU: Tv'nizin özellikler ekran menüsünü görmek için basın. 3Y : Ses seviyesini artırmak veya azaltmak için basın. Ekran menüsünde, uzaktan kumandada ◄ ve ► düğmelerini kullandığınız gibi Y düğmelerini kullanın. 4ZZ: Kanalları değiştirmek için basın. Ekran menüsünde, uzaktan kumandada ▼ ve ▲ düğmelerini kullandığınız gibi düğmelerini kullanın. 5 P (GÜÇ): Tv'yi açıp kapatmak için basın. 6 UZAKTAN KUMANDA SENSÖRÜ: Uzaktan kumandayı Tv üzerinde bu noktaya doğru tutun. 7 GÜÇ GÖSTERGESİ: Güç açıkken yanıp söner ve kapanır; bekleme modunda sürekli yanar. 8 HOPARLÖRLER BN68-03043A.indb 2 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:15Türkçe - 3 ¦ Aksesuarlar Uzaktan Kumanda ve Piller (AAA x 2) Güç Kablosu Kapak-Alt (yalnızca 22 inç modeli) Temizleme Bezi (M4 X l16) duvar Montaj kiti (yalnızca 19 inç modeli) Decoration Cover (yalnızca 19 inç modeli) Stand Screw X 4 (yalnızca 22 inç modeli) ● Kullanıcı Talimatları ● Garanti kartı ● Güvenlik Kılavuzu N lCd Tv'nizle birlikte aşağıdaki öğelerin verildiğinden emin olun. Öğelerden herhangi biri eksikse bayinizle görüşün. N Garanti kartı / Güvenlik Kılavuzu (Her yerde yoktur) N Öğelerin rengi ve şekli, modele bağlı olarak farklılık gösterebilir. BN68-03043A.indb 3 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:16Türkçe - 4 6 7 1 2 3 4 0 9 8 5 ¦ Bağlantı Paneline Bakış N Ürünün rengi ve şekli, modele bağlı olarak farklılık gösterebilir. N Tv'nize harici bir cihaz bağladığınızda, birimdeki gücün kapatıldığından emin olun. N Harici bir cihaza bağlarken, bağlantı terminalinin rengiyle kablonun rengini eşleştirin. 1 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) – Ev sineması alıcısı gibi bir dijital Ses bileşenine bağlanır. N HdMI IN jakları bağlıyken Tv'deki DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) jakı yalnızca 2 kanallı ses çıkışı verir. 5.1 kanal ses duymak istiyorsanız, dvd/Blu-ray oynatıcısı veya Kablo/Uydu Kutusundaki Optik jakı doğrudan Amplifikatör veya Ev Sinemasına bağlayın, Tv'ye bağlamayın. 2 SERVICE – Yazılım yükseltmeleri için konektör. 3 HDMI / PC IN [HDMI (DVI), AUDIO, PC] – HdMI çıkışlı bir cihazın HdMI jakına bağlanır. N HdMI - HdMI bağlantıları için ek Ses bağlantısı gerekmez. N HdMI nedir? HdMI(Yüksek Tanımlı Multimedya Arayüzü), dijital ses ve video sinyallerinin tek bir kablo kullanılarak iletilmesini sağlayan bir arayüzdür. HdMI ve dvI arasındaki fark, HdMI cihazının daha küçük olması, HdCP (High Bandwidth digital Copy Protection – Yüksek Bant Genişliği dijital Kopyalama Koruma) kodlama özelliğinin yüklü olması ve çok kanallı dijital sesi desteklemesidir. N Harici bir cihaza dvI bağlantısı yapmak için HDMI / PC IN [HDMI (DVI)] jakını kullanın. video bağlantısı için bir dvI - HdMI kablosu ya da dvI - HdMI adaptörü kullanın, ses için ise HDMI / PC IN [AUDIO] jakları kullanın. HdMI / dvI kablo bağlantısı kullanırken HDMI / PC IN [HDMI(DVI)] jakını kullanmalısınız. HDMI / PC IN [AUDIO] – PC’nizin üzerindeki ses çıkış jakına bağlayın. – Harici cihazlar için dvI ses çıkışları. HDMI / PC IN [PC] – PC’nizin üzerindeki video çıkış jakına bağlayın. N PC’niz bir HdMI bağlantısını destekliyorsa, bunu HDMI / PC IN [HDMI (DVI)] terminaline bağlayabilirsiniz. N PC’niz bir dvI bağlantısını destekliyorsa, bunu HDMI / PC IN [HDMI (DVI)] / [AUDIO] terminaline bağlayabilirsiniz. 4 AV IN [VIDEO] / [R-AUDIO-L] – rCA kablosunu vCr, dvd ya da Kamera gibi uygun bir harici cihaza bağlayın. – rCA ses kablolarını cihazınızın [R-AUDIO-L] girişlerine takın ve kabloların diğer uçlarını A/v cihazınızın karşılık gelen ses çıkış konektörlerine takın. [TV Arka Paneli] Güç Girişi BN68-03043A.indb 4 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:16Türkçe - 5 5 ANT IN – Bir antene ya da kablolu Tv sistemine bağlanır. 6 COMMON INTERFACE Yuvası – Bazı kanallara 'CI KArTI' yerleştirilmediğinde, ekranda 'Karışmış Sinyal' görüntülenir. – Bir telefon numarası, CI KArT Kimliği, Ana Makine Kimliği ve diğer bilgileri içeren eşleştirme bilgileri yaklaşık 2~3 dakika içinde görüntülenecektir. Bir hata iletisi görüntülenirse, lütfen hizmet sağlayıcınızla görüşün. – Kanal bilgileri yapılandırması tamamlandığında, kanal listesinin artık güncellendiğini belirten 'Güncelleme Tamamlandı' mesajı görüntülenir. N Yerel bir kablo hizmet sağlayıcısından bir CI KArTI edinmeniz gerekir. CI KArTI'nı düşürürseniz zarar görebileceğinden elinizle dikkatlice çıkarın. N CI-Kartı'nı, üzerinde belirtilen yönde yerleştirin. N COMMON INTERFACE Yuvasının yeri, modeline bağlı olarak farklılık gösterebilir. N CAM bazı ülkelerde ve bölgelerde desteklenmez, yetkili satıcınızla görüşün. 4 AV IN [VIDEO] / [R-AUDIO-L] – rCA kablosunu vCr, dvd ya da Kamera gibi uygun bir harici cihaza bağlayın. – rCA ses kablolarını cihazınızın [R-AUDIO-L] girişlerine takın ve kabloların diğer uçlarını A/v cihazınızın karşılık gelen ses çıkış konektörlerine takın. 7 KENSINGTON KİLİDİ (modele bağlıdır) – Kensington kilidi, (isteğe bağlı) halka açık bir ortamda kullanıldığında sistemi fiziksel olarak sabitlemek için kullanılan bir aygıttır. Bir kilitleme cihazı kullanmak isterseniz, Tv'yi satın aldığınız bayi ile görüşün. 8 Kulaklık jakı – Kulaklık, cihazınızın kulaklık çıkışına takılabilir. Kulaklık takılıyken, dahili hoparlörlerden gelen ses kapatılacaktır. N Kensington Kilidinin konumu, modeline bağlı olarak farklılık gösterebilir. 9 COMPONENT IN – Parça video kablolarını (isteğe bağlı) cihazınızın arkasındaki parça konektörüne (PR, PB, Y) takın ve kabloların diğer uçlarını dTv ya da dvd'nin karşılık gelen parça video çıkış konektörlerine takın. – Set Üstü cihazını ve dTv'yi (ya da dvd'yi) aynı anda bağlamak istiyorsanız, Set Üstü Cihazını dTv'ye (ya da dvd'ye) ve dTv'yi (ya da dvd'yi) cihazınızdaki parça konektörüne (PR, PB, Y) bağlayın. – Parça cihazlarınızdaki (dTv veya dvd) PR, PB ve Y konektörleri bazen Y, B-Y ve r-Y ya da Y, Cb ve Cr şeklinde etiketlenebilir. – rCA ses kablolarını (isteğe bağlı) cihazınızın arkasındaki [R-AUDIO-L] girişlerine takın ve kabloların diğer uçlarını A/v cihazınızın karşılık gelen ses çıkış konektörlerine takın. 0 EXT (RGB) Konektör Giriş Çıkış Video Ses (Sol / Sağ) rGB video + Ses (Sol / Sağ) EXT O O O Yalnızca Tv veya dTv çıkışı kullanılabilir. – vCr, dvd, video oyun cihazları ya da video disk çalarlar gibi harici cihazlar için giriş ya da çıkış bağlantıları. BN68-03043A.indb 5 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:16Türkçe - 6 ¦ Uzaktan Kumanda N Uzaktan kumandayı Tv'den en fazla 23 fit kadar uzakta kullanabilirsiniz. N Uzaktan kumandanın performansı parlak ışıktan etkilenebilir. N Ürünün rengi ve şekli, modele bağlı olarak farklılık gösterebilir. 1 POWER: Televizyon Beklemede düğmesidir. 2 SAYISAL DÜĞMELER: Kanalı değiştirmek için basın. 3 FAV.CH: Ekranda Favori Kanal listelerini görüntülemek için kullanılır. 4Y : Ses seviyesini artırmak veya azaltmak için basın. 5 SOURCE: Kullanılabilir video kaynaklarını görüntülemek ve seçmek için basın. 6 INFO : Tv ekranında bilgi görüntülemek için basın. 7 TOOLS: Sık kullanılan işlevleri hızla seçmek için kullanın. 8 CH LIST: Ekranda Kanal listesini görüntüler 9 RENKLİ DÜĞMELER: Bu düğmeleri Kanal Listesi menülerinde vb. kullanın. ! TV: doğrudan Tv modunu seçer. @ PRE-CH: Önceki izlediğiniz kanala dönmenizi sağlar. # MUTEM: Sesi geçici olarak kesmek için basın. $ P

: Kanalları değiştirmek için basın. % MENU: Ana ekran menüsünü görüntüler ^ GUIDE: Elektronik Program Kılavuzu (EPG) ekranı & RETURN: Önceki menüye geri döner * YUKARI▲ / AŞAĞI▼ / SOL◄ / SAĞ► / ENTERE: Ekran üzerindeki menü öğelerini seçmek ve menü değerlerini değiştirmek için kullanın. ( EXIT: Menüden çıkmak için basın. ) SUBT. : dijital altyazı görünümü a AD: Sesli Açıklama seçimi. Teletekst İşlevleri 5 0: Teletekst modu seçimi (lIST / FlOF) 6 5: Teletekst gösterimi 7 4: Teletekst boyutu seçimi 8 8: Teletekst hafızaya alma 9 Fastekst konu seçimi 0/: Alternatif olarak Teletekst, Çift ya da Karışık seçin. ! :: Teletekst gösteriminden çıkış @ 1: Teletekst alt sayfası $ 2: Teletekst sonraki sayfa 3: Teletekst önceki sayfa % 6: Teletekst dizini & 9: Teletekst tutma ( 7: Teletekst iptal ¦ Uzaktan Kumandaya Pil Takma 1. resimde gösterildiği gibi uzaktan kumandanın arkasındaki kapağı kaldırın. 2. İki AAA boyutunda pil takın. N Pil uçlarındaki '+' ve '–' işaretlerinin bölme içindeki şekille eşleşmesine dikkat edin. 3. Kapağı çıkarın. N Uzaktan kumandayı uzunca bir süre kullanmayacaksanız, pilleri çıkarın ve serin, kuru bir yerde saklayın. N Uzaktan kumanda çalışmazsa, aşağıdakileri kontrol edin: ● Tv açık mı? ● Pillerin artı ve eksi uçları ters olarak mı takılmış? ● Piller bitmiş mi? ● Elektrik kesintisi veya güç kablosunun çıkması gibi bir durum var mı? ● Yakınlarda özel flüoresan lambası veya neon işareti var mı? 1 2 4 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 ! @ # $ & * ( ) a % ^ BN68-03043A.indb 6 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:17Türkçe - 7 ÇALIŞTIRMA ¦ Menülere bakış Tv'yi kullanmadan önce, değişik fonksiyonları seçmek ve ayarlamak için menüde nasıl dolaşılabileceğini öğrenmek amacıyla aşağıdaki adımları izleyin. 1. MENU düğmesine basın. Ana menü ekranda görüntülenir. Solunda şu simgeler vardır: Görüntü, Ses, Kanal , Kurulum, Giriş, Uygulama, Destek. 2. Simgelerden birini seçmek için ▲ ya da ▼ düğmesine basın. Simgelerin alt menülerine gitmek için ◄ ya da ► düğmesine basın. 3. Öğeleri menüye taşımak için ▲ ya da ▼ düğmesine basın. Menüye öğe girmek için ENTERE düğmesine basın. 4. Seçilmiş öğeleri değiştirmek için ▲/▼/◄/► düğmelerine basın. N Önceki menüye dönmek için RETURN düğmesine basın. 5. Menüden çıkmak için EXIT düğmesine basın. Uzaktan kumanda düğmelerinin kullanımı Düğme İşlemler Düğme İşlemler MENUm Ana ekran menüsünü görüntüler. ▲/▼/◄/►/ ENTERE İşaretçiyi hareket ettirir ve bir öğe seçer. Geçerli olarak seçili öğeyi seçer. Ayarları onaylar. RUTURNR Önceki menüye geri döner. EXITe Ekran menüsünden çıkar. Örnek: Resim Menüsünde TV'nin Parlaklığını ayarlama „ Parlaklığı 80 olarak ayarlama 1. Menüyü görüntülemek için MENU düğmesine basın. 2. Görüntü öğesini seçmek için ENTERE düğmesine basın. 3. Parlaklık öğesini seçmek için ▲ ya da ▼ düğmelerine basın. 4. ENTERE düğmesine basın. 5. Parlaklık 80'e gelene kadar ◄ ya da ► düğmesine basın. 6. ENTERE düğmesine basın. N Menüden çıkmak için EXIT düğmesine basın. Modu : Standart ► Arka Aydınlatma : 7 Kontrast : 95 Parlaklık : 45 Netlik : 50 renk : 50 Ton (G/r) : G50 / r50 Görüntü Modu : Standart ► Arka Aydınlatma : 7 Kontrast : 95 Parlaklık : 45 Netlik : 50 renk : 50 Ton (G/r) : G50 / r50 Görüntü Arka Aydınlatma : 7 Kontrast : 95 Parlaklık : 45 ► Netlik : 50 renk : 50 Ton (G/r) : G50 / r50 Gelişmiş Ayarlar resim Seçenekleri resim Sıfırlama Görüntü U Taşı L Ayarla E Giriş R Geri Parlaklık 45 U Taşı L Ayarla E Giriş R Geri Parlaklık 80 Modu : Standart ► Arka Aydınlatma : 7 Kontrast : 95 Parlaklık : 45 Netlik : 50 renk : 50 Ton (G/r) : G50 / r50 Görüntü BN68-03043A.indb 7 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:17Türkçe - 8 ¦ Televizyonunuzun Bekleme Moduna Alınması Cihazınız, güç tüketimini azaltmak için bekleme moduna alınabilir. Bekleme modu izlemeyi geçici olarak (örneğin yemek sırasında) kesmek istediğinizde yararlı olur. 1. Uzaktan kumandadaki POWERP düğmesine basın. N Ekrandaki görüntü kapanır ve cihazınızın üzerinde bir bekleme göstergesi yanar. 2. Ayarınızı eski durumuna getirmek için sadece POWERP yeniden basın. N Cihazınızı uzun süre (örneğin, tatile gittiğinizde) bekleme modunda bırakmayın. Cihazı elektrik şebekesinden ve anten bağlantılarından ayırmak en doğru işlemdir. ¦ Plug & Play Özelliği Tv ilk kez açıldığında, temel ayarlar otomatik olarak başlar ve birbiri ardına devam eder. 1. Uzaktan kumandadaki POWER düğmesine basın. You can set the menu language. mesajı görüntülenir. 2. ▲ veya ▼ düğmesine basarak uygun dili seçin. Seçiminizi onaylamak için ENTERE düğmesine basın. 3. ◄ veya ► düğmesine basarak Dükkan Demo veya Evde Kullanım seçimini yapın, ardından ENTERE düğmesine basın. N Ev ortamınızda en iyi resim için Tv'yi Evde Kullanım moduna ayarlamanızı öneririz. N Dükkan Demo modu yalnızca satış ortamlarında kullanmak içindir. N Cihaz kazara Dükkan Demo moduna ayarlanmışsa ve siz Evde Kullanım (Standart) moduna dönmek istiyorsanız: Televizyon üzerindeki volume düğmesine basın. Ses OSd görüntülendiğinde televizyon üzerindeki MENU düğmesini 5 saniye boyunca basılı tutun. 4. ENTERE düğmesine basın. ▲ veya ▼ düğmesine basarak uygun ülkeyi seçin. Seçiminizi onaylamak için ENTERE düğmesine basın. 5. Dış Anten veya Kablo seçimini yapmak için ▲ veya ▼ düğmesine ve ardından ENTERE düğmesine basın. N Dış Anten: Dış Anten anten sinyalidir. Kablo: Kablo anten sinyalidir. 6. ▲ veya ▼ düğmesine basarak hafızaya alınacak kanal kaynağını seçin. Başlama öğesini seçmek için ENTERE düğmesine basın. N Dijital ve Analog: dijital ve Analog kanallardır. Dijital: dijital kanallardır. Analog: Analog kanallardır. N Anten kaynağını Kablo olarak ayarladığınızda, dijital kanal araması için bir değer ayarlamanızı sağlayan bir adım belirir. Daha fazla bilgi için, Kanal → Otomatik kayıtkısmına bakın. N Kanal arama otomatik olarak başlatılır ve sonlandırılır. N Kayda alma işlemini herhangi bir anda kesmek için ENTERE düğmesine basın. N Kullanılabilir tüm kanallar hafızaya alındıktan sonra, Saat Modunu ayarlayın mesajı gösterilir. 7. ENTERE düğmesine basın. Oto seçimini yapmak için ▲ veya ▼ düğmesine ve adından ENTERE düğmesine basın. N Geçerli tarih ve zamanı ayarlayın, Manuel seçeneğini seçerseniz gösterilir. N Bir dijital sinyal alırsanız, zaman otomatik olarak ayarlanacaktır. Almazsanız, saati ayarlamak için Manuel seçimini yapın. (bkz. sayfa 20) 8. En iyi Hd kalitesini sunacak bağlantı yöntemi önerilmektedir. Yöntemi onayladıktan sonra ENTERE düğmesine basın. 9. TV'nizden keyif alın. mesajı görüntülenir. Bitirdiğinizde ENTERE düğmesine basın. Bu özelliği sıfırlamak istiyorsanız... 1. Menüyü görüntülemek için MENU düğmesine basın. Kurulum seçimini yapmak için ▲ ya da ▼ düğmesine, ardından ENTERE düğmesine basın. 2. Plug & Play seçimini yapmak için ENTERE düğmesine yeniden basın. 3. 4 basamaklı PIN numaranızı girin. Yeni bir Tv'nin varsayılan PIN numarası 0-0-0-0 dır. N PIN numarasını değiştirmek istiyorsanız, PIN Değiştir işlevini kullanın. (bkz. sayfa 22) N Plug & Play özelliği yalnızca Tv modunda kullanılabilir. Plug & Play You can set the menu language. Menu language : English ► E enter BN68-03043A.indb 8 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:17Türkçe - 9 ¦ Monitöre Bakış Ekran, geçerli kanalı ve bazı belirli ses-video ayarlarının durumunu tanımlar. O Bilgileri görüntülemek için INFO düğmesine basın. Uzaktan kumandadaki INFO düğmesine basın. Tv; kanalı, sesin türünü ve belirli görüntü ve ses ayarlarının durumunu görüntüleyecektir. ● ▲, ▼: diğer kanal bilgilerini görüntüleyebilirsiniz. Geçerli durumda seçili kanala gitmek istediğinizde, ENTERE düğmesine basın. ● ◄, ►: Geçerli kanalda istenen programın bilgilerini görüntüleyebilirsiniz. N INFO düğmesine bir kez daha basın veya yaklaşık 10 saniye bekleyin, ekran otomatik olarak kaybolur. KANAL KONTROLÜ ¦ Kanal Menüsünü Yapılandırma ❑ Ülke N PIN numarası giriş ekranı görünür. 4 basamaklı PIN numaranızı girin. „ Analog Kanal Analog kanallar için ülkeyi değiştirebilirsiniz. „ Dijital Kanal dijital kanallar için ülkeyi değiştirebilirsiniz. ❑ Otomatik kayıt Kullanabileceğiniz frekans aralıklarını tarayabilirsiniz (ve kullanılabilirlik ülkenize göre değişir). Otomatik olarak yerleştirilen program numaraları, gerçek ya da istenen program numaralarına uymayabilir. N Bir kanal Çocuk Kilidi işlevi kullanılarak kilitlenmişse, PIN giriş penceresi görünür. „ Dış Anten / Kablo Hafızaya alınacak anten kaynağıdır ● Dijital ve Analog: dijital ve Analog kanallardır. ● Dijital: dijital kanallardır. ● Analog: Analog kanallardır. ‘Kablo → Dijital ve Analog’ veya ‘Kablo → Dijital’ Kablo kanallarını taramak için bir değer girin. ● Arama Modu → Tam / Ağ / Hızlı N Hızlı – Network ID: Ağ kimliği kodunu görüntüler. – Frekans: Kanalın frekansını görüntüler. (Her ülkede farklıdır) – Modulation: Kullanılabilir modülasyon değerlerini görüntüler. – Symbol Rate: Kullanılabilir sembol hızlarını görüntüler. N Etkin yayın istasyonları olan tüm kanalları tarar ve bunları Tv'nin hafızasına kaydeder. N Otomatik Kayıt işlemini durdurmak istiyorsanız, ENTERE düğmesine basın. Otomatik Programlama Durdurulsun mu? mesajı görüntülenecektir. ◄ veya ► düğmesine basarak Evet seçimini yapın, sonra ENTERE düğmesine basın. Ülke ► Otomatik kayıt Elden kayıt Kablolu Arama Seçeneği Şimdi ve Sonraki Klvz. Tam Kılavuz varsayılan Kılavuz : Tam Kılavuz Kanal DTV Air 15 abc1 18:00 ~ 6:00 18:11 Thu 6 Jan life On venus Avenue Unclassified No Detaild Information ¦ INFO BN68-03043A.indb 9 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:18Türkçe - 10 ❑ Elden kayıt N Bir kanalı elle tarar ve bunu Tv'nin hafızasına kaydeder. N Bir kanal Çocuk Kilidi işlevi kullanılarak kilitlenmişse, PIN giriş penceresi görünür. „ Dijital Kanal dijital kanalların elle kaydedilmesi. N Dijital Kanal sadece DTV modunda geçerlidir. ● Kanal: ▲, ▼ ya da sayı (0~9) düğmelerini kullanarak Kanal numarasını ayarlayın. ● Frekans: Sayı düğmelerini kullanarak frekansı ayarlayın. ● Bant genişliği: ▲, ▼ ya da sayı (0~9) düğmelerini kullanarak bant genişliğini ayarlayın. N Tamamlandığında, kanal listesindeki kanallar güncellenir. „ Analog Kanal Analog kanalların elle kaydedilmesi. ● Program (Kanala atanacak program numarası): ▲, ▼ ya da sayı (0~9) düğmelerini kullanarak program numarasını ayarlar. ● Renk Sistemi → Oto / PAL / SECAM / NTSC4.43: ▲ veya ▼ düğmesini kullanarak renk sistemi değerini ayarlar. ● Ses Sistemi → BG / DK / I / L: ▲ veya ▼ düğmesini kullanarak ses sistemi değerini ayarlar. ● Kanal (Kaydedilecek kanal numarasını biliyorsanız): ▲ veya ▼ düğmesine basarak C (Karasal kanal) ya da S (Kablo kanalı) seçimini yapın. ► düğmesine basın, ardından gerekli numarayı seçmek için ▲, ▼ ya da sayı (0~9) düğmelerine basın. N Kanal numarasını, sayı (0~9) düğmelerine basarak da doğrudan seçebilirsiniz. N Normal olmayan bir ses varsa veya ses yoksa, gerekli ses standardını yeniden seçin. ● Ara (Kanal numaralarını bilmediğinizde): Aramayı başlatmak için ▲ veya ▼ düğmesine basın. Kanal ayarcısı ilk kanal ya da sizin seçtiğiniz kanal ekranda görüntülenene kadar frekans aralığını tarar. ● Kayıt (Kanal ve ilgili program numarasını kaydettiğinizde): ENTERE düğmesine basarak Tamam olarak ayarlayın. N Kanal modu – P (Program modu): Ayarlama tamamlanırken, bölgenizdeki yayın istasyonları, P00 ile P99 arasındaki konum numaralarına atanırlar. Bu modda iken konum numarasını girerek bir kanalı seçebilirsiniz. – C (Karasal kanal modu): Bu modda iken, antenle alınan her bir istasyona atanmış numarayı girerek bir kanal seçebilirsiniz. – S (Kablo kanalı modu): Bu modda iken, kablo ile alınan her bir istasyona atanmış numarayı girerek bir kanal seçebilirsiniz. ❑ Kablolu Arama Seçeneği Kablo Tv şebekesi araması için frekans ve simge hızı gibi ek arama seçeneklerini ayarlar. ● Frekans (Başlama ~ Durdurma): Kanalın frekansını görüntüler. ● Modulation: Kullanılabilir modülasyon değerlerini görüntüler. ● Symbol Rate: Kullanılabilir sembol hızlarını görüntüler. ❑ Şimdi ve Sonraki Klvz. / Tam Kılavuz EPG (Elektronik Program Kılavuzu) bilgileri yayıncılar tarafından sağlanır. Herhangi bir kanalda bilgi yayını sebebiyle boş veya güncelliğini yitirmiş program girişleri görünebilir. Yeni bilgiler gelir gelmez ekran dinamik şekilde güncellenir. N Şimdi ve Sonraki Klvz. ve Tam Kılavuz kullanımı hakkındaki ayrıntılı prosedürler için sayfa 11'daki açıklamalara bakın. O Kılavuz menüsünü görüntülemek için GUIDE düğmesine basmanız da yeterlidir. (Varsayılan Kılavuz öğesini yapılandırmak için açıklamalara bakın.) „ Şimdi ve Sonraki Klvz. Sol sütunda gösterilen altı kanal için, Geçerli program ve Sonraki program bilgileri görüntülenir. „ Tam Kılavuz Program bilgilerini zamana göre sıralanmış Bir saatlik dilimler şeklinde görüntüler. Zamana göre ileri ya da geri kaydırılabilen iki saatlik program bilgileri görüntülenir. BN68-03043A.indb 10 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:18Türkçe - 11 ❑ Varsayılan Kılavuz → Şimdi ve Sonraki Klvz. / Tam Kılavuz Uzaktan kumandadaki GUIDE düğmesi basıldığında Şimdi ve Sonraki Klvz. ya da Tam Kılavuz görüntülemeyi seçebilirsiniz. ❑ Kanal Listesi Kanal Listesi kullanma hakkında ayrıntılı prosedürler için 'Kanalları Yönetme' talimatlarına bakın. O Uzaktan kumanda üzerindeki CH LIST düğmesine basarak bu seçenekleri belirleyebilirsiniz. ❑ Kanal Modu P >/< düğmesine basıldığında, Kanallar seçilen kanal listesi dahilinde değişecektir. „ Eklenen Kanallar Kanallar kaydedilmiş kanal listesi içinde geçiş yapacaktır. „ Favori Kanallar Kanallar favori kanal listesi içinde geçiş yapacaktır. ❑ İnce Ayar Alınan görüntü netse, arama ve kaydetme işlemi sırasında otomatik olarak yapılmış olduğu için kanalın ince ayarını yapmanıza gerek yoktur. Ancak sinyal zayıf ya da bozuksa, kanalın ince ayarını elle yapmanız gerekebilir. N İnce ayarlanan kanalların, kanal etiketindeki kanal numarasının sağ tarafında bir yıldız '*' işareti bulunur. N İnce ayarı sıfırlamak için, ▲ veya ▼ düğmesine basarak Sıfrl seçeneğini seçin ve ardından ENTERE düğmesine basın. N Yalnızca Analog Tv kanallarında ince ayar yapılabilir. Şimdi ve Sonraki Klvz. / Tam Kılavuz Amaç... İşlem... EPG listesindeki bir programı seyretmek ▲, ▼, ◄, ► düğmesine basarak bir program seçin. Kılavuzdan çıkmak Mavi düğmeye basın Sonraki program seçilirse, saat simgesi görüntülenerek program zamanlanır. ENTERE düğmesine tekrar basılırsa, ◄, ► düğmesine basarak Prgrmlr Dğştrm seçeneğini seçin, saat simgesinin kaybolması ile zamanlama işlemi iptal edilir. Program bilgilerini izlemek ▲, ▼, ◄, ► düğmesine basarak istediğiniz bir programı seçin. Ardından istediğiniz program vurgulandığında INFO düğmesine basın. Program başlığı, ekran merkezinin üst kısmındadır. Ayrıntılı bilgi için INFO düğmesine basın. Ayrıntılı bilgi içinde Channel Number, running Time, Status Bar, Parental level, video Quality Information (Hd / Sd), Sound Modes, Subtitle ya da Teletext, Subtitle veya Teletext dilleri ve vurgulanan programın kısa bir özeti bulunur. “...” özet uzunsa görüntülenecektir. Şimdi ve Sonraki Klvz. ya da Tam Kılavuz arasında geçiş yapmak. Kırmızı düğmeye art arda basın. Tam Kılavuz'da Geriye hızlı hareket (24 saat). İleriye hızlı hareket (24 saat). Yeşil düğmeye art arda basın. Sarı düğmeye art arda basın. Tam Kılavuz dTv Cable 900 f tn 2:10 Sal 1 Haz Freshmen On Campus 2:00 - 2:30 No Detailed Information Bugün 2:00 - 3:00 3:00 - 4:00 Mint extra loaded Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC The Distillery Smash Hits! Sunday 1 f tn 2 ITv Play 3 Kerrang! 4 Kiss 5 oneword ▼ 6 Smash Hits! No information Freshmen O.. İzle INFO Bilgi ■ Şimdi/Snr ■ +24 Saat ■ Çıkış Şimdi ve Sonraki Klvz. dTv Cable 900 f tn 2:10 Sal 1 Haz Freshmen On Campus 2:00 - 2:30 No Detailed Information Şimdi İleri Mint extra loaded Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC The Distillery Smash Hits! Sunday 1 f tn 2 ITv Play 3 Kerrang! 4 Kiss 5 oneword ▼ 6 Smash Hits! Kisstory No information No information No information Street Hypn.. İzle INFO Bilgi ■ Tam Kılavuz ■ Çıkış BN68-03043A.indb 11 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:18Türkçe - 12 ¦ Kanalları Yönetme Bu menüyü kullanarak Favori kanalları Ekleyebilir / Silebilir ya da ayarlayabilir ve dijital yayınlar için program kılavuzunu kullanabilirsiniz. „ Tüm Kanallar O anda mevcut tüm kanalları gösterir. „ Eklenen Kanallar Tüm eklenmiş kanalları gösterir. „ Sık Kullanılanlar Tüm favori kanalları gösterir. O Ayarladığınız favori kanalları seçmek için uzaktan kumandadaki FAV.CH düğmesine basın. „ Programlandı Tüm geçerli rezerv edilmiş kanalları gösterir. N Tüm Kanallar, Eklenen Kanallar veya Sık Kullanılanlar ekranında ▲ / ▼ düğmelerine ve ENTERE düğmesine basarak bir kanal seçin. Ardından seçilen kanalı izleyebilirsiniz. N Kanal Listesinde Renk düğmelerinin kullanılması – Kırmızı (Kanal Tipi): TV, Radyo, Veri / Diğer ve Tümü seçenekleri arasında geçiş yapın. – Yeşil (zoom): Bir kanal numarasını büyütür ya da küçültür. – Sarı (Seçim): Birden fazla kanal listesi seçer. Aynı anda birden fazla kanal için ekleme / silme, Favorilere ekleme / Favorilerden silme ya da kilitleme / kilit açma işlevlerini gerçekleştirebilirsiniz. Tüm seçilmiş kanalları aynı anda ayarlamak için gerekli kanalı seçin ve sarı düğmeye basın. Seçilen kanalların solunda c işareti görünür. – TOOLS (Araçlar): Sil (veya Ekle), Sık Kullanılanlara Ekle (veya Sık Kullanılanlardan Sil), Kilit (veya Kilit aç), Zamanlayıcıyla Seyretme, Kanal Adı Düzenleme, Sınıflama, Kanal Numarası Düzenleme, Tümünü Seç (veya Tüm seçimleri kaldır), Otomatik kayıt menüsünü gösterir. (Seçenekler menüleri duruma göre değişebilir.) N Kanal Durum Ekranı Simgeleri ● A : Bir analog kanal. ● c: Sarı düğmeye basılarak seçilen bir kanal. ● : Favori olarak ayarlanmış bir kanal. ● ( : Geçerli olarak yayınlanmakta olan bir kanal. ● \ : Kilitlenmiş bir kanal. ● ) : rezerv edilmiş bir program Kanal Listesi Seçenek Menüsü (Tüm Kanallar / Eklenen Kanallar / Sık Kullanılanlar) N Seçenek menüsünü kullanmak için TOOLS düğmesine basın. N Seçenek menüsü öğeleri kanal durumuna göre değişebilir. „ Ekle / Sil İstediğiniz kanalları görüntülemek için bir kanalı silebilir ya da ekleyebilirsiniz. N Silinen tüm kanallar Tüm Kanallar menüsünde gösterilecektir. N Gri renkli bir kanal, kanalın silindiğini gösterir. N Ekle menüsü yalnızca silinmiş kanallar için görünür. N Ayrıca bir kanalı Eklenen Kanallar veya Sık Kullanılanlar menüsünde de aynı şekilde silebilirsiniz. „ Sık Kullanılanlara Ekle / Sık Kullanılanlardan Sil Sık seyrettiğiniz kanalları favoriler olarak ayarlayabilirsiniz. T Araçlar menüsünü görüntülemek için TOOLS düğmesine basın. Ayrıca Favorilerde yapılan ekleme (ya da silme) işlemini Araçlar → Sık Kullanılanlara Ekle (veya Sık Kullanılanlardan Sil) öğelerini seçerek de yapabilirsiniz. N ' ' sembolü gösterilecek ve kanal bir favori olarak ayarlanacaktır. N Tüm favori kanallar Sık Kullanılanlar menüsünde gösterilecektir. 824 UKTV Gold 825 UKTV style A 1 C -- A 2 C -- A 3 ♥ C -- A 4 C -- A 5 C -- A 6 C -- A 7 C -- Eklenen Kanallar Tümü ■ Kanal Tipi ■ Zoom ■ Seçim T Araçlar 824 UKTV Gold 825 UKTV style A 1 C -- A 2 C -- A 3 ♥ C -- A 4 C -- A 5 C -- A 6 C -- A 7 C -- Eklenen Kanallar Tümü ■ Kanal Tipi ■ Zoom ■ Seçim T Araçlar Sil Sık Kullanılanlara Ekle Kilit Zamanlayıcıyla Seyretme Kanal Adı Düzenleme Sınıflama ▼ BN68-03043A.indb 12 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:19Türkçe - 13 „ Kilit / Kilit aç Bir kanalı kilitleyebilirsiniz, böylece kanal seçilemez ve izlenemez. Bu işlev yalnızca Çocuk Kilidi öğesi Açık olarak ayarlandığında kullanılabilir. (bkz. sayfa 22) N PIN numarası giriş ekranı görünür. 4 basamaklı PIN numaranızı girin. N Yeni bir Tv'nin varsayılan PIN numarası 0-0-0-0 dır. Menüden PIN Değiştir seçimini yaparak PIN'i değiştirebilirsiniz. N '\' sembolü gösterilecek ve kanal kilitlenecektir. „ Zamanlayıcıyla Seyretme İzlemek istediğiniz bir programı rezerv ettiyseniz, başka bir kanal izliyor olsanız bile kanal otomatik olarak Kanal listesindeki rezerv edilmiş kanala geçecektir. Bir programı rezerv etmek için önce geçerli zamanı ayarlayın. (Bkz. sayfa 20) N Yalnızca hafızaya alınmış kanallar rezerv edilebilir. N Uzaktan kumanda üzerindeki numara düğmelerine basarak kanal, gün, ay, yıl, saat ve dakika ayarlarını doğrudan yapabilirsiniz. N Bir programın rezerv edilmesi Program menüsünde gösterilecektir. N Dijital Program Kılavuzu ve İzleme Rezervasyonu Bir dijital kanal seçildiğinde ve ► düğmesine bastığınızda kanalın Program Kılavuzu görünür. Yukarıda anlatılan prosedürlere göre bir programı rezerve edebilirsiniz. „ Kanal Adı Düzenleme (yalnızca analog kanallar) Kanallar çağrı harfleri kanal seçildiğinde görünecek şekilde etiketlenebilir. N dijital yayın kanallarının adları otomatik olarak atanır ve etiketlenemez. „ Kanal Numarası Düzenleme (yalnızca dijital kanallar) Uzaktan kumanda üzerindeki numara düğmelerine basarak da kanal numarasını düzenleyebilirsiniz. „ Sınıflama (yalnızca analog kanallar) Bu işlem, kayıtlı kanalların program numarasını değiştirmenize olanak verir. Bu işlem otomatik kaydetme kullanıldıktan sonra gerekli olabilir. „ Tümünü Seç / Tüm seçimleri kaldır ● Tümünü Seç: Kanal listesindeki tüm kanalları seçebilirsiniz. ● Tüm seçimleri kaldır: Seçilmiş kanalların hepsini seçilmemiş konuma getirebilirsiniz. N Ancak seçilmiş bir kanal olduğunda Tüm seçimleri kaldır seçimini yapabilirsiniz. „ Otomatik kayıt N Ayarlama seçenekleri hakkında daha fazla bilgi için sayfa 9'e bakın. N Bir kanal Çocuk Kilidi işlevi kullanılarak kilitlenmişse, PIN giriş penceresi görünür. Kanal Listesi Seçenek Menüsü (Programlandı menüsünde) Bir rezervasyonu görüntüleyebilir, değiştirebilir ya da silebilirsiniz. N Seçenek menüsünü kullanmak için TOOLS düğmesine basın. „ Bilgileri Değiştirme Bir izleme rezervasyonunu değiştirmek için seçin. „ Programları Değiştirme Bir izleme rezervasyonunu iptal etmek için seçin. „ Bilgi Bir izleme rezervasyonunu izlemek için seçin. (Ayrıca rezervasyon bilgisini de değiştirebilirsiniz.) „ Tümünü Seç Tüm rezerv edilmiş programları seçin. 1 / 1 / 2009 13:59 5 Tv1 Quincy, M.E 18:59 2 Tv3 The equalizer 20:59 2 Tv3 McMillan & Wife Programlandı Tümü ■ Zoom ■ Seçim T Araçlar E Araçlar Bilgileri Değiştirme Prgrmlr Dğştrm Bilgi Tümünü Seç BN68-03043A.indb 13 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:19Türkçe - 14 RESİM KONTROLÜ ¦ Resim Menüsünü Yapılandırma ❑ Modu İzleme gereksinimlerinize en uygun resim türünü seçebilirsiniz. T Araçlar menüsünü görüntülemek için TOOLS düğmesine basın. Ayrıca Araçlar → Resim Modu seçimini yaparak resim modunu da ayarlayabilirsiniz. „ Dinamik Aydınlık bir odada yüksek tanımlamalı görüntü için resim türünü seçer. „ Standart Normal bir odada en iyi görüntü için resim türünü seçer. „ Sinema Karanlık bir odada film izlemek için resim türünü seçer. ❑ Arka Aydınlatma / Kontrast / Parlaklık / Netlik / Renk / Ton (G/R) Televizyonunuzda, resim kalitesini kontrol etmenizi sağlayacak çeşitli ayar seçenekleri bulunmaktadır. ● Arka Aydınlatma: lCd arka aydınlatmanın parlaklığını ayarlar. ● Kontrast: resmin kontrast seviyesini ayarlar. ● Parlaklık: resmin parlaklık seviyesini ayarlar ● Netlik: resmin kenar tanımlamasını ayarlar. ● Renk: resmin renk doygunluğunu ayarlar. ● Ton (G/R): resmin renk tonunu ayarlar. N Önce ayarlanacak bir resim modu seçin. Ayarlanan değerler her resim modu için kaydedilecektir. N Arka Aydınlatma, Kontrast, Parlaklık, Netlik, Renk veya Ton (G/R) ayarlarında değişiklik yaptığınızda OSd de uygun şekilde ayarlanacaktır. N PAl sistemin analog TV, Ext., AV modlarında Ton (G/R) İşlevini kullanamazsınız. N PC modunda, yalnızca Arka Aydınlatma, Kontrast ve Parlaklık ayarlarında değişiklik yapabilirsiniz. N Ayarlar, Tv'nin bir girişine bağladığınız her harici cihaz için ayarlanabilir ve saklanabilir. N resmin parlaklık düzeyi azaltılırsa kullanım süresince tüketilen enerji önemli ölçüde azaltılabilir ve bu, toplam çalışma maliyetini düşürür. ❑ Gelişmiş Ayarlar Samsung'un yeni Tv'leri önceki modellere göre daha hassas resim ayarları yapmanıza izin verir. Ayrıntılı resim ayarlarını yapmak için aşağıya bakın. N Gelişmiş Ayarlar menüsü, Standart veya Sinema modunda kullanılabilir. N PC modunda Gelişmiş Ayarlar öğeleri arasından yalnızca Gamma ve Beyaz Dengesi ayarlarını değiştirebilirsiniz. „ Siyah Tonu → Kpalı / Koyu / Daha Koyu / En Koyu Ekran derinliğini ayarlamak için ekrandaki siyahlık düzeyini seçebilirsiniz. „ Dinamik Kontrast → Kpalı / Düşük / Orta / Yüksek En iyi kontrast sağlanacak şekilde ekran kontrastını ayarlayabilirsiniz. „ Gamma Ana renk (Kırmızı, Yeşil, Mavi) Yoğunluğunu ayarlayabilirsiniz. „ Renk Alanı renk Alanı kırmızı, yeşil ve mavi renklerden oluşan bir renk tablosudur. En doğal renkleri yaşamak için beğendiğiniz renk Alanı seçimini yapın. ● Doğal: doğal renk Alanı, derinliği olan zengin bir renk tonu sunar. ● Oto: Oto renk Alanı, program kaynaklarına dayalı en doğal renk tonunu otomatik olarak ayarlar. Modu : Standart ► Arka Aydınlatma : 7 Kontrast : 95 Parlaklık : 45 Netlik : 50 renk : 50 Ton (G/r) : G50 / r50 Görüntü renk : 50 Ton (G/r) : G50 / r50 Gelişmiş Ayarlar ► resim Seçenekleri resim Sıfırlama Görüntü BN68-03043A.indb 14 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:19Türkçe - 15 „ Beyaz Dengesi daha doğal resim renkleri için renk sıcaklığını ayarlayabilirsiniz. ● R-Ofseti / G-Ofseti / G-Ofseti / R-Kazanımı / G-Kazanımı / B-Kazanımı: Açık alanlarda renk ‘sıcaklığını’ r, G, B değerleri değiştirerek ayarlayabilirsiniz. Yalnızca ileri düzey kullanıcılar için önerilmektedir. ● Sıfrl: daha önce ayarlanmış beyaz dengesi fabrika ayarlarına dönecektir. „ Ten Tonu resimdeki pembe 'cilt tonu'nu vurgulayabilirsiniz. N Ayar değerinin değiştirilmesi ayarlanmış ekranı yenileyecektir. „ Kenar Geliştirme → Kpalı / Açık resimdeki nesne sınırlarını vurgulayabilirsiniz. ❑ Resim Seçenekleri N PC modunda Resim Seçenekleri öğeleri arasından yalnızca Renk Tonu ve Boyut ayarlarında değişiklik yapabilirsiniz. „ Renk Tonu → Mavi / Normal / Kırmızı1 / Kırmızı2 Gözlerinize en uygun renk tonunu seçebilirsiniz. N Ayarlar, Tv'nin bir girişine bağladığınız her harici cihaz için ayarlanabilir ve saklanabilir. N Kırmızı1 ya da Kırmızı2 yalnızca resim modu Sinema olduğunda etkinleştirilir. „ Boyut İzleme gereksinimlerinize en uygun resim boyutunu seçebilirsiniz. T Araçlar menüsünü görüntülemek için TOOLS düğmesine basın. Boyutu ayrıca Araçlar → Resim Boyutu ayarı ile de ayarlayabilirsiniz. ● Oto Geniş: resim boyutunu otomatik olarak 16:9 en-boy oranına ayarlar. ● 16:9: resim boyutunu, dvd'ler ya da geniş yayınlar için uygun 16:9 oranına getirir. ● Geniş Yknlştrm: resmin boyutunu 4:3'ten daha fazla büyütür. ● Zoom: 16:9 geniş resmi büyüterek (dikey yönde) ekran boyutuna sığdırır. ● 4:3: video filmleri ya da normal yayın için bu varsayılan ayardır. ● Ekrana Sığdır: HdMI (720p/1080i) veya Parça (1080i) sinyalleri girişi alınırken herhangi bir yerini kesmeden tam resmi görmek için bu işlevi kullanın. N Giriş kaynağına bağlı olarak, resim boyutu farklılık gösterebilir. N Kullanılabilir öğeler, seçilen moda bağlı olarak farklı olabilir. N PC Modunda, yalnızca 16:9 ve 4:3 modu ayarlanabilir. N Ayarlar, Tv'nin bir girişine bağladığınız her harici cihaz için ayarlanabilir ve saklanabilir. N Cihazda iki saatten fazla durağan bir görüntü izlediğinizde geçici görüntü takılması oluşabilir. N Geniş Yknlştrm: ► düğmesine basarak Konum seçeneğini seçin ve ardından ENTERE düğmesine basın. resmi yukarı / aşağı hareket ettirmek için ▲ veya ▼ düğmesine basın. Ardından ENTERE düğmesine basın. N Zoom: ► düğmesine basarak Konum seçeneğini seçin ve ardından ENTERE düğmesine basın. resmi yukarı ve aşağı hareket ettirmek için ▲ veya ▼ düğmesine basın. Ardından ENTERE düğmesine basın. ► düğmesine basarak Boyut seçeneğini seçin ve ardından ENTERE düğmesine basın. resim boyutunu dikey yönde büyütmek ya da küçültmek için ▲ veya ▼ düğmesine basın. Ardından ENTERE düğmesine basın. N HDMI(1080i) veya Component (1080i) modunda Ekrana Sığdır seçildikten sonra: ◄ veya ► düğmesine basarak Konum seçeneğini belirleyin. resmi hareket ettirmek için ▲, ▼, ◄ veya ► düğmesini kullanın. Sıfrl: ◄ veya ► düğmesine basarak Sıfrl seçeneğini seçin ve ardından ENTEREdüğmesine basın. Ayarları başlatabilirsiniz. N HdMI 720p girişiyle Ekrana Sığdır işlevini kullanırsanız, overscan işlevinde olduğu gibi 1 satır üstten, alttan, soldan ve sağdan kesilir. „ Ekran Modu → 16:9 / Geniş Yknlştrm / Zoom / 4:3 resim boyutunu 16:9 geniş açı Tv'de Oto Geniş ayarına getirirken, 4:3 WSS (Geniş Ekran Hizmeti) görüntü görmek istediğiniz görüntü boyutuna karar verebilir ya da hiçbir şey yapmayabilirsiniz. Her Avrupa ülkesi farklı resim boyutu gerektirir, dolayısıyla bu işlev kullanıcıların seçmesi için tasarlanmıştır. ● 16:9: resmi 16:9 geniş moduna ayarlar. ● Geniş Yknlştrm: resmin boyutunu 4:3'ten daha fazla büyütür. ● Zoom: resmin boyutunu ekranda dikey olarak büyütür. ● 4:3: resmi 4:3 normal moduna ayarlar. N Bu işlev Oto Geniş modunda kullanılabilir. N Bu işlev PC, Parça veya HDMI modunda kullanılamaz. BN68-03043A.indb 15 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:20Türkçe - 16 „ Dijital azal → Kpalı / Düşük / Orta / Yüksek / Oto Tv'nizin aldığı yayın sinyali zayıfsa, ekranda görülebilecek parazit ya da gölgeleri gidermek için dijital Gürültü Azaltma özelliği kullanılabilir. N Sinyal zayıfsa, en iyi resmi elde edinceye kadar diğer seçenekleri deneyin. „ HDMI Siyahlık Düzeyi → Normal / Düşük Ekran derinliğini ayarlamak için doğrudan ekrandaki siyahlık düzeyini seçebilirsiniz. N Bu işlev yalnızca harici giriş HdMI'ya (rGB sinyalleri) bağlandığında etkindir. „ Film modu → Kpalı / Oto Tv, tüm kaynaklardan film sinyallerini otomatik olarak algılamak ve işlemek ve en iyi kalite için resmi ayarlamak üzere ayarlanabilir. N Film modu Tv, Av, Parça (480i / 1080i) ve HdMI (480i / 1080i) tarafından desteklenir. ❑ Resim Sıfırlama → Resim Modunu Sıfırla / İptal Tüm resim ayarlarını varsayılan değerlere sıfırlar. N Sıfırlanacak bir resim modu seçin. Her resim modu için sıfırlama gerçekleştirilir. ● Resim Modunu Sıfırla: Mevcut resim değerleri varsayılan ayarlara döner. ¦ TV'nizi Bilgisayar (PC) Ekranı Olarak Kullanma PC Yazılımınızın Ayarlanması (Windows XP'ye göre) Tipik bir bilgisayarın Windows ekran ayarları aşağıda gösterilmektedir. Kullandığınız Windows'un sürümüne ve video kartınıza bağlı olarak PC'nizin gerçek ekranı büyük olasılıkla bundan farklıdır. Ancak, sizin bilgisayarınızda açılan ekranlar farklı görünse de, çoğu durumda aynı temel ayar bilgileri geçerli olacaktır. (değilse, bilgisayar üreticinize ya da Samsung Bayiine başvurun.) 1. İlk olarak Windows başlat menüsünden 'denetim Masası'nı tıklatın. 2. denetim masası penceresi göründüğünde, 'Görünüm ve Temalar' öğesini tıklatın, bir iletişim kutusu açılır. 3. denetim masası penceresi göründüğünde, 'Ekran'ı tıklatın, bir ekran iletişim kutusu açılır. 4. Ekran iletişim kutusunda 'Ayarlar' sekmesine gidin. doğru boyut ayarı (çözünürlük): En iyi-1360 x 768 piksel Ekran ayarları iletişim kutunuzda düşey frekans seçeneği varsa, doğru değer '60' ya da '60 Hz'dir. Yoksa, 'TAMAM' düğmesini tıklatın ve iletişim kutusundan çıkın. BN68-03043A.indb 16 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:20Türkçe - 17 Ekran Modları PC monitörünün türüne ve çözünürlüğüne bağlı olarak hem ekran konumu hem de boyutu farklı olabilir. Tablodaki çözünürlükler önerilmektedir. „ D-Sub ve HDMI/DVI Girişi Modu Çözünürlük Yatay Frekans (KHz) Dikey Frekans (Hz) Piksel Saati Frekansı (MHz) Senkronizasyon Polaritesi (Y/D) IBM 640 x 350 31,469 70,086 25,175 +/- 720 x 400 31,469 70,087 28,322 -/+ MAC 640 x 480 35,000 66,667 30,240 -/- 832 x 624 49,726 74,551 57,284 -/- VeSA CVT 720 x 576 35,910 59,950 32,750 -/+ 1280 x 720 44,772 59,855 74,500 -/+ 1280 x 720 56,456 74,777 95,750 -/+ VeSA DMT 640 x 480 31,469 59,940 25,175 -/- 640 x 480 37,500 75,000 31,500 -/- 640 x 480 37,861 72,809 31,500 -/- 800 x 600 37,879 60,317 40,000 +/+ 800 x 600 46,875 75,000 49,500 +/+ 800 x 600 48,077 72,188 50,000 +/+ 1024 x 768 48,363 60,004 65,000 -/- 1024 x 768 56,476 70,069 75,000 -/- 1024 x 768 60,023 75,029 78,750 +/+ 1360 x 768 47,712 60,015 85,500 +/+ VeSA GTF 1280 x 720 52,500 70,000 89,040 -/+ N HdMI/dvI kablo bağlantısı kullanırken HDMI (DVI) jakını kullanmalısınız. N Geçmeli tarama modu desteklenmemektedir. N Standartlara uymayan bir video biçimi seçilirse cihaz normal olarak çalışmayabilir. N Ayrı ve Kompozit modlar desteklenmektedir. SOG desteklenmemektedir. ¦ TV'nizin PC'nizle Ayarlanması N Ön ayar: PC modunu seçmek için SOURCE düğmesine basın. ❑ Otomatik Ayarlama Otomatik Ayarlama, cihazın PC ekranının, gelen PC video sinyaline göre kendini otomatik olarak ayarlamasını sağlar. İnce, kaba ve konum değerleri otomatik olarak ayarlanır. N Bu işlev dvI-HdMI modunda çalışmaz. T Araçlar menüsünü görüntülemek için TOOLS düğmesine basın. Otomatik Ayarlama değerini ayrıca Araçlar → Otomatik Ayarlama öğesini seçerek de ayarlayabilirsiniz. ❑ Ekran „ Kaba / İnce resim kalitesi ayarının amacı, resimdeki parazitleri ortadan kaldırmak veya azaltmaktır. Parazitleri yalnızca İnce ayarıyla ortadan kaldıramazsanız, frekans ayarlarını en iyi şekilde ayarlayın (Kaba) ve yeniden İnce ayar işlemi yapın. Parazit azaldığında, görüntüyü ekranın ortasına gelecek şekilde yeniden ayarlayın. „ PC Konumu Tv ekranına sığmıyorsa, PC'nin ekran konumunu ayarlayın. dikey Konum ayarlaması için ▲ veya ▼ düğmesine basın. Yatay Konum ayarlaması için ◄ veya ► düğmesine basın. „ Görüntü Sıfırla Tüm görüntü ayarlarını, fabrika standart değerlerine getirebilirsiniz. Parlaklık : 45 Netlik : 50 Otomatik Ayarlama ► Ekran Gelişmiş Ayarlar resim Seçenekleri resim Sıfırlama Görüntü BN68-03043A.indb 17 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:20Türkçe - 18 SES KONTROLÜ ¦ Ses Menüsünü Yapılandırma ❑ Modu → Standart / Müzik / Sinema / Sesi Netleştir / Kişisel Kişisel tercihlerinize uygun bir ses modu seçebilirsiniz. T Araçlar menüsünü görüntülemek için TOOLS düğmesine basın. Ses modunu ayrıca Araçlar → Ses Modu öğesini seçerek de yapılandırabilirsiniz. „ Standart Normal ses modunu seçer. „ Müzik Müziği diğer seslerin üstünde vurgular. „ Sinema Filmler için en iyi sesi sağlar. „ Sesi Netleştir İnsan sesini diğer seslerin üstünde vurgular. „ Kişisel Kişiselleştirilmiş ses ayarlarınızı geri çağırır. ❑ Ekolayzer Ses ayarları kişisel tercihlerinize göre değiştirilebilir. „ Modu Kişisel tercihlerinize uygun bir ses modu seçebilirsiniz. „ Balans Sağ ve sol hoparlörler arasındaki dengeyi kontrol eder. „ 100Hz / 300Hz / 1KHz / 3KHz / 10KHz (Bant Genişliği Ayarı) Farklı bant genişliği frekanslarının seviyelerini ayarlamak için „ Sıfrl Ekolayzır ayarlarını varsayılan değerlere sıfırlar. ❑ SRS TruSurround HD → Kpalı / Açık SrS TruSurround Hd, 5.1 çok kanallı içeriği iki hoparlör üzerinden oynatma sorununu çözen patentli bir SrS teknolojisidir. TruSurround özelliği, televizyonun içinde bulunan sabit televizyon hoparlörleri dahil olmak üzere, her tür iki hoparlörlü yeniden oynatma sistemi üzerinden şaşırtıcı düzeyde gerçek surround ses deneyiminin elde edilmesini sağlar. Tüm çok kanallı formatlarla tam uyumludur. ❑ Ses Dili (yalnızca dijital kanallar) Ses dillerinin varsayılan ayarını değiştirebilirsiniz. Gelen akışın dil bilgilerini görüntüler. N Yalnızca gerçekte yayınlanan diller arasından dil seçebilirsiniz. N Bir dijital kanal izlerken bu işlev seçilebilir. ❑ Ses Biçimi → MPEG / Dolby dijital (yalnızca dijital kanallar) Hem ana hoparlörden hem ses alıcısından ses verildiğinde, ana hoparlör ve ses alıcısı arasındaki şifre çözme hızı farkından dolayı ses yankısı oluşabilir. Bu durumda, Tv Hoparlörü işlevini kullanın. N Yayın sinyaline göre Ses Biçimi görüntülenir. N Bir dijital kanal izlerken bu işlev seçilebilir. Modu : Kişisel ► Ekolayzer SrS TruSurround Hd : Kpalı Ses dili : - - - Ses Biçimi : - - - Sesli Açıklama Oto ses ayar : Kpalı Ses BN68-03043A.indb 18 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:20Türkçe - 19 ❑ Sesli Açıklama (yalnızca dijital kanallar) Bu, görme özürlü kişilere ilave ses bandı kanalı sağlayan yardımcı bir ses işlevidir. Bu işlev Ad (Sesli Açıklama) için, yayıncıdan gelen ana sesle birlikte gönderildiğinde Audio Stream'i kullanır. Kullanıcılar Sesli Açıklama değerini Açık veya Kpalı konumlarına getirebilirler ve sesi kontrol edebilirler. O Kapalı or Açık ayarına getirmek için uzaktan kumandadaki AD düğmesine basın. „ Sesli Açıklama → Kpalı / Açık Ses açıklaması işlevini açar ya da kapatır. „ Düzey Ses açıklama seviyesini ayarlayabilirsiniz. N Düzey ayarı, Sesli Açıklama öğesi Açık olarak ayarlandığında etkindir. ❑ Oto ses ayar → Kpalı / Açık Her yayın istasyonunun kendi sinyal koşulları vardır ve kanal her değiştiğinde ses seviyesini ayarlamak kolay değildir. Bu özellik modülasyon sinyali yüksekse ses çıkışını düşürerek ya da modülasyon sinyali çok zayıfsa ses çıkışını yükselterek, istenen kanalın ses düzeyini otomatik olarak ayarlamanızı sağlar. ❑ Hoparlörü Seçin → Harici Hoparlör / TV Hoparlörü Sesi ayrı hoparlörlerden duymak istediğiniz takdirde dahili amplifikatörü iptal edin. N Ses düğmeleri ve MUTE düğmeleri, Hoparlörü Seçin öğesi Harici Hoparlör olarak ayarlandığında çalışmaz. N Hoparlörü Seçin menüsünde Harici Hoparlör seçimini yaptıysanız ses ayarları sınırlanacaktır. ❑ Ses Sıfırlama → Tümünü Sıfırla / Ses Modunu Sıfırla / İptal Ses ayarlarını fabrika varsayılan değerlerine geri yükleyebilirsiniz. ¦ Ses Modunun Seçilmesi Araçlar menüsünde ses modunu ayarlayabilirsiniz. Dual l ll konumuna ayarladığınızda geçerli ses modu ekranda görüntülenecektir. Ses Türü Çift 1 / 2 Varsayılan A2 Stereo Mono MONO Otomatik değiştirme Stereo STEREO ↔ MONO Çift DUAL 1 ↔ DUAL 2 DUAL 1 NICAM Stereo Mono MONO Otomatik değiştirme Stereo MONO ↔ STEREO Çift MONO ↔ DUAL 1 DUAL 2 DUAL 1 N Stereo sinyali zayıfsa ve otomatik geçiş meydana geliyorsa mono moduna geçin. N Bu işlev yalnızca stereo ses sinyalinde etkinleştirilir. Mono ses sinyalinde devre dışı bırakılır. N Bu işlev sadece Tv modunda kullanılabilir. BN68-03043A.indb 19 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:20Türkçe - 20 KURULUM ¦ Kurulum Menüsünün Yapılandırılması ❑ Menü Dili Menü dilini ayarlayabilirsiniz. ❑ Zaman „ Saat Tv'nin çeşitli saat özelliklerini kullanabilmek için saatin ayarlanması gereklidir. N INFO düğmesine her basışınızda geçerli zaman görüntülenecektir. N Elektrik kablosunun bağlantısını keserseniz, saati yeniden ayarlamanız gerekir. ● Saat Modu Geçerli saati elle ya da otomatik olarak ayarlayabilirsiniz. – Oto: Geçerli saati, dijital yayından gelen saat ile otomatik olarak ayarlayın. – Manuel: Geçerli saati belirli bir saate elle ayarlayın. N Yayın istasyonuna ve sinyale bağlı olarak, otomatik saat doğru olarak ayarlanabilir. Bu durumda saati elle ayarlayın. N Saati otomatik olarak ayarlamak için anten veya kablo bağlı olmalıdır. ● Saat Ayarı Geçerli saati elle ayarlayabilirsiniz. N Saat Modu öğesini Manuel olarak ayarladıysanız bu öğeyi ayarlayın. N Uzaktan kumanda üzerindeki sayı düğmelerine basarak gün, ay, yıl, saat ve dakika ayarlarını doğrudan yapabilirsiniz. „ Kapanış Ayarı → Kpalı / 30 dak / 60 dak / 90 dak / 120 dak / 150 dak / 180 dak Önceden ayarlanan zaman (30, 60, 90, 120, 150 ve 180 dakika) geçtiğinde uyku zamanlayıcısı Tv'yi otomatik olarak kapatır. N Zamanlayıcı 0'a geldiği zaman Tv otomatik olarak bekleme moduna geçer. N Kapanış Ayarı işlevini iptal etmek için Kpalı seçimini yapın. T Araçlar menüsünü görüntülemek için TOOLS düğmesine basın. Uyku zamanlayıcısını ayrıca Araçlar → Kapanış Ayarı öğesini seçerek de ayarlayabilirsiniz. „ Zamanlayıcı 1 / Zamanlayıcı 2 / Zamanlayıcı 3 Üç farklı açık/kapalı zamanlayıcı ayarı yapılabilir. Önce saati ayarlamanız gerekir. ● Açılış Zamanı: Saati, dakikayı ve etkinleştir/devre dışı bırak ayarını yapın. (Zamanlayıcıyı seçtiğiniz ayara göre etkinleştirmek için Activate ayarına getirin.) ● Kapanış Zamanı: Saati, dakikayı ve etkinleştir/devre dışı bırak ayarını yapın. (Zamanlayıcıyı seçtiğiniz ayara göre etkinleştirmek için Activate ayarına getirin.) ● Düzey: İstenen açma ses seviyesini seçin. ● Anten Tipi: Dış Anten veya Kablo seçimini yapın. ● Kanal: İstediğiniz kanalı seçin. ● Tekrarla: Bir Kez, Her gün, Pts~Cum, Pts~Cts, Cts~Paz veya Manuel seçimini yapın. N Manuel seçildiğinde, haftanın istenilen gününü seçmek için ► düğmesine basın. İstenilen gün üstünde ENTERE düğmesine basın, c işareti görünecektir. N Uzaktan kumanda üzerindeki numara düğmelerini kullanarak saat, dakika ve kanalı ayarlayabilirsiniz. N Otomatik Kapanma Zamanlayıcıyı Açık olarak ayarlandığınızda, zamanlayıcı tarafından açılmasından sonra 3 saat boyunca herhangi bir kumanda kullanılmadığında televizyon kapatılır. Bu işlev yalnızca zamanlayıcı Açık modundayken kullanılabilir ve Tv'nin çok uzun süre açık kalmasından kaynaklanabilecek aşırı ısınmayı önler. Plug & Play Menü Dili : Türkçe ► zaman Yayın Güvenlik Genel Kurulum BN68-03043A.indb 20 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:21Türkçe - 21 ❑ Yayın „ Altyazı Altyazıları etkinleştirebilir veya devre dışı bırakabilirsiniz. Altyazı Modunu ayarlamak için bu menüyü kullanın. Menü altındaki Normal, temel altyazı, İşitme engelli seçeneği ise işitme engelli kişilere yönelik altyazıdır. ● Altyazı → Kpalı / Açık: Altyazıları açar ya da kapatır. ● Modu → Normal / İşitme engelli: Altyazı modunu ayarlar. ● Altyazı Dili: Altyazı dilini ayarlar. N Seyrettiğiniz program İşitme engelli fonksiyonunu desteklemiyorsa, İşitme engelli modu seçilse bile otomatik olarak Normal etkinleşir. N Seçilen dilin yayında kullanılabilir olmaması durumunda İngilizce varsayılan dildir. O Uzaktan kumanda üzerindeki SUBT. düğmesine basarak da bu seçenekleri seçebilirsiniz. „ Dijital Metin → Devre Dışı / Etkinleştir (Yalnızca İngiltere) Program dijital metinle yayınlanırsa bu özellik etkinleştirilir. N MHeG (Multimedia and Hypermedia Information Coding experts Group) Çoklu ortam ve hiper ortamda kullanılan veri kodlama sistemlerinin Uluslararası bir standardıdır. Bu, hareketsiz görüntü, karakter hizmeti, animasyon, grafik ve video dosyaları gibi veri birleştiren hiper ortam ve çoklu ortam verilerini içeren MPEG sisteminden daha yüksek düzeydedir. MHEG, kullanıcı çalışma süresi etkileşim teknolojisi olup aralarında vOd (İsteğe Bağlı video), ITv (Etkileşimli Tv), EC (Elektronik Ticaret), tele-eğitim, tele-konferans, dijital kitaplıklar ve ağ oyunlarının bulunduğu çeşitli ortamlara uygulanır. „ Teletekst Dili dil türünü seçerek teletekst dilini ayarlayabilirsiniz. N Seçilen dilin yayında kullanılabilir olmaması durumunda İngilizce varsayılan dildir. „ Tercih ● Birinci Yayın Dili / İkinci Yayın Dili / Birinci Altyazı Dili / İkinci Altyazı Dili / Birinci Teletekst Dili / İkinci Teletekst Dili Bu özelliği kullanarak kullanıcılar dillerden birini seçebilir. Kullanıcı bir kanal seçtiğinde, burada seçilen dil varsayılan olarak kullanılır. dil ayarını değiştirirseniz, language menüsünün Altyazı dili , Ses dili ve Teletekst dili ayarları otomatik olarak seçilen dile geçer. dil menüsünün Altyazı dili, Ses dili ve Teletekst dili öğeleri, geçerli kanalın desteklediği dillerin bir listesini gösterir ve seçim vurgulanır. Bu dil ayarını değiştirirseniz, yeni seçim sadece o anki kanal için geçerlidir. değiştirilen ayar, Tercih menüsünün Birinci Altyazı dili, Birinci Yayın dili veya Birinci Teletekst dili ayarını değiştirmez. „ Genel Arayüz ● CI Menüsü Bu, kullanıcının CAM sağlanan menüden seçim yapmasına olanak sağlar. Menü PC Kartına göre CI Menüsü seçin. ● Uygulama Bilgisi. Bu, CI'ya takılı CAM hakkındaki bilgileri içerir ve görüntüler. N Uygulama Bilgisi ekleme CI KArTI hakkındadır. Tv Açık ya da Kpalı da olsa her an CAM öğesini yükleyebilirsiniz. 1. En yakın bayinizi ziyaret ederek veya telefonla arayarak CI CAM modülünü satın alın. 2. CI CArd'ı yerine oturana kadar CAM birimine ok yönünde yerleştirin. 3. CI CArd takılı olan CAM birimini genel arayüz yuvasına yerleştirin. (CAM'ı yuvayla paralel olacak şekilde ucuna doğru ok yönünde yerleştirin.) 4. Karışmış sinyal kanalında bir resim görüp göremediğinizi kontrol edin. N CAM bazı ülkelerde ve bölgelerde desteklenmez, yetkili satıcınızla görüşün. BN68-03043A.indb 21 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:21Türkçe - 22 ❑ Yayın Kurulum penceresi görünmeden önce PIN numarası giriş ekranı görünür. 4 basamaklı PIN numaranızı girin. Yeni bir Tv'nin varsayılan PIN numarası 0-0-0-0 dır. Menüden PIN Değiştir seçimini yaparak PIN'i değiştirebilirsiniz. „ Çocuk Kilidi → Kpalı / Açık Bu özellik çocuklar ve benzeri yetkisiz kullanıcıların uygunsuz programları izlemesini ses ve görüntüyü kapatarak önleyebilmenizi sağlar. N Kanal listesi içindeki bazı kanalları kilitleyebilirsiniz. (bkz. sayfa 13) N Çocuk Kilidi yalnızca Tv modunda kullanılabilir. „ Ebeveyn Kilidi Bu özellik, kullanıcının belirlediği 4 haneli PIN (Kişisel Kimlik Belirleme Numarası) kodu sayesinde çocuklar gibi izin verilmeyen kullanıcıların uygunsuz programları izlemesini engellemenizi sağlar. N Ebeveyn Kilidi öğesi ülkeye göre değişir. N Ebeveyn Kilidi ayarlandığında, ‘\’ sembolü gösterilir. N Tmn İzn Vr: Tüm Tv derecelendirmelerinin kilidini kaldırmak için basın. Tmn Engll: Tüm Tv derecelendirmelerini kilitlemek için basın. „ PIN Değiştir Tv'nin kurulumu için gereken kişisel kimlik numaranızı değiştirebilirsiniz. N PIN kodunu unutursanız, PIN'in 0-0-0-0 olarak sıfırlanması için uzaktan kumanda düğmelerine aşağıdaki sırayla basın: POWER (Kapalı) → MUTE → 8 → 2 → 4 → POWER (Açık). ❑ Genel „ Oyun Modu → Kpalı / Açık PlayStation™ veya Xbox™ gibi bir oyun konsoluna bağlanıldığında, oyun menüsünü seçerek daha gerçekçi oyun deneyimi. N Oyun konsoluyla bağlantıyı kesmek ve harici bir cihaza bağlanmak için, kurulum menüsüne girip oyun modunu iptal edin. N Oyun Modu içindeyken Tv menüsünü görüntülerseniz ekran hafifçe sallanır. N Oyun Modu, normal TV ve PC modunda kullanılamaz. N Oyun Modu Açık ise: – resim modu otomatik olarak Standart olarak değişir ve kullanıcılar modu değiştiremez. – Ses modu otomatik olarak Kişisel olarak değişir ve kullanıcılar modu değiştiremez. Ekolayzırı kullanarak sesi ayarlayın. N Sesi Sıfırla işlevi etkinleştirilir. Ekolayzırı ayarladıktan sonra Sıfırla işlevinin seçilmesi, ekolayzırı fabrika ayarlarına getirir. „ Enrj. Tasarrufu → Kpalı / Düşük / Orta / Yüksek / Resim Kapalı / Oto Bu özellik, güç tüketimini azaltmak için Tv'nin parlaklığını ayarlar. Gece Tv izlerken Enrj. Tasarrufu modu seçeneğini Yüksek ayarına getirerek, gözlerinizin yorulmasını engelleyebilir ve güç tüketimini azaltabilirsiniz. Resim Kapalı seçeneğini seçerseniz, ekran kapanır ve yalnızca sesi duyabilirsiniz. Resim Kapalı’dan çıkmak için herhangi bir düğmeye basın. N Tools menüsünde, Resim Kapalı işlevi desteklenmez.. T Araçlar menüsünü görüntülemek için TOOLS düğmesine basın. Enerji Tasarrufu seçeneğini ayrıca Araçlar→ Enrj. Tasarrufu öğesini seçerek ayarlayabilirsiniz. „ Melodi → Kpalı / Düşük / Orta / Yüksek Tv Açıldığında veya Kapandığında bir melodi sesi çıkması sağlanabilir. N Melodi aşağıdaki durumlarda çalışmaz – MUTE düğmesine basıldığı için Tv'den hiç ses çıkışı olmadığında. – (–) Ses düğmesine basıldığı için Tv'den hiç ses çıkışı olmadığında. – Tv, Uyku Zamanlayıcısı işlevi yoluyla kapatıldığında. BN68-03043A.indb 22 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:21Türkçe - 23 GİRİŞ / DESTEK ¦ Giriş Menüsünü Yapılandırma ❑ Kaynak Listesi Tv'yi ya da dvd/Blu-ray oynatıcılar veya Uydu alıcıları (Set Üstü Kutu) gibi Tv'ye bağlanacak diğer harici giriş kaynaklarını seçmek için kullanın. Tercih ettiğiniz giriş kaynağını seçmek için kullanın. O Bir harici sinyal kaynağını izlemek için uzaktan kumandadaki SOURCE düğmesine basın. TV modu, TV düğmesine basılarak seçilebilir. „ TV / Ext. / AV / Parça / PC / HDMI(DVI) N Yalnızca Tv'ye bağlı harici aygıtları seçebilirsiniz. Kaynak Listesi listesinde bağlanan girişler vurgulanacak ve üstte sıralanacaktır. Bağlanmamış girişler altta sıralanacaktır. N Ext. ve PC her zaman etkin durumda kalır. N TOOLS (Araçlar): İsim Değiştir ve Bilgi menülerini görüntüler. ❑ İsim Değiştir Giriş kaynağı seçiminizi kolaylaştırmak için giriş jaklarına bağlı cihazlara isim verin. „ Video / DVD / Kablolu Alıcı / Uydu Alıcısı / PVR Setüstü Kutusu / Receiver / Oyun / Video Kamera / PC / DVI / DVI PC / TV / IPTV / Blu- ray / HD DVD / DMA N HDMI (DVI) bağlantı noktasına bir HdMI/dvI kablosu bağlandığında, Giriş modunun İsim Değiştir bölümünde HDMI/DVI modunu DVI veya DVI PC olarak ayarlamanız gerekir. Bu durumda, ayrı bir ses bağlantısı gereklidir. ¦ Destek Menüsünü Yapılandırma ❑ Kendi Kendini Tanıma „ Görüntü Testi resim sorunu olduğunu düşünüyorsanız, resim testini gerçekleştirin. Sorunun devam edip etmediğini görmek için ekrandaki renk desenini kontrol edin. ● Evet: Test deseni görünmüyorsa veya test deseninde parazit varsa, Evet öğesini seçin. Tv'de bir sorun olabilir. Yardım almak için Samsung'un çağrı merkezine başvurun. ● Hayır: Test deseni düzgün olarak görüntülenirse, Hayır seçimini yapın. Harici ekipmanınızda sorun olabilir. Bağlantılarınızı kontrol edin. Sorun devam ederse, harici cihazın kullanıcı kılavuzuna bakın. „ Ses Testi Ses sorunu olduğunu düşünüyorsanız, ses testini gerçekleştirin. Tv'nizde yerleşik melodi sesini çalarak sesi kontrol edebilirsiniz. Ekranda 'Bu ses testinde sorun hala devam ediyor mu?' görünür. N Ses testini gerçekleştirmeden önce Tv hoparlörlerinden ses işitmezseniz, Sound menüsündeki Hoparlör Seçimi değerinin TV Hoparlörü olduğundan emin olun. N Hoparlörü Seçin, Harici Hoparlör olarak ayarlansa veya MUTE düğmesine basılarak ses kapatılsa bile melodi test sırasında duyulacaktır. ● Evet: Ses testi sırasında sesi tüm hoparlörlerden değil de yalnızca bir hoparlörden duyuyorsanız, Evet seçimini yapın. Tv'de bir sorun olabilir. Yardım almak için Samsung'un çağrı merkezine başvurun. ● Hayır: Hoparlörlerden ses duyabiliyorsanız, Hayır seçimini yapın. Harici ekipmanınızda sorun olabilir. Bağlantılarınızı kontrol edin. Sorun devam ederse, harici cihazın kullanıcı kılavuzuna bakın. „ Sinyal Bilgileri (yalnızca dijital kanallar) 'Net olmayan'dan nete alış kalitesi değişebilen analog kanallardan farklı olarak, dijital (HdTv) kanallar mükemmel alım kalitesine sahiptir veya hiç almazsınız. Analog kanallardan farklı olarak, bir dijital kanala ince ayar yapamazsınız. Ancak, kullanılabilir dijital kanalların alımını artırmak için anteninizi ayarlayabilirsiniz. N Sinyal gücü ölçer sinyalin zayıf olduğunu gösteriyorsa, sinyal gücünü artırmak için anteninizi fiziksel olarak ayarlayın. En güçlü sinyale sahip en iyi konumu buluncaya kadar anteninizi ayarlamaya devam edin. Kendi Kendini Tanıma ► Yazılım Yükseltme Hd Bağlantısı Kılavuzu Samsung'a Başvurun destek Kaynak Listesi İsim değiştir Giriş BN68-03043A.indb 23 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:21Türkçe - 24 ❑ Yazılım Yükseltme Ürününüzü yeni dijital Televizyon özelliklerine uygun şekilde güncel tutmak için, normal Televizyon sinyalinin bir parçası olarak yazılım yükseltmeleri periyodik şekilde yayınlanır. Bu sinyaller otomatik olarak algılanır ve yazılım yükseltme etiketi görüntülenir. Yükseltmeyi yükleme seçeneği sunulur. „ Çevrimiçi olarak Bellenim yükseltmesini içeren bir USB sürücüsünü Tv'ye takın. Yükseltmeler uygulanırken lütfen güç bağlantısını kesmemeye ya da USB sürücüsünü çıkarmamaya dikkat edin. Yerleşik bellek yükseltmesinin tamamlanmasından sonra Tv otomatik olarak kapanıp açılacaktır. Güncelleme tamamlandıktan sonra lütfen yerleşik bellek sürümünü kontrol edin. Yazılım yükseltildiğinde yaptığınız görüntü ve ses ayarları varsayılan (fabrika) ayarlarına geri dönecektir. Ayarlarınızı bir yere yazmanızı öneririz, bu sayede yükseltmeden sonra kolayca sıfırlayabilirsiniz. „ Kanal yoluyla Yazılımı yayın sinyalini kullanarak yükseltir. N İşlev, yazılım iletimi süresinde seçilirse, bu fonksiyon mevcut yazılımı arar ve yazılımı indirir. N Yazılımın indirilmesi için gereken süre siyal durumuna göre belirlenir. „ Bekleme Modunda Yükseltme Ana güç açıkken yazılım güncellemesine devam etmek isterseniz, ▲ veya ▼ düğmesine basarak On seçeneğini belirleyin. Bekleme moduna girildikten 45 dakika sonra elle yükseltme otomatik olarak yürütülür. Cihazın gücü içerden açıldığı için, lCd ürünün ekranı hafifçe açık olabilir. Yazılım yükseltmesi tamamlanıncaya kadar 1 saatten uzun süre bu durum devam edebilir. „ Alternatif Yazılım Yazılım sürümü bilgilerini göstermek için. ❑ HD Bağlantısı Kılavuzu Bu menü, Hd Tv'de en yüksek kaliteye ulaşmak için gereken bağlantı yöntemini sunar. Tv'ye harici cihazlar bağlarken buradaki bilgilere başvurun. ❑ Samsung'a Başvurun Tv'niz doğru çalışmadığında ya da yazılım yükseltmesi istediğinizde bu bilgilere göz atın. Çağrı merkezi, ürün ve yazılım dosyası indirme yöntemi konusundaki bilgilere göz atabilirsiniz. TV Arka Paneli USB Sürücü BN68-03043A.indb 24 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:22Türkçe - 25 KULLANIM ÖNERİLERİ ¦ Teletekst Özelliği Televizyon istasyonlarının çoğu, Teletekst aracılığı ile yazılı bilgi hizmeti sunar. Teletekst hizmetinin dizin sayfasında nasıl kullanılacağıyla ilgili bilgiler bulunur. Ayrıca uzaktan kumanda düğmelerini kullanarak gereksinimlerine uygun seçenekleri belirleyebilirsiniz. N Teletekst bilgilerinin doğru görünmesi için kanal alışının düzenli olması gerekir. Aksi takdirde bilgiler eksik olabilir ya da bazı sayfalar görüntülenmeyebilir. N Uzaktan kumandanın sayısal tuşlarına basarak Teletekst sayfalarını değiştirebilirsiniz. 1 0(mod) Teletekst modunu seçmek için basın (lIST/FlOF). lIST modundayken basarsanız, liste kaydetme moduna geçer. liste kaydetme modunda, 8 (kaydet) düğmesini kullanarak Teletekst sayfasını listeye kaydedebilirsiniz. 2 5(göster) Gizli metinleri (örneğin test oyunları yanıtlarını) göstermek için kullanılır. Normal ekranı görüntülemek için yeniden basın. 3 4(boyut) Ekranın üst yarısında çift boyutlu harfleri görüntülemek için basın. Ekranın alt yarısı için yeniden basın. Normal ekranı görüntülemek için bir kez daha basın. 4 8(Kaydet) Teletekst sayfalarını kaydetmek için kullanılır. 5 Renk düğmeleri (kırmızı/yeşil/sarı/ mavi) Yayın şirketi FASTEKST sistemini kullanıyorsa, Teletekst sayfasında yer alan çeşitli konuların renkleri farklıdır ve bu konular renk düğmeleri basılarak seçilebilir. İstediğiniz sayfaya karşılık gelen renk düğmesine basın. Görünen sayfa, aynı biçimde seçilebilecek diğer renklere ayrılmış bilgiler içerir. Önceki ya da sonraki sayfayı görüntülemek için ilgili renk düğmesine basın. 6/(Teletekst açık/karışık) Teletekst hizmeti sağlayan kanalı seçtikten sonra Teletekst modunu etkinleştirmek için bu düğmeye basın. Teleteksti, normal yayın ekranının üzerine bindirmek için iki kez basın. 7 :(çıkış) Teletekst gösteriminden çıkış. 8 1(alt sayfa) varsa alt sayfayı görüntülemek için kullanılır. 9 2(sayfa yukarı) Bir sonraki Teletekst sayfasını görüntülemek için kullanılır. 0 3(sayfa aşağı) Bir önceki Teletekst sayfasını görüntülemek için kullanılır. ! 9 (tut) Seçilen sayfada, otomatik olarak takip eden başka sayfalar bağlıysa, bulunduğunuz sayfayı tutmak için kullanılır. devam ettirmek için yeniden basın. @ 6(dizin) Teleteksti görüntülerken istediğiniz zaman dizin (içindekiler) sayfasını görüntülemek için kullanılır. # 7(iptal) Sayfa aranırken yayını göstermek için kullanılır. Teletekst sayfaları altı kategoriye göre düzenlenmiştir: Bölüm İçindekiler A Seçilen sayfa numarası. B Yayın yapan kanalın adı. C Geçerli sayfa numarası ya da arama göstergeleri. D Tarih ve saat. E Metin. F Durum bilgileri. FASTeKST bilgileri. 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 0 ! # @ 7 BN68-03043A.indb 25 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:22Türkçe - 26 N Teletekst bilgileri çoğunlukla art arda sıralanmış birden çok sayfaya bölünmüştür ve bunlara: – Sayfa numarasını girerek – listeden bir konu seçerek – renklere göre ayrılmış başlık seçerek (FASTEKST sistemi) erişilebilir N Tv'nin desteklediği Teletekst düzeyi ek grafik ve metin de görüntüleyebilen sürüm 2.5'tir. N Aktarıma bağlı olarak, Teletekst görüntülenirken boş yan paneller oluşabilir. N Bu gibi durumlarda, ek grafik veya metin aktarılmaz. N Sürüm 2.5'i desteklemeyen eski Tv'lerin Teletekst aktarımına bakılmaksızın ek grafik veya metin görüntüleme özelliği yoktur. O Teletekst ekranından çıkmak için TV düğmesine basın. N Teletekst 16:9, resim 16:9 ¦ Standın Ayarlanması (yalnızca 19 inç modeli) 1. Tv'nin ön tarafını Şekil 1'de gösterildiği gibi masada yumuşak bir bez veya minder üstüne yerleştirin. – Tv'nin altını masa kenarıyla hizalayın. 2. Tv arkasının merkezine basın. Standın arkasındaki düğmeye basarken standı Şekil 2'deki gibi ayarlayın. 3. Tv'yi masaya güvenli bir şekilde yerleştirin. ¦ TV Açısının Ayarlanması (yalnızca 19 inç modeli) N Standı ayarlarken, standın arkasındaki düğmeye basın. 1. Şekil 1, lCd'yi standında kullanırkenki ayarlama açısını (-2°~14°) göstermektedir. N Aşırı derecede eğildiğinde lCd Tv hasara neden olabilecek şekilde devrilebilir. 2. Şekil 2, lCd'yi standdan duvar montajına dönüştürdüğünüzdeki ayarlama açısını (14°~80°) göstermektedir. 3. Şekil 3, lCd Tv'yi duvara monte ettiğinizdeki ayarlama açısını (0°~10°) göstermektedir. N Açıyı 1'den 2'ye veya 3'ten 2'ye değiştirirken bir "Tık" sesi duyarsınız. 1 2 1 TV'yi standında kullanırken açı ayarlama. 2 Standdan Duvar Montajına dönüştürürken açı ayarlama (1→ 3, 3→1) 3 LCD TV duvara monte edildiğinde açı ayarlama BN68-03043A.indb 26 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:23Türkçe - 27 ¦ VESA Uyumlu Montaj Araçlarının Takılması (yalnızca 19 inç modeli) 1. Tv'yi ön tarafı masa üzerindeki yumuşak bir bez veya mindere gelecek şekilde koyun. 2. Standın arkasındaki düğmeye basarak standı ayarlayın. 3. Montaj parçasıyla (birlikte verilmez), standın altındaki delikleri hizalayın ve kollu tip tabanlıkla, duvara monte edilen askı ya da diğer tabanlıklarla (birlikte verilmez) birlikte gelen dört vidayla tutturun. ¦ Dekoratif Kapakları Kullanma (yalnızca 19 inç modeli) 1. Standı kullanmadan, Tv'yi duvara monte ederken, dekoratif kapakları resimde 1 görüldüğü gibi deliklere takın. 2. dekoratif kapakları taktıktan sonra, resim 2'de görüldüğü gibi 4 vidayı da kullanarak kapakları sıkın. 1 2 Düğme Montaj parçası (Ayrı olarak satılır) 1 2 BN68-03043A.indb 27 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:23Türkçe - 28 ¦ Standı Takma 1. lCd Tv'nizi standa takın. N Tv'yi iki veya daha fazla kişi taşımalıdır. N Standı takarken standın önü ve arkasını karıştırmamaya dikkat edin. N Tv'nin standa düzgün bir seviyede takıldığından emin olmak için, Tv'nin sağ kenarının sol üstüne aşağı doğru aşırı güç uygulamayın. 2. 1 konumuna iki vidayı sıkıştırın ve sonra 2 konumuna iki vidayı sıkıştırın. N Ürünü yukarı kaldırın ve vidaları sıkıştırın. lCd Tv aşağı yerleşmişken vidaları sıkıştırırsanız bir tarafa eğilebilir. ¦ Duvara Montaj Kitinin Takılması duvara montaj öğeleri (ayrı satılır) ile Tv'yi duvara monte edebilirsiniz. duvara Montaj kitinin takılmasıyla ilgili daha fazla bilgi için, duvara Montaj öğeleriyle birlikte verilen talimatlara bakın. duvara montaj braketini takarken yardım için bir teknisyenle görüşün. Samsung Electronics, Tv'yi kendiniz monte etmeyi seçtiğinizde kendinize ya da başkalarına vereceğiniz hasarlardan sorumlu değildir. duvara Montaj Kitinizi Tv'niz açıkken kurmayın. Elektrik çarpması sonucunda kişisel yaralanmaya neden olabilir. ¦ Hırsıza Karşı Kensington Kilidini Kullanma Kensington Kilidi, televizyonu halka açık bir ortamda kullanıyorsanız, sistemi fiziksel olarak sabitlemek için kullanılan bir aygıttır. Üreticiye bağlı olarak, görünüm ve kilitleme yöntemi resimde gösterilenden farklı olabilir. doğru kullanım için Kensington Kilidiyle birlikte verilen kılavuza başvurun. N lütfen Tv’nin arkasındaki “K” simgesini bulun. Kensington yuvası “K” simgesinin yanındadır. Ürünü kilitlemek için, aşağıdaki adımları izleyin: 1. Kensington kilidi kablosunu, masa veya sandalye gibi büyük ve sabit bir nesneye sarın. 2. Kilidin takılı olduğu kablo ucunu, Kensington kilidi kablosunun kıvrımlı ucuna doğru kaydırın. 3. Kilitleme aygıtını, ürün üzerindeki Kensington kilidine takın (1). 4. Kilidi kilitleyin. N Bunlar genel yönergelerdir. Kesin yönergeler için, kilitleme aygıtı ile birlikte sağlanan Kullanıcı kılavuzuna bakın. N Kilitleme cihazının ayrıca satın alınması gerekmektedir. N Kensington Kilidinin konumu, modeline bağlı olarak farklılık gösterebilir. <İsteğe bağlı> 1 BN68-03043A.indb 28 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:24Türkçe - 29 ¦ Kurulum Alanının Sabitlenmesi Uygun havalandırma için, ürün ve diğer nesneler (duvar gibi) arasında gerekli mesafeyi bırakın. Buna dikkat edilmemesi ürünün dahili sıcaklığında gerçekleşecek artış nedeniyle yangına veya üründe bir soruna neden olabilir. Ürünü şekilde gösterildiği mesafeyi bırakarak monte edin. N Bir stand veya duvar montajı kullanırken, yalnızca Samsung Electronics tarafından sağlanan parçaları kullanın. Ҟ Başka bir üretici tarafından sağlanan parçaların kullanılması, ürünün düşmesi nedeniyle üründe bir soruna veya yaralanmaya neden olabilir. Ҟ Başka bir üretici tarafından sağlanan parçaların kullanılması, yetersiz havalandırma nedeniyle ürünün dahili sıcaklığı artacağından üründe bir soruna veya yangına neden olabilir. N Görünüm ürüne bağlı olarak değişiklik gösterebilir. Ürünü bir standla monte ederken Ürünü bir duvar montajıyla monte ederken 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm ¦ TV'yi Duvara Sabitleme Dikkat: Tv'yi çekme, itme veya üzerine çıkma Tv'yi düşürebilir. Özellikle çocuklarınızın Tv'ye asılmamasına veya Tv'nin dengesini bozmamasına özen gösterin; böyle bir durumda, Tv devrilebilir ve ciddi yaralanmalara veya ölüme neden olabilir. Güvenlik Notundaki tüm güvenlik önlemlerine uyun. Birimin daha dengeli durması için, güvenlik amacıyla aşağıdaki talimatları uygulayarak düşmeyi önleyici cihazı takın. „ TV'nin düşmesini önlemek için: 1. vidaları sıkıştırıcı parçalara yerleştirin ve duvara sıkı bir şekilde sabitleyin. vidaların, duvara sağlam bir şekilde takıldıklarını onaylayın. N duvar tipine bağlı olarak dübel gibi ek malzemelere ihtiyacınız olabilir. N Gerekli sıkıştırıcı parçalar, vidalar ve bağ ürünle birlikte sağlanmadığı için, lütfen bunları ayrı olarak satın alın. 2. Tv'nin arkasında ortadaki vidaları çıkarın, sıkıştırıcı parçaların içinden geçirin ve daha sonra, yeniden Tv'ye takıp sıkıştırın. N vidalar ürünle birlikte verilmemiş olabilir. Bu durumda, lütfen aşağıdaki özelliklere uygun vidaları alın. N vida Özellikleri – For a 17 ~ 29 Inch lCd Tv: M4 X l15 – For a 32 ~ 40 Inch lCd Tv: M6 X l15 3. Tv'ye ve duvara sabitlenmiş sıkıştırıcı parçaları sağlam bir bağ ile birleştirin ve daha sonra, bağı sıkı bir şekilde bağlayın. N Tv'yi arkaya doğru düşmemesi için duvara yakın bir yere yerleştirin. N Bağı, duvardaki sıkıştırıcı parçalar, Tv'ye sabitlenen sıkıştırıcı parçalarla aynı hizada veya daha aşağıda olacak şekilde bağlayabilirsiniz. N Tv'yi taşımadan önce bağı çözün. 4. Tüm bağlantıların uygun şekilde sabitlendiğini doğrulayın. Belirli aralıklarla bağlantılarda yorgunluk belirtisi olup olmadığını kontrol edin. Bağlantılarınızın güvenliğiyle ilgili herhangi bir şüpheniz varsa, bir kurulum uzmanıyla görüşün. Duvar Duvar BN68-03043A.indb 29 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:25Türkçe - 30 ¦ Sorun Giderme Tv'ye ilişkin herhangi bir sorunuz varsa, öncelikle bu listeye başvurun. Bu sorun giderme ipuçlarının hiçbiri işe yaramazsa, lütfen ‘www.samsung.com’ sitesini ziyaret edin ve ardından destek düğmesini tıklatın veya son sayfa listesindeki Çağrı Merkezi ile iletişime geçin. Sorun Çözüm Görüntü Kalitesi Öncelikle, lütfen Tv'nizin test görüntüyü düzgün bir şekilde görüntülediğini onaylamak için, Görüntü Testi işlemini gerçekleştirin. ● MENU - Destek - Kendi Kendini Tanıma - Görüntü Testi Test görüntü düzgün bir şekilde görüntüleniyorsa, bozuk resmin nedeni kaynak veya sinyal olabilir. Tv görüntüsü mağazada olduğu kadar iyi görünmüyor. ● Analog bir Kablo/Set üstü kutuya sahipseniz, Kutuya yükseltin. Hd resim kalitesi elde etmek için HdMI veya Komponent kabloları kullanın. ● Kablolu Tv/Uydu aboneliği : Kanal hattındaki Hd (Yüksek Tanımlı) istasyonlarını deneyin. ● Anten bağlantısı: Otomatik program işlemi gerçekleştirdikten sonra Hd istasyonlarını deneyin. N Pek çok Hd kanalı Sd (Standart Tanımlı) içeriğinden daha yüksek kalitededir. ● Kablo/Set üstü kutu video çıkış çözünürlüğünü 1080i veya 720p olarak ayarlayın. ● Tv'yi görüntülemekte olduğunuz sinyalin boyutuna ve tanımına bağlı olarak önerilen minimum mesafede izlediğinizi onaylayın. resim bozuk : makroblok, küçük blok, noktalar, piksellenme ● video içeriklerinin sıkıştırılması özellikle de spor programları ve aksiyon filmleri gibi hızlı hareket eden görüntüler üzerinde resim bozulmasına yol açabilir. ● düşük sinyal düzeyi veya kötü kalite, resim bozulmasına yol açabilir. Bu Tv'yle ilgili bir sorun değildir. ● Tv'yi (1m'e kadar cca) kapatmak için kullanılan cep telefonları analog veya dijital Tv üzerindeki görüntüde parazite neden olabilir. Komponent bağlantısında yanlışlık veya kayıp renk. ● Komponent kablolarının doğru jaklara takıldığından emin olun. Yanlış veya gevşek bağlantılar renk sorunlarına yol açabilir veya ekran boş olur. Bozuk renk veya parlaklık. ● Tv menüsünde Görüntü seçeneklerini ayarlayın. (Görüntü modu, Renk, Parlaklık, Netlik) ● Kurulum menüsünde Enrj. Tasarrufu seçeneğini ayarlayın. ● varsayılan resim ayarını görüntülemek için resmi sıfırlamayı deneyin. (MENU - Görüntü - Resim Sıfırlama bölümüne gidin) Ekranın kenarında noktalı satır. ● resim boyutu Ekrana Sığdır olarak ayarlandıysa, 16:9 olarak değiştirin. ● Kablo/set üstü kutu çözünürlüğünü değiştirin. resim yalnızca Av (Kompozit) girişi sırasında siyah beyaz. ● video kablosunu (Sarı) Tv'nin 1 numaraları Yeşil komponent girişi jakına takın. Kanallar değiştirilirken resim donuyor veya bozuluyor ya da resim gecikiyor. ● Kablo kutusuyla birlikte bağlandıysa, lütfen kablo kutusunu sıfırlamayı deneyin. (AC kablosunu tekrar bağlayın ve kablo kutusu yeniden yükleninceye kadar bekleyin. Bu 20 dakika kadar sürebilir) ● Kablo kutusunun çıkış çözünürlüğünü 1080i veya 720p olarak ayarlayın. Ses Kalitesi Öncelikle, lütfen Tv'nizin ses seviyesinin düzgün bir şekilde çalıştığını onaylamak için, Ses Testi işlemini gerçekleştirin. ● MENU - Destek - Kendi Kendini Tanıma - Ses Testi Ses seviyesi Tamamsa, ses sorunu kaynaktan veya sinyalden kaynaklanıyor olabilir. Hiç ses yok veya maksimum ses düzeyinde ses çok düşük. ● lütfen Tv'nize bağlı harici cihazın ses düzeyini kontrol edin ve ardından Tv ses düzeyini uygun şekilde ayarlayın. resim iyi ancak ses yok. ● Hoparlörü Seçin seçeneğini ses menüsünde TV Hoparlörü olarak ayarlayın. ● Harici cihazdaki ses kablolarının Tv'deki doğru ses giriş jaklarına bağlandığından emin olun. ● Bağlı cihazın ses çıkış seçeneğini kontrol edin. (örn: Tv'nize bağlı bir HdMI varsa, kablo kutunuzun ses seçeneğini HdMI olarak ayarlamanız gerekebilir. ● dvI - HdMI kablosu kullanıyorsanız, ayrı bir ses kablosu gerekir. ● Ses seviyesini 30 değerinin üzerine ayarlıyorsanız, SrS işlevini devre dışı bırakın. ● Fişi kulaklık jakından çıkarın. (Tv'nizde mevcutsa) Hoparlörden ses geliyor. ● Kablo bağlantılarını kontrol edin. Ses girişine bir video kablosu bağlanmadığından emin olun. ● Anten/Kablo bağlantısı için, sinyal kuvvetini kontrol edin. düşük sinyal seviyesi ses bozukluğuna yol açabilir. BN68-03043A.indb 30 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:25Türkçe - 31 Sorun Çözüm resim Yok, video Yok Tv açılmıyor. ● AC güç kablosu fişinin duvardaki prize ve Tv'ye düzgün bir şekilde takıldığından emin olun. ● Prizin çalıştığından emin olun. ● Uzaktan kumandanın düzgün bir şekilde çalıştığından emin olmak için, Tv'deki POWER düğmesine basın. Tv açılırsa, bu durum Uzaktan Kumandadan kaynaklanıyor olabilir. Uzaktan Kumanda sorununu çözmek için, aşağıdaki 'Uzaktan kumanda çalışmıyor' bölümüne bakın. Tv otomatik olarak kapanıyor. ● Kapanış Ayarı ayarının Kurulum menüsünde Açık olarak ayarlanıp ayarlanmadığını kontrol edin. ● Tv, PC'nize bağlanmışsa PC güç ayarlarınızı kontrol edin. ● AC güç kablosu fişinin duvardaki prize ve Tv'ye düzgün bir şekilde takıldığından emin olun. ● Anten/Kablo bağlantısından yaklaşık 10 ~ 15 dakika boyunca hiçbir sinyal alınmazsa, Tv kapatılır. resim/video yok. ● Kablo bağlantılarını kontrol edin (Tv'nin ve harici cihazların tüm kablolarını çıkarın ve tekrar takın). ● Harici cihazınızın (Kablo/Set Üstü Kutu, dvd, Blu-ray vb.) video çıkışını Tv girişine yapılan bağlantılarla eşleşecek şekilde ayarlayın. Örneğin, harici cihazın çıkışı: HdMI, Tv'nin girişi: HdMI. ● Bağlanan cihazınızın açık olduğundan emin olun. ● Tv uzaktan kumandasının SOURCE düğmesine basarak Tv'nin doğru kaynağını seçtiğinizden emin olun. rF (Kablo/Anten) Bağlantısı Tüm kanalları alamıyor. ● Anten kablosunun doğru bir şekilde bağlandığından emin olun. ● Kanal listesine mevcut kanalları eklemek için, lütfen Plug & Play işlemini deneyin. MENU - Kurulum - Plug & Play bölümüne gidin ve mevcut tüm kanallar kaydedilinceye kadar bekleyin. ● Antenin düzgün bir şekilde konumlandırıldığını onaylayın. resim bozuk : makroblok, küçük blok, noktaralar, piksellenme ● video içeriklerinin sıkıştırılması özellikle de spor programları ve aksiyon filmleri gibi hızlı hareket eden görüntüler üzerinde resim bozulmasına yol açabilir. ● düşük sinyal resim bozukluğuna yol açabilir. Bu Tv'yle ilgili bir sorun değildir. PC Bağlantısı ‘desteklenmeyen Mod’ mesajı. ● PC'nizin çıkış çözünürlüğünü ve frekansını Tv tarafından desteklenen çözünürlüklere uygun olacak şekilde ayarlayın. PC bağlı olmasa bile her zaman kaynak listesinde gösterilir. ● Bu normaldir; PC, bir PC bağlı olmasa bile her zaman kaynak listesinde gösterilir. HdMI bağlantısıyla video düzgün, ancak hiç ses yok. ● PC'nizdeki ses çıkış ayarını kontrol edin. BN68-03043A.indb 31 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:25Türkçe - 32 Sorun Çözüm diğerleri resim tam ekran olarak görüntülenmiyor. ● Yüksek kalitede Sd (4:3) içerikleri görüntülenirken, Hd kanallarında her bir kenar üzerinde siyah çubuklar görüntülenir. ● Tv'nizden farklı açı oranlarına sahip filmlerde Üst ve Alt kısımda siyah çubuklar görüntülenir. ● Harici cihazınızdaki ve Tv'nizdeki resim boyutu seçeneğini tam ekran olarak ayarlayın. Uzaktan kumanda çalışmıyor. ● Uzaktan kumanda pillerini doğru polaritede (+ -) olacak şekilde değiştirin. ● Uzaktan kumandanın üzerinde bulunan iletim penceresini temizleyin. ● Uzaktan kumandayı Tv'den 1,5-2 m uzaktayken kullanmayı deneyin. Tv gücü veya ses düzeyi Kablo/Set üstü kutusu uzaktan kumandasıyla kontrol edilemiyor. ● Kablo/Set üstü kutusu uzaktan kumandasını Tv'yi çalıştıracak şekilde programlayın. SAMSUNG Tv kodu için, Kablolu Tv/Uydu kullanıcı kılavuzuna bakın. ‘desteklenmeyen Mod’ mesajı. ● Tv'nin desteklenen çözünürlüğünü kontrol edin ve harici cihazın çıktı çözünürlüğünü uygun şekilde ayarlayın. Bu kılavuzdaki çözünürlük ayarlarına bakın. Tv'den gelen plastik kokusu. ● Bu koku normaldir ve zaman içinde geçecektir. TV Sinyal Bilgileri, Self Diagnostic Test menüsünde mevcut değil. ● Bu işlev yalnızca Anten (rF/Koaks) bağlantılı dijital kanallar için mevcuttur. Tv sağ veya sol tarafa eğiliyor. ● Stand tabanını Tv'den çıkarın ve tekrar takın. Stand tabanı takılamıyor. ● Tv'nin düzgün bir yüzeyde konumlandırıldığından emin olun. vidalar Tv'den çıkarılamıyorsa, lütfen mıknatıslı tornavida kullanın. Kanal menüsü gri. (mevcut değil) ● Kanal menüsü yalnızca Tv kaynağı seçili olduğunda mevcuttur. Ayarlarınız her 30 dakikada bir veya her Tv kapatıldığında kaybolur. ● TV Dükkan Demo modundaysa, ses ve resim ayarlarını her 30 dakikada bir sıfırlar. lütfen Dükkan Demo modunu, Plug & Play prosedüründeki Evde Kullanım moduyla değiştirin. TV modunu seçmek için, SOURCE düğmesine basın, MENU → Kurulum → Plug & Play → ENTERE bölümüne gidin. Geçici ses veya görüntü kaybı. ● Kablo bağlantılarını kontrol edin ve tekrar bağlayın. ● Çık sıkı veya ince kablo kullanımı nedeniyle olabilir. Kabloların uzun süreli kullanım için yeterince esnek olduğundan emin olun. duvar montajıysa, 90 derecelik konektörlere sahip kablolar kullanmanızı öneririz. Tv ekranını çevreleyen çerçevenin kenarlarına yakından baktığınızda küçük partiküller görebilirsiniz. ● Bu ürün tasarımının bir parçasıdır ve kusur değildir. CAM CArd(CI) ile ‘Karışmış sinyal’ veya ‘Sinyal yok/Güçsüz sinyal’. ● CAM'ın genel arayüz yuvasına takılı CI Kartı olduğundan emin olun. ● CAM'ı Tv'den çekin ve yuvaya tekrar takın. Kapatıldıktan 45 dakika sonra, Tv kendiliğinden açılıyor. ● Bu normaldir, Tv izleme sırasında yüklenen güvenlik duvarını güncellemek için OTA (Over The Air) işlevini kendiliğinden çalıştırır. Tekrarlanan resim/ses sorunu. ● Sinyali/kaynağı kontrol edin ve değiştirin. N TFT lCd paneli, karmaşık bir üretim teknolojisi gerektiren iç piksellerden oluşan bir panel kullanmaktadır. Bununla birlikte, ekranda birkaç parlak veya karanlık piksel bulunabilir. Bu piksellerin ürünün performansına olumsuz etkisi olmaz. BN68-03043A.indb 32 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:25Türkçe - 33 ¦ Teknik Özellikler Model Adı LE19C430C4WXXC / LE19C431C4WXXC LE22C430C4WXXC / LE22C431C4WXXC Ekran Boyutu (Çapraz) 19 inches 22 inches PC Çözünürlüğü (en iyi) 1360 x 768 @ 60Hz 1360 x 768 @ 60Hz Ses (Çıkış) 3W X 2 3W X 2 Boyutlar (GxDxY) Gövde Standla 477 x 65 x 327 mm 477 x 180 x 362 mm 558 x 75 x 384 mm 558 x 216 x 426 mm Ağırlık Standla 5 kg 7 kg Çevre Koşulları Çalışma Sıcaklığı Çalışma Nem Oranı Saklama Sıcaklığı Saklama Nem Oranı 10°C ile 40°C arası (50°F ile 104°F) %10 ile %80 arası, yoğunlaşmayan -20°C ile 45°C arası (-4°F ile 113°F) %5 ile %95 arası, yoğunlaşmayan Döner Stand Sol / Sağ 0˚ N Tasarım ve özellikler önceden haber verilmeden değiştirilebilir. N Bu cihaz, bir Sınıf B dijital cihaz aparatıdır. N Güç kaynağı ve Güç Tüketimi için ürün üzerindeki etikete bakın. BN68-03043A.indb 33 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:26Bu ürünün ortalama yaşam süresi 10 yıldır. İmalatçı SAMSUNG ElECTrONICS CO., lTd. 416 Maetan-3 Dong, Yeongtong-Gu, Suwon City Gyeonggi-Do, Korea, 443-742 Tel: +82-2-2255-0114 / Fax: +82-2-2255-0117 Model code lVD eMC lE19C430C4WXXC / lE19C431C4WXXC KTl(Korea Testing laboratory) CTK Co., ltd. lE22C430C4WXXC / lE22C431C4WXXC KTl(Korea Testing laboratory) CTK Co., ltd. NEMKO Korea Co.,ltd 296, Osan-ri, Mohyeon-Myeon, Cheoin-Gu, Yongin-Si, Gyeonggi-do, Korea 449-582 Tel: + 82-31-322-2333 / Fax: +82-31-322-2332 KTl(Korea Testing laboratory) 222-13, Guro-3dong, Guro-gu, Seoul, 152-718, Korea Tel: +82-2-860-1114 / Fax: +82-2-838-2675 dIGITAl EMC CO., lTd. 683-3, Yubang-dong, Yongin-Si, Kyunggi-do, Korea. 449-080 Tel: +82-31-321-2664 / Fax: +82-31-321-1664 CTK Co., ltd. 386-1, Ho-dong, Cheoin-gu, Yongin-si, Gyeonggi-do, 449-100, Korea Tel: +82-31-339-9970 / Fax: +82-31-339-9855 Samsung electronics co., ltd. Suwon eMC test lab 416 Maetan-3 Dong, Yeongtong-Gu, Suwon-City Gyeonggi-Do, Korea, 443-742 Tel: +82-31-200-2185 / Fax: +82-31-200-2189 EEE Yönetmeliğine Uygundur. BN68-03043A.indb 34 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:26Bu sayfa bilerek boş bırakılmıştır. BN68-03043A.indb 35 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:26Correct Disposal of This Product (Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment) (Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems) This marking on the product, accessories or literature indicates that the product and its electronic accessories (e.g. charger, headset, USB cable) should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of their working life. To prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate these items from other types of waste and recycle them responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources. Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased this product, or their local government office, for details of where and how they can take these items for environmentally safe recycling. Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract. This product and its electronic accessories should not be mixed with other commercial wastes for disposal. [English] Les bons gestes de mise au rebut de ce produit (Déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques) (Applicable dans les pays de l’Union européenne et dans d’autres pays européens pratiquant le tri sélectif) Ce symbole sur le produit, ses accessoires ou sa documentation indique que ni le produit, ni ses accessoires électroniques usagés (chargeur, casque audio, câble USB, etc.) ne peuvent être jetés avec les autres déchets ménagers. la mise au rebut incontrôlée des déchets présentant des risques environnementaux et de santé publique, veuillez séparer vos produits et accessoires usagés des autres déchets. vous favoriserez ainsi le recyclage de la matière qui les compose dans le cadre d’un développement durable. les particuliers sont invités à contacter le magasin leur ayant vendu le produit ou à se renseigner auprès des autorités locales pour connaître les procédures et les points de collecte de ces produits en vue de leur recyclage. les entreprises et professionnels sont invités à contacter leurs fournisseurs et à consulter les conditions de leur contrat de vente. Ce produit et ses accessoires ne peuvent être jetés avec les autres déchets professionnels et commerciaux. [Français] Korrekte Entsorgung von Altgeräten (Elektroschrott) (In den ländern der europäischen Union und anderen europäischen ländern mit einem separaten Sammelsystem) die Kennzeichnung auf dem Produkt, Zubehörteilen bzw. auf der dazugehörigen dokumentation gibt an, dass das Produkt und Zubehörteile (z. B. ladegerät, Kopfhörer, USB-Kabel) nach ihrer lebensdauer nicht zusammen mit dem normalen Haushaltsmüll entsorgt werden dürfen. Entsorgen Sie dieses Gerät und Zubehörteile bitte getrennt von anderen Abfällen, um der Umwelt bzw. der menschlichen Gesundheit nicht durch unkontrollierte Müllbeseitigung zu schaden. Helfen Sie mit, das Altgerät und Zubehörteile fachgerecht zu entsorgen, um die nachhaltige Wiederverwertung von stofflichen ressourcen zu fördern. Private Nutzer wenden sich an den Händler, bei dem das Produkt gekauft wurde, oder kontaktieren die zuständigen Behörden, um in Erfahrung zu bringen, wo Sie das Altgerät bzw. Zubehörteile für eine umweltfreundliche Entsorgung abgeben können. Gewerbliche Nutzer wenden sich an ihren lieferanten und gehen nach den Bedingungen des verkaufsvertrags vor. dieses Produkt und elektronische Zubehörteile dürfen nicht zusammen mit anderem Gewerbemüll entsorgt werden. [Deutsch] Correcte verwijdering van dit product (elektrische & elektronische afvalapparatuur) dit merkteken op het product, de accessoires of het informatiemateriaal duidt erop dat het product en zijn elektronische accessoires (bv. lader, headset, USB-kabel) niet met ander huishoudelijk afval verwijderd mogen worden aan het einde van hun gebruiksduur. Om mogelijke schade aan het milieu of de menselijke gezondheid door ongecontroleerde afvalverwijdering te voorkomen, moet u deze artikelen van andere soorten afval scheiden en op een verantwoorde manier recyclen, zodat het duurzame hergebruik van materiaalbronnen wordt bevorderd. Huishoudelijke gebruikers moeten contact opnemen met de winkel waar ze dit product hebben gekocht of met de gemeente waar ze wonen om te vernemen waar en hoe ze deze artikelen milieuvriendelijk kunnen laten recyclen. Zakelijke gebruikers moeten contact opnemen met hun leverancier en de algemene voorwaarden van de koopovereenkomst nalezen. dit product en zijn elektronische accessoires mogen niet met ander bedrijfsafval voor verwijdering worden gemengd. [Nederlands] Corretto smaltimento del prodotto (rifiuti elettrici ed elettronici) (Applicabile nell’Unione europea e in altri paesi europei con sistema di raccolta differenziata) Il marchio riportato sul prodotto, sugli accessori o sulla documentazione indica che il prodotto e i relativi accessori elettronici (quali caricabatterie, cuffia e cavo USB) non devono essere smaltiti con altri rifiuti domestici al termine del ciclo di vita. Per evitare eventuali danni all’ambiente o alla salute causati dall’inopportuno smaltimento dei rifiuti, si invita l’utente a separare il prodotto e i suddetti accessori da altri tipi di rifiuti e di riciclarli in maniera responsabile per favorire il riutilizzo sostenibile delle risorse materiali. Gli utenti domestici sono invitati a contattare il rivenditore presso il quale è stato acquistato il prodotto o l’ufficio locale preposto per tutte le informazioni relative alla raccolta differenziata e al riciclaggio per questo tipo di materiali. Gli utenti aziendali sono invitati a contattare il proprio fornitore e verificare i termini e le condizioni del contratto di acquisto. Questo prodotto e i relativi accessori elettronici non devono essere smaltiti unitamente ad altri rifiuti commerciali. [Italiano] Eliminación correcta de este producto (Residuos de aparatos eléctricos y electrónicos) (Aplicable en la Unión Europea y en países europeos con sistemas de recogida selectiva de residuos) la presencia de este símbolo en el producto, accesorios o material informativo que lo acompañan, indica que al finalizar su vida útil ni el producto ni sus accesorios electrónicos (como el cargador, cascos, cable USB) deberán eliminarse junto con otros residuos domésticos. Para evitar los posibles daños al medio ambiente o a la salud humana que representa la eliminación incontrolada de residuos, separe estos productos de otros tipos de residuos y recíclelos correctamente. de esta forma se promueve la reutilización sostenible de recursos materiales. los usuarios particulares pueden contactar con el establecimiento donde adquirieron el producto o con las autoridades locales pertinentes para informarse sobre cómo y dónde pueden llevarlo para que sea sometido a un reciclaje ecológico y seguro. los usuarios comerciales pueden contactar con su proveedor y consultar las condiciones del contrato de compra. este producto y sus accesorios electrónicos no deben eliminarse junto a otros residuos comerciales. [Español] Eliminação Correcta Deste Produto (Resíduos de Equipamentos Eléctricos e Electrónicos) esta marca apresentada no produto, nos acessórios ou na literatura – indica que o produto e os seus acessórios electrónicos (por exemplo, o carregador, o auricular, o cabo USB) não deverão ser eliminados juntamente com os resíduos domésticos no final do seu período de vida útil. Para impedir danos ao ambiente ou à saúde humana causados pela eliminação incontrolada de resíduos, deverá separar estes equipamentos de outros tipos de resíduos e reciclá-los de forma responsável, para promover uma reutilização sustentável dos recursos materiais. Os utilizadores domésticos deverão contactar o estabelecimento onde adquiriram este produto ou as entidades oficiais locais para obterem informações sobre onde e de que forma podem entregar estes equipamentos para permitir efectuar uma reciclagem segura em termos ambientais. Os utilizadores profissionais deverão contactar o seu fornecedor e consultar os termos e condições do contrato de compra. Este produto e os seus acessórios electrónicos não deverão ser misturados com outros resíduos comerciais para eliminação. [Português] BN68-03043A.indb 1 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:26Ustrezno odstranjevanje tega izdelka (odpadna električna in elektronska oprema) Oznaka na izdelku, dodatni opremi ali dokumentaciji pomeni, da izdelka in njegove elektronske dodatne opreme (npr. električni polnilnik, slušalke, kabel USB) ob koncu dobe uporabe ni dovoljeno odvreči med gospodinjske odpadke. Te izdelke ločite od drugih vrst odpadkov in jih odgovorno predajte v recikliranje ter tako spodbudite trajnostno vnovično uporabo materialnih virov. Tako boste preprečili morebitno tveganje za okolje ali zdravje ljudi zaradi nenadzoro vanega odstranjevanja odpadkov. Uporabniki v gospodinjstvih naj se za podrobnosti o tem, kam in kako lahko te izdelke predajo v okolju prijazno recikliranje, obrnejo na trgovino, kjer so izdelek kupili, ali na krajevni upravni organ. Poslovni uporabniki naj se obrnejo na dobavitelja in preverijo pogoje kupne pogodbe. Tega izdelka in njegove elektronske dodatne opreme pri odstranjevanju ni dovoljeno mešati z drugimi gospodarskimi odpadki. [Slovenščina] Korrekt avfallshantering av produkten (elektriska och elektroniska produkter) denna markering på produkten, tillbehören och i manualen anger att produkten och de elektroniska tillbehören (t.ex. laddare, headset, USB-kabel) inte bör sorteras tillsammans med annat hushållsavfall när de kasseras. Till förebyggande av skada på miljö och hälsa bör dessa föremål hanteras separat för ändamålsenlig återvinning av beståndsdelarna. Hushållsanvändare bör kontakta den återförsäljare som sålt produkten eller sin kommun för vidare information om var och hur produkten och tillbehören kan återvinnas på ett miljösäkert sätt. Företagsanvändare bör kontakta leverantören samt verifiera angivna villkor i köpekontraktet. Produkten och de elektroniska tillbehören bör inte hanteras tillsammans med annat kommersiellt avfall. [Svenska] Korrekt affaldsbortskaffelse af dette produkt (elektrisk & elektronisk udstyr) Mærket på dette produkt, på tilbehør eller i den medfølgende dokumentation betyder, at produktet og elektronisk tilbehør hertil (f.eks. oplader, hovedsæt, USB-ledning) ikke må bortskaffes sammen med almindeligt husholdningsaffald efter endt levetid. For at undgå skadelige miljø- eller sundhedspåvirkninger på grund af ukontrolleret affaldsbortskaffelse skal ovennævnte bortskaffes særskilt fra andet affald og indleveres behørigt til fremme for bæredygtig materialegenvinding. Forbrugere bedes kontakte forhandleren, hvor de har købt produktet, eller kommunen for oplysning om, hvor og hvordan de kan indlevere ovennævnte med henblik på miljøforsvarlig genvinding. virksomheder bedes kontakte leverandøren og læse betingelserne og vilkårene i købekontrakten. dette produkt og elektronisk tilbehør hertil bør ikke bortskaffes sammen med andet erhvervsaffald. [Dansk] Korrekt avhending av dette produktet (Avfall fra elektrisk og elektronisk utstyr) denne merkingen som vises på produktet, dets tilbehør eller dokumentasjon, indikerer at produktet eller det elektroniske tilbehøret (for eksempel lader, headset, USB-kabel) ikke skal kastes sammen med annet husholdningsavfall ved slutten av levetiden. For å hindre potensiell skade på miljøet eller helseskader grunnet ukontrollert avfallsavhending ber vi om at dette avfallet holdes adskilt fra andre typer avfall og resirkuleres på ansvarlig måte for å fremme bærekraftig gjenbruk av materielle ressurser. Private forbrukere bør kontakte enten forhandleren de kjøpte produktet av, eller lokale myndigheter, for detaljer om hvor og hvordan disse artiklene kan resirkuleres på en miljøvennlig måte. Forretningsbrukere bør kontakte sin leverandør og undersøke vilkårene i kjøpskontrakten. dette produktet og det elektroniske tilbehøret skal ikke blandes med annet kommersielt avfall som skal kastes. [Norsk] Tuotteen turvallinen hävittäminen (elektroniikka ja sähkölaitteet) Oheinen merkintä tuotteessa, lisävarusteissa tai käyttöohjeessa merkitsee, että tuotetta tai lisävarusteina toimitettavia sähkölaitteita (esim. laturia, kuulokkeita tai USB kaapelia) ei saa hävittää kotitalousjätteen mukana niiden käyttöiän päätyttyä. virheellisestä jätteenkäsittelystä ympäristölle ja terveydelle aiheutuvien haittojen välttämiseksi tuote ja lisävarusteet on eroteltava muusta jätteestä ja kierrätettävä kestävän kehityksen mukaista uusiokäyttöä varten. Kotikäyttäjät saavat lisätietoja tuotteen ja lisävarusteiden turvallisesta kierrätyksestä ottamalla yhteyttä tuotteen myyneeseen jälleenmyyjään tai paikalliseen ympäristöviranomaiseen. Yrityskäyttäjien tulee ottaa yhteyttä tavarantoimittajaan ja selvittää hankintasopimuksen ehdot. Tuotetta tai sen lisävarusteita ei saa hävittää muun kaupallisen jätteen seassa. [Suomi] A termék hulladékba helyezésének módszere(WEEE – Elektromos és elektronikus berendezések hulladékai) Ez a jelzés a terméken, tartozékain vagy dokumentációján arra utal, hogy hasznos élettartama végén a terméket és elektronikus tartozékait (pl. töltőegység, fejhallgató, USB kábel) nem szabad a háztartási hulladékkal együtt kidobni. A szabálytalan hulladékba helyezés által okozott környezet- és egészségkárosodás megelőzése érdekében ezeket a tárgyakat különítse el a többi hulladéktól, és felelősségteljesen gondoskodjon az újrahasznosításukról az anyagi erőforrások fenntartható újrafelhasználásának elősegítése érdekében. A háztartási felhasználók a termék forgalmazójától vagy a helyi önkormányzati szervektől kérjenek tanácsot arra vonatkozóan, hová és hogyan vihetik el az elhasznált termékeket a környezetvédelmi szempontból biztonságos újrahasznosítás céljából. Az üzleti felhasználók lépjenek kapcsolatba beszállítójukkal, és vizsgálják meg az adásvételi szerződés feltételeit. Ezt a terméket és tartozékait nem szabad az egyéb közületi hulladékkal együtt kezelni. [Magyar] Prawidłowe usuwanie produktu (zużyty sprzęt elektryczny i elektroniczny) To oznaczenie umieszczone na produkcie, akcesoriach lub dokumentacji oznacza, że po zakończeniu eksploatacji nie należy tego produktu ani jego akcesoriów (np. ładowarki, zestawu słuchawkowego, przewodu USB) wyrzucać wraz ze zwykłymi odpadami gospodarstwa domowego. Aby uniknąć szkodliwego wpływu na środowisko naturalne i zdrowie ludzi wskutek niekontrolowanego usuwania odpadów, prosimy o oddzielenie tych przedmiotów od odpadów innego typu oraz o odpowiedzialny recykling i praktykowanie ponownego wykorzystania materiałów. W celu uzyskania informacji na temat miejsca i sposobu bezpiecznego dla środowiska recyklingu tych przedmiotów, użytkownicy w gospodarstwach domowych powinni skontaktować się z punktem sprzedaży detalicznej, w którym dokonali zakupu produktu, lub z organem władz lokalnych. Użytkownicy w firmach powinni skontaktować się ze swoim dostawcą i sprawdzić warunki umowy zakupu. Produktu ani jego akcesoriów nie należy usuwać razem z innymi odpadami komercyjnymi. [Polski] BN68-03043A.indb 2 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:27Σωστή Απόρριψη αυτού του Προϊόντος (Απόβλητα Ηλεκτρικού & Ηλεκτρονικού Εξοπλισμού) (Ισχύει για την Ευρωπαϊκή Ένωση και για άλλες ευρωπαϊκές χώρες με χωριστά συστήματα συλλογής) Αυτό το σήμα που εμφανίζεται επάνω στο προϊόν, στα εξαρτήματά του ή στα εγχειρίδια που το συνοδεύουν, υποδεικνύει ότι το προϊόν και τα ηλεκτρονικά του εξαρτήματα (π.χ. φορτιστής, ακουστικά, καλώδιο USB) δεν θα πρέπει να ρίπτονται μαζί με τα υπόλοιπα οικιακά απορρίμματα μετά το τέλος του κύκλου ζωής τους. Προκειμένου να αποφευχθούν ενδεχόμενες βλαβερές συνέπειες στο περιβάλλον ή την υγεία εξαιτίας της ανεξέλεγκτης διάθεσης απορριμμάτων, σας παρακαλούμε να διαχωρίσετε αυτά τα προϊόντα από άλλους τύπους απορριμμάτων και να τα ανακυκλώσετε, ώστε να βοηθήσετε στην βιώσιμη επαναχρησιμοποίηση των υλικών πόρων. Οι οικιακοί χρήστες θα πρέπει να έλθουν σε επικοινωνία είτε με το κατάστημα απ’ όπου αγόρασαν αυτό το προϊόν, είτε με τις κατά τόπους υπηρεσίες, προκειμένου να πληροφορηθούν τις λεπτομέρειες σχετικά με τον τόπο και τον τρόπο με τον οποίο μπορούν να δώσουν αυτά τα προϊόντα για ασφαλή προς το περιβάλλον ανακύκλωση. Οι επιχειρήσεις-χρήστες θα πρέπει να έλθουν σε επαφή με τον προμηθευτή τους και να ελέγξουν τους όρους και τις προϋποθέσεις του συμβολαίου αγοράς. Αυτό το προϊόν και τα ηλεκτρονικά του εξαρτήματα δεν θα πρέπει να αναμιγνύονται με άλλα συνηθισμένα απορρίμματα προς διάθεση. [Ελληνικά] Правилно третиране на изделието след края на експлоатационния му живот (Отпадъци, представляващи електрическо и електронно оборудване)(Важи за държавите на Европейския съюз и други европейски държави със системи за разделно сметосъбиране) Този знак, поставен върху изделието, негови принадлежности или печатни материали, означава, че продуктът и принадлежностите (например зарядно устройство, слушалки, USB кабел) не бива да се изхвърлят заедно с другите битови отпадъци, когато изтече експлоатационният му живот. Отделяйте тези устройства от другите видови отпадъци и ги предавайте за рециклиране. Спазвайки това правило не излагате на опасност здравето на други хора и предпазвате околната среда от замърсяване, предизвикано от безконтролно изхвърляне на отпадъци. Освен това, подобно отговорно поведение създава възможност за повторно (екологично съобразно) използване на материалните ресурси. Домашните потребители трябва да се свържат с търговеца на дребно, от когото са закупили изделието, или със съответната местна държавна агенция, за да получат подробни инструкции къде и кога могат да занесат тези устройства за рециклиране, безопасно за околната среда. Корпоративните потребители следва да се свържат с доставчика си и да проверят условията на договора за покупка. Това изделие и неговите електронни принадлежности не бива да се сместват с другите отпадъци на търговското предприятие. [Български] Správná likvidace výrobku (Elektrický a elektronický odpad) Toto označení na výrobku, jeho příslušenství nebo dokumentaci znamená, že výrobek a jeho elektronické příslušenství (například nabíječku, náhlavní sadu, USB kabel) je po skončení životnosti zakázáno likvidovat jako běžný komunální odpad. Možným negativním dopadům na životní prostředí nebo lidské zdraví způsobeným nekontrolovanou likvidací zabráníte oddělením zmíněných produktů od ostatních typů odpadu a jejich zodpovědnou recyklací za účelem udržitelného využívání druhotných surovin. Uživatelé z řad domácností by si měli od prodejce, u něhož produkt zakoupili, nebo u příslušného městského úřadu vyžádat informace, kde a jak mohou tyto výrobky odevzdat k bezpečné ekologické recyklaci. Podnikoví uživatelé by měli kontaktovat dodavatele a zkontrolovat všechny podmínky kupní smlouvy. Tento výrobek a jeho elektronické příslušenství nesmí být likvidován spolu s ostatním průmyslovým odpadem. [Čeština] Správna likvidácia tohoto výrobku (Elektrotechnický a elektronický odpad) (Platné pre Európsku úniu a ostatné európske krajiny so systémom triedeného odpadu) Toto označenie na výrobku, príslušenstve alebo v sprievodnej brožúre hovorí, že po skončení životnosti by produkt ani jeho elektronické príslušenstvo (napr. nabíjačka, náhlavná súprava, USB kábel) nemali byť likvidované s ostatným domovým odpadom. Prípadnému poškodeniu životného prostredia alebo ľudského zdravia môžete predísť tým, že budete tieto výrobky oddeľovať od ostatného odpadu a vrátite ich na recykláciu. Používatelia v domácnostiach by pre podrobné informácie, ako ekologicky bezpečne naložiť s týmito výrobkami, mali kontaktovať buď predajcu, ktorý im ich predal, alebo príslušný úrad v mieste ich bydliska. Priemyselní používatelia by mali kontaktovať svojho dodávateľa a preveriť si podmienky kúpnej zmluvy. Tento výrobok a ani jeho elektronické príslušenstvo by nemali byť likvidované spolu s ostatným priemyselným odpadom. [Slovensky] Cum se elimină corect acest produs (Deşeuri de echipamente electrice şi electronice) (Aplicabil în ţările Uniunii Europene şi în alte ţări cu sisteme de colectare selectivă) Acest simbol de pe produs, accesorii şi documentaţie indică faptul că produsul şi accesoriile sale electronice (încărcător, căşti, cablu USB) nu trebuie eliminate împreună cu alte deşeuri menajere la finalul duratei lor de utilizare. dat fiind că eliminarea necontrolată a deşeurilor poate dăuna mediului înconjurător sau sănătăţii umane, vă rugăm să separaţi aceste articole de alte tipuri de deşeuri şi să le reciclaţi în mod responsabil, promovând astfel reutilizarea durabilă a resurselor materiale. Utilizatorii casnici trebuie să-l contacteze pe distribuitorul care le-a vândut produsul sau să se intereseze la autorităţile locale unde şi cum pot să ducă aceste articole pentru a fi reciclate în mod ecologic. Utilizatorii comerciali trebuie să-şi contacteze furnizorul şi să consulte termenii şi condiţiile din contractul de achiziţie. Acest produs şi accesoriile sale electronice nu trebuie eliminate împreună cu alte deşeuri comerciale. [Română] Izstrādājuma pareiza likvidēšana (Attiecas uz nolietotām elektriskām un elektroniskām ierīcēm) (Spēkā Eiropas Savienībā un pārējās Eiropas valstīs, kas izmanto atkritumu dalītu savākšanu) Šis uz izstrādājuma un tā piederumiem vai pievienotajā dokumentācijā izvietotais marķējums norāda, ka izstrādājumu un tā elektroniskos piederumus (piem., uzlādes ierīci, austiņas, USB kabeli) pēc ekspluatācijas laika beigām nedrīkst likvidēt kopā ar citiem sadzīves atkritumiem. lai nepieļautu atkritumu nekontrolētas likvidēšanas radītu varbūtēju kaitējumu videi un cilvēku veselībai, lūdzam minētās ierīces nošķirt no citiem atkritumiem un disciplinēti nodot pienācīgai pārstrādei, tā sekmējot materiālo resursu atkārtotu izmantošanu. lai uzzinātu, kur un kā minētās ierīces iespējams nodot ekoloģiski drošai pārstrādei, mājsaimniecībām jāsazinās ar izstrādājuma pārdevēju vai savu pašvaldību. Iestādēm un uzņēmumiem jāsazinās ar izstrādājuma piegādātāju un jāiepazīstas ar pirkuma līguma nosacījumiem. Izstrādājumu un tā elektroniskos piederumus nedrīkst nodot likvidēšanai kopā ar citiem iestāžu un uzņēmumu atkritumiem. [Latviešu] BN68-03043A.indb 3 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:27Tinkamas šio gaminio išmetimas (elektros ir elektroninės įrangos atliekos) Šis ženklas, pateiktas ant gaminio, jo priedų ar dokumentacijoje, nurodo, kad gaminio ir jo elektroninių priedų (pvz., įkroviklio, ausinių, USB kabelio) negalima išmesti kartu su kitomis buitinėmis atliekomis gaminio naudojimo laikui pasibaigus. Kad būtų išvengta galimos nekontroliuojamo atliekų išmetimo žalos aplinkai arba žmonių sveikatai ir skatinamas aplinką tausojantis antrinių žaliavų panaudojimas, atskirkite šiuos elementus nuo kitų rūšių atliekų ir atiduokite perdirbti. Informacijos kur ir kaip pristatyti šiuos elementus saugiai perdirbti, privatūs vartotojai turėtų kreiptis į parduotuvę, kurioje šį gaminį pirko, arba į vietos valdžios institucijas. verslo vartotojai turėtų kreiptis į savo tiekėją ir peržiūrėti pirkimo sutarties sąlygas. Tvarkant atliekas, šio gaminio ir jo elektroninių priedų negalima maišyti su kitomis pramoninėmis atliekomis. [Lietuvių kalba] Õige viis toote kasutuselt kõrvaldamiseks (elektriliste ja elektrooniliste seadmete jäätmed) Selline tähistus tootel või selle tarvikutel või dokumentidel näitab, et toodet ega selle elektroonilisi tarvikuid (nt laadija, peakomplekt, USBkaabel) ei tohi kasutusaja lõppemisel kõrvaldada koos muude olmejäätmetega. Selleks et vältida jäätmete kontrollimatu kõrvaldamisega seotud võimaliku kahju tekitamist keskkonnale või inimeste tervisele ning edendada materiaalsete vahendite säästvat taaskasutust, eraldage need esemed muudest jäätmetest ja suunake need vastutustundlikult taasringlusse. Kodukasutajad saavad teavet nende esemete keskkonnaohutu ringlussevõtu kohta kas toote müüjalt või keskkonnaametist. Firmad peaksid võtma ühendust tarnijaga ning kontrollima ostulepingu tingimusi ja sätteid. Toodet ega selle elektroonilisi tarvikuid ei tohi panna muude hävitamiseks mõeldud kaubandusjäätmete hulka. [Eesti] BN68-03043A.indb 4 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:27Correct disposal of batteries in this product (Applicable in the european Union and other european countries with separate battery return systems.) This marking on the battery, manual or packaging indicates that the batteries in this product should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of their working life. Where marked, the chemical symbols Hg, Cd or Pb indicate that the battery contains mercury, cadmium or lead above the reference levels in eC Directive 2006/66. If batteries are not properly disposed of, these substances can cause harm to human health or the environment. To protect natural resources and to promote material reuse, please separate batteries from other types of waste and recycle them through your local, free battery return system. [English] Elimination des batteries de ce produit (Applicable aux pays de l’Union européenne et aux autres pays européens dans lesquels des systèmes de collecte sélective sont mis en place.) le symbole sur la batterie, le manuel ou l’emballage indique que les batteries de ce produit ne doivent pas être éliminées en fin de vie avec les autres déchets ménagers. l’indication éventuelle des symboles chimiques Hg, Cd ou Pb signifie que la batterie contient des quantités de mercure, de cadmium ou de plomb supérieures aux niveaux de référence stipulés dans la directive Ce 2006/66. Si les batteries ne sont pas correctement éliminées, ces substances peuvent porter préjudice à la santé humaine ou à l’environnement. Afin de protéger les ressources naturelles et d’encourager la réutilisation du matériel, veillez à séparer les batteries des autres types de déchets et à les recycler via votre système local de collecte gratuite des batteries. [Français] Korrekte Entsorgung der Batterien dieses Produkts (In den ländern der Europäischen Union und anderen europäischen ländern mit einem separaten Altbatterie-rücknahmesystem) die Kennzeichnung auf der Batterie bzw. auf der dazugehörigen dokumentation oder verpackung gibt an, dass die Batterie zu diesem Produkt nach seiner lebensdauer nicht zusammen mit dem normalen Haushaltsmüll entsorgt werden darf. Wenn die Batterie mit den chemischen Symbolen Hg, Cd oder Pb gekennzeichnet ist, liegt der Quecksilber-, Cadmium- oder Blei-Gehalt der Batterie über den in der EG-richtlinie 2006/66 festgelegten referenzwerten. Wenn Batterien nicht ordnungsgemäß entsorgt werden, können sie der menschlichen Gesundheit bzw. der Umwelt schaden. Bitte helfen Sie, die natürlichen ressourcen zu schützen und die nachhaltige Wiederverwertung von stofflichen ressourcen zu fördern, indem Sie die Batterien von anderen Abfällen getrennt über Ihr örtliches kostenloses Altbatterierücknahmesystem entsorgen. [Deutsch] Correcte behandeling van een gebruikte accu uit dit product (van toepassing op de Europese Unie en andere Europese landen met afzonderlijke inzamelingssystemen voor accu’s en batterijen.) dit merkteken op de accu, handleiding of verpakking geeft aan dat de accu in dit product aan het einde van de levensduur niet samen met ander huishoudelijk afval mag worden weggegooid. de chemische symbolen Hg, Cd of Pb geven aan dat het kwik-, cadmium- of loodgehalte in de accu hoger is dan de referentieniveaus in de richtlijn 2006/66/EC. Indien de gebruikte accu niet op de juiste wijze wordt behandeld, kunnen deze stoffen schadelijk zijn voor de gezondheid van mensen of het milieu. Ter bescherming van de natuurlijke hulpbronnen en ter bevordering van het hergebruik van materialen, verzoeken wij u afgedankte accu’s en batterijen te scheiden van andere soorten afval en voor recycling aan te bieden bij het gratis inzamelingssysteem voor accu’s en batterijen in uw omgeving. [Nederlands] Corretto smaltimento delle batterie del prodotto (Applicabile nei paesi dell’Unione europea e in altri paesi europei con sistemi di conferimento differenziato delle batterie.) Il marchio riportato sulla batteria o sulla sua documentazione o confezione indica che le batterie di questo prodotto non devono essere smaltite con altri rifiuti domestici al termine del ciclo di vita. dove raffigurati, i simboli chimici Hg, Cd o Pb indicano che la batteria contiene mercurio, cadmio o piombo in quantità superiori ai livelli di riferimento della direttiva UE 2006/66. Se le batterie non vengono smaltite correttamente, queste sostanze possono causare danni alla salute umana o all’ambiente. Per proteggere le risorse naturali e favorire il riutilizzo dei materiali, separare le batterie dagli altri tipi di rifiuti e riciclarle utilizzando il sistema di conferimento gratuito previsto nella propria area di residenza. [Italiano] Eliminación correcta de las baterías de este producto (Aplicable en la Unión Europea y en otros países europeos con sistemas de recogida selectiva de baterías.) la presencia de esta marca en las baterías, el manual o el paquete del producto indica que cuando haya finalizado la vida útil de las baterías no deberán eliminarse junto con otros residuos domésticos. los símbolos químicos Hg, Cd o Pb, si aparecen, indican que la batería contiene mercurio, cadmio o plomo en niveles superiores a los valores de referencia admitidos por la Directiva 2006/66 de la Unión europea. Si las baterías no se desechan convenientemente, estas sustancias podrían provocar lesiones personales o dañar el medioambiente. Para proteger los recursos naturales y promover el reciclaje, separe las baterías de los demás residuos y recíclelas mediante el sistema de recogida gratuito de su localidad. [Español] Eliminação correcta das baterias existentes neste produto (Aplicável na União Europeia e noutros países europeus com sistemas de recolha de baterias separados.) esta marca, apresentada na bateria, manual ou embalagem, indica que as baterias existentes neste produto não devem ser eliminadas juntamente com os resíduos domésticos indiferenciados no final do seu período de vida útil. Onde existentes, os símbolos químicos Hg, Cd ou Pb indicam que a bateria contém mercúrio, cádmio ou chumbo acima dos níveis de referência indicados na directiva CE 2006/66. Se as baterias não forem correctamente eliminadas, estas substâncias poderão ser prejudiciais para a saúde humana ou para o meio ambiente. Para proteger os recursos naturais e promover a reutilização dos materiais, separe as baterias dos outros tipos de resíduos e recicle-as através do sistema gratuito de recolha local de baterias. [Português] Ustrezno odstranjevanje baterij v tem izdelku (Uporabno v EU in ostalih evropskih državah s sistemi ločenega odstranjevanja baterij) Ta oznaka na bateriji, v navodilih ali na embalaži pomeni, da baterij ob izteku njihove življenjske dobe v tem izdelku ne smete odstraniti skupaj z ostalimi gospodinjskimi odpadki. Oznake za kemijske elemente Hg, Cd ali Pb pomenijo, da baterija vsebuje živo srebro, kadmij ali svinec v količinah, ki presegajo referenčne nivoje v direktivi EC 2006/66. Če te baterije niso ustrezno odstranjene, te snovi lahko škodujejo zdravju ljudi oziroma okolju. Za zaščito naravnih virov in za vzpodbujanje ponovne uporabe materialov prosimo, ločite te baterije od ostalih odpadkov in jih oddajte na predvidenih lokalnih zbirnih reciklažnih mestih. [Slovenščina] Korrekt avfallshantering av batterierna i denna produkt (Gäller EU och andra europeiska länder med särskild batteriåtervinning.) denna markering på batteriet, i manualen eller på förpackningen anger att batterierna i denna produkt inte bör slängas tillsammans med annat hushållsavfall. de kemiska symbolerna Hg, Cd eller Pb visar i förekommande fall att batterierna innehåller kvicksilver, kadmium eller bly i mängder överstigande de gränsvärden som anges i EU-direktivet 2006/66. Om batterierna inte slängs på ett ansvarsfullt sätt kan dessa substanser utgöra en fara för hälsa eller miljö. Hjälp till att skydda naturresurser och bidra till materialåtervinning genom att sortera batterierna separat från annat avfall och lämna in dem på en återvinningsstation. [Svenska] BN68-03043A.indb 5 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:27KKorrekt bortskaffelse af batterierne i dette produkt (Gælder i EU og andre europæiske lande med særlige retursystemer for batterier). Mærket på dette batteri, dokumentationen eller emballagen betyder, at batterierne i dette produkt efter endt levetid ikke må bortskaffes sammen med andet husholdningsaffald. Mærkning med de kemiske symboler Hg, Cd eller Pb betyder, at batteriet indeholder kviksølv, cadmium eller bly over grænseværdierne i EU-direktiv 2006/66. Hvis batterierne ikke bortskaffes korrekt, kan disse stoffer være skadelige for menneskers helbred eller for miljøet. For at beskytte naturens ressourcer og fremme genbrug, skal batterier holdes adskilt fra andre typer affald og genanvendes via dit lokale, gratis batteriretursystem. [Dansk] Korrekt avhending av batterier i dette produkt (Kommer til anvendelse i den europeiske union og i andre europeiske land med separate systemer for retur av batterier.) denne merkingen på batteriet, håndboken eller emballasjen angir at batteriene i dette produktet ikke skal kastes sammen med annet husholdningsavfall ved slutten av sin levetid. der det er merket, angir de kjemiske symbolene Hg, Cd eller Pb at batteriet inneholder kvikksølv, kadmium eller bly over referansenivåene i EF-direktiv 2006/66. Hvis batteriene ikke avhendes på riktig måte, kan disse stoffene skade menneskers helse eller miljøet. For å beskytte naturressurser og for å fremme gjenbruk av materialer, ber vi deg adskille batterier fra andre typer avfall og resirkulere dem ved å levere dem på din lokale, gratis mottaksstasjon. [Norsk] Tuotteen paristojen oikea hävittäminen (Koskee Euroopan Unionia ja muita Euroopan maita, joissa on erillinen paristojen palautusjärjestelmä.) Pariston, käyttöoppaan tai pakkauksen tämä merkintä tarkoittaa, että tämän tuotteen sisältämiä paristoja ei saa hävittää muun kotitalousjätteen seassa, kun niiden käyttöikä on päättynyt. Kemiallinen symboli Hg, Cd tai Pb ilmaisee, että paristo sisältää elohopeaa, kadmiumia tai lyijyä ylin EU: n direktiivien 2006/66 viiterajojen. Jos paristoja ei hävitetä oikein, nämä aineet voivat vahingoittaa ihmisten terveyttä tai ympäristöä. Suojaa luonnonvaroja ja edistä materiaalien uusiokäyttöä - erottele paristot muusta jätteestä ja toimita ne kierrätettäväksi paikalliseen maksuttomaan paristojen palautusjärjestelmään. [Suomi] A termékhez tartozó akkumulátorok megfelelő ártalmatlanítása (Az Európai Unió területén és más, önálló akkumulátorleadó rendszerrel rendelkező európai országok területén alkalmazandó.) Az akkumulátoron, a kézikönyvön vagy a csomagoláson szereplő jelzés arra utal, hogy hasznos élettartama végén a terméket nem szabad egyéb háztartási hulladékkal együtt kidobni. Ahol szerepel a jelzés, a Hg, Cd vagy Pb kémiai elemjelölések arra utalnak, hogy az akkumulátor az EK 2006/66. számú irányelvben rögzített referenciaszintet meghaladó mennyiségű higanyt, kadmiumot vagy ólmot tartalmaz. Az akkumulátorok nem megfelelő kezelése esetén ezek az anyagok veszélyt jelenthetnek az egészségre vagy a környezetre. A természeti erőforrások megóvása és az anyagok újrafelhasználásának ösztönzése érdekében kérjük, különítse el az akkumulátorokat a többi hulladéktól és vigye vissza a helyi, ingyenes akkumulátorleadó helyre. [Magyar] Sposób poprawnego usuwania baterii, w które wyposażony jest niniejszy produkt (dotyczy obszaru Unii Europejskiej oraz innych krajów europejskich posiadających oddzielne systemy zwrotu zużytych baterii.) Niniejsze oznaczenie na baterii, instrukcji obsługi lub opakowaniu oznacza, że po upływie okresu użytkowania baterie, w które wyposażony był dany produkt, nie mogą zostać usunięte wraz z innymi odpadami pochodzącymi z gospodarstw domowych. Przy zastosowaniu takiego oznaczenia symbole chemiczne (Hg, Cd lub Pb) wskazują, że dana bateria zawiera rtęć, kadm lub ołów w ilości przewyższającej poziomy odniesienia opisane w dyrektywie WE 2006/66. Jeśli baterie nie zostaną poprawnie zutylizowane, substancje te mogą powodować zagrożenie dla zdrowia ludzkiego lub środowiska naturalnego. Aby chronić zasoby naturalne i promować ponowne wykorzystanie materiałów, należy oddzielać baterie od innego typu odpadów i poddawać je utylizacji poprzez lokalny, bezpłatny system zwrotu baterii. [Polski] Σωστή απόρριψη των μπαταριών αυτού του προϊόντος (Ισχύει στην Ευρωπαϊκή Ένωση και άλλες ευρωπαϊκές χώρες με συστήματα ξεχωριστής ανακύκλωσης μπαταριών.) Αυτή η επισήμανση πάνω στη μπαταρία, το εγχειρίδιο ή τη συσκευασία υποδεικνύει ότι οι μπαταρίες αυτού του προϊόντος δεν πρέπει να απορρίπτονται μαζί με άλλα οικιακά απορρίμματα στο τέλος του κύκλου ζωής τους. Όπου υπάρχουν, τα χημικά σύμβολα Hg, Cd ή Pb υποδεικνύουν ότι η μπαταρία περιέχει υδράργυρο, κάδμιο ή μόλυβδο πάνω από τα επίπεδα αναφοράς της Ευρωπαϊκής Οδηγίας 2006/66. Αν οι μπαταρίες δεν απορριφθούν σωστά, αυτές οι ουσίες ενδέχεται να προκαλέσουν βλαβερές συνέπειες στην ανθρώπινη υγεία ή το περιβάλλον. Παρακαλούμε διαχωρίζετε τις μπαταρίες από άλλους τύπους απορριμμάτων και ανακυκλώνετέ τις μέσω του τοπικού σας, δωρεάν συστήματος ανακύκλωσης μπαταριών, για την προστασία των φυσικών πόρων και την προώθηση της επαναχρησιμοποίησης υλικών. [Ελληνικά] Правилно изхвърляне на батериите в този продукт (Приложимо в Европейския съюз и други европейски държави със самостоятелни системи за връщане на батерии.) Това обозначение върху батерията, ръководството или опаковката, показва, че батериите в този продукт не бива да се изхвърлят с другите битови отпадъци в края на техния полезен живот. Където са маркирани, химическите символи Hg, Cd или Pb показват, че батерията съдържа живак, кадмий или олово над контролните нива в Директива 2006/66 на ЕО. Ако батериите не се изхвърлят правилно, тези вещества могат да предизвикат увреждане на човешкото здраве или на околната среда. За да предпазите природните ресурси и за да съдействате за многократната употреба на материалните ресурси, моля отделяйте батериите от другите видове отпадъчни продукти и ги рециклирайте посредством Вашата локална система за безплатно връщане на батерии. [Български] BN68-03043A.indb 6 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:27Správná likvidace baterií v tomto výrobku (Platí v Evropské unii a dalších evropských zemích s vlastními systémy zpětného odběru baterií.) Tato značka na baterii, návodu nebo obalu znamená, že baterie v tomto výrobku nesmí být na konci své životnosti likvidovány společně s jiným domovním odpadem. Případně vyznačené symboly chemikálií Hg, Cd nebo Pb upozorňují na to, že baterie obsahuje rtuť, kadmium nebo olovo v množství překračujícím referenční úrovně stanovené směrnicí ES 2006/66. Pokud baterie nejsou správně zlikvidovány, mohou tyto látky poškodit zdraví osob nebo životní prostředí. Pro ochranu přírodních zdrojů a pro podporu opakovaného využívání materiálů oddělte, prosím, baterie od ostatních typů odpadu a nechte je recyklovat prostřednictvím místního bezplatného systému zpětného odběru baterií. [Čeština] Správna likvidácia batérií v tomto výrobku (Aplikovateľné v krajinách Európskej únie a v ostatných európskych krajinách, v ktorých existujú systémy separovaného zberu batérií.) Toto označenie na batérii, príručke alebo balení hovorí, že batérie v tomto výrobku by sa po skončení ich životnosti nemali likvidovať spolu s ostatným domovým odpadom. v prípade takéhoto označenia chemické symboly Hg, Cd alebo Pb znamenajú, že batéria obsahuje ortuť, kadmium alebo olovo v množstve presahujúcom referenčné hodnoty smernice 2006/66/ES. Pri nevhodnej likvidácii batérií môžu tieto látky poškodiť zdravie alebo životné prostredie. Za účelom ochrany prírodných zdrojov a podpory opätovného použitia materiálu batérie likvidujte oddelene od iných typov odpadou a recyklujte ich prostredníctvom miestneho systému bezplatného zberu batérií. [Slovensky] Dispoziţii privind eliminarea corectă a bateriilor acestui produs (aplicabile în Uniunea Europeană şi în alte ţări europene cu sisteme separate de colectare a bateriilor) Acest marcaj de pe baterie, de pe manualul de utilizare sau de pe ambalaj indică faptul că bateriile acestui produs nu trebuie eliminate împreună cu alte deşeuri menajere la sfârşitul ciclului lor de viaţă. dacă sunt marcate, simbolurile chimice Hg, Cd sau Pb indică faptul că bateria conţine mercur, cadmiu sau plumb peste nivelurile de referinţă prevăzute în directiva CE 2006/66. În cazul în care bateriile nu sunt eliminate corespunzător, aceste substanţe pot fi dăunătoare pentru sănătatea omului sau pentru mediu. În vederea protejării resurselor naturale şi a promovării refolosirii materialelor, vă rugăm să separaţi bateriile de celelalte tipuri de deşeuri şi să le reciclaţi prin intermediul sistemului gratuit de returnare a bateriilor la nivel local. [Română] Šī izstrādājuma bateriju pareiza utilizācija (Piemērojama Eiropas Savienībā un citās Eiropas valstīs ar atsevišķām bateriju nodošanas sistēmām.) Šis marķējums uz baterijas, rokasgrāmatā vai uz iepakojuma norāda, ka šī izstrādājuma bateriju pēc tās kalpošanas laika beigām nedrīkst izmest ar citiem sadzīves atkritumiem. Ja uz baterijas ir atzīmēti ķīmiskie simboli, piem., Hg, Cd vai Pb, tie norāda, ka baterija satur dzīvsudrabu, kadmiju vai svinu, kura saturs ir lielāks par EK direktīvā 2006/66 minētajiem lielumiem. Ja baterijas tiek nepareizi likvidētas, šīs vielas var radīt kaitējumu cilvēku veselībai vai videi. lai aizsargātu dabas resursus un veicinātu materiālu otrreizēju izmantošanu, šķirojiet baterijas atsevišķi no citiem atkritumu veidiem un nododiet tās otrreizējai pārstrādei, izmantojot bateriju vietējo bezmaksas nodošanas sistēmu. [Latviešu] Tinkamas šio produkto akumuliatorių tvarkymas (Taikoma Europos Sąjungoje ir kitose Europos šalyse, kuriose galioja atskiros akumuliatorių grąžinimo sistemos.) Šis ženklas yra pateikiamas ant akumuliatoriaus, jo dokumentacijoje ar ant pakuotės nurodo, kad šio produkto akumuliatorių, pasibaigus jų tarnavimo laikui, negalima išmesti kartu su kitomis buitinėmis atliekomis. Cheminiai simboliai Hg, Cd arba Pb rodo, kad akumuliatoriuje yra gyvsidabrio, kadmio ar švino, kurio kiekis viršija normą, nurodytą ES direktyvoje 2006/66. Jei akumuliatoriai nebus tinkamai išmesti, šios medžiagos gali sukelti žalos žmonių sveikatai ar aplinkai. Tam, kad būtų apsaugoti gamtos ištekliai ir skatinamas antrinių žaliavų panaudojimas, pašome atskirti akumuliatorių nuo kitų rūšių atliekų ir atiduoti perdirbti vietinėje akumuliatorių grąžinimo sistemai. [Lietuvių kalba] Őige viis toote akude kasutusest kőrvaldamiseks (rakendatav Euroopa liidus ja teistes Euroopa riikides, kus on kasutusel spetsiaalsed akude kogumissüsteemid). Selline tähistus akul, dokumentidel vői pakendil näitab, et toote akusid ei tohi kasutusaja lőppemisel kőrvaldada koos muude olmejäätmetega. Keemilised elemendid Hg, Cd, vői Pb näitavad, et aku elavhőbeda, kaadmiumi vői plii sisaldus on EÜ direktiivi 2006/66 sihttasemest suurem. Kui akusid ei kőrvaldata őigel viisil, vőib nende sisu pőhjustada tervise-vői keskkonnakahjustusi. Selleks, et kaitsta loodusvarasid ja edendada materjalide taaskasutamist, eraldage akud muudest jäätmetest ja suunake need taaskasutusse kohaliku, tasuta teenusena pakutava akude tagastussüsteemi abil. [Eesti] BN68-03043A.indb 7 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:27 imagine the possibilities Thank you for purchasing this Samsung product. To receive more complete service, please register your product at www.samsung.com/register Model Serial No. BN68-02333J BN68-02333J-02 Plasma TV user manual Contact SAMSUNG WORLD-WIDE If you have any questions or comments relating to Samsung products, please contact the SAMSUNG customer care centre. Country Customer Care Centre  Web Site AUSTRIA 0810 - SAMSUNG(7267864, € 0.07/min) www.samsung.com/at BELGIUM 02 201 2418 www.samsung.com/be (Dutch) www.samsung.com/be_fr (French) CZECH REPUBLIC 800 - SAMSUNG (800-726786) www.samsung.com/cz DENMARK 8 - SAMSUNG(7267864) www.samsung.com/dk EIRE 0818 717 100 www.samsung.com/ie FINLAND 30 - 6227 515 www.samsung.com/fi FRANCE 01 4863 0000 www.samsung.com/fr GERMANY 01805 - SAMSUNG(726-7864 € 0,14/Min) www.samsung.de HUNGARY 06-80-SAMSUNG(726-7864) www.samsung.com/hu ITALIA 800-SAMSUNG(726-7864) www.samsung.com/it LUXEMBURG 02 261 03 710 www.samsung.com/lu NETHERLANDS 0900-SAMSUNG (0900-7267864) (€ 0,10/Min) www.samsung.com/nl NORWAY 3 - SAMSUNG(7267864) www.samsung.com/no POLAND "0 801 1SAMSUNG(172678) 022-607-93-33" www.samsung.com/pl PORTUGAL 80820-SAMSUNG(726-7864) www.samsung.com/pt SLOVAKIA 0800-SAMSUNG(726-7864) www.samsung.com/sk SPAIN 902 - 1 - SAMSUNG (902 172 678) www.samsung.com/es SWEDEN 0771 726 7864 (SAMSUNG) www.samsung.com/se Switzerland 0848 - SAMSUNG(7267864, CHF 0.08/min) www.samsung.com/ch www.samsung.com/ch_fr/(French) U.K 0845 SAMSUNG (7267864) www.samsung.com/uk BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 1 2009-10-21 �� 8:57:48English - 2 User Instructions „ Screen Image retention Do not display a still image (such as on a video game or when hooking up a PC to this PDP) on the plasma monitor panel for more than 2 hours as it can cause screen image retention. This image retention is also known as “screen burn”. To avoid such image retention, reduce the degree of brightness and contrast of the screen when displaying a still image. „ Height The PDP can normally operate only under 2000m in height. It might abnormally function at a place over 2000m in height so do not install and operate there. „ Heat on the top of the PDP TV The top side of the product may be hot after long period of use as heat dissipates from the panel through the vent hole in the upper part of the product. This is normal and does not indicate any defect or operation failure of the product. However, children should be prevented from touching the upper part of the product. „ The product is making a ‘cracking’ noise. A ‘cracking’ noise may occur when the product contracts or expands due to a change of surrounding environment such as temperature or humidity. This is normal and not a defect of the unit. „ Cell Defects The PDP uses a panel consisting of 2,360,000(HD-level) to 6,221,000(FHD-level) pixels which require sophisticated technology to produce. However, there may be few bright or dark pixels on the screen. These pixels will have no impact on the performance of the product. „ Avoid operating the TV at temperatures below 5°C(41°F) „ A still image displayed too long may cause permanent damage to the PDP Panel. Watching the PDP TV in 4:3 format for a long period of time may leave traces of borders displayed on the left, right and centre of the screen caused by the difference of light emission on the screen. Playing a DVD or a game console may cause similar effect to the screen. Damages caused by the above effect are not covered by the Warranty. „ Afterimage on the Screen. Displaying still images from Video games and PC for longer than a certain period of time may produce partial afterimages. To prevent this effect, reduce the ‘brightness’ and ‘contrast’ when displaying still images. „ Warranty - Warranty does not cover any damage caused by image retention. - Burn-in is not covered by the warranty. „ Installation Be sure to contact an authorized service centre, when installing your set in a location with heavy dust, high or low temperatures, high humidity, chemical substance and where it operates continually such as the airport, the train station etc. Failure to do so may cause a serious damage to your set. Digital TV Notice 1. Functionalities related to Digital TV(DVB) are only available in countries/areas where DVB-T (MPEG2 and MPEG4 AVC) digital terrestrial signals are broadcasted or where you have access to a compatible DVB-C(MPEG2 and MPEG4 AAC) cable-TV service. Please check with your local dealer the possibility to receive DVB-T or DVB-C signal. 2. DVB-T is the DVB European consortium standard for the broadcast transmission of digital terrestrial television and DVB-C is that for the broadcast transmission of digital TV over cable. However, some differentiated features like EPG (Electric Program Guide), VOD (Video on Demand) and so on, are not included in this specification. So, they cannot be supported at this moment. 3. Although this TV set meets the latest DVB-T and DVB-C standards[August,2008], the compatibility with future DVB-T digital terrestrial and DVB-C digital cable broadcasts cannot be guaranteed. 4. Some cable-TV providers may charge an additional fee for such a service and you may be required to agree to terms and conditions of their business. 5. Some Digital TV functions might be unavailable in some countries or regions and DVB-C might not work correctly with all providers. 6. For more information, please contact your local Samsung customer care centre. Contact SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE If you have any questions or comments relating to Samsung products, please contact the SAMSUNG customer care centre. (See back cover for more informations.) N Figures and illustrations in this User Manual are provided for reference only and may differ from actual product appearance. Product design and specifications may be changed without notice in order to enhance product performance. © 2009 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 2 2009-10-21 �� 8:57:49English - 3 English N O T Symbol Press Note One-Touch Button TOOLS Contents Connecting and Preparing Your TV ■ Checking Parts ..........................................................................4 ■ Using the Stand-Base ...............................................................4 ■ Assembling the Cables..............................................................4 ■ Viewing the Control Panel .........................................................5 ■ Viewing the Connection Panel...................................................6 ■ Remote Control .........................................................................8 ■ Installing Batteries in the Remote Control .................................8 ■ Using the Remote Control Backlight Buttons ............................9 ■ Switching On and Off.................................................................9 ■ Placing Your Television in Standby Mode..................................9 ■ Viewing the Display ...................................................................9 ■ Viewing the Menus ..................................................................10 ■ Using the TOOLS Button ........................................................10 ■ Plug & Play Feature ................................................................10 Channel Control ■ Storing Channels ................................................................... 11 ■ Managing Channels ................................................................13 Picture Control ■ Changing the Picture Settings.................................................15 ■ Setting up the TV with your PC ...............................................18 ■ PC Display...............................................................................19 Sound Control ■ Changing the Sound Setting ...................................................20 ■ Selecting the Sound Mode ......................................................21 Function Description ■ Setting the Time ......................................................................22 ■ Configuring the Setup Menu....................................................23 ■ Viewing the Picture in Picture (PIP).........................................25 Support / Input ■ Supported Program.................................................................26 ■ Source List / Edit Name...........................................................27 Network ■ Network Connection ................................................................28 ■ Network Setup.........................................................................30 Media Play ■ Connecting a USB Device.......................................................33 ■ Using the Media Play Function................................................34 ■ Sorting the Photo / Music / Movie List .....................................35 ■ Photo / Music / Movie List Option Menu..................................36 ■ Slide Show / Music Play / Movie Play Option Menu................37 ■ Viewing a Photo or Slide Show ...............................................38 ■ Playing Music ..........................................................................39 ■ Playing a Movie File ...............................................................40 ■ Using the Setup Menu.............................................................41 Media Play-DLNA ■ Setting the DLNA Network.......................................................42 ■ Installing the DLNA Application ...............................................42 ■ Using the DLNA Application ....................................................43 ■ Using the DLNA Function ........................................................44 About Anynet+ ■ Connecting Anynet + Devices ...................................................45 ■ Setting Up Anynet + .................................................................46 ■ Switching between Anynet + Devices .......................................46 ■ Recording ................................................................................47 ■ Listening through a Receiver...................................................48 ■ Troubleshooting for Anynet + ...................................................48 Content Library ■ Activating the Content Library .................................................49 ■ Using the Content Library........................................................50 Internet@TV ■ Getting Started with Internet@TV ...........................................51 ■ Editing Snippets in the Dock ...................................................53 ■ Using the Profile Widget..........................................................53 ■ Using the Yahoo!® Widget Gallery..........................................54 ■ Using the Yahoo!® Weather Widget........................................54 ■ Using the Yahoo!® News Widget ............................................55 ■ Using the Yahoo!® Flickr Widget.............................................55 ■ Using the Yahoo!® Finance Widget.........................................56 ■ Troubleshooting for internet@TV ...........................................56 ■ Help Website ...........................................................................57 Internet@TV ■ Getting Started with Internet@TV ...........................................58 ■ Setting up Internet@TV...........................................................58 ■ Using the Internet@TV service ...............................................59 ■ Troubleshooting for internet@TV ............................................60 ■ Help Website ...........................................................................60 Home Network Centre ■ Home Network Centre.............................................................61 ■ Setting Up the Home Network Centre .....................................62 ■ Using the Message Function...................................................62 ■ Using the Media Function........................................................63 Recommendations for Use ■ Teletext Feature.......................................................................64 ■ Wall Mount Kit Specifications (VESA) .....................................65 ■ Preparing before installing Wall- Mount...................................66 ■ How to attach the Stand-Base.................................................66 ■ Securing the TV to the Wall.....................................................67 ■ Securing the Installation Space...............................................67 ■ Troubleshooting.......................................................................68 ■ Specifications ..........................................................................71 ■ Software License.....................................................................72 BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 3 2009-10-21 �� 8:57:49English - 4 Assembling the Cables Enclose the cables in the Holder-Wire Cable so that the cables are not visible through the transparent stand. Using the Stand-Base N Two or more people should carry the PDP. Never lay the PDP on the floor because of possible damage to the screen. Always keep the PDP upright. N The PDP can rotate 20 degrees in right and left directions. -20° ~ 20° Checking Parts Owner’s Instructions Remote Control/ AAA Batteries (2ea) Power Cord Cloth-Clean Holder-Wire Cable Holder-Ring (4ea) (Refer to page 66) Program CD Screw (4ea) (PS50B650 only) (Refer to page 66) Cover-Bottom (PS50B650 only) (Refer to page 66) Cover-Bottom / Screws (2ea) (PS58B680 / PS63B680 only) (Refer to page 66) Ferrite Core for Headphone Ferrite Core for Power Cord (PS58B680T6P/ PS63B680 only) Ferrite Core for Power Cord Warranty Card/ Safety Guide Manual (Not available in all locations) N Ferrite Core The ferrite cores are used to shield the cables from interference. When connecting a cable, open the ferrite core and clip it around the cable near the plug. Connecting and Preparing Your TV (PS58B680T6P/ PS63B680 only) BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 4 2009-10-21 �� 8:57:51English - 5 Viewing the Control Panel N The product colour and shape may vary depending on the model. Front Panel buttons Touch each button to operate. (PS58B680 / PS63B680) (PS50B650) 1 SOURCE Toggles between all the available input sources (TV, Ext1, Ext2, AV, Component, PC, HDMI1, HDMI2/DVI, HDMI3, HDMI4, USB). N In the on-screen menu, use this button as you would use the ENTERE button on the remote control. 2 MENU Press to see an on-screen menu of your TV’s features. 3 + – Press to increase or decrease the volume. In the on-screen menu, use the + – buttons as you would use the ◄ and ► buttons on the remote control. 4 CH Press to change channels. In the on-screen menu, use the CH buttons as you would use the ▲ and ▼ buttons on the remote control. You can use CH button to turn on the TV without the remote control. 5 POWER INDICATOR Blinks and turns off when the power is on and lights up in stand-by mode. 6 (POWER) Press to turn the TV on and off. 7 REMOTE CONTROL SENSOR Aim the remote control towards this spot on the TV. 8 SPEAKERS BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 5 2009-10-21 �� 8:57:52English - 6 Viewing the Connection Panel N Whenever you connect an audio or video system to your set, ensure that all elements are switched off. N When connecting an external device, match the colour of the connection terminal to the cable. N The product colour and shape may vary depending on the model. 1 LAN Connect a LAN cable to this port to connect to the Network 2 POWER IN Connect the supplied power cord. 3 COMPONENT IN Audio (AUDIO L/R) and video (Y / PB / PR) inputs for Component. 4 PC IN (AUDIO / PC) Connect to the video and audio output jack on your PC. 5 EXT 1, EXT 2 Inputs or outputs for external devices, such as VCR, DVD, video game device or video disc players. N In EXT mode, DTV Out only supports MPEG SD Video and Audio. N In EXT Mode, Game mode is not available Input/Output Specification Connector Input Output Video Audio(L/R) RGB Video + Audio(L/R) EXT 1 ✔ ✔ ✔ Only TV or DTV output is available. EXT 2 ✔ ✔ Output you can choose. 6 HEADPHONE Connect a set of headphones if you wish to watch a television program without disturbing other people in the room. N Prolonged use of headphones at a high volume may damage your hearing. 7 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) Connect to a Digital Audio Component. 8 SERVICE Connector for service. 9 AUDIO OUT(AUDIO R/L) Connect RCA audio signals from the TV to an external source, such as Audio equipment. 0 ANT IN 75Ω Coaxial connector for Aerial/Cable Network. ! HDMI IN 1, 2(DVI), 3 No additional Audio connection is needed for an HDMI to HDMI connection. - When using an HDMI/DVI cable connection, you must use the HDMI IN 2 (DVI) jack. N What is HDMI? - High Definition Multimedia interface allows the transmission of high definition digital video data and multiple channels of digital audio. - The HDMI/DVI terminal supports DVI connection to an extended device with the appropriate cable (not supplied). The difference between HDMI and DVI is that the HDMI device is smaller in size, has the HDCP (High Bandwidth Digital Copy Protection) coding feature installed, and supports multi - channel digital audio. DVI AUDIO IN DVI audio outputs for external devices. Supported modes for HDMI/DVI and Component 480i 480p 576i 576p 720p 1080i 1080p HDMI/DVI 50Hz X X X O O O O HDMI/DVI 60Hz X O X X O O O Component O O O O O O O TV Rear Panel Cable Television Network or or 2 3 4 5 7 9 ! 0 6 8 1 BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 6 2009-10-21 �� 8:57:53English - 7 1 COMMON INTERFACE Slot Insert CI(CI+) (Common Interface) card into the slot. (refer to page 23) - When not inserting CI(CI+) CARD in some channels, Scramble Signal is displayed on the screen. - The pairing information containing a telephone number, CI(CI+) CARD ID, Host ID, and other information will be displayed in about 2~3 minutes. If an error message is displayed, please contact your service provider. - When the channel information configuration has finished, the message Updating Completed is displayed, indicating that the channel list is now updated. - Depending on the model, a message requesting your Parental Lock password may appear when the CI card is reinserted. - Depending on the model, even if the Parental Lock is set to Allow All a message requesting your password may appear for adult (18 years and above) programmes. N Insert the CI(CI+)-Card in the direction marked on it. N 'CI(CI+) CARD' is not supported in some countries, regions, broadcasting stations check with your authorized dealer. N The CI+ function is only applicable to PS********P model. If you have some problems, please contact to service provider. 2 USB 1(HDD), USB 2 Connect a USB mass storage device to view photo files (JPEG) and play audio files (MP3) or movie files. You can connect to SAMSUNG's network wirelessly.USB 1(HDD) jack is also used as the HDD jack. HDD (Hard disk drive) is device which stores digitally encoded data. 3 HDMI IN 4 Connect to the HDMI jack of a device with HDMI output. 4 AV IN (VIDEO, AUDIO L/R) Video and audio inputs for external devices, such as a camcorder or VCR. N The product colour and shape may vary depending on the model. TV Side Panel 3 4 1 2 BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 7 2009-10-21 �� 8:57:54English - 8 Remote Control You can use the remote control up to a distance of about 23 feet from the TV. N The performance of the remote control may be affected by bright light. 1 POWER button (turns the TV on and off) 2 Selects the TV mode directly. 3 Number buttons for direct channel access 4 Press to switch to your favorite channels. 5 Temporary sound switch-off 6 Volume increase Volume decrease 7 Available source selection 8 Use to see information on the current broadcast 9 Use to quickly select frequently used functions. 0 Use to select on-screen menu items and change menu values. ! This function enables you to view Internet@TV. @ Use these buttons in the Channel list, Media Play, and Internet@TV, etc. $ Use to display Channel Lists on the screen. % Use these buttons in the Channel list, Media Play and Anynet+, etc. ^ Press to backlight the buttons on the remote. This function is convenient for using at night or when the room is dark. (Using the remote control with the ON/OFF( ) light button set to On will reduce the battery usage time.) & Previous channel * Next channel Previous channel ( Displays the main on-screen menu ) Electronic Program Guide (EPG) display a Returns to the previous menu b Exit the on-screen menu c This function enables you to view Media Play d This function enables you to view Content Library. e Digital subtitle display f Turn the audio description function on or off. Teletext Functions 2 Exit from the teletext display (depending on the model) 7 Teletext mode selection (LIST/FLOF) 8 Teletext reveal 9 Teletext size @ Fastext topic selection # Teletext display/mix both teletext information and the normal broadcast $ Teletext store & Teletext sub page * P :Teletext next page P :Teletext previous page ( Teletext index a Teletext hold b Teletext cancel Installing Batteries in the Remote Control 1. Lift the cover at the back of the remote control upward as shown in the figure. 2. Install two AAA size batteries. N Make sure to match the ‘+’ and ‘–’ ends of the batteries with the diagram inside the compartment. 3. Close the cover. N Remove the batteries and store them in a cool, dry place if you won’t be using the remote control for a long time. N If the remote control doesn’t work, check the following 1. Is the TV power on? 2. Are the plus and minus ends of the batteries reversed? 3. Are the batteries drained? 4. Is there a power outage or is the power cord unplugged? 5. Is there a special fluorescent light or neon sign nearby? BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 8 2009-10-21 �� 8:57:55English - 9 Using the Remote Control Backlight Buttons Use this feature in dark surroundings and when you are unable to see the remote control buttons clearly. 1. Press the ON/OFF( ) light button N When ON, the button backlight is turned on for a moment. N Pressing a remote control button when the remote control is on turns the button backlight on for a moment. Switching On and Off The mains lead is attached to the rear of your set. 1. Plug the mains lead into an appropriate socket. N The standby indicator lights up on your set. 2. Press the POWERP button on your set. N You also can press the POWERP button or the TV button on the remote control to turn the TV on. N The programme that you were watching last is reselected automatically. 3. Press the numeric button (0~9) or channel up / down (< / >) button on the remote control or < CH> button on your set. N When you switch the set on for the very first time, you will be asked to choose language in which the menus are to be displayed. 4. To switch your set off, press the POWERP button again. Placing Your Television in Standby Mode Your set can be placed in standby mode in order to reduce the power consumption. The standby mode can be useful when you wish to interrupt viewing temporarily (during a meal, for example). 1. Press the POWERP button on the remote control. N The screen is turned off and a red standby indicator appears on your set. 2. To switch your set back on, simply press the POWERP, numeric buttons (0~9), TV button or channel up / down (< / >) button again. N Do not leave your set in standby mode for long periods of time (when you are away on holiday, for example). It is best to unplug the set from the mains and aerial. Viewing the Display The display identifies the current channel and the status of certain audio-video settings. O Press the INFO button to viewing the information. Press the INFO button on the remote control. The TV will display the channel, the type of sound, and the status of certain picture and sound settings. • ▲, ▼: You can view other channel’s information. If you want to move to the currently selected channel, press ENTERE button. • ◄, ►: You can view the desired program’s information at the current channel. N Press the INFO button once more or wait approximately 10 seconds and the display disappears automatically. BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 9 2009-10-21 �� 8:57:56English - 10 Viewing the Menus 1. With the power on, press the MENU button. The main menu appears on the screen. The menu’s left side has icons: Picture, Sound, Channel, Setup, Input, Application, Support. 2. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select one of the icons. Then press the ENTERE button to access the icon’s sub-menu. 3. Press the EXIT button to exit. N The on-screen menus disappear from the screen after about one minute. Using the TOOLS Button You can use the TOOLS button to select your frequently used functions quickly and easily. The Tools menu changes depending on which external input mode you are viewing. 1. Press the TOOLS button. The Tools menu will appear. 2. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select a menu, then press the ENTERE button. 3. Press the ▲ / ▼ / ◄ / ► / ENTERE buttons to display, change, or use the selected items. For a more detailed description of each function, refer to the corresponding page. • Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC), see page 46 • Picture Size, see page 16 • Picture Mode, see page 15 • Sound Mode, see page 20 • Sleep Timer, see page 22 • SRS TS HD, see page 20 • Energy Saving, see page 24 • Dual l ll, see page 21 • Add to Favourite (or Delete from Favourite), see page 14 • PIP, see page 25 • Auto Adjustment, see page 18 Plug & Play Feature When the TV is initially powered on, basic settings proceed automatically and subsequently. N The Screen Saver is activated if there is no remote control key input for longer than 1 minute while Plug & Play is running. N The Screen Saver is activated if there is no operating signal for longer than 15 minutes. N If you accidentally select the wrong country for your TV, the characters on the screen may be wrongly displayed. 1. Press the POWER button on the remote control. Select the OSD Language. menu is automatically displayed. Select the appropriate language by pressing the ▲ or ▼ button. Press the ENTERE button to confirm your choice. 2. Press the ◄ or ► button to select Store Demo or Home Use, then press the ENTERE button. N We recommend setting the TV to Home Use mode for the best picture in your home environment. N Store Demo mode is only intended for use in retail environments. N If the unit is accidentally set to Store Demo mode and you want to return to Home Use (Standard): Press the Volume button on the TV. When the volume OSD is displayed, press and hold the MENU button on the TV for 5 seconds. 3. Press the ENTERE button. Select the appropriate country by pressing the ▲ or ▼ button. Press the ENTERE button to confirm your choice. N After selecting the country in the Country menu, some models may proceed with an additional option to setup the pin number. N When you input the PIN number, 0-0-0-0 is not available. 4. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to memorize the channels of the selected connection, then press the ENTERE button. • Air: Air antenna signal. • Cable: Cable antenna signal. Plug & Play Select the OSD Language. Language : U Move E Enter ▲ Nederlands English Eesti ▼ Tools Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) Picture Size : Auto Wide Picture Mode : Standard Sound Mode : Custom Sleep Timer : Off SRS TS HD : Off Energy Saving : Off Dual l ll : Mono Add to Favourite U Move E Enter e Exit Mode : Standard Cell Light : 4 Contrast : 95 Brightness : 45 Sharpness : 50 Colour : 50 Tint (G/R) : G50/R50 Advanced Settings Picture BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 10 2009-10-21 �� 8:57:56English - 11 5. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the Antenna source to memorize. Press the ENTERE button to select Start. • Digital & Analogue: Digital and Analogue channels. • Digital: Digital channels. • Analogue: Analogue channels. N The channel search will start and end automatically. N For more detailed description of selecting Cable mode, refer to page 11. 6. The message Set the Clock Mode. is displayed. Press the ENTERE button. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Auto, then Press the ENTERE button. N If you select Manual, Set current date and time is displayed. (For a more detailed description of Manual, refer to page 22) N If you have received a digital signal, the time will be set automatically. 7. The brief instruction on How to get the best performance from your new HDTV is displayed. Press the ENTERE button. N This menu is available HD Connection Guide in the Support menu. N You can change previous or next page by pressing the ◄ / ► button. 8. The message Enjoy your TV. is displayed. N If you want to view the TV immediately, select the Watch TV. N If you want to view the See Product Guide, press the ENTERE button. If you want to reset this feature... 1. Press the MENU button to display the menu. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Setup, then press the ENTERE button. 2. Press the ENTERE button again to select Plug & Play. 3. Enter your 4 digit PIN number. The default PIN number of a new TV set is ‘0-0-0-0’. N If you want to change PIN(Personal Identification Number), refer to page 24. N The Plug & Play feature is only available in the TV mode. Storing Channels ❑ Country „ Digital Channel: You can change the country for digital channels. „ Analogue Channel: You can change the country for analogue channels. N The PIN number input screen appears. Enter your 4 digit PIN number. ❑ Auto Store Scans for all channels with active broadcast stations (and availability depends on your country) and stores them in the TV's memory. You set the TV to memorize the channels of the selected connection. • Air: Air antenna signal. • Cable: Cable antenna signal. You can select the antenna source to memorize. • Digital & Analogue: Digital and Analogue channels. • Digital: Digital channels. • Analogue: Analogue channels. N When selecting Cable, • Search Mode: Displays the search mode. (Quick) - Network ID: Displays the network identification code. - Frequency: Displays the frequency for the channel. - Modulation: Displays available modulation values. - Symbol Rate: Displays available symbol rates. • Search Mode: Displays the search mode.(Full, Network) - Start Frequency: Displays the frequency start values. - End Frequency: Displays the frequency stop values. - Modulation: Displays available modulation values. - Symbol Rate : Displays available symbol rates. N If you want to stop Auto Store, press the ENTERE button. The Stop Auto Store? message will be displayed. Select Yes by pressing the ◄ or ► button, then press the ENTERE button. Channel Control Channel Country ► Auto Store Manual Store Cable Search Option Full Guide Mini Guide Default Guide : Full Guide Channel List Setup Plug & Play ► Menu Language : English Time Broadcast Security Network General BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 11 2009-10-21 �� 8:57:57English - 12 ❑ Manual Store Scans for a channel manually and stores it in the TV’s memory. „ Digital Channel (Digital) N Digital Channel is only available in DTV mode. • Channel: Set the Channel number using the ▲, ▼ or number (0~9) buttons. • Frequency: Set the frequency using the number (0~9) buttons. • Bandwidth: Set the bandwidth using the ▲ or ▼ buttons. N When it has finished, channels are updated in the channel list. „ Analogue Channel Manual store for analogue channel. • Programme (Programme number to be assigned to a channel): Sets the programme number using the ▲, ▼ or number (0~9) buttons. • Colour System → Auto / PAL / SECAM / NTSC 4.43: Sets the colour system value using the ▲ or ▼ button. • Sound System → BG / DK / I / L : Sets the sound system value using the ▲ or ▼ button. • Channel (When you know the number of the channel to be stored): Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select C (Air channel) or S (Cable channel). Press the ► button, then press the ▲, ▼ or number (0~9) buttons to select the required number. N If there is abnormal sound or no sound, reselect the sound standard required. • Search (When you do not know the channel numbers): Press the ▲ or ▼ button to start the search. The tuner scans the frequency range until the first channel or the channel that you selected is received on the screen. • Store (When you store the channel and associated programme number): Set to OK by pressing the ENTERE button. N Channel mode - C (Air channel mode): You can select a channel by entering the assigned number to each air broadcasting station in this mode. - S (Cable channel mode): You can select a channel by entering the assigned number for each cable channel in this mode. ❑ Cable Search Option You can set additional search options such as frequency and symbol rate for cable network searching. (Depending on the each country) • Freq.Start : Displays the frequency start values. • Freq.Stop : Displays the frequency stop values. • Modulation: Displays available modulation values. • Symbol Rate: Displays available symbol rates. N If the Freq.Start value is bigger than Freq.Stop value, the warning message is displayed. ❑ Full Guide / Mini Guide The EPG (Electronic Programme Guide) information is provided by the broadcasters. Programme entries may appear blank or out of date as a result of the information broadcast on a given channel. The display will dynamically update as soon as new information becomes available. • Full Guide: Displays the programme information as time ordered one hour segments. One hours of programme information is displayed which may be scrolled forwards or backwards in time. • Mini Guide: The information of each programme is displayed by each line on the current channel Mini Guide screen from the current programme onwards according to the programme starting time order. ❑ Default Guide „ Mini Guide / Full Guide You can decide whether to display either the Mini Guide or the Full Guide when the GUIDE button on the remote control is pressed. O You can also display the guide menu simply by pressing the GUIDE button. Continued... Channel Full Guide Mini Guide Default Guide : Full Guide ► Channel List Channel Mode : Added Ch. Fine Tune BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 12 2009-10-21 �� 8:57:57English - 13 Using the Full / Mini Guide ▲ / ▼ / ◄ / ►, ENTER Select a programme by pressing the ▲/▼/◄/►/ENTERE button. RED Toggle between the Mini Guide or Full Guide. GREEN Full Guide: Scroll backwards quickly (-24 hours). YELLOW Full Guide: Scroll forwards quickly (+24 hours). BLUE Exit the guide. INFO INFO button for the detailed information. ❑ Channel Mode When the press the P () button, Channels will be switched within the selected channel list. „ Added Ch.: Channels will be switched within the memorized channel list. „ Favourite Ch.: Channels will be switched within the favourite channel list. ❑ Fine Tune (Analogue channel only) If the reception is clear, you do not have to fine tune the channel, as this is done automatically during the search and store operation. If the signal is weak or distorted, you may have to fine tune the channel manually. N Fine tuned channels that have been saved are marked with an asterisk * on the right-hand side of the channel number in the channel banner. N If you do not store the fine-tuned channel in memory, adjustments are not saved. N To reset the fine-tuning, select Reset by pressing the ▼ button and then press the ENTERE button. Managing Channels Using this menu, you can Add / Delete or set Favourite channels and use the programme guide for digital broadcasts. N Select a channel in the All Channels, Added Channels, Favourites, or Programmed screen by pressing the ▲ or ▼ buttons, and pressing the ENTERE button. Then you can watch the selected channel. • All Channels: Shows all currently available channels. • Added Channels: Shows all added channels. • Favourites: Shows all favourite channels. • Programmed: Shows all current reserved programmes. O Press the CH LIST button on the remote control to bring up the channel lists. N Using the Colour buttons with the Channel List - Red (Channel Type): Toggle among Air, Cable and Satellite. - Green (Zoom): Enlarges or shrinks a channel number. - Yellow (Select): Selects multiple channel lists. - T TOOLS (Tools): Displays the Delete (or Add), Add to Favourite (or Delete from Favourite), Lock (or Unlock), Timer Viewing, Edit Channel Name, Edit Channel Number, Sort, Select All (or Deselect All), or Auto Store menu. (The Tools menus may differ depending on the situation.) N Channel Status Display Icons A An Analogue channel. c A channel selected by pressing the yellow button. ♥ A channel set as a Favourite. ( A programme currently being broadcast. \ A locked channel. ) A reserved programme Channel Mini Guide Default Guide : Full Guide Channel List Channel Mode : Added Ch. Fine Tune 824 UKTV Gold 825 UKTV style A 1 C -- A 2 C -- A 3 ♥ C -- A 4 C -- A 5 C -- A 6 C -- A 7 C -- A 8 C -- All Channels All „ Channel Type „ Zoom „ Select Page Tools Mini Guide DTV Cable 900 f tn Street Hypnosis Booze Britain 2:00 2:30 ▼ 5:00 Freshmen On Campus Watch Information Page „ Full Guide „ Exit Full Guide DTV Cable 900 f tn 2:10 Tue 1 Jun Freshmen On Campus 2:00 - 2:30 No Detailed Information Today 2:00 - 3:00 3:00 - 4:00 Mint Extra Loaded Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC The Distillery Smash Hits! Sunday 900 f tn 901 ITV Play 902 Kerrang! 903 Kiss 903 oneword ▼ 903 Smash Hits! Street Hypn.. Kisstory No Information No Information No Information Freshmen O.. Watch Information Page „ Mini Guide „ +24 Hours „ Exit BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 13 2009-10-21 �� 8:57:58English - 14 ❑ Channel List Tools Menu (in All Channels / Added Channels / Favourites) N Press the TOOLS button to use the Tools menu. N The Tools menu items may differ depending on the channel status. „ Add / Delete You can delete or add a channel to display the channels you want. N All deleted channels will be shown on All Channels menu. N A gray-coloured channel indicates the channel has been deleted. N The Add menu only appears for deleted channels. N You can also delete a channel to the Added Channels or Favourites menu in the same manner. „ Add to Favourite / Delete from Favourite You can set channels you watch frequently as favourites. T Press the TOOLS button to display Tools menu. You can also add the favourite channel by selecting Tools → Add to Favourite (or Delete from Favourite). O To select the Favourite channels you have set up, press the FAV.CH button on the remote control. N The “♥” symbol will be displayed and the channel will be set as a favourite. N All favourite channels will be shown on Favourite menu. „ Lock / Unlock You can lock a channel so that the channel cannot be selected and viewed. This function is available only when the Child Lock is set to On. (see page 24) N The PIN number input screen appears. Enter your 4 digit PIN number. N The default PIN number of a new TV set is ‘0-0-0-0’. You can change the PIN, by selecting Change PIN from the menu. N The “\” symbol will be displayed and the channel will be locked. „ Timer Viewing If you reserve a programme you want to watch, the channel is automatically switched to the reserved channel in the Channel List; even when you are watching another channel. To reserve a programme set the current time first. (See page 22) N Only memorized channels can be reserved. N You can set the channel, month, day, year, hour and minute directly by pressing the number buttons on the remote control. N Reserving a programme will be shown on Programmed menu. N Digital Programme Guide and Viewing Reservation When a digital channel is selected, and you press the ► button, the Programme Guide for the channel appears. You can reserve a programme according to the procedures described above. „ Edit Channel Name (Analogue channel only) Channels can be labeled so that their call letters appear whenever the channel is selected. N The names of digital broadcasting channels are automatically assigned and cannot be labeled. „ Edit Channel Number (Digital channel only) You can also edit the channel number by pressing the number buttons on the remote control. „ Sort (Analogue channel only) This operation allows you to change the programme numbers of the stored channels. This operation may be necessary after using the auto store. „ Select All / Deselect All You can deselect or select all channels in the channel list. N You can perform the Add / Delete, Add to Favourites / Delete from Favourites, or Lock / Unlock function for multiple channels at the same time. Select the required channels and press the yellow button to set all the selected channels at the same time. N The c mark appears to the left of the selected channels. N You can only select Deselect All when there is a selected channel. „ Auto Store N For further details on setting up options, refer to page 11. N If a channel is locked using the Child Lock function, the PIN input window appears. ❑ Channel List Tools Menu (in Programmed ) You can view, modify or delete a reservation. N Press the TOOLS button to use the Tools menu. • Change Info: Select to change a viewing reservation. • Cancel Schedules: Select to cancel a viewing reservation. • Information: Select to view a viewing reservation. (You can also change the reservation information.) • Select All / Deselect All: Select or deselect all reserved programmes. 824 UKTV Gold 825 UKTV style A 1 C -- A 2 C -- A 3 C -- A 4 C -- A 5 C -- A 6 C -- A 7 C -- A 8 C -- All Channels All „ Channel Type „ Zoom „ Select Page Tools Delete Add to Favourite Lock Timer Viewing Edit Channel Name Sort ▼ Programmed 1 / 1 / 2009 13:59 5 TV1 Quincy, M.E 18:59 2 TV3 The Equalizer 20:59 2 TV3 McMillan & Wife 21:59 2 TV3 M.Spillane’s mike Hammer Change Info Cancel Schedules Information Select All All „ Zoom „ Select Tools Information BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 14 2009-10-21 �� 8:57:59English - 15 Changing the Picture Settings ❑ Mode You can select the type of picture which best corresponds to your viewing requirements. „ Dynamic / Standard / Eco / Movie T Press the TOOLS button to display Tools menu. You can also set the picture mode by selecting Tools → Picture Mode. ❑ Cell Light / Contrast / Brightness / Sharpness / Colour / Tint (G/R) Your television has several setting options that allow you to control the picture quality. • Cell Light: Adjusts the pixel brightness. • Contrast: Adjusts the contrast level. • Brightness: Adjusts the brightness level. • Sharpness: Adjusts the sharpness. • Colour: Adjusts the colour saturation of the picture using the bar on the screen. • Tint (G/R): Adjusts the colour tint of the picture. N When you make changes to Cell Light, Contrast, Brightness, Sharpness, Colour or Tint (G/R), the OSD will be adjusted accordingly. N The adjusted values are saved for each picture mode. N In Analogue TV, Ext., AV modes of the PAL system, you cannot use the Tint Function. N In PC mode, you can only make changes to Cell Light, Contrast and Brightness. N Each adjusted setting will be stored separately according to its input mode. N The energy consumed during use can be significantly reduced if the level of brightness of the picture is reduced, and then this will reduce the overall running cost. ❑ Advanced Settings You can adjust the advanced settings for your screen including the colour and contrast. N Advanced Settings is available in Standard or Movie mode. N In PC mode, you can only make changes to Dynamic Contrast, Gamma and White Balance from among the Advanced Settings items. „ Black Tone → Off / Dark / Darker / Darkest You can enhance the picture depth by adjusting the black colour density. „ Dynamic Contrast → Off / Low / Medium / High You can adjust the screen contrast so that the optimal contrast is provided. „ Gamma You can adjust the primary colour (Red, Green, Blue) Intensity. „ Colour Space Colour Space is a colour matrix composed of red, green and blue colours. Select your favourite Colour Space to experience the most natural colour. • Auto: Automatically sets the colour range depending on the input video source. • Native: Sets the colour range wider than the that of the input video source. • Custom: Adjusts the colour range to suit your preference. N Customizing the Colour Space - Adjusts the Colour range to suit your preference. Colour is available when Colour Space is set to Custom. - Colour → Red / Green / Blue / Yellow / Cyan / Magenta - Red / Green / Blue: You can adjust the RGB values for the selected colour. - Reset: Resets the colour space to the default values. Picture Control Continued... Mode : Standard ► Cell Light : 4 Contrast : 95 Brightness : 45 Sharpness : 50 Colour : 50 Tint (G/R) : G50/R50 Advanced Settings Picture Colour : 50 Tint (G/R) : G50/R50 Advanced Settings ► Picture Options Picture Reset Picture BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 15 2009-10-21 �� 8:57:59English - 16 „ White Balance You can adjust the colour temperature for more natural picture colours. • R-Offset / G-Offset / B-Offset / R-Gain / G-Gain / B-Gain: Changing the adjustment value will refresh the adjusted screen. • Reset: Resets the default white balance. „ Flesh Tone You can adjust the flesh tone to be more or less red. N Changing the adjustment value will refresh the adjusted screen. „ Edge Enhancement → Off / On You can emphasize object boundaries in the picture. „ xvYCC → Off / On Setting the xvYCC mode to on increases detail and colour space when watching movies from an external device (i.e. DVD player). N xvYCC is available when the picture mode is set to Movie, and the external input is set to HDMI or Component mode. N This function may not be supported depending on your external device. ❑ Picture Options You can customize the additional picture settings to suit your preference. N In PC mode, you can only make changes to the Colour Tone, Size and Screen Burn Protection from among the items in Picture Options. „ Colour Tone → Cool / Normal / Warm1 / Warm2 / Warm3 You can select the most comfortable colour tone to your eyes. N The adjusted values are stored according to the selected Picture mode. N Warm1, Warm2, or Warm3 is only activated when the picture mode is Movie. „ Size → Auto Wide / 16:9 / Wide Zoom / Zoom / 4:3 / Screen Fit You can select the picture size which best corresponds to your viewing requirements. • Auto Wide: Sets the picture in Auto Wide format. • 16:9: Sets the picture to the 16:9 aspect ratio. • Wide Zoom: Select this menu to view 4:3 aspect ratio pictures over a 16:9 aspect ratio TV by stretching the 4:3 picture vertically. • Zoom: Stretches the 16:9 aspect ratio picture vertically. • 4:3: Sets the picture to the 4:3 aspect ratio. • Screen Fit: Displays the full native HD signal that cannot be viewed using a normal TV. N Depending on the input source, the picture size options may vary. N The items available may differ depending on the selected mode. N In PC Mode, only 16:9 and 4:3 mode can be adjusted. N When Double ( , ) mode has been set in PIP, the Picture Size cannot be set. N Settings can be adjusted and stored for each external device you have connected to an input of the TV. N Temporary image retention may occur when viewing a static image on the set for more than two hours. N Wide Zoom: Press the ► button to select Position, then press the ENTERE button. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to move the screen up / down. Then press the ENTERE button. N Zoom: Press the ► button to select Position, then press the ENTERE button. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to move the picture up and down. Then press the ENTERE button. Press the ► button to select Size, then press the ENTERE button. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to magnify or reduce the picture size in the vertical direction. Then press the ENTERE button. N After selecting Screen Fit in HDMI (1080i / 1080p) or Component (1080i / 1080p) mode: Select Position by pressing the ◄ or ►button. Use the ▲, ▼, ◄ or ► button to move the picture. N Reset: Press the ◄ or ► button to select Reset, then press the ENTERE button. You can initialize the setting. N If you use the Screen Fit function with HDMI 720p input, 1 line will be cut at the top, bottom, left and right as in the overscan function. „ Screen Mode → 16:9 / Wide Zoom / Zoom / 4:3 When setting the picture size to Auto Wide in a 16:9 wide TV, you can determine the picture size you want to see the 4:3 WSS (Wide Screen Service) image or nothing. Each individual European country requires different picture size so this function is intended for users to select it. N This function is available in Auto Wide mode. N This function is not available in PC, Component or HDMI mode. Continued... Tint (G/R) : G50/R50 Advanced Settings Picture Options ► Picture Reset Picture BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 16 2009-10-21 �� 8:57:59English - 17 „ Digital NR → Off / Low / Medium / High / Auto If the broadcast signal received by your TV is weak, you can activate the Digital Noise Reduction feature to help reduce any static and ghosting that may appear on the screen. N When the signal is weak, select one of the other options until the best picture is displayed. „ HDMI Black Level → Normal / Low You can directly select the black level on the screen to adjust the screen depth. N This function is active only when the external input connects to HDMI (RGB signals). „ 1080 Full HD Motion Demo → Off / On Samsung's new generation PDP panels deliver stunning Full HD motion clarity when viewing fast action sports, movies, and games. N This function is not available in PC, Game or Media Play mode. „ Film Mode You can optimize the picture mode for watching movies. • Off: Turn the Film Mode function off. • Auto1: Automatically adjusts the picture for the best quality when watching a film. • Auto2: Automatically optimizes the video text when watching a film. • Cinema Smooth: Offers the ultimate cinema experience. N Film mode is supported in TV, Video, Component(480i / 1080i) and HDMI(1080i). „ Real 100Hz Demo → Off / On You can get a clear distinction between Real 100Hz and 50Hz, especially when watching fast moving scenes. Therefore, when seeing slow moving scenes, you will not be able to distinguish between Real 100Hz and 50Hz. Demo 100Hz works only with 50Hz signal. Real 100Hz demo mode is provided for shop demonstration with special pictures. „ Blue Only Mode → Off / On This function is for AV device measurement experts. This function displays the blue signal only by removing the red and green signals from the video signal so as to provide a Blue Filter effect that is used to adjust the Colour and Tint of video equipment such as DVD players, Home Theaters, etc. N Blue Only Mode is available when the picture mode is set to Movie or Standard. „ Screen Burn Protection To reduce the possibility of screen burn, this unit is equipped with screen burn prevention technology. This technology enables you to set picture movement up/down (Vertical) and side to side (Horizontal). The Time setting allows you to program the time between movement of the picture in minutes. • Pixel Shift: Using this function, you can minutely move pixels on the PDP in horizontal or vertical direction to minimize after image on the screen. N Optimum condition for pixel shift Item TV/Ext./AV/Component/HDMI/PC Horizontal 0~2 2 Vertical 0~4 4 Time (minute) 1~4 min 2 min N The Pixel Shift value may differ depending on the monitor size (inches) and mode. N This function is not available in the Screen Fit mode. • Scrolling: This function helps remove after images on the screen by moving all the pixels on the PDP according to a pattern. Use this function when there are remaining after images or symbols on the screen especially when you displayed a still image on the screen for a long time. • Side Grey: When you watch TV with the screen ratio of 4:3, the screen is prevented from any damage by adjusting the white balance on both extreme left and right sides. - Light: When you set the screen ratio to 4:3, it brightens the left and right sides. - Dark: When you set the screen ratio to 4:3, it darkens the left and right sides. Continued... BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 17 2009-10-21 �� 8:57:59English - 18 Setting up the TV with your PC N Preset: Press the SOURCE button to select PC mode. ❑ Auto Adjustment Auto Adjustment allows the PC screen of set to self-adjust to the incoming PC video signal. The values of fine, coarse and position are adjusted automatically. N This function does not work in DVI-HDMI mode. T Press the TOOLS button to display Tools menu. You can also set the auto adjustment by selecting Tools → Auto Adjustment. ❑ Screen The purpose of picture quality adjustment is to remove or reduce picture noise. If the noise is not removed by Fine-tuning alone, then adjust the frequency as best as possible (Coarse) and Fine-tune again. After the noise has been reduced, readjust the picture so that it is aligned on the center of screen. „ Coarse Adjusts the frequency when vertical noise appears on the screen. „ Fine Adjusts the screen to be clearer. „ PC Position Adjust the PC’s screen positioning if it does not fit the TV screen. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to adjusting the Vertical-Position. Press the ◄ or ► button to adjust the Horizontal-Position. „ Image Reset You can replace all image settings with the factory default values. ❑ Picture Reset → Reset Picture Mode / Cancel Resets all picture settings to the default values. N Select a picture mode to be reset. The reset is performed for each picture mode. Brightness : 45 Sharpness : 50 Auto Adjustment ► Screen Advanced Settings Picture Options Picture Reset Picture Picture Advanced Settings Picture Options Picture Reset ► Picture BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 18 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:00English - 19 PC Display ❑ Setting Up Your PC Software (Based on Windows XP) The Windows display-settings for a typical computer are shown below. The actual screens on your PC will probably be different, depending upon your particular version of Windows and your particular video card. However, even if your actual screens look different, the same basic set-up information will apply in almost all cases. (If not, contact your computer manufacturer or Samsung Dealer.) 1. First, click on ‘Control Panel’ on the Windows start menu. 2. When the control panel window appears, click on ‘Appearance and Themes’ and a display dialog-box will appear. 3. When the control panel window appears, click on ‘Display’ and a display dialog-box will appear. 4. Navigate to the ‘Settings’ tab on the display dialog-box. The correct size setting (resolution) Optimum: 1920 X 1080 pixels If a vertical-frequency option exists on your display settings dialog box, the correct value is ‘60’ or ‘60 Hz’. Otherwise, just click ‘OK’ and exit the dialog box. ❑ Display Modes Both screen position and size will vary depending on the type of PC monitor and its resolution. The resolutions in the table are recommended. N When using an HDMI/DVI cable connection, you must use the HDMI IN 2(DVI) jack. N The interlace mode is not supported. N The set might operate abnormally if a non-standard video format is selected. N Separate and Composite modes are supported. SOG is not supported. N Too long or low quality VGA cable can cause picture noise at high resolution modes (1920x1080). „ D-Sub and HDMI/DVI Input Mode Resolution Horizontal Frequency (kHz) Vertical Frequency (Hz) Pixel Clock Frequency (MHz) Sync Polarity (H/V) IBM 640 x 350 31.469 70.086 25.175 + / - 720 x 400 31.469 70.087 28.322 - / + MAC 640 x 480 35.000 66.667 30.240 - / - 832 x 624 49.726 74.551 57.284 - / - 1152 x 870 68.681 75.062 100.000 - / + VESA CVT 720 x 576 35.910 59.950 32.750 - / + 1152 x 864 53.783 59.959 81.750 - / + 1280 x 720 44.772 59.855 74.500 - / + 56.456 74.777 95.750 - / + 1280 x 960 75.231 74.857 130.000 - / + VESA DMT 640 x 480 31.469 59.940 25.175 - / - 37.861 72.809 31.500 - / - 37.500 75.000 31.500 - / - 800 x 600 37.879 60.317 40.000 + / + 800 x 600 48.077 72.188 50.000 + / + 800 x 600 46.875 75.000 49.500 + / + 1024 x 768 48.363 60.004 65.000 - / - 56.476 70.069 75.000 - / - 60.023 75.029 78.750 + / + 1152 x 864 67.500 75.000 108.000 + / + 1280 x 800 49.702 59.810 83.500 - / + 62.795 74.934 106.500 - / + 1280 x 960 60.000 60.000 108.000 + / + 1280 x 1024 63.981 60.020 108.000 + / + 79.976 75.025 135.000 + / + 1360 x 768 47.712 60.015 85.500 + / + 1440 x 900 55.935 59.887 106.500 - / + 70.635 74.984 136.750 - / + 1680 x 1050 65.290 59.954 146.250 - / + VESA DMT / DTV CEA 1920 x 1080p 67.500 60.000 148.500 + / + VESA GTF 1280 x 720 52.500 70.000 89.040 - / + 1280 x 1024 74.620 70.000 128.943 - / - BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 19 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:00English - 20 Changing the Sound Setting ❑ Mode You can select the type of special sound effect to be used when watching a given broadcast. „ Standard / Music / Movie / Clear Voice / Custom T Press the TOOLS button to display Tools menu. You can also configure the sound mode by selecting Tools → Sound Mode. ❑ Equalizer The sound settings can be adjusted to suit your personal preferences. • Mode: You can select a sound mode to suit your personal preferences. • Balance: Controls the balance between the right and left speakers. • 100Hz / 300Hz / 1KHz / 3KHz / 10KHz (Bandwidth Adjustment): Adjusts the level of different bandwidth frequencies • Reset: Resets the equalizer settings to the default values. ❑ SRS TruSurround HD → Off / On SRS TruSurround HD is the combined technology of TruSurround and FOCUS, TruBass. SRS TruSurround HD enables you to enjoy a virtual 5.1 Surround Sound effect over the TV's two speakers. This function provides not only rich deep bass also improves high frequency resolution. T Press the TOOLS button to display Tools menu. You can also set the SRS TruSurround HD by selecting Tools → SRS TS HD. TruSurround HD, SRS and the symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc. TruSurround HD technology is incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc. N If the sound is abnormal while TV is playing music, please adjust the equalizer and SRS TruSurround HD (Off/On). ❑ Audio Language (Digital channel only) You can change the default value for audio languages. Displays the language information for the incoming stream. N You can only select the language among the actual languages being broadcast. ❑ Audio Format → MPEG / Dolby Digital (Digital channel only) When sound is emitted from both the main speaker and the audio receiver, a sound echo may occur due to the decoding speed difference between the main speaker and the audio receiver. In this case, use the TV Speaker function. N You can only select the language among the actual languages being broadcast. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. ❑ Audio Description (Digital channel only) This is an auxiliary audio function that provides an additional audio track for visually challenged persons. This function handles the Audio Stream for the AD (Audio Description), when it is sent along with the Main audio from the broadcaster. Users can turn the Audio Description On or Off and control the volume. O You can select these options simply by pressing the AD button on the remote control. „ Audio Description → Off / On Turn the audio description function on or off. „ Volume Adjusts the audio description volume. N Volume is active when Audio Description is set to On. Sound Control Mode : Custom ► Equalizer SRS TruSurround HD : Off Audio Language : ---- Audio Format : ---- Audio Description Auto Volume : Off Speaker Select : TV Speaker Sound BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 20 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:00English - 21 ❑ Auto Volume → Off / On Each broadcasting station has its own signal conditions, and so it is not easy to adjust the volume every time the channel is changed. This feature lets you automatically adjust the volume of the desired channel by lowering the sound output when the modulation signal is high or by raising the sound output when the modulation signal is low. ❑ Speaker Select → External Speaker / TV Speaker If you want to hear the sound through separate speakers, cancel the internal amplifier. N The – +, M MUTE buttons do not operate when the Speaker Select is set to External Speaker. N If you select External Speaker in the Speaker Select menu, the sound settings will be limited. TV's Internal Speakers Audio Out (Optical, L / R Out) to Sound System TV / Ext. / AV / Component / PC / HDMI TV / Ext. / AV / Component / PC / HDMI TV Speaker Speaker Output Sound Output External Speaker Mute Sound Output Video No Signal Mute Mute ❑ Sound Select When the PIP feature is activated, you can listen to the sound of the sub (PIP) picture. • Main: Listen to the sound of the main picture. • Sub: Listen to the sound of the sub picture. T Press the TOOLS button to to display Tools menu. You can also set the sound of the sub picture by selecting Tools → PIP → Sound Select. N You can select this option when PIP is set to On. ❑ Sound Reset „ Reset All / Reset Sound Mode / Cancel: You can restore the Sound settings to the factory defaults. Selecting the Sound Mode When you set to Dual l ll, the current sound mode is displayed on the screen. Type of broadcast On-screen indication NICAM Stereo Regular broadcast (Standard audio) Mono (Normal use) Regular + NICAM Mono NICAM Mono (Normal) NICAM-Stereo NICAM Stereo Mono (Normal) NICAM Dual-I/II NICAM Dual-1 NICAM Dual-2 Mono (Normal) A2 Stereo Regular broadcast (Standard audio) Mono (Normal use) Bilingual or DUAL-I/II Dual I Dual II Stereo Stereo Mono (Forced mono) N If the stereo signal is weak and an automatic switching occurs, then switch to the mono. N This function is only activated in stereo sound signal. It is deactivated in mono sound signal. N This function is only available in TV mode. T Press the TOOLS button to to display Tools menu. You can also select the sound mode by selecting Tools → Dual l ll. Speaker Select : TV Speaker Sound Select : Main Sound Reset ► Sound BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 21 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:01English - 22 Function Description Setting the Time ❑ Clock Setting the clock is necessary in order to use the various timer features of the TV. N The current time will appear every time you press the INFO button. N If you disconnect the power cord, you have to set the clock again. „ Clock Mode You can set up the current time manually or automatically. • Auto: Set the current time automatically using the time from the digital broadcast. • Manual: Set the current time to a manually specified time. „ Clock Set You can set the current time manually. N Set up this item when you have set Clock Mode to Manual. N You can set the Day, Month, Year, Hour, Minute directly by pressing the number buttons on the remote control. ❑ Sleep Timer → Off / 30 min / 60 min / 90 min / 120 min / 150 min / 180 min The sleep timer automatically shuts off the TV after a preset time. (30, 60, 90, 120, 150 and 180 minutes). N The TV automatically switches to standby mode when the timer reaches 0. N To cancel the Sleep Timer function, select Off. T Press the TOOLS button to display Tools menu. You can also set the sleep timer by selecting Tools → Sleep Timer. ❑ Timer 1 / Timer 2 / Timer 3 You can set the TV to turn on or off at a desired time. • On Time: Sets the time for the TV to turn on. • Off Time: Sets the time for the TV to turn off. • Volume: Set the required volume level. • Source : Selects TV or USB device. N When you select the TV, you can set the Antenna and Channel. - Antenna: Selects Air or Cable. - Channel: Select the desired channel. N When you select the USB, you can set the Contents. - Contents: Selects the desired contents on the USB. N If the folder containing a music file is not selected or there is no music file on the USB, Timer function does not operate correctly. • Repeat : Select Once, Everyday, Mon~Fri, Mon~Sat, Sat~Sun or Manual. N When Manual is selected, press the ► button to select the desired day of the week. Press the ENTERE button over the desired day and the c mark will appear. N The whole folder on the USB are supports English 64 character. N You must set the clock first. N You can set the hour, minute and programme by pressing the number buttons on the remote control. N Auto Power Off When you set the timer On, the television will eventually turn off, if no controls are operated for 3 hours after the TV was turned on by the timer. This function is only available in timer On mode and prevents overheating, which may occur if a TV is on for too long time. Time Clock : -- : -- ► Sleep Timer : Off Timer 1 : Inactivated Timer 2 : Inactivated Timer 3 : Inactivated U Move E Enter R Return Setup Plug & Play Menu Language : English Time ► Broadcast Security Network General BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 22 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:01English - 23 Configuring the Setup Menu ❑ Menu Language You can set the menu language. ❑ Broadcast „ Subtitle You can activate and deactivate the subtitles. Use this menu to set the Subtitle Mode. Normal under the menu is the basic subtitle and Hard of hearing is the subtitle for a hearing-impaired person. • Subtitle → Off / On: Switches subtitles off or on. • Mode → Normal / Hard of hearing: Sets the subtitle mode. • Subtitle Language: Set the subtitle language. N If the programme you are watching does not support the Hard of hearing function, Normal automatically activates even though Hard of hearing mode is selected. N English is the default in cases where the selected language is unavailable in the broadcast. O You can select these options simply by pressing the SUBT. button on the remote control. „ Digital Text → Disable / Enable If the programme is broadcast with digital text, this feature is enabled. N MHEG (Multimedia and Hypermedia Information Coding Experts Group) An International standard for data encoding systems used in multimedia and hypermedia. This is at a higher level than the MPEG system which includes data-linking hypermedia such as still images, character service, animation, graphic and video files as well as multimedia data. MHEG is user runtime interaction technology and is being applied to various fields including VOD (Video-On-Demand), ITV (Interactive TV), EC (Electronic Commerce), tele-education, tele-conferencing, digital libraries and network games. „ Teletext Language You can set the Teletext language by selecting the language type. N English is the default in cases where the selected language is unavailable in the broadcast. „ Preference • Primary Audio Language / Secondary Audio Language / Primary Subtitle Language / Secondary Subtitle Language / Primary Teletext Language / Secondary Teletext Language Using this feature, users can select one of the languages. The language selected here is the default when the user selects a channel. If you change the language setting, the Subtitle Language, Audio Language, and the Teletext Language of the Language menu are automatically changed to the selected language. The Subtitle Language, Audio Language, and the Teletext Language of the Language menu show a list of languages supported by the current channel and the selection is highlighted. If you change this language setting, the new selection is only valid for the current channel. The changed setting does not change the setting of the Primary Subtitle Language, Primary Audio Language, or the Primary Teletext Language of the Preference menu. „ Common Interface • Installing the CI(CI+) Card 1. Purchase the CI(CI+) CAM module by visiting your nearest dealer or by phone. 2. Insert the CI(CI+) CARD into the CAM in the direction of the arrow until it fits. 3. Insert the CAM with the CI(CI+) CARD installed into the common interface slot. N Insert the CAM in the direction of the arrow, right up to the end so that it is parallel with the slot. 4. Check if you can see a picture on a scrambled signal channel. • CI(CI+) Menu This enables the user to select from the CAM-provided menu. Select the CI(CI+) Menu based on the menu PC Card. • Application Info. This contains information on CAM inserted in the CI(CI+) slot and displays it. The Application Info inserting is about the CI(CI+) CARD. You can install the CAM anytime whether the TV is ON or OFF. N 'CI(CI+) CARD' is not supported in some countries, regions, broadcasting stations check with your authorized dealer. Continued... Setup Plug & Play Menu Language : English ► Time Broadcast Security Network General BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 23 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:01English - 24 ❑ Security N Some models require selecting the set PIN number when operating Plug & Play. „ Child Lock → Off / On This feature allows you to prevent unauthorized users, such as children, from watching unsuitable programmes by muting out video and audio. N Before the setup screen appears, the PIN number input screen appears. Enter your 4 digit PIN number. N The default PIN number of a new TV set is ‘0-0-0-0’. You can change the PIN by selecting Change PIN from the menu. N You can lock some channels in Channel List. (refer to page 14) N Child Lock is available only in TV mode. „ Parental Lock This feature allows you to prevent unauthorized users, such as children, from watching unsuitable programmes by a 4-digit PIN (Personal Identification Number) code that is defined by the user. N The Parental Rating item differs depending on the country. N Before the setup screen appears, the PIN number input screen appears. Enter your 4 digit PIN number. N The default PIN number of a new TV set is ‘0-0-0-0’. You can change the PIN by selecting Change PIN from the menu. N When the parental ratings are set, the “\” symbol is displayed. N Allow All / Block All: Press to unlock or lock all TV ratings. „ Change PIN You can change your personal ID number that is required to set up the TV. N Before the setup screen appears, the PIN number input screen appears. Enter your 4 digit PIN number (The default PIN number : ‘0-0-0-0’). N If you forget the PIN code, press the remote control buttons in the following sequence, which resets the PIN to ‘0-0-0-0’: POWER (Off), MMUTE, 8, 2, 4, POWER (On). ❑ General „ Game Mode → Off / On When connecting to a game console such as PlayStation TM or Xbox TM , you can enjoy a more realistic gaming experience by selecting the game menu. • When the Game Mode is On - Picture Mode is automatically changed to Standard and users cannot change the mode. - Sound Mode is automatically changed to Custom and users cannot change the mode. Adjust the sound using the equalizer. - The Reset in the Sound menu is activated. Reset function initializes the Equalizer settings to the factory default setting. N Game Mode is not available in regular TV mode or Game Mode set to Off. N If the picture is poor when external device is connected to TV, check if Game Mode is On. N If you display the TV menu in Game mode, the screen shakes slightly. N The mark appears on the screen which means that Game Mode is on with the selected source. N This function supports only game function. N Game mode is not available in PC mode. „ BD Wise → Off / On Wise is a function that enables you automatically to set the optimum condition all connected Samsung devices that support BD Wise. N This function is active only when an external device is connected to the TV via HDMI. N When the BD Wise set to On, picture mode is automatically changed under the conditions „ Energy Saving → Off / Low / Medium / High / Picture Off This feature adjusts the brightness of the TV in order to reduce power consumption. When watching TV at night, set the Energy Saving mode option to High to reduce eye fatigue as well as power consumption. If you select Picture Off, the screen is turned off and you can only hear the sound. Press any button to get out of Picture Off. N In the Tools menu, Picture Off function is not supported. T Press the TOOLS button to display Tools menu. You can also set the Energy Saving option by selecting Tools → Energy Saving. BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 24 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:01English - 25 „ Menu Transparency You can set the transparency of the on-screen menu. • Bright: Sets the on-screen menu to normal. • Dark: changes the on-screen menu to opaque. „ Melody → Off / Low / Medium / High The TV power on / off melody sound can be adjusted. N The Melody does not play - When no sound is output from the TV because the M MUTE button has been pressed. - When no sound is output from the TV because the – (Volume) button has been pressed. - When the TV is turned off by Sleep Timer function. „ Light Effect (PS58B680/PS63B680 only) You can turn on/off the blue LED on the front of TV according to the situation. Use it for saving power or when the LED dazzles your eyes. • Off: The blue LED is always off. • In Standby: The blue LED lights while in Standby mode and it turns off when your TV is turned on. • Watching TV: The blue LED lights when watching TV and it turns off when your TV is turned off. • Always: The blue LED always lights. N Set the Light Effect to Off to reduce the power consumption. Viewing the Picture in Picture (PIP) You can display a sub picture within the main picture of set programme me or video input. In this way, you can watch the picture of set programme me or video input from any connected equipment while watching the main picture. N You may notice that the picture in the PIP window becomes slightly unnatural when you use the main screen to view a game or karaoke. T Press the TOOLS button to display Tools menu. You can also configure PIP related settings by selecting Tools → PIP. ❑ PIP → Off / On You can activate or deactivate the PIP function. Main picture Sub picture Component HDMI 1, HDMI2/DVI, HDMI 3, HDMI 4 PC TV „ Size → / / / You can select a size of the sub-picture. N If main picture is in HDMI mode, Size is not available. „ Position → / / / You can select a position of the sub-picture. N In Double ( , ) mode, Position cannot be selected. „ Channel You can select a channel of the sub-picture. PIP PIP : Off ► Size : Position : Channel : ATV 1 E Enter R Return General Game Mode : Off BD Wise : Off Energy Saving : Off Menu Transparency : Bright Melody : Medium PIP ► U Move E Enter R Return BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 25 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:01English - 26 Supported Program ❑ Legal Notice You can view legal notice and general disclaimer regarding third party contents and services. „ General Disclaimer This is full legal notice service regarding the Internet@TV. N The General Disclaimer may differ depending on the country. N You can move the previous or next page by pressing the ◄ or ► button. ❑ Product Guide The Product Guide gives you information on the most important features of this TV. N For more detailed information, select the desired item. ❑ Self Diagnosis „ Picture Test If you think you have a picture problem, perform the picture test. Check the colour pattern on the screen to see if the problem still exists. N Does the problem still exist with this test photo? appears on the screen. If the test pattern does not appear or there is noise in the test pattern, select Yes. If the test pattern is properly displayed, select No. • Yes : There may be a problem with the TV. Contact Samsung’s Call Center for assistance. • No : There may be a problem with your external equipment. Please check your connections. If the problem still persists, refer to the external device’s user manual. „ Sound Test If you think you have a sound problem, please perform the sound test. You can check the sound by playing a built-in melody sound through the TV. N Does the problem still exist with this sound test? appears on the screen. If during the sound test you can hear sound only from one speaker or not at all, select Yes.If you can hear sound from the speakers, select No. • Yes : There may be a problem with the TV. Contact Samsung’s Call Center for assistance. • No : There may be a problem with your external equipment. Please check your connections. If the problem still persists, refer to the external device’s user manual. N If you hear no sound from the TV’s speakers, before performing the sound test, make sure Speaker Select is set to TV speaker in the Sound menu. N The melody will be heard during the test even if Speaker Select is set to External Speaker or the sound is muted by pressing the M MUTE button. „ Signal Information (Digital channels only) You can adjust your antenna to improve the reception of available digital channels. N If the signal strength meter indicates that the signal is weak, physically adjust your antenna to increase the signal strength. Continue to adjust the antenna until you find the best position with the strongest signal. Support / Input BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 26 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:01English - 27 Source List / Edit Name ❑ Source List Use to select TV or other external input sources such as DVD players or Cable Box / Satellite receivers (Set-Top Box) connected to the TV. Use to select the input source of your choice. „ TV, Ext.1, Ext.2, AV, Component, PC, HDMI1, HDMI2/DVI, HDMI3, HDMI4, USB. N You can choose only those external devices that are connected to the TV. In the Source List, connected inputs will be highlighted and sorted to the top. Inputs that are not connected will be sorted to the bottom. N Using the Colour buttons on the remote with the Source list - Red (Refresh): Refreshes the connecting external devices. - T TOOLS (Tools): Displays the Edit Name and Information menus. O Press the SOURCE button on the remote control to view an external signal source. ❑ Edit Name You can name the device connected to the input jacks to make your input source selection easier. „ VCR / DVD / Cable STB / Satellite STB / PVR STB / AV Receiver / Game / Camcorder / PC / DVI / DVI PC / TV / IPTV / Blu-ray / HD DVD / DMA N When a PC with a resolution of 1920 x 1080@60Hz is connected to the HDMI IN 2(DVI) port, you should set the HDMI2/DVI mode to PC in the Edit Name of the Input mode. ❑ Software Upgrade To keep your product up-to-date with new Digital Television features then software upgrades are periodically broadcast as part of the normal Television signal. It will automatically detect these signals and display the software upgrade banner. You are given the option to install the upgrade. „ By USB Insert a USB drive containing the firmware upgrade into TV. Please be careful to not disconnect the power or remove the USB drive while upgrades are being applied. The TV will turn off and turn on automatically after completing the firmware upgrade. Please check the firmware version after the upgrades are complete. When software is upgraded, video and audio settings you have made will return to their default (factory) settings. „ By Channel Upgrades the software using the broadcasting signal. N If the function is selected during the software transmission period, this function searches for available software and downloads the software. N The time required to download the software is determined by the signal status. „ Standby Mode Upgrade To continue software upgrade with master power on, Select On by pressing the ▲ or ▼ button. 45 minutes after entering standby mode, a manual upgrade is automatically conducted. Since the power of the unit is turned on internally, the screen may be on slightly for the product. This phenomenon may continue for more than 1 hour until the software upgrade is completed. „ Alternative Software Show the previous version that would be replaced. N If software was changed, existing software is displayed. N You can change current software to alternative software by Alternative Software. ❑ HD Connection Guide The brief instruction on how to get the best performance from your new HDTV is displayed. We offer the connection method for HD devices. N You can move the previous or next page by pressing the ◄ or ► button. ❑ Contact Samsung You can know the Samsung Call center, website and information for product. TV Side Panel USB Drive Source List Edit Name Input BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 27 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:02English - 28 Network Network Connection Network Connection is for DLNA, Contents Library-Internet download, Internet@TV and Home Network Centre. ❑ Network Connection - Cable „ LAN Connection for a DHCP Environment The procedures to set up the network using Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) are described below. Since an IP address, subnet mask, gateway, and DNS are automatically allocated when DHCP is selected, you do not have to enter them manually. 1. Connect the LAN port on the rear panel of the TV and the external modem with a LAN Cable. 2. Connect the LAN port on the wall and the external modem with a Modem Cable. N The terminals (the position of the port and the type) of the external device may differ depending on the manufacturer. N If the IP address allocation by the DHCP server has failed, turn the external modem off, turn it on again after at least 10 seconds and then try again. N For the connections between the external modem and the Sharer (Router), refer to the owner’s manual of the corresponding product. N You can connect the TV to the LAN directly without connecting it through a Sharer (Router). N You cannot use a manual-connection-type ADSL modem because it does not support DHCP. You have to use an automaticconnection-type ADSL modem. TV Rear Panel The Modem Port on the Wall 2 Modem Cable External Modem (ADSL/VDSL/Cable TV) 1 LAN Cable You can connect the LAN port and the TV directly depending on your network status. TV Rear Panel LAN Cable The LAN Port on the Wall You can connect the LAN via a Sharer (Router). TV Rear Panel The Modem Port on the Wall External Modem (ADSL/VDSL/ Cable TV) IP Sharer LAN Cable Modem Cable LAN Cable BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 28 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:04English - 29 „ LAN Connection for Static IP Environment The procedures to set up the network using a static IP address are described below. You have to manually enter the IP address, subnet mask, gateway, and DNS that are provided by your Internet Service Provider (ISP). 1. Connect the LAN port on the rear panel of the TV and the LAN port on the wall using the LAN cable. N The terminals (the position of the port and the type) of the external device may differ depending on the manufacturer. N If you are using a static IP address, your ISP will inform you of the IP address, subnet mask, gateway, and DNS. You must enter these values to complete the network settings. If you do not know the values, ask your network administrator. N For the information on how to configure and connect a Sharer (Router), refer to the owner’s manual for the corresponding product. N You can connect the TV to the LAN directly without connecting it through a Sharer (Router). N If you use an IP Sharer (IP Router) that supports DHCP, you can set up the device as either DHCP or static IP. N For the procedures to use a static IP address, ask your Internet Service Provider. ❑ Network Connection - Wireless You can connect to the network wirelessly through a wireless IP sharer. 1. Connect the ‘Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter’ into the USB1(HDD) or USB2 terminal of the TV. N You must use the ‘Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter to use a wireless network. N Samsung’s Wireless LAN adapter is sold separately. The WIS09ABGN Wireless LAN adapter is offered by select retailers, Ecommerce sites and Samsungparts.com. N To use a wireless network, your TV must be connected to a wireless IP sharer. N If the wireless IP sharer supports DHCP, your TV can use a DHCP or static IP address to connect to the wireless network. N Samsung’s Wireless LAN adapter supports IEEE 802.11A, IEEE 802.11B, IEEE 802.11G, IEEE 802.11N. When you play DLNA video over IEEE 802.11B/G connection, the video may not be played smoothly. N If the wireless IP sharer allows you to turn the Ping connection function on/off, turn it on. N Select a channel for the wireless IP sharer that is not currently being used. If the channel set for the wireless IP sharer is currently being used by another device nearby, this will result in interference and communications may fail. Continued... TV Rear Panel 1 LAN Cable The LAN Port on the Wall TV Rear Panel LAN Cable IP Sharer LAN Cable The LAN Port on the Wall You can connect the LAN via a Sharer (Router). TV Side Panel Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter LAN Cable Wireless IP sharer The LAN Port on the Wall BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 29 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:06English - 30 N If you apply a security system other than the systems listed below, it will not work with the TV. - When applying the security key for the AP (wireless IP sharer), only the following is supported. 1) Authentication Mode : OPEN, SHARED, WPAPSK, WPA2PSK 2) Encryption Type : WEP, TKIP, AES - When applying the security key for the Ad-hoc mode, only the following is supported. 1) Authentication Mode : SHARED, WPANONE 2) Encryption Type : WEP, TKIP, AES N If your AP supports WPS(Wi-Fi Protected Setup), you can connect to the network via PBC (Push Button Configuration) or PIN (Personal Indentification Number). WPS will automatically configure the SSID and WPA key in either mode. N If the device isn’t certified, it may not connect to the TV via the ‘Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter’. Network Setup ❑ Network Type Select Cable or Wireless as the method to connect to the network. N The menu is activated only if the ‘Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter’ is connected. • Cable: Connect to network using a cable. • Wireless: Connect to network wirelessly. ❑ Network Setup „ Cable Network Setup (when Network Type is set to Cable) N Please check if the LAN cable is connected. • Internet Protocol Setup → Auto / Manual • Network Test: You can test or confirm the network connection status after setting up the network. N When unable to connect to a wired network If your Internet service provider has registered the MAC address of the device used to connect to the Internet for the first time and authenticates the MAC address each time you connect to the Internet, your TV may not be able to connect to the Internet as the MAC address differs from that of the device (PC). In this case, ask your Internet service provider about the procedures to connect devices other than your PC (such as your TV) to the Internet. If your Internet service provider requires an ID or password to connect to the Internet (network), your TV may not be able to connect to the Internet. In this case, you have to enter your ID or password when connecting to the Internet using an Internet Sharer (Router). The internet connection may failure to a firewall problem. In this case, contact your Internet service provider. If you cannot connect to the Internet even if you have followed the procedures of your Internet service provider, please contact a Samsung Electronics. „ Cable Network Setup-Auto If you connect the LAN cable and it supports DHCP, the Internet Protocol (IP) Settings are automatically configured. 1. Set Network Type to Cable. 2. Select Cable Network Setup. 3. Set Internet Protocol Setup to Auto. N The Internet Protocol is set automatically. 4. Select Network Test to check the network connectivity. „ Cable Network Setup-Manual To connect the TV to the LAN using a static IP address, you must set up the Internet Protocol (IP). N Please check if the LAN cable is connected. (See page 28) 1. Set Network Type to Cable. 2. Select Cable Network Setup. 3. Set Internet Protocol Setup to Manual. 4. Set up IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway and DNS Server. N Press the number buttons on the remote control when you set the Network manually. 5. Select Network Test to check the network connectivity. Setup Broadcast Security Network ► General Continued... BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 30 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:06English - 31 „ Wireless Network Setup (when Network Type is set to Wireless) N The menu is activated only if the ‘Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter is connected. (See page 29) - Internet Protocol Setup → Auto / Manual - Network Test: You can test or confirm the network connection status after setting up the network. N When unable to connect to an AP Your TV may fail to locate an AP that is configured as a private SSID type. In this case, please change the AP settings and try again. If your Internet service provider has registered the MAC address of the device used to connect to the Internet for the first time and authenticates the MAC address each time you connect to the Internet, your TV may not be able to connect to the Internet as the MAC address differs from that of the device (PC). In this case, ask your Internet service provider about the procedures to connect devices other than your PC (such as your TV) to the Internet. If you cannot connect to the Internet even if you have followed the procedures of your Internet service provider, please contact a Samsung Electronics. • Select a network - Access Point: You can select the IP sharer to use when using a wireless network. N If a wireless network is not in the Select a network list, press the Red button. N When the connection is made, you will be returned to the screen automatically. N If you have selected an Access Point with a security authentication: The Security Key input screen appears. Enter the security key and press the Blue button on the remote control. N If security encryption type is WEP, 0~9, A~F will be available when you input security key. Button Operations ▲/▼/◄/► Moves the selection up/down/left/right. ENTER Enters (Inputs) the selected character. Red button Switch between Upper- and Lower-Case Letters Green button You can delete an already entered character. Blue button Press this button to finish entering the security key. ❑ Connecting WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) „ If Security Key is already set: In access point list, select WPS. N You can select PBC, PIN, Security Key. • Connecting by using PBC: Select a PBC (Push Button Configuration). Press the PBC button on the AP (access point) within 2minutes, and wait for connection. • Connecting by using PIN: Select a PIN (Personal Identification Number). N The message showing the PIN Code is displayed. Input the PIN Code at AP device within 2minutes. Select OK and wait for connection. N Try again if connecting operation doesn’t work N When the connection is not established although tried again, reset the access point. Please refer to a manual of each access point. • Connecting by using Security Key: When selecting Security Key, the input window is displayed. Input the security key and press Blue button. N Try again if connecting operation doesn’t work. Wireless Network Setup Security Key n Move Number EEnter R Return _ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 0~9 Number Lowercase Delete Done * * Wireless Network Setup Select a network n Move EEnter R Return Search Ad-hoc AP_1 AP_2 AP_3 AP_4 PBC PIN Security Key 3/9 Press the PBC button on the access point. Access Point Name : AP_3 Cancel Press OK After input TV’s Pincode in the access point’s setup. Access Point Name : AP_3 PIN Code : 12345678 OK Cancel Wireless Network Setup Security Key n Move Number EEnter R Return _ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 0~9 Number Lowercase Delete Done BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 31 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:08English - 32 „ If Security Key is not set: When the security setting of AP that supports WPS is NONE, you can select PBC, PIN, None Security. None Security is capable of connecting to AP directly without using WPS function. N Process of PBC, PIN is same as above. Refer to if Security Key is already set. N Try again if connecting operation doesn’t work. „ Ad-hoc: You can connect to a mobile device without an access point through the ‘Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter’ by using a peer to peer network. • How to connect to new Ad-hoc 1. Choose Select a network, then a device list is displayed. 2. While in the device list, press the Blue button on the remote or select Ad-hoc. N The message The existing network system may have limited functionality. Do you want to change the network connection? is displayed. 3. Input the generated Network Name(SSID) and Security Key into the device you want to connect. • How to connect an existing Ad-hoc device 1. Choose Select a network, the device list is displayed. 2. Select the device you want in the Device list. 3. If security key was applied, input the security key again. N If network doesn’t operate normally, please check the Network Name(SSID) and Security Key again. If the Security Key is incorrect, it may be the reason for the malfunction. „ Wireless Network Setup - Auto If you want to connect AP, AP should support DHCP. Only devices which support Ad-hoc mode can be connected without DHCP. 1. Set Network Type to Wireless. 2. Select Wireless Network Setup. 3. Set Internet Protocol Setup to Auto. N The Internet Protocol is set automatically. 4. Select a network through Select a network. 5. Select Network Test to check the network connectivity. „ Wireless Network Setup - Manual To connect the network wirelessly using a static IP address, you must set up the Internet Protocol (IP). (See page 29) N For more detailed information of static IP address, refer to the user manual of your wireless IP sharer. 1. Set Network Type to Wireless. 2. Select Wireless Network Setup. 3. Set Internet Protocol Setup to Manual. 4. Set up IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway and DNS Server. N Press the number buttons on the remote control when you set the Network manually. 5. Select a network through Select a network. 6. Select Network Test to check the network connectivity. * * Wireless Network Setup Select a network n Move EEnter R Return Search Ad-hoc AP_1 AP_2 AP_3 AP_4 PBC PIN Security Key 3/9 The existing network system may have limited functionality. Do you want to change the network connection? Yes No BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 32 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:08English - 33 Connecting a USB Device 1. Press the POWER button to turn the TV on. 2. Connect a USB device containing photo, music and movie files to the USB jack on the side of the TV. N USB 1(HDD) jack is also used as the HDD jack. HDD (Hard disk drive) is device which stores digitally encoded data. N Media Play only supports USB Mass Storage Class devices (MSC). MSC is a Mass Storage Class Bulk-Only Transport device. Examples of MSC are Thumb drives, Flash Card Readers and USB HDD (USB HUB are not supported.) N MTP (Media Transfer Protocol) is not supported. N The file system only supports FAT16/32 (The NTFS file system is not supported). N Connect a USB HDD to the dedicated port, USB1 (HDD) port. However, if the connected device requires high power, the USB1 (HDD) may fail to support the device.) N Certain types of USB Digital camera and audio devices may not be compatible with this TV. N Please connect directly to the USB port of your TV. If you are using a separate cable connection, there may be a USB compatibility problem. N Before connecting your device to the TV, please back up your files to prevent them from damage or loss of data. SAMSUNG is not responsible for any data file damage or data loss. N Do not disconnect the USB device while it is loading. N MSC supports MP3 and JPEG files, while a PTP device supports JPEG files only. N The sequential JPEG format is supported. N The higher the resolution of the image, the longer it takes to display on the screen. N The maximum supported JPEG resolution is 15360X8640 pixels. N For unsupported or corrupted files, the Not Supported File Format message is displayed. N If the number of photo files exceeds 4000 (or the number of music files exceeds 3000), any files exceeding the 4000 limit may not be displayed in the Photo List (or Music List). N MP3 files with DRM that have been downloaded from a non-free site cannot be played. N DRM(Digital Rights Management) prevents illegal uses of digital media for copyright protection. N When moving to a photo, loading may take a few seconds. ❑ Using the Remote Control Button in Media Play Menu Button Operations ▲/▼/◄/► Move the cursor and select an item. ENTERE Select the currently selected item. Play or pause the files while playing the Slide Sow, Music, or Movie files. Play or pause the Slide Show, Music, or Movie file. RETURN Return to the previous menu. TOOLS Run various functions from the Photo, Music and Movie menus. Stop the current Slide Show, Music or Movie file. Jump to previous group/Jump to next group. INFO Show file information. MEDIA.P Enter or Exit Media Play mode. DivX® Certified to play DivX® video, including premium content. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX,Inc. This is an official DivX Certified device that plays DivX video. Visit www.divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX video. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified® device must be registered in order to play DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) content. To generate the registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in the device setup menu. Go to vod.divx.com with this code to complete the registration process and learn more about DivX VOD. Media Play TV Side Panel USB Drive BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 33 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:08English - 34 Using the Media Play Function This function enables you to view and listen to photo, music and movie files saved on a USB Mass Storage Class (MSC) device. It might not work properly with unlicensed multimedia files. ❑ Entering the Media Play Menu 1. Press the MENU button. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Application, then press the ENTERE button. 2. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Media Play (USB & DLNA), then press the ENTERE button. O Press the MEDIA.P button on the remote control to display the Media Play menu. O Press the SOURCE button on the remote control repeatedly to select USB or DLNA, then press the ENTERE button. 3. Press the Red button, then press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the corresponding USB Memory Device (i.e. if connected through a hub). Press the ENTERE button. N This function differs depending on the USB Memory Device/ DLNA device connected to TV. N The selected USB device name appears at the bottom left of the screen. 4. Press the ◄ or ► button to select an icon (Photo, Music, Movie, Setup), then press the ENTERE button. N To exit Media Play mode, press the MEDIA.P button on the remote control. N In this mode, you can enjoy movie clips contained on a Game, but you cannot play the Game itself. ❑ Removing a USB Memory Device Safely You can remove the device safely from the TV. 1. Press the TOOLS button in the Media Play file list screen, or while a Slide Show, music, or movie file is being played. 2. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Remove Safely, then press the ENTERE button. 3. Remove the USB device from the TV. ❑ Screen Display 1. Current Sort Standard: This field shows the current standard for sorting files. 2. View Groups: The sorting group including the currently selected photo is highlighted. 3 Currently selected file: The currently selected file is highlighted. 4. Item Selection Information: Shows the number of photos that are selected by pressing the Yellow button. 5. Current Device: Shows the currently selected device name. N Red (Device) button: Selects a connected device. 6. Help Items • Green (Favourites Setting) button: Changes the Favourites Setting for the selected file. Press this button repeatedly until the desired value appears. • Yellow (Select) button: Selects file from the file list. Selected files are marked with a symbol c. Press the yellow button again to cancel a file selection. • TOOLS (Tools) button: Displays the option menus. (The Tools menu changes according to the current status.) • R RETURN (Return) button: Return to previous menu. Folder Preference Basic View Timeline Colour IMG_0335.JPG 4/6 IMG_0349. JPG ▶ ▶ Folder 2 1 Folder 1 1 Slide Show Play Current Group Information Remove Safely ../ folder name/ Photo USB „ Device Select T Tools R Upper Folder Media Play Photo Music Setup PHOTO USB : USB 851.98MB/995.00MB Free Movie USB „ Device RReturn Preference Basic View Timeline Color Folder Mar.01.2009 IMG_0343 .JPG ▶ ▶ IMG_03496 .JPG IMG_03496 .JPG Mar Apr Jun Nov IMG_0335.JPG 1/67 ▶ ▶ 2009 ◀ IMG_03496 .JPG 3 1 2 1File(s) Selected 4 5 6 Photo USB „ Device Favorites Setting Select T Tools R Return c BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 34 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:12English - 35 Sorting the Photo / Music / Movie List „ Basic View Shows the folders on the USB memory device. If you select a folder and press the ENTERE button, corresponding files (Photo / Music / Movie) contained in the selected folder are displayed. N When sorted according to the Basic View, you cannot set Favourites files. „ Folder Sorts the files by folder. If there are many folders in USB, the photos files are shown in order in each folder. The file in the Root folder is shown first and the others are shown in alphabetical order by name. „ Preference → ★ ★ ★ , ★ ★ ★ , ★ ★ ★ , ★ ★ ★ Sorts the files by preference (Favourites). N Changing the Favourites Settings Select the desired photo in the file list, then press the Green button repeatedly until the desired setting appears. N The stars are for grouping purposes only. For example, the 3 star setting does not have any priority over the one star setting. „ Timeline (Photo / Movie) Sorts and displays the music or movie titles in symbol/number/alphabet/special order. „ Title (Music / Movie) Sorts the music titles in symbol/number/alphabet/special order, and shows the music file. ❑ Photo „ Colour → Red / Yellow / Green / Blue / Magenta / Black / Gray / Unclassified Sorts photos by colour. You can change the photo colour information. N You should set the Use Colour View to on in the Setup menu before sorting photos by colour. ❑ Music „ Artist Sorts the music file by artist in symbol/number/alphabet/special order. „ Mood → Energetic / Rhythmical / Sad / Exciting / Calm / Unclassified Sorts music files by the mood. You can change the music mood information. „ Genre Sorts music files by the genre. Folder Preference Basic View Title Artist 1 When I Dream 3/4 Carol kidd Mr A-Z 2009 Pop usermanual Heaven NPKI ▶ 1 ▶ ▶ ▶ ▶ ../ folder name/ Music USB „ Device Select T Tools R Upper Folder ▶ ▶ Preference Basic View Timeline Tiltle Folder Apr Apr.27.2009 Movie USB „ Device Favorites Settings Select T Tools R Upper Folder MOVIE_003 .avi MOVIE_000 .avi MOVIE_004 .avi MOVIE_001.avi 1/5 ▶ ▶ ◀ MOVIE_005 .avi Preference Basic View Timeline Color Folder Mar.01.2009 IMG_0343 .JPG ▶ ▶ IMG_03496 .JPG IMG_03496 .JPG Mar Apr Jun Nov IMG_0335.JPG 1/67 ▶ ▶ 2009 ◀ IMG_03496 .JPG Photo USB „ Device Favorites Setting Select T Tools R Return BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 35 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:17English - 36 Photo / Music / Movie List Option Menu 1. Press the MEDIA.P button. 2. Press the ◄ or ► button to select Photo, Music or Movie then press the ENTERE button. 3. Press the ◄ or ► button to select the desired file. N Selecting Multiple Files - Press the ◄ or ► button to select the desired file. Then press the Yellow button. - Repeat the above operation to select multiple files. - The mark c appears to the selected file. 4. Press the TOOLS button. N The option menu changes according to the current status. „ Play Current Group Using this menu, you can play a SlideShow using only the photo files in the currently selected sorting group. „ Deselect All (When at least one file is selected) You can deselect all files. N The c mark indicating the corresponding file is selected is hidden. „ Information The photo/ music/ movie file information is displayed. You can view the information of files during a SlideShow using the same procedures. O Press the INFO button to viewing the information. „ Remove Safely You can remove the device safely from the TV. ❑ Photo „ Slide Show Using this menu, you can play a SlideShow using the photo files on the USB memory device. „ Change Group (When the Sort key is the Colour) You can change a selected photo file’s (or group of files) colour information in order to move it from one colour group to another. N This does not change the actual colour of the photo. N The group information of the current file is updated and the photos are moved to the new colour group. N To change the information of multiple files, select the files you want by pressing the Yellow button. ❑ Music „ Change Group (When the Sort key is Mood) You can change the mood information of music files. The group information of the current file is updated and the file is moved to the new group. To change the information of multiple files, select files by pressing the Yellow button. Select T Tools R Upper Folder Folder Preference Basic View Title Artist 1 1 ▶ ▶ ../ folder name/ Sky When I Dream 3/4 Carol kidd Mr A-Z 2009 Pop NPKI usermanual Heaven ▶ NPKI Play Current Group Information Remove Safely Music USB „ Device Select T Tools R Upper Folder MOVIE_004 MOVIE_003 .avi .avi MOVIE_000 .avi MOVIE_005 .avi MOVIE_007 .avi MOVIE_001.avi 1/5 MOVIE_006 .avi ▶ ▶ Preference Basic View Timeline Tiltle Folder Apr Apr.27.2009 Movie USB „ Device Favorites Settings Select T Tools R Upper Folder Play Current Group Information Remove Safely Basic View Timeline Colour Folder Preference IMG_0335.JPG 4/6 IMG_0349 .JPG ▶ ▶ Folder 2 1 Folder 1 1 Slide Show Play Current Group Change Group Information Remove Safely Photo USB „ Device Favorites Settings Select T Tools R Upper Folder BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 36 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:21English - 37 Slide Show / Music Play / Movie Play Option Menu 1. During a slide show (or when viewing a photo) or playing a music or movie, press the TOOLS button to set the option. 2. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the desired option, then press the ENTERE button. „ Picture Setting / Sound Setting You can select the picture and sound settings. „ Information The file information is displayed. „ Remove Safely You can remove the device safely from the TV. ❑ Slide Show Option Menu „ Stop Slide Show / Start Slide Show You can start or stop a SlideShow. „ Slide Show Speed → Slow / Normal / Fast You can select the slide show speed. N This function is available only during a slide show. N You can also change the speed of the Slide Show by pressing the π (REW) or μ (FF) button during the Slide Show. „ Slide Show Effect You can select the screen transition effect used in the slideshow. • None / Fade1 / Fade2 / Blind / Spiral / Checker / Linear / Stairs / Wipe / Random N This function is available only during a slide show. „ Rotate You can rotate photos saved on a USB memory device. N Whenever you press the ◄ button, it rotates by 270˚, 180˚, 90˚, and 0˚. N Whenever you press the ► button, it rotates by 90˚, 180˚, 270˚, and 0˚. N The rotated file is not saved. „ Zoom You can magnify photos saved on a USB memory device. (x1 → x2 → x4) N To move the enlarged photo image, press the ENTERE button, then press the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons. Note that when the enlarged picture is smaller than the original screen size, the location change function doesn’t work. N The enlarged file is not saved. „ Background Music You can select background music when watching a Slide Show. N To use this feature, there must be music and photo files stored on the USB device. N Loading music files is needed to change BGM mode. Play music files in music category to load. ❑ Music Play Option Menu „ Repeat Mode → On / Off You can play music files repeatedly. ❑ Movie Play Option Menu „ Picture Size → Fit / Original Play video at the screen size or original size. „ Caption Setting You can set the captions for the movie. Tools Tools Stop Slide Show Slide Show Speed : Normal Slide Show Effect : Fade1 Rotate Zoom Background Music Picture Setting Sound Setting Information › U Move E Enter eExit Tools Repeat Mode ◄ On ► Picture Setting Sound Setting Information Remove Safely U Move š™ Adjust eExit Tools Picture Setting Sound Setting Picture Size : Fit Caption Setting Information Remove Safely U Move  Enter eExit BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 37 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:21English - 38 Viewing a Photo or Slide Show ❑ Viewing a Slide Show N All files in the File List Section will be used for the Slide Show. N During the slide show, files are displayed in order from the currently shown file. N The Slide Show progresses in the order sorted in the File List Section. N Music files can be automatically played during the Slide Show if the Background Music is set to On. N While a photo list is displayed, press the ∂(Play)/ENTERE button on the remote control to start slide show. N SlideShow Control Buttons ENTERE Play/Pause the Slide Show. Play the Slide Show. Pause the Slide Show. Exit Slide Show and return to the photo list. / Change the SlideShow playing speed. T TOOLS Run various functions from the Photo menus. ❑ Playing current group 1. Press the ▲ button to move to the Sort key Section. 2. Press the ◄ or ► button to select a sorting standard. 3. Press the ▼ button to move to the Group List Section. 4. Select a group using the ◄ and ► buttons. 5. Press the ∂ (Play) button. A slideshow begins with the files of the selected group. „ Alternatively 1. Select a Sort key and then in the File List Section, select the photos contained in the desired group. N To move to the previous/next group, press the π (REW) or μ (FF) button. 2. Press the TOOLS button. 3. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Play Current Group, then press the ENTERE button. N Only the photos in the sorting group including the selected files will be used for the Slide Show. ❑ To perform a Slide Show with only the selected files 1. Press the ▼ button to select the File List Section. 2. Press the ◄ or ► button to select the desired photo in the File List Section. 3. Press the Yellow button. 4. Repeat the above operation to select multiple photos. N The c mark appears to the left of the selected photo. N If you select one file, the Slide Show will not be performed. N To deselect all selected files, press the TOOLS button and select Deselect All. 5. Press the ∂ (Play)/ENTERE button. N The selected files will be used for the Slide Show. „ Alternatively 1. In the File List Section, press the Yellow buttons to select the desired photos. 2. Press the TOOLS button. 3. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Slide Show, then press the ENTERE button. N The selected files will be used for the Slide Show. ▶ ▶ Preference Basic View Timeline Tiltle Folder Apr Apr.27.2009 Movie USB „ Device Favorites Settings Select T Tools R Upper Folder MOVIE_003 .avi MOVIE_000 .avi MOVIE_004 .avi MOVIE_001.avi 1/5 MOVIE_005 .avi Basic View Timeline Colour Folder Preference IMG_0335.JPG 4/6 IMG_0349 .JPG ▶ ▶ Folder 2 1 Folder 1 1 Slide Show Play Current Group Change Group Information Remove Safely Photo r Normal IMG_0335.JPG 3648x2432 2009/3/15 1/4 USB EPause lr Previous/Next T Tools R Return USB „ Device Favorites Settings Select T Tools R Upper Folder BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 38 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:25English - 39 Playing Music ❑ Playing a music file 1. Press the ▼ button to select the File List Section. 2. Press the ◄ or ► button to select a music file to be played. 3. Press the ∂ (Play)/ENTERE button. N This menu only shows files with the MP3 file extension. Files with other file extensions are not displayed, even if they are saved on the same USB device. N The selected file is displayed at the top with its playing time. N To adjust the music volume, press the volume button on the remote control. To mute the sound, press the M MUTE button on the remote control. N If the sound is odd when playing MP3 files, adjust the Equalizer and SRS TruSurround HD in the Sound menu. (An overmodulated MP3 file may cause a sound problem.) N The playing duration of a music file may be displayed as ‘00:00:00’ if its playing time information is not found at the start of the file. N π (REW) or μ (FF) buttons do not function during play. N Music Play Control Buttons ENTERE Play/Pauses the music file. Exit play mode and return to the music list. Play the music file T TOOLS Run various functions from the Music menus. Pause the music file N Music function information icon When all music files in the folder (or the selected file) are repeated. Repeat Mode is On. When all music files in the folder (or the selected file) are played once. Repeat Mode is Off. ❑ Playing the music group 1. Press the ▲ button to move to the Sort key Section. 2. Press the ◄ or ► button to select a sorting standard. 3. Press the ▼ or ENTERE button to move to the Group List Section. 4. Press the ∂ (Play) button. The files of the selected group will start playing. „ Alternatively 1. Select a sort key and then in the File List Section, select the files contained in the desired group. N To move to the previous/next group, press the π (REW) or μ (FF) button. 2. Press the TOOLS button. 3. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Play Current Group, then press the ENTERE button. N The music files in the sorting group including the selected file are played. ❑ Playing the selected music files 1. Press the ▼ button to select the File List Section. 2. Press the ◄ or ► button to select the desired music file. 3. Press the Yellow button. 4. Repeat the above operation to select multiple music files. N The c appears to the left of the selected music file. N To deselect all selected files, press the TOOLS button and select Deselect All. 5. Press the ∂ (Play)/ENTERE button. N The selected files will be played. r 00:00:02 / 00:04:55 r 1/3 When I Dream r r Geek In The Pink Heaven USB EPause lr Previous/Next T Tools R Return BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 39 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:25English - 40 Playing a Movie File ❑ Playing a movie file 1. Press the ▼ button to select the File List Section. 2. Pressing the ◄ or ► button to select a movie file to be played. 3. Press the ∂ (Play)/ENTERE button. N The selected file is played. N The selected file is displayed at the top with its playing time. N The playing duration of a movie file may be displayed as ‘00:00:00’ if its playing time information is not found at the start of the file. N You can watch exciting gaming multimedia files, but the gaming function is not supported. N Supported caption formats Name File Extension Programming Language MPEG-4 time-based text .ttxt XML SAMI .smi HTML SubRip .srt string-based SubViewer .sub string-based Micro DVD .sub or .txt string-based N Supported Video Formats File extension Container Video Decoder Audio codec Resolution *.avi AVI Divx 3.11/4.x/5.1/6.0 MP3 AC3 LPCM ADPCM 720x576 XviD 1920x1080 H.264 BP/MP/HP 1920x1080 MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080 Motion JPEG 800x600 *.mkv MKV Divx 3.11/4.x/5.1/6.0 MP3 AC3 LPCM ADPCM 720x576 XviD 1920x1080 H.264 BP/MP/HP 1920x1080 MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080 Motion JPEG 800x600 *.asf ASF Divx 3.11/4.x/5.1/6.0 MP3 AC3 LPCM ADPCM WMA 720x576 XviD 1920x1080 H.264 BP/MP/HP 1920x1080 MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080 Motion JPEG 800x600 *.wmv (VC1) ASF VC1 WMA 1920x1080 *.mp4 MP4 (SMP4) H.264 BP/MP/HP MP3 ADPCM AAC 1920x1080 MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080 XVID 1920x1080 *.3gp 3GPP H.264 BP/MP/HP ADPCM AAC 1920x1080 MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080 *.vro VRO VOB MPEG2 AC3 MPEG LPCM 1920x1080 MPEG1 1920x1080 *.mpg *.mpeg PS MPEG1 AC3 MPEG LPCM 1920x1080 MPEG2 1920x1080 *.ts *.tp *.trp TS MPEG2 AAC MP3 1920x1080 H.264 1920x1080 VC1 1920x1080 N Video Play Control Buttons ENTERE Play/Pauses the movie file Play the movie file Pause the movie file Exit play mode and return to the movie list. T TOOLS Run various functions from the movie menus. ◄/► Skip forwards or backwards through the movie file. ▲/▼ Move to the first/last of the file. ▶ r r 00:00:02 / 00:01:55 1/3 MOVIE_000.avi USB EPause lr Jump T Tools R Return BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 40 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:25English - 41 ❑ Playing the movie group 1. Press the ▲ button to move to the Sort key Section. 2. Press the ◄ or ► button to select a sorting standard. 3. Press the ▼ or ENTERE button to move to the Group List Section. 4. Press the ∂ (Play) button. Only the files of the selected group will start playing. „ Alternatively 1. Select a Sort key and then in the File List Section, select the files contained in the desired group. N To move to the previous/next group, press the π (REW) or μ (FF) button. 2. Press the TOOLS button. 3. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Play Current Group, then press the ENTERE button. N The movie files in the sorting group including the selected file are played. ❑ Playing the selected movie files 1. Press the ▼ button to select the File List Section. 2. Press the ◄ or ► button to select the desired music file. 3. Press the Yellow button. N The c mark appears to the left of the selected movie file. N To deselect all selected files, press the TOOLS button and select Deselect All. 4. Repeat the above operation to select multiple movie files. 5. Press the ∂ (Play)/ENTERE button. N Only the selected file is played. ❑ Playing movie continuously (Resume Play) If you exit the playing movie function, the movie can be played later from the point where it was stopped. 1. Select the movie file you want to play continuously by pressing the ◄ or ► button to select it from the File List Section. 2. Press the ∂ (Play)/ENTERE button. 3. Select Play Continuously (Resume Play) by pressing the Blue button. N The Movie will begin to play from where it was stopped. N If Cont. Movie Play Help function is set On in the Setup menu, a pop-up message will appear when you resume play a movie file. Using the Setup Menu Setup displays the user settings of the Media Play menu. 1. Press the MEDIA.P button on the remote control to display the Media Play menu. 2. Press the ◄ or ► button to select Setup, then press the ENTERE button. 3. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the desired option. 4 . Press the ◄ or ► button to select the option. N To exit Media Play mode, press the MEDIA.P button on the remote control. „ Use Color View → On / Off Select to view the color information in the Photo menu. N If this is set to ON, the loading time increases for collecting the color information. „ Music Repeat Mode → On / Off Select to repeatedly play music files. „ Cont. movie play help → On / Off Select to display the help pop-up message for continuous movie playback. „ Get the DivX® VOD registration code Shows the registration code authorized for the TV. If you connect to the DivX web site and register the registration code with a personal account, you can download VOD registration file. If you play the VOD registration using Media Play, the registration is completed. For more information on DivX® VOD, visit www.DivX.com. „ Get the DivX® VOD deactivation code When DivX® VOD is not registered, the registration deactivation code is displayed. If you execute this function when DivX® VOD is registered, the current DivX® VOD registration is deactivated. „ Screen Saver Run Time → 10 min / 20 min / 1 hour Select to set the waiting time before the screen saver appears. „ Information Select to viewing the information of the connected device. „ Remove Safely You can remove the device safely from the TV. Media Play USB : USB 851.98MB/995.00MB Free SETUP Photo Music Movie Setup USB „ eExit Device Setup Move Adjust Return Use Color View ◄ Off ► Music Repeat Mode On Cont. movie play help On Get the DivX® VOD registration code Get the DivX® VOD deactivation code Screen Saver Run Time 10 min Information Remove Safely USB „ Device BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 41 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:26English - 42 Setting the DLNA Network DLNA allows you to watch pictures, musics and videos saved on your PC or on your TV through a network connection in Media Play mode. This removes the need to copy them to a USB storage device and then connect the device to your TV. To use DLNA, the TV must be connected to the network and the DLNA application must be installed on your PC. ❑ Network Connection Diagram-Cable ❑ Network Connection Diagram-Wireless 1. For more information on how to configure your network, refer to ‘Setting the Network’. N You are recommended to locate both TV and PC in same subnet. The first 3 parts of the subnet address of the TV and the PC IP addresses should be the same and only the last part (the host address) should be changed. (e.g. IP Address: 123.456.789.**) 2. Connect the PC to which the Samsung PC Share Manager program will be installed and the external modem using a LAN cable. N You can connect the TV to the PC directly without connecting it through a Sharer (Router). Installing the DLNA Application To play content on the PC on the TV, you have to first install the application. To use the DLNA function smoothly, use the program in the CD-ROM supplied with the TV or use the Samsung PC Share Manager program corresponding to the TV model that can be downloaded from the Samsung web site. TV External Modem (ADSL/VDSL/Cable TV) LAN PC LAN Media Play-DLNA TV LAN PC or 1 TV Side Panel Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 42 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:27English - 43 Using the DLNA Application Programme Screen Display 1. Menus: The following application menus are provided : File, Share, Server, and Help. 2. Click to share the selected PC server folder. 3. Click to cancel sharing. 4. Click to refresh the PC folder and files. 5. Click to synchronize the share status. 6. The folders and files of the PC to be shared are listed. 7. Folders shared by the user are listed. 8. PC server name shown on the device list of the Media Play. „ System Requirements 1. Insert the Programme CD supplied with this TV into your PC. 2. 30MB of free hard disk space is needed for the programme installation. N If you share files, up to 30MB of hard disk drive space is required for each 100 files. N If you cancel file sharing, the hard disk drive space used for the thumbnail information is also freed. „ Supported Formats • Image: JPEG/ Audio: MP3/ Video: AVI, MKV, ASF, MP4, 3GPP, PS, TS container. For detailed supported video formats, refer to the ‘Playing a Movie File’ instructions. „ Install the application ► ► ► 1. Run the Setup.exe file on the Programme CD supplied with the product. N Alternatively, you can download the file from www.samsung.com. 2. Install the SAMSUNG PC Share Manager as shown in the figures. 3. When the installation is complete, the PC Share Manager icon appears on your Desktop. N Double-click the icon to run the programme. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 43 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:28English - 44 ❑ Share „ Sharing a Folder You can share a folder from your PC to the TV. „ Cancelling a Shared Folder You can cancel a shared folder on your PC. Select a folder from the Shared Folder pane and select Unshare Folder. „ Applying the Current Settings Perform this when synchronization is necessary due to a new shared folder or cancelling a shared folder. The Set Changed State menu applies changes to shared folders to the data saved with the PC share programme. Since applying changes to the internal data is a time-consuming process, this function enables users to apply changes to the data only when required. Until the Set Changed State menu is selected, the changed state of the shared folder is not applied to the server. Changes to the shared folders are not applied to your PC until you select the Set Changed State menu. „ Setting the Access Permission To enable the TV to find your PC, the TV must be set to Set Device Policy in the Access Permission Settings window. In addition, the PC server and the TV must be on the same subnet. • Method: Select the Share menu and select Set Device Policy. Rejected items are represented in gray. You can change the access permissions by using the Allow Accept / Deny button. To delete an item, select the item and select Delete Item. ❑ Server „ Server You can run or stop using your PC as a server. „ Run DLNA Digital Media Server when Windows Starts You can determine whether to start the PC server automatically when Windows starts. „ Change server name You can rename the PC server Using the DLNA Function ❑ Using the DLNA Menu DLNA (Digital Living Network Alliance) enables content saved on a DLNA server (usually your PC) connected to your TV or over a network to be played. Media Play enables playing content saved on a USB memory device connected to the TV, while DLNA enables playing content saved on a DLNA server (your PC) connected to your TV or over the network. The procedures to use the content are the same as those for Media Play (USB & DLNA). 1. Press the MEDIA.P button on the remote control to display the DLNA menu. 2. Press the ◄ or ► button to select an icon (Photo, Music, Movie, Setup), then press the ENTERE button. N To exit DLNA mode, press the MEDIA.P button on the remote control. N DLNA does not support the following functions. - The Background Music and Background Music Setting functions. - Sorting files by preference in the Photo, Music, and Movie folders. - The Change Group function. - The Copy / Delete function. - The Remove Safely function. - The REW/FF (π/μ) key functions while a movie is playing. - Playing Movie Continuously (Resume Play) function. N The Skip function may not work with some container such as asf and mkv. N The Divx DRM, Multi-audio, embedded caption does not supported. N Samsung PC Share manager should be permitted by the firewall program on your PC. N The Skip (◄/► keys) or Pause function may not work while a movie is playing for the DLNA of other manufacturers, depending on the corresponding content information. N The playing time may not be displayed while a movie is playing. Media Play Photo Music Setup PHOTO USB : USB 851.98MB/995.00MB Free Movie USB „ Device Return BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 44 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:28English - 45 About Anynet+ Connecting Anynet + Devices Anynet + is a function that enables you to control all connected Samsung devices that support Anynet+ with your Samsung TV’s remote. The Anynet + system can be used only with Samsung devices that have the Anynet+ feature. To be sure your Samsung device has this feature, check if there is an Anynet+ logo on it. ❑ To connect to a TV 1. Connect the HDMI IN (1, 2(DVI), 3 or 4) jack on the TV and the HDMI OUT jack of the corresponding Anynet+ device using an HDMI cable. ❑ To connect to Home Theater 1. Connect the HDMI IN (1, 2(DVI), 3 or 4) jack on the TV and the HDMI OUT jack of the corresponding Anynet+ device using an HDMI cable. 2. Connect the HDMI IN jack of the home theater and the HDMI OUT jack of the corresponding Anynet+ device using an HDMI cable. N Connect the Optical cable between the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) jack on your TV and the Digital Audio Input on the Home Theater. N When following the connection above, the Optical jack only outputs 2 channel audio. You will only hear sound from the Home Theater’s Front Left and Right speakers and the subwoofer. If you want to hear 5.1 channel audio, connect the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) jack on the DVD player or Cable/Satellite Box (ie Anynet Device 1 or 2) directly to the Amplifier or Home Theater, not the TV. N Connect only one Home Theater. N You can connect an Anynet+ device using the HDMI 1.3 cable. Some HDMI cables may not support Anynet+ functions. N Anynet+ works when the AV device supporting Anynet+ is in the Standby or On status. N Anynet+ supports up to 12 AV devices in total. Note that you can connect up to 3 devices of the same type. N Anynet+ supports up to 3 devices simultaneously. Anynet+ Device 1 Anynet+ Device 2 Anynet+ Device 3 TV HDMI 1.3 Cable HDMI 1.3 Cable HDMI 1.3 Cable TV Anynet+ Device 1 Anynet+ Device 2 Anynet+ Device 3 HDMI 1.3 Cable HDMI 1.3 Cable HDMI 1.3 Cable HDMI 1.3 Cable Home Theatre Optical Cable Anynet+ Device 4 HDMI 1.3 Cable Anynet+ Device 4 HDMI 1.3 Cable BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 45 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:29English - 46 Setting Up Anynet + ❑ Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) Setup T Press the TOOLS button to display Tools menu. You can also display Anynet+ menu by selecting Tools → Anynet + (HDMI-CEC). „ Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) → Off / On To use the Anynet + Function, Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) must be set to On. N When the Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) function is disabled, all the Anynet+ related operations are deactivated. „ Auto Turn Off → No / Yes Setting an Anynet + Device to turn Off Automatically when the TV is Turned Off N The active source on the TV remote must be set to TV to use the Anynet+ function. N If you set Auto Turn Off to Yes, connected external devices are also turned off when the TV is turned off. If an external device is still recording, it may or may not turn off. Switching between Anynet + Devices 1. Press the TOOLS button. Press the ENTERE button to select Anynet + (HDMI-CEC). 2. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Device List, then press the ENTERE button. N Anynet+ devices connected to the TV are listed. If you cannot find a device you want, press the red button to scan for devices. N Only when you set Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) to On in the Setup menu, the Device List menu appears. 3. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select to a particular device and press the ENTERE button. It is switched to the selected device. N Switching to the selected devices may take up to 2 minutes. You cannot cancel the operation during the switching operation. N The time required to scan for devices is determined by the number of connected devices. N If you have selected external input mode by pressing the SOURCE button, you cannot use the Anynet+ function. Make sure to switch to an Anynet + device by using the TOOLS button. ❑ Anynet + Menu The Anynet + menu changes depending on the type and status of the Anynet + devices connected to the TV. Anynet + Menu Description View TV Anynet + mode changes to TV broadcast mode. Device List Shows the Anynet+ device list. (device_name) MENU Shows the connected device menus. E.g. If a DVD recorder is connected, the disc menu of the DVD recorder will appear. (device_name) INFO Shows the play menu of the connected device. E.g. If a DVD recorder is connected, the play menu of the DVD recorder will appear. Recording: (*recorder) Starts recording immediately using the recorder. (This is only available for devices that support the recording function.) (*recorder) Reserve Recording Enables reserving a recording for the recorder. (This is only available for devices that support the recording reservation function.) Stop Recording: (*recorder) Stops recording. Receiver Sound is played through the receiver. Continued... Application Media Play (USB & DLNA) Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) ► Content Library Internet@TV Home Network Centre U Move EEnter R Return Anynet+(HDMI-CEC) : On ▶ Auto Turn Off : Yes U Move EEnter R Return View TV Device List Recording : DVDR DVDR MENU DVDR INFO Receiver : On Setup BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 46 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:30English - 47 ❑ TV Remote Control Buttons Available in Anynet+ Mode Device Type Operating Status Available Buttons Anynet + Device After switching to the device, when the menu of the corresponding device is displayed on the screen. Numeric buttons ▲/▼/◄/►/ENTERE buttons Colour buttons / EXIT button After switching to the device, while playing a file (Backward search) / (Forward search) (Stop) / (Play) / (Pause) Device with builtin Tuner After switching to the device, when you are watching a TV programme P / button Audio Device When Receiver is activated = / button M MUTE button N The Anynet + function only works when the active source on the TV remote control is set to TV. N The button works only while in the recordable state. N You cannot control Anynet + devices using the buttons on the TV. You can control Anynet + devices only using the TV remote control. N The TV remote control may not work under certain conditions. In this case, reselect the Anynet+ device. N The Anynet + functions do not operate with other manufacturers’ products. N The , operations may differ depending on the device. N If more than one recording device is connected, they are displayed as (*recorder) and if only one recording device is connected, it will be represented as (*device_name). Recording You can make a recording of a TV programme using a Samsung recorder. 1. Press the TOOLS button. Press the ENTERE button to select Anynet + (HDMI-CEC). 2. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Recording(recorder): then press the ENTERE button. Recording begins. N When there is more than one recording device When multiple recording devices are connected, the recording devices are listed. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select a recording device and press the ENTERE button. Recording begins. N When the recording device is not displayed Select Device List and press the red button to search devices. N Pressing the button will record whatever you are currently watching. If you are watching video from another device, the video from the device is recorded. N Before recording, check whether the antenna jack is properly connected to the recording device. To properly connect an antenna to a recording device, refer to the recording device’s users manual. U Move EEnter R Return View TV Device List Recording : DVDR DVDR MENU DVDR INFO Receiver : On Setup BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 47 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:30English - 48 Listening through a Receiver You can listen to sound through a receiver instead of the TV speaker. 1. Press the TOOLS button. Press the ENTERE button to select Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC). 2. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Receiver. Press the ◄ or ► button to select On or Off. N If your receiver supports audio only, it may not appear in the device list. N The receiver will work when you have properly connected the Optical IN jack of the receiver to the Optical Out jack of the TV. N When the receiver (home theater) is set to On, you can hear sound output from the TV’s Optical jack. When the TV is displaying a DTV(air) signal, the TV will send out 5.1 channel sound to the Home theater receiver. When the source is a digital component such as a DVD and is connected to the TV via HDMI, only 2 channel sound will be heard from the Home Theater receiver. N When using the Media Play feature, sound may not output properly through the receiver. N When listening through the receiver, there are restrictions for using the audio-related (MTS, Preferred language) menus. N If there is a power interruption to the TV when the Receiver is set to On (by disconnecting the power cord or a power failure), the Speaker Select may be set to External Speaker when you turn the TV on again. (see page 21) Troubleshooting for Anynet + Symptom Solution Anynet+ does not work. • Check if the device is an Anynet + device. The Anynet + system supports Anynet + devices only. • Connect only one receiver (home theater). • Check if the Anynet + device power cord is properly connected. • Check the Anynet + device’s Video/Audio/HDMI 1.3 cable connections. • Check whether Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) is set to On in the Anynet+ setup menu. • Check whether the TV remote control is in TV mode. • Check whether it is Anynet + exclusive remote control. • Anynet+ doesn’t work in certain situations. (Searching channels, Plug & Play, etc.) • When connecting or removing the HDMI 1.3 cable, please make sure to search devices again or turn your TV off and on again. • Check if the Anynet + Function of Anynet+ device is set on. I want to start Anynet+. • Check if the Anynet + device is properly connected to the TV and check if the Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) is set to On in the Anynet + Setup menu. • Press the TV button on the TV remote control to switch to TV. Then press the TOOLS button to show the Anynet + menu and select a menu you want. I want to exit Anynet+. • Select View TV in the Anynet + menu. • Press the SOURCE button on the TV remote control and select a device other than Anynet + devices. (Note that the channel button operates only when a tuner-embedded Anynet+ device is not connected.) The message Connecting to Anynet+ device... appears on the screen. • You cannot use the remote control when you are configuring Anynet+ or switching to a view mode. • Use the remote control when the Anynet+ setting or switching to view mode is complete. The Anynet+ device does not play. • You cannot use the play function when Plug & Play is in progress. The connected device is not displayed. • Check whether or not the device supports Anynet + functions. • Check whether or not the HDMI 1.3 cable is properly connected. • Check whether Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) is set to On in the Anynet + setup menu. • Search Anynet + devices again. • You can connect an Anynet + device using the HDMI 1.3 cable only. Some HDMI cables may not support Anynet + functions. • If it is terminated by an abnormal situation such as disconnecting the HDMI cable or power cord or a power failure, please repeat the device scan. The TV programme cannot be recorded. • Check whether the antenna jack on the recording device is properly connected. The TV sound is not output through the receiver. • Connect the optical cable between TV and the receiver. U Move EEnter R Return View TV Device List Recording : DVDR DVDR MENU DVDR INFO Receiver : On Setup BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 48 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:30English - 49 Activating the Content Library The Content Library enables you to view or play the built-in contents on the TV or stored on your USB device. 1. Press the MENU button. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Application, then press the ENTERE button. 2. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Content Library, then press the ENTERE button. The Content Library main menu is displayed. O Press the CONTENT button on the remote control to display the Content Library main menu. 3. Press the ◄ or ► button to select an icon (Gallery, Cooking, Children, Wellness, Others, Content Management), then press the ENTERE button. N The selected item will be run. ❑ Using the Remote Control Button in Content Library Menu Button Operations ▲/▼/◄/► Move the cursor and select an item. ENTERE Select the currently selected item. RETURN Return to the previous menu. EXIT Stop the current function and return to the Content Library main menu. Colour Button Button that provide functions are described on the corresponding page. You can control the volume of the played content. CONTENT Enter or Exit Content Library mode. N If you press the Volume or MMUTE button, no OSD is displayed, but the function operates accordingly. N To return to TV mode, press the P button on the remote control. N CONTENTS LIBRARY CONTAINS TEXT, GRAPHICS, IMAGES, MULTIMEDIA, AND OTHER MATERIALS FOR INFORMATIONAL AND PROMOTIONAL PURPOSES ONLY. MATERIALS IN CONTENTS LIBRARY HAS BEEN MODIFIED AND KEEPS BEING REVISED AND UPDATED. THE MATERIALS IN THE CONTENTS LIBRARY MAY NOT BE SUITABLE FOR ALL AUDIENCES. N INFORMATION IN THE CONTENTS LIBRARY IS PROVIDED “AS IS.” ALTHOUGH THE INFORMATION PROVIDED TO YOU IN THE CONTENTS LIBRARY IS OBTAINED OR COMPLIED FROM SOURCES WE BELIEVE TO BE RELIABLE, SAMSUNG CANNOT AND DOES NOT GUARANTEE THE ACCURACY, VALIDITY, TIMELINESS OR COMPLETENESS OF ANY INFORMATION OR DATA MADE AVAILABLE TO YOU FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES, INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE, SHALL SAMSUNG BE HELD LIABLE, WHETHER IN CONTRACT OR TORT, FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, ATTORNEY FEES, EXPENSES, OR ANY OTHER DAMAGES WHATSOEVER ARISING OUT OF, OR IN CONNECTION WITH, ANY INFORMATION CONTAINED IN, OR THE USE OF, THE CONTENTS LIBRARY, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Content Library Application Media Play (USB & DLNA) Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) Content Library Internet@TV Home Network Centre < > Cooking Children Gallery Gallery Content Library Wellness Others Return Exit BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 49 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:31English - 50 Using the Content Library ❑ Gallery This function plays a Slide Show with high resolution images and background music and produces various atmospheres. Using the Gallery function of the TV, you can change your home atmosphere. N Press INFO button to see the credit and detail information in English for the imagery (currently, the credit supports English only). N You can pause the slide show by pressing the ENTERE button during a slide show. N The copyrights of the Gallery contents and all issues related to them are reserved by Timespace / JoongAng M&B, Inc. ❑ Cooking You can view various recipes that you can then easily follow step by step. Enjoy these contents which give you great ideas for meals. N The recipes introduced in the Cooking contents on the Samsung TV are based on recipes published by Anness Publishing. N The copyrights of the Cooking contents and all issues related to them are reserved by Practical Pictures. ❑ Children This is educational and interactive content that children can watch repeatedly. Enjoy existing stories, songs and plays with the Boowa and Kwala characters. N The copyrights of the Children contents and issues related to them are reserved by UpToTen. ❑ Wellness This is beneficial health management content that provides stretching and massage exercises that can be enjoyed by the whole family. ❑ Content Management „ My contents The use of contents is the same as in using the TV memory contents. Also, you can delete and play the each contents. „ USB You can download the contents onto a USB memory device and play them on your TV. The contents on the external USB device are played directly. N Content Library only supports USB Mass Storage Class devices (MSC). MSC is a Mass Storage Class Bulk-Only Transport device. Examples of MSC are Thumb drives, Flash Card Readers and USB HDD (USB HUB are not supported.) N Playing a game using an external USB memory device will allow you to save your game (depending on the game). Take care as removing the USB memory device while saving data to the USB memory device may cause the data to be lost. N Downloading New Contents New content other than the built-in contents will be provided via the Samsung.com website free of charge. When you download the paid contents, you need UDN number to download contents. Check the UDN number before downloading a new content item. 1. Visit the www.samsung.com website. 2. Select a content item in the Contents Download page. 3. Download the contents onto the USB memory device. 4. Go to Content Library main menu by pressing CONTENT button or choosing Content Library (Menu → Application → Content Library) 5. Plug the USB memory into USB port on the side of the TV. 6. You can see the content sub item which you downloaded. 7. Select a content item and press the enter button. 8. You can play the selected content item. „ Setup • Screen Saver Run Time → 10 min. / 20 min. / 40 min. / 1 hour Select to set the waiting time before the screen saver appears. • Save UDN (Unique Device Number) The 18-digit number on the screen is the product code. You can save the UDN to your USB memory. N An NTFS format USB storage device does not support saving UDN.We recommend using a FAT format USB storage device. BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 50 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:31English - 51 You can use various internet services containing useful information and entertaining content. If you have some problems while using a widget service, please contact to content provider. In the widget, press the green button and get information of contact or refer to help website for widget provider information. N English may be only supported in widget service depending on region. N This function may not be supported depending on your country. Getting Started with Internet@TV Internet@TV provides an integrated Internet and television experience powered by the Yahoo!® Widget Engine. You can monitor financial stocks, share photos with friends and family, and track news and weather all through the Internet@TV service on your television. N If Network condition is unstable, this function may not work. Then, TV would be turned off automatically. Otherwise turn off the TV using power button. N You may experience slow operation or hesitation when using this function due to network conditions. When running Internet@TV for the first time, the basic settings will proceed automatically. N The first step is to set up your network. For more information on how to configure your network, refer to ‘Network Setup’. N After your network is operational, the Internet@TV software guides you through a step-by-step setup wizard. Internet@TV All content and services accessible through this device belong to third parties and are protected by copyright, patent, trademark and/or ther intellectual property laws. Such content and services are provided solely for your personal noncommercial use. You may not use any content or services in a manner that has not been authorized by the content owner or service provider. Without limiting the foregoing, unless expressly authorized by the applicable content owner or service provider, you may not modify, copy, republish, upload, post, transmit, translate, sell, create derivative works, exploit, or distribute in any manner or medium any content or services displayed through this device. YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT USE OF THE DEVICE IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE AND ACCURACY IS WITH YOU. THE DEVICE AND ALL THIRD PARTY CONTENT AND SERVICES ARE PROVIDED "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. SAMSUNG EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO THE DEVICE AND ANY CONTENT AND SERVICES, EITHER EXPRESS OR, IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, OF SATISFACTORY QUALITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OF ACCURACY, OF QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. SAMSUNG DOES NOT GUARANTEE THE ACCURACY, VALIDITY, TIMELINESS, LEGALITY, OR COMPLETENESS OF ANY CONTENT OR SERVICE MADE AVAILABLE THROUGH THIS DEVICE AND DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE DEVICE, CONTENT OR SERVICES WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, OR THAT OPERATION OF THE DEVICE OR SERVICES WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES, INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE, SHALL SAMSUNG BE LIABLE, WHETHER IN CONTRACT OR TORT, FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, ATTORNEY FEES, EXPENSES, OR ANY OTHER DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF, OR IN CONNECTION WITH, ANY INFORMATION CONTAINED IN, OR AS A RESULT OF THE USE OF THE DEVICE, OR ANY CONTENT OR SERVICE ACCESSED BY YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTY, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Third party services may be changed, suspended, removed, terminated or interrupted, or access may be disabled at any time, without notice, and Samsung makes no representation or warranty that any content or service will remain available for any period of time. Content and services are transmitted by third parties by means of networks and transmission facilities over which Samsung has no control. Without limiting the generality of this disclaimer, Samsung expressly disclaims any responsibility or liability for any change, interruption, disabling, removal of or suspension of any content or service made available through this device. Samsung may impose limits on the use of or access to certain services or content, in any case and without notice or liability. Samsung is neither responsible nor liable for customer service related to the content and services. Any question or request for service relating to the content or services should be made directly to the respective content and service providers. 1. Press the MENU button. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Application, then press the ENTERE button. 2. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Internet@TV, then press the ENTERE button. N INTERNET@TV starts. O Press the INTERNET@ button on the remote control to display the Internet@TV menu. 3. The General Disclaimer is displayed on the screen. Select I accept or I do not accept. N For more information on the General Disclaimer, refer to the ‘Legal Notice’. 4. The ‘welcome screen’ is the starting point of the Internet@TV guided setup. N If you select Exit Setup, this step is resumed when you press the INTERNET@ button. N Select Let’s get started! 5. Choosing your location allows TV Widgets to use localized content. N Select your country from the list provided. 6. Accepting the Yahoo!® TV Widget Engine Privacy Policy is required to use Internet@TV. N Select OK, I Accept. BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 51 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:31English - 52 7. Accepting the Yahoo!® TV Widget System Terms of Service is required to use Internet@TV. N Select OK, I Accept. 8. Enter your name to setup your profile. Each profile has its own list of widgets. You can create a profile for each person who uses Internet@TV. N Enter your name and select Save this name. N For more information, refer to page ‘Using the Profile Widget'. 9. Internet@TV tests the network connection. N If the test fails, configure your network again. N For more information, refer to page ‘Network Setup’. 10. The guided setup is complete. A tutorial on how to use Internet@TV is next. N Select Continue to view the tutorial. N Select Exit setup to start using Internet@TV now. N To run the tutorial again, select Profile Widget → System Setting → Repeat Tutorial. 11. Press the INTERNET@ button on the remote control to display the Internet@TV user interface. ❑ Screen display „ Dock mode 1 A welcome banner is shown with your profile name in the top right corner. N This banner disappears after a short delay. 2 The banner highlights two remote control shortcuts. N If you press the blue button (Viewport) on your remote control, the display is toggled between ‘Viewport mode’ and ‘Overlay mode’. In Viewport mode, the TV or video plays in a scaled-down area with graphics outside. In overlay mode, the graphics are displayed on top of the TV or video. N If you press the yellow button (Edit Snippet) on your remote control, a help window is displayed and the snippet with focus can be edited. 3 Press the INTERNET@ button on the remote control to begin. N The horizontal list at the bottom of your TV screen is called ‘the dock’. N The items in the list are called ‘snippets’. N A snippet is a shortcut which launches a TV Widget. N A TV Widget is an Internet application designed to run on your TV. N Move between snippets by pressing the ◄ or ► buttons on the remote control. N Focus is located in the left most region (highlighted in blue). N The dock slides snippets under that focal point. N Launch a TV Widget by pressing the ENTERE button on the remote control when its snippet is in focus. N When you add snippets, they form a stack which you can navigate by pressing the ▲ or ▼ buttons. N Two special TV Widgets appear in the dock: the Profile Widget and the Gallery Widget. These cannot be deleted. N The dock will slide off screen after a timeout period. „ Sidebar mode 1 Focus on a snippet and press the ENTERE button to launch the TV Widget sidebar. The TV Widget logo and Home ( ) are at the top of the sidebar. 2 Current menu is displayed under the TV Widget logo. N To return to a previous screen, select it and press the ENTERE button. N You can also press the RETURN button on the remote control. 3 Current selection is always highlighted in blue. The highlighted button has focus and is activated when you press the ENTERE button. 4 When there is a lot of data, a page control is used. N Current page and total pages are displayed. N Move between pages by pressing ◄ or ► buttons. 5 The bottom toolbar includes color buttons that correspond to the red, green, yellow and blue buttons on the remote control. • Red button: Close the widget. • Green button: Change the widget’s setting. • Yellow button: Manage your snippets. • Blue button: Size video to fit, or make it full screen. N Some buttons may not be available depending on widget. .@# áëí space a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 52 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:33English - 53 Editing Snippets in the Dock 1. Edit a snippet by focusing on it in the dock and pressing the yellow button. 2. The snippet moves to the Second position and its tile slides up to show the following help text: • Delete (red button): Remove this TV Widget. N Deleted widgets can be re-installed using the Widget Gallery. • Move (blue button): Re-order the snippet. Press the ◄ or ► button to scroll. Press the yellow button to drop into the new position. • Done (yellow button): Exit the Edit Snippet menu. Using the Profile Widget The Profile Widget configures your user profile.You can set up multiple profiles, and each profile maintains its own list of widgets. The Switch Profile menu allows you to switch to a different user profile. N At least two profiles must be registered. If you want to add a profile, refer to ‘Administrative Controls’. The Profile Settings menu allows you to customize and protect your profile. • User profiles can be customized with a unique Name and an Avatar (a picture used to represent your profile). • Your profile’s Name and Avatar are displayed in the profile snippet in the dock. • Profiles can be protected by Create Profile PIN. N When setting the PIN for the first time, you can set a Security Question. The Profile Settings menu can limit to widgets. • If you forget your Profile PIN you can answer a Security Question that is associated with your profile. • A profile that has the Limit Profile indicator turned on will not allow new widgets to be installed. N The Owner PIN must be set to use this function. To set the Owner PIN, refer to ‘Administrative Controls’. The System Settings menu allows you to: • Change your Location and set your Zip Code (US only) to tailor the content to your region. • Repeat the Tutorial that was shown during guided setup. • Restore Factory Settings to delete all widget configurations and information. In the Administrative Controls menu you can: • Set the Screen Saver timeout to avoid screen burn in. • Create Owner PIN and set a Security Question to control other profiles. • Create a new Profile which can be configured with a different set of widgets. • Delete an existing profile. From the Profile Widget you can Sign in to Yahoo!® using your Yahoo! ID. • If you have a Yahoo! ID, you can access your personalized content using the Yahoo! TV Widgets. • All Yahoo! TV Widgets that are installed are automatically signed-in with your profile’s Yahoo! ID. • If you have no Yahoo! account, visit www.yahoo.com and create an account. • You may fail to log in with an ID created on the Yahoo website in a country that does not support Internet@TV. ❑ About Profile widget Press the green button. You can view a brief description of the Profile Widget, Copyright Policy, Terms of Service, and Privacy Policy. BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 53 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:33English - 54 Using the Yahoo!® Widget Gallery Use the Yahoo!® Widget Gallery to add more widgets to your TV. View available TV Widgets in the following categories: • Latest Widgets: Displays recently updated widgets. • Yahoo!® Widgets: Displays widgets provided by Yahoo!®. • Samsung Widgets: Displays widgets provided by Samsung. • More Categories: Displays all widgets by category. N To install a widget, navigate to the detail screen and select Add Widget to My Profile and press the ENTERE button. The widget is installed and becomes available in the dock. ❑ Widget Gallery Settings Press the green button. „ About Yahoo! Widget Gallery... You can view brief information for the Widget Gallery, Copyright Policy, Terms of Service, and Privacy Policy. In the Developer Settings menu You can make your own widget. For more information on creating your own widget, visit our developer site at http://connectedtv. yahoo.com/ Using the Yahoo!® Weather Widget The Yahoo!® Weather Widget provides updates on your local and favorite weather locations. This content dynamically changes with weather conditions. • Press the green button on the remote control to display the Yahoo!® Weather Widget Settings menu. • From the Settings menu you can add or remove a city for which you want to view weather information. From the Settings menu: • Add New City by entering the name of the city. Once the search results are displayed, select the city you want and press the ENTERE button. • Delete City by selecting the city you want to delete from the city list. Press the ENTERE button and confirm the deletion. • Changing the Temperature Indication Mode You can change the temperature indication mode to Imperial or Metric. For example, Imperial will show temperatures in Fahrenheit and Metric in Celsius. ❑ Create a snippet for a favorite city • Select the city from the Yahoo!® Weather Widget’s home page and view the detailed weather information. • Press the yellow button. • Select the Add Snippet menu and press ENTERE to add the city as a snippet. ❑ Delete a snippet for a city • Launch the snippet. • Press the yellow button. • Select the Delete Snippet menu and press ENTERE to remove the snippet. BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 54 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:33English - 55 Using the Yahoo!® News Widget The Yahoo!® News Widget provides the latest headline news for business, entertainment, politics, sports, top stories, and many other categories. Select a category, select a headline within the category, and view a dynamically updated news summary. Using the Yahoo!® Flickr Widget The Flickr Widget can provide you access to your favorite photos from friends and family while watching TV. Share your photos with your family on your big screen TV through a slideshow. • Personalize the Flickr Widget by logging in with your Yahoo! ID. • For detailed procedures on log in, refer to the ‘Using the Profile Widget’ instructions. • For more information on Flickr, visit http://www.flickr.com. N Your Photos shows photos you have registered with Flickr website. „ To view Flickr photos in a slideshow: • Select a thumbnail of a photo and press the ENTERE button to view the photo’s details. • Select Start Slideshow and press the ENTERE button. „ To control the slideshow display: • Press the ENTERE button during a slideshow. • The thumbnails of photos are displayed on the bottom of the screen. N When the slideshow control is displayed, you can Pause, Play and Stop the slideshow. N If you select the menu and press ENTERE, you can view information for the selected photo. • The Your Sets menu allows you to view photos you have classified in Flickr. • The Explore menu allows you to explore photos featured by the Flickr website. You can view the photos updated daily. • The Mark as Favorite or Remove From Favorite menu moves photos to your Favorite Photos set or removes photos from it. • The Favorite Photos menu allows you to see the photos you have classified as favorites. • The Your Contacts menu allows you to see updates from family and friends. The Your Groups menu allows you to select your favorite groups from the Flickr website to share and enjoy photos with the Flickr community of users. To configure the Yahoo!® Flickr Widget Settings press the green button on the remote control. • The Time Per Slide menu controls the speed of the slideshow. • The Repeat menu will restart the slideshow at the beginning after the last photo is shown. BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 55 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:34English - 56 Using the Yahoo!® Finance Widget View stock information and the latest stock news with the Yahoo!® Finance Widget. Press the green button to set up your stocks. Use the Add New Symbol menu to enter the name of a new stock. • Select the stock you want to add from the search results and select the Add Symbol menu and press the ENTERE button. N The selected stock is added to the My Stocks list. • Use the Import Symbols From Yahoo!® menu to retrieve your Yahoo!® Finance portfolio. - The Merge Symbols menu merges the symbols in the Yahoo!® Finance Widget with the symbols from your portfolio. - The Replace Symbols menu deletes the symbols in the Yahoo!® Finance Widget and replaces them with the symbols from your portfolio. • Use the Display Format menu to change the stock-price fluctuation transition to Value or Percentage. • Create a snippet for a favorite stock. - Select the stock symbol from the Yahoo!® Finance Widget’s home page and view the detailed finance information. - Press the yellow button. - Select the Add Snippet menu and press ENTERE to add the stock as a snippet. • Delete a snippet - Launch the snippet from the dock - Press the yellow button. - Select the Delete Snippet menu and press ENTERE to remove the snippet. Troubleshooting for internet@TV Problem Possible Solution Some widget services do not work. • Check with that service provider. • In the widget, press the green button and get contact information or refer to help website for widget service provider information. • Refer to Help website page. Some widget contents only have English. How can I change the language? • Widget content language may be different from widget user interface language. It depends on service provider. After factory reset, Yahoo Widget service doesn’t work and warning message is displayed. • After factory reset, turn off and on your TV. Then restart Internet@TV. At the Flickr widget, I logged in my account. But, I can’t view my picture. • Visit Yahoo Web site, and activate your Flickr account at your Yahoo! ID. At the Profile widget, I did change location, but the previous setting still remains. • Turn off and on your TV. Then restart Internet@TV. • Now, you can enjoy widget services supported in changed location. BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 56 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:34English - 57 Help Website Country Website Austria www.samsung.com → Produkte → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Belgium www.samsung.com → Producten → televisies → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV www.samsung.com → Produits → téléviseurs → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Czech www.samsung.com → Produkty → televizory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Denmark www.samsung.com → Produkter → stue & soveværelse → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Finland www.samsung.com → Tuotteet → kodinelektroniikka → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV France www.samsung.com → Produits → télévisions → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Germany www.samsung.com → Privatkunden → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Greece www.samsung.com → Προϊόντα → τηλεοράσεις → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Hungary www.samsung.com → Termékek → televíziók → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Ireland www.samsung.com → Products → Television → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Italy www.samsung.com → Prodotti → TV → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Netherlands www.samsung.com → Producten → televisies → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Norway www.samsung.com → Produkter → hverdagsrom & soverom → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Poland www.samsung.com → Produkty → telewizory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Portugal www.samsung.com → Produtos para Consumidores → televisores → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Slovakia www.samsung.com → Produkty → televízory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Spain www.samsung.com → Productos → televisores → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Sweden www.samsung.com → Produkter → vardagsrum & sovrum → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Switzerland www.samsung.com → Produits → télévisions → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV www.samsung.com → Produkte → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV United Kingdom www.samsung.com → Products → Television → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Turkey www.samsung.com → Tüketici Ürünleri → televizyon → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Estonia www.samsung.com → Klientidele → Televiisorid → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Latvia www.samsung.com → Klientiem → Televizori → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Lithuania www.samsung.com → Namams → Televizoriai → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Russia www.samsung.com → Продукты → Телевизоры → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Ukraine www.samsung.com → Потребительские продукты → телевизоры → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV N Approaching step may be changed later on. N It can be different links for special countrie . BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 57 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:34English - 58 N This function may not be supported depending on your country. N If you have some problems while using a widget service, please contact to service provider. In the widget, press the green button and get contact information or refer to help website for service provider information. N English may be only supported in widget service depending on region. Getting Started with Internet@TV Internet@TV provides SAMSUNG’s widget services through a network connection. Internet@TV contents can be changed depending on contents provider. You can access various information such as YouTube, through the Internet@TV service. N If a certain content's font provided by contents provider is not supported on TV, It may not be viewed normally. N The configuration of Widgets and their provided services may differ according to the selected country. After changing country, turn off and on the TV. Then you can use widget service supported changed country. If Country is set to Others, TV can’t recognize your country. In this case, please select directly from the service country list. N For more information on how how to configure your country, refer to the ‘Plug & Play Feature’ instructions. N You may experience slow operation or hesitation when using this function due to network conditions. N Before using Internet@TV, set up the network first. For more information on how to configure your network, refer to ‘Network Setup’. When running Internet@TV for the first time, the basic settings proceed automatically. It may take few minutes to update. 1. Press the MENU button. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Application, then press the ENTERE button. 2. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Internet@TV, then press the ENTERE button. O Press the INTERNET@ button on the remote control to display the Internet@ TV menu. 3. The User Agreement is displayed. Select Agree to accept the agreement. 4. The Statistics & Analysis is displayed. Select Agree to accept the agreement. Setting up Internet@TV You can check and use the menus regarding Single Sign On (SSO), system management and properties. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Setup, then press the ENTERE button. ❑ Single Sign On You can use this menu when creating, deleting the account. Using the Single Sign On, you can control your account including contents site’s account information. You don’t need additional log in. N Account is only for internet@TV. „ Create Account You can create account and be linked with desired service site. N Account will be made less than 10. N Character of Account should be limited to 10. N If there is no service that needs log in, you can not create account. „ Account Management • Service Site: You can register log in information of service site (such as YouTube). • Change Password: Change the password of your account. • Delete: Delete the account. N If you forget the password of account, press the remote control buttons in the following sequence, which resets the Internet@TV: POWER (off) → MMUTE → 9 → 4 → 8 → POWER (On). If you use this function, all accounts will be deleted. Internet@TV BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 58 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:34English - 59 ❑ System Setup N Ticker Autorun, Ticker Duration may not be supported depending on country. „ Change the Service Lock password N The default password number of a new TV set is ‘0-0-0-0’. N If you forget the password, press the remote control buttons in the following sequence, which resets the password to ‘0-0-0-0’: POWER (Off) → MMUTE → 9 → 4 → 8 → POWER (On). „ Service Duration Select to set the service duration time before the screen saver appears. „ Ticker Autorun → Off / On Select to set ticker to run automatically or not when turning on the TV. „ Ticker Duration Select to set the service duration time before the screen saver appears. ❑ Properties Display information of Internet@TV. You can measure the speed of your Internet TV service using Measuring the speed of the Internet TV service. Using the Internet@TV service In a widget that provides multiple category menus, you can view the contents of the category menus using the ◄ and ► buttons. „ Account Login 1. Press the Red button. 2. Select desired User account, then press the ENTERE button. 3. Input the password. N When login succeeds, User account will be displayed on the screen. N Before login, at least one and more account should be registered. If you want to create account, refer to ‘Setting up Internet@ TV’. „ Using the Widget Gallery You can use Run Service, Lock, Install Service at the existing widget and you can see description of the widget service that isn’t installed. On the Internet@TV, you can add and use various widgets provided by service provider. It may vary according to contents provider. • Run Service: Runs the widget service. • Lock: Set the service lock • Install Service (or Delete Service): Install or delete widget service. „ Using the YouTube Widget You can watch the movie provided by YouTube. If you have the account in YouTube, Register account information using Account management. Then, you can use My Favourites category. N The menu can be changed by web service. N There may be inappropriate contents for child. In this case, use Lock function in Widget Gallery. Xz~*atp‚po _z{*]lpo Xz~*[z{€wl} Xz~*Ot~n€~~po _z{*Qlz€}tp~ Xz~*Wtyvpo Xz~*]p~{zxopo Qpl€}po _zol„ <:B ^ppvtyr*U€~tnp*Opnlop~*Wlp} atp‚~*E*C; M}plvtyr*Yp‚~*Lwp}~*m„*P8Xltw atp‚~*E*C; Mzz*Szz*ty*sp*Mzl}o}zzx atp‚~*E*CE=A „ Change Mode llrrChange page U Move EOK R Return BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 59 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:35English - 60 Troubleshooting for internet@TV Problem Possible Solution Some widget services do not work. Check with that service provider. In the widget, press the green button and get contact information or refer to help website for widget service provider information. Refer to Help website page. What is the advantage of single sign on? If you create account and register your login information of desired service, you can access personalized content without additional login. When a network error occurred, I can’t use other menus except setting menu. If network connection doesn’t work, your service might be limited. Because all widgets except setting widget(Profile widget, Widget Gallery) need to connect Internet. Is there any possibility to show adult movies on YouTube? Basically, at the list on the menu it is filtered out. But by using search function, It can be shown. In this case, using the Widget Gallery lock the widget service. Help Website Country Website Austria www.samsung.com → Produkte → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Belgium www.samsung.com → Producten → televisies → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV www.samsung.com → Produits → téléviseurs → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Czech www.samsung.com → Produkty → televizory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Denmark www.samsung.com → Produkter → stue & soveværelse → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Finland www.samsung.com → Tuotteet → kodinelektroniikka → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV France www.samsung.com → Produits → télévisions → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Germany www.samsung.com → Privatkunden → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Greece www.samsung.com → Προϊόντα → τηλεοράσεις → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Hungary www.samsung.com → Termékek → televíziók → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Ireland www.samsung.com → Products → Television → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Italy www.samsung.com → Prodotti → TV → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Netherlands www.samsung.com → Producten → televisies → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Norway www.samsung.com → Produkter → hverdagsrom & soverom → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Poland www.samsung.com → Produkty → telewizory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Portugal www.samsung.com → Produtos para Consumidores → televisores → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Slovakia www.samsung.com → Produkty → televízory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Spain www.samsung.com → Productos → televisores → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Sweden www.samsung.com → Produkter → vardagsrum & sovrum → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Switzerland www.samsung.com → Produits → télévisions → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV www.samsung.com → Produkte → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV United Kingdom www.samsung.com → Products → Television → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Turkey www.samsung.com → Tüketici Ürünleri → televizyon → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Estonia www.samsung.com → Klientidele → Televiisorid → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Latvia www.samsung.com → Klientiem → Televizori → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Lithuania www.samsung.com → Namams → Televizoriai → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Russia www.samsung.com → Продукты → Телевизоры → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Ukraine www.samsung.com → Потребительские продукты → телевизоры → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV N Approaching step may be changed later on. N It can be different links for special countries. BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 60 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:35English - 61 Home Network Centre About the Home Network Centre The Home Network Centre connects the TV and mobile phones through a network. You can view call arrivals, text message contents, and schedules set on the mobile phone on the TV using the Home Network Centre. In addition, you can play the media contents saved on the mobile phones such as videos, photos and music by controlling them onto the TV via the network. N If the device supports DLNA DMC (Digital Media Controller) function, Home Network Centre function is available. N This function is for compatibility with Samsung mobile phone which will be released later on. For more information, visit www. samsung.com or contact Samsung call center. Other models will be added in the future. The mobile device may need additional software installation. For details, refer to each user’s guide. ❑ Connecting to the Home Network Centre For more information about the network settings, refer to ‘Network Setup’. „ Connecting to a Wi-Fi Ad-hoc network 1. Connect the ‘Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter’ to the USB1(HDD) or USB2 port of the TV. 2. For more information on how to configure Ad-hoc network, refer to ‘Setting the Network’. N For information on configuring the mobile phone’s network settings, refer to the mobile phone manual. 3. Set up the IP address, SSID and password for the mobile phone in the Ad-hoc Settings of the mobile phone using the Network Name (SSID) and Security Key (password) displayed on the TV. „ Connecting through a wire / wireless IP sharer 1. Connect the LAN port of the TV and the Wire/Wireless IP sharer using the LAN cable or connect the USB1(HDD) or USB2 port of the TV and the ‘Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter’. N For the procedures to set up the wire/wireless sharer and the mobile phone, refer to the manual of the corresponding device. Home Network Centre TV Side Panel Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter Mobile phone Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter Wire/Wireless IP sharer TV Side Panel Mobile phone or or LAN Cable Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter Mobile phone TV Side Panel or LAN Cable Wire/Wireless IP sharer BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 61 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:38English - 62 Setting Up the Home Network Centre ❑ Message / Media Shows a list of mobile phones which have been set up with this TV to use the Message or Media function. N Media function is available in other mobile devices which support DLNA DMC. „ Allowed Allows the mobile phone. „ Denied Blocks the mobile phone. „ Delete Deletes the mobile phone from the list. N This function just deletes the name from the list. If the deleted mobile device turns on or tries to connect to the TV, it may be shown on the list. ❑ Setup „ Message → On / Off You can determine whether to use the message function (the call arrivals, text message contents, and schedules set on the mobile phone). „ Media → On / Off You can select whether to use the Media function that plays the contents (videos, photos, music) from the mobile phone. „ TV name You can set the TV name so as to find it easily on the mobile device. N If you selects User Input, you can type the TV name by OSK(On Screen Keyboard). Return Exit Home Network Centre 111-1234-5671 : Allowed 111-1234-5672 : Allowed 111-1234-5673 : Denied 111-1234-5674 : Denied Message Media Setup Return Exit Home Network Centre Message : On Media : On TV name : TV Message Media Setup Using the Message Function Using this function, you can view the call arrivals, text message contents and schedules set on the mobile phone through the alarm window while watching TV. N To disable this Message alarm window, set Message to Off in Setup of the Home Network Centre. N The alarm window appears for 20 seconds. If no key is pressed or if Cancel is selected, it appears up to three times at 5 minute intervals. N If OK is selected, or if OK is not selected while the message is displayed three times, the message will be deleted. The message is not deleted from the mobile phone. N The simple alarm window can be displayed, while using some applications such as Media Play, Contents Library, etc. In this case, to view the contents of the message, switch to TV viewing mode. N When the message of an unknown mobile phone is displayed, select the mobile phone in the Message item of the Home Network Centre and select Denied to block the phone. ❑ Message View If a new text message (SMS) arrives while you are watching TV, the alarm window appears. If you click the OK button, the contents of the message are displayed. N You can configure the viewing settings for the text message (SMS) contents on the mobile phone. For the procedures, refer to the mobile phone manual. N Some special characters may be displayed as blank or broken characters. ❑ Call Arrival Alarm If a call arrives while you are watching TV, the alarm window appears. ❑ Schedule Alarm While you are watching TV, the alarm window appears to display the registered schedule. N You can configure the viewing settings for the schedule contents on the mobile phone. For the procedures, refer to the mobile phone manual. N Some special characters may be displayed as blank or broken characters. husband SMS New message received Doyou want to view the details? OK Cancel BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 62 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:41English - 63 Using the Media Function An alarm window appears informing the user that the media contents (videos, photos, music) sent from the mobile phone will be displayed on the TV. The contents are played automatically 3 seconds after the alarm window appears. If you press the RETURN or EXIT button when the alarm window appears, the Media Contents are not played. N To turn off the media contents transmission from the mobile phone, set Media to Off in Setup of the Home Network Centre. N The contents may not be played on the TV depending on their resolution and format. ❑ Media play control buttons Button Operations ◄/► • Move the cursor and select an item. • While playing a movie file: Skip forwards or backwards through the movie file. ENTER • Pressing the ENTERE button during play pauses the play. • Pressing the ENTERE button during pause resumes the play. RETURN Return to the previous menu. TOOLS Run various functions from the Photo, Music and Movie menus. INFO Show file information. EXIT Stop Media Play mode and Returns to TV mode. N The ENTERE and ◄/► buttons may not work depending on the type of media content. N Using the mobile device, you can control playing media. For details, refer to each user’s guide. Media will be played from “Unknown Device 13” BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 63 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:42English - 64 Continued... Teletext Feature Most television stations provide written information services via Teletext. The index page of the teletext service gives you information on how to use the service. In addition, you can select various options to suit your requirements by using the remote control buttons. N For teletext information to be displayed correctly, channel reception must be stable. Otherwise, information may be missing or some pages may not be displayed. 1 : (exit) Exit from the teletext display. 2 6 (index) Used to display the index (contents) page at any time while you are viewing teletext. 3 5 (reveal) Used to display the hidden text (answers to quiz games, for example). To display normal screen, press it again. 4 4 (size) Press to display the double-size letters in the upper half of the screen. For lower half of the screen, press it again. To display normal screen, press it once again. 5 / (teletext on/mix) Press to activate teletext mode after selecting the channel providing the teletext service. Press it twice to overlap the teletext with the current broadcasting screen. 6 8 (store) Used to store the teletext pages. 7 1 (sub-page) Used to display the available sub-page. 8 2 (page up) Used to display the next teletext page. 9 3 (page down) Used to display the previous teletext page. 0 0 (mode) Press to select the teletext mode (LIST/FLOF). If you press it in the LIST mode, it switches into the List save mode. In the List save mode, you can save teletext page into list using the 8(store) button. ! 9 (hold) Used to hold the display on a given page if the selected page is linked with several secondary pages which follow on automatically. To resume, press it again. @ 7 (cancel) Used to display the broadcast when searching for a page. # Colour buttons (red/green/yellow/blue) If the FASTEXT system is used by a broadcasting company, the different topics covered on a teletext page are colour-coded and can be selected by pressing the colour buttons. Press one of them corresponding to the required. The page is displayed with other coloured information that can be selected in the same way. To display the previous or next page, press the corresponding coloured button. N You can change teletext pages by pressing the numeric buttons on the remote control. Recommendations for Use 1 3 4 5 6 2 7 8 9 0 ! @ # BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 64 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:42English - 65 The teletext pages are organized according to six categories: Part Contents A Selected page number. B Broadcasting channel identity. C Current page number or search indications. D Date and time. E Text. F Status information. FASTEXT information. N Teletext information is often divided between several pages displayed in sequence, which can be accessed by: - Entering the page number - Selecting a title in a list - Selecting a coloured heading (FASTEXT system) O Press the TV button to exit from the teletext display. Wall Mount Kit Specifications (VESA) Install your wall mount on a solid wall perpendicular to the floor. When attaching to other building materials, please contact your nearest dealer. If installed on a ceiling or slanted wall, it may fall and result in severe personal injury. Product Family inch VESA Spec. (A * B) Standard Screw Quantity LCD-TV 19" ~22" 100 * 100 M4 4 23"~29" 200 * 100 30"~40" 200 * 200 M6 46"~55" 400 * 400 57"~70" 800 * 400 M8 80" ~ 1400 * 800 PDP-TV 42"~ 50" 400 * 400 M8 4 58"~ 63" 600 * 400 70" ~ 800 * 400 80" ~ 1400 * 800 N We provided the standard dimensions for wall mount kits as shown in the table above. N When purchasing our wall mount kit, a detailed installation manual and all parts necessary for assembly are provided. N Do not use screws longer than the standard dimension, as they may cause damage to the inside of the TV set. N For wall mounts that do not comply with the VESA standard screw specifications, the length of the screws may differ depending on their specifications. N Do not use screws that do not comply with the VESA standard screw specifications. Do not use fasten the screws too strongly, this may damage the product or cause the product to fall, leading to personal injury. Samsung is not liable for these kinds of accidents. N Samsung is not liable for product damage or personal injury when a non-VESA or non-specified wall mount is used or the consumer fails to follow the product installation instructions. N Our 57” and 63” models do not comply with VESA Specifications. Therefore, you should use our dedicated wall mount kit for this model. N Do not exceed 15 degrees tilt when mounting this TV. Do not install your Wall Mount Kit while your TV is turned on. It may result in personal injury due to electric shock. BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 65 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:42English - 66 Preparing before installing Wall- Mount 1. Install Wall Mount with the torque range of 15kgf·cm or less. Make sure that parts can be damaged if the torque is out of the specified range. 2. Accessory Kit contains Holder–Ring [②] for installing other company’s Wall-Mount on Samsung TV. (Case B) N Screw down the hole [①] when installing wall-mount on the wall. How to attach the Stand-Base Warning Firmly secure the stand to the TV before moving it, as the stand may fall and could cause serious injury. N Two or more people should carry the TV. Never lay the TV on the floor because of possible damage to the screen. Always store the TV upright. Using the screws for securing the stand base and the TV, firmly attach the TV to the stand base. (The exterior of the set may be different from the picture.) When mounting your TV on a wall, install the cover (➊) on the stand-base using two screws. (PS50B650) (PS58B680/PS63B680) Case A. Installing SAMSUNG Wall-Mount Case B. Installing other company’s Wall-Mount BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 66 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:45English - 67 Pulling, pushing, or climbing on the TV may cause the TV to fall. In particular, ensure your children do not hang over or destabilize the TV; doing so may cause the TV to tip over, causing serious injuries or death. Follow all safety precautions provided on the included Safety Flyer. For added stability, install the anti-fall device for safety purposes, as follows. ❑ To avoid the TV from falling 1. Put the screws into the clamps and firmly fasten them onto the wall. Confirm that the screws have been firmly installed onto the wall. N You may need additional material such as an anchor depending on the type of wall. N Since the necessary clamps, screws, and string are not supplied, please purchase these additionally. 2. Remove the screws from the center back of the TV, put the screws into the clamps, and then fasten the screws onto the TV again. N Screws may not be supplied with the product. 3. Connect the clamps fixed onto the TV and the clamps fixed onto the wall with a strong string and then tie the string tightly. N Install the TV near to the wall so that it does not fall backwards. N It is safe to connect the string so that the clamps fixed on the wall are equal to or lower than the clamps fixed on the TV. N Untie the string before moving the TV. 4. Verify all connections are properly secured. Periodically check connections for any sign of fatigue for failure. If you have any doubt about the security of your connections,contact a professional installer. Securing the TV to the Wall Securing the Installation Space Keep the required distances between the product and other objects (e.g. walls) to ensure proper ventilation. Failing to do so may result in fire or a problem with the product due to an increase in the internal temperature of the product. Install the product so the required distances shown in the figure are kept. N When using a stand or wall-mount, use parts provided by Samsung Electronics only. - If you use parts provided by another manufacturer, it may result in a problem with the product or an injury due to the product falling. - If you use parts provided by another manufacturer, it may result in a problem with the product or fire due to an increase in the internal temperature of the product due to poor ventilation. N The appearance may differ depending on the product. „ When installing the product with a stand „ When installing the product with a wall-mount 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 경고 주의 경고 주의 Wall Wall BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 67 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:46English - 68 Troubleshooting If you have any questions of TV, first refer to this list. If none of these troubleshooting tips apply, please visit ‘www.samsung.com’ site, then click on Support or contact Call Center on list of last page. N Firmware Upgrade can be as first possible solution. Problem Possible Solution Picture Quality First of all, please perform the Picture Test to confirm that your TV is properly displaying test image. * Go to MENU → Support → Self Diagnosis → Picture Test If the test image is properly displayed, the poor picture may caused by the source or signal. TV image does not look as good as it did in the store. • If you have an analog Cable/Set top box, upgrade to an Box. Use HDMI or Component cables to deliver HD picture quality. • Cable/Satellite subscriber : Try HD (High Definition) stations from channel line up. • Antenna connection: Try HD stations after performing Auto program N Many HD channels are upscaled from SD (Standard Definition) contents. • Adjust Cable/Set top video output resolution to 1080i or 720p. Picture is distorted: macroblock,small block, dots,pixelization. • Compression of video contents may cause picture distortion especially on fast moving pictures such as sports and action movies. • Low signal level or bad quality can cause picture distortion. This is not a TV issue. Wrong or missing Colour with Component connection. • Make sure the Component cables are connected to the correct jacks. Incorrect or loose connections may cause Colour problems or the screen will be blank. Poor Colour or brightness. • Adjust Picture options in the TV menu (Picture Mode, Colour, Brightness, Sharpness). • Adjust Energy Saving option in Setup menu. • Try picture reset to view the default picture setting. (Go to MENU → Picture → Picture Reset) Dotted line on the edge of screen. • If picture size is set to Just scan, change to 16:9. • Change cable/Set top box resolution. Picture is black and white with AV (Composite) input only. • Connect video cable (Yellow) to Green jack of component input 1 of the TV. Picture freezes or is distorted when changing channels or picture is delayed. • If connected with cable box, please try to reset cable box. (reconnect AC cord and wait until cable box reboots. It may take up to 20 minutes) • Set output resolution of cable box to 1080i or 720p Sound Quality First of all, please perform the Sound Test to confirm that your TV audio is properly operating. * Go to MENU → Support → Self Diagnosis → Sound Test If the audio is OK, the sound problem may caused by the source or signal. No sound or sound is too low at maximum volume. • Please check the volume of device (Cable/Sat Box, DVD, Blu-ray etc) connected to your TV. Then, adjust the TV volume accordingly. Picture is good but no sound. • Set the Speaker Select option to TV speaker in the sound menu. • Make sure audio cables from an external device are connected to correct audio input jacks on the TV. • Check connected device's audio output option. Ex) You may need to change your cable box' audio option to HDMI when you have HDMI connected to your TV. • If you are using a DVI to HDMI cable, a separate audio cable is required. • Deactivate SRS function if you are setting the volume over 30 value. • Remove plug from headphone jack (if available on your TV). Noise from speaker. • Check cable connections. Make sure a video cable is not connected to an audio input. • For Antenna/Cable connection, check signal strength. Low signal level may cause sound distortion. BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 68 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:46English - 69 Problem Possible Solution No Picture, No Video TV won't turn on. • Make sure the AC power cord is plugged in securely to the wall outlet and the TV. • Make sure the wall outlet is working. • Try pressing the Power button on the TV to make sure the remote is working properly. If the TV turns on, it may be caused by Remote Control. To fix the Remote problem, refer to "Remote control does not work" below. TV turns off automatically. • Check if the Sleep Timer is set to On in the Setup menu. • If connected the TV to your PC, check your PC power settings. • Make sure the AC power cord is plugged in securely to the wall outlet and the TV. • If there is no signal for about 10 ~ 15 minutes with Antenna/Cable connection, the TV will turn off. No picture/Video. • Check cable connections. (remove and reconnect all cables of TV and external devices) • Set your external device's (Cable/Set top Box, DVD, Blu-ray etc) video output to match the connections to the TV input. For example, external device's output : HDMI , TV's input : HDMI. • Make sure your connected device is powered on. • Make sure to select the TV's correct source by pressing the SOURCE button on the remote control. • Reboot the connected device by reconnecting the device’s power cable. RF (Cable/Antenna) Connection Cannot receive all channels. • Make sure Antenna cable is connected securely. • Please try Plug & Play to add available channels to the channel list. Go to MENU → Setup → Plug & Play and wait for all avaiable channels are stored. • Verify Antenna is positioned correctly. Picture is distorted : macroblock,small block,dots,pixelization. • Compression of video contents may cause picture distortion especially on fast moving pictures such as sports and action movies. • Low signal level can cause picture distortion. This is not a TV issue. PC Connection “Not Supported Mode” message. • Set your PC's output resolution and frequency so it matches the resolutions supported by the TV. PC is always shown on source list even if not connected. • This is normal; PC is always shown on the source list even though a PC is not connected. Video is OK but there is no audio with HDMI connection. • Check the audio output setting on your PC. Network Connection Wireless network connection failure. • Samsung Wireless USB dongle is required to use wireless network. • Make sure Network Type is set to Wireless. • TV must be connected to a wireless IP sharer (Router). Others Picture is not shown in full screen. • Black bars on each side will be shown on HD channels when displaying upscaled SD (4:3) contents. • Black bars on Top & Bottom will be shown on movies that have aspect ratios different from your TV. • Adjust picture size option on your external device or TV to full screen. Remote control does not work. • Replace the remote control batteries with correct polarity (+ -). • Clean the transmission window located on the top of the remote. • Try pointing the remote directly at the TV from 5~6 feet away. BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 69 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:47English - 70 Problem Possible Solution Plasma TV is making humming noise. • Plasma TVs typically make a soft humming sound. This is normal. It’s caused by the electrical charges that are used to create the images on the screen. • If the humming sound is loud, you may have set the brightness on the TV too high. Try setting the brightness lower. • You can also have loud humming if the back of your Plasma TV is too close to a wall or other hard surface. Also try rerouting your connection cables. • Improper installation of wall mount can create excessive noise. Image Retention (Burn In) Issue. • To minimize the possibility of screen burn, this unit is equipped with screen burn reduction technology. Pixel Shift technology enables you to set picture movement up/ down (Vertical Line) and side to side (Horizontal Dot). Can not control TV power or volume with Cable/Set top box remote control. • Program the Cable/Set top remote control to operate the TV. Refer to Cable/Sat user manual for SAMSUNG TV code. “Not Supported Mode” message. • Check the supported resolution of the TV and adjust the external device's output resolution accordingly. Refer to resolution settings in this manual. Can not turn off the Light Effect on the front bezel (Below SAMSUNG Logo) • Adjust the light effect option in the setup menu. Options are : Off, In Standby, In Watching and Always • Light Effect is not available on all models Plastic smell from TV. • This smell is normal and will dissipate over time. TV Signal Strength is unavailable in the Self Diagnostic Test menu. • This function is only available with digital channels with an Antenna (RF/Coax) connection. TV is tilted to right or left side. • Remove the stand base from TV and reassemble. Can not assemble stand base. • Make sure TV is placed on flat surface. If can not remove screws from TV, please use magnetized screw driver. Channel menu is grey out (unavailable). • Channel menu is only available when TV source is selected. Your settings are lost after 30 minutes or every time TV is turned off. • If TV is in the Store Demo mode, it will reset audio and picture settings every 30 minutes. Please change from Store Demo mode to Home Use mode in the Plug & Play procedure. Press the SOURCE button to select TV mode, go to MENU → Setup → Plug & Play → ENTER Intermittent loss of audio or video. • Check cable connections and reconnect. • Can be caused by using overly rigid or thick cables. Make sure the cables are flexible enough for long term use. If wall mounting, we recommend using cables with 90 degree connectors. You may see small particles if you look closely at the edge of the bezel surrounding the TV screen. • This is part of the product’s design and is not a defect. PIP menu is not available. • PIP functionality is only available when you are watching an HDMI, PC or components source. ‘Scramble signal’ or ‘No signal/Weak signal’ with CAM CARD(CI/CI+) • Check that CAM has CI(CI+) Card installed into the common interface slot. • It is normal, the TV operate OTA(Over The Air) function itself to upgrade firmware downloaded during watching. Recurrent picture/sound issue • Check and change signal/source. N Some of above pictures and functions are available at specific models only. BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 70 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:47English - 71 Specifications The descriptions and characteristics in this booklet are given for information purposes only and are subject to modification without notice. Model Name PS50B650 PS58B680 PS63B680 Screen Size (Diagonal) 50 inch 58 inch 63 inch PC Resolution (Optimum) 1920 x 1080 @ 60 Hz 1920 x 1080 @ 60 Hz 1920 x 1080 @ 60 Hz Sound (Output) 10 W x 2 15 W x 2 15 W x 2 Dimension (W x H x D) Body With stand 1240 x 756 x 74 mm 1240 x 817 x 290 mm 1401 x 848 x 74 mm 1401 x 917 x 335 mm 1531 x 932 x 74 mm 1531 x 957 x 390 mm Weight Body With stand 33 kg 38 kg 39 kg 46 kg 53 kg 61 kg Environmental Considerations Operating Temperature Operating Humidity Storage Temperature Storage Humidity 50 °F to 104 °F (10 °C to 40 °C) 10% to 80%, non-condensing -4 °F to 113 °F (-20 °C to 45 °C) 5% to 95%, non-condensing N This device is a Class B digital apparatus. N Design and specifications are subject to change without prior notice. N For the power supply and Power Consumption, refer to the label attached to the product. BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 71 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:47English - 72 Software License This product uses parts of the software from the Independent JPEG Group. This product uses parts of the software owned by the Freetype Project (www.freetype.org). This product uses some software programs which are distributed under the GPL/LGPL license. Accordingly, the following GPL and LGPL software source codes that have been used in this product can be provided after asking to vdswmanager@samsung.com. GPL software: Linux Kernel, Busybox, Binutils LGPL software: Glibc, ffmpeg, smpeg, libgphoto, libusb, SDL ❑ GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 3, 29 June 2007 Copyright (C) 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. Preamble The GNU General Public License is a free, copyleft license for software and other kinds of works. The licenses for most software and other practical works are designed to take away your freedom to share and change the works. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change all versions of a program--to make sure it remains free software for all its users. We, the Free Software Foundation, use the GNU General Public License for most of our software; it applies also to any other work released this way by its authors. You can apply it to your programs, too. When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for them if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs, and that you know you can do these things. To protect your rights, we need to prevent others from denying you these rights or asking you to surrender the rights. Therefore, you have certain responsibilities if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it: responsibilities to respect the freedom of others. For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must pass on to the recipients the same freedoms that you received. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. Developers that use the GNU GPL protect your rights with two steps: (1) assert copyright on the software, and (2) offer you this License giving you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify it. For the developers’ and authors’ protection, the GPL clearly explains that there is no warranty for this free software. For both users’ and authors’ sake, the GPL requires that modified versions be marked as changed, so that their problems will not be attributed erroneously to authors of previous versions. Some devices are designed to deny users access to install or run modified versions of the software inside them, although the manufacturer can do so. This is fundamentally incompatible with the aim of protecting users’ freedom to change the software. The systematic pattern of such abuse occurs in the area of products for individuals to use, which is precisely where it is most unacceptable. Therefore, we have designed this version of the GPL to prohibit the practice for those products. If such problems arise substantially in other domains, we stand ready to extend this provision to those domains in future versions of the GPL, as needed to protect the freedom of users. Finally, every program is threatened constantly by software patents. States should not allow patents to restrict development and use of software on generalpurpose computers, but in those that do, we wish to avoid the special danger that patents applied to a free program could make it effectively proprietary. To prevent this, the GPL assures that patents cannot be used to render the program non-free. The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. TERMS AND CONDITIONS 0. Definitions. “This License” refers to version 3 of the GNU General Public License. “Copyright” also means copyright-like laws that apply to other kinds of works, such as semiconductor masks. “The Program” refers to any copyrightable work licensed under this License. Each licensee is addressed as “you”. “Licensees” and “ recipients” may be individuals or organizations. To “modify” a work means to copy from or adapt all or part of the work in a fashion requiring copyright permission, other than the making of an exact copy. The resulting work is called a “modified version” of the earlier work or a work “based on” the earlier work. A “covered work” means either the unmodified Program or a work based on the Program. To “propagate” a work means to do anything with it that, without permission, would make you directly or secondarily liable for infringement under applicable copyright law, except executing it on a computer or modifying a private copy. Propagation includes copying, distribution (with or without modification), making available to the public, and in some countries other activities as well. To “convey” a work means any kind of propagation that enables other parties to make or receive copies. Mere interaction with a user through a computer network, with no transfer of a copy, is not conveying. An interactive user interface displays “Appropriate Legal Notices” to the extent that it includes a convenient and prominently visible feature that (1) displays an appropriate copyright notice, and (2) tells the user that there is no warranty for the work (except to the extent that warranties are provided), that licensees may convey the work under this License, and how to view a copy of this License. If the interface presents a list of user commands or options, such as a menu, a prominent item in the list meets this criterion. 1. Source Code. The “source code” for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. “Object code” means any nonsource form of a work. A “Standard Interface” means an interface that either is an official standard defined by a recognized standards body, or, in the case of interfaces specified for a particular programming language, one that is widely used among developers working in that language. The “System Libraries” of an executable work include anything, other than the work as a whole, that (a) is included in the normal form of packaging a Major Component, but which is not part of that Major Component, and (b) serves only to enable use of the work with that Major Component, or to implement a Standard Interface for which an implementation is available to the public in source code form. A “Major Component”, in this context, means a major essential component (kernel, window system, and so on) of the BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 72 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:47English - 73 specific operating system (if any) on which the executable work runs, or a compiler used to produce the work, or an object code interpreter used to run it. The “Corresponding Source” for a work in object code form means all the source code needed to generate, install, and (for an executable work) run the object code and to modify the work, including scripts to control those activities. However, it does not include the work’s System Libraries, or general-purpose tools or generally available free programs which are used unmodified in performing those activities but which are not part of the work. For example, Corresponding Source includes interface definition files associated with source files for the work, and the source code for shared libraries and dynamically linked subprograms that the work is specifically designed to require, such as by intimate data communication or control flow between those subprograms and other parts of the work. The Corresponding Source need not include anything that users can regenerate automatically from other parts of the Corresponding Source. The Corresponding Source for a work in source code form is that same work. 2. Basic Permissions. All rights granted under this License are granted for the term of copyright on the Program, and are irrevocable provided the stated conditions are met. This License explicitly affirms your unlimited permission to run the unmodified Program. The output from running a covered work is covered by this License only if the output, given its content, constitutes a covered work. This License acknowledges your rights of fair use or other equivalent, as provided by copyright law. You may make, run and propagate covered works that you do not convey, without conditions so long as your license otherwise remains in force. You may convey covered works to others for the sole purpose of having them make modifications exclusively for you, or provide you with facilities for running those works, provided that you comply with the terms of this License in conveying all material for which you do not control copyright. Those thus making or running the covered works for you must do so exclusively on your behalf, under your direction and control, on terms that prohibit them from making any copies of your copyrighted material outside their relationship with you. Conveying under any other circumstances is permitted solely under the conditions stated below. Sublicensing is not allowed; section 10 makes it unnecessary. 3. Protecting Users’ Legal Rights From Anti-Circumvention Law. No covered work shall be deemed part of an effective technological measure under any applicable law fulfilling obligations under article 11 of the WIPO copyright treaty adopted on 20 December 1996, or similar laws prohibiting or restricting circumvention of such measures. When you convey a covered work, you waive any legal power to forbid circumvention of technological measures to the extent such circumvention is effected by exercising rights under this License with respect to the covered work, and you disclaim any intention to limit operation or modification of the work as a means of enforcing, against the work’s users, your or third parties’ legal rights to forbid circumvention of technological measures. 4. Conveying Verbatim Copies. You may convey verbatim copies of the Program’s source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice; keep intact all notices stating that this License and any nonpermissive terms added in accord with section 7 apply to the code; keep intact all notices of the absence of any warranty; and give all recipients a copy of this License along with the Program. You may charge any price or no price for each copy that you convey, and you may offer support or warranty protection for a fee. 5. Conveying Modified Source Versions. You may convey a work based on the Program, or the modifications to produce it from the Program, in the form of source code under the terms of section 4, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: a) The work must carry prominent notices stating that you modified it, and giving a relevant date. b) The work must carry prominent notices stating that it is released under this License and any conditions added under section 7. This requirement modifies the requirement in section 4 to “keep intact all notices”. c) You must license the entire work, as a whole, under this License to anyone who comes into possession of a copy. This License will therefore apply, along with any applicable section 7 additional terms, to the whole of the work, and all its parts, regardless of how they are packaged. This License gives no permission to license the work in any other way, but it does not invalidate such permission if you have separately received it. d) If the work has interactive user interfaces, each must display Appropriate Legal Notices; however, if the Program has interactive interfaces that do not display Appropriate Legal Notices, your work need not make them do so. A compilation of a covered work with other separate and independent works, which are not by their nature extensions of the covered work, and which are not combined with it such as to form a larger program, in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium, is called an “aggregate” if the compilation and its resulting copyright are not used to limit the access or legal rights of the compilation’s users beyond what the individual works permit. Inclusion of a covered work in an aggregate does not cause this License to apply to the other parts of the aggregate. 6. Conveying Non-Source Forms. You may convey a covered work in object code form under the terms of sections 4 and 5, provided that you also convey the machinereadable Corresponding Source under the terms of this License, in one of these ways: a) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by the Corresponding Source fixed on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange. b) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by a written offer, valid for at least three years and valid for as long as you offer spare parts or customer support for that product model, to give anyone who possesses the object code either (1) a copy of the Corresponding Source for all the software in the product that is covered by this License, on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange, for a price no more than your reasonable cost of physically performing this conveying of source, or (2) access to copy the Corresponding Source from a network server at no charge. c) Convey individual copies of the object code with a copy of the written offer to provide the Corresponding Source. This alternative is allowed only occasionally and noncommercially, and only if you received the object code with such an offer, in accord with subsection 6b. BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 73 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:47English - 74 d) Convey the object code by offering access from a designated place (gratis or for a charge), and offer equivalent access to the Corresponding Source in the same way through the same place at no further charge. You need not require recipients to copy the Corresponding Source along with the object code. If the place to copy the object code is a network server, the Corresponding Source may be on a different server (operated by you or a third party) that supports equivalent copying facilities, provided you maintain clear directions next to the object code saying where to find the Corresponding Source. Regardless of what server hosts the Corresponding Source, you remain obligated to ensure that it is available for as long as needed to satisfy these requirements. e) Convey the object code using peer-to-peer transmission, provided you inform other peers where the object code and Corresponding Source of the work are being offered to the general public at no charge under subsection 6d. A separable portion of the object code, whose source code is excluded from the Corresponding Source as a System Library, need not be included in conveying the object code work. A “User Product” is either (1) a “consumer product”, which means any tangible personal property which is normally used for personal, family, or household purposes, or (2) anything designed or sold for incorporation into a dwelling. In determining whether a product is a consumer product, doubtful cases shall be resolved in favor of coverage. For a particular product received by a particular user, “normally used” refers to a typical or common use of that class of product, regardless of the status of the particular user or of the way in which the particular user actually uses, or expects or is expected to use, the product. A product is a consumer product regardless of whether the product has substantial commercial, industrial or non-consumer uses, unless such uses represent the only significant mode of use of the product. “Installation Information” for a User Product means any methods, procedures, authorization keys, or other information required to install and execute modified versions of a covered work in that User Product from a modified version of its Corresponding Source. The information must suffice to ensure that the continued functioning of the modified object code is in no case prevented or interfered with solely because modification has been made. If you convey an object code work under this section in, or with, or specifically for use in, a User Product, and the conveying occurs as part of a transaction in which the right of possession and use of the User Product is transferred to the recipient in perpetuity or for a fixed term (regardless of how the transaction is characterized), the Corresponding Source conveyed under this section must be accompanied by the Installation Information. But this requirement does not apply if neither you nor any third party retains the ability to install modified object code on the User Product (for example, the work has been installed in ROM). The requirement to provide Installation Information does not include a requirement to continue to provide support service, warranty, or updates for a work that has been modified or installed by the recipient, or for the User Product in which it has been modified or installed. Access to a network may be denied when the modification itself materially and adversely affects the operation of the network or violates the rules and protocols for communication across the network. Corresponding Source conveyed, and Installation Information provided, in accord with this section must be in a format that is publicly documented (and with an implementation available to the public in source code form), and must require no special password or key for unpacking, reading or copying. 7. Additional Terms. “Additional permissions” are terms that supplement the terms of this License by making exceptions from one or more of its conditions. Additional permissions that are applicable to the entire Program shall be treated as though they were included in this License, to the extent that they are valid under applicable law. If additional permissions apply only to part of the Program, that part may be used separately under those permissions, but the entire Program remains governed by this License without regard to the additional permissions. When you convey a copy of a covered work, you may at your option remove any additional permissions from that copy, or from any part of it. (Additional permissions may be written to require their own removal in certain cases when you modify the work.) You may place additional permissions on material, added by you to a covered work, for which you have or can give appropriate copyright permission. Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, for material you add to a covered work, you may (if authorized by the copyright holders of that material) supplement the terms of this License with terms: a) Disclaiming warranty or limiting liability differently from the terms of sections 15 and 16 of this License; or b) Requiring preservation of specified reasonable legal notices or author attributions in that material or in the Appropriate Legal Notices displayed by works containing it; or c) Prohibiting misrepresentation of the origin of that material, or requiring that modified versions of such material be marked in reasonable ways as different from the original version; or d) Limiting the use for publicity purposes of names of licensors or authors of the material; or e) Declining to grant rights under trademark law for use of some trade names, trademarks, or service marks; or f) Requiring indemnification of licensors and authors of that material by anyone who conveys the material (or modified versions of it) with contractual assumptions of liability to the recipient, for any liability that these contractual assumptions directly impose on those licensors and authors. All other non-permissive additional terms are considered “further restrictions” within the meaning of section 10. If the Program as you received it, or any part of it, contains a notice stating that it is governed by this License along with a term that is a further restriction, you may remove that term. If a license document contains a further restriction but permits relicensing or conveying under this License, you may add to a covered work material governed by the terms of that license document, provided that the further restriction does not survive such relicensing or conveying. If you add terms to a covered work in accord with this section, you must place, in the relevant source files, a statement of theadditional terms that apply to those files, or a notice indicating where to find the applicable terms. Additional terms, permissive or non-permissive, may be stated in the form of a separately written license, or stated as exceptions; the above requirements apply either way. 8. Termination. You may not propagate or modify a covered work except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to propagate or modify it is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License (including any patent licenses granted under the third paragraph of section 11). However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a) provisionally, unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and finally terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the copyright holder fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation. Moreover, your license from a particular BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 74 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:47English - 75 copyright holder is reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from that copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after your receipt of the notice. Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License. If your rights have been terminated and not permanently reinstated, you do not qualify to receive new licenses for the same material under section 10. 9. Acceptance Not Required for Having Copies. You are not required to accept this License in order to receive or run a copy of the Program. Ancillary propagation of a covered work occurring solely as a consequence of using peer-to-peer transmission to receive a copy likewise does not require acceptance. However, nothing other than this License grants you permission to propagate or modify any covered work. These actions infringe copyright if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or propagating a covered work, you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so. 10. Automatic Licensing of Downstream Recipients. Each time you convey a covered work, the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensors, to run, modify and propagate that work, subject to this License. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License. An “entity transaction” is a transaction transferring control of an organization, or substantially all assets of one, or subdividing an organization, or merging organizations. If propagation of a covered work results from an entity transaction, each party to that transaction who receives a copy of the work also receives whatever licenses to the work the party’s predecessor in interest had or could give under the previous paragraph, plus a right to possession of the You may not impose any further restrictions on the exercise of the rights granted or affirmed under this License. For example, you may not impose a license fee, royalty, or other charge for exercise of rights granted under this License, and you may not initiate litigation (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that any patent claim is infringed by making, using, selling, offering for sale, or importing the Program or any portion of it. 11. Patents. A “contributor” is a copyright holder who authorizes use under this License of the Program or a work on which the Program is based. The work thus licensed is called the contributor’s “contributor version”. A contributor’s “essential patent claims” are all patent claims owned or controlled by the contributor, whether already acquired or hereafter acquired, that would be infringed by some manner, permitted by this License, of making, using, or selling its contributor version, but do not include claims that would be infringed only as a consequence of further modification of the contributor version. For purposes of this definition, “control” includes the right to grant patent sublicenses in a manner consistent with the requirements of this License. Each contributor grants you a non-exclusive, worldwide, royalty-free patent license under the contributor’s essential patent claims, to make, use, sell, offer for sale, import and otherwise run, modify and propagate the contents of its contributor version. In the following three paragraphs, a “patent license” is any express agreement or commitment, however denominated, not to enforce a patent (such as an express permission to practice a patent or covenant not to sue for patent infringement). To “grant” such a patent license to a party means to make such an agreement or commitment not to enforce a patent against the party. If you convey a covered work, knowingly relying on a patent license, and the Corresponding Source of the work is not available for anyone to copy, free of charge and under the terms of this License, through a publicly available network server or other readily accessible means, then you must either (1) cause the Corresponding Source to be so available, or (2) arrange to deprive yourself of the benefit of the patent license for this particular work, or (3) arrange, in a manner consistent with the requirements of this License, to extend the patent license to downstream recipients. “Knowingly relying” means you have actual knowledge that, but for the patent license, your conveying the covered work in a country, or your recipient’s use of the covered work in a country, would infringe one or more identifiable patents in that country that you have reason to believe are valid. If, pursuant to or in connection with a single transaction or arrangement, you convey, or propagate by procuring conveyance of, a covered work, and grant a patent license to some of the parties receiving the covered work authorizing them to use, propagate, modify or convey a specific copy of the covered work, then the patent license you grant is automatically extended to all recipients of the covered work and works based on it. A patent license is “discriminatory” if it does not include within the scope of its coverage, prohibits the exercise of, or is conditioned on the non-exercise of one or more of the rights that are specifically granted under this License. You may not convey a covered work if you are a party to an arrangement with a third party that is in the business of distributing software, under which you make payment to the third party based on the extent of your activity of conveying the work, and under which the third party grants, to any of the parties who would receive the covered work from you, a discriminatory patent license (a) in connection with copies of the covered work conveyed by you (or copies made from those copies), or (b) primarily for and in connection with specific products or compilations that contain the covered work, unless you entered into that arrangement, or that patent license was granted, prior to 28 March 2007. Nothing in this License shall be construed as excluding or limiting any implied license or other defenses to infringement that may otherwise be available to you under applicable patent law. 12. No Surrender of Others’ Freedom. If conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot convey a covered work so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not convey it at all. For example, if you agree to terms that obligate you to collect a royalty for further conveying from those to whom you convey the Program, the only way you could satisfy both those terms and this License would be to refrain entirely from conveying the Program. 13. Use with the GNU Affero General Public License. Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, you have permission to link or combine any covered work with a work licensed under version 3 of the GNU Affero General Public License into a single combined work, and to convey the resulting work. The terms of this License will continue to apply to the part which is the covered work, but the special requirements of the GNU Affero General Public License, section 13, concerning interaction through a network will apply to the combination as such. BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 75 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:47English - 76 14. Revised Versions of this License. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the GNU General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies that a certain numbered version of the GNU General Public License “or any later version” applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that numbered version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of the GNU General Public License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program specifies that a proxy can decide which future versions of the GNU General Public License can be used, that proxy’s public statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you to choose that version for the Program. Later license versions may give you additional or different permissions. However, no additional obligations are imposed on any author or copyright holder as a result of your choosing to follow a later version. 15. Disclaimer of Warranty. THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM “ AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. 16. Limitation of Liability. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MODIFIES AND/OR CONVEYS THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. 17. Interpretation of Sections 15 and 16. If the disclaimer of warranty and limitation of liability provided above cannot be given local legal effect according to their terms, reviewing courts shall apply local law that most closely approximates an absolute waiver of all civil liability in connection with the Program, unless a warranty or assumption of liability accompanies a copy of the Program in return for a fee. How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms. To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively state theexclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the “copyright” line and a pointer to where the full notice is found. Copyright (C) This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program. If not, see . Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail. If the program does terminal interaction, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode: Copyright (C) This program comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w’. This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions; type `show c’ for details. The hypothetical commands `show w’ and `show c’ should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, your program’s commands might be different; for a GUI interface, you would use an “about box”. You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or school, if any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the program, if necessary. For more information on this, and how to apply and follow the GNU GPL, see .The GNU General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License. But first, please read . BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 76 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:47English - 77 ❑ GNU Lesser General Public License (LGPL) GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 3, 29 June 2007 Copyright (C) 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. Preamble The GNU General Public License is a free, copyleft license for software and other kinds of works. The licenses for most software and other practical works are designed to take away your freedom to share and change the works. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change all versions of a program--to make sure it remains free software for all its users. We, the Free Software Foundation, use the GNU General Public License for most of our software; it applies also to any other work released this way by its authors. You can apply it to your programs, too. When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for them if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs, and that you know you can do these things. To protect your rights, we need to prevent others from denying you these rights or asking you to surrender the rights. Therefore, you have certain responsibilities if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it: responsibilities to respect the freedom of others. For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must pass on to the recipients the same freedoms that you received. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. Developers that use the GNU GPL protect your rights with two steps: (1) assert copyright on the software, and (2) offer you this License giving you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify it. For the developers’ and authors’ protection, the GPL clearly explains that there is no warranty for this free software. For both users’ and authors’ sake, the GPL requires that modified versions be marked as changed, so that their problems will not be attributed erroneously to authors of previous versions. Some devices are designed to deny users access to install or run modified versions of the software inside them, although the manufacturer can do so. This is fundamentally incompatible with the aim of protecting users’ freedom to change the software. The systematic pattern of such abuse occurs in the area of products for individuals to use, which is precisely where it is most unacceptable. Therefore, we have designed this version of the GPL to prohibit the practice for those products. If such problems arise substantially in other domains, we stand ready to extend this provision to those domains in future versions of the GPL, as needed to protect the freedom of users. Finally, every program is threatened constantly by software patents. States should not allow patents to restrict development and use of software on general-purpose computers, but in those that do, we wish to avoid the special danger that patents applied to a free program could make it effectively proprietary. To prevent this, the GPL assures that patents cannot be used to render the program non-free. The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. TERMS AND CONDITIONS 0. Definitions. “This License” refers to version 3 of the GNU General Public License. “Copyright” also means copyright-like laws that apply to other kinds of works, such as semiconductor masks. “The Program” refers to any copyrightable work licensed under this License. Each licensee is addressed as “you”. “Licensees” and “ recipients” may be individuals or organizations. To “modify” a work means to copy from or adapt all or part of the work in a fashion requiring copyright permission, other than the making of an exact copy. The resulting work is called a “modified version” of the earlier work or a work “based on” the earlier work. A “covered work” means either the unmodified Program or a work based on the Program. To “propagate” a work means to do anything with it that, without permission, would make you directly or secondarily liable for infringement under applicable copyright law, except executing it on a computer or modifying a private copy. Propagation includes copying, distribution (with or without modification), making available to the public, and in some countries other activities as well. To “convey” a work means any kind of propagation that enables other parties to make or receive copies. Mere interaction with a user through a computer network, with no transfer of a copy, is not conveying. An interactive user interface displays “Appropriate Legal Notices” to the extent that it includes a convenient and prominently visible feature that (1) displays an appropriate copyright notice, and (2) tells the user that there is no warranty for the work (except to the extent that warranties are provided), that licensees may convey the work under this License, and how to view a copy of this License. If the interface presents a list of user commands or options, such as a menu, a prominent item in the list meets this criterion. 1. Source Code. The “source code” for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. “Object code” means any nonsource form of a work. A “Standard Interface” means an interface that either is an official standard defined by a recognized standards body, or, in the case of interfaces specified for a particular programming language, one that is widely used among developers working in that language. The “System Libraries” of an executable work include anything, other than the work as a whole, that (a) is included in the normal form of packaging a Major Component, but which is not part of that Major Component, and (b) serves only to enable use of the work with that Major Component, or to implement a Standard Interface for which an implementation is available to the public in source code form. A “Major Component”, in this context, means a major essential component (kernel, window system, and so on) of the specific operating system (if any) on which the executable work runs, or a compiler used to produce the work, or an object code interpreter used to run it. The “Corresponding Source” for a work in object code form means all the source code needed to generate, install, and (for an executable work) run the object code and to modify the work, including scripts to control those activities. However, it does not include the work’s System Libraries, or general-purpose tools or generally available free programs which are used unmodified in performing those activities but which are not part of the work. For example, Corresponding Source includes interface definition files associated with source files for the work, and the source code for shared libraries and dynamically linked BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 77 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:48English - 78 subprograms that the work is specifically designed to require, such as by intimate data communication or control flow between those subprograms and other parts of the work. The Corresponding Source need not include anything that users can regenerate automatically from other parts of the Corresponding Source. The Corresponding Source for a work in source code form is that same work. 2. Basic Permissions. All rights granted under this License are granted for the term of copyright on the Program, and are irrevocable provided the stated conditions are met. This License explicitly affirms your unlimited permission to run the unmodified Program. The output from running a covered work is covered by this License only if the output, given its content, constitutes a covered work. This License acknowledges your rights of fair use or other equivalent, as provided by copyright law. You may make, run and propagate covered works that you do not convey, without conditions so long as your license otherwise remains in force. You may convey covered works to others for the sole purpose of having them make modifications exclusively for you, or provide you with facilities for running those works, provided that you comply with the terms of this License in conveying all material for which you do not control copyright. Those thus making or running the covered works for you must do so exclusively on your behalf, under your direction and control, on terms that prohibit them from making any copies of your copyrighted material outside their relationship with you. Conveying under any other circumstances is permitted solely under the conditions stated below. Sublicensing is not allowed; section 10 makes it unnecessary. 3. Protecting Users’ Legal Rights From Anti-Circumvention Law. No covered work shall be deemed part of an effective technological measure under any applicable law fulfilling obligations under article 11 of the WIPO copyright treaty adopted on 20 December 1996, or similar laws prohibiting or restricting circumvention of such measures. When you convey a covered work, you waive any legal power to forbid circumvention of technological measures to the extent such circumvention is effected by exercising rights under this License with respect to the covered work, and you disclaim any intention to limit operation or modification of the work as a means of enforcing, against the work’s users, your or third parties’ legal rights to forbid circumvention of technological measures. 4. Conveying Verbatim Copies. You may convey verbatim copies of the Program’s source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice; keep intact all notices stating that this License and any nonpermissive terms added in accord with section 7 apply to the code; keep intact all notices of the absence of any warranty; and give all recipients a copy of this License along with the Program. You may charge any price or no price for each copy that you convey, and you may offer support or warranty protection for a fee. 5. Conveying Modified Source Versions. You may convey a work based on the Program, or the modifications to produce it from the Program, in the form of source code under the terms of section 4, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: a) The work must carry prominent notices stating that you modified it, and giving a relevant date. b) The work must carry prominent notices stating that it is released under this License and any conditions added under section 7. This requirement modifies the requirement in section 4 to “keep intact all notices”. c) You must license the entire work, as a whole, under this License to anyone who comes into possession of a copy. This License will therefore apply, along with any applicable section 7 additional terms, to the whole of the work, and all its parts, regardless of how they are packaged. This License gives no permission to license the work in any other way, but it does not invalidate such permission if you have separately received it. d) If the work has interactive user interfaces, each must display Appropriate Legal Notices; however, if the Program has interactive interfaces that do not display Appropriate Legal Notices, your work need not make them do so. A compilation of a covered work with other separate and independent works, which are not by their nature extensions of the covered work, and which are not combined with it such as to form a larger program, in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium, is called an “aggregate” if the compilation and its resulting copyright are not used to limit the access or legal rights of the compilation’s users beyond what the individual works permit. Inclusion of a covered work in an aggregate does not cause this License to apply to the other parts of the aggregate. 6. Conveying Non-Source Forms. You may convey a covered work in object code form under the terms of sections 4 and 5, provided that you also convey the machinereadable Corresponding Source under the terms of this License, in one of these ways: a) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by the Corresponding Source fixed on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange. b) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by a written offer, valid for at least three years and valid for as long as you offer spare parts or customer support for that product model, to give anyone who possesses the object code either (1) a copy of the Corresponding Source for all the software in the product that is covered by this License, on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange, for a price no more than your reasonable cost of physically performing this conveying of source, or (2) access to copy the Corresponding Source from a network server at no charge. c) Convey individual copies of the object code with a copy of the written offer to provide the Corresponding Source. This alternative is allowed only occasionally and noncommercially, and only if you received the object code with such an offer, in accord with subsection 6b. d) Convey the object code by offering access from a designated place (gratis or for a charge), and offer equivalent access to the Corresponding Source in the same way through the same place at no further charge. You need not require recipients to copy the Corresponding Source along with the object code. If the place to copy the object code is a network server, the Corresponding Source may be on a different server (operated by you or a third party) that supports equivalent copying facilities, provided you maintain clear directions next to the object code saying where to find the Corresponding Source. Regardless of what server hosts the Corresponding Source, you remain obligated to ensure that it is available for as long as needed to satisfy these requirements. BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 78 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:48English - 79 e) Convey the object code using peer-to-peer transmission, provided you inform other peers where the object code and Corresponding Source of the work are being offered to the general public at no charge under subsection 6d. A separable portion of the object code, whose source code is excluded from the Corresponding Source as a System Library, need not be included in conveying the object code work. A “User Product” is either (1) a “consumer product”, which means any tangible personal property which is normally used for personal, family, or household purposes, or (2) anything designed or sold for incorporation into a dwelling. In determining whether a product is a consumer product, doubtful cases shall be resolved in favor of coverage. For a particular product received by a particular user, “normally used” refers to a typical or common use of that class of product, regardless of the status of the particular user or of the way in which the particular user actually uses, or expects or is expected to use, the product. A product is a consumer product regardless of whether the product has substantial commercial, industrial or non-consumer uses, unless such uses represent the only significant mode of use of the product. “Installation Information” for a User Product means any methods, procedures, authorization keys, or other information required to install and execute modified versions of a covered work in that User Product from a modified version of its Corresponding Source. The information must suffice to ensure that the continued functioning of the modified object code is in no case prevented or interfered with solely because modification has been made. If you convey an object code work under this section in, or with, or specifically for use in, a User Product, and the conveying occurs as part of a transaction in which the right of possession and use of the User Product is transferred to the recipient in perpetuity or for a fixed term (regardless of how the transaction is characterized), the Corresponding Source conveyed under this section must be accompanied by the Installation Information. But this requirement does not apply if neither you nor any third party retains the ability to install modified object code on the User Product (for example, the work has been installed in ROM). The requirement to provide Installation Information does not include a requirement to continue to provide support service, warranty, or updates for a work that has been modified or installed by the recipient, or for the User Product in which it has been modified or installed. Access to a network may be denied when the modification itself materially and adversely affects the operation of the network or violates the rules and protocols for communication across the network. Corresponding Source conveyed, and Installation Information provided, in accord with this section must be in a format that is publicly documented (and with an implementation available to the public in source code form), and must require no special password or key for unpacking, reading or copying. 7. Additional Terms. “Additional permissions” are terms that supplement the terms of this License by making exceptions from one or more of its conditions. Additional permissions that are applicable to the entire Program shall be treated as though they were included in this License, to the extent that they are valid under applicable law. If additional permissions apply only to part of the Program, that part may be used separately under those permissions, but the entire Program remains governed by this License without regard to the additional permissions. When you convey a copy of a covered work, you may at your option remove any additional permissions from that copy, or from any part of it. (Additional permissions may be written to require their own removal in certain cases when you modify the work.) You may place additional permissions on material, added by you to a covered work, for which you have or can give appropriate copyright permission. Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, for material you add to a covered work, you may (if authorized by the copyright holders of that material) supplement the terms of this License with terms: a) Disclaiming warranty or limiting liability differently from the terms of sections 15 and 16 of this License; or b) Requiring preservation of specified reasonable legal notices or author attributions in that material or in the Appropriate Legal Notices displayed by works containing it; or c) Prohibiting misrepresentation of the origin of that material, or requiring that modified versions of such material be marked in reasonable ways as different from the original version; or d) Limiting the use for publicity purposes of names of licensors or authors of the material; or e) Declining to grant rights under trademark law for use of some trade names, trademarks, or service marks; or f) Requiring indemnification of licensors and authors of that material by anyone who conveys the material (or modified versions of it) with contractual assumptions of liability to the recipient, for any liability that these contractual assumptions directly impose on those licensors and authors. All other non-permissive additional terms are considered “further restrictions” within the meaning of section 10. If the Program as you received it, or any part of it, contains a notice stating that it is governed by this License along with a term that is a further restriction, you may remove that term. If a license document contains a further restriction but permits relicensing or conveying under this License, you may add to a covered work material governed by the terms of that license document, provided that the further restriction does not survive such relicensing or conveying. If you add terms to a covered work in accord with this section, you must place, in the relevant source files, a statement of the additional terms that apply to those files, or a notice indicating where to find the applicable terms. Additional terms, permissive or non-permissive, may be stated in the form of a separately written license, or stated as exceptions; the above requirements apply either way. 8. Termination. You may not propagate or modify a covered work except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to propagate or modify it is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License (including any patent licenses granted under the third paragraph of section 11). However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a) provisionally, unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and finally terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the copyright holder fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation. Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from that copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after your receipt of the notice. Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License. If your rights have been terminated and not permanently reinstated, you do not qualify to receive new licenses for the same material under section 10. BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 79 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:48English - 80 9. Acceptance Not Required for Having Copies. You are not required to accept this License in order to receive or run a copy of the Program. Ancillary propagation of a covered work occurring solely as a consequence of using peer-to-peer transmission to receive a copy likewise does not require acceptance. However, nothing other than this License grants you permission to propagate or modify any covered work. These actions infringe copyright if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or propagating a covered work, you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so. 10. Automatic Licensing of Downstream Recipients. Each time you convey a covered work, the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensors, to run, modify and propagate that work, subject to this License. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License. An “entity transaction” is a transaction transferring control of an organization, or substantially all assets of one, or subdividing an organization, or merging organizations. If propagation of a covered work results from an entity transaction, each party to that transaction who receives a copy of the work also receives whatever licenses to the work the party’s predecessor in interest had or could give under the previous paragraph, plus a right to possession of the Corresponding Source of the work from the predecessor in interest, if the predecessor has it or can get it with reasonable efforts. You may not impose any further restrictions on the exercise of the rights granted or affirmed under this License. For example, you may not impose a license fee, royalty, or other charge for exercise of rights granted under this License, and you may not initiate litigation (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that any patent claim is infringed by making, using, selling, offering for sale, or importing the Program or any portion of it. 11. Patents. A “contributor” is a copyright holder who authorizes use under this License of the Program or a work on which the Program is based. The work thus licensed is called the contributor’s “contributor version”. A contributor’s “essential patent claims” are all patent claims owned or controlled by the contributor, whether already acquired or hereafter acquired, that would be infringed by some manner, permitted by this License, of making, using, or selling its contributor version, but do not include claims that would be infringed only as a consequence of further modification of the contributor version. For purposes of this definition, “control” includes the right to grant patent sublicenses in a manner consistent with the requirements of this License. Each contributor grants you a non-exclusive, worldwide, royalty-free patent license under the contributor’s essential patent claims, to make, use, sell, offer for sale, import and otherwise run, modify and propagate the contents of its contributor version. In the following three paragraphs, a “patent license” is any express agreement or commitment, however denominated, not to enforce a patent (such as an express permission to practice a patent or covenant not to sue for patent infringement). To “grant” such a patent license to a party means to make such an agreement or commitment not to enforce a patent against the party. If you convey a covered work, knowingly relying on a patent license, and the Corresponding Source of the work is not available for anyone to copy, free of charge and under the terms of this License, through a publicly available network server or other readily accessible means, then you must either (1) cause the Corresponding Source to be so available, or (2) arrange to deprive yourself of the benefit of the patent license for this particular work, or (3) arrange, in a manner consistent with the requirements of this License, to extend the patent license to downstream recipients. “Knowingly relying” means you have actual knowledge that, but for the patent license, your conveying the covered work in a country, or your recipient’s use of the covered work in a country, would infringe one or more identifiable patents in that country that you have reason to believe are valid. If, pursuant to or in connection with a single transaction or arrangement, you convey, or propagate by procuring conveyance of, a covered work, and grant a patent license to some of the parties receiving the covered work authorizing them to use, propagate, modify or convey a specific copy of the covered work, then the patent license you grant is automatically extended to all recipients of the covered work and works based on it. A patent license is “discriminatory” if it does not include within the scope of its coverage, prohibits the exercise of, or is conditioned on the non-exercise of one or more of the rights that are specifically granted under this License. You may not convey a covered work if you are a party to an arrangement with a third party that is in the business of distributing software, under which you make payment to the third party based on the extent of your activity of conveying the work, and under which the third party grants, to any of the parties who would receive the covered work from you, a discriminatory patent license (a) in connection with copies of the covered work conveyed by you (or copies made from those copies), or (b) primarily for and in connection with specific products or compilations that contain the covered work, unless you entered into that arrangement, or that patent license was granted, prior to 28 March 2007. Nothing in this License shall be construed as excluding or limiting any implied license or other defenses to infringement that may otherwise be available to you under applicable patent law. 12. No Surrender of Others’ Freedom. If conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot convey a covered work so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not convey it at all. For example, if you agree to terms that obligate you to collect a royalty for further conveying from those to whom you convey the Program, the only way you could satisfy both those terms and this License would be to refrain entirely from conveying the Program. 13. Use with the GNU Affero General Public License. Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, you have permission to link or combine any covered work with a work licensed under version 3 of the GNU Affero General Public License into a single combined work, and to convey the resulting work. The terms of this License will continue to apply to the part which is the covered work, but the special requirements of the GNU Affero General Public License, section 13, concerning interaction through a network will apply to the combination as such. 14. Revised Versions of this License. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the GNU General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies that a certain numbered version of the GNU General Public License “or any later version” applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that numbered version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of the GNU General Public License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program specifies that a proxy can decide which future versions of the GNU General Public License can be used, that proxy’s public statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you to choose that version for the Program. Later license versions may give you additional or different permissions. However, no additional obligations are imposed on any author or copyright holder as a result of your choosing to follow a later version. BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 80 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:48English - 81 15. Disclaimer of Warranty. THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM “ AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. 16. Limitation of Liability. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MODIFIES AND/OR CONVEYS THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. 17. Interpretation of Sections 15 and 16. If the disclaimer of warranty and limitation of liability provided above cannot be given local legal effect according to their terms, reviewing courts shall apply local law that most closely approximates an absolute waiver of all civil liability in connection with the Program, unless a warranty or assumption of liability accompanies a copy of the Program in return for a fee. ❑ END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms. To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively state the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the “copyright” line and a pointer to where the full notice is found. Copyright (C) This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program. If not, see . Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail. If the program does terminal interaction, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode: Copyright (C) This program comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w’. This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions; type `show c’ for details. The hypothetical commands `show w’ and `show c’ should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, your program’s commands might be different; for a GUI interface, you would use an “about box”. You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or school, if any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the program, if necessary. For more information on this, and how to apply and follow the GNU GPL, see . The GNU General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License. But first, please read . The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a dual license, i.e. both the conditions of the OpenSSL License and the original SSLeay license apply to the toolkit. See below for the actual license texts. Actually both licenses are BSD-style Open Source licenses. In case of any license issues related to OpenSSL please contact openssl-core@openssl.org. OpenSSL License Copyright (c) 1998-2007 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: “This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)” 4. The names “OpenSSL Toolkit” and “OpenSSL Project” must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact openssl-core@openssl.org. 5. Products derived from this software may not be called “OpenSSL nor may “OpenSSL” appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project. 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: “This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)” BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 81 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:48English - 82 THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS’’ AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Original SSLeay License Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved. This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL. This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Copyright remains Eric Young’s, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: “This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)” The word ‘cryptographic’ can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related :-). 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement: “This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)” THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS’’ AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.] BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 82 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:48Français - 2 Instructions d’utilisation „ Rémanence de l’image à l’écran Ne figez pas d’images (telle qu’une image de jeu vidéo ou de PC branché à l’écran à plasma) sur l’écran du moniteur à plasma pendant plus de deux heures car cela peut entraîner une rémanence de l’image à l’écran, également appelée “brûlure de l’écran”. Pour éviter la rémanence, réduisez le niveau de contraste ou de luminosité de l’écran lorsque vous affichez une image fixe. „ Hauteur L’écran à plasma est normalement conçu pour être utilisé à une altitude inférieure à 2000m. Il peut fonctionner de façon anormale au-dessus de 2000m d’altitude. Ne l’installez pas et ne le faites donc pas fonctionner dans ces conditions. „ Chaleur diffusée sur la partie supérieure du téléviseur à plasma Le dessus de l’appareil peut chauffer en cas d’utilisation prolongée, car la chaleur s’échappe du panneau par le trou d’aération situé dans la partie supérieure du produit. Ce phénomène est normal et n’indique aucunement la présence d’un défaut ou d’un dysfonctionnement. Il convient cependant d’empêcher les enfants de toucher à la partie supérieure de l’écran. „ Le produit fait un bruit de “claquement”. Ce bruit de “claquement” risque d’être perceptible lorsque le produit se contracte ou s’étend suite à un changement du milieu ambiant, tel que la température ou l’humidité. Ce phénomène est normal et ne constitue pas un défaut. „ Défauts de cellule L’écran à plasma utilise un panneau constitué de 2 360 000 (niveau HD) à 6 221 000 (niveau FHD) pixels dont la fabrication fait appel à une technologie avancée. Il se peut toutefois que quelques points clairs ou sombres apparaissent à l’écran. Ils n’ont aucune incidence sur la performance du produit. „ Evitez d’utiliser le téléviseur à plasma à des températures inférieures à 5°C (41°F). „ Une image fixe affichée trop longtemps peut causer des dommages permanents à l’écran à plasma. Visionner l’écran à plasma au format 4:3 de manière prolongée risque de laisser apparaître des traces de bordures sur la gauche, sur la droite et au centre de l’écran. Ces traces sont dues à la différence de luminosité sur l’écran. Lire un DVD ou un jeu vidéo sur console risque de provoquer un effet similaire sur l’écran. Les dommages provoqués par l’effet susmentionné ne sont pas couverts par la garantie. „ Rémanence de l’image à l’écran. Une rémanence partielle de l’image peut éventuellement se produire si des images figées de jeux vidéo et d’un PC restent affichées pendant un certain temps. Pour éviter cela, réduisez la “luminosité” et le “contraste” lors de l’affichage d’images fixes. „ Garantie - La garantie ne couvre pas les dommages causés par la rémanence. - Les brûlures ne sont pas couvertes par la garantie. „ Installation Contacter un centre de service agréé si le téléviseur est destiné à une installation dans des endroits exposés à la poussière, à des températures faibles ou élevées, à une forte humidité, à des substances chimiques et s’il a été prévu pour fonctionner en permanence, comme dans des aéroports, des gares ferroviaires, etc. Le non-respect de ce qui précède peut gravement endommager le téléviseur. Notifications pour le téléviseur numérique 1. Les fonctions relatives à la télévision numérique (DVB) ne sont disponibles que dans les pays ou régions où des signaux terrestres numériques de type DVB-T (MPEG2 et MPEG4 AVC) sont diffusés ou dans lesquels vous avez accès à un service de télévision par câble compatible DVB-C (MPEG2 et MPEG4 AAC). Consultez votre distributeur local pour connaître les possibilités de réception des signaux DVB-T ou DVB-C. 2. DVB-T est la norme du consortium européen pour la diffusion de signaux terrestres de télévision numérique. La norme DVB-C est quant à elle prévue pour la diffusion des signaux de télévision numérique par câble. Certaines fonctions particulières, telles que le guide électronique des programmes (Electric Program Guide - EPG), la vidéo à la demande (Video on Demand - VOD), etc., ne sont toutefois pas incluses dans cette spécification. Elles ne sont, par conséquent, pas prises en charge pour l’instant. 3. Bien que ce téléviseur soit conforme aux dernières normes DVB-T et DVB-C (août 2008), il n’est pas garanti qu’il soit compatible avec les futures diffusions de signaux numériques terrestres DVB-T et par câble DVB-C. 4. Certains opérateurs de télévision par câble peuvent facturer des frais supplémentaires pour un tel service. Vous aurez aussi éventuellement à accepter les termes et conditions de ces sociétés. 5. Il se peut que certaines fonctions de TV numérique ne soient pas disponibles dans certains pays ou certaines régions et que la réception des signaux DVB-C ne soit pas correcte avec tous les opérateurs. 6. Pour plus d’informations, contactez votre service client Samsung. Contactez SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE Pour tout commentaire ou toute question concernant un produit Samsung, contactez le service client de SAMSUNG. (Voir la quatrième de couverture pour plus d’informations.) N Les figures et illustrations contenues dans ce mode d’emploi sont fournies pour référence uniquement. Elles peuvent différer de l’aspect réel du produit. La conception et les caractéristiques du produit peuvent être modifiées sans avertissement afin d’améliorer ses performances. © 2009 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Tous droits réservés. BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 2 10/20/2009 4:58:30 PMFrançais - 3 N O T Symboles Appuyez sur Remarque Bouton tactile TOOLS Sommaire Branchement et installation de votre téléviseur ■ Vérification des pièces ..............................................................4 ■ Utilisation de la base-support ....................................................4 ■ Assemblage des câbles ............................................................4 ■ Présentation du panneau de commande ..................................5 ■ Présentation du panneau de branchement ...............................6 ■ Télécommande..........................................................................8 ■ Insertion des piles dans la télécommande ................................8 ■ Utilisation des boutons rétroéclairés de la télécommande........9 ■ Mise en marche et arrêt ............................................................9 ■ Mise en mode veille de votre téléviseur ....................................9 ■ Visualisation de laffichage.........................................................9 ■ Affichage des menus...............................................................10 ■ Utilisation du bouton TOOLS ..................................................10 ■ Fonction Plug & Play ...............................................................10 Gestion des canaux ■ Mémorisation des chaînes .................................................... 11 ■ Gestion des chaînes................................................................13 Réglage de l’image ■ Changement des réglages de l’image.....................................15 ■ Configuration du téléviseur avec le PC ...................................18 ■ Ecran du PC............................................................................19 Réglage du son ■ Changement de la norme Son ................................................20 ■ Sélection du mode son............................................................21 Description des Fonctions ■ Réglage de l’heure ..................................................................22 ■ Réglage du menu Configuration..............................................23 ■ Visualisation d’une image dans l’image...................................25 Assistance / Entrée ■ Programme pris en charge......................................................26 ■ Liste Source / Modif. Nom.......................................................27 Réseau ■ Connexion Réseau..................................................................28 ■ Configuration du réseau ..........................................................30 Media Play ■ Connexion d’un périphérique USB..........................................33 ■ Utilisation de la fonction Media Play........................................34 ■ Tri de la liste de fichiers photo / musical / film.........................35 ■ Menu d’options de la liste des fichiers photo / musical / film...36 ■ Menu d'options Slide Show / Music Play / Movie Play ............37 ■ Visualisation d’une photo ou d’un diaporama..........................38 ■ Lecture de musique.................................................................39 ■ Lecture d’un fichier film ..........................................................40 ■ Utilisation du menu Configuration ...........................................41 Media Play-DLNA ■ Définition du réseau DLNA......................................................42 ■ Installation de l’application DLNA............................................42 ■ Utilisation de l’application DLNA..............................................43 ■ Utilisation de la fonction DLNA................................................44 Anynet + ■ Connexion de périphériques Anynet + ......................................45 ■ Configuration d’Anynet + ..........................................................46 ■ Commutation entre périphériques Anynet + ..............................46 ■ Enregistrement ........................................................................47 ■ Ecoute via un récepteur ..........................................................48 ■ Dépannage d’Anynet + .............................................................48 Bibliothèque de contenu ■ Activation de la Bibliothèque de contenu ................................49 ■ Utilisation de la Bibliothèque de contenu ................................50 Internet@TV ■ Mise en route d’Internet@TV ..................................................51 ■ Modification des snippets du dock ..........................................53 ■ Utilisation du widget Profil .......................................................53 ■ Utilisation de la galerie de widgets Yahoo!® ...........................54 ■ Utilisation du widget Météo Yahoo!®.......................................54 ■ Utilisation du widget Actualités Yahoo!® .................................55 ■ Utilisation du widget Flickr Yahoo!® ........................................55 ■ Utilisation du widget Finance Yahoo!®....................................56 ■ Dépannage d’Internet@TV .....................................................56 ■ Site Web d’assistance .............................................................57 Internet@TV ■ Mise en route d’Internet@TV ..................................................58 ■ Configuration d’Internet@TV...................................................58 ■ Utilisation du service Internet@TV..........................................59 ■ Dépannage d’Internet@TV......................................................60 ■ Site Web d’assistance .............................................................60 Centre de réseau domestique ■ Centre de réseau domestique .................................................61 ■ Configuration du Centre de réseau domestique......................62 ■ Utilisation de la fonction Message...........................................62 ■ Utilisation de la fonction Media................................................63 Conseils d'utilisation ■ Fonction Télétexte...................................................................64 ■ Caractéristiques du kit de fixation murale (VESA) ..................65 ■ Préparation avant l’installation d’un kit de fixation murale.......66 ■ Assemblage de la base-support..............................................66 ■ Fixation du téléviseur au mur ..................................................67 ■ Sécurisation de l’emplacement d’installation...........................67 ■ Résolution des problèmes.......................................................68 ■ Caractéristiques ......................................................................71 Français BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 3 10/20/2009 4:58:31 PMFrançais - 4 Assemblage des câbles Insérez les câbles dans le serre-câbles de telle manière qu’ils ne soient pas visibles à travers le pied transparent. Utilisation de la base-support N L’écran à plasma doit être soulevé par au moins deux personnes. Ne posez jamais l’écran à plasma sur le sol, car cela pourrait l’endommager. Conservez toujours l’écran en position verticale. N L’écran à plasma peut pivoter de 20 degrés vers la droite et la gauche. -20° ~ 20° Vérification des pièces Manuel d’utilisation Télécommande / Piles AAA (2ea) Cordon d’alimentation Chiffon de nettoyage Serre-câbles Anneau de support (4ea) (Reportez-vous à la page 66) CD du programme Vis (4ea) (PS50B650 uniquement) (Reportez-vous à la page 66) Capot inférieur (PS50B650 uniquement) (Reportez-vous à la page 66) Capot inférieur / Vis (2ea) (PS58B680 / PS63B680 uniquement) (Reportez-vous à la page 66) Blindage magnétique de casque Blindage magnétique pour cordon d’alimentation (PS58B680T6P / PS63B680 uniquement) Blindage magnétique pour cordon d’alimentation Carte de garantie / Manuel de sécurité (non disponible dans tous les pays) N Blindage magnétique Le blindage magnétique sert à protéger les câbles des interférences. Lors de la connexion d'un câble, ouvrez le blindage magnétique et rabattez-le autour du câble près de la prise comme illustré. Branchement et installation de votre téléviseur (PS58B680T6P / PS63B680 uniquement) BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 4 10/20/2009 4:58:33 PMFrançais - 5 Présentation du panneau de commande N La couleur et la forme du produit peuvent varier en fonction du modèle. Boutons en façade Touchez les boutons pour les actionner. (PS58B680 / PS63B680) (PS50B650) 1 SOURCE Affiche un menu de toutes les sources d’entrée disponibles (TV, Ext1, Ext2, AV, Composant, PC, HDMI1, HDMI2/DVI, HDMI3, HDMI4, USB). N Dans le menu du téléviseur, ce bouton a la même fonction que le bouton ENTERE de la télécommande. 2 MENU Permet d’afficher le menu des fonctions de votre téléviseur sur l’écran. 3 + – Permet d’augmenter ou de baisser le volume. Dans le menu à l’écran, utilisez les boutons + – de la même façon que les boutons ◄ et ► de la télécommande. 4 CH Permet de changer de chaîne. Dans le menu à l’écran, utilisez les boutons CH de la même façon que les boutons ▲ et ▼ de la télécommande. Le bouton CH permet d’allumer le téléviseur sans votre télécommande. 5 TEMOIN D’ALIMENTATION Clignote et s’éteint lorsqu’il est sous tension et s’allume en mode veille. 6 (ALIMENTATION) Permet d’allumer et d’éteindre letéléviseur. 7 CAPTEUR DE LA TELECOMMANDE Dirigez la télécommande vers ce point du téléviseur. 8 HAUT-PARLEURS BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 5 10/20/2009 4:58:34 PMFrançais - 6 Présentation du panneau de branchement N En cas de branchement d’un système audio ou vidéo sur le téléviseur, vérifiez que tous les appareils sont éteints. N Lorsque vous branchez un périphérique externe, faites correspondre les couleurs de la borne de connexion et du câble. N La couleur et la forme du produit peuvent varier en fonction du modèle. 1 LAN Branchez un câble réseau (LAN) sur ce port pour connecter l’appareil au réseau. 2 POWER IN Permet de raccorder le cordon d’alimentation fourni. 3 COMPONENT IN Entrées audio (AUDIO L/R) et vidéo (Y/PB/PR) pour composant. 4 PC IN (AUDIO / PC) Permet de raccorder la prise de sortie vidéo et audio à votre PC. 5 EXT 1, EXT 2 Entrées ou sorties pour périphériques externes tels que des magnétoscopes, des lecteurs DVD, des consoles de jeux vidéo ou des lecteurs de vidéodisques. N En mode EXT, la sortie DTV prend uniquement en charge les formats MPEG, SD Video et Audio. N En mode EXT, le mode Jeu n’est pas disponible. Spécifications entrée/sortie Connecteur Entrée Sortie Video Audio(L/R) RGB Video + Audio(L/R) EXT 1 ✔ ✔ ✔ Seule la sortie TV ou DTV est disponible. EXT 2 ✔ ✔ Sortie que vous pouvez sélectionner.. 6 HEADPHONE Permet de brancher un casque si vous souhaitez regarder la télévision sans déranger les autres personnes présentes dans la pièce. N L’utilisation prolongée d’un casque à un niveau sonore élevé peut endommager l’ouïe. 7 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) A connecter à un composant audio 8 SERVICE Prise pour tests. 9 AUDIO OUT(AUDIO R/L) Permet de connecter les signaux audio RCA du téléviseur à une source externe, telle qu’un équipement audio. 0 ANT IN Connecteur coaxial 75Ω pour réseau câblé/hertzien. ! HDMI IN 1, 2(DVI), 3 Aucune connexion audio supplémentaire n’est nécessaire pour une connexion HDMI - HDMI. - Lorsque vous utilisez une connexion avec câble HDMI/ DVI, vous devez utiliser la borne HDMI IN 2(DVI). N Qu’est-ce que HDMI ? - La technologie “High Definition Multimedia interface” (interface multimédia haute définition) permet la transmission de données vidéo numériques haute définition et de plusieurs canaux de son numérique. - Le terminal HDMI/DVI prend en charge la connexion DVI vers un périphérique raccordé avec le câble adéquat (non fourni). La différence entre HDMI et DVI est que le périphérique HDMI est plus petit, dispose de la fonction de codage HDCP (High Bandwidth Digital Copy Protection) et prend en charge le son numérique multicanal. DVI AUDIO IN Sorties audio DVI pour périphériques externes. Modes pris en charge pour HDMI/DVI et Composant 480i 480p 576i 576p 720p 1080i 1080p HDMI/DVI 50Hz X X X O O O O HDMI/DVI 60Hz X O X X O O O Composant O O O O O O O Panneau arrière du téléviseur Télévision câblée Réseau ou ou 2 3 4 5 7 9 ! 0 6 8 1 BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 6 10/20/2009 4:58:37 PMFrançais - 7 1 Logement de COMMON INTERFACE Insérez la carte d’interface commune dans ce logement. (Reportez-vous à la page 23) - Si vous n'insérez pas la carte d'interface commune CI(CI+) CARD dans certains canaux, le message Scrambled Signal s'affiche. - Les informations de pairage contenant un numéro de téléphone, l'ID de la carte d'interface commune CI(CI+) CARD, l'ID de l'hôte et d'autres informations s'afficheront dans 2 ou 3 minutes. Si un message d’erreur s’affiche, contactez votre prestataire de service. - Lorsque la configuration des informations sur les canaux est terminée, le message Mise à jour terminée s’affiche, indiquant que la liste des chaînes est dorénavant mise à jour. - Selon le modèle, un message demandant le mot de passe du Parental Lock peut s'afficher à l'insertion de la carte CI. - Selon le modèle, même si la fonction Parental Lock est définie sur Allow All, un message demandant le mot de passe peut s'afficher pour les programmes réservés aux adultes (18 ans et plus). N Insérez la carte d'interface commune CI(CI+) CARD dans le sens indiqué sur celle-ci. N La carte d'interface commune (CI(CI+) CARD) n'est pas prise en charge dans certains pays, dans dans certaines régions ni par certaines stations de diffusion ; vérifiez auprès de votre revendeur agréé. N La fonction CI+ n'est applicable qu'au modèle PS********P. Si vous rencontrez des problèmes, contactez le prestataire de service. 2 USB 1(HDD), USB 2 Connectez un périphérique de stockage de masse USB pour afficher des fichiers photo (JPEG), écouter des fichiers musicaux (MP3) et regarder des fichiers vidéo. Vous pouvez vous connecter au réseau SAMSUNG sans fil. Le port USB 1 sert également au branchement des disques durs. Les disques durs sont des périphériques permettant de stocker les données numériques. 3 HDMI IN 4 A connecter à la prise HDMI d’un périphérique équipé d’une sortie HDMI. 4 AV IN (VIDEO, AUDIO L/R) Entrées audio et vidéo pour périphériques externes, tels qu’un caméscope ou un magnétoscope. N La couleur et la forme du produit peuvent varier en fonction du modèle. Panneau latéral du téléviseur 3 4 1 2 BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 7 10/20/2009 4:58:38 PMFrançais - 8 Télécommande Vous pouvez utiliser la télécommande jusqu’à une distance maximale d’environ 7 m du téléviseur. N Une lumière intense peut affecter le bon fonctionnement de la télécommande. 1 Bouton POWER (permet d’allumer et d’éteindre le téléviseur) 2 Sélectionne directement le mode TV. 3 Touches numériques pour l’accès direct aux chaînes. 4 Permet de basculer vers vos chaînes préférées. 5 Suppression temporaire du son. 6 Augmentation du volume Réduction du volume 7 Sélection de la source disponible 8 Affiche les informations relatives au programme en cours. 9 Permet de sélectionner rapidement les fonctions fréquemment utilisées. 0 Permettent de sélectionner des options de menu à l’écran et de modifier des valeurs de menu. ! Cette fonction permet d’afficher Internet@TV. @ Utilisez ces boutons dans la liste des chaînes, Media Play, et Internet@TV, etc. $ Permet d’afficher les listes de chaînes à l’écran. % Utilisez ces boutons dans la liste des chaînes, Media Play et Anynet + , etc. ^ Permet d’activer le rétroéclairage des boutons de la télécommande. Cette fonction est pratique la nuit ou lorsqu’il fait sombre dans la pièce. (L’utilisation de la télécommande avec le bouton lumineux ON/OFF( ) réglé sur On réduit la durée d’utilisation de la pile.) & Chaîne précédente. * Chaîne suivante Chaîne précédente ( Affiche le menu principal à l’écran. ) Affichage EPG (Guide électronique des programmes) a Permet de revenir au menu précédent. b Permet de quitter le menu à l’écran. c Cette fonction permet d’afficher Media Play. d Cette fonction vous permet d’afficher Bibliothèque de contenu. e Affichage numérique des sous-titres. f Sélection de Audio Description. Fonctions télétexte 2 Permet de quitter l’affichage télétexte (en fonction du modèle) 7 Sélection du mode Télétexte (LIST/FLOF) 8 Activation du télétexte 9 Taille du télétexte @ Sélection des rubriques Fastext # Affichage télétexte / informations relatives au télétexte et programme normal $ Mémorisation du télétexte & Page secondaire du télétexte * P :Page télétexte suivante P :Page télétexte précédente ( Index du télétexte a Pause télétexte b Annulation du télétexte Insertion des piles dans la télécommande 1. Soulevez le couvercle situé à l’arrière de la télécommande comme indiqué sur la figure. 2. Placez-y deux piles AAA. N Assurez-vous que les pôles “+” et “–” des piles correspondent au schéma situé à l’intérieur du compartiment. 3. Refermez le couvercle. N Retirez les piles et stockez-les dans un endroit frais et sec si vous n’utilisez pas la télécommande pendant longtemps. N Si la télécommande ne fonctionne pas, vérifiez les points suivants 1. Le téléviseur est-il sous tension ? 2. Les bornes + et - des piles ne sont-elles pas inversées ? 3. Les piles sont-elles déchargées ? 4. Le cordon d’alimentation est-il débranché ou y a-t-il une panne de courant ? 5. Une lampe fluorescente ou néon est-elle allumée à proximité ? BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 8 10/20/2009 4:58:39 PMFrançais - 9 Utilisation des boutons rétroéclairés de la télécommande Utilisez cette fonctionnalité dans des environnements sombres lorsque vous ne parvenez pas à voir correctement les boutons de la télécommande. 1. Appuyez sur le bouton lumineux ON/OFF( ). N Lorsque la position ON est activée, les boutons s'éclairent pendant quelques instants. N Une pression sur un bouton de la télécommande lorsque celle-ci est activée permet de rétroéclairer les boutons pendant quelques instants. Mise en marche et arrêt Le câble relié au secteur est fixé à l’arrière du téléviseur/moniteur. 1. Branchez le cordon d’alimentation sur une prise secteur appropriée. N Le voyant de veille s’allume sur le téléviseur. 2. Appuyez sur le bouton POWERP de votre téléviseur. N Vous pouvez également appuyer sur le bouton POWERP ou sur le bouton TV de votre télécommande pour allumer le téléviseur. N Le dernier programme que vous avez regardé est automatiquement resélectionné. 3. Appuyez sur le bouton numérique (de 0 à 9) ou le bouton Chaîne suivante/précédente (< / >) de la télécommande ou sur le bouton < CH> de votre téléviseur. N Lorsque vous allumez le téléviseur pour la première fois, vous devrez choisir la langue dans laquelle vous souhaitez que les menus s’affichent. 4. Pour éteindre votre téléviseur, appuyez de nouveau sur le bouton POWERP. Mise en mode veille de votre téléviseur Vous pouvez mettre votre téléviseur en mode veille afin de réduire la consommation électrique. Ce mode peut être utile si vous souhaitez éteindre votre téléviseur temporairement (pendant un repas par exemple). 1. Appuyez sur le bouton POWERP de la télécommande. N L’écran s’éteint et un voyant de veille rouge apparaît sur votre téléviseur. 2. Pour rallumer le téléviseur, appuyez de nouveau sur le bouton POWERP, les boutons numériques (de 0 à 9), le bouton TV ou les boutons Chaîne suivante/précédente (< / >). N Ne laissez pas le téléviseur en mode veille pendant de longues périodes (lorsque vous êtes en vacances par exemple). Il est conseillé de débrancher la prise d’alimentation secteur et de l’antenne. Visualisation de laffichage L’affichage identifie la chaîne en cours et l’état de certains paramètres audio et vidéo. O Appuyez sur le bouton INFO pour afficher les informations. Appuyez sur le bouton INFO de la télécommande. La télévision affiche la chaîne, le type de son et l’état de certains paramètres de son et d’image. • ▲, ▼: Vous pouvez afficher des informations relatives à une autre chaîne. Pour accéder à la chaîne actuellement sélectionnée, appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. • ◄, ►: Vous pouvez afficher les informations relatives au programme souhaité de la chaîne actuelle. N Appuyez de nouveau sur le bouton INFO ou attendez environ 10 secondes pour que l'affichage disparaisse automatiquement. DTV Air 15 abc1 18:00 ~ 6:00 18:11 Thu 6 Jan Life On Venus Avenue Unclassified No Detaild Information E Watch ' Information BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 9 10/20/2009 4:58:40 PMFrançais - 10 Affichage des menus 1. Une fois l’appareil allumé, appuyez sur le bouton MENU. Le menu principal apparaît à l’écran. Plusieurs icônes s’affichent sur le côté gauche du menu : Image, Son, Canal, Configuration, Entrée, Application, Assistance. 2. ENTERE Appuyez sur la touche ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner l’une des icônes. Appuyez ensuite sur le bouton ENTERE pour accéder au sous-menu de l’icône. 3. Appuyez sur le bouton EXIT pour quitter le menu. N Les menus disparaissent de l’écran après environ une minute. Utilisation du bouton TOOLS Vous pouvez utiliser le bouton TOOLS pour sélectionner simplement et rapidement les fonctions que vous utilisez le plus souvent. Le menu Outils change en fonction du mode d’entrée externe affiché. 1. Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS. Le menu Outils s’affiche. 2. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner un menu, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. 3. Appuyez sur les boutons ▲ / ▼ / ◄ / ► / ENTERE pour afficher, changer ou utiliser les options de menu sélectionnés. Pour une description plus détaillée de chaque fonction, reportez-vous à la page correspondante. • Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC), voir page 46 • Format de l’ image, voir page 16 • Mode Image, voir page 15 • Mode Son, voir page 20 • Veille, voir page 22 • SRS TS HD, voir page 20 • Mode éco., voir page 24 • Dual l ll, voir page 21 • Ajouter aux favoris (ou Supprimer des favoris), voir page 14 • PIP, voir page 25 • Réglage Automatique, voir page 18 Fonction Plug & Play Lorsque vous allumez le téléviseur pour la première fois, des réglages de base s’effectuent l’un après l’autre de manière automatique. N L’écran de veille est activé si aucune touche de la télécommande n’est actionnée pendant plus d’une minute lorsque le mode Plug & Play est en cours d’exécution. N L’écran de veille est activé si aucun signal de fonctionnement n’est reçu pendant plus de 15 minutes. N Si vous sélectionnez par erreur un pays incorrect pour votre téléviseur, il se peut que les caractères affichés à l’écran soient incorrects. 1. Appuyez sur le bouton POWER de la télécommande. Le menu Select the OSD language s’affiche automatiquement. Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. Sélectionnez la langue appropriée en appuyant sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼. Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE pour confirmer votre choix. 2. Appuyez sur le bouton ◄ ou ► pour sélectionner Enr. démo ou Util. domicile, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. N Nous recommandons de régler le téléviseur sur le mode Util. domicile pour une meilleure qualité d’image dans votre environnement personnel. N Le mode Enr. démo n’est prévu que pour un usage en magasin. N Si l’unité est accidentellement définie sur le mode Enr. démo et que vous souhaitez revenir au mode Util. domicile (standard) : appuyez sur le bouton Volume du téléviseur. Lorsque l’affichage à l’écran du volume apparaît, appuyez pendant 5 secondes sur le bouton MENU du téléviseur. 3. Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. Sélectionnez le pays approprié en appuyant sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼. Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE pour confirmer votre choix. N Après la sélection du pays dans le menu Country, certains modèles peuvent demander, en plus, le code PIN. N Lors de l'entrée du code PIN, 0-0-0-0 n'est pas disponible. 4. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour mémoriser les chaînes de la connexion sélectionnée, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. • Hertzien: signal d’antenne hertzien. • Câblé: signal d’antenne câblé. Plug & Play Select the OSD Language. Language : U Move E Enter ▲ Nederlands English Eesti ▼ Outils Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) Format de l’ image : 16/9 auto Mode Image : Standard Mode Son : Personnel Veille : Arrêt SRS TS HD : Arrêt Mode éco. : Arrêt Dual l ll : Mono Réglage Automatique U Dépl. E Entrer e Quitter Mode : Standard Lum. Cellules : 4 Contraste : 95 Luminosité : 45 Netteté : 50 Couleur : 50 Teinte (V/R) : V50 / R50 Paramètres avancés Image BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 10 10/20/2009 4:58:41 PMFrançais - 11 5. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner la source d’antenne à mémoriser. Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE pour sélectionner Démarrer. • Numérique et Analogique: chaînes numériques et analogiques. • Numérique: chaînes numériques. • Analogique: chaînes analogiques. N La recherche de chaînes démarre et se termine automatiquement. N Pour une description plus détaillée de la sélection du mode Câble, Reportez-vous à la page 11. 6. Le message Définit le mode Horloge. s’affiche. Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner Auto., puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. N Si vous sélectionnez Manuel, Définit la date et l’heure s’affiche. (Pour une description détaillée de l’option Manuel, Reportezvous à la page 22) N Si vous avez reçu un signal numérique, l’heure sera automatiquement réglée. 7. Une brève instruction concernant la manière d’obtenir le meilleur de votre téléviseur HDTV s’affiche. Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. N Ce menu est disponible dans le menu Assistance du Guide de connexion HD. N Vous pouvez passer à la page précédente ou suivante en appuyant sur le bouton ◄ ou ►. 8. Le message Profitez de votre visionnage s’affiche. N Si vous souhaitez regarder la télévision immédiatement, sélectionnez Regarder la TV. N Si vous souhaitez afficher Voir Guide Produit, appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. Si vous souhaitez réinitialiser cette fonction... 1. Appuyez sur le bouton MENU pour afficher le menu. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner Configuration, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. 2. Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE à nouveau pour sélectionner le mode Plug & Play. 3. Entrez votre code PIN à quatre chiffres. Le code PIN par défaut d’un nouveau téléviseur est ‘0-0-0-0’. N Si vous souhaitez changer ce code PIN, reportez-vous à la page 24. N La fonction Plug & Play est uniquement disponible en mode TV. Mémorisation des chaînes ❑ Pays „ Canal numérique: Permet de changer de pays pour les chaînes numériques. „ Canal analogique: Permet de changer de pays pour les chaînes analogiques. N L’écran de saisie du code PIN apparaît. Entrez votre code PIN à quatre chiffres. ❑ Mémorisation Auto Cherche toutes les chaînes avec des stations de diffusion actives (et leur disponibilité en fonction du pays) et les enregistre dans la mémoire du téléviseur. Vous pouvez mémoriser les chaînes de la connexion sélectionnée. • Hertzien: Signal d’antenne hertzien. • Câble: Signal d’antenne câblé. Vous pouvez sélectionner la source d’antenne à mémoriser. • Numérique et Analogique: Chaînes numériques et analogiques. • Numérique: Chaînes numériques. • Analogique: Chaînes analogiques. N Lors de la sélection de l’option Câble. • Mode de recherche: Affiche le mode de recherche (Rapide) - Network ID: Affiche le code d’identification du réseau. - Fréquence: Affiche la fréquence correspondant au canal. - Modulation: Affiche les valeurs de modulation disponibles. - Taux de symbole: Affiche les taux de symboles disponibles. • Mode de recherche: Affiche le mode de recherche (Complet, Réseau) - Fréq. début: Affiche les valeurs de début de la fréquence. - Fréq. fin: Affiche les valeurs de fin de la fréquence. - Modulation: Affiche les valeurs de modulation disponibles. - Taux de symbole: Affiche les taux de symboles disponibles. N Si vous voulez arrêter la Mémorisation Auto, appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. Le message Arrêter le programme automatique ? s’affiche. Sélectionnez Oui en appuyant sur le bouton ◄ ou ►, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. Gestion des canaux Canal Pays ► Mémorisation Auto Mémorisation Manuelle Option de recherche de câble Guide Complet Mini Guide Par défaut : Guide Complet Liste des chaînes Configuration Plug & Play ► langue des menus : Français Horloge Diffuser Sécurité Réseau Général BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 11 10/20/2009 4:58:41 PMFrançais - 12 ❑ Mémorisation Manuelle Permet de chercher manuellement une chaîne et de l’enregistrer dans la mémoire du téléviseur. „ Chaîne numérique (numérique) N La fonction Canal numérique est uniquement disponible en mode DTV. • Canal: Sélectionnez le numéro de canal à l’aide des boutons ▲, ▼ ou des touches numériques (de 0 à 9). • Fréquence: Sélectionnez la fréquence à l’aide des touches numériques (de 0 à 9). • Bande passante: Sélectionnez la bande passante à l’aide du bouton ▲ ou ▼. N Au terme de la recherche, les chaînes de la liste sont mises à jour. „ Chaîne analogique Mémorisation manuelle de chaînes analogiques. • Programme (numéro de programme à attribuer à une chaîne) : sélectionnez le numéro de chaîne à l’aide des boutons ▲, ▼ ou des touches numériques (de 0 à 9). • Système de Couleur → Auto / PAL / SECAM / NTSC 4.43 : Sélectionnez le système de couleurs à l’aide du bouton ▲ ou ▼. • Système Sonore → BG / DK / I / L : Sélectionnez le système audio à l’aide du bouton ▲ ou ▼. • Canal (Si vous connaissez le numéro de la chaîne à mémoriser): Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner C (chaîne hertzienne) ou S (chaîne câblée). Appuyez sur le bouton ►, puis sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ ou une touche numérique (de 0 à 9) pour sélectionner le numéro de votre choix. N Si aucun son ne sort ou si le son produit est anormal, sélectionnez de nouveau la norme son requise. • Recherche (lorsque vous ne connaissez pas les numéros de chaîne): Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour lancer la recherche. Le syntoniseur balaie la plage de fréquences jusqu’à ce que vous receviez la première chaîne ou la chaîne que vous avez sélectionnée à l’écran. • Mémoriser (Permet de mémoriser la chaîne et le numéro de programme correspondant) : Sélectionnez OK en appuyant sur le bouton ENTERE. N Mode des canaux - C (Mode chaîne hertzienne): Dans ce mode, vous pouvez sélectionner un canal en saisissant le numéro attribué à chacune des stations de télédiffusion. - S (Mode chaîne câblée): Dans ce mode, vous pouvez sélectionner une chaîne en saisissant le numéro attribué à chacune des chaînes câblées. ❑ Option de recherche de câble Vous pouvez configurer des options de recherche supplémentaires telles que la fréquence et le taux de symbole pour la recherche de réseaux câblés (en fonction du pays). • Fréq. début : Affiche les valeurs de début de la fréquence. • Fréq. fin : Affiche les valeurs de fin de la fréquence. • Modulation : Affiche les valeurs de modulation disponibles. • Taux de symbole : Affiche les taux de symboles disponibles. N Si la valeur Fréq. début est supérieure à la valeur Fréq. fin, un message d’avertissement s’affiche. ❑ Guide Complet / Mini Guide Les informations relatives au guide électronique des programmes (EPG) sont fournies par les diffuseurs. Des entrées de programmes peuvent être vides ou ne pas être à jour en raison des informations diffusées sur un canal donné. L’affichage fera une mise à jour automatique dès qu’une nouvelle information sera disponible. • Guide Complet : Affiche les informations relatives au programme toutes les heures. Deux heures de programme sont affichées et vous pouvez faire défiler le programme en avançant ou en remontant dans le temps. • Mini Guide : Les informations de chaque programme sont affichées ligne par ligne sur l’écran du mini-guide de la chaîne actuelle, en commençant par le programme en cours, dans l’ordre des heures de début des programmes. ❑ Par Défaut „ Mini Guide / Guide complet Vous pouvez choisir d’afficher soit le Mini Guide soit le Guide Complet lorsque vous appuyez sur le bouton GUIDE de la télécommande. O Vous pouvez aussi afficher le guide en appuyant tout simplement sur le bouton GUIDE. Suite... Canal Guide Complet Mini Guide Par défaut : Guide complet► Liste des chaînes Mode Canal : Chaînes ajoutées Réglage fin BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 12 10/20/2009 4:58:42 PMFrançais - 13 Utilisation du Guide complet / Mini-guide ▲ / ▼ / ◄ / ►, ENTERE Sélectionnez un programme en appuyant sur le bouton ▲/▼/◄/► ENTERE. ROUGE Basculez entre le Guide Complet ou le Mini Guide. VERT Guide Complet : Permet de reculer rapidement. (-24 heures) JAUNE Guide Complet : Permet d’avancer rapidement. (+24 heures) BLEU Quittez le guide. INFO Le bouton INFO permet d’obtenir des informations détaillées. ❑ Mode Canal Lorsque vous appuyez sur le bouton P () l’ordre des chaînes affichées change dans la liste de chaînes sélectionnée. „ Chaînes ajoutées: Les chaînes sont sélectionnées dans la liste des chaînes mémorisée. „ Chaînes favorites: Les chaînes sont sélectionnées dans la liste des chaînes favorites. ❑ Réglage fin (Chaînes analogiques uniquement) Si la réception est claire, vous n’avez pas besoin d’effectuer une syntonisation fine du canal, car cette opération s’effectue automatiquement pendant la recherche et la mémorisation. Si le signal est faible ou déformé, vous pouvez être amené à effectuer manuellement un réglage fin du canal. N Les canaux réglés et mémorisés sont repérés par un astérisque * placé à droite de leur numéro dans la bannière des canaux. N Si vous n’enregistrez pas les chaînes à synchronisation fine dans la mémoire, les réglages ne seront pas enregistrés. N Pour rétablir la syntonisation fine, sélectionnez Réinit à l’aide du bouton ▼, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. Gestion des chaînes Ce menu permet d’ajouter/supprimer ou définir des chaînes favorites et d’utiliser le guide des programmes pour les émissions numériques. N Sélectionnez une chaîne dans l’écran Tous les canaux, Chaînes ajoutées, Favoris ou Programmé en appuyant sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼, puis sur le bouton ENTERE. Vous pouvez alors regarder la chaîne sélectionnée. • Tous les canaux : Affiche toutes les chaînes actuellement disponibles. • Chaînes ajoutées : Affiche toutes les chaînes ajoutées. • Favoris : Affiche toutes les chaînes favorites. • Programmé : Affiche tous les programmes actuellement réservés. O Appuyez sur le bouton CH LIST de la télécommande pour afficher les listes de chaînes. N Utilisation des boutons de couleur dans la liste des chaînes - Rouge (Type de chaîne) : Permet de basculer entre TV, Radio, Données / Autres et Tout. - Vert (Zoom) : Agrandit ou réduit un numéro de chaîne. - Jaune (Sélectionner) : Sélectionne plusieurs listes de chaînes. - T TOOLS (Outils): affiche le menu Supprimer (ou Ajouter), Ajouter aux favoris (ou Supprimer des favoris), Verrouil. (ou Déverr.), Rappel de programme, Modif. nom chaîne, Modif. numéro chaîne, Trier, Désélectionner tout, Sélectionner tout ou Mémorisation Auto. (Les menus Outils peuvent varier en fonction de la situation.) N Icônes d’état des chaînes A Chaîne analogique. c Chaîne sélectionnée en appuyant sur le bouton jaune. ♥ Chaîne définie comme favorite. ( Programme en cours de diffusion. \ Chaîne verrouillée. ) Programme réservé Canal Mini Guide Par défaut : Guide comp. Liste des chaînes Mode Canal : Chaînes ajoutées Réglage fin 824 UKTV Gold 825 UKTV style A 1 C -- A 2 C -- A 3 ♥ C -- A 4 C -- A 5 C -- A 6 C -- A 7 C -- A 8 C -- Tous les canaux Tous „ Type de canal „ Zoom „ Sélect. Page Outils Guide Complet DTV Cable 900 f tn 2:10 Tue 1 Jun Freshmen On Campus 2:00 - 2:30 Aucune information détaillée. Aujourd’hui 2:00 - 3:00 3:00 - 4:00 Mint Extra Loaded Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC The Distillery Smash Hits! Sunday 900 f tn 901 ITV Play 902 Kerrang! 903 Kiss 903 oneword ▼ 903 Smash Hits! Street Hypn.. Kisstory Aucune information Aucune information Aucune information Freshmen O.. Mini Guide DTV Cable 900 f tn Street Hypnosis Booze Britain 2:00 2:30 ▼ 5:00 Freshmen On Campus Regarder Information Page „ Guide complet „ Quitter Regarder Information Page „ Mini Guide „ +24 heures„ Quitter BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 13 10/20/2009 4:58:42 PMFrançais - 14 ❑ Menu d’outils de la liste des chaînes (dans Tous les canaux / Chaînes ajoutées / Favoris) N Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS pour utiliser le menu Outils. N Les options du menu Outils peuvent varier selon l’état de la chaîne. „ Ajouter / Supprimer Vous pouvez supprimer ou ajouter une chaîne afin d’afficher les chaînes de votre choix. N Toutes les chaînes supprimées apparaîtront dans le menu Tous les canaux. N Une chaîne grisée est une chaîne qui a été supprimée. N Le menu Ajouter apparaît uniquement pour les chaînes supprimées. N Vous pouvez également ajouter une chaîne au menu Chaînes ajoutées ou Favoris. „ Ajouter aux favoris / Supprimer des favoris Vous pouvez définir comme favorites les chaînes que vous regardez souvent. T Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS pour afficher le menu Outils. Vous pouvez également définir une chaîne favorite en sélectionnant Outils → Ajouter aux favoris (ou Supprimer des favoris). O Pour sélectionner les chaînes favorites que vous avez configurées, appuyez sur le bouton FAV.CH de la télécommande. control. N Le symbole “♥” s’affiche et la chaîne est définie comme favorite. N Toutes les chaînes favorites apparaîtront dans le menu Favoris. „ Verrouil. / Déverr. Vous pouvez verrouiller une chaîne afin qu’elle ne puisse pas être sélectionnée ni visualisée. Cette fonction n’est disponible que si l’option Verrouillage Canal est définie sur Marche. (voir page 24) N L’écran de saisie du code PIN apparaît. Entrez votre code PIN à quatre chiffres. N Le code PIN par défaut d’un nouveau téléviseur est ‘0-0-0-0’. Vous pouvez modifier le code PIN en sélectionnant Modifier PIN dans le menu. N Le symbole “\” s’affiche et la chaîne est verrouillée. „ Rappel de programme Si vous réservez un programme que vous souhaitez regarder, la chaîne bascule automatiquement vers la chaîne réservée dans la liste de chaînes, même si vous êtes en train de regarder une autre chaîne. Pour réserver un programme, réglez d’abord l’heure actuelle. (voir page 22) N Il n’est possible de réserver que des chaînes mémorisées. N Vous pouvez régler directement la chaîne, le mois, le jour, l’heure et les minutes à l’aide des touches numériques de la télécommande. N Tous les programmes réservés apparaîtront dans le menu Programmé. N Guide des programmes numériques et affichage des réservations Quand une chaîne numérique est sélectionnée et que vous appuyez sur le bouton ►, le Guide des programmes de la chaîne s’affiche. Vous pouvez réserver un programme en suivant les procédures décrites ci-dessus. „ Modif. nom chaîne (Chaînes analogiques uniquement) Vous pouvez attribuer aux chaînes un libellé qui s’affiche chaque fois que vous les sélectionnez. N Les noms des chaînes numériques leur sont automatiquement attribués ; vous ne pouvez pas les modifier. „ Modif. numéro chaîne (Chaînes numériques uniquement) Vous pouvez également modifier le numéro de chaîne à l’aide des touches numériques de la télécommande. „ Tri des canaux (Chaînes analogiques uniquement) Cette opération permet de changer les numéros de programme des chaînes mémorisées. Cette opération peut s’avérer nécessaire après l’utilisation de la mémorisation automatique. „ Désélectionner tout / Sélectionner tout Vous pouvez sélectionner ou désélectionner toutes les chaînes de la liste des chaînes. N Vous pouvez appliquer les fonctions d’ajout / suppression, d’ajout/suppression de favoris ou de verrouillage / déverrouillage à plusieurs chaînes à la fois. Sélectionnez les chaînes voulues, puis appuyez sur le bouton jaune pour traiter toutes les chaînes sélectionnées à la fois. N La marque c s’affiche à gauche des chaînes sélectionnées. N La fonction Désélectionner tout n’est disponible que si au moins une chaîne est sélectionnée. „ Mémorisation Auto N Pour plus d’informations sur le réglage des options, reportez-vous à la page 11. N Si une chaîne est verrouillée par la fonction Verrouillage Canal, la fenêtre de saisie du code PIN s’affiche. ❑ Menu d’outils de la liste des chaînes (dans Programmé) Vous pouvez voir, modifier ou supprimer une réservation. N Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS pour utiliser le menu Outils. • Infos modif. : Permet de modifier une réservation. • Annuler progr. : Permet d’annuler une réservation. • Information : Permet de visualiser une réservation (et d’en changer les données). • Sélectionner tout / Désélectionner tout : Permet de sélectionner ou de désélectionner tous les programmes réservés. Programmé 1 / 1 / 2009 13:59 5 TV1 Quincy, M.E 18:59 2 TV3 The Equalizer 20:59 2 TV3 McMillan & Wife 21:59 2 TV3 M.Spillane’s mike Hammer Infos modif. Annuler progr. Information Sélectionner tout Tous „ Zoom „ Sélect. Outils Information 824 UKTV Gold 825 UKTV style A 1 C -- A 2 C -- A 3 C -- A 4 C -- A 5 C -- A 6 C -- A 7 C -- A 8 C -- Tous les canaux Supprimer Ajouter aux favoris Verrouil. Rappel de prog. Modifi. nom de chaîne Tri des canaux ▼ Tous „ Type de canal „ Zoom „ Sélect. Page Outils BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 14 10/20/2009 4:58:43 PMFrançais - 15 Changement des réglages de l’image ❑ Mode Vous pouvez sélectionner le type d’image correspondant le mieux à vos besoins d’affichage. „ Dynamique / Standard / Econ. / Film T Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS pour afficher le menu Outils. Vous pouvez également régler le mode d’image en sélectionnant Outils → Mode d’image. ❑ Luminosité des cellules / Contraste / Luminosité / Netteté / Couleur / Teinte (V/R) Votre téléviseur offre plusieurs options de paramétrage qui permettent de contrôler la qualité d’image. • Luminosité des cellules : Règle la luminosité des pixels. • Contraste : Règle le contraste de l’image. • Luminosité : Règle la luminosité de l’image. • Netteté : Règle la définition des bords de l’image. • Couleur : Règle la saturation de couleur de l’image. • Teinte (V/R) : Règle la teinte de l’image. N Lorsque vous modifiez le paramètre Luminosité des cellules, Contraste, Luminosité, Netteté, Couleur ou Teinte (V/R), l’affichage à l’écran change en conséquence. N Les valeurs ajustées sont enregistrées pour tous les modes d’image. N Dans les modes analogiques TV, Ext., AV du système PAL, vous ne pouvez pas utiliser la fonction Teinte. N En mode PC, vous ne pouvez modifier que les paramètres Luminosité des cellules, Contraste et Luminosité. N Chaque nouveau réglage est mémorisé séparément selon son mode d’entrée. N L’énergie consommée pendant le fonctionnement peut être sensiblement réduite en baissant le niveau de luminosité de l’image. Cela réduira le coût de fonctionnement général. ❑ Paramètres avancés Vous pouvez régler les paramètres avancés de l’écran (couleur, contraste, etc.). N L’option Paramètres avancés est disponible dans les modes Standard et Film. N En mode PC, vous ne pouvez modifier que les paramètres Contraste Dynam., Gamma et Balance blancs parmi les options du menu Paramètres avancés. „ Nuance de noir → Arrêt / Sombre / Plus sombre / Le plus sombre Vous pouvez améliorer la profondeur de l’image en réglant la densité du noir. „ Contraste Dynam. → Arrêt / Bas / Moyen / Elevé Vous pouvez régler le contraste de l’écran pour obtenir un résultat optimal. „ Gamma Vous pouvez régler l’intensité des couleurs primaires (rouge, vert, bleu). „ Espace couleur Un espace de couleur est une matrice de couleurs composée de rouge, de vert et de bleu. Sélectionnez votre espace de couleur préféré et appréciez la couleur la plus naturelle. • Auto. : Définit automatiquement la gamme de couleurs en fonction de la source vidéo d’entrée. • Natif : Définit une gamme de couleurs plus large en fonction de la source vidéo d’entrée. • Personnel : Règle la gamme de couleurs en fonction de vos préférences. N Personnalisation de l’espace de couleur - Permet de régler la gamme de couleurs en fonction de vos préférences Couleur est disponible lorsque Espace couleur est défini sur Personnel. - Couleur → Rouge / Vert / Bleu / Jaune / Cyan / Magenta - Rouge / Vert / Bleu : vous pouvez régler les valeurs RVB pour la couleur sélectionnée. - Réinit. : Rétablit les valeurs par défaut de l’espace de couleur. Réglage de l’image Suite... Mode : Standard ► Lum. Cellules : 4 Contraste : 95 Luminosité : 45 Netteté : 50 Couleur : 50 Teinte (V/R) : V50/R50 Paramètres avancés Image Couleur : 50 Teinte (V/R) : V50 / R50 Paramètres avancés ► Options d’ image Réinitialisation de l’ image Image BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 15 10/20/2009 4:58:44 PMFrançais - 16 „ Balance blancs Vous pouvez régler la température des couleurs pour que celles-ci soient plus naturelles. • Aj. Rouge / Aj. Vert / Aj. Bleu / Regl. Rouge / Regl. vert / Regl. bleu : la modification des valeurs de réglage actualise l’affichage à l’écran. • Réinit. : Rétablit la balance des blancs par défaut. „ Carnation Vous pouvez régler la densité de rouge de la carnation. N La modification des valeurs de réglage actualise l’affichage à l’écran. „ Netteté des contours → Arrêt / Marche Vous pouvez faire ressortir les contours des objets dans l’image. „ xvYCC → Arrêt / Marche L’activation du mode xvYCC augmente les détails et l’espace de couleur lorsque vous regardez des films depuis un périphérique externe (ex. : lecteur DVD). N La fonction xvYCC est disponible lorsque le mode d’image est défini sur Cinéma et la sortie externe sur le mode HDMI ou Composant. N En fonction de votre périphérique externe, il se peut que cette fonction ne soit pas prise en charge. ❑ Options d’image Vous pouvez personnaliser les réglages de l’image en fonction de vos préférences. N En mode PC, vous ne pouvez modifier que les options Nuance Coul., Format et Protection brûlure écran dans le menu Options d’image. „ Nuance Coul. → Froide / Normal / Chaude1 / Chaude2 / Chaude3 Vous pouvez sélectionner la nuance de couleur la plus agréable à l’oeil. N Les valeurs réglées sont mémorisées en fonction du mode Image sélectionné. N L’option Chaude1, Chaude2 ou Chaude3 n’est activée que lorsque le mode d’image est Film. „ Format → 16/9 auto / 16:9 / Zoom large / Zoom / 4:3 / Adapter à l’écran Vous pouvez sélectionner le format d’image qui correspond le mieux à vos exigences d’affichage. • 16/9 auto : Sélectionne 16:9 auto comme format d’image. • 16:9 : Règle l’image en mode Large, c’est-à-dire en 16:9. • Zoom large : Donnez à l’image une taille supérieure à 4:3. • Zoom : Agrandit la taille de l’image sur l’écran dans le sens vertical. • 4:3 : Règle l’image en mode Normal, c’est-à-dire en 4:3. • Adapter à l’écran : Affiche le signal HD natif complet qu’un téléviseur normal ne peut pas afficher. N Les options de format d’image peuvent varier en fonction de la source d’entrée. N Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction du mode sélectionné. N En mode PC, seuls les modes 16:9 et 4:3 peuvent être réglés. N Lorsque le mode PIP est réglé sur double ( , ), l’option Format de l’image est désactivée. N Vous pouvez régler et enregistrer des paramètres pour chaque périphérique externe connecté à une entrée du téléviseur. N Une rémanence temporaire peut se produire si vous affichez une image statique pendant plus de deux heures sur l’écran du téléviseur. N Zoom large : Appuyez sur le bouton ► pour sélectionner Position, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour déplacer l’écran vers le haut ou le bas. Appuyez ensuite sur le bouton ENTERE. N Zoom : Appuyez sur le bouton ► pour sélectionner Position, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour déplacer l’image vers le haut et vers le bas. Appuyez ensuite sur le bouton ENTERE. Appuyez sur le bouton ► pour sélectionner Format, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour augmenter ou réduire la hauteur de l’image. Appuyez ensuite sur le bouton ENTERE. N Après avoir sélectionné l’option Adapter à l’écran dans le mode HDMI (1080i / 1080p) ou Composant (1080i / 1080p) : sélectionnez Position à l’aide du bouton ◄ ou ►. Utilisez le bouton ▲, ▼, ◄ ou ► pour déplacer l’image. N Réinit. : appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner Réinit., puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. Vous pouvez initialiser le réglage. N Si vous utilisez la fonction Adapter à l’écran avec l’entrée HDMI 720p, une ligne sera coupée en haut, en bas, à gauche et à droite, comme avec la fonction Overscan (Surbalayage). „ Mode écran → 16:9 / Zoom large / Zoom / 4:3 Lorsque vous réglez le format d’image sur 16:9 auto sur un téléviseur 16:9, vous pouvez déterminer le format d’affichage d’une image 4:3 WSS, service d’écran large ou rien. Chaque pays européen emploie un format d’image cette fonction permet aux utilisateurs de sélectionner le leur. N Cette fonction n’est disponible qu’en mode 16:9 auto. N Cette fonction n’est pas disponible en mode PC, Composant ni HDMI. Suite... Teinte (V/R) : V50 / R50 Paramètres avancés Options d’ image ► Réinitialisation de l’ image Image BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 16 10/20/2009 4:58:44 PMFrançais - 17 „ NR numérique → Arrêt / Bas / Moyen / Elevé / Auto. Si le signal de radiodiffusion reçu est faible, vous pouvez activer la fonction de réduction du bruit numérique (NR numérique) pour faciliter la réduction d’images fantômes ou statiques qui peuvent apparaître à l’écran. N Lorsque le signal est faible, sélectionnez une autre option jusqu’à obtention de la meilleure image possible. „ Niv. noir HDMI → Normal / Bas Vous pouvez choisir le niveau de noir pour régler la profondeur de l’écran. N Cette fonction n’est active que si l’entrée externe se connecte à HDMI (signaux RVB). „ 1080 Full HD Motion Demo → Arrêt / Marche La nouvelle génération d’écrans à plasma de Samsung’s offre des images animées Full HD étonnantes lorsque vous regardez du sport, des films ou des jeux d’action. N Cette fonction n’est pas disponible en mode PC, Jeu, ni Media Play. „ Mode Film Vous pouvez optimiser le mode d’image lorsque vous regardez des films. • Arrêt : désactive la fonction Mode Film. • Auto.1 : Fournit automatiquement la meilleure qualité d’image lorsque vous regardez un film. • Auto.2 : Optimise automatiquement le texte vidéo lorsque vous regardez un film. • Cinema Smooth : Offre une expérience cinéma ultime. N Le mode Film est pris en charge avec les modes TV, Vidéo, Composant(480i / 1080i) et HDMI(1080i). „ Démo 100 Hz réel → Arrêt / Marche Vous pouvez clairement voir la différence entre 100Hz réel et 50 Hz, surtout lorsque vous regardez des scènes rapides. Lorsqu’une image lente est affichée, vous ne serez pas en mesure de faire la distinction entre 100Hz réel et 50Hz. La fonction Démo 100 Hz n’est disponible qu’avec un signal 50 Hz. Le mode Démo 100Hz réel est fourni pour des démonstrations en magasin avec des images spéciales. „ Mode bleu uniquement → Arrêt / Marche Cette fonction est destinée aux spécialistes de mesure des appareils AV. Cette fonction affiche le signal bleu en supprimant simplement les signaux rouge et vert du signal vidéo, de manière à fournir un effet Filtre bleu utilisé pour régler la couleur et la teinte de l’équipement vidéo, tel que des lecteurs de DVD, systèmes de cinéma à domicile, etc. N Mode bleu uniquement n’est disponible que si le mode d’image est réglé sur Film ou Standard. „ Protection brûlure écran Pour réduire le risque de brûlure d’écran, cet écran est équipé d’une technologie de prévention des brûlures qui permet de régler le mouvement de l’image de bas en haut (vertical) et de gauche à droite (horizontal). Le réglage de l’horloge permet de programmer en quelques minutes la durée séparant les mouvements de l’image. • Modif. Pixel : Cette fonction permet de déplacer les pixels sur l’écran à plasma dans le sens vertical ou horizontal, afin d’éviter une image résiduelle sur l’écran. N Conditions optimales pour la modification des pixels Option TV/Ext/AV/Composant/HDMI PC Horizontal 0~2 2 Vertical 0~4 4 Horloge (minute) 1~4 min 2 min N La valeur de Pixel Shift (Modif. Pixel) peut changer selon le mode et la taille du moniteur (pouces). N Cette fonction n’est pas disponible en mode Adapter à l’écran. • Défilement : Cette fonction contribue à supprimer les images résiduelles à l’écran en déplaçant tous les pixels sur l’écran à plasma, selon un motif prédéfini. Utilisez cette fonction lorsque des images résiduelles ou des symboles apparaissent à l’écran, en particulier lorsque vous affichez une image fixe à l’écran pendant une longue période. • Gris de bord : Si vous regardez la télévision dans un rapport d’écran 4:3, l’écran est protégé contre tout dommage grâce à l’ajustement de la balance des blancs sur les côtés gauche et droit. - Clair : Si le rapport d’écran est défini sur 4:3, les bords gauche et droit sont éclaircis. - Sombre : Si le rapport d’écran est défini sur 4:3, les bords gauche et droit sont assombris. Suite... BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 17 10/20/2009 4:58:44 PMFrançais - 18 Configuration du téléviseur avec le PC N Préréglage : Appuyez sur le bouton SOURCE pour sélectionner le mode PC. ❑ Réglage Automatique Le réglage automatique permet l’ajustement automatique de l’écran du PC affiché sur le téléviseur en fonction du signal vidéo entrant du PC. Les valeurs des options Regl. Prec, Regl. Base et Position sont définies automatiquement. N Cette fonction ne s’applique pas en mode DVI-HDMI. T Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS pour afficher le menu Outils. Vous pouvez également configurer l’option Réglage Automatique en sélectionnant Outils → Réglage Automatique. ❑ Ecran Lorsque vous réglez la qualité de l’image, l’objectif est d’éliminer ou de réduire les parasites visuels. Si vous ne pouvez pas éliminer ces parasites par une syntonisation fine, réglez la fréquence (Regl. Base) au mieux, puis effectuez de nouveau une syntonisation fine. Une fois les parasites réduits, effectuez un nouveau réglage de l’image pour l’aligner au centre de l’écran. „ Regl. Base Règle la fréquence lorsque du bruit vertical apparaît à l’écran. „ Regl. Prec Eclaircit l’écran. „ Position du PC Réglez la position d’affichage du PC si elle ne convient pas pour l’écran du téléviseur. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour régler la position verticale. Appuyez sur le bouton ◄ ou ► pour régler la position horizontale. „ Réinitialiser Image Vous pouvez rétablir les valeurs par défaut de tous les réglages d’image. ❑ Réinitialisation de l’image → Réinitial. mode image / Annuler Rétablit toutes les valeurs par défaut des paramètres de l’image. N Sélectionnez un mode d’image à rétablir. La fonction de réinitialisation est exécutée pour chaque mode d’image. Luminosité : 45 Netteté : 50 Réglage Automatique ► Ecran Paramètres avancés Options d’ image Réinitialisation de l’ image Image Picture Paramètres avancés Options d’ image Réinitialisation de l’ image ► Image BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 18 10/20/2009 4:58:44 PMFrançais - 19 Ecran du PC ❑ Configuration de votre logiciel PC (instructions basées sur Windows XP) Les paramètres d’affichage Windows indiqués ci-dessous sont ceux d’un ordinateur type. Les affichages à l’écran sur votre PC seront probablement différents, en fonction de votre version de Windows et votre carte vidéo. Cependant, même si les affichages diffèrent, les informations de configuration de base s’appliquent dans la plupart des cas. Dans le cas contraire, contactez le fabricant de votre ordinateur ou votre revendeur Samsung. 1. Cliquez sur “Panneau de configuration” dans le menu Démarrer de Windows. 2. Lorsque vous êtes sur l’écran du panneau de configuration, cliquez sur “Apparence et thèmes”. Une boîte de dialogue apparaît. 3. Cliquez sur “Affichage”. Une boîte de dialogue vous propose des options d’affichage. 4. Sélectionnez l’onglet “Paramètres” dans la boîte de dialogue. Le réglage correct de la taille (résolution) optimal : 1920 X 1080 pixels S’il existe une option de fréquence verticale sur votre boîte de dialogue des paramètres d’affichage, la valeur correcte est “60” ou “60 Hz”. Sinon, cliquez simplement sur “OK” pour quitter la boîte de dialogue. ❑ Modes d’affichage La taille et la position de l’écran varient en fonction du type d’écran et de sa résolution. Les résolutions indiquées dans le tableau ci-dessous sont recommandées. N Lorsque vous utilisez une connexion avec câble HDMI/DVI, vous devez utiliser la borne HDMI IN 2(DVI). N Le mode entrelacé n’est pas pris en charge. N Le téléviseur peut fonctionner de façon anormale si le format vidéo sélectionné n’est pas standard. N Les modes Séparé et Composite sont pris en charge. SOG (SVSV) n’est pas pris en charge. N Un câble VGA trop long ou de qualité médiocre peut être source de parasites visuels dans les modes haute résolution (1920 x 1080). „ Entrée D-Sub et HDMI/DVI Mode Résolution Fréquence horizontale (KHz) Fréquence verticale (kHz) Fréquence de l’horloge pixels (MHhz) Polarité synchronisée (H/V) IBM 640 x 350 31.469 70.086 25.175 + / - 720 x 400 31.469 70.087 28.322 - / + MAC 640 x 480 35.000 66.667 30.240 - / - 832 x 624 49.726 74.551 57.284 - / - 1152 x 870 68.681 75.062 100.000 - / + VESA CVT 720 x 576 35.910 59.950 32.750 - / + 1152 x 864 53.783 59.959 81.750 - / + 1280 x 720 44.772 59.855 74.500 - / + 56.456 74.777 95.750 - / + 1280 x 960 75.231 74.857 130.000 - / + VESA DMT 640 x 480 31.469 59.940 25.175 - / - 37.861 72.809 31.500 - / - 37.500 75.000 31.500 - / - 800 x 600 37.879 60.317 40.000 + / + 800 x 600 48.077 72.188 50.000 + / + 800 x 600 46.875 75.000 49.500 + / + 1024 x 768 48.363 60.004 65.000 - / - 56.476 70.069 75.000 - / - 60.023 75.029 78.750 + / + 1152 x 864 67.500 75.000 108.000 + / + 1280 x 800 49.702 59.810 83.500 - / + 62.795 74.934 106.500 - / + 1280 x 960 60.000 60.000 108.000 + / + 1280 x 1024 63.981 60.020 108.000 + / + 79.976 75.025 135.000 + / + 1360 x 768 47.712 60.015 85.500 + / + 1440 x 900 55.935 59.887 106.500 - / + 70.635 74.984 136.750 - / + 1680 x 1050 65.290 59.954 146.250 - / + VESA DMT / DTV CEA 1920 x 1080p 67.500 60.000 148.500 + / + VESA GTF 1280 x 720 52.500 70.000 89.040 - / + 1280 x 1024 74.620 70.000 128.943 - / - BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 19 10/20/2009 4:58:45 PMFrançais - 20 Changement de la norme Son ❑ Mode Vous pouvez sélectionner le type d’effet sonore souhaité lorsque vous regardez un programme donné. „ Standard / Musique / Film / Voix claire / Personnel T Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS pour afficher le menu Outils. Vous pouvez également régler le mode son en sélectionnant Outils → Mode son. ❑ Egaliseur Vous pouvez régler les paramètres du son en fonction de vos préférences. • Mode : vous pouvez sélectionner un mode son conforme à vos préférences. • Balance : Définit la balance entre les haut-parleurs droit et gauche. • 100Hz / 300Hz / 1KHz / 3KHz / 10KHz (réglage de la bande passante) : Permet de régler le niveau de fréquences de la bande passante. • Réinit. : Rétablit les valeurs par défaut de l’égaliseur. ❑ SRS TruSurround HD → Arrêt / Marche SRS TruSurround HD correspond à la technologie TruBass qui associe les fonctionnalités TruSurround et FOCUS. SRS TruSurround HD permet de bénéficier du son Surround 5.1 virtuel au niveau des deux haut-parleurs du téléviseur. Cette fonction offre des basses riches et améliore la résolution des hautes fréquences. T Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS pour afficher le menu Outils. Vous pouvez également définir l’option SRS TruSurround HD en sélectionnant Outils → SRS TS HD. TruSurround HD, SRS et le symbole sont des marques de SRS Labs, Inc. La technologie TruSurround HD est incorporée sous licence de SRS Labs, Inc.. N Si le son est anormal lors de l’écoute de musique sur le téléviseur, réglez l’égaliseur et la fonction SRS TruSurround HD (Arrêt / Marche). ❑ Langue audio (Chaînes numériques uniquement) Vous pouvez modifier la langue par défaut des sous-titres et de l’audio. Affiche les informations relatives à la langue pour le flot d’entrée. N Vous pouvez sélectionner la langue uniquement parmi les langues en cours de diffusion. ❑ Format Audio → MPEG / Dolby Digital (Chaînes numériques uniquement) Lorsque le son est émis à la fois par le haut-parleur principal et le récepteur audio, un effet d’écho peut se produire en raison de la différence de vitesse de décodage entre le haut-parleur principal et le récepteur audio. Dans ce cas, utilisez la fonction Haut-parleur TV. N Vous pouvez sélectionner la langue uniquement parmi les langues en cours de diffusion. Fabriqué sous licence de Dolby Laboratories. Dolby et le symbole du double D sont des marques déposées de Dolby Laboratories. ❑ Description audio (Chaînes numériques uniquement) Il s’agit d’une fonction audio auxiliaire qui fournit une piste audio supplémentaire à l’intention des personnes malvoyantes. Cette fonction traite le flux audio relatif à la description audio (AD) lorsqu’il est envoyé avec le son principal par le radiodiffuseur. Les utilisateurs peuvent activer ou désactiver la description audio et régler le volume. O Vous pouvez sélectionner ces options en appuyant sur le bouton AD de la télécommande. „ Description audio → Arrêt / Marche Active ou désactive la fonction de description audio. „ Volume Règle le volume de la description audio. N Volume est actif lorsque Description audio est défini sur Marche. Réglage du son Mode : Personnel ► Egaliseur SRS TruSurround HD : Arrêt Langue audio : ---- Format Audio : ---- Description audio Volume auto : Arrêt Sélection Haut-parleur : Haut-parleur TV Son BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 20 10/20/2009 4:58:46 PMFrançais - 21 ❑ Volume auto → Arrêt / Marche Chaque station de télédiffusion possède ses propres conditions de signal. Il n’est donc pas facile de régler le volume chaque fois que vous changez de chaîne. Cette fonction permet de régler automatiquement le volume du canal désiré en réduisant la sortie son lorsque le signal de modulation est puissant ou en l’augmentant lorsque le signal est faible. ❑ Sélection du haut-parleur → Haut-parleur externe / Haut-parleur TV Pour entendre le son par l’intermédiaire d’enceintes séparées, désactivez l’amplificateur interne. N Les boutons – +, M MUTE ne fonctionnent pas lorsque la fonction Sélection du haut-parleur est définie sur Hautparleur externe. N Si vous sélectionnez Haut-parleur externe dans le menu Sélection du haut-parleur, les réglages du son sont limités. Haut-parleurs internes du téléviseur Sortie audio (Optique, Sortie G/D) vers système audio TV / Ext. / AV / Composant / PC / HDMI TV / Ext. / AV / Composant / PC / HDMI Haut-parleur TV Sortie enceinte Sortie son Haut-parleur externe Silence Sortie son Absence de signal vidéo Silence Silence ❑ Sélection du son Lorsque la fonction PIP est activée, vous pouvez écouter le son de l’image secondaire (l’image PIP). • Principal : Active le son de l’image principale. • Secondaire : Active le son de l’image secondaire. T Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS pour afficher le menu Outils. Vous pouvez également régler le mode sonore de l’image secondaire en sélectionnant Outils → PIP → Sélection du son. N Vous pouvez sélectionner cette option lorsque le mode PIP est réglé sur Marche. ❑ Réinitialisation du son „ Réinitial. tout / Réinitial. mode son / Annuler : Vous pouvez rétablir les valeurs par défaut des paramètres audio. Sélection du mode son Lorsque vous réglez cette option sur Dual l ll, le mode son actuel est affiché à l’écran. Type de programme Indication à l’écran NICAM Stéréo Programme normal (Audio standard) Mono (utilisation normale) Normal + Mono NICAM NICAM Mono (Normal) NICAM Stéréo NICAM Stereo Mono (Normal) NICAM Dual-I/II NICAM Dual-1 NICAM Dual-2 Mono (Normal) A2 Stéréo Programme normal (Audio standard) Mono (utilisation normale) Bilingue ou DUAL-I/II Dual I Dual II Stéréo Stéréo Mono (Mono forcé) N Si le signal stéréo est faible et qu’une commutation automatique se produit, passez alors en Mono. N Cette fonction n’est activée qu’en son stéréo. Elle est désactivée en mode mono. N Cette fonction n’est disponible qu’en mode TV. T Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS pour afficher le menu Outils. Vous pouvez également sélectionner le mode son en sélectionnant Outils → Dual l ll. Sélection Haut-parleur : Haut-parleur TV Sélection du son : Principal Réinitialisation du son ► Son BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 21 10/20/2009 4:58:46 PMFrançais - 22 Description des Fonctions Réglage de l’heure ❑ Horloge Le réglage de l’horloge est nécessaire pour utiliser les différentes fonctions de minuterie de la télévision. N L’heure actuelle s’affiche à chaque fois que vous appuyez sur le bouton INFO. N Si vous débranchez le cordon d’alimentation, vous devez régler de nouveau l’horloge. „ Mode Horloge Vous pouvez régler l’heure actuelle manuellement ou automatiquement. • Auto. : Règle automatiquement l’heure en fonction de signaux diffusés. • Manuel : Permet de régler l’heure manuellement. „ Réglage Horloge Vous pouvez régler manuellement l’heure actuelle. N Activez cette option lorsque Mode Horloge est défini sur Manuel. N Vous pouvez régler directement les valeurs Jour, Mois, Année, Heure, Minute en appuyant sur les touches numériques de la télécommande. ❑ Veille → Arrêt / 30 min / 60 min / 90 min / 120 min / 150 min / 180 min La minuterie de mise en veille éteint automatiquement la télévision après une durée préréglée (30, 60, 90, 120, 150 ou 180 minutes). N Le téléviseur passe automatiquement en mode veille lorsque la minuterie atteint 0. N Pour annuler la fonction Veille, sélectionnez Arrêt. T Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS pour afficher le menu Outils. Vous pouvez également régler la minuterie de mise en veille en sélectionnant Outils → Veille. ❑ Minuteur 1 / Minuteur 2 / Minuteur 3 Vous pouvez régler l’heure à laquelle vous souhaitez éteindre ou allumer le téléviseur. • Période d’activation : Règle l’heure à laquelle vous souhaitez allumer le téléviseur. • Période de désactivation : Règle l’heure à laquelle vous souhaitez éteindre le téléviseur. • Volume : Règle le niveau du volume. • Source : Sélectionne le téléviseur, USB le périphérique. N Lorsque vous sélectionnez TV, vous pouvez régler l’Antenne et le Canal. - Antenne : Permet de sélectionner l’option Hertzien ou Câble. - Canal : Permet de sélectionner la chaîne de votre choix. N Lorsque vous sélectionnez USB, vous pouvez régler le Contenu. - Contenu : Sélectionne le contenu souhaité sur USB. N Si le périphérique USB ne contient aucun fichier musical ou si le dossier contenant un fichier musical n'est pas sélectionné, la fonction de veille ne fonctionne pas correctement. • Répétition : Sélectionnez Une fois, Ts jours, Lun~Ven, Lun~Sam, Sam~Dim ou Manuel. N Lorsque Manuel est sélectionné, appuyez sur le bouton ► pour sélectionner le jour de votre choix. Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE sur le jour de votre choix. Le symbole c apparaît alors. N TTout le dossier présent sur le périphérique USB prend en charge les caractères Anglais 64. N Vous devez préalablement régler l’horloge. N Vous pouvez régler l’heure, la minute et la chaîne directement à l’aide des touches numériques de la télécommande. N Arrêt automatique Lorsque vous réglez la minuterie sur Marche, le téléviseur s’éteint si aucune commande n’est utilisée dans les 3 heures qui suivent la mise sous tension par le minuteur. Cette fonction est disponible uniquement lorsque la minuterie est réglée sur Marche, elle permet d’éviter toute surchauffe occasionnée par une utilisation prolongée du téléviseur. Horloge Horloge : -- : -- ► Veille : Arrêt Minuteur 1 : Désactivé Minuteur 2 : Désactivé Minuteur 3 : Désactivé U Dépl. E Entrer R Retour Configuration Plug & Play langue des menus : Français Horloge ► Diffuser Sécurité Réseau Général BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 22 10/20/2009 4:58:46 PMFrançais - 23 Réglage du menu Configuration ❑ Langue des menus Vous pouvez sélectionner la langue des menus. ❑ Diffuser „ Sous-titres Vous pouvez activer ou désactiver les sous-titres. Utilisez ce menu pour définir le mode des sous-titres. Normal s’affiche sous le menu pour les sous-titres de base. Malentendants correspond aux sous-titres destinés aux personnes malentendantes. • Sous-titres → Arrêt / Marche : Active ou désactive les sous-titres. • Mode → Normal / Malentendants : Définit le mode des sous-titres. • Langue des sous-titres : Configure la langue des sous-titres. N Si le programme visionné n’offre pas de fonction Malentendants, le mode Normal est automatiquement activé même si le mode Malentendants est sélectionné. N L’anglais est la langue par défaut si la langue sélectionnée n’est pas diffusée. O Vous pouvez sélectionner ces options en appuyant sur le bouton SUBT. de la télécommande. „ Texte numérique → Désactiver / Activer Si le programme est diffusé avec du textebv numérique, cette fonction est activée. N MHEG (Multimedia and Hypermedia Information Coding Experts Group) Norme internationale pour les systèmes de codage des données utilisés avec le multimédia et l’hypermédia. Niveau supérieur à celui du système MPEG, qui inclut de l’hypermédia à liaison de données tel que des images fixes, le service de caractères, l’animation, les fichiers graphiques et vidéo et les données multimédia. MHEG est une technologie d’interaction de l’utilisateur en cours d’utilisation appliquée à divers domaines, dont la vidéo à la demande (VOD), la télévision interactive (ITV), le commerce électronique, la téléformation, la téléconférence, les bibliothèques numériques et les jeux en réseau. „ Langue du télétexte Vous pouvez définir la langue du télétexte en sélectionnant le type de langue. N L’anglais est la langue par défaut si la langue sélectionnée n’est pas diffusée. „ Préférence • Première Langue Audio / Deuxième Langue Audio / Langue princ. sous-titres / Langue sec. sous-titres / Première Langue Télétexte / Deuxième Langue Télétexte Cette fonction permet de sélectionner une langue. La langue sélectionnée ici est la langue par défaut lorsque l’utilisateur sélectionne un canal. Si vous changez la langue, les options Langue des sous-titres, Langue audio et Langue du télétexte du menu Langue sont automatiquement modifiées en conséquence. Ces options présentent une liste des langues prises en charge par la chaîne actuelle et la langue sélectionnée est affichée en surbrillance. Si vous modifiez le paramètre de la langue, la nouvelle sélection n’est valable que pour la chaîne actuelle. Le nouveau paramétrage n’affecte pas le réglage de l’option Langue princ. sous-titres, Première Langue Audio ou Première Langue Télétexte du menu Préférence. „ Interface commune • Installation de la carte d’interface commune CI(CI+) 1. Achetez le module CI(CI+) CAM en vous rendant chez le revendeur le plus proche ou par téléphone. 2. Insérez la carte d'interface commune (CI(CI+) CARD) dans le CAM (module d'accès commun) dans le sens indiqué par la flèche jusqu'à ce qu'elle se loge en place. 3. Insérez le CAM avec la carte d'interface commune (CI(CI+) CARD) installée dans la fente de l'interface commune N Insérez la CAM dans le sens indiqué par la flèche, tout droit à fond, pour qu'elle soit parallèle à la fente. 4. Vérifiez si une image est visible sur un canal à signal brouillé.channel. • CI(CI+) Menu Permet à l’utilisateur d’opérer une sélection dans le menu du module CAM. Sélectionnez le menu (CI(CI+) dans le menu PC Card. • Infos sur l’application Contient et affiche des informations sur le module CAM inséré dans le logement de l’interface commune. Les informations sur l’application concernent la carte d’interface commune. Vous pouvez installer la CAM que le téléviseur soit allumé ou éteint. N La carte d'interface commune (CI(CI+) CARD) n'est pas prise en charge dans certains pays, dans dans certaines régions ni par certaines stations de diffusion ; vérifiez auprès de votre revendeur agréé. Suite... Configuration Plug & Play Langue des menus : Français ► Horloge Diffuser Sécurité Réseau Général BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 23 10/20/2009 4:58:47 PMFrançais - 24 ❑ Sécurité N Certains modèles exigent la sélection du code PIN défini pour autoriser l'utilisation de Plug & Play. „ Verrouillage Canal → Arrêt / Marche Cette fonction, qui bloque la vidéo et coupe le son, vous permet d’éviter toute utilisation non autorisée du téléviseur, par des enfants par exemple, qui pourraient visionner des programmes qui ne leur sont pas destinés. N Avant que l’écran de configuration s’affiche, l’écran de saisie du code PIN apparaît. Entrez votre code PIN à quatre chiffres. N Le code PIN par défaut d’un nouveau téléviseur est ‘0-0-0-0’. Vous pouvez modifier le code PIN en sélectionnant Modifier PIN dans le menu. N Vous pouvez verrouiller certaines chaînes dans la liste des chaînes. (Reportez-vous à la page 14) N Verrouillage Canal est disponible uniquement en mode TV. „ Verrouillage parental Cette fonction vous permet d’éviter toute utilisation non autorisée, par des enfants par exemple, qui pourraient visionner des programmes ne leur étant pas destinés par un code PIN à chiffres (code d’identification personnelle) défini par l’utilisateur. N L’option de classement parental diffère en fonction du pays. N L’écran de saisie du code PIN s’affiche avant l’écran de configuration. Entrez votre code PIN à quatre chiffres. N Le code PIN par défaut d’un nouveau téléviseur est ‘0-0-0-0’. Vous pouvez modifier le code PIN en sélectionnant Modifier PIN dans le menu. N Une fois le classement parental défini, le symbole “\” s’affiche. N Autor.tout / Bloq. tout : permet de verrouiller ou de déverrouiller tous les classements TV. „ Modifier PIN Vous pouvez modifier le code personnel demandé pour pouvoir configurer le téléviseur. N Avant que l’écran de configuration s’affiche, l’écran de saisie du code PIN apparaît. Entrez votre code PIN à quatre chiffres. (Le code PIN par défaut est ‘0-0-0-0’) N Si vous avez oublié le code, appuyez sur les boutons de la télécommande dans l’ordre suivant, ce qui rétablit le code ‘0-0-0-0’ : POWER (Arrêt), MMUTE, 8, 2, 4, POWER (Marche). ❑ Général „ Mode Jeu → Arrêt / Marche En reliant le téléviseur à une console de jeu telle que PlayStation TM ou Xbox TM , vous pouvez profiter d’une expérience de jeu plus réaliste en sélectionnant le menu de jeu. • Lorsque le mode jeu est défini sur Marche - le Mode Image est automatiquement défini sur Standard et ne peut pas être changé. - le Mode Son est automatiquement défini sur Personnel et ne peut pas être changé. Réglez le son à l’aide de l’égaliseur. - La fonction Réinit. du menu Son est activée. Elle rétablit les valeurs par défaut de l’égaliseur. N le Mode Jeu n’est pas disponible en mode TV classique ou lorsqu’il est défini sur Arrêt. N Si l’image est de mauvaise qualité alors qu’un périphérique externe est connecté au téléviseur, vérifiez l’état du Mode Jeu. N Si vous affichez le menu TV en Mode Jeu, l’écran tremble légèrement. N La marque s’affiche à l’écran. Elle signifie que le Mode Jeu est défini sur Marche avec la source sélectionnée. N Cette fonction ne prend en charge que la fonction Jeu. N le Mode Jeu n’est pas disponible en mode PC. „ BD Wise → Arrêt / Marche Wise est une fonction qui vous permet de régler automatiquement et de manière optimale tous les appareils Samsung connectés compatibles avec BD Wise. N Cette fonction n’est active que si un appareil externe est relié au téléviseur via la prise HDMI. N Lorsque la fonction BD Wise est définie sur On, le mode d’image est réglé automatiquement. „ Mode éco. → Arr. / Bas / Moyen / Elevé / Image désactivée Cette fonction règle la luminosité du téléviseur afin de réduire la consommation d’énergie. Lorsque vous regardez la télévision le soir, réglez l’option du mode Mode éco. pour reposer vos yeux et réduire la consommation d’énergie. Si vous sélectionnez Image désactivée, l’écran s’éteint. Seul le son est émis. Appuyez à nouveau sur ce bouton pour désactiver la fonction Image désactivée. N La function Image désactivée n’est pas prise en charge dans le menu Outils. BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 24 10/20/2009 4:58:47 PMFrançais - 25 T Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS pour afficher le menu Outils. Vous pouvez également définir l’option Mode éco. en sélectionnant Outils → Mode éco. „ Transparence du menu Vous pouvez régler la transparence du menu sur écran. • Lumineux : Règle le menu à l'écran sur normal. • Sombre : Règle le menu à l'écran sur opaque. „ Mélodie → Arrêt / Bas / Moyen / Elevé Vous pouvez régler la mélodie diffusée lorsque vous allumez ou éteignez le téléviseur. N Aucune mélodie n’est lue dans les cas suivants - Aucun son n’est émis par le téléviseur car le bouton M MUTE a été enfoncé. - Aucun son n’est émis par le téléviseur car le bouton – (Volume) a été enfoncé. - Lorsque le téléviseur est mis hors tension par la fonction Veille. „ Effet lumineux (PS58B680/PS63B680 uniquement) Vous pouvez allumer/éteindre la LED bleue à l’avant de votre téléviseur en fonction de la situation. Utilisez cette fonction pour économiser de l’énergie ou si l’intensité du voyant vous gêne. • Arrêt : la LED bleue est toujours éteinte. • En veille : La LED bleue est allumée en mode veille et éteinte quand le téléviseur est sous tension. • En marche : La LED bleue est allumée quand vous regardez la télévision et éteinte quand le téléviseur est hors tension. • Toujours : La LED bleue est toujours allumée. Visualisation d’une image dans l’image Vous pouvez afficher une image secondaire dans l’image principale du programme télévisé ou de l’entrée vidéo. De cette manière, vous pouvez regarder ou surveiller le programme télévisé ou l’entrée vidéo depuis n’importe quel équipement branché tout en regardant l’image principale. N Il est possible que l’image de la fenêtre PIP devienne légèrement anormale lorsque vous utilisez l’écran principal pour jouer à un jeu ou faire un karaoké. T Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS pour afficher le menu Outils. Vous pouvez également régler les paramètres de la fonction PIP en sélectionnant Outils → PIP. ❑ PIP → Arrêt / Marche Vous pouvez activer ou désactiver la fonction PIP. Image principale Image secondaire Component HDMI 1, HDMI2/DVI, HDMI 3, HDMI 4 PC TV „ Format → / / / Vous pouvez régler la taille de l’image secondaire. N Si l’image principale est en mode HDMI, l’option Taille est accessible. „ Position → / / / Vous pouvez sélectionner la position de l’image secondaire. N En mode Double ( , ), l’option Position est désactivée. „ Canal Vous pouvez sélectionner la chaîne affichée dans l’image secondaire. PIP PIP : Arrêt ► Format : Position : Canal : ATV 1 E Entrer R Retour Général Mode Jeu : Arrêt BD Wise : Arrêt Mode éco. : Arrêt Transparence du menu : Lumineux Mélodie : Moyen PIP ► U Dépl. E Entrer R Retour BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 25 10/20/2009 4:58:48 PMFrançais - 26 Programme pris en charge ❑ Avis juridique Vous pouvez afficher l’avis juridique et l’avis de non-responsabilité relatif au contenu et aux services tiers. „ Avis de non-responsabilité Avis juridique complet relatif à Internet@TV. N L’avis de non-responsabilité peut varier en fonction du pays. N Vous pouvez passer à la page précédente ou suivante en appuyant sur le bouton ◄ ou ►. ❑ Guide Produit Le Guide Produit vous donne des informations sur les fonctions les plus importantes de ce téléviseur. N Pour plus d’informations, sélectionnez l’élément souhaité. ❑ Diagnostic automatique „ Test de l’image Si vous pensez que l’image n’est pas optimale, exécutez le test d’image. Vérifiez la mire de couleur à l’écran pour voir si le problème persiste. N Le message “Le problème persiste-t-il pour cette photo ?” s’affiche à l’écran. Si la mire de couleur n’apparaît pas où si elle est parasitée, sélectionnez Oui. Si la mire de couleur s’affiche correctement, sélectionnez Non. • Oui : Il se peut que le téléviseur soit défaillant. Demandez de l’aide au centre d’appel de Samsung. • Non : Il se peut que l’équipement externe soit défaillant. Vérifiez les connexions. Si le problème persiste, reportez-vous au mode d’emploi du périphérique externe. „ Test du son Si vous pensez que le son n’est pas optimal, exécutez le test du son. Vous pouvez contrôler le son en diffusant une mélodie préenregistrée sur le téléviseur. N Le message “Le problème persiste-t-il pour ce test du son ?” s’affiche à l’écran. Si, pendant le test du son, vous n’entendez du son que d’un haut-parleur ou pas de son du tout, sélectionnez Oui. Si vous entendez du son des haut-parleurs, sélectionnez Non. • Oui : Il se peut que le téléviseur soit défaillant. Demandez de l’aide au centre d’appel de Samsung. • Non : Il se peut que l’équipement externe soit défaillant. Vérifiez les connexions. Si le problème persiste, reportez-vous au mode d’emploi du périphérique externe. N Si les haut-parleurs du téléviseur restent muets, avant d’effectuer le test du son, vérifiez que l’option Sélection du haut-parleur est réglée sur Haut-parleur TV dans le menu Son. N La mélodie est diffusée pendant le test, même si l’option Sélection du haut-parleur est réglée sur Ht-parl ext ou si le son a été désactivé en appuyant sur le bouton M MUTE. „ Informations de signal (chaînes numériques uniquement) Vous avez la possibilité de régler votre antenne pour améliorer la réception des chaînes numériques disponibles. N Si l’indicateur d’intensité du signal indique que celui-ci est faible, réglez physiquement votre antenne afin d’en augmenter l’intensité. Continuez à régler l’antenne jusqu’à ce que trouver la position offrant le signal le plus puissant. Assistance / Entrée BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 26 10/20/2009 4:58:48 PMFrançais - 27 Liste Source / Modif. Nom ❑ Liste Source Permet de sélectionner le téléviseur ou d’autres sources d’entrée externes comme les lecteurs DVD ou les décodeurs câble/récepteurs satellite (boîtiers décodeurs) connectés au téléviseur. Permet de sélectionner la source d’entrée de votre choix. „ TV, Ext.1, Ext.2, AV, Composant, PC, HDMI1, HDMI2/DVI, HDMI3, HDMI4, USB. N Vous ne pouvez sélectionner que les périphériques externes connectés au téléviseur. Dans la liste des sources, les entrées connectées sont mises en surbrillance et affichées en début de liste. Les entrées non connectées apparaissent dans le bas de la liste N Utilisation des boutons de couleur de la télécommande dans la liste des sources - Rouge (Actualiser) : Actualise la liste des périphériques externes se connectant. - T TOOLS (Outils): Affiche les menus Modif. Nom et Informations. O Appuyez sur le bouton SOURCE de la télécommande pour afficher une source de signal externe. ❑ Modif. Nom Vous pouvez nommer le périphérique connecté aux prises d’entrée pour faciliter la sélection de la source d’entrée. „ VCR / DVD / Décodeur Câble / Décodeur satellite / Décodeur PVR / Récepteur AV / Jeu / Caméscope / PC / DVI / DVI PC / TV / IPTV / Blu-ray / HD DVD / DMA N Lorsqu’un PC avec une résolution de 1920 x 1080 à 60 Hz est branché au port HDMI IN 2(DVI), vous devez régler le mode HDMI2/DVI sur PC dans l’option Modif. Nom du mode d’entrée. ❑ Mise à niveau du logiciel Pour garder le produit à jour avec les nouvelles fonctions de télévision numérique, des mises à jour logicielles sont régulièrement diffusées via le signal de télévision normal. Le téléviseur détecte automatiquement ces signaux et affiche la bannière de mise à jour logicielle. Vous avez le choix d’installer ou non la mise à jour. „ USB Insérez dans le téléviseur un lecteur USB contenant la mise à niveau du microprogramme. Veillez à ne pas couper l’alimentation ni retirer le lecteur USB pendant l’application des mises à niveau. Une fois la mise à niveau du micrologiciel terminée, le téléviseur se met automatiquement hors puis sous tension. Vérifiez la version du micrologiciel une fois les mises à niveau terminées. Lorsque le logiciel est mis à niveau, les paramètres vidéo et audio définis reprennent leur valeur par défaut (d’usine). „ Canal Met à niveau le logiciel à l’aide du signal diffusé. N Si elle est sélectionnée pendant la période de transmission du logiciel, cette fonction recherche le logiciel disponible et le télécharge. N Le temps nécessaire au téléchargement du logiciel dépend de l’état du signal. „ Mise à niveau en mode veille Pour poursuivre la mise à jour du logiciel en gardant le téléviseur sous tension, sélectionnez Marche en appuyant sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼. Une mise à jour manuelle a lieu automatiquement 45 minutes après l’entrée en mode veille. Etant donné que le courant est activé de façon interne, l’écran peut s’allumer brièvement pour le produit. Le phénomène peut se poursuivre durant une heure jusqu’à ce que la mise à jour logicielle soit terminée. „ Autre logiciel Remplace le logiciel actuel. N Si le logiciel a été modifié, la version existante s’affiche. N Vous pouvez passer à la version de sauvegarde du logiciel en sélectionnant “Autre logiciel”. ❑ Guide de connexion HD Une brève instruction concernant la manière d’obtenir le meilleur de votre téléviseur HDTV s’affiche. Nous offrons le mode de connexion des périphériques HD. N Pour passer à la page précédente ou suivante, appuyez sur le bouton ◄ ou ►. ❑ Contacter Samsung Vous pouvez accéder au centre d’appel et au site Web de Samsung, ainsi qu’à des informations sur le produit. Panneau latéral du téléviseur Lecteur USB Liste Source Modif. Nom Entrée BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 27 10/20/2009 4:58:48 PMFrançais - 28 Réseau Connexion Réseau DLNA, la fonction de téléchargement sur Internet de Content Library, Internet@TV et le Centre de réseau domestique nécessitent une connexion réseau. ❑ Connexion réseau - Câble Connexion LAN pour un environnement DHCP Les procédures à suivre pour configurer le réseau à l’aide du protocole Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) sont décrites ci-après. Etant donné qu’une adresse IP, un masque de sous-réseau, une passerelle et un serveur DNS sont automatiquement attribués lorsque DHCP est sélectionné, vous ne devez pas les spécifier manuellement. 1. Raccordez le port LAN à l’arrière du téléviseur et le modem externe à l’aide d’un câble LAN. 2. Raccordez le port LAN mural et le modem externe à l’aide d’un câble modem. N Les connecteurs (position et type de port) de l’appareil externe peuvent varier selon le fabricant. N Si l’allocation de l’adresse IP par le serveur DHCP échoue, éteignez le modem externe, rallumez-le après au moins 10 secondes et réessayez. N Pour la connexion entre le modem externe et le routeur (Sharer), reportez-vous à la documentation du produit correspondant. N Vous pouvez connecter le téléviseur directement au réseau LAN sans passer par un routeur. N Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser un modem ADSL à connexion manuelle, car celui-ci ne prend pas en charge DHCP. Vous devez utiliser un modem ADSL à connexion automatique. Panneau arrière du téléviseur Port modem mural 2 Câble modem Modem externe (ADSL/VDSL/TV câblé) 1 Câble LAN Selon votre réseau, vous pouvez raccorder directement le port LAN et le téléviseur. Panneau arrière du téléviseur Câble LAN Port modem mural Vous pouvez connecter le LAN via un routeur. Panneau arrière du téléviseur Port modem mural Modem externe (ADSL/VDSL/TV Câblé) Routeur IP Câble LAN Câble modem Câble LAN BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 28 10/20/2009 4:58:51 PMFrançais - 29 „ Connexion LAN pour environnement à IP statique Les procédures à suivre pour configurer le réseau à l’aide d’une adresse IP statique sont décrites ci-après. Vous devez entrer manuellement l’adresse IP, le masque de sous-réseau, la passerelle et le serveur DNS fournis par votre fournisseur d’accès. 1. Raccordez le port LAN à l’arrière du téléviseur et le port LAN mural à l’aide d’un câble LAN. N Les connecteurs (position et type de port) de l’appareil externe peuvent varier selon le fabricant. N Si vous utilisez une adresse IP statique, votre fournisseur d’accès vous communiquera l’adresse IP, le masque de sous-réseau, la passerelle et le serveur DNS appropriés. Vous devez entrer ces valeurs pour effectuer la configuration réseau. Si vous ne connaissez pas ces valeurs, consultez votre administrateur de réseau. N Pour la configuration et le raccordement d’un routeur, reportez-vous à la documentation du produit correspondant. N Vous pouvez connecter le téléviseur directement au réseau LAN sans passer par un routeur. N Si vous utilisez un routeur IP prenant en charge le protocole DHCP, vous pouvez configurer l’appareil comme utilisant DHCP ou une adresse IP statique. N Pour les procédures à suivre si vous utilisez une adresse IP statique, consultez votre fournisseur d’accès. ❑ Connexion réseau - Sans fil Vous pouvez vous connecter au réseau sans fil au travers d’un routeur IP sans fil. 1. Branchez l’adaptateur ‘Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter’ sur le connecteur USB1(HDD) ou USB2 du téléviseur. N L’adaptateur Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter doit obligatoirement être utilisé dans le cadre d’un réseau sans fil. N L’adaptateur “Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter” est vendu séparément. L’adaptateur réseau sans fil “WIS09ABGN Wireless LAN” est disponible auprès des détaillants, sur les sites de commerce électronique et sur Samsungparts.com. N Pour utiliser un réseau sans fil, vous devez connecter le téléviseur à un routeur IP sans fil. N Si ce routeur prend en charge le protocole DHCP, le téléviseur peut utiliser DHCP ou une adresse IP statique pour se connecter au réseau sans fil. N L’adaptateur Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter prend en charge les protocoles IEEE 802.11A, IEEE 802.11B, IEEE 802.11G et IEEE 802.11N. Si vous lisez une vidéo DLNA via une connexion IEEE 802.11B/G, des saccades risquent d’apparaître. N Si le routeur IP sans fil vous permet d’activer / désactiver la fonction de connexion Ping, activez-la. N Sélectionnez un canal inutilisé pour le routeur IP sans fil. Si le canal affecté au routeur IP sans fil est actuellement utilisé par un autre périphérique dans le voisinage, il y aura des interférences et la communication peut échouer. Suite... Panneau arrière du téléviseur 1 Câble LAN Port modem mural Panneau arrière du téléviseur Câble LAN Routeur IP Câble LAN Port modem mural Vous pouvez connecter le LAN via un routeur. Panneau latéral du téléviseur Adaptateur LAN sans fil Samsung Câble LAN Routeur IP sans fil Port modem mural BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 29 10/20/2009 4:58:54 PMFrançais - 30 N Si vous utilisez des paramètres de sécurité différents de ceux indiqués ci-dessous, le routeur ne fonctionnera pas avec le téléviseur. - Pour la clé de sécurité du routeur IP, les options suivantes sont obligatoires. 1) Mode d’authentification : OPEN, SHARED, WPAPSK, WPA2PSK 2) Type de chiffrement : WEP, TKIP, AES - Pour la clé de sécurité en mode ad hoc, les options suivantes sont obligatoires. 1) Mode d’authentification : SHARED, WPANONE 2) Type de chiffrement : WEP, TKIP, AES N Si votre point d’accès prend en charge le WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup), vous pouvez vous connecter au réseau via PBC (Push Button Configuration) ou à l’aide d’un PIN (Personal Indentification Number). La fonction WPS configurera automatiquement le SSID et la clé WPA dans ces deux modes. N Si votre appareil n’est pas certifié, il risque de ne pas pouvoir se connecter au téléviseur via l’adaptateur “Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter”. Configuration du réseau ❑ Type de réseau Sélectionnez Câble ou Sans fil, selon la méthode à utiliser pour la connexion au réseau. N Le menu n’est disponible que si le Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter est connecté. • Câble : Connexion au réseau par câble. • Sans fil : Connexion sans fil. ❑ Configuration du réseau „ Configuration internet (lorsque l’option Type de réseau est réglée sur Câble) N Vérifiez si le câble LAN est correctement branché. • Config. prot. Internet → Auto / Manuel • Test réseau : Permet de tester ou vérifier la connexion réseau après la configuration du réseau. N En cas d’impossibilité de se connecter à un réseau câblé Si votre fournisseur d’accès a enregistré l’adresse MAC du périphérique utilisé pour se connecter la première fois à Internet et qu’il authentifie cette adresse MAC chaque fois que vous vous connectez à Internet, votre téléviseur ne pourra pas se connecter à Internet car l’adresse MAC différera de celle du périphérique (votre PC). Dans ce cas, demandez à votre fournisseur d’accès la procédure à suivre pour connecter des périphériques autres que votre PC (p. ex. votre téléviseur) à Internet. Si votre fournisseur d’accès exige un identifiant ou un mot de passe pour la connexion à Internet (réseau), votre téléviseur ne pourra peut-être pas se connecter à Internet. Dans ce cas, vous devez entrer l’identifiant ou le mot de passe lors de la connexion à Internet à l’aide d’un routeur. La connexion à Internet peut échouer à cause d’un problème de pare-feu. Dans ce cas, contactez votre fournisseur d’accès. Si vous ne pouvez pas vous connecter à Internet même en suivant les procédures communiquées par votre fournisseur d’accès, contactez Samsung Electronics en appelant. „ Configuration internet - Auto Si vous connectez un câble LAN et que le réseau prend en charge DHCP, les paramètres IP (Internet Protocol) sont configurés automatiquement. 1. Définissez l’option Type de réseau sur Câble. 2. Sélectionnez Configuration internet. 3. Définissez l’option Config. prot. Internet sur Auto. N Le protocole Internet est configuré automatiquement. 4. Sélectionnez Test réseau pour vérifier la connexion au réseau. „ Cable Network Setup-Manual Pour connecter le téléviseur au LAN en utilisant une adresse IP statique, vous devez configurer les paramètres IP (Internet Protocol). N Vérifiez si le câble LAN est correctement branché. (voir page 28) 1. Définissez l’option Type de réseau sur Câble. 2. Sélectionnez Réseau câblé. 3. Définissez l’option Config. prot. Internet sur Manuel. 4. Configurez les paramètres Adresse IP, Masque de sous-réseau, Passerelle et Serveur DNS. N Appuyez sur les boutons numériques de la télécommande lorsque vous paramétrez le réseau manuellement. 5. Sélectionnez Test réseau pour vérifier la connexion au réseau. Configuration Diffuser Sécurité Réseau ► Général Suite... BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 30 10/20/2009 4:58:54 PMFrançais - 31 „ Configuration du réseau sans fil (lorsque Type de réseau est réglé sur Sans fil) N Ce menu n’est disponible que si le Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter est connecté. (Voir page 29) - Config. prot. Internet → Auto / Manuel - Test réseau : Permet de tester ou vérifier la connexion réseau après la configuration du réseau. N En cas d’impossibilité de se connecter à un point d’accès Il se peut que votre téléviseur ne parvienne pas à localiser un point d’accès configuré comme SSID privé. Dans ce cas, modifiez les paramètres de point d’accès et réessayez. Si votre fournisseur d’accès a enregistré l’adresse MAC du périphérique utilisé pour se connecter la première fois à Internet et qu’il authentifie cette adresse MAC chaque fois que vous vous connectez à Internet, votre téléviseur ne pourra pas se connecter à Internet car l’adresse MAC différera de celle du périphérique (votre PC). Dans ce cas, demandez à votre fournisseur d’accès la procédure à suivre pour connecter des périphériques autres que votre PC (p. ex. votre téléviseur) à Internet. Si vous ne pouvez pas vous connecter à Internet même en suivant les procédures communiquées par votre fournisseur d’accès, contactez Samsung Electronics en appelant. • Sélectionnez un réseau - Point d’accès : Vous pouvez sélectionner le routeur à utiliser pour la connexion au réseau sans fil. N Si la liste de réseaux à sélectionner ne comporte pas de point d’accès sans fil, appuyez sur le bouton rouge. N Une fois la connexion effectuée, l’écran initial réapparaît. N Si vous avez sélectionné un point d’accès exigeant une authentification : L’écran de saisie de la clé de sécurité apparaît. Saisissez la clé de sécurité puis appuyez sur le bouton bleu de la télécommande. N Si le chiffrement est de type WEP, les caractères 0~9 et A~F seront disponibles lors de la saisie de la clé de sécurité. Bouton Description ▲/▼/◄/► Déplace la sélection vers le haut / le bas / la gauche / la droite. ENTER Entre le caractère sélectionné. Bouton rouge Permet de basculer entre majuscules et minuscules. Bouton vert Permet d’effacer un caractère déjà saisi. Bouton bleu Permet de mettre fin à la saisie de la clé de sécurité. ❑ Connexion WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) „ Si la clé de sécurité est déjà définie : Dans la liste des points d’accès, sélectionnez WPS. N Vous avez le choix entre PBC, NIP et Code de sécurité. • Connexion par PBC : Sélectionnez PBC (Push Button Configuration). Appuyez sur le bouton PBC de votre point d’accès dans les 2 minutes et attendez que la connexion s’établisse. • Connexion par NIP : Sélectionnez NIP (Numéro d’Identification Personnel). N Le message affichant le code NIP apparaît. Entrez le code NIP sur votre point d’accès dans les 2 minutes. Sélectionnez OK et attendez que la connexion s’établisse. N Si cela ne fonctionne pas, réessayez. N Si le problème de connexion persiste, réinitialisez le point d’accès. Pour plus d’informations, consultez la documentation de votre point d’accès. • Connexion par Code de sécurité : Lorsque vous sélectionnez Code de sécurité, la fenêtre de saisie s’affiche. Entrez la clé de sécurité et Appuyez sur le bouton bleu. N Si cela ne fonctionne pas, réessayez. Configuration du réseau sans fil Sais. clé séc. n Dépl. Numéro EEntrer R Retour _ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 0~9 Numéro Minuscule Delete Done * * Configuration du réseau sans fil Sélectionnez un réseau n Dépl. EEntrer R Retour Recherche Ad hoc AP_1 AP_2 AP_3 AP_4 PBC PIN Sais. clé séc. 3/9 Appuyez sur la touche PBC sur le point d’accès. Nom du point d’accès : AP_3 Annuler Appuyez sur OK après avoir entré le code NIP pour configurer le point d’accès. Nom du point d’accès : AP_3 NIP : 123 45678 OK Annuler Configuration du réseau sans fil Sais. clé séc. n Dépl. Numéro EEntrer R Retour _ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 0~9 Numéro Minuscule Supprimer Terminé BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 31 10/20/2009 4:58:56 PMFrançais - 32 „ Si la clé de sécurité n’est pas définie : Si le réglage de sécurité du point d’accès prenant en charge le WPS est défini sur AUCUN, vous pouvez sélectionner PBC, NIP ou Aucune sécurité. Aucune sécurité autorise la connexion directe au point d’accès sans faire appel à la fonction WPC. N La marche à suivre pour les options PBC et NIP est identique à ce qui précède. Consultez les pages précédentes si la Code de sécurité, est déjà définie. N Si cela ne fonctionne pas, réessayez. „ Ad hoc : Vous pouvez vous connecter à un périphérique mobile sans point d’accès en utilisant une connexion réseau peer-to-peer à l’aide d’un adaptateur USB sans fil. • Comment établir une nouvelle connexion Ad hoc 1. Choisissez Sélectionnez un réseau ; Une liste de périphériques s’affiche. 2. Dans la liste des périphériques, appuyez sur le bouton bleu de la télécommande ou sélectionnez Ad hoc. N Le message La fonctionnalité du système de réseau existant est peut-être restreinte. Souhaitez-vous changer la connexion réseau? s’affiche. 3. Saisissez le Nom du réseau (SSID) généré puis le Code de sécurité dans le périphérique auquel vous souhaitez vous connecter. • Comment se connecter à un périphérique ad hoc existant 1. Choisissez Sélectionnez un réseau ; une liste de périphériques s’affiche. 2. Sélectionnez l’appareil de votre choix dans la liste. 3. Si une clé de sécurité est nécessaire, tapez-la. N Si le réseau ne fonctionne pas correctement, revérifiez le Nom du réseau (SSID) et le Code de sécurité. Si le Code de sécurité est incorrect, cela peut être la cause du problème. „ Configuration du réseau sans fil - Auto Si vous voulez vous connecter à un point d’accès, celui-ci doit prendre en charge le DHCP. Seuls les appareils prenant en charge le mode ad hoc autorisent les connexions sans DHCP. 1. Définissez l’option Type de réseau sur Sans fil. 2. Sélectionnez Configuration du réseau sans fil. 3. Définissez l’option Config. prot. Internet sur Auto. N Le protocole Internet est configuré automatiquement. 4. Sélectionnez un réseau via l’option Sélectionnez un réseau. 5. Sélectionnez Test réseau pour vérifier la connexion au réseau. „ Configuration du réseau sans fil - Manuel Pour connecter le réseau sans fil en utilisant une adresse IP statique, vous devez configurer les paramètres IP (Internet Protocol) (voir page 29). N Pour plus d’informations sur cette adresse IP statique, consultez le manuel d’utilisation de votre routeur IP sans fil. 1. Définissez l’option Type de réseau sur Sans fil. 2. Sélectionnez Configuration du réseau sans fil. 3. Définissez l’option Config. prot. Internet sur Manuel. 4. Configurez les paramètres Adresse IP, Masque de sous-réseau, Passerelle et Serveur DNS. N Appuyez sur les boutons numériques de la télécommande lorsque vous paramétrez le réseau manuellement. 5. Sélectionnez un réseau sous l’option Select Access Point. (Sélec. point accès). 6. Sélectionnez Test réseau pour vérifier la connexion au réseau. * * Configuration du réseau sans fil Sélectionnez un réseau n Dépl. EEntrer R Retour Recherche Ad hoc AP_1 AP_2 AP_3 AP_4 PBC NIP Sais. clé séc. 3/9 La fonctionnalité du système de réseau existant est peut-être restreinte. Souhaitez-vous changer la connexion réseau? Oui Non BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 32 10/20/2009 4:58:57 PMFrançais - 33 Connexion d’un périphérique USB 1. Appuyez sur le bouton POWER pour allumer le téléviseur. 2. Connectez un périphérique USB contenant des photos ou des fichiers musicaux au port USB sur le côté du téléviseur. N Le port USB 1 (HDD) sert également au branchement des disques durs. Les disques durs sont des périphériques permettant de stocker les données numériques. N Media Play ne prend en charge que les périphériques de stockage de masse USB de la classe MSC. La classe de stockage de masse MSC est dédiée aux périphériques de transport de masse uniquement. Il s’agit notamment des clés USB, lecteurs de cartes Flash et disques durs USB (les concentrateurs USB ne sont pas pris en charge). N Le protocole MTP (Media Transfer Protocol) n’est pas pris en charge. N Le système de fichiers ne prend en charge que le format FAT16/32 (le système de fichiers NTFS n’est pas pris en charge). N Connectez un disque dur USB au port dédié, le port USB1 (HDD). Toutefois, si le périphérique connecté nécessite beaucoup de puissance, USB1 (HDD) risque de ne pas le prendre en charge. N Il est possible que certains types d’appareils photo numériques et de périphériques audio USB ne soient pas compatibles avec ce téléviseur. N Connectez-vous directement au port USB de votre téléviseur. Si vous utilisez une connexion par câble séparée, un problème de compatibilité USB risque de se poser. N Avant de connecter l’appareil au téléviseur, sauvegardez vos fichiers afin d’éviter qu’ils ne soient endommagés ou que des données ne soient perdues. SAMSUNG ne saurait, en aucun cas, être tenu responsable de la perte de données ou de l’endommagement d’un fichier de données. N Ne déconnectez pas le périphérique USB en cours de chargement. N MSC prend en charge les fichiers MP3 et JPEG, alors qu’un périphérique PTP prend uniquement en charge les fichiers JPEG. N Le format JPEG séquentiel est pris en charge. N Plus la résolution de l’image est élevée, plus le temps d’affichage à l’écran sera long. N La résolution JPEG maximale prise en charge est 15360 x 8640 pixels. N Pour les fichiers non pris en charge ou endommagés, le message Format fichier non compatible s’affiche. N Si le nombre de fichiers photo est supérieur à 4000 (ou à 3000 dans le cas des fichiers musicaux), il se peut que les fichiers situés au-delà de cette limite ne soient pas affichés dans la liste des photos (ou dans la liste musicale). N Les fichiers MP3 avec gestion des droits numériques (DRM) téléchargés à partir d’un site payant ne peuvent pas être lus. N La gestion des droits numériques (DRM) empêche toute utilisation illégale de supports numériques en raison de la protection des droits d’auteur. N Si vous passez à une photo, son chargement peut prendre quelques secondes. A ce stade, l’icône de chargement apparaît. ❑ Utilisation du bouton Remote Control dans le menu Media Play Bouton Description ▲/▼/◄/► Déplace le curseur pour sélectionner un élément. ENTERE Valide l’élément actuellement sélectionné. Lance ou met en pause la lecture des fichiers pendant un diaporama ou la lecture de fichiers musicaux. Lance la lecture d’un diaporama ou d’un fichier musical, ou le met en pause. RETURN Revient au menu précédent. TOOLS Exécute diverses fonctions dans les menus Photo, Musique et Film. Arrête la lecture du diaporama ou du fichier musical en cours. Passe au groupe précédent/suivant. INFO Affiche des informations sur le fichier. MEDIA.P Accéder au mode Media Play ou le quitter. DivX® Certified to play DivX® video, including premium content. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX,Inc. This is an official DivX Certified device that plays DivX video. Visit www.divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX video. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified® device must be registered in order to play DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) content. To generate the registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in the device setup menu. Go to vod.divx.com with this code to complete the registration process and learn more about DivX VOD. Media Play Panneau latéral du téléviseur Lecteur USB BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 33 10/20/2009 4:58:57 PMFrançais - 34 Utilisation de la fonction Media Play Cette fonction vous permet de lire des photos ou de la musique enregistrées sur un périphérique de stockage de masse USB (MSC). Il est se peut que le fonctionnement ne soit pas correct avec des fichiers multimédias sans licence. ❑ Accès au menu Media Play 1. Appuyez sur le bouton MENU. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner Application, puis sur le bouton ENTERE. 2. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner Media Play (USB & DLNA), puis appuyez sur ENTERE. O Appuyez sur le bouton MEDIA.P de la télécommande pour afficher le menu Media Play. O Appuyez sur le bouton SOURCE de la télécommande pour sélectionner USB ou DLNA, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. 3. Appuyez sur le bouton rouge, puis sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner l’unité de stockage USB correspondante (si elle est connectée par le biais d’un concentrateur). Appuyez sur la touche ENTERE. N Cette fonction diffère selon l’unité de stockage connectée au téléviseur. N Le nom du périphérique USB sélectionné s’affiche dans le coin inférieur gauche de l’écran. 4. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner une icône (Photo, Music, Movie, Setup), puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. N Pour quitter le mode Media Play, appuyez sur le bouton MEDIA.P de la télécommande. N Ce mode vous permet de regarder les films contenus dans un jeu (mais pas de jouer). ❑ Retrait d’une unité de stockage USB en toute sécurité Vous pouvez retirer le périphérique du téléviseur en toute sécurité. 1. Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS dans l’écran de la liste des fichiers Media Play ou pendant la lecture d’un fichier musical ou d’un diaporama. 2. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner Retrait sécurisé, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. 3. Retirez le périphérique USB du téléviseur. ❑ Affichage 1. Ordre de tri actuel : Ce champ affiche l’ordre de tri actuel des fichiers. 2. Afficher les groupes : Le groupe de tri contenant la photo actuellement sélectionnée est mis en surbrillance. 3. Fichier actuellement sélectionné : Le fichier actuellement sélectionné est mis en surbrillance. 4. Informations de sélection : Indique le nombre de photos sélectionnées en appuyant sur le bouton Jaune. 5. Périphérique actuel : Indique le nom du périphérique actuellement sélectionné. N Bouton Rouge (Périph.) : Sélectionne un appareil connecté. 6. Options d’aide • Bouton Vert (Réglage des favoris) : Modifie le réglage des favoris pour le fichier sélectionné. Appuyez plusieurs fois sur ce bouton jusqu’à ce que la valeur souhaitée apparaisse. • Bouton Jaune (Sélection) : Sélectionne le fichier dans la liste. Les fichiers sélectionnés sont marqués du symbole c. Appuyez une nouvelle fois sur le bouton jaune pour annuler la sélection d’un fichier. • Bouton TOOLS (Outils) : Affiche les menus d’options. (le menu Tools varie en fonction de l’état actuel). • Bouton R RETURN (Retour) : Revient au menu précédent. Dossier Préférence Aff. de base Date Couleur IMG_0335.JPG 4/6 IMG_0349. JPG ▶ ▶ Folder 2 1 Folder 1 1 Diaporama Lire gp act. Information Retrait sécurisé ../ nom dossier / Photo USB „ Périph. Sélection T Tools R Dossier supérieur Media Play Photo Music Setup PHOTO USB : USB 851.98MB/995.00MB Libre Movie USB „ Périph. RRetour Préférence Aff. de base Date Couleur Dossier Mar.01.2009 IMG_0343 .JPG ▶ ▶ IMG_03496 .JPG IMG_03496 .JPG Mar Apr Jun Nov IMG_0335.JPG 1/67 ▶ ▶ 2009 ◀ IMG_03496 .JPG 3 1 2 1 Fich. sél. 4 5 6 Photo USB „ Périph. Favoris Sélection T Outils R Retour c BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 34 10/20/2009 4:59:03 PMFrançais - 35 Tri de la liste de fichiers photo / musical / film „ Aff. de base Affiche les dossiers sur l’unité de stockage USB. Si vous sélectionnez un dossier et appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE, les fichiers correspondant (photo / music / movie) contenus dans le dossier sélectionné s’affichent. N Lorsque le tri est effectué en fonction de Aff. de base, vous ne pouvez pas définir les fichiers de favoris. „ Dossier Trie les fichiers par dossier. Si le périphérique USB contient de nombreux dossiers, les fichiers photo sont affichés dans l’ordre dans chaque dossier. Le fichier situé dans le dossier racine est affiché en premier, suivi des autres par ordre alphabétique. „ Préférence → ★ ★ ★ , ★ ★ ★ , ★ ★ ★ , ★ ★ ★ Trie les fichiers par préférence (Favoris). N Modification des réglages des favoris Sélectionnez la photo de votre choix dans la liste des Fichiers, puis appuyez plusieurs fois sur le bouton vert jusqu’à ce que le réglage voulu apparaisse. N Les étoiles sont destinées au groupement uniquement. Par exemple, le réglage de 3 étoiles n’a aucune priorité sur le réglage d’une étoile. „ Erstellung (Photo / Movie) Trie les fichiers musicaux ou vidéo par titre et les classe par symbole/ordre alphabétique/ordre personnalisé. „ Titel (Music / Movie) Trie les fichiers musicaux par titre et les classe par symbole/numéro/ordre alphabétique/ordre personnalisé. ❑ Photo „ Couleur → Rouge / Jaune / Vert / Bleu / Magenta / Noir / Gris / Non classé Trie les photos par couleur. Vous pouvez modifier les informations de couleur de la photo. N Vous devez définir Affichage couleur sur Marche dans le menu Setup avant de trier les photos par couleur. ❑ Music „ Artiste Trie les fichiers musicaux par artiste et les classe par symbole/ordre alphabétique/ordre personnalisé. „ Humeur → Energique / Rhytmique / Triste / Enivrante / Calme / Non classé Trie les fichiers musicaux par humeur. Vous pouvez modifier les informations d’ambiance de la musique. „ Genre Trie les fichiers musicaux par genre. Dossier Préférence Aff. de base Titre Artiste 1 When I Dream 3/4 Carol kidd Mr A-Z 2009 Pop usermanual Heaven NPKI ▶ 1 ▶ ▶ ▶ ▶ ../ folder name/ Music USB „ Périph. Sélection T Outils R Dossier supérieur ▶ ▶ Préférence Aff. de base Date Titre Dossier Apr Apr.27.2009 Movie USB „ Périph. Favoris Selection T Outils R Dossier supérieur MOVIE_003 .avi MOVIE_000 .avi MOVIE_004 .avi MOVIE_001.avi 1/5 ▶ ▶ ◀ MOVIE_005 .avi Préférence Aff. de base Date Couleur Dossier Mar.01.2009 IMG_0343 .JPG ▶ ▶ IMG_03496 .JPG IMG_03496 .JPG Mar Apr Jun Nov IMG_0335.JPG 1/67 ▶ ▶ 2009 ◀ IMG_03496 .JPG Photo USB „ Périph. Favoris Sélection T Outils R Retour BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 35 10/20/2009 4:59:09 PMFrançais - 36 Menu d’options de la liste des fichiers photo / musical / film 1. Appuyez sur le bouton MEDIA.P. 2. Appuyez sur le bouton ◄ ou ► pour sélectionner Photo, Music ou Movie, puis sur le bouton ENTERE. 3. Appuyez sur le bouton ◄ ou ►pour sélectionner le fichier de votre choix. N Sélection de plusieurs fichiers - Appuyez sur le bouton ◄ ou ►pour sélectionner le fichier de votre choix. Appuyez ensuite sur le bouton jaune. - Répétez l’opération ci-dessus pour sélectionner fichiers photo. - La marque cs’affiche à côté du fichier film sélectionné. 4. Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS. N Le menu varie en fonction de l’état actuel. „ Lire gp act. Ce menu vous permet de lire un diaporama portant uniquement sur les fichiers photo du groupe de tri sélectionné. „ Désélec. Tout (lorsqu’au moins un fichier est sélectionné) Vous pouvez désélectionner tous les fichiers. N La marque c indiquant que le fichier correspondant est sélectionné est masquée. „ Information Les informations relatives au fichier photo/musical/film sont affichées. Vous pouvez appliquer les mêmes procédures pour afficher les informations des fichiers photo pendant un diaporama. O Appuyez sur le bouton INFO pour afficher les informations. „ Retrait sécurisé Vous pouvez retirer le périphérique du téléviseur en toute sécurité. ❑ Photo „ Diaporama Ce menu vous permet de lire un diaporama à l’aide des fichiers photo situés sur l’unité de stockage USB. „ Changer gp (lorsque la clé de tri est Couleur) Vous pouvez modifier les informations de couleur d’un fichier photo (ou d’un groupe de fichiers) sélectionné afin de le déplacer vers un autre groupe de couleurs. N Ceci ne modifie pas la couleur réelle de la photo. N Les informations de groupe du fichier actuel sont mises à jour et les photos sont déplacées vers le nouveau groupe de couleurs. N Pour modifier les informations de plusieurs fichiers, sélectionnez ceux de votre choix en appuyant sur le bouton jaune. ❑ Music „ Change Group (lorsque la clé de tri est Mood) Vous pouvez modifier les informations d’ambiance des fichiers musicaux. Les informations de groupe du fichier actuel sont mises à jour et le fichier est déplacé vers le nouveau groupe. Pour modifier les informations de plusieurs fichiers, sélectionnez ceux de votre choix en appuyant sur le bouton jaune. Select T Tools R Upper Folder Dossier Préférence Aff. de base Titre Artiste 1 1 ▶ ▶ ../ folder name/ Sky When I Dream 3/4 Carol kidd Mr A-Z 2009 Pop NPKI usermanual Heaven ▶ NPKI Lire gp act. Information Retrait sécurisé Music USB „ Périph. Selection T Outils R Dossier supérieur FILM_004 FILM_003 .avi .avi FILM_000 .avi FILM_005 .avi FILM_007 .avi FILM_001.avi 1/5 FILM_006 .avi ▶ ▶ Préférence Aff. de base Date Titre Dossier Apr Apr.27.2009 Movie USB „ Périph. Favoris Selection T Outils R Dossier supérieur Lire gp act. Information Retrait sécurisé Aff. de base Date Couleur Dossier Préférence IMG_0335.JPG 4/6 IMG_0349 .JPG ▶ ▶ Folder 2 1 Folder 1 1 Diaporama Lire gp act. Changer gp Information Retrait sécurisé Photo USB „ Périph. Favoris Selection T Outils R Dossier supérieur BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 36 10/20/2009 4:59:14 PMFrançais - 37 Menu d’options Slide Show / Music Play / Movie Play 1. Pendant un diaporama (ou l’affichage d’une photo), appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS pour définir l’option. 2. Appuyez sur le bouton ◄ ou ► pour sélectionner l’option, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. „ Réglage de l’image / Réglage du son Vous pouvez sélectionner les réglages de l’image et du son. „ Information Les informations relatives au fichier sont affichées. „ Retrait sécurisé Vous pouvez retirer le périphérique du téléviseur en toute sécurité. ❑ Menu d’options du diaporama „ Arrêter le diaporama / Lancer le diaporama Vous pouvez lancer ou arrêter un diaporama. „ Vit. diaporama → Lent / Normal / Rapide Sélectionnez cette option pour modifier la vitesse de défilement du diaporama. N Cette fonction est uniquement disponible au cours d’un diaporama. N Vous pouvez également modifier la vitesse du diaporama en appuyant sur la touche π (Retour arrière) ou μ (Avance rapide) pendant la lecture. „ Effet du diaporama Vous pouvez sélectionner l’effet de transition entre les écrans qui sera utilisé dans le diaporama. • Aucun / Fondu1 / Fondu2 / Masquer / Spirale / Damier / Linéaire / Escaliers / Balayage / Aléatoire N Cette fonction est uniquement disponible au cours d’un diaporama. „ Rotat. Vous pouvez faire pivoter les photos enregistrées sur une unité de stockage USB. N Chaque fois que vous appuyez sur le bouton ◄, la photo pivote successivement à 270˚, 180˚, 90˚ et 0˚. N Chaque fois que vous appuyez sur le bouton ►, la photo pivote successivement de 90˚, 180˚, 270˚, et 0˚. N Le fichier pivoté n’est pas enregistré. „ Zoom Vous pouvez faire agrandir les photos enregistrées sur une unité de stockage USB. (x1 → x2 → x4) N Pour déplacer l’image agrandie, appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE, puis sur les boutons ▲/▼/◄/►. Notez que lorsque la taille de l’image agrandie est inférieure à celle de l’écran, la fonction de déplacement est inopérante. N Le fichier agrandi n’est pas enregistré. „ Fond musical Vous pouvez sélectionner le fond musical d’un diaporama. N Pour utiliser cette fonction, de la musique et des photos doivent être stockées sur l’unité USB. N Le changement du Mode mus. de fond exige le chargement de fichiers musicaux. Lisez des fichiers musicaux dans la catégorie voulue. ❑ Menu d’options de lecture de musique „ Mode rep. → Marche / Arrêt Vous pouvez lire des fichiers musicaux en boucle. ❑ Menu d’options de lecture du film „ Format de l’image → Ajustement / Original Lit la vidéo à la taille de l’écran ou à sa taille d’origine. „ Paramètres des sous-titres Vous pouvez configurer les sous-titres du film. Tools Outils Arrêter le diaporama Vit. diaporama : Normal Effet du diaporama : Fondu1 Pivoter Zoom Fond musical Réglage de l’image Réglage du son Information › U Dépl. E Entrer eQuitter Outils Mode répét. ◄ Marche ► Réglage de l’ image Réglage du son Information Retrait sécurisé U Dépl. š™ Régler eQuitter Outils Réglage de l’ image Réglage du son Format de l’ image :Ajustement Paramètres des sous-titres Information Retrait sécurisé U Dépl.  Entrer eQuitter BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 37 10/20/2009 4:59:15 PMFrançais - 38 Visualisation d’une photo ou d’un diaporama ❑ Visualisation d’un diaporama N Tous les fichiers de la section Liste de fichiers seront utilisés pour le diaporama. N Durant le diaporama, les fichiers s’affichent dans l’ordre à partir du fichier à l’écran. N Le diaporama progresse dans l’ordre de tri choisi dans la section Liste de fichiers. N Des fichiers musicaux peuvent être lus automatiquement pendant le diaporama, si l’option Fond musical est définie sur Marche. N Lorsqu’une liste de photos est affichée, appuyez sur le bouton ∂(Lecture)/ ENTERE de la télécommande pour lancer le diaporama. N Boutons de commande du diaporama ENTERE Lance/interrompt la lecture du diaporama. Lance la lecture du diaporama. Interrompt la lecture du diaporama. Permet de quitter le mode diaporama et de revenir à la liste des photos. / Modifie la vitesse de lecture du diaporama. T TOOLS Exécute diverses fonctions dans les menus Photo. ❑ Lecture du groupe courant 1. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ pour accéder à la section Sort Key. 2. Appuyez sur le bouton ◄ ou ► pour sélectionner un ordre de tri. 3. Appuyez sur le bouton ▼ pour accéder à Group List Section. 4. Sélectionnez un groupe à l’aide des boutons ◄ ou ►. 5. Appuyez sur le bouton ∂ (Lecture). Un diaporama débute par les fichiers du groupe sélectionné. „ Ou 1. Sélectionnez une clé de tri puis, dans Section Liste de fichiers, sélectionnez les photos contenues dans le groupe de votre choix. N Pour passer au groupe précédent/suivant, appuyez sur le bouton π (Retour arrière) ou μ (Avance rapide). 2. Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS. 3. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner Lire gp act., puis sur le bouton ENTERE. N Seules les photos du groupe contenant les fichiers sélectionnés seront utilisées pour le diaporama. ❑ Pour exécuter un diaporama avec uniquement les fichiers sélectionnés 1. Appuyez sur le bouton ▼ pour sélectionner Section Liste de fichiers. 2. Appuyez sur le bouton ◄ ou ► pour sélectionner la photo voulue dans la section Liste de fichiers. 3. Appuyez sur le bouton jaune. 4. Répétez l’opération ci-dessus pour sélectionner plusieurs photos. N La marque c s’affiche à gauche des photos sélectionnées. N Si vous sélectionnez un seul fichier, le diaporama ne s’exécute pas. N Pour désélectionner tous les fichiers, appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS, puis sélectionnez Désélec. Tout. 5. Appuyez sur le bouton ∂ (Lecture)/ENTERE. N Les fichiers sélectionnés seront utilisés pour le diaporama. „ Ou 1. Dans la section Liste de fichiers, appuyez sur les boutons jaunes pour sélectionner les photos de votre choix. 2. Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS. 3. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner Diaporama, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. N Les fichiers sélectionnés seront utilisés pour le diaporama. ▶ ▶ Préférence Aff. de base Date Titre Dossier Apr Apr.27.2009 Movie USB „ Périph. Favoris Selection T Outils R Dossier supérieur FILM_003 .avi FILM_000 .avi FILM_004 .avi FILM_001.avi 1/5 FILM_005 .avi Aff. de base Date Couleur Dossier Préférence IMG_0335.JPG 4/6 IMG_0349 .JPG ▶ ▶ Folder 2 1 Folder 1 1 Diaporama Lire gp act. Changer gp Information Retrait sécurisé Photo r Normal IMG_0335.JPG 3648x2432 2009/3/15 1/4 USB E Pause lr Préc/Suiv T Outils R Retour USB „ Périph. Favoris Selection T Outils R Dossier supérieur BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 38 10/20/2009 4:59:20 PMFrançais - 39 Lecture de musique ❑ Lecture d’un fichier musical 1. Appuyez sur le bouton ▼ pour sélectionner Section Liste de fichiers. 2. Appuyez sur le bouton ◄ ou ► pour sélectionner le fichier musical à lire. 3. Appuyez sur le bouton ∂ (Lecture)/ENTERE. N Ce menu affiche uniquement les fichiers portant l’extension MP3. Les fichiers portant d’autres extensions ne s’affichent pas, même s’ils sont enregistrés sur le même périphérique USB. N Le fichier sélectionné s’affiche en haut de l’écran, avec la durée de lecture. N Pour régler le volume sonore, appuyez sur le bouton de volume de la télécommande. Pour couper le son, appuyez sur le bouton MMUTE de la télécommande. N Si le son est déformé lors de la lecture de fichiers MP3, réglez les options Egaliseur et SRS TruSurround HD dans le menu Sound. (un fichier MP3 surmodulé peut être à l’origine d’un problème sonore). N La durée de lecture d’un fichier musical peut s’afficher sous la forme “00:00:00” si les informations relatives au temps de lecture ne figurent pas au début du fichier. N Les boutons π (Retour arrière) et μ (Avance rapide) ne fonctionnent pas durant la lecture. N Boutons de commande de lecture ENTERE Lance/interrompt la lecture du fichier musical. Quitte le mode de lecture et revient à la liste musicale. Lance la lecture du fichier musical. T TOOLS Exécute diverses fonctions dans les menus Musique. Interrompt la lecture du fichier musical. N Icône d’informations sur la fonction Musique Tous les fichiers musicaux du dossier (ou le fichier sélectionné) sont répétés. Mode rep. est défini sur Marche. Tous les fichiers musicaux du dossier (ou le fichier sélectionné) sont lus une seule fois. Mode rep. est défini sur Arrêt. ❑ Lecture du groupe de musiques 1. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ pour accéder à la section Sort Key. 3. Appuyez sur le bouton ◄ ou ► pour sélectionner un ordre de tri. 3. Appuyez sur le bouton ▼ ou ENTERE pour accéder à Group List Section. 4. Appuyez sur le bouton ∂ (Lecture). La lecture des fichiers du groupe sélectionné commence. „ Ou 1. Sélectionnez une clé de tri, puis dans Section Liste de fichiers, sélectionnez les fichiers contenus dans le groupe de votre choix. N Pour passer au groupe précédent/suivant, appuyez sur le bouton π (Retour arrière) ou μ (Avance rapide). 2. Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS. 3. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner Lire gp act., puis sur le bouton ENTERE. N Tous les fichiers musicaux du groupe de tri, y compris le fichier sélectionné, sont lus. ❑ Lecture des fichiers musicaux sélectionnés 1. Appuyez sur le bouton ▼ pour sélectionner Section Liste de fichiers. 2. Appuyez sur le bouton ◄ ou ► pour sélectionner le fichier musical de votre choix. 3. Appuyez sur le bouton jaune. 4. Répétez l’opération ci-dessus pour sélectionner plusieurs fichiers musicaux. N La marque c s’affiche à gauche du fichier musical sélectionné. N Pour désélectionner tous les fichiers, appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS, puis sélectionnez Désélec. Tout. 5. Appuyez sur le bouton ∂ (Lecture)/ENTERE. N Les fichiers sélectionnés sont lus. r 00:00:02 / 00:04:55 r 1/3 When I Dream r r Geek In The Pink Heaven USB E Pause lr Préc/Suiv T Outils R Retour BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 39 10/20/2009 4:59:20 PMFrançais - 40 Lecture d’un fichier film ❑ Lecture d’un fichier film 1. Appuyez sur le bouton ▼ pour sélectionner Section Liste de fichiers. 2. Appuyez sur le bouton ◄ ou ► pour sélectionner un film à lire. 3. Appuyez sur le bouton ∂ (Lecture)/ENTERE. N La lecture du fichier sélectionné commence. N Le fichier sélectionné s’affiche en haut de l’écran, avec la durée de lecture. N La durée de lecture d’un fichier film peut s’afficher sous la forme “00:00:00” si les informations relatives au temps de lecture ne figurent pas au début du fichier. N Vous pouvez regarder des fichiers multimédias, mais la fonction jeu n’est pas prise en charge. N Formats de sous-titres pris en charge Nom Extension de fichier Langage de programmation MPEG-4 time-based text .ttxt XML SAMI .smi HTML SubRip .srt chaînes SubViewer .sub chaînes Micro DVD .sub ou .txt chaînes N Formats vidéo pris en charge Extension de fichier Conteneur Décodeur vidéo Codec audio Résolution *.avi AVI Divx 3.11/4.x/5.1/6.0 MP3 AC3 LPCM ADPCM 720x576 XviD 1920x1080 H.264 BP/MP/HP 1920x1080 MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080 Motion JPEG 800x600 *.mkv MKV Divx 3.11/4.x/5.1/6.0 MP3 AC3 LPCM ADPCM 720x576 XviD 1920x1080 H.264 BP/MP/HP 1920x1080 MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080 Motion JPEG 800x600 *.asf ASF Divx 3.11/4.x/5.1/6.0 MP3 AC3 LPCM ADPCM WMA 720x576 XviD 1920x1080 H.264 BP/MP/HP 1920x1080 MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080 Motion JPEG 800x600 *.wmv (VC1) ASF VC1 WMA 1920x1080 *.mp4 MP4 (SMP4) H.264 BP/MP/HP MP3 ADPCM AAC 1920x1080 MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080 XVID 1920x1080 *.3gp 3GPP H.264 BP/MP/HP ADPCM AAC 1920x1080 MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080 *.vro VRO VOB MPEG2 AC3 MPEG LPCM 1920x1080 MPEG1 1920x1080 *.mpg *.mpeg PS MPEG1 AC3 MPEG LPCM 1920x1080 MPEG2 1920x1080 *.ts *.tp *.trp TS MPEG2 AAC MP3 1920x1080 H.264 1920x1080 VC1 1920x1080 N Boutons de commande de lecture vidéo ENTERE Lit/interrompt le fichier film. Lit le fichier film. Interrompt la lecture du fichier film. Quitte le mode de lecture et revient à la liste des films. T TOOLS Exécute diverses fonctions dans les menus Film. ◄/► Avance ou recule dans le film en cours de lecture. ▲/▼ Affiche le premier/dernier fichier. ▶ r r 00:00:02 / 00:01:55 1/3 MOVIE_000.avi USB E Pause lr Passer T Outils R Retour BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 40 10/20/2009 4:59:21 PMFrançais - 41 ❑ Lecture du groupe de films 1. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ pour accéder à la section Sort Key. 2. Appuyez sur le bouton ◄ ou ► pour sélectionner un ordre de tri. 3. Appuyez sur le bouton ▼ ou ENTERE pour accéder à Group List Section. 4. Appuyez sur le bouton ∂ (Lecture). Seule la lecture des fichiers du groupe sélectionné commence. „ Ou 1. Sélectionnez une clé de tri, puis dans Section Liste de fichiers, sélectionnez les fichiers contenus dans le groupe de votre choix. N Pour passer au groupe précédent/suivant, appuyez sur le bouton π (Retour arrière) ou μ (Avance rapide).. 2. Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS. 3. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner Lire gp act., puis sur le bouton ENTERE. N Tous les fichiers film du groupe de tri, y compris le fichier sélectionné, sont lus. ❑ Lecture des fichiers film sélectionnés 1. Appuyez sur le bouton ▼ pour sélectionner Section Liste de fichiers. 2. Appuyez sur le bouton ◄ ou ► pour sélectionner le fichier musical de votre choix. 3. Appuyez sur le bouton jaune. N La marque c s’affiche à gauche du fichier film sélectionné. N Pour désélectionner tous les fichiers, appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS, puis sélectionnez Désélec. Tout. 4. Répétez l’opération ci-dessus pour sélectionner plusieurs fichiers film. 5. Appuyez sur le bouton ∂ (Lecture)/ENTERE. N Seul le fichier sélectionné est lu. ❑ Lecture d’un film en continu (Reprise de la lecture) Si vous quittez la fonction de lecture de film, il est possible de reprendre ultérieurement au point où vous l’avez arrêté. 1. Pour sélectionner le fichier film que vous souhaitez lire en continu, appuyez sur le bouton ◄ ou ► dans File List Section. 2. Appuyez sur le bouton ∂ (Lecture)/ENTERE. 3. Sélectionnez Lecture continue (Resume Play) en appuyant sur le bouton bleu. N Le film reprend à l’endroit précis où vous aviez arrêté la lecture. N Si la fonction Aide lecture continue a été réglée sur Marche dans le menu Setup, un message s’affiche lors de la lecture d’un film que vous souhaitez lire en continu. Utilisation du menu Configuration Le menu Setup affiche les paramètres utilisateur du menu Media Play. 1. Appuyez sur le bouton MEDIA.P de la télécommande pour afficher le menu Media Play. 2. Appuyez sur le bouton ◄ ou ► pour sélectionner Setup, puis sur le bouton ENTERE. 3. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner l’option de votre choix. 4. Appuyez sur le bouton ◄ ou ► pour sélectionner l’option de votre choix. N Pour quitter le mode Media Play, appuyez sur le bouton MEDIA.P de la télécommande. „ Affichage couleur → Mar. / Arr. Vous pouvez choisir de trier les photos par couleur. N Si cette option est définie sur Marche, le temps de chargement risque d’augmenter lors de la collecte des informations de couleur des photos. „ Mode répét. → Mar. / Arr. Permet de répéter la lecture de fichiers musicaux. „ Aide lecture continue → Mar. / Arr. Sélectionnez cette option pour afficher le message d’aide relatif à la lecture continue des films. „ Obtenir code d’enr. de DivX® VOD Affiche le code d’enregistrement autorisé pour le téléviseur. Si vous vous connectez au site Web DivX et enregistrez le code d’enregistrement avec un compte personnel, vous pouvez télécharger le fichier d’enregistrement VOD. Si vous lisez l’enregistrement VOD à l’aide de Media Play, l’enregistrement est terminé. Pour plus d’informations sur la VOD DivX®, visitez le site www.DivX.com. „ Obtenir code de désact. de DivX® VOD Si DivX® VOD n’est pas enregistré, le code de désactivation de l’enregistrement s’affiche. Si vous exécutez cette fonction alors que DivX® VOD est enregistré, l’enregistrement DivX® VOD en cours est désactivé. „ Temps d’ex. éco. écran → 4 heures / 8 heures / 10 heures Sélectionnez cette option pour définir le délai avant l’activation de l’écran de veille. „ Information Affiche les informations de l’appareil connecté. „ Retrait sécurisé Vous pouvez retirer le périphérique du téléviseur en toute sécurité. Media Play USB : USB 851.98MB/995.00MB Libre SETUP Photo Music Movie Setup USB „ eQuitter Périph. Setup Dépl. Régler Retour Affichage couleur ◄ Arrêt ► Mode répét. Marche Aide lecture continue Marche Obtenir code d’enr. de DivX® VOD Obtenir code de désact. de DivX® VOD Temps d’ex. éco. écran 10 min Information Retrait sécurisé USB „ Périph. BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 41 10/20/2009 4:59:22 PMFrançais - 42 Définition du réseau DLNA DLNA vous permet de visionner, sur votre téléviseur, des vidéos et des images enregistrées sur votre ordinateur via une connexion réseau en mode Media. Pour utiliser DLNA, le téléviseur doit être connecté au réseau et l’application DLNA doit être installée sur votre ordinateur. ❑ Diagramme représentant la connexion réseau - Câble ❑ Diagramme représentant la connexion réseau - Sans fil 1. Pour plus d’informations sur la configuration de votre réseau, reportez-vous à la section “Configuration du réseau”. N Nous recommandons de placer le téléviseur et l’ordinateur sur le même sous-réseau. Les 3 premières parties de l’adresse de sous-réseau du téléviseur et les adresses IP du PC doivent être les mêmes et seule la dernière partie (adresse de l’hôte) doit être modifiée. (ex. adresse IP: 123.456.789.**) 2. Connectez l’ordinateur sur lequel le programme Samsung PC Share Manager sera installé au modem externe à l’aide d’un câble réseau. N Vous pouvez connecter directement le téléviseur à un ordinateur sans passer par un routeur. Installation de l’application DLNA Pour lire sur votre téléviseur du contenu stocké sur l’ordinateur, vous devez, dans un premier temps, installer l’application. Pour utiliser correctement la fonction DLNA, utilisez le programme figurant dans le CD-ROM fourni avec le téléviseur ou le programme Samsung PC Share Manager correspondant au modèle de téléviseur, que vous pouvez télécharger sur le site Web de Samsung . TV Modem externe (ADSL/VDSL/TV câblé) LAN PC LAN Media Play-DLNA TV LAN PC ou 1 Panneau latéral du téléviseur Adaptateur LAN sans fil Samsung BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 42 10/20/2009 4:59:23 PMFrançais - 43 Utilisation de l’application DLNA Présentation de l’écran du programme 1. Menus: l’application s’accompagne des menus suivants : Fichier, Partager, Serveur et Aide. 2. Cliquez sur ce bouton pour partager le dossier serveur sélectionné. 3. Cliquez sur ce bouton pour annuler le partage. 4. Cliquez sur ce bouton pour actualiser la liste des fichiers et dossiers de l’ordinateur. 5. Cliquez sur ce bouton pour synchroniser l’état de partage. 6. Les dossiers et fichiers à partager stockés sur l’ordinateur sont répertoriés. 7. Les dossiers partagés par l’utilisateur sont répertoriés. 8. Nom du serveur PC dans la liste d’appareils de Media Play. „ Configuration requise 1. Introduisez le CD du programme fourni avec le téléviseur dans le lecteur approprié de votre ordinateur. 2. L’installation du programme nécessite 30 Mo d’espace libre sur le disque dur. N Si vous partagez des fichiers, jusqu’à 30 Mo d’espace disque est nécessaire par lot de 100 fichiers. N Si vous annulez le partage de fichiers, l’espace disque utilisé pour les informations sur les miniatures est également libéré. „ Formats pris en charge • Image: JPEG/ Audio: MP3/ Video: AVI, MKV, ASF, MP4, 3GPP, PS, TS Conteneur. Pour de plus amples informations sur les formats vidéo pris en charge, reportez-vous aux instructions de la rubrique “Lecture d’un fichier film”. „ Installation de l’application ► ► ► 1. Exécutez le fichier Setup.exe situé sur le CD du programme fourni avec le téléviseur. N Vous pouvez également télécharger ce fichier sur le site Web de Samsung à l’adresse www.samsung.com. 2. Installez l’application SAMSUNG PC Share Manager, comme illustré ci-dessous. 3. Une fois l’installation terminée, l’icône PC Share Manager apparaît sur votre Bureau. N Double-cliquez sur cette icône pour exécuter le programme. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 43 10/20/2009 4:59:25 PMFrançais - 44 ❑ Partager „ Partage d’un dossier Vous pouvez partager un dossier de votre ordinateur sur le téléviseur. „ Annulation d’un dossier partagé Vous pouvez annuler un dossier partagé sur votre ordinateur. Sélectionnez un dossier dans le volet Dossier partagé, puis cliquez sur Annuler le partage. „ Application des réglages actuelss Effectuez cette opération lorsqu’une synchronisation s’avère nécessaire à la suite du partage d’un nouveau dossier ou de l’annulation d’un partage. Le menu Définir l’état modifié applique les modifications apportées aux dossiers partagés aux données enregistrées avec le programme de partage installé sur l’ordinateur. L’application des modifications aux données internes est une procédure relativement longue. Aussi, cette fonction permet-elle aux utilisateurs de n’appliquer les modifications que lorsque cela s’avère nécessaire. Tant que vous ne sélectionnez pas le menu Définir l’état modifié, l’état modifié du dossier partagé n’est pas appliqué au serveur. Les modifications apportées aux dossiers partagés ne sont pas appliquées à l’ordinateur tant que vous n’avez pas sélectionné le menu Définir l’état modifié. „ Définition des permissions d’accès Pour permettre au téléviseur de détecter votre ordinateur, le téléviseur doit être défini sur Définir la politique du périphérique dans la fenêtre Paramètres de permission d’accès. De plus, le serveur et le téléviseur doivent se trouver sur le même sous-réseau. • Procédure : sélectionnez le menu Partager, puis cliquez sur Définir la politique du périphérique. Les éléments rejetés apparaissent en gris. Vous pouvez modifier les permissions d’accès en utilisant le bouton Allow Autoriser Accepter / Refuser. Pour supprimer un élément, sélectionnez-le, puis cliquez sur Supprimer l’élément. ❑ Serveur „ Serveur Vous pouvez utiliser votre ordinateur en tant que serveur ou annuler cette affectation. „ Démarrer le serveur au démarrage de Windows Vous pouvez indiquer si le serveur doit démarrer automatiquement au démarrage de Windows. „ Modifier le nom du serveur Vous pouvez renommer le serveur. Utilisation de la fonction DLNA ❑ Utilisation du menu DLNA DLNA (Digital Living Network Alliance) permet de lire du contenu enregistré sur un serveur DLNA (généralement votre ordinateur) connecté à votre téléviseur ou sur un réseau. Media play permet de lire du contenu enregistré sur une unité de stockage USB connectée au téléviseur, tandis que DLNA permet de lire du contenu enregistré sur un serveur DLNA (votre ordinateur) connecté à votre téléviseur ou sur le réseau. Les procédures d’utilisation du contenu sont identiques à celles en usage pour Media play (USB & DLNA). 1. Appuyez sur le bouton MEDIA.P de la télécommande pour afficher le menu DLNA. 2. Appuyez sur le bouton ◄ ou ► pour sélectionner une icône (Photo, Music, Movie, Setup), puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. N Pour quitter le mode DLNA, appuyez sur le bouton MEDIA.P de la télécommande. N DLNA ne prend pas en charge les fonctions suivantes. - Musique de fond et Sélection musique de fond. - Tri des fichiers par préférence dans les dossiers Photo, Musique et Film. - Mod. info groupe. - La fonction Copier / Supprimer. - La fonction Retrait sécurisé. - Le bouton π (Retour arrière) / μ(Avance rapide) fonctionne pendant la lecture d’un film. - Fonction Lecture d’un film en continu (Resume Play). N La fonction Skip peut ne pas fonctionner avec certains conteneurs tels que asf et mkv. N Les sous-titres intégrés multi-audio Divx DRM ne sont pas pris en charge. N Samsung PC Share Manager doit être autorisé par le pare-feu de l’ordinateur. N Il se peut que la fonction Skip (touches ◄/►) ou Pause ne soit pas opérationnelle pendant la lecture d’un film pour le DLNA d’autres fabricants. Cela dépend, en fait, des informations de contenu. N Il se peut que la durée de lecture ne soit pas affichée lors de la lecture d’un film. Media Play Photo Music Setup PHOTO USB : USB 851.98MB/995.00MB Libre Movie USB „ Périph. Retour BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 44 10/20/2009 4:59:26 PMFrançais - 45 Anynet + Connexion de périphériques Anynet + Anynet + est une fonction qui vous permet de contrôler tous les périphériques Samsung connectés compatibles Anynet + avec votre télécommande Samsung. Le système Anynet + s’utilise uniquement avec des périphériques Samsung disposant de la fonction Anynet + . Afin de vérifier que votre périphérique Samsung dispose de cette fonction, assurez-vous qu’il comporte le logo Anynet + . ❑ Connexion à un téléviseur 1. A l’aide du câble HDMI, reliez la prise HDMI IN (1, 2(DVI), 3 ou 4) du téléviseur à la prise HDMI OUT du périphérique Anynet + correspondant. ❑ Connexion à un système home cinéma 1. A l’aide du câble HDMI, reliez la prise HDMI IN (1, 2(DVI), 3 ou 4) du téléviseur à la prise HDMI OUT du périphérique Anynet + correspondant. 2. A l’aide du câble HDMI, reliez la prise HDMI IN du système home cinéma à la prise HDMI OUT du périphérique Anynet + correspondant. N Connectez le câble optique entre la prise sortie audio numérique (optique) de votre téléviseur et l’entrée Digital Audio (audio numérique) de votre système home cinéma. N En suivant les instructions de connexion ci-avant, la prise optique alimente uniquement les périphériques audio 2 canaux. Vous n’entendrez du son qu’au niveau des haut-parleurs avant gauche et droit et du caisson de basses de votre système home cinéma. Pour écouter des chaînes audio 5.1, branchez la prise Sortie audio numérique (Optique) du lecteur DVD ou du décodeur câble/ récepteur satellite (c.-à-d. appareil Anynet 1 ou 2) directement sur l’amplificateur ou sur un système home cinéma, et non sur le téléviseur. N Ne connectez qu’un seul système home cinéma. N Vous pouvez connecter un périphérique Anynet + à l’aide du câble HDMI 1.3. Certains câbles HDMI peuvent ne pas prendre en charge les fonctions Anynet + . N Anynet + fonctionne si le périphérique AV compatible Anynet + est en mode Standby (Veille) ou Marche. N Anynet + prend en charge jusqu’à 12 périphériques AV. Vous pouvez connecter jusqu’à 3 périphériques du même type. N Anynet + prend en charge jusqu’à 3 périphériques simultanément. Périphérique Anynet + 1 Périphérique Anynet + 2 Périphérique Anynet + 3 Périphérique Anynet + 4 TV Câble HDMI 1.3 Câble HDMI 1.3 Câble HDMI 1.3 Câble HDMI 1.3 TV Périphérique Anynet + 1 Périphérique Anynet + 2 Périphérique Anynet + 3 Câble HDMI 1.3 Câble HDMI 1.3 Câble HDMI 1.3 Câble HDMI 1.3 Home cinéma Câble optique Périphérique Anynet + 4 Câble HDMI 1.3 BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 45 10/20/2009 4:59:27 PMFrançais - 46 Configuration d’Anynet + ❑ Configuration d’ Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) T Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS pour afficher le menu Outils. Vous pouvez également afficher le menu Anynet + en sélectionnant Outils → Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) „ Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) → Arrêt / Marche Pour utiliser la fonction Anynet + , l’option Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) doit être réglée sur Marche. N Lorsque la fonction Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) est désactivée, toutes les activités associées à Anynet + sont indisponibles. „ Arrêt automatique → Non / Oui Arrêt automatique d’un périphérique Anynet + lorsque le téléviseur est mis hors tension. N La source active sur la télécommande du téléviseur doit être définie sur TV pour pouvoir utiliser la fonction Anynet + . N Si vous réglez Arrêt automatique sur Oui, les périphériques externes connectés s’éteignent lorsque le téléviseur est mis hors tension. Toutefois, si un périphérique externe est en train d’enregistrer, il peut ne pas s’éteindre. Commutation entre périphériques Anynet + 1. Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS. Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE pour sélectionner Anynet + (HDMI-CEC). 2. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner Liste d’appareils, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. N La liste des périphériques Anynet + connectés au téléviseur s’affiche. Si le périphérique désiré est introuvable, appuyez sur le bouton rouge pour chercher des périphériques. N Le menu Liste des appareils n’apparaît que si Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) est réglé sur Marche dans le menu Configuration. 3. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner un périphérique, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. Vous passez ainsi au périphérique sélectionné. N Le basculement vers le périphérique sélectionné peut prendre 2 minutes. Il est impossible d’annuler l’opération de basculement en cours. N Le temps de recherche nécessaire dépend du nombre de périphériques connectés. N Si vous avez choisi un périphérique externe en appuyant sur le bouton SOURCE, il est impossible d’utiliser la fonction Anynet + . Veillez à basculer vers un périphérique Anynet + externe au moyen du bouton TOOLS. ❑ Menu Anynet + Le menu Anynet + varie selon le type et l’état des périphériques Anynet + connectés au téléviseur. Menu Anynet + Description Voir télévision Le mode Anynet + change en mode de diffusion TV. Liste d’appareils Affiche la liste des périphériques Anynet + . (nom_périphérique) MENU Affiche les menus du périphérique connecté. Par exemple, si un graveur DVD est connecté, son menu de disque s’affiche. (nom_périphérique) INFO Affiche le menu de lecture du périphérique connecté. Par exemple, si un graveur DVD est connecté, son menu de lecture s’affiche. Enregistrement (*enregistreur) Démarre un enregistrement (ce menu ne fonctionne qu’avec un appareil capable d’enregistrer). (*enregistreur) Réserver l’enregistrement Permet de réserver un enregistrement pour l’enregistreur (cette fonction n’est disponible que pour les périphériques prenant en charge la fonction de réservation). Arrêter Enr. : (*enregistreur) Arrête l’enregistrement. Récepteur Le son est émis par l’intermédiaire du récepteur. Suite... Application Media Play (USB & DLNA) Anynet + (HDMI-CEC)► Bibliothèque de contenu Internet@TV Centre de réseau domestique U Dépl. EEntrer R Retour Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) : Marche ▶ Arrêt automatique : Oui U Dépl. EEntrer R Retour Voir télévision Liste d’appareils Enregistrement : DVDR DVDR MENU DVDR INFO Récepteur AV : Marche Configuration BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 46 10/20/2009 4:59:27 PMFrançais - 47 ❑ Boutons de la télécommande du téléviseur disponibles en mode Anynet + Type de périphérique État de fonctionnement Boutons disponibles Périphérique Anynet + Après basculement vers le périphérique, lorsque son menu s’affiche à l’écran. Touches numériques ▲/▼ Boutons ◄/►/ENTERE Boutons de couleur / Bouton EXIT Après basculement vers le périphérique, pendant la lecture d’un fichier. (Recherche vers l’arrière) / (Recherche vers l’avant) (Arrêt) / (Lecture) / (Pause) Périphérique à tuner intégré Après basculement vers le périphérique, lorsque vous regardez un programme télévisé. Bouton P / Périphérique audio Lorsque le récepteur est activé. Bouton = / Bouton M MUTE N La fonction Anynet + est utilisable uniquement lorsque la source active sur la télécommande est définie sur TV. N Le bouton ne fonctionne que lorsque l’appareil est dans un état où l’enregistrement est possible. N Il est impossible de commander des périphériques Anynet + à l’aide des boutons situés sur le téléviseur. Les périphériques Anynet + ne peuvent être commandés qu’au moyen de la télécommande du téléviseur. N Il se peut que la télécommande du téléviseur ne fonctionne pas dans certaines situations. Dans ce cas, sélectionnez de nouveau le périphérique Anynet + . N Les fonctions Anynet + n’opèrent pas sur des produits d’autres fabricants. N Les opérations , peuvent varier en fonction du périphérique. N Si plusieurs enregistreurs sont connectés, ils s’affichent sous la forme (*enregistreur) si un seul enregistreur est connecté, il s’affiche sous la forme (*nom_périphérique). Enregistrement Vous pouvez enregistrer un programme télévisé à l’aide d’un enregistreur Samsung. 1. Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS. Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE pour sélectionner Anynet + (HDMI-CEC). 2. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner Enregistrement(enregistreur), puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE L’enregistrement débute. N S’il y a plusieurs périphériques d’enregistrement Si plusieurs enregistreurs sont connectés, la liste de ces périphériques s’affiche. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner un périphérique d’enregistrement, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE L’enregistrement débute. N Lorsque le périphérique d’enregistrement n’est pas affiché sélectionnez Liste des appareils et appuyez sur le bouton rouge pour rechercher les périphériques. N Le fait d’appuyer sur le bouton permet d’enregistrer ce que vous regardez. Si vous regardez une vidéo provenant d’un autre périphérique, cette vidéo est enregistrée. N Avant d’enregistrer, vérifiez la connexion de la prise d’antenne au périphérique d’enregistrement. Afin de connecter correctement une antenne à un périphérique d’enregistrement, reportez-vous à la documentation de ce dernier. U Dépl. EEntrer R Retour Voir télévision Liste d’appareils Enregistrement : DVDR DVDR MENU DVDR INFO Récepteur : Marche Configuration BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 47 10/20/2009 4:59:28 PMFrançais - 48 Ecoute via un récepteur Vous pouvez écouter du son via un récepteur au lieu du haut-parleur du téléviseur. 1. Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS. Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE pour sélectionner Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC). 2. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner Récepteur. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner Marche ou Arrêt. N Si votre récepteur ne prend en charge que l’audio, il se peut qu’il ne figure pas dans la liste des périphériques. N Le récepteur fonctionnera lorsque vous aurez correctement raccordé la prise d’entrée optique du récepteur à la prise de sortie optique du téléviseur. N Lorsque le récepteur (home cinéma) est activé, vous pouvez écouter le son sortant de la prise optique du téléviseur. Lorsque le téléviseur affiche un signal DTV(air), il envoie un son 5.1 au récepteur du home cinéma. Lorsque la source est un composant numérique (ex. DVD) connecté au téléviseur via HDMI, seul un son 2 voies est diffusé par le récepteur du home cinéma. N Lorsque vous utilisez la fonction Media Play, le son peut ne pas être transmis correctement par le récepteur. N Lors de l’écoute via le récepteur, des restrictions s’appliquent à l’utilisation des menus liés aux fonctions audio. N Si une coupure de courant se produit alors que l’option Récepteur est définie sur Marche, il se peut que l’option Sélection du haut-parleur soit définie sur Haut-parleur externe lorsque vous rallumez le téléviseur. (Voir page 21) Dépannage d’Anynet + Symptôme Solution Anynet + ne fonctionne pas. • Vérifiez si le périphérique est compatible Anynet + . Le système Anynet + ne prend en charge que les périphériques compatibles Anynet + . • Connexion à un seul récepteur (home cinéma). • Vérifiez si le cordon d’alimentation du périphérique Anynet + est bien connecté. • Vérifiez la connexion des câbles vidéo/audio/HDMI du périphérique Anynet + . • Vérifiez qu’Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) est défini sur Marche dans le menu de configuration d’Anynet + . • Vérifiez si la télécommande du téléviseur est en mode TV. • Vérifiez qu’il s’agit d’une télécommande exclusive Anynet + . • Anynet + ne fonctionne pas dans toutes les conditions (recherche de chaînes, fonctionnement de Media Play, Plug & Play, etc.). • Lorsque vous branchez ou retirez le câble HDMI 1.3, veillez à relancer une recherche de périphérique ou à éteindre et. • Vérifiez si la fonction Anynet + du périphérique Anynet + est réglée sur Marche Je veux démarrer Anynet + . • Assurez-vous que le périphérique Anynet + est bien connecté au téléviseur et assurez-vous que la fonction Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) est réglée sur Marche dans le menu Configuration d’Anynet + . • Appuyez sur le bouton TV de la télécommande pour allumer le téléviseur. Appuyez ensuite sur le bouton TOOLS pour afficher le menu Anynet + et sélectionnez le menu de votre choix. Je veux quitter Anynet+ . • Choisissez Voir télévision dans le menu Anynet + . • Appuyez sur le bouton SOURCE de la télécommande et choisissez un périphérique non compatible Anynet + (remarque : le bouton de chaîne ne fonctionne que si aucun périphérique Anynet + à tuner intégré n’est connecté). Solution Le message Connexion à Anynet + apparaît à l’écran. • Il est impossible d’employer la télécommande quand vous configurez Anynet + ou quand vous passez à un mode de visualisation. • La télécommande n’est utilisable qu’au terme de la configuration d’Anynet + ou du passage au mode de visualisation. La lecture ne démarre pas sur le périphérique Anynet + . • Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser la fonction de lecture quand une opération Plug & Play est en cours. Le périphérique connecté ne s’affiche pas. • Vérifiez si le périphérique est compatible ou non avec les fonctions Anynet + . • Vérifiez si le câble HDMI 1.3 est correctement connecté. • Vérifiez qu’Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) est défini sur Marche dans le menu de configuration d’Anynet + . • Lancez une nouvelle recherche de périphériques Anynet + . • Vous pouvez connecter un périphérique Anynet + uniquement à l’aide du câble HDMI 1.3. Certains câbles HDMI peuvent ne pas prendre en charge les fonctions Anynet + . • En cas d’arrêt anormal résultant d’une déconnexion du câble HDMI ou du câble d’alimentation, ou encore d’une panne de courant, effectuez une nouvelle recherche de périphériques. Impossible d’enregistrer le programme TV. • Vérifiez que la fiche d’antenne est correctement branchée sur le périphérique d’enregistrement. Le son du téléviseur ne sort pas par le récepteur. • Reliez le téléviseur au récepteur à l’aide du câble optique. U Depl. EEntrer R Retour Voir télévision Liste d’appareils Enregistrement : DVDR DVDR MENU DVDR INFO Récepteur : Marche Configuration BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 48 10/20/2009 4:59:29 PMFrançais - 49 Activation de la Bibliothèque de contenu La Bibliothèque de contenu vous permet de visionner ou de lire du contenu intégré sur le téléviseur ou stocké sur votre unité USB. 1. Appuyez sur le bouton MENU. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner Application, puis sur le bouton ENTERE. 2. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner Bibliothèque de contenu, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. Le menu principal de Bibliothèque de contenu s’affiche. O Appuyez sur le bouton CONTENT de la télécommande pour afficher le menu principal Bibliothèque de contenu. 3. Appuyez sur le bouton ◄ ou ► pour sélectionner une icône (Galerie, Cuisine, Enfants, Bien-être, Autres, Gestion de contenu), puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. N L’élément sélectionné est exécuté. ❑ Utilisation du bouton de la télécommande dans le menu Bibliothèque de contenu Bouton Description ▲/▼/◄/► Déplace le curseur pour sélectionner un élément. ENTERE Valide l’élément actuellement sélectionné. RETURN Revient au menu précédent. EXIT Arrête la fonction en cours et revient au menu principal Bibliothèque de contenu. Boutons de couleur Les boutons qui donnent accès à des fonctions sont décrits sur la page correspondante. Vous pouvez régler le volume du contenu en cours de lecture. CONTENT Permet d’entrer ou de quitter le mode Bibliothèque de contenu. N Si vous appuyez sur le bouton Volume ou MMUTE, aucun OSD n’est affiché, mais la fonction est exécutée comme il se doit. N Pour revenir en mode TV, appuyez sur le bouton P de la télécommande. N LA CONTENTS LIBRARY CONTIENT DU TEXTE, DES GRAPHIQUES, DES IMAGES, DES FICHIERS MULTIMEDIA ET AUTRES DOCUMENTS FOURNIS A TITRE PUREMENT INDICATIF ET PROMOTIONNEL. CES DONNEES ONT ETE MODIFIEES ET SONT REGULIEREMENT REVISEES ET MISES A JOUR. CERTAINS DOCUMENTS DE LA CONTENTS LIBRARY PEUVENT NE PAS S’APPLIQUER A TOUS LES UTILISATEURS. N LES INFORMATIONS CONTENUES DANS LA CONTENTS LIBRARY SONT FOURNIES TELLES QUELLES. BIEN QU’ELLES PROVIENNENT DE SOURCES REPUTEES FIABLES, SAMSUNG NE PEUT GARANTIR ET NE GARANTIT PAS L’EXACTITUDE, LA VALIDITE, L’ACTUALITE OU LE CARACTERE COMPLET DE TOUTE INFORMATION OU DONNEES RENDUES DISPONIBLES A UN USAGE PARTICULIER. EN AUCUN CAS, Y COMPRIS LA NEGLIGENCE, SAMSUNG NE POURRA ETRE TENUE RESPONSABLE, QUE CE SOIT SUR BASE CONTRACTUELLE OU EN DOMMAGES ET INTERETS, POUR TOUT DOMMAGE DIRECT, INDIRECT, ACCIDENTEL, PARTICULIER OU CONSECUTIF, FRAIS D’AVOCAT, FRAIS EXPOSES OU TOUT AUTRE DOMMAGE QUELCONQUE RESULTANT DE OU LIE A TOUTE INFORMATION CONTENUE DANS OU RESULTANT DE L’UTILISATION DE LA CONTENTS LIBRARY, MEME SI ELLE A ETE AVERTIE DE LA POSSIBILITE DE TELS DOMMAGES. Bibliothèque de contenu Application Media Play (USB & DLNA) Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) Bibliothèque de contenu Internet@TV Centre de réseau domestique < > Cuisine Enfants Galerie Galerie Bibliothèque de contenu Bien-être Autres Retour Quitter BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 49 10/20/2009 4:59:30 PMFrançais - 50 Utilisation de la Bibliothèque de contenu ❑ Galerie Cette fonction lance un diaporama contenant des images haute résolution et un fond musical. La fonction Galerie du téléviseur vous permet de changer votre ambiance intérieure. N Appuyez sur le bouton INFO pour afficher le nom de l’artiste et des informations détaillées en anglais sur chaque image (actuellement, ces informations ne sont fournies qu’en anglais). N Vous pouvez interrompre le diaporama en appuyant sur le bouton ENTERE pendant sa diffusion. N Les droits d’auteur relatifs au contenu de la Gallery et tous les litiges qui en découlent sont du ressort de Timespace / JoongAng M&B, Inc. ❑ Cuisine Plusieurs recettes, faciles à réaliser, vous sont proposées. Inspirez-vous de ce contenu pour préparer de délicieux repas. N Les recettes présentées dans la catégorie Cuisine du téléviseur Samsung s’inspirent de recettes publiées par Anness Publishing. N Les droits d’auteur relatifs à la catégorie Cuisine et tous les litiges qui en découlent sont du ressort de Practical Pictures. ❑ Enfants Ce contenu éducatif et interactif fera le bonheur de vos enfants. Ils vivront des aventures inoubliables avec Boowa et Kwala, deux personnages sympathiques. N Les droits d’auteur relatifs à la catégorie Enfants et les litiges qui en découlent sont du ressort de UpToTen. ❑ Bien-être Ce contenu de gestion de la santé propose des exercices d’étirement et un fond musical pour toute la famille. ❑ Gestion de contenu „ Mon contenu L’utilisation du contenu est identique à celle du contenu de la mémoire du téléviseur. Vous pouvez également supprimer et lire chaque contenu. „ USB Vous pouvez télécharger du contenu sur une unité de stockage USB et le lire sur votre téléviseur. Le contenu du périphérique USB externe est lu directement. N Bibliothèque de contenu prend en charge les périphériques de stockage de masse USB de la classe MSC. Cette dernière est dédiée aux périphériques de transport de masse uniquement. Il s’agit notamment des clés USB, lecteurs de cartes Flash et disques durs USB (les concentrateurs USB ne sont pas pris en charge). N Si vous exécutez un jeu à l’aide d’une unité de stockage USB externe, vous aurez la possibilité d’enregistrer votre partie (cela dépend en fait du jeu). Nous attirons votre attention sur le fait que le retrait de l’unité de stockage USB alors que l’enregistrement de données est en cours risque de provoquer une perte de données. N Téléchargement de nouveau contenu Vous pourrez vous procurer gratuitement du nouveau contenu par le biais du site Web www.samsung.com. Lorsque vous téléchargez du contenu payant, vous avez besoin d’un numéro UDN (Unique Device Number). Vérifiez le numéro UDN avant de télécharger du nouveau contenu. 1. Rendez-vous sur le site www.samsung.com 2. Sélectionnez un élément de contenu sur la page Téléchargement de contenu. 3. Téléchargez le contenu sur l’unité de stockage USB. 4. Accédez au menu principal Bibliothèque de contenu en appuyant sur le bouton CONTENT ou en sélectionnant Bibliothèque de contenu (Menu → Application → Bibliothèque de contenu) 5. Introduisez l’unité USB dans le port USB situé sur le côté du téléviseur. 6. Vous pouvez regarder le sous-élément de contenu que vous avez téléchargé. 7. Sélectionnez du contenu et appuyez sur le bouton Enter. 8. Vous pouvez lire l’élément de contenu sélectionné. „ Configuration • Délai de l’écran de veille → 10min. / 20min. / 40min. / 1 heures Sélectionne le délai avant l’activation de l’écran de veille. • Enregistrer le numéro UDN (Unique Device Number) Le numéro à 18 chiffres à l’écran représente le code du produit. Vous pouvez enregistrer le numéro UDN sur votre unité USB. N Un périphérique de stockage USB au format NTFS ne prend pas en charge l’enregistrement du numéro UDN. Nous vous recommandons d’utiliser un périphérique de stockage USB utilisant le format FAT. BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 50 10/20/2009 4:59:30 PMFrançais - 51 Vous pouvez accéder à Internet afin d’afficher du contenu informatique ou ludique. Si vous rencontrez des problèmes avec le service d’un widget, contactez le propriétaire du contenu. Dans le widget, appuyez sur le bouton vert et accédez aux informations de contact ou reportez-vous au site Web d’aide pour connaître les coordonnées du fournisseur du widget. N En fonction de votre pays, il se peut que seul l’anglais soit pris en charge dans le service du widget. N Il se peut également que cette fonction ne soit pas prise en charge. Mise en route d’Internet@TV Internet@TV vous propose des services Internet et de télévision intégrés via le Widget Engine Yahoo!®. Avec le service Internet@TV disponible sur votre téléviseur, gérez vos actions, partagez vos photos avec des amis et votre famille, suivez les actualités et la météo. N Selon l’état du réseau, il se peut que cette fonction soit inopérante. Le téléviseur s’éteint alors automatiquement. Sinon, éteignez-le au moyen du bouton d’alimentation. N En fonction de l’état du réseau, cette fonction peut se révéler relativement lente ou instable. Lors de la première exécution d’Internet@TV, des réglages de base s’effectuent de manière automatique. N La première étape consiste à configurer votre réseau. Pour plus d’informations sur la configuration de votre réseau, reportez-vous à la section “Configuration du réseau”. N Une fois le réseau en service, l’assistant du logiciel Internet@TV vous guide tout au long de la procédure de configuration. Internet@TV Le contenu et les services accessibles grâce à cet équipement sont la propriété de tiers et sont protégés par des droits d’auteur, brevets, marques et/ou autres législations applicables en matière de propriété intellectuelle. Ces contenus et services vous sont fournis uniquement pour un usage privé et non-commercial. Vous n’êtes pas autorisé à utiliser le contenu ou les services dans des conditions qui n’ont pas été autorisées par le propriétaire du contenu ou le fournisseur du service. Sauf autorisation expresse du propriétaire du contenu ou du fournisseur du service concerné, vous vous interdisez, notamment, de modifier, reproduire, re-publier, charger, afficher, transmettre, traduire, vendre, exploiter, distribuer ou créer des œuvres dérivées à partir des contenus ou services fournis grâce à cet équipement, de quelque manière que ce soit. LES CONTENUS ET SERVICES TIERS SONT FOURNIS EN L’éTAT. SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO, LTD (« SAMSUNG ») NE GARANTIT NI LE CONTENU NI LES SERVICES AINSI FOURNIS. SOUS RéSERVE DES LOIS IMPéRATIVES APPLICABLES, SAMSUNG EXCLUT EXPRESSéMENT TOUTES GARANTIES APPLICABLES AU CONTENU ET AUX SERVICES TIERS. SAMSUNG NE GARANTIT PAS L’EXACTITUDE, LA VALIDITé, L’OPPORTUNITé, LA LéGALITé OU L’EXHAUSTIVITé DU CONTENU OU DES SERVICES MIS à DISPOSITION PAR LE BIAIS DE CET éQUIPEMENT. SAMSUNG NE SERAAUCUNEMENT RESPONSABLE DES DOMMAGES DIRECTS OU INDIRECTS RéSULTANT DE OU LIéS à L’INFORMATION CONTENUE DANS LE CONTENU ET LES SERVICES OU à L’UTILISATION DE TOUTE CONTENU OU SERVICE PAR VOUS-MêME OU TOUT AUTRE TIERS, MêME SI SAMSUNG A éTé INFORMé DE LA POSSIBILITé DE SURVENANCE DE TELS DOMMAGES. Les services tiers peuvent être résiliés ou interrompus à tout moment par les prestataires tiers. Samsung ne garantit pas que le contenu ou le service soit disponible sur la durée. Le contenu et les services sont transmis par des tiers par le biais de réseaux et d’équipements de transmission sur lesquels Samsung n’exerce aucun contrôle. Samsung exclut de manière expresse toute responsabilité en cas d’interruption ou de suspension de tout contenu ou service mis à disposition grâce à cet équipement, sous réserve qu’une telle interruption ou suspension ne soit pas directement imputable à Samsung. Samsung n’est pas davantage responsable du service clientèle associé aux contenu et services. Toute question ou réclamation concernant le contenu ou les services fournis doit être adressée directement ou fournisseurs de contenus et de services concernés. L’utilisation des services par des mineurs de moins de 18 ans est soumis au consentement exprès de leur parent ou tuteur avant d’accéder au contenu et aux services mis à disposition grâce à cet équipement. 1. Appuyez sur le bouton MENU. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner Application, puis sur le bouton ENTERE. 2. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner Internet@TV, puis sur le bouton ENTERE. N INTERNET@TV démarre. O Appuyez sur le bouton INTERNET@ de la télécommande pour afficher le menu Internet@TV. 3. le General Disclaimer s’affiche à l’écran. Sélectionnez I accept ou I do not accept. N Pour plus d’informations sur le General Disclaimer, reportez-vous à la section ‘Legal Notice’. 4. L’écran de bienvenue est le point de départ de la procédure de configuration guidée d’Internet@TV. N Si vous sélectionnez Exit Setup, vous pouvez reprendre cette étape en appuyant sur le bouton INTERNET@. N Sélectionnez Let’s get started! 5. Le choix de l’emplacement permet aux widgets TV d’utiliser du contenu localisé. N Sélectionnez votre pays dans la liste proposée. 6. Vous devez accepter la politique de confidentialité du moteur de widgets TV Yahoo!® pour pouvoir vous servir d’Internet@TV. N Cliquez sur OK, I Accept. BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 51 10/20/2009 4:59:31 PMFrançais - 52 7. Vous devez accepter les conditions de service du système de widgets TV Yahoo!® pour pouvoir vous servir d’Internet@TV. N Cliquez sur OK, I Accept. 8. Saisissez votre nom pour configurer votre profil. Chaque profil possède sa propre liste de widgets. Vous pouvez créer un profil pour chaque personne se servant d’Internet@TV. N Entrez votre nom et sélectionnez Save this name. N Pour plus d’informations, reportez-vous à la ‘Using the Profile Widget’. 9. Internet@TV teste la connexion réseau. N En cas d’échec du test, reconfigurez votre réseau. N Pour plus d’informations, reportez-vous à la page ‘Network Setup’. 10. La configuration guidée est terminée. Un didacticiel portant sur l’utilisation d’Internet@TV vous est ensuite proposé. N Sélectionnez Continue pour consulter ce didacticiel. N Choisissez Exit setup pour commencer à utiliser Internet@TV. N Pour relancer le didacticiel, sélectionnez Profile Widget → System Setting → Repeat Tutorial. 11. Appuyez sur le bouton INTERNET@ de la télécommande pour afficher l’interface utilisateur Internet@TV. ❑ Affichage „ Mode dock 1 Une bannière de bienvenue apparaît dans l’angle supérieur droit ; elle indique le nom de votre profil. N Cette bannière disparaît rapidement. 2 La bannière met en surbrillance deux raccourcis de la télécommande. N Si vous appuyez sur le bouton bleu (Viewport) de la télécommande, l’affichage passe du mode Viewport au mode de superposition. En mode Viewport, la télévision ou la vidéo est affichée dans une zone miniature, graphismes à l’extérieur. En mode de superposition, les graphismes sont affichés par-dessus la télévision ou la vidéo. N Si vous appuyez sur le bouton jaune (Edit Snippet) de votre télécommande, une fenêtre d’aide s’affiche. Le snippet (raccourci) sélectionné est alors modifiable. 3 Appuyez sur le bouton INTERNET@ de la télécommande. N La liste horizontale au bas de votre écran de télévision s’appelle le ‘dock’. N Les éléments de cette liste sont les ‘snippets’. N Un snippet est un raccourci qui lance un widget TV. N Un widget TV est une application Internet compatible avec votre téléviseur. N Vous pouvez parcourir les snippets à l’aide des touches ◄ ou ► de la télécommande. N La sélection se situe dans la zone la plus à gauche (surbrillance bleue). N Le dock fait glisser les snippets sous cette zone de sélection. N Pour lancer un widget TV, appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE de la télécommande lorsque son snippet est sélectionné. N Lorsque vous ajoutez des snippets, ils forment une liste que vous pouvez parcourir en appuyant sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼. N Deux widgets TV spéciaux apparaissent dans le dock : le Profile Widget et le Gallery Widget. Ceux-ci ne peuvent pas être supprimés. N Le dock disparaîtra de l’écran après une période d’inactivité. „ Mode volet 1 Sélectionnez un snippet et appuyez sur la touche ENTERE pour activer le volet du widget TV. Le logo du widget TV et la maison ( ) apparaissent en haut du volet. 2 Le menu sélectionné est affiché sous le logo du widget TV. N Pour revenir à un précédent écran, sélectionnez-le et appuyez sur la touche ENTERE. N Vous pouvez également appuyer sur la touche RETURN de la télécommande. 3 La sélection active est toujours en surbrillance bleue. La touche en surbrillance est sélectionnée ; pour l’activer, appuyez sur la touche ENTERE. 4 Lorsque les données sont nombreuses, un contrôle de page est utilisé. N La page en cours et le nombre total de pages sont indiqués. N Parcourez les pages en appuyant sur ◄ ou ►. 5 La barre d’outils inférieur comprend des boutons de couleur qui correspondent aux touches verte, rouge, jaune et bleu de la télécommande. • Bouton rouge : Ferme le widget. • Bouton vert : Modifie les paramètres du widget. • Bouton jaune : Gère vos widgets. • Bouton bleu : Ajuste l’écran à la vidéo ou passe la vidéo en plein écran N Il se peut que certains boutons ne soient pas disponibles selon le widget. .@# áëí space a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 52 10/20/2009 4:59:32 PMFrançais - 53 Modification des snippets du dock 1. Pour modifier un snippet, sélectionnez-le dans le dock, puis appuyez sur la touche jaune. 2. Le snippet passe en deuxième position ; le texte d’aide suivant s’affiche alors : • Supprimer (bouton rouge) : Remove this TV Widget. N Vous pouvez réinstaller les widgets supprimés à l’aide de la galerie de widgets (Widget Gallery). • Dépl. (bouton bleu) : Re-order the snippet. Appuyez sur ◄ ou ► pour parcourir les options. Appuyez sur le bouton jaune pour accéder à la nouvelle position. • Terminé (bouton jaune) : Exit the Edit Snippet menu. Utilisation du widget Profil Le widget Profil permet de configurer votre profil utilisateur. Vous pouvez paramétrer plusieurs profils, chacun possédant sa propre liste de widgets. Le menu Switch Profile vous permet de changer de profil. N Au moins deux profils doivent être enregistrés. Si vous voulez ajouter un profil, reportez-vous à la section ‘Contrôles d’administration’. Le menu Profile Settings vous permet de personnaliser et de protéger votre profil. • Les profils utilisateur peuvent être personnalisés au moyen d’un Nom unique et d’un Avatar (image représentant votre profil). • le Nom et l’avatar de votre profil sont affichés dans le snippet de profil, dans le dock. • Vous pouvez protéger vos profils au moyen de l’option Create Profile PIN N Lors du réglage du code PIN pour la première fois, vous pouvez définir une Security Question. Le menu Profile Settings permet de limiter l’accès aux widgets. • En cas d’oubli du code PIN de votre profil, il vous suffit de répondre à la question de sécurité associée à votre profil. • Si l’indicateur Limit Profile d’un profil est activé, aucun autre widget ne peut être installé. N Le code PIN propriétaire doit être défini pour utiliser cette fonction. Pour définir le code PIN propriétaire, reportez-vous à la section ‘Contrôles d’administration’. Le menu System Settings vous permet d’effectuer les opérations suivantes : • Modifier votre emplacement géographique et de définir votre code postal (Etats-Unis uniquement) pour adapter le contenu à votre région. • Relancer didacticiel présenté lors de la configuration. • Restaurer les paramètres d’usine pour supprimer toutes les configurations et informations relatives aux widgets. Dans le menu Administrative Controls, vous pouvez effectuer les opérations suivantes : • Définir le délai d’affichage de l’économiseur d’écran pour éviter de brûler l’écran. • Créer un code PIN propriétaire et définir une question de sécurité pour contrôler d’autres profils. • Créer un nouveau profil pouvant être configuré avec des widgets différents. • Supprimer un profil existant. Dans le widget Profil, vous pouvez vous connecter à Yahoo!® au moyen de votre ID Yahoo!. • Si vous possédez un ID Yahoo!, vous pouvez accéder à votre contenu personnalisé avec les widgets TV Yahoo!. • Tous les widgets TV Yahoo! installés sont automatiquement activés avec l’ID Yahoo! de votre profil. • Si vous ne disposez d’aucun compte Yahoo!, visitez le site Web www.yahoo.com et créez un compte. • La connexion à l’aide d’un ID créé sur le site Web Yahoo dans un pays ne prenant pas en charge Internet@TV peut échouer. ❑ A propos du widget Profil Appuyez sur le bouton vert. Vous pouvez afficher une brève description des éléments suivants : Profile Widget, Copyright Policy, Terms of Service et Privacy Policy. BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 53 10/20/2009 4:59:33 PMFrançais - 54 Utilisation de la galerie de widgets Yahoo!® Passez par la galerie de widgets Yahoo!® pour ajouter d’autres widgets à votre téléviseur. Consultez les widgets TV disponibles dans les catégories suivantes. • Latest Widgets : Affiche les widgets récemment mis à jour. • Yahoo!® Widgets : Kffiche les widgets fournis par Yahoo!®. • Samsung Widgets : Affiche les widgets fournis par Samsung. • Catégories supplémentaires : Affiche tous les widgets par catégorie. N Pour installer un widget, accédez à l’écran de détail, sélectionnez Add Widget to My Profile, puis appuyez sur la touche ENTERE. Le widget est installé et est désormais disponible dans le dock. ❑ Réglage de la Widget Gallery Appuyez sur le bouton vert. „ About Yahoo! Widget Gallery... Vous pouvez afficher de brèves informations concernant les éléments suivants : Widget Gallery, Copyright Policy, Terms of Service et Privacy Policy. Dans le menu Developer Settings, vous pouvez créer votre propre widget. Pour plus d’informations sur la création d’un widget personnalisé, consultez notre site dédié aux développeurs à l’adresse http://connectedtv.yahoo.com/ Utilisation du widget Météo Yahoo!® Le widget Météo Yahoo!® fournit des informations météorologiques actualisées sur votre zone géographique et sur vos emplacements préférés. Ce contenu évolue de façon dynamique en fonction des conditions météorologiques. • Appuyez sur le bouton vert de la télécommande pour afficher le menu Yahoo!® Weather Widget Settings. • Dans le menu Settings, vous pouvez ajouter ou supprimer la ville pour laquelle vous voulez consulter la météo. Dans le menu Settings: • Add New City : ajoutez une ville en saisissant son nom. Une fois les résultats de la recherche affichés, sélectionnez la ville voulue, puis appuyez sur la touche ENTERE. • Delete City : supprimez une ville en sélectionnant son nom dans la liste des villes. Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE et confirmez la suppression. • Modification du mode d’indication de la température. Vous pouvez choisir le mode d’indication de la température : Imperial ou Metric. Imperial affiche les températures en degrés Fahrenheit tandis que Metric les affiche en degrés Celsius. ❑ Créez un snippet pour la ville favorite. • Sélectionnez la ville sur la page d’accueil du widget Météo Yahoo!® et consultez les informations météorologiques détaillées. • Appuyez sur le bouton jaune. • Sélectionnez le menu Add Snippet, puis appuyez sur ENTERE pour ajouter la ville en tant que snippet. ❑ Supprimez un snippet d’une ville. • Lancez le snippet. • Appuyez sur le bouton jaune. • Sélectionnez le menu Delete Snippet, puis appuyez sur ENTERE pour supprimer le snippet. BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 54 10/20/2009 4:59:34 PMFrançais - 55 Utilisation du widget Actualités Yahoo!® Le widget Actualités Yahoo!® vous propose les dernières actualités dans différents domaines : économie, divertissement, politique, sport, people, etc. Sélectionnez une catégorie et le titre qui vous intéresse, puis consultez un résumé constamment actualisé des actualités correspondantes. Utilisation du widget Flickr Yahoo!® Le widget Flickr vous permet d’accéder aux photos favorites de votre famille et de vos amis tout en regardant la télévision. Partagez vos photos avec votre famille en les présentant sous forme de diaporama sur votre téléviseur grand écran. • Personnalisez le widget Flickr en vous connectant avec votre ID Yahoo! • Pour plus de détails sur les procédures de connexion, reportez-vous aux instructions de la section Utilisation du widget Profil. • Pour plus d’informations sur Flickr, visitez le site Web http://www.flickr.com. N La catégorie Your Photos contient les photos que vous avez enregistrées sur le site Web Flickr. „ Pour consulter les photos Flickr sous forme de diaporama : • appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE pour afficher les détails de la photo. • Sélectionnez Start Slideshow, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. „ Pour contrôler la lecture du diaporama : • Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE pendant le diaporama. • Les miniatures des photos sont affichées au bas de l’écran. N Lorsque les boutons de commande du diaporama sont affichés, vous pouvez Interrompre, Lire et Arrêter le diaporama. N Sélectionnez le menu et appuyez sur ENTERE pour afficher les informations de la photo sélectionnée. • Le menu Your Sets vous permet d’afficher les photos que vous avez classées dans Flickr. • Le menu Explore vous permet d’explorer les photos présentées par le site Web Flickr. Vous pouvez afficher les photos mises à jour quotidiennement. • Le menu Mark as Favorite ou Remove From Favorite déplace les photos dans votre jeu de photos favorites ou les en enlève. • Le menu Favorite Photos vous permet d’afficher les photos que vous avez classées dans vos favoris. • Le menu Your Contacts vous permet d’afficher les mises à jour effetuées par vos proches et amis. Le menu Your Groups vous permet de sélectionner vos groupes favoris sur le site Web Flickr afin de partager et de regarder des photos avec la communauté d’utilisateurs Flickr. Pour configurer le widget Flickr Yahoo!®, appuyez sur le bouton vert de la télécommande. • Le menu Time Per Slide permet de contrôler la vitesse du diaporama. • Le menu Repeat relance le diaporama au début une fois la dernière photo affichée. BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 55 10/20/2009 4:59:34 PMFrançais - 56 Utilisation du widget Finance Yahoo!® Consultez les dernières actualités et informations boursières grâce au widget Finance Yahoo!®. Appuyez sur le bouton vert pour configurer vos actions. Utilisez le menu Add New Symbol pour saisir le nom d’une nouvelle action. • Dans les résultats de la recherche, sélectionnez l’action à ajouter, sélectionnez le menu Add Symbol, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. N L’action sélectionnée est ajoutée à la liste My Stocks. • Utilisez le menu Import Symbols From Yahoo!® pour récupérer votre portefeuille Yahoo!® Finance. - Le menu Merge Symbols fusionne les symboles du widget Finance Yahoo!® Widget avec ceux de votre portefeuille. - Le menu Replace Symbols supprime les symboles du widget Finance Yahoo!® Widget par ceux de votre portefeuille. • Utilisez le menu Display Format pour basculer la transition de fluctuation du cours des actions sur Value ou Percentage. • Créez un snippet pour votre action favorite. - Sélectionnez le symbole de l’action sur la page d’accueil du widget Finance Yahoo!® et consultez les informations financières détaillées. - Appuyez sur le bouton jaune. - Sélectionnez le menu Add Snippet, puis appuyez sur ENTERE pour ajouter l’action en tant que snippet. • Suppression d’un Snippet - Lancez le snippet à partir du dock. - Appuyez sur le bouton jaune. - Sélectionnez le menu Delete Snippet, puis appuyez sur ENTERE pour supprimer le snippet. Dépannage d’Internet@TV Problème Solution possible Certains services du widget ne fonctionnent pas. • Contactez le prestataire de service. • Dans le widget, appuyez sur le bouton vert et accédez aux informations de contact ou reportez-vous au site Web d’aide pour connaître les coordonnées du fournisseur du widget. • Reportez-vous au site Web d’aide. Certains contenus de widget sont uniquement en anglais. Comment puis-je en modifier la langue ? • La langue du contenu des widgets peut être différente de celle de l’interface utilisateur des widgets. Ce paramètre dépend du prestataire de service. Après restauration des paramètres d’usine, le service de widget Yahoo ne fonctionne plus et un message d’avertissement s’affiche. • Une fois la restauration des paramètres d’usine terminée, éteignez puis rallumez votre téléviseur. Relancez ensuite Internet@TV. Dans le widget Flickr, je me suis connecté à mon compte, mais je ne parviens pas à voir mon image. • Visitez le site Web Yahoo et activez votre compte Flickr avec votre ID Yahoo!. Dans le widget Profil, j’ai modifié mon emplacement mais les paramètres précédents restent actifs. • Eteignez puis rallumez votre téléviseur. Relancez ensuite Internet@TV. • Vous pouvez à présent profiter de tous les services de widget services pris en charge au nouvel emplacement. BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 56 10/20/2009 4:59:35 PMFrançais - 57 Site Web d’assistance Pays Site Web Autriche www.samsung.com → Produkte → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Belgique www.samsung.com → Producten → televisies → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV www.samsung.com → Produits → téléviseurs → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV République Tchèque www.samsung.com → Produkty → televizory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Danemark www.samsung.com → Produkter → stue & soveværelse → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Finlande www.samsung.com → Tuotteet → kodinelektroniikka → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV France www.samsung.com → Produits → télévisions → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Allemagne www.samsung.com → Privatkunden → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Grèce www.samsung.com → Προϊόντα → τηλεοράσεις → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Hongrie www.samsung.com → Termékek → televíziók → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Irlande www.samsung.com → Products → Television → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Italie www.samsung.com → Prodotti → TV → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Pays-Bas www.samsung.com → Producten → televisies → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Norvège www.samsung.com → Produkter → hverdagsrom & soverom → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Pologne www.samsung.com → Produkty → telewizory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Portugal www.samsung.com → Produtos para Consumidores → televisores → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Slovaquie www.samsung.com → Produkty → televízory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Espagne www.samsung.com → Productos → televisores → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Suède www.samsung.com → Produkter → vardagsrum & sovrum → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Suisse www.samsung.com → Produits → télévisions → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV www.samsung.com → Produkte → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Royaume-Uni www.samsung.com → Products → Television → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Turquie www.samsung.com → Tüketici Ürünleri → televizyon → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Estonie www.samsung.com → Klientidele → Televiisorid → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Lettonie www.samsung.com → Klientiem → Televizori → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Lituanie www.samsung.com → Namams → Televizoriai → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Russie www.samsung.com → Продукты → Телевизоры → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Ukraine www.samsung.com → Потребительские продукты → телевизоры → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV N La procédure d’accès est susceptible d’être modifiée à l’avenir. N Les liens peuvent varier dans des pays spécifiques. BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 57 10/20/2009 4:59:35 PMFrançais - 58 N En fonction de votre pays, il se peut que cette fonction ne soit pas prise en charge. N Si vous rencontrez des problèmes avec le service d’un widget, contactez le propriétaire du contenu. Dans le widget, appuyez sur le bouton vert et accédez aux informations de contact ou reportez-vous au site Web d’aide pour connaître les coordonnées du fournisseur du widget. N En fonction de votre pays, il se peut que seul l’anglais soit pris en charge dans le service du widget. Mise en route d’Internet@TV Internet@TV fournit les services de widget SAMSUNG via une connexion réseau. Le contenu d’Internet@TV peut varier en fonction du fournisseur. Le service Internet@TV vous permet d’accéder à diverses informations telles que YouTube. N Si la police d’un contenu émanant d’un fournisseur précis n’est pas prise en charge sur le téléviseur, ce contenu ne sera pas affiché normalement. N La configuration des widgets et les services associés peuvent varier en fonction du pays sélectionné. Lorsque vous avez changé de pays, éteignez le téléviseur puis rallumez-le. Vous pouvez ensuite utiliser le service de widget adapté au nouveau pays. Si le pays est réglé sur Others (Autres), le téléviseur ne peut pas reconnaître votre pays. Dans ce cas, effectuez directement la sélection dans la liste de pays du service. N Pour plus d’informations sur la configuration pour votre pays, reportez-vous aux instructions de la fonction Plug & Play. N En fonction de l’état du réseau, cette fonction peut se révéler relativement lente ou instable. N Avant d’utiliser Internet@TV, commencez par configurer le réseau. Pour plus d’informations sur la configuration de votre réseau, reportez-vous à la section “Config. du réseau”. Lors de la première exécution d’Internet@TV, des réglages de base s’effectuent de manière automatique. La mise à jour peut prendre quelques minutes. 1. Appuyez sur le bouton MENU. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner Application, puis sur le bouton ENTERE. 2. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner Internet@TV, puis sur le bouton ENTERE. O Appuyez sur le bouton INTERNET@ de la télécommande pour afficher le menu Internet@TV. 3. le Contrat d’utilisation s’affiche. Cliquez sur Accepter pour en accepter les conditions. 4. Le message Statistiques & Analyse s’affiche. Cliquez sur Accepter pour en accepter les conditions. Configuration d’Internet@TV Vous pouvez consulter et utiliser les menus relatifs à Single Sign On (SSO) (Ouverture de session unique), à la gestion du système et aux propriétés. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner Configuration puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. ❑ Single Sign On Vous pouvez utiliser ce menu lors de la création et de la suppression du compte. Avec Single Sign On, vous pouvez gérer votre compte, y compris les informations de compte du site de contenu. Vous ne devez pas ouvrir d’autre session. N Le compte est réservé à internet@TV. „ Créer compte Vous pouvez créer un compte et vous connecter au site du service voulu. N Vous ne pouvez pas créer plus de 10 comptes. N Le nom du compte ne doit pas excéder 10 caractères. N Si aucun service ne requiert de connexion, vous ne pouvez pas créer de compte. „ Account Management • Site du service : vous pouvez enregistrer les informations de connexion du site du service (comme YouTube). • Modifier le mot de passe : permet de modifier le mot de passe du compte. • Supprimer : permet de supprimer le compte. N Si vous avez oublié le mot de passe du compte, appuyez sur les boutons de la télécommande dans l’ordre suivant, de façon à réinitialiser Internet@TV : POWER (arrêt) → M MUTE → 9 → 4 → 8 → POWER (marche). Si vous employez cette fonction, tous les comptes seront supprimés. Internet@TV BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 58 10/20/2009 4:59:35 PMFrançais - 59 ❑ Installation du système N Il se peut que les fonctions Exécution automatique du message déroulant et Durée du message déroulant ne soient pas prises en charge dans votre pays. „ Modification du mot de passe d’un service N Le mot de passe par défaut d’un nouveau téléviseur est réglé sur 0-0-0-0. N Si vous avez oublié le mot de passe, appuyez sur les boutons de la télécommande dans l’ordre suivant, ce qui remet le mot de passe à 0-0-0-0 : POWER (arrêt) → M MUTE → 9 → 4 → 8 → POWER (marche). „ Durée du service Sélectionnez l’option voulue pour définir le délai avant l’activation de l’écran de veille. „ Exécution automatique du message déroulant → Arrêt / Marche Sélectionnez l’option voulue pour activer automatiquement ou non le message défilant lors de la mise en marche du téléviseur. „ Durée du message déroulant Sélectionnez l’option voulue pour définir le délai avant l’activation de l’écran de veille. ❑ Propriétés Permet d’afficher des informations sur Internet@TV. Vous pouvez déterminer la vitesse de votre service de télévision par Internet à l’aide de la section correspondante. Utilisation du service Internet@TV Dans un widget proposant des menus de catégories, vous pouvez visualiser le contenu de ces menus au moyen des boutons ◄ ou ►. „ Connexion au compte 1. Appuyez sur le bouton rouge. 2. Sélectionnez le compte utilisateur voulu, puis appuyez sur ENTERE. 3. Saisissez le mot de passe. N Une fois la connexion établie, le compte utilisateur s’affiche à l’écran. N Pour que la connexion soit possible, au moins un compte doit être enregistré. Pour créer un compte, reportez-vous à la section ‘Configuration d’Internet@TV’. „ Utilisation de la galerie des widgets Vous pouvez utiliser les fonctions Exécuter service, Verrouiller, Installer service dans un widget existant, et consulter la description des services de widget qui ne sont pas installés. Sur Internet@TV, vous pouvez ajouter et utiliser divers widgets fournis par votre fournisseur de service. La situation peut varier en fonction du fournisseur de contenu. • Exécuter service : permet d’exécuter le service du widget. • Verrouiller : verrouille le service. • Installer service (ou Supprimer service) : Permet d’installer ou de supprimer le service du widget. „ Utilisation du widget YouTube Vous pouvez regarder des vidéos diffusées via YouTube. Si vous avez créé un compte sur YouTube, enregistrez les informations de votre compte via la gestion des comptes. Vous pouvez ensuite utiliser la catégorie Mes favoris. N Le menu peut être modifié selon le service Web. N Le contenu peut être inapproprié pour les enfants. Dans ce cas, utilisez la fonction Verrouiller dans la Galerie de Widgets. Xz~*atp‚po _z{*]lpo Xz~*[z{€wl} Xz~*Ot~n€~~po _z{*Qlz€}tp~ Xz~*Wtyvpo Xz~*]p~{zxopo Qpl€}po _zol„ <:B ^ppvtyr*U€~tnp*Opnlop~*Wlp} atp‚~*E*C; M}plvtyr*Yp‚~*Lwp}~*m„*P8Xltw atp‚~*E*C; Mzz*Szz*ty*sp*Mzl}o}zzx atp‚~*E*CE=A „ Change Mode llrrChange page U Move EOK R Return BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 59 10/20/2009 4:59:36 PMFrançais - 60 Dépannage d’Internet@TV Problème Solution possible Certains services de widget ne fonctionnent pas. Contactez le fournisseur du service concerné. Dans le widget, appuyez sur le bouton vert afin d’accéder aux informations de contact, ou consultez le site Web d’assistance pour trouver des informations sur le fournisseur du service. Consultez à la page Web d’assistance. Quel est l’avantage de l’ouverture de session unique ? Si vous créez un compte et enregistrez vos informations de connexion au service désiré, vous pouvez accéder à du contenu personnalisé sans devoir ouvrir une session supplémentaire. Lorsqu’une erreur réseau se produit, je ne peux plus utiliser que le menu Paramètres. Si votre connexion réseau ne fonctionne pas, il se peut que l’accès aux services soit limité. Toutes les fonctions ont en effet besoin d’une connexion à Internet, à l’exception du menu Paramètres. Peut-il arriver que des films destinés aux adultes soient diffusés via YouTube ? En principe, toutes les listes du menu sont filtrées. La fonction de recherche permet toutefois d’afficher ce type de films. Dans ce cas, vous pouvez verrouiller le service de widget à l’aide de la Galerie de Widgets. Site Web d’assistance Pays Site Web Autriche www.samsung.com → Produkte → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Belgique www.samsung.com → Producten → televisies → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV www.samsung.com → Produits → téléviseurs → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV République Tchèque www.samsung.com → Produkty → televizory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Danemark www.samsung.com → Produkter → stue & soveværelse → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Finlande www.samsung.com → Tuotteet → kodinelektroniikka → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV France www.samsung.com → Produits → télévisions → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Allemagne www.samsung.com → Privatkunden → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Grèce www.samsung.com → Προϊόντα → τηλεοράσεις → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Hongrie www.samsung.com → Termékek → televíziók → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Irlande www.samsung.com → Products → Television → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Italie www.samsung.com → Prodotti → TV → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Pays-Bas www.samsung.com → Producten → televisies → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Norvège www.samsung.com → Produkter → hverdagsrom & soverom → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Pologne www.samsung.com → Produkty → telewizory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Portugal www.samsung.com → Produtos para Consumidores → televisores → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Slovaquie www.samsung.com → Produkty → televízory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Espagne www.samsung.com → Productos → televisores → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Suède www.samsung.com → Produkter → vardagsrum & sovrum → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Suisse www.samsung.com → Produits → télévisions → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV www.samsung.com → Produkte → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Royaume-Uni www.samsung.com → Products → Television → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Turquie www.samsung.com → Tüketici Ürünleri → televizyon → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Estonie www.samsung.com → Klientidele → Televiisorid → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Lettonie www.samsung.com → Klientiem → Televizori → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Lituanie www.samsung.com → Namams → Televizoriai → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Russie www.samsung.com → Продукты → Телевизоры → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Ukraine www.samsung.com → Потребительские продукты → телевизоры → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV N La procédure d’accès est susceptible d’être modifiée à l’avenir. N Les liens peuvent varier dans des pays spécifiques. BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 60 10/20/2009 4:59:36 PMFrançais - 61 Centre de réseau domestique A propos du Centre de réseau domestique le Centre de réseau domestique connecte les téléviseurs et téléphones portables par l’intermédiaire d’un réseau. Vous pouvez afficher les appels reçus, le contenu des messages texte et les programmes définis sur le téléphone portable sur le téléviseur à l’aide du Centre de réseau domestique. En outre, vous pouvez lire le contenu multimédia enregistré sur les téléphones portables (vidéos, photos, musique, etc.) en l’important dans le téléviseur via le réseau. N Le Centre de réseau domestique est disponible si l’appareil prend en charge la fonction DLNA DMC (Digital Media Controller). N Cette fonction permet la compatibilité avec les téléphones mobiles Samsung ultérieurs. Pour plus d’informations, visitez www.samsung.com ou contactez le centre d’appel Samsung. Il peut être nécessaire d’installer des logiciels supplémentaires sur l’appareil mobile. Pour plus d’informations, reportez-vous au manuel de celui-ci. ❑ Connexion au Centre de réseau domestique Pour plus d’informations sur les paramètres réseau, reportez-vous à la section ‘Network Setup’. „ Connexion par l’intermédiaire d’un réseau ad hoc Wi-Fi 1. Branchez l’adaptateur “Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter” sur le port USB1(HDD) ou USB2 du téléviseur. 2. Pour plus d’informations sur la configuration de votre réseau Ad-hoc, reportez-vous à la section ‘Network Setup’. N Pour obtenir des informations sur la configuration des paramètres réseau du téléphone portable, reportez-vous au manuel correspondant. 3. Configurez l’adresse IP, le SSID et le mot de passe du téléphone portable dans les paramètres ad hoc de ce dernier à l’aide des valeurs Nom du réseau (SSID) et Code de sécurité affichés sur le téléviseur. „ Connexion via un routeur câblé / sans fil 1. Connectez le routeur IP câblé/sans fil sur le port LAN du téléviseur au moyen du câble LAN ou raccordez le port USB1(HDD) ou USB2 du téléviseur à l’adaptateur LAN sans fil Samsung. N Pour obtenir des informations sur les procédures de configuration du routeur câblé/sans fil et du téléphone portable, reportez-vous au manuel de l’appareil correspondant. Centre de réseau domestique Panneau latéral du téléviseur Adaptateur LAN sans fil Samsung Téléphone portable Adaptateur LAN sans fil Samsung Routeur IP câblé/sans fil Panneau latéral du téléviseur Téléphone portable ou ou Câble LAN Adaptateur LAN sans fil Samsung Panneau latéral du téléviseur Téléphone portable ou Câble LAN Routeur IP câblé/sans fil BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 61 10/20/2009 4:59:40 PMFrançais - 62 Configuration du Centre de réseau domestique ❑ Message / Media Affiche la liste des téléphones mobiles configurés avec ce téléviseur pour utiliser la fonction Message ou Media. N La fonction Media est disponible sur d’autres appareils mobiles prenant en charge la fonction DLNA DMC. „ Autoriser Autorise le téléphone portable. „ Refuser Bloque le téléphone portable. „ Supprimer Supprime le téléphone portable de la liste. N Cette fonction efface simplement le nom de la liste. Si l’appareil mobile effacé s’allume ou tente de se reconnecter au téléviseur, il est possible qu’il s’affiche à nouveau. ❑ Configuration „ Message → Marche / Arrêt Vous pouvez activer ou non l’utilisation de la fonction Message (appels reçus, contenu des messages texte et programmes définis sur le téléphone portable). „ Média → Marche / Arrêt Vous pouvez choisir d’utiliser ou non la fonction média qui lit le contenu (vidéos, photos, musique) du téléphone portable. „ Nom TV Vous pouvez donner un nom au téléviseur afin de le retrouver plus facilement sur le téléphone portable. N Si vous sélectionnez Entrée utilisateur, vous pouvez taper le nom du téléviseur à l’aide de l’OSK (On Screen Keyboard, le clavier virtuel). Retour Quitter Centre de réseau domestique 111-1234-5671 : Autor. 111-1234-5672 : Autor. 111-1234-5673 : Refusé 111-1234-5674 : Refusé Message Média Conf. Retour Quitter Centre de réseau domestique Message : Marche Média : Marche Nom TV : TV Message Média Conf. Utilisation de la fonction Message Cette fonction permet d’afficher les appels reçus, le contenu des messages texte et les programmes définis sur le téléphone portable via la fenêtre d’alarme lorsque vous regardez la télévision. N Pour désactiver cette fenêtre d’alarme Message, définissez l’option Message sur Arrêt dans le menu Configuration du Centre de réseau domestique. N La fenêtre d’alarme s’affiche pendant 20 secondes. Si vous n’appuyez sur aucune touche ou si vous sélectionnez Annuler, elle s’affiche trois fois au maximum à des intervalles de 5 minutes. N Si OK est sélectionné ou s’il ne l’est pas alors que le message est affiché trois fois, le message est supprimé sans toutefois être supprimé du téléphone portable. N La fenêtre d’alarme simple peut s’afficher durant l’utilisation de certaines applications (Media Play, Content Library, etc.). Dans ce cas, pour afficher le contenu du message, basculez vers le mode de consultation de la télévision. N Lorsque le message d’un téléphone portable inconnu s’affiche, sélectionnez ce téléphone sous l’élément Message du Centre de réseau domestique et sélectionnez Refuser pour le bloquer. ❑ Affichage du message Si un nouveau message texte (SMS) arrive lorsque vous regardez la télévision, la fenêtre d’alarme s’affiche. Si vous cliquez sur le bouton OK, le contenu du message s’affiche. N Vous pouvez configurer les paramètres d’affichage du contenu des messages texte (SMS) sur le téléphone portable. Pour plus d’informations, reportez-vous au manuel du téléphone portable. N Certains caractères spéciaux peuvent s’afficher sous forme de caractères vides ou cassés. ❑ Alarme de réception d’appel Si vous recevez un appel lorsque vous regardez la télévision, la fenêtre d’alarme s’affiche. ❑ Alarme des programmes Lorsque vous regardez la télévision, la fenêtre d’alarme apparaît et affiche le programme enregistré. N Vous pouvez configurer les paramètres d’affichage du contenu du programme sur le téléphone portable. Pour plus d’informations, reportez-vous au manuel de celui-ci. N Certains caractères spéciaux peuvent s’afficher sous forme de caractères vides ou cassés.. husband SMS Nouveau message reçu Voulez-vous afficher les détails ? OK Annuler BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 62 10/20/2009 4:59:45 PMFrançais - 63 Utilisation de la fonction Media Une fenêtre d’alarme informe l’utilisateur que le contenu multimédia (vidéos, photos, musique) provenant du téléphone portable va s’afficher sur le téléviseur. Le contenu est lu automatiquement 3 secondes après l’affichage de la fenêtre d’alarme. Si vous appuyez sur le bouton RETURN ou EXIT lorsque la fenêtre d’alarme s’affiche, le contenu multimédia n’est pas lu. N Pour désactiver la transmission du contenu multimédia en provenance du téléphone portable, définissez l’option Média sur Arrêt dans le menu Configuration du Centre de réseau domestique. N En fonction de sa résolution et de son format, le contenu peut ne pas être lu sur le téléviseur. ❑ Boutons de commande du lecteur multimédia Bouton Description ◄ / ► • Déplace le curseur et sélectionne un élément. • Pendant la lecture d’un fichier film : avance ou recule dans le film. ENTERE • Si vous appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE pendant la lecture, celle-ci est suspendue. • Si vous appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE en mode pause, la lecture reprend. RETURN Revient au menu précédent. TOOLS Exécute diverses fonctions dans les menus Photo, Musique et Film. INFO Affiche des informations sur le fichier. EXIT Arrête le mode Media Play et revient en mode télévision. N Les boutons ENTERE et◄ / ► peuvent ne pas fonctionner selon le type de contenu multimédia. N Il est possible de contrôler la lecture à l’aide de l’appareil mobile. Pour plus d’informations, reportez-vous au manuel de celui-ci. Lecture des médias à partir de “Appareil inconnu 13” BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 63 10/20/2009 4:59:45 PMFrançais - 64 Suite... Fonction Télétexte La plupart des chaînes de télévision proposent des services d’informations via le télétexte. La page d’index du télétexte contient des instructions sur l’utilisation du service. Vous pouvez, en outre, sélectionner différentes options à l’aide des boutons de la télécommande N Pour que l’affichage des informations de télétexte soit correct, la réception des chaînes doit être stable. Autrement, des informations pourraient manquer ou certaines pages ne pas s’afficher. 1 : (quitter) Permet de quitter l’affichage télétexte. 2 6 (index) Permet d’afficher la page d’index du télétexte (sommaire). 3 5 (afficher) Permet d’afficher le texte masqué (par exemple, les réponses à un questionnaire). Appuyez à nouveau sur cette touche pour rétablir le mode d’affichage normal. 4 4 (format) Permet d’afficher la moitié supérieure de l’écran en caractères deux fois plus grands. Pour afficher la moitié inférieure de l’écran, appuyez de nouveau sur cette touche. Appuyez à nouveau pour rétablir le mode d’affichage normal. 5 / (télétexte activé/mix) Permet d’activer le mode télétexte après avoir choisi la chaîne diffusant le service télétexte. Appuyez deux fois sur cette touche pour superposer le télétexte à l’émission en cours de diffusion. 6 8 (mémoriser) Permet d’enregistrer les pages de télétexte. 7 1 (page secondaire) Permet d’afficher une page secondaire. 8 2 (page suivante) Permet d’afficher la page de télétexte suivante. 9 3 (page précédente) Permet d’afficher la page de télétexte précédente. 0 0 (mode) Permet de sélectionner le mode Télétexte (LIST/FLOF). Si vous appuyez sur cette touche en mode LISTE, vous accédez au mode d’enregistrement de liste.Dans ce mode, vous pouvez enregistrer une page télétexte dans une liste à l’aide du bouton 8 (mémoriser). ! 9 (maintenir) Permet de bloquer l’affichage sur une page précise, si celle-ci est reliée à plusieurs pages secondaires qui défilent automatiquement. Pour reprendre l’affichage des autres pages, appuyez à nouveau sur cette touche. @ 7 (annuler) Permet d’afficher le programme lors de la recherche d’une page. # Boutons de couleur (rouge/vert/jaune/bleu) Si une société de télédiffusion utilise le système FASTEXT, les différentes rubriques d’une page de télétexte sont associées à un code couleur qui permet de les sélectionner à l’aide des touches de couleur de la télécommande. Appuyez sur la touche dont la couleur correspond à celle de la rubrique souhaitée. La page affiche d’autres informations en couleur que vous pouvez sélectionner de la même manière. Pour afficher la page précédente ou suivante, appuyez sur la touche de couleur correspondante. N Vous pouvez changer de page de télétexte en appuyant sur les touches numériques de la télécommande. Conseils d’utilisation 1 3 4 5 6 2 7 8 9 0 ! @ # BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 64 10/20/2009 4:59:45 PMFrançais - 65 Les pages télétexte sont organisées en six catégories : Catégorie Sommaire A Numéro de la page sélectionnée. B Identité de la chaîne émettrice. C Numéro de la page actuelle ou indications de recherche. D Date et heure. E Texte. F Informations d’état. Informations FASTEXT. N Les informations du télétexte sont souvent réparties sur plusieurs pages qui s’affichent successivement. Ces pages sont accessibles en : - Entrant le numéro de page. - Sélectionnant un titre dans une liste. - Sélectionnant un titre de couleur (système FASTEXT) O Appuyez sur le bouton TV pour quitter l’affichage télétexte. Caractéristiques du kit de fixation murale (VESA) Installez votre fixation murale sur un mur solide perpendiculaire au sol. Si vous souhaitez la fixer sur d’autres matériaux de construction, veuillez prendre contact avec votre revendeur le plus proche. Si vous l’installez au plafond ou sur un mur non droit, elle peut tomber et occasionner des blessures corporelles graves. Famille de produit pouce Caract. VESA (A * B) Standard Vis Quantité TELEVISEUR LCD 19" ~22" 100 * 100 M4 4 23"~29" 200 * 100 30"~40" 200 * 200 M6 46"~55" 400 * 400 57"~70" 800 * 400 M8 80" ~ 1400 * 800 TELEVISEUR ECRAN A PLASMA 42"~ 50" 400 * 400 M8 4 58"~ 63" 600 * 400 70" ~ 800 * 400 80" ~ 1400 * 800 N Nous avons fourni les dimensions standard pour tous les kits de fixation murale, comme indiqué dans le tableau ci-dessus. N Un manuel d’installation détaillé et toutes les pièces nécessaires au montage sont fournis avec le kit de fixation murale. N N’utilisez pas de vis plus longues que la dimension standard car elles pourraient endommager l’intérieur du téléviseur. N Pour les fixations murales non conformes aux caractéristiques des vis VESA standard, la longueur des vis peut varier, selon leurs caractéristiques. N N’utilisez pas de vis non conformes aux caractéristiques des vis VESA standard. Ne serrez pas trop les vis : cela pourrait endommager le produit ou provoquer sa chute, entraînant des blessures corporelles. Samsung ne peut être tenue responsable de ce type d’accident. N Samsung ne peut être tenue responsable de tout dommage au produit ou toute blessure corporelle dans le cas de l’utilisation d’une fixation murale non-VESA ou non spécifiée, ni si l’utilisateur ne suit pas les instructions d’installation du produit. N Nos modèles 57” et 63” ne sont pas conformes aux caractéristiques VESA. Vous devez par conséquent utiliser notre kit de fixation murale approprié pour ce modèle. N Lors du montage, l’inclinaison du téléviseur ne doit pas dépasser 15°. N’installez pas le kit de fixation murale lorsque le téléviseur est sous tension. Cela pourrait entraîner une blessure par choc électrique. BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 65 10/20/2009 4:59:46 PMFrançais - 66 Préparation avant l’installation d’un kit de fixation murale 1. Installez le kit de fixation murale avec un couple de serrage de 15 kg/cm ou moins. Certaines pièces peuvent être endommagées si le couple est supérieur. 2. Le kit d’accessoires contient un Support – un Anneau [②] en vue d’installer un kit d’une marque autre que Samsung TV. (Cas B) N Insérez la vis dans le trou [①] lors de l’installation de la fixation murale. Assemblage de la base-support Avertissement Fixez fermement le socle au téléviseur avant de déplacer ce dernier. Il pourrait tomber et provoquer de graves dommages. N Le téléviseur doit être porté par au moins deux personnes. Ne posez jamais le téléviseur sur le sol car cela pourrait l’endommager. Conservez toujours le téléviseur en position verticale. Fixez fermement la télévision à la base du support au moyen des vis prévues à cet effet. (L’aspect extérieur de votre écran peut différer de celui présenté à l’image.) Si vous fixez le téléviseur au mur, fermez le couvercle (➊) de la pièce de connexion de la base-support à l’aide des deux vis. (PS50B650) (PS58B680/PS63B680) Cas A. Installation d’un kit de fixation murale de SAMSUNG Cas B. Installation d’un kit de fixation murale d’un autre fabricant BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 66 10/20/2009 4:59:49 PMFrançais - 67 Si vous tirez ou poussez le téléviseur ou si vous grimpez dessus, il risque de tomber. Veillez en particulier, à ce que vos enfants ne se suspendent pas au téléviseur, ni ne le déséquilibrent, car cela pourrait le faire basculer et occasionner des blessures graves pouvant entraîner la mort. Respectez toutes les précautions de sécurité indiquées dans la brochure relative à la sécurité. Pour une stabilité accrue, installez le dispositif anti-chute comme indiqué. ❑ Pour éviter toute chute du téléviseur 1. Placez les vis dans les colliers et fixez-les fermement au mur. Assurez-vous que les vis sont solidement fixées au mur. N En fonction du type de mur, il est possible que vous ayez besoin de matériel supplémentaire, tel que des chevilles. N Les colliers, vis et chaînettes n’étant pas fournis, vous devez les acheter séparément. 2. Retirez les vis situées sur la partie centrale arrière du téléviseur, placez les vis dans les colliers, puis fixez-les à nouveau sur le téléviseur. N Il se peut que les vis ne soient pas fournies avec le produit. 3. Reliez les colliers fixés au téléviseur et ceux fixés sur le mur à l’aide de chaînettes, puis attachez-les fermement. N Placez le téléviseur à proximité du mur afin qu’il ne bascule pas vers l’arrière. N Il est recommandé de placer la chaînette de façon à ce que les colliers fixés au mur soient placés à même hauteur ou plus bas que ceux fixés au téléviseur. N Détachez la chaînette avant de déplacer le téléviseur. 4. Vérifiez que toutes les connexions sont fixées correctement. Vérifiez régulièrement que les connexions ne présentent aucun signe d’usure. Si vous avez un doute quant à la sécurité de vos connexions, contactez un installateur professionnel. Fixation du téléviseur au mur Sécurisation de l’emplacement d’installation Respectez les distances requises entre le produit et d’autres objets (p. ex. murs) pour assurer une ventilation adéquate. Le non-respect de cette consigne pourrait provoquer un incendie ou un problème avec le produit en raison de l’augmentation de la température interne de ce dernier. Installez le produit de manière à respecter les distances requises indiquées sur la figure. N En cas d’utilisation d’un support ou de montage mural, n’utilisez que des pièces Samsung Electronics. - L’emploi de pièces d’un autre fabricant risque d’entraîner des problèmes avec le produit ou d’occasionner des blessures dues à la chute du produit. - L’emploi de pièces d’un autre fabricant risque d’entraîner un problème avec le produit ou de provoquer un incendie en raison de l’augmentation de la température interne du produit due à une ventilation insuffisante. N L’aspect peut varier en fonction du produit. „ Installation du produit sur un support „ Montage mural du produit 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 경고 주의 경고 주의 mur mur BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 67 10/20/2009 4:59:50 PMFrançais - 68 Résolution des problèmes Si vous avez des questions relatives au téléviseur, commencez par consulter la liste ci-dessous. Si aucune de ces astuces de dépannage ne s'applique à votre problème, rendez-vous sur le site "www.samsung.com", puis cliquez sur Assistance ou contactez le centre d'appels dont les coordonnées figurent sur la dernière page. N La mise à niveau du microprogramme peut être considérée comme la première solution possible. Problème Solution possible Qualité de l'image Exécutez tout d'abord le Test de l'image pour vérifier que votre téléviseur affiche correctement l'image de test. * Accédez à MENU → Assistance → Diagnostic automatique → Test de l'image Si l'image de test s'affiche correctement, sa qualité médiocre peut être due à la source ou au signal. La qualité de l'image sur le téléviseur n'est pas aussi bonne que dans le magasin. • Si vous êtes équipé d'un décodeur câble/boîtier décodeur analogique, procédez à une mise à niveau. Utilisez les câbles HDMI ou Composant pour fournir une qualité d'image HD. • Abonné câble/satellite : essayez les chaînes HD (High Definition) à partir de l'alignement des canaux. • Connexion de l'antenne : essayez les chaînes HD après avoir exécuté une mémorisation automatique. N De nombreuses chaînes HD sont mises à niveau par rapport à du contenu SD (Standard Definition). • Réglez la résolution de sortie vidéo du décodeur câble/boîtier décodeur sur 1080i ou 720p. L'image est déformée : macrobloc, petit bloc, points, pixelisation. • La compression de contenus vidéo peut engendrer une déformation de l'image, en particulier pour les mouvements rapides comme le sport et les films d'action. • Un niveau de signal faible ou une mauvaise qualité peut déformer l'image. Il ne s'agit pas d'un problème lié au téléviseur. Couleur incorrecte ou manquante avec la connexion Composant. • Vérifiez que les câbles Composant sont raccordés aux prises appropriées. Des raccordements desserrés ou incorrects peuvent engendrer des problèmes au niveau de la couleur ou de l'écran (vide). Luminosité ou couleur médiocre. • Réglez les options Image dans le menu du téléviseur (Mode d'image, Couleur, Luminosité, Netteté). • Réglez l'option Mode éco. dans le menu Configuration. • Essayez de réinitialiser l'image pour afficher son paramètre par défaut (accédez à MENU → Image → Réinitialisation de l'image). Ligne pointillée sur le bord de l'écran. • Si la taille de l'image est réglée sur Adapter à l’écran, remplacez la valeur par 16:9. • Changez la résolution du décodeur câble/boîtier décodeur. L'image est en noir et blanc avec l'entrée AV (Composite) uniquement. • Raccordez le câble vidéo (jaune) à la prise verte de l'entrée Composant 1 du téléviseur. L'image se fige ou est déformée lorsque vous changez de chaînes ou l'image s'affiche avec un décalage. • En cas de raccordement avec le décodeur câble, essayez de réinitialiser ce dernier (rebranchez le cordon d'alimentation secteur et patientez jusqu'au démarrage du décodeur câble. Cette opération peut durer jusqu'à 20 minutes). • Réglez la résolution de sortie du décodeur câble sur 1080i ou 720p. Qualité sonore Exécutez tout d'abord le Test du son pour vérifier que le système audio de votre téléviseur fonctionne correctement. * Accédez à MENU → Assistance → Diagnostic automatique → Test du son Si le système audio est OK, le problème lié au son peut provenir de la source ou du signal. Aucun son ou son trop faible lorsque le niveau du volume est au maximum. • Vérifiez le volume du périphérique (décodeur câble/boîtier décodeur, DVD, Blu-ray, etc.) connecté à votre téléviseur. Puis, réglez le volume du téléviseur en conséquence. Image correcte mais absence de son. • Réglez l'option Sélection Haut-parleur sur Haut-parleur TV dans le menu Son. • Vérifiez que les câbles audio d'un périphérique externe sont raccordés aux prises d'entrée audio appropriées du téléviseur. • Vérifiez l'option de sortie audio du périphérique connecté. Exemple : il se peut que vous deviez remplacer l'option audio de votre décodeur câble par HDMI si vous utilisez la connexion HDMI. • Si vous utilisez un câble DVI-HDMI, un câble audio distinct est requis. • Désactivez la fonction SRS si le réglage du volume est supérieur à 30. • Retirez la fiche de la prise pour casque (si disponible sur votre téléviseur). Bruit émis par le haut-parleur. • Vérifiez le raccordement des câbles. Vérifiez qu'aucun câble vidéo n'est raccordé à une entrée audio. • Pour la connexion de l'antenne/du câble, vérifiez l'intensité du signal. Un niveau de signal faible peut provoquer une distorsion sonore. Suite… BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 68 10/20/2009 4:59:51 PMFrançais - 69 Problème Solution possible Aucune image, aucune vidéo Le téléviseur ne s'allume pas. • Vérifiez que le cordon d'alimentation secteur est branché correctement dans la prise murale et sur le téléviseur. • Vérifiez que la prise murale est opérationnelle. • Essayez d'appuyer sur le bouton d'alimentation du téléviseur pour vérifier que la télécommande fonctionne correctement. Si le téléviseur s'allume, la télécommande peut être à l'origine de cette mise sous tension. Pour résoudre le problème lié à la télécommande, reportez-vous au problème "La télécommande ne fonctionne pas" ci-après. Le téléviseur s'éteint automatiquement. • Vérifiez que la fonction Veille est réglée sur Marche dans le menu Configuration. • Si vous connectez le téléviseur à votre PC, vérifiez les paramètres d'alimentation de votre PC. • Vérifiez que le cordon d'alimentation secteur est branché correctement dans la prise murale et sur le téléviseur. • En l'absence de signal pendant environ 10 à 15 minutes avec la connexion Antenne/ câble, le téléviseur s'éteint. Aucune image/vidéo. • Vérifiez le raccordement des câbles (retirez tous les câbles du téléviseur et des périphériques externes et rebranchez-les). • Réglez la sortie vidéo de votre périphérique externe (décodeur câble/boîtier décodeur, DVD, Blu-ray, etc.) pour faire correspondre les connexions à l'entrée du téléviseur. Par exemple, sortie du périphérique externe : HDMI, entrée du téléviseur : HDMI. • Vérifiez que votre périphérique connecté est sous tension. • Veillez à sélectionner la source appropriée du téléviseur en appuyant sur le bouton SOURCE de la télécommande. • Redémarrez le périphérique connecté en reconnectant le câble d'alimentation du périphérique. Connexion RF (câble/antenne) Impossible de recevoir toutes les chaînes. • Vérifiez que le câble de l'antenne est raccordé correctement. • Essayez le fonction Plug & Play pour ajouter des chaînes disponibles à la liste correspondante. Accédez à MENU → Configuration → Plug & Play et attendez que toutes les chaînes disponibles soient mémorisées. • Vérifiez que l'antenne est positionnée correctement. L'image est déformée : macrobloc, petit bloc, points, pixelisation. • La compression de contenus vidéo peut engendrer une déformation de l'image, en particulier pour les mouvements rapides comme le sport et les films d'action. • Un niveau de signal faible peut déformer l'image. Il ne s'agit pas d'un problème lié au téléviseur. Connexion PC Message Non pris en charge. • Réglez la fréquence et la résolution de sortie de votre PC de sorte à ce qu'il corresponde aux résolutions prises en charge par le téléviseur. Le PC apparaît toujours dans la liste source même s'il n'est pas connecté. • C'est normal ; le PC apparaît toujours dans la liste source même s'il n'est pas connecté. La vidéo fonctionne correctement mais le système audio n'existe pas avec une connexion HDMI. • Vérifiez le paramètre de sortie audio de votre PC. Connexion réseau Echec de la connexion réseau sans fil. • le dongle USB sans fil Samsung est requis pour utiliser le réseau sans fil. • Vérifiez que Type de réseau est réglé sur Sans fil. • Le téléviseur doit être connecté à un routeur IP sans fil. Autres L'image ne s'affiche pas en plein écran. • Des barres noires s'affichent de chaque côté des chaînes HD lors de l'affichage du contenu SD mis à niveau (4:3). • Des barres noires s'affichent en haut et en bas des films dont le format est différent de celui de votre téléviseur. • Réglez l'option de la taille de l'image sur votre périphérique externe ou le téléviseur en plein écran. La télécommande ne fonctionne pas. • Replacez les piles de la télécommande en respectant la polarité (+ -). • Nettoyez la lentille de la télécommande située en haut de la télécommande. • Essayez de diriger directement la télécommande vers le téléviseur dans un rayon de 1,5 à 1,8 m. Suite… BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 69 10/20/2009 4:59:51 PMFrançais - 70 Problème Solution possible Le téléviseur à écran plasma émet un bourdonnement. • Généralement, les téléviseurs à écran plasma émettent un léger bourdonnement. C'est normal. Ce bruit résulte des charges électriques qui sont utilisées pour créer les images sur l'écran. • Si le bourdonnement est fort, il se peut que la luminosité que vous avez réglée soit trop élevée. Essayez de réduire la luminosité. • Le bourdonnement peut également être provoqué par une trop grande proximité entre un mur ou une autre surface dure et l'arrière de votre téléviseur à écran plasma. Vous pouvez également essayer de réacheminer vos câbles de connexion. • Une installation incorrecte du support mural peut créer un bruit excessif. Problème de rémanence de l'image (brûlures). • Pour réduire le risque de brûlure d'écran, cet écran est équipé d'une technologie de réduction des brûlures. Cette fonction (Pixel Shift) permet de régler le mouvement de l'image de bas en haut (ligne verticale) et de gauche à droite (point horizontal). Impossible de contrôler l'alimentation ou le volume du téléviseur avec la télécommande du décodeur câble/ boîtier décodeur. • Programmez la télécommande du décodeur câble/boîtier décodeur pour faire fonctionner le téléviseur. Consultez le manuel de l'utilisateur relatif au câble/satellite pour obtenir le code du téléviseur SAMSUNG. Message Non pris en charge. • Vérifiez la résolution prise en charge du téléviseur et réglez la résolution de sortie du périphérique externe en conséquence. Reportez-vous aux paramètres de résolution indiqués dans ce manuel. Impossible de désactiver Light Effect sur le cadre avant (en dessous du logo SAMSUNG) • Réglez l’option Effet lumineux dans le menu Configuration. Les options sont les suivantes : Arrêt, En veille, En marche et Toujours. • La fonction Effet lumineux n’est pas disponible sur tous les modèles. Odeur de plastique émise par le téléviseur. • Cette odeur est normale et s'atténuera au fur et à mesure. L'option Intensité du signal du téléviseur n'est pas disponible dans le menu de test d'autodiagnostic. • Cette fonction n'est disponible qu'avec des chaînes numériques avec connexion d'antenne (RF/coaxial). Le téléviseur penche vers la droite ou la gauche. • Retirez la base du support du téléviseur et réassemblez-la. Impossible d'assembler la base du support. • Veillez à placer le téléviseur sur une surface plane. Si vous ne parvenez pas à retirer les vis du téléviseur, utilisez un tournevis aimanté. Le menu des chaînes est grisé (non disponible). • Le menu Canal n'est disponible que si la source du téléviseur est sélectionnée. Vos paramètres sont perdus après 30 minutes ou à chaque mise hors tension du téléviseur. • Si le téléviseur est en mode Enr. démo, les paramètres de l'image et audio sont rétablis toutes les 30 minutes. Remplacez le mode Enr. démo par le mode Util. domicile dans la procédure Plug & Play. Appuyez sur le bouton SOURCE pour sélectionner le mode TV , accédez à MENU → Configuration → Plug & Play → ENTER Perte intermittente du signal audio ou vidéo. • Vérifiez le raccordement des câbles ; raccordez-les au besoin. • Cette perte peut être provoquée par l'utilisation de câbles trop rigides ou épais. Veillez à ce que les câbles soient suffisamment souples pour une utilisation à long terme. En cas d'installation murale, nous vous recommandons d'utiliser des câbles avec des connecteurs de 90 degrés. Il se peut que vous voyiez de petites particules si vous regardez de près le bord du cadre de l'écran du téléviseur. • Elles font partie de la conception du produit et ne constituent pas un défaut. Le menu PIP n'est pas disponible. • La fonctionnalité PIP n'est disponible que lorsque vous regardez une source HDMI, PC ou Composant. "Signal brouillé" ou "Aucun signal/ signal faible" avec la carte d'interface (CI/CI+) CARD du CAM. • Vérifiez que la carte d'interface commune CI(CI+) CARD est installée dans le CAM dans la fente de l'interface commune. • Cela est normal car le téléviseur utilise la fonction de liaison radio (OTA) pour mettre à niveau le microprogramme téléchargé pendant son utilisation. Problème récurrent lié à l'image/au son. • Vérifiez et changez le signal/la source. N Certaines des images et fonctions ci-dessus ne sont disponibles que pour des modèles spécifiques. BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 70 10/20/2009 4:59:52 PMFrançais - 71 Caractéristiques Les descriptions et caractéristiques fournies dans ce manuel sont données à titre indicatif seulement et sont susceptibles d’être modifiées sans préavis. Nom du modèle PS50B650 PS58B680 PS63B680 Taille de l’écran (diagonale) 50 pouces 58 pouces 63 pouces Résolution PC (optimale) 1920 x 1080 @ 60 Hz 1920 x 1080 @ 60 Hz 1920 x 1080 @ 60 Hz Son (Sortie) 10 W x 2 15 W x 2 15 W x 2 Dimension (L x H x P) Produit Avec socle 1240 x 756 x 74 mm 1240 x 817 x 290 mm 1401 x 848 x 74 mm 1401 x 917 x 335 mm 1531 x 932 x 74 mm 1531 x 957 x 390 mm Poids Produit Avec socle 33 kg 38 kg 39 kg 46 kg 53 kg 61 kg Conditions ambiantes Température de fonctionnement Humidité au cours du fonctionnement Température de stockage Humidité de stockage 50 °F à 104 °F (10 °C à 40 °C) 10% à 80%, sans condensation -4 °F à 113 °F (-20 °C à 45 °C) 5% à 95%, sans condensation N Ce périphérique est un appareil numérique de classe B. N La conception et les spécifications peuvent être modifiées sans préavis. N Pour les caractéristiques d’alimentation et de consommation électrique, reportez-vous à l’étiquette fixée au produit. BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 71 10/20/2009 4:59:52 PMDeutsch - 2 Benutzerhinweise „ Einbrennen von Standbildern Zeigen Sie Standbilder (z. B. bei einem Videospiel oder bei Anschluss eines PC an diesen Plasmamonitor) niemals länger als 2 Stunden auf dem Plasmabildschirm an, da das Bild auf diese Weise einbrennen kann. Das Einbrennen von Standbildern wird auch als „Bildkonservierung“ bezeichnet. Sie können das Einbrennen vermeiden, indem Sie die Helligkeit und den Kontrast des Bildschirms beim Anzeigen von Standbildern verringern. „ Höhe Um normalen Betrieb zu gewährleisten, muss der Plasmabildschirm in einer Höhe unter 2000 m aufgestellt werden. Der Betrieb des Monitors wird möglicherweise gestört, wenn er in mehr als 2000 m Höhe betrieben wird. Sie dürfen den Plasmabildschirm deshalb nicht in einer Höhe von über 2000 m aufstellen und betreiben. „ Wärmeentwicklung auf der Oberseite des Plasmabildschirms Die Oberseite des Produkts kann nach längerem Betrieb warm werden, da die Wärme aus dem Monitor über die Entlüftungsöffnung im oberen Teil des Geräts abgeführt wird. Dies ist normal und weist nicht auf einen Defekt oder eine Fehlfunktion des Geräts hin. Allerdings sollten Kinder von dem oberen Teil des Geräts ferngehalten werden. „ Das Gerät verursacht ein „knackendes“ Geräusch. Ein „knackendes“ Geräusch entsteht, wenn das Gerätematerial sich aufgrund einer Änderung der Umgebung, wie z. B. Temperaturschwankungen oder Änderung der Luftfeuchtigkeit, zusammenzieht oder ausdehnt. Das ist normal und stellt keinen Defekt des Geräts dar. „ Pixelfehler Der Plasmabildschirm besitzt eine Bildfläche mit 2.360.000 (bei HD-Auflösung) bis 6.221.000 (bei Full-HD-Auflösung) Pixeln, für dessen Herstellung hoch entwickelte Technologie eingesetzt wird. Allerdings können ein paar zu helle oder zu dunkle Pixel auf der Bildfläche zu sehen sein. Diese Pixelfehler haben keinen Einfluss auf die Geräteleistung. „ Vermeiden Sie den Betrieb des Plasmabildschirms bei Temperaturen unter 5° C. „ Ein Standbild, dass zu lange angezeigt wird, kann zu einer bleibenden Beschädigung des Plasmabildschirms führen. Der Betrieb des Plasmabildschirms im Format 4:3 für einen längeren Zeitraum kann links, rechts und in der Mitte des Monitors Spuren der Bildränder hinterlassen, die durch die unterschiedliche Lichtemission auf dem Monitor verursacht werden. Durch die Wiedergabe einer DVD oder der Betrieb einer Spielkonsole kann es auf dem Bildschirm zu ähnlichen Effekten kommen. Schäden, die durch die o. g. Effekte verursacht wurden, fallen nicht unter die Garantie. „ Nachbilder auf dem Monitor Das Anzeigen von Standbildern von Videospielen und PC-Anwendungen über einen bestimmten Zeitraum kann zu partiellen Nachbildern führen. Um diesen Effekt zu verhindern, verringern Sie Helligkeit und Kontrast, wenn Sie Standbilder anzeigen möchten. „ Garantie - Durch diese Garantie nicht abgedeckt sind Schäden, die durch Einbrennen von Bildern entstehen. - Das Einbrennen von Bildern wird von der Garantie nicht abgedeckt. „ Installation Wenden Sie sich an den autorisierten Kundendienst, wenn das Gerät an einem Ort mit hoher Konzentration an Staubpartikeln, außergewöhnlich hoher oder geringer Raumtemperatur, extrem hoher Luftfeuchtigkeit, in unmittelbarer Nähe zu chemischen Lösungsmitteln oder für den Dauerbetrieb, z.B. auf Bahn- oder Flughäfen, aufgestellt werden soll. Eine nicht fachgerechte Aufstellung kann zu schweren Schäden am Gerät führen. Hinweis zu Digitalfernsehgeräten 1. Die Funktionalitäten für Digital TV (DVB) stehen nur in Ländern/Regionen zur Verfügung, in denen digitale terrestrische DVB-T-Signale (MPEG2 und MPEG4 AVC) gesendet werden oder in denen Sie Zugang zu einem kompatiblen Kabelfernsehdienst mit DVB-C (MPEG2 und MPEG4 AAC) haben. Fragen Sie Ihren örtlichen Händler, wenn Sie Informationen über die Verfügbarkeit von DVB-T oder DVB-C in Ihrer Gegend benötigen. 2. DVB-T ist der Standard des europäischen DVB-Konsortiums für die terrestrische Versorgung mit digitalem terrestrischem Fernsehen, und DVB-C ist das Konsortium für die Versorgung mit digitalem Kabelfernsehen. Allerdings werden manche Unterscheidungsmerkmale wie EPG (elektrische Programmzeitschrift), VOD (Video on Demand) usw. in dieser Spezifikation nicht berücksichtigt. Deshalb können sie zum jetzigen Zeitpunkt noch nicht unterstützt werden. 3. Zwar hält dieses Fernsehgerät die aktuellen Standards der DVB-T- und DVB-CSpezifikationen [August 2008] ein, aber es kann nicht garantiert werden, dass die Kompatibilität mit zukünftigen digitalen terrestrischen DVB-T- und DBV-C-Signalen gewahrt bleibt. 4. Manche Kabelfernsehanbieter verlangen zusätzliche Gebühren für solch einen Dienst, und möglicherweise wird verlangt, dass Sie den Vertragsbedingungen des Unternehmens zustimmen. 5. Manche Digitalfernsehfunktionen sind in einigen Ländern oder Regionen möglicherweise nicht verfügbar, und bei DVB-C kann das Gerät möglicherweise nicht mit allen Anbietern störungsfrei zusammenarbeiten. 6. Für weitere Informationen setzen Sie sich bitte mit dem Samsung-Kundendienstzentrum in Verbindung. Wenden Sie sich an SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE Bei Fragen oder Hinweisen zu Produkten von Samsung setzen Sie sich bitte mit dem SAMSUNG-Kundendienstzentrum in Verbindung. (Siehe Abschnitt “Wenden Sie sich an Samsung”) N Die Abbildungen und Illustrationen in diesem Handbuch dienen nur zur Information und können vom tatsächlichen Aussehen des Geräts abweichen. Technische Änderungen und Änderungen am Design des Geräts, insbesondere zur Verbesserung der Leistungsfähigkeit des Geräts, sind jederzeit vorbehalten. © 2009 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Alle Rechte vorbehalten. BN68-02333J-GER.indb 2 10/20/2009 4:37:36 PMDeutsch - 3 Deutsch N O T Symbol Drücken Hinweis Zielwahltaste TOOLS Inhalt Anschließen und Vorbereiten des Fernsehgeräts ■ Lieferumfang .............................................................................4 ■ Standfuß verwenden .................................................................4 ■ Verlegen der Kabel....................................................................4 ■ Bedienfeld .................................................................................5 ■ Anschlussfeld ............................................................................6 ■ Fernbedienung ..........................................................................8 ■ Batterien in die Fernbedienung einsetzen.................................8 ■ Verwenden der Fernbedienung mit Tastenbeleuchtung ............9 ■ Ein-und Ausschalten..................................................................9 ■ Fernsehgerät in den Standby-Modus schalten..........................9 ■ Anzeigen des Bildschirmmenüs ................................................9 ■ Menüs anzeigen ......................................................................10 ■ Verwenden der Taste TOOLS..................................................10 ■ Plug & Play-Funktion...............................................................10 Kanalsteuerung ■ Speichern von Sendern .......................................................... 11 ■ Verwalten von Sendern ...........................................................13 Bildeinstellungen ■ Ändern der Bildeinstellungen ..................................................15 ■ Fernsehgerät mithilfe des PCs einstellen................................18 ■ PC-Anzeige .............................................................................19 Toneinstellungen ■ Tonstandard wählen ................................................................20 ■ Tonmodus wählen ...................................................................21 Funktionsbeschreibung ■ Einstellen der Uhrzeit ..............................................................22 ■ Konfigurieren der Menüeinstellungen......................................23 ■ Verwenden der Bild-in-Bild-Funktion (PIP)..............................25 Unterstützung / Eingang ■ Unterstütztes Programm .........................................................26 ■ Quellen / Name bearbeiten .....................................................27 Netzwerks ■ Netzwerkverbindung................................................................28 ■ Netzwerk einrichten.................................................................30 Media Play ■ Anschließen eines USB-Geräts...............................................33 ■ Verwenden der Medienwiedergabefunktion ............................34 ■ Sortieren der Foto- / Musik- / Filmliste ....................................35 ■ Optionsmenü für Foto- / Musik- / Filmliste...............................36 ■ Optionsmenü für Diashow / Musikwiedergabe / Filmwiedergabe .37 ■ Anzeigen eines Fotos oder einer Diashow..............................38 ■ Wiedergeben von Musik..........................................................39 ■ Wiedergeben einer Filmdatei .................................................40 ■ Verwenden des Menüs Einstellungen .....................................41 Media Play-DLNA ■ Einrichten des DLNA-Netzwerks .............................................42 ■ Installieren der DLNA-Anwendung ..........................................42 ■ Verwenden der DLNA-Anwendung .........................................43 ■ Verwenden der DLNA-Funktion...............................................44 Informationen zu Anynet+ ■ Anschließen von Anynet + -Geräten ..........................................45 ■ Einrichten von Anynet + ...........................................................46 ■ Wechseln zwischen Anynet + -Geräten .....................................46 ■ Aufnahme ................................................................................47 ■ Tonwiedergabe mit einem Receiver ........................................48 ■ Fehlerbehebung für Anynet + ...................................................48 Content Library ■ Aktivieren der Content Library.................................................49 ■ Verwenden der Bibliothek der Inhalte......................................50 Internet@TV ■ Erste Schritte mit Internet@TV................................................51 ■ Bearbeiten von Snippets im Dock ...........................................53 ■ Verwenden des Profil-Widget ..................................................53 ■ Verwenden der Yahoo!®-Widget-Galerie ................................54 ■ Verwenden des Wetter-Widget von Yahoo!® ..........................54 ■ Verwenden des Nachrichten-Widget von Yahoo!®..................55 ■ Verwenden des Flickr-Widget von Yahoo!® ............................55 ■ Verwenden des Finanz-Widget von Yahoo!®..........................56 ■ Fehlerbehebung für Internet@TV ...........................................56 ■ Hilfe-Website ...........................................................................57 Internet@TV ■ Erste Schritte mit Internet@TV................................................58 ■ Konfigurieren von Internet@TV...............................................58 ■ Verwenden des Internet@TV-Dienstes ...................................59 ■ Fehlerbehebung für Internet@TV............................................60 ■ Hilfe-Website ...........................................................................60 Home-Network-Center ■ Home-Network-Center ............................................................61 ■ Einrichten des Home-Network-Centers...................................62 ■ Verwenden der Meldungsfunktion...........................................62 ■ Verwenden der Medienfunktion...............................................63 Empfehlungen für den Betrieb ■ Videotextfunktion.....................................................................64 ■ Spezifikation (VESA) der Wandhalterung................................65 ■ Vorbereitung für die Befestigung der Wandhalterung an der Wand.................................................................................66 ■ Montieren des Standfußes ......................................................66 ■ Befestigen des Fernsehgeräts an der Wand...........................67 ■ Absichern des Einbaubereichs................................................67 ■ Fehlerbehebung ......................................................................68 ■ Technische Daten....................................................................71 BN68-02333J-GER.indb 3 10/20/2009 4:37:37 PMDeutsch - 4 Verlegen der Kabel Verstecken Sie die Kabel im Kabelschlauch, damit Sie durch den transparenten Standfuß hindurch nicht zu sehen sind. Standfuß verwenden N Der PDP-Fernseher sollte von mindestens zwei Personen getragen werden. Um Beschädigungen zu vermeiden, legen Sie den Plasmafernseher nie auf den Fußboden. Der Plasmabildschirm muss sich immer in aufrechter Position befinden. N Der Plasmabildschirm kann um 20 Grad nach recht und links gedreht werden. -20° ~ 20° Lieferumfang Bedienungsanleitung Fernbedienung / AAA-Batterien (2 Stück) Netzkabel Reinigungstuch Kabelschlauch Haltering (4 Stück) (finden Sie auf Seite 66) Software-CD Schrauben (4 Stück) (PS50B650 nur) (finden Sie auf Seite 66) Untere Abdeckung (PS50B650 nur) (finden Sie auf Seite 66) Untere Abdeckung / Schrauben (2 Stück) (PS58B680 / PS63B680 nur) (finden Sie auf Seite 66) Ferritkern für Netzkabel Ferritkern für Netzkabel (PS58B680T6P / PS63B680 nur) Ferritkern für Kopfhörerkabel Garantiekarte/ Sicherheitshinweise (Nicht überall verfügbar) N Ferritkern Mit dem Ferritkern werden die Kabel vor Störungen geschützt. Wenn Sie ein Kabel anschließen, öffnen Sie den Ferritkern und legen Sie ihn in der Nähe des Steckers mit einem deutlich hörbaren Klicken um das Kabel (siehe Abbildung). Anschließen und Vorbereiten des Fernsehgeräts (PS58B680T6P / PS63B680 nur) BN68-02333J-GER.indb 4 10/20/2009 4:37:40 PMDeutsch - 5 Bedienfeld N Form und Farbe des Geräts können sich je nach Modell unterscheiden. Tasten auf der Vorderseite Berühren Sie die verschiedenen Tasten, um die gewünschten Funktionen zu nutzen. (PS58B680 / PS63B680) (PS50B650) 1 SOURCE Schaltet zwischen den verfügbaren Signalquellen um (TV, Ext1, Ext2, AV, Component, PC, HDMI1, HDMI2/DVI, HDMI3, HDMI4, USB). N Im Bildschirmmenü können Sie diese Schaltfläche genauso wie die ENTER -Taste auf der Fernbedienung verwenden. 2 MENU Drücken Sie diese Taste, um ein Bildschirmmenü zu den Funktionen des Fernsehgeräts einzublenden 3 + – Hiermit erhöhen oder verringern Sie die Lautstärke. Im Bildschirmmenü können Sie die Schaltflächen + – wie die Tasten ◄ und ► auf der Fernbedienung verwenden. 4 CH Hiermit wechseln Sie den Sender. Im Bildschirmmenü können Sie die CH -Schaltflächen wie die Tasten ▲ und ▼ auf der Fernbedienung verwenden. Verwnden Sie die CH -Taste verwenden, um das Fernsehgerät ohne Fernbedienung anzuschalten. 5 BETRIEBSANZEIGE Beim Einschalten des Fernsehgeräts blinkt die Netzleuchte kurz und erlischt anschließend. Im Standbymodus leuchtet die Anzeige permanent. 6 (POWER) Drücken Sie diese Taste, um das Fernsehgerät ein- und auszuschalten. 7 FERNBEDIENUNGSSENSOR Richten Sie die Fernbedienung auf diesen Sensor am Fernsehgerät. 8 LAUTSPRECHER BN68-02333J-GER.indb 5 10/20/2009 4:37:41 PMDeutsch - 6 Anschlussfeld N Stellen Sie sicher, dass der Fernseher und alle angeschlossenen Geräte ausgeschaltet sind, bevor Sie weitere Geräte anschließen. N Achten Sie beim Anschließen eines externen Geräts auf die Farbcodierung: Stecker und Buchse müssen die gleiche Farbe aufweisen. N Die Produktfarbe und -form können sich je nach Modell unterscheiden. 1 LAN Schließen Sie ein Netzwerkkabel zur Verbindung mit dem NetzwerK an diesen Anschluss an. 2 POWER IN Anschluss für das Netzkabel. 3 COMPONENT IN Audio- (L/R) UND Videoeingänge (Y / PB / PR) für Komponentensignale. 4 PC IN (AUDIO / PC) Anschließen an den Videound Audioausgang eines Computers. 5 EXT 1, EXT 2 Ein- und Ausgänge für externe Geräte wie z. B. Videorecorder, DVD-Player, Spielekonsolen oder Video-DiscPlayer. N Im EXT-Modus unterstützt DTV Out nur MPEG SD-Video und Audio. N Im EXT-Modus ist der Spielemodus nicht verfügbar. Anschlussmöglichkeiten Anschluss Eingang Ausgang Video Audio(L/R) RGB Video + Audio(L/R) EXT 1 ✔ ✔ ✔ Nur TV- oder DTVAusgang verfügbar. EXT 2 ✔ ✔ Ausgang frei wählbar. 6 KOPFHÖRER Wenn Sie beim Fernsehen andere Personen im Zimmer nicht stören möchten, können Sie Kopfhörer an das Fernsehgerät anschließen. N Das Verwenden von Kopfhörern bei hoher Lautstärke über einen längeren Zeitraum kann zu Hörschäden führen. 7 DIGITALAUDIO-AUSGANG (OPTISCH) Anschließen an ein digitales Audiogerät. 8 SERVICE Anschluss für Servicezwecke. 9 AUDIO OUT(AUDIO R/L) Schließen Sie die Cinch- Audiosignale des Fernsehgeräts an eine externe Quelle an, z. B. an ein Audiogerät. 0 ANT IN Koaxialanschluss (75Ω) für Antenne/Kabelanschluss. ! HDMI IN 1, 2(DVI), 3 Beim Anschluss von Geräten über eine HDMI-Schnittstelle ist keine zusätzliche Audioverbindung erforderlich. - Eine Verbindung über HDMI/DVI-Kabel kann nur über HDMI IN 2 (DVI) erfolgen. N Was ist HDMI? - Die hochauflösende Multimediaschnittstelle HDMI ermöglicht die Übertragung von hochauflösenden digitalen Videodaten und mehreren Kanälen mit Digitalaudio. - Mit dem entsprechenden Kabel ermöglicht der HDMI/ DVI-Anschluss DVIVerbindungen zu einem erweiterten Gerät (nicht mitgeliefert). Der Unterschied zwischen HDMI und DVI besteht darin, dass ein Gerät mit HDMI kleiner ist, mit dem Kopierschutz HDCP (High Bandwidth Digital Copy Protection/ digitaler Kopierschutz) ausgestattet ist und digitalen Mehrkanalton unterstützt. DVI AUDIO IN DVI-Audioausgänge für externe Geräte. Unterstützte Modi für HDMI/DVI und Component 480i 480p 576i 576p 720p 1080i 1080p HDMI/DVI 50Hz X X X O O O O HDMI/DVI 60Hz X O X X O O O Komponenteneingang O O O O O O O Rückseite des Fernsehgeräts Kabelfernsehen Netzwerk oder oder 2 3 4 5 7 9 ! 0 6 8 1 BN68-02333J-GER.indb 6 10/20/2009 4:37:44 PMDeutsch - 7 1 COMMON INTERFACE-Steckplatz Setzen Sie eine CI(CI+)-Karte (Common Interface) in den Steckplatz ein. (finden Sie auf Seite 23) - Ohne eingelegte CI(CI+)-Karte zeigt das Fernsehgerät auf einigen Kanälen ein gestörtes Signal an. - Die Verbindungsinformationen mit Telefonnummer, Kennung der CI(CI+)-Karte, Hostkennung und anderen Angaben wird in ungefähr 2 bis 3 Minuten angezeigt. Wenn eine Fehlermeldung angezeigt wird, wenden Sie sich bitte an Ihren Dienstanbieter. - Wenn die Senderinformationskonfiguration abgeschlossen ist, wird die Meldung angezeigt. Dies bedeutet, dass die Senderliste jetzt aktualisiert ist. - Wenn Sie die CI-Karte wieder einsetzen, wird, je nach Modell, eine Meldung angezeigt, in der Sie das Kennwort für die Parental Lock eingeben sollen. - Selbst wenn die Parental Lock auf Allow All eingestellt ist, wird bei manchen Modellen eine Meldung angezeigt, damit Sie für Erwachsenenprogramme (ab 18 Jahren) das Kennwort eingeben. N Die Richtung, in der Sie die Karte einlegen müssen, ist darauf mit einem Pfeil markiert. N CI(CI+)-Karten werden in einigen Ländern, Regionen und von manchen Sendern nicht unterstützt. Fragen Sie diesbezüglich Ihren offiziellen Händler. N Die CI+-Funktion steht nur im Modell PS********P zur Verfügung. Bei Problemen wenden Sie sich an den Dienstanbieter. 2 USB 1(HDD), USB 2 Schließen Sie ein USB-Massenspeichergerät an, um Fotodateien (JPEG), Audiodateien (MP3) und Filmdateien anzuzeigen bzw. abzuspielen. Sie können eine drahtlose Verbindung zum SAMSUNG-Netzwerk herstellen. Der USB 1-Anschluss dient zugleich als Festplattenanschluss. Auf der Festplatte (Festplattenlaufwerk) werden digitale Daten gespeichert. 3 HDMI IN 4 Zum Anschließen an die HDMI-Buchse von Geräten mit HDMI-Ausgang. 4 AV IN (VIDEO, AUDIO L/R) Video- und Audioeingänge für externe Geräte wie z. B. Camcorder oder Videorecorder. N Form und Farbe des Geräts können sich je nach Modell unterscheiden. Seitenverkleidung des Fernsehgeräts 3 4 1 2 BN68-02333J-GER.indb 7 10/20/2009 4:37:46 PMDeutsch - 8 Fernbedienung Die Reichweite der Fernbedienung beträgt ca. 7 m. N Die Leistungsfähigkeit der Fernbedienung kann durch starke Lichteinstrahlung beeinträchtigt werden. 1 POWER-Taste (Netztaste zum An- und Ausschalten des Fernsehgeräts). 2 TV-Modus direkt aufrufen 3 Zifferntasten für direkte Programmplatzeingabe. 4 Drücken Sie diese Taste, um zu Ihren Favoriten zu wechseln. 5 Ton vorübergehend ausschalten. 6 Nächster Sender Vorheriger Sender. 7 Verfügbare Signalquelle auswählen. 8 Anzeigen von Informationen zur aktuellen Sendung. 9 Hiermit können Sie häufig verwendete Funktionen schnell auswählen. 0 Auswählen von Optionen im Bildschirmmenü und Ändern von Menüwerten. ! Mit dieser Funktionen können Sie Internetfernsehen Internet@TV nutzen. @ Verwenden Sie diese Tasten bei der Arbeit mit der Senderliste, Media Play, Internet@TV und usw. $ Anzeigen von Senderlisten auf dem Bildschirm. % Verwenden Sie diese Tasten bei der Arbeit mit der Senderliste, Media Play und Anynet+. ^ Drücken Sie diese Taste, um die Tastenbeleuchtung der Fernbedienung zu aktivieren. Diese Funktion ist in der Nacht oder in einem dunklen Zimmer hilfreich. (Wenn Sie die Fernbedienung mit angeschalteter Hintergrundbeleuchtung ON/OFF ( ) verwenden, verkürzt dies die Lebensdauer der Batterie.) & Vorheriger Sender. * Nächster Sender Vorheriger Sender ( Bildschirmmenü anzeigen. ) EPG-Anzeige (Elektronischer Programmführer). a Zurück zum vorherigen Menü. b Bildschirmmenü schließen. c Mit dieser Funktionen können Sie Media Play nutzen. d Diese Funktion ermöglicht die Anzeige der Content Library. e Mit dieser Taste können Sie digitale Untertitel anzeigen. f Auswahl der Audio-Beschreibung. Teletextfunktionen 2 Teletextanzeige beenden (modellabhängig) 7 Teletext-Modus auswählen (LIST/FLOF) 8 Teletext anzeigen 9 Teletextgrösse @ Fastext-Thema auswählen # Teletext anzeigen / Teletext und Fernsehsendung zugleich anzeigen $ Teletextseite speichern & Untergeordnete Teletextseite * P : Nächste Teletextseite P : Vorige Teletextseite ( Teletext-Index a Seite weiter anzeigen (nicht umblättern) b Teletext abbreche Batterien in die Fernbedienung einsetzen 1. Heben Sie die Abdeckung auf der Rückseite der Fernbedienung an, wie in der Abbildung dargestellt. 2. Legen Sie zwei AAA-Batterien ein. N Achten Sie darauf, dass die Pole der Batterien wie im Batteriefach angezeigt ausgerichtet sind. 3. Schließen Sie den Deckel. N Wenn die Fernbedienung für einen längeren Zeitraum nicht verwendet wird, nehmenSie die Batterien heraus, und lagern Sie sie an einem kühlen, trockenen Ort. N Sollte die Fernbedienung nicht funktionieren, überprüfen Sie Folgendes : 1. Ist das Fernsehgerät eingeschaltet? 2. Wurden Plus- und Minuspol der Batterien vertauscht? 3. Sind die Batterien leer? 4. Liegt ein Stromausfall vor oder ist das Netzkabel des Fernsehgeräts nicht eingesteckt? 5. Befindet sich eine Leuchtstoffröhre oder ein Neonschild in der Nähe? N Batterien und Akkus gehören nicht in den Hausmüll. Als Verbraucher sind Sie verpflichtet, alte Batterien und Akkus zur umweltschonenden Entsorgung zurückzugeben. Sie können alte Batterien und Akkus bei den öffentlichen Sammelstellen in Ihrer Gemeinde oder überall dort abgeben, wo Batterien und Akkus der betreffenden Art verkauft werden. BN68-02333J-GER.indb 8 10/20/2009 4:37:47 PMDeutsch - 9 Verwenden der Fernbedienung mit Tastenbeleuchtung Nutzen Sie dieses Feature in dunkler Umgebung, oder wenn Sie die Tasten der Fernbedienung nicht deutlich sehen können. 1. Drücken Sie die Taste ON/OFF ( ) für die Tastenbeleuchtung. N Wenn die Hintergrundbeleuchtung angeschaltet (ON) ist, wird die Tastenbeleuchtung kurz angeschaltet. N Sobald Sie eine Taste der angeschalteten Fernbedienung drücken, wird die Tastenbeleuchtung für eine kurze Zeit angeschaltet. Ein-und Ausschalten Das Netzkabel wird auf der Rückseite des Fernsehgeräts angeschlossen. 1. Schließen Sie das Netzkabel an eine geeignete Netzsteckdose an. N Am Gerät leuchtet die Standby-Anzeige auf. 2. Drücken Sie die POWER P am Gerät. N Zum Einschalten des Fernsehgeräts können Sie auch die POWER P Zum Einschalten des Fernsehgeräts können Sie auch die Netytaste P oder die TVTaste auf der Fernbedienung drücken. oder die TVTaste auf der Fernbedienung drücken. N Der Sender, den Sie zuletzt gesehen haben, wird automatisch wieder aufgerufen. 3. Drücken Sie auf der Fernbedienung die Zifferntasten (0-9) bzw. eine der Programmwahltasten (< / >), oder drücken Sie die Taste < CH > am Gerät. N Wenn Sie das Gerät zum ersten Mal einschalten, können Sie die Sprache auswählen, in der die Menüs angezeigt werden. 4. Zum Ausschalten des Fernsehgeräts drücken Sie erneut die Taste POWER P. Fernsehgerät in den Standby-Modus schalten Um den Stromverbrauchs zu senken, kann das Gerät in den Standby-Modus geschaltet werden. Der Standby-Modus ist nützlich, wenn Sie das Gerät vorübergehend ausschalten möchten (z. B. während einer Mahlzeit). 1. Drücken Sie die POWER P auf der Fernbedienung. N Der Bildschirm wird ausgeschaltet, und auf der Vorderseite des Fernsehgeräts leuchtet die rote Standby-Anzeige auf. 2. Drücken Sie einfach erneut die POWER P, eine Zifferntaste (0-9) bzw. die Taste TV oder die Programmwahltaste (< / >), um das Gerät wieder einzuschalten. N Der Standby-Modus ist nicht für längere Phasen der Abwesenheit gedacht (z. B. wenn Sie verreist sind). Ziehen Sie dann sicherheitshalber den Netzstecker und das Antennenkabel. Anzeigen des Bildschirmmenüs Auf dem Bildschirm werden der aktuelle Kanal und bestimmte Audio/Video-Einstellungen angezeigt. O Drücken Sie die Taste INFO, um Informationen anzuzeigen. Drücken Sie die Taste INFO auf der Fernbedienung. Auf dem Bildschirm werden der Kanal, der Tonmodus sowie die Werte bestimmter Bild- und Toneinstellungen angezeigt. • ▲, ▼: Sie können Informationen anderer Kanäle anzeigen. Wenn Sie zum ausgewählten Sender wechseln möchten, drücken Sie auf die ENTERE-Taste. • ◄, ►: Sie können die Informationen zum aktuellen Programm dieses Senders anzeigen. N Drücken Sie noch einmal auf die INFO-Taste und warten Sie ca. 10 Sekunden lang, bis die Informationen automatisch angezeigt werden. DTV Air 15 abc1 18:00 ~ 6:00 18:11 Thu 6 Jan Life On Venus Avenue Unclassified No Detaild Information E Watch ' Information BN68-02333J-GER.indb 9 10/20/2009 4:37:48 PMDeutsch - 10 Menüs anzeigen 1. Drücken Sie die Taste MENU bei angeschaltetem Gerät. Das Hauptmenü wird auf dem Bildschirm angezeigt. Links im Menü sind Symbole zu sehen Bild, Ton, Sender, Einstellungen, Eingang, Anwendung, Unterstützung. 2. Wählen Sie mit den Tasten ▲ oder ▼ eines der Symbole aus. Drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE, um in das Untermenü des Symbols zu wechseln. 3. Zum Beenden drücken Sie die Taste EXIT. N Das Bildschirmmenü wird nach etwa einer Minute vom Bildschirm gelöscht. Verwenden der Taste TOOLS Sie können die Taste TOOLS verwenden, um häufig verwendete Funktionen schnell und einfach auszuwählen. Der Inhalt des Menüs Extras hängt davon ab, welche externe Signalquelle Sie für die Anzeige verwenden. 1. Drücken Sie die Taste TOOLS. Das Menü Extras wird geöffnet. 2. Wählen Sie mit der Taste ▲ oder ▼ eine Menüoption aus, und drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE. 3. Drücken Sie die Tasten ▲ / ▼ / ◄ / ► / ENTERE, um die markierten Elemente anzuzeigen, zu ändern oder zu verwenden. Ausführliche Beschreibungen der einzelnen Funktionen finden Sie auf der jeweiligen Seite. • Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC), siehe Seite 46 • Bildformat, siehe Seite 16 • Bildmodus, siehe Seite 15 • Ton Modus, siehe Seite 20 • Sleep-Timer, siehe Seite 22 • SRS TS HD, siehe Seite 20 • Energiesparmod., siehe Seite 24 • Dual l ll, siehe Seite 21 • Zu Favoriten hinzufügen (oder Aus Favoriten löschen), siehe Seite 14 • PIP, siehe Seite 25 • Autom. Einstellung:, siehe Seite 18 Plug & Play-Funktion Wenn das Fernsehgerät zum ersten Mal eingeschaltet wird, werden automatisch die Grundeinstellungen vorgenommen. N Der Bildschirmschoner wird aktiviert, wenn im Plug & Play Betrieb länger als 1 Minute keine Eingabe mit der Fernbedienung erfolgt. N Der Bildschirmschoner wird aktiviert, wenn länger als 15 Minuten kein Betriebssignal anliegt. N Wenn Sie versehentlich das falsche Land für Ihren Fernseher einstellen, werden die Zeichen auf dem Bildschirm möglicherweise falsch angezeigt. 1. Drücken Sie die Taste POWER auf der Fernbedienung. Das Menü Select the OSD Language. (Sprache des Bildschirmmenüs wählen) wird automatisch angezeigt. Drücken Sie die ENTERE. Wählen Sie die gewünschte Sprache mit den Tasten ▲ oder ▼ aus. Bestätigen Sie Ihre Auswahl mit der Taste ENTERE. 2. Wählen Sie durch Drücken der Tasten ◄ oder ► die Option Shop Demo oder Privatgebrauch, und drücken Sie dann auf ENTERE. N Wir empfehlen Ihnen, das Fernsehgerät im Modus Privatgebrauch zu verwenden, um das optimale Bild für den Privatgebrauch zu erzielen. N Der Modus Shop Demo ist nur geeignet, wenn das Gerät in einem Verkaufsbereich verwendet wird. N Wenn das Gerät versehentlich auf den Modus “Shop Demo” eingestellt ist, und Sie möchten wieder zurück zu “Privatgebrauch” wechseln : Drücken Sie die Lautstärketaste am Fernsehgerät. Wenn das Menü “Lautstärke” angezeigt wird, halten Sie die Taste MENU am Fernsehgerät 5 Sekunden lang gedrückt. 3. Drücken Sie die taste ENTERE. Wählen Sie das gewünschte Land mit der Taste ▲ oder ▼ aus. Bestätigen Sie Ihre Auswahl mit der Taste ENTERE. N Nachdem Sie im Menü Country das Land eingestellt haben, werden Sie bei manchen Modellen anschließend aufgefordert, die PIN-Nummer einzurichten. N Die Ziffernkombination 0-0-0-0 dürfen Sie als PIN-Nummer nicht eingeben. 4. Drücken Sie die Taste ▲ oder ▼, um die Sender der gewählten Verbindung zu speichern, und drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE. • Terrestrisch : Terrestrisches Antennensignal. • Kabel : Kabelgebundenes Antennensignal. Plug & Play Select the OSD Language. Language : U Move E Enter ▲ Nederlands English Eesti ▼ Extras Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) Bildformat : Auto Breit Bildmodus : Standard Ton Modus : Benutzerd. Sleep-Timer : Aus SRS TS HD : Aus Energiesparmod. : Aus Dual l ll : Mono Zu Favoriten hinzufügen U Navig. E Eingabe e Beenden Modus : Standard Zellhelligkeit : 4 Kontrast : 95 Helligkeit : 45 Schärfe : 50 Farbe : 50 Farbton (G/R) : G50/R50 Erweiterte Einstellungen Bild BN68-02333J-GER.indb 10 10/20/2009 4:37:49 PMDeutsch - 11 5. Wählen Sie durch Drücken der Tasten ▲ oder ▼ den Sendertyp zum Speichern aus. Drücken Sie die Taste ENTERE, um Start auszuwählen. • Digital und Analog : Digitale und analoge Kanäle. • Digital : Digitale Kanäle. • Analogue : Analoge Kanäle. N Die Sendersuche wird automatisch gestartet und beendet. N Eine genauere Beschreibung zur Auswahl des Kabelmodus, finden Sie auf Seite 11. 6. Die Meldung Uhrmodus einstellen. wird angezeigt. Drücken Sie die ENTERE-Taste. Wählen Sie durch Drücken der Tasten ▲ oder ▼ die Option Auto, und drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE. N Wenn Sie Manuell wählen, wird Datum und Uhrzeit einstellen angezeigt. (Detailliertere Informationen, finden Sie auf Seite 22) N Wenn Sie ein digitales Signal empfangen, wird die Zeit automatisch eingestellt. 7. Die kurze Einführung So erzielen Sie mit Ihrem HD-Fernsehgerät optimale Leistung wird angezeigt. Drücken Sie die Taste ENTERE. N Dieses Menü ist im HD-Anschlussplanim Menü Unterstützung verfügbar. N Wechseln Sie zum vorherigen oder nächsten Zeichen, indem Sie die Taste ◄ / ► drücken. 8. Die Meldung Enjoy your TV. (Wir wünschen gute Unterhaltung!) wird angezeigt. N Wählen Sie Fernsehen, wenn Sie sofort fernsehen möchten. N Wenn Sie die Anleitung anzeigen möchten, drücken Sie die Taste ENTERE. So setzen Sie diese Funktion zurück... 1. Drücken Sie die Taste MENU, um das Menü anzuzeigen. Drücken Sie die Taste ▲ oder ▼, um Einstellungen auszuwählen, und drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE. 2. Drücken Sie die Taste ENTERE erneut, um Plug & Play auszuwählen. 3. Geben Sie nun Ihre vierstellige PIN ein. Der Standard-PIN-Code eines neuen Fernsehgeräts lautet ‘0-0-0-0’. N Informationen zum Ändern der PIN erhalten finden Sie auf Seite 24. N Die Plug & Play-Funktion gibt es nur im TV-Modus. Speichern von Sendern ❑ Land „ Digitaler Sender : Sie können das Land für digitale Sender ändern. „ Analog Sender : Sie können das Land für die analogen Sender ändern. N Der Eingabebildschirm für die PIN wird geöffnet. Geben Sie nun Ihre vierstellige PIN ein. ❑ Autom. speichern Das Fernsehgerät durchsucht automatisch alle Kanäle mit aktiven Sendern (Anzahl ist länderabhängig) und speichert sie im Speicher des Fernsehgeräts. Sie können den Sender für die gewählte Verbindung speichern. • Terrestrisch : Terrestrisches Antennensignal. • Kabel : Kabelgebundenes Antennensignal. Sie können das Antennensignal zum Speichern auswählen. • Digital und Analog : Digitale und analoge Kanäle. • Digital : Digitale Kanäle. • Analog : Analoge Kanäle. N Bei Auswahl von Kabel, • Suchmodus : Anzeigen des Suchmodus. (Schnell) - Network ID : Anzeigen der Netzwerkkennung. - Frequenz : Hiermit zeigen Sie die Frequenz des Senders an. - Modulation : Hiermit zeigen Sie die verfügbaren Modulationswerte an. - Symbolrate : Hiermit zeigen Sie die verfügbaren Symbolraten an. • Suchmodus : Anzeigen des Suchmodus. (Voll, Netzwerk) - Startfrequenz : Hiermit zeigen Sie die Startfrequenz an. - Endfrequenz : Hiermit zeigen Sie die Stoppfrequenz an. - Modulation : Hiermit zeigen Sie die verfügbaren Modulationswerte an. - Symbolrate : Hiermit zeigen Sie die verfügbaren Symbolraten an. N Wenn Sie Autom. speichern anhalten möchten, drücken Sie auf ENTERE. Die Meldung Automatische Senderspeicherung beenden? wird angezeigt. Wählen Sie mit den Tasten ◄ oder ► die Option JA, und drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE. Kanalsteuerung Sender Land ► Autom. speichern Manuell speichern Suchoptionen für Kabel Ausführlich Übersicht Standard : Ausführlich Senderliste Einstellungen Plug & Play ► Menüsprache : Deutsch Zeit Sendungsoptionen Sicherheit Netzwerk Allgemein BN68-02333J-GER.indb 11 10/20/2009 4:37:50 PMDeutsch - 12 ❑ Manuell speichern Hiermit wird ein Sender manuell gesucht und im Fernsehspeicher abgelegt. „ Digitaler Sender (Digitaler) N Digitalsender sind nur im DTV-Modus verfügbar. • Sender : Stellen Sie die Sendernummer mit den Tasten ▲, ▼ oder einer Zifferntaste (0~9) ein. • Frequenz : Einstellen der Frequenz mit Hilfe der Zifferntasten (0~9). • Bandwidth: Einstellen der Bandbreite mit den Tasten ▲, ▼. N Nach Abschluss des Suchlaufs werden die Kanäle in der Senderliste aktualisiert. „ Analog Sender Manuelles Speichern von analogen Kanälen. • Programm (der Programmplatz, der dem Kanal zugewiesen werden soll) : Stellen Sie den Programmplatz mit den Tasten ▲, ▼ oder einer Zifferntaste (0~9) ein. • Fernsehnorm → Auto / PAL / SECAM / NTSC 4.43 : Einstellen der Fernsehnorm mithilfe der Tasten ▲ oder ▼. • Tonsystem → BG / DK / I / L : Einstellen des Tonsystems mithilfe der Tasten ▲ oder ▼. • Sender (Wenn Ihnen die Nummer des zu speichernden Senders bekannt ist) : Wählen Sie mit den Tasten ▲ oder ▼ die Option C (Terrestrischer Sender) oder S (Kabelsender) aus. Drücken Sie die Taste ► und dann die Tasten ▲, ▼ oder eine Zifferntaste (0~9), um die gewünschte Nummer auszuwählen. N Falls kein oder nur schlechter Ton zu hören sein sollte, wählen Sie einen anderen Audiostandard aus.. • Suchlauf (Wenn Ihnen die Sendernummern nicht bekannt sind) Drücken Sie zum Starten des Suchlaufs die Taste ▲ oder ▼. Der Tuner durchsucht den Frequenzbereich, bis der erste Sender bzw. der ausgewählte Sender empfangen wird. • Sichern (Zum Speichern des Senders und des zugehörigen Programmplatzes) Wählen Sie zum Bestätigen Ihrer Auswahl mit der Taste ENTERE die Option OK. N Sendermodus - C (Antennenempfangsmodus) : In diesem Modus können Sie Kanäle durch Eingabe der Nummer anwählen, die jedem Antennensender zugeordnet ist. - S (Kabelsendermodus) : In diesem Modus können Sie Sender durch Eingabe der Nummer wählen, die jedem Kabelsender zugeordnet ist. ❑ Suchoptionen für Kabel Hiermit können Sie (je nach Land) weitere Suchoptionen für die Sendersuche im Kabelnetz einstellen (z. B. Frequenz oder Symbolrate). • Startfrequenz : Hiermit zeigen Sie die Startfrequenz an. • Stoppfrequenz : Hiermit zeigen Sie die Stoppfrequenz an. • Modulation : Hiermit zeigen Sie die verfügbaren Modulationswerte an. • Symbolrate : Hiermit zeigen Sie die verfügbaren Symbolraten an. N Wenn der Wert von Startfrequenz größer ist als der von Stoppfrequenz, wird eine Warnmeldung angezeigt. ❑ Ausführlich / Übersicht Die Informationen des elektronischen Programmführers werden von den Sendern zur Verfügung gestellt. Es kann sein, dass Programmeinträge leer oder veraltet sind. Dies ist auf die für einen bestimmten Sender übertragenen Informationen zurückzuführen. Die Anzeige wird dynamisch aktualisiert, sobald neue Informationen verfügbar sind. • Ausführlich : Hier werden die Programminformationen in einem Zeitplan mit einer Unterteilung von jeweils 1 Stunde angezeigt. Es wird ein Zeitfenster von 2 Stunden mit Programminformationen angezeigt. Dieses Fenster kann jedoch in der Zeit nach vorne oder nach hinten verschoben werden. • Übersicht : Die Informationen für die einzelnen Programme werden im Fenster für den Mini-Programmführer in chronologischer Reihenfolge des Programmstarts zeilenweise ab dem aktuell laufenden Programm angezeigt. ❑ Standard „ Übersicht / Ausführlich Mit der Taste GUIDE auf der Fernbedienung können Sie einstellen, ob der ausführliche Programmführer oder die Übersicht angezeigt werden soll. O Sie können das Programmführermenü auch durch Drücken der Taste GUIDE aufrufen. Fortsetzung... Sender Ausführlich Übersicht Standard : Ausführlich ► Senderliste Kanalmodus : Hinzugef. Sender Feinabstimmung BN68-02333J-GER.indb 12 10/20/2009 4:37:51 PMDeutsch - 13 Verwenden von Ausführlichem Programmführers / Übersicht ▲ / ▼ / ◄ / ►, ENTER Wählen Sie mit den Tasten ▲/▼/◄/►/ENTERE ein Programm aus. ROT Schalten Sie zwischen dem Ausführlich und der Übersicht um. GRÜN Ausführlich : Schnell zurückblättern. (-24 Std.) GELB Ausführlich : Schnell weiterblättern. (+24 Std.) BLAU Programmführer beenden. INFO INFO-Taste, für detailliertere Informationen. ❑ Sendermodus Durch Drücken der Taste P () wechseln Sie innerhalb der gewählten Senderliste zwischen den Sendern. „ Hinzugef. Sender : Es wird nur zwischen Sendern der gespeicherten Senderliste gewechselt. „ Favoriten : Es wird nur zwischen Sendern der Favoritenliste gewechselt. ❑ Feinabstimmung (nur analoge Kanäle) Bei klarem Empfang ist keine Feinabstimmung nötig, da diese automatisch während der Sendersuche erfolgt. Falls das Signal jedoch schwach oder das Bild verzerrt ist, müssen Sie unter Umständen eine manuelle Feinabstimmung durchführen. N Feinabgestimmte Sender, die gespeichert wurden, werden mit einem Sternchen * rechts neben der Sendernummer im SenderBanner gekennzeichnet. N Wenn Sie den feinabgestimmten Sender nicht speichern, werden Ihre Einstellungen nicht gesichert. N Wählen Sie zum Zurücksetzen der Feinabstimmung die Option Reset. Drücken Sie dazu die Taste ▼ und dann die Taste ENTERE. Verwalten von Sendern Mit diesem Menü können Sie Favoriten hinzufügen, löschen oder einstellen und den Programmführer für Digitalsendungen verwenden. N Wählen Sie im Fenster Alle Sender, Hinzugefügte Sender oder Favorit oder Programm einen Sender. Drücken Sie hierzu die Tasten ▲ oder ▼ und dann die Taste ENTERE. Nun können Sie den gewählten Sender ansehen. • Alle Sender : Hiermit zeigen Sie alle verfügbaren Sender an. • Hinzugefügte Sender : Hiermit zeigen Sie alle hinzugefügten Sender an. • Favorit : Hiermit zeigen Sie alle Favoritensender an. • Programm : Hiermit zeigen Sie alle vorgemerkten Programme an. O Sie öffnen die Senderlisten durch Drücken der Taste CH LIST auf der Fernbedienung. N Verwenden der Farbtasten in Verbindung mit der Senderliste. - Rot (Sendertyp) : Schalten Sie zwischen TV, Radio, Daten / Andere und Alle um. - Grün ( (Zoom) : Hiermit vergrößern oder verkleinern Sie die Sendernummer. - Gelb (Wählen) : Hiermit wählen Sie mehrere Senderlisten aus. - T TOOLS (Extras) : Hiermit zeigen Sie die Menüs Löschen (oder Hinzufügen), Zu Favoriten hinzufügen (oder Aus Favoriten löschen), Sperren (oder Freigabe), Timer-Wiedergabe, Name bearb., Programmplatz bearbeiten, Sort (Sortieren), Alle abwählen, oder Alle wählen oder Autom. speichern an. (Der Inhalt des Menüs Extras hängt von der jeweiligen Situation ab.) N Symbole zur Anzeige des Senderstatus A Ein analoger Sender. c Ein Sender, der durch Drücken der gelben Taste gewählt wurde. ♥ Ein Sender, der als Favorit eingestellt ist. ( Ein Programm, das gerade gesendet wird. \ Ein gesperrter Sender. ) Ein vorgemerktes Programm. Sender Übersicht Standard : Ausführlich Senderliste Kanalmodus : Hinzugef. Sender Feinabstimmung 824 UKTV Gold 825 UKTV style A 1 C -- A 2 C -- A 3 ♥ C -- A 4 C -- A 5 C -- A 6 C -- A 7 C -- A 8 C -- Alle Sender Alle „ Sendertyp „ Zoom „ Wählen Seite Extras Ausführlich DTV - Kabel 900 f tn 2:10 Di 1 Jun Freshmen On Campus 2:00 - 2:30 Keine detaillierten Information. Heute 2:00 - 3:00 3:00 - 4:00 Mint Extra Loaded Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC The Distillery Smash Hits! Sunday 900 f tn 901 ITV Play 902 Kerrang! 903 Kiss 903 oneword ▼ 903 Smash Hits! Street Hypn.. Kisstory Keine Information Keine Information Keine Information Freshmen O.. Übersicht DTV Cable 900 f tn Street Hypnosis Booze Britain 2:00 2:30 ▼ 5:00 Freshmen On Campus Ansehen Informationen Seite „ Ausführlich „ Beenden Ansehen Informationen Seite „ Übersicht „ +24 Std. „ Beenden BN68-02333J-GER.indb 13 10/20/2009 4:37:52 PMDeutsch - 14 ❑ Menü Extras für Senderlisten (in Alle Sender / Hinzugefügte Sender / Favorit) N Drücken Sie die Taste TOOLS, um das Menü Extras anzuzeigen. N Der Inhalt des Menüs Extras hängt vom jeweiligen Senderstatus ab. „ Hinzufügen / Löschen Sie können Kanäle löschen oder hinzufügen, damit nur die gewünschten Kanäle angezeigt werden. N Alle gelöschten Kanäle werden im Menü Alle Sender angezeigt. N Wenn der Sender in grauer Farbe dargestellt wird, wurde er gelöscht. N Das Menü Hinzufügen wird nur für gelöschte Kanäle angezeigt. N Sie können einen Sender aus dem Menü Hinzugefügte Sender oder Favorit in gleicher Weise löschen. „ Zu Favoriten hinzufügen / Aus Favoriten löschen Sie können Kanäle, die Sie häufig sehen, als Favorit festlegen. T Drücken Sie die Taste TOOLS, um das Menü Extras anzuzeigen. Sie können zudem einen Sender zu den Favoriten hinzufügen, indem Sie Extras → Zu Favoriten hinzufügen (oder Aus Favoriten löschen). O Durch Drücken der Taste FAV.CH auf der Fernbedienung können Sie die eingerichteten Favoritenkanäle auswählen. N Das Symbol “♥” wird angezeigt, und der Sender wird als Favorit festgelegt. N Alle Favoritenkanäle werden im Menü Favorit angezeigt. „ Sperren / Freigabe Sie können einen Sender sperren, sodass er nicht ausgewählt und angezeigt werden kann. Diese Funktion ist nur verfügbar, wenn die Kindersicherung aktiviert ist Ein. (siehe Seite 24) N Der Eingabebildschirm für die PIN wird geöffnet. Geben Sie nun Ihre vierstellige PIN ein. N Der Standard-PIN-Code eines neuen Fernsehgeräts lautet ‘0-0-0-0’. Sie können die PIN ändern, indem Sie im Menü den Befehl PIN ändern wählen. N Das Symbol “\” wird angezeigt, und der Sender wird gesperrt. „ Timer-Wiedergabe Wenn Sie ein Programm zum Anschauen vorgemerkt haben, wechselt das Fernsehgerät automatisch zum vorgemerkten Sender in der Senderliste, auch wenn Sie gerade einen anderen Sender anschauen. Um ein Programm vorzumerken, müssen Sie zuerst die Uhrzeit einstellen. (siehe Seite 22) N Sie können nur gespeicherte Kanäle vormerken. N Sie können Sender, Monat, Tag, Jahr, Stunde oder Minute auch direkt über die Zifferntasten auf der Fernbedienung einstellen. N Das Vormerken eines Programms wird im Menü Programm angezeigt. N Digitaler Programmführer und Vormerken von Sendungen Wenn Sie einen digitalen Sender gewählt haben und die Taste ► drücken, wird der Programmführer für diesen Sender angezeigt. Gehen Sie in der oben beschriebenen Weise vor, wenn Sie ein Programm vormerken möchten. „ Sendernamen bearbeiten (nur Analogsender) Sie können Kanäle mit Beschriftungen versehen, sodass die ersten Buchstaben des Namens immer dann angezeigt werden, wenn Sie den Sender wählen. N Die Namen der digitalen Sender werden automatisch zugewiesen und können nicht geändert werden. „ Programmplatz bearbeiten (nur Digitalkanal) Sie können die Sendernummer auch mit den Zifferntasten der Fernbedienung einstellen. „ Sortieren (nur Analogkanal) Mit diesem Vorgang können Sie die Programmnummern gespeicherter Sender ändern. Das ist möglicherweise nach dem automatischen Speichern von Sendern erforderlich. „ Alle wählen / Alle abwählen Sie können die Kanäle in der Senderliste auswählen oder die Auswahl aufheben. N Sie können die Funktionen zum Hinzufügen / Löschen / Hinzufügen zu Favoriten / Löschen aus Favoriten oder Sperren / Freigeben gleichzeitig verwenden. Markieren Sie die gewünschten Kanäle und drücken Sie die gelbe Taste, um alle markierten Kanäle zugleich einzustellen. N Links neben dem Namen des gewählten Senders wird das Symbol c angezeigt. N Alle abwählen können Sie nur wählen, wenn mindestens ein Sender gewählt ist. „ Automatisch speichern N Weitere Informationen zum Einstellen der Optionen, finden Sie auf Seite 11. N Wenn ein Sender mit der Funktion Kindersicherung gesperrt wurde, wird das Eingabefenster für die PIN geöffnet. ❑ Menü Extras für Senderlisten (in Programm) Mit dieser Menüoption können Sie eine Vormerkung anzeigen, ändern oder löschen. N Drücken Sie die Taste TOOLS, um das Menü Extras anzuzeigen. • Info ändern : Wählen Sie diese Option, um eine Vormerkung zu ändern. • Programmierung abbrechen : Wählen Sie diese Option, um eine Vormerkung zu stornieren. • Informationen : Wählen Sie diese Option, um eine Vormerkung anzuzeigen. (Sie können die Vormerkinformationen auch ändern). • Alle wählen / Alle abwählen : Wählen oder abwählen aller vorgemerkten Programme. 824 UKTV Gold 825 UKTV style A 1 C -- A 2 C -- A 3 C -- A 4 C -- A 5 C -- A 6 C -- A 7 C -- A 8 C -- Alle Sender Löschen Zu Favoriten hinzufügen Sperren Timer-Wiedergabe Sendernamen bearbeiten Sortieren ▼ Programmiert 1 / 1 / 2009 13:59 5 TV1 Quincy, M.E 18:59 2 TV3 The Equalizer 20:59 2 TV3 McMillan & Wife 21:59 2 TV3 M.Spillane’s mike Hammer Info ändern Prog. Löschen Informationen Alle wählen Alle „ Zoom „ Wählen Extras Informationen Alle „ Sendertyp „ Zoom „ Wählen Seite Extras BN68-02333J-GER.indb 14 10/20/2009 4:37:53 PMDeutsch - 15 Ändern der Bildeinstellungen ❑ Modus Sie können den Bildstandard auswählen, der für Ihre Sehgewohnheiten am besten geeignet ist. „ Dynamisch / Standard / Eco / Film T Drücken Sie die Taste TOOLS, um das Menü Extras anzuzeigen. Sie können den Bildmodus durch Auswahl von Extras → Bildmodus einstellen. ❑ Zellhelligkeit / Kontrast / Helligkeit / Schärfe / Farbe / Farbton (G/R) Das Gerät verfügt über mehrere Einstellmöglichkeiten für die Bildqualität. • Zellhelligkeit : Zum Anpassen der Pixelhelligkeit. • Kontrast : Hiermit stellen Sie den Kontrast. • Helligkeit : Hiermit stellen Sie die Helligkeit. • Schärfe : Hiermit stellen Sie die Kantenauflösung. • Farbe : Dient zum Anpassen der Farbsättigung des Bilds. • Farbton (G/R) : Hiermit stellen Sie den Farbton ein. N Wenn Sie Änderungen an Zellenhelligkeit, Kontrast, Helligkeit, Schärfe, Farbe oder Farbton (G/R) vornehmen, wird das Bildschirmmenü entsprechend angepasst. N Die eingestellten Werte werden auf jeden Bildmodus angewendet. N Sie können die Funktion Farbton im Analog TV, Ext. oder AV Modus des PAL Systems nicht verwenden. N Im PC Modus können Sie nur Zellhelligkeit, Kontrast und Helligkeit einstellen. N Jede angepasste Einstellung wird je nach Eingabemodus separat gespeichert. N Die im Betrieb verbrauchte Energiemenge geht deutlich zurück, wenn Sie die Helligkeit des Bildes reduzieren. Damit senken Sie die Betriebskosten. ❑ Erweiterte Einstellungen Sie können verschiedene erweiterte Einstellungen für Ihren Fernseher vornehmen, unter anderem für Farbe und Kontrast. N Erweiterte Einstellungen stehen in den Modi Standard oder Film zur Verfügung. N Im PC Modus können von den Advanced Settings nur Optimalkontrast, Gamma und Weißabgleich eingestellt werden. „ Schwarzton → Aus / Dunkel / Dunkler / Dunkelst Verbesserung der Bildtiefe durch Anpassen der schwarzen Farbdichte. „ Optimalkontrast → Aus / Gering / Mittel / Hoch Sie können den Bildschirmkontrast so anpassen, dass ein optimaler Kontrast gewährleistet ist. „ Gamma Sie können die Intensität der Primärfarben (Rot, Grün und Blau) einstellen. „ Farbraum Der Farbraum ist eine Farbmatrix bestehend aus den Farben Rot, Grün und Blau. Wählen Sie Ihren bevorzugten Farbraum, um die Welt in den natürlichsten Farben zu erfahren. • Auto : Automatische Anpassung des Farbbereichs an die Bildsignalquelle. • Nativ : Hiermit stellen Sie einen Farbereich ein, der breiter als der des Eingangssignals ist. • Benutzerd : Hiermit stellen Sie den Farbbereich wunschgemäß ein. N Anpassen des Farbraums - Hiermit stellen Sie den Farbbereich wunschgemäß ein. Die Option “Farbe” ist verfügbar, wenn der Farbraum als benutzerdefiniert eingestellt ist. - Farbe → Rot / Grün / Blau / Gelb / Zyan / Magenta - Rot / Grün / Blau : Sie können die RGB-Werte der jeweils ausgewählten Farbe einstellen. - Reset : Setzt den Farbraum auf die Standardwerte zurück. Bildeinstellungen Fortsetzung... Modus : Standard ► Zellhelligkeit : 4 Kontrast : 95 Helligkeit : 45 Schärfe : 50 Farbe : 50 Farbton (G/R) : G50/R50 Erweiterte Einstellungen Bild Farbe : 50 Farbton (G/R) : G50/R50 Erweiterte Einstellungen ► Bildoptionen Bild zurücksetzen Bild BN68-02333J-GER.indb 15 10/20/2009 4:37:54 PMDeutsch - 16 „ Weißabgleich Um natürlichere Bildfarben zu erhalten, können Sie die Farbtemperatur anpassen. • R-Offset / G-Offset / B-Offset / R-Gain / G-Gain / B-Gain : Wenn Sie den Wert anpassen, wird der Bildschirm aktualisiert und neu angezeigt. • Reset : Hiermit stellen Sie den Standard-Weißabgleich wieder ein. „ Hautton Hiermit reichern Sie den Farbton für Haut mit Rot an oder ab. N Wenn Sie den Anpassungswert ändern, wird der angepasste Bildschirm aktualisiert. „ Kantenglättung → Aus / Ein Sie können die Objektbegrenzungen im Bild betonen. „ xvYCC → Aus / Ein Durch Aktivieren des xvYCC-Modus werden Detailgenauigkeit und Farbtiefe bei der Anzeige von Filmen von einem externen Gerät (z. B. DVD-Player) verbessert. N xvYCC ist verfügbar, wenn der Bildmodus auf Film und der externe Eingang auf HDMI oder Komp. eingestellt ist. N Diese Funktion wird, je nach externem Gerät, möglicherweise nicht unterstützt. ❑ Bildoptionen Die weiteren Bildeinstellungen können an Ihre Bedürfnisse angepasst werden. N Im PC-Modus können von den Bildoptionen nur Farbtemp., Größe und Screen Burn Protection (Bildschirm-Einbrennschutz) eingestellt werden. „ Farbtemp. → Kalt / Normal / Warm1 / Warm2 / Warm3 Sie können den für Ihre Augen angenehmsten Farbton auswählen. N Die eingestellten Werte werden entsprechend dem jeweils ausgewählten Bildmodus gespeichert. N Warm1, Warm2 oder Warm3 werden nur aktiviert, wenn der Bildmodus auf Film eingestellt ist. „ Größe → Autom. Breit / 16:9 / Breitenzoom / Zoom / 4:3 / Bildanpassung Sie können ein Bildformat auswählen, das Ihren Sehgewohnheiten am besten entspricht. • Autom. Breit : Hiermit stellen Sie das Bildformat auf automatische Breite ein. • 16:9 : Stellt das Bildformat auf den Breitbildmodus 16:9 ein. • Breitenzoom : Diese Option vergrößert das Bild auf mehr als 4:3. Verschieben Sie das Bild mit den Tasten ▲ oder ▼ nach oben oder nach unten, nachdem Sie mit der Taste ◄ oder ► eine Auswahl getroffen haben. • Zoom : Vergrößert das Bild vertikal. • 4:3 : Stellt das Bildformat auf den Normalmodus 4:3 ein. • Bildanpassung : Zeigt ein volles, natives HD-Signal an, das mit einem normalen Fernseher nicht angezeigt werden kann. N Je nach Signalquelle können die Bildgrößenoptionen variieren. N Die verfügbaren Elemente können in Abhängigkeit vom ausgewählten Modus variieren. N Im PC Modus können nur die Modi 16:9 und 4:3 eingestellt werden. N Wenn der Modus Doppel ( , ) im PIP-Modus eingestellt wurde, können Sie die Bildgröße nicht einstellen. N Sie können die Einstellungen für jedes externe Gerät festlegen und speichern, das Sie an einen Eingang des Fernsehgeräts angeschlossen haben. N Es kann zu vorübergehender Bildkonservierung kommen, wenn Sie auf dem Gerät mehr als zwei Stunden lang ein unbewegten Bild angezeigt haben. N BreitZoom : Wählen Sie durch Drücken der Taste ► die Option Position, und drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE. Mit der Taste ▲ oder ▼ können Sie das Bild nach oben oder nach unten verschieben. Drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE. N Zoom : Wählen Sie durch Drücken der Taste ► die Option Position, und drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE. Mit der Taste ▲ oder ▼ können Sie das Bild nach oben oder nach unten verschieben. Drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE. Wählen Sie durch Drücken der Taste ► die Option Größe, und drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE. Drücken Sie die Tasten ▲ oder ▼, um das Bild in vertikaler Richtung zu vergrößern oder zu verkleinern. Drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE. N Nach Auswahl von Bildschirmanpassung im Modus HDMI (1080i / 1080p) oder Component (1080i/1080p) : Wählen Sie durch Drücken der Tasten ◄ oder ► die Option Position. Mit den Tasten ▲, ▼, ◄ oder ► können Sie das Bild verschieben. N Reset : Wählen Sie mit den Tasten ◄ oder ► die Option Reset, und drücken Sie dann die ENTERE-Taste. Sie können die Einstellung initialisieren. N Wenn Sie die Funktion Bildschirmanpassung zusammen mit einem HDMI 720p-Signal verwenden, wird eine Zeile wie bei Overscan oben, unten, links und rechts abgeschnitten. Fortsetzung... Farbton (G/R) : G50/R50 Erweiterte Einstellungen Bildoptionen ► Bild zurücksetzen Bild BN68-02333J-GER.indb 16 10/20/2009 4:37:54 PMDeutsch - 17 „ Bildschirmmodus → 16:9 / BreitZoom / Zoom / 4:3 Wenn Sie die Bildgröße bei einem Fernsehgerät im 16:9-Format auf Autom. Breit einstellen, können Sie bestimmen, dass das Bild als 4:3 WSS (Breitbilddienst) oder gar nicht angezeigt werden soll. Da jedes europäische Land eine andere Bildgröße verwendet, können die Benutzer sie damit einstellen. N Diese Funktion ist im Modus Auto Breit verfügbar. N Diese Funktion ist im Modus PC, Component oder HDMI nicht verfügbar. „ Digitale RM → Aus / Gering / Mittel / Hoch / Auto Wenn das vom Fernsehgerät empfangene Sendesignal schwach ist, können Sie die digitale Rauschunterdrückung aktivieren, um ggf. statische Bilder oder Doppelbilder auf dem Bildschirm zu verringern. N Bei schwachem Signal wählen Sie diejenige der anderen Optionen, bei der das beste Bild angezeigt wird. „ HDMI-Schwarzp. → Normal / Gering Sie können direkt auf dem Bildschirm den Schwarzwert auswählen, um die Bildschirmtiefe anzupassen. N Diese Funktion ist nur bei einer Verbindung des externen Eingangs mit HDMI (RGBSignal) aktiv. „ 1080 Full-HD Motion Demo → Aus / Ein Die neue Generation der Samsung Plasmabildschirme bietet höchste Klarheit der Bewegungen bei Full HD - optimal für Sportsendungen, Filme und Spiele mit schnellen Bewegungen. N Diese Funktion ist im PC-, Soiele- oder Media Play-Modus nicht verfügbar. „ Filmmodus Hiermit optimieren Sie den Bildmodus für die Wiedergabe von Filmen. • Aus : Deaktiviert den Filmmodus. • Auto1 : Hiermit wird das Bild bei Filmanzeige automatisch auf die beste Qualität eingestellt. • Auto2 : Automatische Optimierung von Teletext, wenn Sie einen Film sehen. • Cinema Smooth : Ermöglicht das ultimative Kinoerlebnis. N Der Film-Modus wird bei TV, Video, Component (480i / 1080i) und HDMI (480i / 1080i) unterstützt. „ Real 100Hz Demo → Aus / Ein Sie erkennen deutlich den Unterschied zwischen Real 100 Hz und 50 Hz, insbesondere bei Sendungen mit schnellen Bewegungen. Deshalb können Sie, wenn Sie ein Bild mit langsamen Bewegungen betrachten, nicht zwischen Real 100 Hz und 50 Hz unterscheiden. Demo 100 Hz funktioniert nur zusammen mit einem 50 Hz-Signal. Real 100 Hz wird zusammen mit speziellen Bildern für Geschäftsdemos verwendet. „ Blaumodus → Aus / Ein Diese Funktion ist für Experten zum Ausmessen von AV-Geräten bestimmt. Mit dieser Funktion werden das rote und das grüne Signal aus dem Videosignal entfernt, sodass nur das blaue Signal angezeigt wird. Damit wird ein Blaufilter erzeugt, mithilfe dessen die Farbe und der Farbton von Videogeräten wie DVD-Playern, Heimkinosystemen usw. eingestellt werden können. N Der Blaumodus ist verfügbar, wenn der Bildmodus auf Film oder Standard eingestellt ist. „ Einbrennschutz (Bildschirm-Einbrennschutz)Dieses Gerät ist mit Einbrennschutz-Technologie ausgestattet, um die Möglichkeit des Einbrennens des Monitorbildes zu verringern. Diese Technologie ermöglicht das Einstellen von senkrechten (Vertikal) und seitlichen (Horizontal) Bildbewegungen. Die Zeiteinstellung ermöglicht das Programmieren der Dauer zwischen Bildbewegungen in Minuten. • Pixelabstand : Diese Funktion verschiebt Pixel auf dem Plasmabildschirm horizontal oder vertikal, um die Möglichkeit des Einbrennens des Bildes zu minimieren. N Optimale Einstellung für PixelShift Komponente TV/Ext/AV/Component/HDMI PC Horizontal 0~2 2 Vertikal 0~4 4 Zeit (Minuten) 1~4 Min 2 Min N Der PixelShift-Wert kann in Abhängigkeit von der Monitorgröße (Zoll) und dem ausgewählten Modus variieren. N Diese Funktion ist im Modus Bildschirmanpassung nicht verfügbar. Fortsetzung... BN68-02333J-GER.indb 17 10/20/2009 4:37:54 PMDeutsch - 18 Fernsehgerät mithilfe des PCs einstellen N Voreinstellung : Drücken Sie die Taste SOURCE, um den Modus PC einzustellen. ❑ Autom. Einstellung Die automatische Einstellung ermöglicht eine automatische Anpassung des PC-Monitors an das eingehende PC-Videosignal. Die Werte für “Fein”, “Grob” und “position” werden automatisch eingestellt. N Diese Funktion ist im DVI-HDMI-Modus nicht verfügbar. T Drücken Sie die Taste TOOLS, um das Menü Extras anzuzeigen. Sie können die Autom. Einstellung auch durch Auswahl von Extras → Autom. Einstellung durchführen. ❑ PC-Bildschirm Durch das Einstellen der Bildqualität können Bildstörungen und Rauschen beseitigt oder verringert werden. Falls sich Bildrauschen durch die Feinabstimmung allein nicht beheben lässt, stellen Sie zunächst die Frequenz möglichst genau ein (Grob). Führen Sie dann erneut eine Feinabstimmung durch. Nachdem Sie das Bildrauschen durch die Grob- und Feinabstimmung des Bildes verringert haben, stellen Sie die Position des Bildes so ein, dass es auf dem Bildschirm zentriert ist. „ Grob Hiermit stellen Sie die Frequenzein, wenn vertikales Rauschen im Bild vorhanden ist. „ Fein Hiermit stellen Sie den Bildschirm klarer ein. „ PC-Position Passen Sie die Position des PC-Bilds an, wenn es nicht auf den Fernsehbildschirm passt. Stellen Sie mit den Tasten ▲ oder ▼ die vertikale Position ein. Stellen Sie mit den Tasten ◄ oder ► die horizontale Position ein. „ Bild zurücksetzen Sie können alle Bildeinstellungen auf die werkseitig eingestellten Ausgangswerte zurücksetzen. • Bildlauf : Diese Funktion dient zum Entfernen von Nachbildern auf dem Bildschirm, indem alle Pixel des Plasmabildschirms nach einem bestimmten Muster verschoben werden. Verwenden Sie diese Funktion, wenn Nachbilder oder -symbole auf dem Bildschirm angezeigt werden. Diese können insbesondere dann auftreten, wenn auf dem Bildschirm über längere Zeit ein Standbild angezeigt wurde. • Seite grau : Sie verhindern bei Anzeige im Format 4:3 Beschädigungen des Bildschirms, indem Sie einen Weißabgleich an den beiden linken Bildschirmrändern vornehmen. - Hell : Bei Anzeige im Format 4:3 werden die beiden seitlichen Bildschirmränder aufgehellt. - Dunkel : Bei Anzeige im Format 4:3 werden die beiden seitlichen Bildschirmränder abgedunkelt. ❑ Bild zurücksetzen → Bildmodus zurücksetzen / Abbrechen Die Reset-Funktion wird für jeden Bildmodus durchgeführt. N Setzt alle Bildeinstellungen auf die Standardwerte zurück.Wählen Sie zuerst einen Bildmodus zum Zurücksetzen. Helligkeit : 45 Schärfe : 50 Autom. Einstellung ► PC-Bildschirm Erweiterte Einstellungen Bildoptionen Bild zurücksetzen Bild Picture Erweiterte Einstellungen Bildoptionen Bild zurücksetzen ► Bild BN68-02333J-GER.indb 18 10/20/2009 4:37:55 PMDeutsch - 19 PC-Anzeige ❑ Konfigurieren Ihrer PC-Software (unter Windows XP) Im Folgenden sind die typischen Anzeigeeinstellungen für einen Windows-Computer aufgeführt. Die von Ihrem PC angezeigten Fenster entsprechen je nach installierter Windows-Version und verwendeter Grafikkarte möglicherweise nicht genau der Abbildung. Trotzdem sind die hier beschriebenen grundlegenden Informationen in fast allen Fällen anwendbar. (Wenden Sie sich andernfalls an den Computerhersteller oder Samsung-Händler.) 1. Klicken Sie im Startmenü von Windows auf die Systemsteuerung. 2. Wenn das Fenster der Systemsteuerung angezeigt wird, klicken Sie auf „Darstellung und Designs”. Ein Dialogfeld wird geöffnet. 3. Wenn das Fenster der Systemsteuerung angezeigt wird, klicken Sie auf „Anzeige“. Anschließend wird ein Dialogfeld angezeigt. 4. Klicken Sie nun im Dialogfeld „Anzeige“ auf die Registerkarte „Einstellungen”. Stellen Sie die Bildschirmauflösung auf folgenden Wert : 1920 x 1080 Pixel. Wenn das Dialogfeld eine Option für die Bildschirmfrequenz enthält, muss als Einstellung 60 oder 60 Hz ausgewählt werden. Andernfalls klicken Sie einfach auf OK, um das Dialogfeld zu schließen. ❑ Anzeigemodi Bildschirmposition und -größe hängen vom Typ des PC-Monitors und seiner Auflösung ab. Bei den in der Tabelle angegebenen Auflösungen handelt es sich um die empfohlenen Auflösungen. N Eine Verbindung über HDMI/DVI-Kabel kann nur über HDMI IN 2(DVI) erfolgen. N Das Zeilensprungverfahren wird nicht unterstützt. N Das Fernsehgerät funktioniert möglicherweise nicht ordnungsgemäß, wenn kein Standardmodus ausgewählt wird. N Separate- und Composite-Modus werden unterstützt. SOG wird nicht unterstützt. N Ein zu langes oder qualitativ geringwertiges VGA-Kabel kann in hochauflösenden Modi (1920 x 1080) zu Bildrauschen führen. „ D-Sub- und HDMI/DVI-Eingang Modus Auflösung Horizontal Frequenz (kHz) Vertikalfrequenz (Hz) Pixeltakt Frequenz (MHz) SyncPolarität (H x V) IBM 640 x 350 31.469 70.086 25.175 + / - 720 x 400 31.469 70.087 28.322 - / + MAC 640 x 480 35.000 66.667 30.240 - / - 832 x 624 49.726 74.551 57.284 - / - 1152 x 870 68.681 75.062 100.000 - / + VESA CVT 720 x 576 35.910 59.950 32.750 - / + 1152 x 864 53.783 59.959 81.750 - / + 1280 x 720 44.772 59.855 74.500 - / + 56.456 74.777 95.750 - / + 1280 x 960 75.231 74.857 130.000 - / + VESA DMT 640 x 480 31.469 59.940 25.175 - / - 37.861 72.809 31.500 - / - 37.500 75.000 31.500 - / - 800 x 600 37.879 60.317 40.000 + / + 800 x 600 48.077 72.188 50.000 + / + 800 x 600 46.875 75.000 49.500 + / + 1024 x 768 48.363 60.004 65.000 - / - 56.476 70.069 75.000 - / - 60.023 75.029 78.750 + / + 1152 x 864 67.500 75.000 108.000 + / + 1280 x 800 49.702 59.810 83.500 - / + 62.795 74.934 106.500 - / + 1280 x 960 60.000 60.000 108.000 + / + 1280 x 1024 63.981 60.020 108.000 + / + 79.976 75.025 135.000 + / + 1360 x 768 47.712 60.015 85.500 + / + 1440 x 900 55.935 59.887 106.500 - / + 70.635 74.984 136.750 - / + 1680 x 1050 65.290 59.954 146.250 - / + VESA DMT / DTV CEA 1920 x 1080p 67.500 60.000 148.500 + / + VESA GTF 1280 x 720 52.500 70.000 89.040 - / + 1280 x 1024 74.620 70.000 128.943 - / - BN68-02333J-GER.indb 19 10/20/2009 4:37:55 PMDeutsch - 20 Tonstandard wählen ❑ Modus Stellen Sie den Audiomodus ein, der am besten zur jeweiligen Sendung passt. „ Standard / Musik / Film / Klare Stimme / Benutzerd. T Drücken Sie die Taste TOOLS, um das Menü Extras anzuzeigen. Sie können den Tonmodus durch Auswahl von Extras → Tonmodus konfigurieren. ❑ Equalizer Sie können den Ton Ihrem persönlichen Geschmack anpassen. • Modus : Sie können einen Audiomodus gemäß Ihrem persönlichen Geschmack einstellen. • Balance : Steuert die Balance zwischen dem linken und dem rechten Lautsprecher. • 100Hz / 300Hz / 1KHz / 3KHz / 10KHz (Bandbreitenanpassung) : Zum Einstellen der unterschiedlichen Bandbreitenfrequenzen. • Reset : Setzt die Equalizereinstellungen auf die Standardwerte zurück. ❑ SRS TruSurround HD → Aus / Ein SRS TruSurround HD ist eine Kombination der Technologien von TruSurround und FOCUS TruBass. Mit SRS TruSurround HD können Sie virtuelle 5.1 Surroundeffekte mit zwei Lautsprechern genießen. Diese Funktion sorgt nicht nur für kräftige Bässe sondern sie verbessert auch die Widergabe hoher Frequenzen. T Drücken Sie die Taste TOOLS, um das Menü Extras anzuzeigen. Sie können SRS TruSurround HD durch Auswahl von Extras → SRS TS HD auswählen. TruSurround HD, SRS und das Symbol sind eingetragene Marken von SRS Labs, Inc. Die TruSurround HD-Technologie wird unter Lizenz von SRS Labs, Inc. in das System integriert. N Wenn der Ton beim Fernsehen gestört ist stellen Sie den Equalizer und SRS TruSurround HD (Aus/Ein) ein. ❑ Wiedergabesprache (nur Digitalkanal) Sie können die Standardsprache für Audio ändern. Zeigt die Sprachinformationen für den eingehenden Audiostream an. N Sie können nur Sprachen auswählen, die auch tatsächlich übertragen werden. ❑ Audioformat → MPEG / Dolby Digital (nur Digitalkanäle) Wenn Sie für die Tonausgabe sowohl den Hauptlautsprecher als auch den Audioreceiver verwenden, kann es aufgrund der Geschwindigkeitsunterschiede beim Dekodieren durch die beiden Systeme zu einem Echoeffekt kommen. Verwenden Sie in diesen Fall die TV-Lautsprecher. N Sie können nur Sprachen auswählen, die auch tatsächlich übertragen werden. Hergestellt unter Lizenz der Dolby Laboratories. Dolby und das Doppel-D-Symbol sind Warenzeichen von Dolby Laboratories. ❑ Audio für Sehgeschädigte (nur Digitalkanal) Dies ist eine zusätzliche Audiofunktion, mit der für sehbehinderte Personen eine zusätzliche Tonspur wiedergegeben wird. Diese Funktion verarbeitet den Audiostream für die AB (Audio-Beschreibung), sofern diese vom Sender zusammen mit dem Vordergrundton übertragen wird. Der Benutzer kann die Audio-Beschreibung aktivieren oder deaktivieren und die Lautstärke einstellen. O Sie können diese Optionen auswählen, indem Sie einfach die Taste AD auf der Fernbedienung drücken. „ Audio für Sehgeschädigte → Aus / Ein Hiermit schalten Sie die Funktion für Audiobeschreibungen ein bzw. aus. „ Lautstärke Hiermit regeln Sie die Lautstärke der Audiobeschreibungen für Sehgeschädigte. N Lautstärke ist aktiv, wenn Audio für Sehgeschädigte aktiviert (Ein) ist. Toneinstellungen Modus : Benutzerd. ► Equalizer SRS TruSurround HD : Aus Wiedergabesprache : ---- Audioformat : ---- Audio für Sehgeschädigte Auto. Lautst. : Aus Lautsprecher auswählen: TV-Lautsprecher Ton BN68-02333J-GER.indb 20 10/20/2009 4:37:56 PMDeutsch - 21 ❑ Auto. Lautst. → Aus / Ein Aufgrund unterschiedlicher Signalbedingungen unterscheiden sich Fernsehsender in der Lautstärke, so dass es erforderlich sein kann, die Lautstärke beim Umschalten zwischen Sendern jedes Mal nachzuregeln. Mit der Funktion für automatische Lautstärkeeinstellung wird die Lautstärke automatisch bei starkem Modulationssignal verringert und bei schwachem Modulationssignal erhöht. ❑ Lautsprecher auswählen → Ext. Lautsprecher / TV-Lautsprecher Wenn Sie den Ton über separate Lautsprecher hören möchten, deaktivieren Sie den internen Verstärker. N Die Tasten – +, M MUTE funktionieren nicht, wenn Lautsprecher auswählen auf Ext. Lautsprecher geschaltet ist. N Wenn Sie im Menü Lautsprecher auswählen die Option Ext. Lautsprecher wählen, werden die Audioeinstellungen eingeschränkt. Eingebauter Lautsprecher des Fernsehgeräts Audioausgang (Optisch, L/ R-Out) zum Soundsystem TV / Ext. / AV / Component / PC / HDMI TV / Ext. / AV / Component / PC / HDMI TV-Lautsprecher Lautsprecherausgang Audioausgang Externer Lautsprecher Mute Audioausgang Kein Videosignal Mute Mute ❑ Ton wählen Wenn die PIP-Funktion aktiviert ist, können Sie den Ton des PIP-Bildes wiedergeben. • Erster Tuner : Ton des Hauptbildes wiedergeben. • Zweiter Tuner : Ton des PIP-Bildes wiedergeben. T Drücken Sie die Taste TOOLS um das Menü Extras anzuzeigen. Sie können den Ton des PIP-Bilds durch Auswahl von Extras → PIP → Ton wählen einstellen. N Diese Option können Sie auswählen, wenn PIP aktiviert (Ein) ist. ❑ Ton zurücksetzen „ Alle zurücksetzen / Ton-Modus reset / Abbrechen : Sie können alle Audioeinstellungen wieder auf die Werkseinstellungen zurücksetzen. Tonmodus wählen Wenn Sie Dual l ll einstellen, wird der aktuelle Tonwiedergabemodus auf dem Bildschirm angezeigt. Art der Sendung Bildschirmanzeige NICAM Stereo Standardsendung (Standardtonwiedergabe) Mono (normale Verwendung) Standard und NICAM Mono NICAM Mono (Normal) NICAM-Stereo NICAM Stereo Mono (Normal) NICAM Dual-I/II NICAM Dual-1 NICAM Dual-2 Mono (Normal) A2 Stereo Standardsendung (Standardtonwiedergabe) Mono (normale Verwendung) Zweisprachig oder Dual-I/II Dual I Dual II Stereo Stereo Mono (erzwungen)) N Falls das Stereosignal schwach ist und automatisch umgeschaltet wird, sollten Sie zu mono wechseln. N Diese Funktion ist nur bei einem Stereosignal aktiviert. Bei Monosignalen ist es deaktiviert. N Diese Funktion ist nur im TV-Modus verfügbar. T Drücken Sie die Taste TOOLS , um das Menü Extras anzuzeigen. Sie können den Tonmodus durch Auswahl von Extras → Dual l ll auswählen. Lautsprecher auswählen: TV-Lautsprecher Ton wählen : Erster Tuner Ton zurücksetzen ► Ton BN68-02333J-GER.indb 21 10/20/2009 4:37:57 PMDeutsch - 22 Funktionsbeschreibung Einstellen der Uhrzeit ❑ Uhr Die Uhr muss eingestellt werden, damit Sie die verschiedenen Timerfunktionen des Fernsehgeräts verwenden können. N Jedes Mal, wenn Sie die Taste INFO drücken, wird die aktuelle Zeit angezeigt. N Wenn Sie das Netzkabel ziehen, müssen Sie die Uhr erneut einstellen. „ Uhr-Modus Sie können die aktuelle Zeit manuell oder automatisch einstellen. • Auto : Hiermit stellen Sie die Uhrzeit automatisch anhand der Zeit aus den digitalen Übertragungen ein. • Manual : Hiermit stellen Sie die aktuelle Zeit auf einen manuell eingestellten Wert ein. „ Zeit einstellen Sie können die aktuelle Zeit manuell einstellen. N Konfigurieren Sie diese Option, nachdem Sie Uhr-Modus auf Manuell eingestellt haben. N Sie können Tag, Monat, Jahr, Stunde, Minute durch Drücken der Zifferntasten auf der Fernbedienung direkt einstellen. ❑ Sleep-Timer → Aus / 30 min / 60 min / 90 min / 120 min / 150 min / 180 min Der Sleep-Timer schaltet das Fernsehgerät automatisch nach einer eingestellten Zeit (30, 60, 90, 120, 150, 180 Minuten) aus. N Wenn die eingestellte Zeit abgelaufen ist, schaltet das Fernsehgerät automatisch in den Standby-Modus. N Um die Sleep-Timer-Funktion abzubrechen, wählen Sie Aus. T Drücken Sie die Taste TOOLS, um das Menü Extras anzuzeigen. Sie können den Sleep-Timer durch Auswahl von Extras → Sleep-Timer einstellen. ❑ Zeit 1 / Zeit 2 / Zeit 3 Sie können den Fernseher so einstellen, dass er sich zu einer bestimmten Zeit automatisch anoder abschaltet. • Anschaltzeit : Hiermit stellen Sie die Uhrzeit ein, zu der das Fernsehgerät angehen soll. • Ausschaltzeit : Hiermit stellen Sie die Uhrzeit ein, zu der das Fernsehgerät ausgehen soll. • Lautstärke : Einstellen der Lautstärke. • Quelle : Wählen Sie TV, USB. N Wenn Sie TV wählen, können Sie TV-Empfang und Sender einstellen. - TV-Empfang : Wählen Sie Terrestrisch oder Kabel. - Sender : Wählen Sie den gewünschten Senden. N Wenn Sie USB wählen, können Sie den Inhalt einstellen. - Inhalt : Auswählen der gewünschten Inhalte vom USB. N Die Timerfunktion arbeitet nicht fehlerfrei, wenn es auf dem USB-Speicher keine Musikdatei gibt oder der Ordner mit der Musikdatei nicht markiert ist. • Wiederholmodus : Wählen Sie Einmal, Täglich, Mo~Fr, Mo~Sa, Sa~So oder Manuell. N Wenn Sie Manuell gewählt haben, drücken Sie die Taste ►, um den gewünschten Wochentag einzustellen. Wenn Sie die ENTERE-Taste drücken, nachdem Sie den gewünschten Tag gewählt haben, wird das Symbol c angezeigt. N Der ganz Ordner auf dem USB-Speicher unterstützt 64 englisch Zeichen. N Voraussetzung dafür ist, dass Sie die Uhr gestellt haben. N Sie können die Stunden, Minuten und den Sender auch über die Zifferntasten auf der Fernbedienung einstellen. N Automatisch Ausschalten Wenn Sie den Timer aktivieren, schaltet sich das Fernsehgerät drei Stunden nach dem Einschalten durch den Timer ab, wenn in dieser Zeit keine Funktionen verwendet wurden Diese Funktion ist nur verfügbar, wenn der Timer aktiviert ist, und sie verhindert Schäden durch Überhitzung, wenn das Fernsehgerät zu lange eingeschaltet ist. Zeit Uhr : -- : -- ► Sleep-Timer : Aus Timer 1 : Deaktiviert Timer 2 : Deaktiviert Timer 3 : Deaktiviert U Navig. E Eingabe R Zurück Einstellungen Plug & Play Menüsprache : Deutsch Zeit ► Sendungsoptionen Sicherheit Netzwerk Allgemein BN68-02333J-GER.indb 22 10/20/2009 4:37:57 PMDeutsch - 23 Konfigurieren der Menüeinstellungen ❑ Menüsprache Sie können die Menüsprache festlegen. ❑ Sendungsoptionen „ Untertitel Sie können Untertitel aktivieren und deaktivieren. Mit diesem Menü legen Sie den Untertitelmodus fest. Die Option Normal im Menü ist die Basisoption für Untertitel, und Schwerhörig ist für hörgeschädigte Personen bestimmt. • Untertitel → Aus / Ein : Untertitel aktivieren oder deaktivieren. • Modus → Normal / Schwerhörig : Hiermit können Sie den Untertitelmodus festlegen. • Untertitelsprache : Hiermit können Sie die Untertitelsprache festlegen. N Wenn das Programm, das Sie gerade sehen, die Funktion Schwerhörig nicht unterstützt, wird selbst bei der Einstellung Schwerhörig automatisch die Einstellung Normal aktiviert. N Englisch ist der Standardwert in Fällen, wo die ausgewählte Sprache für die Sendung nicht verfügbar ist. O Sie können diese Optionen auswählen, indem Sie einfach die Taste SUBT. auf der Fernbedienung drücken. „ Digitaltext → Deaktivieren / Aktivieren Wenn das Programm mit Digitaltext gesendet wird, ist diese Funktion aktiviert. N MHEG (Multimedia und Hypermedia Information Coding Experts Group) Ein internationaler Standard für Datenkompressionssysteme für Multimediaund Hypermedia-Anwendungen. Dies ist ein höheres Niveau als das MPEG-System, das solche datenverknüpfenden Hypertextmedien wie Standbilder, Zeichendienst, Animations-, Grafik- und Videodateien sowie Multimediadateien umfasst. MHEG ist eine Technologie für Laufzeitinteraktion mit dem Benutzer, und sie wird auf verschiedenen Gebieten verwendet, z. B. VOD (Video-On-Demand), ITV (Interactive TV), EC (Electronic Commerce), Teleweiterbildung, Telekonferenzen, digitale Bibliotheken und Netzwerkspiele. „ Teletextsprache Sie können die Teletextsprache durch Auswählen des Sprachtyps einstellen. N Englisch ist der Standardwert in Fällen, wo die ausgewählte Sprache für die Sendung nicht verfügbar ist. „ Voreinstellung • Primäre Wiedergabesprache / Sekundäre Wiedergabesprache / Primäre Untertitelsprache / Sekundäre Untertitelsprache / Primäre Teletextsprache / Sekundäre Teletextsprache Mit dieser Funktion können Sie eine der verfügbaren Sprachen wählen. Die hier gewählte Sprache ist die Standardsprache, wenn der Benutzer einen Sender auswählt. Wenn Sie die Spracheinstellung ändern, werden die Untertitelsprache, die Audiosprache und die Teletextsprache im Menü “Sprache” automatisch in die gewünschte Sprache geändert. Mit den Untermenüs für die Untertitelsprache, Audiosprache und Teletextsprache im Menü “Sprache” zeigen Sie eine Liste der vom aktuellen Sender unterstützten Sprachen an, und die aktuelle Auswahl wird hervorgehoben. Wenn Sie die Spracheinstellung ändern, gilt die neue Auswahl nur für den aktuellen Sender. Die geänderte Einstellung hat keinen Einfluss auf die Einstellung der Untertitelsprache, Audiosprache und Teletext-Sprache im Menü „Voreinstellung“. „ Common Interface • Installieren der CI-Karte 1. Sie können das CI-CAM-Modul bei Ihrem nächsten Händler oder durch telefonische Bestellung erwerben. 2. Schieben Sie die CI-Karte in Richtung des Pfeils in das CAM-Modul ein, bis sie fest sitzt. 3. Schieben Sie das CAM-Modul mit installierter CI-Karte in den CI-Steckplatz. N Schieben Sie das CAM-Modul parallel zum Steckplatz in Pfeilrichtung bis zum Anschlag. 4. Kontrollieren Sie, ob Sie ein Bild sehen oder ein gestörtes Signal. • CI(CI+)-Menü Hiermit kann der Benutzer seine Auswahl in dem vom CAM-Modul bereitgestellten Menü treffen. Wählen Sie das CI(CI+)-Menü ausgehend vom Menü PC-Karte. • Anwendungsinformationen Die folgenden Erklärungen gelten für den Fall, dass ein CAM-Modul in den CISteckplatz eingesetzt ist und angezeigt wird. In den Anwendungsinformationen wird die CI-Karte beschrieben. Sie können das CAMModul unabhängig davon anschließen, ob das Fernsehgerät angeschaltet ist oder nicht. N CI(CI+)-Karten werden in einigen Ländern, Regionen und von manchen Sendern nicht unterstützt. Fragen Sie diesbezüglich Ihren offiziellen Händler. Fortsetzung... Einstellungen Plug & Play Menüsprache : Deutsch ► Zeit Sendungsoptionen Sicherheit Netzwerk Allgemein BN68-02333J-GER.indb 23 10/20/2009 4:37:58 PMDeutsch - 24 ❑ Sicherheit N Bei manchen Modellen müssen Sie für Plug & Play die PIN-Nummer eingeben. „ Kindersicherung → Aus / Ein Mit dieser Funktion können Sie nicht autorisierte Benutzer, z. B. Kinder, daran hindern, ungeeignete Programme anzuschauen, indem das Bild blockiert und der Ton stummgeschaltet wird. N Ehe das Einstellungsfenster angezeigt wird, wird das Fenster zur. Eingabe der PIN geöffnet. Geben Sie nun Ihre vierstellige PIN ein. N Der Standard-PIN-Code eines neuen Fernsehgeräts lautet 0000. Sie können die PIN ändern, indem Sie im Menü den Befehl PIN ändern wählen. N Sie können einige der Kanäle in der Senderliste sperren. (finden Sie auf Seite 14) N Die Kindersicherung ist nur im TV-Modus verfügbar. „ Sicherungsstufe Mit dieser Funktion können Sie nicht autorisierte Benutzer, z. B. Kinder, daran hindern, ungeeignete Programme anzuschauen. Hierzu verwenden Sie eine benutzerdefinierte vierstellige PIN. N Die angezeigte Sicherungsstufe hängt vom jeweiligen Land ab. N Ehe das Einstellungsfenster angezeigt wird, wird das Fenster zur Eingabe der PIN geöffnet. Geben Sie nun Ihre vierstellige PIN ein. N Der Standard-PIN-Code eines neuen Fernsehgeräts lautet ‘0-0-0-0’. Sie können die PIN ändern, indem Sie im Menü den Befehl PIN ändern wählen. N Nachdem die Sicherungsstufe eingestellt ist, wird das Symbol ““\”” angezeigt. N Alle zul. / Keine zul. : Drücken Sie diese Taste, um alle Altersbeschränkungen zu aktivieren oder freizugeben. „ PIN ändern Sie können Ihre zum Einrichten des Fernsehgeräts benötigte persönliche Kennnummer ändern. N Ehe das Einstellungsfenster angezeigt wird, wird das Fenster zur Eingabe der PIN geöffnet. Geben Sie nun Ihre vierstellige PIN ein. (Die Standard-PIN lautet ‘0-0-0-0’.) N Wenn Sie den PIN-Code vergessen haben, drücken Sie die Fernbedienungstasten in der angegebenen Reihenfolge, um die PIN auf ‘0-0-0-0’ zurückzusetzen : POWER (Aus), M MUTE, 8, 2, 4, POWER (Ein). ❑ Allgemein „ Spielemodus → Aus / Ein Wenn Sie eine Spielekonsole wie PlayStation TM oder Xbox TM anschließen, können Sie durch Auswählen des Spielemodus ein realistischeres Spielerlebnis genießen. • Bei aktiviertem Spielemodus - Der Bildmodus wird automatisch auf Standard eingestellt und kann nicht geändert werden. - Der Tonmodus wird automatisch als benutzerdefiniert eingestellt und kann nicht geändert werden. Passen Sie den Ton unter Verwendung des Equalizers an. - Die Reset-Funktion im Audiomenü ist aktiviert. Mit Hilfe der Reset-Funktion können die Einstellungen für den Equalizer auf die Werkseinstellungen zurückgesetzt werden. N Spielemodus ist im normalen TV-Modus nicht verfügbar, ode der Spielemodus ist deaktiviert. N Kontrollieren Sie, ob der Spielemodus noch aktiviert ist, wenn die Bildqualität bei angeschlossenem externem Gerät schlecht ist. N Wenn Sie im Spielemodus das Fernsehmenü anzeigen, zittert das Bild leicht. N Das Zeichen wird auf dem Bildschirm angezeigt. Dies bedeutet, dass der Spielemodus für die gewählte Signalquelle angeschaltet ist. N Diese Funktion unterstützt nur den Spielemodus. N Der Spielemodus ist im PC-Modus nicht verfügbar. „ BD Wise → Aus / Ein BD Wise ist eine Funktion, mit der Sie automatisch für alle angeschlossenen Geräte von Samsung, die BD Wise unterstützen, den optimalen Zustand einstellen können. N Diese Funktion ist nur aktiv, wenn ein externes Gerät über HDMI mit dem TV verbunden ist. N Wenn BD Wise aktiviert ist (Ein), wird der Bildmodus automatisch an die jeweiligen Bedingungen angepasst. „ Energiesparmod. → Aus / Gering / Mittel / Hoch / Bild aus Mit dieser Funktion stellen Sie die Helligkeit des Fernsehgeräts ein, um den Stromverbrauch zu senken. Wenn Sie nachts fernsehen, stellen Sie Energiesparmod. auf Hoch ein, um sowohl die Augenermüdung als auch den Stromverbrauch zu senken. Wenn Sie Bild aus wählen, wird der Bildschirm abgeschaltet und Sie können nur noch den Ton hören. Drücken Sie eine beliebige Taste, um Bild aus zu beenden. N Im Menü Extras wird die Funktion Bild aus nicht unterstützt. T Drücken Sie die Taste TOOLS, um das Menü Extras anzuzeigen. Sie können zudem die Energiesparoption durch Auswahl von Extras → Energiesparmod. anpassen. BN68-02333J-GER.indb 24 10/20/2009 4:37:58 PMDeutsch - 25 „ Menütransparenz Sie können die Transparenz des Bildschirmmenüs einstellen. • Hell : Hiermit stellen Sie normale Transparenz ein. • Dunkel : Hiermit stellen Sie das Bildschirmmenü als undurchsichtig ein. „ Melodie → Aus / Gering / Mittel / Hoch Sie können die Melodie auswählen, die beim Einund Ausschalten des Fernsehers abgespielt wird. N Die Melodie wird nicht abgespielt. - Das Fernsehgerät gibt keinen Ton aus, weil die M MUTE-Taste gedrückt wurde. - Das Fernsehgerät gibt keinen – Ton aus, weil die Lautstärketaste gedrückt wurde. - Das Fernsehgerät wurde vom Sleep-Timer ausgeschaltet. „ Lichteffekt (nur PS58B680/PS63B680) Sie können die blaue LED an der Vorderseite des Fernsehgeräts je nach Wunsch anbzw. abschalten. Schalten Sie sie ab, wenn Sie Energie sparen möchten oder die LED Ihre Augen stört. • Aus : Die blaue LED ist immer aus. • Standby an : Die blaue LED leuchtet im Standby-Modus und wird beim Anschalten des Fernsehgeräts ausgeschaltet. • TV Modus An : Die blaue LED leuchtet bei angeschaltetem Fernsehgerät und wird beim Ausschalten abgeschaltet. • Immer : Die blaue LED leuchtet immer. N Deaktivieren (Aus) Sie den Lichteffekt, um den Stromverbrauch zu reduzieren. Verwenden der Bild-in-Bild-Funktion (PIP) Sie können innerhalb des Hauptbildes (Fernsehsendung oder Video) ein PIP-Bild einblenden. Dadurch können Sie gleichzeitig eine Fernsehsendung oder ein Video von einem angeschlossenen Gerät im Auge behalten. N Möglicherweise wirkt das Bild im PIP-Fenster leicht unnatürlich, wenn Sie den Hauptbildschirm zum Anzeigen von Spielen oder für Karaoke verwenden. T Drücken Sie die Taste TOOLS um das Menü Extras anzuzeigen. Sie können die PIP-Einstellungen durch Auswahl von Extras → PIP anpassen. ❑ PIP → Aus / Ein Sie können die PIP-Funktion aktivieren oder deaktivieren. Hauptbild Nebenbild Komp. HDMI1, HDMI2/DVI, HDMI3, HDMI4 PC TV „ Size → / / / Sie können die Größe für das PIP-Bild auswählen. N Wenn sich das Hauptbild im HDMI-Modus befindet, ist Größe nicht verfügbar. „ Position → / / / Sie können die Position für das PIP-Bild auswählen. N Im Modus Doppel ( , ) kann Position nicht gewählt werden. „ Sender Sie können einen Sender für das PIP-Bild auswählen. PIP PIP : Aus ► Größe : Position : Sender : ATV 1 E Eingabe R Zurück Allgemein Spielemodus : Aus BD Wise : Aus Energiesparmod : Aus Menütransparenz : Hell Melodie : Mittel PIP ► U Navig. E Eingabe R Zurück BN68-02333J-GER.indb 25 10/20/2009 4:37:59 PMDeutsch - 26 Unterstütztes Programm ❑ Rechtliche Hinweise Lesen Sie die rechtlichen Hinweise und den allgemeinen Haftungsausschluss hinsichtlich der Inhalte und Dienste Dritter. „ Haftungsausschluss Diese rechtlichen Hinweise gelten für Internet@TV. N Der Haftungsausschluss kann sich je nach Land unterscheiden. N Mit den Tasten ◄ oder ► können Sie zur vorigen oder zur nächsten Seite wechseln. ❑ Produktdemo Mit dieser Produktdemo erhalten Sie Informationen zu den wichtigsten Funktionen dieses Fernsehgeräts. N Zeigt detaillierte Informationen an, wenn Sie das gewünschte Element wählen. ❑ Eigendiagnose „ Bildtest If Bei schlechter Bildqualität führen Sie einen Bildtest durch. Prüfen Sie das bunte Testbild auf dem Bildschirm um festzustellen, ob das Problem weiterhin besteht. N Die Meldung Besteht das Problem für dieses Bild weiterhin? wird angezeigt. Wenn das Testbild nicht angezeigt wird oder wenn es verrauscht ist, wählen Sie Ja. Wenn das Testbild fehlerlos angezeigt wird, wählen Sie Nein. • Ja : Möglicherweise liegt ein Problem mit dem Fernsehgerät vor. Hilfe erhalten Sie beim Callcenter von Samsung. • Nein : Möglicherweise liegt ein Problem mit einem externen Gerät vor. Bitte überprüfen Sie sämtliche Anschlüsse noch einmal. Wenn das Problem weiterhin besteht, schlagen Sie im Benutzerhandbuch für das externe Gerät nach. „ Audiotest Bei schlechter Tonqualität führen Sie einen Audiotest durch. Sie können die Tonqualität kontrollieren, indem Sie über den Fernseher eine im Gerät gespeicherte Melodie abspielen. N Die Meldung Besteht das Problem für diesen Audiotest weiterhin? wird angezeigt. Wenn Sie den Ton beim Test nur durch einen Lautsprecher oder gar nicht hören, wählen Sie Ja. Wenn Sie den Ton über die Lautsprecher hören können, wählen Sie Nein. • Ja : Möglicherweise liegt ein Problem mit dem Fernsehgerät vor. Hilfe erhalten Sie beim Callcenter von Samsung. • Nein : Möglicherweise liegt ein Problem mit einem externen Gerät vor. Bitte überprüfen Sie sämtliche Anschlüsse noch einmal. Wenn das Problem weiterhin besteht, schlagen Sie im Benutzerhandbuch für das externe Gerät nach. N Wenn die Fernsehlautsprecher keinen Ton ausgeben, müssen Sie vor dem Audiotest sicherstellen, dass Lautsprecher auswählen im Audiomenü auf TV-Lautsprecher eingestellt ist. N Im Test ist auch dann eine Melodie zu hören, wenn Lautsprecher auswählen auf TV-Lautsprecher eingestellt ist, oder wenn der Ton mit der Taste M MUTE stumm geschaltet wurde. „ Signalinformation (nur Digitalkanäle) Sie können Ihre Antenne so einstellen, dass der Empfang der verfügbaren Digitalkanäle besser wird. N Wenn die Signalstärkeanzeige ein schwaches Signal anzeigt, verändern Sie die Position Ihre Antenne so, dass die Signalstärke zunimmt. Machen Sie dies solange, bis Sie die optimale Ausrichtung mit dem stärksten Signal gefunden haben. Unterstützung / Eingang BN68-02333J-GER.indb 26 10/20/2009 4:37:59 PMDeutsch - 27 Quellen / Name bearbeiten ❑ Quellen Hiermit wählen Sie das Fernsehgerät oder andere externe Signaleingänge wie z. B. DVD-Player oder Kabelbox/Satellitenreceiver (Set-Top-Box), die mit dem Fernsehgerät verbunden sind. Stellen Sie die gewünschte Signalquelle ein. „ TV, Ext.1, Ext.2, AV, Component, PC, HDMI1, HDMI2/DVI, HDMI3, HDMI4, USB. N Sie können nur solche externen Geräte wählen, die an das Fernsehgerät angeschlossen sind. Bei den Quellen werden die angeschlossenen Signalquellen hervorgehoben und am Anfang dargestellt. Nicht angeschlossene Signalquellen werden am Ende der Liste dargestellt. N Verwenden der Farbtasten auf der Fernbedienung in Verbindung mit der Kanalliste. - Aktualisieren : Aktualisieren der angeschlossenen externen Geräte. - T TOOLS (Extras) : Anzeigen der Menüs Name bearb. und Information. O Drücken Sie die Taste SOURCE auf der Fernbedienung, um eine externe Signalquelle anzuzeigen. ❑ Name bearb. Vergeben Sie Namen für die an die Eingangsbuchsen angeschlossenen Geräte, um die Auswahl der Signalquelle zu vereinfachen. „ VCR / DVD / Cable STB / Satellite STB / PVR STB / AV Receiver / Game / Camcorder / PC / DVI / DVI PC / TV / IPTV / Blu- Ray / HD DVD / DMA N Wenn ein PC mit einer Auflösung von 1920 x 1080 bei 60 Hz an den Anschluss HDMI IN 2 angeschlossen wird, sollten Sie in Name bearb. im Modus Eingang den HDMI2/DVI Modus auf PC festlegen. ❑ Software-Update Damit Ihr Produkt stets mit den neuesten Funktionen des Digitalfernsehens ausgerüstet ist, werden zusammen mit dem normalen TV-Signal regelmäßig Softwareaktualisierungen übertragen. Das Gerät erkennt diese Signale automatisch und zeigt einen Hinweis auf die Softwareaktualisierung an. Sie haben die Wahl, ob die Aktualisierung installiert werden soll. „ PER USB Legen Sie ein USB-Laufwerk mit dem gespeicherten Firmwareupgrade in das Fernsehgerät ein. Achten Sie beim Einspielen des Upgrades darauf, die Stromversorgung nicht zu unterbrechen und das USBLaufwerk nicht zu entfernen. Das Fernsehgerät wird automatisch ab- und wieder angeschaltet, sobald das Firmwareupgrade abgeschlossen ist. Kontrollieren Sie die Firmwareversion, wenn das Upgrade abgeschlossen ist. Nachdem die Software aktualisiert wurde, sind die Videound Audioeinstellungen wieder auf die werkseitigen Standardwerte zurückgesetzt. „ PER Channel Aktualisierung der Software über das Sendesignal. N Wenn diese Funktion während der Zeit für Softwareübertragungen gewählt wird, sucht sie nach verfügbarer Software und lädt sie herunter. N Die zum Herunterladen der Software erforderliche Zeit hängt von der Signalqualität ab. „ Update im Standby Um die Softwareaktualisierung mit eingeschalteter Stromversorgung fortzusetzen, wählen Sie mit den Tasten ▲ oder ▼ Ein aus. 45 Minuten nach Beginn des Standbymodus wird die manuelle Aktualisierung automatisch ausgeführt. Da intern die Stromversorgung für das Gerät eingeschaltet ist, kann der Bildschirm leicht beleuchtet sein. Dieser Zustand kann etwas mehr als eine Stunde andauern, bis die Softwareaktualisierung abgeschlossen ist. „ Alternative Software Ersetzten Sie die aktuelle Software durch eine Alternative. N Wenn die Software geändert wurde, wird die vorhandene Software angezeigt. N Sie können die aktuelle Software durch die alternative Software ersetzen, indem Sie Alternative Software wählen. ❑ HD-AnschlussplanDie kurze Einführung “So erzielen Sie mit Ihrem HD-Fernsehgerät optimale Leistung” wird angezeigt. Wir bieten Anschlüsse für HD-Geräte an. N Mit den Tasten ◄ oder ► können Sie zur vorigen oder zur nächsten Seite wechseln. ❑ Samsung kontaktieren Wenden Sie sich an das Callcenter von Samsung oder suchen Sie auf der Website nach Informationen für das Gerät. Seitenverkleidung des Fernsehgeräts USB-Laufwerk Quellen Name bearb. Eingang BN68-02333J-GER.indb 27 10/20/2009 4:37:59 PMDeutsch - 28 Netzwerks Netzwerkverbindung Die Netzwerkverbindung wird für DLNA, Content Library-Internetdownload, Internet@TV und Home-Network-Center benötigt. ❑ Netzwerkverbindung – Kabel „ LAN-Verbindung für eine DHCP-Umgebung Die Verfahren zum Einrichten des Netzwerks mithilfe von (DHCP) Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol werden nachfolgend beschrieben. Da eine IP-Adresse sowie Teilnetzmaske, Gateway und DNS automatisch zugeordnet werden, wenn Sie DHCP wählen, müssen Sie diese Parameter nicht von Hand eingeben. 1. Verbinden Sie den LAN-Anschluss auf der Rückseite des Fernsehgeräts über ein LAN-Kabel mit dem externen Modem. 2. Verbinden Sie den LAN-Anschluss an der Wand über ein Modemkabel mit dem externen Modem. N Die Anschlüsse (also Position und Art des Anschlusses) des externen Geräts können sich je nach Hersteller unterscheiden. N Wenn die Zuordnung der IP-Adresse durch den DHCP-Server fehlschlägt, müssen Sie das externe Modem aus und nach frühestens 10 Sekunden wieder anschalten. Wiederholen Sie den Versuch danach. N Informationen zur Verbindung zwischen dem externen Modem und dem Sharer (Router) finden Sie im Benutzerhandbuch des entsprechenden Geräts. N Sie können das Fernsehgerät direkt an das LAN anschließen, ohne vorher einen Sharer (Router) dazwischen zu schalten. N Sie können kein ADSL-Modem für manuelle Verbindungen verwenden, da dieses DHCP nicht unterstützt. Sie müssen ein ADSL-Modem für automatische Verbindungen verwenden. Sie können den LAN-Anschluss und das Fernsehgerät je nach Netzwerkstatus direkt anschließen. Rückseite des Fernsehgeräts LAN-Kabel LAN-Anschluss an der Wand Sie können die Netzwerkverbindung auch über einen Sharer (Router) herstellen. Rückseite des Fernsehgeräts Modemanschluss an der Wand Externes Modem (ADSL/ VDSL/ Kabelfernsehen) IP-Sharer LAN-Kabel Modem-Kabel LAN-Kabel Rückseite des Fernsehgeräts Modemanschluss an der Wand 2 Modem-Kabel Externes Modem (ADSL/ VDSL/Kabelfernsehen) 1 LAN-Kabel BN68-02333J-GER.indb 28 10/20/2009 4:38:03 PMDeutsch - 29 „ LAN-Verbindung für eine Umgebung mit statischen IP-Adressen Die Verfahren zum Einrichten des Netzwerks mithilfe einer statischen IP-Adresse werden nachfolgend beschrieben. Sie müssen die Ihnen von Ihrem Internet-Provider genannte IP-Adresse, Teilnetzmaske, Gateway und DNS manuell eingeben. 1. Verbinden Sie den LAN-Anschluss auf der Rückseite des Fernsehgeräts über ein LAN-Kabel mit dem LAN-Anschluss in der Wand. N Die Anschlüsse (also Position und Art des Anschlusses) des externen Geräts können sich je nach Hersteller unterscheiden. N Wenn Sie eine statische IP-Adresse verwenden, teilt Ihr Internet-Provider Ihnen die IPAdresse, Teilnetzmaske, Gateway und DNS mit. Sie müssen diese Werte eingeben, um die Netzwerkeinstellungen abzuschließen. Falls Sie die Werte nicht kennen, fragen Sie Ihren Netzwerkadministrator. N Informationen zum Konfigurieren und Verbinden mit dem Sharer (Router) finden Sie im Benutzerhandbuch des entsprechenden Geräts. N Sie können das Fernsehgerät direkt an das LAN anschließen, ohne vorher einen Sharer dazwischen zu schalten. N Wenn Sie einen IP-Sharer (IP-Router) verwenden, der DHCP unterstützt, können Sie das Gerät für DHCP oder statische IP einrichten. N Informationen über die Verfahren zum Einrichten mit einer statischen IP-Adresse erfragen Sie bei Ihrem Internet Service Provider. ❑ Netzwerkverbindung – Drahtlos Sie können die Verbindung zum drahtlosen Netzwerk auch über einen drahtlosen IPSharer herstellen. 1. Schließen Sie den “Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter” an den USB1(HDD)- oder den USB2-Anschluss des Fernsehgeräts an. N Sie müssen den Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter verwenden, wenn Sie mit einem Drahtlosnetzwerk arbeiten möchten. N Der WLAN-Adapter von Samsung ist gesondert erhältlich. Der WLAN-Adapter WIS09ABGN wird bei Spezialanbietern, Internetshops und bei Samsungparts.com angeboten. N Wenn Sie mit einem Drahtlosnetzwerk arbeiten möchten, müssen Sie Ihr Fernsehgerät an einen drahtlosen IP-Sharer anschließen. N Wenn der drahtlose IP-Sharer DHCP unterstützt, kann Ihr Fernsehgerät über DHCP oder über eine statische IP-Adresse mit dem Drahtlosnetzwerk verbunden werden. N Der WLAN-Adapter von Samsung unterstützt IEEE 802.11A, IEEE 802.11B, IEEE 802.11G, IEEE 802.11N. Wenn Sie DLNA-Video über die IEEE 802.11B/G-Verbindung anzeigen, wird das Videobild möglicherweise nicht ohne Unterbrechungen angezeigt. N Wenn Ihr IP-Sharer eine deaktivierbare Funktion anbietet, um einen Verbindungstest mittels Ping durchzuführen, so aktivieren Sie diese Funktion. N Wählen Sie einen zurzeit unbenutzten Kanal für den drahtlosen IP-Sharer. Wenn der für den drahtlosen IP-Sharer eingestellte Kanal von einem anderen Gerät in der Nähe belegt ist, führt dies zu Störungen und die Datenübertragung scheitert. Fortsetzung... Rückseite des Fernsehgeräts 1 LAN-Kabel LAN-Anschluss an der Wand Rückseite des Fernsehgeräts LAN-Kabel IP-Sharer LAN-Kabel LAN-Anschluss an der Wand Sie können die Netzwerkverbindung auch über einen Sharer (Router) herstellen. Seitenverkleidung des Fernsehgeräts WLAN-Adapter von Samsung LAN-Kabel Drahtloser IP-Sharer LAN-Anschluss an der Wand BN68-02333J-GER.indb 29 10/20/2009 4:38:07 PMDeutsch - 30 N Wenn Sie ein anderes Sicherheitssystem als eines der nachfolgend angeführten verwenden, kann es nicht mit dem Fernsehgerät zusammenarbeiten. - Es werden nur folgende Sicherheitsschlüssel für den Zugangspunkt (drahtloser IP-Sharer) unterstützt. 1) Authentifizierungsmodus : OPEN, SHARED, WPAPSK, WPA2PSK 2) Verschlüsselungsmethode : WEP, TKIP, AES - Es werden nur folgende Sicherheitsschlüssel für den Ad-Hoc-Modus unterstützt. 1) Authentifizierungsmodus : SHARED, WPANONE 2) Verschlüsselungsmethode : WEP, TKIP, AES N Wenn Ihr Zugangspunkt WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) unterstützt, können Sie die Netzwerkverbindung mittels PBC (Push Button Configuration) oder PIN (Personal Identification Number) herstellen. WPS konfiguriert den SSID- und WPA-Schlüssel in jedem Modus automatisch. N Wenn das Gerät nicht zertifiziert ist, kann es die Verbindung zum Fernseher möglicherweise nicht über den WLAN-Adapter von Samsung herstellen. Netzwerk einrichten ❑ Netzwerktyp Wählen Sie den Kabelzugang oder den Funkzugang als Methode für die Netzwerkverbindung. N Dieses Menü wird nur aktiviert, wenn der Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter angeschlossen ist. • Cable : Anschließen mit einem Kabel. • Drahtlos : Drahtlose Verbindung. ❑ Netzwerk einrichten „ Kabelnetzwerk einrichten (wenn Netzwerktyp auf Kabel eingestellt ist) N Überprüfen Sie, ob das Netzwerkkabel angeschlossen ist. • IP-Konfiguration → Auto / Manuell • Network Test : Sie können den Netzwerkverbindungsstatus nach dem Einrichten des Netzwerks testen bzw. bestätigen. N Verbindung zum drahtgebundenen Netzwerk nicht möglich Wenn Ihr Internet- Provider die MAC-Adresse des Geräts registriert hat, mit dem die erste Internetverbindung hergestellt wurde und diese MAC-Adresse bei jeder Verbindung überprüft, besteht die Möglichkeit, dass Ihr Fernsehgerät keine Internetverbindung herstellen kann, da dessen MAC-Adresse von der des Geräts abweicht. Fragen Sie in diesem Fall Ihren Internetprovider, auf welche Weise die Verbindung durch andere Geräte als Ihren PC (z. B. Ihr Fernsehgerät) hergestellt werden kann. Wenn Ihr Internet-Provider eine Kennung oder ein Kennwort erfordert, um die Verbindung zum Internet (Netzwerk) herzustellen, kann Ihr Fernsehgerät möglicherweise keine Internetverbindung aufbauen. In diesem Fall müssen Sie Ihre Kennung oder Ihr Kennwort eingeben, wenn die Verbindung mit dem Internet über den Internet-Sharer (Router) hergestellt wird. Die Internetverbindung kann auch aufgrund von Problemen mit der Firewall fehlschlagen. Setzen Sie sich in diesem Fall mit Ihrem Internetprovider in Verbindung. Wenn Sie selbst dann noch keine Internetverbindung aufbauen können, wenn Sie die Anweisungen Ihres Internet-Providers eingehalten haben, setzen Sie sich mit Samsung Electronics in Verbindung. „ Kabelnetzwerk einrichten - Auto Wenn Sie das Netzwerkkabel anschließen und DHCP wird unterstützt, werden die Einstellungen für das Internetprotokoll (IP) automatisch konfiguriert. Überprüfen Sie, ob das Netzwerkkabel angeschlossen ist. 1. Stellen Sie Netzwerktyp auf Kabel. 2. Wählen Sie Kabelnetzwerk einrichten. 3. Stellen Sie IP-Konfiguration auf Auto. N Das Internetprotokoll wird automatisch eingestellt. 4. Wählen Sie Netzwerktest, um die Netzwerkverbindung zu überprüfen. „ Kabelnetzwerk einrichten - Manuell Wenn Sie das Fernsehgerät mittels einer statischen IP-Adresse mit dem LAN verbinden möchten, müssen Sie das Internetprotokoll (IP) konfigurieren. Überprüfen Sie, ob das Netzwerkkabel angeschlossen ist. N Überprüfen Sie, ob das Netzwerkkabel angeschlossen ist. (Siehe Seite 28) 1. Stellen Sie Netzwerktyp auf Kabel. 2. Wählen Sie Kabelnetz. 3. Stellen Sie IP-Konfiguration auf Manuell ein. 4. Geben Sie die Parameter für IP-Adresse, Teilnetzmaske, Gateway und DNS-Server ein. N Drücken Sie die Zifferntasten auf der Fernbedienung, wenn Sie das Netzwerk manuell einstellen. 5. Wählen Sie Netzwerktest, um die Netzwerkverbindung zu überprüfen. Einstellungen Sendungsoptionen Sicherheit Netzwerk ► Allgemein Fortsetzung... BN68-02333J-GER.indb 30 10/20/2009 4:38:08 PMDeutsch - 31 „ Drahtlos-Netzwerk einrichten (wenn Netzwerktyp auf Drahtlos eingestellt ist) N Dieses Menü wird nur aktiviert, wenn der WLAN-Adapter von Samsung angeschlossen ist. (Siehe Seite 29) - IP-Konfiguration → Auto / Manuell - Network Test : Sie können den Netzwerkverbindungsstatus nach dem Einrichten des Netzwerks testen bzw. bestätigen. N Keine Verbindung mit einem Zugangspunkt Möglicherweise kann Ihr Fernsehgerät keinen Zugangspunkt finden, der mit privater SSID konfiguriert ist. Ändern Sie in diesem Fall die Einstellungen für den Zugangspunkt, und versuchen Sie es erneut. Wenn Ihr Internet-Provider die MAC-Adresse des Geräts registriert hat, mit dem die erste Internetverbindung hergestellt wurde und diese MAC-Adresse bei jeder Verbindung überprüft, besteht die Möglichkeit, dass Ihr Fernsehgerät keine Internetverbindung herstellen kann, da dessen MAC-Adresse von der des Geräts abweicht. Fragen Sie in diesem Fall Ihren Internetprovider, auf welche Weise die Verbindung durch andere Geräte als Ihren PC (z. B. Ihr Fernsehgerät) hergestellt werden kann. Wenn Sie selbst dann noch keine Internetverbindung aufbauen können, wenn Sie die Anweisungen Ihres Internet-Providers eingehalten haben, setzen Sie sich unter 1-800- SAMSUNG mit Samsung Electronics in Verbindung. • Wählen Sie ein Netzwerk - Zugangspunkt : Sie können wählen, welcher IP-Sharer verwendet werden soll, wenn Sie ein Drahtlosnetzwerk nutzen. N Wenn in der Liste der Zugangspunkte kein drahtloser Zugangspunkt enthalten ist, drücken Sie die rote Taste. N Sobald die Verbindung aufgebaut ist, wird automatisch wieder das Fenster angezeigt. N Sie haben einen Zugangspunkt mit Authentifizierung gewählt : Der Eingabebildschirm für den Sicherheitsschlüssel wird geöffnet. Geben Sie den Sicherheitsschlüssel ein und drücken Sie die blaue Taste auf der Fernbedienung. N Wenn Sie als Sicherheitsverschlüsselung WEP verwenden, können Sie bei der Eingabe des Sicherheitsschlüssels die Zahlen von 0 bis 9 und die Buchstaben von A bis F verwenden. Taste Vorgang ▲/▼/◄/► Verschiebt die Markierung nach Oben / Unten / Links / Rechts ENTER Eingabe des gewählten Zeichens. Rote Taste Wechseln zwischen Groß- und Kleinschreibung. Grüne Taste Löschen des gerade eingegebenen Zeichens. Blaue Taste Drücken Sie diese Taste, um die Eingabe des Sicherheitsschlüssels zu beenden. ❑ Verbinden mit WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) „ Wenn der Sicherheitsschlüssel bereits eingestellt ist : Wählen Sie in der Liste der Zugangspunkte WPS. N Sie haben die Wahl zwischen PBC, PIN, Schlüssel. • Anschließen mit PBC : Wählen Sie eine PBC (Push Button Configuration). Drücken Sie innerhalb von 2 Minuten die PBC-Taste am Zugangspunkt und warten Sie bis die Verbindung hergestellt ist. • Anschließen mit PIN : Wählen Sie eine PIN (Persönliche Identifikationsnummer). N Es wird eine Meldung mit dem PIN-Code angezeigt. Geben Sie am Zugangspunkt innerhalb von 2 Minuten den PIN-Code ein. Wählen Sie OK und warten Sie auf den Verbindungsaufbau. N Wiederholen Sie den Versuch, wenn die Verbindung nicht hergestellt wird. N Wenn die Netzwerkverbindung trotz des neuen Versuchs nicht aufgebaut wird, setzen Sie den Zugangspunkt zurück. Schlagen Sie im Handbuch des jeweiligen Zugangspunkts nach. • Vwerbinden mit Security Key : Wenn Sie Security Key auswählen, wird das Eingabefenster angezeigt. Geben Sie den Sicherheitsschlüssel ein, und drücken Sie die blaue Taste. N Wiederholen Sie den Versuch, wenn die Verbindung nicht hergestellt wird. Drahtlos-Netzwerk einrichten SicherSchl. n Navig. Zahl EEingabe R Zurück _ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 0~9 Zahl Klein Löschen Fertig * * Drahtlos-Netzwerk einrichten Wählen Sie ein Netzwerk n Navig. EEingabe R Zurück Suchlauf Ad-hoc AP_1 AP_2 AP_3 AP_4 PBC PIN SicherSchl. 3/9 Drücken Sie die PBC-Taste am Zugangspunkt. Name des Zugangspunkts : AP_3 Abbrechen Drücken Sie auf OK, nachdem Sie beim Einrichten des Zugangspunkts die PIN-Nummer des Fernsehers eingegeben haben. Name des Zugangspunkts : AP_3 PIN-Nummer : 123 45678 OK Abbrechen Drahtlos-Netzwerk einrichten SicherSchl. n Navig. Zahl EEingabe R Zurück _ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 0~9 Zahl Klein Löschen Fertig BN68-02333J-GER.indb 31 10/20/2009 4:38:11 PMDeutsch - 32 „ Wenn der Sicherheitsschlüssel nicht eingestellt ist : Wenn die Sicherheitseinstellung des Zugangspunkts, der WPS unterstützt, NONE (KEIN) lautet, können Sie PBC, PIN, None Security (Keine Sicherheit) wählen. Mit None Security (Keine Sicherheit) können Sie die Verbindung zum Zugangspunkt direkt und ohne die WPC-Funktion herstellen. N Der Prozess bei PBC und PIN entspricht dem oben beschriebenen. Siehe Wenn der Security Key bereits eingestellt ist. N Wiederholen Sie den Versuch, wenn die Verbindung nicht hergestellt wird. „ Ad-hoc : Mit einem drahtlosen USB-Adapter können Sie die Verbindung zu einem Mobilgerät mit Hilfe eines Peer-to-Peer-Netzwerks auch ohne Zugriffspunkt herstellen. • So stellen Sie eine Verbindung mit einem neuen Ad-hoc-Netzwerk her 1. Wählen Sie Wählen Sie ein Netzwerk, um die Geräteliste zu öffnen. 2. In der Geräteliste drücken Sie die blaue Taste auf der Fernbedienung, oder Sie wählen Ad-hoc. N Die Meldung Möglicherweise ist das vorhandene Netzwerk funktional eingeschränkt. Möchten Sie die Netzwerkverbindung wechseln? wird angezeigt. 3. Geben Sie den generierten Namen des Netzwerks (SSID) und den Schlüssel in das Gerät ein, mit dem Sie sich verbinden möchten. • So stellen Sie eine Verbindung mit einem vorhandenen Ad-hoc-Gerät her 1. Wählen Sie Wählen Sie ein Netzwerk, um die Geräteliste zu öffnen. 2. Wählen Sie eine Gerät aus der Geräteliste. 3. Wenn ein Sicherheitsschlüssel erforderlich ist, geben Sie diesen erneut ein. N Wenn das Netzwerk nicht fehlerfrei arbeitet, kontrollieren Sie noch einmal den Network Name (SSID) und den Security Key. Wenn der Security Key falsch ist, kann dies die Ursache für die Störung sein. „ Drahtlos-Netzwerk einrichten - Auto Wenn Sie eine Verbindung zu einem Zugangspunkt herstellen möchten, muss dieser DHCP unterstützen. Nur Geräte, die den Adhoc- Modus unterstützen, können ohne DHCP angeschlossen werden. 1. Stellen Sie Netzwerktyp auf Drahtlos. 2. Wählen Sie Drahtlos-Netzwerk einrichten. 3. Stellen Sie IP-Konfiguration auf Auto. N Das Internetprotokoll wird automatisch eingestellt. 4. Wählen Sie mit Wählen Sie ein Netzwerk ein Netzwerk aus. 5. Wählen Sie Netzwerktest, um die Netzwerkverbindung zu überprüfen. „ Drahtlos-Netzwerk einrichten - Manuell Wenn Sie die Netzwerkverbindung mittels einer statischen IP-Adresse herstellen möchten, müssen Sie das Internetprotokoll (IP) konfigurieren. (Siehe Seite 29) N Detailliertere Informationen zu statischen IP-Adressen erhalten Sie im Benutzerhandbuch des drahtlosen IP-Sharers. 1. Stellen Sie Netzwerktyp auf Drahtlos. 2. Wählen Sie Drahtlos-Netzwerk einrichten. 3. Stellen Sie IP-Konfiguration auf Manuell ein. 4. Geben Sie die Parameter für IP-Adresse, Teilnetzmaske, Gateway und DNS-Server ein. N Drücken Sie die Zifferntasten auf der Fernbedienung, wenn Sie das Netzwerk manuell einstellen. 5. Wählen Sie über “Select Access Point (Zugangspunkt wählen)” einen Zugangspunkt. 6. Wählen Sie Netzwerktest, um die Netzwerkverbindung zu überprüfen. * * Drahtlos-Netzwerk einrichten Wählen Sie ein Netzwerk n Navig. EEingabe R Zurück Suchlauf Ad-hoc AP_1 AP_2 AP_3 AP_4 PBC PIN SicherSchl. 3/9 Möglicherweise ist das vorhandene Netzwerk funktional eingeschränkt. Möchten Sie die Netzwerkverbindung wechseln? Ja Nein BN68-02333J-GER.indb 32 10/20/2009 4:38:11 PMDeutsch - 33 Anschließen eines USB-Geräts 1. Drücken Sie zum Einschalten des Computers die POWER-Taste. 2. Schließen Sie ein USB-Gerät mit Foto- oder Musikdateien an die USB-Buchse seitlich am Fernsehgerät an. N Der USB 1(HDD)-Anschluss dient zugleich als Festplattenanschluss. Auf der Festplatte (Festplattenlaufwerk) werden digitale Daten gespeichert. N Media Play unterstützt ausschließlich USB-Massenspeichergeräte vom Typ MSC (Mass Storage Class). MSC-Geräte sind Massenspeicher zur Übertragung von Daten. Beispiele für MSC sind Thumb-Laufwerke und Flash Card-Lesegeräte sowie USB HDD (USB-HUB wird nicht unterstützt). N MTP (Media Transfer Protocol) wird nicht unterstützt. N Als Dateisystem wird ausschließlich FAT16/32 unterstützt. NTFS-Dateisysteme werden nicht unterstützt. N Schließen Sie eine USB-Festplatte an den dafür reservierten Anschluss an: USB1 (HDD). Wenn das angeschlossene Gerät allerdings eine hohe elektrische Leistung abfordert, kann USB1 (HDD) es möglicherweise nicht versorgen. N Einige Typen von USB-Digitalkameras und -Audiogeräten sind eventuell nicht mit diesem Fernseher kompatibel. N Schließen Sie diese direkt an den USB-Anschluss Ihres Fernsehgeräts an. Wenn Sie eine gesonderte Kabelverbindung verwenden, können USB-Kompatibilitätsprobleme auftreten. N Ehe Sie Ihr Gerät an das Fernsehgerät anschließen, sichern Sie Ihre Dateien, um eventuellem Datenverlust vorzubeugen. SAMSUNG haftet nicht für Verlust und Beschädigung von Daten. N Trennen Sie das USB-Gerät nicht, solange Daten geladen werden. N MSC unterstützt MP3- und JPEG-Dateien, wogegen PTP-Geräte nur JPEG-Dateien unterstützen. N Das sequentielle JPEG-Format wird unterstützt. N Je höher die Auflösung des Bilds, desto länger dauert es, um es auf dem Bildschirm anzuzeigen. N Die maximal unterstützte JPEG-Auflösung beträgt 15.360 x 8.640 Pixel. N Bei nicht unterstützten oder beschädigten Dateien wird die Meldung Nicht unterstütztes Dateiformat angezeigt. N Wenn mehr als 4000 Fotodateien (oder mehr als 3000 Musikdateien), vorhanden sind, werden die Dateien ab 4000 (3000) möglicherweise nicht in der Fotoliste (oder Musikliste) angezeigt. N MP3-Dateien mit DRM, die von einer nicht-lizenzfreien Site heruntergeladen worden sind, können nicht abgespielt werden. N DRM(Digital Rights Management) verhindert illegale Verwendung von digitalen Medien zum Schutz der Urheberrechte. N Wenn Sie zu einem anderen Foto wechseln, kann das Laden einige Sekunden dauern. In diesem Fall wird das Ladesymbol angezeigt. ❑ Verwenden der Fernbedienungstasten im Menü Media Play Taste Vorgang ▲/▼/◄/► Cursor bewegen und Elemente auswählen. ENTERE Markiertes Element auswählen. Abspielen oder Anhalten der Dateien während der Wiedergabe von Diashows oder Musikdateien. Abspielen oder Anhalten der Diashow oder Musikdatei. RETURN Zurück zum vorherigen Menü. TOOLS Ausführen verschiedener Funktionen aus dem Photound Musikmenü. Anhalten der aktuellen Präsentation oder Musikdatei. Wechsel zur vorherigen Gruppe/nächsten Gruppe. INFO Anzeigen von Dateiinformationen. MEDIA.P Starten oder beenden Sie den Media Play-Modus. DivX® Certified to play DivX® video, including premium content. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX,Inc. This is an official DivX Certified device that plays DivX video. Visit www.divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX video. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified® device must be registered in order to play DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) content. To generate the registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in the device setup menu. Go to vod.divx.com with this code to complete the registration process and learn more about DivX VOD. Media Play Seitenverkleidung des Fernsehgeräts USB-Laufwerk BN68-02333J-GER.indb 33 10/20/2009 4:38:12 PMDeutsch - 34 Verwenden der Medienwiedergabefunktion Mit dieser Funktion können Sie auf einem USB-Speichermedium (MSC) gespeicherte Fotound Musik anzeigen bzw. wiedergeben. Möglicherweise treten bei lizenzfreien Multimediadateien weniger Probleme auf. ❑ Starten der Medienwiedergabefunktion 1. Drücken Sie die MENU-Taste. Wählen Sie durch Drücken der Tasten ▲ oder ▼ die Option Anwendung, und drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE. 2. Wählen Sie durch Drücken der Tasten ▲ oder ▼ die Option Media Play (USB & DLNA), und drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE. O Drücken Sie die MEDIA.P-Taste auf der Fernbedienung, um das Media Play-Menü anzuzeigen. O Drücken Sie die SOURCE-Taste auf der Fernbedienung, und wählen Sie USB oder DLNA. Drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE. 3. Drücken Sie zuerst die rote Taste und dann ▲ oder ▼, um das entsprechende USBSpeichergerät auszuwählen (sofern es über einen Hub angeschlossen ist). Drücken Sie die ENTERE. N Diese Funktion hängt vom Typ des an das Fernsehgerät angeschlossenen USBGeräts ab. N Der Name des USB-Geräts wird links unten auf dem Bildschirm angezeigt. 4. Drücken Sie die Tasten ◄ oder ►, um ein Symbol (Photo, Music, Movie, Setup) auszuwählen, und drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE. N Um den Media Play-Modus zu beenden, drücken Sie auf der Fernbedienung die Taste MEDIA.P. N In diesem Modus können Sie zwar die Filme im Spiel wiedergeben, nicht aber das eigentliche Spiel spielen. ❑ Sicheres Entfernen von USB-Geräten Sie können das Gerät sicher vom Fernsehgerät entfernen. 1. Drücken Sie die Taste TOOLS im Dateilistenfenster von Media Play oder während eine Diashow bzw. Musikdatei wiedergegeben wird. 2. Wählen Sie durch Drücken der Tasten ▲ oder ▼ die Option Sicher entfernen, und drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE. 3. Entfernen Sie das USB-Gerät sicher vom Fernsehgerät. ❑ Bildschirmanzeige 1. Aktuelle Sortierreihenfolge Dieses Feld zeigt die aktuell eingestellte Sortierreihenfolge. 2. Ausgewählte Datei Die Sortiergruppe mit dem ausgewählten Foto wird hervorgehoben. 3 Anzeigegruppen : Die ausgewählte Datei ist hervorgehoben. 4. Aktuelles Gerät : Zeigt den Namen des aktuell ausgewählten Geräts an. 5. Informationen zur Auswahl von Elementen : Zeigt die Anzahl der Fotos an, die durch Drücken der gelben Taste ausgewählt wurden. N Rote Taste (Gerät) : Dient zur Auswahl eines angeschlossenen Geräts. 6. Aktuelles Gerät • Grüne Taste (Favoritenstatus) : Ändert den Favoritenstatus der gewählten Datei. Drücken Sie diese Taste so oft, bis der gewünschte Wert angezeigt wird. • Gelbe Taste (Auswählen) : Hiermit wählen Sie eine Datei aus der Dateiliste aus. Die ausgewählten Dateien werden mit dem Symbol c gekennzeichnet. Drücken Sie die gelbe Taste noch einmal, um die Auswahl einer Datei zu stornieren. • TOOLS (Extras) : Hiermit zeigen Sie die Optionsmenüs an. (Der Inhalt der Extras richtet sich nach dem jeweiligen Status.) • R RETURN (Zurück) : Zurück zum vorherigem Menü. Ordner Benutzerdef. Basisansicht Erstellung Farbe IMG_0335.JPG 4/6 IMG_0349. JPG ▶ ▶ Ordner 2 1 Ordner 1 1 Diashow Gruppe abspielen Informationen Sicher entfernen ../ Ordnername/ Photo USB „ Gerät Wählen T Extras R Ordner darüber Media Play Photo Music Setup PHOTO USB : USB 851.98MB/995.00MB Frei Movie USB „ Gerät RZurück Voreinstellung Basisansicht Erstellung Farbe Ordner Mrz.01.2009 IMG_0343 .JPG ▶ ▶ IMG_03496 .JPG IMG_03496 .JPG Mrz Apr Jun Nov IMG_0335.JPG 1/67 ▶ ▶ 2009 ◀ IMG_03496 .JPG 3 1 2 1Datei(en) gew. 4 5 6 Photo USB „ Gerät Favoriten-Einst. Wählen T Extras R Zurück c BN68-02333J-GER.indb 34 10/20/2009 4:38:20 PMDeutsch - 35 Sortieren der Foto- / Musik- / Filmliste „ Basisansicht Zeigt die Ordner auf dem USB-Speichergerät an. Wenn Sie einen Ordner auswählen und die Taste ENTERE drücken, werden nur die Filmdateien im gewählten Ordner angezeigt. N Bei Sortierung anhand der Basisansicht können Sie keine Favoritendateien festlegen. „ Ordner Sortieren der Dateien nach Ordnern. Wenn es auf dem USB-Speicher viele Ordner gibt, werden die Fotodateien nach Ordnern sortiert. Die Datei im Stammordner erscheint als erste und die anderen werden nach Namen sortiert angezeigt. „ Preference → ★ ★ ★ , ★ ★ ★ , ★ ★ ★ , ★ ★ ★ Hiermit werden die Dateien nach den Vorlieben (Favoriten) sortiert. N Ändern der Favoriteneinstellungen Markieren Sie das gewünschte Foto in der Fotoliste und drücken Sie dann so oft die grüne Taste, bis die gewünschte Einstellung angezeigt wird. N Die Sterne dienen nur zum Gruppieren. So hat zum Beispiel ein Eintrag mit 3 Sternen keinerlei Priorität vor dem Eintrag mit einem Stern. „ Zeitstrahl (Photo / Movie) Hiermit werden die Filmtitel nach Symbol/Nummer/Anfangsbuchstabe/Spezial sortiert. „ Titel (Music / Movie) Hiermit werden die Musikdateien nach Symbol/Nummer/Anfangsbuchstabe/Spezial sortiert, und die Musikdatei wird gezeigt. ❑ Photo „ Farbe → Rot / Gelb / Grün / Blau / Magenta / Schwarz / Grau / Jedes Alter Hiermit werden die Fotos nach der Farbe sortiert. Sie können die Farbinformation des Fotos ändern. N Aktivieren Sie Farbansicht verwenden im Setup-Menü, ehe Sie Fotos nach der Farbe sortieren. ❑ Music „ Interpret Hiermit werden die Musikdateien nach Symbol/Nummer/Anfangsbuchstabe/Spezial des Interpreten sortiert. „ Stimmung → Dynamisch / Rhythmisch / Traurig / Aufregend / Ruhig / Jedes Alter Hiermit sortieren Sie die Musikdateien nach der Stimmung. Sie können die Informationen zur Stimmung der Musik ändern. „ Genre Hiermit sortieren Sie die Musikdateien nach dem Genre. Ordner Voreinstellung Basisansicht Titel Interpret 1 When I Dream 3/4 Carol kidd Mr A-Z 2009 Pop usermanual Heaven NPKI ▶ 1 ▶ ▶ ▶ ▶ ../ Ordnername/ Music USB „ Gerät Wählen T Extras R Ordner darüber ▶ ▶ Voreinstellung Basisansicht Erstellung Titel Ordner Apr Apr.27.2009 Movie USB „ Gerät Favoriten-Einst. Wählen T Extras R Ordner darüber MOVIE_003 .avi MOVIE_000 .avi MOVIE_004 .avi MOVIE_001.avi 1/5 ▶ ▶ ◀ MOVIE_005 .avi Voreinstellung Basisansicht Erstellung Farbe Ordner Mrz.01.2009 IMG_0343 .JPG ▶ ▶ IMG_03496 .JPG IMG_03496 .JPG Mrz Apr Jun Nov IMG_0335.JPG 1/67 ▶ ▶ 2009 ◀ IMG_03496 .JPG Photo USB „ Gerät Favoriten-Einst. Wählen T Extras R Zurück BN68-02333J-GER.indb 35 10/20/2009 4:38:28 PMDeutsch - 36 Optionsmenü für Foto- / Musik- / Filmliste 1. Drücken Sie die Taste MEDIA.P. 2. Wählen Sie durch Drücken der Tasten ◄ oder ► die Option Photo, Music oder Movie, und drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE. 3. Wählen Sie mit den Tasten ◄ oder ► die gewünschte Musikdatei. N Wählen mehrerer Dateien - Wählen Sie mit den Tasten ◄ oder ► die gewünschte Musikdatei. Drücken Sie dann die gelbe Taste. - Wiederholen Sie den obigen Vorgang, um mehrere Dateien auszuwählen. - Links neben dem Namen der gewählten Datei wird das Symbol c angezeigt. 4. Drücken Sie die Taste TOOLS. N Der Inhalt des Optionsmenüs richtet sich nach dem jeweiligen Status. „ Gruppe abspielen Mit diesem Menübefehl können Sie eine Diashow nur mit den Fotodateien aus der aktuell ausgewählten Sortiergruppe ablaufen lassen. „ Alle abwählen (Wenn mindestens eine Datei gewählt ist) Sie können die Auswahl aller Dateien aufheben. N Das Zeichen c zur Darstellung der entsprechenden Datei wird ausgeblendet. „ Informationen Die Informationen zur Foto-/Musik-/Filmdatei werden angezeigt. Sie können die Informationen von Dateien mit den gleichen Verfahren auch während einer Diashow anzeigen. O Drücken Sie die Taste INFO, um Informationen anzuzeigen. „ Sicher entfernen Sie können das Gerät sicher vom Fernsehgerät entfernen. ❑ Photo „ Diashow Mit diesem Menübefehl können Sie eine Diashow mit den Fotodateien auf dem USB-Speicher ablaufen lassen. „ Grp. ändern (Beim Sortierungsschlüssel Farbe) Sie können die Farbinformationen einer gewählten Fotodatei (oder Gruppe von Dateien) ändern, um sie von einer Farbgruppe in eine andere zu verschieben. N Damit verändern Sie die tatsächliche Farbe des Fotos aber nicht. N Die Gruppeninformationen der aktuellen Datei werden aktualisiert und die Fotos werden in die neue Farbgruppe verschoben. N Wenn Sie die Informationen für mehrere Dateien ändern möchten, wählen Sie die gewünschten Dateien und drücken Sie die gelbe Taste. ❑ Music „ Gruppe ändern (Beim Sortierungsschlüssel “Stimmung”) Sie können die Informationen zur Stimmung der Musikdateien ändern. Die Gruppeninformationen der aktuellen Datei werden aktualisiert und die Datei wird in die neue Gruppe verschoben. Wenn Sie die Informationen für mehrere Dateien ändern möchten, wählen Sie die entsprechenden Dateien, und drücken Sie die gelbe Taste. Select T Tools R Upper Folder Ordner Benutzerdef. Basisansicht Titel Interpret 1 1 ▶ ▶ ../ Ordnername/ Sky When I Dream 3/4 Carol kidd Mr A-Z 2009 Pop NPKI usermanual Heaven ▶ NPKI Gruppe abspielen Informationen Sicher entfernen Music USB „ Gerät Wählen T Extras R Ordner darüber Movie_004 Movie_003 .avi .avi Movie_000 .avi Movie_005 .avi Movie_007 .avi Movie_001.avi 1/5 Movie_006 .avi ▶ ▶ Benutzerdef. Basisansicht Erstellung Titel Ordner Apr Apr.27.2009 Movie USB „ Gerät Favoriten-Einst. Wählen T Extras R Ordner darüber Gruppe abspielen Informationen Sicher entfernen Basisansicht Erstellung Farbe Ordner Benutzerdef. IMG_0335.JPG 4/6 IMG_0349 .JPG ▶ ▶ Ordner 2 1 Ordner 1 1 Diashow Gruppe abspielen Grp. ändern Informationen Sicher entfernen Photo USB „ Gerät Favoriten-Einst. Wählen T Extras R Ordner darüber BN68-02333J-GER.indb 36 10/20/2009 4:38:36 PMDeutsch - 37 Optionsmenü für Diashow / Musikwiedergabe / Filmwiedergabe 1. Während einer Diashow (oder beim Anzeigen eines Fotos) der bei der Wiedergabe von Musik oder eines Films drücken Sie die Taste TOOLS, um die Option einzustellen. 2. Wählen Sie durch Drücken der Tasten ▲ oder ▼ die Option, und drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE. „ Bildeinstellungen / Toneinstellungen Sie können die Bild- und Toneinstellungen festlegen. „ Informationen Die Dateiinformationen werden angezeigt. „ Sicher entfernen Sie können das Gerät sicher vom Fernsehgerät entfernen. ❑ Menü der Optionen für Diashows „ Diashow anhalten / Diashow starten Hiermit können Sie eine Diashow starten oder anhalten. „ Diashow-Geschw. → Langsam / Normal / Schnell Sie können die Geschwindigkeit der Diashow festlegen. N Diese Funktion ist nur während einer Diashow verfügbar. N Wenn Sie die Tasten π (REW) oder μ (FF) während einer Diashow drücken, können Sie auch deren Abspielgeschwindigkeit ändern. „ Diashow-Effekt Sie können den in der Diashow verwendeten Effekt bei Bildschirmübergängen auswählen. • Keine / Ausblend1 / Ausblend2 / Jalousie / Spirale / Schachbrett / Linear / Treppe / Wischen / Zufall N Diese Funktion ist nur während einer Diashow verfügbar. „ Drehen Sie können alle auf einem USB-Speichergerät gespeicherten Dateien drehen. N Wenn Sie die Taste ◄ drücken, wird es nacheinander um 270˚, 180˚, 90˚ und 0˚ gedreht. N Wenn Sie die Taste ► drücken, wird das Foto nacheinander um 90˚, 180˚, 270˚ und 0˚ gedreht. N Die gedrehte Datei wird nicht gespeichert. „ Zoom Sie können alle auf einem USB-Speichergerät gespeicherten Fotos vergrößern. (x1 → x2 → x4) N Um das vergrößerte Foto zu verschieben, drücken sie die Taste ENTERE und anschließend ▲/▼/◄/►. Beachten Sie, dass die Funktion zum Verschieben deaktiviert ist, wenn das vergrößerte Bild kleiner als das ursprüngliche Fenster ist. N Die vergrößerte Datei wird nicht gespeichert. „ Hintergrundmusik Sie können die Hintergrundmusik auswählen, während Sie eine Diashow anzeigen. N Um diese Funktion zu verwenden, müssen auf dem UB-Speicher Musik- und Fotodateien gespeichert sein. N Laden der Musikdateien erforderlich, um in den Hintergrundmusikmodus zu wechseln. Musikdateien aus der Kategorie abspielen, die geladen werden soll. ❑ Menü der Optionen für die Musikwiedergabe „ Wiederhol-M. → Ein / Aus Sie können Musikdateien wiederholt abspielen. ❑ Menü der Optionen für Filmwiedergabe „ Bildformat → Anpassung / Original Abspielen des Videos im Originalformat oder angepasst an die Bildschirmgröße. „ Einstellung für Text Sie können die Beschriftungen für den Film wählen. Tools Extras Diashow anhalten Diashow-Geschw. : Normal Diashow-Effekt : Ausblend1 Drehen Zoom Hintergrundmusik Bildeinstellungen Toneinstellungen Informationen › U Navig. E Eingabe eBeenden Extras Wiederhol-Modus ◄ Ein ► Bildeinstellungen Toneinstellungen Informationen Sicher entfernen U Navig. š™ Einst. eBeenden Extras Bildeinstellungen Toneinstellungen Bildformat : Anpassung Einstellung für Text Informationen Sicher entfernen U Navig.  Eingabe eBeenden BN68-02333J-GER.indb 37 10/20/2009 4:38:37 PMDeutsch - 38 Anzeigen eines Fotos oder einer Diashow ❑ Anzeigen von Diashows N Alle Dateien in der Dateiliste werden für die Diashow verwendet. N Die Bilder werden nacheinander, beginnend mit der aktuell angezeigten Datei angezeigt. N Die Diashow wird entsprechend der Sortierreihenfolge in der Dateiliste ausgeführt. N Musikdateien können während der Diashow automatisch abgespielt werden, wenn Hintergrundmusik aktiviert (Ein) ist. N Drücken Sie die Fernbedienungstaste∂(Play)/ENTERE, während die Fotoliste angezeigtwird, um die Diashow zu starten. N Diashow-Steuertasten ENTERE Abspielen/Pause der Diashow. Abspielen der Diashow. Diashow anhalten. Beenden Sie die Diashow und wechseln Sie wieder zur Fotoliste. / Ändern der Abspielgeschwindigkeit der Diashow. T TOOLS Hiermit führen Sie verschiedene Funktionen aus den Fotomenüs aus. ❑ Abspielen der aktuellen Gruppe 1. Drücken Sie die Taste ▲, um zum Abschnitt mit den Sortierschlüsseln zu wechseln. 2. Wählen Sie mit den Tasten ◄ oder ► das Sortierverfahren aus. 3. Drücken Sie die Taste ▼, um zum Abschnitt mit der Gruppenliste zu wechseln. 4. Drücken Sie die Tasten ◄ und ►, um eine Gruppe auszuwählen. 5. Drücken Sie die Taste ∂ (Wiedergabe). Eine Diashow mit den Dateien der gewählten Gruppe beginnt. „ Alternative 1. Wählen Sie zuerst einen Sortierschlüssel und dann im Dateilistenabschnitt die Fotos aus der gewünschten Gruppe aus. N Um zur vorherigen/nächsten Gruppe zu wechseln, drücken Sie die Taste π (REW) oder μ (FF). 2. Drücken Sie die Taste TOOLS. 3. Wählen Sie durch Drücken der Tasten ▲ oder ▼ die Option Gruppe abspielen, und drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE. N Nur die Fotos aus der Sortiergruppe mit den ausgewählten Dateien werden für die Diashow verwendet. ❑ So starten Sie eine Diashow nur mit den gewählten Dateien 1. Drücken die Taste ▼, um den Dateilistenabschnitt zu wählen. 2. Wählen Sie das gewünschte Foto mit den Tasten ◄ oder ► aus der Dateiliste aus. 3. Drücken Sie die gelbe Taste. 4. Wiederholen Sie den obigen Vorgang, um mehrere Fotodateien auszuwählen. N Links neben dem Namen der Fotodatei wird das Symbol c angezeigt. N Wenn Sie nur eine Datei wählen, wird keine Diashow gestartet. N Um die Auswahl sämtlicher Dateien aufzuheben, drücken Sie die Taste TOOLS und wählen Sie dann Alle abwählen. 5. Drücken Sie die Taste ∂ (Wiedergabe)/ENTERE . N Die ausgewählten Dateien werden für die Diashow verwendet. „ Alternative 1. Wählen Sie die gewünschten Fotos mit der gelben Taste aus der Dateiliste aus. 2. Drücken Sie die Taste TOOLS. 3. Wählen Sie durch Drücken der Tasten ▲ oder ▼ die Option Diashow, und drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE . N Die ausgewählten Dateien werden für die Diashow verwendet. ▶ ▶ Voreinstellung Basisansicht Erstellung Titel Ordner Apr Apr.27.2009 Movie USB „ Gerät Favoriten-Einst. Wählen T Extras R Ordner darüber Movie_003 .avi Movie_000 .avi Movie_004 .avi Movie_001.avi 1/5 Movie_005 .avi Basisansicht Erstellung Farbe Ordner Voreinstellung IMG_0335.JPG 4/6 IMG_0349 .JPG ▶ ▶ Ordner 2 1 Ordner 1 1 Diashow Gruppe abspielen Grp. ändern Informationen Sicher entfernen Photo r Normal IMG_0335.JPG 3648x2432 2009/3/15 1/4 USB E Pause lr Zurück/Weiter T Extras R Zurück USB „ Gerät Favoriten-Einst. Wählen T Extras R Ordner darüber BN68-02333J-GER.indb 38 10/20/2009 4:38:44 PMDeutsch - 39 Wiedergeben von Musik ❑ Wiedergeben einer Musikdatei 1. Drücken die Taste ▼, um den Dateilistenabschnitt zu wählen. 2. Drücken Sie die Taste ◄ oder ► , um eine Musikdatei zu wählen, die abgespielt werden soll. 3. Drücken Sie die Taste ∂ (Wiedergabe)/ENTERE . N Dieses Menü zeigt nur Dateien mit der Dateinamenserweiterung MP3. Dateien mit anderer Dateinamenserweiterung werden nicht angezeigt, auch wenn sie auf dem gleichen USB-Gerät gespeichert wurden. N Die ausgewählte Datei wird zusammen mit der Abspieldauer oben angezeigt. N Um die Musiklautstärke anzupassen, drücken Sie auf der Fernbedienung die Lautstärketaste auf der Fernbedienung. Wenn Sie den Ton ausschalten möchten, drücken Sie die M MUTE-Taste auf der Fernbedienung. N Wenn der Ton beim Abspielen von MP3-Datei “schräg” ist stellen Sie im Tonmenü den Equalizer und SRS TruSurround HD ein. (Bei übermodulierten MP3-Dateien kann es zu Tonproblemen kommen.) N Die Abspieldauer einer Musikdatei wird möglicherweise als 00:00:00 angezeigt, wenn am Anfang der Datei keine Informationen über die Abspieldauer gefunden werden. N Die Tasten π (REW) oder μ (FF) sind bei der Wiedergabe funktionslos. N Regler für Musikwiedergabe ENTERE Wiedergabe/Pause einer Musikdatei. Beenden des Wiedergabemodus und Rückkehr zur Musikliste. Spielen Sie die Musikdatei ab. T TOOLS Hiermit führen Sie verschiedene Funktionen aus den Musikmenüs aus. Hiermit wird die Musikdatei angehalten. N Symbol für Informationen zur Musik-Funktion Hiermit werden alle Musikdateien im Ordner (oder die markierte Datei) wiederholt abgespielt. Wiederhol-M. ist aktiviert (Ein). Hiermit werden alle Musikdateien im Ordner (oder die markierte Datei) einmal abgespielt. Wiederhol-M. ist deaktiviert (Aus). ❑ Abspielen einer Musikgruppe 1. Drücken Sie die Taste ▲, um zum Abschnitt mit den Sortierschlüsseln zu wechseln. 2. Wählen Sie mit den Tasten ◄ oder ► das Sortierverfahren aus. 3. Drücken Sie die Taste ▼ oder ENTERE, um zur Auswahl der Gruppenliste zu wechseln. 4. Drücken Sie die Taste ∂ (Wiedergabe). Die Dateien der ausgewählten Gruppe werden nun abgespielt. „ Alternative 1. Wählen Sie zuerst einen Sortierschlüssel und dann im Dateilistenabschnitt die Fotos aus der gewünschten Gruppe aus. N Um zur vorherigen/nächsten Gruppe zu wechseln, drücken Sie die Taste π (REW) oder μ (FF). 2. Drücken Sie die Taste TOOLS. 3. Wählen Sie durch Drücken der Tasten ▲ oder ▼ die Option Gruppe abspielen, und drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE. N Die Musikdateien in der Sortiergruppe einschließlich der markierten Datei werden einmal abgespielt. ❑ Abspielen ausgewählter Musikdateien 1. Drücken die Taste ▼, um den Dateilistenabschnitt zu wählen. 2. Wählen Sie mit den Tasten ◄ oder ► die gewünschte Musikdatei. 3. Drücken Sie die gelbe Taste. 4. Wiederholen Sie den obigen Vorgang, um mehrere Musikdateien auszuwählen. N Links neben dem Namen der Musikdatei wird das Symbol c angezeigt. N Um die Auswahl sämtlicher Dateien aufzuheben, drücken Sie die Taste TOOLS und wählen Sie dann Alle abwählen. 5. Drücken Sie die Taste ∂ (Wiedergabe)/ENTERE N Die gewählten Dateien werden nun wiedergegeben. r 00:00:02 / 00:04:55 r 1/3 When I Dream r r Geek In The Pink Heaven USB E Pause lr Zurück/Weiter T Extras R Zurück BN68-02333J-GER.indb 39 10/20/2009 4:38:45 PMDeutsch - 40 Wiedergeben einer Filmdatei ❑ Wiedergeben einer Filmdatei 1. Drücken die Taste ▼, um den Dateilistenabschnitt zu wählen. 2. Wählen Sie mit den Tasten ◄ oder ► eine Filmdatei, die abgespielt werden soll. 3. Drücken Sie die Taste ∂ (Wiedergabe)/ENTERE . N Die gewählte Datei wird wiedergegeben. N Die ausgewählte Datei wird zusammen mit der Abspieldauer oben angezeigt. N Die Abspieldauer einer Filmdatei wird möglicherweise als 00:00:00 angezeigt, wenn am Anfang der Datei keine Informationen über die Abspieldauer gefunden werden. N Sie können spannende Multimediaspiele anzeigen, das Spielen selbst wird aber nicht unterstützt. N Unterstützte Formate für Untertitel Name Dateinamenserweiterung Programmiersprache MPEG-4 Text mit Zeitverlauf .ttxt XML SAMI .smi HTML SubRip .srt Stringbasiert SubViewer .sub Stringbasiert Micro DVD .sub oder .txt Stringbasiert N Unterstützte Videoformate Dateinamenserweiterung Container Videodecoder Audio-Codec Max Resolution Sti *.avi AVI Divx 3.11/4.x/5.1/6.0 MP3 AC3 LPCM ADPCM 720x576 XviD 1920x1080 H.264 BP/MP/HP 1920x1080 MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080 Motion JPEG 800x600 *.mkv MKV Divx 3.11/4.x/5.1/6.0 MP3 AC3 LPCM ADPCM 720x576 XviD 1920x1080 H.264 BP/MP/HP 1920x1080 MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080 Motion JPEG 800x600 *.asf ASF Divx 3.11/4.x/5.1/6.0 MP3 AC3 LPCM ADPCM WMA 720x576 XviD 1920x1080 H.264 BP/MP/HP 1920x1080 MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080 Motion JPEG 800x600 *.wmv (VC1) ASF VC1 WMA 1920x1080 *.mp4 MP4 (SMP4) H.264 BP/MP/HP MP3 ADPCM AAC 1920x1080 MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080 XVID 1920x1080 *.3gp 3GPP H.264 BP/MP/HP ADPCM AAC 1920x1080 MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080 *.vro VRO VOB MPEG2 AC3 MPEG LPCM 1920x1080 MPEG1 1920x1080 *.mpg *.mpeg PS MPEG1 AC3 MPEG LPCM 1920x1080 MPEG2 1920x1080 *.ts *.tp *.trp TS MPEG2 AAC MP3 1920x1080 H.264 1920x1080 VC1 1920x1080 N Regler für Videowiedergabe ENTERE Wiedergeben / Anhalten der Filmdatei. Wiedergeben der Filmdatei. Anhalten der Filmwiedergabe. Beenden des Wiedergabemodus und Rückkehr zur Filmliste. T TOOLS Hiermit führen Sie verschiedene Funktionen aus den Filmmenüs aus. ◄/► Schneller Vor- oder Rücklauf durch den Film in Schritten. ▲/▼ Wechseln zur ersten oder letzten Ansicht der aktuellen Datei. ▶ r r 00:00:02 / 00:01:55 1/3 Movie_000.avi USB E Pause lr Wechseln T Extras R Zurück BN68-02333J-GER.indb 40 10/20/2009 4:38:46 PMDeutsch - 41 ❑ Abspielen einer Filmgruppe 1. Drücken Sie die Taste ▲, um zum Abschnitt mit den Sortierschlüsseln zu wechseln. 2. Wählen Sie mit den Tasten ◄ oder ► das Sortierverfahren aus. 3. Drücken Sie die Taste ▼ oder ENTERE, um zur Auswahl der Gruppenliste zu wechseln. 4. Drücken Sie die Taste ∂ (Wiedergabe). Nur die Dateien der gewählten Gruppe werden nun abgespielt. „ Alternative 1. Wählen Sie zuerst einen Sortierschlüssel und dann im Dateilistenabschnitt die Fotos aus der gewünschten Gruppe aus. N Um zur vorherigen/nächsten Gruppe zu wechseln, drücken Sie die Taste π (REW) oder μ (FF). 2. Drücken Sie die Taste TOOLS. 3. Wählen Sie durch Drücken der Tasten ▲ oder ▼ die Option Gruppe abspielen, und drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE. N Hiermit werden alle Filmdateien im Ordner (oder die markierte Datei) einmal abgespielt. ❑ Abspielen der ausgewählten Filmdateien 1. Drücken die Taste ▼, um den Dateilistenabschnitt zu wählen. 2. Wählen Sie mit den Tasten ◄ oder ► die gewünschte Musikdatei. 3. Drücken Sie die gelbe Taste. N Links neben dem Namen der Filmdatei wird das Symbol c cangezeigt. N Um die Auswahl sämtlicher Dateien aufzuheben, drücken Sie die Taste TOOLS und wählen Sie dann Alle abwählen. 4. Wiederholen Sie den obigen Vorgang, um mehrere Filmdateien auszuwählen. 5. Drücken Sie die Taste ∂ (Wiedergabe)/ENTERE . N Nur die gewählte Datei wird wiedergegeben. ❑ Filmwiedergabe fortsetzen (Wiedergabe fortsetzen) Wenn Sie die Filmwiedergabefunktion verlassen, kann der Film später von dem Punkt an abgespielt werden, an dem Sie unterbrochen haben. 1. Wählen Sie den Film, dessen Wiedergabe Sie fortsetzen möchten. Drücken Sie dazu in der Dateiliste auf ◄ oder ► 2. Drücken Sie die Taste ∂ (Wiedergabe)/ENTERE . 3. Wählen Sie mit der blauen Taste die Funktion für Ununterbrochen abspielen.. N Die Filmwiedergabe wird dort fortgesetzt, wo Sie sie angehalten hatten. N Wenn Hilfe zu Schleifenbetrieb im Setup-Menü aktiviert wurde (Ein), wird eine Meldung angezeigt, wenn Sie die Filmdatei fortsetzen. Verwenden des Menüs Einstellungen Mit dem Setup zeigen Sie die im Media Play-Menü vorgenommenen Benutzereinstellungen an. 1. Drücken Sie die MEDIA.P-Taste auf der Fernbedienung, um das Media Play-Menü anzuzeigen. 2. Wählen Sie durch Drücken der Tasten ◄ oder ► die Option SETUP, und drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE. 3. Wählen Sie mit den Tasten ▲ oder ▼ die gewünschte Option aus. 4 . Wählen Sie mit den Tasten ◄ oder ► die gewünschte Option aus. N Um den Media Play-Modus zu beenden, drücken Sie auf der Fernbedienung die Taste MEDIA.P. „ Farbansicht verwenden → Ein / Farbe Hiermit werden die Fotos nach der Farbe sortiert. N Ist diese Option aktiviert, so verlängert sich die Ladezeit, da die Farbinformationen aus den Fotos ermittelt werden. „ Musik Wiederholmodus → Ein / Aus Hiermit können Sie Musikdateien wiederholt abspielen. „ Hilfe zu Schleifenbetrieb → Ein / Aus Hiermit öffnen Sie das Popupfenster mit Informationen zum Schleifenbetrieb. „ Divx® VOD-Registrierungscode abrufen Hiermit zeigen Sie den Registrierungscode für den Fernseher an. Wenn Sie eine Verbindung zur DivX-Website herstellen, und den Registrierungscode für ein Privatkonto registrieren, können Sie VOD-Registrierungsdatei herunterladen. Wenn Sie die VODRegistrierung mit Media Play abspielen, wird die Registrierung abgeschlossen. Weitere Informationen zu DivX® VOD finden Sie unter www.DivX.com. „ Divx® VOD-Deaktivierungscode abrufen Wenn DivX® VOD nicht registriert ist, wird der Deaktivierungscode für die Registrierung angezeigt. Wenn Sie diese Funktion ausführen, wenn DivX® VOD registriert ist, wird die aktuelle DivX® VOD-Registrierung deaktiviert. „ Laufzeit Bildschirmsch. → 2 Std. / 4 std. / 8 std. Wählen Sie die Wartezeit bis zum Aktivieren des Bildschirmschoners. „ Informationen Hiermit zeigen Sie die Informationen zum angeschlossenen Gerät an. „ Sicher entfernen Sie können das Gerät sicher vom Fernsehgerät entfernen. Media Play USB : USB 851.98MB/995.00MB Frei SETUP Photo Music Movie Setup USB „ Gerät eBeenden Setup Navig. Einst. Zurück Farbansicht verwenden ◄ Aus ► Musik Wiederholmodus Ein Hilfe zu Schleifenbetrieb Ein Divx® VOD-Registrierungscode abrufen Divx® VOD-Deaktivierungscode abrufen Laufzeit Bildschirmsch. 10 min Informationen Sicher entfernen USB „ Gerät BN68-02333J-GER.indb 41 10/20/2009 4:38:47 PMDeutsch - 42 Einrichten des DLNA-Netzwerks Mit DLNA können Sie Videos und Bilder, die auf Ihrem PC gespeichert sind, über eine Netzwerkverbindung im Media Play-Modus anzeigen. Damit brauchen Sie die Dateien nicht mehr auf einen USB-Speicher zu kopieren, den Sie dann an Ihren Fernseher anschließen. Damit Sie DLNA verwenden können, muss der Fernseher mit dem Netzwerk verbunden und die DLNA-Anwendung muss auf Ihrem PC installiert sein. ❑ Netzwerkverbindungsdiagramm – Kabel ❑ Netzwerkverbindungsdiagramm – Drahtlos 1. Weitere Informationen zum Konfigurieren Ihres Netzwerks finden Sie unter “Einrichten des Netzwerks”. N Wir empfehlen Ihnen, sowohl das Fernsehgerät als auch den PC in gleichem Teilnetz anzuordnen. Die ersten 3 Teile der Teilnetzadresse des Fernsehgeräts und der IP-Adressen des PCs müssen übereinstimmen und nur der letzte Teil darf geändert werden. (z.B.: IP-Adresse : 123.456.789.**) 2. Schließen Sie den PC, auf dem das Programm Samsung PC Share Manager installiert wird, über ein Netzwerkkabel an das externe Modem an. N Sie können das Fernsehgerät direkt an den PC anschließen, ohne vorher einen Sharer (Router) dazwischen zu schalten. Installieren der DLNA-Anwendung Damit die Inhalte vom PC auf dem Fernsehgerät abgespielt werden können, müssen Sie die Anwendung installieren. Um die DLNAFunktion problemlos nutzen zu können, verwenden Sie das Programm von der CD-ROM, die zusammen mit dem Fernsehgerät geliefert wurde, oder verwenden Sie Samsung PC Share Manager für das Fernsehmodell. Diese Software können Sie von der Samsung-Website herunterladen. TV Externes Modem (ADSL/VDSL/Kabel TV) LAN PC LAN Media Play-DLNA TV LAN PC oder 1 Seitenverkleidung des Fernsehgeräts WLAN-Adapter von Samsung BN68-02333J-GER.indb 42 10/20/2009 4:38:49 PMDeutsch - 43 Verwenden der DLNA-Anwendung Layout des Programmfenster 1. Menüs : Folgende Anwendungsmenüs sind verfügbar : Datei, Freigeben, Server und Hilfe. 2. Klicken Sie, um den markierten Ordner auf dem PC-Server freizugeben. 3. Klicken Sie erneut, um die Freigabe zu beenden. 4. Klicken Sie, um die Ordner und Dateien auf dem PC zu aktualisieren. 5. Klicken Sie, um den Freigabestatus zu synchronisieren. 6. Auf dem PC werden die Ordner und Dateien aufgeführt, die freigegeben werden sollen. 7. Es werden Ordner aufgelistet, die vom Benutzer freigegeben wurden.. 8. Name des PC-Servers aus der Geräteliste von Media Play : Klicken Sie hier, um den Namen zu ändern. „ Systemanforderungen 1. Legen Sie die mit diesem Fernsehgerät gelieferte Programm-CD in den PC ein. 2. Zur Installation des Programms benötigen Sie 20 MB freien Platz auf der Festplatte. N Bei Freigabe der Dateien reichen 20 MB Festplattenspeicher für jeweils etwa 100 Dateien. N Wenn Sie die Dateifreigabe beenden, wird auch der Festplattenspeicher freigegeben, der ansonsten für die Miniaturbildinformationen verwendet wird. „ Unterstützte Formate • Bild : JPEG-Bild (*.jpg, *.jpeg) Audio : MP3 (mp3) Video: MPEG1 (mpg, mpeg), MPEG2 PS/TS (mpg, mpeg, trp, ts, tp), divx(mpg, mpeg, avi), MPEG4/H.264 (mpg, mpeg). Details zu den unterstützten Videoformaten erhalten Sie bei den Anweisungen unter “Wiedergeben einer Filmdatei”. „ Installieren Sie die Anwendung ► ► ► 1. Starten Sie die Datei SETUP.EXE, die auf der zusammen mit dem Gerät gelieferten Programm-CD gespeichert ist. N Sie können die Datei allerdings auch von www.samsung.com herunterladen. 2. Installieren Sie den SAMSUNG PC Share Manager (siehe nachfolgende Abbildungen). 3. Nach Abschluss der Installation wird auf dem Desktop das Symbol für den PC Share Manager angezeigt. N Doppelklicken Sie auf das Symbol, um das Programm zu starten. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 BN68-02333J-GER.indb 43 10/20/2009 4:38:50 PMDeutsch - 44 ❑ Freigeben „ Freigeben eines Ordners Sie können einen Ordner auf dem PC für das Fernsehgerät freigeben. „ Aufheben der Freigabe eines Ordners Sie können die Freigabe eines Ordners auf Ihrem PC aufheben. Markieren Sie einen Ordner im Bereich Freigegebener Ordner und klicken Sie dann auf Unshare Folder. „ Übernehmen der aktuellen Einstellungen Führen Sie diesen Vorgang aus, wenn aufgrund einer neuen Ordnerfreigabe oder der Aufhebung einer Ordnerfreigabe eine Synchronisierung erforderlich ist. Mit dem Menü Neuen Status Einst. übernehmen Sie die Änderungen in den freigegebenen Ordnern auf die Daten, die mit dem PC-Freigabeprogramm gespeichert wurden. Da das Übernehmen der Änderungen an den internen Daten ein zeitraubender Vorgang ist, wird dem Benutzer mit dieser Funktion die Möglichkeit geboten, die Änderungen an den Daten nur bei Bedarf zu übernehmen. Erst wenn der Befehl Neuen Status Einst. gewählt wird, wird der geänderte Status des freigegebenen Ordners auf den Server übernommen. Änderungen an den freigegebenen Ordnern werden erst auf Ihren PC übernommen, wenn Sie den Befehl Neuen Status Einst. wählen. „ Festlegen der Zugangsberechtigung Damit Ihr Fernsehgerät den PC finden kann, muss das Fernsehgerät im Fenster mit den Einstellungen für die Zugangsberechtigungen auf Geräterichtlinie einst. eingestellt werden. Zusätzlich müssen sich der PC-Server und das Fernsehgerät im gleichen Teilnetz befinden. • Vorgehensweise : Klicken Sie auf Freigeben und wählen Sie den Befehl Geräterichtlinie einst.. Nicht verfügbare Elementewerden in Grau dargestellt. Sie können die Zugangsberechtigungen mit den Schaltflächen Akzeptiern / Ablehnen Einst. Um ein Element zu löschen, wählen Sie Delete Item. ❑ Server „ Server Sie können Ihren PC als Server verwenden und den Serverstatus später wieder aufheben. „ Server zusammen mit Windows starten Sie können bestimmen, ob der PC-Server automatisch zusammen mit Windows gestartet werden soll. „ Servernamen ändern Sie können den PC-Server umbenennen. Verwenden der DLNA-Funktion ❑ Verwenden des DLNA-Menüs Durch DLNA (Digital Living Network Alliance) wird es möglich, Inhalte wiederzugeben, die auf einem direkt oder über das Netzwerk an Ihr Fernsehgerät angeschlossenen DLNA-Server (gewöhnlich Ihrem PC) gespeichert sind. Mithilfe von Media play können Sie Inhalte von einem an das Fernsehgerät angeschlossenen USB-Speicher wiedergeben, wogegen Sie mit DLNA Inhalte von einem DLNA-Server (Ihrem PC) wiedergeben können, der direkt oder über das Netzwerk an Ihr Fernsehgerät angeschlossen ist. Die Vorgehensweisen zum Verwenden der Inhalte stimmen mit denen bei Media play (USB & DLNA) überein. 1. Drücken Sie die MEDIA.P-Taste auf der Fernbedienung, um das DLNA-Menü anzuzeigen. 2. Drücken Sie die Tasten ◄ oder ► um ein Symbol (Photo, Music, Movie, Setup) auszuwählen, und drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE. N Um den DLNA-Modus zu beenden, drücken Sie auf der Fernbedienung die Taste MEDIA.P. N DLNA unterstützt die folgenden Funktionen nicht. - Hintergrundmusik und Einstellungen für Hintergrundmusik. - Benutzerdefinierte Sortierung von Dateien im Foto-, Musik- und Filmordner. - Die Funktion zum Ändern der Gruppe. - Die Kopier- / Löschfunktion. - Die Funktion zum sicheren Entfernen. - Die Tasten REW/FF (π/μ) können Sie verwenden, wenn ein Film abgespielt wird. - Funktion zum Fortsetzen der Filmwiedergabe (Wiedergabe fortsetzen). N Bei manchen Containern wie ASF und MKV können Sie die Funktion zum Springen nicht verwenden. N Divx DRM, Multi-Audio und eingebettete Beschriftung werden nicht unterstützt.. N Sie müssen Samsung PC Share Manager in der Firewall Ihres PCs freigeben. N Die Funktionen zum Überspingen (Tasten ◄/►) oder die Pause-Funktion sind möglicherweise bei Verwendung der DLNASoftware anderer Hersteller nicht verfügbar. Dies hängt vom jeweiligen Inhalt ab. N Die Wiedergabedauer wird beim Abspielen von Filmen möglicherweise nicht angezeigt. Media Play Photo Music Setup PHOTO USB : USB 851.98MB/995.00MB Frei Movie USB „ Gerät Zurück BN68-02333J-GER.indb 44 10/20/2009 4:38:51 PMDeutsch - 45 Informationen zu Anynet+ Anschließen von Anynet + -Geräten Bei Anynet+ handelt es sich um eine Funktion, mit der Sie alle angeschlossenen Samsung-Geräte, die Anynet+ unterstützen, mit der Fernbedienung für Ihr Samsung- Fernsehgerätsteuern können. Das Anynet+ -System unterstützt nur Anynet+ -fähige Samsung-Geräte. Wenn Sie wissen möchten, ob Ihr Samsung-Gerät diese Funktion unterstützt, suchen Sie das Anynet+ -Logo auf Ihrem Gerät. ❑ Anschließen an ein Fernsehgerät 1. Verbinden Sie einen der Anschlüsse [HDMI IN 1], [HDMI IN 2(DVI)], [HDMI IN 3] oder [HDMI IN 4] am Fernsehgerät mit dem HDMI OUT-Anschluss am entsprechenden Anynet+ -Gerät. Verwenden Sie hierfür ein HDMI-Kabel. ❑ Anschluss an das Heimkinosystem 1. Verbinden Sie einen der Anschlüsse [HDMI IN 1], [HDMI IN 2(DVI)], [HDMI IN 3] oder [HDMI IN 4] am Fernsehgerät mit dem HDMI OUT-Anschluss am entsprechenden Anynet+ -Gerät. Verwenden Sie hierfür ein HDMI-Kabel. 2. Verbinden Sie den HDMI IN-Anschluss des Heimkinosystems mit dem HDMI OUTAnschluss des entsprechenden Anynet+ -Geräts. Verwenden Sie hierfür ein HDMI-Kabel. N Verbinden Sie den (optischen) digitalen Audioausgang am Fernsehgerät und den digitalen Audioeingang des Heimkinosystems ausschließlich mit Hilfe des Glasfaserkabels. N Bei obiger Vorgehensweise überträgt der optische Anschluss nur 2-Kanalaudio. Die Tonausgabe erfolgt also nur über den linken und rechten Frontlautsprecher sowie den Subwoofer des Heimkinosystems. Wenn Sie 5.1-Kanalton wünschen, müssen Sie den digitalen (optischen) Audioausgang des DVD-Players oder der Kabel-/Sat-Box (also Anynet-Gerät 1 oder 2) direkt an einen Verstärker oder ein Heimkinosystem und nicht an das Fernsehgerät anschließen. N Schließen Sie nur ein Heimkinosystem an. N Sie können Anynet+ -Geräte mithilfe eines HDMI 1.3-Kabels verbinden. Einige HDMIKabel unterstützen möglicherweise keine Anynet+ -Funktionen. N Anynet+ arbeitet, wenn das AV-Gerät, das Anynet+ unterstützt, im Standby-Modus oder angeschaltet ist. N Anynet+ unterstützt maximal 12 AV-Geräte. Beachten Sie, dass Sie maximal 3 Geräte des gleichen Typs anschließen können. N Anynet + unterstützt maximal 3 Geräte gleichzeitig. Anynet + - Gerät 1 Anynet + - Gerät 2 Anynet + - Gerät 3 TV HDMI 1.3-Kabel HDMI 1.3-Kabel HDMI 1.3-Kabel TV Anynet + - Gerät 1 Anynet + - Gerät 2 Anynet + - Gerät 3 HDMI 1.3-Kabel HDMI 1.3-Kabel HDMI 1.3-Kabel HDMI 1.3-Kabel Home Theatre Optical Kabel Anynet + - Gerät 4 HDMI 1.3-Kabel Anynet + - Gerät 4 HDMI 1.3-Kabel BN68-02333J-GER.indb 45 10/20/2009 4:38:53 PMDeutsch - 46 Einrichten von Anynet + ❑ Einrichten von Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) T Drücken Sie die Taste TOOLS, um das Menü. Extras anzuzeigen. Sie können das Anynet+ -Menü auch durch Auswahl von Extras → Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) auswählen. „ Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) → Aus / Ein amit Sie die Funktionen von Anynet+ nutzen können, muss Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) aktiviert (Ein) sein. N Wenn die Funktion Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) deaktiviert wird, sind auch alle Vorgänge in Verbindung mit Anynet+ deaktiviert. „ Autom. Ausschalten → Nein / Ja Automatisches Abschalten von Anynet+ Geraten durch Abschalten des Fernsehgerats. N Automatisches Abschalten von Anynet+ -Geräten durch Abschalten des FernsehgerätsDamit Sie Anynet+ verwenden können, muss die Geräteauswahl der Fernbedienung auf TV eingestellt sein. N Wenn Sie Autom. Ausschalten aktivieren (auf Ja setzen), werden auch die angeschlossenen externen Geräte ausgeschaltet, wenn Sie das Fernsehgerät ausschalten. Wenn das externe Gerät jedoch gerade aufnimmt, wird es möglicherweise abgeschaltet oder auch nicht. Wechseln zwischen Anynet + -Geräten 1. Drücken Sie die Taste TOOLS. Drücken Sie die Taste ENTERE, um Anynet + (HDMICEC) auszuwählen. 2. Wählen Sie durch Drücken der Tasten ▲ oder ▼ die Option Geräteliste, und drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE. N Nun werden die an das Fernsehgerät angeschlossenen Anynet+-Geräte aufgelistet. Wenn Sie das gewünschte Gerät nicht finden, drücken Sie die rote Taste, um nach Geräten zu suchen. N Nur wenn Sie Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) im Menü Setup aktivieren *Ein, wird das Menü Geräteliste angezeigt. 3. Wählen Sie ein bestimmtes Gerät durch Drücken der Tasten ▲ oder ▼, und drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE. Das System wechselt zum ausgewählten Gerät. N Das Umschalten zu den ausgewählten Geräten kann bis zu 2 Minuten dauern. Sie können diesen Vorgang während des Umschaltens nicht abbrechen. N Die zum Suchen nach Geräten erforderliche Zeit hängt von der Anzahl der angeschlossenen Geräte ab. N Wenn Sie mit der Taste SOURCE eine externe Signalquelle eingestellt haben, können Sie die Anynet+ -Funktion nicht verwenden. Achten Sie darauf, immer nur mit der Taste TOOLS zu einem Anynet+ -Gerät zu wechseln. ❑ Anynet + -Menü Der Inhalt des Anynet+ -Menüs hängt vom Typ und Status der an das Fernsehgerät angeschlossenen Anynet+ -Geräte ab. Anynet+-Menü Beschreibung Fernsehen Wechsel vom Anynet+ -Modus zum Fernsehmodus. Geräteliste Anzeige der Anynet+ -Geräteliste. (Geräte_Name)-Menü Hiermit öffnen Sie die Menüs der angeschlossenen Geräte. Wenn z. B. ein DVD-Recorder angeschlossen ist, wird das DVD-Menü des DVD-Recorders angezeigt. (Geräte_Name).INFO Zeigt das Wiedergabemenü des angeschlossenen Geräts an. Wenn z. B. ein DVD-Recorder angeschlossen ist, wird das Wiedergabemenü des DVD-Recorders angezeigt. Aufnahme (*Aufnahmegerät) Startet ein Aufnahme. (Diese Menüption funktioniert nur bei aufnahmefähigen Geräten.) (*Rekorder) Reserve Recording (Aufnahme vormerken) Hiermit können Sie eine Aufnahme mit dem Rekorder vormerken. (Diese Funktion ist nur für Geräte mit Vormerkfunktion für Aufnahmen verfügbar.) Aufnahme anhalten : (*Aufnahmegerät) Beenden der Aufnahme. Receiver Die Tonausgabe erfolgt über den Receiver. Fortsetzung... Anwendung Media Play (USB & DLNA) Anynet + (HDMI-CEC)► Content Library Internet@TV Home-Network-Center U Navig. EEingabe R Zurück Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) : Ein ▶ Autom. Ausschalten : Ja U Navig. EEingabe R Zurück Fernsehen Geräteliste Aufnahme : DVDR DVDR MENU DVDR INFO Empfänger : Ein Einstellungen BN68-02333J-GER.indb 46 10/20/2009 4:38:54 PMDeutsch - 47 ❑ Im Anynet + -Modus verfügbare Tasten der TV-Fernbedienung Gerätetyp Betriebsstatus Verfügbare Tasten Anynet + -Gerät Nach dem Wechseln zum Gerät wird das Menü des entsprechenden Geräts auf dem Bildschirm angezeigt. Zifferntasten ▲/▼/◄/►/ENTERE-Tasten Farbtasten / EXIT-Taste Nach dem Wechseln zum Gerät beim Abspielen einer Datei (Rückwärts suchen) / (Vorwärts suchen) (Stopp) / (Wiedergabe) / (Pause) Gerät mit eingebautem Tuner Nach dem Wechseln zum Gerät beim Fernsehen P / -Taste Audiogerät Beim Aktivieren des Receivers = / -Taste M MUTE-Taste N Die Anynet + -Funktion ist nur nutzbar, wenn auf der Fernbedienung das Fernsehgerät als Empfänger eingestellt ist. N Die -Taste ist nur im Aufnahmestatus belegt. N Sie können Anynet + -Geräte nicht mit den Tasten an Ihrem Fernsehgerät bedienen. Sie können Anynet + -Geräte nur mit der TVFernbedienung steuern. N Die TV-Fernbedienung funktioniert unter bestimmten Umständen nicht. Wählen Sie in diesem Fall erneut das Anynet + -Gerät. N Die Anynet + -Funktionen sind für Geräte anderer Hersteller nicht verfügbar. N Die / -Vorgänge können sich je nach Gerät unterscheiden. N Bei Anschluss von mehr als einem Aufnahmegerät werden sie als (*Aufnahmegerät) angezeigt, bei Anschluss eines einzigen Aufnahmegeräts erfolgt die Anzeige als (*Geräte_Name). Aufnahme Sie können Fernsehprogramme mit einem Samsung-Recorder aufnehmen. 1. Drücken Sie die Taste TOOLS. Drücken Sie die Taste ENTERE, um Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) auszuwählen. 2. Wählen Sie durch Drücken der Tasten ▲ oder ▼ Aufnehmen, und drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE. Die Aufnahme beginnt. N Bei mehr als einem Aufnahmegerät Wählen Sie durch Drücken der Tasten ▲ oder ▼ Aufnehmen, und drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE. Die Aufnahme beginnt. N Wenn das Aufnahmegerät nicht angezeigt wird wählen Sie Geräteliste und drücken Sie die rote Taste, um nach Geräten zu suchen. N Durch Drücken von wird die laufende Sendung aufgenommen. Wenn Sie Bilder aus einer anderen Signalquelle anzeigen, wird das Videosignal aus dieser Quelle aufgenommen. N Überprüfen Sie vor der Aufnahme, ob der Antennenstecker ordnungsgemäß am Aufnahmegerät angeschlossen ist. Informationen zur richtigen Antennenverbindung mit dem Aufnahmegerät finden Sie im Benutzerhandbuch des Aufnahmegeräts. U Navig. EEingabe R Zurück Fernsehen Geräteliste Aufnahme : DVDR DVDR MENU DVDR INFO Empfänger : Ein Einstellungen BN68-02333J-GER.indb 47 10/20/2009 4:38:54 PMDeutsch - 48 Tonwiedergabe mit einem Receiver Sie können die Tonwiedergabe über einen Receiver anstelle des TV-Lautsprechers laufen lassen. 1. Drücken Sie die Taste TOOLS. Drücken Sie die Taste ENTERE, um Anynet+ (HDMICEC) auszuwählen. 2. Wählen Sie mit den Tasten ▲ oder ▼ die Option Receiver. Drücken Sie die Taste ◄ oder ►, um Ein oder Aus zu wählen. N Wenn Ihr Receiver nur Audiosignale unterstützt, wird er in der Geräteliste möglicherweise nicht angezeigt. N Der Receiver kann eingesetzt werden, wenn Sie den optischen Eingang des Receivers mit dem optischen Ausgang des Fernsehgeräts verbunden haben. N Wenn der Receiver (Heimkinosystem) angeschaltet ist, können Sie den Ton so hören, wie er vom optischen Ausgang der Fernsehgeräts zur Verfügung gestellt wird. Wenn das Fernsehgerät ein (terrestrisches) DTV-Signal anzeigt, überträgt das Fernsehgerät 5.1-Kanalton an den Receiver des Heimkinosystems. Wenn es sich bei der Signalquelle um eine digitale Komponente wie beispielsweise einen DVD-Player handelt, der über HDMI an das Fernsehgerät angeschlossen ist, kann der Receiver des Heimkinosystems nur 2-Kanalton wiedergeben. N Bei Verwendung von Media Play wird der Ton über den Receiver möglicherweise nicht korrekt ausgegeben. N Bei Betrieb über den Empfänger bestehen Einschränkungen hinsichtlich der PIP-Funktion und der Menüs für die Audfiofunktionen (MTS, bevorzugte Sprache). N Wenn es zu einer Unterbrechnung der Stromversorgung des Fernsehgeräts kommt, wenn der Empfänger angeschaltet (Ein) ist (z. B. durch Herausziehen des Netzkabels oder einen Stromausfall), ist möglicherweise Lautsprecher auswählen auf Ext. Lautsprecher gesetzt, wenn Sie das Fernsehgerät wieder anschalten. (siehe Seite 21) Fehlerbehebung für Anynet + Symptom Lösung Anynet + funktioniert nicht. • Überprüfen Sie, ob das Gerät Anynet + -tauglich ist. Das Anynet + -System unterstützt nur Anynet + -fähige Geräte. • Schließen Sie nur einen Receiver (Heimkinosystem) an. • Prüfen Sie, ob das Netzkabel des Anynet + -Geräts richtig angeschlossen ist. • Prüfen Sie die Video/Audio/HDMI 1.3-Kabelverbindungen des Anynet + -Geräts. • Prüfen Sie, ob Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) im Setupmenü von Anynet + aktiviert ist Ein. • Überprüfen Sie, ob die Fernbedienung im TV-Modus arbeitet. • Prüfen Sie, ob es sich um eine ausschließlich für Anynet + geeignete Fernbedienung handelt. • Anynet + funktioniert unter bestimmten Umständen nicht. (Kanalsuche, Bedienung von Media Play, Plug&Play usw.) • Stellen Sie nach dem Anschließen oder Entfernen des HDMI 1.3-Kabels sicher, dass die Geräte wieder gesucht werden, oder schalten Sie das TV-Gerät aus und wieder ein. • Überprüfen Sie, ob die Anynet + -Funktion des Anynet + -Geräts eingeschaltet ist. Ich möchte Anynet + starten. • Prüfen Sie, ob das Anynet + -Gerät ordnungsgemäß an das Fernsehgerät angeschlossen ist, und kontrollieren Sie zudem, ob Anynet + (HDMICEC) im Setupmenü von Anynet+ aktiviert (Ein) ist. • Drücken Sie die TV-Taste auf der TV-Fernbedienung, um zu TV zu wechseln. Drücken Sie dann die TOOLS-Taste, um das Anynet + -Menü anzuzeigen und die gewünschte Menüoption auszuwählen. Ich möchte Anynet+ beenden. • Wählen Sie im Anynet + -Menü die Option Fernsehen. • Drücken Sie die Taste SOURCE auf der TV-Fernbedienung, und wählen Sie ein Gerät, bei dem es sich nicht um ein Anynet + handelt. (Beachten Sie, dass die Kanaltaste nur funktioniert, wenn kein in den Tuner integriertes Anynet + -Gerät angeschlossen ist.) Die Meldung “Connecting to Anynet + -Gerät (Verbinden mit Anynet + -Gerät) wird angezeigt. • Sie können die Fernbedienung nicht verwenden, während Sie Anynet + konfigurieren oder in einen anderen Anzeigemodus wechseln. • Verwenden Sie die Fernbedienung, wenn das Konfigurieren von Anynet + oder das Ändern des Anzeigemodus abgeschlossen ist. Keine Wiedergabe mit dem Anynet + - Gerät. • Die Wiedergabefunktion kann nicht verwendet werden, wenn der Plug & Play-Vorgang läuft. Das angeschlossene Gerät wird nicht angezeigt. • Prüfen Sie, ob das Gerät die Anynet + -Funktionen unterstützt. • Prüfen Sie, ob das HDMI 1.3-Kabel ordnungsgemäß angeschlossen wurde. • Prüfen Sie, ob Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) im Setupmenü von Anynet+ aktiviert (Ein) wurde. • Suchen Sie noch mal nach Anynet+-Geräten. • Sie können Anynet + -Geräte nur mithilfe eines HDMI 1.3-Kabels verbinden. Einige HDMI-Kabel unterstützen möglicherweise keine Anynet + -Funktionen. • Wenn es durch eine Störung (z. B. Trennen des HDMI-Kabels, des Netzkabels oder Stromausfall) zu einer Beendigung kommt, wiederholen Sie die Gerätesuche. Das Fernsehprogramm kann nicht aufgezeichnet werden. • Prüfen Sie, ob der Antennenstecker des Aufnahmegeräts ordnungsgemäß angeschlossen ist. Die Ausgabe des Fernsehtons erfolgt über den Receiver. • Schließen Sie das Glasfaserkabel an das Fernsehgerät und den Receiver an. U Navig. EEingabe R Zurück Fernsehen Geräteliste Aufnahme : DVDR DVDR MENU DVDR INFO Empfänger : Ein Einstellungen BN68-02333J-GER.indb 48 10/20/2009 4:38:55 PMDeutsch - 49 Aktivieren der Content Library Mit der Content Library können Sie die Inhalte im Fernsehgerät oder auf dem USBSpeicher anzeigen und abspielen. 1. Drücken Sie die MENU-Taste. Wählen Sie durch Drücken der Tasten ▲ oder ▼ die Option Anwendung, und drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE. 2. Wählen Sie durch Drücken der Tasten ▲ oder ▼ die Option Content Library, und drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE. Das Hauptmenü der Content Library wird angezeigt. O Drücken Sie die CONTENT-Taste auf der Fernbedienung, um das Hauptmenü der Content Library anzuzeigen. 3. Drücken Sie die Taste ◄ oder ►, um eines der Symbole (Galerie, Kochen, Kinder, Wellness, Andere, Management der Inhalte) auszuwählen, und drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE. N Das ausgewählte Element wird wiedergegeben. ❑ Verwenden der Fernbedienungstasten im Menü Content Library Taste Vorgang ▲/▼/◄/► Cursor bewegen und Elemente auswählen. ENTERE Markiertes Element auswählen. RETURN Zurück zum vorherigen Menü. EXIT Beenden Sie die aktuelle Funktion und kehren Sie zum Hauptmenü der Content Library zurück. Farbtasten Die Schaltflächen für Funktionen werden auf den entsprechenden Seiten beschrieben. Sie können die Lautstärke der wiedergegebenen Inhalte einstellen. CONTENT Starten oder beenden Sie den Content Library Modus. N Wenn Sie die Lautstärketaste oder MMUTE drücken, wird kein Bildschirmmenü angezeigt, aber die Funktion wird entsprechend ausgeführt. N Um in den TV-Modus zurückzuwechseln, drücken Sie auf der Fernbedienung die Taste P . N DIE CONTENT LIBRARY ENTHÄLT NUR TEXTE, GRAFIKEN, BILDER, MULTIMEDIA UND WEITERE MATERIALIEN FÜR INFORMATIONS- UND SONSTIGE ZWECKE. DAS MATERIAL IN DER CONTENT LIBRARY WURDE GEÄNDERT UND WIRD STÄNDIG ÜBERARBEITET UND AKTUALISIERT. DAS MATERIAL IN DER CONTENT LIBRARY IST NICHT UNBEDINGT FÜR JEDES PUBLIKUM GEEIGNET. N DIE INFORMATIONEN IN DER CONTENT LIBRARY WERDEN OHNE MÄNGELGEWÄHR ZUR VERFÜGUNG GESTELLT. OBWOHL DIE IHNEN IN DER CONTENT LIBRARYOBWOHL DIE IHNEN IN DER CONTENT LIBRARY ZU VERFÜGUNG GESTELLTEN INHALTE VON QUELLEN STAMMEN ODER ZUSAMMENGESTELLT WERDEN, DIE WIR FÜR ZUVERLÄSSIG ERACHTEN, KANN UND WILL SAMSUNG KEINE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG ÜBERNEHMEN FÜR DIE RICHTIGKEIT, GÜLTIGKEIT, PÜNKTLICHKEIT, LEGALITÄT ODER VOLLSTÄNDIGKEIT DER INFORMATIONEN ODER DATEN, DIE FÜR EINEN BESTIMMTEN ZWECK ZUR VERFÜGUNG GESTELLT WERDEN. UNTER KEINEN UMSTÄNDEN (AUCH NICHT BEI FAHRLÄSSIGKEIT) HAFTEN SAMSUNG ODER DER RECHTEINHABER VERTRAGLICH ODER GESETZLICH FÜR DIREKTE ODER INDIREKTE SCHÄDEN, FÜR NEBENSCHÄDEN UND FOLGESCHÄDEN,ANWALTSGE BÜHREN, AUSLAGEN UND SONSTIGE SCHÄDEN, DIE ALS FOLGE VON ODER IM ZUSAMMENHANG MIT SOLCHEN INFORMATIONEN AUS DER CONTENT LIBRARY ODER DEREN VERWENDUNG AUFTRETEN. DIES IST AUCH DANN DER FALL, WENN SAMSUNG AUF DIE MÖGLICHKEIT SOLCHER SCHÄDEN HINGEWIESEN WURDE. Content Library Anwendung Media Play (USB & DLNA) Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) Content Library Internet@TV Home-Network-Center < > Kochen Kinder Galerie Galerie Content Library Wellness Andere Zurück Beenden BN68-02333J-GER.indb 49 10/20/2009 4:38:56 PMDeutsch - 50 Verwenden der Bibliothek der Inhalte ❑ Galerie Mit dieser Funktion starten Sie eine Diashow mit hochauflösenden Bildern und Hintergrundmusik. Mithilfe der Galeriefunktion Ihres Fernsehgeräts können Sie die Atmosphäre Ihres Heims ändern. N Wenn Sie auf die INFO-Taste drücken, werden der Name des Künstlers sowie genaue Informationen zu jedem Bild angezeigt (zurzeit liegen Informationen nur auf Englisch vor). N Sie können diese Diashow jederzeit durch Drücken der ENTERE-Taste anhalten. N Das Urheberrecht für die Inhalte der Galerie sowie die weiteren entsprechenden Rechte sind Timespace / JoongAng M&B, Inc. vorbehalten. ❑ Kochen Hiermit öffnen Sie verschiedene Rezepte, die Sie dann schrittweise befolgen können. Freuen Sie sich auf diese Inhalte, denn so erhalten Sie zahlreiche Anregungen für gutes Essen. N Die Rezepte aus dem Abschnitt Kochen auf dem Samsung-Fernseher basieren auf den von Anness Publishing veröffentlichten Rezepten. N Das Urheberrecht für die Inhalte unter “Kochen” sowie die weiteren entsprechenden Rechte sind Practical Pictures vorbehalten. ❑ Kinder Hierbei handelt sich um Lerninhalte und interaktive Inhalte, die Kinder regelmäßig schauen dürfen. Freuen Sie sich auf die Geschichten, Songs und Spiele mit Boowa und Kwala. N Das Urheberrecht für die Inhalte unter “Kinder” sowie die weiteren entsprechenden Rechte sind UpToTen vorbehalten. ❑ Wellness Diese nützlichen Inhalte für die Gesundheitspflege umfassen Dehnübungen und Musik, die Ihrer ganzen Familie gut tun. ❑ Management der Inhalte „ Eigene Inhalte Die Verwendung der Inhalte erfolgt in gleicher Weise wie die der Inhalte im Fernsehgerät. Auch können Sie verschiedene Inhalte löschen und widergeben. „ USB Sie können Inhalte auf einen USB-Speicher herunterladen und diese auf Ihrem Fernsehgerät abspielen. Der Inhalt des externen USB-Geräts wird direkt abgespielt. N Media Play unterstützt ausschließlich USB-Massenspeichergeräte vom Typ MSC (Mass Storage Class). MSC-Geräte sind Massenspeicher zur Übertragung von Daten. Beispiele für MSC sind Thumb-Laufwerke und Flash Card-Lesegeräte sowie USB HDD (USB-HUB wird nicht unterstützt). N Wenn Sie ein Spiel mit einem externen SB-Speicher spielen, können Sie (je nach Spiel) Ihre Spieldaten speichern. Entfernen Sie niemals den USB-Speicher, solange Daten gespeichert werden, da auf diese Weise Daten verloren gehen können. N Herunterladen neuer Inhalte Neue bzw. andere als die eingebauten Inhalte können Sie kostenlos über die Website Samsung.com beziehen. Wenn Sie kostenpflichtige Inhalte herunterladen, benötigen Sie dafür die UDN-Nummer. Überprüfen Sie vor dem Herunterladen eines neuen Inhaltselements die UDN-Nummer. 1. Wechseln Sie zur Website unter www.samsung.com. 2. Wählen Sie auf der Seite zum Herunterladen von Inhalten einen Inhaltsbereich aus. 3. Laden Sie den Inhalt auf den USB-Speicher. 4. Wechseln Sie zum Hauptmenü der Content Library. Drücken Sie dazu auf die CONTENT-Taste oder wählen Sie Content Library (Menü → Anwendung → Content Library). 5. Stecken Sie den USB-Speicher in den USB-Anschluss seitlich am Fernsehgerät. 6. Sie können das Unterelement des Inhalts anzeigen, das Sie heruntergeladen haben. 7. Wählen Sie ein Inhaltselement aus und drücken Sie die Eingabetaste. 8. Sie können das gewählte Inhaltselement abspielen. „ Einrichtung • Laufzeit für Bildschirmschoner → 10min. / 20min. / 40min. / 1 Stunde Wählen Sie die Wartezeit bis zum Aktivieren des Bildschirmschoners. • UDN speichern (UDN = Eindeutige Gerätenummer) Bei der angezeigten 18-stelligen Zahl handelt es sich um die Gerätenummer. Sie können die USN auf Ihrem USB-Speicher ablegen. N NTFS-formatierte USB-Speicher unterstützen keine Möglichkeiten, um UDN zu speichern. Wir empfehlen, ein USBSpeichergerät mit FAT-Formatierung zu verwenden. BN68-02333J-GER.indb 50 10/20/2009 4:38:57 PMDeutsch - 51 Sie können verschiedene Internetdienste mit nützlichen Informationen und Unterhaltungsinhalten verwenden. Bei Problemen mit einem Widget-Dienst wenden Sie sich an den Anbieter der Inhalte. Drücken Sie im Widget die grüne Taste, um Kontaktinformationen abzurufen, oder lesen Sie auf der Hilfe-Website, um Informationen über Dienstanbieter zu erhalten. N Je nach Region wird möglicherweise nur Englisch als Sprache des Widget unterstützt. N Diese Funktion wird, je nach Land, möglicherweise nicht unterstützt. Erste Schritte mit Internet@TV Internet@TV ist ein integrierter Internet- und Fernsehspaß auf der Grundlage der Yahoo! ® Widget Engine. Mit dem Internet@ TV-Dienst Ihres Fernsehgeräts können Sie Aktienkurse im Auge behalten, Fotos mit Freunden und der Familie austauschen und aktuelle Nachrichten oder Wetterinformationen abrufen. N Je nach Netzwerkzustand ist diese Funktion möglicherweise nicht verfügbar. Dann wird das Fernsehgerät automatisch abgeschaltet. Schalten Sie anderenfalls das Fernsehgerät mit der Netztaste aus. N Aufgrund der Netzwerkbedingungen kann es bei dieser Funktion zu Verzögerungen oder Unterbrechungen kommen. Wenn Sie Internet@TV erstmals starten, wird die Grundeinstellung automatisch durchgeführt. N Zuerst müssen Sie Ihr Netzwerk einrichten. Weitere Informationen zum Konfigurieren Ihres Netzwerks finden Sie unter “Eingang einrichten”. N Sobald Ihr Netzwerk bereit ist, werden Sie von der Software für Internet@TV Schritt für Schritt durch einen Installationsassistenten geführt. Internet@TV Alle über dieses Geräte abrufbaren Inhalte und Dienste gehören Dritten und sind durch gewerbliche Schutzrechte und insbesondere durch Urheberrechte, Patentrechte und Marken geschützt. Die Inhalte und Dienste sind ausschließlich für Ihren persönlichen und nicht für den kommerziellen Gebrauch bestimmt. Sie dürfen die Inhalte und die Dienste ohne die Einwilligung des Rechteinhabers nur in der autorisierten Weise nutzen. Ungeachtet des Vorstehenden, dürfen Sie ohne die ausdrückliche Einwilligung des jeweiligen Rechteinhabers oder des Service-Providers, die Inhalte oder Dienste weder verändern, kopieren, erneut veröffentlichen, hochladen, zum Abruf bereit halten, versenden, übertragen, übersetzen, verkaufen, Bearbeitungen davon herstellen, verwerten oder verbreiten, unabhängig davon, in welcher Art und Weise oder über welches Medium der Inhalt oder die Dienste mit Hilfe dieses Gerätes angezeigt werden. DIE INHALTE UND DIENSTE WERDEN VON DRITTEN ZUR VERFÜGUNG GESTELLT. SAMSUNG ÜBERNIMMT WEDER AUSDRÜCKLICH NOCH STILLSCHWEIGEND GEWÄHR FÜR DIE BEREITSTELLUNG DER INHALTE ODER DIENSTE. SAMSUNG SCHLIESST AUSDRÜCKLICH JEDE STILLSCHWEIGENDE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG AUS UND INSBESONDERE JEDE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG FÜR DIE MARKTÜBLICHKEIT ODER DIE EIGNUNG FÜR EINEN BESTIMMTEN ZWECK. SAMSUNG STEHT WEDER FÜR DIE FEHLERFREIHEIT, GÜLTIGKEIT, ZEITGERECHTIGKEIT, RECHTMÄSSIGKEIT ODER VOLLSTÄNDIGKEIT DES INHALTS ODER DER DIENSTE EIN, DIE ÜBER DIESES GERÄT ZUR VERFÜGUNG GESTELLT WERDEN; UNTER KEINEN UMSTÄNDEN UND INSBESONDERE AUCH NICHT IM FALLE DER FAHRLÄSSIGKEIT, GLEICH OB AUS VERTRAG ODER DELIKT, HAFTET SAMSUNG FÜR UNMITTELBARE ODER MITTELBARE SCHÄDEN, FOLGESCHÄDEN, ANWALTSGEBÜHREN, AUFWENDUNGEN ODER IRGENDWELCHE ANDEREN SCHÄDEN, DIE DURCH ODER IN ZUSAMMENHANG MIT INFORMATIONEN ENTSTEHEN ODER DIE AUS DER BENUTZUNG DER INHALTE ODER DER DIENSTE DURCH SIE ODER DRITTE ENTSTEHEN, SELBST WENN SAMSUNG AUF DIE MÖGLICHKEIT EINES SCHADENS HINGEWIESEN WORDEN IST. Dienste Dritter können jederzeit beendet oder unterbrochen werden und Samsung steht weder dafür ein noch gewährleistet sie, dass Inhalte oder Dienste über einen Zeitraum dauerhaft verfügbar bleiben. Inhalte und Dienste werden von Dritten über Netzwerke und Übertragungseinrichtungen übertragen auf die Samsung keinen Zugriff hat. Bezüglich der Inhalte und Dienste, die durch diese Geräte zugänglich gemacht werden schließt Samsung daher insbesondere jede Verantwortung und Haftung aus, die durch eine Unterbrechung oder Aussetzung eines Inhalts oder eines Dienstes verursacht wird. Samsung ist für Kundendienst in Verbindung mit Inhalten oder Diensten weder verantwortlich noch haftbar. Alle Anfragen und Fragen zu den Inhalten oder Diensten sind unmittelbar gegenüber dem jeweiligen Service-Provider für diese Inhalte oder Dienste geltend zu machen. In jedem Falle haftet Samsung gegenüber seinen Kunden für eine leicht fahrlässige Verletzung wesentlicher Pflichten aus dem Schuldverhältnis nur der Höhe nach begrenzt auf die bei Vertragsabschluss typischerweise vorhersehbaren Schäden. Darüber hinaus übernimmt Samsung keine Haftung für eine leicht fahrlässige Verletzung nicht wesentlicher Pflichten aus dem Schuldverhältnis sowie für leichte Fahrlässigkeit im Übrigen und für Ansprüche, die darauf beruhen, dass ein Mangel bereits bei Abschluss des Vertrages vorhanden war. Die Haftungsbeschränkung schränkt eine gesetzlich zwingende Haftung nach dem Produkthaftungsgesetz oder eine Haftung für Garantien und eine Haftung für schuldhaft verursachte Körperschäden nicht ein. 1. Drücken Sie die Taste MENU. Wählen Sie durch Drücken der Tasten ▲ oder ▼ die Option “Application”, und drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE. 2. Wählen Sie durch Drücken der Tasten ▲ oder ▼ die Option Internet@TV, und drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE. N INTERNET@TV wird gestartet. O Drücken Sie die Taste INTERNET@ auf der Fernbedienung, um das INTERNET@TV-Menü anzuzeigen. 3. Der General Disclaimer wird auf dem Bildschirm angezeigt. Wählen Sie I accept oder I do not accept. N Weitere Informationen zum General Disclaimer finden Sie unter ‘Legal Notice’. 4. Der Begrüßungsbildschirm ist der Einstieg in die geführte Einrichtung von Internet@TV. N Wenn Sie Exit Setup wählen, wird dieser Schritt noch einmal ausgeführt, wenn Sie die Taste INTERNET@ drücken. N Wählen Sie Let’s get started! 5. Anhand Ihrer Standortauswahl passen die TV-Widgets die Inhalte regional an. N Wählen Sie Ihr Land aus der Liste aus. 6. Damit Sie Internet@TV nutzen können, müssen Sie die “Datenschutzrichtlinie für das Yahoo!® TV Widget System” akzeptieren. N Wählen Sie OK, I Accept. BN68-02333J-GER.indb 51 10/20/2009 4:38:58 PMDeutsch - 52 7. Damit Sie Internet@TV nutzen können, müssen Sie die “Nutzungsbedingungen für das Yahoo!® TV Widget System” akzeptieren. N Wählen Sie OK, I Accept. 8. Geben Sie Ihren Namen ein, um Ihr Profil anzulegen. Jedes Profil verfügt über eine eigene Widget-Liste. Sie können für jede Person, die Internet@TV nutzt, ein eigenes Profil erstellen. N Geben Sie Ihren Namen ein und wählen Sie Save this name. N Weitere Informationen finden Sie auf Seite ‘Using the Profile Widget’. 9. Internet@TV testet die Netzwerkverbindung. N Wenn der Test fehlschlägt, müssen Sie Ihr Netzwerk neu konfigurieren. N Weitere Informationen finden Sie auf Seite ‘Setting the Network.’ 10. Die geführte Einrichtung ist abgeschlossen. Anschließend wird eine Schulung zur Verwendung von Internet@TV gestartet. N Wählen Sie Continue, um die Schulung anzuzeigen. N Wählen Sie Exit setup, um Internet@TV sofort zu nutzen. N Um die Schulung noch einmal auszuführen, wählen Sie Profile Widget → System Setting → Repeat Tutorial. 11. PDrücken Sie die Taste INTERNET@ auf der Fernbedienung, um die Benutzerschnittstelle von Internet@TV anzuzeigen. ❑ Bildschirmmenüs „ Verankerte Fenster 1 Nun wird das Begrüßungsfenster mit Ihrem Profilnamen in der oberen rechten Ecke angezeigt. N Warten Sie einen Augenblick, bis das Fenster geschlossen wird. 2 Im Begrüßungsbildschirm werden zwei Fernbedienungstasten hervorgehoben. N Wenn Sie auf Ihrer Fernbedienung die blaue Taste (Viewport) drücken, wechelt die Anzeige zwischen Anzeigefenster und OverlayModus. Bei Verwendung des Anzeigefensters werden Fernseh- und Videosignale in einem verkleinerten Anzeigefenster neben der Grafikanzeige dargestellt. Im Overlay- Modus wird die Grafik oberhalb des Fernseh- oder Videobilds angezeigt. N Wenn Sie auf Ihrer Fernbedienung die gelbe Taste (Edit Snippet) drücken, wird ein Hilfefenster angezeigt und das aktive Snippet kann bearbeitet werden. 3 Drücken Sie zum Starten auf Ihrer Fernbedienung die Taste INTERNET@. N Die horizontale Liste unten auf Ihrem Fernsehbildschirm wird als das Dock bezeichnet. N Die Elemente dieser Liste sind die sog. Snippets. N Bei einem Snippet handelt es sich um ein Element, das ein Fernseh-Widget startet. N Ein Fernseh-Widget ist eine Internetanwendung, die auf Ihrem Fernseher laufen soll. N Sie können über die Tasten ◄ oder ► auf der Fernbedienung zwischen den Snippets wechseln. N Aktiviert ist der äußerst linke Bereich (blau hervorgehoben). N Im Dock werden die Snippets unter diesen Brennpunkt verschoben. N Sie starten ein Fernseh-Widget durch Drücken der ENTERE-Taste auf der Fernbedienung, wenn das zugehörige Snippet aktiviert ist. N Wenn Sie Snippets hinzufügen, werden diese als Stapel angezeigt, in dem Sie mit den Tasten ▲ und ▼ navigieren können. N Es gibt im Dock zwei spezielle Fernseh-Widgets : das Profile Widget und das Gallery Widget. Diese beiden können nicht gelöscht werden. N Das Dock wird nach einer gewissen Zeit aus der Anzeige herausgeschoben. „ Sidebar mode 1 Aktivieren Sie ein Snippet und drücken Sie die ENTERE-Taste, um die Sidebar mit den Fernseh- Widgets zu öffnen. Das ( ) des FernsehWidget und das Home-Symbol befinden sich oben auf der Sidebar. 2 Das aktuelle Menü wird unterhalb vom Logo für das Fernseh-Widget angezeigt. N Wenn Sie zum vorherigen Bildschirm wechseln möchten, wählen Sie diesen und drücken Sie anschließend auf ENTERE. N YSie können aber auch die Taste RETURN auf der Fernbedienung drücken. 3 CDie aktuelle Auswahl wird immer in blauer Farbe hervogehoben. Die markierte Taste ist aktiviert und durch Drücken von ENTERE führen Sie die entsprechende Funktion aus. 4 Wenn viele Daten vorhanden sind, gibt es eine Navigation. N Es werden die aktuelle Seite und die Gesamtzahl der Seiten angezeigt. N Wechseln Sie durch Drücken von ◄ oder ► von einer Seite zur anderen. 5 Auf der unteren Symbolleiste befinden sich Farbschaltflächen, die der roten, grünen, gelben und blauen Taste der Fernbedienung entsprechen. • Rote Taste : Widget schließen. • Grüne Taste : Einstellungen des Widget ändern. • Gelbe Taste : Snippets verwalten. • Blaue Taste : Größe des Videos an das Fenster anpassen oder als Vollbild anzeigen. N Je nach Widget sind manche Schaltflächen möglicherweise nicht verfügbar. .@# áëí space a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - BN68-02333J-GER.indb 52 10/20/2009 4:39:00 PMDeutsch - 53 Bearbeiten von Snippets im Dock 1. Sie können ein Snippet bearbeiten, indem Sie es im Dock aktivieren und dann die gelbe Taste drücken. 2. Das Snippet wechselt dann an zweite Stelle und sein Feld bewegt sich nach oben, sodass der folgende Hilfetext angezeigt wird : • Löschen (rote Taste) : Fernseh-Widget entfernen. N Gelöschte Widgets können Sie mit Hilfe der Widget Gallery neu installieren. • Verschieben (blaue Taste) : Snippets neu anordnen. Drücken Sie zum Blättern die Taste ◄ oder ►. Drücken Sie die gelbe Taste, um das Widget an der neuen Stelle einzufügen. • Fertig (gelbe Taste) : Schließen des Menüs Edit Snippet. Verwenden des Profil-Widget Mit dem Profil-Widget konfigurieren Sie Ihr Benutzerprofil. Sie können mehrere Profile einrichten, in denen jeweils eine bestimmte Kombination von Widgets verwaltet wird. Mit dem Menü Switch Profile können Sie zu einem anderen Benutzerprofil wechseln. N Wenn Sie ein Profil hinzufügen möchten, schlagen Sie im Abschnitt ‘Administrative Controls’ nach. Mit HIlfe des Menüs Profile Settings können Sie Profile individuell anpassen und schützen. • Sie können Benutzerprofilen einen eindeutigen Namen und einen Avatar (ein Bild zur Darstellung des Profils) zuordnen. • Der Name und der Avatar des Profils werden im Profil-Snippet im Dock angezeigt. • Sie können Profile mit Hilfe von Create Profile PIN schützen. N Wenn Sie den PIN-Code erstmals festlegen, können Sie eine Sicherheitsfrage festlegen. Mit Hilfe des Menüs für die Profileinstellungen können Sie den Zugriff auf Widgets einschränken. • Wenn Sie Ihre Profile PIN vergessen, können Sie die Security Question beantworten, die mit Ihrem Profil verbunden ist. • Wenn Sie ein Profil beschränken, können Sie keine neuen Widgets installieren. Die Eigentümer-PIN muss festgelegt sein, um diese Funktion verwenden zu können. N Informationen zum Festlegen der Eigentümer-PIN finden Sie unter ‘Administrative Controls’. Mit Hilfe des Menüs System Settings können Sie : • Ihren Location und Ihre Zip Code (nur USA) einstellen, um die Inhalte an Ihre Region anzupassen. • Die Schulung wiederholen, die bei der geführten Einrichtung angezeigt wurde. • Die Option Restore Factory Settings verwenden, um alle Einstellungen und Informationen für das Widget zu löschen. Mit Hilfe des Menüs Administrative Controls können Sie : • Den Timeout für den Screen Saver einstellen, um das Einbrennen des Bildschirms zu verhindern. • Eine Eigentümer-PIN und eine Security Question eingeben, um andere Profile zu kontrollieren. • Ein neues Profile Create, das mit einer eigenen Kombination von Widgets ausgestattet werden kann. • Ein vorhandenes Profil Remove. Vom Profil-Widget aus können Sie sich mit Ihrer Yahoo!-Kennung bei Sign in to Yahoo!® anmelden. • Wenn Sie über eine Yahoo!-Kennung verfügen, können Sie mit den Fernseh-Widgets von Yahoo! auf Ihre individuellen Inhalte zugreifen. • Wenn Sie sich mit Ihrer Yahoo!-Kennung anmelden, werden automatisch alle Fernseh-Widgets von Yahoo! installiert. • Wenn Sie kein Yahoo!-Konto besitzen, besuchen Sie www.yahoo.com und legen Sie ein Konto an. • Möglicherweise können Sie sich in einem Land, das Internet@TV nicht unterstützt, nicht mit einer auf der Yahoo-Website erstellten Kennung anmelden. ❑ Informationen zum Profil-Widget Drücken Sie die grüne Taste. Sie können eine kurze Beschreibung des Profile Widget, der Copyright Policy und der Terms of Service sowie der Privacy Policy anzeigen. BN68-02333J-GER.indb 53 10/20/2009 4:39:00 PMDeutsch - 54 Verwenden der Yahoo!®-Widget-Galerie Verwenden Sie die Yahoo!®-Widget-Galerie, um weitere Widgets zu Ihrem Fernsehgerät hinzuzufügen. Zeigen Sie alle verfügbaren Fernseh-Widgets in den folgenden Kategorien an : • Latest Widgets : Anzeigen der zuletzt hochgeladenen Widgets. • Yahoo!® Widgets : Anzeigen der Widgets von Yahoo!®. • Samsung Widgets : Anzeigen der Widgets von Samsung. • More Categories : Anzeigen aller Widgets nach Kategorien. N Um ein Widget zu installieren, navigieren Sie zum Detailfenster und wählen Sie Add Widget to My Profile. Drücken Sie dann auf ENTERE. Das Widget wird installiert und steht im Dock zur Verfügung. ❑ Einstellungen für die Widget Gallery Drücken Sie die grüne Taste. „ About Yahoo! Widget Gallery... Sie können eine kurze Beschreibung der Widget Gallery, Copyright Policy, Terms of Service und der Privacy Policy anzeigen. Mit Hilfe des Menüs für die Entwicklereinstellungen können Sie ein eigenes Widget erstellen. Weitere Informationen zum Erstellen eigener Widgets finden Sie auf unserer Entwickerwebsite unter http://connectedtv.yahoo.com/ Verwenden des Wetter-Widget von Yahoo!® Mit dem Wetter-Widget von Yahoo!® werden Sie über das Wetter bei Ihnen vor Ort und an einigen bevorzugten Standorten auf dem Laufenden gehalten. Der Inhalt wechselt je nach den Wetterbedingungen. • Drücken Sie die grüne Taste auf der Fernbedienung, um das Einstellungsmenü des Wetter-Widget von Yahoo!® anzuzeigen. • Vom Einstellungsmenü aus können Sie Städte hinzufügen oder entfernen, für die Sie Wetterinformationen anzeigen möchten. Ausgehend vom Menü Settings haben Sie folgende Möglichkeiten : • Add New City Geben Sie den Namen der Stadt ein. Nach Anzeige der Suchergebnisse wählen Sie die gewünschte Stadt und drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE. • Delete City Wählen Sie die Stadt aus der Städteliste aus, die Sie entfernen möchten. Drücken Sie die Taste ENTERE, um das Löschen zu bestätigen. • Wechseln des Temperaturanzeigemodus. Sie können den Temperaturanzeigemodus auf Imperial oder Metric einstellen. Bei Imperial werden beispielsweise Temperaturen in Fahrenheit und bei Metric in Celsius angezeigt. ❑ Erstellen Sie ein Snippet für ihre bevorzugte Stadt • Wählen Sie aus der Startseite des Wetter-Widget von Yahoo!® eine Stadt aus und zeigen Sie dafür detaillierte Wetterinformationen an. • Drücken Sie die gelbe Taste. • Wählen Sie den Menübefehl Add Snippet und drücken Sie auf ENTERE, um diese Stadt als Snippet hinzuzufügen. ❑ Delete des Snippet einer Stadt • Starten Sie das Snippet. • Drücken Sie die gelbe Taste. • Wählen Sie die Menüoption Delete Snippet und drücken Sie ENTERE, um das Snippet zu BN68-02333J-GER.indb 54 10/20/2009 4:39:01 PMDeutsch - 55 Verwenden des Nachrichten-Widget von Yahoo!® Das News-Widget von Yahoo!® zeigt aktuelle Schlagzeilen aus den Bereichen Wirtschaft, Unterhaltung, Politik, Sport, Top Stories und vielen anderen Kategorien an. Wählen Sie eine Kategorie, innerhalb der Kategorie eine Überschrift und sehen Sie dann die dynamisch erstellte Nachrichtenzusammenfassung. Verwenden des Flickr-Widget von Yahoo!® Mit dem Flickr-Widget erhalten Sie beim Fernsehen Zugriff auf die Fotos von Freunden und Verwandten. Genießen Sie Ihre Fotos gemeinsam mit Ihrer Familie in einer Diashow auf Ihrem Großbildschirm. • Personalisieren Sie das Flickr-Widget durch Anmelden mit Ihrer Yahoo!-Kennung. • Detaillierte Anweisungen zum Anmelden finden Sie unter “Verwenden des Profil-Widget”. • Weitere Informationen zu Flickr erhalten Sie auf www.flickr.com. N Mit Your Photos können Sie Fotos anzeigen, die Sie auf der Flickr-Website registriert haben. „ So zeigen Sie Ihre Flickr-Fotos als Diashow an : • Wählen Sie das Miniaturbild eines Fotos und drücken Sie auf die ENTERE -Taste, um die Details zum Foto anzuzeigen. • Wählen Sie den Befehl zum Starten der Diashow und drücken Sie auf die ENTERE-Taste. „ So steuern Sie die Anzeige der Diashow : • Drücken Sie während der Diashow auf die ENTERE-Taste. • Die Miniaturbilder der Fotos werden am unteren Bildschirmrand angezeigt. N Wenn die Diashow-Steuerung angezeigt wird, können Sie die Optionen Pause, Play und Stop verwenden. N Wenn Sie das Menü wählen und auf ENTERE drücken, werden Informationen zum markierten Foto angezeigt. • Mit dem Menü Your Sets können Sie Fotos anzeigen, die Sie in Flickr klassifiziert haben. • Mit dem Menü Explore können Sie in den Fotos auf der Flickr-Website navigieren. Sie können die täglich aktualisierten Fotos anzeigen. • Mit Mark as Favorite oder Remove From Favorite können Sie den Inhalt der bevorzugten Fotos verändern. • Mit dem Befehl Favorite Photos zeigen Sie die Fotos an, die Sie als Favoriten klassifiziert haben. • Mit der Option Your Contacts können Sie neue Fotos von Freunden und Verwandten anzeigen. Mit Your Groups können Sie diejenigen Favoritengruppen von der Flickr-Website auswählen, deren Fotos Sie mit der FlickrCommunity teilen möchten. Um die Einstellungen für das Flickr-Widget von Yahoo!® zu ändern, drücken Sie die grüne Taste Ihrer Fernbedienung. • Mit Time Per Slide steuern Sie die Geschwindigkeit der Diashow. • Mit dem Befehl Repeat starten Sie die Diashow von Anfang an neu, wenn das letzte Bild erreicht ist. BN68-02333J-GER.indb 55 10/20/2009 4:39:02 PMDeutsch - 56 Verwenden des Finanz-Widget von Yahoo!® Mit dem Finanz-Widget von Yahoo!® können Sie aktuellste Nachrichten und Börseninformationen abrufen. Drücken Sie die grüne Taste, um Ihre eigenen Aktien einzurichten. Mit Add New Symbol können Sie den Namen einer neuen Aktie eingeben. • Wählen Sie aus der Liste der Suchergebnisse die Aktie aus, die Sie hinzufügen möchten. Wählen Sie dann das Symbol zum Hinzufügen und drücken Sie die ENTERE-Taste, um sie hinzuzufügen. N Die ausgewählte Aktie wird zur Liste My Stocks hinzugefügt. • Mit dem Menübefehl Import Symbols From Yahoo!® können Sie Ihr Yahoo!® Finance Portfolio abrufen. - Mit dem Befehl Merge Symbols fügen Sie die Symbole auf dem Finanz-Widget von Yahoo!® bei den Symbolen Ihres Portfolios ein. - Mit Replace Symbols löschen Sie die Symbole im Finanz-Widget von Yahoo!® und ersetzen sie durch die Symbole Ihres Portfolios. • Verwenden Sie den Befehl Display Format, um die Anzeige der Aktienkurse auf Value oder Percentage einzustellen. • Erstellen Sie ein Snippet für Ihre bevorzugte Aktie. - Wählen Sie das Aktiensymbol von der Homepage des Finanz-Widget von Yahoo!® und zeigen Sie detaillierte Finanzinformationen an. - Drücken Sie die gelbe Taste. - Wählen Sie Add Snippet und drücken Sie auf ENTERE, um diese Aktie als Snippet hinzuzufügen. • Löschen eines Snippet - Starten Sie das Snippet aus dem Dock. - Drücken Sie die gelbe Taste. - Wählen Sie Delete Snippet und drücken Sie ENTERE, um das Snippet zu löschen. Fehlerbehebung für Internet@TV Problem Mögliche Lösung Einige Widget- Dienste funktionieren nicht. • Wenden Sie sich an den entsprechenden Dienstanbieter. • Drücken Sie im Widget die grüne Taste, um Kontaktinformationen abzurufen, oder lesen Sie auf der Hilfe-Website, um Informationen über Anbieter von Widget-Diensten zu erhalten. • Siehe Hilfe-Website. Die Inhalte mancher Widgets liegen nur in englischer Sprache vor. Wie kann ich die Sprache ändern? • Die Sprache der Widget-Inhalte kann von der Sprache der Benutzerschnittstelle abweichen. Das hängt vom jeweiligen Dienstanbieter ab. Nach dem Zurücksetzen auf die Werkseinstellungen ist der Yahoo Widget-Dienst nicht mehr verfügbar und eine Warnmeldung wird angezeigt. • Nach dem Zurücksetzen auf die Werkseinstellungen schalten Sie das Fernsehgerät aus und wieder ein. Starten Sie dann Internet@TV neu. Ich habe mich im Flickr-Widget bei meinem Konto angemeldet, kann aber meine Bilder nicht sehen. • Wechseln Sie auf die Yahoo-Website und aktivieren Sie Ihr Flickr-Konto unter Ihrer Yahoo!- Kennung. Obwohl ich im Profil-Widget meinen Standort geändert habe, gelten weiterhin die alten Einstellungen. • Schalten Sie Ihr Fernsehgerät aus und wieder ein. Starten Sie dann Internet@TV neu. • Genießen Sie die Widget-Dienste für den geänderten Standort. BN68-02333J-GER.indb 56 10/20/2009 4:39:02 PMDeutsch - 57 Hilfe-Website Land Website Austria www.samsung.com → Produkte → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Belgium www.samsung.com → Producten → televisies → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV www.samsung.com → Produits → téléviseurs → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Czech www.samsung.com → Produkty → televizory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Denmark www.samsung.com → Produkter → stue & soveværelse → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Finland www.samsung.com → Tuotteet → kodinelektroniikka → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV France www.samsung.com → Produits → télévisions → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Germany www.samsung.com → Privatkunden → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Greece www.samsung.com → Προϊόντα → τηλεοράσεις → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Hungary www.samsung.com → Termékek → televíziók → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Ireland www.samsung.com → Products → Television → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Italy www.samsung.com → Prodotti → TV → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Netherlands www.samsung.com → Producten → televisies → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Norway www.samsung.com → Produkter → hverdagsrom & soverom → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Poland www.samsung.com → Produkty → telewizory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Portugal www.samsung.com → Produtos para Consumidores → televisores → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Slovakia www.samsung.com → Produkty → televízory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Spain www.samsung.com → Productos → televisores → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Sweden www.samsung.com → Produkter → vardagsrum & sovrum → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Switzerland www.samsung.com → Produits → télévisions → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV www.samsung.com → Produkte → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV United Kingdom www.samsung.com → Products → Television → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Turkey www.samsung.com → Tüketici Ürünleri → televizyon → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Estonia www.samsung.com → Klientidele → Televiisorid → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Latvia www.samsung.com → Klientiem → Televizori → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Lithuania www.samsung.com → Namams → Televizoriai → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Russia www.samsung.com → Продукты → Телевизоры → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Ukraine www.samsung.com → Потребительские продукты → телевизоры → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV N Der Zugriff kann später geändert werden. N In einigen Ländern können die Links abweichen. BN68-02333J-GER.indb 57 10/20/2009 4:39:03 PMDeutsch - 58 N Diese Funktion wird, je nach Land, möglicherweise nicht unterstützt. N Bei Problemen mit einem Widget-Dienst wenden Sie sich an den Anbieter der Inhalte. Drücken Sie im Widget die grüne Taste, um Kontaktinformationen abzurufen, oder lesen Sie auf der Hilfe-Website, um Informationen über Dienstanbieter zu erhalten. N Je nach Region wird möglicherweise nur Englisch als Sprache des Widget unterstützt. Erste Schritte mit Internet@TV Mit Internet@TV erhalten Sie über eine Netzwerkverbindung Zugriff auf die Widget- Dienste von SAMSUNG. Die Inhalte von Internet@ TV richten sich nach dem Angebot der verschiedenen Anbieter. Sie erhalten mit Internet@TV Zugriff auf verschiedene Information wie z. B. von YouTube. N Wenn die Schriftart für die Inhalte eines bestimmten Anbieters von Ihrem Fernsehgerät nicht unterstützt wird, ist die Darstellung auf der Anzeige möglicherweise gestört. N Die Konfiguration von Widgets und deren Diensten kann sich je nach ausgewähltem Land unterscheiden. Nach dem Wechseln des Landes schalten Sie das Fernsehgerät aus und wieder ein. Danach können Sie den Widget-Dienst des neuen Landes nutzen. Wenn Sie das Land auf “Andere” einstellen, kann das Fernsehgerät Ihr Land nicht erkennen. Treffen Sie Ihre Wahl in diesem Fall direkt aus der Liste der unterstützen Länder heraus. N Weitere Informationen zum Konfigurieren für Ihr Land finden Sie unter “Plug-&-Play-Funktion”. N Aufgrund der Netzwerkbedingungen kann es bei dieser Funktion zu Verzögerungen oder Unterbrechungen kommen. N Ehe Sie Internet@TV verwenden, müssen Sie das Netzwerk einrichten. Weitere Informationen zum Konfigurieren Ihres Netzwerks finden Sie unter “Eingang einrichten”. Wenn Sie Internet@TV erstmals starten, werden die Grundeinstellungen automatisch durchgeführt. Es dauert eine Weile, bis die Aktualisierung beendet ist. 1. Drücken Sie die MENU-Taste. Wählen Sie durch Drücken der Tasten ▲ oder ▼ die Option Application (Anwendung), und drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE. 2. Wählen Sie durch Drücken der Tasten ▲ oder ▼ die Option Internet@TV, und drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE. O Drücken Sie die Taste Internet@TV auf der Fernbedienung, um das Internet@TV -Menü anzuzeigen. 3. Die Benutzervereinbarung wird angezeigt. Wählen Sie Agree (Ich stimme zu), um der Vereinbarung zuzustimmen. 4. Die Statistiken und Analysen werden angezeigt. Wählen Sie Agree (Ich stimme zu), um der Vereinbarung zuzustimmen. Konfigurieren von Internet@TV Sie können die Menüs für Single Sign On (SSO), Systemmanagement und Eigenschaften verwenden. Drücken Sie die Taste ▲ oder ▼, um Setup (Konfigurieren) auszuwählen, und drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE. ❑ Single Sign On Sie können dieses Menü verwenden, wenn Sie ein Konto erstellen oder löschen. Mit Hilfe von Single Sign On können Sie die Informationen über Ihr Konto und das Konto für die Inhaltssite kontrollieren. Sie brauchen sich nicht noch einmal anzumelden. N Das Konto gilt nur für internet@TV. „ Create Account (Konto erstellen) Sie können ein Konto erstellen und mit der gewünschten Dienstsite verbunden werden. N Sie können maximal 10 Konten erstellen. N Der Name des Kontos sollte maximal 10 Zeichen lang sein. N Wenn es keinen Dienst gibt, für den eine Anmeldung erforderlich ist, können Sie kein Konto erstellen. „ Kontenmanagement • Service Site (Dienstsite) : Sie können die Anmeldeinformation der Dienstsite (wie YouTube) registrieren. • Change Password (Kennwort ändern) : Ändern Sie das Kennwort Ihres Kontos. • Delete (Löschen) : Löschen Sie das Konto. N Um Internet@TV zurückzusetzen, falls Sie das Kennwort Ihres Kontos vergessen haben, drücken Sie die Fernbedienungstasten in der folgenden Reihenfolge : POWER (Aus) → MMUTE → 9 → 4 → 8 → POWER (Ein). Wenn Sie diese Funktion verwenden, werden alle Konten gelöscht Internet@TV BN68-02333J-GER.indb 58 10/20/2009 4:39:03 PMDeutsch - 59 ❑ Systemkonfiguration N Ticker Autorun (Ticker-Autostart), Ticker Duration (Ticker-Anzeigedauer) werden je nach Land möglicherweise nicht unterstützt. „ Kennwort der Dienstsperre ändern. N Der Standard-PIN-Code eines neuen Fernsehgeräts lautet “0-0-0-0”. N Wenn Sie das Kennwort vergessen haben, drücken Sie die Fernbedienungstasten in der folgenden Reihenfolge, um das Kennwort auf “0-0-0-0” zurückzusetzen : POWER (Aus) → MMUTE → 9 → 4 → 8 → POWER (Ein). „ Service Duration (Dienstanzeigedauer) Wählen Sie die Dienstanzeigedauer bis zum Aktivieren des Bildschirmschoners. „ Ticker Autorun (Ticker-Autostart) → Aus / Ein Legen Sie fest, ob der Ticker beim Einschalten des Fernsehers automatisch gestartet wird. „ Ticker Duration (Tickeranzeigedauer) Wählen Sie die Dienstanzeigedauer bis zum Aktivieren des Bildschirmschoners. ❑ Eigenschaften Informationen zu Internet@TV anzeigen. Sie können die Geschwindigkeit Ihres Internet TV-Dienstes mit Messen der Geschwindigkeit von Internet@TV messen. Verwenden des Internet@TV-Dienstes In einem Widget mit mehreren Kategorienmenüs können Sie den Inhalt der Kategorienmenüs mit Hilfe der Tasten ◄ und ► anzeigen. „ Anmeldung beim Konto 1. Drücken Sie die rote Taste. 2. Wählen Sie das gewünschte User account (Benutzerkonto) und drücken Sie dann die ENTERE-Taste. 3. Geben Sie das Kennwort ein. N Nach erfolgreicher Anmeldung wird das Benutzerkonto auf dem Bildschirm angezeigt. N Vor dem Anmelden sollten Sie mindestens ein Konto registriert haben. Wenn Sie ein Konto erstellen möchten, lesen Sie nach unter ‘Konfigurieren von Internet@TV’. „ Verwenden der Widget-Galerie Sie können für das vorhandene Widget Run Service (Dienst starten), Lock (Sperren), Install Service (Dienst installieren) verwenden, und Sie können eine Beschreibung von Widget-Diensten anzeigen, die nicht installiert sind. In Internet@TV können Sie verschiedene Widgets hinzufügen und nutzen, die Ihnen von Dienstanbietern zur Verfügung gestellt werden. Welche Widgets dies sind, hängt von Ihrem Inhaltsanbieter ab. • Run Service (Dienst starten) : Starten des Widget-Dienstes. • Lock (Sperren) : Aktivieren der Dienstsperre. • Install Service (Dienst installieren) (oder Delete Service (Dienst löschen)) : Installieren oder Löschen des Widget-Dienstes. „ Verwenden des YouTube-Widget Sie können Filme von YouTube sehen. Wenn Sie in YouTube ein Konto besitzen, registrieren Sie die Kontoinformationen mit Hilfe des Kontenmanagement. Dann können Sie die Kategorie “Eigene Favoriten” verwenden. N Das Menü kann über einen Webdienst geändert werden. N Es kann Inhalte geben, die für Kinder ungeeignet sind. In diesem Fall verwenden Sie die Funktionen zum Lock (Sperren) in der Widget-Galerie. Xz~*atp‚po _z{*]lpo Xz~*[z{€wl} Xz~*Ot~n€~~po _z{*Qlz€}tp~ Xz~*Wtyvpo Xz~*]p~{zxopo Qpl€}po _zol„ <:B ^ppvtyr*U€~tnp*Opnlop~*Wlp} atp‚~*E*C; M}plvtyr*Yp‚~*Lwp}~*m„*P8Xltw atp‚~*E*C; Mzz*Szz*ty*sp*Mzl}o}zzx atp‚~*E*CE=A „ Change Mode llrrChange page U Move EOK R Return BN68-02333J-GER.indb 59 10/20/2009 4:39:04 PMDeutsch - 60 Fehlerbehebung für Internet@TV Problem Mögliche Lösung Einige Widget-Dienste funktionieren nicht. Wenden Sie sich an den entsprechenden Dienstanbieter. Drücken Sie im Widget die grüne Taste, um Kontaktinformationen abzurufen, oder lesen Sie die Hilfe-Website, um Informationen über Dienstanbieter zu erhalten. Siehe Hilfe-Website. Worin besteht der Vorteil von Single Sign On? Wenn Sie ein Konto erstellen und Ihre Anmeldeinformationen registrieren, erhalten Sie ohne weitere Anmeldung Zugriff auf individualisierte Inhalte. Nach einem Netzwerkfehler kann ich keine Menü außer “Einstellungen” verwenden. Wenn Ihre Netzwerkverbindung nicht aktiv ist, sind Ihre Dienste möglicherweise nur eingeschränkt funktionsfähig. Deshalb können Sie nur die Einstellungen verwenden, um die Internetverbindung wieder zu reparieren. Besteht die Möglichkeit, dass YouTubeInhalte für Erwachsene angezeigt werden? Diese Inhalte werden eigentlich in der Menüliste herausgefiltert. Aber mit der Suchfunktion können sie angezeigt werden. In diesem Fall verwenden Sie die SperrFunktion der Widget-Galerie, um den Dienst zu sperren. Hilfe-Website Land Website Austria www.samsung.com → Produkte → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Belgium www.samsung.com → Producten → televisies → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV www.samsung.com → Produits → téléviseurs → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Czech www.samsung.com → Produkty → televizory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Denmark www.samsung.com → Produkter → stue & soveværelse → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Finland www.samsung.com → Tuotteet → kodinelektroniikka → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV France www.samsung.com → Produits → télévisions → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Germany www.samsung.com → Privatkunden → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Greece www.samsung.com → Προϊόντα → τηλεοράσεις → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Hungary www.samsung.com → Termékek → televíziók → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Ireland www.samsung.com → Products → Television → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Italy www.samsung.com → Prodotti → TV → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Netherlands www.samsung.com → Producten → televisies → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Norway www.samsung.com → Produkter → hverdagsrom & soverom → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Poland www.samsung.com → Produkty → telewizory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Portugal www.samsung.com → Produtos para Consumidores → televisores → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Slovakia www.samsung.com → Produkty → televízory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Spain www.samsung.com → Productos → televisores → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Sweden www.samsung.com → Produkter → vardagsrum & sovrum → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Switzerland www.samsung.com → Produits → télévisions → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV www.samsung.com → Produkte → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV United Kingdom www.samsung.com → Products → Television → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Turkey www.samsung.com → Tüketici Ürünleri → televizyon → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Estonia www.samsung.com → Klientidele → Televiisorid → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Latvia www.samsung.com → Klientiem → Televizori → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Lithuania www.samsung.com → Namams → Televizoriai → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Russia www.samsung.com → Продукты → Телевизоры → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Ukraine www.samsung.com → Потребительские продукты → телевизоры → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV N Der Zugriff kann später geändert werden. N In einigen Ländern können die Links abweichen. BN68-02333J-GER.indb 60 10/20/2009 4:39:04 PMDeutsch - 61 Home-Network-Center Informationen zum Home-Network-Center Das Home-Network-Center verbindet Fernsehgeräte und Mobiltelefone über ein Netzwerk. Sie können die eingegangenen Anrufe, Textnachrichten und Zeitpläne vom Mobiltelefon auf dem Fernseher anzeigen. Verwenden Sie hierfür das Home-Network-Center. Außerdem können Sie die auf Mobiltelefonen gespeicherten Medieninhalte wie Videos, Photos und Musik abspielen, indem Sie sie über das Netzwerk in den Fernseher importieren. N Sofern das Gerät die DLNA DMC (Digital Media Controller)-Funktion unterstützt, ist die Home-Network-Center-Funktion verfügbar. N Diese Funktion soll die Kompatibilität mit einem Samsung-Mobiltelefon sicherstellen, das zu einem späteren Zeitpunkt auf den Markt kommen soll. Weitere Informationen erhalten Sie unter www.samsung.com, oder wenden Sie sich an ein SamsungCallcenter. Auf dem Mobilgerät muss möglicherweise zusätzliche Software installiert werden. Weitere Informationen hierzu finden Sie im jeweiligen Benutzerhandbuch. ❑ Verbinden mit dem Home-Network-Center Weitere Informationen zu den Einstellungen für Ihr Netzwerk finden Sie unter ‘Eingang einrichten’. „ Verbinden mit einem Ad-hoc-Netzwerk im WLAN 1. Schließen Sie den Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter an den USB1(HDD)- oder den USB2-Anschluss des Fernsehgeräts an. 2. Weitere Informationen zum Konfigurieren Ihres Ad-hoc-Netzwerks finden Sie unter Eingang einrichten. N Informationen zum Konfigurieren der Netzeinstellungen des Mobiltelefons finden Sie im Handbuch für das Mobiltelefon. 3. Richten Sie die IP-Adresse, die SSID und das Kennwort für das Mobiltelefon mit Hilfe des Netzwerknamens (SSID) und des Sicherheitsschlüssels (Kennwort) bei den Adhoc- Einstellungen für das Mobiltelefon ein, die auf dem Fernseher angezeigt werden. „ Verbindung über einen IP-Sharer (Kabel/drahtlos) 1. Schließen Sie den LAN-Anschluss des Fernsehgeräts mit dem LAN-Kabel an den IP-Sharer (Kabel/drahtlos) an, oder verbinden Sie den USB1 (HDD) oder USB2- Anschluss des Fernsehgeräts TV mit dem Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter. N Informationen zum Konfigurieren des Sharers (Kabel/drahtlos) und des Mobiltelefons finden Sie im Benutzerhandbuch des entsprechenden Geräts. Home-Network-Center Seitenverkleidung des Fernsehgeräts WLAN-Adapter von Samsung Mobiltelefon oder WLAN-Adapter von Samsung drahtloser IP-Sharer Seitenverkleidung des Fernsehgeräts Mobiltelefon oder LAN-Kabel WLAN-Adapter von Samsung Seitenverkleidung des Fernsehgeräts Mobiltelefon oder LAN-Kabel drahtloser IP-Sharer BN68-02333J-GER.indb 61 10/20/2009 4:39:09 PMDeutsch - 62 Einrichten des Home-Network-Centers ❑ Message / Medien Hiermit zeigen Sie eine Liste der Mobiltelefone an, mit denen Sie die Nachrichten- oder Medienfunktion in Verbindung mit diesem Fernsehgerät verwenden können. N Die Medienfunktion steht auch in anderen Mobilgeräten zur Verfügung, sofern diese DLNA DMC unterstützen. „ Erlaubt Hiermit lassen Sie das Mobiltelefon zu. „ Verboten Hiermit sperren Sie das Mobiltelefon. „ Löschen Hiermit löschen Sie das Mobiltelefon aus der Liste.Mit dieser Funktion wird aber nur der Name aus der Liste entfernt. N Wenn das entfernte Mobilgerät wieder angeschaltet wird oder eine Verbindung zum Fernseher herstellen möchten, wird es möglicherweise wieder in der Liste angezeigt. ❑ Setup „ Message → Ein / Aus Hiermit können Sie bestimmen, ob die Nachrichtenfunktion (eingehende Anrufe, Textnachrichten und Zeitpläne auf dem Mobiltelefon) verwendet werden soll. „ Medien → Ein / Aus Hiermit können Sie wählen, ob die Medienfunktion zum Abspielen der Inhalte (Videos, Fotos, Musik) vom Telefon verwendet werden soll. „ TV-Name Sie können den Namen des Fernsehers so festlegen, dass Sie ihn im Mobilgerät einfach finden können. N Wenn Sie Ben.-Eingabe wählen, können Sie den Namen des Fernsehers mit der Bildschirmtastatur eingeben. Zurück Beenden Home-Network-Center 111-1234-5671 : Autor. 111-1234-5672 : Autor. 111-1234-5673 : Vrboten 111-1234-5674 : Vrboten Message Medien Setup Zurück Beenden Home-Network-Center Message : Ein Medien : Ein TV-Name : TV Message Medien Setup Verwenden der Meldungsfunktion Mit dieser Funktion können Sie die eingegangenen Anrufe, Textnachrichten und Zeitpläne vom Mobiltelefon im Alarmfenster anzeigen, während Sie das Fernsehgerät verwenden. N Um dieses Alarmfenster für die Message zu deaktivieren, stellen Sie bei den Einstellungen des Home-Network-Center die Option Message auf Aus. N Das Alarmfenster erscheint für 20 Sekunden. Wenn Sie keine Taste drücken oder Abbrechen wählen, wird das Fenster im Abstand von 5 Minuten bis zu dreimal angezeigt. N Wenn OK gewählt wird oder wenn OK während der Anzeige der Nachricht nicht dreimal gewählt wird, wird die Nachricht gelöscht. Die Nachricht wird nicht vom Mobiltelefon gelöscht. N Das einfache Alarmfenster kann angezeigt werden, während Sie Anwendungen wie Media Play oder Contents Library usw. verwenden. N Um den Inhalt der Nachricht zu sehen, schalten Sie in diesem Fall auf Fernsehmodus um.Wenn eine Nachricht von einem unbekannten Mobiltelefon angezeigt wird, wählen Sie unter Message im Home-Network-Center das Mobiltelefon und wählen Sie dann Verboten, um das Telefon zu sperren. ❑ Nachrichtenansicht Wenn eine neue Textnachricht (SMS) ankommt, während Sie fernsehen, wird das Alarmfenster geöffnet. Wenn Sie auf OK klicken, wird der Inhalt der Nachricht angezeigt. N Sie können die Anzeigeeinstellungen für den Inhalt von Textnachrichten (SMS) auf dem Mobiltelefon konfigurieren. Anweisungen finden im Handbuch des Mobiltelefons. N Manche Sonderzeichen werden möglicherweise als Leerzeichen oder unlesbar angezeigt. ❑ Alarm bei eingehendem Anruf Wenn ein Anruf eingeht, während Sie fernsehen, wird das Alarmfenster geöffnet. ❑ Kalenderalarm Während Sie fernsehen, wird das Alarmfenster geöffnet, um den registrierten Kalender anzuzeigen. N Sie können die Anzeigeeinstellungen für den Kalender auf dem Mobiltelefon konfigurieren. Anweisungen finden im Handbuch des Mobiltelefons. N Manche Sonderzeichen werden möglicherweise als Leerzeichen oder unlesbar angezeigt. husband SMS Neue Nachricht eingegangen Details anzeigen? OK Abbrechen BN68-02333J-GER.indb 62 10/20/2009 4:39:14 PMDeutsch - 63 Verwenden der Medienfunktion Ein Alarmfenster wird geöffnet, in dem der Benutzer informiert wird, dass die vom Mobiltelefon gesendeten Medieninhalte (Videos, Photos, Musik) auf dem Fernseher angezeigt werden. Der Inhalt wird automatisch 3 Sekunden nach dem Öffnen des Alarmfensters angezeigt. Wenn Sie bei geöffnetem Alarmfenster auf RETURN oder EXIT drücken, werden die Medieninhalte nicht wiedergegeben. N Um die Übertragung von Medieninhalten des Mobiltelefons zu deaktivieren, müssen Sie im Home-Network-Center die Option Medien unter Setup deaktivieren (Aus). N Die Inhalte können je nach Auflösung und Format möglicherweise nicht auf dem Fernseher angezeigt werden. ❑ Regler für Musikwiedergabe Taste Vorgang ◄/► • Cursor bewegen und Elemente auswählen. • Bei der Wiedergabe einer Filmdatei : Schneller Vor- oder Rücklauf durch den Film in Schritten. ENTER • Durch Drücken der ENTERE-Taste während der Wiedergabe wird die Wiedergabe unterbrochen. • Durch Drücken der ENTERE-Taste während der Unterbrechung wird die Wiedergabe fortgesetzt. RETURN Zurück zum vorherigen Menü. EXTRAS Ausführen verschiedener Funktionen aus dem Foto-, Musik- und Filmmenü. INFO Anzeigen von Dateiinformationen. EXIT Beenden des Modus Media Play und Rückkehr in den TV-Modus. N Die Tasten ENTERE und ◄/► sind je nach Medieninhalt möglicherweise deaktiviert. N Sie können die Medienwiedergabe mit dem Mobiltelefon steuern. Weitere Informationen hierzu finden Sie im jeweiligen Benutzerhandbuch. Medienwiedergabe aus “Unbekanntes Gerät 13” BN68-02333J-GER.indb 63 10/20/2009 4:39:15 PMDeutsch - 64 Fortsetzung... Videotextfunktion Die meisten Fernsehsender bieten über Videotext Informationen an. Auf der Videotext- Indexseite finden Sie Verwendungshinweise zum Videotext. Darüber hinaus können Sie über die Tasten der Fernbedienung nach Bedarf verschiedene Optionen einstellen. N Für die korrekte Anzeige von Videotextinformationen muss der Senderempfang einwandfrei sein. Andernfalls können Informationen unvollständig sein oder einige Seiten nicht angezeigt werden. 1 : (exit) Videotextanzeige beenden. 2 6 (index) Drücken Sie diese Taste, um die Videotext-Indexseite (Inhaltsverzeichnis) anzuzeigen. 3 5 (reveal) Drücken Sie diese Taste, um verborgenen Text anzuzeigen (z. B. Antworten bei Quizsendungen). Drücken Sie die Taste erneut, um den Videotext auszublenden. 4 4 (size) Drücken Sie diese Taste, um Videotext in doppelt so großen Buchstaben in der oberen Hälfte des Bildschirms anzuzeigen. Drücken Sie die Taste erneut, um den Text in der unteren Hälfte des Bildschirms anzuzeigen. Zum Ausblenden des Videotextes drücken Sie die Taste erneut. 5 / (teletext on/mix) Drücken Sie diese Taste, um den Videotextmodus zu aktivieren, nachdem Sie einen Sender ausgewählt haben, der Videotext anbietet. Drücken Sie die Taste zweimal, um die Videotextinformationen gleichzeitig mit der aktuellen Sendung auf dem Bildschirm einzublenden. 6 8 (store) Drücken Sie diese Taste, um Videotextseiten zu speichern. 7 1 (sub-page) Drücken Sie diese Taste, um eine verfügbare untergeordnete Seite anzuzeigen. 8 2 (page up) Drücken Sie diese Taste, um die nächste Videotextseite anzuzeigen. 9 3 (page down) Drücken Sie diese Taste, um die vorherige Videotextseite anzuzeigen. 0 0 (mode) Drücken Sie diese Taste, um den Videotextmodus auszuwählen (LISTE/FLOF) Wenn Sie diese Taste im Modus LIST (Liste) drücken, wird in den Listenspeichermodus umgeschaltet. Im Listenspeichermodus können Sie mit der Taste 8(store) Videotextseiten in einer Liste speichern. ! 9 (hold) Drücken Sie diese Taste, um bei einer angezeigten Seite, die mit weiteren, untergeordnete Seiten verknüpft ist, das automatische Umblättern zu verhindern. Drücken Sie zum Fortfahren die Taste erneut. @ 7 (cancel) Drücken Sie diese Taste, um beim Suchen nach einer Seite die Sendung anzuzeigen. # Farbtasten (rot/grün/gelb/blau) Wenn der Sender das FASTEXT-System verwendet, sind die verschiedenen Themen auf den Videotextseiten farbig gekennzeichnet und können mit den Farbtasten auf der Fernbedienung angewählt werden. Drücken Sie die Farbtaste, die dem Thema entspricht, das Sie anzeigen möchten. Die Seite wird mit anderen farbig markierten Informationen angezeigt, die auf dieselbe Art ausgewählt werden können. Drücken Sie die entsprechende Farbtaste, um die vorherige oder nächste Seite anzuzeigen. N Sie können die Videotextseiten durch Drücken der Zifferntasten auf der Fernbedienung wechseln. Empfehlungen für den Betrieb 1 3 4 5 6 2 7 8 9 0 ! @ # BN68-02333J-GER.indb 64 10/20/2009 4:39:15 PMDeutsch - 65 Die Videotextseiten sind in sechs Kategorien unterteilt : Abschnitt Inhalt A Gewählte Seitennummer B Senderkennung C Aktuelle Seitenzahl oder Suchhinweise D Datum und Uhrzeit E Text F Statusinformationen FASTEXT-Informationen. N Videotextinformationen sind oft auf mehrere, aufeinander folgende Seiten verteilt, die wie folgt aufgerufen werden können : - Eingabe der Seitennummer - Auswahl eines Titels in einer Liste - Auswahl einer farbigen Überschrift (FASTEXT-System) O Drücken Sie die Taste TV, um Videotext zu beenden. Spezifikation (VESA) der Wandhalterung Montieren Sie die Wandhalterung an einer soliden Wand, die senkrecht zum Boden steht. Bei Installation auf anderen Trägermaterialien wenden Sie sich bitte an Ihren Fachhändler. Bei Montage an einer Decke oder schrägen Wand kann es herunterfallen und zu Verletzungen kommen. Produktfamilie Zoll VESASpezifikation (A * B) Standard Schraube Menge LCD-TV 19" ~22" 100 * 100 M4 4 23"~29" 200 * 100 30"~40" 200 * 200 M6 46"~55" 400 * 400 57"~70" 800 * 400 M8 80" ~ 1400 * 800 PDP-TV 42"~ 50" 400 * 400 M8 4 58"~ 63" 600 * 400 70" ~ 800 * 400 80" ~ 1400 * 800 N Die von uns empfohlenen Standardabmessungen der Wandhalterung finden Sie in der obigen Tabelle. N Beim Kauf unserer Wandhalterung erhalten Sie ein detailliertes Installationshandbuch sowie alle für die Montage erforderlichen Teile. N Verwenden Sie keine Schrauben, die länger sind als hier angegeben, da damit innen liegende Bauteile des Fernsehers beschädigt werden können. N Bei Wandhalterungen, die nicht der VESA-Standardspezifikation für Schrauben entsprechen, kann die Länge der Schrauben je nach Spezifikation unterschiedlich sein. N Verwenden Sie keine Schrauben, die nicht der VESA-Standardspezifikation für Schrauben entsprechen. Ziehen Sie die Schrauben nicht zu fest an, weil Sie so das Produkt beschädigen könnten oder das Produkt dadurch herunterfallen könnte, was zu Verletzungen führen kann. N Samsung haftet nicht bei derartigen Unfällen.Samsung haftet nicht für Geräteschäden oder Verletzungen, wenn eine Wandhalterung verwendet wird, die nicht dem VESAStandard entspricht oder nicht spezifiziert ist, oder wenn der Verbraucher die Installationsanleitung für das Produkt nicht befolgt. N Unsere 57- und 63-Zoll-Modelle entsprechen nicht der VESA-Spezifikation. Verwenden Sie für dieses Modell deshalb unseren speziellen Wandmontagesatz. N Bei der Montage dieses Fernsehgeräts dürfen Sie eine Neigung von 15 Grad nicht überschreiten. Installieren Sie die Wandhalterung nicht bei angeschaltetem Fernsehgerät. Sie könnten dabei einen Stromschlag erhalten und sich verletzen. BN68-02333J-GER.indb 65 10/20/2009 4:39:16 PMDeutsch - 66 Vorbereitung für die Befestigung der Wandhalterung an der Wand 1. Befestigen Sie die Wandhalterung mit einem Anzugsmoment von maximal 15kgf·cm. Denken Sie daran, dass Bauteile bei einem höheren Anzugsmoment beschädigt werden können. 2. Zum Zubehörsatz gehört ein Haltering [②] zum Befestigen der Wandhalterungen von Drittanbietern am Samsung-Fernseher. (Fall B) N Drehen Sie die Schrauben bis zum Anschlag in die Bohrung [①], wenn Sie die Wandhalterung an der Wand Anbringen. Montieren des Standfußes Achtung Befestigen Sie den Standfuß sicher am Fernseher, ehe Sie ihn bewegen, denn das Gerät könnte herunterfallen und Verletzungen verursachen. N Der Fernseher sollte von mindestens zwei Personen getragen werden. Um Beschädigungen zu vermeiden, legen Sie den Fernseher nie auf den Fußboden. Der Fernseher muss sich immer in aufrechter Position befinden. Verwenden Sie die mitgelieferten Schrauben, um das Fernsehgerät fest mit der Bodenplatte zu verschrauben. (Das Gehäuse Ihres Fernsehers entspricht möglicherweise nicht genau der Abbildung.) Bei Wandinstallation Ihres Fernsehgeräts schließen Sie die Abdeckung (➊) am Verbindungsteil des Standfußes mithilfe der zwei Verblendschrauben. (PS50B650) (PS58B680/PS63B680) Fall A : Installieren der SAMSUNG-Wandhalterung Fall B : Installieren der Wandhalterung eines anderen Anbieters BN68-02333J-GER.indb 66 10/20/2009 4:39:19 PMDeutsch - 67 Das Fernsehgerät kann hinfallen, wenn Sie daran ziehen, es schieben oder darauf klettern. Stellen Sie insbesondere sicher, dass sich keine Kinder an das Gerät hängen oder es aus dem Gleichgewicht bringen. Anderenfalls könnte das Gerät umkippen und schwere Verletzungen oder den Tod verursachen. Beachten Sie alle Anweisungen der beigefügten Sicherheitshinweise. Noch mehr Stabilität erreichen Sie, wenn Sie den Kippschutz installieren. Gehen Sie hierzu folgendermaßen vor. ❑ So verhindern Sie, dass das Fernsehgerät umkippt 1. Stecken Sie die Schrauben durch die Halterungen und befestigen Sie sie fest an der Wand. Vergewissern Sie sich, dass die Schrauben gut halten. N Je nach Ausführung der Wand benötigen Sie zum Befestigen weiteres Material, wie z. B. einen Dübel. N Da die benötigten Halterungen, Schrauben und das Band nicht zum Lieferumfang gehören, müssen Sie diese Teile gesondert erwerben. 2. Entfernen Sie die Schrauben in der Mitte auf der Rückseite des Fernsehgeräts. Setzen Sie diese Schrauben in die Halterungen ein und befestigen Sie die Schrauben dann wieder am Fernsehgerät. N Die Schrauben werden möglicherweise nicht zusammen mit dem Gerät geliefert. 3. Verbinden Sie die Halterungen an der Wand und die Halterung am Fernsehgerät mit einem festen Band miteinander und ziehen Sie das Band dann fest. N Stellen Sie das Fernsehgerät in der Nähe der Wand auf, damit es nicht nach hinten kippen kann. N Es ist noch sicherer, wenn die Halterungen an der Wand niedriger als die Halterungen am Fernsehgerät sind. N Lösen Sie das Band, ehe Sie den Fernsehapparat bewegen. 4. Kontrollieren Sie, ob alle Anschlüsse weiterhin fest verbunden sind. Prüfen Sie regelmäßig die Verbindungen auf Zeichen von Ermüdung oder Versagen. Bei Zweifeln hinsichtlich der Sicherheit Ihrer Halterung wenden Sie sich an einen professionellen Installationsbetrieb. Befestigen des Fernsehgeräts an der Wand Absichern des Einbaubereichs Halten Sie die erforderlichen Abstände zwischen dem Gerät und anderen Objekten (z.B. Wänden) ein, um ausreichende Lüftung sicherzustellen. Wenn Sie dies nicht tun, besteht die Gefahr, dass aufgrund eines Anstiegs der Temperatur im Innern des Geräts ein Brand ausbricht oder andere Probleme mit dem Gerät auftreten. Stellen Sie das Gerät so auf, dass die in der Abbildung gezeigten Mindestabstände eingehalten werden. N Verwenden Sie nur Teile von Samsung Electronics, wenn Sie einen Standfuß oder eine Wandhalterung einsetzen. - Wenn Sie Teile eines anderen Herstellers verwenden, kann es zu Problemen mit dem Gerät oder zu Verletzungen kommen, weil das Gerät herunterfällt. - Wenn Sie Teile eines anderen Herstellers verwenden, kann es zu Problemen mit dem Gerät oder zu einem Brand kommen, weil die Innentemperatur aufgrund schlechter Belüftung des Geräts ansteigt. N Das Aussehen kann sich je nach Gerät unterscheiden. „ Aufstellen des Geräts mit dem Standfuß „ Installieren des Geräts mit einer Wandhalterung 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 경고 주의 경고 주의 wand wand BN68-02333J-GER.indb 67 10/20/2009 4:39:21 PMDeutsch - 68 Fehlerbehebung Bei Fragen zum Fernsehen schauen Sie zuerst in dieser Liste nach. Wenn keiner dieser Tipps zur Fehlerbehebung weiterhilft, öffnen Sie die Website 'www.samsung.com' und klicken Sie dort auf "Support" oder wenden Sie sich an das in der Liste auf der letzten Seite angegebene Callcenter. N Als erste denkbare Lösung kommt ein Firmware-Upgrade in Frage. Problem Mögliche Lösung Bildqualität Führen Sie zu allererst den Picture Test durch, um zu bestätigen, dass Ihr Fernsehgerät das Testbild korrekt anzeigt. * Wechseln Sie zum MENÜ → Unterstützung → Eigendiagnose → Bildtest Wenn das Testbild richtig angezeigt wird, kann das schlechte Bild durch die Signalquelle oder das Signal verursacht sein. Das Fernsehbild sieht nicht so gut wie im Geschäft aus. • Wenn Sie einen analogen Kabel-/Satellitenreceiver verwenden, rüsten Sie diesen digital auf. Verwenden Sie HDMI- oder Komponentenkabel, um Bildqualität in HD zu ermöglichen. • Kabel-/Satellitenanschluss : Probieren Sie HD-Sender (High Definition) aus der Kanalliste. • Antennenanschluss Probieren Sie HD-Sender, nachdem Sie die Autoprogrammierung durchgeführt haben. N Viele HD-Kanäle senden aufbereitete SD-Inhalte (Standardauflösung). • Stellen Sie den Kabel-/Satellitenreceiver auf eine Bildauflösung von 1080i oder 720p ein. Das Bild ist verzerrt: Große und kleine Blöcke, Punkte, Pixelfehler. • Durch die Kompression der Videoinhaltse kann es zu Bildverzerrungen kommen, insbesondere bei schnellen Bildern wie bei Sportsendungen und Actionfilmen. • Ein niedriger Signalpegel oder schlechte Qualität kann Bildverzerrungen verursachen. Das ist kein Problem des Fernsehgeräts. Falsche oder fehlende Farbe bei Komponentenanschluss. • Vergewissern Sie sich, ob die Komponentenkabel mit den richtigen Anschlüssen verbunden sind. Falsche oder lose Kontakte können Farbprobleme verursachen oder dazu führen, dass auf dem Bildschirm gar kein Bild angezeigt wird. Schlechte Farbwiedergabe oder Helligkeit. • Stellen Sie die Bildoptionen im Fernsehmen[ ein (Picture Mode (Bildmodus), Farbe, Helligkeit, Schärfe). • Stellen Sie die Option Energiesparen-Option im Menü Einstellungen ein. • Versuchen Sie, die Grundstellung für das Bild wieder herzustellen, damit die Standardbildeinstellungen verwendet werden. (Wechseln Sie zu MENÜ → Bild → Bild zurücksetzen) Gepunktete Linie am Bildschirmrand. • Wenn die Bildgröße auf Bildanpassung eingestellt ist, ändern Sie dies in 16:9. • Ändern Sie die Auflösung für den Kabel-/Satellitenreceiver. Das Bild ist nur beim AV-Eingang (Composite) schwarzweiß. • Schließen Sie das Videokabel (Gelb) an die grüne Buchse von Komponenteneingang 1 des Fernsehgeräts an. Beim Kanalwechsel friert das Bild ein bzw. ist verzerrt, oder die Bildanzeige erfolgt verzögert. • Bei Anschluss an einen Kabelreceiver versuchen Sie, den Kabelreceiver zurückzusetzen. (Schließen Sie das Netzkabel wieder an und warten Sie, bis der Kabelreceiver neu startet. Dies kann bis zu 20 Minuten dauern) • Stellen Sie die Bildauflösung des Kabelreceivers auf 1080i oder 720p ein. Tonqualität Führen Sie zu allererst den Audiotest durch, um zu bestätigen, dass Ihr Fernsehgerät den Ton korrekt ausgibt. * Wechseln Sie zum MENÜ → Unterstützung → Eigendiagnose → Audiotest Wenn der Ton OK ausgegeben wird, kann das Tonproblem möglicherweise durch die Signalquelle oder das Signal verursacht sein. Kein Ton oder Ton zu leise bei maximaler Lautstärke. • Überprüfen Sie die Lautstärke des an Ihren Fernseher angeschlossenen Geräts (Kabel/ Satellitenreceiver, DVD-, Blu-ray-Player usw.). Stellen Sie dann die Lautstärke des Fernsehgeräts entsprechend ein. Bild ist gut, aber kein Ton. • Stellen Sie die Option Lautsprecher auswählen im Audio-Menü auf TV-Lautsprecher ein. • Vergewissern Sie sich, dass die Audiokabel vom externen Gerät an die richtigen Audioeingänge am Fernsehgerät angeschlossen sind. • Überprüfen Sie, welcher Tonausgang am angeschlossenen Gerät eingestellt ist. Z. B.: Sie müssen die Audioeinstellung Ihres Kabelreceivers möglicherweise in HDMI ändern, wenn HDMI an Ihr Fernsehgerät angeschlossen ist. • Wenn Sie ein DVI/HDMI-Kabel verwenden, ist ein separates Audiokabel erforderlich. • Deaktivieren Sie die SRS-Funktion, wenn Sie die Lautstärke auf mehr als 30 einstellen. • Ziehen Sie den Stecker aus der Kopfhörerbuchse (sofern an Ihrem Fernseher vorhanden). Rauschen vom Lautsprecher. • Überprüfen Sie die Kabelverbindungen. Vergewissern Sie sich, dass kein Videokabel an einen Audioeingang angeschlossen ist. • Überprüfen Sie die Signalstärke des Antennen-/Kabelanschlusses. Ein schwaches Signal kann Verzerrungen verursachen. Fortsetzung... BN68-02333J-GER.indb 68 10/20/2009 4:39:21 PMDeutsch - 69 Problem Mögliche Lösung Kein Bild, kein Video Der Fernseher kann nicht eingeschaltet werden. • Vergewissern Sie sich, dass das Netzkabel sicher mit der Wandsteckdose und dem Fernsehgerät verbunden ist. • Vergewissern Sie sich, dass die Netzsteckdose Strom liefert. • Drücken Sie die Netztaste am Fernsehgerät, um zu prüfen, ob die Fernbedienung richtig funktioniert. Wenn das Fernsehgerät eingeschaltet wird, kann dies von der Fernbedienung verursacht sein. Um das Problem mit der Fernbedienung zu beheben, lesen Sie den Abschnitt 'Die Fernbedienung funktioniert nicht' weiter unten. Das Fernsehgerät schaltet sich automatisch aus. • Prüfen Sie im Menü Setup, ob der Sleep Timer eingeschaltet (Ein) ist. • Wenn das Fernsehgerät an Ihren PC angeschlossen ist, überprüfen die Energiespareinstellungen Ihres PCs. • Vergewissern Sie sich, dass das Netzkabel sicher mit der Wandsteckdose und dem Fernsehgerät verbunden ist. • Wenn bei Antennen-/Kabelanschluss länger als 10 bis 15 Minuten kein Signal empfangen wurde, wird das Fernsehgerät automatisch ausgeschaltet. Kein Bild/Video. • Überprüfen Sie die Kabelverbindungen. (Unterbrechen Sie kurzzeitig alle Kabelverbindungen zwischen dem Fernsehgerät und den externen Geräten) • Stellen Sie den Videoausgang Ihres externen Geräts (Kabel-/Satellitenreceiver, DVD-/ Blu-ray-Player) so ein, dass er zur Verbindung mit dem Fernsehgerät passt. Zum Beispiel: Ausgang des externen Geräts: HDMI, also Fernseheingang: HDMI. • Stellen Sie sicher, dass das angeschlossene Gerät angeschaltet ist. • Vergewissern Sie sich, dass die richtige Signalquelle für den Fernseher eingestellt ist. Drücken Sie dazu die Taste SOURCE auf der Fernbedienung. • Schießen Sie das Netzkabel an, um das angeschlossene Gerät neu zu starten. HF-Anschluss (Terrestrisch/Kabel) Es werden nicht alle Kanäle empfangen. • Vergewissern Sie sich, dass das Antennenkabel korrekt angeschlossen ist. • Probieren Sie es mit Plug & Play um die verfügbaren Kanäle zur Kanalliste hinzuzufügen. Wechseln Sie zu MENÜ → Einstellungen → Plug & Play und warten Sie, bis alle verfügbaren Kanäle gespeichert sind. • Prüfen Sie, ob die Antenne korrekt angeordnet ist. Das Bild ist verzerrt: Große und kleine Blöcke, Punkte, Pixelfehler. • Durch die Kompression der Videoinhalts kann es zu Bildverzerrungen kommen, insbesondere bei schnellen Bildern wie bei Sportsendungen und Actionfilmen. • Ein schwaches Signal kann Verzerrungen verursachen. Das ist kein Problem des Fernsehgeräts. PC-Verbindung Meldung "Nicht unterstützter Modus" • Stellen Sie die Ausgangsauflösung und Frequenz Ihres PCs so ein, dass sie zu den vom Fernsehgerät unterstützten Auflösungen passen. Der PC wird immer in der Liste der Signalquellen angezeigt, auch wenn keiner angeschlossen ist. • Das ist normal. Der PC wird immer in der Liste der Signalquellen angezeigt, auch wenn keiner angeschlossen ist. Video ist bei HDMI-Anschluss in Ordnung, aber es gibt keinen Ton. • Prüfen Sie die Einstellungen des Audioausgangs für Ihren PC. Netzwerkverbindung Fehler der drahtlosen Netzwerkverbindung. • Es ist ein Drahtloser USB-Dongle von Samsung erforderlich, um das Drahtlosnetzwerk zu verwenden. • Vergewissern Sie sich, dass Netzwerktyp auf Drahtlos eingestellt ist. • Das Fernsehgerät muss an einen drahtlosen IP-Sharer (Router) angeschlossen sein. Weitere Das Bild wird nicht als Vollbild ausgegeben. • Bei HD-Kanälen werden auf beiden Seiten schwarze Balken angezeigt, wenn Sie aufbereitete SD-Inhalte (4:3) wiedergeben. • Bei Filmen mit einem anderen Seitenverhältnis als am Fernsehgerät eingestellt werden oben und unten schwarze Balken angezeigt. • Stellen Sie die Bildgröße an Ihrem externen Gerät oder am Fernseher auf Vollbild ein. Die Fernbedienung funktioniert nicht. • Ersetzen Sie die Batterien der Fernbedienung (richtige Polung beachten). • Reinigen Sie das Sendefenster oben auf der Fernbedienung. • Zeigen Sie mit der Fernbedienung aus 1,5 bis 2 m Enternung direkt auf das Fernsehgerät. Fortsetzung... BN68-02333J-GER.indb 69 10/20/2009 4:39:22 PMDeutsch - 70 Problem Mögliche Lösung Der Plasmafernseher erzeugt ein brummendes Geräusch • Plasmafernseher erzeugen meistens einen leichten Brummton. Dies ist normal. Das wird von den elektrischen Ladungen verursacht, mit denen die Bilder auf dem Fernsehschirm erzeugt werden. • Wenn der Brummton zu laut wird, haben Sie möglicherweise die Helligkeit des Fernsehgeräts zu hoch eingestellt. Versuchen Sie, die Bildhelligkeit zu reduzieren. • Das laute Brummen kann aber auch dadurch verursacht werden, dass die Rückseite Ihres Plasmafernsehers zu nah an einer Wand oder einer anderen harten Fläche steht. Versuchen Sie ebenfalls, Ihre Verbindungskabel anders zu verlegen. • Auch unsachgemäße Installation der Wandhalterung kann zu übermäßigem Lärm führen. Bildkonservierung (Einbrennen). • Dieses Gerät ist mit einer Technologie für den Einbrennschutz ausgestattet, um die Möglichkeit des Einbrennens des angezeigten Bildes zu minimieren. Durch die PixelShift-Technologie können Sie das Bild auf-/abwärts (Pixel vertikal) oder seitwärts (Pixel horizontal) bewegen. Die Lautstärke bzw. Leistung des Fernsehers kann mit der Fernbedienung des Kabel-/ Satellitenreceivers nicht reguliert werden. • Programmieren Sie die Fernbedienung des Kabel-/Satellitenreceivers so, dass sie das Fernsehgerät anspricht. Den Code für SAMSUNG TV finden Sie in der Bedienungsanleitung für Ihren Kabel-/ Satellitenreceiver. Meldung "Nicht unterstützter Modus" • Überprüfen Sie die unterstützte Auflösung des Fernsehgeräts und stellen Sie die Ausgangsauflösung des externen Geräts dementsprechend ein. Weitere Informationen erhalten Sie im Abschnitt zum Einstellen der Auflösung in diesem Handbuch. Der Lichteffekt vorn am Rahmen lässt sich nicht ausschalten (unterhalb vom SAMSUNG-Logo) • Stellen Sie die Option für den Lichteffekt im Menü Einstellungen ein. Es gibt die folgenden Optionen: Aus, Standby an, TV Modus An und Immer. • Die Funktion Lichteffekt steht nicht bei allen Modellen zur Verfügung. Plastikgeruch vom Fernsehen. • Dieser Geruch ist normal und verschwindet im Lauf der Zeit. Die Option "Signalstärke" steht für das Fernsehgerät im Menü "Selbsttest" nicht zur Verfügung. • Diese Funktion ist nur bei digitalen Kanälen mit Antennenanschluss (HF/Koax) verfügbar. Das Fernsehgerät ist zur rechten oder linken Seite geneigt. • Lösen Sie den Sockel des Standfußes vom Fernsehgerät und wiederholen Sie die Montage. Sockel des Standfußes kann nicht montiert werden. • Stellen Sie sicher, dass Ihr Fernsehgerät auf einer ebenen Fläche steht. Wenn Sie die Schrauben nicht vom Fernseher lösen können, verwenden Sie einen magnetischen Schraubendreher. Das Kanalmenü wird grau angezeigt (es ist nicht verfügbar). • Das Kanalmenü ist nur dann verfübgar, wenn eine TV-Signalquelle ausgewählt wurde. Ihre Einstellungen gehen nach 30 Minuten oder bei jedem Abschalten des Fernsehers verloren. • Wenn das Fernsehgerät im Modus Store Demo läuft, werden die Ton- und Bildeinstellungen alle 30 Minuten zurückgesetzt. Wechseln Sie mit dem Plug & Play-Prozess vom Modus Shop Demo zu Privatgebrauch. Drücken Sie die Taste SOURCE, um den Modus TV zu aktivieren. Wechseln Sie zu MENÜ → Einstellungen → Plug & Play → ENTER Vorübergehender Ausfall von Bild oder Ton. • Überprüfen und korrigieren Sie ggf. die Kabelverbindungen. • Kann durch Verwenden von übermäßig starren oder dicken Kabeln verursacht werden. Vergewissern Sie sich, dass die Kabel für langfristigen Gebrauch flexibel genug sind. Bei Wandmontage empfehlen wir, Kabel mit 90 Grad-Steckern zu verwenden. Sie erkennen möglicherweise kleine Partikel, wenn Sie den Rahmen um den Fernsehbildschirm herum genau betrachten. • Dies ist Teil des Produktdesigns und kein Defekt. Das PIP-Menü ist nicht verfügbar. • Die PIP-Funktion steht nur zur Verfügung, wenn Sie eine HDMI-, PC- oder Komponentensignalquelle anzeigen. 'Verschlüsseltes Signal' oder ‘Kein Signal/Schwaches Signal’ bei Einsatz einer CAM-Karte (CI/CI+). • Überprüfen Sie, ob das CAM-Modul mit installierter CI(CI+)-Karte in den CI-Steckplatz (Common Interface) eingesetzt wurde. • Das ist Normal. Das Fernsehgerät aktiviert die OTA-Funktion (Over-the-Air) Funktion selbst, um die beim Fernsehen heruntergeladene Firmware zu aktualisieren. Wiederholtes Bild-/Tonproblem. • Überprüfen und ändern Sie Signal/Signalquelle. N Manche der obigen Abbildungen und Funktionen gibt es nur bei bestimmten Modellen. BN68-02333J-GER.indb 70 10/20/2009 4:39:22 PMDeutsch - 71 Technische Daten Die Beschreibungen und Eigenschaften in diesem Handbuch werden nur zu Informationszwecken herausgegeben und können ohne vorherige Ankündigung geändert werden. Modellname PS50B650 PS58B680 PS63B680 Bildgröße (Diagonal) 50 inch 58 inch 63 inch PC-Auflösung (optimal) 1920 x 1080 @ 60 Hz 1920 x 1080 @ 60 Hz 1920 x 1080 @ 60 Hz Audio (Ausgang) 10 W x 2 15 W x 2 15 W x 2 Abmessungen (BxHxT) Gehäuse Mit Fuß 1240 x 756 x 74 mm 1240 x 817 x 290 mm 1401 x 848 x 74 mm 1401 x 917 x 335 mm 1531 x 932 x 74 mm 1531 x 957 x 390 mm Gewicht von Gehäuse Und Fuß 33 kg 38 kg 39 kg 46 kg 53 kg 61 kg Umgebungsbedingungen Betriebstemperatur Luftfeuchtigkeit (bei Betrieb) Lagerungstemperatur Luftfeuchtigkeit (Lagerung) 50 °F bis 104 °F (10 °C bis 40 °C) 10% bis 80%, nicht kondensierend -4 °F bis 113 °F (-20 °C bis 45 °C) 5% bis 95%, nicht kondensierend N Dies ist ein digitales Gerät der Klasse B. N Änderungen der technischen Daten und des Geräte-Designs vorbehalten. N Die technischen Daten zur benötigten Netzspannung finden Sie auf dem Etikett am Produkt. BN68-02333J-GER.indb 71 10/20/2009 4:39:22 PMNederlands - 2 Instructies voor gebruik „ Beeldretentie Geef een stilstaand beeld (bijvoorbeeld van een videospel of tijdens het aansluiten van een computer) niet langer dan twee uur op het plasmascherm weer, omdat dit beeldretentie kan veroorzaken. Beeldretentie wordt ook wel inbranden genoemd. Verlaag bij de weergave van een stilstaand beeld de helderheid en het contrast om beeldretentie te voorkomen. „ Hoogte Het plasmascherm blijft normaal functioneren tot op een hoogte van 2000 meter. Boven de 2000 meter functioneert het scherm mogelijk niet correct. Installeer en gebruik het scherm niet op dergelijke plaatsen. „ Warmte op de bovenkant van het plasmascherm De bovenkant van het scherm kan na een lange gebruiksperiode erg warm worden omdat de warmte van het scherm zich door het ventilatiegat aan de bovenkant van het toestel verspreidt. Dit is normaal en duidt niet op een defect of storing. Zorg dat kinderen de bovenkant van het product niet kunnen aanraken. „ Het product maakt een ‘krakend’ geluid Het krakende geluid kan optreden als het product uitzet of krimpt door een verandering in de omgeving, zoals de temperatuur of luchtvochtigheid. Dit is normaal en duidt niet op een defect. „ Celdefecten Het plasmascherm gebruikt een paneel dat bestaat uit 2.360.000 (HD-niveau) tot 6.221.000 (FHD-niveau) pixels, wat het gebruik van geavanceerde productietechnologie vereist. Het scherm kan echter enkele heldere of donkere pixels bevatten. Deze pixels zijn niet van invloed op de prestaties van het product. „ Gebruik de tv niet bij een temperatuur van minder dan 5°C. „ Als u een stilstaand beeld te lang op het scherm weergeeft, kan plasmascherm permanent beschadigd raken. Als u gedurende langere tijd naar uw LCD-tv kijkt terwijl het beeld in 4:3-formaat wordt weergegeven, kunnen aan de linker- en rechterkant en in het midden van het scherm randen achterblijven. Hetzelfde effect kan optreden wanneer u een DVD afspeelt of een spelcomputer gebruikt. Schade ontstaan door het bovengenoemde effect valt niet onder de garantie. „ Nabeeld op het scherm. De weergave van stilstaande beelden van computerspelletjes en andere computerbeelden kunnen na langere tijd gedeeltelijk een nabeeld achterlaten. Om dit te voorkomen kunt u tijdens het weergeven van stilstaande beelden de helderheid en het contrast verminderen. „ Garantie - De garantievoorwaarden gelden niet voor schade veroorzaakt door beeldretentie. - Het inbranden van het scherm valt niet onder de garantievoorwaarden. „ Installatie Neem contact op met een erkend servicecentrum wanneer u het apparaat op een locatie installeert met veel stof, hoge of lage temperaturen, een hoge luchtvochtigheid, chemische stoffen en waar het voortdurend in bedrijf is, zoals op het vliegveld treinstation, enzovoort. Als u dat niet doet, kan het apparaat ernstige schade oplopen. Opmerking digitale tv 1. Functionaliteit betreffende digitale tv (DVB) is alleen beschikbaar in landen of gebieden waar DVB-T-signalen (MPEG2 en MPEG4 AVC) voor digitale televisie per zendmast worden uitgezonden of waar u toegang hebt tot een compatibele DVB-Cservice (MPEG2 en MPEG4 AAC) voor kabel-tv. Vraag aan uw plaatselijke aanbieder of u DVB-T- of DVB-C-signalen kunt ontvangen. 2. DVB-T is de Europese DVB-consortiumstandaard voor de uitzending van digitale televisie per zendmast en DVB-C voor de uitzending van digitale televisie over de kabel. Bepaalde speciale functies zoals EPG (Electric Program Guide), VOD (Video on Demand) en dergelijke zijn echter niet bij deze specificatie inbegrepen. Om die reden kunnen ze op dit moment niet worden ondersteund. 3. Hoewel dit televisietoestel aan de nieuwste DVB-T- en DVB-C-standaarden voldoet [augustus 2008], kan de compatibiliteit met toekomstige digitale DVB-T-uitzendingen via de zendmast en digitale DVB-C-uitzendingen via de kabel niet worden gegarandeerd. 4. Sommige aanbieders van kabeltelevisie kunnen voor een dergelijke service extra kosten in rekening brengen en u mogelijk verplichten om met de voorwaarden en bepalingen van hun aanbieding akkoord te gaan. 5. Bepaalde functies van digitale televisie zijn mogelijk niet in alle landen en regio’s beschikbaar en DVB-C werkt mogelijk niet bij alle aanbieders. 6. Neem voor meer informatie contact op met de klantenservice van Samsung. Contact opnemen met SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE Wanneer u vragen of opmerkingen hebt met betrekking tot Samsung-producten, neemt u contact op met de klantenservice van SAMSUNG. (Zie het hoofdstuk Contact opnemen met Samsung) N De figuren en illustraties in deze gebruikershandleiding dienen alleen ter referentie en kunnen afwijken van het werkelijke uiterlijk van het product. Het ontwerp en de specificaties kunnen zonder kennisgeving vooraf worden gewijzigd ter verbetering van de prestaties van het product. © 2009 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Alle rechten voorbehouden. BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 2 10/20/2009 4:47:41 PMNederlands - 3 Nederlands N O T Symbolen Indrukken Opmerking Knop een keer indrukken TOOLS Inhoud Uw tv aansluiten en voorbereiden ■ Controleer de geleverde onderdelen.........................................4 ■ Standaardvoet gebruiken ..........................................................4 ■ De snoeren bij elkaar houden ...................................................4 ■ Overzicht van het bedieningspaneel .........................................5 ■ Overzicht van het aansluitpaneel ..............................................6 ■ Afstandsbediening.....................................................................8 ■ Batterijen in de afstandsbediening plaatsen..............................8 ■ De knoppen voor achtergrondverlichting van de afstandsbediening gebruiken ...............................................9 ■ In- en uitschakelen ....................................................................9 ■ De tv op stand-by zetten ...........................................................9 ■ Het scherm bekijken..................................................................9 ■ Weergave van de menu’s........................................................10 ■ De toets TOOLS gebruiken ....................................................10 ■ Plug & Play-functie ..................................................................10 Kanaalbeheer ■ Kanalen opslaan .................................................................... 11 ■ Kanalen beheren .....................................................................13 Beeldbeheer ■ De beeldinstellingen aanpassen .............................................15 ■ De tv instellen voor uw pc .......................................................18 ■ Pc-scherm ...............................................................................19 Geluidsbeheer ■ De geluidsinstellingen wijzigen................................................20 ■ De geluidsmodus selecteren ...................................................21 Beschrijving van de functies ■ Tijd instellen.............................................................................22 ■ Het instellingenmenu gebruiken ..............................................23 ■ Picture-in-Picture weergeven (PIP).........................................25 Ondersteuning / Invoer ■ Ondersteund programma ........................................................26 ■ Bronlijst / Naam wijzigen .........................................................27 Netwerk ■ Netwerkverbinding...................................................................28 ■ Netwerk instellen .....................................................................30 Media Play ■ Een USB-apparaat aansluiten.................................................33 ■ De functie Media Play gebruiken.............................................34 ■ De Foto sorteren / Muziek / Film Lijst......................................35 ■ Foto / Muziek / Film Lijst Optie MENU ....................................36 ■ Diashow / Muziek Afspelen / Film Afspelen Optie Menu .........37 ■ Een foto of presentatie bekijken..............................................38 ■ Muziek afspelen ......................................................................39 ■ Een filmbestand afspelen ........................................................40 ■ Het menu Setup gebruiken......................................................41 Media Play-DLNA ■ Het DLNA-netwerk instellen ....................................................42 ■ De DLNA-toepassing installeren .............................................42 ■ De DLNA-toepassing gebruiken..............................................43 ■ De DLNA-functie gebruiken.....................................................44 Over Anynet+ ■ Anynet+-apparaten aansluiten ................................................45 ■ Anynet+ instellen ....................................................................46 ■ Tussen Anynet+-apparaten schakelen ....................................46 ■ Opnemen.................................................................................47 ■ Luisteren via een ontvanger....................................................48 ■ Problemen oplossen m.b.t. Anynet+........................................48 Content Library ■ De Content Library activeren...................................................49 ■ De Content Library gebruiken .................................................50 Internet@TV ■ Aan de slag met Internet@TV.................................................51 ■ Snippets in het dock bewerken ...............................................53 ■ De Profile-widget gebruiken ....................................................53 ■ De Yahoo!® Widget Gallery gebruiken....................................54 ■ De Yahoo!® Weather-widget gebruiken ..................................54 ■ De Yahoo!® News-widget gebruiken.......................................55 ■ De Yahoo!® Flickr-widget gebruiken .......................................55 ■ De Yahoo!® Finance-widget gebruiken...................................56 ■ Problemen met Internet@TV oplossen ...................................56 ■ Help-website............................................................................57 Internet@TV ■ Aan de slag met Internet@TV.................................................58 ■ Internet@TV instellen..............................................................58 ■ De Internet@TV-service gebruiken .........................................59 ■ Problemen met Internet@TV oplossen ...................................60 ■ Help-website............................................................................60 Thuisnetwerkcentrum ■ Thuisnetwerkcentrum..............................................................61 ■ Het Thuisnetwerkcentrum instellen .........................................62 ■ De Message-functie gebruiken................................................62 ■ De Media-functie gebruiken ....................................................63 Aanbevelingen voor gebruik ■ Teletekstfunctie........................................................................64 ■ Specificaties voor de wandbevestigingskit (VESA).................65 ■ De montage van de wandbevestiging voorbereiden ...............66 ■ De standaardvoet monteren....................................................66 ■ De tv aan de wand bevestigen................................................67 ■ Installatieruimte .......................................................................67 ■ Problemen oplossen................................................................68 ■ Specificaties ............................................................................71 BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 3 10/20/2009 4:47:41 PMNederlands - 4 De snoeren bij elkaar houden Doe de snoerhouder om de kabels heen, zodat deze niet door de transparante voet heen zichtbaar zijn. Standaardvoet gebruiken N Het plasmascherm moet door twee of meer personen worden getild. Leg het plasmascherm nooit op de grond om eventuele beschadiging aan het scherm te voorkomen. Houd het plasmascherm altijd recht. N Het plasmascherm kan 20 graden naar links en naar rechts draaien. -20° ~ 20° Controleer de geleverde onderdelen Gebruikershandleiding Afstandsbediening / AAA-batterijen (2 stuks) Netsnoer Schoonmaakdoek Snoerhouder Houder - ring (4 stuks) (Zie pagina 66) Programma-cd schroeven (4 stuks) (alleen PS50B650) (Zie pagina 66) Bodemkap (alleen PS50B650) (Zie pagina 66) Bodemkap /schroeven (2 stuks) (alleen PS58B680 / PS63B680) (Zie pagina 66) Ferrietkern voor hoofdtelefoon Ferrietkern voor netsnoer (alleen PS58B680T6P / PS63B680) Ferrietkern voor netsnoer Garantiekaart / Veiligheidsvoorschriften (niet beschikbaar op alle locaties) N Ferrietkern De ferrietkern wordt gebruikt om de kabel af te schermen voor interferentie. Open de ferrietkern bij het aansluiten van een kabel en klem deze om de kabel bij de plug, zoals in de afbeelding wordt aangegeven. Uw tv aansluiten en voorbereiden (PS58B680T6P/ PS63B680 only) BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 4 10/20/2009 4:47:45 PMNederlands - 5 Overzicht van het bedieningspaneel N De vorm en kleur van het product kunnen variëren, afhankelijk van het model. Toetsen op het voorpaneel. Raak de toetsen aan om deze te bedienen. (PS58B680 / PS63B680) (PS50B650) 1 SOURCE Schakelt tussen de beschikbare ingangsbronnen (TV, Ext1, Ext2, AV, Component, PC, HDMI1, HDMI2/DVI, HDMI3, HDMI4, USB). N Gebruik deze toets in het schermmenu zoals u de toets ENTERE op de afstandsbediening gebruikt. 2 MENU Druk op deze toets om een schermmenu met de functies van uw tv weer te geven. 3 + – Druk op deze toetsen om het volume in te stellen. U kunt de knoppen + – in het schermmenu op dezelfde manier gebruiken als de toetsen ◄ en ► op de afstandsbediening. 4 CH Druk op deze toetsen om het kanaal te wijzigen. U kunt de knoppen CH in het schermmenu op dezelfde manier gebruiken als de toetsen ▲ en ▼op de afstandsbediening. U kunt de toets CH gebruiken om de tv in te schakelen zonder de afstandsbediening. 5 STANDBY-INDICATOR Als de stroom is ingeschakeld zal het lampje knipperen en vervolgens uitgaan. In de stand-bymodus zal het lampje branden. 6 (AAN/UIT) Druk op deze toets om de tv in of uit te schakelen. 7 SENSOR VAN DE AFSTANDSBEDIENING Richt de afstandsbediening op dit punt op de tv. 8 LUIDSPREKERS BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 5 10/20/2009 4:47:45 PMNederlands - 6 Overzicht van het aansluitpaneel N Wanneer u een audio- of videosysteem op uw tv aansluit, dient u alle apparaten uit te schakelen. N Zorg er bij het aansluiten van een extern apparaat voor dat de kleuren van de aansluiting en de kabel overeenkomen. N De vorm en kleur van het product kunnen, afhankelijk van het model, variëren. 1 LAN Sluit een LAN-kabel aan op deze poort om verbinding met het netwerk te maken. 2 POWER IN Aansluiting voor het netsnoer. 3 COMPONENT IN Audio-(AUDIO L/R) en video-ingangen (Y / PB / PR)voor componenten. 4 PC IN (AUDIO / PC) Aansluiting voor de video- en audio-uitvoer van de computer 5 EXT 1, EXT 2 Ingangen of uitgangen voor externe apparaten, zoals een videorecorder, dvd-speler, spelcomputer of videodiscspeler. N In de EXT-modus ondersteunt DTV Out alleen MPEG SDvideo en -audio. N In de EXT-modus is Spelmodus niet beschikbaar. Specificaties voor de invoer/uitvoer Aansluiting Invoer Uitvoer Video Audio(L/R) RGB Video + Audio(L/R) EXT 1 ✔ ✔ ✔ Alleen de TV- of DTVuitvoer is beschikbaar EXT 2 ✔ ✔ Uitvoer naar keuze. 6 HEADPHONE U kunt een hoofdtelefoon op de tv aansluiten als u naar een programma wilt kijken zonder de andere aanwezigen in de kamer te storen. N Langdurig gebruik van een hoofdtelefoon met een hoog volume kan het gehoor beschadigen. 7 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) Sluit een component voor digitale audio aan. 8 SERVICE Aansluiting voor onderhoud. 9 AUDIO OUT(AUDIO R/L) RCA-audiosignalen van de tv aansluiten op een externe bron, zoals geluidsapparatuur. 0 ANT IN 75Ω coaxiale aansluiting voor antenne of kabeltelevisienetwerk. ! HDMI IN 1, 2(DVI), 3 Voor een HDMI-naar-HDMI-verbinding is geen extra audioaansluiting nodig. - Bij gebruik van de HDMI/DVI-kabelverbinding, moet u de HDMI IN 2(DVI)-aansluiting gebruiken. N Wat is HDMI? - Met HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) kunnen digitale videogegevens met een hoge definitie en meerdere kanalen met digitale audio worden verzonden. - De HDMI/DVI-uitgang ondersteunt een DVI-aansluiting op externe apparatuur met een geschikte kabel (niet meegeleverd). Het verschil tussen HDMI en DVI is dat het HDMI-apparaat minder groot is, is voorzien van een functie voor HDCP-codering (High Bandwidth Digital Copy Protection) en digitale audio van meerdere kanalen ondersteunt. DVI AUDIO IN DVI-audio-uitgangen voor externe apparaten. Ondersteunde modi voor HDMI/DVI en Component 480i 480p 576i 576p 720p 1080i 1080p HDMI/DVI 50Hz X X X O O O O HDMI/DVI 60Hz X O X X O O O Component O O O O O O O TV Achterpaneel Kabeltelevisienetwerk of of 2 3 4 5 7 9 ! 0 6 8 1 BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 6 10/20/2009 4:47:48 PMNederlands - 7 1 COMMON INTERFACE-sleuf Plaats een CI-kaart (Common Interface) in de sleuf. (Zie pagina 23) - Wanneer u bij sommige kanalen geen CI(CI+)-kaart hebt geplaatst, wordt Scramble Signal (Vervormd signaal) op het scherm weergegeven. - De koppelingsgegevens met een telefoonnummer, de id van de CI(CI+)-kaart, de host-id en andere informatie worden over ongeveer 2-3 minuten weergegeven. Neem contact op met uw serviceprovider als er een foutbericht wordt weergegeven. - Wanneer de kanaalgegevens zijn geconfigureerd, wordt het bericht Update voltooid weergegeven, waarmee wordt aangegeven dat de kanaallijst is bijgewerkt. - Afhankelijk van het model kan u worden gevraagd naar het wachtwoord voor Parental Lock wanneer de CI-kaart opnieuw wordt geplaatst. - Zelfs als Parental Lock is ingesteld op Allow All kan, afhankelijk van het model, een bericht worden weergegeven voor het wachtwoord voor programma's voor volwassenen (18 jaar en ouder). N Plaats de CI(CI+)-kaart in de richting zoals op de kaart wordt aangegeven. N CI-/CI+-kaart worden niet ondersteund in sommige landen, regio's en zendstations. Controleer dit bij uw geautoriseerde verkoper. N De functie CI+is alleen van toepassing op het model PS********P. Als u problemen ondervindt, neemt u contact op met uw serviceprovider. 2 USB 1(HDD), USB 2 Sluit een USB-opslagapparaat aan voor het bekijken van fotobestanden (JPEG) en het afspelen van audiobestanden (MP3) of filmbestanden. U kunt draadloos verbinding maken met het netwerk van SAMSUNG. De aansluiting USB 1 wordt ook gebruikt als HDD-aansluiting. Een HDD (Hard Disk Drive of vaste schijf) is een apparaat waarop digitaal gecodeerde gegevens worden opgeslagen. 3 HDMI IN 4 Aansluiting voor de HDMI-ingang van een apparaat met HDMI-uitvoer. 4 AV IN (VIDEO, AUDIO L/R) Video- en audio-ingangen voor externe apparaten, zoals een camcorder of videorecorder. N De vorm en kleur van het product kunnen, afhankelijk van het model, variëren. TV Zijpaneel 3 4 1 2 BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 7 10/20/2009 4:47:50 PMNederlands - 8 Afstandsbediening U kunt de afstandsbediening gebruiken tot op een afstand van ongeveer 23 meter vanaf de tv. N Fel licht kan de werking van de afstandsbediening beïnvloeden. 1 Toets POWER (de tv in- en uitschakelen). 2 Rechtstreeks de tv-modus selecteren. 3 Cijfertoetsen voor directe kanaalkeuze. 4 Opties in schermmenu’s selecteren en menuwaarden wijzigen. 5 Geluid tijdelijk uitschakelen. 6 Volume verhogen Volume verlagen 7 Beschikbare bron selecteren. 8 Informatie over de huidige uitzending bekijken. 9 Snel veelgebruikte functies selecteren. 0 Informatie over de huidige uitzending bekijken. ! Met deze functie kunt u Internet@TV weergeven. @ Gebruik deze toetsen in Kanalenlijst, Media Play en Internet@TV enzovoort. $ Lijsten met kanalen op het scherm weergeven. % Gebruik deze toetsen in Kanalenlijst, Media Play en Internet@TV enzovoort. ^ Druk op deze toets om de knoppen van de afstandsbediening te verlichten. Deze functie is handig wanneer het donker is in het vertrek. (Als u de afstandsbediening gebruikt terwijl de lichttoets AAN/UIT( ) is ingeschakeld, wordt de levensduur van de batterij verminderd.) & Vorig kanaal. * Volgend kanaal Vorig kanaal. ( Het hoofdmenu weergeven. ) Elektronische programmagids (EPG) weergeven. a Terug naar het vorige menu. b Het schermmenu afsluiten. c Met deze functie kunt u MediaPlay weergeven. d Met deze functie kunt u de Content Library weergeven. e Digitale ondertiteling weergeven. f Audiobeschrijving selectie. Teletekstfuncties 2 Teletekstmodus verlaten (afhankelijk van het model). 7 Teletekstmodus selecteren (LIST/ FLOF). 8 Teletekst opslaan. 9 Weergaveformaat teletekst. @ Fastext-onderwerp selecteren. # Teletekst weergeven/ teletekstinformatie en normale uitzending tegelijk op scherm weergeven. $ Teletekst opslaan. & Teletekst subpagina * P : volgende teletekstpagina / P : vorige teletekstpagina. ( Teletekstindex. a Teletekst vastzetten. b Teletekst uitschakelen. Batterijen in de afstandsbediening plaatsen 1. Open het klepje achter op de afstandsbediening met een opwaartse beweging, zoals aangegeven in de afbeelding. 2. Plaats twee AAA-batterijen. N Zorg ervoor dat de ‘+’ en ‘-’ van de batterijen overeenkomen met de afbeelding in het vakje. 3. Sluit het klepje. N Verwijder de batterijen en bewaar deze op een koele, droge plaats indien u de afstandsbediening langere tijd niet gebruikt. N Controleer het volgende als de afstandsbediening niet werkt 1. Is de tv ingeschakeld? 2. Zijn de plus- en minpolen van de batterijen tegengesteld geplaatst? 3. Zijn de batterijen leeg? 4. Is er een stroomstoring of zit de stekker niet in het stopcontact? 5. Bevindt er zich vlakbij een speciaal fluorescerend licht of neonlicht? BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 8 10/20/2009 4:47:51 PMNederlands - 9 De knoppen voor achtergrondverlichting van de afstandsbediening gebruiken Deze functie is bedoeld voor donkere ruimtes waar u de knoppen van de afstandsbediening niet goed kunt zien. 1. Druk op de lichtknop ON/OFF( ) N In de stand AAN wordt de achtergrondverlichting van de knoppen even ingeschakeld. N Wanneer de afstandsbediening is ingeschakeld, wordt de achtergrondverlichting even ingeschakeld als u op een knop van de afstandsbediening drukt. In- en uitschakelen Het netsnoer is bevestigd aan de achterzijde van de tv. 1. Steek de stekker in een geschikt stopcontact. N Het stand-bylampje op het apparaat brandt. 2. Druk op de toets POWERP op uw tv. N U kunt ook op de toets POWERP of TV op uw afstandsbediening drukken om de tv in te schakelen. N THet meest recente programma dat u hebt bekeken, wordt automatisch opnieuw geselecteerd. 3. Druk op de afstandsbediening op de cijfertoetsen (0~9) of de toetsen voor het volgende/vorige kanaal (< / >) of druk op uw tv op < CH>. N Wanneer u het apparaat voor de eerste keer inschakelt, wordt u gevraagd de taal voor de menu’s te kiezen. 4. Druk nogmaals op de toets POWERP om uw tv uit te schakelen. De tv op stand-by zetten U kunt de tv op stand-by zetten om het energieverbruik te verminderen. De stand-bymodus kan handig zijn als u even wilt stoppen met kijken (bijvoorbeeld tijdens het eten). 1. Druk op de toets POWERP op de afstandsbediening. N Het beeld wordt uitgeschakeld en er gaat een rood stand-bylampje branden op het apparaat. 2. Als u het toestel weer wilt inschakelen, drukt u nogmaals op de toets POWERP, de cijfertoetsen (0~9), de toets TV of de toetsen voor het volgende / vorige kanaal (< / >). N Laat de tv niet gedurende langere tijd op stand-by staan (zoals tijdens vakanties). Haal ook de stekker uit het stopcontact en ontkoppel de antenne. Het scherm bekijken Op het scherm worden het huidige kanaal en de status van bepaalde audio-videoinstellingen weergegeven. O Druk op de toets INFO om de informatie weer te geven. Druk op de INFO-knop op de afstandsbediening. Op het scherm worden het huidige kanaal en de status van bepaalde audio-video-instellingen weergegeven. • ▲, ▼: U kunt informatie over andere kanalen bekijken. Als u naar het huidige geselecteerde kanaal wilt gaan, drukt u op de toets ENTERE. • ◄, ►: U kunt informatie over het gewenste programma op het huidige kanaal bekijken. N Druk nogmaals op de toets INFO of wacht ongeveer 10 seconden. De weergave verdwijnt dan automatisch. DTV Air 15 abc1 18:00 ~ 6:00 18:11 Thu 6 Jan Life On Venus Avenue Unclassified No Detaild Information E Watch ' Information BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 9 10/20/2009 4:47:52 PMNederlands - 10 Weergave van de menu’s 1. Schakel het apparaat in en druk op de toets MENU. Het hoofdmenu verschijnt op het scherm. Aan de linkerkant van het menu worden pictogrammen weergegeven : Beeld, Geluid, Kanaal, Instellingen, Invoer, Toepassing, Ondersteuning. 2. Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ om een van de pictogrammen te selecteren. Druk op de toets ENTERE om het submenu van het pictogram weer te geven. 3. Druk op de toets EXIT om het menu te verlaten. N De schermmenu’s verdwijnen na ongeveer één minuut uit beeld. De toets TOOLS gebruiken U kunt de toets TOOLS gebruiken om snel en eenvoudig uw meestgebruikte functies te selecteren. De opties in het menu Extra zijn afhankelijk van de externe invoermodus die u weergeeft. 1. Druk op de toets TOOLS. Het menu Extra wordt weergegeven. 2. Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ om een menu te selecteren en druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE. 3. Druk op de toetsen▲ / ▼ / ◄ / ► / ENTERE om de geselecteerde items weer te geven, te wijzigen of te gebruiken. Zie de pagina over de desbetreffende functie voor meer informatie over de verschillende functies. • Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC), zie pagina 46 • Beeldformaat, zie pagina 16 • Beeldmodus, zie pagina 15 • Geluidmodus, zie pagina 20 • Slaaptimer, zie pagina 22 • SRS TS HD, zie pagina 20 • Spaarstand, zie pagina 24 • Dual l ll, zie pagina 21 • Toevoegen aan Favoriet (Verwijderen uit Favorieten), zie pagina 14 • PIP, zie pagina 25 • Autom. afstellen, zie pagina 18 Plug & Play-functie Wanneer u de tv voor het eerst inschakelt, worden er automatisch enkele basisinstellingen achter elkaar uitgevoerd. N De screensaver wordt geactiveerd wanneer langer dan 1 minuut geen toetsen van de afstandsbediening worden gebruikt terwijl Plug & Play is ingeschakeld. N De screensaver wordt geactiveerd wanneer langer dan 15 minuten geen bedieningssignaal wordt uitgevoerd. N Als u per ongeluk het verkeerde land voor uw tv selecteert, kunnen de tekens op het scherm onjuist worden weergegeven. 1. Druk op de toets POWER op de afstandsbediening. Het menu Select the OSD Language. wordt automatisch weergegeven. Selecteer de gewenste taal door op de toets ▲ of ▼ te drukken. Druk op de toets ENTERE om uw keuze te bevestigen. 2. Druk op de toets ◄ of ► om Winkeldemo of Thuisgebruik te selecteren en druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE. N Wij raden aan om de tv in te stellen op de modus Thuisgebruik voor het beste beeld in uw thuisomgeving. N De modus Winkeldemo is alleen bedoeld voor gebruik in winkels. N Wanneer het apparaat per ongeluk is ingesteld op de modus Winkeldemo en u de modus Thuisgebruik (standaard) wilt herstellen, drukt u op de volumeknop op de tv. Wanneer het schermmenu voor het volume wordt weergegeven, drukt u 5 seconden op de toets MENU op de tv. 3. Druk op de toets ENTERE. Selecteer het gewenste land door op de toets ▲ of ▼ e drukken. Druk op de toets ENTERE om uw keuze te bevestigen. N Na het selecteren van uw land in het menu Country moet u op sommige modellen vervolgend een pincode instellen. N Bij het invoeren van de pincode is 0-0-0-0 niet beschikbaar. 4. Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ m de kanalen voor de geselecteerde verbinding op te slaan en druk vervolgens op ENTERE. • Ant : Antennesignaal. • Kabel : Kabelantennesignaal. Plug & Play Select the OSD Language. Language : U Move E Enter ▲ Nederlands English Eesti ▼ Extra Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) Beeldformaat : Auto-breed Beeldmodus : Standaard Geluidmodus : Aangepast Slaaptimer : Uit SRS TS HD : Uit Spaarstand : Uit Dual l ll : Mono Toevoegen aan Favoriet U Verpl E Enter e Sluiten Modus : Standaard Cel Helderheid : 4 Contrast : 95 Helderheid : 45 Scherpte : 50 Kleur : 50 Tint (G/R) : G50/R50 Geavanceerde instellingen Beeld BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 10 10/20/2009 4:47:53 PMNederlands - 11 5. Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ om de antennebron te selecteren die u wilt opslaan. Druk op de toets ENTERE om Start te selecteren. • Digitaal en Analoog: digitale en analoge kanalen. • Digitaal: digitale kanalen. • Analoog: analoge kanalen. N Het zoeken van de kanalen start en eindigt automatisch. N Zie het hoofdstuk Automatisch opslaan voor meer informatie over het selecteren van de modus Kabel., zie pagina 11. 6. Het bericht De modus Clock instellen. wordt weergegeven. Druk op de toets ENTERE Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ om Auto, te selecteren en druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE. N Als u Handm. selecteert, wordt Huidige datum en tijd instellen weergegeven. (Zie het hoofdstuk De tijd instellen voor meer informatie, Zie pagina 22) N Wanneer u een digitaal signaal hebt ontvangen, wordt de tijd automatisch ingesteld. 7. De beknopte instructie Hoe u uw nieuwe HDTV optimaal benut wordt weergegeven. Druk op de toets ENTERE. N Dit menu is beschikbaar in de Handleiding HD-verbinding in het menu Ondersteuning. N U kunt naar de volgende of vorige pagina gaan door op de toets ◄ / ► te drukken. 8. Het bericht Enjoy your TV (Veel kijkplezier). wordt weergegeven. N Als u onmiddellijk tv wilt kijken, selecteert u Watch TV (Tv kijken). N Als u de Producthandleiding wilt weergeven, druk u op ENTERE. Als u deze functie wilt resetten... 1. Druk op de toets MENU om het menu weer te geven. Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ om Instellingen, te selecteren en druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE. 2. Druk nogmaals op de toets ENTERE om Plug & Play te selecteren. 3. Voer uw viercijferige pincode in. De standaardpincode van een nieuw tv-toestel is ‘0-0-0-0’. N Zie het hoofdstuk Pincode wijzigen als u de pincode wilt wijzigen, Zie pagina 24. N De functie Plug & Play is alleen beschikbaar in de modus TV. Kanalen opslaan ❑ Land „ Digitaal kanaal : U kunt het land voor digitale kanalen veranderen. „ Analoog kanaal : U kunt het land voor analoge kanalen veranderen. N Het invoerscherm voor de pincode verschijnt.Voer uw viercijferige pincode in. ❑ Automatisch opslaan Zoekt naar alle kanalen met actieve uitzendstations (beschikbaarheid is afhankelijk van uw land) en slaat deze op in het geheugen van de tv. U kunt de kanalen van de geselecteerde verbinding opslaan in het geheugen van de tv. • Ant : Antennesignaal. • Kabel : Kabelantennesignaal. U kunt de antennebron selecteren die uw wilt opslaan in het geheugen. • Digitaal en Analoog : Digitale en analoge kanalen. • Digitaal : Digitale kanalen. • Analoog : Analoge kanalen. N Wanneer u Kabel selecteert, • Zoekmodus : Geeft de zoekmodus weer. (Snel) - Netwerk-ID : Geeft de identificatiecode van het netwerk weer. - Frequentie : Geeft de frequentie voor het kanaal weer.. - Modulatie : Geeft de beschikbare modulatiewaarden weer. - Symboolsnelheid : Geeft de beschikbare symboolsnelheden weer. • Zoekmodus : Geeft de zoekmodus weer. (Volledig, Netwerk) - Startfrequentie : Geeft de waarden voor de startfrequentie weer. - Stopfrequentie : Geeft de waarden voor de stopfrequentie weer. - Modulatie : Geeft de beschikbare modulatiewaarden weer. - Symboolfrequentie : Geeft de beschikbare symboolsnelheden weer. N Als u Automatisch opslaan wilt stoppen, drukt u op de toets ENTERE Het bericht Autom. program. stoppen? wordt weergegeven. Selecteer Ja door op de toets ◄ of ► te drukken en druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE. Kanaalbeheer Kanaal Land ► Automatisch opslaan Handm. opslaan Optie kabel zoeken Volledige gids Minigids Standaardgids : Volledige gids Kanalenlijst Instellingen Plug & Play ► Taalkeuze : Nederlands Tijd Uitzenden Beveiliging Netwerk Algemeen BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 11 10/20/2009 4:47:53 PMNederlands - 12 ❑ Handmatig opslaan Handmatig een kanaal zoeken en opslaan in het tv-geheugen. „ Digitaal kanaal (digitale) N Digitaal kanaal is alleen beschikbaar in DTV-modus • Kanaal : het kanaalnummer instellen met de pijltoetsen ▲, ▼ of de cijfertoetsen (0~9) . • Frequentie : de frequentie instellen met cijfertoetsen (0~9). • Bandbreedte : de bandbreedte instellen met de toetsen ▲ of ▼. N Zodra dit is voltooid, worden de kanalen in de kanalenlijst bijgewerkt. „ Analoog kanaal Handmatig opslaan voor analoog kanaal. • Programma (Programmanummer dat aan een kanaal wordt toegewezen) : het programmanummer instellen met de toetsen ▲, ▼ of met de cijfertoetsen (0~9). • Kleursysteem → Auto / PAL / SECAM / NTSC 4.43 : de waarde van het kleursysteem instellen met de toets ▲ of ▼. • Geluidssysteem → BG / DK / I / L : De waarde van het geluidssysteem opgeven met de toetsen ▲ of ▼. • Kanaal (als u het nummer weet van het kanaal dat u wilt opslaan) : Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ om C (antennekanaal) of S (kabelkanaal) te selecteren. Druk op de toets ► druk vervolgens op de toetsen ▲, ▼ of op de cijfertoetsen (0~9) om het gewenste nummer te selecteren. N Als er geen geluid is of als het geluid is vervormd, selecteert u nogmaals de gewenste geluidsstandaard. • Zoeken (als u de kanaalnummers niet weet) : Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ om met zoeken te beginnen. De tuner scant het frequentiebereik totdat het eerste kanaal of het door u geselecteerde kanaal in beeld komt. • Opslaan (als u het kanaal en het bijbehorende programmanummer opslaat) : Instellen op OK door de toets ENTERE in te drukken. N Kanaalmodus - C (antennekanaalmodus) : in deze modus kunt u een kanaal selecteren door het nummer in te toetsen dat aan het zendstation is toegewezen. - S (kabelkanaalmodus) : in deze stand kunt u een kanaal selecteren door het nummer in te toetsen dat aan het kabelkanaal is toegewezen. ❑ Optie kabel zoeken U kunt aanvullende z oekopties voor het zoeken naar een kabelnetwerk instellen, zoals de frequentie en symboolsnelheid (afhankelijk van het land). • Startfrequentie : geeft de waarden voor de startfrequentie weer. • Stopfrequentie : geeft de waarden voor de stopfrequentie weer. • Modulatie: geeft de beschikbare modulatiewaarden weer. • Symboolsnelheid: geeft de beschikbare symboolsnelheden weer. N Als de waarde voor Startfrequentie hoger is dan voor Stopfrequentie, word het waarschuwingsbericht weergegeven. ❑ Volledige gids / Minigids De EPG-gegevens (Electronic Programme Guide) wordt geleverd door de kabelaanbieders. Programmavermeldingen kunnen leeg of verouderd zijn ten gevolge van de informatie die voor een bepaald kanaal wordt uitgezonden. De weergave wordt dynamisch bijgewerkt zodra nieuwe informatie beschikbaar is. • Volledige gids: hiermee geeft u de programma-informatie weer als segmenten die per uur zijn gesorteerd. Er wordt programma-informatie voor twee uur weergegeven waarin u in tijd vooruit of achteruit kunt bladeren. • Minigids: de informatie over elk programma wordt weergegeven door elke regel onder het scherm Mini Guide van het huidige kanaal, vanaf het huidige programma en verder in volgorde van het begintijdstip van het programma. ❑ Standaardgids „ Minigids / Volledig gids U kunt besluiten of u de minigids of de volledige gids wilt weergeven wanneer u op de toets GUIDE van de afstandsbediening drukt. O U kunt het gidsmenu ook openen door op de toets GUIDE te drukken. Wordt vervolgd... Kanaal Volledige gids Minigids Standaardgids : Volledige gids► Kanalenlijst Kanaalmodus : Toegev. kanalen Fijnafstemming BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 12 10/20/2009 4:47:54 PMNederlands - 13 Volledige gids/Minigids gebruiken ▲ / ▼ / ◄ / ►, ENTER E Selecteer een programma door op de toetsen ▲/▼/◄/►/ENTERE te drukken. ROOD Schakelen tussen de Volledige gids en Minigids. GROEN Volledige gids : Snel terugbladeren. (-24 uren). GEEL Volledige gids : Snel vooruitbladeren. (+24 uren). BLAUW De gids sluiten. INFO De toets INFO voor gedetailleerde informatie. ❑ Modus Kanaal Wanneer u op P () drukt, worden de kanalen in de geselecteerde kanaallijst omgeschakeld. „ Toegev. kanalen : Kanalen in de opgeslagen lijst kanalen worden omgeschakeld. „ Favoriete kanalen : Kanalen in de favoriete lijst kanalen worden omgeschakeld. ❑ Fijnafstemming (alleen analoge kanalen) Als de ontvangst goed is, hoeft u het kanaal niet verder af te stellen omdat dat tijdens het zoeken en opslaan automatisch is gebeurd. Is het signaal echter zwak of vervormd, dan kunt u het kanaal handmatig fijner afstemmen. N Opgeslagen kanalen die handmatig fijner zijn afgesteld, zijn gemarkeerd met een asterisk * rechts van het kanaalnummer in de kanaalbalk. N Als u het fijner afgestemde kanaal niet opslaat in het geheugen, worden de aanpassingen niet opgeslagen. N Wanneer u de fijnafstemming wilt resetten, selecteert u Reset door op de toets ▼ en vervolgens op de toets ENTERE te drukken. Kanalen beheren Via dit menu kunt u kanalen toevoegen en verwijderen of voorkeurskanalen instellen en de programmagids gebruiken voor digitale uitzendingen. N Selecteer een kanaal in het scherm Alle kanalen, Toegevoegde kanalen, Voorkeurskanalen of Geprogrammeerd door op de toetsen ▲ / ▼ en vervolgens op de toets ENTERE te drukken. Vervolgens kunt u naar het geselecteerde kanaal kijken. • Alle kanalen : geeft alle kanalen weer die momenteel beschikbaar zijn. • Toegevoegde kanalen : geeft alle toegevoegde kanalen weer. • Voorkeurskanalen : geeft alle voorkeurskanalen weer. • Geprogrammeerd : geeft alle programma’s weer die momenteel zijn gereserveerd. O Druk op de afstandsbediening op CH LIST om de kanalenlijsten weer te geven. N De gekleurde toetsen met de kanalenlijst gebruiken - Rood (Type kanaal) : schakelen tussen TV, Radio, Data / Other (Gegevens / Overige) en All (Alles). - Groen (Zoom) : vergroot of verkleint een kanaalnummer. - Geel (Selecteren) : meerdere kanaallijsten selecteren. - TTOOLS (Extra) : geeft het menu Verwijderen (of Toevoegen), Toevoegen als Favoriet (of Verw. uit Favorieten), Vergrend. (of Slot uit), Timerweergave, Kanaalnaam wijzigen, Kanaalnummer wijzigen, Sorteren, Niets select. (of Alles select.), of Automatisch opslaan. (De optiemenu’s kunnen verschillen, afhankelijk van de situatie.) N Weergavepictogrammen kanaalstatus A Een analoog kanaal. c Selecteer een kanaal door op de gele knop te drukken. ♥ Een kanaal als favoriet instellen. ( Een programma dat momenteel wordt uitgezonden. \ Een vergrendeld kanaal. ) Een gereserveerd programma. Kanaal Minigids Standaardgids : Volledige gids Kanalenlijst Kanaalmodus : Toegev. kanalen Fijnafstemming 824 UKTV Gold 825 UKTV style A 1 C -- A 2 C -- A 3 ♥ C -- A 4 C -- A 5 C -- A 6 C -- A 7 C -- A 8 C -- Alle kanalen Alle „ Type kanaa „ Zoom „ Keuze Pagina Extra Volledige gids DTV Cable 900 f tn 2:10 Tue 1 Jun Freshmen On Campus 2:00 - 2:30 Geen gedetailleerde informatie. Vandaag 2:00 - 3:00 3:00 - 4:00 Mint Extra Loaded Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC The Distillery Smash Hits! Sunday 900 f tn 901 ITV Play 902 Kerrang! 903 Kiss 903 oneword ▼ 903 Smash Hits! Street Hypn.. Kisstory Geen informatie Geen informatie Geen informatie Freshmen O.. Minigids DTV Cable 900 f tn Street Hypnosis Booze Britain 2:00 2:30 ▼ 5:00 Freshmen On Campus Bekijken Informatie Pagina „ Volledige gids „ Sluiten Bekijken Informatie Pagina „ Minigids „ Meer dan 24 uur „ Sluiten BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 13 10/20/2009 4:47:55 PMNederlands - 14 ❑ Optiemenu kanaallijst (in Alle kanalen / Toegevoegde kanalen / Voorkeurskanalen) N Druk op de toets TOOLS om het menu Extra weer te geven. N De menuopties kunnen, afhankelijk van de kanaalstatus, verschillen. „ Toevoegen / Verwijderen U kunt een kanaal toevoegen of verwijderen om de door u gewenste kanalen weer te geven. N Alle verwijderde kanalen worden getoond op het menu Alle kanalen. N Een grijs gekleurd kanaal geeft aan dat het kanaal is verwijderd. N Het menu Toevoegen verschijnt alleen bij verwijderde kanalen. N U kunt ook op dezelfde manier een kanaal verwijderen uit het menu Toegevoegde kanalen of Voorkeurskanalen. „ Toevoegen aan Voorkeurskanalen / Verwijderen uit Voorkeurskanalen U kunt kanalen die u vaak bekijkt instellen als voorkeurskanaal. T Druk op de toets TOOLS om het menu Extra weer te geven. U kunt de voorkeurskanalen ook instellen door Extra → Toevoegen aan Favoriet / Verwijderen uit Favorieten te selecteren. O Druk op de afstandsbediening op de toets FAV.CH om de voorkeurskanalen te selecteren die u hebt ingesteld. N Het symbool “♥” wordt weergegeven en het kanaal wordt ingesteld als voorkeurskanaal. N Alle voorkeurskanalen worden weergegeven in het menu Voorkeurskanalen. „ Vergrend. / Slot uit U kunt een kanaal vergrendelen, zodat het kanaal niet geselecteerd en bekeken kan worden. Deze functie is alleen beschikbaar wanneer Kinderslot is ingesteld op Aan. (Zie pagina 24) N Het invoerscherm voor de pincode verschijnt. Voer uw viercijferige pincode in. N De standaardpincode van een nieuw tv-toestel is ‘0-0-0-0’. U kunt de pincode wijzigen door PIN wijzigen uit het menu te selecteren. N Het symbool “\” wordt weergegeven en het kanaal wordt vergrendeld. „ Timerweergave Wanneer u een programma dat u wilt bekijken, reserveert, schakelt het kanaal automatisch naar het gereserveerde kanaal in de kanaallijst, zelfs wanneer u een naar een ander kanaal kijkt. Stel eerst de huidige tijd in om een programma te reserveren. (Zie pagina 22) N Alleen kanalen in het geheugen kunnen worden gereserveerd. N U kunt het kanaal, de maand, de dag, het jaar, de uren en minuten ook rechtstreeks met de cijfertoetsen op de afstandsbediening instellen. N Een programma reserveren wordt getoond in het menu Geprogrammeerd. N Digitale programmagids en kijkreserveringen Wanneer er een digitaal kanaal is geselecteerd en u op de toets ► drukt, wordt de programmagids voor het kanaal weergegeven. U kunt een programma reserveren volgens de hierboven beschreven procedures. „ Kanaalnaam wijzigen (alleen analoog kanaal) Kanalen kunnen worden voorzien van een aanduiding, zodat de corresponderende letters verschijnen wanneer het kanaal wordt geselecteerd. N De namen van de digitale zendkanalen worden automatisch toegewezen en kunnen niet worden voorzien van een aanduiding. „ Kanaalnummer wijzigen (alleen digitaal kanaal) U kunt het kanaalnummer ook wijzigen door op de cijfertoetsen op de afstandsbediening te drukken. „ Sorteren (alleen analoog kanaal) Hiermee kunt u de programmanummers van de opgeslagen kanalen wijzigen. Deze bewerking kan nodig zijn na gebruik van de functie kanalen automatisch opslaan. „ Alles select. / Niets select. U kunt alle kanalen in de kanalenlijst selecteren of deselecteren. N U kunt de functies Toevoegen / Verwijderen, Toevoegen als Favoriet / Verw. uit Favorieten of Vergrendelen / Slot uit tegelijkertijd voor meerdere kanalen uitvoeren. Selecteer de gewenste kanalen. Druk op de gele toets om alle geselecteerde kanalen tegelijkertijd te selecteren. N Het symbool c verschijnt links van de geselecteerde kanalen. N U kunt alleen Niets select. kiezen wanneer er een kanaal is geselecteerd. „ Automatisch opslaan N zie pagina 11 voor meer informatie over het instellen van opties. N Wanneer een kanaal is vergrendeld met de functie Kinderslot, wordt er een venster weergegeven waarin u een pincode kunt opgeven. ❑ Optiemenu voor kanalenlijst (in Geprogrammeerd) U kunt een reservering bekijken, bewerken of verwijderen. N Druk op de toets TOOLS om het menu Extra weer te geven. • Info wijzigen: Selecteren om een reservering te bekijken. • Progr. annuleren: Selecteren om een reservering te annuleren. • Informatie: Selecteren om een reservering weer te geven. (U kunt de reserveringsinformatie ook wijzigen.) • Alles select. / Niets select.: Alle gereserveerde programma’s selecteren of deselecteren. 824 UKTV Gold 825 UKTV style A 1 C -- A 2 C -- A 3 C -- A 4 C -- A 5 C -- A 6 C -- A 7 C -- A 8 C -- Alle kanalen Verwijderen Toevoegen als Favoriet Vergrend. Timerweergave Kanaalnummer wijzigen Sorteren ▼ Geprogrammeerd 1 / 1 / 2009 13:59 5 TV1 Quincy, M.E 18:59 2 TV3 The Equalizer 20:59 2 TV3 McMillan & Wife 21:59 2 TV3 M.Spillane’s mike Hammer Info wijzigen Progr. annuleren Informatie Alles select. Alle „ Zoom „ Keuze Extra Informatie Alle „ Type kanaa „ Zoom „ Keuze Pagina Extra BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 14 10/20/2009 4:47:55 PMNederlands - 15 De beeldinstellingen aanpassen ❑ Modus U kunt het beeld selecteren dat het beste overeenkomt met uw wensen. „ Dynamisch / Standaard / Eco / Film T Druk op de toets TOOLS om het menu Extra weer te geven. U kunt de beeldmodus ook instellen door Extra → Beeldmodus te selecteren. ❑ Cel Helderheid / Contrast / Helderheid / Scherpte / Kleur / Tint (G/R) Uw tv heeft verschillende instelmogelijkheden waarmee u de beeldkwaliteit kunt beheren. • Cel Helderheid : hiermee past u de pixelhelderheid aan. • Contrast : hiermee past u het contrastniveau aan. • Helderheid : hiermee past u de helderheid van het beeld aan. • Scherpte : hiermee past u de randdefinitie van het beeld aan. • Kleur : hiermee past u de kleurintensiteit van het beeld aan. • Tint (G/R) : hiermee past u de tint van de kleur van het beeld aan. N Wanneer u wijzigingen aanbrengt bij Cel Helderheid, Contrast, Helderheid, Scherpte, Kleur of Tint (G/R), wordt het schermmenu dienovereenkomstig aangepast. N De aangepaste waarden worden toegepast op elke beeldmodus. N In de analoge modi TV, Ext., AV van het PAL-systeem kunt u de functie Tint niet gebruiken. N In de modus PC kunt u alleen de opties Cel Helderheid, Contrast en Helderheid wijzigen. N Elke aangepaste instelling wordt afzonderlijk opgeslagen voor de bijbehorende invoermodus. N De hoeveelheid verbruikte energie kan sterk worden verminderd als de helderheid van het beeld wordt teruggebracht. Zo worden de algemene verbruikskosten ook lager. ❑ Geavanceerde instellingen U kunt de geavanceerde instellingen voor uw scherm wijzigen, waaronder de kleur en het contrast. N Geavanceerde instellingen is alleen beschikbaar in de modi Standaard en Film. N In de modus PC kunt u alleen wijzigingen aanbrengen in de opties Dynamisch contrast, Gamma en Witbalans in Geavanceerde instellingen. „ Zwarttinten → Uit / Donker / Donkerder / Donkerste U kunt de beelddiepte aanpassen door de kleurverzadiging voor zwart aan te passen. „ Dynamisch → Uit / Laag / Middel / Hoog U kunt het beeldcontrast aanpassen voor een optimaal contrast. „ Gamma U kunt de intensiteit van de primaire kleuren aanpassen (rood, groen, blauw). „ Kleurruimte Kleurruimte is een kleurenmatrix opgebouwd uit rood, groen en blauw. Selecteer de gewenste kleurruimte om een zo natuurgetrouw mogelijke kleurweergave te verkrijgen. • Auto: hiermee wordt automatisch het kleurbereik ingesteld op basis van de video-ingangsbron. • Eigen: selecteert een kleurbereik dat breder is dan het bereik van de invoervideobron. • Aangepast: het kleurenschema aanpassen aan uw voorkeuren. N Kleurruimte aanpassen Hiermee kunt u de kleuren aanpassen aan uw voorkeuren. Kleur is beschikbaar als Kleurruimte is ingesteld op Aangepast. - Kleur → Rood / Groen / Blauw / Geel / Cyaan / Magenta - Rood / Groen / Blauw : de RGB-waarden voor de geselecteerde kleur aanpassen. - Reset : standaardinstellingen van de kleurruimte resetten. Beeldbeheer Wordt vervolgd... Modus : Standaard ► Cel Helderheid : 4 Contrast : 95 Helderheid : 45 Scherpte : 50 Kleur : 50 Tint (G/R) : G50/R50 Geavanceerde instellingen Beeld Kleur : 50 Tint (G/R) : G50/R50 Geavanceerde instellingen ► Afbeeldingsopties Beeld resetten Beeld BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 15 10/20/2009 4:47:56 PMNederlands - 16 „ Witbalans U kunt de kleurtemperatuur wijzigen voor natuurgetrouwere beeldkleuren. • R-basis / G-basis / B-basis / R-niveau / G-niveau / B-niveau : als u de waarde van de aanpassing wijzigt, wordt het aangepaste scherm vernieuwd. • Reset : de standaard witbalans herstellen. „ Huidkleur U kunt de roodwaarde van de huidskleur aanpassen. N Als u de waarde van de aanpassing wijzigt, wordt het aangepaste scherm vernieuwd. „ Randverbetering → Uit / Aan U kunt randen van objecten benadrukken in het beeld. „ xvYCC → Uit / Aan Door de xvYCC-modus in te stellen op Aan worden de details en kleurruimte vergroot wanneer u vanaf een extern apparaat (zoals een dvd-speler) naar films kijkt. N xvYCC is beschikbaar wanneer de beeldmodus is ingesteld op Film, en wanneer de externe input is ingesteld op de modus HDMI of Component. N Ova funkcija možda neće biti podržana u zavisnosti od externe apparaten. ❑ Afbeeldingsopties U kunt de overige beeldinstellingen aanpassen aan uw voorkeuren. N In de modus PC kunt u alleen wijzigingen aanbrengen in de opties Kleur tint, Formaat en Inbrandbeveiliging in het menu Afbeeldingsopties. „ Kleur tint → Koel / Normaal / Warm1 / Warm2 / Warm3 U kunt kiezen welke kleurtint u het prettigst vindt. N De aangepaste waarden worden opgeslagen overeenkomstig de geselecteerde beeldmodus. N Warm1, Warm2, of Warm3 is alleen ingeschakeld in de beeldmodus Film. „ Formaat → Auto-breed / 16:9 / Breedbeeldzoom / Zoom / 4:3 / Volledig scherm kunt het beeldformaat selecteren dat het beste overeenkomt met uw wensen. • Auto-breed : Hiermee stelt u het beeld automatisch breed in. • 16:9 : Stelt het beeld in op de 16:9 breedbeeldmodus. • Breedbeeldzoom : Het beeld wordt vergroot en uitgerekt van 4:3- tot 16:9-formaat. • Zoom : Hiermee vergroot u het beeld verticaal op het scherm. • 4:3 : Stelt het beeld in op de 4:3 normale modus. • Volledig scherm : het volledige eigen HD-signaal dat niet kan worden weergegeven op een normale tv. N Afhankelijk van de ingangsbron kunnen de opties voor het beeldformaat variëren. N De beschikbare onderdelen kunnen, afhankelijk van de geselecteerde modus, verschillen. N In de modus PC kunt u alleen de modi 16:9 en 4:3 aanpassen. N Wanneer de modus Dubbel ( , ) is ingesteld voor PIP, kan de waarde voor Beeldformaat niet worden ingesteld. N De instellingen voor elk extern apparaat dat u hebt aangesloten op een ingang op de tv kunnen worden aangepast en opgeslagen. N Er kan tijdelijke beeldretentie optreden wanneer er langer dan twee uur een statisch beeld op de tv wordt weergegeven. N Breedbeeldzoom : druk op de toets ► om Positie te selecteren en druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE. Gebruik de toets ▲ of ▼ om het scherm naar boven of beneden te verplaatsen. Druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE. N Zoom : druk op de toets ► om Positie te selecteren en druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE. Gebruik de toets ▲ of ▼ om het beeld naar boven of beneden te verplaatsen. Druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE. Druk op de toets ► om Formaat te selecteren en druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE. Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ om het beeldformaat in verticale richting te vergroten of te verkleinen. Druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE. N Na het selecteren van Volledig scherm in de modus HDMI (1080i / 1080p) of Component (1080i / 1080p) : Selecteer Positie door op de toets ◄ of ► te drukken. Gebruik de toetsen ▲, ▼, ◄ en ► om de afbeelding te verplaatsen. N Reset : druk op de toets ◄ of ► om Reset te selecteren en druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE. U kunt de instelling initialiseren. N Als u de functie Volledig scherm gebruikt met een ingangssignaal HDMI 720p, wordt 1 kaderlijn verwijderd aan de bovenkant, onderkant, linkerkant en rechterkant, zoals in de functie Overscan.function. „ Schermmodus → 16:9 / Breedbeeldzoom / Zoom / 4:3 Wanneer u het beeldformaat op een tv met een breedte van 16:9 instelt op Auto-breed, kunt u het gewenste beeldformaat instellen op 4:3 WSS (Wide Screen Service) of niet. Omdat er voor elk land in Europa een ander beeldformaat geldt, is deze functie bedoeld om het juiste beeldformaat te kiezen. N Deze functie is alleen beschikbaar in de modus Auto-breed. Wordt vervolgd... Tint (G/R) : G50/R50 Geavanceerde instellingen Afbeeldingsopties ► Beeld resetten Beeld BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 16 10/20/2009 4:47:56 PMNederlands - 17 N Deze functie is niet beschikbaar in de modus PC, Component of HDMI. „ Dig. ruisfilter → Uit / Laag / Middel / Hoog / Auto Als het ontvangen signaal zwak is, kunt u de functie voor digitale ruisonderdrukking activeren om statische ruis en echobeelden te reduceren die mogelijk op het scherm verschijnen. N Als het signaal zwak is, selecteert u één van de andere opties totdat de afbeelding het best wordt weergegeven. „ HDMI-zwartniveau → Normaal / Laag U kunt direct het zwartniveau op het scherm selecteren om de schermdiepte aan te passen. N Deze functie is alleen beschikbaar wanneer de externe ingang is verbonden met HDMI (RGB-signalen). „ 1080 Full HD Motion-demo → Aan / Uit De nieuwe generatie PDP-panelen van Samsung hebben een prachtige Full HD motion-helderheid bij het bekijken van snelle sportbeelden, films en games. N Deze functie is niet beschikbaar in de modus PC, Game of Media Play. „ Filmmodus U kunt de beeldmodus optimaliseren voor het weergeven van films. • Uit : de functie Filmmodus uitschakelen. • Auto1 : het beeld wordt automatisch aangepast aan de beste kwaliteit voor het weergeven van een film. • Auto2 : optimaliseert automatisch de videotekst bij het weergeven van een film. • Bioscoop : Geeft de ultieme bioscoopervaring. N De filmmodus wordt ondersteund in TV, Video, Component (480i / 1080i) en HDMI(1080i). „ Real 100Hz Demo → Uit / Aan U kunt duidelijk verschil zien tussen Real 100Hz (Vloeiend 100 Hz) en 50 Hz, met name tijdens het kijken naar snelle scènes. Bij langzame scènes ziet u geen verschil tussen Real 100Hz en 50 Hz. Demo 100Hz werkt alleen met een 50-Hz signaal. De demomodus Real 100Hz (Vloeiend 100Hz) is bedoeld voor demonstraties in de winkel met speciale films. „ Modus Alleen blauw → Uit / Aan Deze functie is voor experts op het gebied van AV-apparaten. Deze functie geeft het blauwe signaal weer door het rode en groene signaal uit het videosignaal te verwijderen, waardoor er een soort blauwfilter-effect ontstaat dat wordt gebruikt om de kleur en tint van videoapparatuur zoals dvd-spelers en Home Theaters aan te passen. N Modus Alleen blauw is beschikbaar wanneer de beeldmodus is ingesteld op Film of Standaard. „ Inbrandbeveiliging Om het risico van het inbranden van het scherm te verkleinen, is dit apparaat uitgerust met technologie voor inbrandpreventie. Met deze technologie kunt u de beweging van het beeld op en neer (Verticaa) en van links naar rechts (Horizontaal) instellen. Met de tijdsinstelling kunt u de tijd tussen het bewegen van het beeld programmeren in minuten. • Pixelverschuiving : met deze functie worden iedere minuut de pixels op uw plasmascherm in horizontale of verticale richting verschoven om de kans op inbranding van uw scherm te minimaliseren. N Optimale instellingen voor pixelverschuiving Onderdeel TV/Ext./AV/Component/HDMI/PC Horizontaal 0~2 2 Verticaal 0~4 4 Tijd (minuten) 1~4 min 2 min N De waarde voor Pixelverschuiving kan verschillen afhankelijk van het formaat (inches) en de modus van de monitor. N Deze functie is niet beschikbaar in de modus Volledig scherm. • Schuiven : deze functie helpt ingebrande beelden op het scherm te verwijderen door de pixels op uw plasmascherm in een bepaald patroon te verschuiven. Gebruik deze functie wanneer er beelden of symbolen op uw scherm achterblijven, vooral na het langere tijd weergeven van een stilstaand beeld op uw scherm. • Grijswaarden balken : wanneer u tv kijkt met de schermverhouding 4:3, wordt voorkomen dat het scherm beschadigd raakt door de witbalans geheel links en rechts aan te passen. Wordt vervolgd... BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 17 10/20/2009 4:47:57 PMNederlands - 18 De tv instellen voor uw PC N Vooraf instellen : druk op de toets SOURCE om de modus PC in te schakelen. ❑ Autom. afstellen Via Autom. afstellen wordt het pc-scherm van de tv automatisch aangepast op het binnenkomende pc-videosignaal. De waarden voor fijnheid, grofheid en positie worden automatisch aangepast. N Deze functie is niet beschikbaar in de DVI-HDMI-modus. T Druk op de toets TOOLS om het menu Extra weer te geven. U kunt Autom. afstellen ook instellen door Extra → Autom. afstellen te selecteren. ❑ Scherm U past de beeldkwaliteit aan om beeldruis te verwijderen of te verminderen. Als de ruis niet verdwijnt door het kanaal nauwkeurig af te stemmen, stel dan de frequentie zo goed mogelijk in (Grof) en voer opnieuw de instelling Fine-tune (Fijnfafstemming) uit. Stel het beeld opnieuw in het midden van het scherm in nadat de ruis is verminderd. „ Grof Past de frequentie aan wanneer verticale ruis wordt weergegeven op het scherm. „ Fijn Past het scherm aan zodat dit helderder is. „ Positie pc De horizontale en verticale beeldpositie van de pc optimaliseren als deze niet gelijk is aan het tv-scherm. Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ om de verticale positie aan te passen. Druk op de toets ◄ of ► om de horizontale positie aan te passen. „ Beeld resetten U kunt alle beeldinstellingen vervangen door fabrieksinstellingen. - Licht : wanneer u de schermratio op 4:3 instelt, worden de linker- en rechterkant helderder. - Donker : wanneer u de schermratio op 4:3 instelt, worden de linker- en rechterkant donkerder. ❑ Beeld resetten → Beeldmodus resetten / Annuleren Herstelt de standaardwaarden van alle beeldinstellingen. N Selecteer een beeldmodus om te resetten. Het resetten wordt voor elke beeldmodus uitgevoerd. Helderheid : 45 Scherpte : 50 Autom. afstellen ► Scherm Geavanceerde instellingen Afbeeldingsopties Beeld resetten Beeld Picture Geavanceerde instellingen Afbeeldingsopties Beeld resetten ► Beeld BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 18 10/20/2009 4:47:57 PMNederlands - 19 Pc-scherm ❑ Software configureren (gebaseerd op Windows XP) Hieronder ziet u de Windows-beeldscherminstellingen voor een standaardcomputer. De vensters op uw computer kunnen enigszins afwijken, afhankelijk van de versie van Windows en de geïnstalleerde videokaart. Maar ook dan zijn in de meeste gevallen dezelfde basisinstallatiegegevens van toepassing. (Neem contact op met de computerfabrikant of Samsungleverancier als dit niet het geval is.) 1. Klik eerst op ‘Configuratiescherm’ in het menu Start van Windows. 2. Wanneer het venster configuratiescherm verschijnt, klikt u op ‘Beeldscherm’ om een dialoogvenster voor het beeldscherm te openen. 3. Wanneer het Configuratiescherm verschijnt, klikt u op ‘Weergave’ om een dialoogvenster voor het beeldscherm te openen. 4. Selecteer het tabblad ‘Instellingen’ in het dialoogvenster. Geef de juiste resolutie voor de monitor op (resolutie) Optimaal: 1920 X 1080. Als het dialoogvenster een optie bevat voor het instellen van de verticale frequentie, is de juiste waarde ‘60’ of ‘60 Hz’. Klik anders op ‘OK’ om het dialoogvenster te sluiten. ❑ Weergavemodi Zowel de beeldpositie als de beeldgrootte varieert afhankelijk van het type monitor en de bijbehorende resolutie. De resoluties in de tabel worden aangeraden N Bij gebruik van de HDMI/DVI-kabelverbinding, moet u de HDMI IN 2(DVI) -aansluiting gebruiken. N De interlacemodus wordt niet ondersteund. N De tv werkt mogelijk niet normaal als een afwijkend videoformaat wordt geselecteerd. N De modi Separate en Composite worden ondersteund. SOG wordt niet ondersteund. N Een VGA-kabel die te lang of van lage kwaliteit is, kan ruis in het beeld veroorzaken bij hoge resoluties (1920x1080). „ D-Sub- en HDMI/DVI-invoer Modus Resolutie Horizontaal Frequentie (kHz) Verticale frequentie (Hz) Pixelklok Frequentie (MHz) Sync-polariteit (H/V) IBM 640 x 350 31.469 70.086 25.175 + / - 720 x 400 31.469 70.087 28.322 - / + MAC 640 x 480 35.000 66.667 30.240 - / - 832 x 624 49.726 74.551 57.284 - / - 1152 x 870 68.681 75.062 100.000 - / + VESA CVT 720 x 576 35.910 59.950 32.750 - / + 1152 x 864 53.783 59.959 81.750 - / + 1280 x 720 44.772 59.855 74.500 - / + 56.456 74.777 95.750 - / + 1280 x 960 75.231 74.857 130.000 - / + VESA DMT 640 x 480 31.469 59.940 25.175 - / - 37.861 72.809 31.500 - / - 37.500 75.000 31.500 - / - 800 x 600 37.879 60.317 40.000 + / + 800 x 600 48.077 72.188 50.000 + / + 800 x 600 46.875 75.000 49.500 + / + 1024 x 768 48.363 60.004 65.000 - / - 56.476 70.069 75.000 - / - 60.023 75.029 78.750 + / + 1152 x 864 67.500 75.000 108.000 + / + 1280 x 800 49.702 59.810 83.500 - / + 62.795 74.934 106.500 - / + 1280 x 960 60.000 60.000 108.000 + / + 1280 x 1024 63.981 60.020 108.000 + / + 79.976 75.025 135.000 + / + 1360 x 768 47.712 60.015 85.500 + / + 1440 x 900 55.935 59.887 106.500 - / + 70.635 74.984 136.750 - / + 1680 x 1050 65.290 59.954 146.250 - / + VESA DMT / DTV CEA 1920 x 1080p 67.500 60.000 148.500 + / + VESA GTF 1280 x 720 52.500 70.000 89.040 - / + 1280 x 1024 74.620 70.000 128.943 - / - BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 19 10/20/2009 4:47:58 PMNederlands - 20 De geluidsinstellingen wijzigen ❑ Modus U kunt het geluidseffect selecteren dat het best overeenkomt met de beelden die u bekijkt. „ Standaard / Muziek / Film / Heldere spraak / Aangepast T Druk op de toets TOOLS om het menu Extra weer te geven. U kunt het geluid ook instellen door Extra → Geluidsmodus te selecteren. ❑ Toonregeling U kunt de geluidsinstellingen aanpassen aan uw persoonlijke voorkeuren. • Modus : u kunt een geluidsmodus selecteren die bij uw persoonlijke voorkeuren past. • Balans : regelt de balans tussen de linker- en de rechterluidsprekers. • 100Hz / 300Hz / 1KHz / 3KHz / 10KHz (bandbreedte wijzigen) : het niveau van verschillende bandbreedtes aanpassen • Reset : standaardinstellingen van de equalizer resetten. ❑ SRS TruSurround HD → Aan / Uit SRS TruSurround HD is een technologie waarin TruSurround, FOCUS en TruBass wordt gecombineerd. SRS TruSurround HD stelt u in staat om te genieten van een virtueel 5.1 Surround Sound via de twee luidsprekers van de tv. Deze functie levert niet alleen een volle, diepe bas, maar verbetert tevens de resolutie van de hoge frequenties. T Druk op de toets TOOLS om het menu Extra weer te geven. U kunt SRS TruSurround HD ook instellen door Extra → SRS TS HD te selecteren. TruSurround HD, SRS en het -symbool zijn handelsmerken van SRS Labs, Inc. De TruSurround HD-technologie valt onder licentie van SRS Labs, Inc. N Als bij het weergeven van muziek op de tv het geluid abnormaal klinkt, past u de toonregeling en SRS TruSurround HD (Aan/Uit) aan. ❑ Gesproken taal (alleen digitaal kanaal) U kunt de standaardwaarde voor de gesproken talen wijzigen. Hiermee geeft u de taalinformatie voor het inkomende signaal weer. N U kunt alleen een taal selecteren uit de talen waarin wordt uitgezonden. ❑ Geluidsformaat → MPEG / Dolby Digital (alleen digitaal kanaal) Wanneer de hoofdluidspreker en de audio-ontvanger beide geluid voortbrengen, kan er echo optreden omdat geluid in de hoofdluidspreker en de audio-ontvanger niet op gelijke snelheid wordt gedecodeerd. Gebruik in dat geval de functie tv-luidspreker. N U kunt alleen een taal selecteren uit de talen waarin wordt uitgezonden. Geproduceerd onder licentie van Dolby Laboratories. Dolby en double-D-symbool zijn handelsmerken van Dolby Laboratories. ❑ Audiobeschrijving (alleen digitaal kanaal) Dit is een ondersteunende geluidsfunctie die een aanvullend geluidsspoor laat horen voor blinden en slechtzienden. Deze functie verwerkt het geluidsspoor voor de audiobeschrijving, wanneer dat samen met het hoofdgeluid wordt uitgezonden. Gebruikers kunnen de functie Audiobeschrijving of Uit zetten en het volume bepalen. O U kunt deze opties selecteren door simpelweg op de toets AD van de afstandsbediening te drukken. „ Audiobeschrijving → Aan / Uit De functie voor gesproken omschrijvingen in- of uitschakelen. „ Volume het volume voor gesproken omschrijving aanpassen. N Volume is actief wanneer Audiobeschrijving is ingesteld op Aan. Geluidsbeheer Modus : Aangepast ► Toonregeling SRS TruSurround HD : Uit Gesproken taal : ---- Geluidsformaat : ---- Audiobeschrijving Auto Volume : Uit Luidspreker selecteren : TV-luidspreker Geluid BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 20 10/20/2009 4:47:59 PMNederlands - 21 ❑ Auto Volume → Uit / Aan Elk zendstation kent andere signaalkenmerken, waardoor het lastig kan zijn het volume steeds opnieuw in te stellen wanneer u van kanaal verandert. Met deze functie kunt u het volume van het gewenste kanaal automatisch laten instellen. Bij een hoog modulatiesignaal wordt de geluidsweergave verlaagd en bij een laag modulatiesignaal wordt de geluidsweergave verhoogd. ❑ Luidspreker selecteren → Ext. luidspreker / TV-luidspreker Indien u het geluid door aparte luidsprekers wilt horen, schakelt u de interne versterker uit. N De toetsen – +, MMUTE werken niet wanneer Luidspreker selecteren is ingesteld op Ext. luidspreker. N Wanneer u Ext. luidspreker selecteert in het menu Luidspreker selecteren worden de geluidsinstellingen beperkt. Interne luidsprekers tv Audio-uitgang (optisch, L / R -uitgang) naar geluidssysteem TV / Ext. / AV / Component / PC / HDMI TV / Ext. / AV / Component / PC / HDMI Tv-luidspreker Geluidsuitvoer Luidsprekers Externe luidspreker Onderdrukken Luidsprekers Geen videosignaal Onderdrukken Onderdrukken ❑ Geluid selecteren Wanneer de PIP-functie is geactiveerd, kunt u naar het geluid bij het subbeeld (PIP) luisteren. • Hoofd: Selecteert het geluid van het hoofdbeeld. • Sub: Selecteert het geluid van het subbeeld. T Druk op de toets TOOLS om het menu Extra weer te geven. U kunt het geluid van het subbeeld ook instellen door Tools → PIP → Geluidskeuze te selecteren. N U kunt deze optie selecteren wanneer PIP is ingesteld op Aan. ❑ Geluid resetten „ Alles resetten / Geluidsmodus resetten / Annuleren : U kunt de fabrieksinstellingen voor de geluidsinstellingen herstellen. De geluidsmodus selecteren Wanneer u de optie Dual l ll instelt, wordt de huidige geluidsmodus op het scherm weergegeven. Type uitzending Aanduiding op scherm NICAM Stereo Normale uitzending (Standaard audio) Mono (normaal gebruik) Normale en NICAM Mono NICAM Mono (Normaal) NICAM-Stereo NICAM Stereo Mono (Normaal) NICAM Dual-I/II NICAM Dual-1 NICAM Dual-2 Mono (Normaal) A2 Stereo Normale uitzending (Standaard audio) Mono (Normaal gebruik) Tweetalig of DUAL-I/II Dual I Dual II Stereo Stereo Mono (Geforceerd mono) N Wanneer het stereosignaal te zwak is en er automatische zenderverdringing optreedt, kunt u beter naar mono overschakelen. N Deze functie wordt alleen geactiveerd in stereogeluidssignaal. Het wordt gedeactiveerd in monogeluidssignaal. N Deze functie is alleen beschikbaar in de modus TV. T Druk op de toets TOOLS om het menu Extra weer te geven. U kunt de geluidsmodus ook selecteren door Extra → Dual l ll te selecteren. Luidspreker selecteren : TV-luidspreker Geluidskeuze : Hoofdtuner Geluid resetten ► Geluid BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 21 10/20/2009 4:47:59 PMNederlands - 22 Beschrijving van de functies Tijd instellen ❑ Klok Het is noodzakelijk de klok in te stellen om de verschillende functies van de tv te kunnen gebruiken. N De huidige tijd wordt telkens weergegeven wanneer u op de toets INFO drukt. N Als u de voedingskabel hebt losgekoppeld, moet u de klok opnieuw instellen. „ Klokmodus U kunt de huidige tijd handmatig of automatisch instellen. • Auto: de huidige tijd wordt automatisch ingesteld op basis van de tijd van de digitale uitzending. • Handmatig: u kunt de huidige tijd handmatig op een bepaalde tijd instellen. „ Klok instellen u kunt de huidige tijd handmatig instellen. N Stel dit item in wanneer u Klokmodus hebt ingesteld op Handmatig. N U kunt rechtstreeks waarden voor Dag, Maan, Jaar, Uur, Min opgeven via de cijfertoetsen op de afstandsbediening. ❑ Slaaptimer → Uit / 30 min / 60 min / 90 min / 120 min / 150 min / 180 min De functie slaaptimer schakelt automatisch uit na een van tevoren ingestelde tijd (30, 60, 90, 120, 150 en 180 minuten). N De tv schakelt automatisch over op stand-by wanneer de timer 0 bereikt. N Als u de functie Slaaptimer wilt annuleren, selecteert u Uit. T Druk op de toets TOOLS om het menu Extra weer te geven. U kunt de sleep timer ook instellen door Extra → Slaaptimer te selecteren. ❑ Timer 1 / Timer 2 / Timer 3 U kunt de tv op een gewenst tijdstip in- en uitschakelen. • Inschakeltijd: Specifieke tijd waarop de tv moet worden ingeschakeld. • Uitschakeltijd: Specifieke tijd waarop de tv moet worden uitgeschakeld. • Volume: Het volumeniveau selecteren. • Bron : Hiermee selecteert u een apparaat voor TV, USB. N Wanneer u TV selecteert kunt u opties voor Antenne en Kanaal selecteren. - Antenne: Ant of Kabel selecteren. - Kanaal: Het gewenste kanaal selecteren. N Wanneer u USB selecteert, kunt u de inhoud instellen. - Inhoud: Hiermee kunt u de gewenste inhoud voor USB selecteren. N Als het USB-station geen muziekbestanden bevat of de map met muziekbestanden niet is geselecteerd, werkt de timerfunctie niet goed. • Herhalen : Selecteer Eenmaal, Dagelijks, Ma~Vr, Ma~Za, Za~Zo of Handmatig. N Wanneer Handmatig is geselecteerd, kunt u op de toets ► drukken om de gewenste dag te selecteren. Druk bij de gewenste dag op de toets ENTERE zodat het pictogram c verschijnt. N De hele map op de USB ondersteunt Engelse 64-bits tekens. N U moet eerst de klok instellen. N U kunt de uren en minuten ook rechtstreeks met de cijfertoetsen op de afstandsbediening instellen. N Automatisch uitschakelen Als u de timer instelt op Aan, schakelt de televisie uiteindelijk uit wanneer binnen 3 uur na het automatisch inschakelen van het toestel geen toets wordt ingedrukt. Deze functie is alleen beschikbaar in de timermodus Aan. Met deze functie wordt oververhitting tegengegaan, wat kan gebeuren als het toestel te lang ingeschakeld blijft staan. Tijd Klok : -- : -- ► Slaaptimer : Uit Timer 1 : Uit Timer 2 : Uit Timer 3 : Uit U Verpl. E Enter R Terug Instellingen Plug & Play Taalkeuze : Nederlands Tijd ► Uitzenden Beveiliging Netwerk Algemeen BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 22 10/20/2009 4:48:00 PMNederlands - 23 Het instellingenmenu gebruiken ❑ Taalkeuze U kunt de menutaal instellen. ❑ Uitzending „ Ondertiteling U kunt de ondertiteling in- en uitschakelen. Gebruik dit menu om de modus voor de ondertiteling in te stellen. De optie Normaal is de basisinstelling voor ondertiteling en de optie Slechthorenden is ondertiteling voor doven en slechthorenden. • Ondertiteling → Uit / Aan : De ondertiteling in- of uitschakelen. • Modus → Normaal / Slechthorenden : de ondertitelingsmodus instellen. • Ondertitelingstaal : de ondertitelingstaal instellen. N Wanneer u naar een programma kijkt dat de functie Slechthorenden niet ondersteunt, wordt Normaal automatisch geactiveerd, zelfs wanneer de modus Slechthorenden is geselecteerd. N Engels is de standaardtaal als de geselecteerde taal niet beschikbaar is in de uitzending. O U kunt deze opties selecteren door simpelweg op de toets SUBT. van de afstandsbediening te drukken. „ Digitale tekst → Deactiveren / Activeren Als het programma wordt uitgezonden met digitale tekst, is deze functie ingeschakeld. N MHEG (Multimedia and Hypermedia Information Coding Experts Group) Een internationale standaard voor gegevenscoderingssystemen die in multimedia en hypermedia worden gebruikt. Gegevens worden gecodeerd op een hoger niveau dan het MPEG-systeem, waaronder hypermedia voor gegevenskoppeling, zoals stilstaande beelden, tekstservice, animatie, beeld- en videobestanden en multimediagegevens. MHEG is een technologie voor interactie met de gebruiker tijdens runtime en wordt toegepast op verschillende gebieden, waaronder VOD (Video On Demand), ITV (interactieve tv), EC (e-commerce), afstandsonderwijs, telefonische vergaderingen, digitale bibliotheken en netwerkspellen. „ Teleteksttaal Taal voor teletekst instellen door taaltype te selecteren. N Engels is de standaardtaal als de geselecteerde taal niet beschikbaar is in de uitzending. „ Voorkeur • Eerste taal voor audio / Tweede taal voor audio / Eerste taal ondertitel / Tweede taal ondertitel / Eerste taal teletekst / Tweede taal teletekst Gebruikers kunnen met deze functie een van de talen selecteren. De geselecteerde taal wordt standaard gebruikt wanneer u een kanaal selecteert. Als u de taalinstelling wijzigt, worden de Ondertitelingstaal, Gesproken taal en Teleteksttaal in het menu Taalkeuze automatisch gewijzigd in de geselecteerde taal. Met Ondertitelingstaal, Gesproken taal en Teleteksttaal in het menu Taalkeuze geeft u een lijst weer met talen die door het huidige kanaal worden ondersteund. De geselecteerde taal is gemarkeerd. Als u deze taalinstelling wijzigt, is de nieuwe selectie alleen geldig voor het huidige kanaal. De gewijzigde instelling is niet van invloed op de instellingen voor Eerste taal ondertitel, Eerste taal voor audio of Eerste taal teletekst van het menu Voorkeur. „ Algemene interface • De CI(CI+)-kaart plaatsen 1. De CI CAM-module kunt u verkrijgen bij uw lokale leverancier of door deze telefonisch te bestellen. 2. Steek de CI(CI+)-kaart in de CAM in de richting van de pijl op zijn plaats. 3. Plaats de CAM met de CI(CI+)-kaart in de sleuf voor de algemene interface. N Duw de CAM in de richting van de pijl volledig in de sleuf. 4. Controleer of u een beeld op een kanaal met een vervormd signaal kunt bekijken. • CI(CI+)-menu Hiermee kunt u het CAM-menu selecteren. Selecteer het CI(CI+)-menu op basis van het menu PC-kaart. • Toepassingsinfo Met deze optie geeft u informatie over een CAM in de CI-sleuf weer. Toepassingsinfo heeft betrekking op de CI(CI+)-kaart. U kunt de CAM altijd installeren, ongeacht of de tv is in- of uitgeschakeld. N CI-/CI+-kaart worden niet ondersteund in sommige landen, regio's en zendstations. Controleer dit bij uw geautoriseerde verkoper. Wordt vervolgd.... Instellingen Plug & Play Taalkeuze : Nederlands ► Tijd Uitzenden Beveiliging Netwerk Algemeen BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 23 10/20/2009 4:48:00 PMNederlands - 24 ❑ Beveiliging N Op sommige modellen is de pincode vereist bij het uitvoeren van Plug & Play. „ Kinderslot → Uit / Aan Met deze functie kunt u door middel van het uitschakelen van beeld en geluid voorkomen dat ongeautoriseerde gebruikers, zoals kinderen, ongepaste programma’s bekijken. N Voordat het instellingsscherm verschijnt, ziet u het invoerscherm voor de pincode. Voer uw viercijferige pincode in. N De standaardpincode van een nieuw tv-toestel is ‘0-0-0-0’. U kunt de pincode wijzigen door in het menu de optie PIN wijzigen te selecteren. N U kunt sommige kanalen in de kanalenlijst vergrendelen. (Zie pagina 14) N Kinderslot is alleen beschikbaar in de modus TV. „ Kinderslot Door een pincode (persoonlijk identificatienummer) van vier cijfers in te stellen kunt u met deze functie voorkomen dat ongeautoriseerde gebruikers, zoals kinderen, ongeschikte programma’s bekijken. N Het item Leeftijdsbeperking kan per land verschillen. N Voordat het instellingsscherm verschijnt, ziet u het invoerscherm voor de pincode. Voer uw viercijferige pincode in. N De standaardpincode van een nieuw tv-toestel is ‘0-0-0-0’. U kunt de pincode wijzigen door in het menu de optie PIN wijzigen te selecteren. N Wanneer er een leeftijdsbeperking is ingesteld, wordt het symbool “\” weergegeven. N Alles mag / Alles blok : druk hierop om alle leeftijdsbeperkingen te ontgrendelen of vergrendelen. „ PIN wijzigen U kunt de benodigde pincode voor het instellen van de tv wijzigen. N Voordat het instellingsscherm verschijnt, ziet u het invoerscherm voor de pincode. Voer uw viercijferige pincode in. (De standaard pincode : ‘0-0-0-0’) N Als u de pincode bent vergeten, drukt u achtereenvolgens op de volgende toetsen van de afstandsbediening zodat de pincode opnieuw wordt ingesteld op ‘0-0-0-0’ : POWER (Uit), MMUTE, 8, 2, 4, POWER (Aan). ❑ Algemeen „ Spelmodus → Uit / Aan Als u een spelcomputer aansluit, zoals een PlayStation TM of een Xbox TM , kunt u het menu Spelcomputer selecteren voor een realistischere spelervaring. • Wanneer de Spelmodus is ingesteld op Aan - De beeldmodus Standaard wordt automatisch geselecteerd en kan niet worden gewijzigd. - De geluidsmodus Aangepast wordt automatisch geselecteerd en kan niet worden gewijzigd. Pas het geluid aan met de equalizer. - De optie Reset in het menu Geluid wordt geactiveerd. De functie Reset herstelt de equalizerinstellingen naar de fabrieksinstellingen. N Spelmodus is niet beschikbaar in de normale TV-modus of Spelmodus is ingesteld op Uit. N Als het beeld slecht is wanneer er een extern apparaat is aangesloten op de tv, controleer dan of de spelmodus is ingeschakeld. N Als u het menu TV weergeeft in de Spelmodus, zal het beeld een beetje trillen. N De markering mark awordt weergegeven op het scherm. Dit betekent dat Spelmodus is ingeschakeld voor de geselecteerde bron. N Deze functie ondersteunt alleen de spelfunctie. N Spelmodus is niet beschikbaar in de PC-modus. „ BD Wise → Uit / Aan Wise is een functie waarmee u automatisch de optimale conditie kunt instellen voor alle aangesloten Samsung-apparaten die BD Wise ondersteunen. N Deze functie is allee actief wanneer een extern apparaat via HDMI is aangesloten op de tv. N Als BD Wise is ingesteld op Aan, wordt de beeldmodus automatisch aangepast aan de omstandigheden. „ Spaarstand → Uit / Laag / Middel / Hoog / Beeld uit Met deze functie kunt u de helderheid van de tv aanpassen om het energieverbruik te verminderen. Wanneer u ‘s avonds tv kijkt, kunt u de modus Spaarstand op Hoog zetten. Zo kunt u voorkomen dat uw ogen vermoeid raken en tevens besparen op het energieverbruik. Als u de optie Beeld uit selecteert, wordt het scherm uitgeschakeld en hoort u slechts het geluid. Druk op een willekeurige toets om Beeld uit ongedaan te maken. N In het menu Extra wordt de functie Beeld uit niet ondersteund. T Druk op de toets TOOLS om het menu Extra weer te geven. U kunt de optie Spaarstand ook instellen door Extra → Spaarstand te selecteren. BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 24 10/20/2009 4:48:01 PMNederlands - 25 „ Transparantie menu U kunt de transparantie van het schermmenu instellen. • Helder : Stelt het schermmenu als normaal in. • Donker : Maakt het schermmenu mat. „ Melodie → Uit / Laag / Middel / Hoog U kunt instellen dat er een melodie wordt afgespeeld bij het in- of uitschakelen van de tv. N De melodie wordt niet afgespeeld - Wanneer er geen geluid wordt weergegeven, omdat de toets M MUTEis ingedrukt. - Wanneer de tv geen geluid weergeeft, omdat de toets – (Volume) is ingedrukt. - Wanneer de tv door de functie Slaaptimer is uitgeschakeld. „ Lichteffect (alleen PS58B680/PS63B680) U kunt het blauwe lampje op de voorkant van de tv al naargelang de omstandigheden in of uit schakelen. Schakel het lampje uit om energie te besparen of wanneer het lampje in uw ogen schijnt. • Uit : Het blauwe lampje is altijd uit. • Stand-bystand aan : Het blauwe lampje brandt in de stand-bystand en is uit wanneer uw tv is ingeschakeld. • Tv kijken : Het blauwe lampje brandt wanneer u tv kijkt en is uit wanneer uw tv is uitgeschakeld. • Altijd : Het blauwe lampje is altijd aan. N Zet Lichteffect op Uit om minder stroom te verbruiken. Picture-in-Picture weergeven (PIP) Binnen het beeld van een tv-programma of het beeld dat afkomstig is van een extern apparaat, zoals een videorecorder of dvd-speler, kunt u een subbeeld weergeven. Zodoende kunt u het beeld van de ingestelde programma- of video-invoer vanaf elk aangesloten apparaat bekijken, terwijl ook het hoofdbeeld wordt weergegeven. N Het beeld in het PIP-venster kan er enigszins onnatuurlijk uitzien wanneer u het hoofdscherm gebruikt voor een videospel of karaoke. T Druk op de toets TOOLS om het menu Extra weer te geven. U kunt ook instellingen voor PIP configureren door Extra → PIP te selecteren. ❑ PIP → Uit / Aan U kunt de PIP-functie aan- of uitzetten. Hoofdbeeld Subbeeld Component HDMI 1, HDMI2/DVI, HDMI 3, HDMI 4 PC TV „ Formaat → / / / U kunt het formaat voor het subbeeld selecteren. N Als voor het hoofdbeeld de modus HDMI is ingeschakeld, is Formaat beschikbaar. „ Positie → / / / U kunt de positie van het subbeeld selecteren. N In de modus Double (Dubbel) ( , ) kan Positie niet worden geselecteerd. „ Kanaal U kunt een kanaal voor het subbeeld selecteren. PIP PIP : Uit ► Formaat : Positie : Kanaal : ATV 1 E Enter R Terug Algemeen Spelmodus : Uit BD Wise : Uit Spaarstand : Uit Transparantie menu : Helder Melodie : Middel PIP ► U Verpl. E Enter R Terug BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 25 10/20/2009 4:48:01 PMNederlands - 26 Ondersteund programma ❑ Juridische informatie U kunt de juridische informatie en algemene vrijwaring betreffende inhoud en services van derden weergeven. „ Algemene vrijwaring Dit is een volledige juridische kennisgeving met betrekking tot Internet@TV. N De algemene vrijwaring kan per land verschillen. N U kunt naar de vorige of volgende pagina bladeren door op de toets ◄ of ► te drukken. ❑ Producthandleiding De producthandleiding bevat informatie over de belangrijkste functies van deze tv. N Selecteer het gewenste item voor meer informatie. ❑ Zelfdiagnose „ Het beeld testen Als u denkt een probleem te hebben met het beeld voert u de beeldtest uit. Controleer het kleurenpatroon onder in het beeld om te bepalen of het probleem nog aanwezig is. N Het bericht Blijft het probleem zich voordoen in deze afbeelding? verschijnt op het scherm. Als het testpatroon niet wordt weergegeven of als er ruis optreedt in het testpatroon kiest u Ja. Als het testpatroon juist wordt weergegeven kiest u Nee. • Ja : er kan een probleem zijn met de tv. Neem contact op met het callcenter van Samsung voor hulp. • Nee : er kan een probleem zijn met uw externe apparatuur. Controleer de aansluitingen. Als het probleem zich blijft voordoen, raadpleegt u de gebruikershandleiding van het externe apparaat. „ Het geluid testen Als u denkt een probleem te hebben met het geluid voert u de geluidstest uit. U kunt het geluid controleren door via de tv een ingebouwde melodie af te spelen. N Het bericht Blijft het probleem zich voordoen bij deze geluidstest? verschijnt op het scherm. Als u tijdens de geluidstest alleen geluid hoort uit één luidspreker of helemaal geen geluid hoort, kiest u Ja. Als u geluid hoort uit de luidsprekers, kiest u Nee. • Ja : er kan een probleem zijn met de tv. Neem contact op met het callcenter van Samsung voor hulp. • Nee : er kan een probleem zijn met uw externe apparatuur. Controleer de aansluitingen. Als het probleem zich blijft voordoen, raadpleegt u de gebruikershandleiding van het externe apparaat. N Als u geen geluid hoort via de luidsprekers van de tv controleert u voordat u de geluidstest uitvoert of Luidspreker selecteren in het menu Geluid is ingesteld op TV-luidspreker. N U kunt de melodie zelfs tijdens de test horen als Luidspreker selecteren is ingesteld op Ext. luidspreker of als het geluid is gedempt doordat de toets M MUTE is ingedrukt. „ Signaalinformatie (alleen digitale kanalen) U kunt de antenne afstellen om de ontvangst van de beschikbare digitale kanalen te verbeteren. N Als de signaalsterktemeter aangeeft dat het signaal zwak is, verstelt u uw antenne handmatig om de signaalsterkte te versterken. Blijf de antenne bijstellen totdat u de positie met het sterkste signaal vindt. Ondersteuning / Invoer BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 26 10/20/2009 4:48:01 PMNederlands - 27 Bronlijst / Naam wijzigen ❑ Bronlijst Hiermee kunt u de tv of andere externe ingangsbronnen selecteren die zijn aangesloten op uw tv, zoals dvd-spelers, aftakdozen en satellietontvangers. Hiermee kunt u de gewenste ingangsbron selecteren. „ TV, Ext.1, Ext.2, AV, Component, PC, HDMI1, HDMI2/DVI, HDMI3, HDMI4, USB. N U kunt alleen de externe apparaten selecteren die zijn aangesloten op de tv. In de Bronlijst worden aangesloten ingangen gemarkeerd en boven aan de lijst geplaatst. Ingangen die niet zijn aangesloten, worden onder aan de lijst geplaatst. N De kleurentoetsen op de afstandsbediening met de Bronlijst gebruiken - Rood (Vernieuwen) : de aansluiting met de externe apparaten vernieuwen. - T TOOLS (Extra) : geeft de menu’s Naam wijzigen en Information (Informatie) weer. O Druk op de toets SOURCE op de afstandsbediening om een externe signaalbron weer te geven. ❑ Naam wijzigen U kunt het op de ingangen aangesloten apparaat een naam geven om de selectie van de ingangsbron te vereenvoudigen. „ VCR / DVD / Kabel STB / Satelliet STB / PVR STB / AV-ontvanger / Spelcomputer / Camcorder / PC / DVI / DVI PC / TV / IPTV / Blu-ray / HD DVD / DMA N Wanneer een computer met een resolutie van 1920 x 1080 bij 60Hz is aangesloten op de HDMI IN 2 (DVI)-poort, moet u de modus HDMI2/DVI in het menu Naam wijzigen in de modus Invoer instellen op PC. ❑ Software-upgrade Er worden regelmatig software-upgrades verzonden met het normale televisiesignaal om uw product bij te werken met de nieuwe mogelijkheden van digitale televisie. Deze signalen worden automatisch gedetecteerd, waarna de balk voor software-upgrades wordt weergegeven. U krijgt de optie om de upgrade te installeren. „ Via USB Plaats een USB-geheugenschijf met de firmware-upgrade in de tv. Let op dat u tijdens het toevoegen van upgrades het apparaat niet uitschakelt of de USB-geheugenschijf verwijdert. Nadat de firmware-upgrade is voltooid, wordt de tv automatisch in- en uitgeschakeld. Controleer de firmwareversie nadat de upgrades zijn voltooid. Zodra de software is bijgewerkt, worden standaard video- en audio-instellingen (fabrieksinstellingen) hersteld. „ Via kanaal Hiermee wordt de software bijgewerkt die gebruikmaakt van het uitzendsignaal. N Als de functie tijdens de softwareoverdracht wordt geselecteerd, zoekt de functie naar beschikbare software en downloadt het deze. N De benodigde tijd voor het downloaden van de software wordt door de signaalstatus bepaald. „ Upgrade stand-bymodus Selecteer Aan door op de toets ▲ of ▼ te drukken om de software-upgrade voort te zetten terwijl de stroom is ingeschakeld. 45 minuten nadat de tv op stand-by is gezet, wordt automatisch een handmatige upgrade uitgevoerd. Omdat de tv intern wordt ingeschakeld, kan dit resulteren in vage beelden op de tv. Dit kan meer dan een uur duren totdat de software-upgrade is voltooid. „ Alternatieve software Huidige software vervangen door alternatief. N Als de software is gewijzigd, wordt de huidige software weergegeven. N U kunt de huidige software veranderen in alternatieve software via Alternatieve software. ❑ Handleiding HD-verbinding Er worden beknopte instructies weergegeven hoe u de beste prestatie uit uw nieuwe HDTV haalt. We bieden u de verbindingsmethode voor HD-apparaten. N U kunt naar de vorige of volgende pagina bladeren door op de toets ◄ of ► te drukken. ❑ Contact opnemen met Samsung U kunt contact opnemen met het callcenter van Samsung of de website van Samsung raadplegen voor meer informatie over het product. Zijpaneel TV USB-station Bronlijst Naam wijzigen Invoer BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 27 10/20/2009 4:48:02 PMNederlands - 28 Netwerk Netwerkverbinding Netwerkverbinding is voor DLNA, Contents Library-Internetdownload, Internet@TV en Thuisnetwerkcentrum. ❑ Netwerkverbinding - Kabel „ LAN-verbinding voor een DHCP-omgeving Hieronder worden de procedures beschreven voor het instellen van een netwerk met Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP). Aangezien er automatisch een IP-adres, subnetmasker, gateway en DNS worden toegewezen wanneer DHCP wordt geselecteerd, hoeft u deze niet handmatig in te voeren. 1. Sluit de LAN-poort aan op de achterkant van de tv en sluit het externe modem aan met een LAN-kabel. 2. Sluit de LAN-poort aan op de aansluiting in de wand en sluit het externe modem aan met een modemkabel. N De terminals (de positie van de poort en het type) van het externe apparaat kunnen, afhankelijk van de fabrikant, verschillen. N Wanneer het toewijzen van een IP-adres door de DHCP-server is mislukt, kunt u de externe modem na ten minste 10 seconden uitschakelen en opnieuw inschakelen en het opnieuw proberen. N Voor de verbinding tussen de externe modem en de sharer (router), zie de gebruikershandleiding van het corresponderende product. N U kunt de tv direct aansluiten op de LAN zonder deze via een sharer (router) aan te sluiten. N U kun geen ADSL-modem gebruiken dat handmatig verbinding maakt, omdat deze DHCP niet ondersteunt. U dient een ADSL-modem te gebruiken die automatisch verbinding maakt. Achterpaneel van de tv De modempoort in de wand 2 Modemkabel Externe modem (ADSL/VDSL/Kabel-TV) 1 LAN-kabel U kunt een directe aansluiting maken tussen de LAN-poort en de tv, afhankelijk van uw netwerkstatus. Achterpaneel van de tv LAN-kabel De LAN-poort in de wand U kunt de LAN aansluiten via een verdeler (router). Achterpaneel van de tv De modempoort in de wand Externe modem (ADSL/ VDSL/Kabel-TV) IP-verdeler LAN-kabel Modemkabel LAN-kabel Wordt vervolgd... BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 28 10/20/2009 4:48:04 PMNederlands - 29 „ LAN-verbinding voor een omgeving met een statische IP Hieronder worden de procedures beschreven voor het instellen van een netwerk met statische IP-adressen. U dient handmatig het IP-adres, het subnetmasker, de gateway en de DNS in te voeren. Deze gegevens zijn door uw Internet Service Provider (ISP) geleverd. 1. Gebruik een LAN-kabel om de LAN-poort aan de achterkant van de tv aan te sluiten op de LAN-poort aan de wand. N De terminals (de positie van de poort en het type) van het externe apparaat kunnen, afhankelijk van de fabrikant, verschillen. N Wanneer u een statisch IP adres gebruikt, stelt uw ISP u op de hoogte van het IP-adres, het subnetmasker, de gateway en de DNS. U dient deze waarden in te voeren om de netwerkinstellingen te voltooien. Als u niet weet wat deze waarden zijn, kunt u ze opvragen bij uw netwerkbeheerder. N Voor informatie over het configureren en aansluiten van een verdeler (router), zie de gebruikershandleiding voor het corresponderende product. N U kunt de tv direct aansluiten op de LAN zonder deze via een sharer aan te sluiten. N Wanneer u een IP-sharer (IP-router) gebruikt, die DHCP ondersteunt, kunt u het apparaat ofwel als DHCP of als statische IP instellen. N Voor de procedures voor het gebruiken van een statisch IP-adres, informeer bij uw Internet Service Provider. ❑ Netwerkverbinding - Draadloos U kunt een draadloze netwerkverbinding maken via een draadloze IP-verdeler. 1. Sluit de ‘Draadloze LAN-adapter van Samsung’ aan op de USB1(HDD)- of USB2-aansluiting van de tv. N U dient de draadloze LAN-adapter van Samsung te gebruiken om een draadloos netwerk te gebruiken. N De Samsung Wireless LAN-adapter wordt apart verkocht. De WIS09ABGN Wireless LAN Adapter is verkrijgbaar bij bepaalde detailhandels, e-commercewebsites en bij Samsungparts.com. N Om een draadloos netwerk te gebruiken, dient uw tv aangesloten te zijn op een draadloze IP-verdeler. N Wanneer de draadloze IP-sharer DHCP ondersteunt, kan uw tv een DHCP-adres of een statisch IP-adres gebruiken om verbinding te maken met het draadloze netwerk. N De Samsung Wireless LAN-adapter ondersteunt IEEE 802.11A, IEEE 802.11B, IEEE 802.11G, IEEE 802.11N. Wanneer u DLNAvideo over een IEEE 802.11B/G-verbinding afspeelt, wordt de video mogelijk niet vloeiend afgespeeld. N Als u de pingverbinding kunt in- en uitschakelen met draadloze IP-sharer, schakelt u deze in. N Selecteer een kanaal voor de draadloze IP-verdeler dat momenteel niet wordt gebruikt. Wanneer het voor de draadloze IP-sharer ingestelde kanaal momenteel wordt gebruikt door een ander dichtbijzijnd apparaat, treedt er storing op en kan communicatie mislukken. Wordt vervolgd.... Achterpaneel van de tv 1 LAN-kabel De LAN-poort in de wand Achterpaneel van de tv LAN-kabel IP-verdeler LAN-kabel De LAN-poort in de wand U kunt de LAN aansluiten via een verdeler (router). Zijpaneel TV Draadloze LAN-adapter van Samsung LAN-kabel Draadloze IP-verdeler De LAN-poort in de wand BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 29 10/20/2009 4:48:07 PMNederlands - 30 N Wanneer u een ander veiligheidssysteem toepast dan de hieronder genoemde systemen, werkt dit niet bij de tv. - Wanneer de veiligheidssleutel op de AP (draadloze IP-verdeler) wordt toegepast, wordt alleen het volgende ondersteund. 1) Verificatiemodus : OPEN, SHARED, WPAPSK, WPA2PSK 2) Type codering : WEP, TKIP, AES - Wanneer de veiligheidssleutel voor de ad-hocmodus wordt toegepast, wordt alleen het volgende ondersteund. 1) Verificatiemodus : SHARED, WPANONE 2) Type codering : WEP, TKIP, AES N Als uw AP WPS(Wi-Fi Protected Setup) ondersteunt, kunt u verbinding met het netwerk maken via PBC (Push Button Configuration) of PIN (Personal Indentification Number). WPS zal in beide modi automatisch de SSID en WPA-sleutel configureren. N Als het apparaat niet is gecertificeerd, kan het mogelijk geen verbinding met de tv maken via de ‘Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter’. Netwerk instellen ❑ Type netwerk Selecteer Kabel of Draadloos als verbindingsmethode met het netwerk. N Het menu wordt alleen geactiveerd als de draadloze LAN-adapter van Samsung is aangesloten. • Kabel : aansluiten op het netwerk met een kabel. • Draadloos : draadloos op het netwerk aansluiten. ❑ Netwerk instellen „ Kabelnetwerk instellen (wanneer Type netwerk is ingesteld op Kabel) N Controleer of de LAN-kabel is aangesloten. • Internetprotocol. → Auto / Handm. • Netwerktest : U kunt na het instellen van het netwerk de status van de netwerkverbinding testen of bevestigingen. N Wanneer er geen verbinding met een bekabeld netwerk kan worden gemaakt Wanneer uw internetprovider het MAC-adres van het apparaat dat is gebruikt om voor de eerste keer verbinding met internet te maken, heeft geregistreerd en het MAC-adres iedere keer dat u verbinding maakt met internet verifieert, kan uw tv wellicht geen verbinding met internet maken aangezien het MAC-adres verschilt van het pc-adres. In dit geval kunt u bij uw internetprovider informeren over de procedures om andere apparaten dan uw computer (zoals uw tv) op internet aan te sluiten. Wanneer uw internetprovider een id of een wachtwoord vraagt om verbinding met internet (netwerk) te maken, kan uw tv wellicht geen verbinding met internet maken. In dit geval dient u uw id of wachtwoord in te voeren bij het aansluiten op internet met behulp van een verdeler (router). Mogelijk kunt u geen verbinding met internet maken vanwege een probleem met een firewall. Neem in dit geval contact op met uw internetprovider. Wanneer u geen verbinding met internet kunt maken, zelfs als u de procedures van uw internetprovider hebt gevolgd, kunt u contact opnemen met Samsung Electronics via het nummer 1-800-SAMSUNG. „ Kabelnetwerk instellen - Auto Wanneer u de LAN-kabel aansluit en DHCP wordt hierdoor ondersteund, worden de IP-instellingen automatisch geconfigureerd. 1. Stel Type netwerk in op Kabel. 2. Selecteer Kabelnetwerk instellen. 3. Stel Internetprotocol. in op Auto. N Het Internet Protocol wordt automatisch ingesteld. 4. Selecteer Netwerktest om de netwerkconnectiviteit te controleren. „ Kabelnetwerk instellen - Handm. Als u de tv via een statisch IP-adres wilt aansluiten op de LAN, moet u het internetprotocol (IP) instellen. N Controleer of de LAN-kabel is aangesloten. (Zie pagina 28) 1. Stel Type netwerk in op Kabel. 2. Selecteert een kabelnetwerk. 3. Stel Internetprotokol. in op Handmatig instellen. 4. Geef de instellingen voor IP-adres, Subnetmasker, Gateway en DNS-server op. N Druk op de cijfertoetsen op de afstandsbediening wanneer u het netwerk handmatig instelt. 5. Selecteer Netwerktest om de netwerkconnectiviteit te controleren. Instellingen Uitzenden Beveiliging Netwerk ► Algemeen Wordt vervolgd... BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 30 10/20/2009 4:48:08 PMNederlands - 31 „ Draadloos netwerk instellen (wanneer Type netwerk is ingesteld als Draadloos) N Het menu wordt alleen geactiveerd als de ‘Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter’ is aangesloten (Zie pagina 29) - Internetprotocol. → Auto / Handm. - Netwerktest : u kunt na het instellen van het netwerk de status van de netwerkverbinding testen of bevestigingen N Wanneer u geen verbinding met een AP kunt maken Uw tv kan wellicht geen AP (toegangspunt) vinden dat geconfigureerd is als een privé-SSID-type. In dit geval kunt u de APinstellingen wijzigen en het opnieuw proberen. Wanneer uw internetprovider het MAC-adres van het apparaat dat is gebruikt om voor de eerste keer verbinding met internet te maken, heeft geregistreerd en het MAC-adres iedere keer dat u verbinding maakt met internet verifieert, kan uw tv wellicht geen verbinding met internet maken aangezien het MAC-adres verschilt van het pc-adres. In dit geval kunt u bij uw internetprovider informeren over de procedures om andere apparaten dan uw computer (zoals uw tv) op internet aan te sluiten. Wanneer u geen verbinding met internet kunt maken, zelfs als u de procedures van uw internetprovider hebt gevolgd, kunt u contact opnemen met Samsung Electronics. • Selecteer een netwerk - Toegangspunt : U kunt de IP-sharer selecteren voor het gebruiken van een draadloos netwerk. N Wanneer een draadloos toegangspunt niet in de Access Point-lijst staat, kunt u op de rode toets drukken. N Wanneer de verbinding is gemaakt, keert u automatisch naar het scherm terug. N Wanneer u een AP hebt geselecteerd met een beveiligingssverificatie : het invoerscherm voor de beveiligingssleutel verschijnt. Voer de beveiligingssleutel in en druk op de blauwe toets op de afstandsbediening. N Als de beveiligingscodering van het type WEP is, zijn 0-9 en A-F beschikbaar voor het invoeren van de beveiligingssleutel. Toets Effect ▲/▼/◄/► Hiermee beweegt u de selectie omhoog, omlaag, naar links of naar rechts. ENTER Hiermee voert u het geselecteerde teken in. De rode toets Hiermee wisselt u tussen hoofdletters en kleine letters. De groene toets Hiermee wist u een ingevoerd teken. De blauwe toets Druk op deze toets om de invoer van de beveiligingssleutel te voltooien. ❑ Verbinding met WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) „ Als Security Key al is ingesteld: Selecteer in de Access Point-lijst WPS. N U kunt PBC, PIN, Bev.sleutel selecteren. • Verbinding met behulp van PBC : Selecteer een PBC (Push Button Configuration). Druk binnen 2 minuten op de PBC-toets op de AP (Access Point) en wacht tot er verbinding is gemaakt. • Verbinding met behulp van PIN : Selecteer een PIN (Personal Identification Number). N Het bericht met de pincode wordt weergegeven. Voer binnen 2 minuten de pincode op het AP-apparaat in. Selecteer OK en wacht tot er verbinding is gemaakt. N Probeer het nogmaals als er geen verbinding is gemaakt. N Wanneer er ook bij een nieuwe poging geen verbinding tot stand komt, reset u het Access Point. Raadpleeg de handleiding van het desbetreffende Access Point voor instructies. • Verbinding met behulp van een Bev.sleutel : wanneer u Bev.sleutel selecteert, wordt het invoervenster weergegeven. Voer de beveiligingssleutel in en druk op de blauwe toets. N Probeer het nogmaals als er geen verbinding is gemaakt. Draadloos netwerk instellen Bev. sleutel n Verpl. Nummer EEnter R Terug _ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 0~9 Nummer Kleine letter Verwijderen Gereed * * Draadloos netwerk instellen Selecteer een netwerk n Verpl. EEnter R Terug Zoeken Ad-hoc AP_1 AP_2 AP_3 AP_4 PBC PIN Bev. sleutel 3/9 Druk op de PBC-knop op het toegangspunt. Naam toegangspunt : AP_3 Annuleren Druk bij het instellen van het toegangspunt na het invoeren van de tv-pincode op OK. Naam toegangspunt : AP_3 Pincode : 123 45678 OK Annuleren Draadloos netwerk instellen Bev. sleutel n Verpl. Nummer EEnter R Terug _ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 0~9 Nummer Kleine letter Verwijderen Gereed BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 31 10/20/2009 4:48:10 PMNederlands - 32 „ Als Security Key niet is ingesteld: Wanneer de beveiligingsinstelling van de AP die WPS ondersteunt NONE is, kunt u PBC, PIN, None Security selecteren. Met None Security kan er zonder gebruik van de WPC-functie direct met de AP verbinding worden gemaakt. N Het proces voor PBC, PIN is hetzelfde als bovenstaand. Raadpleeg dat als Security Key al is ingesteld. N Probeer het nogmaals als er geen verbinding is gemaakt. „ Ad-hoc : U kunt via de draadloze USB-dongle zonder Access Point verbinding met een mobiel apparaat maken door van een zogenaamd peer-to-peer-netwerk gebruik te maken. • Verbinding maken met een nieuw Ad-hoc-netwerk 1. Kies Selecteer een netwerk., waarna er een apparatenlijst wordt weergegeven.. 2. Terwijl u in de apparatenlijst bent, drukt u op de blauwe toets op de afstandsbediening of selecteert u Ad-hoc. N Het bericht Het aanwezige netwerksysteem heeft mogelijk beperkte functionaliteit. Wilt u de netwerkverbinding wijzigen? wordt weergegeven. 3. Voer de gegenereerde Netwerknaam (SSID) en Bev.sleutel in op het apparaat waarmee u verbinding wilt maken. • Verbinding maken met een bestaand Ad-hoc-apparaat 1. Kies Selecteer een netwerk., waarna er een apparatenlijst wordt weergegeven. 2. Selecteer in het gewenste apparaat in de lijst. 3. Als er een beveiligingssleutel was toegepast, voert u die nogmaals in. N Als het netwerk niet normaal werkt, controleert u de Netwerknaam (SSID) en Bev.sleutel. Als de Bev.sleutel onjuist is, kan dit de reden voor de storing zijn. „ Draadloos netwerk instellen - Auto Als u verbinding met een AP wilt maken, dient de AP DHCP te ondersteunen. Alleen met apparaten die de ad-hocmodus ondersteunen kan zonder DHCP verbinding worden gemaakt. 1. Stel Type netwerk in op Draadloos. 2. Selecteer Draadloos netwerk instellen. 3. Stel Internetprotocol. in op Auto. N Het Internet Protocol wordt automatisch ingesteld. 4. Selecteer een netwerk via Selecteer een netwerk. 5. Selecteer Netwerktest om de netwerkconnectiviteit te controleren. „ Draadloos netwerk instellen - Handm. Voor een draadloos netwerk met een statisch IP-adres moet u het internetprotocol (IP) instellen. (zie pagina 29). N Raadpleeg de gebruikershandleiding bij uw IP-sharer voor meer informatie over een statisch IP-adres. 1. Stel Type netwerk in op Draadloos. 2. Selecteer Draadloos netwerk instellen. 3. Stel Internetprotocol. in op Handmatig. 4. Geef de instellingen voor IP-adres, Subnetmasker, Gateway en DNS-server op. N Druk op de cijfertoetsen op de afstandsbediening wanneer u het netwerk handmatig instelt. 5. . Selecteer een AP via Select Access Point. 6. Selecteer Netwerktest om de netwerkconnectiviteit te controleren. * * Draadloos netwerk instellen Selecteer een netwerk n Verpl. EEnter R Terug Zoeken Ad-hoc AP_1 AP_2 AP_3 AP_4 PBC PIN Bev. sleutel 3/9 Het aanwezige netwerksysteem heeft mogelijk beperkte functionaliteit. Wilt u de netwerkverbinding wijzigen? Ja Nee BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 32 10/20/2009 4:48:11 PMNederlands - 33 Een USB-apparaat aansluiten 1. Druk op de toets POWER om de tv in te schakelen. 2. Sluit een USB-apparaat met foto- en muziekbestanden aan op de USB-aansluiting aan de zijkant van de tv. N De USB 1 (HDD)-aansluiting wordt ook gebruikt als HDD-aansluiting. Een HDD (Hard Disk Drive of vaste schijf) is een apparaat waarop digitaal gecodeerde gegevens worden opgeslagen. N Media Play ondersteunt alleen USB MSC-apparatuur. MSC staat voor Mass Storage Class, een apparaat waarop grote hoeveelheden gegevens tegelijk kunnen worden opgeslagen en getransporteerd. Voorbeelden van MSC’s zijn USB-sticks, Flash-kaartlezers en USB-vaste schijven (USB-HUB’s worden niet ondersteund.) N MTP (Media Transfer Protocol) wordt niet ondersteund. N Alleen het bestandssysteem FAT16/32 wordt ondersteund. Het bestandssysteem NTFS wordt niet ondersteund. N Sluit een USB-vaste schijf op de daarvoor bestemde poort aan, de USB1 (HDD)-poort. Als het apparaat in kwestie echter meer stroom nodig heeft, kan de USB1 (HDD) mogelijk onvoldoende ondersteuning voor het apparaat bieden. N Bepaalde types digitale camera’s en geluidsapparatuur zijn mogelijk niet compatibel met dit toestel. N Sluit het apparaat rechtstreeks aan op de USB-poort van uw tv. Als u een losse kabelverbinding gebruikt, kunnen USB-compatibiliteitsproblemen optreden. N Maak een back-up van uw bestanden voordat u het apparaat aansluit op de tv om beschadiging of verlies van uw gegevens te voorkomen. SAMSUNG is niet verantwoordelijk voor beschadiging of verlies van gegevens. N Verwijder het USB-apparaat niet terwijl gegevens worden geladen. N MSC ondersteunt MP3- en JPEG-bestanden. Een PTP-apparaat ondersteunt alleen JPEG. N De sequentiële JPEG-indeling wordt ondersteund. N Hoe hoger de resolutie van het beeld, des te langer duurt het voordat het op het scherm wordt weergegeven. N De maximaal ondersteunde JPEG-resolutie is 15360 x 8640 pixels. N Bij bestanden die niet worden ondersteund of die zijn beschadigd wordt het bericht Geen ondersteund bestandstype weergegeven. N Als het aantal fotobestanden groter is dan 4000 (of het aantal muziekbestanden groter dan 3000) worden de bestanden boven de limiet mogelijk niet vermeld in de fotolijst (of muzieklijst). N MP3-bestanden met DRM die tegen betaling zijn gedownload worden niet afgespeeld. N DRM (Digital Rights Management) voorkomt illegaal gebruik van digitale bestanden en beschermt het auteursrecht. N Wanneer u een foto verplaatst kan het laden een paar seconden duren. ❑ De toetsen van de afstandsbediening gebruiken in het menu Media Play Toets Effect ▲/▼/◄/► De cursor verplaatsen en een item markeren. ENTERE Het gemarkeerde item selecteren. Een diashow of muziekbestanden afspelen of onderbreken. De diashow of het muziekbestand afspelen of pauzeren. RETURN Terug naar het vorige menu. TOOLS Verschillende functies uit de menu’s Foto en Muziek uitvoeren. De huidige diashow of het huidige muziekbestand stoppen. Naar de voorgaande/volgende groep gaan. INFO Bestandsgegevens weergeven. MEDIA.P De modus Media Play openen of afsluiten. DivX® Certified to play DivX® video, including premium content. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX,Inc. This is an official DivX Certified device that plays DivX video. Visit www.divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX video. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified® device must be registered in order to play DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) content. To generate the registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in the device setup menu. Go to vod.divx.com with this code to complete the registration process and learn more about DivX VOD. Media Play Zijpaneel TV USB-station BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 33 10/20/2009 4:48:11 PMNederlands - 34 De functie Media Play gebruiken In deze modus kunt u foto- en muziekbestanden die op een USB MSC-apparaat zijn opgeslagen, bekijken en/of beluisteren. Werkt mogelijk niet naar behoren met multimedia bestanden zonder licentie. ❑ Het menu Media Play openen 1. Druk op de MENU-knop. Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ om Toepassing te selecteren en druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE. 2. Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ om Media Play (USB & DLNA), te selecteren en druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE. O Druk op de toets MEDIA.P op de afstandsbediening om het menu Media Play te openen. O Druk een aantal malen op de toets SOURCE op de afstandsbediening om USB of DLNA, te selecteren en druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE. 3. Druk op de rode toets en druk vervolgens op de toets ▲ of ▼ om het corresponderende USB-geheugenapparaat te selecteren (indien aangesloten via een hub). Druk op de toets ENTERE. N Deze werking van deze functie kan verschillen, afhankelijk van het USB-geheugen apparaat dat op de tv is aangesloten. N De naam van het geselecteerde USB-apparaat verschijnt linksonderaan op het scherm. 4. Druk op de toets ◄ of ► om een pictogram (Photo, Music, Movie, Setup) te selecteren en druk op de toets ENTERE. N U kunt de modus Media Play afsluiten door te drukken op de toets MEDIA.P op de afstandsbediening. N In deze modus kunt u de filmclips van een spel weergeven, maar kunt u het spel zelf niet spelen. ❑ Een USB-opslagapparaat veilig verwijderen U kunt het apparaat veilig van de tv verwijderen. 1. Druk op TOOLS in het scherm met de Media Play-bestandenlijst, of op het moment dat een diavoorstelling, muziekbestand of filmbestand wordt afgespeeld. 2. Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ om Veilig verwijderen te selecteren en druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE. 3. Verwijder het USB-apparaat van de tv. ❑ Schermweergave 1. Huidige sorteervolgorde : In dit veld is te zien hoe de bestanden worden gesorteerd. 2. Groepsweergave : De sorteergroep waarin de huidige geselecteerde foto is opgenomen is gemarkeerd. 3. Geselecteerd bestand : Het huidige geselecteerde bestand wordt gemarkeerd. 4. Informatie over de geselecteerde items : Geeft het aantal foto’s weer dat is geselecteerd door te drukken op de gele toets. 5. Huidig apparaat : Geeft de naam van het huidige geselecteerde apparaat weer. N Rode toets (Apparaat) : hiermee selecteert u een aangesloten apparaat. 6. Help-items • Groene toets (Voorkeursinstellingen) : Hiermee wijzigt u de voorkeursinstellingen voor het geselecteerde bestand. Druk een aantal malen op deze toets totdat de gewenste waarde verschijnt. • Gele toets (Keuze) : Hiermee selecteert u een bestand in de bestandenlijst. De geselecteerde bestanden worden gemarkeerd met het symbool c. Druk nogmaals op de gele toets om de selectie van een bestand ongedaan te maken. • TOOLS toets (Extra) : Hiermee opent u de optiemenu’s. (Het menu Extra verandert in overeenstemming met de status van dat moment.) • R RETURN toets (Terug) : Hiermee gaar u terug naar het vorige menu. Map Voorkeur Alg. weergave Tijdslijn Kleur IMG_0335.JPG 4/6 IMG_0349. JPG ▶ ▶ Folder 2 1 Folder 1 1 Diashow Huid. afsp. Informatie Veilig verwijderen ../ mapnaam/ Photo USB „ Apparaat Keuze T Extra R Bovenste map Media Play Photo Music Setup PHOTO USB : USB 851.98MB/995.00MB Vrij Movie USB „ Apparaat RTerug Voorkeur Alg. weergave Tijdslijn Kleur Map Mar.01.2009 IMG_0343 .JPG ▶ ▶ IMG_03496 .JPG IMG_03496 .JPG Mar Apr Jun Nov IMG_0335.JPG 1/67 ▶ ▶ 2009 ◀ IMG_03496 .JPG 3 1 2 1Ges. best. 4 5 6 Photo USB „ Apparaat Fav. inst. Keuze T Extra R Terug c BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 34 10/20/2009 4:48:18 PMNederlands - 35 De Foto sorteren / Muziek / Film Lijst „ Alg. weergave Hier ziet u de mappen in het USB-geheugen. Als u een map selecteert en op de toets ENTERE drukt, worden alleen de fotobestanden in de geselecteerde map weergegeven. N Wanneer u volgens de Alg. weergave sorteert, kunt u geen favoriete bestanden instellen. „ Map Hiermee worden de bestanden op map gesorteerd. Als er veel mappen in het USB-geheugen staan, worden de fotobestanden per map weergegeven. Het bestand in de basismap wordt als eerste weergegeven, gevolgd door de andere, op naam en in alfabetische volgorde. „ Preference → ★ ★ ★ , ★ ★ ★ , ★ ★ ★ , ★ ★ ★ De bestanden worden op voorkeur (Favoriet) gesorteerd. N De voorkeursinstelling wijzigen Selecteer de gewenste foto in de fotolijst en druk een aantal keer op de groene toets totdat de gewenste instelling verschijnt. N De sterren zijn alleen voor groeperingsdoeleinden. Zo heeft bijvoorbeeld een 3-sterrenwaardering geen prioriteit boven een waardering met 1 ster. „ Tijdslijn (Photo / Movie) Hiermee worden de filmbestanden op titel gesorteerd in de volgorde symbool/cijfer/ letter/speciaal en weergegeven. „ Titel (Music / Movie) Hiermee worden de muziekbestanden gesorteerd in de volgorde symbool/cijfer/ letter/speciaal en weergegeven. ❑ Photo „ Kleur → Rood / Geel / Groen / Blauw / Magenta / Zwart / Grijs / Niet gecl. Hiermee worden foto’s op kleur gesorteerd. U kunt de kleurinfo van de foto zelf instellen. N Alvorens foto’s op kleur te sorteren, dient u Kleurweergave gebruiken in het menu Inst. in te schakelen. ❑ Music „ Artiest Hiermee worden de muziekbestanden op artiest gesorteerd in de volgorde symbool/cijfer/letter/speciaal. „ Stemming → Energiek / Ritmisch / Treurig / Spannend / Kalm / Niet gecl. Hiermee worden de muziekbestanden op stemming gesorteerd. U kunt de stemmingsinfo van de muziek zelf instellen. „ Genre Hiermee worden de muziekbestanden op genre gesorteerd. Map Voorkeur Alg. weergave Titel Artiest 1 When I Dream 3/4 Carol kidd Mr A-Z 2009 Pop usermanual Heaven NPKI ▶ 1 ▶ ▶ ▶ ▶ ../ mapnaam/ Music USB „ Apparaat Keuze T Extra R Bovenste map ▶ ▶ Voorkeur Alg. weergave Tijdslijn Titel Map Apr Apr.27.2009 Movie USB „ Apparaat Fav. inst. Keuze T Extra R Bovenste map MOVIE_003 .avi MOVIE_000 .avi MOVIE_004 .avi MOVIE_001.avi 1/5 ▶ ▶ ◀ MOVIE_005 .avi Voorkeur Alg. weergave Tijdslijn Kleur Map Mar.01.2009 IMG_0343 .JPG ▶ ▶ IMG_03496 .JPG IMG_03496 .JPG Mar Apr Jun Nov IMG_0335.JPG 1/67 ▶ ▶ 2009 ◀ IMG_03496 .JPG Photo USB „ Apparaat Fav. inst. Keuze T Extra R Terug BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 35 10/20/2009 4:48:24 PMNederlands - 36 Foto / Muziek / Film Lijst Optie MENU 1. Druk op de toets MEDIA.P. 2. Druk op de toets ◄ of ► om Photo, Music of Movie te selecteren en druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE. 3. Druk op de toets ◄ of ► om het gewenste bestand te selecteren. N Keuze Multiplex Best. - Druk op de toets ◄ of ► om het gewenste bestand te selecteren. Druk vervolgens op de gele toets. - Herhaal deze procedure om meerdere filmbestanden te selecteren. - Naast het geselecteerde filmbestand verschijnt het symbool c. 4. Druk op de toets TOOLS. N Het optiemenu verandert in overeenstemming met de status van dat moment. „ Huid. afsp. Met dit menu kunt u een presentatie afspelen van de fotobestanden in de geselecteerde sorteergroep. „ Niets select. (wanneer ten minste één bestand is geselecteerd) Hiermee kunt u de selectie van alle bestanden opheffen. N Het symbool c van het desbetreffende bestand wordt verborgen. „ Informatie De bestandsinformatie van het foto-, muziek- of filmbestand wordt weergegeven. Op dezelfde wijze kunt u de gegevens van fotobestanden tijdens een presentatie bekijken. O Druk op de toets INFO om de informatie weer te geven. „ Veilig verwijderen Hiermee kunt u het apparaat veilig van de TV verwijderen. ❑ Photo „ Diashow Via dit menu kunt u een presentatie afspelen van de fotobestanden in het USB-geheugen. „ Groep wzgn (wanneer de sortering Kleur is) Hiermee kunt u de kleurinformatie van een geselecteerd fotobestand (of een groep bestanden) wijzigen om deze van de ene kleurgroep naar de andere te verplaatsen. N De kleur van de foto zelf wordt hiermee niet gewijzigd. N De groepsinfo van het huidige bestand wordt bijgewerkt en de foto wordt naar de nieuwe kleurgroep verplaatst. N U kunt de gegevens van meerdere bestanden wijzigen door met behulp van de gele toets de gewenste bestanden te selecteren. ❑ Music „ Groep wijzigen (wanneer de sortering Mood is) Hiermee kunt u de stemmingsinfo van muziekbestanden zelf instellen. De groepsinfo van het huidige bestand wordt bijgewerkt en het bestand wordt naar de nieuwe groep verplaatst. U kunt de gegevens van meerdere bestanden wijzigen door met behulp van de gele toets de gewenste bestanden te selecteren. Select T Tools R Upper Folder Map Voorkeur Alg. weergave Titel Artiest 1 1 ▶ ▶ ../ mapnaam/ Sky When I Dream 3/4 Carol kidd Mr A-Z 2009 Pop NPKI usermanual Heaven ▶ NPKI Huid. afsp. Informatie Veilig verwijderen Music USB „ Apparaat Keuze T Extra R Bovenste map MOVIE_004 MOVIE_003 .avi .avi MOVIE_000 .avi MOVIE_005 .avi MOVIE_007 .avi MOVIE_001.avi 1/5 MOVIE_006 .avi ▶ ▶ Voorkeur Alg. weergave Tijdslijn Titel Map Apr Apr.27.2009 Movie USB „ Apparaat Fav. inst. Keuze T Extra R Bovenste map Huid. afsp. Informatie Veilig verwijderen Alg. weergave Tijdslijn Kleur Map Voorkeur IMG_0335.JPG 4/6 IMG_0349 .JPG ▶ ▶ Folder 2 1 Folder 1 1 Diashow Huid. afsp. Groep wzgn Informatie Veilig verwijderen Photo USB „ Apparaat Fav. inst. Keuze T Extra R Bovenste map BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 36 10/20/2009 4:48:30 PMNederlands - 37 Diashow / Muziek Afspelen / Film Afspelen Optie Menu 1. Druk tijdens een presentatie (of het bekijken van een foto) op de toets TOOLS om een optie in te stellen. 2. Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ om de optie te selecteren en druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE. „ Afbeeldinginstallatie / Geluidsinstellingen Hiermee kunt u de beeld- en geluidsinstellingen wijzigen. „ Informatie Hiermee kunt u de gegevens van het fotobestand weergeven. „ Veilig verwijderen Hiermee kunt u het apparaat veilig van de TV verwijderen. ❑ Opties voor de presentatie „ Stop diashow / Begin diashow Hiermee kunt u de presentatie starten of stoppen. „ Snelh. Diashow → Langzaam / Normaal / Snel Hiermee kunt u de snelheid van de presentatie bepalen. N Deze functie is alleen tijdens een presentatie beschikbaar. N U kunt de snelheid van de presentatie ook wijzigen door tijdens de presentatie op de toets π (REW) of μ (FF) te drukken. „ Effect presentatie Hiermee kunt u het overgangseffect in de presentatie kiezen. • Geen /Vervaag1 / Vervaag2 / Blind / Spiraal / Ruitjes / Lineair / Trap / Vegen / Willekeur. N Deze functie is alleen tijdens een presentatie beschikbaar. „ Roteren Hiermee kunt u foto’s in een USB-geheugen draaien. N Wanneer u op de toets ◄ drukt, wordt het beeld 270˚, 180˚, 90˚ en 0˚ gedraaid. N Wanneer u op de toets ► drukt, wordt het beeld 90˚, 180˚, 270˚ en 0˚ gedraaid. N Het gedraaide bestand wordt niet opgeslagen. „ Zoom Hiermee kunt u foto’s in een USB-geheugen op het scherm vergroten. (x1 → x2 → x4) N U kunt de ingezoomde foto verschuiven door op de toets ENTERE te drukken en vervolgens op de toetsen ▲/▼/◄/►. Als de ingezoomde afbeelding kleiner is dan het oorspronkelijke beeldformaat, werkt de verschuivingsfunctie niet. N Het ingezoomde bestand wordt niet opgeslagen. „ Achtergr.kl. Hiermee kunt u achtergrondmuziek instellen bij het weergeven van een presentatie. N U kunt deze functie alleen gebruiken als er zich zowel muziek- als fotobestanden in het USB-geheugen bevinden. N Voor het wijzigen van de BGM-modus moeten muziekbestanden worden geladen. Speel muziekbestanden in de categorie af om ze te laden. ❑ Opties voor het afspelen van muziek „ Herhalen → Aan / Uit Hiermee kunt u muziekbestanden herhaald afspelen. ❑ Opties voor het afspelen van films „ Beeldformaat → Passend / Oorspronkelijk Hiermee kunt u video afspelen op volledig scherm of op het oorspronkelijke formaat. „ Instelling ondertiteling Hiermee kunt u de ondertiteling van de film instellen. Tools Extra Stop diashow Snelheid presentatie : Normaal Effect presentatie : Vervagen1 Roteren Zoom Achtergr.kl. Afbeeldinginstallatie Geluidsinstellingen Informatie › U Verpl. E Enter eSluiten Extra Herhalingsmodus ◄ Aan ► Afbeeldinginstallatie Geluidsinstellingen Informatie Veilig verwijderen U Verpl. š™ Instell. eSluiten Extra Afbeeldinginstallatie Geluidsinstellingen Beeldformaat : Passend Instelling ondertiteling Informatie Veilig verwijderen U Verpl.  Enter eSluiten BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 37 10/20/2009 4:48:31 PMNederlands - 38 Een foto of presentatie bekijken ❑ Een presentatie bekijken N Alle bestanden in de Bestandenlijst worden voor de presentatie gebruikt. N Tijdens de presentatie worden de bestanden in volgorde afgebeeld vanaf het huidige bestand. N De presentatie verloopt in de volgorde waarin de Bestandenlijst is gesorteerd. N U kunt tijdens een presentatie automatisch muziekbestanden laten afspelen als Achtergr.kl. op Aan is ingesteld. N Druk op het moment dat een fotolijst wordt weergegeven op de toets ∂(Afspelen)/ENTERE op de afstandsbediening om de presentatie te starten. N Bedieningstoetsen voor de presentatie ENTERE De presentatie afspelen/pauzeren. De presentatie afspelen. De presentatie pauzeren. De presentatie afsluiten en terugkeren naar de fotolijst. / De snelheid van de presentatie wijzigen. T TOOLS Verschillende functies uit de fotomenu’s uitvoeren. ❑ Huidige groep afspelen 1. Druk op de toets ▲ om naar het gedeelte Sort te gaan. 2. Druk op de toets ◄ of ► om een sorteermethode te selecteren. 3. Druk op de toets ▼ om naar het gedeelte Groepenlijst te gaan. 4. Selecteer een groep met de toetsen ◄ en ►. 5. Druk op de toets ∂ (Afspelen). Er wordt een presentatie gestart met bestanden uit de geselecteerde groep. „ U kunt ook het volgende doen 1. Selecteer een sortering en vervolgens in het gedeelte Bestandenlijst de foto’s in de gewenste groep. N U kunt naar de voorgaande/volgende groep gaan door te drukken op de toets π (REW) of μ (FF). 2. Druk op de toets TOOLS. 3. Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ om Huid. afsp. te selecteren en druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE. N Alleen de foto’s in de sorteergroep met de geselecteerde bestanden worden voor de presentatie gebruikt. ❑ Een presentatie uitvoeren met alleen de geselecteerde bestanden 1. Druk op de toets ▼ om het gedeelte Bestandenlijst te selecteren. 2. Druk op de toets ◄ of ► om de gewenste foto in de bestandenlijst te selecteren. 3. Druk op de gele toets. 4. Herhaal deze procedure om meerdere foto’s te selecteren. N Links naast de geselecteerde foto verschijnt het symbool c. N Als u één bestand selecteert wordt er geen presentatie uitgevoerd. N Als u de selectie van alle bestanden ongedaan wilt maken, drukt u op de toets TOOLS en selecteert u Niets select. 5. Druk op de toets ∂ (Afspelen)/ENTERE. N De geselecteerde bestanden worden voor de presentatie gebruikt. „ U kunt ook het volgende doen 1. Druk in de Bestandenlijst op de gele toetsen om de gewenste foto’s te selecteren. 2. Druk op de toets TOOLS. 3. Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ om Diashow te selecteren en druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE. N De geselecteerde bestanden worden voor de presentatie gebruikt. ▶ ▶ Voorkeur Alg. weergave Tijdslijn Titel Map Apr Apr.27.2009 Movie USB „ Apparaat Fav. inst. Keuze T Extra R Bovenste map MOVIE_003 .avi MOVIE_000 .avi MOVIE_004 .avi MOVIE_001.avi 1/5 MOVIE_005 .avi Alg. weergave Tijdslijn Kleur Map Voorkeur IMG_0335.JPG 4/6 IMG_0349 .JPG ▶ ▶ Folder 2 1 Folder 1 1 Diashow Huid. afsp. Groep wzgn Informatie Veilig verwijderen Photo r Normal IMG_0335.JPG 3648x2432 2009/3/15 1/4 USB E Pauze lr Vorig / Volg T Extra R Terug USB „ Apparaat Fav. inst. Keuze T Extra R Bovenste map BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 38 10/20/2009 4:48:37 PMNederlands - 39 Muziek afspelen ❑ Een muziekbestand afspelen 1. Druk op de toets ▼ om het gedeelte Bestandenlijst te selecteren. 2. Druk op de toets ◄ of ► om het gewenste muziekbestand te selecteren. 3. Druk op de toets ∂ (Afspelen)/ENTERE. N In dit menu ziet u alleen bestanden met de extensie MP3. Bestanden met andere extensies worden niet weergeven, ook al staan ze wel op het USB-apparaat. N Het geselecteerde bestand wordt bovenaan weergegeven, compleet met speelduur. N U kunt het volume van de muziek instellen met de volumetoets op de afstandsbediening. Als u het geluid wilt onderdrukken, drukt u op M MUTE op de afstandsbediening. N Als het geluid bij het afspelen van MP3-bestanden ongewoon klinkt, past u de Toonregeling en SRS TruSurround HD in het geluidsmenu aan. (Een overgemoduleerd MP3-bestand kan geluidsproblemen veroorzaken.) N Het kan voorkomen dat de speelduur van een muziekbestand wordt weergegeven als ‘00:00:00’ als de informatie betreffende de speelduur niet aan het begin van het bestand wordt aangetroffen. N π (REW) of μ (FF) werken niet tijdens het afspelen. N Toetsen voor het afspelen van muziek ENTERE Het muziekbestand afspelen/pauzeren. De afspeelmodus afsluiten en terugkeren naar de muzieklijst. Het muziekbestand afspelen. T TOOLS Verschillende functies uit de muziekmenu’s uitvoeren. Het muziekbestand pauzeren. N Informatiepictogram muziekfunctie Wanneer alle muziekbestanden in de map (of het geselecteerde bestand) worden herhaald. Herhalingsmodus is Aan. Wanneer alle muziekbestanden in de map (of het geselecteerde bestand) eenmaal worden afgespeeld. Herhalingsmodus is Uit. ❑ De muziekgroep afspelen 1. Druk op de toets ▲ om naar het gedeelte Sort te gaan. 2. Druk op de toets ◄ of ► om een sorteermethode te selecteren. 3. Druk op de toets ▼ of ENTERE om naar het gedeelte Groepenlijst te gaan. 4. Druk op de toets ∂ (Afspelen). De bestanden van de geselecteerde groep worden afgespeeld. „ U kunt ook het volgende doen 1. Selecteer een sortering en vervolgens in het gedeelte Bestandenlijst de bestanden in de gewenste groep. N U kunt naar de voorgaande/volgende groep gaan door te drukken op de toets π (REW) of μ (FF). 2. Druk op de toets TOOLS. 3. Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ om Huid. afsp. te selecteren en druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE. N De muziekbestanden in de sorteergroep waarin het geselecteerde bestand zich bevindt worden afgespeeld. ❑ De geselecteerde muziekbestanden afspelen 1. Druk op de toets ▼ om het gedeelte Bestandenlijst te selecteren. 2. Druk op de toets ◄ of ► om het gewenste muziekbestand te selecteren. 3. Druk op de gele toets. 4. Herhaal deze procedure om meerdere muziekbestanden te selecteren. N Links naast het geselecteerde muziekbestand verschijnt het symbool c. N Als u de selectie van alle bestanden ongedaan wilt maken, drukt u op de toets TOOLS en selecteert u Niets select. 5. Druk op de toets ∂ (Afspelen)/ENTERE. N De geselecteerde bestanden wordt afgespeeld. r 00:00:02 / 00:04:55 r 1/3 When I Dream r r Geek In The Pink Heaven USB E Pauze lr Vorig / Volg T Extra R Terug BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 39 10/20/2009 4:48:38 PMNederlands - 40 Een filmbestand afspelen ❑ Een filmbestand afspelen 1. Druk op de toets ▼ om het gedeelte Bestandenlijst te selecteren. 2. Druk op de toets ◄ of ► om het gewenste filmbestand te selecteren, 3. Druk op de toets ∂ (Afspelen)/ENTERE. N Het geselecteerde bestand wordt afgespeeld. N Het geselecteerde bestand wordt bovenaan weergegeven, compleet met speelduur. N Het kan voorkomen dat de speelduur van een filmbestand wordt weergegeven als ‘00:00:00’ als de informatie betreffende de speelduur niet aan het begin van het bestand wordt aangetroffen. N U kunt spannende multimediabestanden van games bekijken, maar de gamefunctie wordt niet ondersteund. N Ondersteunde ondertitelingsindelingen Naam Bestandsextensie Programmeertaal MPEG-4 op tijd gebaseerde tekst .ttxt XML SAMI .smi HTML SubRip .srt op tekenreeks gebaseerd SubViewer .sub op tekenreeks gebaseerd Micro DVD .sub of .txt op tekenreeks gebaseerd N Ondersteunde videobestandsindelingen Bestandsextensie Houder Videodecoder Audiocodec Resolutie *.avi AVI Divx 3.11/4.x/5.1/6.0 MP3 AC3 LPCM ADPCM 720x576 XviD 1920x1080 H.264 BP/MP/HP 1920x1080 MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080 Motion JPEG 800x600 *.mkv MKV Divx 3.11/4.x/5.1/6.0 MP3 AC3 LPCM ADPCM 720x576 XviD 1920x1080 H.264 BP/MP/HP 1920x1080 MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080 Motion JPEG 800x600 *.asf ASF Divx 3.11/4.x/5.1/6.0 MP3 AC3 LPCM ADPCM WMA 720x576 XviD 1920x1080 H.264 BP/MP/HP 1920x1080 MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080 Motion JPEG 800x600 *.wmv (VC1) ASF VC1 WMA 1920x1080 *.mp4 MP4 (SMP4) H.264 BP/MP/HP MP3 ADPCM AAC 1920x1080 MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080 XVID 1920x1080 *.3gp 3GPP H.264 BP/MP/HP ADPCM AAC 1920x1080 MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080 *.vro VRO VOB MPEG2 AC3 MPEG LPCM 1920x1080 MPEG1 1920x1080 *.mpg *.mpeg PS MPEG1 AC3 MPEG LPCM 1920x1080 MPEG2 1920x1080 *.ts *.tp *.trp TS MPEG2 AAC MP3 1920x1080 H.264 1920x1080 VC1 1920x1080 N Toetsen voor het afspelen van video ENTERE Het filmbestand afspelen/onderbreken Het filmbestand afspelen Het filmbestand onderbreken De afspeelmodus afsluiten en terugkeren naar de filmlijst. T TOOLS Verschillende functies uit de filmmenu’s uitvoeren. ◄/► Vooruit of achteruit door het filmbestand springen. ▲/▼ Naar het begin/eind van het bestand gaan. Wordt vervolgd... ▶ r r 00:00:02 / 00:01:55 1/3 MOVIE_000.avi USB E Pauze lr Springen T Extra R Terug BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 40 10/20/2009 4:48:39 PMNederlands - 41 ❑ De filmgroep afspelen 1. Druk op de toets ▲ om naar het gedeelte Sort te gaan. 2. Druk op de toets ◄ of ► om een sorteermethode te selecteren. 3. Druk op de toets ▼ of ENTERE om naar het gedeelte Groepenlijst te gaan. 4. Druk op de toets ∂ (Afspelen). Alleen de bestanden van de geselecteerde groep worden afgespeeld. „ U kunt ook het volgende doen 1. Selecteer een sortering en vervolgens in het gedeelte Bestandenlijst de bestanden in de gewenste groep. N U kunt naar de voorgaande/volgende groep gaan door te drukken op de toets π (REW) of μ (FF). 2. Druk op de toets TOOLS. 3. Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ om Huid. afsp. te selecteren en druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE. N De filmbestanden in de sorteergroep waarin het geselecteerde bestand zich bevindt worden afgespeeld. ❑ De geselecteerde filmbestanden afspelen 1. Druk op de toets ▼ om het gedeelte Bestandenlijst te selecteren. 2. Druk op de toets ◄ of ► om het gewenste muziekbestand te selecteren. 3. Druk op de gele toets. N Links naast het geselecteerde filmbestand verschijnt het symbool c. N Als u de selectie van alle bestanden ongedaan wilt maken, drukt u op de toets TOOLS en selecteert u Niets select. 4. Herhaal deze procedure om meerdere filmbestanden te selecteren. 5. Druk op de toets ∂ (Afspelen)/ENTERE. N Alleen het geselecteerde bestand wordt afgespeeld. ❑ De film doorlopend afspelen (Resume Play) Als u een film die wordt afgespeeld verlaat, kan deze later weer worden hervat op het punt waar deze was gestopt. 1. Selecteer het filmbestand dat u doorlopend wilt afspelen door het met de toets ◄ of ► in de Bestandenlijst te selecteren. 2. Druk op de toets ∂ (Afspelen)/ENTERE. 3. Selecteer Doorlpnd. (Resume Play) door op de blauwe toets te drukken. N De film wordt afgespeeld vanaf het punt waar deze was onderbroken. N Als de functie Herinn. doorl. afsp. Film in het menu Setup is ingesteld op Aan, verschijnt er een pop-upbericht wanneer het afspelen van een film wordt hervat. Het menu Setup gebruiken In Setup vindt u de gebruikersinstellingen van het menu Media Play. 1. Druk op de toets MEDIA.P op de afstandsbediening om het menu Media Play te openen. 2. Druk op de toets ◄ of ► om Setup te selecteren en druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE. 3. Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ om de gewenste optie te selecteren. 4. Druk op de toets ◄ of ► om de optie te selecteren. N U kunt de modus Media Play afsluiten door te drukken op de toets MEDIA.P op de afstandsbediening. „ Kleurweergave gebruiken → Aan / Uit Hiermee kunt u foto’s op kleur sorteren. N Als deze optie is ingesteld op Aan, kan de laadtijd toenemen, doordat er kleurinformatie van de foto’s wordt vergaard. „ Herhalen → Aan / Uit Hiermee kunt u muziekbestanden herhaald laten afspelen. „ Herinn. doorl. afsp. Film → Aan / Uit Hiermee kunt u de helptekst weergeven voor het voortgezet afspelen van een film. „ De registratiecode voor DivX® VOD Hiermee geeft u de geautoriseerde registratiecode voor de TV weer. Als u met de DivX-website verbinding maakt en de registratiecode bij een persoonlijke account registreert, kunt u een VOD-registratiebestand downloaden. Als u de VOD-registratie via Media Play afspeelt, is de registratie voltooid. Meer informatie over DivX® VOD vindt u op www.DivX.com. „ De deactiveringscode voor DivX® VOD Wanneer DivX® VOD niet is geregistreerd, wordt de registratiedeactivatiecode weergegeven. Als u deze functie uitvoert wanneer DivX® VOD is geregistreerd, wordt de actuele DivX® VOD-registratie gedeactiveerd. „ Uitvoertijd schermbev. → 10 min / 20 min / 1 uur Hiermee kunt u de wachttijd instellen voor het inschakelen van de schermbeveiliging. „ Informatie Hiermee kunt u de informatie van het aangesloten apparaat weergeven. „ Veilig verwijderen Hiermee kunt u het apparaat veilig van de TV verwijderen. Media Play USB : USB 851.98MB/995.00MB Vrij SETUP Photo Music Movie Setup USB „ Apparaat eSluiten Setup Verpl. Instell. Terug Kleurweergave gebruiken ◄ Uit ► Herhalen Aan Help doorl. afsp. film Aan De registratiecode voor DivX® VOD De deactiveringscode voor DivX® VOD Uitvoertijd schermbev. 10 min Informatie Veilig verwijderen USB „ Apparaat BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 41 10/20/2009 4:48:39 PMNederlands - 42 Het DLNA-netwerk instellen Met DLNA kunt u video en foto’s die op uw pc zijn opgeslagen via een netwerkverbinding op uw tv bekijken in de Media Play. U hoeft deze dan niet naar een USB-geheugen te kopiëren en dit op de tv aan te sluiten. Om DLNA te kunnen gebruiken moet de tv zijn aangesloten op het netwerk en moet de DLNA-toepassing zijn geïnstalleerd op de pc. ❑ Netwerkverbindingsdiagram – met gebruik van kabels ❑ Netwerkverbindingsdiagram – draadloos 1. Raadpleeg ‘Het netwerk instellen’ voor meer informatie over het configureren van uw netwerk. N Het wordt aanbevolen om de TV en de pc in hetzelfde subnet op te nemen. De eerste 3 delen van het subnetadres en IP-adres van de TV en de pc moeten gelijk zijn en alleen het laatste deel (het hostadres) moet anders zijn (bijvoorbeeld IP-adres : 123.456.789.**) 2. Verbind de pc waarop het programma Samsung PC Share Manager wordt geïnstalleerd door middel van een netwerkkabel met de externe modem. N U kunt de TV rechtstreeks op de pc aansluiten, zonder de verbinding door een verdeler (router) te laten lopen. De DLNA-toepassing installeren Voordat u het materiaal van de pc op de TV kunt afspelen, moet u de toepassing installeren. Om een goede werking van de DLNA-functie te verzekeren, gebruikt u het programma op de cd-rom die met de tv is meegeleverd, of gebruikt u het programma Samsung PC Share Manager dat met het tv-model correspondeert en dat van de website van Samsung kan worden gedownload. Wordt vervolgd... TV Externe modem (ADSL/VDSL/Kabel-TV) LAN PC LAN Media Play-DLNA TV LAN PC of 1 Zijpaneel TV Draadloze LAN-adapter van Samsung BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 42 10/20/2009 4:48:41 PMNederlands - 43 De DLNA-toepassing gebruiken De indeling van het programmascherm 1. Menu’s : De toepassing kent de volgende menu’s : Bestnd, Delen, Server en Help. 2. De geselecteerde pc-servermap delen. 3. Het delen opheffen 4. De pc-map en -bestanden vernieuwen. 5. De status van de gedeelde map synchroniseren. 6. Overzicht van de mappen en bestanden op de pc die worden gedeeld. 7. Overzicht van de mappen die door de gebruiker worden gedeeld. 8. Pc-servernaam die wordt weergegeven in de apparatenlijst van de Media Play : klik om de naam te wijzigen. „ Systeemvereisten 1. Plaats de programma-cd die bij de tv is geleverd in de pc. 2. Voor de installatie van het programma is 30MB aan schijfruimte vereist. N Als u bestanden deel, is 30MB aan vasteschijfruimte nodig voor elke 100 bestanden. N Als u de bestandsdeling opheft, wordt de vasteschijfruimte die wordt gebruikt voor de miniatuurafbeeldingen ook vrijgegeven. „ Ondersteunde indelingen • Afbeeldingen : JPEG/ Audio: MP3/ Video: AVI, MKV, ASF, MP4, 3GPP, PS, TS naam. Zie ‘Een filmbestand afspelen’ voor uitgebreide aanwijzingen betreffende ondersteunde videobestandsindelingen. „ De toepassing installeren ► ► ► 1. Start het bestand Setup.exe op de programma-cd die bij het product is geleverd. N U kunt het bestand ook downloaden van www.samsung.com. 2. Installeer de SAMSUNG PC Share Manager zoals aangegeven in de onderstaande afbeeldingen. 3. Nadat de installatie is voltooid verschijnt het pictogram PC Share Manager op het PC. N Dubbelklik op het pictogram om het programma uit te voeren. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 43 10/20/2009 4:48:42 PMNederlands - 44 ❑ Delen „ Een map delen U kunt een map op uw pc delen met de tv. „ Het delen van een map opheffen U kunt het delen van een map op uw pc opheffen. Selecteer een map in het deelvenster map delen en klik op delen ongedaan maken. „ De huidige instellingen toepassen Voer deze handeling uit wanneer dit nodig is in verband met het delen van een nieuwe map of het opheffen van het delen van een map. Het menu Gewijzigde status inst. past de wijzigingen in de gedeelde mappen toe op de gegevens die zijn opgeslagen met het programma PC share. Aangezien het toepassen van wijzigingen op de interne gegevens een tijdrovend proces is, stelt deze functie de gebruiker in staat de wijzigingen alleen toe te passen op het moment dat dit nodig is. Zolang de optie Gewijzigde status inst. nog niet is geselecteerd, wordt de gewijzigde toestand van de gedeelde map niet toegepast op de server. Wijzigingen in de gedeelde mappen worden pas toegepast op de pc nadat u de optie Gewijzigde status inst. hebt geselecteerd. „ Toegangsrechten instellen Om de tv in staat te stellen de pc te vinden moet deze worden ingesteld op Beleid apparaat instellen in het venster Access Permission Settings. Bovendien moeten de pc-server en de tv zich binnen hetzelfde subnet bevinden. • Methode : Open het menu delen en kies Beleid apparaat instellen. Items die niet kunnen worden geselecteerd worden in grijs weergegeven. U kunt de toegangsrechten wijzigen met de knoppen Allow Accepteren / Weigeren. U kunt een item verwijderen door het te selecteren en op geselecteerd item verwijderen te klikken. ❑ Server „ Server U kent het gebruik van uw pc als server inschakelen en uitschakelen. „ Server starten tijdens het opstarten van Windows U kunt instellen of de server op de pc automatisch moet worden gestart tijdens het opstarten van Windows. „ Servernaam wijzigen U kunt de naam van de pc-server wijzigen. De DLNA-functie gebruiken ❑ Het DLNA-menu gebruiken DLNA (Digital Living Network Alliance) maakt het mogelijk materiaal af te spelen dat is opgeslagen op een DLNA-server (meestal uw PC) die rechtstreeks of via een netwerk met uw tv is verbonden. Media Play maakt het om mogelijk materiaal in een USB-geheugen dat op de televisie is aangesloten af te spelen, terwijl DLNA het mogelijk maakt om materiaal af te spelen op een DLNA-server (uw pc) die rechtstreeks of via een netwerk met uw televisie verbonden is. De procedure voor het gebruik van het materiaal is dezelfde als bij Media Play (USB & DLNA). 1. Druk op de toets MEDIA.P op de afstandsbediening om het DLNA-menu te openen. 2. Druk op de toets ◄ of ► om een van de pictogrammen (Photo, Music, Movie, Setup) te selecteren en druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE. N U kunt de modus DLNA afsluiten door te drukken op de toets MEDIA.P op de afstandsbediening. N DLNA ondersteunt de volgende functies niet. - De functies Achtergrondmuziek en Instellingen achtergrondmuziek. - Bestanden sorteren op voorkeur in de mappen Foto, Muziek en Film. - De functie Groep wzgn. - Kopiëren / Verwijderen. - De functie Veilig verwijderen. - De functie van de knoppen REW/FF (π/μ) tijdens het afspelen van een film. - De film doorlopend afspelen (Resume Play). N De Skip-functie werkt mogelijk niet met bepaalde indelingen, zoals ASF en MKV. N Divx DRM, Multi-audio en bijgevoegde ondertiteling wordt niet ondersteund. N Samsung PC Share Manager moet door de pc-firewall worden toegestaan. N De functie Skip (toetsen ◄/►) of Pause werkt mogelijk niet wanneer er een film wordt afgespeeld via de DLNA van een andere fabrikant, afhankelijk van het betreffende materiaal. N De speelduur wordt mogelijk niet weergegeven terwijl een film wordt afgespeeld. Media Play Photo Music Setup PHOTO USB : USB 851.98MB/995.00MB Vrij Movie USB „ Apparaat Terug BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 44 10/20/2009 4:48:43 PMNederlands - 45 Over Anynet+ Anynet + -apparaten aansluiten Anynet + is een functie waarmee u alle aangesloten Samsung-apparaten die Anynet + ondersteunen, kunt bedienen met de afstandsbediening van de Samsung-tv. Het Anynet + -systeem kan alleen worden gebruikt met Samsung-apparaten die over Anynet + beschikken. Om u ervan te verzekeren dat uw Samsung-apparaat deze functie heeft, kunt u controleren of er een Anynet + -logo op het apparaat zit. ❑ Op een tv aansluiten 1. Sluit de HDMI-kabel aan op een HDMI-aansluiting op de tv ([HDMI IN 1], [HDMI IN 2 (DVI)], [HDMI IN 3] of [HDMI IN 4]) en op de aansluiting HDMI OUT van het betreffende Anynet + -apparaat. ❑ Op de thuisbioscoop aansluiten 1. Sluit de HDMI-kabel aan op een HDMI-aansluiting op de tv ([HDMI IN 1], [HDMI IN 2 (DVI)], [HDMI IN 3] of [HDMI IN 4]) en op de aansluiting HDMI OUT van het betreffende Anynet + -apparaat. 2. Verbind de HDMI-kabel op de aansluiting HDMI IN van de thuisbioscoop en de uitgang HDMI OUT van het betreffende Anynet + -apparaat. N Verbind de optische kabel tussen de uitgang Digital Audio Out (Optical) op uw tv en de ingang Digital Audio van de thuisbioscoop. N Wanneer de bovenstaande verbinding wordt gevolgd, voert de optische aansluiting slechts 2-kanaals audiosignaal uit. U hoort alleen geluid uit de linker- en rechterluidspreker van de thuisbioscoop en de subwoofer. Voor een 5.1-kanaals audiosignaal, sluit u de optische aansluiting van de dvd-speler of aftakdoos/satellietontvanger (Anynet + -apparaat 1 of 2) rechtstreeks aan op een versterker of op de thuisbioscoop en niet op de tv. N Alleen één thuisbioscoop aansluiten. N U kunt een Anynet + -apparaat aansluiten met een HDMI 1.3-kabel. Bepaalde HDMI-kabels ondersteunen mogelijk geen Anynet + -functies. N Anynet + werkt wanneer het AV-apparaat dat Anynet + ondersteunt, op stand-by staat of is ingeschakeld. N Anynet + ondersteunt maximaal 12 AV-apparaten. U kunt maximaal drie apparaten van hetzelfde type aansluiten. N Anynet + ondersteunt hoogstens drie apparaten tegelijk. Anynet + - apparaat 1 Anynet + - apparaat 2 Anynet + - apparaat 3 TV HDMI 1.3-kabel HDMI 1.3-kabel HDMI 1.3-kabel Anynet + - apparaat 4 HDMI 1.3-kabel TV Anynet + -apparaat 1 Anynet + -apparaat 2 Anynet + -apparaat 3 HDMI 1.3-kabel HDMI 1.3-kabel HDMI 1.3-kabel HDMI 1.3-kabel Thuisbioscoop Optische kabel Anynet + -apparaat 4 HDMI 1.3-kabel BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 45 10/20/2009 4:48:44 PMNederlands - 46 Anynet + instellen ❑ Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) instellen T Druk op de toets TOOLS om het menu Extra weer te geven. U kunt het Anynet + -menu ook weergeven door Extra → Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) te selecteren. „ Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) → Uit / Aan Als u de functie Anynet + wilt gebruiken, moet Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) zijn ingesteld op Aan. N Wanneer de functie Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) is uitgeschakeld, worden alle bewerkingen betreffende Anynet + uitgeschakeld. „ Automatisch uitschakelen → Nee / Ja Een Anynet + -apparaat automatisch uitschakelen wanneer de tv wordt uitgeschakeld. N De actieve bron op de afstandsbediening van de tv moet te worden ingesteld op TV om de functie Anynet + te kunnen gebruiken. N Wanneer u Automatisch uitschakelen instelt op Ja, worden de externe apparaten die zijn aangesloten, ook uitgeschakeld wanneer de tv wordt uitgeschakeld. Wanneer een extern apparaat nog opneemt, kan dit mogelijk wel of niet worden uitgeschakeld. Tussen Anynet + -apparaten schakelen 1. Druk op de toets TOOLS. Druk op de toets ENTERE om Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) te selecteren. 2. Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ om Apparatenlijst selecteren en druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE. N De Anynet + -apparaten die op de tv zijn aangesloten, worden weergegeven. Wanneer u het door u gewenste apparaat niet kunt vinden, kunt u op de rode knop drukken om op apparaten te scannen. N Alleen wanneer u in het in menu Instellingen de optie Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) instelt op Aan, wordt het menu Apparatenlijst weergegeven. 3. Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ om een bepaald apparaat te selecteren en druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE. Er wordt naar het geselecteerde apparaat overgeschakeld. N Het kan twee minuten voordat naar de geselecteerde apparaten is overgeschakeld. U kunt de bewerking in de tussentijd niet annuleren. N De benodigde tijd voor het zoeken naar apparaten wordt bepaald door het aantal aangesloten apparaten. N Als u een extern apparaat hebt geselecteerd door op de toets SOURCE te drukken, kunt u de functie Anynet + niet gebruiken. Zorg ervoor dat u naar een extern Anynet + -apparaat schakelt via de toets TOOLS. ❑ Menu Anynet + Welke opties in het menu Anynet + worden weergegeven, is afhankelijk van het type en de status van de Anynet + -apparaten die op de tv zijn aangesloten. Menu Anynet + Beschrijving Tv weergeven De modus Anynet + schakelt naar de tv-uitzendmodus. Apparatenlijst Geeft de lijst met Anynet + -apparaten weer. (apparaat_naam)Menu Toont de menu’s van het aangesloten apparaat. Wanneer er bijvoorbeeld een dvd-recorder is aangesloten, verschijnt het diskmenu van de dvd-recorder. (apparaat_naam) INFO Toont de afspeelmenu’s van het aangesloten apparaat. Wanneer er bijvoorbeeld een dvd-recorder is aangesloten, verschijnt het afspeelmenu van de dvd-recorder. Opnemen (*recorder) Starten van opname. (Dit menu werkt alleen bij een apparaat dat opnemen ondersteunt.) (*recorder) Opname reserveren Hiermee kunt een opname voor de recorder reserveren. (Dit is alleen beschikbaar voor apparaten die de functie recording reservation ondersteunen). Opname stoppen : (*recorder) Hiermee wordt het opnemen beëindigd. Ontvangern Geluid wordt uitgevoerd via de ontvanger. Wordt vervolgd... Toepassing Media Play (USB & DLNA) Anynet + (HDMI-CEC)► Content Library Internet@TV Thuisnetwerkcentrum U Verpl. EEnter R Terug Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) : Nee ▶ Automatisch uitschakelen : Ja U Verpl. EEnter R Terug Tv weergeven Apparatenlijst Opname : DVDR DVDR MENU DVDR INFO Receiver : Aan Instellingen BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 46 10/20/2009 4:48:45 PMNederlands - 47 ❑ Beschikbare toetsen op afstandsbediening van de tv in de modus Anynet + Type apparaat Bedieningsstatus Beschikbare toetsen Anynet + -apparaat Nadat u naar het apparaat bent geschakeld, wanneer het menu van het betreffende apparaat wordt weergegeven op het scherm. Cijfertoetsen ▲/▼/ De toetsen ◄/►/ENTERE kleurtoetsen /de toets EXIT Nadat u naar het apparaat bent geschakeld, terwijl u een bestand afspeelt. (Terugspoelen) / (Vooruitspoelen) (Stop) / (Afspelen) / (Pauze) Apparaat met ingebouwde tuner Nadat u naar het apparaat bent overgeschakeld, wanneer u tv kijkt. Toets P / Audioapparaat Wanneer ontvanger is ingeschakeld. Toets = / Toets M MUTE N De functie Anynet + werkt alleen wanneer de actieve bron op de afstandsbediening is ingesteld op tv. N De toets werkt alleen wanneer opname mogelijk is. N U kunt Anynet + -apparaten niet bedienen met de toetsen op de tv. U kunt Anynet + -apparaten alleen bedienen met de afstandsbediening van de tv. N De afstandsbediening van de tv werkt mogelijk niet in bepaalde omstandigheden. Selecteer in dat geval opnieuw het Anynet + -apparaat. N De Anynet + -functies werken niet bij producten van andere fabrikanten. N De werking van de toetsen , is enigszins afhankelijk van het apparaat. N Wanneer er meerdere opnameapparaten zijn aangesloten, worden deze weergegeven als (*recorder) en wanneer er slechts één opnameapparaat is aangesloten, wordt deze weergegeven als (*apparaat_naam). Opnemen U kunt een tv-programma opnemen met een Samsung-recorder. 1. Druk op de toets TOOLS. Druk op de toets ENTERE om Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) te selecteren. 2. Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ om Opnemen (recorder) te selecteren en druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE. Het opnemen wordt gestart. N Bij meerdere opnameapparaten Wanneer er meerdere opnameapparaten zijn aangesloten, wordt een apparatenlijst weergegeven. Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ om een opnameapparaat te selecteren en druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE. Het opnemen wordt gestart. N Wanneer het opnameapparaat niet wordt weergegeven selecteert u Apparatenlijst en drukt u op de rode toets om apparaten te zoeken. N Wanneer u op de toets drukt, wordt datgene waar u op dat moment naar kijkt, opgenomen. Wanneer u vanaf een ander apparaat een video bekijkt, wordt de video van dat apparaat opgenomen. N Controleer voor u begint met opnemen of de antenne correct is aangesloten op het opnameapparaat., Voor het correct aansluiten van een antenne op een opnameapparaat kunt u de gebruikershandleiding van het opnameapparaat raadplegen. U Verpl. EEnter R Terug Tv weergeven Apparatenlijst Opname : DVDR DVDR MENU DVDR INFO Receiver : Aan Instellingen BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 47 10/20/2009 4:48:45 PMNederlands - 48 Luisteren via een ontvanger U kunt geluid beluisteren via een ontvanger in plaats van de luidsprekers van de tv. 1. Druk op de toets TOOLS. Druk op de toets ENTERE om Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) te selecteren. 2. Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ voor het selecteren van Ontvanger. Druk op de toets ◄ of ► om Aan of Uit te selecteren. N Wanneer uw ontvanger alleen audio ondersteunt, verschijnt deze wellicht niet in de apparatenlijst. N De ontvanger werkt wanneer u de Optical IN-aansluiting van de ontvanger correct hebt aangesloten op de Optical Out-aansluiting van de tv. N Wanneer de ontvanger (thuisbioscoop) is ingesteld op Aan, hoort u alleen geluid via de Optical-aansluiting van de tv. Wanneer de tv een DTV-signaal (antenne) weergeeft, verstuurt de tv een 5.1-kanaals geluidssignaal naar de ontvanger van de thuisbioscoop. Wanneer de bron een digitaal onderdeel is, zoals een dvd en deze op de tv aangesloten is via HDMI, geeft de ontvanger van de thuisbioscoop alleen een 2-kanaals signaal weer. N Wanneer u de functie Media Play gebruikt, wordt het geluid mogelijk niet goed uitgevoerd via de ontvanger. N Wanneer u via de ontvanger luistert, gelden er beperkingen voor het gebruik van de audiomenu’s. N Wanneer de stroomvoorziening naar de tv wordt onderbroken en de Ontvanger is ingesteld op Aan is het mogelijk dat voor Luidspreker selecteren de optie Ext. luidspreker is geselecteerd wanneer de tv opnieuw wordt ingeschakeld. (Zie pagina 21) Problemen oplossen m.b.t. Anynet + Symptoom Oplossing Anynet + werkt niet. • Controleer of het apparaat een Anynet + -apparaat is. Het Anynet + -systeem ondersteunt alleen Anynet + apparaten. • Sluit niet meer dan één ontvanger aan (thuisbioscoop). • Controleer of het netsnoer van het Anynet + -apparaat correct is aangesloten. • Controleer de video-/audio-/HDMI 1.3-kabelverbindingen van het Anynet + -apparaat. • Controleer of Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) is ingesteld op Aan in het instellingenmenu Anynet + . • Controleer of de afstandsbediening van de tv in de tv-modus staat. • Controleer of het de exclusieve afstandsbediening van Anynet + is. • In bepaalde situaties werkt Anynet + niet. (Kanalen zoeken, Media Play uitvoeren, Plug & Play, enzovoort.) • Wanneer u de HDMI 1.3-kabel aansluit of verwijdert, dient u opnieuw naar apparaten te zoeken of uw televisie uit te schakelen en opnieuw in te schakelen. • Controleer of de Anynet + -functie van het Anynet + -apparaat is ingeschakeld. Ik wil Anynet + starten. • Controleer of het Anynet + -apparaat goed is aangesloten op de tv en controleer of Anynet + (HDMICEC) is ingesteld op Aan in het instellingenmenu van Anynet + . • Druk op de toets TV op de afstandsbediening van de tv om naar de tv te schakelen. Druk vervolgens op de toets TOOLS om het menu Anynet + te openen en het gewenste menu te selecteren. Ik wil Anynet + verlaten. • Selecteer Tv weergeven in het menu Anynet + . • Druk op de toets SOURCE op de afstandsbediening van de tv en selecteer een ander apparaat dan een Anynet + -apparaat. (De kanaaltoets werkt alleen wanneer er geen Anynet + -apparaat met een ingebouwde tuner is aangesloten.) Het bericht Verbinden met Anynet + -apparaat... wordt weergegeven op het scherm. • U kunt de afstandsbediening gebruiken voor het configureren van Anynet + of het schakelen naar een weergavemodus. • Gebruik de afstandsbediening wanneer u klaar bent met het instellen van Anynet + of met het schakelen naar een weergavemodus. Het Anynet + -apparaat speelt niets af. • U kunt de afspeelfunctie niet gebruiken wanneer Plug & Play actief is. Het aangesloten apparaat wordt niet weergegeven. • Controleer of het apparaat Anynet + -functies ondersteunt. • Controleer of de HDMI 1.3-kabel op de correcte manier is aangesloten. • Controleer of Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) is ingesteld op Aan in het instellingenmenu van Anynet + . • Zoek opnieuw naar Anynet + -apparaten. • U kunt een Anynet + -apparaat alleen aansluiten met een HDMI 1.3-kabel. Het is mogelijk dat bepaalde HDMI-kabels geen Anynet + -functies ondersteunen. • Wanneer het wordt beëindigd door een bijzondere situatie, bijvoorbeeld wanneer de HDMI-kabel of het netsnoer wordt losgekoppeld, of wanneer er een stroomstoring optreedt, herhaalt u het scannen op apparaten. Het televisieprogramma kan niet worden opgenomen. • Controleer of de antenneaansluiting op het apparaat voor opname correct is aangesloten. Het geluid van de televisie wordt niet uitgevoerd via de ontvanger. • Maak verbinding tussen de TV en de ontvanger met gebruik van de optische kabel. U Verpl. EEnter R Terug Tv weergeven Apparatenlijst Opname : DVDR DVDR MENU DVDR INFO Receiver : Aan Instellingen BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 48 10/20/2009 4:48:46 PMNederlands - 49 De Content Library activeren Met de Content Library kunt u de geïntegreerde inhoud van tv of inhoud op een USB-apparaat weergeven en afspelen. 1. Druk op de MENU-knop. Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ om Toepassing te selecteren en druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE. 2. Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ om Content Library te selecteren en druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE. Het hoofdmenu van de Content Library wordt weergegeven. O Druk op de toets CONTENT op de afstandsbediening om het hoofdmenu Content Library weer te geven. 3. Druk op de toets ◄ of ► om een pictogram te selecteren (Galerie, Koken, Kinderen, Fitness, Overige, Inhoud beheren) en druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE. N Het geselecteerde item wordt uitgevoerd. ❑ De afstandsbediening gebruiken in het menu Content Library Toets Effect ▲/▼/◄/► De cursor verplaatsen en een item markeren. ENTERE Het gemarkeerde item selecteren. RETURN Terug naar het vorige menu. EXIT De huidige functie beëindigen en terugkeren naar het hoofdmenu van de Content Library. Gekleurde toetsen Knoppen en corresponderende functies worden beschreven op de betreffende pagina. Hiermee kunt u het volume van de afgespeelde inhoud regelen. CONTENT De modus Content Library openen of sluiten. N Als u op de volumetoetsen of de toets MMUTE drukt, wordt er geen informatie weergegeven in het schermmenu, maar werkt de functie wel gewoon. N Druk op de toets P op de afstandsbediening om terug te keren naar de modus TV. N DE CONTENT LIBRARY BEVAT TEKST, GRAFISCHE ELEMENTEN, AFBEELDINGEN, MULTIMEDIA EN ANDER MATERIAAL, DAT UITSLUITEND IS BEDOELD VOOR INFORMATIEVE EN PROMOTIONELE DOELEINDEN. DE INHOUD VAN DE CONTENT LIBRARY IS GEWIJZIGD EN WORDT VOORTDUREND HERZIEN EN BIJGEWERKT. HET MATERIAAL IN DE CONTENT LIBRARY IS MOGELIJK NIET VOOR ELK PUBLIEK GESCHIKT. N DE INFORMATIE IN DE CONTENT LIBRARY WORDT ALS ZODANIG, ZONDER VERDERE GARANTIES GELEVERD. HOEWEL DE INFORMATIE IN DE CONTENTLIBRARY IS VERKREGEN VAN OF VOLDOET AAN BRONNEN WAARVAN WIJ GELOVEN DAT ZE BETROUWBAAR ZIJN, KAN SAMSUNG GEEN ENKELE GARANTIE GEVEN BETREFFENDE DE NAUWKEURIGHEID, GELDIGHEID, ACTUALITEIT, VOLLEDIGHEID OF GESCHIKTHEID VOOR EEN BEPAALD DOEL VAN ENIGE INFORMATIE OF GEGEVENS DIE U TER BESCHIKKING ZIJN GESTELD. IN GEEN ENKELE OMSTANDIGHEID, MET INBEGRIP VAN NALATIGHEID, ZAL SAMSUNG AANSPRAKELIJK WORDEN GEHOUDEN, HETZIJ CONTRACTUEEL OF GERECHTELIJK, VOOR ENIGE DIRECTE, INDIRECTE, INCIDENTELE, BIJZONDERE OFGEVOLGSCHADE, KOSTEN VOOR GERECHTELIJKE BIJSTAND, ONKOSTEN OF WELKE ANDERE GELEDEN SCHADE DAN OOK VOORTKOMEND UIT, OF IN VERBAND MET, ENIGE INFORMATIE IN, OF HET GEBRUIK VAN, DE CONTENT LIBRARY, ZELFS INDIEN ZIJ OP DE HOOGTE WAS GESTELD VAN DE MOGELIJKHEID VAN DERGELIJKE SCHADE. Content Library Toepassing Media Play (USB & DLNA) Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) Content Library Internet@TV Thuisnetwerkcentrum < > Koken Kindvr Galerie Galerie Content Library Fitness Overige Sluiten Sluiten BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 49 10/20/2009 4:48:47 PMNederlands - 50 De Content Library gebruiken ❑ Galerie Met deze functie wordt een diapresentatie afgespeeld met hoge-resolutiebeelden en achtergrondmuziek.. Met de functie Galerie van de tv kunt u de sfeer in huis wijzigen. N Druk op de knop INFO om de naam van de artiest en gedetailleerde informatie in het Engels weer te geven voor elke afbeelding (de informatie is momenteel alleen in het engels beschikbaar). N U kunt de diavoorstelling onderbreken door tijdens de voorstelling op de toets ENTERE te drukken. N Het copyright van de inhoud van de Galerie en alle bijbehorende zaken zijn voorbehouden aan Timespace / JoongAng M&B, Inc. ❑ Koken U kunt diverse recepten bekijken die u stap voor stap kunt volgen. Deze inhoud geeft u leuke ideeën voor een maaltijd. N De recepten in de categorie Koken van de Samsung-tv zijn gebaseerd op recepten gepubliceerd door Anness Publishing. N Het copyright van de inhoud van de categorie Koken en alle bijbehorende zaken zijn voorbehouden aan Practical Pictures. ❑ Kinderen. Dit is educatief en interactief materiaal dat kinderen herhaaldelijk kunnen bekijken. Geniet van de verhalen, liedjes en spelletjes met de personages Boowa en Kwala. N Het copyright van de inhoud van de categorie Kinderen en alle bijbehorende zaken zijn voorbehouden aan UpToTen. ❑ Fitness Dit is nuttige informatie voor de gezondheid, met strek- en rekoefeningen op geluid voor het hele gezin. ❑ Inhoud beheren „ Mijn inhoud De inhoud wordt op dezelfde manier gebruikt als de inhoud in het geheugen van de tv. De inhoud van het externe USB-apparaat wordt direct afgespeeld. „ USB U kunt inhoud opslaan op een USB-geheugen en afspelen op uw tv. De inhoud van een extern USB-geheugen wordt rechtstreeks afgespeeld en gekopieerd naar het geïntegreerde Flash-geheugen in de tv. N De Content Library ondersteunt USB MSC-apparaten. MSC staat voor Mass Storage Class, een apparaat waarop grote hoeveelheden gegevens tegelijk kunnen worden opgeslagen en getransporteerd. Voorbeelden van MSC zijn pendrives en geheugenkaartlezers. (USB HDD en HUB worden niet ondersteunt.) N Wanneer u een game speelt vanaf een extern USB-geheugen kunt u uw prestaties opslaan (afhankelijk van de game). Ga voorzichtig te werk bij het verwijderen van een USB-geheugenapparaat, want als u dat doet terwijl gegevens worden opgeslagen kunnen gegevens verloren gaan. N Nieuwe inhoud downloaden Via de website samsung.com wordt nieuw materiaal gratis beschikbaar gesteld in aanvulling op het ingebouwde materiaal. U hebt een UDN-nummer nodig om betaalde inhoud te kunnen downloaden. Controleer het UDN-nummer alvorens u een nieuw item downloadt. 1. Ga naar de website www.samsung.com 2. Selecteer een item op de pagina Contents Download. 3. Download het materiaal naar het USB-geheugen. 4. Ga naar het hoofdmenu van de Content Library door op de toets CONTENT te drukken of kies Content Library (Menu → Toepassing → Content Library) 5. Sluit het USB-geheugen aan op de USB-poort aan de zijkant van de tv. 6. Hier ziet u het subitem dat u hebt gedownload. 7. Selecteer een item en druk op de toets enter. 8. U kunt het geselecteerde item afspelen. „ Instellingen • Uitvoertijd schermbeveiliging → 10 min. / 20min. / 40 min. / 1 uur Hiermee kunt u de wachttijd instellen voor het inschakelen van de schermbeveiliging. • UDN bewaren (Unique Device Number) Het 18-cijferige nummer op het scherm is de productcode. U kunt het UDN opslaan op uw USB-geheugen. N USB-opslagapparaten met het NTFS-bestandssysteem ondersteunen het opslaan van UDN niet. BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 50 10/20/2009 4:48:47 PMNederlands - 51 U kunt diverse internetdiensten gebruiken, zowel voor nuttige informatie en als voor amusement. Als u problemen ondervindt bij het gebruik van een widget-service, neemt u contact op met de serviceprovider. Druk wanneer u in de widget bent op de groene toets voor de contactgegevens, of bezoek de helpwebsite voor informatie over de widgetserviceprovider. N Afhankelijk van de regio wordt Engels mogelijk niet in de widget-service ondersteund. N Ova funkcija možda neće biti podržana u zavisnosti od zemlje. Aan de slag met Internet@TV Internet@TV biedt een ingebouwde internet- en televisiebeleving die wordt aangestuurd door de Yahoo!® Widget Engine. Hiermee kunt u de koers van uw aandelen in de gaten houden, foto’s met vrienden en familie delen en het nieuws en de weersverwachting bekijken, allemaal via de Internet@TV-service op de televisie. N Als de netwerkomstandigheden instabiel zijn, werkt deze functie mogelijk niet. De tv wordt dan automatisch uitgeschakeld. Als dit niet gebeurt, schakelt u de tv met behulp van de aan-uitknop uit. N Vanwege netwerkomstandigheden kan het zijn dat u bij gebruik van deze functie soms een zekere traagheid ervaart. Wanneer u Internet@TV voor het eerst uitvoert, worden automatisch de basisopties ingesteld. N Als eerste moet u uw netwerk instellen. Raadpleeg ‘Netwerk instellen’ voor meer informatie over het configureren van uw netwerk. N Wanneer uw netwerk functioneert, leidt de Internet@TV-software u door een stapsgewijze instelwizard. Internet@TV Alle inhoud en diensten die via dit apparaat beschikbaar zijn, zijn het eigendom van derde partijen en worden beschermd door auteursrecht, handelsmerk en/of andere wetten betreffende intellectueel eigendom. Zulke inhoud en diensten worden uitsluitend geleverd voor persoonlijk, niet-commercieel gebruik. Het is u niet toegestaan enige inhoud of diensten te gebruiken op een manier die niet is geautoriseerd door de eigenaar van de inhoud of de leverancier van de diensten. Zonder het voorgaande te beperken, is het u zonder uitdrukkelijke toestemming van de eigenaar van de inhoud of leverancier van de diensten, niet toegestaan om enige inhoud of diensten die via deze dienst beschikbaar zijn, te wijzigen, te kopiëren, te reproduceren, opnieuw te publiceren, te uploaden, te plaatsen, door te geven, te vertalen, te verkopen, afgeleide werken te creëren, te gebruiken of te verspreiden. INHOUD EN DIENSTEN VAN DERDE PARTIJEN WORDEN ZONDER VERDERE GARANTIES GELEVERD. SAMSUNG GEEFT GEEN GARANTIE VOOR DIENSTEN OF INFORMATIE ZOALS DEZE WORDEN GELEVERD, HETZIJ UITDRUKKELIJK OF IMPLICIET, VOOR WELK DOEL DAN OOK. SAMSUNG WIJST NADRUKKELIJK ENIGE IMPLICIETE GARANTIE, WAARONDER, MAAR NIET BEPERKT TOT, GARANTIES VAN VERKOOPBAARHEID OF GESCHIKTHEID VOOR EEN BEPAALD DOEL, VAN DE HAND. SAMSUNG GARANDEERT DE NAUWKEURIGHEID, GELDIGHEID, TIJDIGHEID, WETTIGHEID OF VOLLEDIGHEID VAN INHOUD OF DIENSTEN DIE DOOR DIT APPARAAT BESCHIKBAAR WORDEN GESTELD VOOR WELKE DOELEINDEN DAN OOK EN IN GEEN GEVAL, WAARONDER NALATIGHEID, IS SAMSUNG AANSPRAKELIJK, HETZIJ CONTRACTUEEL OF DOOR ONRECHTMATIGHEID VOOR DIRECTE, INDIRECTE, INCIDENTELE, SPECIALE SCHADE OF GEVOLGSCHADE, ADVOCATENKOSTEN OF OVERIGE KOSTEN VOORTVLOEIEND UIT OF VERBAND HOUDEND MET INFORMATIE AFKOMSTIG VAN OF ALS GEVOLG VAN HET GEBRUIK VAN ENIGE INHOUD OF SERVICE DOOR U OF EEN ANDERE DERDE, ZELFS INDIEN MEN OP DE HOOGTE IS GESTELD VAN DE MOGELIJKHEID VAN DERGELIJKE KOSTEN. Diensten van derde partijen kunnen op elk moment worden stopgezet of onderbroken en Samsung verklaart en garandeert niet dat enige inhoud of service gedurende een periode beschikbaar blijft. De inhoud en diensten worden verstuurd door derde partijen middels netwerken en verzendingsmiddelen waar Samsung geen controle over heeft. Zonder de algemeenheid te van deze vrijwaring te beperken wijst Samsung uitdrukkelijk alle verantwoordelijkheid of aansprakelijkheid van de hand voor enige onderbreking of opschorting van enige via dit apparaat beschikbare inhoud of diensten. Samsung is verantwoordelijk noch aansprakelijk voor klantenservice met betrekking tot inhoud en diensten. Vragen of verzoeken tot service met betrekking tot de inhoud of diensten moeten direct tot de respectievelijke leveranciers van de inhoud en diensten. 1. Druk op de toets MENU. Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ om Application te selecteren en druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE. 2. Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ om Internet@TV te selecteren en druk op de toets ENTERE. O INTERNET@TV wordt gestart. O Druk op de toets INTERNET@ op de afstandsbediening om het menu Internet@TV te openen. 3. De General Disclaimer wordt op het scherm weergegeven. Selecteer I accept of I do not accept. N Zie de General Disclaimer, voor meer informatie over de ‘Legal Notice’. 4. Het ‘welkomstscherm’ is het beginpunt van het begeleid instellen van Internet@TV. N Als u Exit Setup selecteert, wordt deze stap hervat wanneer u op de toets INTERNET@ drukt. N Selecteer Let’s get started! 5. Met het kiezen van uw locatie maakt u het gebruik van gelokaliseerd materiaal in de tv-widgets mogelijk. N Selecteer uw land in de lijst. 6. Om van Internet@TV gebruik te kunnen maken, is het nodig dat u akkoord gaat met de Yahoo!® TV Widget Engine Privacy Policy. N Selecteer OK, I Accept. BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 51 10/20/2009 4:48:48 PMNederlands - 52 7. Om van Internet@TV gebruik te kunnen maken, is het nodig dat u akkoord gaat met de Yahoo!® TV Widget System Terms of Service. N Selecteer OK, I Accept. 8. Voer uw naam in om uw profiel te maken. Elk profiel heeft een eigen lijst met widgets. Voor elke persoon die van Internet@TV gebruikmaakt, kunt u een profiel maken. N Voer uw naam in en selecteer Save this name. N Raadpleeg ‘De Profile-widget gebruiken’ voor meer informatie. 9. Internet@TV test de netwerkverbindin. N Als de test mislukt, moet u het netwerk opnieuw configureren. N Raadpleeg ‘Setting the Network’ voor meer informatie. 10. Het begeleid instellen is voltooid. Nu volgt er een tutorial over het gebruik van Internet@TV. N Selecteer Continue om de tutorial weer te geven. N Selecteer Exit setup als u nu direct van Internet@TV wilt gebruikmaken. N U kunt het tutorial later weer opnieuw weergeven via Profile Widget → System Setting → Repeat Tutorial. 11. Druk op de toets INTERNET@ op de afstandsbediening om de gebruikersinterface van Internet@TV weer te geven. ❑ Schermweergave „ Dock mode 1 Er wordt in de rechterbovenhoek een welkomstbericht met uw naam weergegeven N Dit bericht verdwijnt even later weer. 2 In het bericht worden twee sneltoetsen op de afstandsbediening getoond. N Als u op de blauwe toets op de afstandsbediening drukt (Viewport) wisselt de weergave tussen het ‘minischerm’ en de gewone weergave. In het minischerm (Viewport-modus) wordt het tv-programma of de video weergegeven in een verkleind gebied met plaatjes aan de buitenkant. In de normale weergave (Overlay-modus) worden de plaatjes over het tv-programma of de video heen weergegeven. N Als u op de gele toets op de afstandsbediening drukt (Edit Snippet) wordt er een helpvenster weergegeven en kan de geselecteerde snippet worden bewerkt. 3 Druk op de toets INTERNET@ op de afstandsbediening om te beginnen. N De horizontale lijst onder aan het tv-scherm wordt het ‘dock’ genoemd. N De items in de lijst heten ‘snippets’. N Een snippet is een snelkoppeling naar een tv-widget. N Een tv-widget is een internetapplicatie die speciaal voor de tv is ontworpen. N Ga van de ene naar de andere snippet met behulp van de toetsen ◄ of ► op de afstandsbediening. N De focus ligt op het meest linkse gebied (blauw gemarkeerd). N De snippets in het dock worden onder dat focuspunt verschoven. N Open een tv-widget door op ENTERE te drukken op de afstandsbediening wanneer de snippet ervan in het focuspunt staat. N Wanneer u snippets toevoegt, vormen ze een stapel waarin u kunt navigeren met de toetsen ▲ of ▼. N Er staan twee speciale tv-widgets in het dock : De Profile Widget en de Gallery Widget. Deze kunnen niet worden verwijderd. N Na een bepaalde periode schuift het dock van het scherm. „ Zijbalkmodus 1 Met een snippet in focus drukt u op de toets ENTERE om de tv-widgetzijbalk te openen. Het tv-widgetlogo en Home ( ) worden boven in de zijbalk weergegeven. 2 Het actuele menu wordt onder het tv-widgetlogo weergegeven. N Als u naar een voorgaand scherm wilt terugkeren, selecteert u het en drukt u op de toets ENTERE. N U kunt tevens op de toets RETURN op de afstandsbediening drukken. 3 De actuele selectie is altijd blauw gemarkeerd. De focus ligt op de gemarkeerde toets en deze wordt geactiveerd wanneer u op de toets ENTERE drukt. 4 Wanneer er erg veel informatie is, wordt er een navigatie-element gebruikt. N De actuele pagina en het totale aantal pagina’s worden weergegeven. N U gaat van de ene naar de andere pagina met de toetsen ◄ of ►. 5 De onderste werkbalk bevat kleurentoetsen die overeenkomen met de rode, groene, gele en blauwe toets op de afstandsbediening. • Rode toets : De widget sluiten. • Groene toets : De instellingen van de widget veranderen. • Gele toets : Uw snippets beheren. • Blauwe toets : De video passend maken of op volledige schermgrootte zetten. N Sommige knoppen zijn mogelijk niet beschikbaar, afhankelijk van de widget. .@# áëí space a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 52 10/20/2009 4:48:50 PMNederlands - 53 Snippets in het dock bewerken 1. U kunt snippets bewerken door een te selecteren en op de gele toets te drukken. 2. De snippet wordt naar de tweede positie verplaatst en zijn tegel schuift omhoog zodat de volgende helptekst zichtbaar wordt : • Delete (rode toets) : Deze tv-widget verwijderen. N Verwijderde widgets kunnen via de Widget Gallery weer opnieuw worden geïnstalleerd. • Move (blauwe toets) : De snippet een andere plaats geven. Druk op de toets ◄ of ► om te scrollen. Druk op de gele toets om de snippet op de nieuwe positie te plaatsen. • Done (gele toets) : Het menu Edit Snippet afsluiten. De Profile-widget gebruiken De Profile-widget configureert uw gebruikersprofiel. U kunt meerdere profielen instellen en elk profiel heeft zijn eigen lijst met widgets. Met behulp van het menu Switch Profile kunt u naar een ander gebruikersprofiel overschakelen. N Er dienen ten minste twee profielen te zijn geregistreerd. Voor het toevoegen van een profiel, zie ‘Administrative Controls’. Met het menu Profile Settings kunt u uw profiel aanpassen en beveiligen. • Gebruikersprofielen kunnen worden aangepast met een unieke Name en een Avatar (een afbeelding die uw profiel representeert). • De Name en Avatar van uw profiel worden weergegeven in de profielsnippet in het dock. • Profielen kunnen worden beveiligd met behulp van Create Profile PIN. N Wanneer u de pincode de eerste keer instelt, kunt u tevens een Security Question instellen. Via het menu Profile Settings kan de toegang tot widgets worden beperkt. • Mocht u uw Profile PIN vergeten, dan kunt u antwoord geven op een Security Question die aan uw profiel is gekoppeld. • Bij profielen waarbij de Limit Profile-indicator is ingeschakeld, kunnen geen nieuwe widgets worden geïnstalleerd. N Owner PIN moet zijn ingesteld als u deze functie wilt gebruiken. Voor het instellen van Owner PIN, zie ‘Administrative Controls’. Met behulp van het menu System Settings kunt u het volgende doen : • Uw Location wijzigen en uw Zip Code instellen (alleen voor de VS) om het materiaal aan uw land of regio aan te passen. • Repeat Tutorial die tijdens het begeleid instellen werd weergegeven. • Restore Factory Settings om alle widgetconfiguraties en -informatie te wissen. In het menu Administrative Controls kunt u het volgende doen : • De Screen Saver instellen om te voorkomen dat het beeld in het scherm brandt. • Create Owner PIN en een Security Question instellen om andere profielen te beveiligen. • Een nieuw Create Profile waarvoor een aparte reeks widgets kan worden ingesteld. • Een bestaand profiel Verwijderen. In de Profile-widget kunt u met uw Yahoo!-ID Sign in to Yahoo!®. • Als u over een Yahoo!-ID beschikt, hebt u met behulp van de Yahoo!-tv-widgets toegang tot uw aangepaste materiaal. • U wordt automatisch met de Yahoo!-ID van uw profiel bij alle automatisch geïnstalleerde Yahoo!-tv-widgets aangemeld. • Als u nog niet over een Yahoo!-account beschikt, kunt u via www.yahoo.com een account maken. • In landen waar Internet@TV niet wordt ondersteund, kunt u zich mogelijk niet aanmelden met een id die u op de Yahoo!-website hebt ingesteld. ❑ Info over de Profile-widget Druk op de groene toets. Hiermee kunt u een korte beschrijving van de Profile Widget, het Copyright Policy, de Terms of Service en het Privacy Policy weergeven. BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 53 10/20/2009 4:48:50 PMNederlands - 54 De Yahoo!® Widget Gallery gebruiken Met de Yahoo!® Widget Gallery kunt u meer widgets aan uw tv toevoegen. Bekijk de beschikbare tv-widgets in de volgende categorieën : • Latest Widgets : Hier ziet u de onlangs bijgewerkte widgets. • Yahoo!® Widgets : Hier ziet u widgets die door Yahoo!® worden geleverd. • Samsung Widgets : Hier ziet u widgets die door Samsung worden geleverd. • Meer Categorieën : Alle widgets weergeven op categorie. N Als u een widget wilt installeren, gaat u naar het detailscherm, selecteert u Add Widget to My Profile en drukt u op de toets ENTERE. De widget wordt geïnstalleerd en is vervolgens in het dock beschikbaar. ❑ Instellingen van de Widget Gallery Druk op de groene toets. „ Info over Yahoo! Widget Gallery Hiermee kunt u een korte beschrijving van de Widget Gallery, Copyright Policy, Terms of Service en het Privacy Policy weergeven. In het menu Developer Settings kun u zelf widgets maken. Bezoek voor meer informatie over het zelf widgets maken onze website voor ontwikkelaars op http://connectedtv.yahoo.com/ De Yahoo!® Weather-widget gebruiken De Yahoo!® Weather-widget geeft actuele informatie over het weer in uw woonplaats en in uw favoriete andere locaties. De inhoud wordt steeds aan de veranderende weersomstandigheden aangepast. • Druk op de groene toets op de afstandsbediening om het instellingenmenu Settings van de Yahoo!® Weather-widget weer te geven. • In het menu Settings kunt u steden waarvoor het weerbericht wordt weergegeven toevoegen en verwijderen. In het menu Settings kunt u het volgende doen : • Add New City door de naam van de stad in te voeren. Wanneer de zoekresultaten worden weergegeven, selecteert u de gewenste stad en drukt u op de toets ENTERE. • Delete City door de gewenste stad in de lijst te selecteren. Druk op de toets ENTERE en bevestig de verwijdering. • De temperatuurindicatiemodus wijzigen. Hier kunt u de temperatuurindicatiemodus in Imperial of Metric veranderen. Met Imperial wordt bijvoorbeeld de temperatuur in Fahrenheit weergegeven en met Metric in graden Celsius. ❑ Een snippet voor een favoriete stad maken • Selecteer de stad in de homepage van de Yahoo!® Weather-widget en bekijk de gedetailleerde weersverwachting. • Druk op de gele toets. • Selecteer het menu Add Snippet en druk op de toets ENTERE om de stad als snippet toe te voegen. ❑ Een snippet voor een stad Delete • Open de snippet. • Druk op de gele toets. • Selecteer het menu Delete Snippet en druk op ENTERE om de snippet te verwijderen. BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 54 10/20/2009 4:48:51 PMNederlands - 55 De Yahoo!® News-widget gebruiken De Yahoo!® News-widget geeft het laatste beknopte nieuws op het gebied van economie, amusement, politiek, sport en vele andere categorieën. Selecteer een categorie, een berichtkop in de categorie en bekijk een dynamisch bijgewerkte nieuwssamenvatting. De Yahoo!® Flickr-widget gebruiken Met de Flickr-widget hebt u tijdens het tv-kijken toegang tot uw favoriete foto’s van vrienden en familie. Deel de foto’s met de rest van het gezin via een presentatie op het grote tv-scherm. • U kunt de Flickr-widget aanpassen door u aan te melden met uw Yahoo!-ID. • Raadpleeg voor meer informatie het gedeelte ‘De Profile-widget gebruiken’. • Meer informatie over Flickr vindt u op www.flickr.com. N Your Photos toont foto’s die u op de Flickr-website hebt geregistreerd. „ U kunt op de volgende wijze foto’s van Flickr in een presentatie weergeven : • Selecteer een miniatuur van een foto en druk op de toets ENTERE om de gegevens van de foto te bekijken. • Selecteer Start Slideshow en druk op de toets ENTERE. „ U kunt de presentatieweergave als volgt regelen : • Druk tijdens een presentatie op de toets ENTERE. • De miniaturen van de foto’s worden onder aan het scherm weergegeven. N Wanneer de presentatiebediening wordt weergegeven kunt u de presentatie Pause, Play en Stop. N Als u het menu selecteert en op de toets ENTERE drukt, kunt u informatie over de geselecteerde foto weergeven. • Met het menu Your Sets kunt u foto’s die u in Flickr hebt geclassificeerd, weergeven. • Met het menu Explore kunt u foto’s bekijken die door de Flickr-website worden gepromoot. Tevens kunt u de dagelijks bijgewerkte foto’s bekijken. • Met het menu Mark as Favorite of Remove From Favorite voegt u foto’s aan uw reeks Favorite Photos toe of verwijdert u ze daaruit. • Met het menu Favorite Photos kunt u de foto’s weergeven die u als favoriet hebt geclassificeerd. • Met het menu Your Contacts kunt u updates van familie en vrienden weergeven. Met het menu Your Groups kunt u uw favoriete groepen op de Flickr-website selecteren en van foto’s van de Flickr-gemeenschap genieten en foto’s daarmee delen Als u de instellingen voor de Yahoo!® Flickr-widget wilt configureren, drukt u op de groene toets op de afstandsbediening. • Met het menu Time Per Slide regelt u de snelheid van de presentatie. • Met het menu Repeat stelt u in dat de presentatie na de laatste foto weer van voren af aan begint. BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 55 10/20/2009 4:48:51 PMNederlands - 56 De Yahoo!® Finance-widget gebruiken Bekijk de aandelenkoersen en het laatste beursnieuws met de Yahoo!® Finance-widget. Druk op de groene toets om uw aandelen in te stellen. Voer met het menu Add New Symbol de naam van een nieuw aandeel in. • Selecteer in de zoekresultaten het aandeel dat u wilt toevoegen, selecteer het menu Add Symbol en druk op de toets ENTERE. N Het geselecteerde aandeel verschijnt in de My Stocks-lijst. • Met het menu Import Symbols From Yahoo!® kunt u uw Yahoo!® Finance-portefeuille oproepen. - Met het menu Merge Symbols worden de symbolen van de Yahoo!® Finance-widget met de symbolen van uw portefeuille gecombineerd. - Met het menu Replace Symbols worden de symbolen van de Yahoo!® Finance-widget gewist en vervangen door de symbolen van uw portefeuille. • Gebruik het menu Display Format om de fluctuatie van de aandelenprijs weer te geven in Value of Percentage. • Een snippet voor een favoriet aandeel maken - Selecteer de het symbool van het aandeel in de homepage van de Yahoo!® Finance-widget en bekijk de gedetailleerde financiële informatie. - Druk op de gele toets. - Selecteer het menu Add Snippet en druk op de toets ENTERE om het aandeel als snippet toe te voegen. • Een snippet Delete - Open de snippet in het dock. - Druk op de gele toets. - Selecteer het menu Delete Snippet en druk op ENTERE om de snippet te verwijderen. Problemen met Internet@TV oplossen Probleem Mogelijke oplossing Bepaalde widgetservices werken niet. • Controleer dit bij de serviceprovider. • Druk wanneer u in de widget bent op de groene toets voor de contactgegevens, of bezoek de helpwebsite voor informatie over de widgetserviceprovider. • Raadpleeg de Help-websitepagina. Sommige widgets hebben alleen Engelstalig materiaal. Hoe kan ik de taal wijzigen? • De taal van het materiaal in de widget kan verschillen van de taal van de gebruikersinterface. Dit is afhankelijk van de serviceprovider. Na een reset naar de fabrieksinstellingen functioneert de Yahoo!-widgetservice niet meer en wordt er een waarschuwingsbericht weergegeven. • Schakel de tv na een reset naar de fabrieksinstelingen uit en weer in. Start vervolgens Internet@TV weer. Ik heb me bij de Flickr-widget bij mijn account aangemeld, maak ik kan mijn foto niet zien. • Ga naar de Yahoo!-website en activeer uw Flickr-account met uw Yahoo!-ID. Ik heb bij de Profile-widget de locatie gewijzigd, maar de vorige instelling is nog steeds actief. • Schakel de tv uit en weer in. Start vervolgens Internet@TV weer. • Nu kunt u de widget-services gebruiken die in de nieuwe locatie worden ondersteund.location. BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 56 10/20/2009 4:48:52 PMNederlands - 57 Help-website Land Website Oostenrijk www.samsung.com → Produkte → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV België www.samsung.com → Producten → televisies → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV www.samsung.com → Produits → téléviseurs → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Tsjechië www.samsung.com → Produkty → televizory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Denemarken www.samsung.com → Produkter → stue & soveværelse → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Finland www.samsung.com → Tuotteet → kodinelektroniikka → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Frankrijk www.samsung.com → Produits → télévisions → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Duitsland www.samsung.com → Privatkunden → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Griekenland www.samsung.com → Προϊόντα → τηλεοράσεις → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Hongarije www.samsung.com → Termékek → televíziók → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Ierland www.samsung.com → Products → Television → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Italië www.samsung.com → Prodotti → TV → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Nederland www.samsung.com → Producten → televisies → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Noorwegen www.samsung.com → Produkter → hverdagsrom & soverom → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Polen www.samsung.com → Produkty → telewizory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Portugal www.samsung.com → Produtos para Consumidores → televisores → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Slowakije www.samsung.com → Produkty → televízory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Spanje www.samsung.com → Productos → televisores → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Zweden www.samsung.com → Produkter → vardagsrum & sovrum → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Zwitserland www.samsung.com → Produits → télévisions → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV www.samsung.com → Produkte → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Verenigd Koninkrijk www.samsung.com → Products → Television → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Turkije www.samsung.com → Tüketici Ürünleri → televizyon → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Estland www.samsung.com → Klientidele → Televiisorid → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Letland www.samsung.com → Klientiem → Televizori → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Litouwen www.samsung.com → Namams → Televizoriai → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Rusland www.samsung.com → Продукты → Телевизоры → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Oekraïne www.samsung.com → Потребительские продукты → телевизоры → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV N De menustappen worden later mogelijk gewijzigd. N De links kunnen voor bepaalde landen verschillen. BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 57 10/20/2009 4:48:52 PMNederlands - 58 N Ova funkcija možda neće biti podržana u zavisnosti od zemlje. N Als u problemen ondervindt bij het gebruik van een widget-service, neemt u contact op met de serviceprovider. Druk wanneer u in de widget bent op de groene toets voor de contactgegevens, of bezoek de helpwebsite voor informatie over de widgetserviceprovider. N Afhankelijk van de regio wordt Engels mogelijk niet in de widget-service ondersteund. Aan de slag met Internet@TV Internet@TV geeft u via een netwerkverbinding toegang tot de widgetservices van SAMSUNG. Het materiaal dat via Internet@TV beschikbaar is kan variëren, afhankelijk van de provider. Via de Internet@TV-service hebt u toegang tot diverse services, onder meer YouTube. N Als een bepaald lettertype in het materiaal niet door de tv wordt ondersteund, kan het desbetreffende materiaal mogelijk niet normaal worden weergegeven. N De configuratie van widgets en de geleverde services kunnen per land verschillen. Nadat u uw landselectie hebt gewijzigd, schakelt u de tv uit en weer in. U kunt dan de widgetservice voor het ingestelde ondersteunde land gebruiken. Als het land op overige is ingesteld, kan de tv uw land niet herkennen. Selecteer in dat geval rechtstreeks in de landenlijst van de service. N Raadpleeg het gedeelte ‘Plug & Play-functie’ voor meer informatie over het instellen van uw land. N Vanwege netwerkomstandigheden kan het zijn dat u bij gebruik van deze functie soms een zekere traagheid ervaart. N Alvorens Internet@TV te kunnen gebruiken, dient u eerst het netwerk in te stellen. Raadpleeg ‘Het netwerk instellen’ voor meer informatie over het configureren van uw netwerk. Wanneer u Internet@TV voor het eerst uitvoert, worden automatisch de basisopties ingesteld. Het kan enkele minuten duren om deze bij te werken. 1. Druk op de MENU-toets. Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ om Application te selecteren en druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE. 2. Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ om Internet@TV te selecteren en druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE. O Druk op de toets INTERNET@ op de afstandsbediening om het menu Internet@ TV te openen. 3. De gebruikersovereenkomst wordt weergegeven. Selecteer Agree om de overeenkomst te aanvaarden. 4. De statistieken en analyse worden weergegeven. Selecteer Agree om de overeenkomst te aanvaarden. Internet@TV instellen U kunt de menu’s voor Single Sign On (SSO), systeembeheer en eigenschappen controleren en gebruiken. Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ om Setup te selecteren en druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE. ❑ Single Sign On Met dit menu kunt u de account maken en verwijderen. Met Single Sign On kunt u uw account en de accountinformatie van de contentsite beheren. U hebt geen aanvullende aanmeldingsgegevens nodig. N De account is alleen voor Internet@TV. „ Create Account Hiermee kunt u een account maken en aan de gewenste servicesite worden gekoppeld. N U kunt niet meer dan 10 accounts maken. N De accountnaam mag niet meer dan 10 tekens bevatten. N Als er geen service is waarvoor het nodig is dat u zich aanmeldt, kunt u geen account maken. „ Account Management • Service Site : Hier kunt u de aanmeldgegevens van de servicesite registreren (bijvoorbeeld YouTube). • Change Password : Hier kunt u het wachtwoord van uw account wijzigen. • Delete : Hier kunt u de account verwijderen. N Als u het wachtwoord van een account vergeet, drukt u de toetsen van de afstandsbediening in deze volgorde in om Internet@TV te resetten : POWER (uit) → MMUTE → 9 → 4 → 8 → POWER (aan). Bij gebruik van deze functie worden alle accounts gewist. Internet@TV BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 58 10/20/2009 4:48:52 PMNederlands - 59 ❑ System Setup N Ticker Autorun en Ticker Duration worden mogelijk niet in alle landen ondersteund. „ Change the Service Lock password N De standaardpincode van een nieuw tv-toestel is 0-0-0-0. N Als u de pincode bent vergeten, drukt u achtereenvolgens op de volgende toetsen van de afstandsbediening zodat de pincode opnieuw wordt ingesteld op 0-0-0-0 : POWER (uit) → MMUTE → 9 → 4 → 8 → POWER (aan). „ Service Duration Hiermee kunt u de wachttijd instellen voor het inschakelen van de schermbeveiliging. „ Ticker Autorun → Aan / Uit Stel hiermee in of de ticker bij het inschakelen van de tv automatisch wordt gestart. „ Ticker Duration Hiermee kunt u de wachttijd instellen voor het inschakelen van de schermbeveiliging. ❑ Properties Informatie over Internet@TV weergeven. U kunt de snelheid van uw Internet TV-service meten met behulp van de functie Measuring the speed of the Internet TV service. De Internet@TV-service gebruiken In een widget met meerdere categoriemenu’s kunt u de inhoud van de categoriemenu’s met de toetsen ◄ en ► weergeven. „ Aanmelden bij een account 1. Druk op de rode toets. 2. Selecteer de gewenste User account en druk op de toets ENTERE. 3. Voer het wachtwoord in. N Wanneer het aanmelden is gelukt, wordt de gebruikersaccount op het scherm weergegeven. N Voordat u zich kunt aanmelden, moet er ten minste één account zijn geregistreerd. Informatie over het maken van een account vindt u in het gedeelte ‘Internet@TV instellen’. „ De Widget Gallery gebruiken U kunt Run Service, Lock en Install Service bij de huidige widget gebruiken en u kunt de beschrijving zien van de widgetservice die niet is geïnstal.eerd. U kunt bij Internet@TV diverse widgets toevoegen en gebruiken die door de serviceprovider worden geleverd. Dit kan per provider verschillen. • Run Service : Hiermee wordt de widgetservice gestart. • Lock : Hiermee wordt de service vergrendeld. • Install Service (of Delete Service) : Hiermee wordt de widgetservice geïnstalleerd of verwijderd. „ De YouTube-widget gebruiken U kunt films van YouTube bekijken. Als u over een YouTube-account beschikt, registreert u de accountinformatie met behulp van Account Management. Vervolgens kunt u een My Favourites-categorie gebruiken. N Het menu kan via een webservice worden gewijzigd. N Er kan materiaal tussen zitten dat niet geschikt is voor kinderen. Gebruik in dat geval de Lock-functie in de Widget Gallery. Xz~*atp‚po _z{*]lpo Xz~*[z{€wl} Xz~*Ot~n€~~po _z{*Qlz€}tp~ Xz~*Wtyvpo Xz~*]p~{zxopo Qpl€}po _zol„ <:B ^ppvtyr*U€~tnp*Opnlop~*Wlp} atp‚~*E*C; M}plvtyr*Yp‚~*Lwp}~*m„*P8Xltw atp‚~*E*C; Mzz*Szz*ty*sp*Mzl}o}zzx atp‚~*E*CE=A „ Change Mode llrrChange page U Move EOK R Return BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 59 10/20/2009 4:48:53 PMNederlands - 60 Problemen met Internet@TV oplossen Probleem Mogelijke oplossing Bepaalde widgetservices werken niet. Controleer dit bij de serviceprovider. Druk wanneer u in de widget bent op de groene toets voor de contactgegevens, of bezoek de helpwebsite voor informatie over de serviceprovider. Raadpleeg de Help-websitepagina. Wat is het voordeel van Single Sign On? Als u een account maakt en uw aanmeldgegevens voor de gewenste service registreert, hebt u toegang tot aangepast materiaal zonder dat u zich daarvoor extra moet aanmelden. Wanneer er een netwerkfout optreedt, kan ik behalve het instellingenmenu geen menu’s meer gebruiken. Als de netwerkverbinding niet functioneert, is uw service wellicht beperkt. Omdat alle widgets behalve instellingenwidgets (Profile widget, Widget Gallery) verbinding moeten maken met het internet. Is het mogelijk om pornofilms op YouTube weer te geven? Dit soort materiaal wordt bij de lijst in het menu weggefilterd. Toch kan het via de zoekfunctie worden weergegeven. Gebruik in dat geval de Lock-functie in de Widget Gallery om de widgetservice te vergrendelen. Help-website Land Website Oostenrijk www.samsung.com → Produkte → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV België www.samsung.com → Producten → televisies → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV www.samsung.com → Produits → téléviseurs → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Tsjechië www.samsung.com → Produkty → televizory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Denemarken www.samsung.com → Produkter → stue & soveværelse → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Finland www.samsung.com → Tuotteet → kodinelektroniikka → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Frankrijk www.samsung.com → Produits → télévisions → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Duitsland www.samsung.com → Privatkunden → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Griekenland www.samsung.com → Προϊόντα → τηλεοράσεις → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Hongarije www.samsung.com → Termékek → televíziók → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Ierland www.samsung.com → Products → Television → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Italië www.samsung.com → Prodotti → TV → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Nederland www.samsung.com → Producten → televisies → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Noorwegen www.samsung.com → Produkter → hverdagsrom & soverom → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Polen www.samsung.com → Produkty → telewizory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Portugal www.samsung.com → Produtos para Consumidores → televisores → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Slowakije www.samsung.com → Produkty → televízory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Spanje www.samsung.com → Productos → televisores → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Zweden www.samsung.com → Produkter → vardagsrum & sovrum → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Zwitserland www.samsung.com → Produits → télévisions → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV www.samsung.com → Produkte → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Verenigd Koninkrijk www.samsung.com → Products → Television → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Turkije www.samsung.com → Tüketici Ürünleri → televizyon → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Estland www.samsung.com → Klientidele → Televiisorid → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Letland www.samsung.com → Klientiem → Televizori → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Litouwen www.samsung.com → Namams → Televizoriai → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Rusland www.samsung.com → Продукты → Телевизоры → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Oekraïne www.samsung.com → Потребительские продукты → телевизоры → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV N De menustappen worden later mogelijk gewijzigd. N De links kunnen voor bepaalde landen verschillen. BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 60 10/20/2009 4:48:53 PMNederlands - 61 Thuisnetwerkcentrum Informatie over het Thuisnetwerkcentrum Met het Thuisnetwerkcentrum worden tv’s en mobiele telefoons via een netwerk met elkaar verbonden. Zo kunt u inkomende oproepen, de inhoud van tekstberichten en de agenda van de mobiele telefoon via het Thuisnetwerkcentrum op de tv weergeven. Bovendien kunt u de multimedia op de mobiele telefoon, zoals video’s, foto’s en muziek via het netwerk naar de tv importeren en deze daar weergeven en afspelen. N Als het apparaat DLNA DMC (Digital Media Controller) ondersteunt, is de Thuisnetwerkcentrum-functie beschikbaar. N Deze functie is voor compatibiliteit met mobiele telefoons van Samsung die binnenkort worden uitgebracht. Voor meer informatie gaat u naar www.samsung.com of neemt u contact op met de klantenservice van Samsung. Het is mogelijk dat er extra software op het mobiele apparaat moet worden geïnstalleerd. Raadpleeg de gebruikershandleiding van het apparaat voor meer informatie. ❑ Verbinding maken met het Thuisnetwerkcentrum Raadpleeg ‘Netwerk instellen’ voor meer informatie over de netwerkinstellingen. „ Verbinding maken met een Wi-Fi-ad-hocnetwerk 1. Sluit de ‘Draadloze LAN-adapter van Samsung’ aan op de USB1(HDD)- of USB2-aansluiting van de tv. 2. Raadpleeg ‘Netwerk instellen’ voor meer informatie over het configureren van een ad-hocnetwerk. N Raadpleeg de handleiding van de mobiele telefoon voor informatie over het configureren van de netwerkinstellingen op de telefoon. 3. Stel bij de ad-hocinstellingen van de mobiele telefoon het IP-adres, SSID en wachtwoord voor de mobiele telefoon in volgens de Netwerknaam (SSID) en Beveiligingssleutel die op de tv worden weergegeven. „ Verbinding maken via een bedrade/draadloze IP- 1. Sluit de bedrade/draadloze IP-verdeler met de LAN-kabel op de LAN-poort van de tv aan, of sluit de ‘Draadloze LAN-adapter van Samsung’ op de USB1(HDD)- of USB2-poort van de tv aan. N Raadpleeg de handleiding van het desbetreffende apparaat voor de procedures voor het instellen van de bedrade/draadloze verdeler en de mobiele telefoon. Thuisnetwerkcentrum TV Zijpaneel Draadloze LAN-adapter van Samsung mobiele telefoon of Draadloze LAN-adapter van Samsung Draadloze IP-verdeler TV Zijpaneel Mobiele telefoon of LAN-kabel Draadloze LAN-adapter van Samsung Mobiele telefoon TV Zijpaneel of LAN-kabel Draadloze IP-verdeler BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 61 10/20/2009 4:48:58 PMNederlands - 62 Het Thuisnetwerkcentrum instellen ❑ Bericht / Media Hier ziet u een lijst met mobiele telefoons die voor deze tv zijn ingesteld en waarbij u de bericht of media functie kunt gebruiken N De functie Media is beschikbaar op andere mobiele apparaten die DLNA DMC ondersteunen. „ Toegestaan De mobiele telefoon wordt toegestaan. „ Gweigrd De mobiele telefoon wordt geblokkeerd. „ Verwijderen Hiermee wordt de mobiele telefoon uit de lijst verwijderd. N Deze functie wist alleen de namen uit de lijst. Als het gewiste mobiele apparaat wordt ingeschakeld of probeert verbinding met de tv te maken, wordt het mogelijk weer in de lijst weergegeven. ❑ Instellingen „ Bericht → Aan / Uit Hier kunt u bepalen of de berichtenfunctie wordt gebruikt (binnengekomen oproepen, de inhoud van tekstberichten en agendapunten op de telefoon). „ Media → Aan / Uit Hier kunt u instellen of de weergavefunctie voor de multimedia (video’s, foto’s en muziek) op de mobiele telefoon wordt gebruikt. „ Tv-naam U kunt de tv-naam instellen, zodat u deze gemakkelijk op het mobiele apparaat kunt vinden. N Als u Gebrk Invoer selecteert, kunt u bij OSK(On Screen Keyboard) de tv-naam invoeren. Terug Sluiten Thuisnetwerkcentrum 111-1234-5671 : Toegstn 111-1234-5672 : Toegstn 111-1234-5673 : Gweigrd 111-1234-5674 : Gweigrd Bericht Media Instellingen Terug Sluiten Thuisnetwerkcentrum Bericht : Aan Media : Aan Tv-naam : TV Bericht Media Instellingen De Message-functie gebruiken Met deze functie kunt u tijdens het TV-kijken inkomende oproepen, de inhoud van tekstberichten en de agenda van de mobiele telefoon via het alarmvenster weergeven. N Als u dit Bericht-alarmvenster wilt uitschakelen, stelt u Bericht in op Uit bij Instellingen van het Thuisnetwerkcentrum. N Het alarmvenster wordt 20 seconden weergegeven. Als er gedurende die tijd niet op een toets wordt gedrukt, of als Annuleren wordt geselecteerd, verschijnt het venster tot drie keer met een tussentijd van 5 minuten. N Als OK wordt geselecteerd, of als OK niet is geselecteerd terwijl het bericht drie keer is weergegeven, wordt het bericht verwijderd. Het bericht wordt echter niet van de mobiele telefoon verwijderd. N Het eenvoudige alarmvenster kan worden weergegeven terwijl u bepaalde applicaties zoals Media Play, Contents Library, enz. gebruikt. Schakel in dat geval naar de tv-modus over om de inhoud van het bericht te bekijken. N Wanneer er een bericht van een onbekende mobiele telefoon wordt weergegeven, selecteert u de mobiele telefoon bij Bericht in het Thuisnetwerkcentrum en selecteert u Gweigrd om de telefoon te blokkeren. ❑ Berichtweergave Als er een nieuw tekstbericht (SMS) binnenkomt terwijl u tv-kijkt, wordt het alarmvenster weergegeven. Als u op de OK-toets drukt, wordt de inhoud van het bericht weergegeven. N U kunt de weergave-instellingen voor de inhoud van tekstberichten (SMS) op de mobiele telefoon configureren. Raadpleeg voor de juiste procedures de handleiding van de mobiele telefoon. N Bepaalde speciale tekens worden mogelijk blanco of als kapotte tekens weergegeven. ❑ Alarm bij binnenkomende oproep Als er een oproep binnenkomt terwijl u TV-kijkt, wordt het alarmvenster weergegeven. ❑ Agenda-alarm Terwijl u TV-kijkt, verschijnt het alarmvenster met de geregistreerde agenda. N U kunt de weergave-instellingen voor de inhoud van de agenda op de mobiele telefoon configureren. N Raadpleeg voor de juiste procedures de handleiding van de mobiele telefoon.Bepaalde speciale tekens worden mogelijk blanco of als kapotte tekens weergegeven. husband SMS Nieuw bericht ontvangen Wilt u de gegevens bekijken? OK Annuleren BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 62 10/20/2009 4:49:02 PMNederlands - 63 De Media-functie gebruiken Er verschijnt een alarmvenster waarin de gebruiker wordt geïnformeerd dat de multimedia (foto’s, video’s en muziek) die van de telefoon is verzonden, op de TV wordt weergegeven. De multimedia wordt automatisch 3 seconden na het verschijnen van het alarmvenster weergegeven of afgespeeld. Als u bij het verschijnen van het alarmvenster op de toets RETURN of EXIT drukt wordt de Media Contents niet afgespeeld of weergegeven. N Als u het verzenden van multimedia-inhoud vanaf de mobiele telefoon wilt uitschakelen, stelt u Media in op Uit in Instellingen in het Thuisnetwerkcentrum. N Afhankelijk van de resolutie en indeling kan bepaalde inhoud mogelijk niet op tv worden afgespeeld. ❑ Toetsen voor het weergeven van multimedia Toets Effect ◄/► • Beweeg de cursor en selecteer een item. • Tijdens het afspelen van een film : Vooruit of achteruit door de film springen. ENTER • Als u op ENTERE drukt tijdens het afspelen, wordt het afspelen onderbroken. • Als u op ENTERE drukt in de pauzemodus, wordt het afspelen hervat. RETURN Terug naar het vorige menu. TOOLS Verschillende functies uit de menu’s Photo, Music en Movie uitvoeren. INFO Bestandsgegevens weergeven. EXIT De modus Media Play afsluiten en terugkeren naar de TV-modus. N De toetsen ENTERE en ◄/► werken mogelijk niet, afhankelijk van het type multimedia. N Met behulp van het mobiele apparaat kunt u de afgespeelde multimedia bedienen. Raadpleeg de gebruikershandleiding van het apparaat voor meer informatie. Media wordt afgespeeld in “Obekend apparaat 13” BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 63 10/20/2009 4:49:03 PMNederlands - 64 Wordt vervolgd... Teletekstfunctie De meeste televisiekanalen bieden tekstinformatiediensten via teletekst. Op de indexpagina van de teletekstdienst vindt u informatie over het gebruik van de dienst. Ook kunt u naar wens verschillende opties selecteren met de toetsen op de afstandsbediening. N Voor een juiste weergave van teletekstinformatie is een stabiele kanaalontvangst vereist. Anders kan bepaalde informatie ontbreken of worden bepaalde pagina’s niet weergegeven. 1 : (sluiten) De teletekstweergave verlaten. 2 6 (index) Druk op deze toets voor weergave van de indexpagina (inhoudspagina) tijdens het gebruik van teletekst. 3 5 (tonen) Druk op deze toets om verborgen tekst weer te geven (bijvoorbeeld antwoorden op quizvragen). Druk nogmaals op deze toets om terug te keren naar de normale weergave. 4 4 (formaat) Druk op deze toets om de tekst in de bovenste helft van het scherm op dubbel formaat weer te geven. Druk nogmaals op deze toets om de tekst in de onderste helft van het scherm op dubbel formaat weer te geven. Druk nogmaals op deze toets om terug te keren naar de normale weergave. 5 / (teletekst aan/mix) Druk op deze toets om teletekst te activeren nadat u het kanaal dat de teletekstdienst aanbiedt, hebt geselecteerd. Druk tweemaal op deze toets om het huidige televisiebeeld over de teletekstpagina heen weer te geven. 6 8 (opslaan) Hiermee kunt u teletekstpagina’s opslaan. 7 1 (subpagina) Druk op deze toets om de beschikbare subpagina’s weer te geven. 8 2 (volgende pagina) Gebruikt voor het weergeven van de volgende teletekst pagina. 9 3 (vorige pagina) Druk op deze toets om de vorige teletekstpagina weer te geven. 0 0 (modus) Druk op deze toets om de teletekstmodus (LIST/FLOF) te selecteren. Als u in de modus LIST op deze toets drukt, schakelt u over naar de modus Opslaan in lijst. In deze modus kunt u met behulp van de toets 8(opslaan) teletekstpagina’s in een lijst opslaan. ! 9 (vastzetten) Druk op deze toets als u een roulerende pagina wilt vastzetten. Druk nogmaals op deze toets om het rouleren te hervatten. @ 7 (annuleren) Druk op deze toets om naar een uitzending weer te geven wanneer u een pagina zoekt. # Gekleurde toetsen (rood/groen/geel/blauw) Als een zendstation gebruikmaakt van het FASTEXT-systeem, worden de verschillende onderwerpen op een teletekstpagina van een kleurcodering voorzien, die u kunt selecteren met behulp van de gekleurde toetsen. Druk op de gewenste toets. De pagina wordt weergegeven met aanvullende kleurcodegegevens, die op dezelfde wijze kunnen worden geselecteerd. Om de vorige of volgende pagina weer te geven drukt u op de toets met de overeenkomstige kleur. N U kunt de teletekstpagina’s veranderen met decijfertoetsen op de afstandsbediening. Aanbevelingen voor gebruik 1 3 4 5 6 2 7 8 9 0 ! @ # BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 64 10/20/2009 4:49:03 PMNederlands - 65 De teletekstpagina’s zijn in zes categorieën verdeeld : Onderdeel Inhoud A Geselecteerd paginanummer. B Aanduiding zendstation. C Huidig paginanummer of zoekindicaties. D Datum en tijd. E Tekst. F Statusinformatie. FASTEXT-informatie. N Teletekstinformatie is vaak verdeeld over verschillende pagina’s die achtereenvolgens worden weergegeven. U kunt rechtstreeks naar deze pagina’s gaan door : - Het paginanummer in te voeren; - Een titel in een lijst te selecteren; - Een gekleurde kop te selecteren (FASTEXT-systeem). O Druk op de toets TV teletekstmodus verlaten. Specificaties voor de wandbevestigingskit (VESA) Installeer de wandbevestiging aan een massieve muur die loodrecht op de vloer staat. Wanneer u de wandbevestiging aan andere bouwmaterialen wilt bevestigen, neemt u contact op met de dichtstbijzijnde dealer. Als u de kit aan het plafond of een schuine wand bevestigt, kan de wandbevestiging vallen en ernstig letsel veroorzaken. Productgroep inch VESA-specificaties (A * B) Standaard Quantity Schroef Aantal 100 * 100 M4 4 23"~29" 200 * 100 30"~40" 200 * 200 M6 46"~55" 400 * 400 57"~70" 800 * 400 M8 80" ~ 1400 * 800 PDP-TV 42"~ 50" 400 * 400 M8 4 58"~ 63" 600 * 400 70" ~ 800 * 400 80" ~ 1400 * 800 N We leveren standaardafmetingen voor wandbevestigingskits, zoals geïllustreerd in de voorgaande tabel. N Wanneer u onze wandbevestigingskit aanschaft, zijn een gedetailleerde installatiegids en alle vereiste montageonderdelen daarbij inbegrepen. N Gebruik geen schroeven die langer zijn dan de standaardafmetingen, omdat anders de binnenkant van de tv beschadigd kan raken. N Voor wandbevestigingen die niet voldoen aan de standaardspecificaties voor VESA-schroeven, kan de lengte van de schroeven afhankelijk van de specificaties afwijken. N Gebruik geen schroeven die niet voldoen aan de standaardspecificaties voor VESA-schroeven. Draai de schroeven niet te vast. Dit kan ertoe leiden dat het product beschadigd raakt of valt, wat kan resulteren in persoonlijk letsel. Samsung kan niet aansprakelijk worden gesteld voor dergelijke ongevallen. N Samsung is niet aansprakelijk voor productschade of persoonlijk letsel wanneer een niet-VESA of niet-gespecificeerde wandbevestiging is gebruikt of wanneer de consument de installatie-instructies voor het product niet in acht heeft genomen. N Onze modellen van 57 en 63 inch voldoen niet aan de VESA-specificaties. Gebruik daarom voor dit model onze speciaal samengestelde wandbevestigingskit. N Kantel deze tv voor de bevestiging nooit meer dan 15 graden. Installeer de wandbevestigingskit niet met de tv ingeschakeld. Dit kan resulteren in persoonlijk letsel door elektrische schokken. BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 65 10/20/2009 4:49:04 PMNederlands - 66 De montage van de wandbevestiging voorbereiden 1. Plaats de wandbevestiging met een aandraaibereik van maximaal 15 kgf/cm. De onderdelen kunnen beschadigd raken als het koppel buiten het opgegeven bereik valt. 2. De kit met accessoires bevat een houder en een ring [②]voor het bevestigen van wandbevestigingen van andere bedrijven op uw Samsung-tv. (Situatie B). N Draai de schroef [①] vast wanneer u de wandbevestiging aan de muur bevestigt. De standaardvoet monteren Waarschuwing Bevestig de voet stevig aan de tv voordat u deze verplaatst. Als u dit niet doet kan de voet kan vallen en ernstig letsel veroorzaken. N De tv moet door twee of meer mensen worden gedragen. Leg de tv nooit op de grond neer om eventuele beschadiging aan het scherm te voorkomen. Zet de tv altijd rechtop. Bevestig de tv met de schroeven stevig op de standaardvoet. (Het uiterlijk van het scherm kan afwijken van het scherm in de afbeelding.) Als u de tv aan een muur bevestigt, sluit u het deksel (➊) op het verbindingsstuk van de standaardvoet met twee schroeven. (PS50B650) (PS58B680/PS63B680) Situatie A. De wandbevestiging van SAMSUNG installeren Situatie B. Een wandbevestiging van een ander bedrijf installeren BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 66 10/20/2009 4:49:07 PMNederlands - 67 Als u duwt of trekt aan de tv of op de tv klimt, kan deze vallen. Zie er met name op toe dat uw kinderen niet aan de tv gaan hangen of deze uit balans brengen. De tv kan dan omvallen, hetgeen verwondingen kan veroorzaken of zelfs fatale gevolgen kan hebben. Neem alle voorzorgsmaatregelen die in de bijgesloten veiligheidsfolder worden genoemd. Om veiligheidsredenen is het raadzaam het valbeveiligingsmechanisme te installeren om de stabiliteit van het toestel te verhogen. ❑ Voorkomen dat de tv valt 1. Plaats de schroeven in de beugels en bevestig deze stevig aan de wand. Controleer of de schroeven stevig in de wand zijn gedraaid. N Afhankelijk van het wandtype hebt u mogelijk aanvullend materiaal nodig om het geheel te verankeren. N De benodigde beugels, schroeven en draad worden niet meegeleverd. Deze moeten apart worden aangeschaft. 2. Verwijder de schroeven in het midden aan de achterkant van de tv, steek de schroeven door de beugels en draai de schroeven weer vast in de tv. N Het is mogelijk dat de schroeven niet bij het product worden meegeleverd. 3. Verbind de beugels die aan de tv zijn bevestigd met een sterke draad aan de beugels die aan de wand zijn bevestigd en knoop de draad stevig vast. N Plaats de tv dicht bij de wand zodat deze niet achterover kan vallen. N Het is veilig de draad zodanig aan te brengen dat de beugels die aan de wand zijn bevestigd zich boven de beugels op de tv of op gelijke hoogte daarmee bevinden. N Haal de draad los voordat u de tv verplaatst. 4. Controleer of alle bevestigingen goed zijn aangebracht. Controleer de bevestigingspunten regelmatig op tekenen van moeheid of verzwakking. Neem in geval van twijfel over de veiligheid van de bevestiging contact op met een professionele installateur. De tv aan de wand bevestigen Installatieruimte Bewaar de nodige afstand tussen het product en andere objecten (bijv. muren) zodat er een goede ventilatie mogelijk is. Wanneer u dat niet doet, kunnen er door een stijging van de interne temperatuur brand of problemen bij het product ontstaan. Plaats het product op zo’n manier dat de in de afbeelding aangegeven vereiste afstanden worden aangehouden. N Bij gebruik van een voet of muurbevestiging mogen er alleen onderdelen worden gebruikt die door Samsung Electronics zijn geleverd. - Het gebruik van onderdelen van een andere fabrikant kan leiden tot problemen met het product of zelfs tot lichamelijk letsel doordat het product valt. - Het gebruik van onderdelen van een andere fabrikant kan leiden tot problemen met het product of zelfs tot brand vanwege een door een slechte ventilatie gestegen interne temperatuur. N Het uiterlijk van het product kan van het afgebeelde apparaat afwijken. „ Bij installatie van het product met een voet „ Bij installatie van het product met een muurbevestiging 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 경고 주의 경고 주의 Wand Wand BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 67 10/20/2009 4:49:09 PMNederlands - 68 Problemen oplossen Wanneer u vragen over deze televisie hebt, kunt u eerst deze lijst raadplegen. Wanneer geen van deze tips voor het oplossen van de problemen van toepassing is, kunt u naar 'www.samsung.com' gaan en vervolgens op Ondersteuning klikken of contact opnemen met het callcenter dat vermeld staat op de laatste pagina. N Een firmware-upgrade kan de eerste mogelijke oplossing zijn. Probleem Mogelijke oplossing Beeldkwaliteit Voer eerst Het beeld testen uit om te bevestigen dat uw televisie het testbeeld juist weergeeft. * Ga naar MENU → Ondersteuning → Zelfdiagnose → Het beeld Testen Wanneer het testbeeld juist wordt weergegeven, kan de slechte beeldkwaliteit worden veroorzaakt door de bron of het signaal. Het televisiebeeld lijkt niet zo goed als in de winkel. • Wanneer u een analoge aftakdoos/Set-Top Box hebt, kunt u upgraden naar een SetTop Box. Gebruik HDMI- of Componentkabels voor HD-beeldkwaliteit. • Abonnee kabel/satelliet : Probeer HD-stations (High Definition) uit het kanalenoverzicht uit. • Aansluiting antenne : Probeer HD-stations uit na het uitvoeren van Auto Program N Veel HD-kanalen zijn geüpgraded van SD-inhoud (Standard Definition). • Wijzig de resolutie van de video-uitgang van de aftakdoos/Set top naar 1080i of 720p. Het beeld is vervormd: macroblock, small block, punten, pixelisatie. • De compressie van video-inhoud kan beeldvervorming veroorzaken, vooral bij snel bewegende beelden zoals bij sport en actiefilms. • Een zwak signaal of slechte kwaliteit kan beeldvervorming veroorzaken. Dit is geen defect van de tv. Onjuiste kleur of ontbrekende kleur met Component-verbinding. • Zorg dat de Component-kabels op de juiste aansluitingen zijn aangesloten. Onjuiste of te losse aansluitingen kunnen leiden tot kleurproblemen of tot een leeg scherm. Slechte kleurweergave of helderheid. • Wijzig de beeld-opties in het tv-menu (modus Beeld, Kleur, Helderheid, Scherpte). • Wijzig de optie Spaarstand in het menu Setup. • Probeer het beeld te resetten om de standaardbeeldinstelling weer te geven. (Ga naar MENU → Beeld → Beeld resetten) Stippellijn op de rand van het scherm. • Wanneer het beeldformaat is ingesteld op Volledig scherm, wijzigt u dit naar 16:9. • Resolutie van de aftakdoos/Set-Top Box wijzigen. Het beeld is zwart-wit met alleen AV-invoer (Composite). • Sluit de videokabel (geel) aan op de groene aansluiting van componentingang 1 van de televisie. Het beeld staat stil of is vervormd wanneer het wijzigen van kanalen of van het beeld wordt uitgesteld. • Wanneer de tv is aangesloten met de aftakdoos kunt u proberen de aftakdoos te resetten. (Sluit het AC-snoer opnieuw aan en wacht totdat de aftakdoos opnieuw wordt opgestart. Dit kan circa 20 minuten duren) • Stel de uitgangsresolutie van de aftakdoos in op 1080i of 720p. Geluidskwaliteit Voer eerst Het geluid testen uit om te bevestigen dat uw televisie goed werkt. * Ga naar MENU → Ondersteuning → Zelfdiagnose → Het geluid testen Als het geluid OK is, kan het geluidsprobleem worden veroorzaakt door de bron of het geluid. Geen geluid of het geluid is te zwak bij het maximale volume. • Controleer het volume van het apparaat (aftak-/satellietdoos, DVD, Blu-ray enzovoort) dat op uw televisie is aangesloten. Vervolgens past u het televisievolume daaraan aan. Het beeld is goed maar er is geen geluid. • Stel de optie Luidspreker selecteren in op TV-luidspreker in het geluidsmenu. • Zorg dat de audiokabels van een extern apparaat op de juiste audio-ingangen van de televisie zijn aangesloten. • Controleer de optie voor audio-uitgangen van het aangesloten apparaat. Bijvoorbeeld) U moet misschien de audio-optie van de aftakdoos instellen op HDMI wanneer u HDMI hebt aangesloten op uw televisie. • Wanneer u een een DVI-HDMI-kabel gebruikt, is een afzonderlijke audiokabel vereist. • U moet de SRS-functie uitschakelen wanneer u het volume boven 30 instelt. • Verwijder de plug van de hoofdtelefoonaansluiting (indien beschikbaar op uw televisie). Ruis van de luidspreker. • Controleer de kabelaansluitingen. Controleer of een videokabel niet is aangesloten op een audio-ingang. • Controleer de signaalsterkte voor een antenne-/kabelaansluiting. Een zwak signaal kan geluidsvervorming veroorzaken. Wordt vervolgd... BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 68 10/20/2009 4:49:09 PMNederlands - 69 Probleem Mogelijke oplossing Geen beeld, geen video De televisie kan niet worden ingeschakeld. • Controleer of de stekker op juiste wijze in het stopcontact is gestoken en op de televisie is aangesloten. • Controleer of het stopcontact werkt. • Druk op de Aan/uit-knop op de televisie om te controleren of de afstandsbediening juist werkt. Als de televisie wordt ingeschakeld, kan de oorzaak van het probleem de afstandsbediening zijn. Voor het oplossen van het probleem met de afstandsbediening kunt u het gedeelte 'Afstandsbediening werkt niet' hieronder raadplegen. De televisie wordt automatisch uitgeschakeld. • Controleer of de Slaaptimer is ingesteld op Aan in het menu Setup. • Wanneer u de televisie op uw pc hebt aangesloten, moet u de instellingen voor de stroomvoorziening van de pc controleren. • Controleer of de stekker op juiste wijze in het stopcontact is gestoken en op de televisie is aangesloten. • Wanneer er gedurende 10 tot 15 minuten geen signaal is bij de antenne-/ kabelaansluiting wordt de televisie uitgeschakeld. Geen beeld/video • Controleer de kabelaansluitingen. (verwijder alle kabels uit de televisie en de externe apparaten en sluit deze opnieuw aan) • Stel de video-uitgang van het externe apparaat (aftakdoos, Set-Top Box, DVD, Blu-ray enzovoort) in zodat deze overeenkomt met de aansluitingen van de tv-ingang. De uitgang van het externe apparaat is bijvoorbeeld: HDMI en de ingang van de televisie: HDMI. • Controleer of het aangesloten apparaat is ingeschakeld. • Zorg dat u de de juiste tv-bron selecteert door op de knop SOURCE op de afstandsbediening te drukken. • Start het aangesloten apparaat opnieuw op door het netsnoer van het apparaat opnieuw aan te sluiten. RF-aansluiting (kabel/antenne) Kan niet alle kanalen ontvangen. • Controleer of de antennekabel goed is aangesloten. • Probeer Plug & Play om beschikbare kanalen aan de kanalenlijst toe te voegen. Ga naar MENU → Setup → Plug & Play en wacht tot alle beschikbare kanalen zijn opgeslagen. • Controleer of de antenne juist is geplaatst. Het beeld is vervormd: macroblock, small block, punten, pixelisatie. • De compressie van video-inhoud kan beeldvervorming veroorzaken, vooral bij snel bewegende beelden zoals bij sport en actiefilms. • Een zwak signaal kan geluidsvervorming veroorzaken. Dit is geen defect van de tv. Pc-aansluiting Melding Niet-ondersteunde modus. • Stel de resolutie en frequentie van de pc-uitgang in zodat deze overeenkomen met de resoluties die door de televisie worden ondersteund. De pc wordt altijd weergegeven in de bronlijst, ook wanneer deze niet is aangesloten. • Dit is normaal: de pc wordt altijd weergegeven in de bronlijst, zelfs wanneer een pc niet is aangesloten. Video is in orde, maar er is geen audio bij een HDMI-aansluiting. • Controleer de instelling voor audio-uitvoer op uw pc. Netwerkverbinding Fout bij verbinding draadloos netwerk. • De Samsung Wireless USB dongle is vereist voor het gebruik van een draadloos netwerk. • Controleer of Type netwerk is ingesteld op Draadloos. • De televisie moet worden aangesloten op een IP sharer (router). Overig Het beeld wordt niet in het volledige scherm weergegeven. • Er worden bij HD-kanalen zwarte balken aan weerskanten weergegeven wanneer geüpgrade SD-inhoud (4:3) wordt weergegeven. • Zwarte balken onder en boven in het scherm worden weergegeven bij films die beeldformaten hebben die afwijken van die van uw televisie. • Stel de optie voor beeldformaat op uw externe apparaat of televisie in op volledig scherm. Afstandsbediening werkt niet. • Plaats de batterijen van de afstandsbediening opnieuw met de juiste polariteit (+ -). • Reinig het transmissievenster dat zich boven op de afstandsbediening bevindt. • Richt vanaf circa 1,5 tot 2 meter afstand de afstandsbediening direct naar de televisie. Wordt vervolgd... BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 69 10/20/2009 4:49:09 PMNederlands - 70 Probleem Mogelijke oplossing Plasma-tv maakt zoemend geluid • Plasma-tv's maken een zacht zoemend geluid. Dit is normaal. Dit wordt veroorzaakt door de elektrische lading die wordt gebruikt om beelden op het scherm te maken. • Als het zoemen luid is, is de helderheid van uw televisie mogelijk te hoog ingesteld. Stel de helderheid lager in. • Uw plasma-tv kan ook luid zoemen als de achterkant ervan te dicht bij een wand of ander hard oppervlak staat. Sluit de verbindingskabels opnieuw aan. • Onjuiste installatie van de muurbevestiging kan sterke ruis veroorzaken. Beeldretentie (inbranden) • Om het risico van het inbranden van het scherm te minimaliseren, is dit apparaat voorzien van technologie voor inbrandvermindering. Met pixelsverplaatsingstechnologie kunt u de beweging van het beeld op en neer (verticale lijn) en van links naar rechts (punten horizontaal) instellen. De tv kan niet aan/uit worden gezet en het volume kan niet worden geregeld met de afstandsbediening van de aftakdoos/Set-Top box. • Programmeer de afstandsbediening van de aftakdoos/Set-Top voor bediening van de tv. Raadpleeg de gebruikershandleiding voor kabel/satelliet voor de SAMSUNG tv-code. Melding Niet-ondersteunde modus. • Controleer de ondersteunde resolutie van de tv en pas de uitgangsresolutie van het externe apparaat daaraan aan. Raadpleeg voor resolutie-instellingen deze handleiding. Kan het lichteffect op de rand aan de voorkant niet uitschakelen (onder het SAMSUNG-logo). • De optie Lichteffect in het menu Setup aanpassen. De opties zijn: Uit, Standbystand aan, Kijkstand aan en Altijd. • Lichteffect is niet bij alle modellen beschikbaar. De televisie ruikt naar plastic. • Deze geur is normaal en verdwijnt na verloop van tijd. De sterkte van het televisiesignaal is niet beschikbaar in het menu Zelfdiagnostische test. • Deze functie is alleen beschikbaar bij digitale kanalen met een antenneaansluiting (RF/Coax). De televisie helt naar rechts of links. • Verwijder de standaardvoet van de televisie en monteer deze opnieuw. De standaardvoet kan niet worden gemonteerd. • Zorg dat de televisie op een vlak oppervlak is geplaatst. Wanneer u de schroeven niet uit de televisie kunt draaien, kunt u een magnetische schroevendraaier gebruiken. Het kanaalmenu wordt grijs weergegeven (niet beschikbaar). • Het kanaalmenu is alleen beschikbaar wanneer de tv-bron is geselecteerd. Uw instellingen verdwijnen na 30 minuten of telkens wanneer de televisie wordt uitgeschakeld. • Als de tv zich in de modus Winkeldemo bevindt, worden elke 30 minuten de audio- en beeldinstellingen gereset. Wijzig de modus van Winkeldemo naar Thuisgebruik in de Plug & Play-procedure. Druk de knop SOURCE in om de modus TV te selecteren, ga naar MENU → Setup → Plug & Play → ENTER Audio-of videoverlies met tussenpozen. • Controleer de kabelaansluitingen en sluit opnieuw aan. • Dit kan worden veroorzaakt door overmatig dikke of stugge kabels. Zorg dat de kabels flexibel genoeg zijn voor langetermijngebruik. Bij wandmontage raden wij aan om kabels te gebruiken met 90-graden connectoren. U ziet mogelijk kleine deeltjes als u dichtbij de rand het televisiescherm kijkt. • Dit maakt deel uit van het productontwerp en is geen defect. Het PIP-menu is niet beschikbaar. • De PIP-functionaliteit is alleen beschikbaar wanneer u naar een HDMI-, pc- of componentbron kijkt. 'Vervormd signaal' of 'Geen signaal/ zwak signaal' bij een CAM-kaart (CI/CI+) • Controleer of bij CAM de CI(CI+)-kaart in de sleuf voor de algemene interface is geïnstalleerd. • Dit is normaal. De tv voert de OTA-functie (Over The Air) zelf uit om gedownloade firmware te upgraden tijdens het kijken. Terugkerende beeld-/geluidsproblemen • Controleer en wijzig signaal/bron. N Enkele van de bovenstaande afbeeldingen en functies zijn alleen voor bepaalde modellen verkrijgbaar. BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 70 10/20/2009 4:49:10 PMNederlands - 71 Specificaties De beschrijvingen en kenmerken in dit boekje zijn alleen bedoeld ter informatie en kunnenzonder voorafgaande kennisgeving worden gewijzigd. Modelnaam PS50B650 PS58B680 PS63B680 Schermformaat (diagonaal) 50 inch 58 inch 63 inch Resolutie computer (optimaal) 1920 x 1080 @ 60 Hz 1920 x 1080 @ 60 Hz 1920 x 1080 @ 60 Hz Geluidsuitgang 10 W x 2 15 W x 2 15 W x 2 Afmetingen (B x H x D) Behuizing Met voet 1240 x 756 x 74 mm 1240 x 817 x 290 mm 1401 x 848 x 74 mm 1401 x 917 x 335 mm 1531 x 932 x 74 mm 1531 x 957 x 390 mm Gewicht Behuizing Met voet 33 kg 38 kg 39 kg 46 kg 53 kg 61 kg Omgevingsvereisten Bedrijfstemperatuur Luchtvochtigheid bij gebruik Opslagtemperatuur Luchtvochtigheid bij opslag 50 °F to 104 °F (10 °C tot 40 °C) 10% to 80%, niet-condenserend -4 °F to 113 °F (-20 °C tot 45 °C) 5% to 95%, niet-condenserend N Dit is een digitaal apparaat van klasse B. N Vormgeving en specificaties kunnen zonder kennisgeving worden gewijzigd. N Zie voor informatie over de stroomvoorziening en het energieverbruik het etiket op het product. BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 71 10/20/2009 4:49:10 PMItaliano - 2 Istruzioni per l’utente „ Ritenzione dell’immagine sullo schermo Non visualizzare un’immagine fissa (come un gioco o lo sfondo di un PC collegato a questo PDP) sul pannello del monitor al plasma per più di 2 ore poiché può verificarsi una ritenzione delle immagini. Il fenomeno di ritenzione dell’immagine è anche noto come “bruciatura dello schermo”. Per evitare il fenomeno di ritenzione dell’immagine, ridurre il grado di luminosità e contrasto dello schermo quando si visualizza un’immagine fissa. „ Altitudine Il PDP può funzionare regolarmente fino a 2000m di altitudine. Se utilizzato a un’altitudine superiore a 2000m di altezza si possono verificare malfunzionamenti, pertanto se ne sconsiglia l’uso. „ Calore sulla parte superiore del TV PDP La parte superiore dell’apparecchio può risultare calda dopo un uso prolungato poiché il calore viene dissipato dal pannello attraverso i fori di ventilazione presenti nella parte superiore. Ciò è una condizione normale e non indica alcun difetto o malfunzionamento del prodotto. Tuttavia, si consiglia di impedire ai bambini di toccare la parte superiore del prodotto. „ Il prodotto emette degli scricchiolii. Uno scricchiolio può verificarsi per l’espansione e la contrazione del telaio a causa di variazioni ambientali quali la temperatura e l’umidità. Ciò è normale e non rappresenta un difetto del prodotto. „ Difetti delle celle Il PDP usa un pannello composto da 2,360,000 (livello HD) a 6,221,000 (livello FHD) pixel che richiedono una speciale tecnologia di produzione. Tuttavia, alcuni pixel potrebbero risultare più luminosi o più scuri. Questo fenomeno non ha alcun impatto sulle prestazioni del prodotto. „ Si sconsiglia di utilizzare il prodotto a temperature inferiori ai 5°C. „ La visualizzazione di una immagine fissa per un lungo periodo di tempo può provocare un danno permanente al pannello PDP. La visione del TV PDP con un formato 4:3 per un periodo di tempo prolungato può lasciare traccia dei bordi sulla parte sinistra, destra e centrale del video a causa delle differenti emissioni luminose dello schermo. La riproduzione di un DVD o l’uso di una console per videogiochi può causare effetti analoghi sullo schermo. Questo tipo di danni non è coperto dalla Garanzia. „ Immagine residua sullo schermo. La visualizzazione prolungata di immagini fisse da videogiochi e PC può causare immagini residue parziali. Per evitare questo problema, ridurre la ‘luminosità’ e il ‘contrasto’ mentre si visualizzano immagini fisse. „ Garanzia - La Garanzia non copre i danni causati dalle immagini residue. - La bruciatura dello scherno non è coperta dalla garanzia. „ Installazione Per l’installazione dell’apparecchio in luoghi estremamente polverosi o esposti a basse o alte temperature, elevata umidità o sostanze chimiche, oppure laddove è richiesto un funzionamento continuativo del prodotto come per esempio in aeroporti, stazioni ferroviarie, ecc. si consiglia di contattare un Centro di assistenza autorizzato. La mancata osservanza di questa indicazione può causare seri danni all’apparecchio. Avvertenza TV Digitale 1. Le funzioni relative alla televisione digitale (DVB) sono disponibili solo nelle nazioni o nelle aree in cui viene trasmesso il segnale digitale terrestre DVB-T (MPEG2 e MPEG4 AVC) o laddove si abbia accesso a un servizio TV via cavo compatibile DVB-C (MPEG2 e MPEG4 AAC). Verificare con il rivenditore locale la possibilità di ricevere segnali DVB-T o DVB-C. 2. DVB-T è lo standard del consorzio europeo DVB per la trasmissione della televisione digitale terrestre mentre DVB-C è lo standard per la trasmissione della televisione digitale via cavo. Tuttavia, alcune funzioni quali EPG (Electronic Program Guide), VOD (Video on Demand) e altre non sono incluse in queste specifiche. Per questo motivo, al momento non sono supportate. 3. Sebbene questo televisore rispetti i più recenti standard DVB-T e DVB-C [agosto 2008], la compatibilità con future trasmissioni digitali terrestri DVB-T e digitali via cavo DVB-C non può essere garantita. 4. Alcuni fornitori di trasmissioni TV via cavo potrebbero applicare una tariffa aggiuntiva per tali servizi e richiedere all’utente di accettare i termini e le condizioni della loro offerta. 5. Alcune funzioni della TV digitale potrebbero non essere disponibili in alcune nazioni o regioni e lo standard DVB-C potrebbe non essere correttamente supportato da tutti i fornitori. 6. Per maggiori informazioni, contattare il locale centro assistenza clienti SAMSUNG. Contatta SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE In caso di domande o commenti relativi ai prodotti Samsung, contattare il centro assistenza clienti SAMSUNG (Vedere retro di copertina per maggiori informazioni.) N Le figure e le illustrazioni presenti in questo Manuale dell’utente sono fornite unicamente a titolo di riferimento e possono differire da quelle del prodotto attuale. Il design e le specifiche del prodotto possono variare senza preavviso allo scopo di migliorare costantemente le prestazioni del prodotto. © 2009 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Tutti i diritti riservati. BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 2 10/20/2009 4:50:27 PMItaliano - 3 Italiano N O T Simbolo Premere Nota Tasto One-Touch TOOLS Sommario Connessione e preparazione del televisore ■ Verifica delle parti ......................................................................4 ■ Uso della base a piedistallo.......................................................4 ■ Assemblaggio dei cavi...............................................................4 ■ Pannello di controllo ..................................................................5 ■ Pannello dei collegamenti .........................................................6 ■ Telecomando .............................................................................8 ■ Installazione delle batterie nel telecomando .............................8 ■ Uso dei tasti retroilluminati del telecomando.............................9 ■ Accendere e spegnere ..............................................................9 ■ Impostare il televisore in modalità Standby...............................9 ■ Visualizzazione del display........................................................9 ■ Visualizzazione dei menu........................................................10 ■ Uso del tasto TOOLS .............................................................10 ■ Funzioni Plug & Play ...............................................................10 Controllo dei canali ■ Memorizzazione dei canali .................................................... 11 ■ Gestione dei canali..................................................................13 Controllo dell’immagine ■ Modifica delle impostazioni delle immagini .............................15 ■ Configurazione del televisore con il PC...................................18 ■ Schermo del PC ......................................................................19 Controllo dell’audio ■ Modifica dello standard audio..................................................20 ■ Selezione della modalità audio................................................21 Descrizione delle funzioni ■ Impostazione dell’ora ..............................................................22 ■ Configurazione del menu Impostazione ..................................23 ■ Visione Picture-in-Picture (PIP)...............................................25 Supporto / Ingressi ■ Programmi supportati ..............................................................26 ■ Elenco sorgenti / Modifica Nome.............................................27 Rete ■ Connessione di rete ................................................................28 ■ Impostazione rete....................................................................30 Media Play ■ Collegamento di un dispositivo USB .......................................33 ■ Uso della funzione Media Play ................................................34 ■ Ordinamento Photo / Music / Movie List..................................35 ■ Photo / Music / Movie List Option Menu..................................36 ■ Slide Show / Music Play / Movie Play Option Menu................37 ■ Visualizzazione di una foto o di una proiezione di diapositive.38 ■ Riproduzione di musica ...........................................................39 ■ Riproduzione di un filmato .....................................................40 ■ Utilizzo del menu Impostazione...............................................41 Media Play-DLNA ■ Impostazione della rete DLNA.................................................42 ■ Installazione dell’applicazione DLNA.......................................42 ■ Uso dell’applicazion DLNA......................................................43 ■ Uso della funzione DLNA ........................................................44 Informazioni su Anynet+ ■ Collegamento dei dispositivi Anynet+......................................45 ■ Configurazione diAnynet+ .......................................................46 ■ Passaggio da un dispositivo Anynet+ all’altro .........................46 ■ Registrazione ..........................................................................47 ■ Ascolto tramite il ricevitore ......................................................48 ■ Risoluzione dei problemi con Anynet+ ...................................48 Content Library ■ Attivazione della modalità Content Library .............................49 ■ Uso di Content Library.............................................................50 Internet@TV ■ Guida introduttiva di Internet@TV...........................................51 ■ Modificare gli snippet nel dock ................................................53 ■ Uso del widget Profile..............................................................53 ■ Uso di Yahoo!® Widget Gallery...............................................54 ■ Uso di Yahoo!® Weather Widget.............................................54 ■ Uso del widget Yahoo!® News ................................................55 ■ Uso del widget Yahoo!® Flickr.................................................55 ■ Uso del widget Yahoo!® Finance ............................................56 ■ Risoluzione dei problemi con internet@TV ............................56 ■ Guida Sito web ........................................................................57 Internet@TV ■ Guida introduttiva di Internet@TV...........................................58 ■ Configurazione di Internet@TV...............................................58 ■ Uso del servizio Internet@TV..................................................59 ■ Risoluzione dei problemi di internet@TV ................................60 ■ Guida Sito web ........................................................................60 Centro rete dom ■ Centro rete dom ......................................................................61 ■ Configurazione di Centro rete dom .........................................62 ■ Uso della funzione Messaggio ................................................62 ■ Uso della funzione Media ........................................................63 Consigli per l’uso ■ Funzione Teletext ....................................................................64 ■ Specifiche del kit di supporto a parete (VESA) .......................65 ■ Preparazione per l’installazione del kit di montaggio a parete ...................................................................................66 ■ Come assemblare la base a piedistallo...................................66 ■ Fissaggio del televisore alla parete .........................................67 ■ Messa in sicurezza della posizione di installazione ................67 ■ Risoluzione dei problemi .........................................................68 ■ Specifiche................................................................................71 ■ Schema blocco........................................................................72 Questo apparecchio è fabbricato in conformità al D.M.28.08.95 n.548 ed in particolare a quanto specificato nell Art.2, comma 1. Questo apparecchio è fabbricato nella U.E. in conformità al D.M.28.08.95 n.548 Art.2, comma 1 ed al D.M.26.03.92 Art.1 BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 3 10/20/2009 4:50:28 PMItaliano - 4 Assemblaggio dei cavi Inserire i cavi nel fermacavo in modo che non siano visibili attraverso il piedistallo trasparente. Uso della base a piedistallo N In caso di spostamento, il PDP deve essere sorretto da due o più persone. Non lasciare mai il PDP appoggiato al pavimento in quanto ciò potrebbe danneggiare lo schermo. Mantenere sempre il PDP in posizione eretta. N Il PDP è in grado di ruotare di 20 gradi verso destra e verso sinistra. -20° ~ 20° Verifica delle parti Manuale dell'utente Telecomando / Batterie AAA (2ea) Cavo di alimentazione Panno per la pulizia Ferma cavo Anello di ritenuta (4ea) (vedere a pag. 66) CD del programma Viti (4ea) (PS50B650 solo) (vedere a pag. 66) Copertura-Fondo (PS50B650 solo) (vedere a pag. 66) Copertura-Fondo / Viti (2ea) (PS58B680 / PS63B680 solo) (vedere a pag. 66) Nucleo in ferrite per il cavo delle cuffie Nucleo in ferrite per cavo di alimentazione (PS58B680T6P / PS63B680 solo) Nucleo in ferrite per cavo di alimentazione Scheda di garanzia/ Guida alla sicurezza (Non disponibile in tutte le località) N Nucleo in ferrite Il nucleo in ferrite viene utilizzato per schermare il cavo dalle interferenze. Quando si collega un cavo, aprire il nucleo in ferrite e agganciarlo intorno al cavo vicino alla spina, come mostrato in figura. Connessione e preparazione del televisore (PS58B680T6P/ PS63B680 solo) BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 4 10/20/2009 4:50:30 PMItaliano - 5 Pannello di controllo N La forma e il colore del prodotto possono variare in base al modello. Tasti del pannello frontale Toccare i tasti per attivare le relative funzioni. (PS58B680 / PS63B680) (PS50B650) 1 SOURCE Alterna tra tutte le sorgenti di ingressi disponibili (TV, Est1, Est2, AV, Component, PC, HDMI1, HDMI2/DVI, HDMI3, HDMI4, USB). N Nel menu a video, utilizzare questo tasto come si usa il tasto ENTERE del telecomando. 2 MENU Premere per visualizzare il menu a video con le funzioni del televisore. 3 + – Premere per aumentare o diminuire il volume. Nel menu a video, utilizzare i tasti + – così come si usano i tasti ◄ e ► del telecomando. 4 CH Premere per cambiare canale. Nel menu a video, utilizzare i tasti g CH così come si usano i tasti ▲ e ▼ del telecomando. E’ possibile usare il tasto g CH per accendere il televisore senza il telecomando. 5 SPIA DI ACCENSIONE Lampeggia e si spegne quando l’alimentazione è attiva, si accende in modalità standby. 6 (POWER) Premere per accendere e spegnere il televisore. 7 SENSORE DEL TELECOMANDO Puntare il telecomando in direzione di questo punto sul televisore. 8 ALTOPARLANTI BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 5 10/20/2009 4:50:30 PMItaliano - 6 Pannello dei collegamenti N Nel collegare un sistema audio o video all’apparecchio, accertarsi che tutti gli elementi siano spenti. N Nel collegare un dispositivo esterno, far combaciare il colore del terminale di collegamento a quello del cavo. N La forma e il colore del prodotto possono variare in base al modello. 1 LAN Inserire un cavo LAN in questa porta per effettuare il collegamento in rete 2 POWER IN Collegare il cavo di alimentazione. 3 COMPONENT IN Ingressi Audio (AUDIO L/R) e video (Y / PB / PR) per Component. 4 PC IN (AUDIO / PC) Collegare alla porta di uscita video e audio del PC. 5 EXT 1, EXT 2 Ingressi e uscite di dispositivi esterni quali videoregistratori, DVD, console di gioco o lettori di dischi video. N In modalità Est, l’uscita DTV supporta solo Video e Audio SD MPEG. N In modalità Est, Modalità gioco non è disponibile. Specifiche Ingressi/Uscite Connettore Ingresso Uscita Video Audio(L/R) RGB Video + Audio(L/R) EXT 1 ✔ ✔ ✔ Solo l’uscita TV o DTV è disponibile. EXT 2 ✔ ✔ Uscita da selezionare. 6 HEADPHONE Collegare delle cuffie per guardare un programma televisivo senza disturbare altre persone nella stessa stanza. N L’uso prolungato delle cuffie ad alto volume può causare danni all’udito. 7 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) Collegare a un componente audio digitale. 8 SERVICE Connettore di servizio. 9 AUDIO OUT(AUDIO R/L) Collegare segnali audio RCA dal televisore a una sorgente esterna, come ad esempio un componente audio. 0 ANT IN Connettore coassiale da 75Ω per rete via antenna/cavo. ! HDMI IN 1, 2(DVI), 3 Non è necessario un ulteriore collegamento audio per la connessione HDMI-HDMI. - In caso di uso di un cavo di connessione HDMI/DVI è necessario usare il jack HDMI IN 2(DVI). N Che cosa significa HDMI? - High Definition Multimedia Interface permette la trasmissione di dati video digitali ad alta definizione e audio digitale multicanale. - Il terminale HDMI/DVI supporta il collegamento DVI a una periferica estesa con un cavo appropriato (non fornito). La differenza tra HDMI e DVI è che il dispositivo HDMI è di dimensioni più piccole, dispone della funzione di codifica HDCP (High Bandwidth Digital Copy Protection) installata, e supporta audio digitale multicanale. DVI AUDIO IN Uscite audio DVI per dispositivi esterni. Modalità supportate per HDMI/DVI e Component 480i 480p 576i 576p 720p 1080i 1080p HDMI/DVI 50Hz X X X O O O O HDMI/DVI 60Hz X O X X O O O Component O O O O O O O TV Pannello posteriore Televisione via cavo Rete o o 2 3 4 5 7 9 ! 0 6 8 1 BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 6 10/20/2009 4:50:33 PMItaliano - 7 1 Alloggiamento COMMON INTERFACE Inserire una scheda CI(CI+) (Common Interface) nell’alloggiamento. (vedere a pag. 23) - Se per alcuni canali non si inserisce la SCHEDA CI(CI+), il messaggio Segnale criptato viene visualizzato sullo schermo. - Nell’arco di 2~3 minuti vengono visualizzate le informazioni di pairing che contengono un numero telefonico, l’ID della SCHEDA CI(CI+), l’ID host e altri dati. Se viene visualizzato un messaggio di errore, contattare il fornitore del servizio. - Una volta completata la configurazione delle informazioni relative al canale, viene visualizzato il messaggio Completato aggiornamento, a indicare che l’elenco dei canali è stato aggiornato. - A seconda del modello, al reinserimento della scheda CI potrebbe essere richiesta la password per la funzione Parental Lock. - A seconda del modello, anche se la funzione Parental Lock è impostata su Allow All, potrebbe essere richiesta la password per la visione di programmi per adulti (dai 18 anni in su). N Inserire la scheda CI(CI+) nella direzione indicata sulla scheda stessa. N La ‘SCHEDA CI (CI+)' non è supportata in alcune nazioni, regioni e da alcune stazioni emittenti; controllare con il rivenditore autorizzato di zona. N La funzione CI+ è applicabile solo al modello PS********P. In caso di problemi, contattare il fornitore del servizio. 2 USB 1(HDD), USB 2 Collegare un dispositivo MSC USB per visualizzare foto (JPEG) e riprodurre file audio (MP3) o filmati. E’ possibile connettersi a una rete SAMSUNG in modalità wireless. Il jack USB 1 è anche usato come jack per HDD. HDD (Hard Disk Drive) è un dispositivo che memorizza digitalmente dati codificati. 3 HDMI IN 4 Collegare a un jack HDMI di un dispositivo con uscita HDMI. 4 AV IN (VIDEO, AUDIO L/R) Ingressi video e audio per dispositivi esterni, come una telecamera o un videoregistratore. N La forma e il colore del prodotto possono variare in base al modello. TV Pannello laterale 3 4 1 2 BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 7 10/20/2009 4:50:34 PMItaliano - 8 Telecomando Il telecomando è utilizzabile fino a una distanza di 23 metri dal televisore. N Una illuminazione troppo intensa può avere conseguenze sulle prestazioni del telecomando. Installazione delle batterie nel telecomando 1. Sollevare il coperchio sul retro del telecomando come mostrato in figura. 2. Inserire due batterie tipo AAA. N Fare corrispondere i poli ‘+’ e ‘–’ delle batterie con lo schema riportato all’interno del vano. 3. Chiudere il coperchio. N Se si prevede di non utilizzare il telecomando per un periodo di tempo prolungato, rimuovere le batterie e riporle in un luogo asciutto e fresco. N Se il telecomando non funziona, effettuare il seguente controllo 1. Il televisore è acceso? 2. I poli + e - delle batterie sono invertiti? 3. Le batterie sono esaurite? 4. Si è verificata una interruzione di corrente o il cavo di alimentazione è scollegato? 5. È presente una luce a fluorescenza speciale o un neon nelle vicinanze? 1 Pulsante POWER (accende e spegne il televisore). 2 Seleziona direttamente la modalità TV. 3 Tasti numerici per selezionare direttamente i canali. 4 Premere per passare ai canali preferiti. 5 Disattivazione temporanea dell’audio. 6 Aumento volume diminuzione volume 7 Selezione della sorgente disponibile. 8 Consente di vedere le informazioni sull’emittente corrente. 9 Per selezionare rapidamente le funzioni più frequentemente utilizzate. 0 Per selezionare le voci dei menu a schermo e modificarne i valori. ! Questa funzione consente di guardare Internet@TV. @ Usare questi tasti in Elenco canali, Media Play e, ecc Internet@TV. $ Per visualizzare l’elenco dei canali sullo schermo. % Usare questi tasti in Elenco canali, Media Play e Anynet+. ^ Premere per attivare la retroilluminazione dei tasti del telecomando. Questa funzione consente una migliore visibilità dei tasti in condizioni di scarsa illuminazione. (Usando il telecomando con il tasto di illuminazione dei tasti ON/OFF ( ) impostato su On, si riduce la durata delle batterie.) & Canale precedentel. * Canale successivo Canale precedente ( Visualizza il menu a video principale. ) Visualizzazione della Guida elettronica ai programmi (EPG). a Torna al menu precedente. b Esce dal menu a video. c Questa funzione consente di visualizzare Media Play. d Questa funzione permette la visione di Content Library. e Visualizzazione sottotitoli digitali. f Selezione descrizione audio (AD). Funzioni Teletext 2 Esce dalla visualizzazione Teletext (in base al modello) 7 Selezione della modalità Teletext (LIST/FLOF) 8 Mostra Teletex 9 Dimensione Teletext @ Selezione dell’argomento Fastext # Visualizzazione Teletext/sovrapporre le informazioni Teletext con la normale trasmissione $ Negozio Teletext & Pagina secondaria Teletext * P : Pagina successiva Teletext P : Pagina precedente Teletext ( Indice Teletext a Mantieni Teletext b Annulla Teletext BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 8 10/20/2009 4:50:35 PMItaliano - 9 Uso dei tasti retroilluminati del telecomando Utilizzare questa funzione in un ambiente poco illuminato o in caso di difficoltà a vedere chiaramente i tasti. 1. Premere il tasto luminoso ON/OFF( ) N In modalità ON, il tasto si retroillumina per un istante. N Premendo un tasto sul telecomando quando quest’ultimo è ON attiva la retroilluminazione del tasto per un istante. Accendere e spegnere Il cavo di rete è collegato sul retro dell’apparecchio. 1. Inserire la spina di alimentazione in una presa idonea. N La spia di standby si accende sull’apparecchio. 2. Premere il pulsante POWER P sul prodotto. N E’ possibile accendere il televisore anche premendo il pulsante POWER P o il pulsante TV sul telecomando. N Verrà visualizzato l’ultimo programma selezionato al precedente spegnimento. 3. Premere i tasti numerici (0~9) o il pulsante canale precedente / successivo (< / >) sul telecomando o < CH> sul televisore. N Accendendo il televisore la prima volta, verrà richiesto di impostare la lingua con la quale si desidera visualizzare i menu. 4. Per spegnere l’apparecchio, premere nuovamente il pulsante POWER P. Impostare il televisore in modalità Standby Per ridurre il consumo energetico è possibile impostare il televisore in modalità standby. La modalità standby può essere utile quando si desidera interrompere temporaneamente la visione (durante una cena ad esempio). 1. Premere il pulsante POWER P del telecomando. N Lo schermo viene spento e sull’apparecchio si accende una spia rossa di standby. 2. Per riaccendere il televisore, premere semplicemente POWER P, uno dei tasti numerici (0~9), il pulsante TV o nuovamente il pulsante canale precedente / successivo (< / >). N Non lasciare il televisore in modalità standby per lunghi periodi di tempo (partendo per le vacanze ad esempio). E’ consigliabile scollegare il cavo di alimentazione e il cavo dell’antenna dalle prese a muro. Visualizzazione del display Il display identifica il canale corrente e lo stato di determinate impostazioni audio e video. O Premere il tasto INFO per visualizzare le informazioni. Premere INFO sul telecomando. Il televisore visualizzerà il canale, il tipo di audio e lo stato di determinate impostazioni immagine e audio. • ▲, ▼: E' possibile visualizzare altre informazioni relative al canale. Se si desidera spostarsi sul canale selezionato, premere ENTERE. • ◄, ►: E' possibile visualizzare le informazioni del programma desiderato sul canale corrente. N Premere nuovamente INFO o attendere 10 secondi finché il display scomparirà automaticamente. DTV Air 15 abc1 18:00 ~ 6:00 18:11 Thu 6 Jan Life On Venus Avenue Unclassified No Detaild Information E Watch ' Information BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 9 10/20/2009 4:50:36 PMItaliano - 10 Visualizzazione dei menu 1. A televisore acceso, premere il pulsante MENU. Il menu principale viene visualizzato a schermo. Sul lato sinistro del menu compaiono alcune icone : Immagine, Suono, Canale , Impostazione, Ingressi, Applicazione, Supporto. 2. Premere il pulsante ▲ o ▼ per selezionare una delle icone. Quindi premere il pulsante ENTERE per accedere al menu secondario dell’icona. 3. Per uscire, premere EXIT. N Dopo circa un minuto il menu scompare dallo schermo. Uso del tasto TOOLS Il tasto TOOLS può essere usato per selezionare in modo rapido e facile le funzioni usate più frequentemente. Il menu Strumenti varia in base alla modalità di ingresso esterno visualizzata. 1. Premere il tasto TOOLS. Verrà visualizzato il menu Strumenti. 2. Premere il tasto ▲ o ▼ per selezionare un menu, quindi premere ENTERE 3. Premere i tasti ▲ / ▼ / ◄ / ► / ENTERE per visualizzare, cambiare o usare le voci selezionate. Per una descrizione più dettagliata di ogni funzione vedere la pagina corrispondente. • Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC), vedere pag. 46 • Formato immagine, vedere pag. 16 • Modalità immagine, vedere pag. 15 • Modalità audio, vedere pag. 20 • Timer stand-by, vedere pag. 22 • SRS TS HD, vedere pag. 20 • Risp. energia, vedere pag. 24 • Dual l ll, vedere pag. 21 • Aggiungi a Preferiti (o Elimina da Preferiti), vedere pag. 14 • PIP, vedere pag. 25 • Regolazione auto, vedere pag. 18 Funzioni Plug & Play Se il televisore viene acceso per la prima volta, alcune impostazioni di base vengono visualizzate automaticamente e in sequenza. N Il salvaschermo si attiva qualora non si prema alcun pulsante sul telecomando per più di 1 minuto durante l’esecuzione di Plug & Play. N Il salvaschermo si attiva qualora non via sia alcun segnale operativo per più di 15 minuti. N Se durante l’impostazione del televisore si seleziona la nazione errata, i caratteri sullo schermo potrebbero essere visualizzati in modo non corretto. 1. Premere il pulsante POWER del telecomando. Il menu Select the OSD Language. ENTERE viene automaticamente visualizzato. Selezionare la lingua desiderata premendo il pulsante ▲ o ▼. PremereENTERE per confermare la scelta. 2. Premere ◄ o ► per selezionare Demo Negozio o Uso dom, quindi premereENTERE. N Si consiglia di impostare la modalità TV su Uso dom. per ottenere la migliore qualità dell’immagine in un ambiente domestico. N La modalità Demo Negozio è intesa solo per un uso commerciale del prodotto. N Se l’unità è stata accidentalmente impostata sulla modalità Demo Negozio e si desidera tornare alla modalità Uso dom. (Standard) : Premere il tasto Volume del televisore. Quando il menu OSD Volume viene visualizzato, tenere premuto il pulsante MENU del televisore per 5 secondi. 3. Premere tasti ENTERE. Selezionare la nazione desiderata premendo il pulsante ▲ o ▼. Premere ENTERE per confermare la scelta. N Dopo aver selezionato il paese nel menu Country, alcuni modelli potrebbero richiedere un'opzione aggiuntiva per l'impostazione del pin. N All'inserimento del codice PIN, 0-0-0-0 non è disponibile. 4. Premere ▲ o ▼ per memorizzare i canali della connessione selezionata, quindi premere ENTERE • Antenna : Segnale antenna via etere. • Cavo : Segnale antenna via cavo. Plug & Play Select the OSD Language. Language : U Move E Enter ▲ Nederlands English Eesti ▼ Strumenti Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) Formato immagine : Automatico Modalità immagine : Standard Modalità audio : Personalizza Timer stand-by : Off SRS TS HD : Off Risp. energia : Off Dual l ll : Mono Aggiungi a Preferiti U Sposta E Conf. e Esci Modalità : Standard Luce cella : 4 Contrasto : 95 Luminosità : 45 Nitidezza : 50 Colore : 50 Tinta (V/R) : V50/R50 Impostazioni avanzate Immagine BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 10 10/20/2009 4:50:37 PMItaliano - 11 5. Premere ▲ o ▼ per selezionare la sorgente Antenna da memorizzare. Premere ENTERE per selezionare Avvio. • Digitale e Analogico : Canali digitali e analogici. • Digitale : Canali digitali. • Analogico : Canali analogici. N La ricerca dei canali inizia e termina in modo automatico. N Per una descrizione più dettagliata della selezione della modalità Cavo, vedere a pag. 11. 6. Viene visualizzato il messaggio Imposta modalità Orologio. Premere ENTERE. Premere ▲ o ▼ per selezionare Auto, quindi Premere ENTERE. N Selezionando Manuale, viene visualizzato Imposta data e orario correnti. (Per una descrizione più dettagliata dell’opzione Manuale, vedere il capitolo Orario, vedere a pag. 22). N Ricevendo un segnale digitale, l’orario verrà impostato automaticamente. 7. Viene visualizzata la breve introduzione Ottenere le prestazioni migliori dal nuovo HDTV. Premere ENTERE. N Questo menu è disponibile Guida per la connessione HD nel menu Supporto. N E’ possibile passare alla pagina precedente o successiva premendo il tasto ◄ / ►. 8. Viene visualizzato il messaggio Buon divertimento. N Se si desidera guardare un programma TV, selezionare Guarda TV. N Premere ENTERE per selezionare Ved Guida prodotto. Per reimpostare questa funzione... 1. Premere MENU per visualizzare il menu. Premere ▲ o ▼ per selezionare Impostazione, quindi premere ENTERE. 2. Premere nuovamente ENTEREper selezionare Plug & Play. 3. Digitare il PIN a quattro cifre. Il PIN predefinito di un nuovo apparecchio TV è ‘0-0-0-0’. N Per cambiare il PIN, vedere il capitolo Cambiare il PIN, vedere a pag. 24. N La funzione Plug & Play è disponibile solo in modalità TV. Memorizzazione dei canali ❑ Nazione „ Canale digitale : Funzione per la modifica del paese per i canali digitali. „ Canale analogico : Funzione per la modifica del paese per i canali analogici. N Comparirà la richiesta del PIN. Digitare il 4 PIN a quattro cifre. ❑ Memorizzazione auto Esegue la scansione di tutti i canali con stazioni di trasmissione attive (la disponibilità dipende dalla nazione) e li memorizza nella memoria del televisore. E’ possibile impostare il televisore per memorizzare i canali della connessione selezionata. • Antenna : Segnale antenna via etere. • Cavo : Segnale antenna via cavo. E’ possibile selezionare il tipo di antenna da memorizzare. • Digitale e Analogico : Canali digitali e analogici. • Digitale : Canali digitali. • Analogico : Canali analogici. N Selezionando Cavo, • Modalità ricerca : Visualizza la modalità di ricerca. (Rapida) - Network ID : Visualizza il codice di identificazione del network. - Frequenza : Visualizza la frequenza del canale. - Modulazione : Visualizza i valori di modulazione disponibili. - Symbol Rate : Visualizza i valori di symbol rate disponibili. • Modalità ricerca : Visualizza la modalità di ricerca. (Completa, Rete) - Frequenza inizio : Visualizza i valori iniziali di frequenza. - Frequenza fine : Visualizza i valori finali di frequenza. - Modulazione : Visualizza i valori di modulazione disponibili. - Symbol Rate : Visualizza i valori di symbol rate disponibili. N Per interrompere la funzione Memorizzazione auto, premere ENTERE. Verrà visualizzato il messaggio Interrompere Memorizzazione auto?. Selezionare Sì premendo ◄ o ►, quindi premere ENTERE. Controllo dei canali Canale Nazione ► Memorizzazione auto Memorizzazione manuale Opzione ricerca via cavo Guida Completa Mini Guida Guida Predefinita : Guida Completa Elenco canali Impostazione Plug & Play ► Lingua menu : Italiano Ora Trasmissione Sicurezza Rete Generale BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 11 10/20/2009 4:50:37 PMItaliano - 12 ❑ Memorizzazione manuale Esegue la scansione manuale di un canale e lo memorizza nella memoria TV. „ Canale digitale (Digitale) N Canale digitale è disponibile solo in modalità DTV. • Canale : Impostare il numero del Canale mediante i tasti ▲, ▼ o i tasti numerici (0~9). • Frequenza : Impostare la frequenza utilizzando i tasti numerici (0~9). • Larg. di banda : Impostare la Larghezza di banda utilizzando i tasti ▲ o ▼. N Al termine, i canali vengono aggiornati nell’elenco dei canali. „ Canali analogici Memorizzazione manuale dei canali analogici. • Programma (Numero di programma da assegnare a un canale) : Impostare il numero del programma mediante i tasti ▲, ▼ o i tasti numerici (0~9). • Sistema colore → Auto / PAL / SECAM / NTSC4.43 : Impostare il sistema colore utilizzando i tasti ▲ o ▼. • Sistema audio → BG / DK / I / L : Impostare il sistema audio utilizzando i tasti ▲ o ▼. • Canale (Quando si conosce il numero del canale da memorizzare) : Premere ▲ o ▼ per selezionare C (Antenna) o S (Cavo). Premere ►, quindi▲, ▼ o un tasto numerico (0~9) per selezionare il numero desiderato. N Se l’audio è anomalo o assente, riselezionare lo standard audio richiesto. • Ricerca (Quando non si conosce il numero del canale) : Premere il pulsante ▲ o ▼ per avviare la ricerca. Il sintonizzatore effettua la scansione della gamma di frequenza fino a quando appare il primo canale o il canale selezionato. • Memorizza (Quando si memorizza il canale e il numero di programma corrispondente) : Impostare su OK premendo ENTERE. N Modalità Canale - C (modalità Antenna) : È possibile selezionare un canale immettendo in questa modalità il numero assegnato a ciascuna emittente. - S (Modalità Cavo) : E’ possibile selezionare un canale immettendo in questa modalità il numero assegnato a ciascun canale via cavo. ❑ Opzione ricerca via cavo E’ possibile impostare ulteriori opzioni come ad esempio la frequenza e il symbol rate per la ricerca della rete via cavo (in base alla nazione). • Frequenza inizio : Visualizza i valori iniziali di frequenza. • Frequenza arresto : Visualizza i valori finali di frequenza. • Modulazione : Visualizza i valori di modulazione disponibili. • Symbol Rate : Visualizza i valori di symbol rate disponibili. N Se il valore di Frequenza inizio è maggiore del valore Frequenza arresto, verrà visualizzato un messaggio di avviso. ❑ Guida Completa / Mini Guida Le informazioni EPG (Electronic Programme Guide) sono fornite dall’emittente. Le voci relative ai programmi potrebbero risultare vuote o non aggiornate, a seconda delle informazioni trasmesse dall’emittente su un determinato canale. La schermata viene aggiornata automaticamente non appena sono disponibili le nuove informazioni. • Guida Completa : Visualizza la informazioni sui programmi ordinate in segmenti di un’ora. Sono comprese due ore di programmi che è possibile scorrere in avanti o indietro. • Mini Guida : Su ogni riga della Mini Guida del canale corrente sono riportate le informazioni relative a ogni programma partendo dal programma corrente in avanti in ordine di orario. ❑ Guida Predefinita „ Mini Guida / Guida Completa E’ possibile scegliere se visualizzare la Mini Guida o la Guida Completa premendo il pulsante GUIDE del telecomando. O È anche possibile visualizzare il menu della guida semplicemente premendo il pulsante GUIDE. Continua... Canale Guida Completa Mini Guida Guida Predefinita : Guida Completa► Elenco canali Mod. Canale : Canali aggiunti Sintonia fine BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 12 10/20/2009 4:50:37 PMItaliano - 13 Uso della Guida Completa / Mini Guida ▲ / ▼ / ◄ / ►, ENTER Selezionare un programma premendo ▲/▼/◄/►/ENTERE. ROSSO Alterna tra Guida Completa e Mini Guida. VERDE Guida Completa : Scorrere velocemente in avanti. (-24 ore). GIALLO Guida Completa : Scorrere velocemente in avanti. (+24 ore) BLU Esce dalla guida. INFO Tasto INFO per ottenere maggiori informazioni. ❑ Modalità Canale Premendo il tasto P (), si passerà da un canale all’altro all’interno dell’elenco canali selezionato. „ Can. Aggiunti : I canali verranno attivati secondo l’elenco canali memorizzato. „ Can. Preferiti : I canali verranno attivati secondo l’elenco canali preferiti. ❑ Sintonia fine (solo canali analogici) Se la ricezione è chiara, non è necessario sintonizzare il canale poiché questa operazione viene effettuata automaticamente durante le operazioni di ricerca e memorizzazione. Se tuttavia il segnale risulta debole o distorto, può essere necessario sintonizzare il canale manualmente. N I canali sintonizzati manualmente e memorizzati sono evidenziati da un asterisco *alla destra del numero del canale nel relativo riquadro. N Se la sintonizzazione non viene memorizzata, le regolazioni andranno perse. N Per reimpostare la sintonizzazione, selezionare Reset premendo ▼, quindi premere ENTERE. Gestione dei canali Usando questo menu è possibile aggiungere, eliminare o impostare i canali preferiti e utilizzarela guida ai programmi per le trasmissioni digitali. N Selezionare un canale nella schermata Tutti i Canali, Canali aggiunti, Preferiti o Programmato premendo ▲ o ▼, quindi ENTERE. Ora è possibile guardare il canale selezionato. • Tutti i Canali : Mostra tutti i canali attualmente disponibili. • Canali aggiunti : Mostra tutti i canali aggiunti. • Preferiti : Mostra tutti i canali Preferiti. • Programmato : Mostra tutti i canali prenotati. O Premere il pulsante CH LIST sul telecomando per visualizzare l’elenco canali. N Usare i tasti colorati nell’elenco canali - Rosso (Tipo di canale) : Alterna tra TV, Radio, Dati / Altro e Tutti. - Verde (Zoom) : Ingrandisce o riduce il numero di un canale. - Giallo (Selezione) : Seleziona più elenchi di canali. - T TOOLS (Strumenti) : Visualizza i menu Cancella (o Aggiungi), Aggiungi a Preferiti (o Elimina da Preferiti), Blocco (o Sblocco), Timer per visione, Modifica nome canale, Modifica numero canale, Ordina, Deseleziona tutto, (Seleziona tutto), o Memorizzazione auto. (Il menu Strumenti può essere diverso in base alla situazione). N Icone sullo stato del canale A Canale analogico. c Canale selezionato mediante il tasto giallo. ♥ Canale impostato come preferito ( Programma attualmente trasmesso. \ A locked channel. ) Programma prenotato Canale Mini Guida Guida Predefinita : Guida Completa Elenco canali Mod. Canale : Canali aggiunti Sintonia fine 824 UKTV Gold 825 UKTV style A 1 C -- A 2 C -- A 3 ♥ C -- A 4 C -- A 5 C -- A 6 C -- A 7 C -- A 8 C -- Tutti i Canali Tutto „ Tipo canale „ Zoom „ Selezione Pagina Strumenti Guida Completa DTV Cable 900 f tn 2:10 Tue 1 Jun Freshmen On Campus 2:00 - 2:30 Dettagli non disponibili. Oggi 2:00 - 3:00 3:00 - 4:00 Mint Extra Loaded Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC The Distillery Smash Hits! Sunday 900 f tn 901 ITV Play 902 Kerrang! 903 Kiss 903 oneword ▼ 903 Smash Hits! Street Hypn.. Kisstory Nessuna informazione. Nessuna informazione. Nessuna informazione. Freshmen O.. Mini Guida DTV Cable 900 f tn Street Hypnosis Booze Britain 2:00 2:30 ▼ 5:00 Freshmen On Campus Guarda Informazioni Pagina „ Guida Completa „ Esci Guarda Informazioni Pagina „ Mini Guida „ +24 ore „ Esci BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 13 10/20/2009 4:50:39 PMItaliano - 14 ❑ Strumenti Elenco canali (in Tutti i Canali / Canali aggiunti / Preferiti) N Premere il tasto TOOLS per usare il menu Strumenti. N Gli elementi del menu Strumenti possono differire in base allo stato del canale. „ Aggiungi / Cancella E’ possibile eliminare o aggiungere un canale per visualizzare i canali desiderati. N Tutti i canali eliminati saranno visibili nel menu Tutti i Canali. N Se il canale in elenco è evidenziato in grigio, significa che il canale è stato eliminato. N Il menu Aggiungi viene visualizzato solo per i canali eliminati. N E’ inoltre possibile eliminare un canale nel menu Canali aggiunti o Preferiti allo stesso modo. „ Aggiungi a Preferiti / Elimina da Preferiti E’ possibile impostare i canali che si vedono più frequentemente come preferiti. T Premere il tasto TOOLS per visualizzare il menu Strumenti. E’ inoltre possibile impostare i canali Preferiti selezionando Strumenti → Aggiungi a Preferiti (Elimina da Preferiti). O Per selezionare i canali preferiti impostati, premere il pulsante FAV.CH sul telecomando. N Il simbolo "♥" verrà evidenziato e il canale verrà impostato come Preferito. N Tutti i canali Preferiti saranno visibili nel menu Preferiti. „ Blocco / Sblocco E’ possibile bloccare un canale in modo che non possa essere selezionato e visualizzato. Questa funzione è disponibile solo quando la funzione Blocco canali è impostata su On. (vedere pag. 24) N Comparirà la richiesta del PIN. Digitare il PIN a quattro cifre. N Il PIN predefinito di un nuovo apparecchio TV è ‘0-0-0-0’. E’ possibile modificare il PIN selezionando Cambia PIN nel menu. N Verrà visualizzato il simbolo “\“ e il canale verrà bloccato. „ Timer per visione Se si è effettuata la prenotazione di un canale, all’ora stabilita verrà visualizzato il canale prenotato nell’Elenco canali anche durante la visione di un altro canale. Per prenotare un programma, impostare prima l’orario corrente. (vedere pag. 22) N E’ possibile prenotare solo i canali memorizzati. N È possibile impostare il canale, il mese, il giorno, l’anno, l’ora e i minuti premendo direttamente i tasti numerici del telecomando. N Durante le prenotazione di un programma comparirà il menu Programmato. N Guida ai programmi digitali e Visualizzazione delle prenotazioni Selezionando un canale digitale e premendo il tasto ►,comparirà la Guida ai programmi. Per prenotare un programma seguire le procedure descritte sopra. „ Modifica nome canale (solo canali analogici) I canali possono essere etichettati in modo che il nome compaia quando viene selezionato il canale. N I nomi dei canali digitali trasmessi vengono automaticamente assegnati e non possono essere modificati. „ Modifica numero canale (solo canali digitali) E’ possibile modificare il numero dei canali premendo i pulsanti numerici sul telecomando. „ Ordina (solo canali analogici) Questa operazione consente di modificare i numeri di programma dei canali memorizzati. Questa operazione è spesso necessaria dopo la memorizzazione automatica dei canali. „ Seleziona tutto / Deseleziona tutto E’ possibile deselezionare o selezionare tutti i canali contenuti nell’elenco dei canali. N E’ possibile utilizzare contemporaneamente le funzioni Aggiungi / Cancella, Aggiungi a Preferiti / Elimina da Preferiti, o Blocco / Sblocco per più canali alla volta. Selezionare i canali desiderati e premere il tasto giallo per impostare tutti i canali selezionati contemporaneamente. N Il simbolo c compare a sinistra dei canali selezionati. N E’ possibile selezionare Deseleziona tutto solo quando è stato selezionato almeno un canale. „ Memorizzazione auto N Per maggiori dettagli sull’impostazione delle opzioni, vedere a pag. 11. N Se un canale è stato bloccato mediante le funzione Blocco canali, comparirà la schermata di inserimento del PIN. ❑ Strumenti Elenco canali (in Programmato) E’ possibile visualizzare, modificare o annullare una prenotazione. N Premere il tasto TOOLS per usare il menu Strumenti. • Modifica info : Selezionare questa funzione per modificare una prenotazione. • Annulla Programmazioni : Selezionare questa funzione per annullare una prenotazione. • Informazioni : Selezionare questa funzione per visualizzare una prenotazione (E’ inoltre possibile modificare le informazioni relative alla prenotazione.) • Seleziona tutto / Deseleziona tutto : Seleziona o deseleziona tutti i programmi prenotati Programmato 1 / 1 / 2009 13:59 5 TV1 Quincy, M.E 18:59 2 TV3 The Equalizer 20:59 2 TV3 McMillan & Wife 21:59 2 TV3 M.Spillane’s mike Hammer Modifica info Annulla Program Informazioni Seleziona tutto Antenna „ Zoom „ Selezione Strumenti Informazioni 824 UKTV Gold 825 UKTV style A 1 C -- A 2 C -- A 3 C -- A 4 C -- A 5 C -- A 6 C -- A 7 C -- A 8 C -- Tutti i Canali Tutto „ Tipo canale „ Zoom „ Selezione Pagina Strumenti Cancella Aggiungi a Preferiti Blocco Timer visione Modifica nome canale Ordina ▼ BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 14 10/20/2009 4:50:39 PMItaliano - 15 Modifica delle impostazioni delle immagini ❑ Modalità È possibile selezionare il tipo di immagine che più corrisponde alle proprie preferenze. „ Dinamica / Standard / Eco / Film T Premere il tasto TOOLS per visualizzare il menu Strumenti. E’ anche possibile impostare la modalità dell’immagine selezionando Strumenti → Modalità immagine. ❑ Luce cella / Contrasto / Luminosità / Nitidezza / Colore / Tinta (V/R) Il televisore ha diverse opzioni di impostazione che permettono il controllo della qualità dell’immagine. • Luce cella : Regola la luminosità dei pixel. • Contrasto : Regola il livello di contrasto dell’immagine. • Luminosità : Regola il livello di luminosità dell’immagine. • Nitidezza : Regola la definizione dei bordi dell’immagine. • Colore : Regola la saturazione dei colori dell’immagine. • Tinta (V/R) : Regola la tonalità delle tinte dell’immagine. N Modificando Luce cella, Contrasto, Luminosità, Nitidezza, Colore o Tinta (V/R), l’OSD verrà regolato di conseguenza. N Per ogni modalità dell’immagine vengono memorizzati i valori modificati. N In modalità TV, Est., AV analogica del sistema PAL, non è possibile utilizzare la funzione Tinta. N In modalità PC, è possibile modificare solo i parametri Luce cella, Contrasto e Luminosità. N Ogni impostazione regolata viene memorizzata separatamente in base alla sua modalità di ingresso. N E’ possibile ridurre significativamente il consumo di energia, e i costi ad esso associati, diminuendo la luminosità dello schermo. ❑ Impostazioni avanzate E’ possibile regolare le impostazioni avanzate dello schermo compresi il colore e il contrasto. N Impostazioni avanzate è disponibile in modalità Standard o Film. N In modalità PC, è possibile modificare solo i parametri Contrasto dinamico, Gamma Bilan bianco tra le opzioni della voce Impostazioni avanzate. „ Tonalità nero → Off / Scuro / Più scura / Extra scura E’ possibile migliorare la profondità dell’immagine regolando la densità del colore nero. „ Contrasto dinamico → Off / Basso / Medio / Alta E’ possibile regolare il contrasto dello schermo in modo da avere un contrasto ottimale. „ Gamma Consente di regolare l’intensità dei colori primari (rosso, verde, blu). „ Spazio colore Spazio colore è una matrice di colori composta dai colori rosso, verde e blu. Per scoprire lo straordinario mondo dei colori naturali basta selezionare lo spazio colore preferito. • Auto : Imposta automaticamente la gamma dei colori in base alla sorgente video di ingresso. • Nativa : Imposta una gamma dei colori più ampia di quella della sorgente video di ingresso. • Personalizza : Regola la gamma colore per adattarla alle proprie preferenze. N Personalizzazione dello Spazio colore - Regola la gamma colore per adattarla alle proprie preferenze. La funzione Colore è disponibile quando l’opzione Spazio colore è impostata su Personalizza. - Colore → Rosso / Verde / Blu / Giallo / Ciano / Magenta - Rosso / Verde / Blu : Nella funzione Colore, è possibile regolare i valori RGB per il colore selezionato. - Reset : Ripristina le impostazioni dello spazio colore ai valori predefiniti. Controllo dell’immagine Continua... Modalità : Standard ► Luce cella : 4 Contrast : 95 Luminosità : 45 Nitidezza : 50 Colore : 50 Tint (V/R) : V50/R50 Impostazioni avanzate Immagine Colore : 50 Tint (V/R) : V50/R50 Impostazioni avanzate ► Opzioni immagine Reset immagine Immagine BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 15 10/20/2009 4:50:40 PMItaliano - 16 „ Bilan bianco Consente di regolare la temperatura del colore per ottenere immagini più naturali. • R-Offset / G-Offset / B-Offset / R-Gain / G-Gain / B-Gain : Una volta modificato il valore, lo schermo viene automaticamente regolato di conseguenza. • Reset : Ripristina il bilanciamento predefinito del bianco. „ Incarnato E’ possibile regolare l’incarnato in modo da essere più o meno intenso. N Una volta modificato il valore, lo schermo viene automaticamente regolato di conseguenza. „ Migliora imm bordi → Off / On E’ possibile enfatizzare i contorni degli oggetti della figura. „ xvYCC → Off / On Impostando la modalità xvYCC su On, si noterà un miglioramento nei dettagli e nel colore durante la visione di un film riprodotto da un dispositivo esterno (per es. un lettore DVD). N xvYCC è disponibile quando la modalità dell’immagine è impostata su Film, e l’ingresso esterno è impostato su HDMI o Component. N Questa funzione potrebbe non essere supportata dal dispositivo esterno in uso. ❑ Opzioni immagine E’ possibile personalizzare altre impostazioni delle immagini in base alle proprie preferenze. N In modalità PC, è possibile modificare solo Toni colore, Dimensione e Protezione bruciature tra le opzioni della voce Opzioni immagine. „ Toni colore → Freddo / Normale / Caldo1 / Caldo2 / Caldo3 E’ possibile selezionare la tonalità dei colori più confortevole per la propria vista. N Le regolazioni vengono memorizzate in base alla modalità Immagine selezionata. N Caldo1, Caldo2 o Caldo3 vengono attivate solo quando la modalità Immagine è Film. „ Dimensione → Automatico / 16:9 / Wide Zoom / Zoom / 4:3 / Adatta allo schermo E’ possibile selezionare la dimensione dell’immagine che più si adatta alle proprie preferenze. • Automatico : Imposta l’immagine in formato Auto Wide. • 16:9 : Regola la dimensione dell’immagine a 16:9, un valore appropriato per visualizzare DVD o trasmissioni panoramiche. • Wide Zoom : Aumenta le dimensioni dell’immagine a più di 4:3. • Zoom : Ingrandisce il formato 16:9 (in senso verticale) per adattarlo alle dimensioni dello schermo. • 4:3 : Questa è l’impostazione predefinita per un filmato video o una trasmissione normale. • Adatta allo schermo : Visualizza il segnale nativo pieno in HD non visualizzabile mediante un normale televisore. N A seconda del tipo di sorgente di ingresso, le opzioni relative alla dimensione dell’immagine possono variare. N Le voci disponibili variano in base alla modalità selezionata. N In modalità PC, è possibile regolare solo i formati 16:9 e 4:3. N Se la modalità PIP è stata impostata su Double ( , ) la dimensione dell’immagine non potrà essere impostata. N Le impostazioni possono essere regolate e memorizzate per ogni dispositivo esterno connesso a un ingresso TV. N Se si visualizza una immagine fissa per oltre due ore, sullo schermo potrebbe apparire una immagine residua temporanea. N Wide Zoom : Premere ► per selezionare Posizione, quindi premere ENTERE. Per spostare l’immagine in alto o in basso, premere ▲ o ▼. Quindi premere ENTERE. N Zoom : Premere ► per selezionare Posizione, quindi premere ENTERE. Per spostare l’immagine in alto o in basso, premere ▲ o ▼Quindi premere ENTERE. Premere ► per selezionare Dimensione, quindi premere ENTERE. Premere ▲ o ▼ per aumentare o ridurre la dimensione dell’immagine in direzione verticale. Quindi premere ENTERE. N Dopo aver selezionato l’opzione Adatta allo schermo in modalità HDMI (1080i / 1080p) o Component (1080i / 1080p) : Selezionare Posizione premendo ◄ o ►. Premere . N Reset : Premere ◄ o ► per selezionare Reset, quindi premere ENTERE. E’ possibile azzerare l’impostazione. N Usando la funzione Adatta allo schermo con un ingresso HDMI 720p, 1 riga verrà tagliata in alto, in basso, a sinistra e a destra come nella funzione di overscan. „ Mod schermo → 16:9 / Wide Zoom / Zoom / 4:3 Impostando la dimensione dell’immagine su Automatico su un televisore 16:9, è possibile determinare la dimensione dell’immagine da visualizzare in modo 4:3 WSS (Wide Screen Service) o nessuna. Ogni nazione europea richiede un formato dell’immagine diverso e questa funzione deve essere quindi selezionata dall’utente. N Questa funzione è disponibile in modalità Automatico. N Questa funzione non è disponibile in modalità PC, Component o HDMI. Continua... Tinta (V/R) : V50/R50 Impostazioni avanzate Opzioni immagine ► Reset immagine Immagine BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 16 10/20/2009 4:50:40 PMItaliano - 17 „ Digital NR → Off / Bassa / Media / Alta / Auto Se il segnale trasmesso dall’emittente ricevuto dal vostro televisore è debole, è possibile attivare la funzione Digital Noise Reduction per facilitare la riduzione di qualsiasi effetto di ghosting statico che possa comparire sullo schermo. N Se il segnale è debole, selezionare una delle altre opzioni disponibili fino a ottenere la migliore qualità visiva. „ Livello di nero HDMI → Normale / Basso E’ possibile selezionare direttamente il livello di nero sullo schermo per regolare la profondità delle immagini. N Questa funzione si attiva solo quando l’ingresso esterno è collegato a HDMI (segnali RGB). „ Demo 1080 Full HD Motion → Off / On La nuova generazione di pannelli PDP Samsung offre una straordinaria nitidezza delle immagini in movimento in Full HD durante la visione di programmi sportivi, film e giochi. N Questa funzione non è disponibile in modalità PC, Giochi o Media Play. „ Modalità Film E’ possibile ottimizzare la modalità della immagini per la visione di film. • Off : Disattiva la funzione Modalità Film. • Auto1 : Regola automaticamente l’immagine alla migliore qualità possibile per la visione di un film. • Auto2 : Ottimizza automaticamente il testo del video durante la visione di un film. • Cinema Smooth : Offre la più straordinaria esperienza da cinema. N La modalità Film è supportata in modalità TV, Video, Component (480i / 1080i) e HDMI (1080i). „ Demo a 100Hz reali → Off / On E’ possibile ottenere una chiara distinzione tra reali 100Hz e 50Hz, specialmente quando si guardano scene in movimento. Perciò, quando si visualizzano scene caratterizzate da movimenti lenti, non è possibile distinguere tra reali 100Hz e 50Hz.Demo 100Hz funziona solo con segnale a 50Hz. Real 100Hz demo è disponibile per dimostrazioni presso il punto vendita con immagini speciali. „ Modalità Solo blu → Off / On Questa funzione è riservata agli utenti esperti nella misurazione del dispositivo AV. Questa funzione visualizza solo il segnale blu escludendo i segnali rosso e verde dal segnale video in modo da fornire un effetto Filtro Blu usato per regolare il colore e la tinta delle apparecchiature video come lettori DVD, Home Theater, ecc. N Modalità Solo blu è disponibile solo quando la modalità immagine è impostata su Film o Standard. „ Protezione bruciatura schermo Per ridurre l’eventualità di una bruciatura dello schermo, questo prodotto è dotato di una tecnologia per la prevenzione di bruciature dello schermo. Questa tecnologia consente di impostare il movimento alto/basso (verticale) e sinistra/destra (orizzontale). L’impostazione Ora permette di impostare i minuti dell’intervallo di spostamento da una immagine all’altra. • Spostamento pixel : Mediante questa funzione è possibile spostare i pixel sul PDP in orizzontale o verticale, allo scopo di ridurre al minimo la possibilità che permanga una immagine residua sullo schermo. N Condizione ottimale per lo spostamento dei pixel Voce TV/Ext/AV/Component/HDMI PC Orizzontale 0~2 2 Verticale 0~4 4 Ora (minuti) 1~4 min 2 min N Il valore della funzione Spostamento pixel può variare in base alle dimensioni del monitor (in pollici) e alla modalità. N Questa funzione non è disponibile in modalità Adatta allo schermo. • Scorrimento : Questa funzione aiuta a eliminare l’immagine residua sullo schermo muovendo tutti i pixel del PDP secondo uno schema prestabilito. Usare questa funzione quando si notano immagini residue o simboli residui sullo schermo, in particolare dopo una visualizzazione prolungata di una immagine fissa sullo schermo. • Lato grigio : Durante la visione del televisore con un formato 4:3, si prevengono eventuali danni allo schermo regolando il bilanciamento del bianco su entrambe le estremità sinistra e destra. - Chiaro : Impostando il formato dello schermo su 4:3, schiarisce le bande sinistra e destra. - Scuro : Impostando il formato dello schermo su 4:3, scurisce le bande sinistra e destra. Continua... BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 17 10/20/2009 4:50:40 PMItaliano - 18 Configurazione del televisore con il PC N Preimpostazione : Premere il tasto SOURCE per selezionare la modalità PC. ❑ Regolazione auto La regolazione automatica consente allo schermo del PC di adattarsi automaticamente al segnale video PC in ingresso. I valori delle opzioni Fine, Grossa e Posizione vengono regolati automaticamente. N Questa funzione non è disponibile in modalità DVI-HDMI. T Premere il tasto TOOLS per visualizzare il menu Strumenti. E’ inoltre possibile impostare Regolazione auto selezionando Strumenti → Regolazione auto. ❑ Schermo Lo scopo della regolazione della qualità dell’immagine è quello di eliminare o ridurre eventuali disturbi di visualizzazione. Se non si riesce a eliminare il disturbo cambiando sintonizzazione, regolare la frequenza nel modo migliore possibile (Grossa) ed eseguire nuovamente la sintonizzazione fine. Una volta ridotto il disturbo, regolare l’immagine in modo che sia perfettamente centrata sullo schermo. „ Grossa Regola la frequenza in caso di comparsa di disturbi verticali sullo schermo. „ Fine Regola lo schermo in modo da essere più nitido. „ Posizione PC Regola la posizione dello schermo del PC se non si adatta allo schermo del televisore. Premere il tasto ▲ o ▼ per regolare la posizione verticale. Premere il tasto ◄ o ► per regolare la posizione orizzontale. „ Reset immagine È possibile sostituire tutte le impostazioni dell’immagine ripristinando i valori di fabbrica. ❑ Reset immagine → Azzera modalità immagine / Cancella Ripristina tutte le impostazioni delle immagini ai valori predefiniti. N Seleziona una modalità dell’immagine da regolare. La funzione Reset viene eseguita per ogni modalità dell’immagine. Luminosità : 45 Nitidezza : 50 Regolazione auto ► Schermo Impostazioni avanzate Opzioni immagine Reset immagine Immagine Picture Impostazioni avanzate Opzioni immagine Reset immagine ► Immagine BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 18 10/20/2009 4:50:41 PMItaliano - 19 Schermo del PC ❑ Impostazione del software del PC (basato su Windows XP) Di seguito vengono illustrate le impostazioni di visualizzazione di Windows per un PC tipico. Le schermate visualizzate sul PC possono differire in base alla versione di Windows e alla scheda video installate. Nel caso le schermate risultassero differenti, le stesse informazioni di base per la configurazione sono applicabili in quasi tutti i casi (in caso contrario, contattare la casa costruttrice del computer oppure un rivenditore Samsung). 1. Fare clic su ‘Pannello di controllo’ nel menu Start di Windows. 2. Alla comparsa della finestra del pannello di controllo, cliccare su ‘Aspetto e temi’. Verrà visualizzata una finestra di dialogo. 3. Alla comparsa della finestra del pannello di controllo, cliccare su ‘Schermo’. Verrà visualizzata una finestra di dialogo. 4. Selezionare la scheda ‘Impostazioni’ nella finestra di dialogo. La corretta impostazione delle dimensioni (risoluzione) Ottimale : 1920 X 1080 pixel Se la finestra di dialogo delle impostazioni contiene un’opzione relativa alla frequenza verticale, il valore corretto è ‘60’ o ‘60 Hz’. In caso contrario, cliccare su ‘OK’ e uscire dalla finestra di dialogo. ❑ Modalità di visualizzazione La posizione e la dimensione dello schermo variano in base al tipo di schermo del PC e alla relativa risoluzione. Si consigliano le risoluzioni riportate in tabella. N In caso di uso di un cavo di connessione HDMI/DVI è necessario usare la presa HDMI IN 2 (DVI). N La modalità interlacciata non è supportata. N Questo dispositivo potrebbe non funzionare correttamente se si seleziona un formato video non standard. N Le modalità Separata e Composito sono supportate. Il formato SOG non è supportato. N Se il cavo VGA è di scarsa qualità o troppo lungo, in alta risoluzione (1920x1080) le immagini possono risultare disturbate. „ Ingresso D-Sub e HDMI/DVI Modalità Risoluzione Frequenza orizzontale (kHz) Frequenza verticale (Hz) Frequenza pixel clock (MHz)) Polarità sync (O / V) IBM 640 x 350 31.469 70.086 25.175 + / - 720 x 400 31.469 70.087 28.322 - / + MAC 640 x 480 35.000 66.667 30.240 - / - 832 x 624 49.726 74.551 57.284 - / - 1152 x 870 68.681 75.062 100.000 - / + VESA CVT 720 x 576 35.910 59.950 32.750 - / + 1152 x 864 53.783 59.959 81.750 - / + 1280 x 720 44.772 59.855 74.500 - / + 56.456 74.777 95.750 - / + 1280 x 960 75.231 74.857 130.000 - / + VESA DMT 640 x 480 31.469 59.940 25.175 - / - 37.861 72.809 31.500 - / - 37.500 75.000 31.500 - / - 800 x 600 37.879 60.317 40.000 + / + 800 x 600 48.077 72.188 50.000 + / + 800 x 600 46.875 75.000 49.500 + / + 1024 x 768 48.363 60.004 65.000 - / - 56.476 70.069 75.000 - / - 60.023 75.029 78.750 + / + 1152 x 864 67.500 75.000 108.000 + / + 1280 x 800 49.702 59.810 83.500 - / + 62.795 74.934 106.500 - / + 1280 x 960 60.000 60.000 108.000 + / + 1280 x 1024 63.981 60.020 108.000 + / + 79.976 75.025 135.000 + / + 1360 x 768 47.712 60.015 85.500 + / + 1440 x 900 55.935 59.887 106.500 - / + 70.635 74.984 136.750 - / + 1680 x 1050 65.290 59.954 146.250 - / + VESA DMT / DTV CEA 1920 x 1080p 67.500 60.000 148.500 + / + VESA GTF 1280 x 720 52.500 70.000 89.040 - / + 1280 x 1024 74.620 70.000 128.943 - / - BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 19 10/20/2009 4:50:41 PMItaliano - 20 Modifica dello standard audio ❑ Modalità È possibile selezionare il tipo di effetto audio da utilizzare durante la visione di una trasmissione. „ Standard / Musica / Film / Voce cristallina / Personalizza T Premere il tasto TOOLS per visualizzare il menu Strumenti. E’ inoltre possibile impostare la modalità audio selezionando Strumenti → Modalità Suono. ❑ Equalizzatore Le impostazioni audio possono essere regolate in base alle proprie preferenze. • Modalità : E’ possibile selezionare una modalità audio per soddisfare le proprie preferenze. • Bilanciamento : Controlla il bilanciamento degli altoparlanti sinistro e destro. • 100Hz / 300Hz / 1KHz / 3KHz / 10KHz (Regolazione larghezza di banda) : Regolare il livello delle diverse frequenze di larghezza di banda. • Reset : Ripristina le impostazione predefinite dell’equalizzatore. ❑ SRS TruSurround HD → Off / On SRS TruSurround HD è la tecnologia combinata di TruSurround e FOCUS, TruBass. SRS TruSurround HD permette di godere di un effetto audio virtuale 5.1 Surround attraverso i due altoparlanti del televisore. Questa funzione non solo fornisce suoni bassi e ricchi ma migliora anche i toni alti. T Premere il tasto TOOLS per visualizzare il menu Strumenti. E’ possibile impostare la funzione SRS TruSurround HD selezionando Strumenti → SRS TS HD. TruSurround HD, SRS e il simbolo sono marchi di SRS Labs, Inc. La tecnologiaTruSurround HD è utilizzata su licenza di SRS Labs, Inc. N Se durante la riproduzione di musica sul televisore l’audio è anomalo, regolare l’equalizzatore e SRS TruSurround HD (Off/On). ❑ Lingua audio (solo canali digitali) E’ possibile cambiare il valore predefinito della lingua audio. Visualizza le informazioni sulla lingua relative alla trasmissione in corso. N E’ possibile selezionare solo una delle lingue trasmesse. ❑ Formato audio → MPEG / Dolby Digital (solo canali digitali) Quando l’audio è generato sia dall’altoparlante principale sia dal ricevitore audio, potrebbe prodursi un effetto eco a causa della diversa velocità di decodifica dei due dispositivi. In questo caso, attivare la funzione Altoparlante TV. N E’ possibile selezionare solo una delle lingue trasmesse. Prodotto su licenza di Dolby Laboratories. Dolby e il simbolo della doppia D sono marchi registrati di Dolby Laboratories. ❑ Descrizione audio (solo canali digitali) Questa funzione audio ausiliaria fornisce una traccia audio aggiuntiva per aiutare le persone con problemi visivi. Questa funzione gestisce il flusso audio per la AD (Descrizione audio), quando viene inviato insieme all’audio Principale dall’emittente. Gli utenti possono attivare o disattivare la Descrizione audio e regolare il volume. O È possibile selezionare queste opzioni semplicemente premendo il tasto AD sul telecomando. „ Descrizione audio → Off / On Attiva e disattiva la funzione di descrizione audio. „ Volume Regola il volume della descrizione audio. N Volume è attivo quando la funzione Descrizione audio è impostata su On. Controllo dell’audio Modalità : Personalizza ► Equalizzatore SRS TruSurround HD : Off Lingua audio : ---- Formato audio : ---- Descrizione audio Volume auto : Off Seleziona altoparlante : Altoparlante TV Suono BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 20 10/20/2009 4:50:42 PMItaliano - 21 ❑ Volume auto → Off / On Le condizioni del segnale variano a seconda dell’emittente, ma non è pratico regolare il volume ogni volta che si cambia canale. Questa funzione consente di regolare automaticamente il volume del canale desiderato diminuendo il livello dell’uscita audio quando il segnale di modulazione è alto, oppure aumentando il livello dell’uscita audio quando il segnale di modulazione è basso. ❑ Seleziona altoparlante → Altoparlante est / Altoparlante TV Se si desidera ascoltare l’audio attraverso altoparlanti separati, annullare l’amplificatore interno. N I tasti – +, M MUTE non sono attivi quando Seleziona altoparlante è impostato su Altoparlante est. N Selezionando Altoparlante est nel menu Seleziona altoparlante, le impostazioni dell’audio saranno limitate. Altoparlanti interni del televisore DA Audio Out (Ottica, L / R Out) a sistema audio TV / Ext. (Est) / AV / Component / PC / HDMI TV / Ext. (Est) / AV / Component / PC / HDMI Altoparlante TV Uscita altoparlanti Uscita audio Altoparlanti esterni Mute Uscita audio Nessun segnale video Mute Mute ❑ Selezione audio Durante l’uso della funzione PIP, è possibile ascoltare l’audio dell’immagine secondaria (PIP). • Principale : Consente di ascoltare l’audio dell’immagine principale. • Secondario : Consente di ascoltare l’audio dell’immagine secondaria. T Premere il tasto TOOLS per visualizzare il menu Strumenti. E’ inoltre possibile impostare l’audio dell’immagine secondaria selezionando Strumenti → PIP → Selezione audio. N E’ possibile selezionare questa opzione solo quando la funzione PIP è On. ❑ Reset impostazioni audio „ Azzera tutto / Azz mod audio / Cancella : E’ possibile ripristinare le impostazioni audio ai valori preimpostati in fabbrica. Selezione della modalità audio Quando si imposta la modalità Dual I II, la modalità audio corrente viene visualizzata sullo schermo. Tipo di trasmissione Indicazioni a schermo NICAM Stereo Trasmissione regolare (Audio standard) Mono (uso normale) Regolare + NICAM Mono NICAM Mono (Normale) NICAM-Stereo NICAM Stereo Mono (Normale) NICAM Dual-I/II NICAM Dual-1 NICAM Dual-2 Mono (Normale) A2 Stereo Trasmissione regolare (Audio standard) Mono (uso normale) Trasmissione regolare Dual I Dual II Bilingue o DUAL-I/II Stereo Mono (Mono forzato) N Se il segnale stereo è debole e si verifica un cambio automatico, passare alla modalità Mono. N Questa funzione è attiva solo con un segnale audio stereo. Al contrario, non è attiva con un segnale audio mono. N Questa funzione è disponibile solo in modalità TV. T Premere il tasto TOOLS per visualizza.re il menu Strumenti. E’ inoltre possibile impostare la modalità audio selezionando Strumenti → Dual l ll. Seleziona altoparlante : Altoparlante TV Selezione audio : Principale Reset impostazioni audio ► Suono BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 21 10/20/2009 4:50:42 PMItaliano - 22 Descrizione delle funzioni Impostazione dell’ora ❑ Orologio L’impostazione dell’orologio è necessaria per utilizzare le varie funzioni timer del televisore. N L’ora corrente appare ogni qualvolta si preme il tasto INFO. N Se il cavo di alimentazione viene scollegato, è necessario impostare nuovamente l’orologio. „ Modalità orologio E’ possibile impostare manualmente o automaticamente l’orario corrente. • Auto : Imposta automaticamente l’orario corrente utilizzando l’orario inviato dalla trasmissione digitale. • Manuale : Imposta manualmente l’ora corrente. „ Imposta Ora È possibile impostare manualmente l’ora corrente. N Configurare questa voce una volta impostata la funzione Modalità orologio su Manuale. N E’ possibile impostare i valori Giorno, Mese, Anno, Ora, Minuto direttamente premendo i tasti numerici del telecomando. ❑ Timer stand-by → Off / 30 min / 60 min / 90 min / 120 min / 150 min / 180 min Il timer di stand-by disattiva automaticamente il televisore dopo il tempo impostato (30, 60, 90, 120, 150 e 180 minuti). N Quando il timer raggiunge lo 0, il televisore passa automaticamente in modalità Standby. N Per annullare la funzione Timer stand-by selezionare Off. T Premere il tasto TOOLS per visualizzare il menu Strumenti. E’ inoltre possibile impostare il timer stand-by selezionando Strumenti → Timer stand-by. ❑ Timer 1 / Timer 2 / Timer 3 E’ possibile impostare il televisore in modo da accendersi all’orario desiderato. • Orario TV on : Imposta il timer per l’accensione automatica del televisore. • Orario TV off : Imposta il timer per lo spegnimento automatico del televisore. • Volume : Seleziona il livello del volume. • Sorgente : Seleziona il dispositivo TV, USB. N Selezionando TV, è poi possibile impostare l’Antenna e il Canale. - Antenna : Seleziona Antenna o Cavo. - Canale : Seleziona il canale desiderato. N Selezionando USB è possibile impostare i Contenuti. - Contenuti : Seleziona i contenuti desiderati da USB. N Se sulla chiavetta USB non sono presenti file musicali, oppure la cartella contenente file musicali non è selezionata, l’opzione Timer non funziona correttamente. • Ripetizione : Selezionare Una volta, Ogni gg, Lun~Ven, Lun~Sab, Sab~Dom o Manuale. N Quando viene selezionato Manuale, premere il tasto ► per impostare il giorno della settimana. Premere ENTERE sul giorno desiderato per visualizzare un simbolo c. N L’intera cartella del dispositivo USB supporta i caratteri English 64. N E’ necessario prima impostare l’orologio. N È possibile impostare l’ora, i minuti e il canale anche premendo i tasti numerici del telecomando. N Auto Power Off Quando il televisore si accende attraverso il timer impostato su On, si spegne automaticamente se per tre ore non viene premuto alcun tasto di controllo. Questa funzione è disponibile solo se il timer è impostato su On e impedisce l’eventuale surriscaldamento del televisore dovuto a un periodo di accensione troppo lungo. Ora Orologio : -- : -- ► Timer stand-by : Off Timer 1 : Disattivato Timer 2 : Disattivato Timer 3 : Disattivato U Sposta E Conf. R Ritorno Impostazione Plug & Play Lingua menu : Italiano Ora ► Trasmissione Sicurezza Rete Generale BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 22 10/20/2009 4:50:43 PMItaliano - 23 Configurazione del menu Impostazione ❑ Lingua menu E’ possibile impostare la lingua dei menu. ❑ Trasmissione „ Sottotitoli È possibile attivare e disattivare i sottotitoli. Utilizzare questo menu per impostare la modalità sottotitoli. Normale al di sotto del menu rappresenta il sottotitolo di base mentre Non udenti è il sottotitolo per le persone con problemi uditivi. • Sottotitolo → Off / On : Attiva e disattiva i sottotitoli. • Modalità → Normale / Non udenti : Imposta la modalità dei sottotitoli. • Lingua sottotitoli : Imposta la lingua dei sottotitoli. N Se il programma che si sta guardando non supporta la funzione Non udenti, si attiva automaticamente l’opzione Normale, anche se è selezionata la modalità Non udenti. N L’inglese è la lingua predefinita nel caso in cui la trasmissione non supporti la lingua selezionata. O È possibile selezionare queste opzioni semplicemente premendo il tasto SUBT. sul telecomando. „ Testo digitale → Disattiva / Attiva Se il programma è trasmesso con testo digitale, questa funzione è attivata. N MHEG (Multimedia and Hypermedia Information Coding Experts Group) Standard internazionale per i sistemi di codifica dei dati usati nei multimedia e hypermedia. È un sistema più complesso rispetto al formato MPEG in quanto include collegamenti a dati ipermediali come immagini fisse, servizi di caratteri, animazione, grafica e file video, oltre ai dati multimediali. MHEG è una tecnologia interattiva con vari campi di applicazione, come sistemi VOD (Video-On-Demand), ITV (Interactive TV), EC (Electronic Commerce), teleformazione, teleconferenza, librerie digitali e giochi di rete. „ Lingua Teletext E’ possibile impostare la lingua del Teletext selezionando il tipo di lingua. N L’inglese è la lingua predefinita nel caso in cui la trasmissione non supporti la lingua selezionata. „ Preferenze • Lingua principale audio / Lingua secondaria audio / Lingua principale sottotitoli / Lingua secondaria sottotitoli / Lingua principale Teletext / Lingua secondaria Teletext Mediante questa funzione gli utenti possono selezionare una delle lingue disponibili. La lingua selezionata viene impostata automaticamente durante la selezione di un canale. Modificando l’impostazione della lingua, le opzioni Lingua sottotitoli, Lingua audio e Lingua Teletext del menu Lingua vengono automaticamente impostate sulla lingua selezionata. Le opzioni Lingua sottotitoli, Lingua audio, e Lingua Teletext del menu Lingua mostrano l’elenco delle lingue supportate dal canale corrente, dove l’opzione corrente appare evidenziata. Se si modifica una di queste opzioni, la nuova lingua viene applicata solo al canale corrente. La nuova impostazione non viene invece applicata alle opzioni Lingua principale sottotitoli, Lingua principale audio o Lingua principale Teletext del menu Preferenze. „ Common Interface • Installazione della scheda CI(CI+) 1. Acquistare il modulo CI(CI+) CAM presso il rivenditore locale più vicino o via telefono. 2. Inserire la scheda CI(CI+) CARD nel CAM nella direzione indicata dalla freccia. 3. Inserire il CAM con la scheda CI(CI+) CARD installata nello slot common interface. N Inserire completamente il CAM nella direzione indicata dalla freccia in modo che risulti parallelo allo slot. 4. Verificare la visione dell’immagine su un canale a segnale criptato. • Menu CI(CI+) Permette all’utente di accedere al menu del modulo CAM. Selezionare il Menu CI(CI+) in base alla scheda PC. • Info sull’applicazione Contiene informazioni sul modulo CAM inserito nello slot CI(CI+) e le visualizza. Le informazioni sull’applicazione sono relative alla scheda CI(CI+) CARD. È possibile installare il modulo CAM in qualsiasi momento, a televisore acceso o spento. N La ‘SCHEDA CI (CI+)' non è supportata in alcune nazioni, regioni e da alcune stazioni emittenti; controllare con il rivenditore autorizzato di zona. Continua... Impostazione Plug & Play Lingua menu : English ► Ora Trasmissione Sicurezza Rete Generale BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 23 10/20/2009 4:50:43 PMItaliano - 24 ❑ Sicurezza N Alcuni modelli richiedono la selezione del PIN impostato per la funzione Plug & Play. „ Blocco canali → Off / On Tramite questa funzione è possibile impedire agli utenti non autorizzati, ad esempio i bambini, di guardare programmi non adatti a loro, annullando il video e azzerando l’audio. N Prima della comparsa dell’immagine, compare la richiesta del PIN. Digitare il PIN a quattro cifre. N Il PIN predefinito di un nuovo apparecchio TV è ‘0-0-0-0’. E’ possibile modificare il PIN selezionando Cambia PIN nel menu. N E’ possibile bloccare alcuni canali nell’elenco dei canali. (vedere a pag. 14) N Blocco canali è disponibile solo in modalità TV. „ Blocco canale Questa funzione consente di immettere un codice PIN (Personal Identification Number) di identificazione personale a 4 cifre definito dall’utente per impedire agli utenti non autorizzati, come ad esempio i bambini, di vedere programmi non adatti a loro. N La voce Grado Blocco Canale può essere diversa in base al paese. N Prima della comparsa dell’immagine, compare la richiesta del PIN. Digitare il PIN a quattro cifre. N Il PIN predefinito di un nuovo apparecchio TV è ‘0-0-0-0’. E’ possibile modificare il PIN selezionando Cambia PIN nel menu. N Una volta impostata la classificazione dei programmi, verrà visualizzato il simbolo “\”. N Cons tutto / Bloc tutto : Premere per sbloccare o bloccare tutte le classificazioni dei canali TV. „ Cambia PIN E’ possibile modificare il numero ID necessario per configurare il televisore. N Prima della comparsa dell’immagine, compare la richiesta del PIN. Digitare il PIN a quattro cifre. (Il PIN predefinito è: ‘0-0-0-0’). N Qualora si sia dimenticato il codice PIN, premere i tasti del telecomando nella sequenza seguente per ripristinare il codice PIN predefinito ‘0-0-0-0’: POWER (Off), MMUTE, 8, 2, 4, POWER (On). ❑ Generale „ Modalità gioco → Off / On Durante la connessione a una console per videogiochi come PlayStation TM o Xbox TM , il gioco sarà più realistico selezionando il relativo menu. • Quando la Modalità gioco è On - La modalità Immagine viene automaticamente impostata su Standard e non può essere modificata. - La modalità Suono viene automaticamente impostata su Personalizza e non può essere modificata. Regolare l’audio mediante l’equalizzatore. - La funzione Reset nel menu Suono è attivata. La funzione Reset inizializza le impostazioni dell’Equalizzatore alle impostazione predefinite in fabbrica. N La Modalità gioco non è disponibile nella normale modalità TV o quando la Modalità gioco è Off. N Se la qualità dell’immagine è scadente quando al televisore è collegato un dispositivo esterno, verificare se la Modalità gioco è impostata su On. N Visualizzando il menu TV in Modalità gioco si potrebbe verificare un leggero sfarfallio. N Visualizzando il menu TV in Modalità gioco si potrebbe verificare un leggero sfarfallio. N Questa funzione supporta solo la funzione giochi. N La Modalità gioco non è disponibile in modalità PC. „ BD Wise → Off / On BD Wise è una funzione che consente di impostare automaticamente la configurazione ottimale per tutti i dispositivi Samsung connessi che supportano questa funzione. N Questa funzione è attiva solo quando un dispositivo esterno viene collegato al televisore mediante una porta HDMI. N Impostando BD Wise su On, la modalità Immagine viene automaticamente cambiata in base alle condizioni. „ Risp. energia → Spenta / Basso / Medio / Alta / Immagine off Questa funzione regola la luminosità del televisore in modo da ridurre il consumo di energia. Durante la visione notturna del televisore, impostare l’opzione della modalità Risp. energia su Alta in modo da ridurre l’affaticamento degli occhi oltre al consumo energetico. Selezionando Immagine off, lo schermo si spegne lasciando attivo solo l’audio. Premere un tasto qualsiasi per uscire dalla modalità Immagine off. N Nel menu Strumenti, la funzione Immagine off non è supportata. T Premere il tasto TOOLS per visualizzare il menu Strumenti. E’ inoltre possibile impostare l’opzione Risp. energia selezionando Strumenti → Risp. energia. BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 24 10/20/2009 4:50:43 PMItaliano - 25 „ Trasparenza menu E’ possibile impostare il livello di trasparenza del menu a video. • Luminoso : imposta il menu a video su normale. • Scuro : rende il menu a video opaco. „ Melodia → Off / Basso / Medio / Alta La melodia di accensione/spegnimento del televisore può essere regolata. N La Melodia non viene riprodotta - Se il televisore non emette alcun suono significa che è stato premuto il tasto M MUTE. - Se il televisore non emette alcun suono significa che è stato premuto il tasto – (Volume). - Se il televisore è stato spento mediante la funzione Timer stand-by. „ Effetto luce (solo per i modelli PS58B680/PS63B680) Consente di attivare/disattivare il LED blu sul pannello frontale del televisore in base alla situazione. Utilizzarlo per risparmiare energia oppure se il LED infastidisce gli occhi. • Off : Il LED blu è sempre spento. • Mod StdBy ON : Il LED blu si accende in standby e si spegne all’accensione del televisore. • Mod visione ON : Il LED blu si accende e si spegne in corrispondenza dell’accensione e dello spegnimento del televisore. • Sempre : Il LED blu è sempre acceso. N Impostare Effetto luce su Off per ridurre il consumo energetico. Visione Picture-in-Picture (PIP) Questa funzione consente di visualizzare un’immagine secondaria all’interno dell’immagine principale del programma o della sorgente video impostata. In questo modo, è possibile visualizzare l’immagine di un programma o di una sorgente video esterna mentre si guarda l’immagine principale. N L’immagine nella finestra PIP potrebbe apparire leggermente innaturale quando si usa la schermata principale per visualizzare un videogame o il karaoke. T Premere il tasto TOOLS per visualizzare il menu Strumenti. E’ possibile regolare le impostazioni relative alla funzione PIP selezionando Strumenti → PIP. ❑ PIP → Off / On La funzione PIP può essere attivata e disattivata.. Immagine principale Immagine secondaria Component HDMI 1, HDMI2/DVI, HDMI 3, HDMI 4 PC TV „ Dimensione → / / / Consente di selezionare il formato dell’immagine secondaria. N Se l’immagine principale è in modalità HDMI, l’opzione Dimensione è disponibile. „ Posizione → / / / Utilizzata per selezionare la posizione dell’immagine secondaria. N In modalità Double ( , ), la voce Posizione non può essere selezionata. „ Canale E’ possibile selezionare un canale per l’immagine secondaria. PIP PIP : Off ► Dimensione : Posizione : Canale : ATV 1 E Conf. R Ritorno Generale Modalità gioco : Off BD Wise : Off Risp. energia : Off Trasparenza menu : Luminoso Melodia : Medio PIP ► U Sposta E Conf. R Ritorno BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 25 10/20/2009 4:50:44 PMItaliano - 26 Programmi supportati ❑ Legal Notice E’ possibile visualizzare le note legali e la clausola di esclusione di responsabilità riguardanti i contenuti e servizi di terze parti. „ General Disclaimer E’ un servizio di avvertenze legali riguardante l’uso di Internet@TV. N Il General Disclaimer può essere diverso da paese a paese. N E’ possibile passare alla pagina precedente o successiva premendo il tasto ◄ o ►. ❑ Guida Prodotto Guida Prodotto fornisce le informazioni riguardanti le principali funzioni del televisore. N Per maggiori informazioni selezionare la voce desiderata. ❑ Auto diagnosi „ Test immagine In caso di problemi di visualizzazione dell’immagine, eseguire il test pertinente. Verificare il color pattern sullo schermo per vedere se il problema persiste. N Il messaggio Il problema riscontrato con questa foto persiste? viene visualizzato sullo schermo.Se il test pattern non compare oppure presenta disturbi, selezionare Sì. Se il test pattern è visualizzato correttamente, selezionare No. • Sì : Potrebbe essersi verificato un problema con il televisore. Contattare il Call Center Samsung per richiedere assistenza. • No : Potrebbe essersi verificato un problema con i dispositivi esterni. Controllare lo stato dei collegamenti. Se il problema persiste, consultare il manuale dell’utente dei dispositivi esterni. „ Test audio In caso di problemi di audio, eseguire il test pertinente. Controllare l’audio riproducendo un test melodico attraverso le casse del televisore. N Il messaggio Il problema riscontrato con il test audio persiste? viene visualizzato sullo schermo. Se durante l’esecuzione del test audio il suono proviene da un solo altoparlante, selezionare Sì. Se è possibile ascoltare il suono dagli altoparlanti, selezionare No. • Sì : Potrebbe essersi verificato un problema con il televisore. Contattare il Call Center Samsung per richiedere assistenza. • No : Potrebbe essersi verificato un problema con i dispositivi esterni. Controllare lo stato dei collegamenti. Se il problema persiste, consultare il manuale dell’utente dei dispositivi esterni. N Se non c’è ritorno audio dagli altoparlanti del televisore, prima di eseguire il test verificare che Selezione altoparlante sia impostato su Altoparlante TV nel menu Suono. N E’ possibile ascoltare la melodia durante il test anche se Selezione altoparlante è impostato su Altoparlante est oppure l’audio è stato disattivato mediante la pressione del tasto M MUTE. „ Informazioni segnale (solo canali digitali) E’ possibile migliorare la ricezione dei canali digitali disponibili regolando l’antenn N Se il misuratore della potenza del segnale indica che il segnale è debole, regolare fisicamente l’antenna per aumentare il segnale. Continuare a regolare l’antenna fino a trovare la posizione migliore per ricevere il segnale in modo ottimale. Supporto / Ingressi BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 26 10/20/2009 4:50:44 PMItaliano - 27 Elenco sorgenti / Modifica Nome ❑ Elenco sorgenti Questa funzione viene usata per selezionare il televisore o un’altra sorgente di ingresso come un lettore DVD o un decoder digitale / ricevitore satellitare (Set-Top Box) collegato al televisore. Utilizzare la funzione per selezionare la sorgente di ingresso desiderata. „ TV, Ext.1, Ext.2, AV, Component, PC, HDMI1, HDMI2/DVI, HDMI3, HDMI4, USB. N E’ possibile scegliere solo i dispositivi esterni collegati al televisore. Nell’Elenco sorgenti, gli ingressi collegati verranno evidenziati e ordinati in cima all’elenco. Gli ingressi non collegati verranno ordinati in fondo all’elenco. N Uso dei tasti colorati del telecomando per l’elenco sorgenti - Rosso (Aggiorna) : Aggiorna il collegamento ai dispositivi esterni. - T TOOLS (Strumenti) : Visualizza i menu Modifica Nome e Informazioni. O Premere il tasto SOURCE sul telecomando per visualizzare una sorgente del segnale esterna. ❑ Modifica Nome Assegnare un nome al dispositivo collegato ai jack di ingresso per semplificare la selezione della sorgente di ingresso. „ VCR / DVD / Cable STB / Satellite STB / PVR STB / AV Receiver / Game / Camcorder / PC / DVI / DVI PC / TV / IPTV / Blu-ray / HD DVD / DMA N Quando un PC con una risoluzione di 1920 x 1080 @ 60Hz è collegato alla porta HDMI IN 2 (DVI), è necessario impostare la modalità HDMI2/DVI su PC in Modifica Nome della modalità Ingressi. ❑ Aggiornamento software Gli aggiornamenti del prodotto, contenenti le nuove funzionalità della televisione digitale, vengono trasmessi periodicamente tramite il normale segnale televisivo. Il prodotto rileva automaticamente questi segnali e visualizza la finestra di aggiornamento del software. E’ possibile avviare da questa finestra l’installazione degli aggiornamenti. „ Tramite USB Inserire un’unità USB contenente l’aggiornamento del firmware nel televisore. Fare attenzione a non disattivare l’alimentazione o rimuovere l’unità USB mentre l’aggiornamento è in corso. Al termine dell’aggiornamento del firmware, il televisore si spegnerà e riaccenderà automaticamente. Verificare la versione del firmware al termine dell’aggiornamento. Al termine dell’aggiornamento del software, le impostazioni video e audio modificate torneranno alle impostazioni predefinite di fabbrica. „ Tramite canale Aggiorna il software mediante il segnale trasmesso. N Se la funzione viene selezionata durante la trasmissione software, questa funzione ricerca il software disponibile e ne scarica gli aggiornamenti. N Il tempo necessario per scaricare il software è determinato dallo stato del segnale. „ Aggiornamento mod Standby Per continuare l’aggiornamento software anche quando l’alimentazione principale è attiva, selezionare On premendo il tasto ▲ o ▼. 45 minuti dopo l’attivazione della modalità Standby, viene effettuato un aggiornamento manuale. Poiché l’alimentazione dell’unità si attiva internamente, lo schermo potrà attivarsi per breve tempo. Questo fenomeno può continuare per più di un’ora, fino al termine dell’aggiornamento software. „ Software alternativo Sostituire il software attuale con uno alternativo. N Se il software è stato cambiato, viene visualizzata la versione corrente. N E’ possibile cambiare la versione del software corrente Selezionando Software alternativo. ❑ Guida alla connessione HD Viene visualizzata una breve introduzione su come ottenere le migliori prestazioni dal vostro nuovo televisore ad alta risoluzione. Sono disponibili vari metodi di connessione per i dispositivi HD. N E’ possibile passare alla pagina precedente o successiva premendo il tasto ◄ o ►. ❑ Contattare Samsung E’ possibile ottenere le informazioni riguardanti il prodotto, il Call Center Samsung e il sito web. Pannello laterale del televisore Unità USB Elenco sorgenti Modifica Nome Ingressi BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 27 10/20/2009 4:50:44 PMItaliano - 28 Rete Connessione di rete Connessione di rete è per DLNA, Contents Library-Internet download, Internet@TV e Centro rete dom. ❑ Connessione di rete - Cavo „ Connessione LAN via cavo per un ambiente DHCP Di seguito è riportata la procedura per impostare una connessione di rete usando il protocollo DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol). Poiché alla selezione di DHCP vengono automaticamente impostati un indirizzo IP, una maschera di sottorete, un gateway e un DNS, non è necessario inserirli manualmente. 1. Collegare la porta LAN sul retro del televisore al modem esterno mediante un cavo LAN. 2. Collegare la porta LAN a parete e il modem esterno mediante un cavo Modem. N I terminali (la posizione della porta e il tipo) del dispositivo esterno variano in base alla marca del dispositivo. N Se si è verificato un errore nell’allocazione dell’indirizzo IP da parte del server DHCP, spegnere il modem e riaccenderlo dopo circa 10 secondi. N Per i collegamenti tra il modem esterno e il Router, vedere il manuale dell’utente del prodotto utilizzato. N E’ possibile collegare direttamente il televisore alla LAN senza collegarlo tramite un Router. N Non è possibile usare un modem ADSL con connessione manuale poiché non supporta il protocollo DHCP. E’ necessario pertanto utilizzare un modem ADSL con connessione automatica. Pannello posteriore del televisore Porta Modem a parete 2 Cavo modem Modem esterno (ADSL/VDSL/TV via cavo) 1 Cavo LAN E’ possibile collegare la porta LAN al televisore direttamente in base allo stato della rete Pannello posteriore del televisore Cavo LAN Porta Modem a parete E’ possibile collegare il televisore a una LAN mediante un Router. Pannello posteriore del televisore Porta Modem a parete Modem esterno (ADSL/VDSL/TV via cavo) Router IP LAN Cable Cavo modem Cavo LA BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 28 10/20/2009 4:50:47 PMItaliano - 29 „ Connessione via cavo per un ambiente IP statico Di seguito è riportata la procedura per impostare una connessione di rete usando un indirizzo IP statico. L’indirizzo IP, la maschera di sottorete, il gateway e il DNS devono essere inseriti manualmente così come forniti dall’ISP (Internet Service Provider). 1. Collegare la porta LAN sul retro del televisore alla porta LAN a parete mediante un cavo LAN. N I terminali (la posizione della porta e il tipo) del dispositivo esterno variano in base alla marca del dispositivo. N In caso di utilizzo di un indirizzo IP statico, l’ISP potrà fornire l’indirizzo IP, la maschera di sottorete, il gateway e il DNS. E’ necessario inserire questi valori per completare le impostazioni della rete. Qualora non si conoscano tali valori, richiederli all’amministratore di rete. N Per maggiori informazioni sulla configurazione e sulla connessione a un router, vedere il manuale di riferimento del prodotto corrispondente. N E’ possibile collegare direttamente il televisore alla LAN senza collegarlo tramite un Router. N Qualora si utilizzi un Router IP che supporta il protocollo DHCP, è possibile impostare il dispositivo sia come DHCP sia come IP statico. N Per conoscere le procedure necessarie per impostare un indirizzo di IP statico, rivolgersi al proprio Internet Service Provider. ❑ Connessione di rete - Wireless E’ possibile collegarsi alla rete in modalità senza fili utilizzando un Router IP wireless 1. Collegare l’adattatore ‘Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter’ alla porta USB1 (HDD) o USB2 del televisore. N Per utilizzare una rete wireless è necessario utilizzare l’adattatore ‘Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter’. N La scheda Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter è venduta separatamente. La scheda LAN wireless WIS09ABGN è in vendita presso rivenditori autorizzati, siti di Ecommerce e Samsungparts.com. N Per utilizzare una rete wireless, il televisore deve essere collegato a un Router IP wireless. N Se il Router IP wireless supporta il protocollo DHCP, il televisore può utilizzare sia un indirizzo DHCP sia un indirizzo IP statico per collegarsi alla rete in modalità wireless. N La Samsung Wireless LAN adapter supporta i protocolli IEEE 802.11A, IEEE 802.11B, IEEE 802.11G, IEEE 802.11N. Riproducendo un video DLNA su una connessione IEEE 802.11B/G, il video potrebbe non essere riprodotto in modo fluido. N Se il Router IP wireless permette di attivare/disattivare la funzione di connessione Ping, attivarla. N Selezionare un canale per il Router IP wireless che non sia attualmente utilizzato. Se il canale impostato per il Router IP wireless è attualmente utilizzato da un altro dispositivo vicino, ciò comporterà delle interferenze e le comunicazioni potrebbero cadere. Continua... Pannello posteriore del televisorec 1 Cavo LAN Porta Modem a parete Pannello posteriore del televisore Cavo LAN Router IP Cavo LAN Porta Modem a parete E’ possibile collegare il televisore a una LAN mediante un Router. Pannello laterale del televisore Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter Cavo LAN Router IP wireless Porta Modem a parete BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 29 10/20/2009 4:50:50 PMItaliano - 30 N Sistema di sicurezza diversi da quelli sotto elencati non sono compatibili con il televisore. - Durante l’applicazione della chiave di sicurezza per l’AP (Router IP wireless), sono supportate solo le seguenti. 1) Modalità di autenticazione : OPEN, SHARED, WPAPSK, WPA2PSK 2) Tipo crittografia : WEP, TKIP, AES - Durante l’applicazione della chiave di sicurezza per l’AP (Router IP wireless) in modalità Ad-hoc, sono supportate solo le seguenti funzioni. 1) Modalità di autenticazione : SHARED, WPANONE 2) Tipo crittografia : WEP, TKIP, AES N Se il proprio AP supporta WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup), è possibile collegarsi alla rete mediante PBC (Push Button Configuration) o un PIN (Personal Identification Number). WPS configurerà automaticamente l’SSID e la chiave WPA in entrambe le modalità. N Se il dispositivo non è certificato, potrebbe non connettersi al televisore mediante la scheda ‘Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter’. Impostazione rete ❑ Tipo di rete Selezionare Cavo o Wireless come metodo di collegamento alla rete. N Il menu viene attivato solo se l’adattatore ‘Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter’ è collegato. • Cavo : Collegamento alla rete mediante un cavo. • Wireless : Collegamento alla rete in modalità wireless. ❑ Impostazione rete „ Impostazione rete via cavo (quando Tipo di rete è impostato su Cavo) N Verificare che il cavo LAN sia collegato. • Impostazione IP → Auto / Manuale • Test di rete : Mediante questa funzione è possibile testare o confermare lo stato del collegamento di rete dopo la sua impostazione. N Cosa fare se non si è in grado di collegarsi alla rete in modalità cablata Se il proprio Internet Service Provider ha registrato il MAC address del dispositivo utilizzato per il collegamento a Internet la prima volta ed esegue l’autenticazione a ogni accesso a Internet, il televisore potrebbe non essere in grado collegarsi a Internet poiché il MAC address è diverso da quello utilizzato dal dispositivo (PC). In questo caso, chiedere all’Internet Service Provider le procedure per collegare dispositivi diversi al PC (ad esempio il televisore) a Internet. Se l’Internet Service Provider richiede un ID o una password per il collegamento a Internet (rete), il televisore potrebbe non essere in grado di collegarsi. In questo caso, digitare la propria ID o password al collegamento a Internet usando un Router IP. La connessione internet potrebbe cadere a causa di un problema di firewall. In questo caso, contattare il proprio Internet Service Provider. Se ancora non è possibile collegarsi a Internet anche dopo aver seguito le procedure descritte dall’Internet Service Provider, contattare Samsung Electronics. „ Impostazione rete via cavo - Auto Collegando un cavo LAN a una rete che supporta il protocollo DHCP, le impostazioni IP (Internet Protocol) vengono automaticamente configurate. Verificare che il cavo LAN sia collegato. 1. Impostare Tipo di rete su Cavo. 2. Selezionare Impostazione rete via cavo. 3. Impostare Impostazione IP su Auto. N Il protocollo Internet viene impostato automaticamente. 4. Selezionare Test di rete per verificare la connettività della rete. „ Impostazione rete via cavo - Manuale Per collegare il televisore alla LAN mediante un indirizzo IP statico, è necessario impostare l’indirizzo IP. Verificare che il cavo LAN sia collegato. N Verificare che il cavo LAN sia collegato. (vedere pag. 28) 1. Impostare Tipo di rete su Cavo. 2. Selezionare Rete via cavo. 3. Impostare Impostazione IP su Manuale. 4. Impostare Indirizzo IP, Maschera sottorete, Gateway e Server DNS. N Premere i tasti numerici sul telecomando quando si desidera impostare manualmente la rete. 5. Selezionare Test di rete per verificare la connettività della rete. Impostazione Trasmissione Sicurezza Rete ► Generale Continua... BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 30 10/20/2009 4:50:50 PMItaliano - 31 „ Impostazione rete (quando Tipo di rete è impostato su Wireless) N Impostazione rete via cavo (quando Tipo di rete è impostato su Cavo). (vedere pag. 29) - Impostazione IP → Auto / Manuale. - Test di rete : Mediante questa funzione è possibile testare o confermare lo stato del collegamento di rete dopo la sua impostazione. N In caso sia impossibile collegarsi a un AP Il televisore non riesce a individuare un AP configurato come SSID privato. In questo caso, cambiare le impostazioni dell’AP e riprovare. Se il proprio Internet Service Provider ha registrato il MAC address del dispositivo utilizzato per il collegamento a Internet la prima volta ed esegue l’autenticazione a ogni accesso a Internet, il TV potrebbe non essere in grado collegarsi a Internet poiché il MAC address è diverso da quello utilizzato dal dispositivo (PC). In questo caso, chiedere all’Internet Service Provider le procedure per collegare dispositivi diversi da un PC (ad esempio il televisore) a Internet. Se ancora non è possibile collegarsi a Internet anche dopo aver seguito le procedure descritte dall’Internet Service Provider, contattare Samsung Electronics al numero 1–800–SAMSUNG. • Seleziona una rete - Access Point : Con questa funzione è possibile selezionare il Router IP da utilizzare in caso di uso di una rete wireless. N Se l’Access Point wireless non è riportato nell’elenco dei dispositivi disponibili, premere il tasto Rosso. N Una volta stabilita la connessione, il sistema tornerà automaticamente alla schermata. N Una volta avuto accesso a un Access Point mediante autenticazione di sicurezza : Comparirà la richiesta della Chiave di sicurezza. Digitare la chiave di sicurezza e premere il tasto Blu sul telecomando. N Se il tipo di crittografia è WEP, 0~9, A~F sarà disponibile durante la digitazione della chiave di sicurezza. Tasto Operazioni ▲/▼/◄/► Sposta la selezione in direzione alto / basso / sinistra / destra. ENTER Inserisce il carattere selezionato. Tasto rosso Passa dal carattere maiuscolo al minuscolo e viceversa. Tasto verde E’ possibile cancellare un carattere già inserito. Tasto blu Premere questo tasto per terminare l’inserimento della chiave di sicurezza. ❑ Collegamento mediante WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) „ Se la chiave di sicurezza è già impostata : Nell’elenco degli access point disponibili selezionare WPS. N E’ possibile selezionare PBC, PIN, Chiave di sicurezza. • Collegamento mediante PBC : Selezionare un PBC (Push Button Configuration). Premere il tasto PBC sull’AP (access point) entro 2 minuti e attendere la connessione. • Collegamento mediante PIN : Selezionare un PIN (Personal Identification Number). N Viene visualizzato il messaggio del Codice PIN. Inserire il PIN per il dispositivo AP entro 2 minuti. Selezionare OK e attendere la connessione. N Riprovare nuovamente se la connessione non ha successo. N Se non è possibile stabilire la connessione, reimpostare l’access point. Vedere le istruzioni relative all’access point. • Collegamento mediante Chiave di sicurezza : Selezionando Chiave di sicurezza, viene visualizzata la finestra per la digitazione della chiave. Digitare la chiave di sicurezza e premere Blu. N Riprovare nuovamente se la connessione non ha successo. Imp rete wireless Chiave sicur n Sposta Numero EConf. R Ritorno _ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 0~9 Numero Minusc Cancella Eseg * * Imp rete wireless Seleziona una rete n Sposta EConf. R Ritorno Ricerca Ad-hoc AP_1 AP_2 AP_3 AP_4 PBC PIN Chiave sicur 3/9 Premere il tasto PBC sull’AP. Nome punto di accesso : AP_3 Cancella Premere OK dopo aver immesso il pin del televisore Nome punto di accesso : AP_3 Numero PIN : 123 45678 OK Cancella Imp rete wireless Chiave sicur n Sposta Numero EConf. R Ritorno _ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 0~9 Numero Minusc Cancella Eseg BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 31 10/20/2009 4:50:52 PMItaliano - 32 „ Se la chiave di sicurezza non è già impostata : Quando l’impostazione di sicurezza dell’AP che supporta la WPS è NONE, è possibile selezionare PBC, PIN, Nessuna sicurezza. Nessuna sicurezza permette la connessione diretta all’AP senza l’uso della funzione WPC. N Il processo per PBC, PIN è uguale a quello descritto sopra. Fare riferimento ad esso se la chiave di sicurezza è già impostata. N Riprovare nuovamente se la connessione non ha successo. „ Ad-hoc : E’ possibile collegarsi a un dispositivo mobile senza un Access Point utilizzando un dongle USB wireless mediante rete peer-to-peer. • Come collegarsi a un nuovo network Ad-hoc 1. Selezionare Seleziona una rete per visualizzare un elenco di dispositivi. 2. All’interno dell’elenco dei dispositivi, premere il tasto Blu sul telecomando o selezionare Ad-hoc. N Il messaggio Il sistema di rete esistente potrebbe avere funzioni limitate. Cambiare la connessione di rete? viene visualizzato a schermo. 3. Digitare il Nome rete (SSID) generato e la Chiave di sicurezza nel dispositivo che si intende collegare.. • Come collegarsi a un dispositivo Ad-hoc esistente 1. Selezionare Seleziona una rete per visualizzare un elenco di dispositivi. 2. Selezionare il dispositivo desiderato nell’Elenco dei dispositivi. 3. Se la chiave di sicurezza è stata applicata, digitarla nuovamente. N Se il network non funziona regolarmente, controllare nuovamente il Nome rete (SSID) e la Chiave di sicurezza. Se la Chiave di sicurezza è errata, potrebbe essere la ragione del malfunzionamento. „ Imp rete wireless - Auto Per collegare un AP, questo deve supportare la modalità DHCP. Solo i dispositivi che supportano la modalità Ad-hoc possono essere collegati senza DHCP. 1. Impostare Tipo di rete su Wireless. 2. Selezionare Imp rete wireless. 3. Impostare Impostazione IP su Auto. N Il protocollo Internet viene impostato automaticamente. 4. Selezionare una rete mediante l’opzione Seleziona una rete. 5. Selezionare Test di rete per verificare la connettività della rete. „ Imp rete wireless - Manuale Per collegare la rete wireless mediante un indirizzo IP statico, è necessario impostare l'indirizzo IP. (Vedere pag. 29) N Per maggiori informazioni sull'indirizzo IP statico, vedere il manuale dell'utente del Router IP wireless. 1. Impostare Tipo di rete su Wireless. 2. Selezionare Imp rete wireless. 3. Impostare Impostazione IP su Manuale. 4. Impostare Indirizzo IP, Maschera sottorete, Gateway e Server DNS. N Premere i tasti numerici sul telecomando quando si desidera impostare manualmente la rete. 5. Selezionare una rete tramite Seleziona punto d’accesso. 6. Selezionare Test di rete per verificare la connettività della rete. * * Imp rete wireless Seleziona una rete n Sposta EConf. R Ritorno Ricerca Ad-hoc AP_1 AP_2 AP_3 AP_4 PBC PIN Chiave sicur 3/9 Il sistema di rete esistente potrebbe avere funzioni limitate. Cambiare la connessione di rete? Sì No BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 32 10/20/2009 4:50:53 PMItaliano - 33 Collegamento di un dispositivo USB 1. Per accendere il televisore premere il tasto POWER. 2. Collegare un dispositivo USB contenente foto e file musicali alla porta USB posta sul lato del televisore. N Il jack USB 1 (HDD) è inoltre utilizzato come jack HDD. HDD (Hard Disk Drive) è un dispositivo che memorizza digitalmente dati codificati. N Media Play supporta solo il dispositivo USB MSC (Mass Storage Class). MSC è un dispositivo di memorizzazione di massa Bulk-Only Transport. Esempi di MSC sono le unità Thumb, i Flash Card Reader e le unità HDD USB (le unità HUB USB non sono supportate.) N MTP (Media Transfer Protocol) non è supportato. N Il file system supporta solo FAT16/32 (il file system NTFS non è supportato). N Collegare un’unità HDD USB alla porta dedicata, USB1 (HDD). Tuttavia, se il dispositivo collegato è molto esigente in termini di alimentazione, la porta USB1 (HDD) potrebbe non essere in grado di supportare il dispositivo.) N Alcuni dispositivi audio e videocamere digitali USB possono non essere compatibili con questo televisore. N Collegare direttamente alla porta USB del televisore. Se si utilizza un cavo separato, possono verificarsi problemi di compatibilità USB. N Prima di collegare il dispositivo al televisore, eseguire il backup dei file per prevenire danni o la perdita di dati. SAMSUNG non è responsabile per eventuali danni ai file dati o perdite di dati. N Non scollegare il dispositivo USB durante il caricamento. N MSC supporta file MP3 e JPEG, mentre un dispositivo PTP supporta solo file JPEG. N Il formato JPEG sequenziale è supportato. N Maggiore è la risoluzione dell’immagine, più lungo è il tempo necessario per visualizzarla sullo schermo. N La risoluzione massima supportata in JPEG è di 15360X8640 pixel. N In caso di file non supportati o danneggiati, comparirà il messaggio Formato file non supportato. N Se il numero di file eccede i 4000 (o il numero di file musicali eccede i 3000), tutti i file eccedenti tale limite non verranno visualizzati nell’Elenco foto (o nell’Elenco musica).MP3 files with DRM that have been downloaded from a non-free site cannot be played. N I file MP3 con DRM scaricati da un sito a pagamento non possono essere riprodotti. N DRM (Digital Rights Management) impedisce l’uso illegale di contenuti digitali protetti da copyright. N Passare da una foto all’altra potrebbe richiedere alcuni secondi. Ora, sullo schermo comparirà l’icona che indica il caricamento in corso. ❑ Uso dei tasti del Telecomando nel menu Media Play Tasto Operazioni ▲/▼/◄/► Sposta il cursore e seleziona una voce. ENTERE Seleziona la voce attualmente evidenziata. Riproduce o interrompe temporaneamente i file durante la proiezione di diapositive o la riproduzione di un file musicale. Riproduce o arresta temporaneamente la proiezione di diapositive o la riproduzione di un brano musicale. RETURN Torna al menu precedente. TOOLS Esegue varie funzioni nei menu Foto e Musica. Interrompe la proiezione di diapositive o la riproduzione di un brano musicale. Passa al gruppo precedente/successivo. INFO Mostra le informazioni relative al file. MEDIA.P Attiva/Disattiva la modalità Media Play. DivX® Certified to play DivX® video, including premium content. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX,Inc. This is an official DivX Certified device that plays DivX video. Visit www.divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX video. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified® device must be registered in order to play DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) content. To generate the registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in the device setup menu. Go to vod.divx.com with this code to complete the registration process and learn more about DivX VOD. Media Play Pannello laterale del televisore Unità USB BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 33 10/20/2009 4:50:53 PMItaliano - 34 Uso della funzione Media Play Questa funzione consente di visualizzare e riprodurre file fotografici e musicali memorizzati su un dispositivo USB Mass Storage Class (MSC). Utilizzando file multimediali senza licenza, il prodotto potrebbe non funzionare correttamente. ❑ Accesso al menu Media Play 1. Premere il tasto MENU. Premere ▲ o ▼ per selezionare Applicazione, quindi premere ENTERE. 2. Premere ▲ o ▼ per selezionare Media Play (USB & DLNA), quindi premere ENTERE. O Premere il tasto MEDIA.P sul telecomando per visualizzare il menu Media Play. O Premere SOURCE ripetutamente sul telecomando per selezionare USB o DLNA, quindi premere ENTERE. 3. Premere il tasto rosso, quindi il tasto ▲ o ▼ per selezionare il dispositivo USB corrispondente (ad es. se connesso tramite un hub). Premere ENTERE. N Questa funzione può risultare diversa in base al dispositivo di memoria collegato al televisore. N Nella parte inferiore sinistra dello schermo comparirà il nome del dispositivo USB selezionato. 4. Premere ◄ o ► er selezionare una icona (Photo, Music, Movie, Setup), quindi premere ENTERE. N Per uscire dalla modalità Media Play premere il tasto MEDIA.P sul telecomando. N In questa modalità, è possibile visualizzare clip video contenute in un gioco, tuttavia non è possibile riprodurre il gioco stesso. ❑ Rimozione sicura di un dispositivo di memoria USB E’ possibile rimuovere il dispositivo dal televisore in modo sicuro. 1. Premere il tasto TOOLS nella schermata di elenco dei file Media Play, o durante la proiezione di diapositive o, la riproduzione di un brano , musicale o di un filmato. 2. Premere ▲ o ▼per selezionare Rimozione sicura, quindi premere ENTERE. 3. Rimuovere il dispositivo USB dal televisore. ❑ Schermo 1. Ordinamento corrente : Questo campo mostra lo standard attuale per l’ordinamento dei file. 2. Visualizza gruppi : Il gruppo di ordinamento che comprende le foto selezionate viene evidenziato. 3. File attualmente selezionato : Viene evidenziato il file attualmente selezionato. 4. Informazioni sulla selezione degli elementi : Mostra il numero di fotografie selezionate premendo il tasto giallo. 5. Dispositivo attuale : Mostra il nome del dispositivo attualmente selezionato. N Tasto Rosso (Dispositivo) : Seleziona un dispositivo connesso. 6. Voci della guida • Tasto Verde (Impostazioni pref) : Modifica le impostazioni preferite per il file selezionato. Premere ripetutamente questo tasto fino a visualizzare il valore desiderato. • Tasto Giallo (Selezione) : Seleziona il file dall’elenco. I file selezionati vengono evidenziati con un simbolo c. Premere nuovamente il tasto giallo per deselezionare il file. • Tasto TOOLS (Strumenti) : Visualizza i menu delle opzioni. (Il menu Strumenti varia in base allo stato corrente.) • R Tasto RETURN (Ritorno) : Ritorna al menu precedente. Cartella Preferenze Visual base Timeline Colore IMG_0335.JPG 4/6 IMG_0349. JPG ▶ ▶ Folder 2 1 Folder 1 1 Slide Show Riproduci gruppo corrente Informazioni Rimozione sicura ../ Nome cart/ Photo USB „ Dispositivo Selezione T Strumenti R Cartella superiore Media Play Photo Music Setup PHOTO USB : USB 851.98MB/995.00MB Libero Movie USB „ Dispositivo RRitorno Preferenze Visual base Orario Colore Cartella Mar.01.2009 IMG_0343 .JPG ▶ ▶ IMG_03496 .JPG IMG_03496 .JPG Mar Apr Jun Nov IMG_0335.JPG 1/67 ▶ ▶ 2009 ◀ IMG_03496 .JPG 3 1 2 1File selez 4 5 6 Photo USB „ Dispositivo Impostazioni pref SelezioneT T Strumenti R Ritorno c BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 34 10/20/2009 4:50:58 PMItaliano - 35 Ordinamento Photo / Music / Movie List „ Visual base Visualizza le cartelle presenti sul dispositivo di memorizzazione USB. Se si seleziona una cartella e si preme il tasto ENTERE, vengono visualizzati solo i file (Photo / Music / Movie) contenuti nella cartella selezionata. N Se i file sono ordinati secondo la Visual base, non sarà possibile impostare i file preferiti. „ Cartella Ordina le foto per cartella. Se nel dispositivo USB sono presenti più cartelle, i file fotografici vengono visualizzati in ordine in ogni cartella.I file nella cartella principale vengono mostrati per primi, mentre gli altri vengono ordinati alfabeticamente per nome. „ Preferenze → ★ ★ ★ , ★ ★ ★ , ★ ★ ★ , ★ ★ ★ Ordina i file per preferenza (Favourites). N Modificare le impostazioni dei preferiti Selezionare l’immagine nell’elenco foto e premere il tasto Verde ripetutamente fino alla comparsa dell’impostazione desiderata. N Le stelle sono utilizzate solo ai fini del raggruppamento. Ad esempio, l’impostazione con 3 stelle non ha alcuna priorità rispetto all’impostazione con una stella. „ Orario (Photo / Movie) Ordina e mostra i titoli dei filmati o dei brani musicali in ordine di simbolo / numerico / alfabetico / speciale. „ Titolo (Music / Movie) Ordina e mostra i titoli dei brani musicali in ordine di simbolo / numerico / alfabetico / speciale. ❑ Photo „ Colore → Rosso / Giallo / Verde / Blu / Magenta / Nero / Grigio / Non classificato Ordina le foto in base al colore. È possibile cambiare le informazioni relative al colore della foto. N È necessario attivare la funzione Usare visualizz a colori nel menu Setup prima di ordinare le foto in base al colore. ❑ Music „ Artista Ordina i file musicali per artista in ordine di simbolo / numero / alfabeto / speciale. „ Atmosfera → Energetico / Ritmico / Triste / Eccitante / Calmo / Non classif Ordina i brani musicali in base all’atmosfera.È possibile cambiare le informazioni relative all’atmosfera musicale. „ Genere Ordina i brani musicali in base al genere. Compos Preferenze Visual base Titolo Artista 1 When I Dream 3/4 Carol kidd Mr A-Z 2009 Pop usermanual Heaven NPKI ▶ 1 ▶ ▶ ▶ ▶ ../ Nome cart/ Music USB „ Dispositivo Selezione T StrumentiR Cartella superiore ▶ ▶ Preferenze Visual base Orario Titolo Cartella Apr Apr.27.2009 Movie USB „ Dispositivo Impostazioni pref Selezione T Strumenti R Cartella superiore MOVIE_003 .avi MOVIE_000 .avi MOVIE_004 .avi MOVIE_001.avi 1/5 ▶ ▶ ◀ MOVIE_005 .avi Preferenze Visual base Orario Colore Cartella Mar.01.2009 IMG_0343 .JPG ▶ ▶ IMG_03496 .JPG IMG_03496 .JPG Mar Apr Jun Nov IMG_0335.JPG 1/67 ▶ ▶ 2009 ◀ IMG_03496 .JPG Photo USB „ Dispositivo Impostazioni pref Selezione T Strumenti R Cartella superiore BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 35 10/20/2009 4:51:04 PMItaliano - 36 Photo / Music / Movie List Option Menu 1. Premere il tasto MEDIA.P. 2. Premere il tasto ◄ o ► per selezionare Photo, Music o Movie, quindi premere ENTERE. 3. Per selezionare il file desiderato, premere il tasto ◄ o ►. N Selezione di più file - Per selezionare il file desiderato, premere il tasto ◄ o ►.Quindi premere il tasto giallo. - Ripetere l’operazione per selezionare più file. - Il contrassegno c appare per il file selezionato. 4. Premere il tasto TOOLS. N Il menu delle opzioni varia in base allo stato corrente. „ Riproduci gruppo corrente Questo menu consente di avviare una proiezione di diapositive solo delle foto contenute nel gruppo di ordinamento selezionato. „ Deselez tutto (se è selezionato almeno un file) È possibile deselezionare tutti i file. N Il contrassegno c che indica che il file corrispondente è selezionato è nascosto. „ Informazioni Vengono visualizzate le informazioni relative alla foto, al brano musicale o al filmato. Usando le stesse procedure durante una proiezione di diapositive, è possibile vedere le informazioni relative ai file fotografici. O Premere il tasto INFO per visualizzare le informazioni. „ Rimozione sicura Il dispositivo può essere rimosso dal televisore in modo sicuro. ❑ Foto „ Slide Show Questo menu consente di avviare una proiezione di diapositive delle foto contenute nel dispositivo USB. „ Mod. gruppo (quando la chiave di ordinamento è Colore) È possibile modificare le informazioni sul colore di un file, o un gruppo di file, di foto selezionato in modo da spostare il file in un altro gruppo di colore. N Il colore effettivo della foto non verrà modificato. N Le informazioni del gruppo del file corrente vengono aggiornate e le foto vengono spostate nel nuovo gruppo di colore. N Per modificare le informazioni di più file, selezionare i file desiderati premendo il tasto giallo. ❑ Music „ Change Group (quando la chiave di ordinamento è Mood) È possibile modificare le informazioni relative all’atmosfera del file musicale. Le informazioni del gruppo del file corrente vengono aggiornate e il file viene spostato nel nuovo gruppo. Per modificare le informazioni di più file, selezionare i file desiderati premendo il tasto giallo. Select T Tools R Upper Folder Compos Preferenze Visual base Titolo Artista 1 1 ▶ ▶ ../ folder name/ Sky When I Dream 3/4 Carol kidd Mr A-Z 2009 Pop NPKI usermanual Heaven ▶ NPKI Riproduci gruppo corrente Informazioni Rimozione sicura Music USB „ Dispositivo Selezione T Strumenti R Cartella superiore MOVIE_004 MOVIE_003 .avi .avi MOVIE_000 .avi MOVIE_005 .avi MOVIE_007 .avi MOVIE_001.avi 1/5 MOVIE_006 .avi ▶ ▶ Preferenze Visual base Orario Titolo Cartella Apr Apr.27.2009 Movie USB „ Dispositivo Impostazioni pref Selezione T Strumenti R Cartella superiore Riproduci gruppo corrente Informazioni Rimozione sicura Visual base Orario Colore Cartella Preferenze IMG_0335.JPG 4/6 IMG_0349 .JPG ▶ ▶ Folder 2 1 Folder 1 1 Slide Show Riproduci gruppo corrente Mod. gruppo Informazioni Rimozione sicura Photo USB „ Dispositivo Impostazioni pref Selezione T Strumenti R Cartella superiore BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 36 10/20/2009 4:51:09 PMItaliano - 37 Slide Show / Music Play / Movie Play Option Menu 1. Durante una proiezione di diapositive (o la visualizzazione di una foto) o durante la riproduzione di un brano musicale o di un filmato, premere il tasto TOOLS per impostare l’opzione. 2. Premere il tasto ▲ o ▼ per selezionare l’opzione, quindi premere ENTERE. „ Impostazioni immagine / Impostazioni audio È possibile selezionare le impostazioni delle immagini e dell’audio. „ Informazioni Vengono visualizzate le informazioni relative al file. „ Rimozione sicura Il dispositivo può essere rimosso dal televisore in modo sicuro. ❑ Menu opzioni di Slide Show „ Arresta proiezione diapositive / Avvia proiezione diapositive E’ possibile iniziare o interrompere la proiezione di diapositive. „ Velocità slide show → Lenta / Normale / Veloce Selezionare questa opzione per determinare la velocità di proiezione delle diapositive. N La funzione è disponibile solo durante una proiezione. N La velocità di proiezione delle diapositive può essere modificata premendo il tasto π (REW) o μ (FF) durante le proiezione. „ Effetto slide show È possibile selezionare l’effetto di transizione dello schermo da utilizzare nella proiezione di diapositive. • Nessuno / Dissolv1 / Dissolv2 / Veneziana / Spirale / Scacchiera / Lineare / Scale / A comparsa / Casuale N La funzione è disponibile solo durante una proiezione. „ Ruota E’ possibile ruotare le foto memorizzate su un dispositivo USB. N Premendo il tasto ◄, la foto verrà ruotata di 270˚, 180˚, 90˚ e 0˚. N Premendo il tasto ►, la foto verrà ruotata di 90˚, 180˚, 270˚ e 0˚. N Il file ruotato non viene memorizzato. „ Zoom E’ possibile ingrandire le foto memorizzate su un dispositivo USB. (x1 → x2 → x4) N Per spostare l’immagine ingrandita, premere il tasto ENTERE , quindi i tasti ▲/▼/◄/►. Notare che se l’immagine ingrandita è più piccola della dimensione dello schermo originale, la funzione di modifica della posizione non avrà alcun effetto. N Il file ingrandito non può essere memorizzato. „ Musica di sottofondo Durante una proiezione di diapositive è possibile impostare la musica di sottofondo desiderata. N Per usare questa funzione, la musica scelta deve essere memorizzata sul dispositivo USB. N Per modificare la modalità Musica di sottofondo è necessario caricare i brani musicali. Riprodurre i brani musicali nella categoria musica per caricarli. ❑ Menu Opzione della riproduzione di file musicali „ Mod Ripetiz. → On / Off E’ possibile riprodurre ripetutamente i brani musicali. ❑ Menu opzioni della riproduzione di filmati „ Formato immagine → Adatta / Originale Riproduce un video in dimensione originale o a tutto schermo. „ Impostazione didascalie È possibile impostare le didascalie per il filmato. Tools Strumenti Arresta proiezione diapositive Velocità slide show : Normale Effetto slide show : Dissolv1 Ruota Zoom Musica di sottof Impostazioni immagine Impostazioni audio Informazioni › U Sposta E Conf. eEsci Strumenti Modalità Ripeti ◄ On ► Impostazioni immagine Impostazioni audio Informazioni Rimozione sicura U Sposta š™ Regola eEsci Strumenti Impostazioni immagine Impostazioni audio Formato immagine : Adatta Impostazione didascalia Informazioni Rimozione sicura U Sposta  Conf. eEsci BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 37 10/20/2009 4:51:10 PMItaliano - 38 Visualizzazione di una foto o di una proiezione di diapositive ❑ Proiezione di diapositive N Nella proiezione di diapositive verranno utilizzate tutte le foto contenute nell’Elenco file. N Durante la proiezione di diapositive, i file appaiono in sequenza a partire da quello correntemente visualizzato. N La proiezione di diapositive prosegue in base all’ordine specificato nell’Elenco file. N Impostando l’opzione Musica di sottofondo su Acceso durante la proiezione delle diapositive i brani musicali vengono riprodotti automaticamente. N Quando si visualizza un Elenco foto, per iniziare la proiezione di diapositive premere il tasto ∂ (Riproduci) / ENTERE sul telecomando. N Tasti di controllo per la proiezione di diapositive ENTERE Riproduci/Arresta la proiezione di diapositive. Riproduci la proiezione di diapositive. Arresta la proiezione di diapositive. Esce dalla proiezione diapositive e torna all’elenco delle foto. / Varia la velocità di riproduzione della proiezione. T TOOLS Esegue varie funzioni nei menu Photo.. ❑ Riproduce il gruppo corrente 1. Premere il tasto ▲ per passare alla sezione tasti di ordinamento. 2. Premere il tasto ◄ o ► per selezionare l’ordinamento. 3. Premere il tasto ▼ per passare alla sezione Elenco gruppi. 4. Selezionare un gruppo utilizzando i tasti ◄ e ►. 5. Premere il tasto ∂ (Riproduci). Viene avviata una proiezione di diapositive con i file del gruppo selezionato. „ In alternativa 1. Selezionare un tasto di ordinamento e, nella sezione Elenco file, selezionare le foto contenute nel gruppo desiderato. N Per passare al gruppo successivo/precedente, premere il tasto π (REW) o μ (FF). 2. Premere il tasto TOOLS. 3. Premere il tasto ▲ o ▼ per selezionare Riproduci gruppo corrente, quindi premere il tasto ENTERE. N Per la proiezione verranno utilizzati solo i file contenuti nel gruppo di ordinamento. ❑ Per riprodurre una proiezione di diapositive dei soli file selezionati 1. Premere il tasto ▼ per selezionare la sezione Elenco file. 2. Premere il tasto ◄ o ► per selezionare la foto desiderata nell’Elenco file. 3. Premere il tasto giallo. 4. Ripetere l’operazione per selezionare più foto. N Il contrassegno c cappare a sinistra della foto selezionata. N Selezionando un solo file, la proiezione di diapositive non avrà inizio. N Per deselezionare tutti i file, premere il tasto TOOLS quindi selezionare Deselez tutto. 5. Premere il tasto ∂ (Riproduci)/ENTERE. N I file selezionati verranno utilizzati per la proiezione di diapositive. „ In alternativa 1. Nell’Elenco file, premere il tasto giallo per selezionare le foto desiderate. 2. Premere il tasto TOOLS. 3. Premere il tasto ▲ o ▼ per selezionare Slide show, quindi premere il tasto ENTERE . N I file selezionati verranno utilizzati per la proiezione di diapositive. ▶ ▶ Preferenze Visual base Orario Titolo Cartella Apr Apr.27.2009 Movie Impostazioni pref Selezione T Strumenti R Cartella superiore MOVIE_003 .avi MOVIE_000 .avi MOVIE_004 .avi MOVIE_001.avi 1/5 MOVIE_005 .avi USB „ Dispositivo Visual base Orario Colore Cartella Preferenze IMG_0335.JPG 4/6 IMG_0349 .JPG ▶ ▶ Folder 2 1 Folder 1 1 Slide Show Riproduci gruppo corrente Mod. gruppo Informazioni Rimozione sicura Photo r Normale IMG_0335.JPG 3648x2432 2009/3/15 1/4 USB E Pausa lr Prec/succ T Strumenti R Ritorno USB „ Dispositivo Impostazioni pref Selezione T Strumenti R Cartella superiore BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 38 10/20/2009 4:51:15 PMItaliano - 39 Riproduzione di musica ❑ Riproduzione di un file musicale 1. Premere il tasto ▼ per selezionare la sezione Elenco file. 2. Premere il tasto ◄ o ► per selezionare un file musicale da riprodurre. 3. Premere il tasto ∂ (Riproduci)/ENTERE. N Questo menu mostra solo i file con estensione MP3. I file con altre estensioni non vengono visualizzati, nemmeno se sono stati salvati sul medesimo dispositivo USB. N Il file selezionato appare in alto con il relativo tempo di riproduzione. N Per regolare il volume della musica, premere il tasto del volume sul telecomando. Per azzerare il volume, premere il tasto M MUTE sul telecomando. N Se l’audio risulta anomalo quando si riproducono file MP3, regolare le impostazioni Equalizzatore e SRS TruSurround HD nel menu Sound. (Un file MP3 sovramodulato può causare problemi audio.) N La durata di un filmato può essere visualizzata come ‘00:00:00’ se all’inizio della riproduzione non vengono reperite le informazioni relative al tempo di riproduzione. N I tasti π (REW) e μ (FF) non sono attivi durante la riproduzione. N Tasti di controllo della riproduzione musicale ENTERE Riproduce/Interrompe il brano musicale. Esce dalla modalità di riproduzione e torna all’Elenco musica. Riproduce il brano musicale. T TOOLS Esegue varie funzioni nei menu Music. Interrompe il brano musicale. N Icona informazioni sulla funzione Music Quando tutti i brani musicali presenti nella cartella (o i file selezionati) sono stati ripetuti. La modalità Ripetizione è impostata su Acceso. Quando tutti i brani musicali presenti nella cartella (o i file selezionati) sono stati riprodotti una volta. La modalità Ripetizione è impostata su Spento. ❑ Riproduzione di un gruppo di brani 1. Premere il tasto ▲ per passare alla sezione tasti di ordinamento. 2. Premere il tasto ◄ o ► per selezionare l’ordinamento. 3. Premere il tasto ▼ o ENTERE per passare alla sezione Elenco gruppi. 4. Premere il tasto ∂ (Play). Viene avviata la riproduzione dei file del gruppo selezionato. „ In alternativa 1. Selezionare un tasto di ordinamento e, nella sezione Elenco file, selezionare i file contenuti nel gruppo desiderato. N Per passare al gruppo successivo/precedente, premere il tasto π (REW) o μ (FF). 2. Premere il tasto TOOLS. 3. Premere il tasto ▲ o ▼ per selezionare Riproduci gruppo corrente, quindi premere il ENTERE. N Vengono riprodotti i brani musicali inseriti nel gruppo di ordinamento, compresi i brani selezionati. ❑ Riproduzione dei brani musicali selezionati 1. Premere il tasto ▼ per selezionare la sezione Elenco file. 2. Per selezionare il brano musicale desiderato, premere il tasto ◄ o ►. 3. Premere il tasto giallo. 4. Ripetere l’operazione per selezionare più file musicali. N Il contrassegno c appare a sinistra del brano musicale selezionato. N Per deselezionare tutti i file, premere il tasto TOOLS quindi selezionare Deselez tutto. 5. Premere il tasto ∂ (Riproduci)/ENTERE. N Vengono riprodotti i file selezionati. r 00:00:02 / 00:04:55 r 1/3 When I Dream r r Geek In The Pink Heaven USB E Pause lr Prec/succ T Strumenti R Ritorno BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 39 10/20/2009 4:51:15 PMItaliano - 40 Riproduzione di un filmato ❑ Riproduzione di un filmato 1. Premere il tasto ▼ per selezionare la sezione Elenco file. 2. Premere il tasto ◄ o ► per selezionare un filmato da riprodurre. 3. Premere il tasto ∂ (Riproduci)/ENTERE. N Verrà visualizzato il file selezionato. N Il file selezionato appare in alto con il relativo tempo di riproduzione. N La durata di un filmato può essere visualizzata come ‘00:00:00’ se all’inizio della riproduzione non vengono reperite le informazioni relative al tempo di riproduzione. N È possibile guardare giochi multimediali, ma la funzione gioco non è supportata. N Formati didascalie supportati Nome Estensione file Lingua programmazione MPEG-4 time-based text .ttxt XML SAMI .smi HTML SubRip .srt string-based SubViewer .sub string-based Micro DVD .sub o .txt string-based N Formati video supportati Extension de fichier Conteneur Décodeur vidéo Codec audio Risoluzione *.avi AVI Divx 3.11/4.x/5.1/6.0 MP3 AC3 LPCM ADPCM 720x576 XviD 1920x1080 H.264 BP/MP/HP 1920x1080 MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080 Motion JPEG 800x600 *.mkv MKV Divx 3.11/4.x/5.1/6.0 MP3 AC3 LPCM ADPCM 720x576 XviD 1920x1080 H.264 BP/MP/HP 1920x1080 MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080 Motion JPEG 800x600 *.asf ASF Divx 3.11/4.x/5.1/6.0 MP3 AC3 LPCM ADPCM WMA 720x576 XviD 1920x1080 H.264 BP/MP/HP 1920x1080 MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080 Motion JPEG 800x600 *.wmv (VC1) ASF VC1 WMA 1920x1080 *.mp4 MP4 (SMP4) H.264 BP/MP/HP MP3 ADPCM AAC 1920x1080 MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080 XVID 1920x1080 *.3gp 3GPP H.264 BP/MP/HP ADPCM AAC 1920x1080 MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080 *.vro VRO VOB MPEG2 AC3 MPEG LPCM 1920x1080 MPEG1 1920x1080 *.mpg *.mpeg PS MPEG1 AC3 MPEG LPCM 1920x1080 MPEG2 1920x1080 *.ts *.tp *.trp TS MPEG2 AAC MP3 1920x1080 H.264 1920x1080 VC1 1920x1080 N Tasti di controllo della riproduzione video ENTERE Riproduci/ Arresta il filmato. Riproduce il filmato. Interrompe la riproduzione del filmato. Esce dalla modalità di riproduzione e torna all’Elenco filmati. T TOOLS Esegue varie funzioni nei menu dei filmati. ◄/► Salta in avanti o indietro all’interno del filmato. ▲/▼ Passa al primo/all’ultimo fotogramma del file. ▶ r r 00:00:02 / 00:01:55 1/3 Film_000.avi USB E Pausa lr Salta T Strumenti R Ritorno BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 40 10/20/2009 4:51:16 PMItaliano - 41 ❑ Riproduzione di un gruppo di filmati 1. Premere il tasto ▲ per passare alla sezione tasti di ordinamento. 2. Premere il tasto ◄ o ► per selezionare l’ordinamento. 3. Premere il tasto ▼ o ENTERE per passare alla sezione Elenco gruppi. 4. Premere il tasto ∂ (Riproduci). Viene avviata la riproduzione solo dei file del gruppo selezionato. „ In alternativa 1. Selezionare un tasto di ordinamento e, nella sezione Elenco file, selezionare i file contenuti nel gruppo desiderato. N Per passare al gruppo successivo/precedente, premere il tasto π (REW) o μ (FF). 2. Premere il tasto TOOLS. 3. Premere il tasto ▲ o ▼ per selezionare Riproduci gruppo corrente, quindi premere il tasto ENTERE . N Vengono riprodotti i filmati inseriti nel gruppo di ordinamento, compresi i file selezionati. ❑ Riproduzione dei filmati selezionati 1. Premere il tasto ▼ per selezionare la sezione Elenco file. 2. Per selezionare il brano musicale desiderato, premere il tasto ◄ o ►. 3. Premere il tasto giallo. N Il simbolo c cappare a sinistra del filmato selezionato. N Per deselezionare tutti i file, premere il tasto TOOLS quindi selezionare Deselez tutto. 4. Ripetere l’operazione per selezionare più filmati. 5. Premere il tasto ∂ (Riproduci)/ENTERE. N Verrà riprodotto solo il file selezionato. ❑ Riproduzione continua dei filmati (Resume Play) Uscendo dalla funzione di riproduzione di un filmato, la sua riproduzione può essere ripresa in seguito a partire dal punto nel quale era stata interrotta. 1. Selezionare il filmato da riprodurre in modo continuo premendo il tasto ◄ o ► nella sezione elenco file. 2. Premere il tasto ∂ (Riproduci)/ENTERE. 3. Selezionare Ripr in continuo (ripristina riproduzione) premendo il tasto blu. N La riproduzione del filmato inizierà dal punto di arresto precedente. N Se la funzione Prom ripr cont di un film è impostata su On nel menu Setup comparirà un messaggio alla ripresa della riproduzione del filmato. Utilizzo del menu Impostazione Il menu Impostazioni mostra le impostazioni utente del menu Media Play. 1. Premere il tasto MEDIA.P sul telecomando per visualizzare il menu Media Play. 2. Premere il tasto ◄ o ► per selezionare Setup, quindi premere il tasto ENTERE. 3. Per selezionare l’opzione desiderata, premere il tasto ▲ o ▼. 4 . Per selezionare l’opzione desiderata, premere il tasto ◄ o ►. N Per uscire dalla modalità Media Play premere il tasto MEDIA.P sul telecomando. „ Usare visualizz a colori → On / Off È possibile selezionare l’ordinamento delle foto in base al colore. N Se l’opzione è impostata su Acceso, il tempo di caricamento può aumentare a causa del reperimento delle informazioni relative alle foto. „ Mod Ripetiz. → On / Off Selezionare questa opzione per riprodurre ripetutamente i brani musicali. „ Prom ripr cont di un film → On / Off Selezionare questa opzione per visualizzare il messaggio a comparsa di aiuto per la riproduzione continua del filmato. „ Ottieni codice registrazione DivX® VOD Mostra il codice di registrazione autorizzato per il televisore. Se si è connessi al sito web DivX e si registra il codice di registrazione con un account personale, è possibile scaricare il file di registrazione VOD. Se la registrazione VOD viene riprodotta con Media Play, la procedura di registrazione viene completata. Per ulteriori informazioni su VOD DivX®, visitare il sito www.DivX.com. „ Ottieni codice disattivazione DivX® VOD Se VOD DivX® non è registrato, viene visualizzato il codice di disattivazione della registrazione. Se si esegue questa funzione con il VOD DivX® registrato, la registrazione VOD DivX® corrente viene disattivata. „ Durata salvaschermo → 10 ore / 20 ore / 1 ore Selezionare questa opzione per impostare il tempo di attesa prima che lo screen saver entri in funzione. „ Informazioni Selezionare questa opzione per visualizzare le informazioni sul dispositivo collegato. „ Rimozione sicura Il dispositivo può essere rimosso dal televisore in modo sicuro. Media Play USB : USB 851.98MB/995.00MB Libero SETUP Photo Music Movie Setup USB „ eEsci Dispositivo Setup Sposta LRegola Ritorno Usare visualizz a colori ◄ Off ► Mod Ripetiz. On Prom ripr cont di un film On Ottieni codice registrazione DivX® VOD Ottieni codice disattivazione DivX® VOD Durata salvaschermo 10 min Informazioni Rimozione sicura USB „ Dispositivo BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 41 10/20/2009 4:51:16 PMItaliano - 42 Impostazione della rete DLNA DLNA permette la visione di filmati e immagini memorizzati nel PC sul televisore mediante una connessione di rete in modalità Media Play. Per utilizzare DLNA, il televisore deve essere collegato alla rete e l’applicazione DLNA deve essere installata sul PC. ❑ Schema connessioni di rete - Cavo ❑ Schema connessioni di rete - Wireless 1. Per ulteriori informazioni sulla configurazione della rete, vedere ‘Impostazione della rete’. N È opportuno che il televisore e il PC siano nella stessa subnet. Le prime 3 parti dell’indirizzo subnet e IP del televisore e del PC devono essere uguali e solo l’ultima parte (l’indirizzo host) deve variare. (per es. Indirizzo IP : 123.456.789.**) 2. Collegare il PC su cui verrà installato il programma Samsung PC Share Manager e il modem esterno mediante un cavo LAN. N E’ possibile collegare direttamente il televisore al PC senza dover passare tramite uno Sharer (Router). Installazione dell’applicazione DLNA Per riprodurre il contenuto del PC sul televisore, è necessario prima installare l’applicazione. Per utilizzare la funzione DLNA senza problemi, utilizzare il programma presente sul CD-ROM fornito con il televisore o il programma Samsung PC Share Manager corrispondente al modello di televisore che può essere scaricato dal sito web Samsung. TV Modem esterno (ADSL/VDSL/Cavo TV) LAN PC LAN Media Play-DLNA TV LAN PC o 1 Pannello laterale del televisore Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 42 10/20/2009 4:51:18 PMItaliano - 43 Uso dell’applicazion DLNA La schermata del programma 1. Menu : Vengono forniti i seguenti menu dell’applicazione : File, condividi, Server, e Guida. 2. Fare clic per condividere la cartella del server PC selezionata. 3. Fare clic per annullare la condivisione. 4. Fare clic per aggiornare la cartella del PC e i file. 5. Fare clic per sincronizzare lo stato della condivisione. 6. Vengono elencate le cartelle e i file del PC da condividere. 7. Vengono elencate le cartelle condivise dall’utente. 8. Nome server PC indicato nell’elenco periferiche di Media Play. „ Requisiti di sistema 1. Inserire nel PC il CD del programma fornito in dotazione con il televisore. 2. Per l’installazione del programma sono necessari 30MB di spazio libero sul disco rigido. N Se si intende condividere file, è necessario disporre di 30MB di spazio libero sul disco rigido ogni 100 file. N Annullando la condivisione dei file, lo spazio sul disco fisso utilizzato per le informazioni delle miniature verrà liberato. „ Formati supportati • Immagine : JPEG/ Audio: MP3/ Video: AVI, MKV, ASF, MP4, 3GPP, PS, TS container. Per informazioni dettagliate sui formati video supportati, vedere la sezione ‘Riproduzione di un filmato’. „ Installare l’applicazione ► ► ► 1. Eseguire il file Setup.exe contenuto del CD del programma fornito in dotazione con il prodotto. N In alternativa, è possibile scaricare il file dal sito web www.samsung.com. 2. Installare SAMSUNG PC Share Manager come mostrato nelle figure sottostanti. 3. Una volta completata l’installazione, sul desktop verrà visualizzata l’icona PC Share Manager. N Fare doppio clic sull’icona per avviare il programma. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 43 10/20/2009 4:51:19 PMItaliano - 44 ❑ Condividi „ Condivisione di una cartella E’ possibile condividere una cartella del PC sul televisore. „ Annullamento della condivisione di una cartella E’ possibile annullare la condivisione di una cartella sul PC. Selezionare una cartella dal pannello Cartellacondivisa e selezionare non condividere cartella. „ Applicazione dwwelle impostazioni correnti Eseguire questa operazione quando la sincronizzazione è necessaria a causa di una nuova cartella condivisa o dell’annullamento di una condivisione. Il menu Imposta stato modificato applica i cambiamenti delle cartelle condivise ai dati memorizzati con il programma di condivisione PC. Dal momento che l’applicazione dei cambiamenti ai dati interni è un processo lungo, questa funzione permette agli utenti di applicare le modifiche ai dati solo quando è necessario. Fino a quando il menu Imposta stato modificato non viene selezionato, le modifiche alla cartella condivisa non verranno applicate al server. Le modifiche alle cartelle condivise non vengono applicate al PC fino a quando non viene selezionato il menu Imposta stato modificato. „ Impostazione dei permessi di accesso Per abilitare il televisore a vedere il PC, il televisore deve essere impostato su Imposta politica dispositivo nella finestra Access Permission Settings. Inoltre, il server del PC e il televisore devono appartenere alla stessa subnet. • Metodo : Selezionare il menu condividi quindi selezionare Imposta politica dispositivo. Le voci rifiutate vengono rappresentate in grigio. E’ possibile cambiare i permessi di accesso usando il tasto accetta / Nega. Per eliminare una voce, selezionarla e selezionare elimina voce selezionata. ❑ Server „ Server E’ possibile eseguire o interrompere usando il PC come server. „ Avviamento del server all’avvio di Windows E’ possibile impostare il server del PC per essere eseguito automaticamente all’avvio di Windows. „ Modifica nome server È possibile rinominare il server del PC. Uso della funzione DLNA ❑ Uso della funzione DLNA DLNA (Digital Living Network Alliance) permette la riproduzione dei contenuti memorizzati su un server DLNA (solitamente il PC) collegato al proprio televisore tramite una rete. Media play permette la riproduzione di contenuti memorizzati su un dispositivo USB collegato al televisore, mentre DLNA permette la riproduzione di contenuti memorizzati su un server DLNA (PC) collegato al televisore tramite una rete. Le procedure per l’uso dei contenuti sono uguali a quelle utilizzate con Media Play (USB & DLNA). 1. Premere il tasto MEDIA.P sul telecomando per visualizzare il menu DLNA. 2. Premere il tasto ◄ o ► per selezionare una icona (Photo, Music, Movie, Setup), quindi premere il tasto ENTERE. N Per uscire dalla modalità DLNA, premere il tasto MEDIA.P sul telecomando. N DLNA non supporta le seguenti funzioni. - Le funzioni Musica di sottofondo e Impostazione musica di sottofondo. - Ordinamento dei file in base alle preferenze nelle cartelle Foto, Musica e Film. - La funzione Mod. gruppo. - La funzione Copia / Elimina. - La funzione Remove Safely. - La funzioni dei tasti REW/FF (π/μ) durante la riproduzione di un filmato. - Funzione Continua riproduzione filmato (Ripristina riproduzione). N La funzione di passaggio a un altro fotogramma può non funzionare con alcuni container, ad esempio asf e mkv. N Le didascalie incorporate, Divx DRM, Multi-audio, non sono supportate. N Samsung PC Share Manager deve essere autorizzato dal programma firewall del PC. N La funzione Skip (tasto ◄/►) o Pause potrebbe non funzionare durante la riproduzione di un filmato per DLNA di altri produttori, in base al contenuto delle informazioni corrispondenti. N Il tempo di riproduzione può non essere visualizzato durante la riproduzione di un filmato. Media Play Photo Music Setup PHOTO USB : USB 851.98MB/995.00MB Libero Movie USB „ Dispositivo Ritorno BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 44 10/20/2009 4:51:20 PMItaliano - 45 Informazioni su Anynet+ Collegamento dei dispositivi Anynet + Anynet + è una funzione che permette di controllare mediante il telecomando del televisore Samsung tutti i dispositivi Samsung collegati che supportano Anynet + . Il sistema Anynet + può essere usato solo con i dispositivi Samsung dotati della funzione Anynet + . Per controllare se il dispositivo Samsung in uso è dotato di questa funzione, verificare la presenza del logo Anynet + . ❑ Per effettuare il collegamento a un televisore 1. Collegare il jack HDMI IN (1, 2(DVI), 3 o 4) del televisore al jack HDMI OUT del dispositivo Anynet + corrispondente tramite un cavo HDMI. ❑ Per effettuare il collegamento a un sistema Home Theater 1. Collegare il jack [HDMI IN 1], [HDMI IN 2 (DVI)], [HDMI IN 3] o [HDMI IN 4] del televisore al jack HDMI OUT del dispositivo Anynet + corrispondente tramite un cavo HDMI. 2. Collegare il jack HDMI IN del sistema home theater al jack HDMI OUT del dispositivo Anynet + corrispondente tramite un cavo HDMI. N Collegare il cavo ottico tra l’uscita Digital Audio Out (ottica) del televisore e l’ingresso Digital Audio Input del sistema Home Theater. N Qualora si opti per una connessione di questo genere, la presa Ottica permette l’uscita di soli 2 canali audio. In questo modo non sarà possibile sentire l’audio dall’altoparlante frontale sinistro e destro del sistema Home Theater e dal subwoofer. Per avere un audio a 5.1 canali, collegare il jack Digital Audio Out (ottico) del lettore DVD o del decoder cavo/satellitare (es. Anynet Device 1 o 2) direttamente a un amplificatore o all’Home Theater, non al televisore. N Collegare solo un sistema Home Theater. N E’ possibile collegare un dispositivo Anynet+ tramite un cavo HDMI 1.3. Alcuni cavi HDMI potrebbero non supportare le funzioni Anynet . N Anynet + si attiva solo quando il relativo dispositivo AV che supporta Anynet+ è acceso o in modalità Standby. N Anynet + supporta fino a 12 dispositivi AV. Da notare che è possibile collegare fino a 3 dispositivi dello stesso tipo. N Anynet + supporta fino a 3 dispositivi simultaneamente. Dispositivo Anynet + 1 Dispositivo Anynet + 2 Dispositivo Anynet + 3 TV Cavo HDMI 1.3 Cavo HDMI 1.3 Cavo HDMI 1.3 TV Dispositivo Anynet + 1 Dispositivo Anynet + 2 Dispositivo Anynet + 3 HDMI 1.3 Cable Cavo HDMI 1.3 Cavo HDMI 1.3 Cavo HDMI 1.3 Home Theater Cavo ottico Dispositivo Anynet + 4 Cavo HDMI 1.3 Dispositivo Anynet + 4 Cavo HDMI 1.3 BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 45 10/20/2009 4:51:21 PMItaliano - 46 Configurazione di Anynet + ❑ Impostazione di Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) T Premere il tasto TOOLS per visualizzare il menu Strumenti. E’ inoltre possibile visualizzare il menu Anynet+ selezionando Strumenti → Anynet + (HDMI-CEC). „ Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) → Spento / Acceso Per utilizzare la funzione Anynet + , Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) deve essere impostata su Acceso. N Quando la funzione Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) è disattivata, sono disattivate anche tutte le funzioni relative a Anynet + . „ Spegnimento auto → Acceso / Sì Impostare lo spegnimento automatico di un dispositivo Anynet + allo spegnimento del televisore. N E’ necessario impostare la sorgente attiva sul telecomando del televisore in modo che il televisore utilizzi la funzione Anynet + . N Se si imposta Spegnimento auto su Sì, i dispositivi esterni collegati al televisore si spengono ogniqualvolta si spegne il televisore. Se un dispositivo esterno è in fase di registrazione, potrebbe non spegnersi automaticamente. Passaggio da un dispositivo Anynet+ all’altro 1. Premere il tasto TOOLS. Premere il tasto ENTERE per selezionare Anynet + (HDMICEC). 2. Premere il tasto ▲ o ▼ per selezionare Elenco dispositivi, quindi premere il tasto ENTERE. N Vengono elencati tutti i dispositivi Anynet + collegati al televisore. Se non si trova il dispositivo desiderato, premere il tasto rosso per eseguire la scansione dei dispositivi. N Solo all’impostazione di Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) su Acceso nel menu Impostazione, comparirà l’Elenco dispositivi. 3. Premere il tasto ▲ o ▼ per selezionare un particolare dispositivo, quindi premere il tasto ENTERE. Il dispositivo selezionato viene attivato. N Il passaggio al dispositivo selezionato può richiedere fino a 2 minuti. Non è possibile annullare l’operazione durante il passaggio da un dispositivo all’altro. N Il tempo richiesto per la scansione dei dispositivi dipende dal numero di dispositivi collegati. N Se si è selezionata una modalità di ingresso esterna tramite il tasto SOURCE, non sarà possibile utilizzare la funzione Anynet + . Accertarsi di passare a un dispositivo esterno Anynet + utilizzando il tasto TOOLS. ❑ Menu Anynet + Il menu Anynet+ può variare a seconda del tipo e dello stato del dispositivo Anynet+ collegato al televisore. Menu Anynet+ Descrizione Visualizza TV La modalità Anynet + passa alla modalità di trasmissione TV. Elenco dispositivi Visualizza l’elenco dei dispositivi Anynet + . (nome_dispositivo) MENU Mostra i menu del dispositivo collegato. Ad esempio, se è collegato un registratore DVD, comparirà il menu del disco del registratore DVD. (nome_dispositivo) INFO Mostra i menu di riproduzione del dispositivo collegato. Ad esempio, se è collegato un registratore DVD, comparirà il menu di riproduzione del registratore DVD. Registrazione (*registratore) Avvia una registrazione (Questo menu è operativo solo per un dispositivo che supporta la registrazione.) (*registratore) Prenota registrazione Permette di prenotare una registrazione sul registratore (Questa funzione è disponibile solo per i dispositivi che supportano la funzione di prenotazione.) Interrompi registrazione: (*registratore) Interrompe la registrazione. Ricevitore L’audio viene riprodotto attraverso il ricevitore. Continua... Applicazione Media Play (USB & DLNA) Anynet + (HDMI-CEC)► Content Library Internet@TV Centro rete dom U Sposta EConf. R Ritorno Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) : On ▶ Spegnimento auto : Sì U Sposta EConf. R Ritorno Visualizza TV Elenco dispositivi Registrazione : DVDR DVDR MENU DVDR INFO Ricevitore : On Impostazione BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 46 10/20/2009 4:51:22 PMItaliano - 47 ❑ Tasti del telecomando disponibili in modalità Anynet + Tipo di dispositivo Stato operativo Tasti disponibili Dispositivo Anynet+ Una volta attivato il dispositivo, quando il menu del dispositivo corrispondente appare sullo schermo. Tasti numerici ▲/▼/◄/►/ENTERE Tasti colorati / tasto EXIT Una volta attivato il dispositivo, quando si riproduce un file (Ricerca indietro) / (Ricerca avanti) (Interrompi) / (Riproduci) / (Pausa) Dispositivo con sintonizzatore incorporato Una volta attivato il dispositivo, durante la visione di un programma televisivo Tasto P / Dispositivo audio Una volta attivato il ricevitore Tasto = / Tasto M MUTE N La funzione Anynet + è utilizzabile solo quando il telecomando è impostato su TV. N Il tasto è attivo solo in fase di registrazione. N Non è possibile gestire i dispositivi Anynet + utilizzando i pulsanti del televisore. I dispositivi Anynet + possono essere controllati solo tramite il telecomando del televisore. N In determinate condizioni, il telecomando del televisore potrebbe non funzionare. In questo caso, selezionare nuovamente il dispositivo Anynet + . N Le funzioni Anynet + non sono attive con prodotti di altre marche. N Le operazioni , possono differire a seconda del dispositivo in uso. N Se al sistema è collegato più di un dispositivo di registrazione, questi vengono visualizzati come (*registratore); in caso il dispositivo collegato sia uno solo, verrà rappresentato come (*nome_dispositivo). Registrazione Con un videoregistratore Samsung è possibile registrare un programma televisivo. 1. Premere il tasto TOOLS. Premere il tasto ENTERE per selezionare Anynet+ (HDMICEC). 2. Premere il tasto ▲ o ▼per selezionare Registrazione, quindi premere il tasto ENTERE. La registrazione ha inizio. N Quando è presente più di un dispositivo di registrazione Se sono collegati più dispositivi di registrazione, questi vengono elencati. Premere il tasto ▲ o ▼ per selezionare un particolare dispositivo, quindi premere il tasto ENTERE. La registrazione ha inizio. N Se un dispositivo di registrazione non è visualizzato selezionare Elenco dispositivi e premere il tasto rosso per ricercarlo. N Premendo il tasto si eseguirà la registrazione del programma attualmente visualizzato sul televisore. Se si sta guardando l’immagine di un altro dispositivo, vengono registrate le immagini di quel dispositivo. N Prima di registrare, controllare che il jack dell’antenna sia correttamente collegato al dispositivo di registrazione. Per collegare in modo adeguato un’antenna a un dispositivo di registrazione, vedere il manuale dell’utente del dispositivo di registrazione in uso. U Sposta EConf. R Ritorno Visualizza TV Elenco dispositivi Registrazione : DVDR DVDR MENU DVDR INFO Ricevitore : On Impostazione BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 47 10/20/2009 4:51:22 PMItaliano - 48 Ascolto tramite il ricevitore È possibile ascoltare l’audio tramite un ricevitore anzichè dagli altoparlanti del televisore. 1. Premere il tasto TOOLS. Premere il tasto ENTERE per selezionare Anynet + (HDMICEC). 2. Premere il tasto ▲ o ▼ per selezionare Ricevitore. Premere il tasto ◄ o ► per selezionare On o Off. N Se il ricevitore supporta solo l’audio, potrebbe non comparire nell’elenco dei dispositivi. N Il ricevitore è operativo solo se è collegato in modo appropriato il jack Optical In del ricevitore al jack Optical Out del televisore. N Quando il ricevitore (home theater) è impostato su On, è possibile udire l’audio proveniente dall’uscita ottica del televisore. Quando il televisore visualizza un segnale DTV (air), invia l’audio a 5.1 canali al ricevitore Home Theater. Se la sorgente è un componente digitale, come per es. un DVD, ed è collegata al televisore mediante HDMI, saranno udibili solo 2 canali audio dal ricevitore Home Theater. N Utilizzando la funzione Media Play, l’audio potrebbe non essere emesso correttamente attraverso il ricevitore. N Durante l’ascolto tramite il ricevitore, vi sono alcune restrizioni nell’uso dei menu relativi all’audio. N Nel caso di una interruzione di corrente al televisore quando il menu Ricevitore è impostato su On la funzione Seleziona altoparlante può essere impostata su Altoparlante esterno alla riaccensione del televisore. (vedere pag. 21) Risoluzione dei problemi con Anynet + Sintomo Soluzione Anynet + non funziona. • Controllare se si sta utilizzando un dispositivo Anynet + . Il sistema Anynet + può essere utilizzato solo con dispositivi che supportano Anynet+. • Collegare un solo ricevitore (home theater). • Controllare che il cavo di alimentazione di Anynet+ sia correttamente collegato. • Controllare i collegamenti dei cavi Video/Audio/HDMI 1.3 del dispositivo Anynet+. • Verificare che Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) sia impostato su Acceso nel menu Impostazione di Anynet + . • Verificare che il telecomando del televisore sia in modalità TV. • Verificare che sia Anynet + la modalità esclusiva del telecomando. • In particolari condizioni, Anynet + non funziona. (Ricerca canali, Media Play, Plug & Play, ecc.) • Quando si collega o si rimuove il cavo HDMI 1.3, eseguire una nuova ricerca dei dispositivi oppure spegnere e riaccendere il tel evisore. • Verificare che la funzione Anynet + del dispositivo Anynet + sia impostata su Acceso. Per avviare Anynet +. . • Verificare che il dispositivo Anynet + sia collegato correttamente al televisore e che Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) sia impostato su Acceso nel menu Impostazione di Anynet + . • Premere il tasto TV sul telecomando per passare al controllo del televisore. Premere il tasto TOOLS per visualizzare il menu Anynet+ e selezionare il menu desiderato. Per uscire da Anynet + . • Selezionare Visualizza TV nel menu Anynet + . • Premere il tasto SOURCE sul telecomando del televisore e selezionare un dispositivo non Anynet + (Notare che il tasto dei canali funziona solo se non è collegato un dispositivo Anynet + con sintonizzatore incorporato.) Sullo schermo viene visualizzato il messaggio Connecting to Anynet + device • Non è possibile utilizzare il telecomando durante la configurazione di Anynet + o passare a un’altra modalità di visualizzazione. • Utilizzare il telecomando solo al termine dell’impostazione di Anynet + o del passaggio alla nuova modalità di visualizzazione. Non è possibile avviare la riproduzione del dispositivo Anynet + . • Non è possibile utilizzare la funzione di riproduzione mentre è in corso la funzione Plug & Play. Lo schermo del dispositivo esterno non appare. • Controllare se il dispositivo supporta le funzioni Anynet + . • Verificare che il cavo HDMI 1.3 sia collegato correttamente. • Verificare che Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) sia impostato su On nel menu Impostazione di Anynet + . • Cercare altri dispositivi Anynet + . • E’ possibile collegare un dispositivo Anynet + solo tramite un cavo HDMI 1.3. Alcuni cavi HDMI potrebbero non supportare le funzioni Anynet + . • In caso di chiusura anomala, a causa di uno scollegamento del cavo HDMI, del cavo di alimentazione oppure di una interruzione di corrente, ripetere la ricerca del dispositivo. Il programma TV non può essere registrato. • Verificare che il jack dell’antenna sul dispositivo di registrazione sia correttamente collegato. L’audio del televisore non viene riprodotto attraverso il ricevitore • Collegare il televisore e il ricevitore mediante il cavo ottico. U Sposta EConf. R Ritorno Visualizza TV Elenco dispositivi Registrazione : DVDR DVDR MENU DVDR INFO Ricevitore : On Impostazione BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 48 10/20/2009 4:51:23 PMItaliano - 49 Attivazione della modalità Content Library Content Library permette di visualizzare o riprodurre contenuti già predisposti sul televisore o memorizzati su un dispositivo USB. 1. Premere il tasto MENU. Premere ▲ o ▼ per selezionare Applicazione, quindi premere ENTERE. 2. Premere ▲ o ▼ per selezionare Content Library, quindi premere ENTERE. Viene visualizzato il menu principale Content Library. O Premere CONTENT sul telecomando per visualizzare il menu principale Content Library. 3. Premere ◄ o ► per selezionare una icona (Galleria, Cucina, Bambini, Benessere, Altro, Gestione contenuti), quindi premere ENTERE. N Vengono riprodotti gli elementi selezionati. ❑ Uso dei tasti del telecomando nel menu Content Library Tasto Operazioni ▲/▼/◄/► Sposta il cursore e seleziona un elemento. ENTERE Attiva la voce attualmente selezionata. RETURN Torna al menu precedente. EXIT Arresta la funzione corrente e torna al menu principale di Content Library. Tasti Colorati I tasti che attivano le funzioni sono descritti nella pagina corrispondente. Questa barra serve per regolare il volume del contenuto riprodotto. CONTENT Attiva o disattiva la modalità Content Library. N Premendo il tasto Volume o MMUTE, non verrà visualizzato alcun OSD, ma la funzione verrà regolarmente eseguita. N Per tornare alla modalità TV, premere il tasto P del telecomando. N CONTENT LIBRARY CONTIENE TESTO, GRAFICA, IMMAGINI, CONTENUTI MULTIMEDIALI E ALTRI MATERIALI UNICAMENTE PER USO INFORMATIVO E PROMOZIONALE. I MATERIALI CONTENUTI IN CONTENT LIBRARY SONO IN CONTINUO AGGIORNAMENTO. I MATERIALI CONTENUTI IN CONTENT LIBRARY POTREBBERO NON ESSERE IDONEI AD ALCUNE FASCE DI PUBBLICO. N LE INFORMAZIONI CONTENUTE IN CONTENT LIBRARY SONO FORNITE “COSÌ COME SONO”. NONOSTANTE LE INFORMAZIONI FORNITE NELLA CONTENT LIBRARY SIANO STATE OTTENUTE O RICAVATE DA FONTI RITENUTE AFFIDABILI, SAMSUNG NON GARANTISCE LA PRECISIONE, LA VALIDITA’, LA PUNTUALITA’ O LA COMPLETEZZA DI QUALSIASI INFORMAZIONE O DATO FORNITO PER QUALSIASI SCOPO SPECIFICO. IN NESSUNA CIRCOSTANZA, INCLUSA NEGLIGENZA, SAMSUNG POTRA’ ESSERE RITENUTA RESPONSABILE, SIA PER CONTRATTO SIA PER ILLECITO, DI EVENTUALI DANNI DIRETTI, INCIDENTALI, SPECIALI OCONSEQUENZIALI, PARCELLE LEGALI, SPESE O QUALSIASI ALTRO DANNO DI QUALSIVOGLIA NATURA POSSA DERIVARE, O ESSERE ASSOCIATO, ALLE INFORMAZIONI CONTENUTE IN, O ALL’USO DELLA CONTENT LIBRARY, ANCHE SE IL POSSIBILE VERIFICARSI DI TALI DANNI SIA STATO RESO NOTO. Content Library Applicazione Media Play (USB & DLNA) Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) Content Library Internet@TV Centro rete dom < > Cucina Bambini Galleria Galleria Content Library Benessere Altro Ritorno Esci BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 49 10/20/2009 4:51:24 PMItaliano - 50 Uso di Content Library ❑ Galleria Questa funzione consente di riprodurre uno Slide Show con immagini ad alta risoluzione e musica di sottofondo. Usando la funzione Galleria del televisore, è possibile cambiare l’atmosfera del proprio ambiente. N Premere INFO per vedere il nome dell’artista e informazioni dettagliate in lingua inglese relative a ogni immagine visualizzata (attualmente, le informazioni sono fornite solo in lingua inglese). N E’ possibile interrompere temporaneamente la proiezione di diapositive premendo il tasto ENTERE. N I copyright dei contenuti della sezione Galleria e tutte le informazioni ad essi relative sono di proprietà di Timespace / JoongAng M&B, Inc. ❑ Cucina Mediante questa funzione è possibile visualizzare diverse ricette da seguire passo passo. Questi contenuti potranno fornire agli utenti ottime idee per pranzi e cene. N Le ricette contenute nella sezione Cucina consultabili sul televisore Samsung si basano su ricette pubblicate da Anness Publishing. N I copyright dei contenuti della sezione Cucina e tutte le informazioni ad essi relative sono di proprietà di Practical Pictures. ❑ Bambini Questo è un contenuto educativo e interattivo che i bambini possono vedere più volte. Con le storie, le canzoni, i giochi e i personaggi Boowa e Kwala, il divertimento è assicurato. N I copyright dei contenuti della sezione Bambini e tutte le informazioni ad essi relative sono di proprietà di UpToTen. ❑ Benessere Questo contenuto è dedicato al mantenimento della forma fisica e mostra esercizi di stretching e relax che possono essere utilizzati da tutta la famiglia. ❑ Gestione contenuti „ Conten personali L’uso dei contenuti è uguali a quello dei contenuti della memoria del televisore. Inoltre, i contenuti personali possono essere cancellati. „ USB E’ possibile scaricare i contenuti su una memoria USB per poi riprodurli sul televisore. I contenuti del dispositivo USB esterno vengono riprodotti direttamente. N Content Library supporta dispositivi USB MSC (Mass Storage Class). MSC è un dispositivo di memorizzazione di massa BulkOnly Transport. Esempi di MSC sono le unità Thumb e i Flash Card Reader (le unità HDD USB e HUB non sono supportate). N La riproduzione di alcuni giochi mediante un dispositivo di memorizzazione USB esterno consente di salvare i giochi (in base al tipo di gioco utilizzato). Prestare attenzione quando si rimuove il dispositivo USB mentre si salvano i dati poiché ciò potrebbe causare la perdita dei dati. N Scaricamento di nuovi contenuti Nuovi contenuti diversi da quelli inclusi nel prodotto possono essere scaricati dal sito web Samsung.com a titolo gratuito. Per poter scaricare contenuti a pagamento, è necessario disporre del numero UDN. Verificare il numero UDN prima di scaricare un nuovo contenuto. 1. Accedere al sito www.samsung.com. 2. Selezionare un contenuto nella pagina Content Download (Download contenuti). 3. Scaricare il contenuto sul dispositivo USB. 4. assare al menu principale Content Library premendo il tasto CONTENT o scegliendo (Menu → Application → Content Library). 5. Collegare il dispositivo USB alla porta USB sul lato del televisore. 6. E’ possibile vedere le voci secondarie dei contenuti scaricati. 7. Selezionare un contenuto e premere il tasto ENTER. 8. E’ possibile riprodurre il contenuto selezionato. „ Impostazione • Durata salvaschermo → 10 min. / 20 min. / 40 min. / 1 ore Selezionare questa opzione per impostare il tempo di attesa prima che il salvaschermo entri in funzione. • Salva UDN (Unique Device Number) Il numero di 18 cifre sullo schermo rappresenta il codice del prodotto. E’ possibile salvare l’UDN sulla memoria USB. N Un dispositivo USB in formato NTFS non supporta la memorizzazione UDN. Si consiglia di usare un dispositivo USB formattato FAT. BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 50 10/20/2009 4:51:24 PMItaliano - 51 E’ possibile utilizzare vari servizi internet contenenti utili contenuti informativi e di intrattenimento. In caso di problemi nell’uso di un servizio widget, contattare il fornitore del contenuto. In widget, premere il tasto verde per le informazioni di contatto, oppure visitare la guida del sito web per reperire informazioni sul provider del servizio widget. N In base alla regione, il servizio widget potrebbe essere supportato solo in lingua inglese. N Questa funzione potrebbe non essere supportata dal paese di residenza. Guida introduttiva di Internet@TV Grazie a Yahoo!® Widget Engine, Internet@TV permette un’esperienza web e TV interattiva. E’ possibile controllare i titoli finanziari, condividere fotografie con amici e parenti, apprendere notizie di cronache e consultare il meteo attraverso il servizio Internet@TV del televisore. N Se la condizione della rete non è stabile, questa funzione potrebbe non funzionare. In questo caso, il televisore si spegnerà automaticamente. In caso contrario, spegnere il televisore premendo il tasto Power. N Durante l’uso di questa funzione si potrebbe verificare una certa lentezza operativa a causa delle condizioni della rete. Quando si esegue Internet@TV per la prima volta, le impostazioni di base vengono applicate automaticamente. N Questo primo passaggio è relativo alla configurazione della rete. Per ulteriori informazioni sulla configurazione di rete, vedere ‘Impostazione della rete’. N Una volta impostata la rete, attraverso il software Internet@TV sarà possibile procedere con l’installazione guidata. Internet@TV Tutti i contenuti e i servizi accessibili attraverso il presente apparecchio appartengono a terzi e sono protetti dalle leggi in materia di diritto d’autore, brevetti, marchi e/o altre leggi in materia di proprietà intellettuale. Tali contenuti e servizi sono forniti esclusivamente per un Suo uso personale e non commerciale. Lei non può utilizzare alcun contenuto o servizio in modi non autorizzati dal proprietario del contenuto o dal fornitore del servizio. In particolare, Lei non potrà modificare, copiare, ripubblicare, caricare, pubblicare, trasmettere, tradurre, vendere, creare opere derivate, sfruttare o distribuire in qualunque modo o con qualunque mezzo alcun contenuto o servizio visualizzato attraverso il presente apparecchio senza l’espressa autorizzazione del relativo proprietario del contenuto o fornitore del sevizio. IL CONTENUTO ED I SERVIZI DI TERZI SONO FORNITI “COSÌ COME SONO”. SAMSUNG NON GARANTISCE IL CONTENUTO O I SERVIZI COSÌ FORNITI, NÉ ESPRESSAMENTE NE’ IMPLICITAMENTE, PER QUALSIASI SCOPO. SAMSUNG ESCLUDE ESPRESSAMENTE QUALSIASI GARANZIA IMPLICITA, INCLUSE, A TITOLO ESEMPLIFICATIVO, LE GARANZIE DI COMMERCIABILITÀ O IDONEITÀ PER UNO SCOPO SPECIFICO. SAMSUNG NON GARANTISCE L’ACCURATEZZA, VALIDITÀ, TEMPESTIVITÀ, LEGALITÀ O COMPLETEZZA DI QUALSIASI CONTENUTO O SERVIZIO RESO DISPONIBILE ATTRAVERSO IL PRESENTE APPARECCHIO, E IN NESSUN CASO, INCLUSO IL CASO DI COLPA, FERMO RESTANDO QUANTO PREVISTO ALL’ART. 1229 DEL CODICE CIVILE, SAMSUNG SARÀ RESPONSABILE, SIA PER RESPONSABILITÀ CONTRATTUALE CHE EXTRACONTRATTUALE, PER QUALSIASI DANNO DIRETTO, INDIRETTO, INCIDENTALE, SPECIALE O CONSEQUENZIALE, PER GLI ONORARI DI AVVOCATO, SPESE, LUCRO CESSANTE O QUALUNQUE ALTRO DANNO DERIVANTE DA, O RELATIVO A, QUALSIASI INFORMAZIONE CONTENUTA IN, O CONSEGUENZA DELL’UTILIZZO DI, QUALUNQUE CONTENUTO O DEL SERVIZIO DA PARTE SUA O DA PARTE DI TERZI, ANCHE SE AL CORRENTE DELLA POSSIBILITÀ DI TALI DANNI.. I servizi di terzi possono essere terminati o interrotti in qualsiasi momento, e Samsung non dichiara né garantisce che qualsiasi contenuto o servizio rimarrà disponibile per un certo periodo di tempo. I contenuti e i servizi sono trasmessi da terzi attraverso reti e apparecchiature di trasmissione sulle quali Samsung non ha alcun controllo. Senza che ciò limiti quanto detto sopra, Samsung esclude espressamente ogni tipo di responsabilità per qualsiasi interruzione o sospensione di qualsiasi contenuto o servizio reso disponibile attraverso il presente apparecchio. Samsung non è nemmeno in alcun modo responsabile per il servizio assistenza clienti relativo ai contenuti e servizi. Qualsiasi domanda o richiesta di servizio relativa ai contenuti o ai servizi dovrebbe essere fatta direttamente ai relativi fornitori di contenuti e servizi. 1. Premere il tasto MENU. Premere il tasto ▲ o ▼ per selezionare Application, quindi premere il tasto ENTERE. 2. Premere il tasto ▲ o ▼ per selezionare Internet@TV, quindi premere il tasto ENTERE. N INTERNET@TV viene avviato. O Premere il tasto Internet@ sul telecomando per visualizzare il menu INTERNET@TV. 3. Viene visualizzata la schermata General Disclaimer. Selezionare I accept o I do not accept. N Per ulteriori informazioni sulla General Disclaimer, fare riferimento all ‘Legal Notice’. 4. La ‘schermata di benvenuto’ rappresenta la pagina iniziale dell’impostazione guidata di Internet@TV. N Selezionando Exit Setup, questo passaggio viene ripreso alla pressione del tasto INTERNET@. N Selezionare Let’s get started! 5. La scelta del paese permette agli widget TV di utilizzare un contenuto localizzato nella lingua locale. N Selezionare il paese nell’elenco visualizzato. 6. L’accettazione della Privacy Policy di Yahoo!® TV Widget Engine è necessaria per utilizzare Internet@TV. N Selezionare OK, I Accept. BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 51 10/20/2009 4:51:25 PMItaliano - 52 7. L’accettazione dei Terms of Service del servizio di Yahoo!® TV Widget System è necessaria per utilizzare Internet@TV. N Selezionare OK, I Accept. 8. Digitare il proprio nome per impostare il profilo. Ogni profilo ha un elenco di widget. E’ possibile creare un profilo per ogni persona che utilizza Internet@TV. N Immettere il nome e selezionare Save this name. N Per maggiori informazioni vedere a ‘Using the Profile Widget’. 9. Internet@TV testa la connessione di rete. N Se il test della connessione di rete ha esito negativo, configurare di nuovo la rete. N Per maggiori informazioni vedere a ‘Network Setup.’ 10. L’impostazione guidata è ora completa. Di seguito verrà visualizzato un tutorial sull’uso di Internet@TV. N Selezionare Continue per visualizzare il tutorial. N Selezionare Exit setup per iniziare a usare Internet@TV. N Per eseguire il tutorial di nuovo, selezionare Profile Widget → System Setting → Repeat Tutorial. 11. Premere INTERNET@ sul telecomando per visualizzare il menu Internet@TV. ❑ Schermo „ Dock mode 1 Sullo schermo verrà visualizzato un banner di benvenuto con il nome del proprio profilo nell’angolo in alto a destra. N Questo banner scompare dopo pochi secondi. 2 Il banner evidenzia due tasti di scelta rapida sul telecomando. N Premendo il tasto blu (Viewport) del telecomando, il display passa dalla modalità ‘Viewport’ alla modalità ‘Overlay’ e viceversa. In modalità Viewport, il televisore o il video viene visualizzato con un’area in scala ridotta e con la grafica all’esterno. In modalità overlay, la grafica viene visualizzata al di sopra della visualizzazione del televisore o del video. N Premendo il tasto giallo (Edit Snippet) del telecomando, verrà visualizzata una finestra di guida e lo snippet selezionato potrà essere modificato. 3 Premere il tasto INTERNET@ del telecomando per iniziare. N L’elenco orizzontale in fondo alla schermata del televisore è denominato ‘dock’. N Gli elementi dell’elenco sono denominati ‘snippet’. N Uno snippet è un collegamento che attiva un widget del televisore. N Un widget del televisore è un’applicazione internet da eseguire sul televisore. N Scorrere da uno snippet all’altro premendo i tasti ◄ o ► del telecomando. N L’elemento selezionato è situato nella zona più a sinistra (evidenziato in blu). N Il dock scorre gli snippet sotto il punto focale. N Avviare un widget TV premendo il tasto ENTERE sul telecomando quando lo snippet è in evidenza. N Quando si aggiungono snippet, questi formano un insieme all’interno del quale è possibile navigare premendo il tasto ▲ o ▼. N Nel dock vengono visualizzati due widget TV speciali : Profile Widget e Gallery Widget. Questi non possono essere eliminati. N Il dock scorrerà fuori della schermata dopo un determinato periodo di tempo. „ Modalità Sidebar 1 Selezionare uno snippet e premere il tasto ENTERE per attivare la barra laterale degli widget. Il logo TV Widget e Home ( ) sono situati nella parte superiore della barra laterale. 2 Il menu corrente è visualizzato sotto il logo TV Widget. N Per tornare alla schermata precedente, selezionarla e premere il tasto ENTERE. N E’ possibile inoltre premere il tasto RETURN del telecomando. 3 La selezione corrente è sempre evidenziata in blu. Il tasto evidenziato è selezionato e viene attivato premendo ENTERE. 4 Qualora vi siano molti dati, viene utilizzata una suddivisione a pagine. N Vengono visualizzate la pagina corrente e le pagine totali. N Scorrere le pagine mediante il tasto ◄ o ►. 5 La barra degli strumenti inferiore comprende i tasti colorati corrispondenti ai tasti rosso, verde, giallo e blu del telecomando. • Tasto rosso : Chiude il widget. • Tasto verde : Cambia le impostazioni del widget. • Tasto giallo : Gestisce gli snippet. • Tasto blu : Dimensiona il video per adattarlo o renderlo a pieno schermo. N Alcuni tasti potrebbero non essere disponibili a seconda del widget. .@# áëí space a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 52 10/20/2009 4:51:26 PMItaliano - 53 Modificare gli snippet nel dock 1. Per modificare uno snippet selezionarlo nel dock e premere il tasto giallo. 2. Lo snippet si porta in seconda posizione e la sua immagine scorre per mostrare il testo di aiuto : • Delete (tasto rosso) : Rimuove il widget. N Gli widget eliminati possono essere ripristinati usando la Widget Gallery. • Move (tasto blu) : Riordina lo snippet. Premere il tasto ◄ o ►per scorrere. Premere il tasto giallo per spostarlo in una nuova posizione. • Done (tasto giallo) : Esce dal menu Edit Snippet. Uso del widget Profile Il widget Profile configura il profilo dell’utente. E’ possibile impostare più profili, mantenendo per ognuno il proprio elenco di widget. Il menu Switch Profile permette di passare da un profilo utente all’altro. N È necessario registrare almeno due profili. Se si desidera aggiungere un profilo, vedere ‘Administrative Controls’. Il menu Profile Settings permette di personalizzare e proteggere i profili. • I profili utenti possono essere personalizzati mediante un Name e un Avatar (una immagine usata per rappresentare il profilo) univoci. • Il Name e l’Avatar del profilo vengono visualizzati nello snippet del profilo del dock. • I profili possono essere protetti mediante Create Profile PIN. N Quando si imposta il PIN per la prima volta, è possibile impostare una domanda di sicurezza. Il menu Profile Settings può limitare l’accesso agli widget. • Nel caso si dimentichi il proprio Profile PIN è possibile rispondere a una Security Question associata al profilo. • Un profilo che abbia attivo il Limit Profile non permetterà l’installazione di nuovi widget. N Per utilizzare questa funzione, è necessario impostare il PIN del titolare. Per impostare il PIN, vedere ‘Administrative Controls’. Il menu System Settings permette di : • Cambiare Location e impostare il proprio Zip Code (solo USA) per attivare il contenuto locale. • Repeat Tutorial mostrato durante l’impostazione guidata. • Restore Factory Settings per eliminare tutte le configurazioni degli widget e le informazioni. Nel menu Administrative Controls è possibile : • Impostare l’intervallo di Screen Saver per evitare le bruciature dello schermo. • Selezionare Create Owner PIN e impostare la Security Question per controllare gli atri profili. • Create crea un nuovo Profile che può essere configurato con diversi gruppi di widget. • Rimuovere un profilo esistente. Dal widget Profile è possibile eseguire Sign in to Yahoo!® usando il proprio ID di Yahoo! • Se si possiede un ID di Yahoo!, è possibile accedere ai contenuti personalizzati mediante gli widget TV di Yahoo!. • All Yahoo!® Gli widget TV installati vengono automaticamente attivati insieme all’ ID del profilo di Yahoo!. • Se non si dispone di un account Yahoo!, visitare il sito www.yahoo.com e creare un account. • Potrebbe non essere possibile accedere con un ID creato sul sito web di Yahoo! in un paese che non supporti Internet@TV. ❑ Informazioni sul widget Profile Premere il tasto verde. È possibile visualizzare una breve descrizione degli widget Profile, Copyright Policy, Terms of Service e Privacy Policy. BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 53 10/20/2009 4:51:26 PMItaliano - 54 Uso di Yahoo!® Widget Gallery Utilizzare Yahoo!® Widget Gallery per aggiungere ulteriori widget al proprio televisore. Visualizzare tutti gli widget TV disponibili nelle seguenti categorie : • Latest Widgets : Visualizza gli widget aggiornati di recente. • Yahoo!® Widgets : Visualizza gli widget forniti da Yahoo!®. • Samsung Widgets : Visualizza gli widget forniti da Samsung. • Altre categorie : Visualizza tutti gli Add Widget to My Profile per categoria. N Per installare un widget, accedere alla schermata dei dettagli e selezionare Install Widget e premere il tasto ENTERE. Il widget viene quindi installato e diventa disponibile nel dock. ❑ Impostazioni di Widget Gallery Premere il tasto verde. „ About Yahoo! Widget Gallery... È possibile visualizzare brevi informazioni su Widget Gallery, Copyright Policy, Terms of Service, e Privacy Policy. Nel menu Developer Settings è possibile creare i propri widget personali. Per maggiori informazioni sulla creazione di widget personalizzati, visitare il sito web di sviluppo http://connectedtv.yahoo.com/ Uso di Yahoo!® Weather Widget Yahoo!® Weather Widget fornisce aggiornamenti sulla situazione meteo locale o preferita. Questo contenuto cambia dinamicamente in base alle condizioni climatiche. • Premere il tasto verde del telecomando per visualizzare il menu Yahoo!® Weather Widget Settings. • Nel menu Settings è possibile aggiungere o eliminare una città per la quale si desidera visualizzare la situazione meteo. Nel menu Settings : • Add New City digitando il nome di una città. Una volta visualizzati i risultati della ricerca, selezionare la città desiderata e premere il tasto ENTERE. • Delete City selezionando la città da eliminare dall’elenco delle città. Premere ENTERE per confermare l’eliminazione. • Modifica della modalità Temperature Indication. È possibile modificare la modalità di indicazione della temperatura da Imperial a Metric e viceversa. Ad esempio, Imperial mostrerà la temperatura in gradi Fahrenheit mentre Metric in gradi Centigradi. ❑ Creare uno snippet per una città preferita • Selezionare la città nella home page del widget Yahoo!® Weather e visualizzare le informazioni meteo. • Premere il tasto giallo. • Selezionare il menu Add Snippet e premere ENTERE per aggiungere la città come snippet. ❑ Delete elimina lo snippet di una città • Avviare lo snippet. • Premere il tasto giallo. • Selezionare il menu Delete Snippet e premere il tasto ENTERE per eliminarlo. BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 54 10/20/2009 4:51:27 PMItaliano - 55 Uso del widget Yahoo!® News Il widget Yahoo!® News fornisce le ultime notizie su economia, intrattenimenti, politica, sport, avvenimenti di interesse generale e molte altre categorie. Selezionare una categoria, un argomento all’interno di una categoria e visualizzare il riepilogo delle notizie aggiornato dinamicamente. Uso del widget Yahoo!® Flickr Il widget Flickr fornisce un accesso alle fotografie preferite di amici e parenti durante la visione del televisore. Ora è possibile condividere le immagini con la famiglia sullo schermo del televisore come una proiezione di diapositive. • Personalizzare il widget Flickr collegandosi al proprio ID di Yahoo! • Per le procedure di accesso dettagliate, fare riferimento alle istruzioni ‘Uso del widget Profile’. • Per ulteriori informazioni su Flickr, visitare il sito www.flickr.com. N Your Photos mostra le fotografie registrate sul sito web con Flickr. „ Per visualizzare le fotografie Flickr in una proiezione di diapositive : • Selezionare una miniatura di una foto e premere il tasto ENTERE per visualizzare i dettagli della fotografia. • Selezionare Start Slideshow e premere il tasto ENTERE. „ Per controllare la visualizzazione della proiezione di diapositive : • Premere il tasto ENTERE durante la proiezione. • Le miniature delle fotografie vengono visualizzate nella parte bassa dello schermo. N Quando il controllo della proiezione di diapositive viene visualizzato, è possibile utilizzare i comandi Pause, Play e Stop. N Selezionando il menu e premendo il tasto ENTERE, è possibile visualizzare le informazioni della fotografia selezionata. • Il menu Your Setspermette di visualizzare le fotografie classificate in Flickr. • Il menu Explore permette di esplorare le fotografie presentate sul sito web Flickr. Si possono visualizzare le foto aggiornate ogni giorno. • Il menu Mark as Favorite o Remove From Favorite sposta le fotografie nella cartella Favorite Photos o le rimuove. • Il menu Favorite Photos permette di visualizzare le fotografie classificate come preferite. • Il menu Your Contacts permette di visualizzare gli aggiornamenti inseriti da parenti e amici. Il menu Your Groups permette di selezionare i gruppi preferiti nel sito web Flickr per condividere le fotografie con la comunità di utenti Flickr. Per configurare le impostazioni del widget Yahoo!® Flickr premere il tasto verde del telecomando. • Il menu Time Per Slide controlla la velocità di riproduzione della proiezione di diapositive. • Il menu Repeat ripeterà la proiezione dall’inizio dopo l’ultima fotografia. BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 55 10/20/2009 4:51:28 PMItaliano - 56 Uso del widget Yahoo!® Finance Con il widget Yahoo!® Finance è possibile visualizzare le ultime notizie di borsa. Premere il tasto verde per impostare le proprie azioni. Usare il menu Add New Symbol per inserire il nome di un nuovo titolo. • Selezionare il titolo da aggiungere nei risultati di ricerca, quindi il menu Add Symbol e premere il tasto ENTERE. N Il titolo selezionato viene aggiunto all’elenco My Stocks • Usare il menu Import Symbols From Yahoo!® per recuperare il proprio portfolio Yahoo!® Finance. - Il menu Merge Symbols unisce i simboli del widget Yahoo!® Finance ai simboli presenti nel proprio portfolio. - Il menu Replace Symbols elimina i simboli del widget Yahoo!® Finance e li sostituisce con i simboli presenti nel proprio portfolio. • Usare il menu Display Format per modificare la transizione della fluttuazione delle quotazioni in Value o Percentage. • Creare uno snippet per un titolo preferito. - Selezionare il simbolo del titolo nella home page del widget Yahoo!® Finance e visualizzare le quotazioni dettagliate. - Premere il tasto giallo. - Selezionare il menu Add Snippet e premere ENTERE per aggiungere il titolo come snippet. • Delete elimina uno snippet - Avviare lo snippet dal dock. - Premere il tasto giallo. - Selezionare il menu Delete Snippet e premere il tasto ENTERE per eliminarlo. Risoluzione dei problemi con internet@TV Problema Possibile soluzione Alcuni servizi widget non funzionano. • Verificare il servizio con il fornitore. • In widget, premere il tasto verde per le informazioni di contatto, oppure visitare la guida del sito web per reperire informazioni sul provider del servizio. • Vedere la guida sulla pagina del sito web. Alcuni contenuti degli widget sono solo in Inglese. Come posso cambiare la lingua? • La lingua del contenuto del widget può essere diversa dalla lingua di interfaccia utente del widget. Ciò può dipendere dal fornitore del servizio. Dopo un ripristino ai valori preimpostati, il servizio Yahoo Widget non funziona e compare un messaggio di avviso. • Dopo un ripristino ai valori preimpostati, il servizio Yahoo Widget non funziona e compare un messaggio di avviso. Nel widget Flickr, ho effettuato l’accesso al mio account. Tuttavia, non riesco a visualizzare le mie foto. • Visitare il sito web Yahoo e attivare l’account con il proprio ID Yahoo!. Nel widget Profile ho cambiato l’area, ma sono rimaste le impostazioni precedenti. • Spegnere e riaccendere il televisore. Quindi riavviare Internet@TV. • Ora potrete usufruire dei servizi widget supportati nella nuova area.. BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 56 10/20/2009 4:51:28 PMItaliano - 57 Guida Sito web Nazione Sito web Austria www.samsung.com → Produkte → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Belgium www.samsung.com → Producten → televisies → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV www.samsung.com → Produits → téléviseurs → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Czech www.samsung.com → Produkty → televizory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Denmark www.samsung.com → Produkter → stue & soveværelse → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Finland www.samsung.com → Tuotteet → kodinelektroniikka → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV France www.samsung.com → Produits → télévisions → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Germany www.samsung.com → Privatkunden → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Greece www.samsung.com → Προϊόντα → τηλεοράσεις → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Hungary www.samsung.com → Termékek → televíziók → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Ireland www.samsung.com → Products → Television → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Italy www.samsung.com → Prodotti → TV → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Netherlands www.samsung.com → Producten → televisies → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Norway www.samsung.com → Produkter → hverdagsrom & soverom → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Poland www.samsung.com → Produkty → telewizory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Portugal www.samsung.com → Produtos para Consumidores → televisores → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Slovakia www.samsung.com → Produkty → televízory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Spain www.samsung.com → Productos → televisores → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Sweden www.samsung.com → Produkter → vardagsrum & sovrum → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Switzerland www.samsung.com → Produits → télévisions → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV United Kingdom www.samsung.com → Produkte → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV United Kingdom www.samsung.com → Products → Television → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Turkey www.samsung.com → Tüketici Ürünleri → televizyon → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Estonia www.samsung.com → Klientidele → Televiisorid → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Latvia www.samsung.com → Klientiem → Televizori → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Lithuania www.samsung.com → Namams → Televizoriai → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Russia www.samsung.com → Продукты → Телевизоры → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Ukraine www.samsung.com → Потребительские продукты → телевизоры → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV N L’accesso potrebbe subire modifiche. N Potrebbero esservi link diversi per determinati paesi. BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 57 10/20/2009 4:51:28 PMItaliano - 58 N Questa funzione potrebbe non essere supportata dal paese di residenza. N In caso di problemi nell’uso di un servizio widget, contattare il fornitore del contenuto. In widget, premere il tasto verde per le informazioni di contatto, oppure visitare la guida del sito web per reperire informazioni sul provider del servizio widget. N In base alla regione, il servizio widget potrebbe essere supportato solo in lingua inglese. Guida introduttiva di Internet@TV Internet@TV fornisce i servizi widget di SAMSUNG attraverso una connessione di rete. I contenuti Internet@TV potrebbero subire modifiche da parte del provider del servizio. Grazie al servizio Internet@TV è possibile accedere a varie informazione fornite per es. da YouTube. N Se il televisore non supporta i caratteri di un contenuto fornito dal content provider, il contenuto potrebbe non essere visualizzato correttamente. N La configurazione dei widget e dei relativi servizi forniti può variare a seconda del paese. Dopo la modifica del paese, spegnere e riaccendere il televisore. A questo punto è possibile utilizzare il servizio widget supportato dal paese. Se il Paese è impostato su Altro, il televisore non può riconoscere il paese. In questo caso, selezionarlo direttamente dall’elenco dei paesi del servizio. N Per maggiori informazioni sulla configurazione del paese, vedere le istruzioni alla sezione ‘Funzioni Plug & Play’. N Durante l’uso di questa funzione si potrebbe verificare una certa lentezza operativa a causa delle condizioni della rete. N Prima di utilizzare Internet@TV, impostare la rete. Per ulteriori informazioni sulla configurazione di rete, vedere ‘Impostazione rete’. Quando si esegue Internet@TV per la prima volta, le impostazioni di base vengono applicate automaticamente. L’aggiornamento potrebbe richiedere alcuni minuti. 1. Premere il tasto MENU. Premere ▲ o ▼ per selezionare Applicazione, quindi premere ENTERE. 2. Premere il tasto ▲ o ▼ per selezionare Internet@TV, quindi premere ENTERE. O Premere il tasto INTERNET@ sul telecomando per visualizzare il menu Internet@TV. 3. Viene visualizzata la sezione Accordo utente. Selezionare Accetto per accettare i termini contenuti nell’accordo. 4. Viene visualizzata la sezione Statistiche e analisi. Selezionare Accetto per accettare i termini contenuti nell’accordo. Configurazione di Internet@TV E’ possibile verificare e utilizzare i menu relativi a Single Sign On (SSO), gestione del sistema e proprietà. Premere ▲ o ▼ per selezionare Impostazione, quindi premere ENTERE. ❑ Single Sign On E’ possibile usare questo menu in fase di creazione o eliminazione di un account. Mediante Single Sign On, è possibile controllare l’account e le informazioni ad esso relative sul sito del contenuto. Non è necessario effettuare un nuovo login. N L’account è valido solo per internet@TV. „ Crea account E’ possibile creare un account per il collegamento al sito del servizio desiderato. N E’ possibile creare fino a 10 account. N Il numero massimo di caratteri utilizzabili per l’account è 10. N Se non vi sono servizi che richiedono di effettuare il login, non sarà necessario creare un account. „ Gestione account • Sito del servizio : E’ possibile memorizzare le informazioni per eseguire il login sul sito del servizio (per es. YouTube). • Modifica password : Modifica la password dell’account. • Elimina : Elimina l’account. N Nel caso si sia dimenticata la password dell’account, resettare Internet@TV premendo in questa sequenza i seguenti tasti del telecomando : POWER (off) → MMUTE → 9 → 4 → 8 → POWER (On). Questa sequenza elimina tutti gli account. Internet@TV BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 58 10/20/2009 4:51:28 PMItaliano - 59 ❑ Impostazione del sistema N Esecuzione automatica ticker e Durata ticker potrebbero non essere supportati a seconda del paese. „ Modifica la password per l’opzione Blocco servizio N La password predefinita di un nuovo apparecchio TV è 0-0-0-0. N Nel caso si sia dimenticata la password, premere i tasti del telecomando nella sequenza seguente per ripristinare il codice PIN predefinito 0-0-0-0 : POWER (Off) → MMUTE → 9 → 4 → 8 → POWER (On). „ Durata servizio Selezionare questa opzione per impostare il tempo di attesa del servizio prima che lo screensaver entri in funzione. „ Esecuzione automatica ticker→ Off / On Selezionare questa opzione per impostare o meno l’esecuzione automatica del ticker all’accensione del televisore. „ Durata ticker Selezionare questa opzione per impostare il tempo di attesa del servizio prima che lo screensaver entri in funzione. ❑ Proprietà Visualizza le informazioni di Internet@TV. E’ possibile misurare la velocità del servizio Internet TV mediante l’opzione Misurazione della velocità del servizio Internet TV. Uso del servizio Internet@TV In un widget che offre vari menu per categoria, è possibile visualizzare i contenuti dei vari menu premendo i tasti ◄ e ►. „ Login account 1. Premere il tasto rosso. 2. Selezionare Account utente, quindi premere ENTERE. 3. Inserire password. N Al termine del login, sullo schermo verrà visualizzato l’account utente. N Prima del login, è necessario registrare almeno un account. Se si desidera creare un account, vedere la sezione ‘Configurazione di Internet@TV’. „ Uso di Widget Gallery E’ possibile utilizzare Esegui servizio, Blocca, Installa servizio per il widget esistente e vedere le descrizioni del servizio widget che non è installato. Su Internet@TV, è possibile aggiungere e usare vari widget forniti dal service provider. L’offerta può variare a seconda del fornitore dei contenuti. • Esegui servizio : Esegue il servizio widget. • Blocca : Imposta il blocco del servizio. • Installa servizio (o Elimina servizio) : Installa o elimina il servizio widget. „ Uso del widget YouTube E’ possibile guardare un filmato disponibile su YouTube. Se si dispone di un account su YouTube, eseguire la registrazione delle informazioni sull’account mediante Gestione account. Dopodiché sarà possibile utilizzare la categoria My Favourites. N Il menu può essere modificato dal provider del servizio. N Il contenuto potrebbe non essere adatto ai minori. In questo caso, utilizzare la funzione Blocca di Galleria widget. Xz~*atp‚po _z{*]lpo Xz~*[z{€wl} Xz~*Ot~n€~~po _z{*Qlz€}tp~ Xz~*Wtyvpo Xz~*]p~{zxopo Qpl€}po _zol„ <:B ^ppvtyr*U€~tnp*Opnlop~*Wlp} atp‚~*E*C; M}plvtyr*Yp‚~*Lwp}~*m„*P8Xltw atp‚~*E*C; Mzz*Szz*ty*sp*Mzl}o}zzx atp‚~*E*CE=A „ Change Mode llrrChange page U Move EOK R Return BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 59 10/20/2009 4:51:29 PMItaliano - 60 Risoluzione dei problemi di internet@TV Problema Possibile soluzione Alcuni servizi widget non funzionano. Controllare con il fornitore del servizio. In widget, premere il tasto verde per le informazioni di contatto, oppure visitare il sito per reperire informazioni sul provider del servizio widget. Sul sito web consultare la pagina della Guida.. Quali sono i vantaggi offerti da single sign on? Se si crea un account e si registrano le informazioni di login per il servizio desiderato, è possibile accedere a contenuti personalizzati senza dover effettuare un ulteriore login. Quando si verifica un errore di rete, posso utilizzare solo il menu di impostazione. Se la connessione di rete non è disponibile, il servizio potrebbe avere delle limitazioni. Eccetto il menu di impostazione widget, tutte le altre funzioni widget (come Profile e Gallery) richiedono la connessione Internet. C’è qualche possibilità di visualizzare film per adulti su YouTube? Generalmente, questi contenuti sono filtrati dall’elenco menu. Tuttavia, utilizzando la funzione di ricerca è possibile visualizzarli. In questo caso, utilizzare la funzione di blocco del servizio della Galleria widget. Guida Sito web Nazione Sito web Austria www.samsung.com → Produkte → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Belgium www.samsung.com → Producten → televisies → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV www.samsung.com → Produits → téléviseurs → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Czech www.samsung.com → Produkty → televizory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Denmark www.samsung.com → Produkter → stue & soveværelse → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Finland www.samsung.com → Tuotteet → kodinelektroniikka → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV France www.samsung.com → Produits → télévisions → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Germany www.samsung.com → Privatkunden → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Greece www.samsung.com → Προϊόντα → τηλεοράσεις → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Hungary www.samsung.com → Termékek → televíziók → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Ireland www.samsung.com → Products → Television → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Italy www.samsung.com → Prodotti → TV → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Netherlands www.samsung.com → Producten → televisies → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Norway www.samsung.com → Produkter → hverdagsrom & soverom → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Poland www.samsung.com → Produkty → telewizory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Portugal www.samsung.com → Produtos para Consumidores → televisores → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Slovakia www.samsung.com → Produkty → televízory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Spain www.samsung.com → Productos → televisores → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Sweden www.samsung.com → Produkter → vardagsrum & sovrum → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Switzerland www.samsung.com → Produits → télévisions → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV www.samsung.com → Produkte → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV United Kingdom www.samsung.com → Products → Television → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Turkey www.samsung.com → Tüketici Ürünleri → televizyon → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Estonia www.samsung.com → Klientidele → Televiisorid → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Latvia www.samsung.com → Klientiem → Televizori → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Lithuania www.samsung.com → Namams → Televizoriai → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Russia www.samsung.com → Продукты → Телевизоры → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Ukraine www.samsung.com → Потребительские продукты → телевизоры → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV N L’accesso potrebbe subire modifiche. N Potrebbero esservi link diversi per determinati paesi. BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 60 10/20/2009 4:51:29 PMItaliano - 61 Centro rete dom Info su Centro rete dom Centro rete dom collega dispositivi TV e telefoni cellulari tramite una rete. È possibile visualizzare sul televisore le chiamate in arrivo, i contenuti dei messaggi di testo e i programmi impostati sul cellulare utilizzando la funzione Centro rete dom. Inoltre, è possibile riprodurre i contenuti multimediali salvati sul cellulare, ad esempio video, foto e musica, importandoli sul televisore attraverso la rete. N Se il dispositivo supporta la funzione DLNA DMC (Digital Media Controller), la funzione Home Network Center è disponibile. N Questa funzione è utile per la compatibilità del prodotto con i telefoni cellulari Samsung di prossima uscita. Per ulteriori informazioni visitare il sito www.samsung.com o chiamare il call center Samsung. Il dispositivo mobile potrebbe necessitare di ulteriore software. Per maggiori informazioni, vedere la guida dell’utente di ogni prodotto. ❑ Collegamento a Centro rete dom Per ulteriori informazioni sulle impostazioni della rete, vedere ‘Configurazione della rete’. „ Connessione tramite una rete Ad-hoc Wi-Fi 1. Collegare l’adattatore ‘Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter’ alla porta USB1 (HDD) o USB2 del televisore. 2. Per ulteriori informazioni sulla configurazione della rete Ad-hoc, vedere ‘Configurazione della rete’. N Per informazioni sulla configurazione delle impostazioni di rete per il telefono cellulare, consultare il manuale del cellulare. 3. Impostare indirizzo IP, SSID e password per il cellulare nelle impostazioni Ad-hoc del cellulare utilizzando Nome rete (SSID) e Chiave di sicurezza (password) visualizzati sul televisore. „ Collegamento tramite un Router IP wireless/cablato 1. Collegare la porta LAN del televisore e il router IP wireless/cablato mediante un cavo LAN, oppure collegare la porta USB1 (HDD) o USB2 del televisore con la scheda ‘Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter’. N Per le procedure di impostazione del router wireless/cablato e del telefono cellulare, fare riferimento al manuale del dispositivo corrispondente. Centro rete dom Pannello laterale del televisore Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter Telefono cellulare Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter Router IP wireless Pannello laterale del televisore Telefono cellulare o o Cavo LAN Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter Telefono cellulare Pannello laterale del televisore o Cavo LAN Router IP wireless BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 61 10/20/2009 4:51:34 PMItaliano - 62 Configurazione di Centro rete dom ❑ Message / Media Mostra un elenco di telefoni cellulari configurati con questo televisore per utilizzare le funzioni Message o Media. N Mostra un elenco di telefoni cellulari configurati con questo televisore per utilizzare le funzioni Message o Media. „ Consent Consente il collegamento del cellulare. „ Negato Blocca il collegamento del cellulare. „ Elimina Elimina il cellulare dall’elenco. N Questa funzione cancella solo il nome dall’elenco. Se il dispositivo mobile eliminato viene acceso o tenta di collegarsi al televisore, potrebbe comparire in elenco. ❑ Impostazione „ Messag → On / Off È possibile determinare se utilizzare le funzioni dei messaggi (chiamate in arrivo, contenuti dei messaggi di testo e programmi impostati sul telefono cellulare). „ Media → On / Off E’ possibile indicare se utilizzare la funzione Media per la riproduzione dei contenuti (video, foto, musica) dal cellulare. „ Nome TV E’ possibile impostare il nome del televisore in modo da trovarlo facilmente tramite il dispositivo mobile. N Selezionando Input utente, è possibile digitare il nome del televisore mediante OSK (On Screen Keyboard). Ritorno Esci Centro rete dom 111-1234-5671 : Consent 111-1234-5672 : Consent 111-1234-5673 : Negato 111-1234-5674 : Negato Messag Media Impost Ritorno Esci Centro rete dom Messag : On Media : On Nome TV : TV Messag Media Impost Uso della funzione Messaggio Utilizzando questa funzione, è possibile visualizzare le chiamate in arrivo, i contenuti dei messaggi di testo e i programmi impostati sul cellulare nella finestra degli allarmi mentre si guarda la TV. N Per disabilitare la finestra Messag, impostare Messag su Off alla voce Impost di Centro rete dom. N La finestra degli allarmi appare per 20 secondi. Se non si preme alcun tasto o è selezionata l’opzione Annulla, la finestra appare tre volte a intervalli di 5 minuti. N Se è selezionato OK o se OK non viene selezionato mentre il messaggio viene visualizzato tre volte, il messaggio verrà eliminato. Il messaggio non viene eliminato dal telefono cellulare. N La sola finestra di allarme può essere visualizzata durante l’uso di alcune applicazioni quali Media Play, Contents Library, ecc. In questo caso, per visualizzare il contenuto di un messaggio passare alla modalità di visualizzazione TV. N Quando viene visualizzato il messaggio proveniente da un cellulare sconosciuto, selezionare il cellulare alla voce Messag di Centro rete dom e selezionare Negato per bloccare il cellulare. ❑ Visualizzazione messaggi Se arriva un nuovo messaggio di testo (SMS) mentre si guarda il televisore, viene visualizzata la finestra degli allarmi. Facendo clic su OK viene visualizzato il contenuto del messaggio. N È possibile configurare le impostazioni di visualizzazione per il contenuto dei messaggi di testo (SMS) sul telefono cellulare. Per le procedure, vedere il manuale del cellulare. N Alcuni caratteri speciali possono essere visualizzati come caratteri vuoti o danneggiati. ❑ Allarme chiamata in arrivo Se arriva una chiamata mentre si guarda il televisore, viene visualizzata la finestra degli allarmi. ❑ Allarme programma Mentre si guarda il televisore, la finestra degli allarmi appare per visualizzare il programma registrato. N È possibile configurare le impostazioni di visualizzazione per il contenuto dei programmi sul telefono cellulare. Per le procedure, vedere il manuale del cellulare. N Alcuni caratteri speciali possono essere visualizzati come caratteri vuoti o danneggiati. husband SMS Nuovo messaggio ricevuto Visualizzare i dettagli? OK Cancella BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 62 10/20/2009 4:51:38 PMItaliano - 63 Uso della funzione Media Viene visualizzata una finestra degli allarmi per informare l’utente che i contenuti multimediali (VCR, foto, musica) inviati dal cellulare verranno visualizzati sul televisore. I contenuti vengono riprodotti automaticamente 3 secondi dopo la visualizzazione della finestra degli allarmi. Premendo RETURN o EXIT quando appare la finestra degli allarmi, i Contenuti multimediali non vengono visualizzati. N Per disattivare la trasmissione dei contenuti multimediali dal telefono cellulare, impostare Media su Off nel menu Impost di Centro rete dom. N I contenuti possono non essere riprodotti sul televisore in base alla risoluzione e al formato. ❑ Tasti di controllo di Media Play Tasto Operazioni ◄/► • Sposta il cursore e seleziona una voce. • Durante la riproduzione di un filmato : Scorre in avanti o indietro il filmato. ENTER • Premendo il tasto ENTERE durante una riproduzione, l’esecuzione si interrompe temporaneamente. • Premendo il tasto ENTERE durante una interruzione, la riproduzione viene ripresa. RETURN Ritorna al menu precedente. TOOLS Esegue varie funzioni nei menu Foto, Musica e Film. INFO Mostra le informazioni relative al file. EXIT Interrompe la modalità Media Play e torna alla modalità TV. N I tasti ENTERE e ◄/► potrebbero non funzionare in base al tipo di contenuto multimediale riprodotto. N Mediante il dispositivo mobile è possibile controllare la riproduzione del contenuto multimediale. Per maggiori informazioni, vedere la guida dell’utente di ogni prodotto. Il supporto verrà riprodotto da “Disp sconosciuto 13” BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 63 10/20/2009 4:51:39 PMItaliano - 64 Continua... Funzione Teletext La maggior parte delle emittenti televisive fornisce servizi informativi tramite il servizio Teletext. La pagina dell’indice del servizio Teletext contiene informazioni sull’uso del servizio. Inoltre, è possibile selezionare varie opzioni tramite i tasti del telecomando. N Per ricevere correttamente le informazioni del servizio Teletext, è necessario che la ricezione del canale sia stabile. In caso contrario, alcune informazioni potrebbero essere perse o alcune pagine potrebbero non essere visualizzate correttamente. 1 : (uscita) Esce dalla schermata Teletext. 2 6 (indice) In modalità Teletext, premere questo tasto in qualsiasi momento per visualizzare la pagina dell’indice (contenuti). 3 5 (rivela) Consente di visualizzare il testo nascosto (risposte a quiz, ad esempio). Per tornare alla modalità di visualizzazione normale, premere di nuovo il tasto. 4 4 (dimensione) Premere questo tasto per raddoppiare le dimensioni dei caratteri nella metà superiore dello schermo. Premere di nuovo il tasto per ingrandire i caratteri nella metà inferiore dello schermo. Per tornare alla modalità di visualizzazione normale, premere di nuovo il tasto. 5 / (teletext on/mix) Premere questo tasto per attivare la modalità Teletext dopo avere selezionato un canale che fornisce questo tipo di servizio. Premere di nuovo il tasto per sovrapporre le informazioni del servizio Teletext alla trasmissione corrente. 6 8 (memorizza) Usato per memorizzare le pagine Teletext. 7 1 (pagina secondaria) Usato per visualizzare la pagina secondaria disponibile. 8 2 (pagina su) Usato per visualizzare la pagina Teletext successiva. 9 3 (pagina giù) Usato per visualizzare la pagina Teletext precedente. 0 0 (modalità) Premere questo tasto per selezionare la modalità Teletext (LIST/FLOF). Premendo questo tasto in modalità LIST, si attiva la modalità di salvataggio Elenco. In questa modalità è possibile memorizzare la pagina Teletext all’interno di un elenco utilizzando il tasto 8 (memorizza). ! 9 (mantieni) Consente di mantenere visualizzata una pagina, se la pagina è collegata a più pagine secondarie che scorrono automaticamente. Premerlo nuovamente per riprendere la visualizzazione. @ 7 (annulla) Utilizzato per visualizzare le stazioni emittenti durante la ricerca di una pagina. # Tasti colorati (rosso/verde/giallo/blu) Se una emittente usa il sistema FASTEXT, i vari argomenti trattati in una pagina Teletext vengono codificati in base ai colori e possono essere selezionati premendo i relativi tasti colorati. Premere il tasto il cui colore corrisponde a quello dell’argomento desiderato. La pagina viene visualizzata con altre informazioni colorate che possono essere selezionate allo stesso modo. Per visualizzare la pagina successiva o precedente, premere il tasto colorato corrispondente. N E’ possibile cambiare le pagine teletext premendo i tasti numerici sul telecomando. Consigli per l’uso 1 3 4 5 6 2 7 8 9 0 ! @ # BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 64 10/20/2009 4:51:39 PMItaliano - 65 Le pagine teletext sono organizzate in base a sei categorie : Parte Contenuti A Numero della pagina selezionata. B Identità della stazione emittente. C CNumero della pagina corrente o stato della ricerca. D Data e ora. E Testo. F Informazioni sullo stato. Informazioni FASTE N Le informazioni del servizio Teletext sono spesso suddivise su più pagine visualizzate in sequenza alle quali è possibile accedere come segue : - Digitando il numero di pagina - Selezionando un titolo in un elenco - Selezionando un’intestazione colorata (sistema FASTEXT) O Premere il tasto TV per uscire dal servizio Teletext. Specifiche del kit di supporto a parete (VESA) Installare la staffa su una parete solida perpendicolare al pavimento. Qualora si fissi la staffa ad altri materiali, contattare il rivenditore più vicino.Se installato a soffitto o su una parete inclinata, il prodotto potrebbe cadere e causare gravi danni Famiglia del prodotto pollici Spec. VESA (A * B) Viti Quantità LCD-TV Quantità 100 * 100 M4 4 23"~29" 200 * 100 30"~40" 200 * 200 M6 46"~55" 400 * 400 57"~70" 800 * 400 M8 80" ~ 1400 * 800 PDP-TV 42"~ 50" 400 * 400 M8 4 58"~ 63" 600 * 400 70" ~ 800 * 400 80" ~ 1400 * 800 N Nella tabella sopra sono fornite le dimensioni standard per un kit di montaggio a parete. N In caso di acquisto di un kit di montaggio a parete, verrà fornita insieme una guida dettagliata all’installazione e tutte le parti necessarie per montaggio. N Non utilizzare viti diverse dalle dimensioni standard poiché potrebbero danneggiare l’interno del televisore. N Per i montaggi a parete non conformi alle specifiche delle viti standard VESA, la lunghezza delle viti potrebbe differire in base alle loro specifiche. N Non utilizzare viti non conformi alle specifiche dello standard VESA. Non serrare le viti con troppa forza poiché ciò potrebbe danneggiare il prodotto o causarne la caduta provocando gravi danni. Samsung non può essere ritenuta responsabile per questo tipo di incidenti. N Samsung non può essere ritenuta responsabile per eventuali danni a cose e persone qualora vengano usati kit di montaggio a parete non conformi allo standard VESA o l’utente non segua le istruzioni di installazione fornite. N I nostri modelli da 57 e 63 pollici non sono conformi alle specifiche VESA. Di conseguenza, per tali modelli è necessario utilizzare gli appositi kit di montaggio a parete Samsung. N Non superare i 15 gradi di inclinazione durante il montaggio del televisore. Non installare il Kit di montaggio a parete con il televisore acceso. Ciò potrebbe provocare lesioni personali causate da eventuali scosse elettriche. BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 65 10/20/2009 4:51:39 PMItaliano - 66 Preparazione per l’installazione del kit di montaggio a parete 1. Installare il kit di montaggio a parete applicando una forza di serraggio di 15kgf·cm o inferiore. Le parti potrebbero danneggiarsi applicando una forza di serraggio superiore. 2. Il kit degli accessori contiene un anello di ritenuta [②] per l’installazione del kit di montaggio a parete di terze parti su televisori Samsung. (Caso B) N Avvitare a fondo nel foro [①] durante l’installazione della staffa alla parete. Come assemblare la base a piedistallo Avvertenza Fissare saldamente il piedistallo al televisore prima di spostarlo, poiché potrebbe cadere e causare seri danni. N In caso di spostamento, il televisore deve essere sorretto da due o più persone. Non lasciare mai il televisore appoggiato al pavimento in quanto ciò potrebbe danneggiare lo schermo. Mantenere sempre il televisore in posizione eretta. Usando le viti in dotazione, fissare saldamente il televisore al piedistallo. (L’aspetto dell’unità può variare rispetto all’immagine.) In caso di installazione del televisore a parete, chiudere la copertura (➊) sulla connessione del piedistallo usando le due viti in dotazione per nasconderlo. (PS50B650) (PS58B680/PS63B680) Caso A. Installare il kit di montaggio a parete SAMSUNG Caso B. Installare un kit di montaggio a parete di altra marca BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 66 10/20/2009 4:51:43 PMItaliano - 67 Tirare, spingere o arrampicarsi sul televisore sono azioni che possono provocarne la caduta. Si raccomanda di non far giocare i bambini con il televisore poiché potrebbero appendersi ad esso destabilizzandolo; se ciò dovesse verificarsi, il televisore potrebbe cadere provocando lesioni personali gravi e perfino mortali. Seguire tutte le precauzioni di sicurezza descritte della documentazione allegata. Per una maggiore stabilità e sicurezza del prodotto, installare il dispositivo anticaduta come segue. ❑ Per evitare una eventuale caduta del televisore 1. Avvitare a fondo le viti nei ganci e fissarli alla parete. Verificare che le viti siano state fissate saldamente alla parete. N A seconda del tipo di parete, potrebbe essere necessario utilizzare un tassello. N Poiché i ganci, le viti e il cavo di sicurezza non sono forniti in dotazione, è necessario acquistare tali materiali separatamente. 2. Rimuovere le viti dal centro del pannello posteriore del televisore, inserirle nei ganci, quindi avvitarle nuovamente al televisore. N Le viti potrebbero non essere fornite insieme al prodotto. 3. Collegare i ganci fissati al televisore a quelli fissati alla parete utilizzando un cavo resistente, quindi legarlo con forza. N Installare il televisore il più possibile vicino alla parete in modo che non possa cadere all’indietro. N Collegare il cavo in modo che i ganci fissati alla parete si trovino allineati o leggermente più in basso di quelli fissati al televisore. N Slegare il cavo prima di spostare il televisore. 4. Accertarsi che tutte le connessioni siano adeguatamente fissate. Controllare periodicamente le connessioni per verificarne l’eventuale usura o rottura. Per qualsiasi dubbio relativo alla sicurezza delle connessioni effettuate, contattare un installatore specializzato. Fissaggio del televisore alla parete Messa in sicurezza della posizione di installazione Mantenere le distanze necessarie tra il prodotto e gli altri elementi presenti (per esempio le pareti) per garantire un’adeguata ventilazione. La mancata osservanza di tale precauzione può comportare un pericolo d’incendio o un malfunzionamento a causa del surriscaldamento del prodotto. Installare il prodotto mantenendo le distanze indicate in figura. N Quando si usa un piedistallo o un sistema di montaggio a parete, utilizzare solo le parti fornite da Samsung Electronics - L’uso di parti di altre marche può causare un malfunzionamento o lesioni provocate da una eventuale caduta del prodotto. - L’uso di parti di altre marche può comportare un malfunzionamento o un pericolo di incendio per il surriscaldamento del prodotto a causa di una ventilazione inadeguata. N L’aspetto del prodotto può variare a seconda del modello. „ Durante l’installazione del prodotto con un piedistallo „ Durante l’installazione del prodotto con un sistema di montaggio a parete 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 경고 주의 경고 주의 parete parete BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 67 10/20/2009 4:51:44 PMItaliano - 68 Risoluzione dei problemi In caso di domande sul funzionamento del televisore, consultare per prima cosa l'elenco sottostante. Se nessuno dei consigli sottoriportati si dimostra utile per risolvere il problema, visitare il sito ‘www.samsung.com’, quindi fare clic sulla voce Support (Assistenza), oppure chiamare il numero del Call Center riportato in ultima pagina. N L'aggiornamento del firmware potrebbe essere la prima soluzione possibile. Problema Possibile soluzione Qualità dell'immagine Per prima cosa, eseguire il Test immagine per confermare che il televisore sia in grado di visualizzare correttamente l'immagine di prova. * Selezionare MENU → Supporto → Auto diagnosi → Test Immagine Se l'immagine di prova viene visualizzata correttamente, la scarsa qualità dell'immagine potrebbe essere causata dalla sorgente o dal segnale. La qualità dell'immagine non sembra all'altezza di quella vista in negozio. • Se si dispone di un ricevitore via cavo analogico/Set top box, eseguire l'aggiornamento all'STB. Utilizzare cavi HDMI o Component per ottenere una qualità dell'immagine HD. • Abbonato servizi cavo/satellite : Provare le stazioni HD (High Definition) disponibili attraverso la griglia dei programmi (channel line up). • Connessione antenna Antenna : Provare le stazioni HD dopo avere eseguito il programma automatico. N Molti canali HD trasmettono contenuti SD (Standard Definition) aggiornati. • Impostare la risoluzione di uscita video del ricevitore via cavo/Set top box su 1080i o 720p. L'immagine è distorta: sono visibili blocchi grandi, blocchi piccoli, punti e pixel. • La compressione di contenuti video può causare la distorsione dell'immagine specialmente nel caso di immagini caratterizzate da movimenti rapidi, come per esempio eventi sportivi o film d'azione. • Un segnale debole o di scarsa qualità può causare la distorsione dell'immagine. Questo non è un problema del televisore. Con una connessione Component il colore risulta incongruo o mancante. • Verificare che i cavi Component siano connessi ai rispettivi jack. Connessioni allentate o non corrette possono causare problemi di colore o una schermata vuota. Colore o luminosità delle immagini scadente. • Regolare le opzioni Immagine nel menu TV (Modalità Immagine , Colore, Luminosità, Nitidezza). • Regolare l'opzione Risp. energia nel menu Impostazione. • Provare a reimpostare l'immagine visualizzandola con le impostazioni predefinite. (Selezionare MENU → Immagine → Reset immagine). E' visibile una linea punteggiata sul bordo dello schermo. • Se la dimensione dell'immagine è impostata su Adatta allo schermo, modificarla selezionando 16:9. • Cambiare la risoluzione del ricevitore via cavo/Set top box. L'immagine risulta in bianco e nero solo in caso di ingresso AV (Composite). • Collegare un cavo video (giallo) al jack verde dell'ingresso component 1 del televisore. Quando si cambiano i canali, l'immagine risulta ferma, distorta o in ritardo. • Se il prodotto è connesso a un ricevitore via cavo, reimpostare il ricevitore. (Riconnettere il cavo CA e attendere fino al riavvio del ricevitore. L'operazione potrebbe richiedere fino a 20 minuti di tempo) • Impostare la risoluzione di uscita del ricevitore via cavo su 1080i o 720p. Qualità audio Per prima cosa, eseguire il Test audio per confermare che l'impianto audio del televisore funzioni in modo appropriato. * Selezionare MENU → Supporto → Auto diagnosi → Test audio Se l'audio è OK, il problema potrebbe essere causato dalla sorgente o dal segnale. L'audio non viene riprodotto oppure il livello del volume risulta troppo basso anche se impostato al valore massimo. • Verificare il volume del dispositivo (ricevitore via cavo/satellitare, lettore DVD, Blu-ray, ecc) collegato al televisore. Quindi, regolare il volume del televisore di conseguenza. L'immagine è buona ma senza audio. • Impostare l'opzione Seleziona altoparlante su Altoparlante TV nel menu Suono. • Verificare che i cavi audio provenienti dal dispositivo esterno siano connessi ai rispettivi jack di ingresso audio sul televisore. • Verificare l'opzione di uscita audio del dispositivo connesso. Per es.) Potrebbe essere necessario cambiare l'opzione del ricevitore via cavo in HDMI in caso di collegamento HDMI al TV. • Se si usa un cavo DVI-HDMI, è necessario utilizzare un cavo audio separato. • Disattivare la funzione SRS se è stato impostato il volume oltre il valore 30. • Scollegare lo spinotto dal jack della cuffia (se disponibile sul televisore). Rumore proveniente dall'altoparlante. • Verificare le connessioni dei cavi. Verificare che i cavi video non siano connessi a un ingresso audio. • Per le connessioni Antenna/Cavo, verificare l'intensità del segnale. Un segnale basso può causare la distorsione dell'audio. Continua... BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 68 10/20/2009 4:51:44 PMItaliano - 69 Problema Possibile soluzione Nessuna immagine, video spento Il televisore non si accende. • Verificare che la spina del cavo di alimentazione CA sia correttamente collegata a una presa a muro e il televisore sia acceso. • Accertarsi che la presa a muro sia funzionante. • Premere il tasto Power sul televisore per verificare che il telecomando funzioni correttamente. Se il televisore si accende, il problema potrebbe essere causato dal telecomando. Per risolvere il problema causato dal telecomando, consultare il paragrafo sottostante ‘Il telecomando non funziona’. Il televisore si spegne automaticamente. • Verificare che l'opzione Timer stand-by sia impostata su On nel menu Impostazione. • Se il televisore è collegato al PC, verificare le impostazioni di alimentazione del PC. • Verificare che la spina del cavo di alimentazione CA sia correttamente collegata a una presa a muro e il televisore sia acceso. • Se il televisore non riceve segnale per circa 10 ~ 15 minuti con una connessione Antenna/Cavo, il televisore si spegne. Nessuna immagine/Video. • Verificare le connessioni dei cavi. (scollegare e ricollegare tutti i cavi del televisore e dei dispositivi esterni) • Impostare l'uscita video del dispositivo esterno (ricevitore via cavo/STB, lettore DVD, Blu-ray, ecc) in modo che le connessioni corrispondano all'ingresso del televisore. Per esempio, uscita del dispositivo esterno: HDMI, ingresso TV: HDMI. • Verificare che il dispositivo collegato sia acceso. • Selezionare la corretta sorgente del televisore premendo il tasto SOURCE sul telecomando TV. • Riavviare il dispositivo dopo aver scollegato e ricollegato la spina di alimentazione. Connessione RF (Cavo/Antenna) Impossibile ricevere tutti i canali. • Verificare che il cavo Antenna sia correttamente collegato. • Provare a impostare Plug & Play per aggiungere i canali disponibili all'elenco canali. Selezionare MENU → Impostazione → Plug & Play e attendere che tutti i canali disponibili vengano memorizzati. • Verificare che l'antenna sia posizionata correttamente. L'immagine è distorta: sono visibili blocchi grandi, blocchi piccoli, punti e pixel. • La compressione di contenuti video può causare la distorsione dell'immagine specialmente nel caso di immagini caratterizzate da movimenti rapidi, come per esempio eventi sportivi o film d'azione. • Un segnale basso può causare la distorsione dell'immagine. Questo non è un problema del televisore. Connessione PC Messaggio ‘Modo non supportato’. • Impostare la risoluzione di uscita e la frequenza del PC in modo che corrispondano alle risoluzioni supportate dal televisore. Nell'elenco sorgenti, il PC è sempre evidenziato anche se non è connesso. • E' normale; nell'elenco sorgenti, il PC risulta sempre evidenziato anche quando non è collegato. La riproduzione del video è corretta ma manca l'audio con una connessione HDMI. • Verificare l'impostazione di uscita audio sul PC. Connessione di rete Mancata connessione di rete wireless. • Per la rete wireless, è necessario utilizzare il dongle USB wireless di Samsung. • Verificare che l'opzione Tipo di rete sia impostata su Wireless. • Il televisore deve essere collegato a un router IP wireless. Altri L'immagine non viene riprodotta a pieno schermo. • Quando si guardano contenuti SD (4:3) aggiornati per la trasmissione su canali HD, appaiono barre nere su ogni lato dello schermo. • Quando vengono trasmessi film con un rapporto d'immagine diverso da quello del televisore, appaiono barre nere sui lati superiore e inferiore dello schermo. • Regolare la dimensione dell'immagine sul dispositivo esterno o sul televisore per visualizzare l'immagine a pieno schermo. Il telecomando non funziona. • Sostituire le batterie del telecomando rispettando la polarità (+ -). • Pulire la finestra di trasmissione posizionata in cima al telecomando. • Puntare il telecomando direttamente verso il televisore a una distanza di 1,5~2 metri. Continua... BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 69 10/20/2009 4:51:45 PMItaliano - 70 Problema Possibile soluzione Il televisore al plasma emette un rumore fastidioso. • Tipicamente, i televisori al plasma emettono un leggero ronzio. Ciò è normale. Questo rumore è causato dalle cariche elettriche utilizzate per creare le immagini sullo schermo. • Tuttavia, se il ronzio è intenso, è possibile che sia stata impostata una luminosità dello schermo troppo elevata. Impostare un livello di luminosità inferiore. • E’ inoltre possibile avvertire un ronzio intenso anche quando il pannello posteriore del televisore al plasma si trova troppo vicino alla parete o a un’altra superficie solida. Provare inoltre a posizionare diversamente i cavi di collegamento. • Una installazione impropria del sistema di montaggio a parete può creare un rumore eccessivo. Ritenzione dell’immagine (bruciatura dello schermo). • Per ridurre il rischio di incorrere nella bruciatura dello schermo, questa unità è dotata di una speciale tecnologia. La tecnologia di spostamento dei pixel permette di impostare lo spostamento delle immagini verso l’alto e verso il basso (in linea verticale) e lateralmente (punti orizzontali). Impossibile controllare il volume o le funzioni di accensione/spegnimento del televisore con il telecomando del ricevitore via cavo/STB. • Programmare il telecomando del ricevitore via cavo/Set topbox in modo che possa controllare le funzioni del televisore. Consultare il manuale dell'utente del ricevitore via cavo/satellitare per il codice TV SAMSUNG. Messaggio ‘Modo non supportato’. • Verificare la risoluzione del televisore supportata e regolare di conseguenza la risoluzione di uscita del dispositivo esterno. Consultare la sezione di questo manuale relativa all'impostazione della risoluzione. Impossibile disattivare l’opzione Effetto luce sulla cornice anteriore (sotto il logo SAMSUNG) • Regolare l’opzione Effetto luce nel menu Impostazione. Le opzioni sono : Off, Mod StdBy ON, Mod visione ON e Sempre. • Non tutti i modelli supportano l’opzione Effetto luce. Il televisore emana odore di plastica. • Ciò è normale, tuttavia l'odore svanirà nel corso del tempo. L'opzione Potenza del segnale del televisore non è disponibile nel menu Test di autodiagnosi. • Questa funzione è disponibile solo con canali digitali e connessione antenna (RF/ Coax). Il televisore è inclinato verso destra o sinistra. • Rimuovere il piedistallo dal televisore quindi rimontarlo. Impossibile montare il piedistallo. • Verificare che il televisore sia posizionato su una superficie piana. Se non si riesce a rimuovere le viti dal televisore, utilizzare un cacciavite con punta magnetica. Il menu Canale è in colore grigio (non disponibile). • Il menu Canale è disponibile solo se è selezionata la sorgente del televisore. Le impostazioni andranno perse dopo 30 minuti o a ogni spegnimento del televisore. • Se il televisore è in modalità Demo Negozio, ogni 30 minuti verranno azzerate le impostazioni audio e immagine. Commutare la modalità Demo Negozio in Uso dom. secondo la procedura Plug & Play. Premere il tasto SOURCE per selezionare la modalità TV , quindi selezionare MENU → Impostazione → Plug & Play → ENTER Perdita intermittente di segnale audio o video. • Verificare le connessioni e ricollegare i cavi. • Questo problema potrebbe essere causato dall'uso di cavi troppo grossi o rigidi. Verificare che i cavi siano sufficientemente flessibili da consentire un uso prolungato nel tempo. In caso di montaggio a parete, si consiglia di utilizzare cavi con connettori da 90°. Guardando da vicino il bordo della cornice dello schermo del televisore è possibile notare delle piccole particelle. • Ciò non costituisce un difetto ma fa parte del design del prodotto. Il menu PIP non è disponibile. • La funzione PIP è disponibile solo quando il segnale proviene da una sorgente HDMI, PC o component. ‘Segnale criptato’ o ‘Segnale debole o assente’ con la scheda (CI/CI+) CAM • Verificare che nel modulo CAM la SCHEDA CI (CI+) sia installata nell'alloggiamento common interface. • Ciò è normale, il televisore è dotato della funzione OTA (Over The Air) che permette di aggiornare il firmware scaricato durante la visione del televisore. Immagini/audio ricorrenti. • Verificare e modificare il segnale/la sorgente. N Alcune delle immagini e funzioni sopra riportate sono disponibili solo per determinati modelli. BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 70 10/20/2009 4:51:45 PMItaliano - 71 Specifiche Le descrizioni e le caratteristiche riportate in questa guida vengono fornite a puro scopo informativo e sono soggette a modifiche senza preavviso. Nome modello PS50B650 PS58B680 PS63B680 Dimensione schermo (Diagonale) 50 pollici 58 pollici 63 pollici Risoluzione PC (Ottimale) 1920 x 1080 @ 60 Hz 1920 x 1080 @ 60 Hz 1920 x 1080 @ 60 Hz Audio (Uscita) 10 W x 2 15 W x 2 15 W x 2 Dimensioni (LxAxP) Corpo Senza piedistallo 1240 x 756 x 74 mm 1240 x 817 x 290 mm 1401 x 848 x 74 mm 1401 x 917 x 335 mm 1531 x 932 x 74 mm 1531 x 957 x 390 mm Peso Corpo Con piedistallo 33 kg 38 kg 39 kg 46 kg 53 kg 61 kg Considerazioni ambientali Temperatura operativa Umidità operativa Temperatura di stoccaggio Umidità di stoccaggio 50 °F a 104 °F (10 °C a 40 °C) 10% a 80%, senza condensa -4 °F a 113 °F (-20 °C a 45 °C) 5% a 95%, senza condensa N Questo prodotto è un’apparecchiatura digitale di Classe B. N Design e specifiche sono soggetti a modifiche senza preavviso. N Per l’alimentazione elettrica e il consumo di corrente, consultare l’etichetta apposta al prodotto. BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 71 10/20/2009 4:51:45 PMItaliano - 72 Schema blocco BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 72 10/20/2009 4:51:46 PMSpanish - 2 Instrucciones para el usuario „ Retención de la imagen en pantalla No visualice una imagen fija (como las de un videojuego o cuando la PDP está conectada a un PC) en el panel del monitor de plasma durante más de 2 horas porque podría causar la retención de imagen en pantalla. Este fenómeno de retención de imágenes también se denomina “quemadura de pantalla”. Para evitar que se produzca esa persistencia de la imagen, reduzca el nivel de brillo y de contraste de la pantalla cuando muestre imágenes fijas. „ Altitud La PDP puede funcionar normalmente hasta altitudes de 2.000 metros. No la instale ni utilice en lugares que se encuentren a más de 2.000 metros de altitud porque el funcionamiento podría ser irregular. „ Calor en la parte superior del televisor PDP La parte superior del aparato puede calentarse tras un uso prolongado ya que el calor se disipa desde el panel a través de los orificios de ventilación de la sparte superior del aparato. Esto es normal y no indica ningún defecto ni fallo de funcionamiento del aparato. No obstante, debe evitarse que los niños toquen la parte superior del aparato. „ El aparato emite una especie de crujido. Este ruido puede producirse cuando el aparato se contrae o se expande debido a un cambio ambiental de temperatura o humedad. Este hecho es normal y no se trata de ningún defecto en la unidad. „ Defectos de celda La PDP utiliza un panel compuesto de 2.360.000 (nivel HD) a 6.221.000 (nivel FHD) píxeles que requieren una sofisticada tecnología para su producción. No obstante, puede que existan unos cuantos píxeles brillantes u oscuros en la pantalla. Estos píxeles no influirán en el rendimiento del aparato. „ Evite que el TV funcione a temperaturas por debajo de 5°C(41°F) „ La visualización prolongada de una imagen fija puede originar daños permanentes en el panel de la pantalla PDP. Ver el televisor PDP en formato 4:3 durante un tiempo prolongado puede dejar rastros de bordes en las partes izquierda, derecha o central de la pantalla causados por la diferencia de emisión de luz en la pantalla. La reproducción de un DVD o el uso de una consola de videojuegos pueden provocar un efecto similar en la pantalla. Los daños provocados por los efectos mencionados no quedan cubiertos por la garantía. „ Restos de imágenes en pantalla. Ver imágenes fijas de videojuegos y PC durante más tiempo del indicado puede producir restos de imágenes parciales. Para evitar este efecto, reduzca el ‘brillo’ y el ‘contraste’ cuando vea imágenes fijas. „ Garantía - La garantía no cubre ningún daño causado por la retención de imágenes. - La garantía no cubre el desgaste de la pantalla. „ Instalación Póngase en contacto con un centro de servicio técnico autorizado cuando instale el equipo en un lugar expuesto a gran cantidad de polvo, temperaturas extremas, alto nivel de humedad y productos químicos, y en lugares donde se vaya a utilizar continuamente, como aeropuertos, estaciones, etc. El incumplimiento de estas indicaciones puede causar serios desperfectos en el equipo. Nota sobre la TV digital 1. Las funciones relacionadas con la TV digital (DVB) sólo están disponibles en países o regiones donde se emitan señales terrestres digitales DVB-T (MPEG2 y MPEG4 AVC) o donde se tenga acceso a servicios de televisión por cable compatibles con DVB-C (MPEG2 y MPEG4 AAC). Póngase en contacto con su distribuidor para conocer si puede recibir señales DVB-T o DVB-C. 2. DVB-T es una norma del consorcio europeo para la transmisión de la televisión digital terrestre y DVB-C lo es para la transmisión de la televisión digital por cable. Sin embargo, en esta especificación no se incluyen algunas funciones diferenciadas, como EPG (Guía electrónica de programas), VOD (Vídeo a la carta) y otras. Por ello, en estos momentos aún no se admiten. 3. Este equipo de televisión cumple las más actuales normas de DVB-T y DVB-C [agosto de 2008], pero no se garantiza la compatibilidad con futuras emisiones de televisión digital terrestre DVB-T y por cable DVB-C. 4. Algunos proveedores de la televisión por cable pueden cobrar un pago adicional por algunos servicios y pueden exigir al usuario su aceptación de los términos y condiciones de su empresa. 5. Algunas funciones de televisión digital pueden no estar disponibles en algunos países o regiones; asimismo DVB-C puede no funcionar correctamente con todos los proveedores. 6. Para obtener más información, póngase en contacto con su centro de atención al cliente de Samsung. Contacte con SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE Si tiene cualquier comentario o pregunta referentes a los productos Samsung, póngase en contacto con el Centro de atención al cliente de SAMSUNG. (Consulte la cubierta posterior para obtener más información.) N Las ilustraciones de este manual de usuario se proporcionan sólo como referencia y pueden ser diferentes del producto real. El diseño y las especificaciones del producto se pueden cambiar sin previo aviso para mejorar el rendimiento del producto. © 2009 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Reservados todos los derechos. BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 2 10/20/2009 5:02:17 PMSpanish - 3 Spanish N O T Símbolos Pulse Nota Botón de una pulsación TOOLS Contenido Conexión y preparación del televisor ■ Comprobación de los componentes..........................................4 ■ Uso del soporte .........................................................................4 ■ Soporte de cables .....................................................................4 ■ Aspecto general del panel de control........................................5 ■ Aspecto general del panel de conexiones.................................6 ■ Mando a distancia .....................................................................8 ■ Instalación de las pilas en el mando a distancia .......................8 ■ Uso de los botones con luz de fondo del mando a distancia ....9 ■ Encendido y apagado................................................................9 ■ Cómo poner el televisor en modo de espera ............................9 ■ Visualización de la pantalla .......................................................9 ■ Visualización de los menús .....................................................10 ■ Uso del botón TOOLS ............................................................10 ■ Función Plug & Play ................................................................10 Control de los canales ■ Memorización de los canales ................................................ 11 ■ Gestión de los canales ............................................................13 Control de la imagen ■ Cambio de la configuración de la imagen ...............................15 ■ Ajuste del televisor con el ordenador ......................................18 ■ Pantalla de PC ........................................................................19 Control del sonido ■ Cambio del estándar de sonido...............................................20 ■ Selección del modo de sonido ................................................21 Descripción de las funciones ■ Configuración de la hora .........................................................22 ■ Configuración del menú de configuración...............................23 ■ Visualización PIP (Imagen en imagen)....................................25 Asistencia técnica / Entrada ■ Programa admitido ..................................................................26 ■ Fuentes / Editar nombre..........................................................27 Red ■ Conexión de la red ..................................................................28 ■ Configuración de la red ...........................................................30 Media Play ■ Conexión de un dispositivo USB.............................................33 ■ Uso de la función Media Play..................................................34 ■ Clasificación de la lista de fotos/música/películas...................35 ■ Menús de opciones de la lista de fotos/música/películas........36 ■ Menús de opciones de las presentaciones y la reproducción de música y películas ..............................................................37 ■ Visualización de una foto o una presentación.........................38 ■ Reproducción de música.........................................................39 ■ Reproducción de un archivo de película ................................40 ■ Uso del menú de configuración...............................................41 Media Play-DLNA ■ Configuración de la red DLNA.................................................42 ■ Instalación de la aplicación DLNA...........................................42 ■ Uso de la aplicación DLNA......................................................43 ■ Uso de la función DLNA..........................................................44 Acerca de Anynet+ ■ Conexión de dispositivos Anynet+...........................................45 ■ Configuración de Anynet+ ......................................................46 ■ Conmutación entre dispositivos Anynet+ ................................46 ■ Grabación................................................................................47 ■ Escucha a través de un receptor.............................................48 ■ Solución de problemas de Anynet+.........................................48 Content Library ■ Activación de la Content Library..............................................49 ■ Uso de la Content Library........................................................50 Internet@TV ■ Primeros pasos con Internet@TV ...........................................51 ■ Edición del extracto en el acoplamiento..................................53 ■ Uso del widget de un perfil ......................................................53 ■ Uso de la galería de widgets de Yahoo!® ...............................54 ■ Uso del servicio meteorológico de Yahoo!®............................54 ■ Uso del servicio de noticias de Yahoo!® .................................55 ■ Uso del servicio Filckr de Yahoo!®..........................................55 ■ Uso del servicio de finanzas de Yahoo!®................................56 ■ Solución de problemas de internet@TV..................................56 ■ Help Website ...........................................................................57 Internet@TV ■ Primeros pasos con Internet@TV ...........................................58 ■ Configuración de Internet@TV................................................58 ■ Uso del servicio Internet@TV..................................................59 ■ Solución de problemas con Internet@TV................................60 ■ Página web de ayuda..............................................................60 Centro de red doméstica ■ Centro de red doméstica .........................................................61 ■ Configuración del Centro de red doméstica ............................62 ■ Uso de la función de mensajería.............................................62 ■ Uso de la función multimedia ..................................................63 Recomendaciones de uso ■ Función de teletexto ................................................................64 ■ Especificaciones del equipo de montaje en la pared (VESA)........65 ■ Preparación para instalar el montaje mural.............................66 ■ Cómo montar el soporte base .................................................66 ■ Fijación del televisor a la pared...............................................67 ■ Seguridad en el espacio de instalación...................................67 ■ Identificación de problemas.....................................................68 ■ Especificaciones......................................................................71 BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 3 10/20/2009 5:02:18 PMSpanish - 4 Soporte de cables Sujete los cables con el soporte de cables para que éstos no sean visibles a través del soporte transparente. Uso del soporte N La PDP la deben transportar dos o más personas. No deje nunca la PDP en el suelo, porque es posible que se dañe la pantalla. Mantenga siempre la PDP en posición vertical. N La PDP se puede girar 20 grados a derecha e izquierda. -20° ~ 20° Comprobación de los componentes Manual de instrucciones Mando a distancia/ Pilas AAA (2 unid.) Cable de alimentación Paño de limpieza Soporte de cables Soporte - Anilla (4 unid.) (Consulte la página 66) CD del programa Tornillos (4 unid.) (sólo PS50B650) (Consulte la página 66) Cubierta inferior (sólo PS50B650) (Consulte la página 66) Cubierta inferior/ Tornillos (2 unid.) (sólo PS58B680 / PS63B680) (Consulte la página 66) Núcleo de ferrita para el cable de los auriculares Núcleo de ferrita para cable de alimentación (sólo PS58B680T6P / PS63B680) Núcleo de ferrita para cable de alimentación Tarjeta de garantía/ Guía de seguridad (no disponible en todos los lugares) N Núcleo de ferrita El núcleo de ferrita se utiliza para proteger los cables de las interferencias. Cuando conecte un cable, abra el núcleo de ferrita y sujételo al cable cerca del enchufe, tal como se muestra en la ilustración. Conexión y preparación del televisor (PS58B680T6P / PS63B680 sólo) BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 4 10/20/2009 5:02:22 PMSpanish - 5 Aspecto general del panel de control N El color y la forma del producto pueden variar según el modelo. Botones del panel frontal Toque cada botón para activar la función. (PS58B680 / PS63B680) (PS50B650) 1 SOURCE Cambia entre todas las fuentes de entrada disponibles (TV, Ext1, Ext2, AV, Componente, PC, HDMI1, HDMI2/DVI, HDMI3, HDMI4, USB). N En el menú en pantalla, utilice este botón como lo haría con el botón ENTER del mando a distancia. 2 MENU Púlselo para ver en pantalla un menú de las características del televisor. 3 + – Púlselos para subir o bajar el volumen. En el menú de la pantalla, use los botones + – del mismo modo que los botones ◄ y ► del mando a distancia. 4 CH Permiten cambiar de canal. En el menú de la pantalla, use los botones g CH f del mismo modo que los botones ▲ y ▼ del mando a distancia. Puede usar el botón g CH f para encender el televisor sin el mando a distancia. 5 INDICADOR DE ENCENDIDO Parpadea y se apaga cuando se enciende el aparato y se ilumina en el modo en espera. 6 (POWER) Púlselo para encender o apagar el TV. 7 SENSOR DEL MANDO A DISTANCIA El mando a distancia debe dirigirse hacia este punto del televisor. 8 ALTAVOCES BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 5 10/20/2009 5:02:22 PMSpanish - 6 Aspecto general del panel de conexiones N Cuando conecte un dispositivo externo, debe hacer coincidir los colores del terminal de conexión y del cable. N Al conectar un sistema de audio o vídeo al aparato, asegúrese de que todos los elementos están apagados. N El color y la forma del producto pueden variar según el modelo. 1 LAN Conecte un cable LAN a este puerto para conectarse a la red. 2 POWER IN Conexión al cable de alimentación suministrado. 3 COMPONENT IN Entradas de audio (AUDIO L/R) y vídeo (Y/PB /PR) para componentes. 4 PC IN (AUDIO / PC) Conexión para el terminal de salida de vídeo y audio del PC. 5 EXT 1, EXT 2 Terminales de entrada o salida para dispositivos externos, como aparatos de vídeo, reproductores de DVD, consolas de videojuegos o reproductores de videodiscos. Especificación de entrada/ salida N En el modo EXT, DTV sólo admite Vídeo y Audio SD MPEG. N En el modo EXT, Modo Juego no está disponible. Especificación de entrada/salida Conector Entrada Salida Video Audio(L/R) RGB Video + Audio(L/R) EXT 1 ✔ ✔ ✔ Sólo está disponible la salida de TV o DTV. EXT 2 ✔ ✔ La salida que puede elegir. 6 AURICULARES Puede conectar unos auriculares si desea ver un programa de televisión sin molestar a las personas que están en la misma habitación. N El uso continuado de auriculares a un volumen elevado puede dañar la capacidad auditiva. 7 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) Se conecta al componente de audio digital. 8 SERVICE Conector para servicio. 9 AUDIO OUT(AUDIO R/L) Puede conectar las señales de audio RCA desde el televisor a una fuente externa, como un equipo de audio. 0 ANT IN Conector coaxial de 75 Ω para antena o red por cable. ! HDMI IN 1, 2(DVI), 3 No se necesita conexión de audio adicional para una conexión de HDMI a HDMI. - Cuando se usa una conexión de cable HDMI/DVI, se debe conectar en el terminal HDMI IN 2(DVI). N ¿Qué es HDMI? - La interfaz multimedia de alta definición (HDMI según sus siglas en inglés) permite la transmisión de los datos de vídeo digital de alta definición y varios canales de sonido digital. - El terminal HDMI/DVI admite la conexión DVI con un dispositivo ampliado mediante el cable apropiado (no suministrado). La diferencia entre los dispositivos HDMI y DVI es que el HDMI es más pequeño, tiene instalada la función de codificación HDCP (protección alta de la copia digital del ancho de banda) y es compatible con el sonido digital de varios canales. DVI AUDIO IN Salidas de audio DVI para dispositivos externos. Modos compatibles con HDMI/DVI y componentes 480i 480p 576i 576p 720p 1080i 1080p HDMI/DVI 50Hz X X X O O O O HDMI/DVI 60Hz X O X X O O O Componente O O O O O O O TV Panel posterior Red de televisión por cable o o 2 3 4 5 7 9 ! 0 6 8 1 BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 6 10/20/2009 5:02:25 PMSpanish - 7 1 Ranura COMMON INTERFACE Inserte la tarjeta CI(CI+) (Interfaz común) en la ranura. (Consulte la página 23) - Si no se inserta una TARJETA CI(CI+) con algunos canales, en la pantalla aparece Señal codificada. - En 2 o 3 minutos aparecerá en la pantalla la información del enlace que contiene un número telefónico, un identificador de TARJETA CI(CI+), un identificador del sistema y demás información. Si aparece un mensaje de error, póngase en contacto con su proveedor de servicios. - Si ha terminado la configuración de la información del canal, aparecerá el mensaje Actualiz. completa, que indica que la lista de canales ya se ha actualizado. - Según el modelo, puede que aparezca un mensaje solicitándole la contraseña de Parental Lock al volver a insertar la tarjeta CI. - Según el modelo, aunque Parental Lock esté configurado como Allow All, puede que aparezca un mensaje solicitándole la contraseña para los programas dirigidos a adultos (más de 18 años). N Inserte la tarjeta CI(CI+) en la dirección marcada sobre ella. N La ‘TARJETA CI(CI+)’ no se admite en algunos países, zonas o emisoras; consulte a su distribuidor local. N La función CI(CI+) sólo se aplica al modelo PS********P. Si tiene algún problema, póngase en contacto con el proveedor del servicio. 2 USB 1(HDD), USB 2 Conexión para un dispositivo de almacenamiento masivo USB para ver archivos de fotos (JPEG) y reproducir archivos de audio (MP3) y de películas. Puede conectarse a la red inalámbrica de SAMSUNG. El terminal USB 1 también se usa como terminal HDD. HDD (unidad de disco duro) es un dispositivo que almacena datos codificados digitalmente. 3 HDMI IN 4 Conexión para el terminal HDMI de un dispositivo que tenga salida HDMI. 4 AV IN (VIDEO, AUDIO L/R) Se conecta a las entradas de vídeo y audio para dispositivos externos, como una videocámara o un aparato de vídeo. N El color y la forma del producto pueden variar según el modelo. TV Panel posterior 3 4 1 2 BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 7 10/20/2009 5:02:27 PMSpanish - 8 Mando a distancia Puede utilizar el mando a una distancia del televisor de hasta 23 metros. N El exceso de luz puede influir en el rendimiento del mando a distancia. Instalación de las pilas en el mando a distancia 1. Levante la tapa de la parte posterior del mando a distancia, como se muestra en la ilustración. 2. Inserte dos pilas de tamaño AAA. N Compruebe que los extremos ‘+’ y ‘–’ de las pilas concuerdan con el diagrama del interior del compartimiento. 3. Cierre la tapa. N Si no va a utilizar el mando a distancia durante mucho tiempo, quite las pilas y guárdelas en un lugar fresco y seco. N Si el mando a distancia no funciona, haga estas comprobaciones 1. ¿Está encendido el TV? 2. ¿Están intercambiados los polos positivos y negativos de las pilas? 3. ¿Se han agotado las pilas? 4. ¿Ha habido un corte de luz o el cable está desconectado? 5. ¿Hay un fluorescente o un neón a poca distancia? 1 Botón POWER (enciende y apaga el televisor) 2 Selecciona directamente el modo TV. 3 Botones numéricos para acceso directo a los canales. 4 Pulse este botón para sintonizar sus canales favoritos. 5 Interrupción momentánea del sonido. 6 Subir el volumen Bajar el volumen 7 Selección de fuente disponible. 8 Se utiliza para ver información sobre la emisión actual. 9 Permite seleccionar rápidamente las funciones que se usan con mayor frecuencia. 0 Se usan para seleccionar los elementos del menú en pantalla y cambiar los valores del menú. ! Esta función permite ver Internet@TV. @ Utilice estos botones en la Lista de canales, Media Play, o Internet@TV etc. $ Se usa para mostrar las listas de canales en la pantalla. % Use estos botones en la Lista de canales, Media Play y Anynet + . ^ Esta función es útil cuando se usa el mando a distancia de noche o en una sala oscura. (El uso del mando a distancia con los botones de iluminación ON / OFF ( ) activados reduce el tiempo de uso de las pilas.) & Canal anterior * Canal siguiente Canal anteriorl. ( Muestra el menú de pantalla principal. ) Visualización de la Guía electrónica de programas (EPG). a Vuelve al menú anterior. b Salir del menú en pantalla. c Esta función permite ver Media Play. d Esta función permite ver la Biblioteca de contenidos. e Visualización de subtítulos digitales. f Selección de la descripción de audio. Funciones del teletexto 2 Sale del teletexto (según los modelos) 7 Selección del modo de teletexto (LIST/FLOF) 8 Mostrar el teletexto 9 Tamaño del teletexto @ Selección de tema de Fastext # Visualización de teletexto/mezclar información de teletexto y emisión normal $ Memorizar teletexto & Página secundaria de teletexto * P : Página siguiente del teletexto P : Página de teletexto anterior ( Índice del teletexto a Teletexto en espera b Cancelar teletexto BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 8 10/20/2009 5:02:28 PMSpanish - 9 Visualización de la pantalla La pantalla identifica el canal actual y el estado de algunos ajustes de audio-vídeo. O Pulse el botón INFO para ver la información. Pulse el botón INFO del mando a distancia. El televisor mostrará el canal, el tipo de sonido y el estado de ciertos ajustes de imagen y sonido. • ▲, ▼ : Puede ver otra información del canal. Si desea ir al canal actualmente seleccionado, pulse el botón ENTERE. • ◄, ►: Puede ver la información de programas del canal actual. N Pulse el botón INFO otra vez o espere unos 10 segundos; la información desaparecerá automáticamente. Uso de los botones con luz de fondo del mando a distancia Use esta función en un entorno oscuro donde no sea posible ver los botones del mando a distancia con claridad. 1. Pulse el botón de iluminación ON/OFF( ) N Si está en ON, la iluminación del botón se enciende durante unos momentos. N Si se pulsa un botón del mando a distancia cuando éste está activado, la iluminación del botón se enciende durante unos momentos. Encendido y apagado El cable de alimentación se conecta a la parte trasera del televisor. 1. Enchufe el cable de alimentación en una toma eléctrica adecuada. N El indicador del modo de espera se enciende en el equipo. 2. Pulse el botón POWER P del equipo. N También puede pulsar el botón POWER P o el botón TV del mando a distancia para encender el televisor. N El programa que estaba viendo por última vez se vuelve a seleccionar de forma automática. 3. Pulse los botones numéricos (0~9) o de canales arriba/abajo (< / >) del mando a distancia o el botón g < CH> f del equipo. N Cuando encienda el equipo por primera vez, se le pedirá que elija el idioma en el que quiere que aparezcan los menús. 4. Para apagar el televisor, vuelva a pulsar el botón POWER P. Cómo poner el televisor en modo de espera El aparato puede ponerse en modo de espera para reducir el consumo eléctrico. El modo de espera es muy útil si desea interrumpir la visualización momentáneamente (durante la comida, por ejemplo). 1. Pulse el botón POWER P del mando a distancia. N La pantalla se apaga y aparece un indicador de modo de espera rojo en el equipo. 2. Para volver a encender el equipo, pulse de nuevo los botones POWER P, numéricos (0~9), TV o de canal arriba/abajo (< / >). N No deje el aparato en modo de espera durante períodos largos de tiempo (cuando está de vacaciones, por ejemplo). Lo más conveniente es desenchufar el aparato de la red eléctrica y de la antena. DTV Air 15 abc1 18:00 ~ 6:00 18:11 Thu 6 Jan Life On Venus Avenue Unclassified No Detaild Information E Watch ' Information BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 9 10/20/2009 5:02:29 PMSpanish - 10 Visualización de los menús 1. Con el aparato encendido, pulse el botón MENU. En la pantalla aparece el menú principal. En el lado izquierdo del menú hay los iconos : Imagen, Sonido, Canal, Configuración, Entrada, Aplicación, Asistencia técnica. 2. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar un icono. Después pulse el botón ENTERE para acceder al submenú del icono. 3. Pulse el botón EXIT para salir. N Pasado aproximadamente un minuto, los menús de la pantalla desaparecen. Uso del botón TOOLS Se puede usar el botón TOOLS para seleccionar rápida y fácilmente las funciones que se usan con más frecuencia. El menú Herramientas cambia según el modo de entrada externo que se está viendo. 1. Pulse el botón TOOLS. Aparece el menú Herramientas. 2. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar un menú y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. 3. Pulse los botones ▲ / ▼ / ◄ / ► / ENTEREpara mostrar, cambiar o activar los elementos seleccionados. Para ver una descripción más detallada de cada función, consulte la página correspondiente. • Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC), Consulte la página 46 • Tamaño de imagen, Consulte la página 16 • Modo imagen, Consulte la página 15 • Modo de sonido, Consulte la página 20 • Temp. desc., Consulte la página 22 • SRS TS HD, Consulte la página 20 • Ahorro energía, Consulte la página 24 • Dual l ll, Consulte la página 21 • Añadir a Favoritos (o Borrar de Favoritos), Consulte la página 14 • PIP, Consulte la página 25 • Ajuste automático, Consulte la página 18 Función Plug & Play Cuando el televisor se enciende por primera vez, los valores se inician correlativamente de forma automática. N El salvapantallas se activa si durante más de 1 minuto no hay ninguna entrada desde el teclado del mando a distancia mientras Plug & Play está en ejecución. N El salvapantallas se activa si durante más de 15 minutos no se detecta ninguna señal de funcionamiento. N Si accidentalmente selecciona un país erróneo para su televisor, puede que los caracteres de la pantalla se vean de manera incorrecta. 1. Pulse el botón POWER del mando a distancia. El menú Select the OSD Language se muestra automáticamente. Seleccione el idioma con los botones ▲ o ▼. Pulse el botón ENTERE para confirmar la elección. 2. Pulse los botones ◄ o ► para seleccionar Demo tienda o Uso doméstico y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. N Es recomendable configurar el televisor en el modo Uso doméstico para obtener la mejor imagen en un entorno doméstico. N El modo Demo tienda sólo es necesario en los entornos comerciales. N Si la unidad accidentalmente se configura en el modo Demo tienda y se desea volver a Uso doméstico (estándar) : Pulse el botón del volumen del televisor. Cuando se muestra la OSD del volumen, mantenga pulsado el botón MENU del televisor durante 5 segundos. 3. Pulse el botón ENTERE botón. Seleccione el país pulsando los botones ▲ o ▼. Pulsar el botón ENTERE para confirmar la selección. N Después de seleccionar el país en el menú Country, algunos modelos pueden presentar una opción adicional para configurar el código PIN. N Para introducir el código PIN, 0-0-0-0 no está disponible. 4. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para memorizar los canales de la conexión seleccionada y pulse el botón ENTERE. • Aérea : Señal de antena aérea. • Cable : Señal de antena del cable. 5. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar la fuente de antena que desea memorizar. Pulse el botón ENTERE para seleccionar Empezar. • Digital y Analógico : Canales digitales y analógicos. • Digital : Canales digitales. • Analógico : Canales analógicos. N La búsqueda de canales se iniciará y terminará automáticamente. N Para ver una descripción más detallada sobre cómo seleccionar el modo Cable, consulte el capítulo Guardado automático. Consulte la página 11 Plug & Play Select the OSD Language. Language : U Move E Enter ▲ Nederlands English Eesti ▼ Modo : Estándar Ilumin. celda : 4 Contraste : 95 Brillo : 45 Nitidez : 50 Color : 50 Tint (V/R) : V50/R50 Configuración avanzada Imagen Herramientas Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) Tamaño de imagen : Ancho auto. Modo imagen : Estándar Modo de sonido : Personal Temp. desc. : Des. SRS TS HD : Des. Ahorro energía : Des. Dual l ll : Mono Añadir a Favoritos U Mover E Entrar e Salir BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 10 10/20/2009 5:02:31 PMSpanish - 11 6. Aparece automáticamente el mensaje Configurar el modo del reloj. Pulse el botón ENTERE. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar Auto y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. N Si selecciona Manual, se muestra Configurar fecha y hora actuales. (Para ver una descripción más detallada de la opción Manual, Consulte la página 22) N Si ha recibido una señal digital, se ajustará la hora automáticamente. 7. Se muestran unas breves instrucciones en Cómo obtener el mejor rendimiento del nuevo HDTV. Pulse el botón ENTERE . N Este menú está disponible en Guía de conexión HD en el menú Asistencia técnica. N Puede ir a la página anterior o siguiente con los botones ◄ / ►. 8. Aparecerá el mensaje Que lo disfrute. N Si desea ver la televisión inmediatamente, seleccione Ver TV. N Si se desea ver Ver Guía producto, pulse el botón ENTERE. Si desea reiniciar esta función... 1. Pulse el botón MENU para ver el menú. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar Configuración y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. 2. Pulse de nuevo el botón ENTERE para seleccionar Plug & Play. 3. Escriba su código PIN de 4 dígitos. El código PIN predeterminado para un televisor nuevo es ‘0-0-0-0’. N Si desea cambiar el número PIN, consulte el capítulo Cambiar PIN, Consulte la página 24. N La función Plug & Play está disponible sólo en el modo TV. Memorización de los canales ❑ País „ Canal digital : Se puede cambiar el país de los canales digitales. „ Canal analógico : Se puede cambiar el país de los canales analógicos. N Aparece la pantalla para la introducción del número PIN. Escriba su código PIN de 4 dígitos. ❑ Guardado automático Busca todos los canales de las emisoras activas (la disponibilidad depende del país) y los memoriza en el televisor. Configure el televisor para memorizar los canales de la conexión seleccionada. • Aérea : Señal de antena aérea. • Cable : Señal de antena del cable. Puede seleccionar la fuente de antena que desea memorizar. • Digital y Analógico : Canales digitales y analógicos. • Digital : Canales digital. • Analógico : Canales analógicos. N Al seleccionar Cable, • Modo Búsqueda : Muestra el modo de búsqueda. (Rápida) - ID red : Muestra el código de identificación de la red. - Frecuencia : Muestra la frecuencia del canal. - Modulación : Muestra los valores de modulación disponibles. - Velocidad de símbolo : Muestra las velocidades de símbolo disponibles. • Modo Búsqueda : Muestra el modo de búsqueda. (Completa, Red) - Frecuencia de inicio : Muestra los valores de la frecuencia de inicio. - Frecuencia de parada : Muestra los valores de la frecuencia de parada. - Modulación : Muestra los valores de modulación disponibles. - Velocidad de símbolo : Muestra las velocidades de símbolo disponibles. N Si desea detener el Guardado automático, pulse el botón ENTERE. Aparece el mensaje ¿Detener programación automática?. Seleccione Sí con los botones ◄ o ► y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. Control de los canales Canal País ► Guardado automático Guardado manual Opción de búsqueda de cable Guía completa Miniguía Guía predeterminada : Guía completa Lista de canales Configuración Plug & Play ► Idioma de menú : Español Hora Emisión Seguridad Red General BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 11 10/20/2009 5:02:31 PMSpanish - 12 ❑ Guardado manual Busca un canal manualmente y lo memoriza en el televisor. „ Canal digital (Digital) N Almacenamiento manual de canales digitales. • Canal : Establezca el número del canal con los botones ▲, ▼ o numéricos (0~9). • Frecuencia : Establezca la frecuencia con los botones numéricos (0~9). • Ancho de banda : Establezca el ancho de banda con los botones ▲ o ▼. N Una vez finalizada, la lista de canales se actualiza automáticamente. „ Canal analógico Almacenamiento manual de canales analógicos. • Programa (número de programa que asignar a un canal) : Establezca el número del programa con los botones ▲, ▼ o numéricos (0~9). • Sistema de color → Automático / PAL / SECAM / NTSC 4.43 : Establezca el valor del sistema del color con los botones ▲ o ▼. • Sistema de sonido → BG / DK / I / L : Establezca el sistema del sonido con los botones ▲ o ▼ • Canal (si conoce el número de canal que desea guardar) : Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar C (canal aéreo) o S (canal por cable). Pulse el botón ► y después ▲, ▼ o los botones numéricos (0~9) para seleccionar el número que desee. N Si se produce un sonido anormal o no se produce sonido, vuelva a seleccionar el estándar de sonido adecuado. • Buscar (si no conoce los números de los canales) : Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para iniciar la búsqueda. El sintonizador explora el rango de frecuencia hasta que se recibe en la pantalla el primer canal o el canal que se ha seleccionado. • Guardar (cuando guarde el canal y el número de programa asociado) : Ajústelo a Aceptar pulsando el botón ENTERE. N Modo de canal - C (Modo de canal aéreo) : Puede seleccionar un canal introduciendo el número asignado a cada emisora aérea en este modo. - S (Modo de canal por cable) : Puede seleccionar un canal introduciendo el número asignado a cada canal por cable de este modo. ❑ Opción de búsqueda de cable Puede establecer opciones adicionales, como la frecuencia y la velocidad de símbolo, para la búsqueda de la red por cable. (Dependiendo del país) • Frecuencia inicio : Muestra los valores de la frecuencia de inicio. • Frecuencia parada : Muestra los valores de la frecuencia de parada. • Modulación : Muestra los valores de modulación disponibles. • Velocidad de símbolo : Muestra las velocidades de símbolo disponibles. N Si el valor de Frecuencia inicio es mayor que el de Frecuencia parada, se muestra un mensaje de advertencia. ❑ Guía completa / Miniguía La información de la Guía electrónica de programas (EPG) la proporcionan las emisoras. Las entradas de los programas pueden aparecer vacías u obsoletas, según la información proporcionada por un canal determinado. La pantalla se actualiza dinámicamente tan pronto como hay nueva información disponible. • Guía completa : Muestra la información de los programas ordenados por hora en segmentos de una hora. Muestra la información de dos horas de programa que se puede desplazar adelante o atrás en el tiempo. • Miniguía : La información de cada programa se muestra en una línea de la pantalla de la miniguía del canal actual desde el programa actual en adelante según el orden de la hora de inicio del programa. ❑ Guía predeterminada „ Miniguía / Guía completa Puede decidir que se muestre la Miniguía o la Guía completa cuando se pulsa el botón GUIDE del mando a distancia. O También puede ver el menú de la guía pulsando el botón GUIDE. Continúa… Canal Guía completa Miniguía Guía predeterminada : Guía completa ► Lista de canales Modo de canal : Canales añadidos. Sintonización fina BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 12 10/20/2009 5:02:32 PMSpanish - 13 Uso de Guía completa / Miniguía ▲ / ▼ / ◄ / ►, ENTER Seleccionar un programa con los botones ▲/▼/◄ / ► ENTERE Botón. ROJO Intercambiar entre Guía completa o Miniguía. VERDE Guía completa : Desplazarse rápidamente hacia atrás (-24 horas). AMARILLO Guía completa : Desplazarse rápidamente hacia adelante. (+24 horas). AZUL Salir de la guía. INFO Botón INFO para obtener información detallada. ❑ Modo Canal Cuando se pulsa el botón P () se cambian los canales en la lista de canales seleccionados. „ Canales añadidos : Los canales se cambian en la lista de canales memorizados. „ Canales favoritos : Los canales se cambian en la lista de canales favoritos. ❑ Sintonización fina (sólo canales analógicos) Si la recepción es clara, no tendrá que ajustar la sintonización del canal porque esto se hace automáticamente cuando se ejecuta la función de búsqueda y memorización. Si la señal es débil o está distorsionada, puede que deba realizar manualmente la sintonización fina del canal. N Los canales que se han ajustado con sintonización fina se marcan con un asterisco * a la derecha del número de canal en la banda del canal. N Si no almacena en la memoria el canal que ha ajustado con la sintonización fina, los ajustes no se guardan. N Para reiniciar la sintonización fina, seleccione Rest. pulsando los botones ▼ y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. Gestión de los canales Con este menú puede agregar y borrar los canales o configurarlos como favoritos y usar la guía de programas de las emisoras digitales. N Seleccione un canal en la pantalla Todos los canales, Canales añadidos, Favoritos o Programado con los botones ▲ o ▼ y pulse el botón ENTERE. A continuación puede ver el canal seleccionado. • Todos los canales : Muestra todos los canales disponibles actualmente. • Canales añadidos : Muestra todos los canales añadidos. • Favoritos : Muestra todos los canales favoritos. • Programado : Muestra todos los programas actualmente reservados. O También puede pulsar el botón CH LIST del mando a distancia para mostrar las listas de canales. N Uso de los botones de colores en la lista de canales - Rojo (Tipo de canal) : Conmuta entre TV, radio, datos/otros y todo. - Verde (Zoom) : Amplía o disminuye el número del canal. - Amarillo (Seleccionar) : Selecciona varias listas de canales. - T TOOLS (Herramientas) : Muestra los menús Borrar (o Añadir), Añadir a Favoritos (o Borrar de Favoritos), Bloquear (o Desbloquear), Visualiz. con temporiz., Editar nombre de canal, Modificac. número canal, Ordenar, Seleccionar todos, Seleccionar todos o Guardado automático. (Los menús de herramientas pueden cambiar, dependiendo de la situación.) N Iconos de la pantalla de estado del canal A Un canal analógico. c Canal seleccionado al pulsar el botón amarillo. ♥ Un canal configurado como favorito. ( Programa que se está emitiendo. \ Un canal bloqueado. ) Programa reservado. Canal Miniguía Guía predeterminada : Guía completa Lista de canales Modo Canal : Canales añadidos Sintonización fina 824 UKTV Gold 825 UKTV style A 1 C -- A 2 C -- A 3 ♥ C -- A 4 C -- A 5 C -- A 6 C -- A 7 C -- A 8 C -- Todos los canales Todos „ Tipo de canal „ Zoom „ Selecc. página Herramientas Guía completa DTV Cable 900 f tn 2:10 Tue 1 Jun Freshmen On Campus 2:00 - 2:30 Información no detallada. Hoy 2:00 - 3:00 3:00 - 4:00 Mint Extra Loaded Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC The Distillery Smash Hits! Sunday 900 f tn 901 ITV Play 902 Kerrang! 903 Kiss 903 oneword ▼ 903 Smash Hits! Street Hypn.. Kisstory Sin información. Sin información. Sin información. Freshmen O.. Miniguía DTV Cable 900 f tn Street Hypnosis Booze Britain 2:00 2:30 ▼ 5:00 Freshmen On Campus Ver Información página „ Guía completa „ Salir Ver Información página „ Miniguía „ +24 horas „ Salir BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 13 10/20/2009 5:02:35 PMSpanish - 14 ❑ Menús de herramientas de los canales (en Todos los canales / Canales añadidos / Favoritos) N Pulse el botón TOOLS para usar el menú Herramientas. N Los elementos del menú de Herramientas pueden variar según el estado del canal. „ Añadir / Borrar Puede suprimir o añadir un canal para que se muestren los canales que desee. N Todos los canales borrados se mostrarán en el menú Todos los canales. N Un canal de color gris quiere decir que se ha suprimido. N El menú Añadir sólo aparece con los canales borrados. N También puede borrar un canal en los menús Canales añadidos o Favoritos de la misma manera. „ Añadir a Favoritos / Borrar de Favoritos Puede configurar como favoritos los canales que vea con más frecuencia. T Pulse el botón TOOLS para ver el menú Herramientas. También puede establecer los canales favoritos seleccionando Herramientas → Añadir a Favoritos (o Borrar de Favoritos). O Si desea seleccionar los canales favoritos que ha configurado, pulse el botón FAV. CH del mando a distancia. N Se mostrará el símbolo “♥” y el canal se configurará como favorito.. N Todos los canales favoritos se mostrarán en el menú Favoritos. „ Bloquear / Desbloquear YPuede bloquear un canal para que no se pueda seleccionar ni visualizar. Está función está disponible sólo cuando Seguridad niños está configurado como Act.. (página 24) N Aparece la pantalla para la introducción del número PIN. Escriba su código PIN de 4 dígitos. N El código PIN predeterminado para un televisor nuevo es ‘0-0-0-0’. Se puede cambiar el PIN seleccionando Cambiar PIN en el menú. N Se muestra el símbolo “\” y el canal queda bloqueado. „ Visualiz. con temporiz. Si reserva un programa que desea ver, el canal se cambia automáticamente al canal reservado en la lista de canales aunque esté viendo otro canal. Para reservar un programa, en primer lugar debe configurar la hora actual. (Página 22) N Sólo se pueden reservar los canales memorizados. N Puede ajustar el canal, el mes, el día, el año, la hora y el minuto directamente pulsando los botones numéricos del mando a distancia. N La reserva de un programa se muestra en el menú Programado. N Guía de programas digitales y reserva de visualización Si se ha seleccionado un canal digital y se pulsa el botón ►, aparece la guía de programas del canal. Se puede reservar un programa mediante el procedimiento descrito anteriormente. „ Editar nombre de canal (sólo canales analógicos) Los canales se pueden etiquetar con el propósito de que cuando éstos se seleccionan se pueda ver su nombre. N Los nombres de los canales digitales se asignan automáticamente y no se pueden etiquetar. „ Modificac. número canal (sólo canales digitales) También puede editar el número del canal pulsando los botones numéricos del mando a distancia. „ Ordenar (sólo canales analógicos) Esta operación permite cambiar los números de programa de los canales memorizados. Puede que sea necesario realizarla después de la memorización automática. „ Seleccionar todos / Seleccionar todos Puede seleccionar o deseleccionar todos los canales de la lista. N Puede realizar las funciones de añadir, borrar, añadir a favoritos, borrar de favoritos, bloquear o desbloquear con varios canales al mismo tiempo. Seleccione los canales que desee y pulse el botón amarillo para configurar los canales seleccionados al mismo tiempo. N La marca caparece a la izquierda de los canales seleccionados. N YSólo se puede seleccionar Seleccionar todos si hay canales seleccionados. „ Guardado automático N Si desea más detalles sobre las opciones de configuración, consulte el capítulo Memorización de los canales. Consulte la página 11. N Si el canal está bloqueado con la función Seguridad niños aparece la ventana para la introducción del código PIN. ❑ Menús de herramientas de la lista de canales (en Programado) Se puede ver, cambiar o borrar una reserva.. N Pulse el botón TOOLS para usar el menú Herramientas. • Cambiar información : Selecciónelo para cambiar la reserva de visualización. • Cancelar programaciones : Selecciónelo para cancelar la reserva de visualización. • Información : Selecciónelo para ver una reserva de visualización. (También puede cambiar la información de la reserva.) • Seleccionar todos / Seleccionar todos : Seleccionar o deseleccionar todos los programas reservados.. 824 UKTV Gold 825 UKTV style A 1 C -- A 2 C -- A 3 C -- A 4 C -- A 5 C -- A 6 C -- A 7 C -- A 8 C -- Todos los canales Todo „ Tipo de canale „ Zoom „ Selecc página Herramientas Borrar Añadir a Favoritos Bloquear Visual. con temp Modificac. nombre canal Ordenar ▼ Programado 1 / 1 / 2009 13:59 5 TV1 Quincy, M.E 18:59 2 TV3 The Equalizer 20:59 2 TV3 McMillan & Wife 21:59 2 TV3 M.Spillane’s mike Hammer Cambiar información Cancelar progr. Información Seleccionar todos Todo „ Zoom „ Selecc. Herramientas Información BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 14 10/20/2009 5:02:35 PMSpanish - 15 Cambio de la configuración de la imagen ❑ Modo Puede seleccionar el tipo de imagen que mejor cumpla sus requisitos de visualización. „ Dinámico / Estándar / Eco / Película T Pulse el botón TOOLS para ver el menú Herramientas. También se puede configurar el modo de la imagen seleccionando Herramientas → Modo imagen. ❑ Ilumin. celda / Contraste / Brillo / Nitidez / Color / Matiz (V/R) El televisor tiene varias opciones de configuración que permiten controlar la calidad de la imagen. • Ilumin. celda : Ajusta el brillo de los píxeles. • Contraste : Ajusta el nivel de contraste. Cuanto más cerca de 100, mayor es ladiferencia. • Brillo : Ajusta el nivel de brillo. • Nitidez : Ajusta el nivel de nitidez. • Color : Ajusta la saturación del color de la imagen mediante la barra de la pantalla.Cuanto más cerca de 100, más saturado está el color. • Matiz (V/R) : Ajusta el matiz del color de la imagen. N Cuando se cambian Ilumin. celda, Contraste, Brillo, Nitidez, Color o Matiz (V/R), la presentación en la pantalla OSD se ajusta consecuentemente. N Los valores ajustados se guardan para cada modo de imagen. N En los modos analógicos TV, Ext., AV del sistema PAL, no se puede usar la función Matiz. N En el modo PC, sólo se pueden realizar cambios en las opciones Ilumin. celda, Contraste y Brillo. N Cada valor ajustado se almacenará por separado según su modo de entrada. N La energía consumida durante el uso se puede reducir significativamente si se disminuye el nivel del brillo de la imagen, ya que así se reduce el coste total de funcionamiento. ❑ Configuración avanzada Puede ajustar la configuración avanzada de la pantalla, incluidos el color y el contraste. N Configuración avanzada está disponible en los modos Estándar o Película. N En el modo PC sólo se pueden cambiar Contraste dinám., Gamma y Balance de blanco entre los elementos de Configuración avanzada. „ Tono del negro → Des. / Oscuro / Más oscuro / El más oscuro Puede mejorar la profundidad de la imagen ajustando la densidad del color negro. „ Contraste dinám. → Des. / Bajo / Medio / Alto Puede ajustar el contraste de la pantalla para conseguir un contraste óptimo. „ Gamma Puede ajustar la intensidad de los colores primarios (rojo, verde y azul). „ Gama de colores La gama de colores es una matriz compuesta por los colores rojo, verde y azul. Seleccione su gama favorita de colores y disfrute de unos colores auténticamente naturales. • Auto : Configura automáticamente la gama de color de acuerdo con la fuente del vídeo de entrada. • Original : Configura la gama de color más amplia que la de la fuente del vídeo de entrada. • Personal : Ajusta la gama del color según las preferencias del usuario. N Personalización de la gama de colores - Ajusta la gama del color según las preferencias del usuario. Color está disponible cuando Gama de colores está configurado en Personal. - Color → Rojo / Verde / Azul / Amarillo / Cián / Magenta - Rojo / Verde / Azul : Puede ajustar los valores RGB del color seleccionado. - Rest. : Restablece la gama de colores en los valores predeterminados. Control de la imagen Continúa… Modo : Estándar ► Ilumin. celda : 4 Contraste : 95 Brillo : 45 Nitidez : 50 Color : 50 Matiz (V/R) : V50/R50 Configuración avanzada Imagen Color : 50 Matiz (V/R) : V50 / R50 Configuración avanzada ► Opciones de imagen Reinicio de la imagen Imagen BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 15 10/20/2009 5:02:36 PMSpanish - 16 „ Balance de blanco Puede ajustar la temperatura del color para conseguir colores más naturales. • Rojo - / Verde - / Azul - / Rojo + / Verde + / Azul + : Al cambiar el valor de ajuste se actualizará la pantalla ajustada. • Rest. : Restablece el balance de blancos predeterminado. „ Tono piel Puede ajustar el tono de piel para que sea más o menos rojo. N Al cambiar el valor de ajuste se actualizará la pantalla ajustada. „ Mejora del borde → Des. / Act. Puede acentuar los bordes de los objetos en las imágenes. „ xvYCC → Des. / Act. Si se activa el modo xvYCC, se aumenta el detalle y la gama de colores mientras se ven películas desde un dispositivo externo (por ejemplo, un reproductor de DVD) N xvYCC está disponible cuando el modo de imagen está configurado en Cine y la entrada externa está establecida en los modos HDMI o Componente. N Es posible que esta función no se admita, según el dispositivo externo. ❑ Opciones de imagen Puede personalizar los parámetros de imagen adicionales según sus preferencias personales. N En el modo PC sólo se pueden cambiar Tono color, Tamaño y Screen Protección de pantalla entre los elementos de Opciones de imagen. „ Tono color → Frío / Normal / Cálido1 / Cálido2 / Cálido3 Puede seleccionar el tono de color que le resulte más cómodo para la vista. N Los parámetros ajustados se almacenan de acuerdo con el modo Imagen seleccionado. N Cálido1, Cálido2 o Cálido3 sólo están disponibles cuando el modo de imagen está configurado en Película. „ Tamaño → Ancho auto. / 16:9 / Zoom ancho / Zoom / 4:3 / Ajuste pantalla Puede seleccionar el tamaño de imagen que mejor se adapte a sus requisitos de visualización. • Ancho auto. : Ajusta la imagen en formato de ancho automático 4:3 a 16:9. • 16:9 : Ajusta la imagen al modo panorámico 16:9. • Zoom ancho : Aumenta el tamaño de la imagen más que 4:3. • Zoom : Amplía la imagen ancha de 16:9 en sentido vertical. • 4:3 : Ajusta la imagen al modo normal 4:3. • Ajuste pantalla : Muestra la señal HD nativa completa que no se puede ver en un televisor normal. N Según la fuente de entrada, las opciones de tamaño de la imagen pueden variar. N Las opciones disponibles pueden diferir según el modelo seleccionado. N En el modo PC, sólo se pueden ajustar los modos 16:9 y 4:3. N Si se ha seleccionado el modo doble ( , ) men el menú PIP, el tamaño de la imagen no se puede definir. N La configuración de cada dispositivo externo conectado a la entrada del televisor se puede ajustar y guardar. N Puede producirse una retención temporal de imagen cuando se ve una imagen estática durante más de dos horas. N Zoom ancho : Pulse el botón ► para seleccionar Posición y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para desplazar la pantalla hacia arriba o hacia abajo. A continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. N Zoom : Pulse el botón ► para seleccionar Posición y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para desplazar la imagen hacia arriba o hacia abajo. A continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. Pulse el botón ► para seleccionar Tamaño y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. Utilice los botones ▲ o ▼ para ampliar o reducir el tamaño de la imagen en dirección vertical. A continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. N Después de seleccionar Ajuste pantalla en los modos HDMI (1080i / 1080p) o Componente (1080i / 1080p) : Seleccione Posición con los botones ◄ o ►. Use los botones ▲, ▼, ◄ o ► para mover la imagen. N Rest. : Pulse los botones ◄ o ► para seleccionar Rest. y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. Puede inicializar la configuración. N Si se usa la función Ajuste pantalla con la entrada HDMI 720p, en los laterales superior, inferior, derecho e izquierdo de la pantalla se cortará 1 línea como en la función de sobreexploración. „ Modo Pantalla → 16:9 / Zoom ancho / Zoom / 4:3 Cuando se configura el tamaño de la imagen como Ancho auto. en un televisor panorámico 16:9, se puede determinar el tamaño de la imagen para ver una imagen en pantalla panorámica 4:3 WSS o ninguna. Cada país europeo exige un tamaño de imagen diferente, de modo que esta función está concebida con la intención de que los usuarios la seleccionen. N Esta función está disponible en el modo Ancho auto.. N Esta función no está disponible en los modos PC, Componente o HDMI. Continúa… Matiz (V/R) : V50/R50 Configuración avanzada Opciones de imagen ► Reinicio de la imagen Imagen BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 16 10/20/2009 5:02:37 PMSpanish - 17 „ Digital NR → Des. / Bajo / Medio / Alto / Auto Si la señal de emisión que recibe el televisor es débil, puede activarse la función de reducción digital del ruido para reducir la estática y las imágenes superpuestas que pueden aparecer en la pantalla. N Cuando la señal sea débil, seleccione alguna de las otras opciones hasta que se vea una imagen de mejor calidad. „ N.neg HDMI → Normal / Bajo Puede seleccionar directamente el nivel de negro en la pantalla para ajustar la profundidad de ésta. N Esta función sólo está activa cuando se conecta la entrada externa a HDMI (señales RGB). „ Demostración de movimiento Full HD 1080 → Des. / Act. Los paneles PDP de nueva generación de Samsung’s proporcionan una asombrosa claridad de movimiento Full HD cuando se ven deportes, películas y juegos muy dinámicos. N Esta función no está disponible en los modos PC, Juego, o Media Play. „ Modo de película Puede optimizar el modo de imagen para ver películas. • Des. : Desactiva la función del modo de película. • Auto1 : Ajusta automáticamente la imagen con la mejor calidad cuando se ve una película. • Auto2 : Mejora automáticamente el texto de vídeo cuando se ven películas. • Cinema Smooth : Proporciona la sensación de cine definitiva. N Film mode es compatible con los modos TV, Video, S-Video, Componente (480i / 1080i) y HDMI (1080i). „ Real 100Hz Demo → Des. / Act. Se puede ver una distinción clara entre Real 100Hz y 50 Hz, especialmente cuando se miran escenas de acción. Por ello, cuando contemple escenas con escaso movimiento no podrá diferenciar Real 100Hz de 50 Hz. La demostración de 100 Hz funciona sólo con la señal de 50 Hz. El modo de demostración de Real 100Hz se proporciona para demostraciones en comercios con imágenes especiales. „ Sólo modo azul → Des. / Act. Esta función es para los expertos en mediciones de dispositivos AV. Esta función muestra sólo la señal azul ya que se eliminan las señales rojas y verdes de la señal de vídeo a fin de proporcionar un efecto de filtro azul que se usa para ajustar el color y el matiz de los equipos de vídeo, como reproductores DVD, sistemas Home Cinema, etc.. N Sólo modo azul está disponible cuando el modo de imagen está configurado como Película o Estándar. „ Protección pantalla Esta pantalla está equipada con tecnología de prevención para reducir la posibilidad de que se queme. Esta tecnología permite definir el movimiento de la imagen arriba o abajo (vertical) y de lado a lado (horizontal). El ajuste del tiempo permite programar intervalos temporales entre los movimientos de la imagen en minutos. • Cambio de píxel : Con esta función podrá mover píxeles de forma detallada en la pantalla PDP, en sentido horizontal o vertical, para minimizar restos de imágenes en la pantalla. N Condición óptima para cambio de píxel Elemento TV/Ext/AV/Componente/HDMI PC Horizontal 0~2 2 Vertical 0~4 4 Tiempo (minutos) 1~4 min 2 min N El valor del cambio de píxel puede variar según el tamaño (pulgadas) del monitor y el modo. N Esta función no está disponible en el modo Ajuste pantalla. • Desplazamiento : Esta función ayuda a suprimir los restos de imágenes en la pantalla moviendo todos los píxeles de la PDP de acuerdo con un patrón. Utilice esta función si hay restos de imágenes o símbolos en la pantalla, especialmente después de haber mostrado una imagen fija en la pantalla durante un largo tiempo. • Lateral gris : Cuando se ve la televisión con una relación de pantalla de 4:3, ésta se puede proteger de un posible daño si se ajusta el balance de blanco en ambos extremos, el izquierdo y el derecho. - Claro : Cuando se establece una relación de pantalla de 4:3, con esta opción se aclaran ambos extremos, el izquierdo y el derecho. - Oscuro : Cuando se establece una relación de pantalla de 4:3, con esta opción se oscurecen ambos extremos, el izquierdo y el derecho. Continúa… BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 17 10/20/2009 5:02:37 PMSpanish - 18 Ajuste del televisor con el ordenador N Preselección : Pulse el botón SOURCE para seleccionar el modo PC. ❑ Ajuste automático Esta función permite que la pantalla de PC del equipo se ajuste automáticamente a la señal de vídeo del PC. Los valores fino, grueso y posición se ajustan automáticamente. N Esta función no se puede utilizar en modo DVI-HDMI. T Pulse el botón TOOLS para ver el menú Herramientas. También puede configurar el Ajuste automático seleccionando Herramientas → Ajuste automático. ❑ Pantalla El objetivo del ajuste de la calidad de imagen es eliminar o reducir las interferencias. Si el ruido no se elimina mediante la sintonización fina, ajuste la frecuencia lo mejor que pueda (gruesa) y vuelva a realizar la sintonización fina. Después de reducir el ruido, vuelva a ajustar la imagen para que quede alineada en el centro de la pantalla. „ Grueso Ajusta la frecuencia si hay distorsiones verticales en la pantalla. „ Fino Ajusta la pantalla para que sea más clara. „ Posición de PC Ajuste la posición de la pantalla del PC si no se acopla a la pantalla del TV. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para ajustar la posición vertical. Pulse los botones ◄ o ► para ajustar posición horizontal. „ Restablecer imagen Puede recuperar todos los ajustes de imagen predeterminados de fábrica. ❑ Reinicio de la imagen → Rest. modo imagen / Cancelar Restablece todos los ajustes predeterminados. N Seleccione un modo de imagen que desee restaurar. La restauración se realiza en cada modo de imagen. Brillo : 45 Nitidez : 50 Ajuste automático ► Pantalla Configuración avanzada Opciones de imagen Reinicio de la imagen Imagen Picture Configuración avanzada Opciones de imagen Reinicio de la imagen ► Imagen BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 18 10/20/2009 5:02:37 PMSpanish - 19 Pantalla de PC ❑ Configuración del software del PC (basado en Windows XP) A continuación se muestra la configuración de pantalla de Windows para un ordenador típico. Probablemente la pantalla real de su PC sea distinta, según la versión concreta de Windows y de la tarjeta de vídeo que tenga. Aunque las pantallas reales sean diferentes, la información de configuración básica que se aplica en casi todos los casos es la misma. (En caso contrario, póngase en contacto con el fabricante del ordenador o con el distribuidor de Samsung.) 1. Primero, haga clic en ‘Panel de control’ en el menú Inicio de Windows. 2. Cuando aparezca la ventana del panel de control, haga clic en ‘Apariencia y temas’ y aparecerá un cuadro de diálogo. 3. Cuando aparezca la ventana del panel de control, haga clic en ‘Pantalla’ y aparecerá un cuadro de diálogo. 4. Seleccione la ficha ‘Configuración’ en el cuadro de diálogo. Configuración correcta del tamaño (resolución) : 1920 x 1080 píxeles Si existe una opción de frecuencia vertical en el cuadro de diálogo de configuración de la pantalla, el valor correcto es ‘60’ o ‘60 Hz’. En caso contrario, haga clic en ‘Aceptar’ y salga del cuadro de diálogo. ❑ Modos de pantalla Tanto la posición en la pantalla como el tamaño varían dependiendo del tipo de monitor del PC y de su resolución. Se recomiendan las resoluciones de la tabla. N Cuando se usa una conexión de cable HDMI/DVI, se debe conectar en el terminal HDMI IN 2(DVI). N No se admite el modo entrelazado. N TEl aparato puede funcionar incorrectamente si se selecciona un formato de vídeo que no sea estándar. N Los modos Independiente y Compuesto no se admiten. SOG no se admite. N Un cable VGA demasiado largo o de mala calidad puede provocar que se vea la imagen con ruido en los modos de resolución alta (1920 x 1080). „ Entradas D-Sub y HDMI/DVI Modo Resolución Frecuencia horizontal (kHz) Frecuencia vertical (Hz) Reloj de píxeles Frecuencia (MHz) Polaridad de sincronización (H/V) IBM 640 x 350 31.469 70.086 25.175 + / - 720 x 400 31.469 70.087 28.322 - / + MAC 640 x 480 35.000 66.667 30.240 - / - 832 x 624 49.726 74.551 57.284 - / - 1152 x 870 68.681 75.062 100.000 - / + VESA CVT 720 x 576 35.910 59.950 32.750 - / + 1152 x 864 53.783 59.959 81.750 - / + 1280 x 720 44.772 59.855 74.500 - / + 56.456 74.777 95.750 - / + 1280 x 960 75.231 74.857 130.000 - / + VESA DMT 640 x 480 31.469 59.940 25.175 - / - 37.861 72.809 31.500 - / - 37.500 75.000 31.500 - / - 800 x 600 37.879 60.317 40.000 + / + 800 x 600 48.077 72.188 50.000 + / + 800 x 600 46.875 75.000 49.500 + / + 1024 x 768 48.363 60.004 65.000 - / - 56.476 70.069 75.000 - / - 60.023 75.029 78.750 + / + 1152 x 864 67.500 75.000 108.000 + / + 1280 x 800 49.702 59.810 83.500 - / + 62.795 74.934 106.500 - / + 1280 x 960 60.000 60.000 108.000 + / + 1280 x 1024 63.981 60.020 108.000 + / + 79.976 75.025 135.000 + / + 1360 x 768 47.712 60.015 85.500 + / + 1440 x 900 55.935 59.887 106.500 - / + 70.635 74.984 136.750 - / + 1680 x 1050 65.290 59.954 146.250 - / + VESA DMT / DTV CEA 1920 x 1080p 67.500 60.000 148.500 + / + VESA GTF 1280 x 720 52.500 70.000 89.040 - / + 1280 x 1024 74.620 70.000 128.943 - / - BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 19 10/20/2009 5:02:38 PMSpanish - 20 Cambio del estándar de sonido ❑ Modo Puede seleccionar el tipo de efecto de sonido especial que se va a utilizar mientras ve una emisión determinada. „ Estándar / Música / Película / Voz clara / Personal T Pulse el botón TOOLS para ver el menú Herramientas. También se puede configurar el modo de sonido seleccionando Herramientas → Modo de sonido. ❑ Ecualizador Los parámetros de sonido pueden ajustarse para que se adapten a sus preferencias personales. • Modo : Puede seleccionar el modo de sonido que se ajuste a sus preferencias personales. • Balance : Ajusta el balance entre los altavoces izquierdo y derecho. • 100Hz / 300Hz / 1KHz / 3KHz / 10KHz (Ajuste ancho de banda) : Ajusta el nivel de las diferentes frecuencias de ancho de banda. • Rest. : Restablece la configuración del ecualizador en los valores predeterminados. ❑ SRS TruSurround HD → Des./Act. SRS TruSurround HD es una tecnología combinada de TruSurround y FOCUS, TruBass. SRS TruSurround HD permite disfrutar de un sonido surround virtual de 5.1 canales en los dos altavoces del televisor. Esta función proporciona no sólo bajos profundos sino que también mejora la resolución de las frecuencias altas. T Pulse el botón TOOLS para ver el menú Herramientas. También se puede configurar SRS TruSurround HD seleccionando Herramientas → SRS TS HD. TruSurround HD, SRS y el símbolo son marcas comerciales de SRS Labs, Inc. La tecnología TruSurround HD está incorporada bajo licencia de SRS Labs, Inc. N Si al reproducir música el sonido del televisor no se oye correctamente, ajuste el ecualizador y SRS TruSurround HD (Des./Act.). ❑ Idioma de audio (sólo canales digitales) Puede cambiar los valores predeterminados para los idiomas del audio. Muestra la información del idioma para el flujo de entrada. N Sólo se puede seleccionar uno de los idiomas que ofrece la emisora. ❑ Formato audio → MPEG / Dolby Digital (sólo canales digitales) Cuando el sonido se emite desde un altavoz principal y un receptor de audio, se puede originar un sonido de eco debido a las diferencias en la velocidad de decodificación entre el altavoz principal y el receptor de audio. En tales casos, use la función Altavoz de TV. N Sólo se puede seleccionar uno de los idiomas que ofrece la emisora. Fabricado bajo licencia de Dolby Laboratories. Dolby y el símbolo de la doble D son marcas comerciales de Dolby Laboratories. ❑ Descripción de audio (sólo canales digitales) Es una función auxiliar de audio que proporciona una pista de audio adicional para personas con problemas de vista. Esta función maneja el flujo de audio de AD (Descripción de audio) cuando se envía desde el emisor con el audio principal.Los usuarios pueden activar o desactivar la descripción de audio y controlar el volumen. O Puede seleccionar estas opciones pulsando el botón AD del mando a distancia. „ Descripción de audio → Des. / Act. Activa o desactiva la función de descripción del audio. „ Volumen Ajusta el volumen de la descripción del audio. N Volumen está activo cuando Descripción de audio se configura como Act.. Control del sonido Modo : Custom ► Ecualizador SRS TruSurround HD : Des. Idioma de audio : ---- Formato audio : ---- Descripción de audio Volumen automático : Des. Seleccionar altavoz : Altavoz de TV Sonido BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 20 10/20/2009 5:02:39 PMSpanish - 21 ❑ Volumen automático → Des. / Act. Cada emisora tiene sus propias condiciones de señal y resulta incómodo ajustar el volumen cada vez que se cambia de canal. Esta función permite ajustar automáticamente el volumen de un canal disminuyendo la salida de sonido cuando la señal de modulación es alta o aumentando la salida de sonido cuando la señal de modulación es baja. ❑ Seleccionar altavoz → Altavoz externo / Altavoz de TV Si desea usar unos altavoces independientes, desactive el amplificador interno. N Los botones – +, MMUTE no funcionan si Seleccionar altavoz está establecido en Altavoz externo. N Si se selecciona Altavoz externo en el menú Seleccionar altavoz, se limita la configuración del sonido. Altavoces internos del televisor Salida de audio (Optical, R/L Out) para el sistema de sonido TV/Ext. /AV/Componente/ PC/HDMI TV/Ext. /AV/Componente/PC/ HDMI Altavoz de TV Salida para altavoces Salida de sonido Altavoz externo Silencio Salida de sonido Sin señal del vídeo Silencio Silencio ❑ Selección de Sonido Cuando la opción PIP está activada, se puede escuchar el sonido de la imagen secundaria (PIP). • Principal : Se usa para escuchar el sonido de la imagen principal. • Sub : Se usa para escuchar el sonido de la imagen secundaria. T Pulse el botón TOOLS para usar el menú Herramientas. También puede configurar el sonido de la imagen secundaria seleccionando Herramientas → PIP → Selección de sonido. N Puede seleccionar esta opción cuando PIP está ajustado como Act. ❑ Reinicio del sonido „ Restablecer todo / Rest. modo sonido / Cancelar : Puede restaurar la configuración del sonido con los valores predeterminados de fábrica. Selección del modo de sonido Cuando se configura Dual l ll, el modo de sonido actual se muestra en la pantalla. Tipo de emisión Indicación en pantalla NICAM Estéreo Emisión normal (Audio estándar) Mono (Uso normal) Normal + NICAM Mono NICAM Mono (Normal) NICAM-Estéreo NICAM Stereo Mono (Normal) NICAM Dual-I/II NICAM Dual-1 NICAM Dual-2 Mono (Normal) A2 Estéreo Emisión normal (Audio estándar) Mono (Uso normal) Bilingüe o Dual-I/II Dual I Dual II Estéreo Estéreo Mono (mono forzado) N Si la señal de estéreo es débil y el modo cambia de forma automática, cambie a mono. N Esta función sólo está activa en la señal de sonido estéreo. Está desactivada en la señal de sonido monoaural. N Esta función sólo está disponible en el modo TV. T Pulse el botón TOOLS para usar el menú Herramientas. También se puede seleccionar el modo de la imagen seleccionando Herramientas → Dual l ll. Seleccionar altavoz : Altavoz de TV Selección de sonido : Principal Reinicio del sonido ► Sonido BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 21 10/20/2009 5:02:39 PMSpanish - 22 Descripción de las funciones Configuración de la hora ❑ Reloj El ajuste del reloj es necesario para utilizar las distintas funciones de temporización del televisor. N La hora actual aparecerá siempre que se pulse el botón INFO. N Si desconecta el cable de alimentación, debe configurar el reloj de nuevo. „ Modo de reloj Se puede configurar la hora actual manual o automáticamente. • Auto : Configure la hora automáticamente mediante la información de la hora de la emisión digital. • Manual : Configure la hora actual manualmente. „ Ajustar hora Puede ajustar la hora actual manualmente. N Establezca este elemento cuando configure Modo de reloj como Manual. N Puede ajustar directamente Mes, Día, Año, Hora, Minuto con los botones numéricos del mando a distancia. ❑ Temp. desc. → Des. / 30 min / 60 min / 90 min / 120 min / 150 min / 180 min El temporizador de desconexión apaga automáticamente el televisor después de un período prefijado (30, 60, 90, 120, 150 y 180 minutos). N Cuando el temporizador llega a 0, el televisor pasa al modo de espera de forma automática. N Para cancelar la función Temp. desc. seleccione Des.. T Pulse el botón TOOLS para ver el menú Herramientas. También puede configurar el temporizador seleccionando Herramientas → Temp. desc.. ❑ Temporizador 1 / Temporizador 2 / Temporizador 3 Utilice esta función para que el televisor se encienda o apague a una hora concreta. • Hora encendido : Establece la hora en que se encenderá el televisor. • Hora apagado : Establece la hora en que se apagará el televisor. • Volumen : Controla el nivel del volumen. • Fuente : Seleccione el dispositivo TV, USB. N Si selecciona el TV, puede configurar Antena y Canal. - Antena : Selecciona aérea o de cable. - Canal : Selecciona el canal deseado. N Si selecciona USB, puede configurar el contenido. - Contenido : Selecciona el contenido deseado de USB. N Si no hay archivos de música en el USB o no se ha seleccionado la carpeta que contenga los archivos de música, el temporizador no funciona correctamente. • Repetir : Seleccione Una vez, Cada día, Lun~Vie, Lun~Sáb, Sáb~Dom o Manual. N Con Manual seleccionado, pulse el botón ► para seleccionar el día de la semana. Pulse el botón ENTERE sobre el día deseado; aparecerá la marca c. N El nombre de la carpeta de USB admite 64 caracteres en inglés. N Debe ajustar el reloj en primer lugar. N Puede ajustar la hora, los minutos y el canal pulsando los botones numéricos del mando a distancia. N Apagado automático Si activa el temporizador, el televisor se apagará si no se pulsa ningún botón durante 3 horas, después de que el temporizador lo haya puesto en marcha. Esta función sólo está disponible con el temporizador activado y evita el recalentamiento que se puede producir si el televisor está encendido durante demasiado tiempo. Hora Reloj : -- : -- ► Temp. desc. : Des. Temporizador 1 : Desactivado Temporizador 2 : Desactivado Temporizador 3 : Desactivado U Mover E Entrar R Volver Configuración Plug & Play Idioma de menú : Español Hora ► Emisión Seguridad Red General BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 22 10/20/2009 5:02:39 PMSpanish - 23 Configuración del menú de configuración ❑ Idioma de menú Puede configurar el idioma de los menús. ❑ Emisión „ Subtítulos Se pueden activar o desactivar los subtítulos. Use este menú para configurar el modo de subtítulo. Normal es la opción básica y Duro de oído es la opción para personas con problemas de audición. • Subtítulos → Des. / Act. : Activa o desactiva los subtítulos. • Modo → Normal / Duro de oído : Establece el modo de los subtítulos. • Idioma de los subtítulos : Establece el idioma de los subtítulos. N Si el programa que se está viendo no admite la opción Duro de oído, automáticamente se activa Normal aunque se seleccione Duro de oído. N El inglés es el idioma predeterminado cuando en una emisión no está disponible la selección de idiomas. O También puede seleccionar estas opciones pulsando el botón SUBT. del mando a distancia. „ Texto digital → Inhabilitar / Habilitar Si el programa se emite con texto digital, esta opción está habilitada. N MHEG (Multimedia and Hypermedia Information Coding Experts Group -Grupo de expertos para la codificación de la información hipermedia y multimedia) Es una norma internacional para los sistemas de codificación de datos que se utilizan en hipermedia y multimedia. Es un nivel superior al sistema MPEG que incluye hipermedia vinculado a datos, como imágenes fijas, servicios de caracteres, animaciones, gráficos y archivos de vídeo así como datos multimedia. MHEG es una tecnología de interacción de tiempo de ejecución del usuario que se aplica en varios campos, como VOD (vídeo a la carta), ITV (televisión interactiva), EC (comercio electrónico), educación a distancia, teleconferencias, bibliotecas digitales y juegos „ Idioma del teletexto Se puede configurar el idioma del teletexto seleccionando el tipo de idioma. N El inglés es el idioma predeterminado cuando en una emisión no está disponible la selección de idiomas. „ Transparencia • Idioma principal audio / Idioma secundario audio / Idioma princ. subtítulos / Idioma sec. subtítulos / Idioma principal del teletexto / Idioma secundario del teletexto Con esta función los usuarios pueden seleccionar uno de los idiomas. El idioma seleccionado aquí se convierte en el predeterminado cuando se selecciona un canal. Si se cambia la configuración del idioma, las opciones de idioma de los subtítulos, del audio o del teletexto del menú Idioma se cambian automáticamente al idioma seleccionado. Las opciones Idioma de los subtítulos, Idioma de audio e Idioma del teletexto, del menú Idioma, muestran una lista de los idiomas admitidos en el canal actual y la selección se resalta. Si cambia la configuración del idioma, ésta sólo es válida en el canal actual. Los cambios de configuración no afectan a las opciones de idioma principal de los subtítulos, del audio o del teletexto del menú de preferencias. „ Interfaz común • Instalación de la tarjeta CI(CI+) 1. Puede adquirir el módulo del CAM de CI(CI+) por teléfono o en el distribuidor más cercano a su domicilio. 2. Inserte la TARJETA CI(CI+) en el CAM siguiendo la dirección de la flecha hasta que encaje. 3. Inserte el CAM con la TARJETA CI(CI+) instalada en la ranura para interfaz común. N Inserte el CAM, siguiendo la dirección de la flecha, hasta el fondo, de modo que quede paralelo a la ranura. 4. Compruebe si se ven imágenes en un canal de señal codificada. • Menú CI(CI+) Permite al usuario realizar selecciones en el menú CAM proporcionado. Seleccione el menú CI(CI+) según el menú de la tarjeta PC. • Info. sobre la aplicación La interfaz común contiene y muestra información acerca del CAM insertado en la ranura CI(CI+). La información de la aplicación insertada se refiere a la TARJETA CI(CI+). La instalación del CAM puede efectuarse con el televisor encendido o apagado. N La ‘TARJETA CI(CI+)’ no se admite en algunos países, zonas o emisoras; consulte a su distribuidor local. Continúa… Configuración Plug & Play Idioma de menú : Español ► Hora Emisión Seguridad Red General BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 23 10/20/2009 5:02:40 PMSpanish - 24 ❑ Seguridad N Algunos modelos requieren el código PIN cuando se utiliza Plug & Play. „ Seguridad niños → Des. / Act. Esta función permite bloquear el vídeo y el audio para evitar que los usuarios no autorizados (por ejemplo, los niños) puedan ver programas poco recomendables. N Antes de que se muestre la pantalla de configuración, aparece la pantalla para la introducción del código PIN. Escriba su código PIN de 4 dígitos. N El código PIN predeterminado para un televisor nuevo es ‘0-0-0-0’. Se puede cambiar el PIN seleccionando Cambiar PIN en el menú. N Se pueden bloquear algunos canales en la lista de canales. (Consulte la página 14) N Seguridad niños sólo está disponible en el modo TV. „ Bloqueo paterno Con esta función se puede impedir por medio de un código PIN (número de identificación personal) de 4 dígitos definido por el usuario que personas no autorizadas, como los niños, vean programas inadecuados. N El elemento de clasificación paterna difiere según el país. N Antes de que se muestre la pantalla de configuración, aparece la pantalla para la introducción del código PIN. Escriba su código PIN de 4 dígitos. N El código PIN predeterminado para un televisor nuevo es ‘0-0-0-0’. Se puede cambiar el PIN seleccionando Cambiar PIN en el menú. N Una vez establecida la clasificación, se muestra el símbolo “\” . N Perm. todo / Bloq. todo : Se pulsa para desbloquear o bloquear todos los programas de televisión. „ Cambiar PIN Se puede cambiar el número ID personal necesario para configurar el televisor. N Antes de que se muestre la pantalla de configuración, aparece la pantalla para la introducción del código PIN. Escriba su código PIN de 4 dígitos. (Código PIN predeterminado: ‘0-0-0-0’) N Si ha olvidado el código PIN, pulse los botones del mando a distancia en la siguiente secuencia para reiniciar el PIN a ‘0-0-0-0’: POWER (apagar), MMUTE, 8, 2, 4, POWER (encender). ❑ General „ Modo Juego → Des. / Act Si conecta una consola de videojuegos, como PlayStation TM o Xbox5 TM , podrá disfrutar de sensaciones más realistas seleccionando el menú de juegos. • Si el Modo Juego está encendido - El modo Imagen cambia automáticamente a Estándar y no se puede cambiar. - El modo Sonido cambia automáticamente a Personal y no se puede cambiar. Ajuste el sonido con el ecualizador. - El modo Rest. del menú Sonido se activa. La función Rest. inicializa la configuración del ecualizador con los valores predeterminados de fábrica. N Modo Juego no está disponible en el modo normal de TV o Modo Juego está establecido como Des. N Si la calidad de la imagen es deficiente cuando un dispositivo externo está conectado a TV, compruebe si la opción Modo Juego está configurada como Act. N Si visualiza el menú de TV en el modo Juego, la pantalla tiembla ligeramente. N La marca que aparece en la pantalla indica que la opción Modo Juego está activa con la fuente seleccionada. N Esta función sólo admite la función de juegos. N Modo Juego no está disponible en el modo PC. „ BD Wise → Des. / Act. BD Wise es una función que permite configurar automáticamente la condición óptima de todos los dispositivos Samsung conectados compatibles con BD Wise. N Esta función sólo está activa cuando un dispositivo externo está conectado al televisor a través de HDMI. N Cuando BD Wise está configurado como Act., el modo de imagen se configura automáticamente según las mejores condiciones. „ Ahorro energía → Des. / Bajo / Medio / Alto / Imagen desact. Esta función ajusta el brillo del televisor, lo cual reduce el consumo de energía. Si desea ver la televisión por la noche, ajuste la opción del modo Ahorro energía en Alto; sus ojos se lo agradecerán y, además, reducirá el consumo de energía. Si se selecciona Imagen desact., la pantalla se apaga y sólo se puede oír el sonido. Pulse cualquier botón para salir de Imagen desact.. N En el menú Herramientas, la función Imagen desact. no se admite. BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 24 10/20/2009 5:02:40 PMSpanish - 25 T Pulse el botón TOOLS para ver el menú Herramientas. También puede configurar la opción Ahorro energía seleccionando Herramientas → Ahorro energía. „ Transparencia de menú Puede definir la transparencia de los menús. • Brillo : Establece el menú en pantalla como normal. • Oscuro : Establece el menú en pantalla como opaco. „ Melodía → Des. / Bajo / Medio / Alto El volumen del sonido de la melodía del encendido y del apagado del televisor se puede configurar. N La melodía no se reproduce - Cuando no hay salida de sonido desde el televisor porque se ha activado el botón MMUTE. - Cuando no hay salida de sonido desde el televisor porque se ha pulsado el botón – (Volumen). - Cuando la función Temp. desc. ha apagado el televisor. „ Efecto de luz (PS58B680/PS63B680 sólo) Se puede apagar o encender el LED azul del frontal del televisor según las circunstancias. Use esta función para ahorrar energía o si el LED le molesta a la vista. • Des. : El LED azul siempre está apagado. • En espera : El LED azul se enciende cuando el TV está en modo de espera y se apaga cuando se enciende el televisor. • Viendo TV : El LED azul se enciende cuando se ve la televisión y se apaga cuando se apaga el televisor. • Siempre : El LED está siempre encendido. N Configure la opción Efecto de luz en Des. para reducir el consumo de energía. Visualización PIP (Imagen en imagen) Puede mostrar una imagen secundaria dentro de la imagen principal de un programa de TV o entrada de vídeo. De esta forma puede ver una imagen del programa de TV o de la entrada de vídeo desde cualquier equipo conectado mientras ve la imagen principal. N Puede notar que la imagen de la ventana PIP llega a ser ligeramente artificial cuando utiliza la pantalla principal para visualizar juegos o karaoke. T Pulse el botón TOOLS para usar el menú Herramientas. También puede establecer la configuración PIP relacionada seleccionando Herramientas → PIP. ❑ PIP → Des. / Act. Puede activar o desactivar la función PIP. Imagen principal Imagen secundaria Componente HDMI1, HDMI2/DVI, HDMI3,HDMI4 PC TV „ Tamaño → / / / Puede seleccionar el tamaño de la imagen secundaria. N Si la imagen principal está en modo HDMI, la opción Tamaño está disponible. „ Posición → / / / Puede seleccionar la posición de la imagen secundaria. N En el modo doble ( , ) mode, Posición no se puede seleccionar. „ Canal Puede seleccionar un canal para la imagen secundaria. PIP PIP : Des. ► Tamaño : Posición : Canal : ATV 1 E Entrar R Volver General Modo Juego : Des. BD Wise : Des. Ahorro energía : Des. Transpar. de menú : Brillo Melodía : Medio PIP ► U Mover E Entrar R Volver BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 25 10/20/2009 5:02:41 PMSpanish - 26 Programa admitido ❑ Aviso legal Puede ver el aviso legal y el descargo de responsabilidad general referentes al contenido y los servicios de terceros. „ Descargo respons. gral. Es el servicio de aviso legal completo referente a Internet@TV. N El descargo de responsabilidad puede variar según el país. N Puede desplazarse a la página anterior o siguiente con los botones ◄ o ►. ❑ Guía de producto La guía del producto proporciona información sobre las características más importantes del televisor. N Si desea más información, consulte el elemento deseado. ❑ Auto diagnostic „ Prueba de imagen Si cree que tiene un problema con la imagen, efectúe la prueba de imagen. Compruebe el patrón del color en la pantalla para ver si persiste el problema. N En la pantalla aparece el mensaje ¿El problema aún existe con esta foto?. Si no se muestra el patrón de prueba o hay ruido en el patrón de prueba, seleccione Sí. Si el patrón de prueba se muestra correctamente, seleccione No.. • Sí : Puede haber un problema en el televisor. Póngase en contacto con el Centro de llamadas para obtener ayuda. • No : Puede haber un problema en el equipo externo. Compruebe las conexiones. Si el problema continúa, consulte el manual del usuario del dispositivo externo. „ Prueba de sonido Si cree que tiene un problema con el sonido, efectúe la prueba de sonido. Compruebe el sonido reproduciendo una melodía en el televisor. N En la pantalla aparece el mensaje ¿Continúa el problema con esta prueba de sonido?. Si durante la prueba de sonido sólo se oye sonido de un altavoz o no se oye ningún sonido, seleccione Sí. Si desde los altavoces se oye sonido, seleccione No. • Sí : Puede haber un problema en el televisor. Póngase en contacto con el Centro de llamadas para obtener ayuda. • No : Puede haber un problema en el equipo externo. Compruebe las conexiones. Si el problema continúa, consulte el manual del usuario del dispositivo externo. N Si no oye sonido a través de los altavoces del televisor, antes de realizar la prueba de sonido compruebe que Seleccionar altavoz esté configurado como Altavoz de TV en el menú Sonido. N La melodía se debe oír durante la prueba aunque Seleccionar altavoz esté establecido como Altavoz externo o se haya silenciado el sonido con el botón M MUTE. „ Información de señal (sólo canales digitales) Se puede ajustar la antena para mejorar la recepción de los canales digitales disponibles. N Si el medidor de la intensidad de la señal indica que ésta es débil, mueva la antenapara aumentar la intensidad de la señal. Siga ajustando la antena hasta que encuentre la mejor posición para recibir la señal más fuerte. Asistencia técnica / Entrada BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 26 10/20/2009 5:02:41 PMSpanish - 27 Fuentes / Editar nombre ❑ Fuentes Utilice este menú para seleccionar TV u otras fuentes de entrada externas como reproductores de DVD o receptores de cable y satélite (decodificadores) conectados al televisor. Permite seleccionar la fuente de entrada que se prefiera. „ TV, Ext.1, Ext.2, AV, Componente, PC, HDMI1, HDMI2/DVI, HDMI3, HDMI4, USB. N Sólo se puede elegir los dispositivos externos que estén conectados al televisor. En Fuentes, las entradas conectadas se resaltan y se ordenan en la parte superior. Las entradas que no están conectadas se ordenan en la parte inferior. N Uso de los botones de colores del mando a distancia con la lista de fuentes - Rojo (Actualizar) : Actualiza los dispositivos externos conectados. - T TOOLS (Herramientas) : Muestra los menús Editar nombre e Información. O Pulse el botón SOURCE del mando a distancia para ver una fuente de señal externa. ❑ Editar nombre Puede dar un nombre al dispositivo conectado en los terminales de entrada; de esta manera será más fácil seleccionar el dispositivo de entrada. „ Vídeo / DVD / Cable STB / Satélite STB / PVR STB / Receptor AV / Juego / Videocámara / PC / DVI / DVI PC / TV / IPTV / Blu-ray / HD DVD / DMA N Cuando se conecta un ordenador con una resolución de 1920 x 1080 a 60 Hz al puerto HDMI IN 2 (DVI), se debe configurar el modo HDMI2/DVI del PC en Editar nombre del modo Entrada. ❑ Software superior Para mantener el producto actualizado con las nuevas funciones de la televisión digital se envían periódicamente actualizaciones de software como parte de la señal normal de televisión. Automáticamente se detectan estas señales y se muestra una pantalla de actualización del software. Se presenta la opción de instalar la actualización. „ POR USB Inserte una unidad USB que contenga la actualización del firmware en el televisor. No desconecte la alimentación ni extraiga la unidad USB mientras se aplican las actualizaciones. El televisor se apagará y se encenderá automáticamente después de completar la actualización del firmware. Después de realizar la actualización compruebe la versión del firmware. Cuando se actualiza el software, la configuración del vídeo y audio que se haya efectuado vuelve a la configuración predeterminada (de fábrica). „ Por canal Actualiza el software a través de una señal de emisión. N Si la función se selecciona durante el periodo de transmisión del software, busca el software disponible y lo descarga. N El tiempo necesario para la descarga del software lo determina el estado de la señal. „ Modo suspensión Para continuar con la actualización del software con el conmutador de encendido principal activado, seleccione Act. pulsando los botones ▲ o ▼. 45 minutos después de haber entrado en el modo de suspensión, se inicia automáticamente una actualización manual. Dado que la alimentación de la unidad está activada internamente, la pantalla puede encenderse ligeramente. Este fenómeno puede durar 1 hora mientras la actualización del software se completa. „ Software alternativo Reemplace el software actual por otro alternativo. N Si se ha cambiado el software, se muestra el software existente. N Puede cambiar el software actual a uno alternativo mediante Software alternativo. ❑ Guía de conexión HD Se muestran unas breves instrucciones sobre cómo obtener el mejor rendimiento del nuevo HDTV. Se proporciona el método de conexión de los dispositivos de alta definición. N Puede desplazarse a la página anterior o siguiente con los botones ◄ o ►. ❑ Contacto con Samsung Puede conocer los datos del centro de llamadas, la página web y obtener información de los productos de Samsung. Panel lateral del TV Unidad USB Fuentes Editar nombre Entrada BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 27 10/20/2009 5:02:42 PMSpanish - 28 Red Conexión de la red Conexión de red para DLNA, descarga de Internet-Biblioteca de contenidos, Internet@TV y Centro red doméstica. ❑ Conexión con la red - Cable „ Conexión LAN para un entorno DHCP A continuación se describe el procedimiento para configurar la red mediante el protocolo de configuración dinámica de host (DHCP). Dado que la dirección IP, la máscara de subred, la puerta de enlace y el DNS se asignan automáticamente cuando se selecciona DHCP, no es necesario introducirlos manualmente. 1. Conecte el puerto LAN del panel posterior del televisor y el módem externo con un cable LAN. 2. Conecte el puerto LAN de la pared y el módem externo con un cable de módem. N Los terminales (la posición del puerto y el tipo) del dispositivo externo pueden variar según el fabricante. N Si falla la asignación de la dirección IP por el servidor DHCP, apague el módem externo, vuelva a encenderlo al menos después de 10 segundos e inténtelo de nuevo. N Para la conexión entre el módem externo y el compartidor (enrutador), consulte el manual del usuario del producto correspondiente. N Puede conectar el televisor a la LAN directamente sin usar compartidor (enrutador). N No se puede usar un módem ADSL de tipo de conexión manual ya que no admite DHCP. Se debe usar un módem ADSL de tipo de conexión automática. Panel posterior del TV Puerto de módem Panel posterior del TV en la pared 2 Cable del módem Módem externo (ADSL/ VDSL/TV por cable) 1 Cable LAN Puede conectar el puerto LAN y el televisor directamente según el estado de la red. Panel posterior del TV Cable LAN Puerto de módem en la pared Puede conectar la LAN con un compartidor (enrutador). Panel posterior del TV Puerto de módem en la pared Módem externo (ADSL/VDSL/TV por cable) Compartidor IP Cable LAN Cable del módem LAN Cable BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 28 10/20/2009 5:02:45 PMSpanish - 29 „ Conexión LAN para un entorno IP estático A continuación se describe el procedimiento para configurar la red con una dirección IP estática. Se debe introducir manualmente la dirección IP, la máscara de subred, la puerta de enlace y el DNS proporcionados por el proveedor de servicios de Internet (ISP). 1. Conecte el puerto [LAN] del panel posterior del televisor y el puerto LAN de la pared con un cable LAN. N Los terminales (la posición del puerto y el tipo) del dispositivo externo pueden variar según el fabricante. N Si usa una dirección IP estática, su ISP le informará de la dirección IP, la máscara de subred, la puerta de enlace y el DNS. Debe introducir estos valores para completar la configuración de la red. Si no los conoce, consulte a su administrador de la red. N Para obtener información sobre cómo configurar y conectar un compartidor (enrutador), consulte el manual del usuario del producto correspondiente. N Puede conectar el televisor a la LAN directamente sin usar compartidor (enrutador). N Si usa un compartidor IP (enrutador IP) que admite DHCP, puede configurar el dispositivo como DHCP o IP estático. N Para saber cómo usar una dirección IP estática, consulte a su proveedor de servicios de Internet. ❑ Conexión con la red - Inalámbrica Es posible conectar a la red de manera inalámbrica a través de un compartidor IP inalámbrico. 1. Conecte el ‘adaptador de LAN inalámbrica de Samsung’ en el terminal USB1(HDD) o USB2 del televisor. N Para utilizar una red inalámbrica necesita el ‘adaptador de LAN inalámbrica de Samsung’. N El adaptador de LAN inalámbrica de Samsung se vende por separado. El adaptador de El adaptador de LAN inalámbrica WIS09ABGN se ofrece a través de distribuidores seleccionados, sitios web de comercio electrónico y Samsungparts.com. N Para utilizar una red inalámbrica, el televisor debe estar conectado a un compartidor IP inalámbrico. N Si el compartidor IP inalámbrico admite DHCP, el televisor puede utilizar DHCP o una dirección IP estática para conectarse a la red inalámbrica. N El adaptador de LAN inalámbrica de Samsung es compatible con IEEE 802.11A, IEEE 802.11B, IEEE 802.11G e IEEE 802.11N. Si reproduce el vídeo DLNA en una conexión IEEE 802.11B/G, es posible que el vídeo no se reproduzca correctamente. N Si el compartidor IP inalámbrico permite activar o desactivar la función de conexión Ping, actívela. N Seleccione un canal para el compartidor IP inalámbrico que no se esté usando en ese momento. Si el canal ajustado para el compartidor IP inalámbrico lo está usando en ese momento otro dispositivo cercano, se producirán interferencias y es posible que la comunicación falle. Continúa… Panel posterior del TV 1 Cable LAN Puerto de módem en la pared Panel posterior del TV Cable LAN Compartidor IP Cable LAN Puerto de módem en la pared Puede conectar la LAN con un compartidor (enrutador). Panel lateral del TV Adaptador de LAN inalámbrica de Samsung Cable LAN Compartidor IP inalámbrico Puerto de módem en la pared BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 29 10/20/2009 5:02:48 PMSpanish - 30 N Si se aplica un sistema de seguridad distinto de los sistemas que se muestran a continuación, no funcionará con el televisor. - Cuando se aplica la clave de seguridad para el punto de acceso (compartidor IP inalámbrico) sólo se admiten las opciones siguientes. 1) Modo de autenticación : OPEN, SHARED, WPAPSK, WPA2PSK 2. Tipo de cifrado : WEP, TKIP, AES - Cuando se aplica la clave de seguridad para el modo Ad-hoc, sólo se admiten las opciones siguientes. 1) Modo de autenticación : SHARED, WPANONE 2. Tipo de cifrado : WEP, TKIP, AES N Si el punto de acceso admite WPS (Configuración protegida Wi-Fi), puede conectarse a la red vía PBC (Configuración del botón) o PIN (Número de identificación personal). De cualquier modo, WPS configurará automáticamente las claves SSID y WPA. N Si el dispositivo no está certificado, quizás no se conecte al televisor a través del ‘adaptador de LAN inalámbrica de Samsung’. Configuración de la red ❑ Tipo de red Seleccione Cable o Inalámbr. como método para conectar con la red. N El menú sólo se activa si está conectado el ‘adaptador de LAN inalámbrica de Samsung’. • Cable : Conecte la red mediante un cable. • Inalámbr. : Conecte la red de modo inalámbrico. ❑ Configuración de red „ Configuración de red por cable (cuando Tipo de red está configurado como Cable) N Compruebe si el cable LAN está conectado. • Config. protocolo Internet → Auto / Manual • Prueba de red : Puede comprobar o confirmar el estado de conexión de la red después de configurarla. N Cuando no pueda conectarse a una red cableada Si su proveedor de servicios de Internet ha registrado la dirección MAC del dispositivo utilizado para conectarse a Internet por primera vez y autentifica la dirección MAC cada vez que se conecta a Internet, el televisor quizás no pueda conectarse a Internet ya que la dirección MAC difiere de la del dispositivo (PC). En tal caso, solicite a su proveedor de servicios de Internet que le explique el procedimiento para conectar dispositivos que no sean un ordenador (por ejemplo su televisor) a Internet. Si su proveedor de servicios de Internet necesita un ID o una contraseña para conectarse a Internet (red), su televisor quizás no pueda conectarse a Internet. En tal caso, debe introducir su ID o contraseña cuando se conecte a Internet mediante un compartidor de Internet (enrutador). La conexión de Internet puede fallar por problemas del servidor de seguridad. En este caso, póngase en contacto con el proveedor de servicios de Internet. Si no puede conectarse a Internet aunque haya seguido el procedimiento de su proveedor de servicios de Internet, debe ponerse en contacto con el centro de servicio técnico de Samsung Electronics. „ Configuración de red por cable - Auto Si se conecta el cable LAN y se admite DHCP, los ajustes del protocolo de Internet (IP) se configurarán automáticamente. Compruebe si el cable LAN está conectado. 1. Establezca Tipo de red como Cable. 2. Seleccione Configuración de red por cable. 3. Establezca Config. protocolo Internet como Auto. N El protocolo de Internet se configura automáticamente 4. Seleccione Prueba de red para comprobar la conectividad de la red. „ Configuración de red por cable - Manual Para conectar el televisor a la LAN mediante una dirección IP estática, se debe configurar el protocolo de Internet (IP). N Compruebe si el cable LAN está conectado. (Página 28) 1. Establezca Tipo de red como Cable. 2. Seleccione Red de cable. 3. Establezca Config. protocolo Internet como Manual. 4. Configure Dirección IP, Máscara de subred, Puerta de enlace y Servidor DNS. N Pulse los botones numéricos del mando a distancia para configurar la red manualmente. 5. Seleccione Prueba de red para comprobar la conectividad de la red. Configuración Emisión Seguridad Red ► General Continúa… BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 30 10/20/2009 5:02:49 PMSpanish - 31 „ Config. red inalámb. (cuando Tipo de red se establece como Inalámbr.) N El menú sólo se activa si está conectado el ‘adaptador de LAN inalámbrica de Samsung’. (Página 29) - Config. protocolo Internet → Auto / Manual - Prueba de red : Puede comprobar o confirmar el estado de conexión de la red después de configurarla. N Cuando no pueda conectarse a un punto de acceso Su televisor quizás no pueda encontrar un punto de acceso (PA) que esté configurado como un tipo SSID privado. En tal caso, cambie la configuración del PA y vuelva a intentar la operación. Si su proveedor de servicios de Internet ha registrado la dirección MAC del dispositivo utilizado para conectarse a Internet por primera vez y autentifica la dirección MAC cada vez que Ud. se conecta a Internet, su televisor quizás no pueda conectarse a Internet ya que la dirección MAC difiere de la del dispositivo (PC). En tal caso, solicite a su proveedor de servicios de Internet que le explique el procedimiento para conectar dispositivos que no sean un ordenador (por ejemplo su televisor) a Internet. Si no puede conectarse a Internet aunque haya seguido el procedimiento de su proveedor de servicios de Internet, debe ponerse en contacto con el centro de servicio técnico de Samsung Electronics a través de 1-800-SAMSUNG. • Seleccionar una red - Punto de acceso : Se puede seleccionar el compartidor IP que utilizar cuando se configura una red inalámbrica. N Si algún punto de acceso no aparece en la lista de selección de redes, pulse el botón rojo. N Cuando se establezca la conexión, volverá a la pantalla automáticamente. N Si ha seleccionado un punto de acceso con autenticación de seguridad: Aparece la pantalla de la clave de seguridad. Especifique la clave de seguridad y pulse el botón azul del mando a distancia. N Si el tipo de cifrado de seguridad es WEP, podrá utilizar 0~9 y A~F cuando especifique la clave de seguridad. Botón Función ▲/▼/◄/► Mueve la selección arriba/abajo/izquierda/derecha. ENTERE Introduce el carácter seleccionado. Botón rojo Cambiar entre letras mayúsculas y minúsculas. Botón verde Permite borrar un carácter introducido. Botón azul Pulse este botón para terminar de introducir la clave de seguridad. ❑ Conexión WPS (Configuración protegida Wi-Fi) „ Si la clave de seguridad ya está configurada : En la lista de puntos de acceso, seleccione WPS. N Puede seleccionar PBC, PIN, Clave seguridad. • Conexión mediante PBC : Seleccione un PBC (Configuración del botón). Pulse el botón PBC en el punto de acceso (PA) antes de 2 minutos y espere a que se efectúe la conexión. • Conexión mediante PIN : Seleccione un PIN (Número de identificación personal). N Se muestra un mensaje con el código PIN. Escriba el código PIN en el dispositivo del punto de acceso antes de 2 minutos. Seleccione Aceptar y espere a que se efectúe la conexión. N Si ésta no funciona correctamente, vuelva a intentarlo N Cuando la conexión no se establece ni siquiera después de intentarlo de nuevo, reinicie el punto de acceso. Consulte el manual de cada punto de acceso. • Conexión mediante Clave seguridad : Al seleccionar Clave seguridad, se muestra la ventana de entrada. Escriba la clave de seguridad y pulse el botón ENTERE. N Si ésta no funciona correctamente, vuelva a intentarlo Config. red inalámb. Clave segur. n Mover Número EEntrar R Volver _ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 0~9 Número Minús Borrar Hecho * * Config. red inalámb. Seleccionar una red n Mover EEntrar R Volver Buscar Ad Hoc AP_1 AP_2 AP_3 AP_4 PBC PIN Clave segur. 3/9 Pulse el botón PBC en el punto de acceso. Nombre punto de acceso : AP_3 Cancelar Pulse Aceptar después de escribir el código PIN del TV mientras configura el punto de acceso. Nombre punto de acceso : AP_3 Número PIN : 123 45678 Aceptar Cancelar Config. red inalámb. Clave segur. n Mover Número EEntrar R Volver _ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 0~9 Número Minús Borrar Hecho BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 31 10/20/2009 5:02:51 PMSpanish - 32 „ Si la clave de seguridad no está configurada: Cuando no se ha establecido la configuración de seguridad de un punto de acceso que admita WPS, puede seleccionar PBC, PIN, Sin seguridad. Sin seguridad permite la conexión directa al punto de acceso sin utilizar la función WPC. N El procedimiento de PBC, PIN es el mismo que el anterior. Consúltelo si la clave de seguridad ya está configurada. N Si ésta no funciona correctamente, vuelva a intentarlo „ Ad Hoc : Puede conectarse a un dispositivo móvil sin punto de acceso a través de una mochila USB inalámbrica mediante una red par a par. • Cómo conectarse al nuevo Ad hoc 1. Elija Seleccionar una red para que se muestre una lista de dispositivos. 2. En la lista de dispositivos, pulse el botón azul del mando a distancia o seleccione Ad Hoc. N Se muestra el mensaje El sistema de red existente puede tener una funcionalidad limitada. ¿Desea cambiar la conexión de la red? 3. Introduzca el Nombre de la red (SSID) y la Clave seguridad generados en el dispositivo con el que se desea conectar. • Cómo conectarse a un dispositivo Ad Hoc existente 1. Elija Seleccionar una red para que se muestre la lista de dispositivos. 2. Seleccione el dispositivo que desee en la lista. 3. Si se ha aplicado la clave de seguridad, introdúzcala de nuevo. N Si la red no funciona normalmente, compruebe de nuevo el Nombre de la red (SSID) y la Clave seguridad. El motivo del funcionamiento incorrecto puede ser que la Clave seguridad no sea correcta. „ Wireless Network Setup - Auto Si desea conectar el punto de acceso, éste debe admitir DHCP. Sólo los dispositivos compatibles con el modo Ad-hoc se pueden conectar sin DHCP. 1. Establezca Tipo de red como Inalámbr.. 2. Seleccione Config. red inalámb.. 3. Establezca Config. protocolo Internet como Auto. N El protocolo de Internet se configura automáticamente. 4. Seleccione una red mediante Seleccionar una red. 5. Seleccione Prueba de red para comprobar la conectividad de la red. „ Config. red inalámb. - Manual Para conectar la red de modo inalámbrico mediante una dirección IP estática, se debe configurar el protocolo de Internet (IP). (Consulte la página 29.) N Para obtener información más detallada sobre la dirección IP estática, consulte el manual del usuario del compartidor IP inalámbrico. 1. Establezca Tipo de red como Inalámbr.. 2. Seleccione Config. red inalámb.. 3. Establezca Config. protocolo Internet como Manual. 4. Configure Dirección IP, Máscara de subred, Puerta de enlace y Servidor DNS. N Pulse los botones numéricos del mando a distancia para configurar la red manualmente. 5. Seleccione un punto de acceso mediante Seleccionar punto de acceso. 6. Seleccione Prueba de red para comprobar la conectividad de la red. * * Config. red inalámb. Seleccionar una red n Mover EEntrar R Volver Buscar Ad Hoc AP_1 AP_2 AP_3 AP_4 PBC PIN Clave segur. 3/9 El sistema de red existente puede tener una funcionalidad limitada. ¿Desea cambiar la conexión de la red? Sí No BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 32 10/20/2009 5:02:51 PMSpanish - 33 Conexión de un dispositivo USB 1. Pulse el botón POWER para encender el televisor. 2. Conecte un dispositivo USB que contenga archivos de fotos o música al terminal USB que se encuentra en el lateral del televisor. N El terminal USB 1(HDD) también se usa como terminal HDD. HDD (unidad de disco duro) es un dispositivo que almacena datos codificados digitalmente. N Media Play sólo admite dispositivos USB de clase de almacenamiento masivo (MSC). MSC es un dispositivo de clase de almacenamiento masivo sólo de transporte de gran capacidad. Ejemplos de MSC son las unidades de almacenamiento en miniatura, los lectores de tarjetas Flash y las unidades de disco duro de USB (no se admiten concentradores de USB). N MTP (Protocolo de transferencia de recursos) no se admite. N El sistema de archivos sólo admite FAT16/32 (el sistema de archivos NTFS no se admite). N Conecte un disco duro de USB al puerto reservado, el puerto USB1 (HDD). Sin embargo, si el dispositivo conectado precisa una gran potencia, es posible que el puerto USB1 (HDD) no admita el dispositivo. N Ciertos tipos de cámara digital USB y dispositivos de audio quizás no sean compatibles con este televisor. N Conecte directamente con el puerto USB del televisor. Si utiliza una conexión con un cable independiente, puede haber problemas de compatibilidad con el USB. N Antes de conectar el dispositivo al televisor, haga una copia de seguridad de sus archivos para evitar daños o pérdidas de datos. SAMSUNG no se hace responsable por cualquier daño en los archivos o pérdida de datos. N No desconecte el dispositivo USB mientras se esté cargando. N MSC admite archivos MP3 y JPEG, mientras que un dispositivo PTP sólo admite archivos JPEG. N Se admite el formato JPEG secuencial. N Cuanto mayor sea la resolución de la imagen, más tiempo tardará en visualizarse en la pantalla. N La resolución JPEG máxima admitida es 15360 x 8640 píxeles. N Con archivos dañados o que no se admiten, se muestra el mensaje Formato de archivo no admitido. N Si hay más de 4000 archivos de fotografías (o el número de archivos de música supera los 3000), es posible que no se muestre ningún archivo que supere el límite de los 4000 en la Lista de fotos (o Lista de música). N Los archivos MP3 con DRM descargados desde un sitio de pago no se pueden reproducir. N DRM (Gestión de derechos digitales) impide los usos ilegales de recursos digitales para proteger el copyright. N Cuando se desplaza a una foto, la carga puede tardar varios segundos. En este punto, el icono de carga aparecerá en la pantalla. ❑ Uso de los botones del mando a distancia en el menú Media Play Botón Función ▲/▼/◄/► Mover el cursor y seleccionar una opción. ENTERE Seleccionar la opción marcada. Reproducir o hacer una pausa mientras se está reproduciendo una presentación o un archivo de música. Reproducir o hacer una pausa en la presentación o el archivo de música. RETURN Volver al menú anterior.. TOOLS Ejecutar diversas funciones desde los menús de fotos y música. Detener la presentación o el archivo de música. Saltar al grupo anterior/Saltar al grupo siguiente. INFO Mostrar información del archivo. MEDIA.P Acceder al o salir del modo Media Play. DivX® Certified to play DivX® video, including premium content. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX,Inc. This is an official DivX Certified device that plays DivX video. Visit www.divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX video. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified® device must be registered in order to play DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) content. To generate the registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in the device setup menu. Go to vod.divx.com with this code to complete the registration process and learn more about DivX VOD. Media Play Panel lateral del TV Unidad USB BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 33 10/20/2009 5:02:52 PMSpanish - 34 Uso de la función Media Play Permite ver y reproducir archivos de fotos o música guardados en un dispositivo de clase de almacenamiento masivo (MSC) USB. Puede que no funcione correctamente con archivos multimedia sin licencia. ❑ Uso del menú Media Play 1. Pulse el botón MENU. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar Aplicación y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. 2. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar Media Play (USB & DLNA) y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. O Pulse el botón MEDIA.P del mando a distancia para que se muestre el menú Media Play. O Pulse varias veces el botón SOURCE del mando a distancia para seleccionar USB o DLNA y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. 3. Pulse el botón rojo y, a continuación, los botones ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar el correspondiente dispositivo de memoria USB (si está conectado a un concentrador). Pulse el botón ENTERE. N Esta función puede variar según el dispositivo de memoria USB conectado al televisor. N El nombre del dispositivo USB seleccionado aparece en la parte inferior izquierda de la pantalla. 4. Pulse los botones ◄ o ► para seleccionar un icono (Photo, Music, Movie, Setup) y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. N Para salir del modo Media Play pulse el botón MEDIA.P del mando a distancia. N En este modo, se pueden ver clips de películas contenidos en un juego, pero no se puede reproducir éste. ❑ Extracción segura del dispositivo de memoria USB Puede quitar el dispositivo del televisor con seguridad. 1. Pulse el botón TOOLS en la pantalla de la lista de archivos del reproductor multimedia o mientras se reproduce una presentación, un archivo de música o una película. 2. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar Retirar con seguridad y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. 3. Retire el dispositivo USB del televisor. ❑ Pantalla de visualización 1. Norma de clasificación actual : Este campo muestra la norma actual de la clasificación de archivos. 2. Ver grupos : El grupo de clasificación que incluye la foto seleccionada se resalta. 3. Archivo seleccionado actualmente : Se resalta el archivo seleccionado actualmente. 4. Información de selección del elemento : Muestra el número de fotos seleccionadas cuando se pulsa el botón amarillo. 5. Dispositivo actual : Muestra el nombre del dispositivo actualmente seleccionado. N Botón rojo (Dispositivo) : Selecciona un dispositivo conectado. 6. Elementos de ayuda • Botón verde (Conf. fav.) : Cambia la configuración de favorito del archivo seleccionado. Pulse este botón varias veces hasta que se muestre el valor que desee. • Botón amarillo (Selecc.) : Selecciona un archivo en la lista de archivos. Los archivos seleccionados se marcan con un símbolo c. Vuelva a pulsar el botón amarillo para cancelar la selección del archivo. • Botón TOOLS (Herramientas) : Muestra los menús de opciones. (El menú Herramientas cambia de acuerdo con el estado actual.) • Botón R RETURN (Volver) : Volver al menú anterior. Carpeta Preferencia Vista básica Cronología Color IMG_0335.JPG 4/6 IMG_0349. JPG ▶ ▶ Carpeta 2 1 Carpeta 1 1 Secuencia Rep.gr. act. Información Retirar con seguridad ../ Nombre carpeta/ Photo USB „ Dispositivo Selecc T Herramientas R Carpeta superior Media Play PHOTO Music Setup PHOTO USB : USB 851.98MB/995.00MB Libre Movie USB „ Dispositivo RVolver Preferencia Vista básica Cronología Color Carpeta Mar.01.2009 IMG_0343 .JPG ▶ ▶ IMG_03496 .JPG IMG_03496 .JPG Mar Apr Jun Nov IMG_0335.JPG 1/67 ▶ ▶ 2009 ◀ IMG_03496 .JPG 3 1 2 1Archivos selecc. 4 5 6 Photo USB „ Dispositivo Conf. fav. Selecc T Herramientas R Volver c BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 34 10/20/2009 5:02:58 PMSpanish - 35 Clasificación de la lista de fotos/música/películas „ Vista básica Muestra las carpetas del dispositivo de memoria USB. Si selecciona una carpeta y pulsa el botón ENTERE, sólo se muestran los archivos de fotos incluidos en la carpeta seleccionada. N Cuando se clasifican según la Vista básica, no se pueden configurar los archivos favoritos. „ Carpeta Ordena los archivos por carpetas.Si hay varias carpetas en el USB, los archivos de fotos se muestran ordenados en cada carpeta. El archivo de la carpeta raíz se muestra primero y los otros se muestran ordenados alfabéticamente por nombre. „ Preferencia → ★ ★ ★ , ★ ★ ★ , ★ ★ ★ , ★ ★ ★ Ordena los archivos por preferencias (favoritos). N Cambio de la configuración de favoritos Seleccione una foto en la lista de fotos y pulse varias veces el botón verde hasta que aparezca la opción deseada. N Las estrellas son para la agrupación solamente. Por ejemplo, la opción de 3 estrellas no tiene prioridad alguna sobre la opción de una estrella. „ Cronología (Photo / Movie) Ordena y muestra los títulos de películas según el símbolo, el número, alfabéticamente y orden especial. „ Título (Music / Movie) Clasifica los títulos de música según el símbolo, el número, alfabéticamente y orden especial, y muestra el archivo de música. ❑ Photo „ Color → Rojo / Amarillo / Verde / Azul / Magenta / Negro / Gris / Sin clasificar Ordena las fotos por color. Puede cambiar la información del color de la foto. N Debe activar Usar vista de color en el menú Configuración antes de ordenar las fotos por color. ❑ Music „ Artista Ordena los archivos de música por artista según el símbolo, el número, alfabéticamente y orden especial. „ Ánimo → Enérgico / Rítmico / Triste / Excitante / Calm / Sin clasificar Ordena los archivos de música por el estado de ánimo. Puede cambiar la información del tipo de música. „ Género Ordena los archivos de música por género. Carpeta Preferencia Vista básica Título Artista 1 When I Dream 3/4 Carol kidd Mr A-Z 2009 Pop usermanual Heaven NPKI ▶ 1 ▶ ▶ ▶ ▶ ../ Nombre carpeta/ Music USB „ Dispositivo Selecc T Herramientas R Carpeta superior ▶ ▶ Preferencia Vista básica Cronología Título Carpeta Apr Apr.27.2009 Movie USB „ Dispositivo Conf. fav. Selecc T Herramientas R Carpeta superior Película_000. avi Película_000. avi Película_000. avi MOVIE_001.avi 1/5 ▶ ▶ ◀ Película_000. avi Preferencia Vista básica Cronología Color Carpeta Mar.01.2009 IMG_0343 .JPG ▶ ▶ IMG_03496 .JPG IMG_03496 .JPG Mar Apr Jun Nov IMG_0335.JPG 1/67 ▶ ▶ 2009 ◀ IMG_03496 .JPG Photo US„ Dispositivo Conf. fav Selecc T Herramientas R Carpeta superior BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 35 10/20/2009 5:03:06 PMSpanish - 36 Menús de opciones de la lista de fotos/música/películas 1. Pulse el botón MEDIA.P. 2. Pulse los botones ◄ o ► para seleccionar Photo, Music o Movie y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. 3. Pulse los botones ◄ o ► para seleccionar el archivo que desee. N Selección de varios archivos - Pulse los botones ◄ o ► para seleccionar el archivo que desee. A continuación pulse el botón amarillo. - Repita el proceso anterior para seleccionar varios archivos. - Junto al archivo seleccionado aparece la marca c. 4. Pulse el botón TOOLS. N El menú de opciones cambia de acuerdo con el estado actual. „ Rep.gr. act. Con este menú se puede realizar una presentación de diapositivas de los archivos de fotos del grupo de clasificación actualmente seleccionado. „ Deselecc. todos (Si hay, al menos, un archivo seleccionado) Puede cancelar la selección de todos los archivos. N La marca c indica que el archivo correspondiente seleccionado está oculto. „ Información Se muestra la información del archivo de fotos/música/películas. Se puede ver la información de los archivos durante una presentación siguiendo el mismo procedimiento. O Pulse el botón INFO para ver la información. „ Retirar con seguridad Se puede quitar el dispositivo del televisor con seguridad. ❑ Photo „ Secuencia Con este menú puede realizar una presentación de diapositivas de los archivos de fotos del dispositivo de memoria USB . „ Cambiar info grupo (Si la tecla de clasificación es Color) Se puede cambiar la información de color de un archivo (o grupo de archivos) de una foto seleccionada para mover ésta de un grupo de color a otro. N Esto no cambia el color real de la foto. N La información del grupo del archivo actual se ha actualizado y las fotos se han movido al nuevo grupo de color. N Para cambiar la información de varios archivos, seleccione los que desee cambiar con el botón amarillo. ❑ Music „ Cambiar grupo (si la tecla de clasificación es Mood) Puede cambiar la información del tipo de música. La información del grupo del archivo actual se ha actualizado y el archivo se ha movido al nuevo grupo. Para cambiar la información de varios archivos, seleccione éstos con el botón amarillo. Select T Tools R Upper Folder Carpeta Preferencia Vista básica Título Artista 1 1 ▶ ▶ ../ folder name/ Sky When I Dream 3/4 Carol kidd Mr A-Z 2009 Pop NPKI usermanual Heaven ▶ NPKI Rep.gr. act. Información Retirar con seguridad Music USB „ Dispositivo Selecc T Herramientas R Carpeta superior MOVIE_004 MOVIE_003 .avi .avi MOVIE_000 .avi MOVIE_005 .avi MOVIE_007 .avi MOVIE_001.avi 1/5 MOVIE_006 .avi ▶ ▶ Preferencia Vista básica Cronología Título Carpeta Apr Apr.27.2009 Movie USB „ Dispositivo Conf. fav Selecc T Herramientas R Carpeta superior Rep.gr. act. Información Retirar con seguridad Vista básica Cronología Color Carpeta Preferencia IMG_0335.JPG 4/6 IMG_0349 .JPG ▶ ▶ Folder 2 1 Folder 1 1 Secuencia Rep.gr. act. Cambiar grupo Información Retirar con seguridad Photo USB „ Dispositivo Conf. fav. Selecc T Herramientas R Carpeta superior BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 36 10/20/2009 5:03:12 PMSpanish - 37 Menús de opciones de las presentaciones y la reproducción de música y películas 1. Durante una presentación (o la visualización de una foto) o la reproducción de música o películas, pulse el botón TOOLS para establecer una opción. 2. Pulse el botón ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar la opción deseada y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. „ Configuración de la imagen / Configuración del sonido Puede seleccionar la configuración de la imagen y el sonido. „ Información Se muestra la información del archivo. „ Retirar con seguridad Se puede quitar el dispositivo del televisor con seguridad. ❑ Menú de opciones de la presentación de diapositivas „ Detener presentación / Iniciar visionado automático Se puede iniciar o detener una presentación. „ Vel. secuencia → Lenta / Normal / Rápida Se puede seleccionar la velocidad de la presentación. N Esta función está disponible sólo durante la presentación. N Durante la presentación, también se puede cambiar la velocidad de ésta pulsando el botón π π (REW) o μ μ (FF). „ Efecto de secuencia Puede seleccionar los efectos de transición de pantalla que se utilizan en la presentación. • Ninguno / Fundido 1 / Fundido 2 / Persiana / Espiral / Tablero / Lineal / Escaleras / Cortinilla / Aleatorio N Esta función está disponible sólo durante la presentación. „ Girar Puede girar las fotos guardadas en el dispositivo de memoria USB. N Con cada pulsación del botón ◄ la imagen gira 270˚, 180˚, 90˚ y 0˚. N Con cada pulsación del botón ► la imagen gira 90˚, 180˚, 270˚ y 0˚. N El archivo girado no se guarda. „ Zoom Puede ampliar las fotos guardadas en el dispositivo de memoria USB. (x1 → x2 → x4) N Para mover una foto ampliada, pulse el botón ENTERE y, a continuación, los botones ▲/▼/◄/►. Tenga en cuenta que si una imagen ampliada es menor que el tamaño de la pantalla original, la función de cambio de ubicación no está operativa. N El archivo ampliado no se guarda. „ Música de fondo Puede seleccionar una música de fondo para la presentación. N Para usar esta función, en el dispositivo USB debe haber archivos de música y fotos almacenados. N Se deben cargar archivos de música para acceder al modo BGM. Reproduzca los archivos de música en la categoría de música para cargarlos. ❑ Menú de opciones de la reproducción de música „ Modo de repetición → Act. / Des. Puede reproducir archivos de música repetidamente. ❑ Menús de opciones de la reproducción de películas „ Picture Size → Fit/Original Reproducir vídeo al tamaño de la pantalla o al original. „ Configuración del subtítulo Puede configurar los subtítulos de la película. Tools Herramientas Detener presentación Vel. secuencia :Normal Efecto de secuencia :Fundido 2 Girar Zoom Música de fondo Configuración de la imagen Configuración del sonido Información › U Mover E Entrar eSalir Herramientas Modo de repetición ◄ Act. ► Configuración de la imagen Configuración del sonido Información Retirar con seguridad U Mover š™ Ajustar eSalir Herramientas Configuración de la imagen Configuración del sonido Tamaño de imagen : Ajustar Configuración del subtítulo Información Retirar con seguridad U Mover  Entrar eSalir BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 37 10/20/2009 5:03:13 PMSpanish - 38 Visualización de una foto o una presentación ❑ Visualización de una presentación N En la presentación se usan todos los archivos de la sección de la lista de archivos. N En la presentación, los archivos se muestran en orden a partir del archivo que se muestra en este momento. N La presentación se ejecuta según el orden de la clasificación de la sección de la lista de archivos. N Los archivos se música se pueden reproducir automáticamente durante la presentación si Música de fondo está configurado como Act.. N Cuando se muestre una lista de fotos, pulse el botón ∂(Reproducir)/ ENTERE del mando a distancia para iniciar la presentación. N Botones de control de la presentación ENTERE Reproducir/hacer una pausa en la presentación. Reproducir la presentación. Hacer una pausa en la presentación. Salir de la presentación y volver a la lista de fotos. / Cambiar la velocidad de la reproducción de la presentación. T TOOLS Ejecutar varias funciones de los menús de fotos. ❑ Reproducción del grupo actual 1. Pulse el botón ▲ para ir a la sección de las teclas de clasificación. 2. Pulse el botón ◄ o ► para seleccionar una norma de clasificación. 3. Pulse el botón ▼ para ir a la sección de la lista de grupos. 4. Seleccione un grupo con los botones ◄ y ►. 5. Pulse el botón ∂ (Reproducir). Se inicia la presentación de diapositivas de los archivos del grupo seleccionado. „ Otra posibilidad 1. Seleccione una tecla de clasificación y, en la sección de la lista de archivos, seleccione las fotos del grupo que desee. N Para ir al grupo anterior/siguiente, pulse los botones π π (REW) o µ μ (FF). 2. Pulse el botón TOOLS. 3. Pulse el botón ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar Rep.gr. act. y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. N En la presentación se usan sólo las fotos del grupo de clasificación que incluye los archivos seleccionados. ❑ Para ver una presentación sólo con los archivos seleccionados 1. Pulse el botón ▼ para seleccionar la sección de la lista de archivos. 2. Pulse el botón ◄ o ► para seleccionar la foto que desee en la sección de la lista de archivos. 3. Pulsar el botón amarillo. 4. Repita el proceso anterior para seleccionar varias fotos. N La marca c aparece a la izquierda de la foto seleccionada. N Si selecciona sólo un archivo, la presentación no se efectuará. N Para cancelar la selección de los archivos, pulse el botón TOOLS y seleccione Deselecc. todos. 5. Pulse el botón ∂ (Reproducir)/ENTERE. N Los archivos seleccionados se usan en la presentación. „ Otra posibilidad 1. En la sección de la lista de archivos, pulse los botones amarillos para seleccionar las fotos deseadas. 2. Pulse el botón TOOLS. 3. Pulse el botón ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar Secuencia y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. N Los archivos seleccionados se usan en la presentación. ▶ ▶ Preferencia Vista básica Cronología Título Carpeta Apr Apr.27.2009 Movie USB „ Dispositivo Conf. fav. Selecc T Herramientas R Carpeta superior Película_003. avi Película_003. avi Película_003. avi MOVIE_001.avi 1/5 Película_003. avi Vista básica Cronología Colour Carpeta Preferencia IMG_0335.JPG 4/6 IMG_0349 .JPG ▶ ▶ Folder 2 1 Folder 1 1 Secuencia Rep.gr. act. Cambiar grupo Información Retirar con seguridad Photo r Normal IMG_0335.JPG 3648x2432 2009/3/15 1/4 USB E Pausa lr Ant./Sig T Herramientas R Volver USB „ Dispositivo Conf. fav. Selecc T Herramientas R Carpeta superior BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 38 10/20/2009 5:03:19 PMSpanish - 39 Reproducción de música ❑ Reproducción de un archivo de música 1. Pulse el botón ▼ para seleccionar la sección de la lista de archivos. 2. Pulse el botón ◄ o ► para seleccionar el archivo de música que desee. 3. Pulse el botón ∂ (Reproducir)/ENTERE. N Este menú sólo muestra archivos con la extensión MP3. Los archivos con otras extensiones no se muestran, aunque se hayan guardado en el mismo dispositivo USB. N El archivo seleccionado se visualiza en la parte superior con su tiempo de reproducción. N Para ajustar el volumen de la música, pulse el botón del volumen del mando a distancia. Para silenciar el sonido, pulse el botón M MUTE del mando a distancia. N Si, al reproducir archivos MP3, el sonido no se oye correctamente, ajuste Ecualizador y SRS TruSurround HD en el menú Sonido. (Un archivo MP3 con una modulación excesiva puede causar problemas de sonido.) N La duración de la reproducción de un archivo de música puede visualizarse como ‘00:00:00’ si la información del tiempo de reproducción no se encuentra al inicio del archivo. N π (REW) o μ μ (FF) no funcionan durante la reproducción. N Botones de control de la reproducción de música ENTERE Reproducir/hacer una pausa en el archivo de música. Salir del modo de reproducción y volver a la lista de música. Reproducir el archivo de música. T TOOLS Ejecutar varias funciones de los menús de Hacer una pausa en el archivo de música. música. N Icono de información de la función de la música Cuando todos los archivos de música de la carpeta (o el archivo seleccionado) se repiten. Modo de repetición está Act.. Cuando todos los archivos de música de la carpeta (o el archivo seleccionado) se reproducen una vez Modo de repetición está Des.. ❑ Reproducción de un grupo de música 1. Pulse el botón ▲ para ir a la sección de las teclas de clasificación. 2. Pulse el botón ◄ o ► para seleccionar una norma de clasificación. 3. Pulse el botón ▼ o ENTERE para ir a la sección de la lista de grupos. 4. Pulse el botón ∂ (reproducir). Se inicia la reproducción de los archivos del grupo seleccionado. „ Otra posibilidad 1. Seleccione una tecla de clasificación y en la sección de la lista de archivos seleccione los archivos del grupo que desee. N Para ir al grupo anterior/siguiente, pulse los botones π (REW) o µ μ (FF). 2. Pulse el botón TOOLS. 3. Pulse el botón ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar Rep.gr. act. y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. N Se reproducen los archivos de música incluidos en el archivo seleccionado. ❑ Reproducción de archivos de música seleccionados 1. Pulse el botón ▼ para seleccionar la sección de la lista de archivos. 2. Pulse el botón ◄ o ► para seleccionar el archivo de música que desee. 3. Pulsar el botón amarillo. 4. Repita el proceso anterior para seleccionar varios archivos de música. N La marca c aparece a la izquierda del archivo de música seleccionado. N Para cancelar la selección de los archivos, pulse el botón TOOLS y seleccione Deselecc . 5. Pulse el botón ∂ (Reproducir)/ENTERE. N Se reproducen los archivos seleccionados. r 00:00:02 / 00:04:55 r 1/3 When I Dream r r Geek In The Pink Heaven USB E Pausa lr Ant./Sig T Herramientas R Volver BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 39 10/20/2009 5:03:20 PMSpanish - 40 Reproducción de un archivo de película ❑ Reproducción de un archivo de película 1. Pulse el botón ▼ para seleccionar la sección de la lista de archivos. 2. Pulse el botón ◄ o ► para seleccionar el archivo de película que desee. 3. Pulse el botón ∂ (Reproducir)/ENTERE. N El archivo seleccionado se reproduce. N El archivo seleccionado se visualiza en la parte superior con su tiempo de reproducción. N La duración de la reproducción de un archivo de película puede visualizarse como ‘00:00:00’ si la información del tiempo de reproducción no se encuentra al inicio del archivo. N Se pueden reproducir emocionantes archivos multimedia de juegos, pero la función de juego no se admite. N Formatos de subtítulos admitidos Nombre Extensión del archivo Lenguaje de programación Texto basado en tiempo MPEG-4 .ttxt XML SAMI .smi HTML SubRip .srt basado en cadenas SubViewer .sub basado en cadenas Micro DVD .sub o .txt basado en cadenas N Formatos de vídeo admitidos Extensión del archivo Contenedor Decodificador de vídeo Códec de audio Resolución *.avi AVI Divx 3.11/4.x/5.1/6.0 MP3 AC3 LPCM ADPCM 720x576 XviD 1920x1080 H.264 BP/MP/HP 1920x1080 MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080 Motion JPEG 800x600 *.mkv MKV Divx 3.11/4.x/5.1/6.0 MP3 AC3 LPCM ADPCM 720x576 XviD 1920x1080 H.264 BP/MP/HP 1920x1080 MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080 Motion JPEG 800x600 *.asf ASF Divx 3.11/4.x/5.1/6.0 MP3 AC3 LPCM ADPCM WMA 720x576 XviD 1920x1080 H.264 BP/MP/HP 1920x1080 MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080 Motion JPEG 800x600 *.wmv (VC1) ASF VC1 WMA 1920x1080 *.mp4 MP4 (SMP4) H.264 BP/MP/HP MP3 ADPCM AAC 1920x1080 MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080 XVID 1920x1080 *.3gp 3GPP H.264 BP/MP/HP ADPCM AAC 1920x1080 MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080 *.vro VRO VOB MPEG2 AC3 MPEG LPCM 1920x1080 MPEG1 1920x1080 *.mpg *.mpeg PS MPEG1 AC3 MPEG LPCM 1920x1080 MPEG2 1920x1080 *.ts *.tp *.trp TS MPEG2 AAC MP3 1920x1080 H.264 1920x1080 VC1 1920x1080 N Botones de control de la reproducción de vídeo ENTERE Reproducir/hacer una pausa en el archivo de película Reproducir el archivo de película Hacer una pausa en el archivo de película Salir del modo de reproducción y volver a la lista de películas. T TOOLS Ejecutar varias funciones de los menús de películas. ◄/► Saltar hacia adelante o hacia atrás en el archivo de película. ▲/▼ Ir al principio o al final del archivo. ▶ r r 00:00:02 / 00:01:55 1/3 Película_000.avi USB E Pausa lr Saltar T Herramientas R Volver BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 40 10/20/2009 5:03:21 PMSpanish - 41 ❑ Reproducción de un grupo de películas 1. Pulse el botón ▲ para ir a la sección de las teclas de clasificación. 2. Pulse el botón ◄ o ► para seleccionar una norma de clasificación. 3. Pulse el botón ▼ o ENTERE para ir a la sección de la lista de grupos. 4. Pulse el botón ∂ (reproducir). Sólo se inicia la reproducción de los archivos del grupo seleccionado. „ Otra posibilidad 1. Seleccione una tecla de clasificación y en la sección de la lista de archivos seleccione los archivos del grupo que desee. N Para ir al grupo anterior/siguiente, pulse los botones π π (REW) o µ μ (FF). 2. Pulse el botón TOOLS. 3. Pulse el botón ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar Rep.gr. act. y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. N Se reproducen los archivos de películas del grupo de ordenación, incluido el archivo seleccionado. ❑ Reproducción de archivos de películas seleccionados 1. Pulse el botón ▼ para seleccionar la sección de la lista de archivos. 2. Pulse el botón ◄ o ► para seleccionar el archivo de música que desee. 3. Pulsar el botón amarillo. N La marca c aparece a la izquierda del archivo de película seleccionado. N Para cancelar la selección de los archivos, pulse el botón TOOLS y seleccione Deselecc. todos. 4. Repita el proceso anterior para seleccionar varios archivos de película. 5. Pulse el botón ∂ (reproducir)/ENTERE. N Sólo se reproduce el archivo seleccionado. ❑ Continuación de la reproducción de una película (reanudar reproducción) Si sale de la función de reproducción de la película, ésta se puede reproducir posteriormente desde el punto en que se detuvo. 1. Seleccione el archivo de la película que desee seguir reproduciendo pulsando los botones ◄ o ► en la sección de la lista de archivos. 2. Pulse el botón ∂ (Play)/ENTERE. 3. Seleccione reanudar reproducción con el botón azul. N La película se reproducirá desde el punto en que se detuvo. N Si la función Cont. Movie Play Help está configurada como On en el menú Setup, aparecerá un mensaje emergente cuando se reanude la reproducción de un archivo de película. Uso del menú de configuración Muestra la configuración del usuario del menú Media Play. 1. Pulse el botón MEDIA.P del mando a distancia para que se muestre el menú Media Play. 2. Pulse los botones ◄ o ► para seleccionar Setup, y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. 3. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar la opción deseada. 4. Pulse los botones ◄ o ► para seleccionar la opción. N Para salir del modo Media Play, pulse el botón MEDIA.P del mando a distancia. „ Usar vista de color → Act. / Des. Seleccionar par ver la información de color en el menú Foto. N Si está configurado como Act., se incrementa el tiempo de carga para reunir la información del color „ Modo de repetición → Act. / Des. Puede seleccionar que los archivos de música se repitan continuamente. „ Recordar contin. pelíc. → Act. / Apagado Seleccionar para mostrar el mensaje de ayuda emergente para la reproducción de una película desde el punto en que se dejó de ver anteriormente. „ Obtener código de registro de DivX® VOD Muestra el código de registro autorizado para el televisor. Si se conecta al sitio Web DivX y registra el código de registro con una cuenta personal, puede descargar el archivo de registro VOD. Si reproduce el registro VOD mediante el reproductor multimedia, el registro se ha terminado. Para obtener más información sobre DivX® VOD, visite www.DivX.com „ Obtener código desactivación DivX® VOD Si DivX® VOD no está registrado, aparece el código de desactivación de registro. Si ejecuta esta función cuando DivX® VOD se ha registrado, el registro actual de DivX® VOD se desactiva. „ Tiempo ej. salvapantallas → 2 horas / 4 horas / 8 horas Puede configurar el tiempo de espera necesario para que se ejecute el salvapantallas. „ Información Puede configurar que se muestre la información del dispositivo conectado. „ Retirar con seguridad Se puede quitar el dispositivo del televisor con seguridad. Media Play USB : USB 851.98MB/995.00MB Free SETUP Photo Music Movie Setup USB „ eSalir Dispositivo Setup UMover Ajustar Volver Usar vista de color ◄ Des. ► Modo de repetición Act. Recordar contin. pelíc. Act. Obtener código de registro de DivX® VOD Obtener código desactivación DivX® VOD Tiempo ej. salvapantallas 10 min Información Retirar con seguridad USB „ Dispositivo BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 41 10/20/2009 5:03:21 PMSpanish - 42 Configuración de la red DLNA DLNA permite ver en el televisor vídeos e imágenes guardados en el ordenador a través de una conexión de red en modo Media Play. De esta forma se elimina la necesidad de copiarlos en un dispositivo de almacenamiento USB y después conectar éste al televisor. Para utilizar DLNA, es necesario conectar el televisor a la red e instalar la aplicación DLNA en el ordenador. ❑ Diagrama de conexión con la red - Cable ❑ Diagrama de conexión con la red - Inalámbrica 1. Para obtener más información sobre cómo configurar la red, consulte ‘Configuración de la red’. N Se le recomienda que ubique el televisor y el PC en la misma subred. Las 3 primeras partes de la dirección de la subred del televisor y las direcciones IP del PC deben ser iguales; sólo la última parte (la dirección host) se debe cambiar. (Por ejemplo, dirección IP: 123.456.789.**) 2. Conecte el ordenador en el que se instalará el programa Samsung PC Share Manager y el módem externo con un cable LAN. N Se puede conectar el televisor al ordenador directamente sin usar compartidor (enrutador). Instalación de la aplicación DLNA Para reproducir contenidos del ordenador en el televisor, primero hay que instalar la aplicación. Para usar la función DLNA sin problemas, use el programa del CD-ROM suministrado con el televisor o use el programa PC Share Manager de Samsung que se corresponda con el modelo de televisor que se puede descargar del sitio Web de Samsung. TV Módem externo (ADSL/VDSL/TV por cable) LAN PC LAN Media Play-DLNA TV LAN PC o 1 Panel lateral del TV Adaptador de LAN inalámbrica de Samsung BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 42 10/20/2009 5:03:23 PMSpanish - 43 Uso de la aplicación DLNA Disposición de la pantalla del programa 1. Menús : La aplicación incluye los menús siguientes : arch., compartir, Servidor y Ayuda. 2. Haga clic para compartir la carpeta del servidor PC seleccionado. 3. Haga clic para cancelar el acceso compartido. 4. Haga clic para actualizar la carpeta y los archivos del ordenador. 5. Haga clic para sincronizar el estado de acceso compartido. 6. Se mostrarán las carpetas y los archivos del ordenador que se compartirán. 7. Se mostrarán las carpetas que comparte el usuario. 8. El nombre del servidor PC que se muestra en la lista de dispositivos del reproductor multimedia. „ Requisitos del sistema 1. Inserte en el ordenador el CD del programa suministrado con el televisor. 2. Se necesitan 20 MB de espacio en el disco para la instalación del programa. N Si se comparten archivos, se necesitan hasta 20 MB de espacio en disco duro por cada 100 archivos. N Si se cancela el acceso compartido a archivos, también se libera el espacio en disco duro utilizado para la información delas miniaturas. „ Formatos compatibles • Imagen : JPEG (jpg, jpeg) : MP3/ Video: AVI, MKV, ASF, MP4, 3GPP, PS, TS otros. Con el fin de conocer de forma detallada los formatos de vídeo admitidos, consulte las instrucciones de ‘Reproducción de un archivo de película’. „ Instalación de la aplicación ► ► ► 1. Ejecute el archivo Setup.exe que se encuentra en el CD del programa suministrado con el producto. N También puede descargar el archivo desde www.samsung.com. 2. Instale SAMSUNG PC Share Manager como se muestra en las figuras siguientes. 3. Cuando la instalación haya finalizado, se mostrará en el escritorio el icono de PC Share Manager. N Haga doble clic sobre el icono para ejecutar el programa. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 43 10/20/2009 5:03:25 PMSpanish - 44 ❑ Compartir „ Acceso compartido a una carpeta Se pueden compartir carpetas entre el ordenador y el televisor. „ Cancelación de una carpeta compartida Se puede cancelar el acceso a una carpeta compartida en el ordenador. Seleccione una carpeta del panel compartir carpeta y seleccione no compartir carpeta. „ Aplicación de los ajustes actuales Realice este procedimiento cuando sea necesario sincronizar debido a la creación de una nueva carpeta compartida o a la cancelación de una carpeta compartida. El menú Configurar estado cambiado aplica los cambios a las carpetas compartidas según los datos guardados con el programa de acceso compartido del ordenador. Como aplicar los cambios a los datos internos es un proceso lento, esta función permite a los usuarios aplicar los cambios en los datos sólo cuando resulta necesario. Los cambios en el estado de la carpeta compartida no se aplican al servidor hasta que se selecciona el menú Configurar estado cambiado. Los cambios en las carpetas compartidas no se aplican al ordenador hasta que se selecciona el menú Configurar estado cambiado. „ Ajuste de los permisos de acceso Para permitir que el televisor encuentre el ordenador, es necesario ajustar el televisor en Config. norma dispositivo en la ventana de Ajuste de los permisos de acceso. Además, es necesario que el ordenador servidor y el televisor se encuentren en la misma subred. • MetMétodo : Seleccione el menú compartir y seleccione Config. Los elementos rechazados se representan en color gris. Puede cambiar los permisos de acceso con el botón Allow aceptar/Denegar. Para eliminar un elemento, selecciónelo y después elija borrar elemento seleccionado. ❑ Servidor „ Servidor La función de servidor del ordenador se puede iniciar o detener. „ Iniciar servidor al arrancar Windows Puede determinar si desea que el servidor del ordenador se inicie automáticamente cuando Windows se inicie. „ Change server name Es posible cambiar el nombre del servidor del ordenador. Uso de la función DLNA ❑ Uso del menú DLNA DLNA (Digital Living Network Alliance) permite reproducir el contenido guardado en un servidor DLNA (normalmente un ordenador) conectado al televisor o a través de una red. El reproductor multimedia permite reproducir contenidos guardados en un dispositivo de memoria USB conectado al televisor, mientras que DLNA permite reproducir contenido guardado en un servidor DLNA (el ordenador) conectado al televisor o a través de la red. Los procedimientos para usar los contenidos son los mismos que los del reproductor multimedia. 1. Pulse el botón MEDIA.P del mando a distancia para que se muestre el menú DLNA. 2. Pulse los botones ◄ o ► para seleccionar icono (Photo, Music, Movie, Setup) y, a continuación pulse el botón ENTERE. N Para salir del modo DLNA, pulse el botón MEDIA.P del mando a distancia. N DLNA no es compatible con las funciones siguientes. - Las funciones de música de fondo y configuración de la música de fondo. - La clasificación de archivos por preferencias en las carpetas de fotos, música y películas. - La función del cambio de información del grupo. - Las funciones de copiar / eliminar. - La función de retirar con seguridad. - Los botones REW/FF (π/μ) funcionan durante la reproducción de una película. - Función de continuación de la reproducción de una película (reanudar reproducción). N Es posible que la función Skip no funcione con algún contenedor como asf y mkv. N No se admite el subtítulo incorporado, Multi-audio ni DivX DRM. N Samsung PC Share Manager debe ser compatible con el programa cortafuegos del ordenador. N Es posible que las funciones de omitir (◄/► teclas) y de pausa no funcionen mientras se reproduce una película para el DLNA de otros fabricantes, dependiendo de la información de contenidos correspondiente. N Es posible que no se muestre el tiempo de reproducción mientras se visualiza una película. Media Play PHOTO Music Setup PHOTO USB : USB 851.98MB/995.00MB Free Movie USB „ Dispositivo Salir BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 44 10/20/2009 5:03:25 PMSpanish - 45 Conexión de dispositivos Anynet+ Anynet + es una función que permite controlar con el mando a distancia del televisor Samsung todos los dispositivos de Samsung conectados que sean compatibles con Anynet + . El sistema Anynet + sólo se puede usar con dispositivos de Samsung que tengan la función Anynet + . Para asegurarse de que el dispositivo de Samsung tenga dicha función, compruebe si lleva el logotipo Anynet + ❑ Para conectar al televisor 1. Conecte los terminales [HDMI 1], [HDMI 2 (DVI)], [HDMI 3] o [HDMI 4] del televisor y el terminal HDMI OUT del dispositivo Anynet + correspondiente mediante un cable HDMI. ❑ Para conectar al sistema Home Cinema 1. Conecte los terminales [HDMI 1], [HDMI 2 (DVI)], [HDMI 3] o [HDMI 4] del televisor y el terminal HDMI OUT del dispositivo Anynet + correspondiente mediante un cable HDMI. 2. Conecte el terminal HDMI IN del sistema Home Cinema y el terminal HDMI OUT del dispositivo Anynet + correspondiente mediante un cable HDMI. N Conecte el cable óptico entre el terminal Digital Audio Out (Optical) del televisor y el terminal Digital Audio Input del sistema Home Cinema. N Si se sigue la conexión anterior, el terminal Optical sólo produce la salida de 2 canales de audio. Sólo oirá sonido de los altavoces frontales izquierdo y derecho y del subwoofer del sistema Home Cinema. Para escuchar el canal de audio 5.1, conecte el terminal Digital Audio Out (Optical) del reproductor de DVD o del decodificador de cable/satélite (dispositivo Anynet 1 o 2) directamente al amplificador o al sistema Home Cinema, no al televisor. N Conecte sólo un sistema Home Cinema. N Puede conectar un dispositivo Anynet + mediante el cable HDMI 1.3. Algunos cables HDMI pueden no admitir las funciones Anynet + . N Anynet + funciona cuando el dispositivo de AV que admite Anynet + se encuentra en estado de espera o de encendido. N Anynet + admite hasta 12 dispositivos de AV en total. Tenga en cuenta que puede conectar hasta 3 dispositivos del mismo tipo. N Anynet + admite hasta 3 dispositivos simultáneamente. Acerca de Anynet+ Dispositivo 1 Anynet + Dispositivo 2 Anynet + Dispositivo 3 Anynet + TV Cable HDMI 1.3 Cable HDMI 1.3 Cable HDMI 1.3 TV Dispositivo 1 Anynet + Dispositivo 2 Anynet + Dispositivo 3 Anynet + Cable HDMI 1.3 Cable HDMI 1.3 Cable HDMI 1.3 Cable HDMI 1.3 Sistema Home Cinema Cable óptico Dispositivo 4 Anynet + Cable HDMI 1.3 Dispositivo 4 Anynet+ Cable HDMI 1.3 BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 45 10/20/2009 5:03:27 PMSpanish - 46 Configuración de Anynet+ ❑ Configuración de Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) T Pulse el botón TOOLS para ver el menú Herramientas. También puede mostrar el menú Anynet+ seleccionando Herramientas → Anynet + (HDMI-CEC). „ Anynet+(HDMI-CEC) → Desactivado / Activado Para utilizar la función Anynet + , Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) debe estar configurado como Activado. N Cuando la función Anynet+(HDMI-CEC) está desactivada, todas las operaciones relacionadas con Anynet + se desactivan. „ Apagado automático → No / Sí Configuración de Anynet + para que se desactive automáticamente cuando el televisor se apaga. N La fuente activa del televisor remoto se debe configurar como TV para usar la función Anynet + . N Si establece Apagado Automático como Sí, los dispositivos externos conectados también se desactivan cuando se apaga el televisor. Si un dispositivo externo todavía está grabando, puede apagarse o no. Conmutación entre dispositivos Anynet+ 1. Pulse el botón TOOLS. Pulse el botón ENTERE para seleccionar Anynet + (HDMI-CEC). 2. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar Lista de dispositivos y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. N Se muestran todos los dispositivos Anynet + conectados al televisor. Si no encuentra el dispositivo que desea, pulse el botón rojo para buscar los dispositivos. N Sólo cuando la opción Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) está establecida como Activado en el menú Configuración , se muestra el menú Lista de dispositivos. 3. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar un dispositivo determinado y pulse el botón ENTERE. Se cambia al dispositivo seleccionado. N El cambio a los dispositivos seleccionados puede tardar unos 2 minutos. No se puede cancelar la operación de cambio de dispositivo mientras ésta se está efectuando. N El tiempo necesario para la búsqueda de dispositivos depende de la cantidad de dispositivos conectados. N Si ha seleccionado un dispositivo externo pulsando el botón SOURCE, no podrá usar la función Anynet + . Asegúrese de cambiar a un dispositivo Anynet + externo mediante el botón TOOLS. ❑ Menú Anynet + El menú Anynet + cambia según el tipo y el estado de los dispositivos Anynet + conectados al televisor. Menú Anynet + Descripción Ver la televisión El modo Anynet + cambia al modo de emisión de TV. Lista de dispositivos Muestra la lista de dispositivos de Anynet + . MENU (nombre_dispositivo) Muestra los menús del dispositivo conectado. Por ejemplo, si se ha conectado un grabador de DVD, se muestra el menú del disco del grabador de DVD. INFO (nombre_dispositivo) Por ejemplo, si se ha conectado un grabador de DVD, se muestra el menú del disco del grabador de DVD. Grabar (*grabador) Comienza una grabación. (Este menú sólo funciona en un dispositivo que admita grabación.) Reserve Recording (Reservar grabación) (*grabador) Permite reservar una grabación en el grabador. (Sólo está disponible en los dispositivos que admiten la función de reserva de la grabación.) Detener la grabación : (*grabador) Detiene la grabación. Receptor La reproducción del sonido se efectúa a través del receptor. Continúa… Aplicación Media Play (USB & DLNA) Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) ► Content Library Internet@TV Centro red doméstica U Mover EEntrar R Volver Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) : No ▶ Apagado automático : Sí U Mover EEntrar R Volver Ver la televisión Lista de dispositivos Grabación : DVDR DVDR MENU DVDR INFO Receptor : Activado Configuración BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 46 10/20/2009 5:03:28 PMSpanish - 47 ❑ Botones del mando a distancia del televisor disponibles en el modo Anynet + Tipo de dispositivo Estado de funcionamiento Botones disponibles Dispositivo Anynet + Después de cambiar al dispositivo, cuando el menú de éste aparece en la pantalla. Botones numéricos ▲/▼/◄/►/ENTERE Botones de colores/botón EXIT Después de cambiar al dispositivo, mientras se reproduce un archivo (Búsqueda atrás) / (Búsqueda adelante) / (Detener) / (Reproducir)/ (Pausa) Dispositivo con sintonizador incorporado Después de cambiar al dispositivo, mientras se ve un programa de TV Botón P / Dispositivo de audio Cuando el receptor está activado = / Botón M MUTE N La función Anynet + sólo funciona cuando la fuente activa del mando a distancia del televisor está ajustada en TV. N El botón sólo funciona cuando la grabación es posible. N Los dispositivos Anynet + no se pueden controlar con los botones del TV. Los dispositivos Anynet + sólo se pueden controlar mediante el mando a distancia del televisor. N El mando a distancia del televisor puede no funcionar en determinadas circunstancias. En ese caso, vuelva a seleccionar el dispositivo Anynet + . N Las funciones Anynet + no están operativas con los productos de otros fabricantes. N El funcionamiento de / puede variar según el dispositivo. N Cuando hay conectados varios dispositivos de grabación, éstos se muestran como (*grabador), pero si sólo hay conectado un dispositivo, éste se muestra como (*nombre_dispositivo). Grabación El grabador de Samsung permite efectuar una grabación de un programa de televisión. 1. Pulse el botón TOOLS. Pulse el botón ENTERE para seleccionar Anynet + (HDMI-CEC). 2. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar Grabar (grabadora) y pulse el botón ENTERE. Comienza la grabación. N Cuando hay más de un dispositivo de grabación Cuando hay varios dispositivos de grabación conectados, éstos se muestran en una lista. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar el dispositivo de grabación que desee y pulse el botón ENTERE. Comienza la grabación. N Cuando no se muestra el dispositivo de grabación, seleccione Lista de dispositivos y pulse el botón rojo para buscar los dispositivos. N Si pulsa el botón grabará lo que está viendo en ese momento. Si está viendo un vídeo desde otro dispositivo, se graba el vídeo de éste. N Antes de grabar, compruebe si la toma de antena está conectada correctamente al dispositivo de grabación. Para conectar correctamente una antena a un dispositivo de grabación, consulte el manual del usuario del dispositivo de grabación. U Mover EEntrar R Volver Ver la televisión Lista de dispositivos Grabación : DVDR DVDR MENU DVDR INFO Receptor : Act. Configuración BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 47 10/20/2009 5:03:28 PMSpanish - 48 Escucha a través de un receptor Se puede escuchar sonido a través de un receptor en lugar de hacerlo mediante el altavoz del TV. 1. Pulse el botón TOOLS. Pulse el botón ENTERE para seleccionar Anynet + (HDMI-CEC). 2. Pulse el botón ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar Receptor. Pulse los botones ◄ o ► para seleccionar Activado o Desactivado. N Si el receptor sólo admite audio, quizás no se muestre la lista de dispositivos. N El receptor no funcionará si no se ha conectado correctamente el terminal Optical IN del receptor con el terminal Optical OUT del televisor. N Cuando el receptor (sistema Home Cinema) está activado, se puede oír la salida de sonido desde el terminal Optical del televisor. Cuando se ve la televisión a través de un DTV (aéreo), el televisor envía el sonido de 5.1 canales al receptor del sistema Home Cinema. Cuando la fuente es un componente digital, como un DVD, y está conectada al televisor a través de HDMI, sólo se oye el sonido de 2 canales del receptor del sistema Home Cinema. N Cuando se usa la función Media Play, el sonido puede no oírse adecuadamente a través del receptor. N Cuando se escucha a través del receptor, hay restricciones para el uso de los menús relativos al audio. N Si hay una interrupción en la alimentación del televisor con la opción Receptor configurada en Activado puede que la opción Seleccionar altavoz esté configurada como Altavoz externo al volver a encender el televisor. (Consulte la página 21) Solución de problemas de Anynet+ Síntoma Solución Anynet + no funciona. • Compruebe si el dispositivo es un dispositivo Anynet + . El sistema Anynet + sólo admite dispositivos Anynet + . • Conecte sólo un receptor (sistema Home Cinema). • Compruebe si el cable de alimentación del dispositivo Anynet + está debidamente conectado. • Compruebe las conexiones de los cables de Vídeo/Audio/HDMI 1.3 del dispositivo Anynet + . • Compruebe si Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) está configurado como Activado en el menú de configuración de Anynet + . • Compruebe si el mando a distancia del televisor está en modo TV. • Compruebe si es un mando a distancia exclusivo para Anynet + • Anynet + no funciona en algunas situaciones. (Búsqueda de canales, funcionamiento de Media Play, Plug & Play, etc.) • Cuando se conecta o se desconecta el cable HDMI 1.3, se han de buscar de nuevo los dispositivos o volver a apagar y encender el televisor. • Compruebe si la función Anynet + del dispositivo Anynet + está activada. Deseo iniciar Anynet + . • Compruebe si el dispositivo Anynet + está debidamente conectado al televisor y si la opción Anynet + (HDMICEC) está establecida en Activado en el menú Configuración de Anynet + . • Pulse el botón TV del mando a distancia del televisor para cambiar a TV. A continuación pulse el botón TOOLS para visualizar el menú Anynet + y seleccione el menú que desee. Deseo salir de Anynet + . • Seleccione Ver la televisión en el menú de Anynet + . • Pulse el botón SOURCE del mando a distancia del televisor y seleccione un dispositivo que no sea Anynet + . (Tenga en cuenta que el botón de canal sólo funciona cuando no hay ningún dispositivo Anynet + con sintonizador incorporado conectado.) En la pantalla aparece el mensaje Conectando a un dispositivo Anynet + . • El mando a distancia no se puede utilizar cuando se está configurando Anynet + o cambiando a un modo de visualización. • Utilice el mando a distancia cuando haya terminado la configuración de Anynet + o el cambio al modo de visualización. El dispositivo Anynet + no reproduce. • No se puede usar la función de reproducción mientras se efectúa una conexión Plug & Play. El dispositivo conectado no se muestra. • Compruebe si el dispositivo admite las funciones Anynet + . • Compruebe si el cable HDMI 1.3 está debidamente conectado. • Compruebe si Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) está configurado como Activado en el menú de configuración de Anynet + . • Vuelva a efectuar una búsqueda de dispositivos Anynet + . • Sólo puede conectar un dispositivo Anynet + mediante el cable HDMI 1.3. Algunos cables HDMI pueden no admitir las funciones Anynet + . • Si se ha interrumpido por una situación anormal como la desconexión del cable HDMI o el de alimentación o por un fallo en la corriente eléctrica, deberá repetir la búsqueda del dispositivo. El programa de televisión no se puede grabar. • Compruebe la conexión de la toma de antena del dispositivo de grabación. El sonido del televisor no sale a través del receptor. • Conecte el cable óptico entre el televisor y el receptor. U Mover EEntrar R Volver Ver la televisión Lista de dispositivos Grabación : DVDR DVDR MENU DVDR INFO Receptor : Act. Configuración BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 48 10/20/2009 5:03:29 PMSpanish - 49 Activación de la Content Library La Content Library permite ver o reproducir los contenidos incorporados en el TV o almacenados en un dispositivo USB. 1. Pulse el botón MENU. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar Aplicación y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. 2. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar Content Library y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. Aparece el menú principal de la biblioteca de contenidos. O Pulse el botón CONTENT del mando a distancia para que se muestre el menú principal Content Library. 3. Pulse los botones ◄ o ► para seleccionar un icono (Galería, Cocina, Niños, Bien estar, Otros, Gestión del contenido) y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. N Se ejecuta el elemento seleccionado. ❑ Uso de los botones del mando a distancia en el menú Content Library Botón Función ▲/▼/◄/► Mover el cursor y seleccionar una opción. ENTERE Seleccionar la opción marcada. RETURN Volver al menú anterior. EXIT Detener la función actual y volver al menú principal Content Library. Botones de colores El botón de cada función se describe en su página correspondiente. Puede controlar el volumen del contenido que se reproduce. CONTENT Acceder a o salir del modo Content Library. N Si pulsa los botones de volumen o M MUTE, no se mostrará la pantalla OSD, pero el volumen cambiará correctamente. N Para volver al modo TV, pulse los botones P del mando a distancia. N LA Content Library INCLUYE TEXTOS, GRÁFICOS, IMÁGENES, MULTIMEDIA Y OTROS MATERIALES CON FINES SÓLO INFORMATIVOS Y PUBLICITARIOS. LOS MATERIALES DE LA Content Library SE HAN MODIFICADO Y SE MANTIENEN REVISADOS Y ACTUALIZADOS. LOS MATERIALES DE LA Content Library PUEDEN NO SER APROPIADOS PARA TODAS LAS AUDIENCIAS. N LA INFORMACIÓN DE LA Content Library SE PROPORCIONA “TAL CUAL”. AUNQUE LA INFORMACIÓN PROPORCIONADA EN LAContent Library SE HA OBTENIDO O RECOPILADO EN FUENTES QUE CONSIDERAMOS FIABLES, SAMSUNG NO PUEDE GARANTIZAR NI GARANTIZA LA PRECISIÓN, VALIDEZ, VIGENCIA O INTEGRIDAD DE CUALQUIER INFORMACIÓN O DATO DISPONIBLE PARA UN PROPÓSITO EN PARTICULAR. BAJO NINGUNA CIRCUNSTANCIA, INCLUIDA NEGLIGENCIA, SAMSUNG SE HACE RESPONSABLE, YA SEA POR CONTRATO YA SEA POR AGRAVIO, DE CUALQUIER DAÑO DIRECTO, INDIRECTO, INCIDENTAL, ESPECIALO CONSECUENTE, GASTOS LEGALES, PAGOS Y CUALQUIER OTRO DAÑO DERIVADOS DE O RELACIONADOS CON CUALQUIER INFORMACIÓN INCLUIDA, O COMO RESULTADO DEL USO DE LA Content Library, NI SIQUIERA EN EL CASO DE QUE SE HAYA ADVERTIDO DE LA POSIBILIDAD DE TALES DAÑOS. Content Library Aplicación Media Play (USB & DLNA) Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) Content Library Internet@TV Centro red doméstica < > Cocina Niños Galería Galería Content Library Bien estar Otros Volver Salir BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 49 10/20/2009 5:03:30 PMSpanish - 50 Uso de la Content Library ❑ Galería Esta función reproduce una presentación de fotos con imágenes en alta resolución y música de fondo. Con la función Galería del televisor, se puede cambiar el ambiente de casa. N Pulse el botón INFO para ver el nombre del artista e información detallada en inglés de las imágenes (actualmente esta información sólo se proporciona en inglés). N Puede hacer una pausa en la presentación pulsando el botón ENTERE. N Los copyrights de los contenidos de Galería y todas las cuestiones relacionadas con ellos están reservados por Timespace/ JoongAng M&B, Inc. ❑ Cocina Muestra varias recetas que después se pueden seguir fácilmente paso a paso. Disfrute de estos contenidos que le ofrecen excelentes sugerencias para preparar comidas. N Las recetas incluidas en el contenido de Cocina del televisor Samsung se basan en recetas publicadas por Anness Publishing. N Los copyrights de los contenidos de Cocina y todas las cuestiones relacionadas con los mismos están reservados por Practical Pictures. ❑ Niños Incluye contenido educativo e interactivo que pueden ver los niños indefinidamente. Disfrute de las historias, las canciones y los juegos incluidos con los personajes Boowa y Kwala. N Los copyrights de los contenidos de Niños y todas las cuestiones relacionadas con los mismos están reservados por UpToTen. ❑ Bien estar Incluye contenidos para un estilo de vida saludable, como ejercicios de estiramientos, y música, de los que puede disfrutar toda la familia. ❑ Gestión del contenido „ Mi contenido Los contenidos se manejan de la misma forma que los incluidos en la memoria del televisor. También puede borrar o reproducir cada contenido. „ USB Puede descargar los contenidos en un dispositivo de memoria USB y reproducirlos en el televisor. Los contenidos del dispositivo USB externo se reproducen directamente. N Content Library sólo admite dispositivos USB de clase de almacenamiento masivo (MSC). MSC es un dispositivo de clase de almacenamiento masivo sólo de transporte de gran capacidad. Ejemplos de MSC son las unidades de almacenamiento en miniatura, los lectores de tarjetas Flash y las unidades de disco duro de USB (no se admiten concentradores de USB). N Jugar a un juego con un dispositivo de memoria USB externa le permitirá guardar el estado del juego (dependiendo del juego). Tenga cuidado de no retirar el dispositivo de memoria USB mientras se están guardando datos en el mismo, ya que esto podría provocar la pérdida de los datos. N Descarga de contenidos nuevos Además de los contenidos incorporados, se ofrecerán contenidos nuevos gratuitos a través del sitio web Samsung.com. Para descargar contenidos de pago, se necesita un número UDN. Compruebe el número UDN antes de descargar un nuevo elemento de contenido. 1. Visite el sitio web www.samsung.com 2. Seleccione un elemento de contenido en la página de descargas de contenidos. 3. Descargue los contenidos en el dispositivo de memoria USB. 4. Vaya al menú principal de la Content Library pulsando el botón CONTENT o eligiendo Content Library (Menú → Aplicación → Content Library) 5. Enchufe la memoria USB en el puerto USB situado en el lateral del televisor. 6. Puede ver el subelemento del contenido que ha descargado. 7. Seleccione un elemento de contenido y pulse el botón Enter. 8. Puede reproducir el elemento de contenido seleccionado. „ Configuración • Tiempo ej. salvapantallas → 10 min / 20 min. / 40 min. / 1 hora Configurar el tiempo de espera necesario para que se ejecute el salvapantallas. • Guardar UDN (número de dispositivo exclusivo) El código numérico de 18 dígitos que aparece en pantalla es el código del producto. Puede guardarlo en la memoria USB. N El dispositivo de almacenamiento USB de formato NTFS no admite que se guarde el UDN. Recomendamos utilizar un dispositivo de almacenamiento USB de formato FAT. BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 50 10/20/2009 5:03:31 PMSpanish - 51 Todos los contenidos y servicios accesibles a través de este dispositivo pertenecen a terceros y se encuentran protegidos por las leyes de derechos de autor, patentes, marcas y demás legislación en materia de propiedad intelectual. Dichos contenidos y servicios se ofrecen únicamente para su uso personal y no comercial. Los contenidos y servicios no podrán ser utilizados de ninguna forma no autorizada por el correspondiente propietario de los contenidos o proveedor del servicio. Sin limitación de lo anteriormente dispuesto, salvo con la previa y expresa autorización del correspondiente propietario de los contenidos o proveedor del servicio, no podrá Usted modificar, copiar, republicar, cargar, incluir, transmitir, traducir, vender, explotar o distribuir de ninguna forma y en ningún medio los contenidos o servicios ofrecidos a través de este dispositivo, ni crear trabajos derivados de éstos. LOS CONTENIDOS Y SERVICIOS DE TERCEROS SE PROPORCIONAN “TAL CUAL”. SAMSUNG NO GARANTIZA LOS CONTENIDOS O SERVICIOS OFRECIDOS CONFORME A LO ANTERIORMENTE INDICADO, DE FORMA EXPRESA O IMPLÍCITA, PARA NINGÚN FIN ESPECÍFICO. SAMSUNG EXCLUYE EXPRESAMENTE TODAS LAS GARANTÍAS IMPLÍCITAS, INCLUYENDO, SIN LIMITACIÓN ALGUNA, LAS GARANTÍAS DE COMERCIABILIDAD O ADECUACIÓN A UN FIN CONCRETO. SAMSUNG NO GARANTIZA LA PRECISIÓN, VALIDEZ, PUNTUALIDAD, LEGALIDAD O EXHAUSTIVIDAD DE LOS CONTENIDOS O SERVICIOS OFRECIDOS A TRAVÉS DE ESTE DISPOSITIVO Y NO SERÁ RESPONSABLE EN NINGÚN CASO, INCLUYENDO EN CASO DE NEGLIGENCIA, CONTRACTUAL O EXTRACONTRACTUAL, POR CUALESQUIERA DAÑOS DIRECTOS, INDIRECTOS, DERIVADOS, ESPECIALES O EMERGENTES, HONORARIOS DE ABOGADOS, GASTOS U OTROS DAÑOS RELATIVOS A CUALQUIER INFORMACIÓN DERIVADA DEL USO DE LOS CONTENIDOS O SERVICIOS POR SU PARTE O POR PARTE DE CUALQUIER TERCERO, AUN CUANDO HAYA SIDO ADVERTIDO DE LA POSIBILIDAD DE DICHOS DAÑOS. LA RESPONSABILIDAD DE SAMSUNG NO QUEDARÁ EXCLUIDA EN CASO DE NEGLIGENCIA GRAVE, CONDUCTA ILÍCITA DOLOSA, RESPONSABILIDAD CIVIL POR PRODUCTO DEFECTUOSO O CUALQUIER OTRO TIPO DE RESPONSABILIDAD QUE NO PUEDA SER OBJETO DE EXCLUSIÓN O LIMITACIÓN EN VIRTUD DE LA LEGISLACIÓN APLICABLE. Los servicios de terceros podrán ser suspendidos o interrumpidos en cualquier momento, y Samsung no realiza ninguna manifestación ni otorga ninguna garantía en el sentido de que los contenidos o servicios estarán disponibles durante un periodo de tiempo determinado. Los contenidos y servicios son transmitidos por terceros a través de redes e instalaciones de transmisión sobre las que Samsung no tiene ningún tipo de control. Sin limitación del carácter general de esta exclusión de responsabilidad, Samsung excluye expresamente cualquier responsabilidad por la interrupción o suspensión de cualquiera de los contenidos o servicios ofrecidos a través de este dispositivo. Samsung excluye cualquier tipo de responsabilidad editorial por los contenidos accesibles a través de este dispositivo. Samsung no es responsable del servicio al cliente relativo a los contenidos y servicios. Todas las dudas o cuestiones relativas a los contenidos o servicios deberán formularse directamente a los respectivos proveedores de contenidos y servicios. Samsung considera que esta exclusión de responsabilidad es aceptada por una persona con capacidad legal suficiente para entender sus términos y excluye cualquier responsabilidad por éstos. Se pueden utilizar diferentes servicios de Internet que contengan información útil y contenidos de entretenimiento. Si tiene problemas cuando utiliza algún servicio widget, póngase en contacto con el proveedor del servicio. En el widget, pulse el botón verde para obtener información de contacto o consulte la página web de ayuda para obtener información del widget. N Según la región, puede que en el servicio del widget sólo se admita el inglés. N Es posible que esta función no se admita, según el país. Primeros pasos con Internet@TV Internet@TV proporciona contenido integrado de Internet y televisión de Yahoo!® Widget Engine. Puede supervisar la información bursátil, compartir fotos con amigos y familiares y acceder a noticias e información meteorológica a través del servicio Internet@TV en el televisor. N Si la condición de la red no es estable, es posible que no esté operativa esta función. El televisor se apagará automáticamente. Si no, apague el televisor con el botón de encendido. N Puede que sufra un funcionamiento lento o titubeante cuando use esta función debido a las condiciones de la red. Cuando se ejecuta Internet@TV por primera vez, la configuración básica se inicia automáticamente. N El primer paso es configurar la red. Para obtener más información sobre cómo configurar la red, consulte ‘Configuración de red’. N Una vez que la red esté operativa, el software Internet@TV le guiará paso a paso con el asistente de configuración. Internet@TV 1. Pulse el botón MENU. Pulse el botón ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar la aplicación y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE 2. Pulse el botón ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar Internet@TV y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. N Se inicia INTERNET@TV. O Pulse el botón Internet@ del mando a distancia para que se muestre el menú Internet@TV”. 3. Se muestra en la pantalla el General Disclaimer. Seleccione I accept o I do not accept. N Para obtener más información sobre el General Disclaimer, consulte el ‘Legal Notice’. 4. La pantalla de bienvenida es el punto de inicio de la guía de configuración de Internet@TV. N Si selecciona Exit Setup, se reanudará este paso cuando pulse el botón INTERNET@. N Seleccione Let’s get started! 5. La elección de la ubicación permite que los wi dgets de televisión utilicen contenido. N Seleccione el país en la lista. 6. Se debe aceptar la política de privacidad de Yahoo!® TV Widget Engine para utilizar Internet@TV. N Seleccione OK, I Accept. BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 51 10/20/2009 5:03:31 PMSpanish - 52 7. Se deben aceptar los términos de servicio de Yahoo!® TV Widget Engine para utilizar Internet@TV. N Seleccione OK, I Accept. 8. Escriba su nombre para configurar su perfil. Cada perfil tiene su propia lista de widgets. Puede crear un perfil para cada persona que utilice Internet@TV. N Escriba su nombre y seleccione Save this name. N Para obtener más información, consulte la página ‘Using the Profile Widget’. 9. Internet@TV comprueba la configuración de la red. N Si esta prueba falla, vuelva a configurar la red. N Para obtener más información, consulte la página ‘Network Setup.’ 10. Se completa la configuración guiada. El siguiente paso es un tutorial para utilizar Internet@TV. N Seleccione Continue para ver el tutorial. N Seleccione Exit setup si desea empezar a usar Internet@TV ahora. N Para volver a ejecutar el tutorial, seleccione Profile Widget → System Setting → Repeat Tutorial. 11. Pulse el botón INTERNET@ del mando a distancia para que se muestre la interfaz del usuario de Internet@TV. ❑ Pantalla de visualización „ Modo Dock 1 Se muestra una pancarta de bienvenida con el nombre del perfil en la esquina superior derecha. N Tras unos momentos desaparece la pancarta. 2 La pancarta resalta dos accesos directos del mando a distancia. N Si pulsa el botón azul (Viewport) del mando a distancia, la pantalla cambia entre ‘Viewport mode’ y ‘Overlay mode’. En el modo Viewport, la televisión o el vídeo se reproduce en una área a escala reducida con gráficos en el exterior. En el modo Overlay, los gráficos se muestran sobre la televisión o el vídeo. N Si pulsa el botón amarillo (Edit Snippet) del mando a distancia, se muestra una ventana de ayuda y el extracto resaltado se puede editar. 3 Pulse el botón INTERNET@ del mando a distancia para comenzar. N La lista horizontal en la parte inferior de la pantalla del televisor se denomina ‘el acoplamiento’. N Los elementos de la lista se denominan ‘extractos’. N Un extracto es un acceso directo que ejecuta un widget del televisor. N Un widget del televisor es una aplicación de Internet diseñada para ejecutarse en el televisor. N Con los botones ◄ o ► del mando a distancia puede desplazarse por los extractos. N El enfoque se localiza en el área más a la izquierda (resaltado en azul). N El acoplamiento desliza los extractos debajo de este punto focal. N Ejecute el widget de TV pulsando el botón ENTERE del mando a distancia cuando se resalta el extracto. N Cuando se añaden extractos, éstos forman una pila por la que es posible desplazarse con los botones ▲ o ▼. N En el acoplamiento hay dos widgets de TV especiales : el Profile Widget y el Gallery Widget. No se pueden eliminar. N El acoplamiento se desliza fuera de la pantalla tras un periodo de tiempo. „ Modo Sidebar 1 Enfoque un extracto y pulse el botón ENTERE para ejecutar la barra lateral del widget de TV. El logotipo del widget de TV y de inicio ( ) están en la parte superior de la barra lateral. 2 El menú actual se muestra debajo del logotipo del widget de TV. N Para volver a la pantalla anterior, selecciónela y pulse el botón ENTERE. N También puede pulsar el botón RETURN del mando a distancia. 3 La selección actual siempre está resaltada en azul. El botón resaltado tiene el enfoque y se activa cuando se pulsa el botón ENTERE. 4 Si hay muchos datos se utiliza un control de página. N Se muestran todas las páginas junto con la actual. N Desplácese entre las páginas con los botones ◄ o ►. 5 La barra de herramientas inferior incluye los botones de colores que se corresponden con los botones rojo, verde, amarillo y azul del mando a distancia. • Botón rojo : Cerrar el widget. • Botón verde : Cambiar la configuración del widget. • Botón amarillo : Administrar los extractos. • Botón azul : Cambiar el tamaño del vídeo para ajustarlo o mostrarlo a pantalla completa. N Según el widget algunos botones pueden no estar disponibles. .@# áëí space a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 52 10/20/2009 5:03:33 PMSpanish - 53 Edición del extracto en el acoplamiento 1. Edite un extracto : Selecciónelo en el acoplamiento y pulse el botón amarillo. 2. El extracto se desplaza a la segunda posición y su miniatura se desliza hacia arriba para mostrar el texto de ayuda siguiente • Borrar (botón rojo) : Eliminar este widget de TV. N Los widgets eliminados se puede volver a instalar con la Widget Gallery. • Mover (botón azul) : Reordenar el extracto. Pulse los botones◄ o ► para desplazar. Pulse el botón amarillo para soltar el extracto en la nueva posición. • Finalizar (botón amarillo) : Salir del menú Edit Snippet . Uso del widget de un perfil El widget de un perfil configura el perfil del usuario. Se pueden establecer varios perfiles; cada uno mantiene su propia lista de widgets. El menú Switch Profile permite cambiar de perfil. N Al menos se deben registrar dos perfiles. Si desea añadir un perfil, consulte ‘Controles administrativos’. El menú Profile Settings permite personalizar y proteger un perfil personal. • Los perfiles de usuario se deben personalizar con un Name y un Avatar exclusivos (un avatar es una imagen que se utiliza para representar el perfil del usuario). • El Name y el Avatar del usuario se muestran en el extracto del perfil en el acoplamiento. • Los perfiles se pueden proteger con Create Profile PIN.. N Cuando se configura el PIN por primera vez, se puede establecer una pregunta de seguridad. El menú de configuración del perfil limita el acceso a los widgets. • Si se olvida el Profile PIN se puede contestar a una Security Question que está asociada con dicho perfil. • Un perfil que tiene un Limit Profile activado no permitirá que se instalen nuevo widgets. N Para esta función se debe utilizar el PIN propietario. Para establecer el PIN propietario, consulte ‘Controles administrativos’. El menú System Settings permite : • Cambiar la Location y establecer el Zip Code (sólo Estados Unidos) para que se ajuste el contenido a la zona del usuario. • Repetir tutorial que se ha mostrado durante la configuración. • Restaurar la configuración de fábrica para eliminar todas las configuraciones y la información de los widgets. En el menú Administrative Controls se puede : • Establecer la temporización del Screen Saver para prevenir daños en la pantalla. • Create Owner PIN y establecer una Security Question para controlar otros perfiles. • Create un nuevo Profile con el que se pueden configurar un conjunto diferentes de widgets. • Borrar un perfil existente. Desde el widget del perfil se puede Sign in to Yahoo!® mediante el ID del Yahoo! personal. • Si dispone de un ID de Yahoo!, puede acceder a su contenido personalizado mediante los widgets de TV de Yahoo!. • Todos los widgets de TV de Yahoo! que están instalados se registran automáticamente con el perfil del usuario del ID de Yahoo!. • Si no tiene una cuenta Yahoo!, visite www.yahoo.com y créela. • Es posible que no pueda iniciar la sesión con un ID creado en el sitio web de Yahoo en un país que no admita Internet@TV. ❑ Acerca del widget del perfil Pulse el botón verde. Puede ver una breve descripción de Profile Widget, Copyright Policy, Terms of Service y Privacy Policy. BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 53 10/20/2009 5:03:34 PMSpanish - 54 Uso de la galería de widgets de Yahoo!® Utilice de la galería de widgets de Yahoo!® para añadir más widgets a su televisor. Puede ver los widgets de TV disponibles en las siguientes categorías : • Latest Widgets: Muestra los widgets recientemente actualizados. • Yahoo!® Widgets: Muestra los widgets proporcionados por Yahoo!®. • Samsung Widgets: Muestra los widgets proporcionados por Samsung. • Más categorías : Muestra todos los widgets por categorías. N Para instalar un widget, acceda a la pantalla de detalles, seleccione Add Widget to My Profile y pulse el botón ENTERE. Se instala el widget y queda disponible en el acoplamiento. ❑ Configuración de Widget Gallery Pulsar el botón verde. „ About Yahoo! Widget Gallery... Puede ver una breve descripción de Widget Gallery, Copyright Policy, Terms of Service y Privacy Policy. En el menú de configuración del desarrollador se puede construir un widget propio. Para obtener más información sobre cómo construir un widget propio, visite nuestra sede del desarrollador http://connectedtv.yahoo.com/. Uso del servicio meteorológico de Yahoo!® El servicio meteorológico de Yahoo!® proporciona actualizaciones de la información meteorológica de las ciudades y regiones que se desee. El contenido cambia dinámicamente al mismo tiempo que las condiciones climáticas. • Pulse el botón verde del mando a distancia para mostrar el menú de configuración del servicio meteorológico de Yahoo!® • En este menú puede añadir o eliminar una ciudad cuya información meteorológica desee ver. En el menú Settings puede : • Add New City escribiendo el nombre de ésta. Cuando se muestren los resultados, seleccione la ciudad que desee y pulse el botón ENTERE. • Delete City seleccionando la ciudad que desee borrar de la lista de ciudades. Pulse el botón ENTERE para confirmar la supresión. • Cambiar el método de indicación de la temperatura. Puede cambiar el método de indicación de la temperatura a Imperial o Metric. Por ejemplo, Imperial mostrará temperaturas en grados Fahrenheit y Metric en grados Celsius. ❑ Creación del extracto de una ciudad • Seleccione la ciudad en la página de inicio del servicio meteorológico de Yahoo!® y vea la información meteorológica detallada. • Pulsar el botón amarillo. • Seleccione el menú Add Snippet y pulse el botón ENTERE para añadir la ciudad a un extracto. ❑ Supresión del extracto de una ciudad • Ejecute el extracto. • Pulsar el botón amarillo. • Seleccione el menú Delete Snippet y pulse ENTERE para eliminar el extracto. BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 54 10/20/2009 5:03:35 PMSpanish - 55 Uso del servicio de noticias de Yahoo!® El servicio News de Yahoo!® proporciona las últimas noticias económicas, de entretenimiento, políticas, deportivas, actualidad y otras categorías. Seleccione una categoría, seleccione un titular en la categoría y vea un resumen que se actualiza dinámicamente. Uso del servicio Filckr de Yahoo!® El servicio Flickr permite acceder a las fotos favoritas de amigos y familiares mientras se ve la televisión. Comparta sus fotos con su familia en la pantalla grande del televisor viéndolas en forma de presentación. • Personalice el widget Flickr registrándose con su ID de Yahoo!. • Con el fin de conocer el procedimiento detallado para el inicio de sesión, consulte las instrucciones ‘Uso del widget de un perfil’. • Para obtener más información sobre Flickr, visite http://www.flickr.com. N Your Photos muestra las fotos registradas en la página web de Flickr. „ Para ver fotos de Flickr en una presentación : • Seleccione una miniatura de una foto y pulse el botón ENTERE para ver los detalles de la foto. • Seleccione Start Slideshow y pulse el botón ENTERE. „ Para controlar la pantalla de la presentación : • Pulse el botón ENTERE durante una presentación. • Las miniaturas de las fotos se muestran en la parte inferior de la pantalla. N Cuando se muestran los controles de la presentación, se puede Pause, Play y Stop la presentación. N Si selecciona el menú y pulsa ENTERE, puede ver información sobre la foto seleccionada. • El menú Your Sets permite ver las fotos que haya clasificado en Flickr. • El menú Explore permite examinar las fotos de la página web de Flickr. Puede ver la fotos actualizadas diariamente. • Los menús Mark as Favorite o Remove From Favorite mueven las fotos a las listas de las fotos favoritas y las eliminan de las listas. • El menú Favorite Photos permite ver las fotos que haya clasificado como favoritas. • El menú Your Contacts permite ver las fotos actualizadas de sus amigos y familiares. El menú Your Groups permite seleccionar los grupos de favoritos de la página web de Flickr para compartirlos con la comunidad de usuarios de Flickr. Para configurar el servicio Flickr de Yahoo!® pulse el botón verde del mando a distancia. • El menú Time Per Slide controla la velocidad de la presentación. • El menú Repeat reinicia la presentación desde el principio. BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 55 10/20/2009 5:03:35 PMSpanish - 56 Uso del servicio de finanzas de Yahoo!® Vea información bursátil y los últimos valores de las acciones con el servicio de finanzas de Yahoo!®. Pulse el botón verde para configurar su mercado bursátil. Utilice el menú Add New Symbol para escribir el nombre del mercado bursátil. • Seleccione el mercado que desee añadir en los resultados encontrados, seleccione el menú Add Symbol y pulse el botón ENTERE. N El mercado seleccionado se añade a la lista My Stocks. • Utilice el menú Import Symbols From Yahoo!® para recuperar la cartera de finanzas de Yahoo!®. - El menú Merge Symbols agrupa los símbolos del servicio de finanzas de Yahoo!® con los símbolos de la cartera del usuario. - El menú Merge Symbols borra los símbolos del servicio de finanzas de Yahoo!® y los reemplaza por los símbolos de la cartera del usuario. • Utilice el menú Display Format para cambiar la transición de la fluctuación de los valores bursátiles como Value o Percentage. • Cree el extracto de un mercado favorito - Seleccione el símbolo del mercado en la página de inicio del servicio de finanzas de Yahoo!® y vea la información financiera detallada. - Pulsar el botón amarillo. - Seleccione el menú Add Snippet y pulse el botón ENTERE para añadir el mercado a un extracto. • Delete un extracto - Ejecute el extracto en el acoplamiento. - Pulsar el botón amarillo. - Seleccione el menú Delete Snippet y pulse ENTERE para eliminar el extracto. Solución de problemas de internet@TV Problema Posible solución Algunos servicios de widget no funcionan. • Compruebe con su proveedor del servicio. • En el widget, pulse el botón verde para obtener información de contacto o consulte la página web de ayuda para obtener información del widget. • Consulte la página web de la ayuda. Algunos contenidos de los widgets sólo están en inglés. ¿Cómo puedo cambiar el idioma? • El idioma del contenido del widget puede ser deferente del idioma de la interfaz del usuario. Esto depende del proveedor del servicio. Con la configuración predeterminada de fábrica restablecida, el servicio del widget de Yahoo! no funciona y se muestra un mensaje de advertencia. • Después de restablecer la configuración predeterminada de fábrica, apague y encienda el televisor. A continuación, reinicie Internet@TV. He registrado mi cuenta en un widget de Flickr. Pero no puedo ver mis fotos. • Vaya a la página web de Yahoo! y active su cuenta de Flickr en el ID de Yahoo! En el widget del perfil, he cambiado la ubicación pero se mantiene la configuración anterior. • Apague y encienda el televisor. A continuación, reinicie Internet@TV. • Ahora, podrá ver los servicios de widgets admitidos en la ubicación cambiada. BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 56 10/20/2009 5:03:36 PMSpanish - 57 Página web de ayuda País Página web Austria www.samsung.com → Produkte → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Bélgica www.samsung.com → Producten → televisies → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV www.samsung.com → Produits → téléviseurs → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV República Checa www.samsung.com → Produkty → televizory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Dinamarca www.samsung.com → Produkter → stue & soveværelse → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Finlandia www.samsung.com → Tuotteet → kodinelektroniikka → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Francia www.samsung.com → Produits → télévisions → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Alemania www.samsung.com → Privatkunden → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Grecia www.samsung.com → Προϊόντα → τηλεοράσεις → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Hungría www.samsung.com → Termékek → televíziók → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Irlanda www.samsung.com → Products → Television → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Italia www.samsung.com → Prodotti → TV → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Países Bajos www.samsung.com → Producten → televisies → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Noruega www.samsung.com → Produkter → hverdagsrom & soverom → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Polonia www.samsung.com → Produkty → telewizory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Portugal www.samsung.com → Produtos para Consumidores → televisores → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Eslovaquia www.samsung.com → Produkty → televízory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV España www.samsung.com → Productos → televisores → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Suecia www.samsung.com → Produkter → vardagsrum & sovrum → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Suiza www.samsung.com → Produits → télévisions → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV www.samsung.com → Produkte → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Reino Unido www.samsung.com → Products → Television → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Turquía www.samsung.com → Tüketici Ürünleri → televizyon → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Estonia www.samsung.com → Klientidele → Televiisorid → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Letonia www.samsung.com → Klientiem → Televizori → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Lituania www.samsung.com → Namams → Televizoriai → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Rusia www.samsung.com → Продукты → Телевизоры → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Ucrania www.samsung.com → Потребительские продукты → телевизоры → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV N Los datos de contacto pueden cambiar posteriormente. N Puede haber enlaces diferentes para algunos países.. BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 57 10/20/2009 5:03:36 PMSpanish - 58 N Es posible que esta función no se admita, según el país. N Si tiene problemas cuando utiliza algún servicio widget, póngase en contacto con el proveedor del servicio. En el widget, pulse el botón verde para obtener información de contacto o consulte la página web de ayuda para obtener información del widget. N Según la región, puede que en el servicio del widget sólo se admita el inglés. Primeros pasos con Internet@TV Internet@TV proporciona servicios widget de SAMSUNG a través de una conexión de red. Los contenidos de Internet@TV se pueden cambiar según el proveedor del servicio. Puede acceder a información diversa, como YouTube, mediante el servicio Internet@TV. N Si el televisor no admite alguna fuente del contenido proporcionado por el proveedor, puede que el contenido no se vea adecuadamente. N La configuración de los widgets y los servicios que éstos proporcionan pueden variar según el país seleccionado. Después de cambiar de país, apague y encienda el televisor. A continuación puede utilizar el servicio de widget admitido por el país que ha cambiado. Si Country está configurado como Others, el televisor no puede reconocer el país. En este caso, haga la selección directamente en la lista de países del servicio. N Para obtener más información sobre cómo configurar el país, consulte las instrucciones de ‘Función Plug & Play’. N Puede que sufra un funcionamiento lento o titubeante cuando use esta función debido a las condiciones de la red. N Configure la red antes de usar Internet@TV. Para obtener más información sobre cómo configurar la red, consulte ‘Configuración de red’. Cuando se ejecuta Internet@TV por primera vez, la configuración básica se inicia automáticamente. Puede tardar unos minutos en actualizarse. 1. Pulse el botón MENU. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar Aplicación y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. 2. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar Internet@TV y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. O Pulse el botón Internet@ del mando a distancia para que se muestre el menú Internet@TV. 3. Se muestra el Acuerdo del usuario. Seleccione Acepto para aceptar el acuerdo. 4. Se muestra Estadísticas y análisis. Seleccione Acepto para aceptar el acuerdo. Configuración de Internet@TV Puede comprobar y utilizar los menús relacionados con Single Sign On (SSO), la gestión del sistema y las propiedades. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar Configuración y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. ❑ Single Sign On (SSO) Puede utilizar este menú para crear o borrar la cuenta. Mediante Single Sign On (SSO), puede controlar su cuenta, incluida la información de la cuenta del sitio del contenido. No es necesario iniciar un sesión adicional. N La cuenta sólo es para internet@TV. „ Create Account Puede crear una cuenta y vincularla con el sitio de servicio que desee. N Puede crear hasta 10 cuentas. N El nombre de la cuenta no puede superar los 10 caracteres. N Si no hay un servicio que necesite un inicio de sesión, no puede crear la cuenta. „ Administración de cuentas • Sitio del servicio : Puede registrar la información del registro del sitio de servicio (como YouTube). • Cambiar contraseña : Cambiar la contraseña de la cuenta. • Borrar : Borrar la cuenta. N Si ha olvidado la contraseña de la cuenta, pulse los botones del mando a distancia en el orden siguiente para restablecer Internet@TV : POWER (apagar) → M MUTE → 9 → 4 → 8 → POWER (encender). Si utiliza esta función, se borrarán todas las cuentas. Internet@TV BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 58 10/20/2009 5:03:37 PMSpanish - 59 ❑ Configuración del sistema N Ejecución automática teletipo, Duración teletipo puede que no se admitan según el país. „ Cambiar la contraseña de bloqueo del servicio N El número de la contraseña predeterminada para un televisor nuevo es “0-0-0-0”. N Si olvida la contraseña, pulse los botones del mando a distancia en la siguiente secuencia para reiniciar la contraseña como “0-0-0-0” : POWER (apagar) → M MUTE → 9 → 4 → 8 → POWER (encender). „ Duración del servicio Seleccionar para configurar el tiempo de duración del servicio antes de que se ejecute el salvapantallas. „ Ejecución automática teletipo → Desactivar / Activar Seleccionar para establecer que el teletipo se ejecute automáticamente o no cuando se encienda el televisor.. „ Duración del teletipo Seleccionar para configurar el tiempo de duración del servicio antes de que se ejecute el salvapantallas. ❑ Propiedades Puede medir la velocidad del servicio Internet TV mediante Puede medir la velocidad del servicio Internet TV mediante Measuring the speed of the Internet TV service. Uso del servicio Internet@TV En un widget que proporcione varios menús de categorías, se puede ver el contenido de éstos con los botones ◄ y ►. „ Registro de la cuenta 1. Pulse el botón rojo. 2. Seleccione la Cuenta de usuario y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. 3. Escriba la contraseña. N Una vez registrada la cuenta del usuario, ésta se mostrará en la pantalla. N Para iniciar una sesión, se deben haber registrado una o más cuentas. Si desea crear una cuenta, consulte ‘Configuración de Internet@TV’. „ Uso de la galería de widgets Puede utilizar Ejecutar servicio, Bloquear, Instalar servicio en el widget existente y puede ver la descripción del servicio del widget que no está instalado. En Internet@TV, se pueden utilizar y añadir varios widgets proporcionados por el proveedor del servicio. Puede variar según el proveedor. • Ejecutar servicio : Ejecuta el servicio del widget. • Bloquear : Establecer el bloqueo del servicio • Instalar servicio (o Borrar servicio) : Instalar o borrar el servicio del widget. „ Uso del widget YouTube Puede ver películas proporcionadas por YouTube. Si tiene una cuenta en YouTube, registre la información de la cuenta mediante la Administración de la cuenta. A continuación, puede usar la categoría Mis favoritos. N El servicio de la web puede cambiar el menú. N Puede haber contenidos inapropiados para los niños. En tal caso, utilice la función Bloquear en Galería de widgets. Xz~*atp‚po _z{*]lpo Xz~*[z{€wl} Xz~*Ot~n€~~po _z{*Qlz€}tp~ Xz~*Wtyvpo Xz~*]p~{zxopo Qpl€}po _zol„ <:B ^ppvtyr*U€~tnp*Opnlop~*Wlp} atp‚~*E*C; M}plvtyr*Yp‚~*Lwp}~*m„*P8Xltw atp‚~*E*C; Mzz*Szz*ty*sp*Mzl}o}zzx atp‚~*E*CE=A „ Change Mode llrrChange page U Move EOK R Return BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 59 10/20/2009 5:03:37 PMSpanish - 60 Solución de problemas con Internet@TV Problema Posible solución Algunos servicios de widget no funcionan. Compruebe con su proveedor del servicio. En el widget, pulse el botón verde para obtener información de contacto o consulte la página web de la ayuda para obtener información del proveedor del servicio. Consulte la página web de la ayuda. ¿Qué ventajas tiene registrarse? Si crea una cuenta y registra la información de inicio de sesión del servicio deseado, puede acceder al contenido personalizado sin un registro adicional. Cuando hay un error de red, no puedo utilizar otros menús que no sean el de configuración. Si no funciona la conexión de red, el servicio puede quedar limitado. Porque todas las funciones excepto el menú de configuración necesitan la conexión a Internet. ¿Se pueden mostrar películas para adultos en YouTube? Básicamente, en la lista del menú, éstas se filtran. Sin embargo, con la función de búsqueda se pueden mostrar. En este caso, utilice la galería de widgets para bloquear el servicio del widget. Página web de ayuda País Página web Austria www.samsung.com → Produkte → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Bélgica www.samsung.com → Producten → televisies → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV www.samsung.com → Produits → téléviseurs → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV República Checa www.samsung.com → Produkty → televizory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Dinamarca www.samsung.com → Produkter → stue & soveværelse → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Finlandia www.samsung.com → Tuotteet → kodinelektroniikka → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Francia www.samsung.com → Produits → télévisions → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Alemania www.samsung.com → Privatkunden → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Grecia www.samsung.com → Προϊόντα → τηλεοράσεις → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Hungría www.samsung.com → Termékek → televíziók → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Irlanda www.samsung.com → Products → Television → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Italia www.samsung.com → Prodotti → TV → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Países Bajos www.samsung.com → Producten → televisies → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Noruega www.samsung.com → Produkter → hverdagsrom & soverom → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Polonia www.samsung.com → Produkty → telewizory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Portugal www.samsung.com → Produtos para Consumidores → televisores → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Eslovaquia www.samsung.com → Produkty → televízory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV España www.samsung.com → Productos → televisores → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Suecia www.samsung.com → Produkter → vardagsrum & sovrum → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Suiza www.samsung.com → Produits → télévisions → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV www.samsung.com → Produkte → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Reino Unido www.samsung.com → Products → Television → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Turquía www.samsung.com → Tüketici Ürünleri → televizyon → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Estonia www.samsung.com → Klientidele → Televiisorid → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Letonia www.samsung.com → Klientiem → Televizori → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Lituania www.samsung.com → Namams → Televizoriai → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Rusia www.samsung.com → Продукты → Телевизоры → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Ucrania www.samsung.com → Потребительские продукты → телевизоры → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV N Los datos de contacto pueden cambiar posteriormente. N Puede haber enlaces diferentes para algunos países. BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 60 10/20/2009 5:03:37 PMSpanish - 61 Centro de red doméstica Acerca del Centro de red doméstica El Centro de red doméstica se conecta a los televisores y a los móviles a través de una red. Puede ver en el televisor las llamadas entrantes, el contenido de los mensajes de texto y las planificaciones programadas en el móvil mediante el Centro de red doméstica. Asimismo, puede reproducir el contenido multimedia guardado en los móviles como vídeos, fotos y música importándolos al televisor a través de la red. N Si el dispositivo admite la función DLNA DMC (Digital Media Controller), la función Centro red doméstica está disponible. N Esta función permite la compatibilidad con teléfonos móviles de Samsung que estarán disponibles posteriormente. Para obtener más información, visite www.samsung.com o póngase en contacto con el centro de llamadas de Samsung. Es posible que el dispositivo móvil requiera la instalación de software adicional. Para obtener más información, consulte la guía del usuario correspondiente. ❑ Conexión del Centro de red doméstica Para obtener más información sobre la configuración de la red, consulte ‘Configuración de la red’. „ Conexión mediante una red Wi-Fi Ad-hoc específica 1. Conecte el ‘adaptador de LAN inalámbrica de Samsung’ en el puerto USB1(HDD) o USB2 del televisor. 2. Para obtener más información sobre cómo configurar la red Ad-hoc, consulte ‘Network Setup’. N Para obtener información sobre la configuración de la red del móvil, consulte el manual del aparato. 3. Configure la dirección IP, el SSID y la contraseña del móvil y las configuraciones Ad-hoc del móvil mediante el Nombre de la red (SSID) y la Clave seguridad (contraseña) que aparecen en el televisor. „ Conexión a través de un compartidor IP cableado/inalámbrico 1. Conecte el puerto LAN del televisor y el compartidor IP cableado/inalámbrico mediante el cable LAN o conecte el puerto USB1 (HDD) o USB2 del televisor y el ‘adaptador de LAN inalámbrica de Samsung’. N Si desea conocer las instrucciones para configurar el compartidor cableado/inalámbrico y el teléfono móvil, consulte el manual del dispositivo correspondiente.. Centro de red doméstica Panel lateral del TV Adaptador de LAN inalámbrica de Samsung Teléfono móvil o Adaptador de LAN inalámbrica de Samsung Compartidor IP inalámbricor Panel lateral del TV Teléfono móvil o Cable LAN Adaptador de LAN inalámbrica de Samsung Teléfono móvil TV Side Panel o Cable LAN Compartidor IP inalámbricor BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 61 10/20/2009 5:03:44 PMSpanish - 62 Configuración del Centro de red doméstica ❑ Mensaje / Multim Muestra una lista de teléfonos móviles que se han configurado con este televisor para usar la función de mensajería o multimedia. N La función multimedia está disponible en otros teléfonos móviles que admiten DLNA DMC. „ Permtdo Admite el teléfono móvil. „ Dnegado Bloquea el teléfono móvil. „ Borrar Elimina el teléfono móvil de la lista. N Esta función elimina el nombre de la lista. Si el dispositivo móvil borrado se enciende o intenta conectarse con el televisor, puede que aparezca en la lista. ❑ Configuración „ Mensaje → Act./Desact. Puede determinar si usar la función de mensajería (las llamadas entrantes, el contenido de mensajes de texto y las planificaciones programadas en el teléfono móvil). „ Multim.→ Act./Desact. Puede seleccionar si usar la función multimedia que reproduce el contenido (vídeos, fotos o música) del teléfono móvil. „ Nombre TV Puede configurar el nombre del televisor para encontrarlo fácilmente en el dispositivo móvil. N Si selecciona Entr. usu., puede escribir el nombre del televisor mediante el teclado en pantalla (OSK). Volver Salir Centro red doméstica 111-1234-5671 : Permtdo 111-1234-5672 : Permtdo 111-1234-5673 : Dnegado 111-1234-5674 : Dnegado Mensaje Multim Config Volver Salir Centro red doméstica Mensaje : On Multim. : On Nombre TV : TV Mensaje Multim. Config. Página web de ayuda Mediante esta función puede ver las llamadas entrantes, el contenido de los mensajes de texto y las planificaciones programadas en el teléfono móvil a través de la ventana de alarma mientras ve la televisión. N Para desactivar esta ventana de alarma de Mensaje, configure Mensaje como Desact. en Config. de Centro red doméstica. N La ventana de alarma aparece durante 20 segundos. Si no se pulsa ninguna tecla o si se selecciona Cancelar, aparece hasta tres veces en intervalos de 5 minutos. N Si se selecciona Aceptar, o bien si no se selecciona Aceptar mientras el mensaje aparecía tres veces, el mensaje se borrará. El mensaje no se elimina del teléfono móvil. N Puede aparecer la ventana de alarma simple mientras se usan algunas aplicaciones como el Reproductor multimedia, la Biblioteca de contenidos, etc. En este caso, para ver el contenido del mensaje, cambie al modo de visualización de televisión. N Si aparece el mensaje de un móvil desconocido, seleccione el móvil en el elemento Mensaje de Centro red doméstica y seleccione Dnegado para bloquear el teléfono. ❑ Visualización de mensajes Si llega un nuevo mensaje de texto (SMS) mientras mira la televisión, aparece la ventana de alarma. Si hace clic en el botón Aceptar, aparecerá el contenido del mensaje. N Puede configurar las opciones de visualización del contenido de los mensajes de texto (SMS) en el teléfono móvil. Para conocer el procedimiento, consulte el manual del teléfono móvil. N Es posible que algunos caracteres especiales se muestren en blanco o dañados. ❑ Alarma de llamada entrante Si se produce una llamada mientras ve la televisión, aparece la ventana de alarma. ❑ Alarma de planificación Mientras ve la televisión, aparece la ventana de alarma para mostrar la planificación registrada. N Puede configurar las opciones de visualización del contenido de la planificación en el teléfono móvil. Para conocer el procedimiento, consulte el manual del teléfono móvil. N Es posible que algunos caracteres especiales se muestren en blanco o dañados. husband SMS Recibido nuevo mensaje Desea ver los detalles? Aceptar Cancelar BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 62 10/20/2009 5:03:49 PMSpanish - 63 Uso de la función multimedia Aparece una ventana de alarma para informar al usuario de que el contenido multimedia (vídeos, fotos, música) enviado desde el teléfono móvil aparecerá en el televisor. El contenido se reproduce automáticamente 3 segundos después de que aparezca la ventana de alarma. Si pulsa el botón RETURN o EXIT cuando aparece la ventana de alarma, no se reproduce el contenido multimedia. N Para desactivar la transmisión del contenido multimedia desde el teléfono móvil, configure Multim. como Desact. en Config. de Centro red doméstica. N Es posible que el contenido no se reproduzca en el televisor, según la resolución y el formato. ❑ Botones de control de la reproducción multimedia Botón Función ◄/► • Mover el cursor y seleccionar una opción. • Mientras se reproduce un archivo de película : Saltar hacia adelante o hacia atrás en el archivo de película. ENTER • Pulsando el botón ENTERE durante la reproducción se hace una pausa. • Pulsando el botón ENTERE durante la pausa se reanuda la reproducción. RETURN Volver al menú anterior. TOOLS Ejecutar diversas funciones desde los menús de fotos, música y película. INFO Mostrar información del archivo. EXIT Detener el modo Media Play y volver al modo TV. N Los botones ENTERE y ◄/► puede que no funcionen, según el tipo de contenido multimedia. N Mediante el dispositivo de móvil se puede controlar la reproducción de archivos multimedia. Para obtener más información, consulte la guía del usuario correspondiente. Reproducir multimedia desde “Dispos. desconocido 13” BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 63 10/20/2009 5:03:51 PMSpanish - 64 Continued... Función de teletexto La mayoría de los canales de televisión proporcionan servicios de información escrita mediante el teletexto. La página de índice de dicho servicio proporciona información sobre el uso de éste. Asimismo, se pueden seleccionar diversas opciones mediante los botones del mando a distancia para ajustar el servicio a las necesidades del usuario. N Para que la información del teletexto se visualice correctamente, la recepción del canal debe ser estable. En caso contrario, puede perderse información o algunas páginas pueden no visualizarse. 1 : (salir) Salir de la pantalla de teletexto. 2 6 (índice) Se utiliza para mostrar la página de índice (contenido) en cualquier momento durante la visualización de teletexto.. 3 5 (mostrar) Se usa para mostrar el texto oculto (respuestas a juegos, por ejemplo). Púlselo de nuevo para volver a la presentación normal. 4 4 (tamaño) Se utiliza para mostrar caracteres de doble tamaño en la parte superior de la pantalla. Si desea mostrarlos también en la parte inferior, vuelva a pulsar el botón. Púlselo de nuevo una vez para volver a la presentación normal. 5 / (activar teletexto/mezcla) Se utiliza para activar el modo de teletexto tras seleccionar el canal que proporciona el servicio. Pulse dos veces para superponer el teletexto a la pantalla de emisión actual. 6 8 (almacenar) Se utiliza para guardar las páginas del teletexto. 7 1 (página secundaria) Se utiliza para mostrar la página secundaria disponible. 8 2 (avanzar página) Se utiliza para mostrar la siguiente página de teletexto. 9 3 (retroceder página) Se utiliza para mostrar la página anterior de teletexto. 0 0 (modo) Selección del modo de teletexto (LIST/FLOF). Si lo pulsa en el modo LIST, cambia al modo de guardar lista. En dicho modo se puede guardar la página de teletexto en la lista mediante el botón 8(almacenar). ! 9 (retener) Se utiliza para retener la presentación en una página determinada si ésta está enlazada con varias páginas secundarias que se muestran automáticamente. Para reanudar, vuelva a pulsar el botón. @ 7 (cancelar) Se utiliza para visualizar la emisión cuando se busca una página. # Botones de colores (rojo/verde/amarillo/azul) Si una emisora utiliza el sistema FASTEXT, los distintos temas cubiertos en una página de teletexto se codificarán en color y podrá seleccionarlos pulsando los botones de color. Pulse el correspondiente al tema deseado. La página muestra otra información con código de color que se puede seleccionar de la misma forma. Pulse el botón del color correspondiente para ver la página anterior o la siguiente. N Puede cambiar páginas de teletexto pulsando los botones numéricos del mando a distancia. Recomendaciones de uso 1 3 4 5 6 2 7 8 9 0 ! @ # BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 64 10/20/2009 5:03:51 PMSpanish - 65 Las páginas de teletexto se organizan en seis categorías : Parte Contenido A Número de página seleccionado. B Identidad del canal de emisión. C Número de página actual o indicaciones de la búsqueda. D Fecha y hora. E Texto. F Información de estado. Información FASTEXT. N La información de teletexto se suele dividir en varias páginas que aparecen en secuencia y a las que se puede acceder : - Introduciendo el número de página. - Seleccionando un título de la lista. - Seleccionando un encabezado de color (sistema FASTEXT). O Pulse el botón TV para salir de la visualización de teletexto. Especificaciones del equipo de montaje en la pared (VESA) Instale el montaje mural en una pared sólida, perpendicular al suelo. Para colocarlo en otros materiales de construcción, póngase en contacto con el distribuidor más cercano. Si se instala en el techo o en una pared inclinada, puede caerse y causar graves lesiones personales. Familia de producto Pulgadas Especificaciones VESA (A * B) estándar Cantidad LCD-TV 19” ~22” 100 * 100 M4 4 23"~29" 200 * 100 30"~40" 200 * 200 M6 46"~55" 400 * 400 57"~70" 800 * 400 M8 80" ~ 1400 * 800 PDP-TV 42"~ 50" 400 * 400 M8 4 58"~ 63" 600 * 400 70" ~ 800 * 400 80" ~ 1400 * 800 N Se ofrecen las dimensiones estándar para los equipos de montaje mural, como se muestra en la tabla anterior. N Al adquirir el equipo de montaje en la pared, también se distribuye un manual de instalación detallado y todas las piezas necesarias para el montaje. N No use tornillos con un tamaño superior al estándar, ya que pueden causar daños en el interior del televisor. N Para montajes murales que no cumplen las especificaciones de tornillos estándar VESA, la longitud de éstos puede variar dependiendo de las especificaciones. N No use tornillos que no cumplan las especificaciones de tornillos estándar VESA. No apriete excesivamente los tornillos, ya que podría dañar el producto o provocar la caída de éste con riesgo de causar lesiones personales. Samsung no se hace responsable de este tipo de accidentes. N Samsung no se hace responsable de daños o lesiones personales cuando se usa un montaje mural que no cumple las especificaciones VESA o si el cliente no sigue las instrucciones de instalación del producto. N Nuestros modelos de 57” y 63” no son compatibles con las especificaciones VESA. Por ello, debe usar un equipo de montaje mural exclusivo para este modelo. N No supere los 15 grados de inclinación cuando monte este televisor. No instale el equipo de montaje mural mientras el televisor está encendido. Se podría producir una descarga eléctrica con riesgo de causar lesiones personales. BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 65 10/20/2009 5:03:52 PMSpanish - 66 Preparación para instalar el montaje mural 1. Instale el montaje mural con un par de apriete de 15 kgf cm o menos. Tenga en cuenta que las piezas se pueden dañar si el par de apriete es diferente del especificado. 2. El juego de accesorios incluye soporte y anilla [②] para la instalación de un televisor SAMSUNG en un montaje mural de otra empresa. (Case B) N Se ha de fijar en el orificio [①] cuando instale el montaje mural en la pared. Cómo montar el soporte base Advertencia Sujete firmemente el soporte al televisor antes de moverlo, ya que el soporte puede caer y causar lesiones graves. N El televisor lo deben transportar dos o más personas. Nunca deje el televisor en el suelo ya que la pantalla puede sufrir daños. Mantenga siempre el televisor en su posición vertical. Mediante los tornillos para asegurar el soporte y el televisor, fije firmemente el televisor al soporte. (Es posible que el exterior del equipo sea diferente del que se muestra en la imagen.) Si va a instalar el televisor en la pared, fije la tapa (➊) en la zona de conexión de la base del soporte con los dos tornillos para ocultar la ranura. (PS50B650) (PS58B680/PS63B680) Caso A. Instalación del montaje mural de SAMSUNG Caso B. Instalación del montaje mural de otra empresa BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 66 10/20/2009 5:03:57 PMSpanish - 67 Tirar del televisor, empujarlo o colgarse de él puede provocar su caída. En especial, procure que los niños no se cuelguen del televisor ni lo desestabilicen; éste podría caerse sobre ellos y causarles lesiones graves o incluso la muerte. Siga las precauciones de seguridad del folleto de seguridad incluido con el producto. Para mejorar la estabilidad instale un dispositivo antivuelco, como se explica a continuación. ❑ Para impedir que el televisor se caiga 1. Apriete firmemente las grapas sobre la pared con los tornillos. Asegúrese de que los tornillos estén bien afirmados en la pared. N Según el tipo de pared quizás necesite algún material adicional para el anclaje. N SLas grapas, los tornillos y la cadena no se suministran con el producto; deberá adquirirlos por separado. 2. Quite los tornillos de la parte central posterior del televisor y con ellos monte las grapas en el televisor. N Quizás con el televisor no vayan incluidos los tornillos. 3. Monte una cadena fuerte entre las grapas del televisor y de la pared de manera que quede bien tensada. N Instale el televisor cerca de la pared para evitar que caiga hacia atrás. N Las grapas de la pared han de estar a la misma o a menor altura que las grapas del televisor. N Cuando desee mover el televisor deberá aflojar la cadena. 4. Compruebe que todas las conexiones estén bien aseguradas. Compruébelas periódicamente para detectar cualquier signo de fatiga o de fallo. Si tiene dudas sobre la seguridad de la instalación, póngase en contacto con un instalador profesional. Fijación del televisor a la pared Seguridad en el espacio de instalación Mantenga la distancia requerida entre el producto y otros objetos (por ejemplo, paredes) para asegurar la ventilación adecuada. En caso contrario, se podría producir un incendio por un incremento de la temperatura interna del producto. Instale el producto a la distancia requerida como se muestra en la ilustración. N Cuando utilice un soporte o un montaje mural, use sólo las piezas proporcionadas por Samsung Electronics. - Si utiliza piezas proporcionadas por otros fabricantes, podría tener problemas con el producto o éste se podría caer con el riesgo de cuasar lesiones personales. - Si utiliza piezas proporcionadas por otros fabricantes, podría tener problemas con el producto o éste se podría incendiar por el incremento de la temperatura interior debido a una mala ventilación. N El aspecto puede variar según el producto. „ Instalación del producto sobre un soporte „ Instalación del producto en un montaje mural 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 경고 주의 경고 주의 pared pared BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 67 10/20/2009 5:03:58 PMSpanish - 68 Identificación de problemas Si tiene algún problema con el televisor, consulte esta lista en primer lugar. Si ninguno de los consejos funciona, visite ‘www.samsung.com’ y haga clic en Support o llame al centro de atención al cliente que encontrará en la lista de la última página. N La primera solución posible puede ser actualizar el firmware. Problema Posible solución Calidad de la imagen En primer lugar, ejecute la Prueba de imagen para confirmar que el televisor muestra correctamente la imagen de prueba. * Vaya a MENU → Asistencia técnica → Autodiagnóstico → Prueba DE imagen Si la imagen de la prueba se muestra correctamente, la imagen deficiente puede provenir de la fuente o la señal. La imagen del televisor no se ve tan bien como en la tienda. • Si tiene un receptor de cable/decodificador analógico, cambie a un decodificador. Utilice cables HDMI o de componentes para conseguir la mejor calidad de imagen de alta definición. • Suscriptor de cable/satélite : Pruebe con emisoras de alta definición (HD) de la oferta de canales. • Conexión antena : Pruebe con emisoras de alta definición (HD) después de ejecutar la programación automática. N Muchos canales de alta definición (HD) mejoran los contenidos SD (definición estándar). • Ajuste la resolución de la salida de vídeo del receptor de cable/decodificador en 1080i o 720p. La imagen aparece distorsionada : macrobloques, microbloques, puntos, pixelización. • La compresión de los contenidos de vídeo puede causar imágenes distorsionadas especialmente en las escenas de movimiento rápido, como en los deportes y las películas de acción. • Un nivel de señal débil o de mala calidad puede causar imágenes distorsionadas. No es un problema del televisor. Color de mala calidad o no hay color en la conexión de componentes. • Compruebe que los cables de los componentes estén conectados en los terminales correctos. Las conexiones incorrectas o sueltas pueden originar problemas en el color o que la pantalla se quede en blanco. Color deficiente o brillo. • Ajuste las opciones de la imagen en el menú del televisor (Modo imagen, Color, Brillo, Nitidez). • Ajuste la opción Ahorro energía en el menú Configuración. • Intente reiniciar la imagen para ver los ajustes predeterminados. (Vaya a MENU → Imagen → Reinicio de la imagen) Línea de puntos en el borde de la pantalla. • Si el tamaño de la imagen está configurado en Ajuste pantalla, cámbielo a 16:9. • Cambie la resolución del receptor de cable/decodificador. La imagen se ve sólo en blanco y negro en la entrada AV (compuesto). • Conecte el cable de vídeo (amarillo) al terminal verde de la entrada 1 de componentes del televisor. Imágenes congeladas o distorsionadas al cambiar de canal o retraso en la aparición de la imagen. • Si está conectado al receptor de cable, reinicie éste (vuelva a conectar el cable CA y espere a que el receptor de cable se reinicie. Puede tardar unos 20 minutos.) • Configure la resolución de salida del receptor de cable en 1080i o 720p. Calidad del sonido En primer lugar, ejecute la Prueba de sonido para confirmar que el audio del televisor funciona correctamente. * Vaya a MENU → Asistencia técnica → Autodiagnóstico → Prueba de sonido Si el audio es correcto, el problema del sonido puede provenir de la fuente o la señal. No se percibe ningún sonido, o muy bajo, con el volumen al máximo. • Compruebe el volumen del dispositivo (decodificador de cable/satélite, DVD, Blu-ray, etc.) conectado al televisor. A continuación, ajuste el volumen del televisor según corresponda. La imagen es buena pero no hay sonido. • Configure la opción Seleccionar altavoz como Altavoz de TV en el menú de sonido. • Compruebe que los cables de audio de un dispositivo externo estén conectados a los terminales de entrada de audio correctos del televisor. • Compruebe la opción de salida de audio del dispositivo conectado. Ejemplo : quizás deba cambiar la opción de audio del receptor de cable a HDMI sitiene conectado HDMI al televisor. • Si se utiliza un cable DVI a HDMI, se necesita un cable de audio independiente. • Desactive la función SRS si va a ajustar el volumen a un valor superior a 30. • Retire el enchufe de la toma de auriculares (si está disponible en el televisor) Se oye ruido en el altavoz. • Compruebe las conexiones del cable. Compruebe que no haya un cable de vídeo conectado a una entrada de audio. • Para la conexión antena/cable, compruebe la potencia de señal. Un nivel de señal débil puede causar distorsiones en el sonido. Continúa... BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 68 10/20/2009 5:03:59 PMSpanish - 69 Problema Posible solución No hay imagen, no hay vídeo El televisor no se enciende. • Compruebe que el cable de alimentación esté bien conectado en la toma de la pared y en el televisor. • Compruebe que la toma de la pared funciona. • Pulse el botón de encendido del televisor para asegurarse de que el mando a distancia funciona adecuadamente. Si el televisor se enciende, puede ser debido al mando a distancia. Para solucionar el problema del mando a distancia, consulte "El mando a distancia no funciona" a continuación. El televisor se apaga automáticamente. • Compruebe si la opción Temp. desc. está establecida en Act. en el menú Configuración. • Si el televisor está conectado al PC, compruebe la configuración de encendido de éste. • Compruebe que el cable de alimentación esté bien conectado en la toma de la pared y en el televisor. • Si no hay señal durante unos de 10~15 minutos en la conexión de antena/cable, el televisor se apagará. No hay imagen/vídeo. • Compruebe las conexiones del cable (desconecte y vuelva a conectar todos los cables del televisor y los dispositivos externos). • Establezca la salida de vídeo de los dispositivos externos (receptor de cable/ decodificador, DVD, Blu-ray, etc.) de modo que coincida con las conexiones de la entrada de TV. Por ejemplo, salida del dispositivo externo : HDMI , entrada de TV : HDMI. • Compruebe que esté encendido el dispositivo conectado. • Compruebe que esté seleccionada la fuente de TV correcta pulsando el botón SOURCE del mando a distancia. • Reinicie el dispositivo conectado volviendo a conectar el cable de alimentación del dispositivo. Conexión RF (Cable/Antena) No se reciben todos los canales. • Compruebe que el cable de la antena esté firmemente conectado. • Use la opción Plug & Play para añadir los canales disponibles a la lista de canales. Vaya a MENU → Configuración → Plug & Play y espere a que se guarden todos los canales disponibles. • Compruebe la posición de la antena. La imagen aparece distorsionada : macrobloques, microbloques, puntos, pixelización. • La compresión de los contenidos de vídeo puede causar imágenes distorsionadas especialmente en las escenas de movimiento rápido, como en los deportes y las películas de acción. • Un nivel de señal débil puede causar imágenes distorsionadas. No es un problema del televisor. Conexión del PC Mensaje "Modo no compatible". • Establezca la resolución y la frecuencia de salida del PC de modo que coincida con la resolución admitida por el televisor. El PC siempre aparece en la lista de fuentes aunque no esté conectado. • Esto es normal; el PC siempre aparece en la lista de fuentes aunque no haya ningún PC conectado. El vídeo es correcto pero no se oye el audio con una conexión HDMI. • Compruebe la configuración de la salida de audio del PC. Conexión de la red Fallo en la conexión de la red inalámbrica. • Para utilizar una red inalámbrica, es necesario usar la mochila USB inalámbrica de Samsung. • Asegúrese de que Tipo de red está configurado como Inalámbr.. • El televisor debe estar conectado a un compartidor (enrutador) IP inalámbrico. Otros La imagen no se ve a pantalla completa. • En cada lado se muestran barras negras en los canales de alta definición cuando se muestran contenidos SD mejorados (4:3). • Se muestran barras negras en las partes inferior y superior cuando se ven películas que tienen diferente formato que el televisor. • Ajuste la opción del tamaño de imagen del dispositivo externo o del televisor al modo de pantalla completa. El mando a distancia no funciona. • Sustituya las pilas del mando a distancia de acuerdo con la polaridad correcta (+ -). • Limpie la ventana de transmisión de la parte superior del mando a distancia. • Apunte con el mando a distancia directamente al televisor desde una distancia de 1,5 -2 metros. Continúa... BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 69 10/20/2009 5:03:59 PMSpanish - 70 Problema Posible solución El televisor de plasma emite un zumbido. • Los televisores de plasma normalmente emiten un zumbido suave. Esto es normal. Lo causan las cargas eléctricas que se utilizan para crear las imágenes en la pantalla. • Si el zumbido es fuerte, quizás se haya configurado el brillo del televisor demasiado alto. Pruebe a establecer un nivel de brillo menor. • También se puede originar un zumbido fuerte si la parte posterior del televisor de plasma está demasiado cerca de la pared o de otra superficie dura. También puede probar a cambiar el recorrido de los cables de conexión. • Una instalación inadecuada del montaje mural puede crear un ruido excesivo. Problema de retención de imagen (desgaste). • Esta pantalla está equipada con tecnología de reducción de la "quemadura de pantalla" para reducir la posibilidad de que se queme. La tecnología Cambio de píxel permite definir el movimiento de la imagen arriba o abajo (línea vertical) y de lado a lado (punto horizontal). No se puede controlar el encendido/ apagado o el volumen del televisor con el mando a distancia del receptor de cable/decodificador. • Programe el mando a distancia del receptor de cable/decodificador para que controle el televisor. Consulte el manual del decodificador de cable/satélite para conocer el código del TV SAMSUNG. Mensaje "Modo no compatible". • Compruebe la resolución que admite el televisor y ajuste en consecuencia la resolución de salida del dispositivo externo. Consulte los valores de resolución en este manual. No se puede desactivar el efecto de luz en la zona biselada frontal (debajo del logotipo de SAMSUNG). • Ajuste la opción de efecto de luz en el menú Configuración. Las opciones son: Des., En espera, In Watching (Viendo TV) y Siempre • Efecto de luz no está disponible en todos los modelos Olor a plástico en el televisor. • Este olor es normal y desaparece con el tiempo. La potencia de señal del televisor no está disponible en el menú de prueba de autodiagnóstico. • Esta función sólo está disponible en los canales digitales con las conexiones de antena (RF/coaxial). El televisor está inclinado hacia la izquierda o hacia la derecha. • Retire la base del soporte de televisor y vuelva a montarla. No se puede montar la base del soporte. • Compruebe que el televisor esté instalado sobre una superficie plana. Si no puede quitar los tornillos del televisor, utilice un destornillador magnetizado. El menú del canal se ve de color gris (no disponible). • El menú del canal sólo está disponible cuando está seleccionada la fuente del televisor. La configuración se pierde después de 30 minutos o cada vez que se apaga el televisor. • Si el televisor está en el modo Demo tienda, reiniciará los ajustes de audio y de imagen cada 30 minutos. Debe cambiar el modo Demo tienda al modo Uso doméstico en el procedimiento Plug & Play. Pulse el botón SOURCE para seleccionar el modo TV , vaya a MENU → Configuración → Plug & Play → ENTER Pérdida intermitente de audio o vídeo. • Compruebe las conexiones de los cables y vuelva a conectarlos. • Se puede deber a que los cables son demasiado rígidos o gruesos. Debe asegurarse de que los cables sean lo suficientemente flexibles para un largo periodo de uso. En un montaje mural, es aconsejable utilizar cables con conectores de 90 grados. Puede ver pequeñas partículas si mira de cerca el borde biselado de la pantalla del televisor. • Esto es una particularidad del diseño del producto y no es un defecto. El menú PIP no está disponible. • La función PIP sólo está disponible cuando se ve una fuente HDMI, PC o de componentes. ‘Señal codificada’ o ‘Sin señal/Señal débil’ con TARJETA (CI/CI+) en CAM. • Compruebe que el CAM tenga tarjeta CI(CI+) instalada en la ranura para interfaz común. • Esto es normal, ya que el televisor ejecuta la función OTA (en el aire) por sí solo a fin de actualizar el firmware descargado mientras se veía la televisión. Problema de imagen/sonido recurrente • Compruebe y cambie la señal/fuente. N Algunas de las imágenes y funciones mostradas sólo están disponibles en unos modelos determinados. BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 70 10/20/2009 5:04:00 PMSpanish - 71 Especificaciones Las descripciones y las características de este folleto se facilitan con fines informativos solamente y están sujetas a modificación sin previo aviso. Nombre del modelo PS50B650 PS58B680 PS63B680 Tamaño de pantalla (diagonal) 50 pulgadas 58 pulgadas 63 pulgadas Resolución de PC (Óptima) 1920 x 1080 @ 60 Hz 1920 x 1080 @ 60 Hz 1920 x 1080 @ 60 Hz Salida de sonido 10 W x 2 15 W x 2 15 W x 2 Dimensiones (An x Pr x Al) Cuerpo principal con el soporte 1240 x 756 x 74 mm 1240 x 817 x 290 mm 1401 x 848 x 74 mm 1401 x 917 x 335 mm 1531 x 932 x 74 mm 1531 x 957 x 390 mm Peso cuerpo principal con el soporte 33 kg 38 kg 39 kg 46 kg 53 kg 61 kg Consideraciones medioambientales Temperatura de funcionamiento Humedad de funcionamiento Temperatura de almacenamiento Humedad de almacenamiento 50 °F a 104 °F (10 °C a 40 °C) 10% to 80%, sin condensación -4 °F a 113 °F (-20 °C a 45 °C) 5% a 95%, sin condensación N Este dispositivo es un aparato digital de la Clase B. N El diseño y las especificaciones pueden cambiar sin previo aviso. N Para conocer la fuente de alimentación y el consumo de energía, consulte la etiqueta adherida al producto. BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 71 10/20/2009 5:04:00 PMPortuguês - 2 Instruções para o utilizador „ Retenção de imagem no ecrã Não visualize uma imagem fixa (como, por exemplo, um videojogo ou se ligar um PC a este plasma) no ecrã de plasma durante mais de 2 horas, porque pode provocar a retenção de imagem no ecrã. Esta retenção de imagem também é conhecida como “queimadura de ecrã”. Para evitar a retenção de imagem, reduza o grau do brilho e do contraste no ecrã quando surgir uma imagem fixa. „ Altitude O plasma só funciona normalmente a uma altitude inferior a 2000 m. Pode não funcionar correctamente num local que esteja a uma altitude superior a 2000 m, não sendo aconselhável instalá-lo nem utilizá-lo nesse local. „ Calor na parte superior do televisor plasma A parte superior do produto pode ficar quente se o utilizar durante muito tempo, pois o calor dissipa-se a partir do painel, através das aberturas de ventilação que estão em cima. Esta situação é considerada normal e não indica que exista qualquer avaria ou defeito no produto. No entanto, deve evitar que as crianças toquem na parte superiordo produto. „ Ouvem-se estalidos no produto. Os estalidos podem ocorrer quando o produto se contrair ou expandir devido a mudanças ambientais no espaço circundante, como a nível de temperatura ou humidade. Isto é normal e não representa um defeito no aparelho. „ Defeitos nas células O plasma utiliza um painel constituído por 2 360 000 (nível HD) a 6 221 000 (nível FHD) pixels que necessitam de uma tecnologia sofisticada para serem reproduzidos. No entanto, podem existir alguns pixels claros ou escuros no ecrã. Estes pixels não afectam o desempenho do produto. „ Evite utilizar o televisor com temperaturas inferiores a 5 °C. „ Uma imagem fixa reproduzida durante um longo período de tempo pode danificar permanentemente o ecrã de plasma. A utilização do televisor plasma no formato 4:3N durante um longo período de tempo pode deixar vestígios de margens na parte esquerda, direita e central do ecrã, devido a diferenças de emissão de luz. Se reproduzir um DVD ou um jogo, pode causar efeitos semelhantes no ecrã. Os danos causados pelo efeito acima mencionado não estão cobertos pela garantia. „ Imagem residual no ecrã. A visualização prolongada de imagens fixas de videojogos e de um PC pode produzir imagens residuais parciais. Para evitar este efeito, reduza o ‘brilho’ e o ‘contraste’ quando visualizar imagens fixas. „ Garantia - A garantia não cobre quaisquer danos causados por retenção de imagem. - A garantia não cobre o efeito de imagem queimada. „ Instalação Contacte um centro de assistência autorizado quando instalar o televisor num local sujeito a poeiras excessivas, temperaturas elevadas ou reduzidas, elevados índices de humidade, substâncias químicas, bem como em locais onde o produto seja utilizado continuamente, como num aeroporto, estação de comboios, etc. Se não o fizer, pode danificá-lo seriamente. Aviso sobre TV digital 1. As funcionalidades relacionadas com a TV digital (DVB) estão apenas disponíveis em países/regiões onde sinais terrestres digitais DVB-T (MPEG2 e MPEG4 AVC) são transmitidos ou onde tenha acesso a um serviço de televisão por cabo DVB-C (MPEG2 e MPEG4 AAC) compatível. Verifique com o revendedor local a possibilidade de receber sinais DVB-T ou DVB-C. 2. DVB-T é o consórcio padrão europeu para a transmissão de emissão de televisão digital terrestre enquanto o DVB-C é o de transmissão de emissão de televisão digital por cabo. Contudo, algumas funcionalidades distintas, como o EPG [Electric Program Guide (Guia de Programação Electrónico)], VOD [Video on Demand (Vídeo a pedido)], etc. não estão incluídas nestas especificações. Deste modo, de momento não são suportadas. 3. Embora o televisor esteja de acordo com as normas DVB-T e DVB-C [Agosto de 2008], a compatibilidade com as futuras transmissões digitais terrestres DVB-T e por cabo digital DVB-C não são garantidas. 4. Alguns fornecedores de TV por cabo podem cobrar uma taxa adicional para este tipo de serviço e podem também requerer um acordo com os termos e condições do respectivo estabelecimento. 5. Algumas funções da TV digital podem não estar disponíveis em alguns países ou regiões e o DVB-C pode não funcionar correctamente com todos os fornecedores. 6. Para mais informações, contacte o centro local de apoio ao cliente da SAMSUNG. Contacte a SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE Se tiver algum comentário ou dúvida relacionados com produtos da Samsung, contacte o centro de assistência ao cliente da SAMSUNG. (Consulte a contracapa para obter mais informações.) N As imagens e ilustrações neste manual do utilizador servem apenas de referência e podem ser diferentes do produto real. De forma a melhorar o desempenho do produto, o design e as características técnicas podem sofrer alterações. © 2009 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Todos os direitos reservados. BN68-02333J-POR.indb 2 10/20/2009 4:40:51 PMPortuguês - 3 N O T Símbolo Carregue Nota Tecla rápida TOOLS Índice Ligar e preparar o televisor ■ Verificar as peças recebidas .....................................................4 ■ Utilizar a base de suporte..........................................................4 ■ Montar os cabos........................................................................4 ■ Apresentação do painel de controlo..........................................5 ■ Apresentação do painel de ligação ...........................................6 ■ Telecomando .............................................................................8 ■ Colocar pilhas no telecomando .................................................8 ■ Utilizar os botões de retroiluminação do telecomando..............9 ■ Ligar e desligar..........................................................................9 ■ Definir o televisor para o modo de espera ................................9 ■ Visualização no ecrã .................................................................9 ■ Ver os menus ..........................................................................10 ■ Utilizar o botão TOOLS ...........................................................10 ■ Função Plug & Play.................................................................10 Controlo de canais ■ Memorizar canais .................................................................... 11 ■ Gerir canais .............................................................................13 Controlo de imagem ■ Alterar as definições de imagem.............................................15 ■ Configurar o televisor com o PC .............................................18 ■ Monitor do PC .........................................................................19 Controlo de som ■ Alterar as Definições do Som..................................................20 ■ Seleccionar o modo de som....................................................21 Descrição das funções ■ Definir a hora...........................................................................22 ■ Definir o menu Configurar .......................................................23 ■ Ver a imagem numa imagem (PIP) .........................................25 Assistência / Entrada ■ Programa suportado................................................................26 ■ Lista de fontes / Editar nome...................................................27 Rede ■ Ligação à rede.........................................................................28 ■ Configurar rede .......................................................................30 Media Play ■ Ligar um dispositivo USB ........................................................33 ■ Utilizar a função Media Play....................................................34 ■ Ordenar a lista de fotografias / músicas / filmes .....................35 ■ Menu de opções da lista de fotografias / músicas / filmes ......36 ■ Menu de opções de Apresentação de diapositivos / Reprodução de música / Reprodução de filmes .....................37 ■ Visualizar uma fotografia ou uma apresentação de diapositivos.........................................................................38 ■ Reproduzir música ..................................................................39 ■ Reproduzir um ficheiro de filme ..............................................40 ■ Utilizar o menu Configurar.......................................................41 Media Play-DLNA ■ Definir a Rede DLNA...............................................................42 ■ Instalar a Aplicação DLNA.......................................................42 ■ Utilizar a Aplicação DLNA........................................................43 ■ Utilizar a Função DLNA...........................................................44 Sobre o Anynet+ ■ Ligar dispositivos Anynet + ........................................................45 ■ Configurar a função Anynet + ....................................................46 ■ Alternar entre dispositivos Anynet + ..........................................46 ■ Gravação.................................................................................47 ■ Ouvir através de um receptor..................................................48 ■ Resolução de problemas para a função Anynet + ....................48 Content Library ■ Activar a Content Library.........................................................49 ■ Utilizar a Content Library.........................................................50 Internet@TV ■ Introdução à aplicação Internet@TV.......................................51 ■ Editar Snippets na Ancoragem................................................53 ■ Utilizar o widget Profile............................................................53 ■ Utilizar a Yahoo!® Widget Gallery ...........................................54 ■ Utilizar o Yahoo!® Weather Widget.........................................54 ■ Utilizar o Yahoo!® News Widget..............................................55 ■ Utilizar o Yahoo!® Flickr Widget..............................................55 ■ Utilizar o Yahoo!® Finance Widget..........................................56 ■ Resolução de problemas da aplicação Internet@TV..............56 ■ Website de ajuda.....................................................................57 Internet@TV ■ Introdução à aplicação Internet@TV.......................................58 ■ Configurar a aplicação Internet@TV.......................................58 ■ Utilizar o serviço Internet@TV.................................................59 ■ Resolução de problemas da aplicação Internet@TV..............60 ■ Website de ajuda.....................................................................60 Centro rede domést. ■ Centro rede domést.................................................................61 ■ Configurar a aplicação Centro rede domést............................62 ■ Utilizar a função Mensag.........................................................62 ■ Utilizar a função Média............................................................63 Recomendações para a utilização ■ Função de teletexto.................................................................64 ■ Especificações do kit de montagem na parede.......................65 ■ Preparação antes da instalação do suporte de montagem na parede ................................................................................66 ■ Como montar a base de suporte.............................................66 ■ Fixar o televisor à parede........................................................67 ■ Manter um espaço de instalação seguro ................................67 ■ Resolução de problemas.........................................................68 ■ Especificações ........................................................................71 Português BN68-02333J-POR.indb 3 10/20/2009 4:40:52 PMPortuguês - 4 Montar os cabos Prenda os cabos no suporte de cabos para que estes não fiquem à vista na base transparente. Utilizar a base de suporte N O plasma deve ser transportado por duas ou mais pessoas. Nunca deite o plasma no chão, porque pode danificar o ecrã. Mantenha sempre o plasma na vertical. N O plasma pode rodar 20 graus para a esquerda e para a direita. -20° ~ 20° Verificar as peças recebidas Manual do utilizador Telecomando / Pilhas AAA (2 unidades) Cabo de alimentação Pano de limpeza Suporte de cabos Anel de suporte (4 unidades) (Consulte a página 66) CD do programa Parafusos (4 unidades) (apenas PS50B650) (Consulte a página 66) Protecção inferior (apenas PS50B650) (Consulte a página 66) Protecção inferior / Parafusos (2 unidades) (apenas PS58B680 / PS63B680) (Consulte a página 66) Núcleo de ferrite para auscultadores Núcleo de ferrite para cabo dealimentação (apenas PS58B680T6P / S63B680) Núcleo de ferrite paracabo dealimentação Cartão de garantia / Manual de segurança (Não disponível em todos os locais) N Núcleo de ferrite Os núcleos de ferrite são utilizados para proteger os cabos de interferências. Quando ligar um cabo, abra o núcleo de ferrite e prenda-o à volta do cabo junto da ficha como ilustrado na figura. Ligar e preparar o televisor (apenas PS58B680T6P / PS63B680) BN68-02333J-POR.indb 4 10/20/2009 4:40:55 PMPortuguês - 5 Apresentação do painel de controlo N A cor e a forma do produto podem variar consoante o modelo. Botões do painel frontal Toque em cada um dos botões para utilizá-los. (PS58B680 / PS63B680) (PS50B650) 1 SOURCE Alterna entre todas as fontes de entrada disponíveis (TV, Ext1, Ext2, AV, Componente, PC, HDMI1, HDMI2/DVI, HDMI3, HDMI4, USB). N No menu no ecrã, utilize este botão tal como utiliza o botão ENTERE no telecomando. 2 MENU Carregue neste botão para ver o menu das funções do televisor no ecrã. 3 + – Carregue nestes botões para aumentar ou diminuir o volume. No menu no ecrã, utilize os botões + – tal como utiliza os botões ◄ ou ► do telecomando. 4 CH Carregue nestes botões para mudar de canal. No menu no ecrã, utilize os botões CH tal como utilizaos botões ▲ ou ▼ do telecomando. Pode utilizar o botão CH para ligar o televisor sem o telecomando. 5 INDICADOR DE CORRENTE Pisca e desliga-se quando o televisor está ligado; acende-se quando está no modo de espera. 6 (ALIMENTAÇÃO) Carregue para ligar e desligar o televisor. 7 SENSOR DO TELECOMANDO Aponte o telecomando para este ponto do televisor. 8 ALTIFALANTES BN68-02333J-POR.indb 5 10/20/2009 4:40:55 PMPortuguês - 6 Apresentação do painel de ligação N Sempre que ligar um sistema de áudio ou de vídeo ao televisor, certifique-se de que todos os elementos estão desligados. N Quando ligar um dispositivo externo, faça a correspondência de cores entre o terminal e o respectivo cabo. N A cor e a forma do produto podem variar consoante o modelo. 1 LAN Ligue um cabo LAN a esta porta para ligar à rede 2 POWER IN Ligue o cabo de alimentação fornecido. 3 COMPONENT IN Entradas de áudio (AUDIO L/R) e vídeo (Y / PB / PR) para componentes. 4 PC IN (AUDIO / PC) Ligue à tomada de saída de vídeo e de áudio do PC. 5 EXT 1, EXT 2 Entradas ou saídas para dispositivos externos, tais como videogravadores, consolas de jogos ou leitores de DVD. N No modo EXT, a saída DTV suporta apenas Vídeo MPEG SD e Áudio. N No modo EXT, Modo Jogo não está disponível. Especificação de entradas/saídas Connector Entrada Saída Video Audio(L/R) RGB Video + Audio(L/R) EXT 1 ✔ ✔ ✔ Só está disponível a saída TV ou DTV. EXT 2 ✔ ✔ Saída que pode escolher. 6 AUSCULTADORES Ligue uns auscultadores se quiser ver um programa de televisão sem incomodar as pessoas que o rodeiam. N O uso prolongado dos auscultadores com o volume muito alto pode provocar lesões auditivas. 7 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) Ligue a um componente de áudio digital. 8 SERVICE Conector para assistência técnica. 9 AUDIO OUT(AUDIO R/L) Ligue sinais de áudio RCA entre o televisor e uma fonte externa como, por exemplo, um equipamento de áudio. 0 ANT IN Conector coaxial de 75 Ω para rede de televisão por cabo/ antena. ! HDMI IN 1, 2(DVI), 3 Não é necessária uma ligação áudio adicional numa ligação de HDMI a HDMI. - Quando utilizar uma ligação com cabo HDMI/DVI, tem de utilizar a tomada HDMI IN 2(DVI). N O que é HDMI? - Interface multimédia de alta definição permite a transmissão de dados de vídeo digital de alta definição e de som digital multicanal. - O terminal HDMI/DVI suporta uma ligação DVI a um dispositivo alargado, com o cabo adequado (não fornecido). HDMI e DVI diferem pois o dispositivo HDMI é mais pequeno, tem a função de codificação HDCP (High Bandwidth Digital Copy Protection - Protecção de banda larga para conteúdos digitais) instalada e suporta som digital multicanal. DVI AUDIO IN Saídas de áudio DVI para dispositivos externos. Modos suportados para HDMI/DVI e componente 480i 480p 576i 576p 720p 1080i 1080p HDMI/DVI 50Hz X X X O O O O HDMI/DVI 60Hz X O X X O O O Componente O O O O O O O Painel posterior do televisor Rede de televisão por cabo ou ou 2 3 4 5 7 9 ! 0 6 8 1 BN68-02333J-POR.indb 6 10/20/2009 4:40:58 PMPortuguês - 7 1 Ranhura COMMON INTERFACE Introduza o cartão CI(CI+) (Common Interface - Interface comum) na ranhura. (Consulte a página 23) - Se não introduzir o CI(CI+) CARD em determinados canais, a mensagem Scramble Signal é apresentada no ecrã. - As informações de associação, incluindo um número de telefone, ID do CI(CI+) CARD, ID do anfitrião e outras informações, são apresentadas cerca de 2 a 3 minutos depois. Se aparecer uma mensagem de erro, contacte o seu fornecedor de serviços. - Assim que concluir a configuração das informações dos canais, a mensagem Updating Completed é apresentada, indicando que a lista de canais já está actualizada. - Dependendo do modelo, quando o cartão CI for novamente introduzido, pode aparecer uma mensagem a solicitar a palavra-passe do Parental Lock. - Dependendo do modelo, mesmo que o Parental Lock esteja definido para Allow All pode aparecer uma mensagem a solicitar a palavra-passe de programas para adultos (18 anos ou mais). N Introduza o CI(CI+) CARD na direcção indicada. N Uma vez que o "CI(CI+) CARD" não é suportado nalguns países, regiões, estações emissoras, verifique esta situação junto do seu revendedor autorizado. N A função CI+ apenas é aplicável ao modelo PS********P. Se tiver problemas, contacte o fornecedor de serviços. 2 USB 1(HDD), USB 2 Ligue um dispositivo de armazenamento de massa USB para visualizar ficheiros de fotografias (JPEG) e reproduzir ficheiros de áudio (MP3) ou ficheiros de filme. Pode estabelecer uma ligação sem fios à rede da Samsung. A tomada USB 1 é também utilizada como tomada HDD. HDD (Unidade de disco rígido) é o dispositivo para o armazenamento de dados digitalmente codificados. 3 HDMI IN 4 Ligue à tomada HDMI de um dispositivo com saída HDMI. 4 AV IN (VIDEO, AUDIO L/R) Entradas de vídeo e áudio para dispositivos externos, como, por exemplo, uma câmara de vídeo ou um videogravador. N A cor e a forma do produto podem variar consoante o modelo. Painel lateral do televisor 3 4 1 2 BN68-02333J-POR.indb 7 10/20/2009 4:40:59 PMPortuguês - 8 Telecomando Pode utilizar o telecomando até, aproximadamente, 7 metros de distância do televisor. N O desempenho do telecomando pode ser afectado por luzes fortes. 1 Botão POWER (liga e desliga o televisor). 2 Selecciona o modo TV directamente. 3 Botões numéricos para acesso directo aos canais. 4 Carregue neste botão para aceder aos seus canais favoritos. 5 Desligar o som temporariamente. 6 Aumento do volume Diminuição do volume 7 Selecção de fontes disponíveis. 8 Utilize para ver informações sobre a transmissão actual. 9 Utilize este botão para seleccionar rapidamente as funções utilizadas com frequência. 0 Utilize este botão para seleccionar os itens do menu no ecrã e alterar os valores dos menus. ! Esta função permite-lhe visualizar a aplicação Internet@TV. @ Utilize estes botões nos modos Lista Canais, Media Play, e Internet@TV, etc. $ Utilize este botão para ver as listas de canais no ecrã. % Utilize estes botões na lista de canais, Media Play e Anynet+. ^ Carregue neste botão para acender a luz de fundo dos botões do telecomando. Esta função é útil para utilizar à noite ou quando a sala está escura. (Se utilizar o telecomando com o botão de iluminação ON/OFF ( ) definido para On, reduz o tempo de carga disponível da pilha.) & Canal anterior. * Canal seguinte Canal anterior ( Mostra o menu principal no ecrã. ) Visualização do guia de programação electrónic o (EPG - Electronic Program Guide). a Volta ao menu anterior. b Sai do menu no ecrã. c Esta função permite-lhe visualizar a aplicação Media Play. d Esta função permite-lhe ver a aplicação Content Library. e Visualização de legendas digitais. f selecção da descrição áudio. Funções de teletexto 2 Sair do ecrã do teletexto (consoante o modelo) 7 Selecção do modo do teletexto (LIST/FLOF) 8 Mostrar teletexto 9 Tamanho do teletexto @ Selecção de tópicos Fastext # Apresentação do teletexto/combinar informações do teletexto com a transmissão normal $ Memorizar teletexto & Página secundária do teletexto * P : Página seguinte do teletexto P : Página anterior do teletexto ( Índice do teletexto a Pausa do teletexto b Cancelamento do teletexto Colocar pilhas no telecomando 1. Levante a tampa na parte de trás do telecomando, como mostra a figura. 2. Coloque duas pilhas de tamanho AAA. N Faça corresponder os pólos ‘+’ e ‘–’ das pilhas com o diagrama existente no compartimento. 3. Feche a tampa. N Se não tencionar utilizar o telecomando durante muito tempo, retire as pilhas e guarde-as num local fresco e seco. N Se o telecomando não funcionar, verifique o seguinte 1. O televisor está ligado? 2. Os pólos + e - das pilhas estão invertidos? 3. As pilhas estão gastas? 4. Houve um corte de energia ou o cabo de alimentação está desligado? 5. Há alguma lâmpada fluorescente especial ou luz de néon por perto? BN68-02333J-POR.indb 8 10/20/2009 4:41:01 PMPortuguês - 9 Utilizar os botões de retroiluminação do telecomando Utilize esta função no escuro ou quando não conseguir ver claramente os botões do telecomando. 1. Carregue no botão de iluminação ON/OFF( ) N Na posição ON, a função de retroiluminação dos botões é activada por um instante. N Ao carregar num botão do telecomando quando este estiver ligado, activa a retroiluminação dos botões por um instante. Ligar e desligar O cabo de ligação à corrente está ligado à parte traseira do televisor. 1. Ligue o cabo de alimentação a uma tomada adequada. N O indicador de modo de espera do televisor acende-se. 2. Carregue no botão POWERP do televisor. N Também pode carregar no botão POWERP ou no botão TV do telecomando para ligar o televisor. N É automaticamente seleccionado o último canal a que assistiu. 3. Carregue no botão numérico (0~9) ou no botão de canal para cima / para baixo (< / >) do telecomando ou no botão < CH > do televisor. N Quando liga o televisor pela primeira vez, é-lhe pedido que escolha o idioma no qual os menus são apresentados. 4. Para desligar o televisor, carregue novamente no botão POWERP. Definir o televisor para o modo de espera Pode definir o seu televisor para o modo de espera, de forma a reduzir o consumo de energia. O modo de espera é útil quando precisa de interromper a visualização temporariamente (por exemplo, durante a refeição). 1. Carregue no botão POWERP do telecomando. N O ecrã apaga-se e aparece o indicador luminoso vermelho do modo de espera no televisor. 2. Para voltar a ligar o televisor, basta carregar novamente em POWERP, nos botões numéricos (0~9), no botão TV ou no botão de canal para cima / para baixo (< / >). N Não deixe o televisor em modo de espera durante longos períodos de tempo (por exemplo, quando vai de férias). Aconselha-se que desligue o televisor da corrente eléctrica e da antena. Visualização no ecrã A visualização no ecrã identifica o canal actual e o estado de determinadas definições de áudio-vídeo. O Carregue no botão INFO para visualizar as informações. Carregue no botão INFO no telecomando. O canal, o tipo de som e o estado de determinadas definições de imagem e som são apresentados no televisor. • ▲, ▼: Pode visualizar outras informações do canal. Se quer passar para o canal actualmente seleccionado, carregue no botão ENTERE. • ◄, ►: Pode visualizar as informações do programa pretendido no canal actual. N Carregue novamente no botão INFO ou espere aproximadamente 10 segundos e o ecrã desaparece automaticamente. DTV Air 15 abc1 18:00 ~ 6:00 18:11 Thu 6 Jan Life On Venus Avenue Unclassified No Detaild Information E Watch ' Information BN68-02333J-POR.indb 9 10/20/2009 4:41:01 PMPortuguês - 10 Ver os menus 1. Com o televisor ligado, carregue no botão MENU. O menu principal aparece no ecrã. No lado esquerdo do menu aparecem ícones : Imagem, Som, Canal, Configurar, Entrada, Aplicação, Assistência. 2. Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar um dos ícones. Em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE para aceder ao submenu do ícone. 3. Carregue no botão EXIT para sair. N Os menus no ecrã desaparecem após cerca deum minuto. Utilizar o botão TOOLS Pode utilizar o botão TOOLS para seleccionar as funções que utiliza com frequência, de forma rápida e fácil. O menu Ferramentas muda consoante o modo de entrada externa seleccionado. 1. Carregue no botão TOOLS. O menu Ferramentas aparece. 2. Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar um menu e, em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE. 3. Carregue nos botões ▲ / ▼ / ◄ / ► / ENTERE para ver, alterar ou utilizar os itens seleccionados. Para obter uma descrição mais detalhada de cada função, consulte a página correspondente. • Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC), consulte a página 46 • Taman. de imagem, consulte a página 16 • Modo Imagem, consulte a página 15 • Modo Som, consulte a página 20 • Temporizador, consulte a página 22 • SRS TS HD, consulte a página 20 • Poupança energ., consulte a página 24 • Dual l ll, consulte a página 21 • Adicionar aos favoritos (ou Apagar dos favoritos), consulte a página 14 • PIP, consulte a página 25 • Ajuste auto., consulte a página 18 Função Plug & Play Quando ligar o televisor pela primeira vez, as definições básicas são utilizadas de forma automática e subsequente. N A protecção de ecrã é activada se não utilizar as teclas do telecomando durante mais de 1 minuto, no modo Plug & Play. N A protecção de ecrã é activada se não for detectada actividade durante mais de 15 minutos. N Se seleccionar acidentalmente o país errado para o televisor, os caracteres podem aparecer de forma incorrecta no ecrã. 1. Carregue no botão POWER do telecomando. O menu Select the OSD Language é apresentado automaticamente. Carregue no botão ENTERE. Seleccione o idioma apropriado carregando no botão ▲ ou ▼. Carregue no botão ENTERE para confirmar a escolha. 2. Carregue no botão ◄ ou ► para seleccionar Demo Loja ou Uso Doméstico e, em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE. N Recomendamos que configure o televisor para o modo Uso Doméstico, de forma a usufruir da melhor imagem no seu ambiente em casa. N O modo Demo Loja destina-se apenas a locais de venda a retalho. N Se definir o televisor acidentalmente para o modo Demo Loja e quiser voltar para o modo Uso Doméstico (padrão) : Carregue no botão de volume do televisor. Quando aparecer o OSD do volume, carregue sem soltar o botão MENU do televisor durante 5 segundos. 3. Carregue no botão ENTERE. Seleccione o país apropriado carregando no botão ▲ ou ▼. Carregue no botão ENTERE para confirmar a escolha. N Depois de seleccionar o país no menu Country alguns modelos permitem avançar para uma opção adicional para definir o pin. N Quando introduz o número PIN, 0-0-0-0 não está disponível. 4. Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ para memorizar os canais da ligação seleccionada e, em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE. • Antena : Sinal de antena. • Cabo : Sinal de cabo. Plug & Play Select the OSD Language. Language : U Move E Enter ▲ Nederlands English Eesti ▼ Ferramentas Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) Taman. de imagem : Wide Automático Modo Imagem : Standard Modo Som : Personal. Temporizador : Deslig. SRS TS HD : Deslig. Poupança energ. : Deslig. Dual l ll : Mono Adicionar aos favoritos U Mover E Enter e Sair Modo : Standard Lumin. Células : 4 Contraste : 95 Brilho : 45 Nitidez : 50 Cor : 50 Matiz (Vd/Vm) : Vd50 / Vm50 Definições avançadas Imagem BN68-02333J-POR.indb 10 10/20/2009 4:41:02 PMPortuguês - 11 5. Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar a fonte de antena que pretende memorizar. Carregue no botão ENTERE para seleccionar Iniciar. • Digital e Analógico : Canais digitais e analógicos. • Digital : Canais digitais. • Analógico : Canais analógicos. N A procura de canais começa e termina automaticamente. N Para obter uma descrição mais detalhada de como seleccionar o modo Cabo, Consulte a página 11. 6. A mensagem Ajustar o Modo Relógio. é apresentada. Carregue no botão ENTERE. Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar Auto. e, em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE. N Se seleccionar Manual, Ajustar data e hora actuais é apresentado. (Para obter uma descrição mais detalhada sobre a opção Manual, Consulte a página 22) N Se receber um sinal digital, a hora será definida automaticamente. 7. É apresentada uma breve descrição de Como obter o melhor desempenho do novo televisor HD. Carregue no botão ENTERE. N Este menu está disponível em Guia de ligação HD no menu Assistência. N Pode ir para a página anterior ou seguinte, utilizando os botões ◄ / ►. 8. Aparece a mensagem Enjoy your TV (Divirta-se). N Se quiser ver televisão, seleccione a opção Ver televisão. N Se quiser aceder à opção Ver Manual produto, carregue no botão ENTERE. Se quiser repor esta função... 1. Carregue no botão MENU para ver o menu. Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar Configurar e, em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE. 2. Carregue novamente no botão ENTERE para seleccionar Plug & Play. 3. Introduza o número PIN de 4 dígitos. O número PIN predefinido de um televisor novo é ‘0-0-0-0’. N Se quiser mudar o número PIN (Personal Identification Number), Consulte a página 24. N A função Plug & Play só está disponível no modo TV. Memorizar canais ❑ País „ Canal digital : Pode alterar o país nos canais digitais. „ Canal analógico : Pode alterar o país nos canais analógicos. N É apresentado o ecrã para a introdução do número PIN. Introduza o número PIN de 4 dígitos. ❑ Memor. auto. Procura todos os canais com estações emissoras activas (a disponibilidade depende do seu país) e guarda-os na memória do televisor. Defina o televisor para memorizar os canais da ligação seleccionada. • Antena : Sinal de antena. • Cabo : Sinal de cabo. Pode seleccionar a fonte de antena a memorizar. • Digital e Analógico : Canais digitais e analógicos. • Digital : Canais digitais. • Analógico : Canais analógicos. N Se seleccionar Cabo, • Modo proc. : Mostra o modo de procura. (Rápida) - ID de rede : Mostra o código de identificação de rede. - Frequência : Mostra a frequência para o canal. - Modulação : Mostra os valores de modulação disponíveis. - Taxa de símbolos : Mostra as taxas de símbolos disponíveis. • Modo de procura : Mostra o modo de procura. (Completa, Rede) - Frequência inicial : Mostra os valores iniciais da frequência. - Frequência final : Mostra os valores de paragem da frequência. - Modulação : Mostra os valores de modulação disponíveis. - Taxa de símbolos : Mostra as taxas de símbolos disponíveis. N Se pretender parar a função Memor. auto., carregue no botão ENTERE. A mensagem Parar a programação automática? será apresentada. Seleccione Sim carregando no botão ◄ ou ► e, em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE. Controlo de canais Canal País ► Memor. auto. Memor. manual Opção de Procura por Cabo Guia completo Mini guia Guia predef. : Guia completo Lista canais Configurar Plug & Play ► Idioma do menu : Português Tempo Transmissão Segurança Rede Geral BN68-02333J-POR.indb 11 10/20/2009 4:41:03 PMPortuguês - 12 ❑ Memor. manual Procura o canal manualmente e guarda-o na memória do televisor. „ Canal digital (só canais digitais) N O Canal digital só está disponível no modo DTV. • Canal : Defina o número do canal utilizando os botões ▲, ▼ ou os botões numéricos (0~9). • Frequência : Defina a frequência utilizando os botões numéricos (0~9). • Largura banda : Defina a largura da banda utilizando os botões ▲ ou ▼. N Quando terminar, os canais são actualizados na lista de canais. „ Canal analógico Memorização manual para canais analógicos. • Programa (Número do programa a ser atribuído a um canal) : Define o número do programa utilizando os botões ▲, ▼ ou os botões numéricos (0~9). • Sistema cores → Automático / PAL / SECAM / NTSC4.43 : Define o valor do sistema de cores utilizando o botão ▲ ou ▼. • Sistema som → BG / DK / I / L : Define o valor do sistema de som utilizando o botão ▲ ou ▼ • Canal (Se souber o número do canal que pretende memorizar) : Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar C (Canal de antena) ou S (Canal de cabo). Carregue no botão ► e, em seguida, nos botões ▲, ▼ ou nos botões numéricos (0~9) para seleccionar o número pretendido. N Se não ouvir som ou se este não estiver em condições, volte a seleccionar o padrão de som pretendido. • Busca (Se não souber os números dos canais) : Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ para iniciar a procura. O sintonizador pesquisa a amplitude de frequências até aparecer no ecrã o primeiro canal ou o canal seleccionado. • Memorizar (Quando memoriza o canal e o número do programa associado) : Defina para OK carregando no botão ENTERE. N Modo de canal - C (Modo de canal de antena) : Pode seleccionar um canal, introduzindo o número atribuído a cada estação emissora neste modo. - S (Modo de canal de cabo) : Pode seleccionar um canal, introduzindo o número atribuído a cada canal de cabo neste modo. ❑ Opção de Procura por Cabo Pode definir opções de procura adicionais, como a frequência e a taxa de símbolos para a procura de rede por cabo. (Consoante o país) • Iniciar frequência : Mostra os valores iniciais da frequência. • Parar frequência : Mostra os valores de paragem da frequência. • Modulação : Mostra os valores de modulação disponíveis. • Taxa de símbolos : Mostra as taxas de símbolos disponíveis. N Se o valor de Iniciar frequência for superior ao valor de Parar frequência, é apresentada uma mensagem de aviso. ❑ Guia completo / Mini guia As informações do EPG (Electronic Programme Guide - Guia de programação electrónico) são fornecidas pelas estações emissoras. Pode haver entradas de programas em branco ou desactualizadas em consequência da transmissão de informações de um determinado canal. O ecrã é actualizado de forma dinâmica à medida que ficam disponíveis novas informações. • Guia completo : Mostra informações sobre os programas de hora em hora. Aparecem informações sobre duas horas de programação que pode percorrer para a frente ou para trás no tempo. • Mini guia : As informações sobre cada programa são apresentadas em cada linha do ecrã do miniguia do canal actual, a partir do programa actual, de acordo com a ordem do início dos programas. ❑ Guia predef. „ Mini guia / Guia completo Pode escolher ver o miniguia ou o guia completo quando carregar no botão GUIDE do telecomando. O Também pode aceder ao menu do guia carregando no botão GUIDE. Continua... Canal Guia completo Mini guia Guia predef. : Guia completo► Lista canais Modo de canal : Canais adicionados Sintonia fina BN68-02333J-POR.indb 12 10/20/2009 4:41:03 PMPortuguês - 13 Utilizar o Guia completo / Mini guia ▲ / ▼ / ◄ / ►, ENTER Seleccionar um programa carregando no botão ▲/▼/◄/►/ENTERE. VERMELHO Alternar entre o Guia completo ou o Mini guia. VERDE Guia completo : Deslocar-se para baixo rapidamente. (-24 horas) AMARELO Guia completo : Avançar rapidamente. (+24 horas) AzUL Sair do guia. INFO Botão INFO para obter informações detalhadas. ❑ Modo de canal Ao carregar no botão P (), A mudança de canal é feita de acordo com a lista de canais seleccionados. „ Canais adicionados : A mudança de canal é feita de acordo com a lista de canais memorizados. „ Canais favoritos : A mudança de canal é feita de acordo com a lista de canais favoritos. ❑ Sintonia fina (só canais analógicos) Se a recepção for nítida, não precisa de fazer a sintonização fina do canal, uma vez que é feita automaticamente durante a procura e memorização. Se, no entanto, o sinal estiver fraco ou distorcido, pode ser necessário fazer uma sintonização fina de canais manualmente. N Os canais memorizados onde foi efectuada a sintonização fina estão marcados com um asterisco * no lado direito do número do canal na banda de canais. N Se não guardar na memória o canal onde foi efectuada a sintonização fina, os ajustes não são gravados. N Para repor a sintonização fina, seleccione Reiniciar carregando no botão ▼ e, em seguida, no botão ENTERE. Gerir canais Se utilizar este menu, pode adicionar / eliminar ou definir canais favoritos e utilizar o guia de programas para transmissões digitais. N Seleccione um canal no ecrã Todos os canais, Canais adicionados, Favoritos ou Programado carregando nos botões ▲ ou ▼ e no botão ENTERE. Pode então ver o canal seleccionado. • Todos os canais : Mostra todos os canais disponíveis. • Canais adicionados : Mostra todos os canais adicionados. • Favoritos : Mostra todos os canais favoritos. • Programado : Mostra todos os programas actualmente reservados. O Carregue no botão CH LIST do telecomando para ver as listas de canais. N Utilizar os botões coloridos com a lista de canais - Vermelho (Tipo de canal) : Alterna entre o televisor, rádio, dados / outros e tudo. - Verde (zoom) : Aumenta ou diminui o número de um canal. - Amarelo (Seleccionar) : Selecciona várias listas de canais. - T TOOLS (Ferramentas) : Apresenta o menu Apagar (ou Adicionar), Adicionar aos favoritos (ou Apagar dos favoritos), Bloquear (ou Desbloq.), Visual. Temporizador, Edição do nome do canal, Edição do Canal nº, Ordenar, Anular selecção ou Selec. Todos ou Memor. auto..(Os menus de Tools (Ferramentas) podem variar consoante a situação.) N Ícones do ecrã sobre o estado do canal A Um canal analógico. c Um canal seleccionado carregando no botão amarelo. ♥ Um canal definido como favorito. ( Um programa que está a ser transmitido. \ Um canal bloqueado. ) Um programa reservado. Canal Mini guia Guia predef. : Guia completo Lista canais Modo Canal : Adicionar Sintonia fina 824 UKTV Gold 825 UKTV style A 1 C -- A 2 C -- A 3 ♥ C -- A 4 C -- A 5 C -- A 6 C -- A 7 C -- A 8 C -- Todos os canais Todas „ Tipo de canal „ Zoom „ Selec. Página Ferramentas Guia completo DTV Cabo 900 f tn 2:10 Ter 1 Jun Freshmen On Campus 2:00 - 2:30 Informação não detalhada. Hoje 2:00 - 3:00 3:00 - 4:00 Mint Extra Loaded Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC The Distillery Smash Hits! Sunday 900 f tn 901 ITV Play 902 Kerrang! 903 Kiss 903 oneword ▼ 903 Smash Hits! Street Hypn.. Kisstory Nenhuma informação. Nenhuma informação. Nenhuma informação. Freshmen O.. Mini guia DTV Cabo 900 f tn Street Hypnosis Booze Britain 2:00 2:30 ▼ 5:00 Freshmen On Campus Ver Informação Página „ Guia completo „ Sair Ver Informação Página „ Mini guia „ +24 horas „ Sair BN68-02333J-POR.indb 13 10/20/2009 4:41:05 PMPortuguês - 14 ❑ Menu Ferramentas da lista de canais (em Todos os canais / Canais adicionados / Favoritos) N Carregue no botão TOOLS para utilizar o menu Ferramentas. N Os itens do menu Tools (Ferramentas) podem variar consoante o estado do canal. „ Adicionar / Apagar Pode eliminar ou adicionar um canal para ver os canais pretendidos. N Todos os canais eliminados são apresentados no menu Todos os canais. N Um canal a cinzento indica que este foi eliminado. N O menu Adicionar só é apresentado para canais eliminados. N Também pode, do mesmo modo, eliminar um canal do menu Canais adicionados ou Favoritos. „ Adicionar aos favoritos / Apagar dos favoritos Pode definir canais que vê frequentemente como favoritos. T Carregue no botão TOOLS para ver o menu Ferramentas. Também pode definir o canal favorito seleccionando Ferramentas → Adicionar aos favoritos (ou Apagar dos favoritos) O Para seleccionar os canais configurados como favoritos, carregue no botão FAV.CH do telecomando. N O símbolo “♥” é apresentado e o canal é definido como favorito. N Todos os canais favoritos são apresentados no menu Favoritos. „ Bloquear / Desbloq. Pode bloquear um canal para que este não possa ser seleccionado nem visto. Esta função só está disponível quando Bloq. crianças está definido para Lig.. (Consulte a página 24) N É apresentado o ecrã para a introdução do número PIN. Introduza o número PIN de 4 dígitos. N O número PIN predefinido de um televisor novo é ‘0-0-0-0’. Pode alterar o PIN, seleccionando a opção Alterar PIN do menu. N O símbolo “\” é apresentado e o canal é bloqueado. „ Visual. Temporizador Se reservar um programa a que queira assistir, o televisor muda automaticamente para o canal da lista onde tinha reservado o programa, mesmo que esteja a ver outro canal. Para reservar um programa, defina primeiro a hora actual. (Consulte a página 22) N Só pode reservar canais memorizados. N Pode definir directamente o canal, o mês, o dia, o ano, a hora e o minuto, carregando nos botões numéricos do telecomando. N A reserva de um programa é apresentada no menu Programado. N Guia de programas digitais e ver uma reserva Se carregar no botão ► quando seleccionar um canal digital, aparece o guia de programas desse canal. Pode reservar um programa seguindo os procedimentos descritos acima. „ Edição do nome do canal (só canais analógicos) Pode etiquetar os canais para que o respectivo indicativo apareça sempre que seleccionar o canal. N Os nomes dos canais digitais são atribuídos automaticamente e não podem ser etiquetados. „ Edição do Canal nº (só canais digitais) Também pode editar o número do canal carregando nos botões numéricos do telecomando. „ Ordenar (só canais analógicos) Esta operação permite alterar os números de programa dos canais memorizados. Esta operação pode ser necessária depois de utilizar a memorização automática. „ Selec. Todos / Anular selecção Pode anular a selecção ou seleccionar todos os canais da lista de canais. N Pode adicionar / eliminar, adicionar aos Favoritos / eliminar dos Favoritos ou bloquear / desbloquear vários canais ao mesmo tempo. Seleccione os canais pretendidos e carregue no botão amarelo para definir todos os canais seleccionados ao mesmo tempo. N A marca c aparece à esquerda dos canais seleccionados. N Só pode escolher Anular selecção se houver um canal seleccionado. „ Memor. auto. N Para obter mais informações sobre a configuração das opções, Consulte a página 11. N Se o canal estiver bloqueado devido à activação da função Bloq. crianças, aparece a janela para a introdução do PIN. ❑ Menu Ferramentas da lista de canais (em Programado) Pode ver, modificar ou eliminar uma reserva. N Carregue no botão TOOLS para utilizar o menu Ferramentas. • Alterar informações : Seleccione esta opção para alterar uma reserva em visualização. • Cancelar planos : Seleccione esta opção para cancelar uma reserva. • Informação : Seleccione esta opção para ver uma reserva. (Também pode alterar as informações de reserva.) • Selec. Todos / Anular selecção : Seleccione ou anule a selecção de todos os programas reservados. 824 UKTV Gold 825 UKTV style A 1 C -- A 2 C -- A 3 C -- A 4 C -- A 5 C -- A 6 C -- A 7 C -- A 8 C -- Todos os canais Apagar Adicionar aos favoritos Bloquear Visual. temp. Editar nome de canal Ordenar ▼ Programado 1 / 1 / 2009 13:59 5 TV1 Quincy, M.E 18:59 2 TV3 The Equalizer 20:59 2 TV3 McMillan & Wife 21:59 2 TV3 M.Spillane’s mike Hammer Alterar informações Cancelar planos Informação Selec. Todos Todas „ Zoom „ Selec. Ferramentas Informação Todas „ Tipo de canal „ Zoom „ Selec. Página Ferramentas BN68-02333J-POR.indb 14 10/20/2009 4:41:06 PMPortuguês - 15 Alterar as definições de imagem ❑ Modo Pode seleccionar o tipo de imagem que melhor corresponde aos seus requisitos de visualização. „ Dinâmico / Standard / Eco / Filme T Carregue no botão TOOLS para ver o menu Ferramentas. Também pode definir o modo de imagem seleccionando Ferramentas → Modo de imagem. ❑ Lumin. Células / Contraste / Brilho / Nitidez / Cor / Matiz (Vd/Vm) O seu televisor dispõe de várias opções de definição que lhe permitem controlar a qualidade da imagem. • Lumin. Células : Regula o brilho dos pixels. • Contraste : Regula o nível de contraste da imagem. • Brilho : Regula o nível de brilho da imagem. • Nitidez : Regula a definição das extremidades da imagem. • Cor : Regula a saturação da cor da imagem. • Matiz (Vd/Vm) : Regula o matiz da cor da imagem. N Quando faz alterações às opções Lumin. Células, Contraste, Brilho, Nitidez, Cor ou Matiz (Vd/Vm), o OSD é regulado em conformidade. N Os valores de ajuste são gravados para cada modo de imagem. N Nos modos TV, Ext., AV analógicos do sistema PAL, não pode utilizar a função Matiz. N No modo PC, só pode fazer alterações às opções Lumin. Células, Contraste e Brilho. N Cada definição regulada poderá ser memorizada separadamente de acordo com o seu modo de entrada. N O consumo de energia durante a utilização pode ser reduzido de forma significativa se o nível de brilho da imagem for reduzido. Assim, diminuirá o custo geral de funcionamento. ❑ Definições avançadas Pode regular as definições avançadas do ecrã, incluindo a cor e o contraste. N A opção Definições avançadas está disponível no modo Standard ou Filme. N No modo PC, só pode fazer alterações às opções Contraste dinâm., Gama e Equilíb. branco de entre os itens de Definições avançadas. „ Tonalidade de preto → Deslig. / Escuro / Mais escuro / Muito escuro Pode aumentar a profundidade da imagem regulando a densidade da cor preta. „ Contraste dinâm. → Deslig. / Baixo / Médio / Alto Pode regular o contraste do ecrã de forma a obter o contraste ideal. „ Gama Pode regular a intensidade das cores primárias (vermelho, verde, azul). „ Matriz de cores A matriz de cores é um esquema de cores composto por vermelho, verde e azul. Seleccione a sua matriz de cores favorita para obter uma cor mais natural. • Auto. : Define automaticamente o intervalo de cores consoante a fonte de entrada de vídeo. • Nativo : Aumenta o intervalo de cores relativamente ao da fonte de entrada de vídeo. • Personal. : Regula o intervalo de cores de acordo com a sua preferência.. N Personalizar a matriz de cores - Regula o intervalo de cores de acordo com a sua preferência. A opção Cor está disponível quando Matriz de cores está definido para Personal. - Cor → Vermelho / Verde / Azul / Amarelo / Ciano / Magenta. - Vermelho / Verde / Azul : Pode regular os valores RGB da cor seleccionada. - Reiniciar : Repõe os valores predefinidos da matriz de cores. Controlo de imagem Continua... Modo : Standard ► Lumin. Células : 4 Contraste : 95 Brilho : 45 Nitidez : 50 Cor : 50 Matiz (Vd/Vm) : Vd50/Vm50 Definições avançadas Imagem Cor : 50 Matiz (Vd/Vm) : Vd50/Vm50 Definições avançadas ► Opções de imagem Reposição de imagem Imagem BN68-02333J-POR.indb 15 10/20/2009 4:41:06 PMPortuguês - 16 „ Equilíb. branco Pode regular a temperatura da cor de forma a obter imagens com cores mais naturais. • Vrm-Offset / Verde-Offset / Azul-Offset / Vrm-Gain / Verde-Gain / Azul-Gain : Se alterar os valores de ajuste, será efectuada a actualização do ecrã. • Reiniciar : Repõe o equilíbrio do branco predefinido. „ Tom de pele Pode regular o tom de pele para mais ou menos vermelho. N Se alterar os valores de ajuste, será efectuada a actualização do ecrã. „ Melhor. extremid. → Deslig. / Lig. Pode realçar os limites dos objectos na imagem. „ xvYCC → Deslig. / Lig. Definir o modo xvYCC para Lig. aumenta o detalhe e o espaço de cores quando estiver a ver filmes a partir de um dispositivo externo (por exemplo, um leitor de DVD). N xvYCC está disponível quando o modo de imagem está definido para Filme e a entrada externa está definida para o modo HDMI ou para o modo Componente. N Dependendo do dispositivos externos, esta função pode não ser suportada. ❑ Opções de imagem Pode personalizar as definições adicionais de imagem de acordo com a sua preferência. N No modo PC, só pode fazer alterações às opções Tonalidade, Tamanho e Screen Burn Protection (Protecção contra queimadura de ecrã) de entre os itens de Opções de imagem. „ Tonalidade → CoresFr / Normal / C. quentes1 / C. quentes2 / C. quentes3 Pode seleccionar a tonalidade que considera mais agradável. N Os valores regulados são guardados consoante o modo de imagem seleccionado. N As opções C. quentes1, C. quentes2 ou C. quentes3 só são activadas quando o modo de imagem está definido para Filme. „ Tamanho → Wide Automático / 16:9 / Wide zoom / zoom / 4:3 / Ajustar ao ecrã Pode seleccionar o tamanho de imagem que melhor corresponde aos seus requisitos de visualização. • Wide Automático : Ajusta a imagem para o formato Wide Automático. • 16:9 : Define a imagem para o modo panorâmico 16:9. • Wide zoom : Aumenta ainda mais o tamanho da imagem do que 4:3. • zoom : Aumenta o tamanho da imagem na vertical. • 4:3 : Define a imagem para o modo normal 4:3. • Ajustar ao ecrã : Mostra o sinal Full HD nativo que não pode ser visto utilizando um televisor normal. N As opções de tamanho da imagem podem variar consoante a fonte de entrada. N Os itens disponíveis podem variar consoante o modo seleccionado. N No modo PC, só os modos 16:9 e 4:3 podem ser regulados. N Se o modo Duplo ( , ) estiver definido para PIP, não é possível definir o Tamanho da imagem. N As definições podem ser reguladas e guardadas para cada dispositivo externo que ligar a uma entrada do televisor. N Pode ocorrer uma retenção temporária da imagem quando vir uma imagem fixa por um período superior a duas horas. N Wide zoom : Carregue no botão ► para seleccionar Posição e, em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE. Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ para deslocar o ecrã para cima ou para baixo. Em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE. N zoom : Carregue no botão ► para seleccionar Posição e, em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE. Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ para deslocar a imagem para cima e para baixo. Em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE. Carregue no botão ► para seleccionar Tamanho e, em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE. Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ para ampliar ou reduzir o tamanho da imagem na vertical. Em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE. N Depois de seleccionar Ajustar ao ecrã no modo HDMI (1080i / 1080p) ou Componente (1080i / 1080p) : Seleccione Posição carregando no botão ◄ ou ►. Utilize o botão ▲, ▼, ◄ ou ► para deslocar a imagem. N Reini. : Carregue no botão ◄ ou ► para seleccionar Reini. e, em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE. Pode inicializar a definição. N Se utilizar a função Ajustar ao ecrã com uma entrada HDMI 720p, é cortada uma linha na parte superior, inferior, esquerda e direita, tal como na função de procura. „ Modo de ecrã → 16:9 / Wide zoom / zoom / 4:3 Se definir o tamanho da imagem para Wide Automático num televisor panorâmico 16:9, pode determinar o tamanho que pretende ver: a imagem 4:3 WSS (Wide Screen Service) ou nenhuma. Cada país europeu requer um tamanho de imagem diferente, pelo que esta função permite aos utilizadores seleccionar o tamanho. N Esta função está disponível no modo Wide Automático. N Esta função não está disponível nos modos PC, Componente nem HDMI. Continua... Matiz (Vd/Vm) : Vd50 / Vm50 Definições avançadas Opções de imagem ► Reposição de imagem Imagem BN68-02333J-POR.indb 16 10/20/2009 4:41:07 PMPortuguês - 17 „ NR Digital → Deslig. / Baixa / Média / Alta / Auto. Se o sinal de transmissão recebido pelo seu televisor for fraco, pode activar a função Redução do ruído digital para ajudar a diminuir os efeitos da electricidade estática ou de fantasma que possam aparecer no ecrã. N Se o sinal for fraco, seleccione uma das outras opções até que apareça no ecrã a melhor imagem. „ Nv.pr.HDMI → Normal / Baixa Pode seleccionar o nível de preto directamente no ecrã para regular a intensidade do ecrã. N Esta função só está activa quando ligar a entrada externa a HDMI (sinais RGB). „ Demo 1080 Full HD Motion → Deslig. / Lig. A nova geração de ecrãs de plasma da Samsung’s proporciona uma espantosa nitidez de movimentos em Full HD durante a reprodução de desportos, filmes e jogos com movimentos rápidos. N Esta função não está disponível nos modos PC, Jogos nem Media Play. „ Modo Filme Pode optimizar o modo da imagem especialmente para ver filmes. • Deslig. : Desactiva a função Modo Filme. • Auto.1 : Regula automaticamente a imagem para obter a melhor qualidade quando vê um filme. • Auto.2 : Optimiza automaticamente o videotexto quando vê um filme. • Cinema Smooth : Proporciona a derradeira experiência cinematográfica. N O Modo Filme é suportado pelas opções TV, Vídeo, Componente(480i / 1080i) e HDMI(1080i). „ Demo 100Hz Real → Deslig. / Lig. É possível distinguir claramente entre 100 Hz Reais e 50 Hz, especialmente quando vê cenas em movimento rápido. Portanto, quando vir cenas em movimento lento, não é possível distinguir entre 100Hz Reais e 50Hz.A demonstração 100 Hz funciona apenas com sinal de 50 Hz. O modo de demonstração 100 Hz Reais é fornecido para demonstrações em lojas e fotografias especiais. „ Modo Apenas azul → Deslig. / Lig. Esta função destina-se a especialistas de medição de dispositivos audiovisuais. Esta função apresenta apenas o sinal azul, removendo os sinais vermelho e verde do sinal de vídeo para fornecer um efeito de filtro azul que é utilizado para regular a cor e a matiz do equipamento de vídeo, como leitores de DVD, sistemas home theater, etc. N O Modo Apenas azul está disponível quando o modo de imagem está definido para Filme ou Standard. „ Protecção contra queimadura de ecrã Este aparelho está equipado com tecnologia de prevenção contra queimadura de ecrã, o que reduz a possibilidade de ocorrência deste efeito. Esta tecnologia permite regular o movimento da imagem para cima/baixo (Vertical) e lateralmente (Horizontal). A definição Tempo permite programar, em minutos, o tempo entre movimentos da imagem. • Mudar pixels : Esta função permite mover, de minuto a minuto, pixels no plasma, na horizontal ou na vertical, para minimizar a imagem residual no ecrã. N Condição óptima para a mudança de pixels Item TV/Ext./AV/Componente/HDMI/PC Horizontal 0~2 2 Vertical 0~4 4 Tempo (minutos) 1~4 min 2 min N O valor de Mudar pixels pode ser diferente consoante o tamanho do monitor (polegadas) e do modo. N Esta função não está disponível no modo Ajustar ao ecrã. • Deslocamento : Esta função permite remover as imagens residuais do ecrã, movendo todos os pixels no plasma de acordo com um padrão. Utilize esta função quando ainda houver imagens residuais ou símbolos no ecrã, especialmente depois de uma imagem fixa ter sido exibida no ecrã durante muito tempo. • Cinzento lateral : Quando vir televisão no formato 4:3, se regular o equilíbrio do branco nas extremidades esquerda e direita, pode evitar danos no ecrã. - Claro : Se definir o tamanho do ecrã para 4:3, aclara os lados esquerdo e direito. - Escuro : Se definir o tamanho do ecrã para 4:3, escurece os lados esquerdo e direito. Continua... BN68-02333J-POR.indb 17 10/20/2009 4:41:07 PMPortuguês - 18 Configurar o televisor com o PC N Predefinição : Carregue no botão SOURCE para seleccionar o modo PC. ❑ Ajuste auto. A opção Ajuste auto. permite que o monitor do PC se ajuste automaticamente ao sinal de vídeo recebido de um PC. Os valores Fino, Grosso e Posição são regulados automaticamente. N Esta função não está disponível no modo DVI-HDMI. T Carregue no botão TOOLS para ver o menu Ferramentas. Também pode definir a opção Ajuste auto. seleccionando Ferramentas → Ajuste auto.. ❑ Ecrã O objectivo do ajuste da qualidade da imagem é o de remover ou reduzir o ruído da imagem. Se não conseguir retirar o ruído fazendo apenas a sintonização fina, regule a frequência o melhor possível (Grosso) e volte a fazer a sintonização fina. Depois de reduzido o ruído, volte a regular a imagem de forma a ficar alinhada no centro do ecrã. „ Grosso Regula a frequência quando surge ruído vertical no ecrã. „ Fino Regula o ecrã de forma a aumentar a nitidez. „ Posição do PC Regule a posição do ecrã do PC se esta não se ajustar por completo ao televisor. Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ para regular a posição vertical. Carregue no botão ◄ ou ► para regular a posição horizontal. „ Repor imagem Pode substituir todas as definições de imagem pelos valores predefinidos. ❑ Reposição de imagem → Repor modo de imagem / Cancelar Repõe os valores predefinidos. N Seleccione o modo de imagem que pretende repor. A reposição é feita para cada modo de imagem. Brilho : 45 Nitidez : 50 Ajuste auto. ► Ecrã Definições avançadas Opções de imagem Reposição de imagem Imagem Picture Definições avançadas Opções de imagem Reposição de imagem ► Imagem BN68-02333J-POR.indb 18 10/20/2009 4:41:07 PMPortuguês - 19 Monitor do PC ❑ Configurar o software do PC (com base no Windows XP) Seguem-se as definições de visualização do Windows num computador normal. Os ecrãs que aparecem no monitor do seu PC são provavelmente diferentes, dependendo da sua versão do Windows e da placa de vídeo. Contudo, mesmo que os ecrãs pareçam diferentes, são aplicadas, em quase todos os casos, as mesmas informações de configuração básicas. (Se tal não acontecer, contacte o fabricante do computador ou um revendedor Samsung.) 1. Em primeiro lugar, clique em ‘Painel de controlo’ no menu Iniciar do Windows. 2. Quando a janela do painel de controlo for apresentada, clique em ‘Aspecto e temas’ e surgirá uma caixa de diálogo. 3. Quando a janela do painel de controlo for apresentada, clique em ‘Visualização’ e surgirá uma caixa de diálogo. 4. Navegue até ao separador ‘Definições’ na caixa de diálogo. A definição de tamanho (resolução) óptima : 1920 X 1080 pixels. Se existir uma opção de frequência vertical na caixa de diálogo das definições da visualização, o valor correcto é ‘60’ ou ‘60 Hz’. Senão for o caso, basta clicar em ‘OK’ e sair da caixa de diálogo. ❑ Modos de visualização Tanto a posição como o tamanho do ecrã dependem do tipo de monitor do PC e da sua resolução. Recomendam-se as resoluções da tabela. N Quando utilizar uma ligação com cabo HDMI/DVI, tem de utilizar a tomada HDMI IN 2(DVI). N O modo entrelaçado não é suportado. N O televisor pode não funcionar correctamente se for seleccionado um formato de vídeo não padrão. N São suportados os modos Separate (Separado) e Composite (Composto). SOG não é suportado. N Cabos VGA muito longos ou de baixa qualidade podem causar ruídos na imagem em modos de resolução altos (1920 x 1080). „ Entrada D-Sub e HDMI/DVI Modo Resolução Frequência horizontal (kHz) Frequência vertical (Hz) Frequência do relógio em pixels(MHz) Polaridade de sincronização (H / V) IBM 640 x 350 31.469 70.086 25.175 + / - 720 x 400 31.469 70.087 28.322 - / + MAC 640 x 480 35.000 66.667 30.240 - / - 832 x 624 49.726 74.551 57.284 - / - 1152 x 870 68.681 75.062 100.000 - / + VESA CVT 720 x 576 35.910 59.950 32.750 - / + 1152 x 864 53.783 59.959 81.750 - / + 1280 x 720 44.772 59.855 74.500 - / + 56.456 74.777 95.750 - / + 1280 x 960 75.231 74.857 130.000 - / + VESA DMT 640 x 480 31.469 59.940 25.175 - / - 37.861 72.809 31.500 - / - 37.500 75.000 31.500 - / - 800 x 600 37.879 60.317 40.000 + / + 800 x 600 48.077 72.188 50.000 + / + 800 x 600 46.875 75.000 49.500 + / + 1024 x 768 48.363 60.004 65.000 - / - 56.476 70.069 75.000 - / - 60.023 75.029 78.750 + / + 1152 x 864 67.500 75.000 108.000 + / + 1280 x 800 49.702 59.810 83.500 - / + 62.795 74.934 106.500 - / + 1280 x 960 60.000 60.000 108.000 + / + 1280 x 1024 63.981 60.020 108.000 + / + 79.976 75.025 135.000 + / + 1360 x 768 47.712 60.015 85.500 + / + 1440 x 900 55.935 59.887 106.500 - / + 70.635 74.984 136.750 - / + 1680 x 1050 65.290 59.954 146.250 - / + VESA DMT / DTV CEA 1920 x 1080p 67.500 60.000 148.500 + / + VESA GTF 1280 x 720 52.500 70.000 89.040 - / + 1280 x 1024 74.620 70.000 128.943 - / - BN68-02333J-POR.indb 19 10/20/2009 4:41:08 PMPortuguês - 20 Alterar as Definições do Som ❑ Modo Pode seleccionar o tipo de efeitos sonoros especiais a utilizar quando estiver a ver uma determinada emissão. „ Standard / Música / Filme / Voz nítida / Personal. T Carregue no botão TOOLS para ver o menu Ferramentas. Também pode configurar o modo de som seleccionando Ferramentas → Modo de som. ❑ Equalizador Pode regular as definições de som de acordo com as suas preferências pessoais. • Modo : Pode seleccionar o modo de som de acordo com as suas preferências pessoais. • Balanço : Controla o equilíbrio entre os altifalantes esquerdo e direito. • 100Hz / 300Hz / 1KHz / 3KHz / 10KHz (Ajuste de banda larga) : Regula o nível de diferentes frequências de banda larga. • Reiniciar : Repõe os valores predefinidos do equalizador. ❑ SRS TruSurround HD → Deslig. / Lig. SRS TruSurround HD é a tecnologia combinada entre TruSurround e FOCUS, TruBass. A função SRS TruSurround HD permite-lhe desfrutar de um efeito de som Surround 5.1 nos dois altifalantes do televisor. Para além de oferecer graves intensos e ricos, esta função também melhora a resolução das frequências altas. T Carregue no botão TOOLS para ver o menu Ferramentas. Também pode definir a opção SRS TruSurround HD seleccionando Ferramentas → SRS TS HD. TruSurround HD, SRS e o símbolo são marcas comerciais da SRS Labs, Inc. A tecnologia TruSurround HD está incorporada na licença da SRS Labs, Inc. N Se o som não estiver normal durante a reprodução de música no televisor, regule o equalizador e SRS TruSurround HD (Deslig./Lig.). ❑ Idioma de áudio (só canais digitais) Pode alterar o valor predefinido dos idiomas de áudio. Apresenta a informação de idioma da transmissão a ser recebida. N Só pode seleccionar de entre os idiomas disponibilizados pela transmissão. ❑ Formato áudio → MPEG / Dolby Digital (só canais digitais) Se o som for emitido tanto pelo altifalante principal como pelo receptor de áudio, pode ouvir-se um eco devido à diferença na velocidade de descodificação entre o altifalante principal e o receptor de áudio. Neste caso, utilize a função Altifalante do tv. N Só pode seleccionar de entre os idiomas disponibilizados pela transmissão. Fabricado sob a licença da Dolby Laboratories. Dolby e o símbolo de duplo D são marcas comerciais da Dolby Laboratories. ❑ Descrição áudio (só canais digitais) Esta é uma função auxiliar de áudio que fornece uma faixa de áudio adicional para pessoas com deficiências visuais. Esta função gere o fluxo de áudio para AD (Descrição de áudio), quando é enviado pelo transmissor juntamente com o áudio principal. Os utilizadores podem activar ou desactivar a descrição de áudio e regular o volume. O Para seleccionar estas opções basta carregar no botão AD do telecomando. „ Descrição áudio → Deslig. / Lig. Activa ou desactiva a função de descrição de áudio. „ Volume Regula o volume da descrição de áudio. N A função Volume é activada se Descrição áudio estiver definido para Lig.. Controlo de som Modo : Personal. ► Equalizador SRS TruSurround HD : Off Idioma de áudio : ---- Formato áudio : ---- Descrição áudio Volume auto. : Deslig. Seleccionar Altifalante : Altifalante do tv. som BN68-02333J-POR.indb 20 10/20/2009 4:41:09 PMPortuguês - 21 ❑ Volume auto. → Deslig. / Lig. Cada estação emissora tem condições de sinal específicas e, por isso, não é fácil regular o volume sempre que muda de canal. Esta função permite regular automaticamente o volume do canal pretendido, baixando o som quando o sinal de modulação está alto, ou aumentando o som quando o sinal de modulação está baixo. ❑ Seleccionar Altifalante → Altifalante Exter. / Altifalante do tv. Se pretender ouvir o som através de altifalantes separados, cancele o amplificador interno. N Os botões – +, M MUTE não funcionam se Seleccionar Altifalante estiver definido para Altifalante Exter.. N Se seleccionar Altifalante Exter. no menu Seleccionar Altifalante, as definições de som são limitadas. Altifalantes internos do televisor Audio Out (Optical, L / R) para o sistema de som TV / Ext. / AV / Componente / PC / HDMI TV / Ext. / AV / Componente / PC / HDMI Altifalante do televisor Saída do altifalante Saída de som Altifalante externo Silêncio Saída de som Sem sinal de vídeo Silêncio Silêncio ❑ Selecção do Som Se a função PIP estiver activada, pode ouvir o som da imagem secundária (PIP). • Principal : Ouvir o som da imagem principal. • Sub : Ouvir o som da imagem secundária. T Carregue no botão TOOLS para visualizar o menu Ferramentas. Também pode definir o som da imagem secundária seleccionando Ferramentas → PIP → Selecção do Som. N Pode seleccionar esta opção se PIP estiver definido para Lig.. ❑ Reposição de som „ Repor tudo / Repor modo de som / Cancelar : Pode repor as predefinições de Som. Seleccionar o modo de som Quando define para Dual l ll, o modo de som actual é apresentado no ecrã. Tipo de transmissão Indicação no ecrã Estéreo NICAM Transmissão normal (Som standard) Mono (Utilização normal) Normal + Mono NICAM NICAM Mono (Normal) Estéreo NICAM NICAM Estéreo Mono (Normal) NICAM Dual-I/II NICAM Dual-1 NICAM Dual-2 Mono (Normal) Estéreo A2 Transmissão normal (Som standard) Mono (Normal use) Bilingue ou DUAL-I/II Dual I Dual II Estéreo Estéreo Mono (Mono forçado) N Se o sinal de estéreo for fraco e ocorrer uma mudança automática, mude para o modo mono. N Esta função só está activa no sinal de som estéreo. Está desactivada no sinal de som mono. N Esta função só está disponível no modo TV. T Carregue no botão TOOLS para visualizar o menu Ferramentas. É também possível seleccionar o modo de som a partir de Ferramentas → Dual l ll Seleccionar Altifalante : Altifalante do tv. Seleção do Som : Principal Reposição de som ► som BN68-02333J-POR.indb 21 10/20/2009 4:41:10 PMPortuguês - 22 Descrição das funções Definir a hora ❑ Relógio Tem de acertar o relógio para poder utilizar todas as funções de temporizador do televisor. N A hora actual é apresentada sempre que carregar no botão INFO. N Se desligar o cabo de alimentação, terá de acertar novamente o relógio. „ Modo Relógio Pode definir a hora actual de forma manual ou automática. • Auto. : Defina automaticamente a hora actual, utilizando a hora da transmissão digital. • Manual : Defina manualmente a hora actual para uma hora específica. „ Ajuste o Relógio Pode definir manualmente a hora actual. N Configure este item quando definir Modo Relógio para Manual. N Pode acertar directamente o Dia, o Mês, o Ano, a Hora, o Minuto carregando nos botões numéricos do telecomando. ❑ Temporizador → Deslig. / 30 min / 60 min / 90 min / 120 min / 150 min / 180 min O temporizador desliga automaticamente o televisor após um período de tempo predefinido (30, 60, 90, 120, 150 e 180 minutos). N O televisor passa automaticamente para o modo de espera quando o temporizador atinge o 0. N Para cancelar a função Temporizador, seleccione Deslig.. T Carregue no botão TOOLS para ver o menu Ferramentas. Também pode definir o temporizador seleccionando Ferramentas → Temporizador. ❑ Temporizador 1 / Temporizador 2 / Temporizador 3 Pode definir o televisor para ligar ou desligar à hora pretendida. • Ligar à hora definida : Define a hora para ligar o televisor. • Desligar à hora definida : Define a hora para desligar o televisor. • Volume : Selecciona o nível de volume. • Fonte : Selecciona o dispositivo TV, USB. N Se seleccionar o TV, pode definir as opções Antena e Canal. - Antena : Selecciona Antena ou Cabo. - Canal : Selecciona o canal pretendido. N Ao seleccionar USB, pode definir os Conteúdos. - Conteúdos : Selecciona os conteúdos pretendidos no USB. N Se não existirem ficheiros de música no USB ou se a pasta que contém um ficheiro de música não estiver seleccionada, a função Temporizador não funciona correctamente. • Repetir : Seleccione, Uma vez, Diariamente, Seg~Sex, Seg~Sáb, Sáb~Dom ou Manual. N Quando Manual está seleccionado, carregue no botão ► para seleccionar o dia da semana pretendido. Carregue no botão ENTERE sobre o dia pretendido e aparece a marca c. N A pasta do dispositivo USB suporta 64 caracteres (inglês). N Deve acertar o relógio primeiro. N Pode acertar as horas, os minutos e definir o canal carregando nos botões numéricos do telecomando. N Desligar automático Quando definir o temporizador para Lig., o televisoracabará por se desligar se não carregar em nenhum comando durante 3 horasdepois de o temporizador ter ligado o televisor. Esta função só está disponível nomodo Lig. do temporizador e permite evitar sobreaquecimentos, que podem ocorrer se o televisor permanecer ligado durante muito tempo. Tempo Relógio : -- : -- ► Temporizador : Deslig. Temporizador 1 : Desactivado Temporizador 2 : Desactivado Temporizador 3 : Desactivado U Mover E Enter R Voltar Configurar Plug & Play Idioma do menu : Português Tempo ► Transmissão Segurança Rede Geral BN68-02333J-POR.indb 22 10/20/2009 4:41:10 PMPortuguês - 23 Definir o menu Configurar ❑ Idioma do menu Pode definir o idioma do menu. ❑ Transmissão „ Legenda Pode activar e desactivar as legendas. Utilize este menu para definir o modo Legenda. Normal, escrito por baixo do menu, refere-se às legendas normais, e Surdos inclui legendas para pessoas com deficiências auditivas. • Legenda → Deslig. / Lig. : Desactiva ou activa as legendas. • Modo → Normal / Surdos : Define o modo Legenda. • Idioma das legendas : Define o idioma da legenda. O Se o programa que estiver a ver não suportar a função Surdos, a opção Normal é automaticamente activada, mesmo que o modo Surdos esteja seleccionado. O O inglês é a predefinição para os casos em que o idioma seleccionado não esteja disponível na transmissão. O Para seleccionar estas opções basta carregar no botão SUBT. do telecomando. „ Texto digital → Desactivar / Activar Se o programa for transmitido com texto digital,esta função é activada. N MHEG (Multimedia and Hypermedia Information Coding Experts Group) Uma norma internacional de sistemas de codificação de dados utilizados em multimédia e hipermédia. Funciona a um nível mais elevado do que o sistema MPEG, incluindo hipermédia de ligação de dados, como imagens fixas, serviço de caracteres, animação, gráficos e ficheiros de vídeo, bem como dados multimédia. MHEG é uma tecnologia de interacção com o utilizador em tempo de execução e está a ser aplicada a diversos campos, incluindo VOD (Video-On-Demand), ITV (Interactive TV), EC (Electronic Commerce), tele-educação, teleconferência, bibliotecas digitais e jogos em rede. „ Idioma do teletexto Pode definir o idioma do teletexto seleccionando o tipo de idioma. N O inglês é a predefinição para os casos em que o idioma seleccionado não esteja disponível na transmissão. „ Preferência • Idioma principal / Idioma secundário / Idioma princ. Legendas / Idioma secund. Legendas / Idioma principal do teletexto / Idioma secund. Teletexto Através desta função, os utilizadores podem seleccionar um dos idiomas. O idioma seleccionado aqui é o predefinido para quando o utilizador selecciona um canal. Se alterar a definição do idioma, as opções Idioma das legendas, o Idioma de áudio e o Idioma do teletexto do menu Idioma mudam automaticamente para o idioma seleccionado. As opções Idioma das legendas, Idioma de áudio e Idioma do teletexto do menu Idioma apresentam uma lista de idiomas suportados pelo canal actual e a selecção é realçada. Se alterar esta definição de idioma, a nova selecção só é válida para o canal actual. A definição alterada não muda a definição das opções Idioma princ. Legendas, Idioma principal nem Idioma principal do teletexto no menu Preferência. „ Interface comum • Colocar o CI(CI+) CARD 1. Adquira o módulo CAM de CI(CI+) no revendedor mais próximo ou por telefone. 2. Introduza o CI(CI+) CARD no CAM na direcção da seta até ficar encaixado. 3. Introduza o CAM, com o CI(CI+) CARD colocado, na ranhura da interface comum. N Introduza completamente o CAM na direcção da seta, de modo a ficar paralelo à ranhura. 4. Verifique se consegue ver uma imagem num canal de sinal codificado. • Menu CI(CI+) Permite ao utilizador seleccionar a partir do menu fornecido pelo CAM. Seleccione o Menu CI(CI+) com base na placa PC. • Informação sobre aplicações Contém informações sobre o CAM introduzido na ranhura CI(CI+) e apresenta-as no ecrã. Os dados apresentados neste menu referem-se ao CI(CI+) CARD. Pode instalar o CAM a qualquer altura, independentemente de o televisor estar ligado ou desligado. N Uma vez que o "CI(CI+) CARD" não é suportado nalguns países, regiões, estações emissoras, verifique esta situação junto do seu revendedor autorizado. Continua... Configurar Plug & Play Idioma do menu : Português ► Tempo Transmissão Segurança Rede Geral BN68-02333J-POR.indb 23 10/20/2009 4:41:11 PMPortuguês - 24 ❑ Segurança N Alguns modelos requerem que o número PIN definido seja seleccionado quando estiver a funcionar o Plug & Play. „ Bloq. crianças → Deslig. / Lig. Esta função impede que utilizadores não autorizados, como crianças, vejam programas não apropriados, cortando a imagem e o áudio. N Antes de a janela de configuração ser apresentada, surge o ecrã para a introdução do número PIN. Introduza o número PIN de 4 dígitos. N O número PIN predefinido de um televisor novo é ‘0-0-0-0’. Pode alterar o PIN seleccionando a opção Alterar PIN do menu. N Pode bloquear canais da lista de canais. (Consulte a página 14) N A opção Bloq. crianças só está disponível no modo TV. „ Bloqueio para crianças Esta função permite evitar que utilizadores não autorizados como, por exemplo, crianças, assistam a programas inadequados, através de um código PIN (Número de identificação pessoal) de 4 dígitos definido pelo utilizador. N A Classificação do bloqueio muda consoante o país. N Antes de a janela de configuração ser apresentada, surge o ecrã para a introdução do número PIN. Introduza o número PIN de 4 dígitos. N O número PIN predefinido de um televisor novo é ‘0-0-0-0’. Pode alterar o PIN seleccionando a opção Alterar PIN do menu. N Quando as classificações de bloqueio estão definidas, o símbolo “\” é apresentado. N Perm. Tudo / Bloq. Tudo : Carregue nesta opção para desbloquear ou bloquear todas as classificações do televisor. „ Alterar PIN Pode alterar o seu número de identificação pessoal, necessário para configurar o televisor. N Antes de a janela de configuração ser apresentada, surge o ecrã para a introdução do número PIN. Introduza o número PIN de 4 dígitos. (O número PIN predefinido : ‘0-0-0-0’) N Caso se esqueça do código PIN, carregue nos botões do telecomando pela seguinte sequência, para repor o PIN para ‘0-0-0-0’: POWER (Desligar), MMUTE, 8, 2, 4, POWER (Ligar). ❑ Geral „ Modo Jogo → Deslig. / Lig. Quando ligar uma consola de jogos, como a PlayStation TM ou Xbox TM , pode desfrutar de uma experiência de jogo mais realista seleccionando o menu Jogos. • Se o Modo Jogo estiver definido para Lig. - O modo Imagem muda automaticamente para Standard e não pode ser alterado. - O modo Som muda automaticamente para Personal. e não pode ser alterado. Regule o som utilizando o equalizador. - A opção Reiniciar do menu Som é activada. A função Reiniciar repõe os valores predefinidos do Equalizador. N O Modo Jogo não está disponível no modo TV normal ou está definido para Deslig.. N Se, depois de ligar o dispositivo externo ao televisor, a imagem não estiver em condições, verifique se Modo Jogo está definido para Lig.. N Se visualizar o menu TV durante o Modo Jogo, o ecrã treme ligeiramente. N A marca aparece no ecrã, o que significa que o Modo Jogo está activado na fonte seleccionada. N Esta função só suporta a função Jogos. N O Modo Jogo não está disponível no modo PC. „ BD Wise → Deslig. / Lig. A função Wise permite-lhe definir automaticamente a qualidade ideal para todos os dispositivos Samsung que suportam BD Wise. N Esta função só está activa quando ligar um dispositivo externo ao televisor através de um cabo HDMI. N Se a função BD Wise estiver definida para Lig., o modo imagem é automaticamente modificado de acordo com as condições. „ Poupança energ. → Deslig. / Baixo / Médio / Alto / Imagem Desligada Esta função regula o brilho do televisor para reduzir o consumo de energia. Quando estiver a ver televisão à noite, defina o modo Poupança energ., de forma a reduzir a fadiga ocular, bem como o consumo de energia. Se seleccionar Imagem Desligada, o ecrã desliga-se e apenas conseguirá ouvir o som. Carregue em qualquer botão para sair da função Imagem Desligada. N No menu Ferramentas, a função Imagem Desligada não é suportada. BN68-02333J-POR.indb 24 10/20/2009 4:41:11 PMPortuguês - 25 T Carregue no botão TOOLS para ver o menu Ferramentas. Também pode definir a opção Poupança energ. seleccionando Ferramentas → Poupança energ.. „ Transparência de menu Pode definir a transparência do menu no ecrã. • Brilhante : Define o menu no ecrã para a visualização normal. • Escuro : Muda o menu no ecrã para uma visualização opaca. „ Melodia → Deslig. / Baixo / Médio / Alto Pode regular a melodia que acompanha o ligar / desligar do televisor. N A melodia não é reproduzida - Quando o televisor não emite som porque alguém carregou no botão M MUTE. - Quando o televisor não emite som porque alguém carregou no botão – (Volume). - Quando o televisor é desligado pela função Temporizador. „ Efeito de luz (apenas PS58B680/PS63B680) Dependendo da situação, pode acender/apagar o LED azul existente na parte da frente do televisor. Utilize esta opção para poupar energia ou se o LED fizer reflexo. • Deslig. : O LED azul está sempre apagado. • Modo Standby lig : O LED azul acende-se no modo de espera e apaga-se quando liga o televisor. • Modo visual. lig : O LED azul acende-se quando está a ver televisão e apaga-se quando desliga o televisor. • Sempre : O LED azul está sempre aceso. N Para reduzir o consumo de energia, defina o Efeito de luz para Deslig.. Ver a imagem numa imagem (PIP) Pode visualizar uma imagem secundária dentro da imagem principal do programa definido ou entrada de vídeo. Desta forma, pode ver a imagem do programa definido ou entrada de vídeo, a partir de qualquer equipamento ligado, enquanto vê a imagem principal. N A imagem na janela PIP pode ficar pouco natural se utilizar o ecrã principal para ver um jogo ou um programa de karaoke. T Carregue no botão TOOLS para visualizar o menu Ferramentas. Também pode configurar as definições relacionadas com a opção PIP seleccionando Ferramentas → PIP. ❑ PIP → Deslig. / Lig. Pode activar ou desactivar a função PIP. Imagem principal Imagem secundária Componente HDMI 1, HDMI2/DVI, HDMI 3, HDMI 4 PC TV „ Tamanho → / / / Pode seleccionar o tamanho da imagem secundária. N Se a imagem principal estiver no modo HDMI, a opção Tamanho está disponível. „ Posição → / / / Pode seleccionar a posição da imagem secundária. N No modo Duplo ( , ) a opção Posição não pode ser seleccionada. „ Canal Pode seleccionar um canal da imagem secundária. PIP PIP : Deslig. ► Tamanho : Posição : Canal : ATV 1 E Enter R Voltar Geral Modo Jogo : Deslig. BD Wise : Deslig. Poupança energ. : Deslig. Transparência de menu : Brilhante Melodia : Médio PIP ► U Mover E Enter R Voltar BN68-02333J-POR.indb 25 10/20/2009 4:41:11 PMPortuguês - 26 Programa suportado ❑ Aviso legal Pode consultar o aviso legal e a exoneração de responsabilidade, no que respeita aos conteúdos e serviços de terceiros. „ Exoneração de responsabilidade Este é um aviso legal pormenorizado, relativamente à aplicação Internet@TV. N O conteúdo da Exoneração de responsabilidade pode variar consoante o país. N Pode ir para a página anterior ou seguinte, utilizando os botões ◄ ou ►. ❑ Guia de produto A opção Guia de produto fornece informações sobre as funções mais importantes deste televisor. N Para obter mais informações, seleccione o item pretendido. ❑ Auto-diagnóstico „ Teste de imagem Se achar que tem problemas de imagem, execute o teste de imagem. Verifique o padrão de cores no ecrã para ver se o problema persiste. N A mensagem : O problema da fotografia persiste? aparece no ecrã. Se o padrão de teste não aparecer ou se houver ruído no mesmo, seleccione Sim. Se o padrão de teste aparecer correctamente, seleccione Não. • Sim : Pode haver um problema com o televisor. Contacte o Centro de atendimento da Samsung para obter assistência. • Não : Pode haver um problema com o equipamento externo. Verifique as suas ligações. Se o problema persistir, consulte o manual de utilizador dos dispositivos externos. „ Teste de som Se achar que tem problemas de som, execute o teste de som. Pode verificar o som ao reproduzir uma melodia incluída através do televisor. N A mensagem : O problema de teste de som persiste? aparece no ecrã. Se durante o teste de som, conseguir ouvir apenas som de um dos altifalantes, ou se não conseguir ouvir nada, seleccione Sim. Se conseguir ouvir som dos altifalantes, seleccione Não. • Sim : Pode haver um problema com o televisor. Contacte o Centro de atendimento da Samsung para obter assistência. • Não : Pode haver um problema com o equipamento externo. Verifique as suas ligações. Se o problema persistir, consulte o manual de utilizador dos dispositivos externos. N Se não ouvir som dos altifalantes do televisor, antes de executar o teste de som, certifique-se de que Seleccionar altifalante está definido para Altifalante do tv. no menu de Som. N A melodia é ouvida durante o teste, mesmo que Seleccionar altifalante esteja definido para Altifalante externo, ou se estiver sem som por ter carregado no botão M MUTE. „ Informações sobre o sinal (Apenas canais digitais) Pode ajustar a antena para melhorar a recepção dos canais digitais disponíveis. N Se o medidor da intensidade do sinal indicar que o sinal é fraco, ajuste manualmente a sua antena para aumentar a intensidade do mesmo. Continue a ajustar a antena até encontrar a melhor posição com o sinal mais forte. Assistência / Entrada BN68-02333J-POR.indb 26 10/20/2009 4:41:12 PMPortuguês - 27 Lista de fontes / Editar nome ❑ Lista de fontes Utilize esta opção para seleccionar o televisor ou outras fontes de entrada externas, como leitores de DVD ou caixa de televisão por cabo / receptores de satélite (Set-Top Box) ligados ao televisor. Utilize esta opção para seleccionar a sua fonte de entrada preferida. „ TV, Ext.1, Ext.2, AV, Componente, PC, HDMI1, HDMI2/DVI, HDMI3, HDMI4, USB. N Só pode escolher os dispositivos externos que estão ligados ao televisor. Em Lista de fontes, as entradas ligadas são realçadas e ordenadas no topo. As entradas que não estejam ligadas serão ordenadas na parte inferior. N Utilizar os botões coloridos do telecomando com a lista de fontes. - Vermelho (Actualizar) : Actualiza os dispositivos externos ligados. - T TOOLS (Ferramentas) : Mostra os menus Editar nome e Informação. O Carregue no botão SOURCE do telecomando para ver uma fonte de sinal externo. ❑ Editar nome Pode atribuir um nome ao dispositivo ligado às tomadas de entrada para facilitar a selecção da fonte de entrada. „ VCR / DVD / STB Cabo / Satélite STB / STB PVR / Receptor AV / Jogos / Câmara de Vídeo / PC / DVI / DVI PC / TV / IPTV / Blu-ray / HD DVD / DMA N Se houver um PC com uma resolução de 1920 x 1080 a 60 Hz ligado à porta HDMI IN 2(DVI), defina o modo HDMI2/DVI para PC na opção Editar nome do modo Entrada. ❑ Actualização do software Para manter o produto actualizado com novas funções da televisão digital, são transmitidas periodicamente actualizações de software como parte do sinal de televisão normal. O televisor detecta automaticamente estes sinais e apresenta a faixa de actualização do software. Tem a opção de instalar ou não a actualização. „ Por USB Introduza no televisor a unidade USB que contém a actualização do firmware. Tenha cuidado para não desligar a corrente ou retirar a unidade USB enquanto as actualizações estiverem a ser executadas. O televisor desliga-se e volta a ligar-se automaticamente após terminar a actualização do firmware. Verifique a versão de firmware depois de concluídas as actualizações. Quando o software é actualizado, as definições de áudio e de vídeo que fez voltam às predefinições (de fábrica). „ Por um canal Actualiza o software através do sinal de transmissão. N Se a função for seleccionada durante o período de transmissão do software, esta função procura por software disponível e transfere-o. N O tempo necessário para transferir o software é determinado pelo estado do sinal. „ Actual. no Modo de Espera Para continuar a actualizar o software com o interruptor de corrente principal ligado, seleccione Lig. carregando no botão ▲ ou ▼. 45 minutos depois de entrar no modo de espera, uma actualização manual é iniciada automaticamente. Dado que o aparelho está ligado internamente, o ecrã pode ficar aceso durante algum tempo. Este fenómeno pode persistir durante mais de 1 hora até a actualização do software ficar concluída. „ Software Alternativo Substitui o software actual com o alternativo. N Se o software foi alterado, é apresentado o software existente. N Pode alterar o software actual para alternativo através do Software Alternativo. ❑ Guia de ligação HD É apresentada uma breve descrição de como obter o melhor desempenho do novo televisor HD. Mostramos o método de ligação para dispositivos HD. N Pode passar para a página anterior ou para a página seguinte carregando no botão ◄ ou ►. ❑ Contactar a Samsung Pode contactar o centro de atendimento e consultar o website da Samsung para obter Painel lateral do televisor Unidade USB Lista de fontes Editar nome Input BN68-02333J-POR.indb 27 10/20/2009 4:41:12 PMPortuguês - 28 Rede Ligação à rede A ligação à rede destina-se a DLNA, transferências da Internet para as aplicações Contents Library, Internet@TV e Centro rede domést. ❑ Ligação à rede - Cabo „ Ligação por cabo para um ambiente DHCP Seguem-se os procedimentos necessários para configurar a rede utilizando o protocolo de configuração dinâmica de anfitrião Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP). Uma vez que o endereço IP, máscara de sub-rede, gateway e DNS são automaticamente atribuídos quando o DHCP é seleccionado, não é necessário introduzi-los manualmente. 1. Ligue a porta LAN no painel traseiro do televisor ao modem externo com um cabo LAN. 2. Ligue a porta LAN na parede ao modem externo com um cabo de modem. N Os terminais (a posição da porta e o tipo) do dispositivo externo podem variar consoante o fabricante. N Se a atribuição do endereço IP pelo servidor DHCP falhar, desligue o modem externo, volte a ligá-lo após, no mínimo, 10 segundos e, em seguida, tente novamente. N Para saber qual a ligação entre o modem externo e o router, consulte o manual do utilizador do produto correspondente. N Pode ligar o televisor directamente à LAN sem utilizar um router. N Não pode utilizar um modem ADSL de ligação manual, porque este não suporta DHCP. Tem de utilizar um modem ADSL de ligação automática. Painel posterior do televisor Porta do modem na parede 2 Cabo do modem Modem externo (ADSL/VDSL/TV por cabo) 1 Cabo LAN Dependendo do estado da rede, pode ligar a porta LAN directamente ao televisor. Painel posterior do televisor Cabo LAN Porta do LAN na parede Pode ligar a LAN através de um router. Painel posterior do televisor Porta do modem na parede Modem externo (ADSL/VDSL/TV por cabo) Router IP Cabo LAN Cabo do modem Cabo LAN BN68-02333J-POR.indb 28 10/20/2009 4:41:15 PMPortuguês - 29 „ Ligação LAN para um ambiente de IP estático Seguem-se os procedimentos necessários para configurar a rede utilizando um endereço IP estático. Tem de introduzir manualmente o endereço IP, máscara de sub-rede, gateway e DNS fornecidos pelo seu fornecedor de serviços de Internet (ISP - Internet Service Provider). 1. Ligue a porta LAN no painel traseiro do televisor à porta LAN na parede utilizando o cabo LAN. N Os terminais (a posição da porta e o tipo) do dispositivo externo podem variar consoante o fabricante. N Se estiver a utilizar um endereço IP estático, o seu ISP informá-lo-á sobre o endereço IP, máscara de sub-rede, gateway e DNS. Tem de introduzir estes valores para poder concluir as definições de rede. Se não souber os valores, pergunte ao seu administrador de rede. N Para obter informações sobre a configuração e ligação de um router, consulte o manual do utilizador do produto correspondente. N Pode ligar o televisor directamente à LAN sem utilizar um router. N Se utilizar um router IP que suporte DHCP, pode configurar o dispositivo como DHCP ou IP estático. N Para saber quais os procedimentos necessários para utilizar um endereço IP estático, contacte o seu fornecedor de serviços de Internet. ❑ Ligação à rede - Sem fios Pode estabelecer a ligação à rede sem fios através de um router IP sem fios. 1. Ligue o ‘Adaptador de LAN sem fios da Samsung’ ao terminal USB1(HDD) ou USB2 do televisor. N Tem de utilizar o ‘Adaptador de LAN sem fios da Samsung’ para poder utilizar uma rede sem fios. N O adaptador de LAN sem fios da Samsung é vendido separadamente. O adaptador de LAN sem fios WIS09ABGN da Samsung é disponibilizado por revendedores seleccionados, sites de e-commerce e no site Samsungparts.com. N Para utilizar uma rede sem fios, o seu televisor deve estar ligado a um router IP sem fios. N Se o router IP sem fios suportar DHCP, o seu televisor pode utilizar DHCP ou um endereço IP estático para estabelecer a ligação à rede sem fios. N O adaptador de LAN sem fios da Samsung suporta as normas IEEE 802.11A, IEEE 802.11B, IEEE 802.11G, IEEE 802.11N. Se reproduzir um vídeo DLNA com uma ligação IEEE 802.11B/G, o vídeo pode não ser reproduzido normalmente. PAGE 151 N Se o router IP sem fios permitir activar/desactivar a função de ligação Ping, active-a. N Seleccione um canal para o router IP sem fios que não esteja a ser utilizado actualmente. Se o canal definido para o router IP sem fios estiver a ser utilizado actualmente por outro dispositivo próximo, podem verificar-se interferências e as comunicações podem falhar. Continua... Painel posterior do televisor 1 Cabo LAN Porta do LAN na parede Painel posterior do televisor Cabo LAN Router IP Cabo LAN Porta do LAN na parede Pode ligar a LAN através de um router. Painel lateral do televisor Adaptador de LAN sem fios da Samsung Cabo LAN Router IP sem fios Porta do LAN na parede BN68-02333J-POR.indb 29 10/20/2009 4:41:18 PMPortuguês - 30 N Se aplicar um sistema de segurança diferente dos sistemas listados abaixo, este não funciona com o televisor. - Quando aplicar a chave de segurança ao AP (router IP sem fios), só são disponibilizadas as seguintes opções. 1) Modo de autenticação : OPEN, SHARED, WPAPSK, WPA2PSK 2) Tipo de codificação : WEP, TKIP, AES - Quando aplicar a chave de segurança ao modo Ad-hoc, só são disponibilizadas as seguintes opções. 1) Modo de autenticação : SHARED, WPANONE 2) Tipo de codificação: WEP, TKIP, AES N Se o seu AP suportar WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup - Configuração Wi-Fi protegida), pode estabelecer a ligação à rede através de PBC (Push Button Configuration) ou PIN (Personal Indentification Number - Número de identificação pessoal). O WPS configura automaticamente a chave SSID e WPA em qualquer um dos modos. N Se o dispositivo não estiver certificado, não pode estabelecer a ligação ao televisor através do ‘adaptador de LAN sem fios da Samsung’. Configurar rede ❑ Tipo de rede Seleccione Cabo ou Sem fios como método de ligação à rede. N O menu só é activado se tiver ligado um ‘Adaptador de LAN sem fios da Samsung’. • Cabo : Estabelece a ligação à rede utilizando um cabo. • Sem fios : Estabelece a ligação à rede sem fios. ❑ Configurar Rede „ Configurar cabo de rede (se Tipo de rede estiver definido para Cabo) N Verifique se o cabo LAN está ligado. • Config. Protoc. Internet → Auto. / Manual • Teste de rede : Pode testar ou confirmar o estado da ligação à rede depois de configurar a mesma. N Se não conseguir estabelecer a ligação a uma rede com fios Se o seu fornecedor de serviços de Internet tiver registado o endereço MAC do dispositivo utilizado para estabelecer a ligação à Internet pela primeira vez e autenticar o endereço MAC sempre que estabelecer a ligação à Internet, o seu televisor pode não conseguir estabelecer a ligação à Internet, pois o endereço MAC é diferente do endereço MAC do dispositivo (PC). Neste caso, contacte o seu fornecedor de serviços de Internet para saber quais os procedimentos necessários para ligar outros dispositivos diferentes do seu PC (como o seu televisor) à Internet. Se o seu fornecedor de serviços de Internet solicitar uma ID ou uma palavra-passe para estabelecer a ligação à Internet (rede), o seu televisor pode não conseguir estabelecer a ligação à Internet. Neste caso, tem de introduzir a sua ID ou palavra-passe quando estabelecer a ligação à Internet utilizando um router de Internet. A ligação à Internet pode falhar, devido a um problema na firewall. Neste caso, contacte o seu fornecedor de serviços de Internet. Se não conseguir estabelecer a ligação à Internet, mesmo que tenha seguido os procedimentos indicados pelo seu fornecedor de serviços de Internet, contacte a Samsung Electronics através. „ Configurar cabo de rede - Auto. Se ligar o cabo LAN e este suportar DHCP, as definições do protocolo de Internet (IP - Internet Protocol) são automaticamente configuradas. 1. Defina Tipo de rede para Cabo. 2. Seleccione Configurar cabo de rede. 3. Defina Config. Protoc. Internet para Auto.. N O protocolo de Internet é definido automaticamente. 4. Seleccione Teste de rede para verificar a conectividade da rede. „ Configurar cabo de rede - Manual Para ligar o televisor à LAN utilizando um endereço IP estático, deve configurar o protocolo de Internet (IP - Internet Protocol). N Verifique se o cabo LAN está ligado. (Consulte a página 28) 1. Defina Tipo de rede para Cabo. 2. Seleccione Rede por cabo. 3. Defina Config. Protoc. Internet para Manual. 4. Configure Endereço IP, Máscara de sub-rede, Gateway e Servidor DNS. N Carregue nos botões numéricos do telecomando para definir a rede manualmente. 5. Seleccione Teste de rede para verificar a conectividade da rede. Configurar Transmissão Segurança Rede ► Geral Continua... BN68-02333J-POR.indb 30 10/20/2009 4:41:19 PMPortuguês - 31 „ Config. rede sem fios (quando Tipo de rede for definido para Sem fios) N O menu só é activado se tiver ligado um ‘Adaptador de LAN sem fios da Samsung’. (Consulte a página 29) - Config. Protoc. Internet → Auto. / Manual - Teste de rede : Pode testar ou confirmar o estado da ligação à rede depois de configurar a mesma. N Se não conseguir estabelecer a ligação a um AP O seu televisor pode não conseguir localizar um AP que esteja configurado como tipo SSID privado. Neste caso, altere as definições do AP e volte a tentar. Se o seu fornecedor de serviços de Internet tiver registado o endereço MAC do dispositivo utilizado para estabelecer a ligação à Internet pela primeira vez e autenticar o endereço MAC sempre que estabelecer a ligação à Internet, o seu televisor pode não conseguir estabelecer a ligação à Internet, pois o endereço MAC é diferente do endereço MAC do dispositivo (PC). Neste caso, contacte o seu fornecedor de serviços de Internet para saber quais os procedimentos necessários para ligar outros dispositivos diferentes do seu PC (como o seu televisor) à Internet. Se não conseguir estabelecer a ligação à Internet, mesmo que tenha seguido os procedimentos indicados pelo seu fornecedor de serviços de Internet, contacte a Samsung Electronics através. • Seleccionar uma rede - Ponto de Acesso : Pode seleccionar o router IP que pretende utilizar com uma rede sem fios. N Se um ponto de acesso sem fios não aparecer na lista Seleccionar uma rede, carregue no botão vermelho. N Quando a ligação for estabelecida, será automaticamente redireccionado para o ecrã. N Se tiver seleccionado um Ponto de acesso com uma autenticação de segurança : é apresentado o ecrã para a introdução da chave de segurança. Introduza a chave de segurança e carregue no botão azul do telecomando. N Se o tipo de codificação de segurança for WEP, 0~9, A~F ficam disponíveis quando introduz a chave de segurança. Botão Operações ▲/▼/◄/► Desloca a selecção para cima/para baixo/para a esquerda/para a direita. ENTER Introduz o carácter seleccionado. Botão vermelho Alterna entre letras maiúsculas e minúsculas Botão verde Pode eliminar um carácter introduzido anteriormente. Botão azul Carregue neste botão para concluir a introdução da chave de segurança. ❑ Ligar WPS (Configuração Wi-Fi protegida) „ Se a Chave de segurança já estiver definida : Na lista de pontos de acesso, seleccione WPS. N Pode seleccionar PBC, PIN, Chave segurana. • Estabelecer a ligação utilizando a opção PBC : Seleccione um PBC (Push Button Configuration). Carregue no botão PBC do AP (Access point - Ponto de acesso) no espaço de 2 minutos e espere que a ligação seja estabelecida. • Estabelecer a ligação utilizando a opção PIN : Seleccione um PIN (Personal Identification Number - Número de identificação pessoal). N É apresentada a mensagem com o código PIN. Introduza o código PIN no dispositivo AP dentro de 2 minutos. Seleccione OK e aguarde pela ligação. N Tente novamente se a ligação não funcionar. N Se não conseguir estabelecer a ligação, mesmo depois de ter tentado uma segunda vez, reinicie o ponto de acesso. Consulte o manual de cada ponto de acesso. • Estabelecer a ligação utilizando a opção Chave de segurança : Se seleccionar Chave de segurança, a janela de introdução é apresentada. Introduza a chave de segurança e carregue no botão azul. N Tente novamente se a ligação não funcionar Config. rede sem fios Chave segur. n Mover Número EEnter R Voltar _ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 0~9 Número Minúsc. Apagar Conc. * * Config. rede sem fios Seleccionar uma rede n Mover EEnter R Voltar Pesquisa Ad-Hoc AP_1 AP_2 AP_3 AP_4 PBC PIN Chave segur. 3/9 Prima o botão PBC no ponto de acesso. Nome do Ponto de Acesso : AP_3 Cancelar Prima OK depois de introduzir o código de TV enquanto estiver a configurar o ponto de acesso. Nome do Ponto de Acesso : AP_3 Número PIN : 123 45678 OK Cancelar Config. rede sem fios Chave segur. n Mover Número EEnter R Voltar _ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 0~9 Número Minúsc. Apagar Conc. BN68-02333J-POR.indb 31 10/20/2009 4:41:21 PMPortuguês - 32 „ Se a Chave de segurança não estiver definida : Se o AP que suporta WPS não tiver uma definição de segurança, pode seleccionar PBC, PIN, Sem segurança. A opção Sem segurança permite estabelecer a ligação ao AP directamente sem utilizar a função WPC. N O procedimento para o PBC e para o PIN é igual ao descrito acima. Consulte-o se a Chave de segurança já estiver definida. N Tente novamente se a ligação não funcionar „ Ad-hoc : Pode estabelecer a ligação a um dispositivo móvel sem um ponto de acesso através de uma chave anticópia USB sem fios utilizando uma rede ponto a ponto. • Como estabelecer a ligação a uma nova rede Ad-hoc 1. Escolha Seleccionar uma rede e, em seguida, é apresentada uma lista de dispositivos. 2. Na lista de dispositivos, carregue no botão azul do telecomando ou seleccione Ad-hoc. N A mensagem O sistema de rede existente pode ter uma funcionalidade limitada. Quer alterar a ligação de rede? é apresentada. 3. Introduza o Nome de Rede (SSID) e a Chave de segurança gerados no dispositivo com o qual pretende estabelecer a ligação. • Como estabelecer a ligação a um dispositivo Ad-hoc existente 1. Escolha Seleccionar uma rede, é apresentada a lista de dispositivos. 2. Seleccione o dispositivo pretendido da lista de dispositivos. 3. Se a chave de segurança tiver sido aplicada, volte a introduzi-la. N Se a rede não funcionar normalmente, confirme novamente o Nome de Rede (SSID) e a Chave de segurança. se a Chave de segurança estiver incorrecta, pode ser essa a razão do mau funcionamento. „ Config. rede sem fios. - Auto. Se quiser estabelecer a ligação ao AP, este deve suportar DHCP. Só os dispositivos que suportem o modo Ad-hoc podem ser ligados sem DHCP. 1. Defina Tipo de rede para Sem fios. 2. Seleccione Config. rede sem fios. 3. Defina Config. Protoc. Internet para Auto. N O protocolo de Internet é definido automaticamente. 4. Seleccione uma rede através da opção Seleccionar uma rede. 5. Seleccione Teste de rede para verificar a conectividade da rede. „ Config. rede sem fios. - Manual Para ligar a rede sem fios utilizando um endereço IP estático, tem de configurar o protocolo de Internet (IP). (Consulte a página 29) N Para obter informações detalhadas sobre o endereço IP estático, consulte o manual do utilizador do seu router IP sem fios. 1. Defina Tipo de rede para Sem fios. 2. Seleccione Config. rede sem fios. 3. Defina Config. Protoc. Internet para Manual. 4. Defina Endereço IP, Máscara de sub-rede, Gateway e Servidor DNS. N Carregue nos botões numéricos do telecomando quando definir a rede manualmente. 5. Seleccione uma rede através de Seleccionar ponto de acesso. 6. Seleccione Teste de rede para verificar a conectividade da rede. * * Config. rede sem fios Seleccionar uma rede n Mover EEnter R Voltar Pesquisa Ad-Hoc AP_1 AP_2 AP_3 AP_4 PBC PIN Chave segur. 3/9 O sistema de rede existente pode ter funcionalidade limitada. Deseja alterar a ligação de rede? sim Não BN68-02333J-POR.indb 32 10/20/2009 4:41:21 PMPortuguês - 33 Ligar um dispositivo USB 1. Carregue no botão POWER para ligar o televisor. 2. Ligue um dispositivo USB que contenha ficheiros de fotografia e de música à tomada USB existente na parte lateral do televisor. N A tomada USB 1(HDD) é também utilizada como tomada HDD. HDD (Unidade de disco rígido) é o dispositivo para o armazenamento de dados digitalmente codificados. N A função Media Play só suporta dispositivos de classe de armazenamento de massa (MSC - Mass Storage Class) USB. MSC é um dispositivo de transporte em volume de classe de armazenamento de massa. São exemplos de MSC as mini-unidades USB, leitores de cartões flash e USB HDD (os USB HUB não são suportados). N O MTP (Media Transfer Protocol - Protocolo de transferência multimédia) não é suportado. N O sistema de ficheiros só suporta FAT16/32 (o sistema de ficheiros NTFS não é suportado). N Ligue um USB HDD à porta dedicada, a porta USB1 (HDD). No entanto, se o dispositivo ligado necessitar de um nível elevado de potência, a entrada USB1 (HDD) pode não suportar o dispositivo. N Determinados tipos de câmaras digitais e dispositivos áudio USB podem não ser compatíveis com este televisor. N Ligue-os directamente à porta USB do televisor. Se estiver a utilizar uma ligação por cabo em separado, pode ocorrer um problema de compatibilidade USB. N Antes de ligar o dispositivo ao televisor, efectue uma cópia de segurança dos seus ficheiros de modo a prevenir danos ou perda de dados. A SAMSUNG não se responsabiliza por quaisquer danos ou perda de dados. N Não desligue o dispositivo USB enquanto estiver a carregar. N A MSC suporta ficheiros MP3 e JPEG, enquanto um dispositivo PTP só suporta ficheiros JPEG. N O formato sequencial JPEG é suportado. N Quanto maior for a resolução da imagem, mais tempo leva a ser apresentada no ecrã. N A resolução JPEG máxima suportada é de 15 360 x 8640 pixels. N Para ficheiros não suportados ou danificados, é apresentada a mensagem Formato de ficheiro não suportado. N Se o número de ficheiros de fotografia exceder os 4000 (ou se o número de ficheiros de música exceder os 3000), quaisquer ficheiros que excedam o limite de 4000 não podem ser apresentados na lista de fotografias (ou lista de músicas). N Os ficheiros MP3 com DRM transferidos de sites pagos não são reproduzidos. N A DRM (Digital Rights Management - Gestão de direitos digitais) impede a utilização ilegal de dados multimédia digitais, protegendo os direitos de autor. N Quando pretender ver uma fotografia, o carregamento da mesma pode levar alguns segundos. ❑ Utilizar os botões do telecomando no menu Media Play Botão Operações ▲/▼/◄/► Deslocar o cursor e seleccionar um item. ENTERE Seleccionar o item actualmente seleccionado.Reproduzir ou interromper os ficheiros durante a reprodução de uma apresentação de diapositivos ou de ficheiros de música. Reproduzir ou interromper a apresentação de diapositivos ou o ficheiro de música. RETURN Voltar ao menu anterior. TOOLS Executar várias funções dos menus Fotografia e Música. Parar a apresentação de diapositivos ou o ficheiro de música actual. Saltar para o grupo anterior/seguinte. INFO Mostrar as informações do ficheiro. MEDIA.P Entrar/sair do modo Media Play. DivX® Certified to play DivX® video, including premium content. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX,Inc. This is an official DivX Certified device that plays DivX video. Visit www.divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX video. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified® device must be registered in order to play DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) content. To generate the registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in the device setup menu. Go to vod.divx.com with this code to complete the registration process and learn more about DivX VOD. Media Play Painel lateral do televisor Unidade USB BN68-02333J-POR.indb 33 10/20/2009 4:41:22 PMPortuguês - 34 Utilizar a função Media Play Esta função permite ver fotografias e ouvir ficheiros de música guardados num dispositivo de classe de armazenamento de massa (MSC - Mass Storage Class) USB. O equipamento pode não funcionar correctamente com ficheiros multimédia não licenciados. ❑ Aceder ao menu Media Play 1. Carregue no botão MENU. Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar Aplicação e, em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE. 2. Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar Media Play (USB & DLNA), em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE. O Carregue no botão MEDIA.P do telecomando para ver o menu Media Play. O Carregue várias vezes no botão SOURCE do telecomando para seleccionar USB ou DLNA, em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE. 3. Carregue no botão vermelho e, em seguida, no botão ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar o respectivo dispositivo de memória USB (isto é, se estiver ligado através de um hub). Carregue no botão ENTERE. O Esta função varia consoante o dispositivo de memória USB ligado ao televisor. O O nome do dispositivo USB seleccionado é apresentado no canto inferior esquerdo do ecrã. 4. Carregue no botão ◄ ou ► para seleccionar um ícone (Photo, Music, Movie, Setup) e, em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE. N Para sair do modo Media Play, carregue no botão MEDIA.P do telecomando. N A partir deste modo, tem acesso aos clips de filme de um jogo, mas não pode jogar. ❑ Retirar um dispositivo de memória USB com segurança Pode remover o dispositivo do televisor com segurança. 1. Carregue no botão TOOLS no ecrã da lista de ficheiros Media Play, ou durante a reprodução de uma apresentação de diapositivos, de ficheiros de música ou de filme. 2. Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar Remover em segurança e, em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE 3. Retire o dispositivo USB do televisor. ❑ Descrição do ecrã 1. Padrão de ordenação actual : Este campo apresenta o padrão actual para a ordenação dos ficheiros. 2. Ver grupos : O grupo de ordenação que inclui a fotografia actualmente seleccionada é realçado. 3. Ficheiro actualmente seleccionado : O ficheiro actualmente seleccionado é realçado. 4. Informações sobre a selecção de itens : Mostra o número de fotografias seleccionadas carregando no botão amarelo. 5. Dispositivo actual : Mostra o nome do dispositivo actualmente seleccionado. N Botão Vermelho (Dispos.) : Selecciona um dispositivo ligado. 6. Itens de ajuda • Botão Verde (Definições dos favoritos) : Altera as definições de Definições dos favoritos para o ficheiro seleccionado. Carregue várias vezes neste botão até os valores pretendidos serem apresentados • Botão Amarelo (Selec.) : Selecciona ficheiros da lista de ficheiros. Os ficheiros seleccionados estão marcados com o símbolo c. Carregue novamente no botão amarelo para cancelar a selecção de um ficheiro. • Botão TOOLS (Ferramentas) : Mostra os menus de opções. (O menu Ferramentas muda consoante o estado actual.) • Botão R RETURN (Voltar) : Volta ao menu anterior. Pasta Preferência Visual. básica Lin.Tem. Cor IMG_0335.JPG 4/6 IMG_0349. JPG ▶ ▶ Folder 2 1 Folder 1 1 Apres. Diap. Repr.Gr.Act. Informação Remover em segurança ../ No. pasta/ Photo USB „ Dispos. Selec. T Ferramentas R Mover para pasta superior. Media Play Photo Music Setup PHOTO USB : USB 851.98MB/995.00MB Livre Movie USB „ Dispos. RVoltar Preferência Visual. básica Lin.Tem. Cor Pasta Mar.01.2009 IMG_0343 .JPG ▶ ▶ IMG_03496 .JPG IMG_03496 .JPG Mar Apr Jun Nov IMG_0335.JPG 1/67 ▶ ▶ 2009 ◀ IMG_03496 .JPG 3 1 2 1Fic. sel. 4 5 6 Photo USB „ Dispos. Def.fav. Selec. T Ferramentas R Voltar c BN68-02333J-POR.indb 34 10/20/2009 4:41:29 PMPortuguês - 35 Ordenar a lista de fotografias / músicas / filmes „ Visual. básica Mostra as pastas no dispositivo de memória USB. Se seleccionar uma pasta e carregar no botão ENTERE, são apresentados os ficheiros correspondentes (Photo / Music / Movie) que se encontram na pasta seleccionada. N Quando ordenar de acordo com Visual. básica, não pode definir ficheiros favoritos. „ Pasta Ordena os ficheiros por pasta. Se existirem muitas pastas no USB, os ficheiros de fotografia são apresentados por ordem em cada pasta. O ficheiro na pasta de raiz é apresentado em primeiro lugar e os restantes são apresentados por ordem alfabética. „ Preferência → ★ ★ ★ , ★ ★ ★ , ★ ★ ★ , ★ ★ ★ Ordena os ficheiros por preferência (Favoritos). N Alterar as definições dos Favoritos Seleccione a fotografia pretendida na lista de ficheiros e, em seguida, carregue várias vezes no botão verde até ser apresentada a definição pretendida. N As estrelas servem apenas para agrupar os ficheiros. Por exemplo, um ficheiro com 3 estrelas não tem qualquer prioridade sobre um ficheiro com uma estrela. „ Lin.Tem. (Photo / Movie) Ordena e apresenta os títulos das músicas ou dos filmes por símbolo/número/ ordem alfabética/ordem especial. „ Título (Music / Movie) Ordena os títulos dos ficheiros de música por símbolo/número/ordem alfabética/ ordem especial e apresenta o ficheiro de música. ❑ Photo „ Cor → Vermelho / Amarelo / Verde / Azul / Magenta / Preto / Cinzento / Não classi. Ordena as fotografias por cor. Pode alterar as informações relativas à cor da fotografia. N Active Utilizar visualização a cores no menu Configurar antes de ordenar as fotografias por cor. ❑ Music „ Artista Ordena o ficheiro de música por artista, por símbolo/número/ordem alfabética/ordem especial. „ Disposição → Energético / Rítmico / Triste / Alegre / Calmo / Não classi. Ordena os ficheiros de música pela disposição. Pode alterar as informações de disposição da música. „ Género Ordena os ficheiros de música por género. Folder Preferência Visual. básica Título Artista 1 When I Dream 3/4 Carol kidd Mr A-Z 2009 Pop usermanual Heaven NPKI ▶ 1 ▶ ▶ ▶ ▶ ../ No. pasta/ Music USB „ Dispos. Selec. T Ferramentas R Mover para pasta superior ▶ ▶ Preferência Visual. básica Lin.Tem. Título Pasta Apr Apr.27.2009 Movie USB „ Dispos. Def.fav. Selec. T Ferramentas R Mover para pasta superior MOVIE_003 .avi MOVIE_000 .avi MOVIE_004 .avi MOVIE_001.avi 1/5 ▶ ▶ ◀ MOVIE_005 .avi Preferência Visual. básica Lin.Tem. Cor Pasta Mar.01.2009 IMG_0343 .JPG ▶ ▶ IMG_03496 .JPG IMG_03496 .JPG Mar Apr Jun Nov IMG_0335.JPG 1/67 ▶ ▶ 2009 ◀ IMG_03496 .JPG Photo USB „ Dispos. Def.fav. Selec. T Ferramentas R Voltar BN68-02333J-POR.indb 35 10/20/2009 4:41:35 PMPortuguês - 36 fotografias / músicas / Menu de opções da lista de filmes 1. Carregue no botão MEDIA.P. 2. Carregue no botão ◄ ou ► para seleccionar Photo, Music ou Movie e em seguida carregue no botão ENTERE. 3. Carregue no botão ◄ ou ► para seleccionar o ficheiro pretendido. N Seleccionar vários ficheiros - Carregue no botão ◄ ou ► para seleccionar o ficheiro pretendido. Em seguida, carregue no botão amarelo. - Repita a operação acima descrita para seleccionar vários ficheiros. - A marca c aparece no ficheiro seleccionado. 4. Carregue no botão TOOLS. N O menu de opções é alterado consoante o estado actual. „ Repr.Gr.Act. Neste menu, pode reproduzir uma apresentação de diapositivos utilizando apenas os ficheiros de fotografia no grupo de ordenação actualmente seleccionado. „ Anular selecção (Quando seleccionar, pelo menos, um ficheiro) Pode anular a selecção de todos os ficheiros. N A marca c indica que o ficheiro correspondente seleccionado está oculto. „ Informação A informação do ficheiro de fotografia/ música/ filme é apresentada. Pode ver as informações de ficheiros durante uma apresentação de diapositivos seguindo o mesmo procedimento. O Carregue no botão INFO para visualizar as informações. „ Remover em segurança Pode remover o dispositivo do televisor com segurança. ❑ Photo „ Apres. Diap. Neste menu, pode reproduzir uma apresentação de diapositivos utilizando os ficheiros de fotografia no dispositivo de memória USB. „ Mudar grupo (Quando a tecla de ordenação for Cor) Pode alterar as informações relativas à cor do ficheiro de fotografia seleccionado (ou grupo de ficheiros) e movê-lo de um grupo de cores para outro. N Este procedimento não altera a cor da fotografia. N As informações de grupo do ficheiro actual são actualizadas e as fotografias são movidas para o novo grupo de cores. N Para alterar as informações em vários ficheiros, seleccione os ficheiros pretendidos carregando no botão amarelo. ❑ Music „ Change Group (Quando a tecla de ordenação for Disposição) Pode alterar as informações de disposição dos ficheiros de música. As informações de grupo do ficheiro actual são actualizadas e o ficheiro é movido para o novo grupo. Para alterar as informações de vários ficheiros, seleccione os ficheiros carregando no botão amarelo. Select T Tools R Upper Folder Pasta Preferência Visual. básica Título Artista 1 1 ▶ ▶ ../ No. pasta / Sky When I Dream 3/4 Carol kidd Mr A-Z 2009 Pop NPKI usermanual Heaven ▶ NPKI Repr.Gr.Act. Informação Remover em segurança Music USB „ Dispos. Selec. T Ferramentas R Mover para pasta superior. MOVIE_004 MOVIE_003 .avi .avi MOVIE_000 .avi MOVIE_005 .avi MOVIE_007 .avi MOVIE_001.avi 1/5 MOVIE_006 .avi ▶ ▶ Preferência Visual. básica Lin.Tem. Título Pasta Apr Apr.27.2009 Movie Repr.Gr.Act. Informação Remover em segurança USB „ Dispos. Def.fav. Selec. T Ferramentas R Mover para pasta superior. Visual. básica Lin.Tem. Cor Pasta Preferência IMG_0335.JPG 4/6 IMG_0349 .JPG ▶ ▶ Folder 2 1 Folder 1 1 Apres. Diap. Repr.Gr.Act. Mudar grupo Informação Remover em segurança Photo USB „ Dispos. Def.fav. Selec. T Ferramentas R Mover para pasta superior. BN68-02333J-POR.indb 36 10/20/2009 4:41:41 PMPortuguês - 37 Menu de opções de Apresentação de diapositivos / Reprodução de música / Reprodução de filmes 1. Durante uma apresentação de diapositivos (ou enquanto visualiza uma fotografia), ou a reprodução de uma música ou filme, carregue no botão TOOLS para definir a opção. 2. Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar a opção pretendida e, em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE. „ Definição de Imagem / Definição de Imagem Pode seleccionar as definições de imagem e de som. „ Informação Aparecem as informações do ficheiro. „ Remover em segurança Pode remover o dispositivo do televisor com segurança. ❑ Menu de opções da apresentação de diapositivos „ Parar apresentação de slides / Iniciar apresentação de slides Pode iniciar ou parar uma apresentação de diapositivos. „ Vel. apr. diap. → Lenta / Normal / Rápida Pode seleccionar a velocidade da apresentação de diapositivos. N Esta função só está disponível durante uma apresentação de diapositivos. N Também pode alterar a velocidade da apresentação de diapositivos carregando no botão π (REW) ou μ (FF) durante a mesma. „ Efe. apres. diap. Pode seleccionar o efeito de transição do ecrã utilizado na apresentação de diapositivos. • Nenhum / Desvan. 1 / Desvan. 2 / Cortina / Espiral / Xadrez / Linear / Escada / Limpar / Aleatório N Esta função só está disponível durante uma apresentação de diapositivos. „ Rodar Pode rodar fotografias guardadas num dispositivo de memória USB. N Sempre que carregar no botão ◄, a fotografia roda 270˚, 180˚, 90˚ e 0˚. N Sempre que carregar no botão ►, a fotografia roda 90˚, 180˚, 270˚ e 0˚. N O ficheiro rodado não é guardado. „ zoom Pode ampliar fotografias guardadas num dispositivo de memória USB. (x1 → x2 → x4) N Para mover a fotografia ampliada, carregue no botão ENTERE e, em seguida, carregue nos botões ▲/▼/◄/►. Quando a imagem ampliada é mais pequena do que o tamanho original do ecrã, a função de alteração do local não funciona. N O ficheiro ampliado não é guardado. „ Música de fundo Pode seleccionar a música de fundo durante a visualização de uma apresentação de diapositivos. N Para utilizar esta função, devem existir ficheiros de música e fotografia guardados no dispositivo USB. N É necessário carregar ficheiros de música para alterar o modo BGM. Reproduza ficheiros de música por categoria de música a carregar. ❑ Menu de opções de reprodução de músicas „ Modo repetir → Lig. / Deslig. Pode reproduzir ficheiros de música várias vezes. ❑ Menu de opções de reprodução de filmes „ Taman. de imagem → Ajuste / Original Reproduzir vídeo no tamanho do ecrã ou no tamanho original. „ Configuração de legenda Pode definir as legendas do filme. Tools Ferramentas Parar apresentação de slides Vel. apr. diap. : Normal Efeito apresentação diapositivos : Desvan .1 Rodar Zoom Música de fundo Definição de Imagem Definições do Som Informação › U Mover E Enter eSair Ferramentas Modo repetir ◄ Lig. ► Definição de Imagem Definições do Som Informação Remover em segurança U Mover š™ Adjust eSair Ferramentas Definição de Imagem Definições do Som Taman. de imagem : Ajuste Configuração de legenda Informação Remover em segurança U Mover  Enter eSair BN68-02333J-POR.indb 37 10/20/2009 4:41:42 PMPortuguês - 38 Visualizar uma fotografia ou uma apresentação de diapositivos ❑ Visualizar uma apresentação de diapositivos N Todos os ficheiros na secção da lista de ficheiros serão utilizados para a apresentação de diapositivos. N Durante a apresentação de diapositivos, os ficheiros são apresentados por ordem a partir do ficheiro actualmente exibido. N O progresso da apresentação de diapositivos é efectuado pela ordem definida na secção da lista de ficheiros. N Os ficheiros de música podem ser automaticamente reproduzidos durante a apresentação de diapositivos se a opção Música de fundo estiver definida para Lig.. N Enquanto uma fotografia é apresentada, carregue no botão ∂(Reproduzir) /ENTERE no telecomando para iniciar a apresentação de diapositivos. N Botões de controlo da apresentação de diapositivos ENTERE Reproduz/interrompe a apresentação de diapositivos. Reproduz a apresentação de diapositivos. Interrompe a apresentação de diapositivos. Sai da apresentação de diapositivos e volta à lista |de fotografias. / Altera a velocidade de reprodução da apresentação de diapositivos. T TOOLS Executa várias funções a partir dos menus de fotografia. ❑ Reproduzir o grupo actual 1. Carregue no botão ▲ para passar à Secção de teclas de ordenação. 2. Carregue no botão ◄ ou ► para seleccionar um padrão de ordenação. 3. Carregue no botão ▼ para passar à Secção da lista de grupos. 4. Seleccione um grupo utilizando os botões ◄ e ►. 5. Carregue no botão ∂ (Reproduzir). Inicia-se uma apresentação de diapositivos com os ficheiros do grupo seleccionado. „ Em alternativa 1. Seleccione uma tecla de ordenação e, em seguida, na secção da lista de ficheiros, seleccione as fotografias que se encontram no grupo pretendido. N Para ir para o grupo anterior/seguinte, carregue no botão π (REW) ou μ (FF). 2. Carregue no botão TOOLS. 3. Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar Repr.Gr.Act. e, em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE. N Apenas as fotografias no grupo de ordenação, incluindo os ficheiros seleccionados, serão utilizados na apresentação de diapositivos. ❑ Para reproduzir uma apresentação de diapositivos apenas com os ficheiros seleccionados 1. Carregue no botão ▼ para seleccionar a secção da lista de ficheiros. 2. Carregue no botão ◄ ou ► para seleccionar a fotografia pretendida na secção da lista de ficheiros. 3. Carregue no botão amarelo. 4. Repita a operação acima descrita para seleccionar várias fotografias. N A marca c aparece à esquerda da fotografia seleccionada. N Se seleccionar um ficheiro, a apresentação de diapositivos não é reproduzida. N Para anular a selecção de todos os ficheiros seleccionados, carregue no botão TOOLS e escolha Anular selecção. 5. Carregue no botão ∂ (Reproduzir)/ENTERE. N Os ficheiros seleccionados serão utilizados para a apresentação de diapositivos. „ Em alternativa 1. Na secção da lista de ficheiros, carregue nos botões amarelos para seleccionar as fotografias pretendidas. 2. Carregue no botão TOOLS. 3. Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar Apres. Diap. e, em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE. N Os ficheiros seleccionados serão utilizados para a apresentação de diapositivos. ▶ ▶ Preferência Visual. básica Lin.Tem. Título Pasta Apr Apr.27.2009 Movie MOVIE_003 .avi MOVIE_000 .avi MOVIE_004 .avi MOVIE_001.avi 1/5 MOVIE_005 .avi Visual. básica Lin.Tem. Cor Pasta Preferência IMG_0335.JPG 4/6 IMG_0349 .JPG ▶ ▶ Folder 2 1 Folder 1 1 Apres. Diap. Repr.Gr.Act. Mudar grupo Informação Remover em segurança Photo r Normal IMG_0335.JPG 3648x2432 2009/3/15 1/4 USB E Pausa lr Ant./Seg. T Ferramentas R Voltar USB „ Dispos. Def.fav. Selec. T Ferramentas R Mover para pasta superior. USB „ Dispos. Def.fav. Selec. T Ferramentas R Mover para pasta superior. BN68-02333J-POR.indb 38 10/20/2009 4:41:47 PMPortuguês - 39 Reproduzir música ❑ Reproduzir um ficheiro de música 1. Carregue no botão ▼ para seleccionar a secção da lista de ficheiros. 2. Carregue no botão ◄ ou ► para seleccionar o ficheiro de música que pretende reproduzir. 3. Carregue no botão ∂ (Reproduzir)/ENTERE. N Este menu só apresenta ficheiros com a extensão MP3. Os ficheiros com outras extensões não são apresentados, mesmo que estejam guardados no mesmo dispositivo USB. N O ficheiro seleccionado é apresentado na parte superior, com o respectivo tempo de reprodução. N Para regular o volume da música, carregue no botão do volume do telecomando. Para cortar o som, carregue no botão M MUTE do telecomando. N Se o som se apresentar irregular durante a reprodução de ficheiros MP3, regule a opção Equalizador e SRS TruSurround HD no menu Som. (Um ficheiro MP3 com muita modulação pode causar um problema no som.) N A duração de reprodução de um ficheiro de música pode ser apresentada como ‘00:00:00’, se a informação de tempo de reprodução não for encontrada no início do ficheiro. N Os botões π (REW) ou μ (FF) não funcionam durante a reprodução. N Botões de controlo de reprodução de música ENTERE Reproduz/interrompe o ficheiro de música. Sai do modo de reprodução e volta à lista de músicas. Reproduz o ficheiro de música T TOOLS Executa várias funções a partir dos menus de música. Interrompe o ficheiro de música N Ícone de informações da função de música Quando todos os ficheiros de música da pasta (ou o ficheiro seleccionado) são repetidos. Modo repetir está definido para Lig.. Quando todos os ficheiros de música da pasta (ou o ficheiro seleccionado) são reproduzidos uma vez. Modo repetir está definido para Deslig.. ❑ Reproduzir o grupo de música 1. Carregue no botão ▲ para passar à Secção de teclas de ordenação. 2. Carregue no botão ◄ ou ► para seleccionar um padrão de ordenação. 3. Carregue no botão ▼ ou ENTERE para passar à secção da lista de grupos. 4. Carregue no botão ∂ (Reproduzir). Os ficheiros do grupo seleccionado começam a ser reproduzidos. „ Em alternativa 1. Seleccione uma tecla de ordenação e, em seguida, na secção da lista de ficheiros, seleccione os ficheiros que se encontram no grupo pretendido. N Para ir para o grupo anterior/seguinte, carregue no botão π (REW) ou μ (FF). 2. Carregue no botão TOOLS. 3. Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar Repr.Gr.Act. e, em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE. N Os ficheiros de música do grupo de ordenação, incluindo o ficheiro seleccionado, são reproduzidos. ❑ Reproduzir os ficheiros de música seleccionados 1. Carregue no botão ▼ para seleccionar a secção da lista de ficheiros. 2. Carregue no botão ◄ ou ► para seleccionar o ficheiro de música pretendido. 3. Carregue no botão amarelo. 4. Repita a operação acima para seleccionar vários ficheiros de música. N A marca c aparece à esquerda do ficheiro de música seleccionado. N Para anular a selecção de todos os ficheiros seleccionados, carregue no botão TOOLS e escolha Anular selecção. 5. Carregue no botão ∂ (Reproduzir)/ENTERE. N Os ficheiros seleccionados são reproduzidos. r 00:00:02 / 00:04:55 r 1/3 When I Dream r r Geek In The Pink Heaven USB E Pausa lr Ant./Seg. T Ferramentas R Voltar BN68-02333J-POR.indb 39 10/20/2009 4:41:48 PMPortuguês - 40 Reproduzir um ficheiro de filme ❑ Reproduzir um ficheiro de filme 1. Carregue no botão ▼ para seleccionar a secção da lista de ficheiros. 2. Carregue no botão ◄ ou ► para seleccionar o ficheiro de filme que pretende reproduzir. 3. Carregue no botão ∂ (Reproduzir)/ENTERE. N O ficheiro seleccionado é reproduzido. N O ficheiro seleccionado é apresentado na parte superior, com o respectivo tempo de reprodução. N A duração de um ficheiro de filme pode ser apresentada como ‘00:00:00’, se as informações de tempo de reprodução não surgirem no início do ficheiro. N Pode reproduzir emocionantes ficheiros multimédia de jogos, mas a função de jogo não é suportada. N Formatos de legenda suportados Nome Extensão do ficheiro Linguagem de programação MPEG-4 (texto baseado no tempo) .ttxt XML SAMI .smi HTML SubRip .srt baseado em cadeias de texto SubViewer .sub baseado em cadeias de texto Micro DVD .sub ou .txt baseado em cadeias de texto N Formatos de vídeo suportados Extensão do ficheiro Categoria Descodificador de vídeo Codec de áudio Resolução *.avi AVI Divx 3.11/4.x/5.1/6.0 MP3 AC3 LPCM ADPCM 720x576 XviD 1920x1080 H.264 BP/MP/HP 1920x1080 MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080 Motion JPEG 800x600 *.mkv MKV Divx 3.11/4.x/5.1/6.0 MP3 AC3 LPCM ADPCM 720x576 XviD 1920x1080 H.264 BP/MP/HP 1920x1080 MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080 Motion JPEG 800x600 *.asf ASF Divx 3.11/4.x/5.1/6.0 MP3 AC3 LPCM ADPCM WMA 720x576 XviD 1920x1080 H.264 BP/MP/HP 1920x1080 MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080 Motion JPEG 800x600 *.wmv (VC1) ASF VC1 WMA 1920x1080 *.mp4 MP4 (SMP4) H.264 BP/MP/HP MP3 ADPCM AAC 1920x1080 MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080 XVID 1920x1080 *.3gp 3GPP H.264 BP/MP/HP ADPCM AAC 1920x1080 MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080 *.vro VRO VOB MPEG2 AC3 MPEG LPCM 1920x1080 MPEG1 1920x1080 *.mpg *.mpeg PS MPEG1 AC3 MPEG LPCM 1920x1080 MPEG2 1920x1080 *.ts *.tp *.trp TS MPEG2 AAC MP3 1920x1080 H.264 1920x1080 VC1 1920x1080 N Botões de controlo de reprodução de vídeo ENTERE Reproduz/interrompe o ficheiro de filme. Reproduz o ficheiro de filme. Interrompe o ficheiro de filme. Sai do modo de reprodução e volta à lista de filmes. T TOOLS Executa várias funções a partir dos menus de filme. ◄/► Avança ou retrocede no ficheiro de filme. ▲/▼ Vai para o primeiro/último ficheiro. Continua... ▶ r r 00:00:02 / 00:01:55 1/3 MOVIE_000.avi USB E Pausa lr Saltar T Ferramentas R Voltar BN68-02333J-POR.indb 40 10/20/2009 4:41:49 PMPortuguês - 41 ❑ Reproduzir o grupo de filmes 1. Carregue no botão ▲ para passar à Secção de teclas de ordenação. 2. Carregue no botão ◄ ou ► para seleccionar um padrão de ordenação. 3. Carregue no botão ▼ ou ENTERE para passar à secção da lista de grupos. 4. Carregue no botão ∂ (Reproduzir). Só os ficheiros do grupo seleccionado começam a ser reproduzidos. „ Em alternativa 1. Seleccione uma tecla de ordenação e, em seguida, na secção da lista de ficheiros, seleccione os ficheiros que se encontram no grupo pretendido. N Para ir para o grupo anterior/seguinte, carregue no botão π (REW) ou μ (FF). 2. Carregue no botão TOOLS. 3. Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar Repr.Gr.Act. e, em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE. N Os ficheiros de filme do grupo de ordenação, incluindo o ficheiro seleccionado, são reproduzidos. ❑ Reproduzir os ficheiros de filme seleccionados 1. Carregue no botão ▼ para seleccionar a secção da lista de ficheiros. 2. Carregue no botão ◄ ou ► para seleccionar o ficheiro de música pretendido. 3. Carregue no botão amarelo. N A marca c aparece à esquerda do ficheiro de filme seleccionado. N Para anular a selecção de todos os ficheiros seleccionados, carregue no botão TOOLS e escolha Anular selecção. 4. Repita a operação acima descrita para seleccionar vários ficheiros de filme. 5. Carregue no botão ∂ (Reproduzir)/ENTERE. N Só é reproduzido o ficheiro seleccionado. ❑ Reproduzir um filme de modo contínuo (Retomar reprodução) Se sair da função de reprodução de filmes, pode reproduzir o filme posteriormente a partir do ponto em que parou. 1. Seleccione o ficheiro de filme que pretende reproduzir de modo contínuo carregando no botão ◄ ou ► a partir da Secção da lista de ficheiros. 2. Carregue no botão ∂ (Reproduzir)/ENTERE. 3. Seleccione Rep.Cnt. (Retomar reprodução) carregando no botão azul. N O filme irá iniciar a reprodução a partir do ponto no qual foi interrompido. N Se a função Lemb. reprod. cont. filme estiver definida para Lig. no menu Setup, aparece uma mensagem de contexto quando retoma a reprodução de um ficheiro de filme. Utilizar o menu Configurar A opção Configurar apresenta as definições do utilizador do menu Media Play. 1. Carregue no botão MEDIA.P do telecomando para ver o menu Media Play. 2. Carregue no botão ◄ ou ► para seleccionar Setup e, em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE. 3. Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar a opção pretendida. 4. Carregue no botão ◄ ou ► para seleccionar a opção. N Para sair do modo Media Play, carregue no botão MEDIA.P do telecomando. „ Utilizar visualização a cores → Lig. / Deslig. Seleccione para ver a informação da cor no menu Fotografia. N Quando definido para Lig., o tempo de carregamento aumenta para recolher a informação da cor. „ Modo repetir música → Lig. / Deslig. Seleccione esta opção para reproduzir ficheiros de música várias vezes. „ Lemb. reprod. cont. filme → Lig. / Deslig. Seleccione para visualizar a mensagem de ajuda da reprodução contínua de filmes. „ Obtenha o código de registo do DivX® VOD Mostra o código de registo autorizado do televisor. Se aceder ao Website da DivX e registar o código de registo com uma conta pessoal, pode transferir o ficheiro de registo VOD. Se reproduzir o registo VOD utilizando a aplicação Media Play, o registo é concluído. Para obter mais informações sobre o DivX® VOD, visite www.DivX.com. „ Obtenha código desactivação do DivX® VOD Quando o DivX® VOD não é registado, é apresentado o código de desactivação do registo. Se executar esta função com o DivX® VOD registado, o registo do DivX® VOD actual é desactivado. „ Tem.exec.prot.ecrã → 10 min / 20 min / 1 hora Seleccione esta opção para definir o tempo de espera antes de ser apresentada a protecção de ecrã. „ Informação Seleccione esta opção para ver as informações do dispositivo ligado. „ Remover em segurança Pode remover o dispositivo do televisor com segurança. Media Play USB : USB 851.98MB/995.00MB Livre SETUP Photo Music Movie Setup USB „ eSair Dispos. Setup Mover Ajustar Voltar Utilizar visual. a cores ◄ Deslig. ► Modo repetir música Lig. Lemb. reprod. cont. filme Lig. Obtenha o código de registo do DivX® VOD Obtenha código desactivação do DivX® VOD Tempo exec. protec. ecrã 10 min Informação Remover em segurança USB „ Dispos. BN68-02333J-POR.indb 41 10/20/2009 4:41:49 PMPortuguês - 42 Definir a Rede DLNA A DLNA permite visualizar filmes e imagens guardados no PC no televisor através de uma ligação de rede no modo Media Play. Isto elimina a necessidade de copiá-los para um dispositivo de armazenamento USB e depois ligar o dispositivo ao televisor. Para utilizar a DLNA, o televisor deve estar ligado à rede e a aplicação DLNA deve estar instalada no PC. ❑ Diagrama de ligação à rede - Cabo ❑ Diagrama de ligação à rede - Sem fios 1. Para obter mais informações sobre como configurar a rede, consulte ‘Definir a rede’. N Recomenda-se que localize o televisor e o PC na mesma sub-rede. As 3 primeiras partes do endereço de sub-rede do televisor e dos endereços IP do PC devem ser iguais e só a última parte (o endereço do anfitrião) deve ser alterada. (p.ex., Endereço IP : 123.456.789.**) 2. Ligue o PC no qual o programa Samsung PC Share Manager será instalado e o modem externo utilizando um cabo LAN. N Pode ligar o televisor directamente ao PC sem utilizar um router. Instalar a Aplicação DLNA Para reproduzir conteúdos do PC no televisor, tem de instalar a aplicação primeiro. Para utilizar a função DLNA sem problemas, utilize o programa no CD-ROM fornecido com o televisor ou utilize o programa Samsung PC Share Manager correspondente ao modelo de televisor, que pode ser transferido do web site da Samsung. Continua... TV Modem externo (ADSL/VDSL/TV por cabo) LAN PC LAN Media Play-DLNA TV LAN PC ou 1 Painel lateral do televisor Adaptador de LAN sem fios da Samsung BN68-02333J-POR.indb 42 10/20/2009 4:41:51 PMPortuguês - 43 Utilizar a Aplicação DLNA Programme Screen Display 1. Menus : São fornecidos os seguintes menus da aplicação : Ficheiro, Partilhar, Servidor, e Ajuda. 2. Clique para partilhar a pasta de servidor do PC seleccionada. 3. Clique para cancelar a partilha. 4. Clique para actualizar as pastas e ficheiros do PC. 5. Clique para sincronizar o estado de partilha. 6. As pastas e ficheiros do PC a serem partilhados estão listados. 7. As pastas partilhadas pelos utilizadores estão listadas. 8. Nome do servidor do computador apresentado na lista de dispositivos do Media Play. „ Requisitos do Sistema 1. Introduza no PC o CD do Programa fornecido com este televisor. 2. São necessários 30MB de espaço livre no disco rígido para a instalação do programa. N Se partilha ficheiros, é necessário um espaço livre no disco rígido até 30MB para cada 100 ficheiros. N Se cancelar a partilha de ficheiros, o espaço do disco rígido utilizado para a informação das miniaturas é igualmente libertado. „ Formatos Suportados • Imagem : JPEG/ Audio: MP3/ Video: AVI, MKV, ASF, MP4, 3GPP, PS, TS categoria. Para obter mais informações sobre quais os formatos de vídeo suportados, consulte as instruções de ‘Reproduzir um ficheiro de filme’. „ Instalar a aplicação ► ► ► 1. Execute o ficheiro Setup.exe do Programa do CD fornecido com o produto. N Como alternativa, pode transferir o ficheiro em www.samsung.com. 2. Instale o SAMSUNG PC Share Manager com apresentado nas figuras. 3. Concluída a instalação, o ícone do PC Share Manager aparece no Ambiente de PC. N Clique duas vezes no ícone para executar o programa. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 BN68-02333J-POR.indb 43 10/20/2009 4:41:53 PMPortuguês - 44 ❑ Partilhar „ Partilhar uma Pasta Pode partilhar uma pasta do PC no televisor. „ Cancelar uma Pasta Partilhada Pode cancelar uma pasta partilhada no PC. Seleccione uma pasta no painel partilhar pasta e seleccione não partilhar pasta. „ Aplicar as Definições Actuais Efectue esta acção quando for necessário sincronizar devido a uma nova pasta partilhada ou ao cancelamento de uma pasta partilhada. O menu Definir estado alterado aplica alterações em pastas partilhadas aos dados guardados com o programa de partilha do PC. Uma vez que a aplicação de alterações aos dados internos é um processo que consome tempo, esta função permite aos utilizadores aplicar alterações aos dados sempre que necessário. Até o menu Definir estado alterado ser seleccionado, o estado alterado da pasta partilhada não é aplicado ao servidor. As alterações efectuadas em pastas partilhadas não são aplicadas no PC até seleccionar o menu Definir estado alterado. „ Definir a Permissão de Acesso Para permitir que o televisor localize o PC, o televisor deve estar definido para Def. Política do Dispositivo na janela de Definições da Permissão de Acesso. Adicionalmente, o servidor do PC e o televisor devem estar na mesma subrede. • Método : Seleccione o menu partilhar e, em seguida, seleccione Def. Política do Dispositivo. Os itens rejeitados são apresentados a cinzento. Pode alterar as permissões de acesso com o botão aceitar / Recusar. Para eliminar um item, seleccione o item e seleccione Delete Item. ❑ Servidor „ Servidor Pode executar ou parar de utilizar o PC como servidor. „ Iniciar servidor quando o Windows iniciar Pode determinar se pretende iniciar automaticamente o servidor do PC quando o Windows arranca. „ Mudar nome do servidor Pode alterar o nome do servidor do PC. Utilizar a Função DLNA ❑ Utilizar o Menu DLNA A DLNA (Digital Living Network Alliance) permite reproduzir o conteúdo guardado no servidor DLNA (habitualmente no PC) ligado ao televisor ou em rede. A aplicação Media Play permite reproduzir conteúdos guardados num dispositivo de memória USB ligado ao televisor, enquanto a DLNA permite reproduzir conteúdos guardados num servidor DLNA (o PC) ligado ao televisor ou em rede. O procedimento para utilizar o conteúdo é o mesmo do Media Play (USB & DLNA). 1. Carregue no botão MEDIA.P do telecomando para visualizar o menu DLNA. 2. Carregue no botão◄ ou ► para seleccionar um ícone (Photo, Music, Movie, Setup) e, em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE. N Para sair do modo DLNA, carregue no botão MEDIA.P do telecomando. N A DLNA não suporta as seguintes funções. - As funções Música de fundo e Definições da música de fundo. - A ordenação de ficheiros por preferência nas pastas Fotografia, Música e Filme. - A função Alterar a informação do grupo. - A função Copy / Delete. - A função Remove Safely. - As funções dos botões REW/FF (π/μ) durante a reprodução de um filme. - Função de reprodução de um filme de modo contínuo (Retomar reprodução). N A função Skip pode não funcionar com alguns formatos, como o asf e mkv. N Divx DRM, multi-áudio, legendas incorporadas não são suportados. N O Samsung PC Share Manager deve ser autorizado pelo programa de firewall instalado no PC. N As funções de avanço/retrocesso (teclas ◄/►) ou de pausa podem não funcionar durante a reprodução de um filme na DLNA de outros fabricantes, dependendo das respectivas informações dos conteúdos. N O tempo de reprodução pode não ser apresentado durante a reprodução de um filme. Media Play Photo Music Setup PHOTO USB : USB 851.98MB/995.00MB Livre Movie USB „ Dispos. Voltar BN68-02333J-POR.indb 44 10/20/2009 4:41:53 PMPortuguês - 45 Sobre o Anynet + Ligar dispositivos Anynet+ Anynet + é uma função que lhe permite controlar, com o telecomando do seu televisor Samsung, todos os dispositivos Samsung ligados que suportem Anynet + . O sistema Anynet + pode ser utilizado com dispositivos Samsung que disponham da função Anynet + . Para se certificar de que o dispositivo Samsung dispõe desta funcionalidade, verifique se existe um logótipo Anynet + no mesmo. ❑ Para ligar ao televisor 1. Ligue a tomada HDMI IN (1, 2(DVI), 3 ou 4) do televisor e a tomada HDMI OUT do dispositivo Anynet + correspondente utilizando um cabo HDMI. ❑ Para ligar ao sistema home theater 1. Ligue a tomada HDMI IN (1, 2(DVI), 3 ou 4) do televisor e a tomada HDMI OUT do dispositivo Anynet + correspondente utilizando um cabo HDMI. 2. Ligue a tomada HDMI IN do sistema home theater e a tomada HDMI OUT do dispositivo Anynet + correspondente utilizando um cabo HDMI. N Ligue o cabo óptico entre a tomada Digital Audio Out (Optical) do televisor e a entrada Digital Audio IN do sistema home theater. N Se seguir a ligação anterior, a tomada óptica só tem saída para áudio de 2 canais. O som só é reproduzido no subwoofer e nos altifalantes frontais esquerdo e direito do sistema home theater. Se quiser ouvir áudio de 5.1 canais, ligue a tomada Digital Audio Out (Optical) do leitor de DVD ou caixa de televisão por cabo/satélite (ou seja, dispositivo Anynet 1 ou 2) directamente ao amplificador ou ao sistema home theater e não ao televisor. N Ligue apenas um sistema home theater. N Pode ligar um dispositivo Anynet + utilizando o cabo HDMI 1.3. Alguns cabos HDMI podem não suportar funções Anynet + . N A aplicação Anynet + funciona quando o dispositivo AV que suporta Anynet + está em espera ou ligado. N O Anynet + suporta até 12 dispositivos AV, no total. Pode ligar até 3 dispositivos do mesmo tipo. N O Anynet + suporta até 3 dispositivos em simultâneo Dispositivo Anynet + 1 Dispositivo Anynet + 2 Dispositivo Anynet + 3 Televisor Cabo HDMI 1.3 Cabo HDMI 1.3 Cabo HDMI 1.3 Televisor Dispositivo Anynet + 1 Dispositivo Anynet + 2 Dispositivo Anynet + 3 Cabo HDMI 1.3 Cabo HDMI 1.3 Cabo HDMI 1.3 Cabo HDMI 1.3 Sistema home theatre Cabo óptico Dispositivo Anynet + 4 Cabo HDMI 1.3 Dispositivo Anynet + 4 Cabo HDMI 1.3 BN68-02333J-POR.indb 45 10/20/2009 4:41:54 PMPortuguês - 46 Configurar a função Anynet + ❑ Configuração da aplicação Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) T Carregue no botão TOOLS para ver o menu Ferramentas . Também pode ver o menu Anynet + seleccionando Ferramentas → Anynet + (HDMI-CEC). „ Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) → Deslig. / Lig. Para utilizar a função Anynet + , tem de definir Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) para Lig.. N Quando a aplicação Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) está desactivada, todas as operações relacionadas com a função Anynet + são desactivadas. „ Desligar automat. → Não / Sim Definir um dispositivo Anynet + para se desligar automaticamente quando o televisor for desligado. N A fonte activa no telecomando do televisor deve estar definida para TV, de forma a poder utilizar a função Anynet + . N Se definir Desligar automat. para Sim, os dispositivos externos ligados também são desligados quando o televisor for desligado. Se um dispositivo externo ainda estiver a gravar, este pode não se desligar. Alternar entre dispositivos Anynet + 1. Carregue no botão TOOLS. Carregue no botão ENTERE para seleccionar Anynet + (HDMI-CEC). 2. Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar Lista dispos. e, em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE. N É apresentada uma lista dos dispositivos Anynet + ligados. Se não encontrar o dispositivo que pretende, carregue no botão vermelho para procurar dispositivos. N Só quando definir Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) para Lig. no menu Configurar, é apresentado o menu Lista dispos.. 3. Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar um dispositivo específico e carregue no botão ENTERE. Alterna para o dispositivo seleccionado. N Alternar para os dispositivos seleccionados pode demorar até 2 minutos. Não pode cancelar a operação durante o processo de comutação. N O tempo necessário para a procura de dispositivos é determinado pelo número de dispositivos ligados. N Se tiver seleccionado um dispositivo externo carregando no botão SOURCE, não pode utilizar a função Anynet + . Mude para um dispositivo Anynet + externo utilizando o botão TOOLS. ❑ Menu Anynet + O menu Anynet + muda consoante o tipo e o estado dos dispositivos Anynet + ligados ao televisor TV. Menu Anynet + Descrição Ver TV O modo Anynet + muda para o modo de transmissão televisiva. Lista dispos. Apresenta a lista de dispositivos Anynet + . (nome_dispositivo) MENU Apresenta os menus dos dispositivos ligados. Por exemplo, se estiver ligado um gravador de DVD, é apresentado o menu do disco do gravador de DVD. (nome_dispositivo) INFO Apresenta o menu de reprodução do dispositivo ligado. Por exemplo, se estiver ligado um gravador de DVD, é apresentado o menu de reprodução do gravador de DVD. Gravação (*gravador) Inicia uma gravação. (Este menu só funciona com um dispositivo que suporte gravação.) (*gravador) Reserve Recording (Reservar gravação) Activa a função de reserva de gravação do gravador. (Esta função só está disponível para dispositivos que suportem a função de reserva de gravação.) Parar gravação: (*gravador) Pára a gravação. Receptor O som é reproduzido através do receptor. Continua... Aplicação Media Play (USB & DLNA) Anynet + (HDMI-CEC)► Content Library Internet@TV Centro rede domést. U Mover EEnter R Voltar Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) : Não ▶ Desligar automat. : Sim U Mover EEnter R Voltar Ver TV Lista dispos. Gravação : DVDR DVDR MENU DVDR INFO Receptor : Lig. Configurar BN68-02333J-POR.indb 46 10/20/2009 4:41:55 PMPortuguês - 47 ❑ Botões do telecomando do televisor disponíveis no modo Anynet + Tipo de dispositivos Estado de funcionamento Botões disponíveis Dispositivo Anynet + Depois de mudar para o dispositivo, quando for apresentado no ecrã o menu do dispositivo correspondente. Botões numéricos ▲/▼/Botões ◄/►/ENTERE Botões coloridos / botão EXIT Depois de mudar para o dispositivo, enquanto reproduz um ficheiro (Retroceder) / (Avançar) (Parar) / (Reproduzir) / (Pausa) Dispositivo com sintonizador incorporado Depois de mudar para o dispositivo, quando estiver a ver um programa televisivo Botão P / Dispositivo de áudio Quando o receptor está activado Botão = / Botão M MUTE N A função Anynet + só funciona quando a fonte activa no telecomando está definida para TV. N O botão só funciona no estado de gravação. N Não é possível controlar os dispositivos Anynet + utilizando os botões do televisor. Só consegue controlar os dispositivos Anynet + utilizando o telecomando do televisor. N O telecomando do televisor pode não funcionar sob determinadas condições. Neste caso, volte a seleccionar o dispositivo Anynet + . N As funções Anynet + não funcionam com produtos de outros fabricantes. N As operações , podem variar consoante o dispositivo. N Se mais do que um dispositivo estiver ligado, são apresentados como (*gravador), e se só estiver ligado um dispositivo, é apresentado como (*nome_dispositivo). Gravação Pode gravar um programa televisivo utilizando um gravador Samsung. 1. Carregue no botão TOOLS. Carregue no botão ENTERE para seleccionar Anynet + (HDMI-CEC). 2. Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar Gravação(gravador) e, em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE. A gravação começa. N Quando houver mais do que um dispositivo de gravação Se estiverem ligados vários dispositivos de gravação, estes são listados. Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar um dispositivo de gravação e carregue no botão ENTERE. A gravação começa. N Se o dispositivo de gravação não for apresentado seleccione Lista dispos. e carregue no botão vermelho para procurar dispositivos. N Se carregar no botão grava o que estiver a ver no momento. Se estiver a ver um vídeo de outro dispositivo, esse vídeo é gravado. N Antes de gravar, verifique se a tomada da antena está devidamente ligada ao dispositivo de gravação, Para ligar correctamente uma antena a um dispositivo de gravação, consulte o respectivo manual do utilizador. U Mover EEnter R Voltar Ver TV Lista dispos. Gravação : DVDR DVDR MENU DVDR INFO Receptor : Lig. Configurar BN68-02333J-POR.indb 47 10/20/2009 4:41:56 PMPortuguês - 48 Ouvir através de um receptor Pode ouvir o som através de um receptor em vez do altifalante do televisor. 1. Carregue no botão TOOLS. Carregue no botão ENTERE para seleccionar Anynet + (HDMI-CEC). 2. Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar Receptor. Carregue no botão ◄ ou ► para seleccionar Lig. ou Deslig.. N Se o receptor só suportar áudio, pode não aparecer na lista de dispositivos. N O receptor funciona quando tiver ligado a tomada óptica de entrada do receptor à tomada óptica de saída do televisor. N Se o receptor (sistema home theater) estiver definido para Lig., o som é reproduzido a partir da tomada óptica do televisor. Se o televisor apresentar um sinal DTV (antena), este vai enviar som de 5.1 canais para o receptor home theater. Se a fonte for um componente digital, como um leitor de DVD, e estiver ligada ao televisor através de um cabo HDMI, só pode ouvir som de 2 canais a partir do receptor home theater. N Quando utilizar a função Med ia Play, o som pode não ser reproduzido correctamente através do receptor. N Quando estiver a ouvir através do receptor, há restrições à utilização dos menus de áudio. N Se houver uma falha na alimentação do televisor, enquanto Receptor estiver definido para Lig. (devido a o cabo de alimentação não estar ligado, ou por causa de uma falha na alimentação), a opção Seleccionar Altifalante pode ser configurada para Altifalante Exter. quando voltar a ligar o televisor. (Consulte a página 21) Resolução de problemas para a função Anynet + Sintoma Solução O Anynet + não funciona. • Verifique se o dispositivo é um dispositivo Anynet + . O sistema Anynet + só suporta dispositivos Anynet + . • Ligue apenas um receptor (sistema home theater). • Verifique se o cabo de alimentação do dispositivo Anynet + está ligado correctamente. • Verifique as ligações dos cabos de vídeo/áudio/HDMI 1.3 do dispositivo Anynet + . • Verifique se a aplicação Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) está definida para Lig. no menu de configuração do Anynet + . • Verifique se o telecomando do televisor está no modo TV. • Verifique se é um telecomando exclusivo para Anynet + . • A função Anynet + não funciona em algumas situações. (pesquisa de canais, utilização das funções Media Play, Plug & Play, etc.) • Quando ligar ou remover o cabo HDMI 1.3, certifique-se de que procura novamente dispositivos ou que desliga e volta a ligar o televisor. • Verifique se a função + do dispositivo Anynet + está activada. Quero iniciar a função Anynet + . • Verifique se o dispositivo Anynet + está ligado correctamente ao televisor e se a aplicação Anynet + (HDMICEC) está definida para Lig. no menu de configuração do Anynet + . • Carregue no botão TV do telecomando para mudar para o televisor. Em seguida, carregue no botão TOOLS para ver o menu Anynet + e seleccione o menu pretendido. Quero sair da função Anynet + . • Seleccione Ver TV no menu Anynet + . • Carregue no botão SOURCE do telecomando do televisor e seleccione um dispositivo que não seja Anynet + . (O botão de canal só funciona quando não estiver ligado um dispositivo Anynet + com o sintonizador incorporado.) A mensagem Ligação ao dispositivo Anynet + aparece no ecrã. • Não pode utilizar o telecomando enquanto estiver a configurar a função Anynet + ou a mudar para um modo de visualização. • Utilize o telecomando quando tiver terminado a definição da função Anynet + ou a mudança para o modo de visualização. O dispositivo Anynet + não reproduz dados. • Não pode utilizar a função de reprodução enquanto a aplicação Plug & Play estiver em execução. O dispositivo ligado não é apresentado. • Verifique se o dispositivo suporta as funções Anynet + . • Verifique se o cabo HDMI 1.3 está ligado correctamente. • Verifique se a aplicação Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) está definida para Lig. no menu de configuração do Anynet + . • Procure novamente dispositivos Anynet + . • Pode ligar um dispositivo Anynet + utilizando o cabo HDMI 1.3. Alguns cabos HDMI podem não suportar funções Anynet + . • Se for interrompido por uma situação anómala, tal como a desconexão do cabo HDMI ou do cabo de alimentação, ou por uma falha na corrente, repita a procura de dispositivos. Não consigo gravar o programa televisivo. • Verifique se a tomada da antena do dispositivo de gravação está ligada correctamente. O som do televisor não é reproduzido através do receptor. • Ligue o cabo óptico entre o televisor e o receptor. U Mover EEnter R Voltar Ver TV Lista dispos. Gravação : DVDR DVDR MENU DVDR INFO Receptor : Lig. Configurar BN68-02333J-POR.indb 48 10/20/2009 4:41:56 PMPortuguês - 49 Activar a Content Library A Content Library permite-lhe ver ou reproduzir os conteúdos incorporados no televisor ou guardados no dispositivo USB. 1. Carregue no botão MENU. Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar Aplicação e, em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE. 2. Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar Content Library e, em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE. Aparece o menu principal da aplicação Content Library. O Carregue no botão CONTENT do telecomando para ver o menu principal da aplicação Content Library. 3. Carregue no botão ◄ ou ► para seleccionar um ícone (Galeria, Culinária, Crianças, Bem-estar, Outros, Gestão de conteúdos) e, em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE. N O item seleccionado é executado. ❑ Utilizar os botões do telecomando no menu Content Library Botão Operações ▲/▼/◄/► Desloca o cursor e selecciona um item. ENTERE Escolhe o item actualmente seleccionado. RETURN Volta ao menu anterior. EXIT Pára a função actual e volta ao menu principal da aplicação Content Library. Botões coloridos Botão que disponibiliza funções descritas na página correspondente. Pode controlar o volume dos conteúdos reproduzidos. CONTENT Entra ou sai do modo Content Library. N Se carregar no botão de volume ou MMUTE não é apresentado qualquer OSD, mas a função funciona em conformidade. N Para voltar ao modo TV, carregue no botão P do telecomando. N A APLICAÇÃO CONTENT LIBRARY CONTÉM TEXTO, GRÁFICOS, IMAGENS, MULTIMÉDIA E OUTROS MATERIAIS PARA FINS MERAMENTE PROMOCIONAIS E INFORMATIVOS. OS MATERIAIS DA APLICAÇÃO CONTENT LIBRARY FORAM MODIFICADOS E CONTINUAM A SER REVISTOS E ACTUALIzADOS. OS MATERIAIS DA APLICAÇÃO CONTENT LIBRARY PODEM NÃO SER ADEQUADOS PARA TODOS OS PÚBLICOS. N AS INFORMAÇÕES DA APLICAÇÃO CONTENT LIBRARY SÃO DISPONIBILIzADAS “SEM TRATAMENTO PRÉVIO”. EMBORA AS INFORMAÇÕES DISPONIBILIzADAS AOS UTILIzADORES NA APLICAÇÃO CONTENT LIBRARY SEJAM OBTIDAS DE FONTES QUE ACREDITAMOS SEREM FIÁVEIS, A SAMSUNG NÃO PODE GARANTIR, NEM GARANTE, A PRECISÃO, A VALIDADE, A PERTINÊNCIA OU A INTEGRIDADE DE QUAISQUER INFORMAÇÕES OU DADOS DISPONIBILIzADOS AOS UTILIzADORES PARA UM FIM ESPECÍFICO. EM NENHUMA CIRCUNSTÂNCIA, INCLUINDO NEGLIGÊNCIA, PODE A SAMSUNG SER RESPONSABILIzADA, SEJA POR CONTRATO OU DELITO CIVIL, POR QUAISQUER DANOS DIRECTOS, INDIRECTOS, ACIDENTAIS, ESPECIAIS OU CONSEQUENCIAIS, HONORÁRIOS DE ADVOGADOS, DESPESAS OU QUAISQUER OUTROS DANOS RESULTANTES DE, OU RELACIONADOS COM, A UTILIzAÇÃO DA APLICAÇÃO CONTENT LIBRARY OU QUALQUER INFORMAÇÃO CONTIDA NA MESMA, AINDA QUE AVISADA DA POSSIBILIDADE DE OCORRÊNCIA DE TAIS DANOS. Content Library Aplicação Media Play (USB & DLNA) Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) Content Library Internet@TV Centro rede domést. < > Culinária Crianças Galeria Galeria Content Library Bem-estar Outros Voltar Sair BN68-02333J-POR.indb 49 10/20/2009 4:41:57 PMPortuguês - 50 Utilizar a Content Library ❑ Galeria Esta função reproduz uma apresentação de diapositivos com imagens de alta resolução e música de fundo. Utilizando a função Galeria do televisor, pode alterar o ambiente. N Carregue no botão INFO para visualizar o nome do artista e informações detalhadas em inglês para cada imagem (actualmente, a informação está apenas disponível em inglês). N Pode fazer uma pausa na apresentação de diapositivos carregando no botão ENTERE durante a mesma. N Os direitos de autor dos conteúdos da opção Galeria e todos os assuntos relacionados com os mesmos são reservados pela Timespace / JoongAng M&B, Inc. ❑ Culinária Pode visualizar várias receitas que pode facilmente seguir passo a passo. Desfrute destes conteúdos que lhe oferecem ideias fantásticas para refeições. N As receitas apresentadas nos conteúdos da opção Culinária do televisor Samsung são baseadas em receitas publicadas pela Anness Publishing. N Os direitos de autor dos conteúdos da opção Culinária e todos os assuntos relacionados com os mesmos são reservados pela Practical Pictures. ❑ Crianças Inclui conteúdos educacionais e interactivos que as crianças podem ver várias vezes. Desfrute de histórias, músicas e jogos existentes com as personagens Boowa e Kwala. N Os direitos de autor dos conteúdos da opção Crianças e todos os assuntos relacionados com os mesmos são reservados pela UpToTen. ❑ Bem-estar Inclui conteúdos benéficos de gestão de saúde que fornecem exercícios de alongamento e sons que podem ser desfrutados por toda a família. ❑ Gestão de conteúdos „ Os meus conteúdos A utilização dos conteúdos é igual à utilização dos conteúdos da memória do televisor. Além disso, pode eliminar e reproduzir todos os conteúdos. „ USB Pode transferir os conteúdos para um dispositivo de memória USB e reproduzi-los no seu televisor. Os conteúdos do dispositivo USB externo são reproduzidos directamente. N A aplicação Content Library suporta dispositivos de classe de armazenamento de massa USB (MSC). MSC é um dispositivo de transporte em volume de classe de armazenamento de massa. São exemplos de MSC as mini-unidades USB e os leitores de cartões flash (os USB HDD e HUB não são suportados). N Jogar utilizando um dispositivo de memória USB externo permite gravar o jogo (consoante o jogo). Tenha cuidado uma vez que remover o dispositivo de memória USB durante a gravação dos dados no mesmo pode levar à perda dos dados. N Transferir novos conteúdos São disponibilizados novos conteúdos, diferentes dos conteúdos incorporados, através do website Samsung.com, de forma gratuita. Quando transferir conteúdos pagos, precisa do número UDN para os transferir. Verifique o número UDN antes de transferir um novo item de conteúdo. 1. Visite o website www.samsung.com 2. Seleccione um item de conteúdo na página de Transferência de conteúdos. 3. Transfira os conteúdos para o dispositivo de memória USB. 4. Vá para o menu principal da aplicação Content Library carregando no botão CONTENT ou escolhendo Content Library (Menu → Aplicação → Content Library) 5. Introduza a memória USB na porta USB existente na parte lateral do televisor. 6. Pode ver o subitem de conteúdo que transferiu. 7. Seleccione um item de conteúdo e carregue no botão enter. 8. Pode reproduzir o item do conteúdo seleccionado. „ Configurar • Tempo exec. protec. ecrã → 10 min. / 20 min. / 40 min. / 1 hora Seleccione esta opção para definir o tempo de espera antes de ser apresentada a protecção de ecrã. • Guardar UDN (Número de Dispositivo Único) O número de 18 dígitos no ecrã é o código do produto. Pode guardar o UDN na sua memória USB. N Um dispositivo de armazenamento USB de formato NTFS não suporta a opção Guardar UDN. Recomenda-se a utilização de um dispositivo de armazenamento USB de formato FAT. BN68-02333J-POR.indb 50 10/20/2009 4:41:57 PMPortuguês - 51 Pode utilizar vários serviços da Internet que contêm informações úteis e conteúdos de entretenimento. Se tiver algum problema ao utilizar o serviço widget, contacte o fornecedor de conteúdo. No widget, carregue no botão verde e obtenha informação sobre o contacto ou consulte o website de ajuda para obter informações sobre o fornecedor do serviço widget. N Consoante a região, pode ser suportado apenas o inglês no serviço widget. N Dependendo do país, esta função pode não ser suportada. Introdução à aplicação Internet@TV Internet@TV oferece Internet integrada e a experiência televisiva fornecida pela Yahoo!® Widget Engine. Pode seguir as bolsas de valores, partilhar fotografias com os amigos e a família e acompanhar as notícias e a meteorologia através do serviço Internet@TV no seu televisor. N Se as condições de rede forem instáveis, esta função pode não funcionar. Assim, o televisor desliga-se automaticamente. Caso contrário, desligue o televisor utilizando o botão de alimentação. N Quando utilizar esta função, o funcionamento pode ser lento ou ter interferências, devido às condições da rede. Quando utilizar a função Internet@TV pela primeira vez, as definições básicas ocorrem automaticamente. N O primeiro passo consiste em definir a sua rede. Para obter mais informações sobre como configurar a rede, consulte ‘Configurar a rede’. N Após a sua rede estar operacional, o software da aplicação Internet@TV guia-o através do assistente de configuração passo a passo. Internet@TV All content and services accessible through this device belong to third parties and are protected by copyright, patent, trademark and/or ther intellectual property laws. Such content and services are provided solely for your personal noncommercial use. You may not use any content or services in a manner that has not been authorized by the content owner or service provider. Without limiting the foregoing, unless expressly authorized by the applicable content owner or service provider, you may not modify, copy, republish, upload, post, transmit, translate, sell, create derivative works, exploit, or distribute in any manner or medium any content or services displayed through this device. YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT USE OF THE DEVICE IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE AND ACCURACY IS WITH YOU. THE DEVICE AND ALL THIRD PARTY CONTENT AND SERVICES ARE PROVIDED "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. SAMSUNG EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO THE DEVICE AND ANY CONTENT AND SERVICES, EITHER EXPRESS OR, IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, OF SATISFACTORY QUALITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OF ACCURACY, OF QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. SAMSUNG DOES NOT GUARANTEE THE ACCURACY, VALIDITY, TIMELINESS, LEGALITY, OR COMPLETENESS OF ANY CONTENT OR SERVICE MADE AVAILABLE THROUGH THIS DEVICE AND DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE DEVICE, CONTENT OR SERVICES WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, OR THAT OPERATION OF THE DEVICE OR SERVICES WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES, INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE, SHALL SAMSUNG BE LIABLE, WHETHER IN CONTRACT OR TORT, FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, ATTORNEY FEES, EXPENSES, OR ANY OTHER DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF, OR IN CONNECTION WITH, ANY INFORMATION CONTAINED IN, OR AS A RESULT OF THE USE OF THE DEVICE, OR ANY CONTENT OR SERVICE ACCESSED BY YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTY, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Third party services may be changed, suspended, removed, terminated or interrupted, or access may be disabled at any time, without notice, and Samsung makes no representation or warranty that any content or service will remain available for any period of time. Content and services are transmitted by third parties by means of networks and transmission facilities over which Samsung has no control. Without limiting the generality of this disclaimer, Samsung expressly disclaims any responsibility or liability for any change, interruption, disabling, removal of or suspension of any content or service made available through this device. Samsung may impose limits on the use of or access to certain services or content, in any case and without notice or liability. Samsung is neither responsible nor liable for customer service related to the content and services. Any question or request for service relating to the content or services should be made directly to the respective content and service providers. 1. Carregue no botão MENU. Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar Application e, em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE. 2. Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar Internet@TV e, em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE. O A aplicação INTERNET@TV é iniciada. O Carregue no botão INTERNET@ do telecomando para visualizar o menu Internet@TV. 3. O texto General Disclaimer é apresentado no ecrã. Seleccione I accept ou I do not accept. N Para obter mais informações sobre o texto General Disclaimer, consulte ‘Legal Notice’. 4. O “ecrã de boas-vindas” é o ponto de partida da configuração guiada da aplicação Internet@TV. N Se seleccionar Exit Setup, este passo é retomado quando carregar no botão INTERNET@. N Seleccione Let’s get started! 5. A escolha da sua localização permite aos Widgets TV utilizar conteúdos no seu idioma. N Seleccione o país a partir da lista fornecida. 6. É necessário aceitar a Yahoo!® TV Widget Engine Política de privacidade de forma a poder utilizar a Internet@TV. N Seleccione OK, I Accept. BN68-02333J-POR.indb 51 10/20/2009 4:41:58 PMPortuguês - 52 7. É necessário aceitar os Yahoo!® TV Widget System Terms of Service (Termos do serviço) de forma a poder utilizar a Internet@TV. N Seleccione OK, I Accept. 8. Introduza o seu nome para configurar o seu perfil. Cada perfil tem a sua própria lista de widgets. Pode criar um perfil para cada pessoa que utiliza a Internet@TV. N Introduza o nome e seleccione Save this name. N Para obter mais informações, consulte a ‘Utilizar o widget Profile’. 9. Internet@TV verifica a ligação à rede. N Se o teste falhar, configure novamente a rede. N Para obter mais informações, consulte as ‘Setting the Network. 10. A configuração guiada está concluída. Em seguida, é apresentado um tutorial sobre como utilizar a Internet@TV. N Seleccione Continue para visualizar o tutorial. N Seleccione Exit setup para iniciar a utilização da Internet@TV. N Para executar o tutorial novamente, seleccione Profile Widget → System Setting → Repeat Tutorial. 11. Carregue no botão INTERNET@ do telecomando para visualizar a interface de utilizador da Internet@TV. ❑ Descrição do ecr㠄 Modo de ancoragem 1 Uma faixa de boas-vindas é apresentada com o nome do seu perfil no canto superior direito. N Esta faixa desaparece após um curto espaço de tempo. 2 A faixa realça dois atalhos do telecomando. N Se carregar no botão azul (Viewport) do telecomando, a visualização alterna entre ‘modo Viewport’ e ‘modo Overlay’. No modo Viewport, o televisor ou o vídeo reproduz imagens numa área reduzida com gráficos fora dessa área. No modo Overlay, os gráficos são sobrepostos no televisor ou vídeo. N Se carregar no botão amarelo (Edit Snippet) do telecomando, é apresentada uma janela de ajuda e o snippet realçado pode ser editado. 3 Carregue no botão INTERNET@ do telecomando para começar. N A lista horizontal no fundo do ecrã do televisor chama-se ‘ancoragem’. N Os itens da lista chamam-se ‘snippets’. N Um snippet é um atalho que inicia um Widget TV. N Um Widget TV é uma aplicação da Internet concebida para ser executada no televisor. N Desloque-se entre snippets carregando nos botões ◄ ou ► do telecomando. N O destaque é feito no lado esquerdo (realçado a azul). N A ancoragem faz deslizar snippets para debaixo deste ponto central. N Inicie um Widget TV ao carregar no botão ENTERE do telecomando quando o snippet está focado. N Quando adiciona snippets, estes formam uma lista pela qual pode navegar carregando nos botões ▲ ou ▼. N Dois Widgets TV específicos aparecem na ancoragem : O Profile Widget e o Gallery Widget. Estes não podem ser eliminados. N A ancoragem desaparece do ecrã após um período de pausa. „ Modo Barra lateral 1 Realce um snippet e carregue no botão ENTERE para iniciar a barra lateral do Widget TV. O logótipo do Widget TV e Home ( ) encontramse no topo da barra lateral. 2 O menu actual é apresentado abaixo do logótipo do Widget TV. N Para voltar ao ecrã anterior, seleccione-o e carregue no botão ENTERE. N Também pode carregar no botão RETURN do telecomando. 3 A selecção actual é sempre realçada a azul. O botão realçado fica em destaque e é activado quando carrega no botão ENTERE. 4 Quando existem muito dados, é utilizado um controlo de página. N A página actual e a totalidade das páginas são apresentadas. N Desloque-se entre as páginas carregando nos botões ◄ ou ►. 5 A barra de ferramentas na parte inferior inclui botões coloridos que correspondem aos botões vermelho, verde, amarelo e azul no telecomando. • Botão vermelho : Fechar o widget. • Botão verde : Alterar a definição do widget. • Botão amarelo : Gerir os seus snippets. • Botão azul : Dimensionar o vídeo de forma a ajustar-se ao ecrã ou expandi-lo até ocupar o ecrã inteiro. N Alguns botões podem não estar disponíveis consoante o widget. .@# áëí space a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - BN68-02333J-POR.indb 52 10/20/2009 4:42:00 PMPortuguês - 53 Editar Snippets na Ancoragem 1. Edite um snippet realçando-o na ancoragem e carregando no botão amarelo. 2. O snippet move-se para a segunda posição e o mosaico respectivo desliza para cima de forma a apresentar o texto de ajuda seguinte : • Eliminar (botão vermelho) : Remover este Widget TV. N Os widgets eliminados podem ser reinstalados utilizando a Widget Gallery. • Mover (botão azul) : Encomendar novamente o snippet. Carregue nos botões ◄ ou ► para se deslocar. Carregue no botão amarelo para largar o snippet na nova posição. • Terminar (botão amarelo) : Sair do menu Edit Snippet. Utilizar o widget Profile O widget Profile configura o perfil de utilizador. Pode configurar vários perfis e cada perfil mantém a sua própria lista de widgets. O menu Switch Profile permite-lhe mudar para um perfil de utilizador diferente. N Devem ser registados, no mínimo, dois perfis. Se pretender adicionar um perfil, consulte ‘Administrative Controls’. O menu Profile Settings permite-lhe personalizar e proteger o perfil. • Os perfis dos utilizadores podem ser personalizados com um Name e um Avatar (uma imagem utilizada para representar o perfil) únicos. • O Name do perfil e o Avatar são apresentados no snippet do perfil na ancoragem. • Os perfis podem ser protegidos com a opção Create Profile PIN. N Quando definir o PIN pela primeira vez, pode definir uma pergunta de segurança. O menu Profile Settings pode limitar o acesso a widgets. • Caso se esqueça do Profile PIN pode responder a uma Security Question que está associada ao seu perfil. • Um perfil que tenha o indicador Limit Profile ligado não lhe permite instalar novos widgets. Defina o PIN do proprietário para utilizar esta função. N Para definir o PIN do proprietário, consulte ‘Administrative Controls’. O menu System Settings permite-lhe : • Modifique a Location e defina o zip Code (apenas EUA) para adaptar o conteúdo à sua região. • Repeat Tutorial apresentado durante a configuração guiada. • Restore Factory Settings para eliminar todas as configurações e informações dos widgets. No menu Administrative Controls pode : • Definir o intervalo de Screen Saver para evitar danificar o ecrã. • Create Owner PIN e definir a Security Question para controlar outros perfis. • Create um novo Profile que pode ser configurado com um conjunto diferente de widgets. • Eliminar um perfil existente. A partir do widget Profile pode Sign in to Yahoo!® utilizando a Yahoo! ID. • Se tiver uma ID da Yahoo!, pode aceder ao seu conteúdo personalizado da Yahoo!® TV Widgets • Todos os Widgets TV da Yahoo! que estão instalados são automaticamente registados no seu perfil da Yahoo! ID. • Se não tiver uma conta Yahoo!, visite www.yahoo.com e crie uma. • Pode não conseguir iniciar sessão com uma ID criada no website da Yahoo num país que não suporte a aplicação Internet@TV. ❑ O widget Profile Carregar no botão verde. Pode ver uma breve descrição das opções Profile Widget, Copyright Policy, Terms of Service, e Privacy Policy. BN68-02333J-POR.indb 53 10/20/2009 4:42:00 PMPortuguês - 54 Utilizar a Yahoo!® Widget Gallery Utilize a Yahoo!® Widget Gallery para adicionar mais widgets ao televisor. Veja os Widgets TV disponíveis nas categorias seguintes : • Latest Widgets : Mostra os widgets recentemente actualizados. • Yahoo!® Widgets : Apresenta os widgets disponibilizados pela Yahoo!®. • Samsung Widgets : Apresenta os widgets disponibilizados pela Samsung. • Mais Categorias : Apresenta todos os widgets por categoria. N Para instalar um widget, vá ao ecrã de detalhes, seleccione Add Widget to My Profile e carregue no botão ENTERE. O widget é instalado e fica disponível na ancoragem. ❑ Definições da opção Widget Gallery Carregue no botão verde. „ About Yahoo! Widget Gallery... Pode ver breves informações sobre Widget Gallery, Copyright Policy, Terms of Service, e Privacy Policy. No menu Definições do programador pode criar o seu próprio widget. Para obter mais informações sobre como criar o seu próprio widget, visite o nosso site para programadores no endereço http://connectedtv.yahoo.com/ Utilizar o Yahoo!® Weather Widget O Yahoo!® Weather Widget fornece-lhe informações actualizadas sobre as suas localizações meteorológicas favoritas. O conteúdo muda de forma dinâmica com as condições meteorológicas. • Carregue no botão verde do telecomando para visualizar o menu das Settings do Yahoo!® Weather Widget. • A partir do menu das Settings pode adicionar ou eliminar uma localidade sobre a qual pretende ver as informações meteorológicas. No menu Settings : • Add New City introduzindo o nome da localidade. Uma vez os resultados apresentados, seleccione a localidade que pretende e carregue no botão ENTERE. • Delete City seleccionando a localidade que pretende eliminar da lista de localidades. Carregue no botão ENTERE e confirme a eliminação. • Alterar o modo de indicação da temperatura. Pode alterar o modo de indicação da temperatura para Imperial ou Metric. Por exemplo, a opção Imperial mostra a temperatura em Fahrenheit e a opção Metric em Celsius. ❑ Crie um snippet para a localidade favorita. • Seleccione a localidade na página inicial do Yahoo!® Weather Widget e visualize as informações meteorológicas detalhadas. • Carregar no botão amarelo. • Seleccione o menu Add Snippet e carregue em ENTERE para adicionar a localidade como um snippet. ❑ Delete um snippet de uma localidade. • Iniciar o snippet. • Carregar no botão amarelo. • Seleccionar o menu Eliminar snippet e carregar em ENTERE para remover o snippet. BN68-02333J-POR.indb 54 10/20/2009 4:42:01 PMPortuguês - 55 Utilizar o Yahoo!® News Widget O Yahoo!® News Widget fornece-lhe as últimas manchetes de notícias sobre negócios, entretenimento, política, desporto, destaques e muitas outras categorias. Seleccione uma categoria, seleccione uma manchete de acordo com a categoria e visualize de forma dinâmica o sumário de notícias actualizado. Utilizar o Yahoo!® Flickr Widget O Flickr Widget pode disponibilizar-lhe o acesso às suas fotografias favoritas de amigos e família enquanto vê televisão. Partilhe as suas fotografias com a sua família no grande ecrã do seu televisor através de uma apresentação de diapositivos. • Personalize o Flickr Widget registando-se na Yahoo! ID. • Para obter informações detalhadas sobre os procedimentos de início de sessão, consulte as instruções de ‘Utilizar o widget Profile’. • Para obter mais informações sobre o Flickr, visite http://www.flickr.com. N Your Photos apresenta fotografias que registou com o website do Flickr. „ Para visualizar fotografias do Flickr numa apresentação de diapositivos : • Seleccione uma fotografia em miniatura e carregue no botão ENTERE para visualizar os detalhes da fotografia. • Iniciar apresentação de dipositivos e carregue no botão ENTERE. „ Para controlar a visualização da apresentação de diapositivos : • Carregue no botão ENTERE durante a apresentação de diapositivos. • As miniaturas das fotografias são apresentadas na parte inferior do ecrã. N Quando o controlo da apresentação de diapositivos é apresentado, pode utilizar as opções Pause, Play e Stop durante a apresentação. N Se seleccionar o menu e carregar em ENTERE, pode visualizar as informações da fotografia seleccionada. • O menu Your Sets permite-lhe visualizar fotografias que classificou no Flickr. • O menu Explore permite-lhe explorar as fotografias incluídas no website do Flickr. Pode visualizar as fotografias actualizadas diariamente. • O menu Mark as Favorite ou Remove From Favorite move as fotografias para o conjunto de fotografias favoritas ou remove as mesmas. • O menu Favorite Photos permite-lhe visualizar fotografias que classificou como favoritas. • O menu Your Contacts permite-lhe visualizar as actualizações efectuadas pela família e pelos amigos. O menu Your Groups permite-lhe seleccionar os seus grupos favoritos do website do Flickr para partilhar e desfrutar fotografias com os utilizadores da comunidade Flickr. Para configurar as definições do Yahoo!® Flickr Widget carregue no botão verde do telecomando. • O menu Time Per Slide controla a velocidade da apresentação de diapositivos. • O menu Repeat reinicia a apresentação de diapositivos desde o início após a última fotografia ser apresentada. BN68-02333J-POR.indb 55 10/20/2009 4:42:02 PMPortuguês - 56 Utilizar o Yahoo!® Finance Widget Apresenta informações sobre o mercado bolsista e as últimas notícias da bolsa com o Yahoo!® Finance Widget. Carregue no botão verde para definir as suas acções. Utilize o menu Add New Symbol para introduzir o nome de uma acção nova. • Seleccione a acção que pretende adicionar a partir dos resultados da pesquisa, seleccione o menu Adicionar símbolo e carregue no botão ENTERE. N A acção seleccionada é adicionada à lista My Stocks. • Utilize o menu Import Symbols From Yahoo!® para recuperar o portfólio do Yahoo!® Finance. - O menu Merge Symbols combina os símbolos do Yahoo!® Finance Widget com os símbolos do seu portfólio. - O menu Replace Symbols elimina os símbolos do Yahoo!® Finance Widget e substitui os mesmos por símbolos do seu portfólio. • Utilize o menu Display Format para modificar a transição da flutuação do preço das acções para Value ou Percentage. • Crie um snippet para uma acção favorita. - Seleccione o símbolo da acção na página inicial do Yahoo!® Weather Widget e visualize as informações financeiras detalhadas. - Carregar no botão amarelo. - Seleccione o menu Add Snippet e carregue em ENTERE para adicionar a acção como um snippet. • Delete um snippet - Inicia o snippet da ancoragem - Carregar no botão amarelo. - Seleccione o menu Delete Snippet e carregue em ENTERE para remover o snippet. Resolução de problemas da aplicação Internet@TV Problema Solução possível Alguns serviços widget não funcionam. • Fale com o fornecedor de serviço. • No widget, carregue no botão verde e obtenha informação sobre contactos ou consulte o website de ajuda para obter informações sobre o fornecedor de serviço widget. • Consulte a página de Ajuda do website. Alguns conteúdos de widgets são apenas em inglês. Como posso mudar o idioma? • O idioma do conteúdo widget pode ser diferente do idioma da interface de utilizador do widget. Depende do fornecedor de serviço. Após a reposição dos valores predefinidos, o serviço Yahoo Widget não funciona e é apresentada uma mensagem de aviso. • Desligue e volta a ligar o televisor após a reposição dos valores predefinidos. Em seguida, reinicie a aplicação Internet@TV. No widget Flickr, registo-me na minha conta, mas não consigo ver a minha fotografia. • Visite o website Yahoo, e active a sua conta Flickr na Yahoo! ID. No widget Profile, mudei a localidade, mas aparecem as definições anteriores. • Desligue e volte a ligar o televisor. Em seguida reinicie a aplicação Internet@TV. • Agora pode desfrutar dos serviços widget suportados na localidade alterada. BN68-02333J-POR.indb 56 10/20/2009 4:42:02 PMPortuguês - 57 Website de ajuda País Website Áustria www.samsung.com → Produkte → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Bélgica www.samsung.com → Producten → televisies → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV www.samsung.com → Produits → téléviseurs → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV República Checa www.samsung.com → Produkty → televizory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Dinamarca www.samsung.com → Produkter → stue & soveværelse → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Finlândia www.samsung.com → Tuotteet → kodinelektroniikka → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV França www.samsung.com → Produits → télévisions → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Alemanha www.samsung.com → Privatkunden → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Grécia www.samsung.com → Προϊόντα → τηλεοράσεις → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Hungria www.samsung.com → Termékek → televíziók → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Irlanda www.samsung.com → Products → Television → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Itália www.samsung.com → Prodotti → TV → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Países Baixos www.samsung.com → Producten → televisies → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Noruega www.samsung.com → Produkter → hverdagsrom & soverom → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Polónia www.samsung.com → Produkty → telewizory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Portugal www.samsung.com → Produtos para Consumidores → televisores → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Eslováquia www.samsung.com → Produkty → televízory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Espanha www.samsung.com → Productos → televisores → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Suécia www.samsung.com → Produkter → vardagsrum & sovrum → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Suíça www.samsung.com → Produits → télévisions → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV www.samsung.com → Produkte → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Reino Unido www.samsung.com → Products → Television → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Turquia www.samsung.com → Tüketici Ürünleri → televizyon → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Estónia www.samsung.com → Klientidele → Televiisorid → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Letónia www.samsung.com → Klientiem → Televizori → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Lituânia www.samsung.com → Namams → Televizoriai → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Rússia www.samsung.com → Продукты → Телевизоры → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Ucrânia www.samsung.com → Потребительские продукты → телевизоры → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV N O passo pode ser alterado posteriormente. N As ligações podem ser diferentes para países com estatuto especial. BN68-02333J-POR.indb 57 10/20/2009 4:42:02 PMPortuguês - 58 N Consoante a região, pode ser suportado apenas o inglês no serviço widget. N Se tiver algum problema ao utilizar o serviço widget, contacte o fornecedor de conteúdo. No widget, carregue no botão verde e obtenha informação sobre o contacto ou consulte o website de ajuda para obter informações sobre o fornecedor do serviço widget. N Consoante a região, pode ser suportado apenas o inglês no serviço widget. Introdução à aplicação Internet@TV O Internet@TV disponibiliza serviços widget da SAMSUNG através de uma ligação à rede. Pode alterar os conteúdos do Internet@TV consoante o fornecedor dos conteúdos. Pode aceder a várias informações, como o YouTube, através do serviço Internet@TV. N Se um determinado tipo de letra de um conteúdo fornecido pelo fornecedor de conteúdos não for suportado pelo televisor, este pode não ser visualizado normalmente. N A configuração dos widgets e dos serviços disponibilizados pode diferir consoante o país seleccionado. Após alterar o país, desligue e volte a ligar o televisor. Em seguida, pode utilizar o serviço widget suportado no país seleccionado. Se País estiver definido para Outros, o televisor não consegue reconhecer o seu país. Nesse caso, seleccione-o directamente a partir da lista de países do serviço. N Para obter mais informações sobre como configurar o seu país, consulte as instruções em ‘Função Plug & Play’. N Quando utilizar esta função, o funcionamento pode ser lento ou ter interferências, devido às condições da rede. N Antes de utilizar a aplicação Internet@TV, configure a rede. Para obter mais informações sobre como configurar a rede, consulte ‘‘Configurar a rede’. Quando executar o Internet@TV pela primeira vez, as definições básicas são utilizadas automaticamente. A actualização pode demorar alguns minutos. 1. Carregue no botão MENU. Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar Application e, em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE. 2. Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar Internet@TV e, em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE. O Carregue no botão INTERNET@ do telecomando para ver o menu Internet@TV. 3. O Acordo do utilizador é apresentado. Seleccione Agree para aceitar o acordo. 4. A Estatística e análise é apresentada. Seleccione Agree para aceitar o acordo. Configurar a aplicação Internet@TV Pode verificar e utilizar os menus relativos a Single Sign On (SSO), à gestão do sistema e às propriedades. Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar Setup e, em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE. ❑ Single Sign On Pode utilizar este menu quando criar ou eliminar a conta. Se utilizar o Single Sign On, pode controlar a sua conta, incluindo as informações relativas à conta no site dos conteúdos. Não é necessário um início de sessão adicional. N A conta é apenas para o internet@TV. „ Create Account Pode criar uma conta e estabelecer a ligação ao site do serviço desejado. N Poderá ter até 10 contas. N A conta deverá ter até 10 caracteres. N Se nenhum serviço necessitar de início de sessão, não é possível criar uma conta. „ Account Management • Service Site: Pode registar as informações de início de sessão do site do serviço (como o YouTube). • Change Password: Altere a palavra-passe da sua conta. • Delete: Elimine a conta. N Se se esquecer da palavra-passe da conta, carregue nos botões do telecomando pela sequência seguinte, que reinicia a aplicação Internet@TV : POWER (desligar) → MMUTE → 9 → 4 → 8 → POWER (ligar). Se utilizar esta função, todas as contas são eliminadas. Internet@TV BN68-02333J-POR.indb 58 10/20/2009 4:42:03 PMPortuguês - 59 ❑ System Setup N As funções Ticker Autorun, Ticker Duration podem não ser suportadas, consoante o país. „ Change the Service Lock password N A palavra-passe predefinida de um televisor novo é ‘0-0-0-0’. N Caso se esqueça da palavra-passe, carregue nos botões do telecomando pela sequência seguinte, repondo a palavra-passe para ‘0-0-0-0’ : POWER (desligar) → MMUTE → 9 → 4 → 8 → POWER (ligar). „ Service Duration Seleccione esta opção para definir o tempo de duração do serviço antes de ser apresentada a protecção de ecrã. „ Ticker Autorun → Off / On Seleccione esta opção para definir o ticker para ser ou não executado automaticamente quando liga o televisor. „ Ticker Duration Seleccione esta opção para definir o tempo de duração do serviço antes de ser apresentada a protecção de ecrã. ❑ Properties Mostra as informações sobre a aplicação Internet@TV. Pode medir a velocidade do seu serviço Internet TV utilizando a opção Measuring the speed of the Internet TV service. Utilizar o serviço Internet@TV Num widget que apresente vários menus de categoria, pode ver os conteúdos dos menus de categoria utilizando os botões ◄ e ►. „ Início de sessão da conta 1. Carregue no botão vermelho. 2. Seleccione a User account desejada e, em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE. 3. Introduza a palavra-passe. N Quando iniciar sessão, a conta de utilizador é apresentada no ecrã. N Pelo menos uma ou mais contas devem estar registadas para iniciar sessão. Se pretender criar uma conta, consulte ‘Configurar a aplicação Internet@TV’. „ Utilizar a opção Widget Gallery Pode utilizar as opções Run Service, Lock, Install Service no widget existente e pode ver a descrição do serviço widget que não está instalado. Na aplicação Internet@TV, pode adicionar e utilizar vários widgets fornecidos pelo fornecedor do serviço. As condições podem variar consoante o fornecedor do serviço. • Run Service : Executa o serviço widget. • Lock : Define o bloqueio do serviço. • Install Service (ou Delete Service) : Instala ou elimina o serviço widget. „ Utilizar o widget YouTube Pode ver o filme fornecido pelo YouTube. Se tiver uma conta no YouTube, registe as respectivas informações através da gestão da conta. Em seguida, pode utilizar a categoria Os meus favoritos. N O menu pode ser alterado pelo serviço web. N Podem existir conteúdos inapropriados para crianças. Neste caso, utilize a função Lock na aplicação Widget Gallery. Xz~*atp‚po _z{*]lpo Xz~*[z{€wl} Xz~*Ot~n€~~po _z{*Qlz€}tp~ Xz~*Wtyvpo Xz~*]p~{zxopo Qpl€}po _zol„ <:B ^ppvtyr*U€~tnp*Opnlop~*Wlp} atp‚~*E*C; M}plvtyr*Yp‚~*Lwp}~*m„*P8Xltw atp‚~*E*C; Mzz*Szz*ty*sp*Mzl}o}zzx atp‚~*E*CE=A „ Change Mode llrrChange page U Move EOK R Return BN68-02333J-POR.indb 59 10/20/2009 4:42:03 PMPortuguês - 60 Resolução de problemas da aplicação Internet@TV Problema Solução possível Alguns serviços widget não funcionam. Consulte o fornecedor do serviço. No widget, carregue no botão verde e obtenha as informações sobre os contactos ou consulte o website de ajuda para obter informações do fornecedor do serviço widget. Consulte a página do website de ajuda. Qual é a vantagem de um único início de sessão? Se criar uma conta e registar as suas informações de início de sessão relativas ao serviço desejado, pode aceder a conteúdos pessoais sem necessitar de um início de sessão adicional. Quando ocorre um erro na rede, não posso utilizar outros menus para além do menu de definição. Se a ligação à rede não funcionar, o seu serviço pode ser limitado. Porque todos os widgets, excepto o widget de definição (widget Profile, Widget Gallery) necessitam de uma ligação à Internet. É possível ver filmes para adultos no YouTube? Geralmente, estes encontram-se excluídos da lista do menu. Mas, se utilizar a função de procura, pode vê-los. Nesse caso, se utilizar a aplicação Widget Gallery, bloqueia o serviço widget. Website de ajuda País Website Áustria www.samsung.com → Produkte → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Bélgica www.samsung.com → Producten → televisies → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV www.samsung.com → Produits → téléviseurs → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV República Checa www.samsung.com → Produkty → televizory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Dinamarca www.samsung.com → Produkter → stue & soveværelse → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Finlândia www.samsung.com → Tuotteet → kodinelektroniikka → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV França www.samsung.com → Produits → télévisions → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Alemanha www.samsung.com → Privatkunden → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Grécia www.samsung.com → Προϊόντα → τηλεοράσεις → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Hungria www.samsung.com → Termékek → televíziók → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Irlanda www.samsung.com → Products → Television → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Itália www.samsung.com → Prodotti → TV → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Países Baixos www.samsung.com → Producten → televisies → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Noruega www.samsung.com → Produkter → hverdagsrom & soverom → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Polónia www.samsung.com → Produkty → telewizory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Portugal www.samsung.com → Produtos para Consumidores → televisores → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Eslováquia www.samsung.com → Produkty → televízory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Espanha www.samsung.com → Productos → televisores → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Suécia www.samsung.com → Produkter → vardagsrum & sovrum → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Suíça www.samsung.com → Produits → télévisions → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV www.samsung.com → Produkte → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Reino Unido www.samsung.com → Products → Television → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Turquia www.samsung.com → Tüketici Ürünleri → televizyon → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Estónia www.samsung.com → Klientidele → Televiisorid → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Letónia www.samsung.com → Klientiem → Televizori → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Lituânia www.samsung.com → Namams → Televizoriai → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Rússia www.samsung.com → Продукты → Телевизоры → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV Ucrânia www.samsung.com → Потребительские продукты → телевизоры → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV N O passo pode ser alterado posteriormente. N As ligações podem ser diferentes para países com estatuto especial. BN68-02333J-POR.indb 60 10/20/2009 4:42:03 PMPortuguês - 61 Centro rede domést. O Centro rede domést. O Centro rede domést. liga televisores e telemóveis através de uma rede. Pode ver as chamadas recebidas, o conteúdo de mensagens de texto e os compromissos definidos no telemóvel através do televisor utilizando a aplicação Centro rede domést.. Além disso, pode reproduzir os conteúdos multimédia guardados no telemóvel, como vídeos, fotografias e música importando-os para o televisor através da rede. N Se o dispositivo suportar a função DLNA DMC (Digital Media Controller - Controlador multimédia digital), a função Centro rede domést. fica disponível. N Esta função é necessária para compatibilidade com o telemóvel da Samsung a ser, futuramente, lançado. Para mais informações, vá a www.samsung.com ou contacte-nos através do centro de atendimento da Samsung. Pode ser necessário instalar software adicional no dispositivo móvel. Para obter mais informações, consulte os respectivos manuais do utilizador. ❑ Ligar ao Centro rede domést. Para obter mais informações sobre as definições de rede, consulte ‘Network Setup’. „ Ligação através de uma rede Wi-Fi Ad-hoc 1. Ligue o ‘adaptador de LAN sem fios da Samsung’ à porta USB1(HDD) ou USB2 do televisor. 2. Para obter mais informações sobre como configurar uma rede Ad-hoc, consulte ‘Configurar Rede’. N Para obter mais informações sobre a configuração das definições de rede do telemóvel, consulte o manual do telemóvel. 3. Configure o endereço IP, o SSID e a palavra-passe do telemóvel na opção Definições Ad-hoc do mesmo, utilizando o Nome da Rede (SSID) e a Chave de segurança (palavra-passe) apresentados no televisor. „ Ligação através de um router IP com/sem fios 1. Ligue a porta LAN do televisor ao router IP com/sem fios utilizando o cabo LAN ou ligue as portas USB1 (HDD) ou USB2 do televisor ao ‘adaptador de LAN sem fios da Samsung’. N Para obter mais informações sobre os procedimentos de configuração do router com/sem fios e do telemóvel, consulte o manual do dispositivo correspondente. Centro rede domést. Painel lateral do televisor Adaptador de LAN sem fios da Samsung Telemóvel ou Adaptador de LAN sem fios da Samsung Router IP sem fios Painel lateral do televisor Telemóvel ou Cabo LAN Adaptador de LAN sem fios da Samsung Telemóvel Painel lateral do televisor ou Cabo LAN Router IP sem fios BN68-02333J-POR.indb 61 10/20/2009 4:42:09 PMPortuguês - 62 Configurar a aplicação Centro rede domést. ❑ Mensag. / Média Mostra uma lista de telemóveis que foram configurados com este televisor para utilizar a função Mensag ou Média. N A função Media encontra-se disponível noutros dispositivos móveis que suportem DLNA DMC. „ Permit. Autoriza o telemóvel. „ Recus. Bloqueia o telemóvel. „ Elimin. Elimina o telemóvel da lista. N Esta função elimina apenas o nome da lista. Se o dispositivo móvel eliminado for ligado ou tentar estabelecer uma ligação com o televisor, pode aparecer na lista. ❑ Config. „ Mensag. → Ligado / Deslig. Pode determinar se pretende utilizar a função Mensag. (as chamadas recebidas, o conteúdos de mensagens de texto e os compromissos definidos no telemóvel). „ Média → Ligado / Deslig. Pode definir se pretende utilizar a função multimédia que reproduz os conteúdos (vídeos, fotografias, música) a partir do telemóvel. „ Nome de TV Pode definir o nome do televisor para conseguir encontrar facilmente o televisor no dispositivo móvel. N Se seleccionar Ent. utiliz., pode escrever o nome do televisor com o teclado no ecrã. Voltar Sair Centro rede domést. 111-1234-5671 : Permit. 111-1234-5672 : Permit. 111-1234-5673 : Recus. 111-1234-5674 : Recus. Mensag. Média Configurar Voltar Sair Centro rede domést. Mensag. : Lig. Média : Lig. Nome de TV : TV Mensag. Média Configurar Utilizar a função Mensag. Com esta função, pode visualizar as chamadas recebidas, o conteúdo de mensagens de texto e os compromissos definidos no telemóvel através da janela de alarme enquanto vê televisão. N Para desactivar esta janela de alarme da função Mensag. defina Mensag. para Deslig. na opção Config. do Centro rede domést.. N A janela de alarme aparece durante 20 segundos. Se não carregar em qualquer tecla ou se Cancelar estiver seleccionado, aparece até três vezes em intervalos de 5 minutos. N Se seleccionar OK, ou se OK não for seleccionado nas três vezes em que a mensagem aparece, esta é eliminada. A mensagem não é eliminada do telemóvel. N Pode ver a janela de alarme simples enquanto utiliza várias aplicações, como o Media Play, Contents Library, etc. Neste caso, para ver os conteúdos da mensagem, mude para o modo de visualização TV. N Se for apresentada a mensagem de um telemóvel desconhecido, seleccione o telemóvel no item Mensag. do Centro rede domést. e seleccione Recus. para bloquear o telefone. ❑ Visualizar mensagem Se receber uma nova mensagem de texto (SMS) enquanto vê televisão, aparece a janela de alarme. Se clicar no botão OK, o conteúdo da mensagem é apresentado. N Pode configurar as definições de visualização dos conteúdos das mensagens de texto (SMS) no telemóvel. Para obter mais informações sobre os procedimentos, consulte o manual do telemóvel. N Alguns caracteres especiais podem aparecer em branco ou corrompidos. ❑ Alarme de chamada recebida Se receber uma chamada enquanto vê televisão, aparece a janela de alarme. ❑ Alarme de compromisso A janela de alarme aparece enquanto vê televisão e mostra os compromissos registados. N Pode configurar as definições de visualização dos conteúdos de compromisso no telemóvel. Para obter mais informações sobre os procedimentos, consulte o manual do telemóvel. N Alguns caracteres especiais podem aparecer em branco ou corrompidos. husband SMS Nova mensagem recebida Quer ver os detalhes? OK Canc. BN68-02333J-POR.indb 62 10/20/2009 4:42:13 PMPortuguês - 63 Utilizar a função Média Aparece uma janela de alarme a informar o utilizador de que os conteúdos multimédia (vídeos, fotografias, música) enviados do telemóvel serão apresentados no televisor. Os conteúdos são reproduzidos automaticamente 3 segundos após a janela de alarme aparecer. Se carregar no botão RETURN ou EXIT quando a janela de alarme aparece, os Conteúdos multimédia não são reproduzidos. N Para desactivar a transmissão dos conteúdos multimédia do telemóvel, defina Média para Desligado em Configurar do Centro rede domést.. N Os conteúdos podem não ser reproduzidos no televisor consoante a sua resolução e formato. ❑ Botões de controlo da aplicação Media Play Botão Operações ◄/► • Move o cursor e selecciona um item. • Enquanto reproduz um ficheiro de filme : Avança ou retrocede no ficheiro de filme. ENTER • Se carregar no botão ENTERE durante a reprodução, interrompe a mesma. • Se carregar no botão ENTERE durante a pausa, retoma a reprodução. RETURN Volta ao menu anterior. TOOLS Executa várias funções a partir dos menus Fotografia, Música e Filme. INFO Apresenta as informações do ficheiro. EXIT Pára o modo Media Play e volta ao modo TV. N Os botões ENTERE e ◄ / ► podem não funcionar consoante o tipo de conteúdos multimédia. N Se utilizar o dispositivo móvel, pode controlar a reprodução dos dados multimédia. Para obter mais informações, consulte os respectivos manuais do utilizador. Fich. méd. s. repr. de “Dispositivo desconhecido 13” BN68-02333J-POR.indb 63 10/20/2009 4:42:14 PMPortuguês - 64 Continua... Função de teletexto A maioria das estações de televisão fornece serviços de informação por escrito através da função de teletexto. A página de índice remissivo do serviço de teletexto fornece informações sobre como utilizar o serviço. Além disso, pode seleccionar várias opções de acordo com os seus requisitos, utilizando os botões do telecomando. N Para que as informações de teletexto sejam apresentadas correctamente, é preciso que a recepção dos canais se processe em boas condições. Caso contrário, podem faltar informações ou podem não aparecer algumas páginas. 1 : (sair) Sair da visualização do teletexto. 2 6 (índice remissivo) Botão utilizado para ver a página de índice remissivo (conteúdos) a qualquer momento em que estiver a ver o teletexto. 3 5 (mostrar) Botão utilizado para mostrar o texto oculto (respostas a questionários, por exemplo). Para ver o ecrã normal, carregue novamente neste botão. 4 4 (tamanho) Carregue neste botão para ver as letras com o dobro do tamanho na metade superior do ecrã. Para ver a metade inferior do ecrã, carregue novamente neste botão. Para ver o ecrã normal, carregue novamente neste botão. 5 / (apresentar/combinar teletexto) Carregue neste botão para activar o modo de teletexto depois de seleccionar o canal que disponibiliza o serviço de teletexto. Carregue duas vezes neste botão para sobrepor o ecrã de transmissão actual ao teletexto. 6 8 (memorizar) Botão utilizado para memorizar páginas de teletexto. 7 1 (página secundária) Botão utilizado para ver a página secundária disponível. 8 2 (subir página) Botão utilizado para ver a página de teletexto seguinte. 9 3 (descer página) Botão utilizado para ver a página de teletexto anterior. 0 0 (modo) Carregue neste botão para seleccionar o modo de teletexto (LIST/FLOF). Se carregar neste botão no modo LIST, muda para o modo de memorização de lista. No modo de lista de memorização, pode guardar a página de teletexto na lista utilizando o botão 8(memorizar). ! 9 (parar) Botão utilizado para manter o ecrã numa determinada página, se esta estiver ligada a várias páginas secundárias que aparecem automaticamente de forma sequencial. Para continuar, carregue novamente neste botão. @ 7 (cancelar) Botão utilizado para ver a emissão enquanto procura uma página. # Botões coloridos (vermelho/verde/amarelo/azul) Se a estação emissora utilizar o sistema FASTEXT, os diferentes tópicos apresentados na página de teletexto aparecem codificados com cores e podem ser seleccionados carregando nas teclas coloridas. Carregue num dos botões que corresponda à cor pretendida. A página inclui outras informações a cores que podem ser seleccionadas da mesma forma. Para ver a página anterior ou a página seguinte, carregue no botão colorido correspondente. N Pode mudar as páginas de teletexto carregando nos botões numéricos do telecomando. Recomendações para a utilização 1 3 4 5 6 2 7 8 9 0 ! @ # BN68-02333J-POR.indb 64 10/20/2009 4:42:14 PMPortuguês - 65 As páginas de teletexto estão divididas em seis categorias : Parte Conteúdo A Número da página seleccionada. B Nome da estação emissora. C Número da página actual ou indicações da procura. D Data e hora. E Texto. F Informações sobre o estado. Informações FASTEXT. N As informações do teletexto estão, muitas vezes, divididas em várias páginas apresentadas de forma sequencial às quais pode aceder : - Introduzindo o número da página - Seleccionando um título numa lista - Seleccionando um título a cores (sistema FASTEXT) O Carregue no botão TV para sair do teletexto. Especificações do kit de montagem na parede Instale o suporte de montagem na parede numa parede sólida perpendicular ao chão. Quando o fixar a outros materiais de construção, contacte o revendedor mais próximo. Se o instalar no tecto ou numa parede inclinada, este pode cair e provocar ferimentos graves. Família de produtos polegadas Espec. VESA (A * B) Parafuso padrão Quantidade Televisor LCD 19" ~22" 100 * 100 M4 4 23"~29" 200 * 100 30"~40" 200 * 200 M6 46"~55" 400 * 400 57"~70" 800 * 400 M8 80" ~ 1400 * 800 Televisor plasma 42"~ 50" 400 * 400 M8 4 58"~ 63" 600 * 400 70" ~ 800 * 400 80" ~ 1400 * 800 N Fornecemos as medidas padrão para kits de montagem na parede, como mostra a tabela acima. N Quando adquirir o nosso kit de montagem na parede, são fornecidos um manual de instalação detalhado e todas as peças necessárias para a montagem. N Não utilize parafusos com uma medida superior à padrão, pois podem danificar o interior do televisor. N No que se refere aos suportes de montagem na parede que não respeitem as especificações VESA para parafusos padrão, o comprimento dos parafusos pode variar consoante as respectivas especificações. N Não utilize parafusos que não cumpram as especificações VESA para parafusos padrão. Não aperte demasiado os parafusos, pois pode danificar o produto ou fazê-lo cair, provocando ferimentos. A Samsung não se responsabiliza por este tipo de acidentes. N A Samsung não se responsabiliza por danos no produto ou ferimentos, no caso de ser utilizado um suporte de montagem na parede que não seja VESA ou de um tipo não especificado, ou se o consumidor não respeitar as instruções de instalação do produto. N Os nossos modelos de 57” e 63” não estão em conformidade com as especificações VESA. Deste modo, deve utilizar o nosso kit de montagem na parede dedicado para este modelo. N Não exceda uma inclinação de 15 graus quando montar este televisor. Não instale o seu kit de montagem na parede enquanto o televisor estiver ligado. Pode provocar ferimentos resultantes de choques eléctricos. BN68-02333J-POR.indb 65 10/20/2009 4:42:14 PMPortuguês - 66 Preparação antes da instalação do suporte de montagem na parede 1. Instale o suporte de montagem na parede com um intervalo de torque de 15 kg/cm ou inferior. As peças podem danificar-se se o torque não tiver o intervalo especificado. 2. O kit de acessórios inclui um anel de suporte [2] para instalar um suporte de montagem na parede de outro fabricante num televisor Samsung. (Caso B) N Introduza os parafusos no respectivo orifício [1] quando instalar o suporte de montagem na parede. Como montar a base de suporte Aviso Prenda bem o suporte do televisor antes de o mover, porque o suporte pode cair e causar lesões graves. N O televisor deve ser transportado por duas ou mais pessoas. Nunca deite o televisor no chão, porque pode danificar o ecrã. Mantenha sempre o televisor na vertical. Fixe bem o televisor à base com os parafusos fornecidos. (A parte exterior do aparelho pode ser diferente da mostrada na imagem.) Se quiser instalar o televisor na parede, feche a tampa (➊) na parte de ligação da base de suporte com dois parafusos para a ocultar. (PS50B650) (PS58B680/PS63B680) Caso A. Instalar o suporte de montagem na parede SAMSUNG Caso B. Instalar o suporte de montagem na parede de outro fabricante BN68-02333J-POR.indb 66 10/20/2009 4:42:18 PMPortuguês - 67 Se puxar, empurrar ou subir para o televisor pode provocar a queda do mesmo. Em especial, certifique-se de que as crianças não se penduram nem desestabilizam o televisor, o que poderia provocar a queda do mesmo e resultar em acidentes graves ou morte. Siga todas as precauções de segurança fornecidas no folheto de segurança incluído. Para uma maior estabilidade, instale o dispositivo antiqueda por razões de segurança, como descrito em seguida. ❑ Para evitar a queda do televisor 1. Introduza os parafusos nos grampos e aparafuse-os com firmeza à parede. Verifique se os parafusos foram bem aparafusados à parede. N Pode necessitar de material adicional, tal como uma bucha, consoante o tipo de parede. N Uma vez que os grampos, parafusos e fios necessários não são fornecidos, adquira-os em separado. 2. Retire os parafusos da parte central traseira do televisor, introduza-os nos grampos e, em seguida, aperte novamente os parafusos no televisor . N Os parafusos podem não ser fornecidos com o produto. 3. Ligue os grampos fixados ao televisor e os grampos fixados à parede com um fio forte e, em seguida, aperte bem o fio. N Instale o televisor perto da parede para que este não caia para trás. N É mais seguro ligar o fio de modo a que os grampos fixados à parede estejam ao mesmo nível ou abaixo dos grampos fixados ao televisor. N Desaperte o fio antes de transportar o televisor. 4. Verifique se todas as ligações estão devidamente presas. Verifique regularmente as ligações para evitar qualquer sinal de gasto ou falha. Se tiver alguma dúvida sobre a segurança das suas ligações, contacte um instalador profissional. Fixar o televisor à parede Manter um espaço de instalação seguro Mantenha as distâncias recomendadas, entre o produto e outros objectos (por exemplo, uma parede) para garantir a ventilação adequada. Caso contrário, pode provocar um incêndio ou danificar o produto devido ao aumento de temperatura no interior do mesmo. Instale o produto de modo a que as distâncias recomendadas, assinaladas na figura seguinte, sejam respeitadas. N Se utilizar uma base ou suporte para montagem na parede, utilize apenas as peças fornecidas pela Samsung Electronics. - O facto de utilizar peças fornecidas por outro fabricante, pode resultar em danos materiais ou ferimentos graves em caso de queda do produto. - O facto de utilizar peças fornecidas por outro fabricante, pode resultar em danos materiais ou provocar um incêndio devido ao aumento de temperatura no interior do produto por ventilação inadequada. N O aspecto exterior pode ser diferente, dependendo do produto. „ Se instalar o produto com uma base „ Se instalar o produto com um suporte para montagem na parede 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 경고 주의 경고 주의 parede parede BN68-02333J-POR.indb 67 10/20/2009 4:42:19 PMPortuguês - 68 Resolução de problemas Se tiver alguma dúvida sobre o televisor, consulte primeiro esta lista. Se nenhuma destas sugestões para resolução de problemas se aplicar, consulte o site ‘www.samsung.com’ e, em seguida, clique em Assistência ou contacte o Centro de atendimento na lista da última página. N A actualização de firmware pode ser a primeira solução possível para os seus problemas. Problema Solução possível Qualidade de imagem Primeiro, execute o Teste de imagem para confirmar se o televisor está a apresentar o teste de imagem correctamente. * Vá para MENU → Assistência → Auto-diagnóstico → Teste de Imagem Se a imagem de teste for apresentada correctamente, a imagem de má qualidade pode ser provocada pela fonte ou sinal. A imagem do televisor não parece ser de tão boa qualidade como na loja. • Se tiver uma caixa de televisão por cabo/set top box analógica, actualize para uma set top box. Utilize cabos HDMI ou de Componente para obter uma qualidade de imagem HD. • Subscritor de cabo/satélite : Tente estações HD (Alta Definição) a partir de canais codificados. • Ligação antena : Tente estações HD após executar a memorização automática N Vários canais HD são actualizados a partir de conteúdos SD (Definição standard). • Ajuste a resolução de saída de vídeo da caixa de televisão por cabo/set top box para 1080i ou 720p. A imagem está distorcida: macrobloco, pequeno bloco, pontos, pixelização. • A compressão de conteúdos de vídeo pode causar uma distorção na imagem, especialmente nas imagens de movimentos rápidos como no desporto e filmes de acção. • Um nível de sinal baixo ou uma má qualidade pode causar distorção de imagem. Isto não é um problema do televisor. Cor errada ou inexistente com a ligação de Componente. • Certifique-se de que os cabos de Componente estão ligados às tomadas correctas. Ligações incorrectas ou soltas podem provocar problemas na cor ou o ecrã pode ficar em branco. Cor e brilho fracos. • Ajuste as opções de Imagem no menu TV (Modo de imagem, Cor, Brilho, Nitidez). • Ajuste a opção Poupança de energia no menu Configurar. • Tente a reposição de imagem para visualizar as predefinições da imagem. (Vá para MENU → Imagem → Reposição de imagem) Linha pontilhada na extremidade do ecrã. • Se o tamanho da imagem estiver definido para Ajustar ao ecrã, altere para 16:9. • Altere a resolução da caixa de televisão por cabo/set top box. A imagem é a preto e branco apenas com entrada AV (Composto). • Ligue o cabo de vídeo (amarelo) à tomada verde da entrada de componente 1 do televisor. A imagem fica bloqueada ou distorcida quando muda de canais ou a imagem está atrasada. • Se estiver ligado a uma caixa de televisão por cabo, tente reiniciar a caixa de televisão por cabo. (ligue novamente o cabo de CA e espere até que a caixa de televisão por cabo reinicie. Pode demorar até 20 minutos) • Defina a resolução de saída da caixa de televisão por cabo para 1080i ou 720p. Qualidade do som Primeiro, execute o Teste de som para confirmar se o áudio do televisor está a funcionar correctamente. * Vá para MENU → Assistência → Auto-diagnóstico → Teste de som Se o áudio estiver a funcionar correctamente, o problema de som pode ser provocado pela fonte ou sinal. Não se ouve som ou o som é demasiado baixo mesmo com o volume no máximo. • Verifique o volume do dispositivo (caixa de televisão por cabo/set top box, DVD, Blu-ray, etc.) ligado ao televisor. Em seguida, ajuste o volume do televisor. A imagem é boa, mas não tem som. • Defina a opção Seleccionar Altifalante para Altifalante do televisor no menu do som. • Certifique-se de que os cabos de áudio do dispositivo externo estão ligados às tomadas de entrada de áudio correctas no televisor. • Verifique a opção de saída de áudio do dispositivo ligado. Ex) Pode ser necessário alterar a opção de áudio da caixa de televisão por cabo para HDMI quando tiver o cabo HDMI ligado ao televisor. • Se estiver a utilizar um cabo DVI para HDMI, é necessário um cabo de áudio suplementar. • Desactive a função SRS se definir o volume acima do valor 30. • Remova a ficha da tomada dos auscultadores (se disponível no televisor). Ruído nos auscultadores. • Verifique as ligações dos cabos. Certifique-se de que um cabo de vídeo não está ligado à entrada de áudio. • Para ligações por antena/cabo, verifique a intensidade do sinal. Um nível de sinal baixo pode causar distorção de imagem. Continua... BN68-02333J-POR.indb 68 10/20/2009 4:42:19 PMPortuguês - 69 Problema Solução possível Sem imagem, sem vídeo O televisor não liga. • Certifique-se de que o cabo de alimentação CA está ligado correctamente à tomada de parede e ao televisor. • Verifique se a tomada de parede está a funcionar devidamente. • Tente carregar no botão de alimentação no televisor para ter a certeza de que o telecomando está a funcionar correctamente. Se o televisor ligar, o problema pode ser causado pelo telecomando. Para resolver o problema do telecomando, consulte "O telecomando não funciona" abaixo. O televisor desliga-se automaticamente. • Verifique se o Temporizador está definido para Lig. no menu Configurar. • Se ligar o televisor ao PC, verifique as definições de alimentação do PC. • Certifique-se de que o cabo de alimentação CA está ligado correctamente à tomada de parede e ao televisor. • Se não houver qualquer sinal durante 10 a 15 minutos com a ligação por antena/ cabo, o televisor desliga-se. Sem imagem/vídeo. • Verifique as ligações dos cabos. (remova e ligue novamente todos os cabos do televisor e dispositivos externos) • Defina a saída de vídeo do dispositivo externo (cabo/set top box, DVD, Blu-ray, etc.) para corresponder às ligações de entrada do televisor. Por exemplo, saída do dispositivo externo : HDMI, entrada do televisor : HDMI. • Certifique-se de que o dispositivo está ligado. • Certifique-se de que selecciona a fonte correcta do televisor, carregando no botão SOURCE do telecomando. • Reinicie o dispositivo ao voltar a ligar o cabo de alimentação do dispositivo. Ligação RF (cabo/antena) Impossível receber todos os canais. • Certifique-se de que o cabo de antena está correctamente ligado. • Tente Plug & Play para adicionar canais disponíveis à lista de canais. Vá para MENU → Configurar → Plug & Play e aguarde até que todos os canais disponíveis sejam memorizados. • Verifique se a antena está na posição correcta. A imagem está distorcida: macrobloco, pequeno bloco, pontos, pixelização. • A compressão de conteúdos de vídeo pode causar uma distorção na imagem, especialmente nas imagens de movimentos rápidos como no desporto e filmes de acção. • Um nível de sinal baixo pode causar distorção de imagem. Isto não é um problema do televisor. Ligação ao PC Mensagem "Modo não suportado". • Defina a resolução de saída e frequência do computador para que corresponda às resoluções suportadas pelo televisor. O computador é sempre apresentado na lista de fontes mesmo que não esteja ligado. • Isto é normal; o computador é sempre apresentado na lista de fontes mesmo que um computador não esteja ligado. O vídeo está a funcionar correctamente, mas não há áudio com ligação HDMI. • Verifique as definições da saída de áudio no seu computador. Ligação de rede Falha de ligação da rede sem fios. • É necessária uma chave anticópia USB sem fios da Samsung para utilizar a rede sem fios. • Certifique-se de que a opção Tipo de rede está definida para Sem fios. • O televisor deve estar ligado a um router IP sem fios. Outros A imagem não é apresentada em ecrã inteiro. • Serão apresentadas barras pretas em ambos os lados nos canais HD sempre que forem apresentados conteúdos SD (4:3) actualizados. • Serão apresentadas barras pretas na parte superior e inferior dos filmes que tenham um formato diferente do seu televisor. • Ajuste a opção de tamanho da imagem no seu dispositivo externo ou televisor para ecrã inteiro. O telecomando não funciona. • Substitua as pilhas do telecomando com a polaridade correcta (+ -). • Limpe a janela de transmissão localizada na parte superior do telecomando. • Tente apontar o telecomando directamente para o televisor a uma distância de 1,5 m a 1,8 m. Continua... BN68-02333J-POR.indb 69 10/20/2009 4:42:20 PMPortuguês - 70 Problema Solução possível O televisor plasma está a emitir um zumbido. • Normalmente, os televisores plasma emitem um ligeiro zumbido. Isto é normal. Este ruído deve-se às cargas eléctricas que são utilizadas para criar as imagens no ecrã. • Se o zumbido for muito forte, a definição do brilho do televisor pode estar demasiado elevada. Tente reduzir a definição do brilho. • Também pode surgir um zumbido forte, se a parte traseira do televisor plasma estiver demasiado perto de uma parede ou de qualquer outra superfície dura. Tente igualmente redireccionar os cabos de ligação. • Uma montagem incorrecta na parede pode provocar ruído excessivo. Problemas de retenção de imagem (Queimadura) • Para minimizar a possibilidade de queimadura de ecrã, este aparelho está equipado com tecnologia de redução de queimadura de ecrã. A tecnologia Pixel Shift permitelhe regular o movimento da imagem para cima/baixo (Linha vertical) e lateralmente (Ponto horizontal). Não é possível controlar o volume nem ligar/desligar o televisor com o telecomando da caixa de televisão por cabo/set top box. • Programe o telecomando da caixa de televisão por cabo/set top box para funcionar com o televisor. Consulte o manual do utilizador do dispositivo por cabo/satélite para identificar o código do televisor SAMSUNG. Mensagem “Modo não suportado”. • Verifique a resolução suportada pelo televisor e ajuste a resolução de saída do dispositivo externo em conformidade. Consulte as definições de resolução neste manual. Impossível desligar o Efeito de luz no painel frontal (por baixo do logótipo da SAMSUNG) • Ajuste a opção de efeito de luz no menu configurar. As opções são : Deslig., Modo Standby lig, Em visualização e Sempre. • A função Efeito de luz não está disponível em todos os modelos. Cheiro a plástico proveniente do televisor. • Este cheiro é normal e dissipa-se com o passar do tempo. A intensidade do sinal do televisor está indisponível no menu de Teste de Autodiagnóstico. • Esta função encontra-se apenas disponível para canais digitais com uma ligação de antena (RF/coaxial). O televisor está inclinado para a esquerda ou para a direita. • Remova a base do suporte do televisor e monte novamente. Não é possível montar a base do suporte. • Certifique-se de que o televisor se encontra sobre uma superfície plana. Se não conseguir retirar os parafusos do televisor, utilize uma chave de parafusos magnetizada. O menu do canal está a cinzento (indisponível). • O menu Canal está apenas disponível quando a fonte de TV está seleccionada. Perde as suas definições após 30 minutos ou sempre que o televisor for desligado. • Se o televisor estiver no modo Demo Loja, as definições de áudio e imagem são repostas a cada 30 minutos. Altere o modo Demo Loja para Uso Doméstico no procedimento Plug & Play. Carregue no botão SOURCE para seleccionar o modo TV , vá para MENU → Configurar → Plug & Play → ENTER Perda descontínua de áudio ou vídeo. • Verifique as ligações dos cabos e ligue novamente. • Este problema pode ser devido à utilização de cabos excessivamente rígidos ou finos. Certifique-se de que os cabos são suficientemente flexíveis para uma utilização a longo prazo. Para montagem na parede, recomenda-se a utilização de cabos com conectores de 90 graus. Pode ver pequenas partículas se olhar de perto para a extremidade da moldura em volta do ecrã do televisor. • Faz parte do design do produto e não constitui um defeito. O menu PIP não está disponível. • A funcionalidade PIP está apenas disponível quando visualizar uma fonte HDMI, PC ou componentes. ‘Sinal codificado’ ou ‘Sem sinal/Sinal fraco’ com CAM CARD(CI/CI+) • Verifique se o CAM tem o CI(CI+) Card colocado na ranhura da interface comum. • É normal, o televisor utiliza a função OTA (Over The Air) para actualizar o firmware transferido enquanto vê televisão. Problema de imagem/som frequente. • Verifique e altere o sinal/fonte. N Algumas das imagens e funções acima assinaladas estão disponíveis apenas em modelos específicos. BN68-02333J-POR.indb 70 10/20/2009 4:42:20 PMPortuguês - 71 Especificações As descrições e características incluídas neste folheto destinam-se apenas a fins informativos e estão sujeitas a alterações sem aviso prévio. Nome do modelo PS50B650 PS58B680 PS63B680 Tamanho do ecrã (na diagonal) 50 polegadas 58 polegadas 63 polegadas Resolução do PC (óptima) 1920 x 1080 @ 60 Hz 1920 x 1080 @ 60 Hz 1920 x 1080 @ 60 Hz Som (saída) 10 W x 2 15 W x 2 15 W x 2 Dimensões (W x H x D) Corpo Com base 1240 x 756 x 74 mm 1240 x 817 x 290 mm 1401 x 848 x 74 mm 1401 x 917 x 335 mm 1531 x 932 x 74 mm 1531 x 957 x 390 mm Peso do Corpo Com base 33 kg 38 kg 39 kg 46 kg 53 kg 61 kg Considerações ambientais Temperatura de funcionamento Humidade de funcionamento Temperatura de armazenamento Humidade de armazenamento 50 °F to 104 °F (10 °C to 40 °C) 10% to 80%, sem condensação -4 °F to 113 °F (-20 °C to 45 °C) 5% to 95%, sem condensação N Trata-se de um aparelho digital de classe B. N O design e as especificações estão sujeitos a alterações sem aviso prévio. N Para obter informações sobre a fonte de alimentação e o consumo de energia, consulte a etiqueta colada ao produto. BN68-02333J-POR.indb 71 10/20/2009 4:42:20 PMSlovenščina - 2 Navodila za uporabnike „ Zadrževanje slike na zaslonu Na plazma monitorju ne prikazujte mirujoče slike (kot je video igra ali pri povezavi zaslona PDP z računalnikom) dlje kot 2 uri, saj lahko to povzroči zadrževanje slike na zaslonu. Tako zadrževanje slike se imenuje tudi “ožig zaslona”. Da bi se izognili takemu zadrževanju slike, pri prikazovanju mirujoče slike zmanjšajte stopnjo svetlosti in kontrasta zaslona. „ Višina Zaslon PDP lahko normalno deluje na nadmorski višini pod 2000 m. Ne uporabljajte ga na nadmorski višini nad 2000 m, saj lahko pride do motenj v delovanju. „ Segrevanje zgornjega dela televizorja PDP Zgornji del izdelka se lahko pri dolgotrajni uporabi zelo segreje, ker se toplota iz izdelka odvaja skozi odprtino v zgornjem delu. To je običajno in ni posledica okvare ali napake na izdelku. Vseeno pa morate otrokom preprečiti dotikanje zgornjega dela izdelka. „ Izdelek ‘prasketa’. Televizor se pri prilagajanju okolju (na primer temperaturi in vlažnosti zraka) lahko razširja ali krči in ob tem ‘prasketa’. To je običajno in ni posledica napake na izdelku. „ Poškodovane pike Na zaslonu PDP je od 2.360.000 (slika visoke ločljivosti) do 6.221.000 (slika polne visoke ločljivosti) slikovnih pik, ki so izdelane z zelo napredno tehnologijo. Kljub temu je lahko na zaslonu nekaj svetlih ali temnih slikovnih pik. Te svetlobne pike ne bodo vplivale na delovanje izdelka. „ Televizorja ne uporabljajte pri temperaturah pod 5 °C (41 F) „ Če je na zaslonu PDP predolgo prikazana mirujoča slika, ga to lahko trajno poškoduje. Dolgotrajno gledanje televizorja LCD v formatu slike 4:3 lahko na levi in desni strani ter na sredini zaslona povzroči sledi okvirja zaradi različnega svetlobnega oddajanja na zaslonu. Predvajanje DVD-ja ali uporaba igralne konzole ima lahko podobne učinke. Garancija ne zajema poškodb, ki so nastale na tak način. „ Zakasnele slike na zaslonu. Če je na zaslonu dlje časa prikazana mirujoča računalniška slika ali slika iz video igrice, to lahko povzroči delni prikaz zakasnele slike. Ta učinek preprečite tako, da ob prikazu mirujočih slik zmanjšate ‘svetlost’ in ‘kontrast’. „ Garancija - Garancija ne zajema škode, ki jo povzroči zadrževanje slike. - Garancija ne zajema poškodb zaradi vžgane slike. „ Namestitev Za namestitev izdelka v okolju z veliko prahu, visoko ali nizko temperaturo, visoko vlažnostjo, kemičnimi snovmi ali v okoljih, kjer neprestano deluje (na primer letališče, železniška postaja), se obrnite na pooblaščeni servisni center. Če tega ne storite, lahko pride do resne poškodbe naprave. Obvestilo o digitalni televiziji 1. Funkcije, ki so povezane z digitalnim televizijskim signalom (DVB), so na voljo samo v državah/na območjih, kjer se oddajajo digitalni prizemni signali (MPEG2 IN MPEG4 AVC), ali kjer je mogoč dostop do združljive storitve kabelske televizije DVB-C (MPEG2 in MPEG4 AAC). Pri lokalnem trgovcu preverite, ali imate dostop do signala DVB-T ali DVB-C. 2. DVB-T je standard DVB evropskega konzorcija za oddajanje digitalne prizemne televizije, DVB-C pa je standard za oddajanje digitalne televizije prek kabla. V tej specifikaciji pa niso vključene nekatere funkcije, kot so EPG (elektronski programski vodnik), VOD (video na zahtevo) itd. Torej zaenkrat še niso podprte. 3. Čeprav je televizor v skladu z najnovejšima standardoma DVB-T in DVB-C [avgust 2008], ni mogoče jamčiti združljivosti s prihodnjimi sistemi digitalne prizemne televizije in digitalne kabelske televizij. 4. Nekateri ponudniki kabelske televizije morda takšno storitev dodatno zaračunavajo in se boste zato morda morali strinjati z določbami in pogoji njihovega poslovanja. 5. V nekaterih državah ali regijah nekatere funkcije digitalne televizije morda niso na voljo in digitalna kabelska televizija morda ne bo delovala pravilno pri vseh ponudnikih. 6. Za dodatne informacije se obrnite na lokalni Samsungov center za pomoč strankam. Obrnite se na SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE Če imate kakršno koli vprašanje ali komentar glede Samsungovih izdelkov, se obrnite na center SAMSUNG za pomoč strankam. (Za več informacij si oglejte hrbtno platnico.) N Slike in ilustracije v tem uporabniškem priročniku so samo za referenco. Dejanski izdelek je lahko videti drugačen. Zasnova in specifikacije izdelka se lahko spremenijo brez obvestila z namenom izboljšave delovanja izdelka. © 2009 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Vse pravice pridržane. BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 2 10/20/2009 4:54:00 PMSlovenščina - 3 Slovenščina N O T Simbol Pritisnite Opomba Gumb na dotik TOOLS Vsebina Priključitev in priprava televizorja ■ Pregled delov ............................................................................4 ■ Uporaba stojala .........................................................................4 ■ Združitev kablov ........................................................................4 ■ Ogled nadzorne plošče .............................................................5 ■ Ogled plošče s priključki............................................................6 ■ Daljinski upravljalnik ..................................................................8 ■ Vstavljanje baterij v daljinski upravljalnik...................................8 ■ Uporaba gumbov za osvetlitev daljinskega upravljalnika..........9 ■ Vklop in izklop ...........................................................................9 ■ Preklop televizorja v stanje pripravljenosti ................................9 ■ Ogled prikaza ............................................................................9 ■ Ogled menijev .........................................................................10 ■ Uporaba gumba TOOLS .........................................................10 ■ Funkcija Plug & Play ...............................................................10 Upravljanje kanalov ■ Shranjevanje kanalov ............................................................ 11 ■ Upravljanje kanalov .................................................................13 Upravljanje slike ■ Spreminjanje slikovnih nastavitev ...........................................15 ■ Nastavitev televizorja z računalnikom .....................................18 ■ Računalniški zaslon.................................................................19 Nadzor zvoka ■ Spreminjanje zvočnega standarda ..........................................20 ■ Izbira zvočnega načina............................................................21 Opis funkcij ■ Nastavitev časa .......................................................................22 ■ Konfiguriranje menija Setup ....................................................23 ■ Ogled slike v sliki (PIP)............................................................25 Podprti / Vhod ■ Podprti program.......................................................................26 ■ Seznam virov / urejanje imena ................................................27 Omrežna ■ Omrežna povezava .................................................................28 ■ Nastavitev omrežja..................................................................30 Predvajanje predstavnosti ■ Priključitev naprave USB.........................................................33 ■ Uporaba funkcije predvajanja predstavnosti ...........................34 ■ Urejanje seznama fotografij / glasbe / filmov...........................35 ■ Meni z možnostmi za seznam fotografij / filmov / glasbe ........36 ■ Meni z možnostmi za diaprojekcije / predvajanje glasbe / predvajanje filmov ...................................................................37 ■ Ogled fotografije ali diaprojekcije ............................................38 ■ Predvajanje glasbe..................................................................39 ■ Predvajanje filmske datoteke .................................................40 ■ Uporaba menija nastavitve......................................................41 Predvajanje predstavnosti DLNA ■ Nastavitev omrežja DLNA .......................................................42 ■ Namestitev aplikacije DLNA....................................................42 ■ Uporaba aplikacije DLNA ........................................................43 ■ Uporaba funkcije DLNA...........................................................44 Anynet + ■ Povezava naprav, ki podpirajo Anynet + ...................................45 ■ Nastavitev sistema Anynet + Anynet + .......................................46 ■ Preklapljanje med napravami, ki podpirajo Anynet + ................46 ■ Snemanje ................................................................................47 ■ Poslušanje prek sprejemnika ..................................................48 ■ Odpravljanje težav s funkcijo Anynet + ....................................48 Knjižnica vsebin ■ Aktiviranje knjižnice vsebin......................................................49 ■ Uporaba možnosti knjižnice vsebin .........................................50 Internet@TV ■ Uvod v Internet@TV................................................................51 ■ Urejanje delčkov v sidrišču......................................................53 ■ Uporaba gradnika profila .........................................................53 ■ Uporaba galerije gradnikov Yahoo!®.......................................54 ■ Uporaba gradnika informacij o vremenu Yahoo!®...................54 ■ Uporaba gradnika novic Yahoo!®............................................55 ■ Uporaba gradnika storitve Flickr Yahoo!®...............................55 ■ Uporaba gradnika finančnih informacij Yahoo!® .....................56 ■ Odpravljanje težav s storitvijo internet@TV ...........................56 ■ Spletno mesto s pomočjo ........................................................57 Internet@TV ■ Uvod v Internet@TV................................................................58 ■ Nastavitev Internet@TV ..........................................................58 ■ Uporaba storitve Internet@TV.................................................59 ■ Odpravljanje težav s storitvijo internet@TV ............................60 ■ Spletno mesto s pomočjo ........................................................60 Središče domačega omrežja ■ Središče domačega omrežja...................................................61 ■ Nastavitev središča domačega omrežja..................................62 ■ Uporaba funkcije sporočil ........................................................62 ■ Uporaba funkcije predstavnosti ...............................................63 Priporočila za uporabo ■ Funkcija teleteksta...................................................................64 ■ Specifikacije opreme za pritrditev na steno (VESA)................65 ■ Priprava na namestitev opreme za pritrditev na steno............66 ■ Navodila za sestavljanje stojala ..............................................66 ■ Pritrditev televizorja na steno ..................................................67 ■ Zaščita prostora za namestitev ...............................................67 ■ Odpravljanje težav...................................................................68 ■ Specifikacije ............................................................................71 BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 3 10/20/2009 4:54:00 PMSlovenščina - 4 Združitev kablov Kable ovijte z dralom za kable, tako da jih ni mogoe videti skozi prozorno stojalo. Uporaba stojala N PDP naj nosita vsaj dve osebi. PDP-ja nikoli ne postavite tako, da je zaslon obrnjen navzdol, ker lahko tako poškodujete zaslon. PDP naj bo vedno pokonci. N PDP je mogoče obračati v levo ali v desno pod kotom 20 stopinj. -20° ~ 20° Pregled delov Uporabniška navodila Daljinski upravljalnik/ bateriji AAA (2ea) Napajalni kabel Čistilna krpica Držalo za kable Držalni obroč (4ea) (oglejte si stran 66) CD s programom Vijaka (4ea) (samo PS50B650) (oglejte si stran 66) Spodnji pokrov (samo PS50B650) (oglejte si stran 66) Spodnji pokrov/vijaka (2ea) (samo PS58B680 / PS63B680) (oglejte si stran 66) Feritni obroč za kabel za slušalke Feritni obroč za napajalni kabel (samo PS58B680T6P / PS63B680) Feritni obroč za napajalni kabel Garancijska kartica/ Varnostni priročnik (Ni na voljo povsod) N Feritni obroč Feritni obroči ščitijo kable pred motnjami. Ko želite povezati kabel, odprite feritni obroč in ga namestite okoli kabla blizu vtiča, kot je prikazano na sliki. Priključitev in priprava televizorja (samo PS58B680T6P/ PS63B680) BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 4 10/20/2009 4:54:03 PMSlovenščina - 5 Ogled nadzorne plošče N Barva in oblika izdelka sta odvisni od modela. Gumbi na sprednji plošči. Za upravljanje se dotaknite posameznega gumba. (PS58B680 / PS63B680) (PS50B650) 1 SOURCE Za preklapljanje med vsemi razpololjivimi vhodnimi viri (TV, Ext1, Ext2, AV, Component, PC, HDMI1, HDMI2/DVI, HDMI3, HDMI4, USB). N Na meniju na zaslonu ta gumb uporabljajte kot gumb ENTERE na daljinskem upravljalniku. 2 MENU Pritisnite za ogled menija na zaslonu s funkcijami televizorja. 3 + – Pritisnite za znižanje ali zvišanje glasnosti. Na meniju na zaslonu uporabljajte gumba + – kot uporabljate gumba ◄ in ► na daljinskem upravljalniku. 4 CH Pritisnite za menjavo kanalov. Na meniju na zaslonu uporabljajte gumb CH , kot uporabljate gumba ▲ in ▼ na daljinskem upravljalniku. Z gumbom CH vklopite televizor brez uporabe daljinskega upravljalnika. 5 INDIKATOR NAPAJANJA Utripa in se izklopi, ko je napajanje vklopljeno, in začne svetiti v stanju pripravljenosti. 6 (POWER) Pritisnite za vklop in izklop televizorja. 7 SENZOR DALJINSKEGA UPRAVLJALNIKA Daljinski upravljalnik usmerite proti tej točki na televizorju. 8 ZVOČNIKA BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 5 10/20/2009 4:54:03 PMSlovenščina - 6 Ogled plošče s priključki N Kadarkoli na televizor priključite avdio ali video sistem, zagotovite, da so vsi elementi izklopljeni. N Ko priključujete zunanjo napravo, mora biti barva priključka enaka barvi kabla. N Barva in oblika izdelka sta odvisni od modela. 1 LAN Na ta vrata povežite kabel LAN, da se povežete z omrežjem. 2 POWER IN Priklopite priloženi napajalni kabel. 3 COMPONENT IN Avdio (AUDIO L/R) in video (Y / PB / PR) vhodi za komponento. 4 PC IN (AUDIO / PC) Za povezavo z vtičnico za video in avdio izhod na računalniku. 5 EXT 1, EXT 2 Vhodi oziroma izhodi za zunanje naprave, kot so videorekorder, predvajalnik DVD, video igralna naprava ali predvajalnik video plošč. N V načinu zunanje naprave izhod digitalne televizije podpira samo video in avdio MPEG SD. N V načinu zunanje naprave Game mode ni na voljo. Specifikacije za vhod/izhod Spojnik Vhod Izhod Video Avdio(L/R) RGB Video + Avdio(L/R) EXT 1 ✔ ✔ ✔ Na voljo je samo izhod televizorja ali DTV. EXT 2 ✔ ✔ Izhod lahko izberete. 6 SLUŠALKE Na televizor lahko priključite slušalke, da televizijski program, ki ga gledate, ne bi motil ostalih oseb v prostoru. N Daljša uporaba slušalk pri večji glasnosti lahko poškoduje sluh 7 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) Za povezavo z digitalno avdio komponento. 8 SERVICE Spojnik za servis. 9 AUDIO OUT(AUDIO R/L) Zvočne signale RCA iz televizorja priklopite na zunanji vir, na primer avdio sistem. 0 ANT IN Koaksialni spojnik 75 Ω za anteno / kabelsko omrežje. ! HDMI IN 1, 2(DVI), 3 Za povezavo HDMI-ja s HDMI-jem ne potrebujete dodatne avdio povezave. - Če uporabljate kabel HDMI/DVI, uporabite vtičnico HDMI IN 2(DVI). N Kaj je HDMI? - Večpredstavnostni vmesnik z visoko razločljivostjo omogoča prenos digitalnih video podatkov z visoko razločljivostjo in večkanalni digitalni avdio. - Spojnik HDMI/DVI podpira povezavo DVI do razširjene naprave z ustreznim kablom (ni priložen). HDMI in DVI se razlikujeta v tem, da je naprava HDMI manjša, da ima vgrajeno funkcijo kodiranja HDCP (zaščita pred kopiranjem za širokopasovno digitalno vsebino) in da podpira večkanalni digitalni avdio. DVI AUDIO IN Avdio izhodi DVI za zunanje naprave Podprti modeli za HDMI/DVI in komponento 480i 480p 576i 576p 720p 1080i 1080p HDMI/DVI 50Hz X X X O O O O HDMI/DVI 60Hz X O X X O O O Komponento O O O O O O O TV Zadnja plošča Kabelsko televizijsko omrežje ali ali 2 3 4 5 7 9 ! 0 6 8 1 BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 6 10/20/2009 4:54:06 PMSlovenščina - 7 1 Reža COMMON INTERFACE V režo vstavite CI(CI+) (Common Interface) kartico za splošni vmesnik. (oglejte si stran 23) - Če pri nekaterih kanalih ni vstavljena CI(CI+) kartico za splošni vmesnik, se na zaslonu prikaže sporočilo Scrambled Signal. - V 2–3 minutah se prikažejo informacije o združitvi, tj. telefonska številka, CI(CI+) kartico ID, za splošni vmesnik, ID gostitelja, in druge informacije. Če se prikaže sporočilo o napaki, se obrnite na ponudnika storitev. - Ko je konfiguracija informacij o kanalih končana, se prikaže sporočilo Updating Completed, kar pomeni, da je seznam kanalov posodobljen. - Pri nekaterih modelih se ob vstavitvi kartice za splošni vmesnik prikaže poziv za geslo za Parental Lock. - Pri nekaterih modelih se pri programih za odrasle (18 let in več) poziv za geslo prikaže tudi, če je možnost Parental Lock nastavljena na Allow All. N CI(CI+)-Kartico za splošni vmesnik vstavite v smeri, ki je označena na njej. N Kartica za splošni vmesnik (CI+) ni podprta v nekaterih državah, regijah in pri nekaterih oddajnih postajah. Preverite pri pooblaščenem prodajalcu. N Funkcija CI+ je na voljo samo pri modelu PS********P. Če ste naleteli na težave, se obrnite na ponudnika storitev. 2 USB 1(HDD), USB 2 Za ogled foto datotek (JPEG) in predvajanje zvočnih datotek (MP3) in filmskih datotek priključite napravo za množično shranjevanje USB. Z omrežjem SAMSUNG se lahko povežete brezžično. Vtičnica USB 1 se uporablja tudi kot vtičnica HDD. HDD (trdi disk) je naprava, ki shranjuje digitalno šifrirane podatke. 3 HDMI IN 4 Za povezavo z vtičnico HDMI naprave z izhodom HDMI. 4 AV IN (VIDEO, AUDIO L/R) Video in avdio vhodi za zunanje naprave, kot sta videokamera ali videorekorder. N Barva in oblika izdelka sta odvisni od modela. TV Stranska plošča 3 4 1 2 BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 7 10/20/2009 4:54:07 PMSlovenščina - 8 Daljinski upravljalnik Daljinski upravljalnik lahko uporabljate do oddaljenosti približno 7 m od televizorja. N Na delovanje daljinskega upravljalnika lahko vpliva močna svetloba. Vstavljanje baterij v daljinski upravljalnik 1. Odprite pokrovček na hrbtni strani daljinskega upravljalnika, kot je prikazano na sliki. 2. Vstavite dve bateriji AAA. N Poskrbite, da sta pola ‘+’ in ‘–’ baterije usmerjena skladno s prikazom v predelu za baterije. 3. Zaprite pokrov. N Če daljinskega upravljalnika ne boste uporabljali dalj časa, odstranite baterije in jih shranite na hladnem in suhem mestu. N Če daljinski upravljalnik ne deluje, preverite naslednje 1. Ali je televizor vklopljen? 2. Ali so poli baterij ‘plus’ in ‘minus’ zamenjani? 3. Ali sta bateriji prazni? 4. Ali je prišlo do izpada napajanja oziroma je napajalni kabel izključen? 5. Ali je v bližini posebna fluorescentna luč ali neonska tabla? 1 Gumb POWER (za vklop in izklop televizorja). 2 Neposredna izbira načina televizorja. 3 Številski gumbi za neposreden dostop do kanalov. 4 Pritisnite za preklop na priljubljene kanale. 5 Začasen izklop zvoka. 6 Zvišanje znižanje glasnosti 7 Izbira razpoložljivih virov. 8 Za ogled informacije o trenutnem programu. 9 Za hitro izbiro pogosto uporabljenih funkcij. 0 Za izbiro elementov menija na zaslonu in spreminjanje vrednosti menija. ! Ta funkcija omogoča gledanje televizije Internet@TV. @ Te gumbe uporabite za Channel list, Media Play, in Internet@TV, itd. $ Za prikaz seznamov kanalov na zaslonu. % Te gumbe uporabite za Channel list, Media Play in Anynet+, itd. ^ Pritisnite za osvetlitev gumbov na daljinskem upravljalniku. Ta funkcija je priročna ponoči in v temnem prostoru. (Če je gumb osvetlitve ON/OFF( ) na daljinskem upravljalniku vklopljen, se čas uporabe baterije skrajša.) & Prejšnji kanal. * Naslednji prejšnji kana ( Prikaz glavnega menija na zaslonu. ) Prikaz elektronskega programskega vodnika (EPG). a Za vrnitev na prejšnji meni. b Za izhod iz menija na zaslonu. c Ta funkcija omogoča ogled predstavnosti. d Ta funkcija omogoča ogled možnosti Content Library. e Prikaz digitalnih podnapisov. f Izbira zvočnega opisa. Funkcije teleteksta 2 Izhod iz teleteksta (odvisno od modela) 7 Izbira načina teleteksta (LIST/FLOF) 8 Prikaz teleteksta 9 Velikost teleteksta @ Izbira teme Fastext # Prikaz teleteksta/hkraten prikaz teleteksta in televizijskega programa $ Shranjevanje teleteksta & Podstran teleteksta * P :naslednja stran teleteksta P :prejšnja stran teleteksta ( Kazalo teleteksta a Zadržanje strani teleteksta b Preklic teleteksta BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 8 10/20/2009 4:54:08 PMSlovenščina - 9 Uporaba gumbov za osvetlitev daljinskega upravljalnika To funkcijo uporabite v temnem okolju in ko ne morete jasno videti gumbov na daljinskem upravljalniku. 1. Pritisnite gumb osvetlitve ON/OFF( ). N Ko ga nastavite na ON, se za trenutek vklopi osvetlitev gumba. N Če pritisnete gumb na daljinskem upravljalniku, ko je upravljalnik vklopljen, se za trenutek vklopi osvetlitev gumba. Vklop in izklop Kabel za napajanje se nahaja na hrbtni strani televizorja. 1. Napajalni kabel priključite na ustrezno vtičnico. N Indikator stanja pripravljenosti na televizorju začne svetiti. 2. Pritisnite gumb POWER P na televizorju. N Televizor lahko vklopite tudi tako, da pritisnete gumb POWER P ali TV na daljinskem upravljalniku. N Znova je izbran program, ki ste ga gledali nazadnje. 3. Pritisnite številski gumb (0–9) ali gumb za kanal navzgor/navzdol (< / >) na daljinskem upravljalniku ali pa gumb < CH> na televizorju. N Ob prvem vklopu televizorja boste pozvani, da izberete jezik, v katerem naj bodo prikazani meniji. 4. Za izklop televizorja znova pritisnite gumb POWER P. Preklop televizorja v stanje pripravljenosti Televizor lahko preklopite v stanje pripravljenosti in s tem zmanjšate porabo energije. Stanje pripravljenosti je uporabno, če želite začasno prekiniti gledanje (na primer med jedjo). 1. Pritisnite gumb POWER P na daljinskem upravljalniku. N Zaslon se izklopi in na televizorju začne svetiti rdeči indikator stanja pripravljenosti. 2. Za ponoven vklop televizorja enostavno znova pritisnite gumb POWER P, številske gumbe (0~9), gumb TV ali gumb za kanal navzgor/navzdol (< / >). N Televizorja ne puščajte v stanju pripravljenosti dlje časa (na primer, ko greste na dopust). Priporočamo tudi, da izključite napajanje in anteno. Ogled prikaza Prikaz označuje trenutni kanal in stanje določenih zvočnih in slikovnih nastavitev. O Za ogled informacij pritisnite gumb INFO. Pritisnite gumb INFO na daljinskem upravljalniku. Na televizorju se bodo prikazali kanal, vrsta zvoka in stanje določenih slikovnih in zvočnih nastavitev. • ▲, ▼: Za ogled drugih informacij o kanalu. Če se želite pomakniti na trenutno izbran kanal, pritisnite gumb ENTERE. • ◄, ►: Ogledate si lahko informacije o želeni oddaji na trenutnem kanalu. N Znova pritisnite gumb INFO ali počakajte približno 10 sekund, da prikaz samodejno izgine. DTV Air 15 abc1 18:00 ~ 6:00 18:11 Thu 6 Jan Life On Venus Avenue Unclassified No Detaild Information E Watch ' Information BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 9 10/20/2009 4:54:09 PMSlovenščina - 10 Ogled menijev 1. Ko je vklopljeno napajanje, pritisnite gumb MENU. Na zaslonu se prikaže glavni meni. Na levi strani menija so ikone: Picture, Sound, Channel, Setup, Input, Application, Support. 2. Za izbiro ene od ikon pritisnite gumb ▲ ali ▼. Za dostop do podmenija ikone pritisnite gumb ENTERE. 3. Za izhod pritisnite gumb EXIT. N Meniji na zaslonu izginejo z zaslona po približno eni minuti. Uporaba gumba TOOLS Gumb TOOLS lahko uporabljate za hitro in preprosto izbiro funkcij, ki jih pogosto uporabljate. Meni Tools se spreminja glede na uporabljeni način zunanjega vhoda. 1. Pritisnite gumb TOOLS. Prikazal se bo meni Tools. 2. S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼ izberite meni, nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE. 3. Pritiskajte gumbe ▲ / ▼ / ◄ / ► / ENTERE, da prikažete, spremenite ali uporabite izbrane elemente. Za podrobnejši opis posameznih funkcij si oglejte ustrezne strani. • Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC), oglejte si 46. stran • Picture Size, oglejte si 16. stran • Picture Mode, oglejte si 15. stran • Sound Mode, oglejte si 20. stran • Sleep Timer, oglejte si 22. stran • SRS TS HD, oglejte si 20. stran • Energy Saving, oglejte si 24. stran • Dual l ll, oglejte si 21. stran • Add to Favourite (ali Delete from Favourite), oglejte si 14. stran • PIP, oglejte si 25. stran • Auto Adjustment, oglejte si 18. stran Funkcija Plug & Play Pri prvem vklopu televizorja se samodejno prikažejo osnovne nastavitve. N Ohranjevalnik zaslona se aktivira, če medtem ko je zagnan Plug & Play, več kot 1 minuto ne pritisnete nobenega gumba na daljinskem upravljalniku. N Ohranjevalnik zaslona se aktivira, če več kot 15 minut ni signala. N Če pri nastavitvi države pomotoma izberete napačno, so lahko znaki na zaslonu narobe prikazani. 1. Pritisnite gumb POWER na daljinskem upravljalniku. Samodejno se prikaže meni Select Language the OSD. Pritisnite gumb ENTERE. S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼ izberite ustrezen jezik. Za potrditev izbire pritisnite gumb ENTERE. 2. S pritiskanjem gumba ◄ ali ► izberite Store Demo ali Home Use in nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE. N Priporočamo, da televizor nastavite na način Home Use, saj to zagotavlja najboljšo sliko v domačem okolju. N Način Store Demo je namenjen samo uporabi v trgovinah. N Če je naprava po pomoti nastavljena na način Store Demo in se želite vrniti v način Home Use (Standard): na televizorju pritisnite gumb za glasnost. Ko je na zaslonu prikaz glasnosti, pritisnite gumb MENU na televizorju in ga držite 5 sekund. 3. Pritisnite gumb ENTERE. S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼ izberite ustrezno državo. Za potrditev izbire pritisnite gumb ENTERE. N Ko uporabnik izbere državo v meniju Country, se pri nekaterih modelih prikaže dodatna možnost za nastavitev številke PIN. N Ko vnašate številko PIN, 0-0-0-0 ni na voljo. 4. Pritisnite gumb ▲ ali ▼, da shranite kanale izbrane povezave, in pritisnite gumb ENTERE. • Air : Signal običajne antene. • Cable : Signal kabelske antene. Plug & Play Select the OSD Language. Language : U Move E Enter ▲ Nederlands English Eesti ▼ Tools Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) Picture Size : Auto Wide Picture Mode : Standard Sound Mode : Custom Sleep Timer : Off SRS TS HD : Off Energy Saving : Off Dual l ll : Mono Add to Favourite U Move E Enter e Exit Mode : Standard Cell Light : 4 Contrast : 95 Brightness : 45 Sharpness : 50 Colour : 50 Tint (G/R) : G50/R50 Advanced Settings Picture BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 10 10/20/2009 4:54:10 PMSlovenščina - 11 5. S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼ izberite vir antene, ki ga želite shraniti. Pritisnite gumb ENTERE, da izberete Start. • Digital & Analogue : Digitalni in analogni kanali. channels. • Digital : Digitalni kanali. • Analogue : Analogni kanali. N Iskanje kanalov se bo samodejno začelo in končalo. N Za podrobnejši opis izbire načina Cable si oglejte poglavje, oglejte si stran 11. 6. Prikaže se sporočilo Set the Clock Mode. Pritisnite gumb ENTERE. S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼ izberite Auto in nato Pritisnite gumb ENTERE. N Če izberete Manual, se prikaže Set current date and time. (Za podrobnejši opis možnosti Manual si oglejte poglavje, oglejte si stran 22) N Če ste prejeli digitalni signal, se bo čas samodejno nastavil. 7. Prikažejo se kratka navodila How to get the best performance from your new HDTV. Pritisnite gumb ENTERE . N Ta meni je razpoložljivi HD Connection Guide v meniju Support. N Za pomik na prejšnjo ali naslednjo stran pritisnite gumb ◄ / ►. 8. Prikaže se sporočilo Enjoy your TV. N Za takojšnje gledanje televizije izberite Watch TV. N Če si želite ogledati možnost See Product Guide, pritisnite gumb ENTERE. Za ponastavitev te funkcije ... 1. Za prikaz menija pritisnite gumb MENU. S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼ izberite Setup in nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE. 2. Znova pritisnite gumb ENTERE, da izberete Plug & Play. 3. Vnesite 4-mestno kodo PIN. Privzeta koda PIN novega televizorja je ‘0-0-0-0’. N Če želite kodo PIN (Personal Identification Number) spremeniti, oglejte si stran 24. N Funkcija Plug & Play je na voljo samo v načinu TV. Shranjevanje kanalov ❑ Country „ Digital Channel : Za spreminjanje države digitalnih kanalov. „ Analogue Channel : Za spreminjanje države analognih kanalov. N Prikaže se zaslon za vnos kode PIN. Vnesite 4-mestno kodo PIN. ❑ Auto Store Poišče vse kanale aktivnih televizijskih postaj (odvisno od države) in jih shrani v pomnilnik televizorja. Televizor nastavite tako, da shrani kanale izbrane povezave. • Air : Signal običajne antene. • Cable : Signal kabelske antene. Izberete lahko vir antene za shranjevanje. • Digital & Analogue : Digitalni in analogni kanali. • Digital : Digitalni kanali. • Analogue : Analogni kanali. N Če izberete Cable, • Search Mode : Za prikaz načina iskanja. (Quick) - Network ID : Za prikaz identifikacijske kode omrežja. - Frequency : Za prikaz frekvence kanala. - Modulation : Za prikaz razpoložljivih vrednosti modulacije. - Symbol Rate : Za prikaz razpoložljivih simbolnih hitrosti. • Search Mode : Za prikaz načina iskanja. (Full, Network) - Start Frequency : Za prikaz začetnih frekvenčnih vrednosti. - End Frequency : Za prikaz končnih frekvenčnih vrednosti. - Modulation : Za prikaz razpoložljivih vrednosti modulacije. - Symbol Rate : Za prikaz razpoložljivih simbolnih hitrosti. N Če želite ustaviti izvajanje funkcije Auto Store, pritisnite gumb ENTERE. Prikaže se sporočilo Stop Auto Store?. S pritiskanjem gumba ◄ ali ► izberite Yes in nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE. Upravljanje kanalov Channel Country ► Auto Store Manual Store Cable Search Option Full Guide Mini Guide Default Guide : Full Guide Channel List Setup Plug & Play ► Menu Language : Slovenian Time Broadcast Security Network General BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 11 10/20/2009 4:54:11 PMSlovenščina - 12 ❑ Manual Store Za ročno iskanje kanala in shranjevanje le-tega v pomnilnik televizorja. „ Digital Channel (Digital) N Digitalni kanal je na voljo samo v načinu DTV. • Channel : S pritiskanjem gumba ▲, ▼ ali številskimi gumbi (0~9) nastavite številko kanala. • Frequency : S številskimi gumbi (0~9) nastavite frekvenco. • Bandwidth : S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼ nastavite pasovno širino. N Ko se iskanje dokonča, so posodobljeni kanali na seznamu kanalov. „ Analogue Channel Za ročno shranjevanje analognih kanalov. • Programme (Številka programa, ki naj bo dodeljena kanalu) : S pritiskanjem gumba ▲, ▼ ali številskimi gumbi (0~9) nastavite številko programa. • Colour System → Auto / PAL / SECAM / NTSC 4.43 : S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼ nastavite vrednost barvnega sistema. • Sound System → BG / DK / I / L : S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼ nastavite vrednost zvočnega sistema. • Channel (če poznate številko kanala za shranjevanje) : S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼ izberite C (običajna antena) ali S (kabelski kanal). S pritiskanjem gumba ► in nato s pritiskanjem gumbov ▲, ▼ ali številskih gumbov (0~9) izberite želeno številko. N Če ni zvoka ali le-ta ni normalen, znova izberite želeni zvočni standard. • Search (če shranite kanal in z njim povezano številko programa) : Za začetek iskanja pritisnite gumb ▲ ali ▼. Kanalnik pregleda frekvenčni razpon, dokler se na zaslonu ne prikaže prvi kanal ali izbrani kanal. • Store (če shranite kanal in z njim povezano številko programa) : Nastavite na OK s pritiskom gumba ENTERE. N Kanalni način - C (način običajne antene) : Kanal lahko izberete z vnosom določene številke za posamezno oddajno postajo v tem načinu. - S (način kabelskega kanala) : Kanal lahko izberete z vnosom določene številke za vsak kabelski kanal v tem načinu. ❑ Cable Search Option Za iskanje kabelskega omrežja lahko nastavite dodatne možnosti iskanja, kot sta frekvenca in hitrost simbola. (Odvisno od države). • Freq.Start : Za prikaz začetnih frekvenčnih vrednosti. • Freq.Stop : Za prikaz končnih frekvenčnih vrednosti. • Modulation : Za prikaz razpoložljivih vrednosti modulacije. • Symbol Rate : Za prikaz razpoložljivih simbolnih hitrosti. N Če je vrednost Freq.Start večja kot Freq.Stop, se prikaže opozorilo. ❑ Full Guide / Mini Guide Informacije EPG (elektronski programski vodnik) posredujejo izdajatelji televizijskega programa. Informacije o programu so lahko zastarele ali jih ni, kar je posledica oddajanja informacij določene televizijske postaje. Zaslon se bo dinamično posodobil takoj, ko bodo na voljo nove informacije. • Full Guide : Informacije o programu so prikazane za eno uro. Prikazane so informacije o dveh urah programa, po katerih se lahko pomikate naprej ali nazaj glede na čas. • Mini Guide : Informacije o posameznih oddajah so prikazane v ločenih vrsticah na zaslonu mini vodnika trenutnega kanala, od trenutne oddaje navzgor, glede na vrstni red začetka oddaj. ❑ Default Guide „ Mini Guide / Full Guide Odločite se lahko, ali želite prikazati mini vodnik ali celotni vodnik, potem ko pritisnete gumb GUIDE na daljinskem upravljalniku. O Meni vodnika lahko prikažete tudi enostavno s pritiskom gumba GUIDE. se nadaljuje … Channel Full Guide Mini Guide Default Guide : Full Guide ► Channel List Channel Mode : Added Ch. Fine Tune BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 12 10/20/2009 4:54:11 PMSlovenščina - 13 Uporaba možnosti Full / Mini Guide ▲ / ▼ / ◄ / ►, ENTER Z gumbi ▲/▼/◄/►/ENTERE izberite program. RDEČI Preklapljanje med možnostma Full Guide in Mini Guide. ZELENI Full Guide : Za hiter pomik nazaj (-24 hours). RUMENI Full Guide : Za hiter pomik naprej (+24 hours). MODRA Izhod iz vodnika. INFO Gumb INFO za podrobne informacije. ❑ Channel Mode Če pritisnete gumb P (), preklopite med kanali, ki so na izbranem seznamu kanalov. „ Added Ch. : Preklop med kanali, ki so na seznamu shranjenih kanalov. „ Favourite Ch. : Preklop med kanali, ki so na seznamu priljubljenih kanalov. ❑ Fine Tune (samo analogni kanali) Če je sprejem jasen, fina naravnava kanala ni potrebna, ker se samodejno izvede med iskanjem in shranjevanjem. Če je signal šibak ali popačen, boste kanal mogoče morali ročno fino naravnati. N Shranjeni fino naravnani kanali so označeni z zvezdico * na desni strani številke kanala na traku s kanalom. N Če fino naravnanega kanala ne shranite v pomnilnik, se prilagoditve ne shranijo. N Če želite ponastaviti fino naravnavo, izberite Reset s pritiskanjem gumba ▼ in nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE. Upravljanje kanalov S tem menijem lahko dodate / izbrišete ali nastavite priljubljene kanale in uporabljate programski vodnik za digitalno oddajano vsebino. N Izberite kanal na zaslonu All Channels, Added Channels, Favourites ali Programmed s pritiskom gumbov ▲ ali ▼ in ENTERE. Nato lahko gledate izbrani kanal. • All Channels : Prikaz vseh trenutno razpoložljivih kanalov. • Added Channels : Prikaz vseh dodanih kanalov. • Favourites : Prikaz vseh priljubljenih kanalov. • Programmed : Prikaz trenutno rezerviranih oddaj. O Za prikaz seznama kanalov pritisnite gumb CH LIST na daljinskem upravljalniku. N Uporaba barvnih gumbov skupaj z možnostjo Channel List - Rdeči (Channel Type) : Preklapljanje med možnostmi TV, Radio, Data/Other in All. - Zeleni (Zoom) : Povečanje ali pomanjšanje številke kanala. - Rumeni (Select) : Izbira več seznamov kanalov. - TTOOLS (Tools) : Za prikaz menija Delete (ali Add), Add to Favourites (ali Delete from Favourites), Lock (ali Unlock), Timer Viewing, Edit Channel Name, Edit Channel Number, Sort, Select All, Deselect All ali Auto Store. (Meniji Tools se lahko razlikujejo, odvisno od okoliščin.) N Ikone stanja kanala A Analogni kanal. c Kanal, izbran s pritiskom rumenega gumba. ♥ Kanal, ki je nastavljen kot priljubljeni. ( Oddaja, ki se trenutno predvaja. \ Zaklenjen kanal. ) Rezervirana oddaja. Channel Mini Guide Default Guide : Full Guide Channel List Channel Mode : Added Ch. Fine Tune 824 UKTV Gold 825 UKTV style A 1 C -- A 2 C -- A 3 ♥ C -- A 4 C -- A 5 C -- A 6 C -- A 7 C -- A 8 C -- All Channels All „ Channel Type „ Zoom „ Select Page Tools Full Guide DTV Cable 900 f tn 2:10 Tue 1 Jun Freshmen On Campus 2:00 - 2:30 No Detailed Information Today 2:00 - 3:00 3:00 - 4:00 Mint Extra Loaded Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC The Distillery Smash Hits! Sunday 900 f tn 901 ITV Play 902 Kerrang! 903 Kiss 903 oneword ▼ 903 Smash Hits! Street Hypn.. Kisstory No Information No Information No Information Freshmen O.. Mini Guide DTV Cable 900 f tn Street Hypnosis Booze Britain 2:00 2:30 ▼ 5:00 Freshmen On Campus Watch Information Page „ Full Guide „ Exit Watch Information Page „ Mini Guide „ +24 Hours „ Exit BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 13 10/20/2009 4:54:12 PMSlovenščina - 14 ❑ Meni z orodji seznama kanalov (v možnosti All Channels/Added Channels/Favourites) N Za uporabo menija Tools pritisnite gumb TOOLS. N Elementi menija Tools se lahko razlikujejo, odvisno od stanja kanala. „ Add / Delete Lahko izbrišete ali dodate kanal, da prikažete želene kanale. N Vsi izbrisani kanali bodo prikazani v meniju All Channels. N Če je kanal obarvan sivo, to pomeni, da je bil izbrisan. N Meni Add se prikaže samo pri izbrisanih kanalih. N Na enak način lahko izbrišete kanal v meniju Added Channels ali Favourites. „ Add to Favourite / Delete from Favourite Kanale, ki jih pogosto gledate, lahko nastavite kot priljubljene. T Pritisnite gumb TOOLS, da se prikaže meni Tools. Priljubljeni kanal lahko nastavite tudi z izbiro možnosti Tools → Add to Favorite (ali Delete from Favourite) O Če želite izbrati priljubljene kanale, ki ste jih nastavili, pritisnite gumb FAV.CH na daljinskem upravljalniku. N Prikazan bo simbol “♥” in kanal bo nastavljen kot priljubljeni. N Vsi priljubljeni kanali bodo prikazani v meniju Favourites. „ Lock / Unlock Kanal lahko zaklenete, tako da ga ni mogoče izbrati in gledati. Ta funkcija je na voljo samo, če je možnost Child Lock nastavljena na On. (oglejte si 24. stran) N Prikaže se zaslon za vnos kode PIN. Vnesite 4-mestno kodo PIN. N Privzeta koda PIN novega televizorja je ‘0-0-0-0’. Kodo PIN lahko spremenite tako, da v meniju izberete Change PIN. N Prikazan bo simbol “\” in kanal bo zaklenjen. „ Timer Viewing Če rezervirate oddajo, ki si jo želite ogledati, se kanal na seznamu kanalov samodejno preklopi v rezerviranega, tudi če gledate drug kanal. Če želite rezervirati oddajo, najprej nastavite trenutni čas. (oglejte si 22. stran) N Rezervirati je mogoče samo shranjene kanale. N Kanal, mesec, dan, leto, uro in minute lahko nastavite neposredno s pritiskom številskih gumbov na daljinskem upravljalniku. N Rezerviranje programa bo prikazano v meniju Programmed. N Programski vodnik za digitalne kanale in rezerviranje oddaj Če je izbran digitalni kanal in pritisnete gumb ►, se prikaže programski vodnik za ta kanal. Oddajo lahko rezervirate po zgoraj opisanih postopkih. „ Edit Channel Name (samo pri analognih kanalih) Kanale lahko označite, tako da se vsakič, ko izberete določen kanal, prikaže njegovo ime. N Digitalnim kanalom so imena samodejno dodeljena in jih ni mogoče določiti. „ Edit Channel Number (samo pri digitalnih kanalih) Urejate lahko tudi številke kanalov, in sicer s pritiskanjem številskih gumbov na daljinskem upravljalniku. „ Sort (samo pri analognih kanalih) Ta postopek omogoča spreminjanje številk programov shranjenih kanalov. To postopek boste mogoče morali izvesti po uporabi funkcije samodejnega shranjevanja. „ Deselect All / Select All Prekličete lahko izbor vseh kanalov, ki so izbrani na seznamu kanalov. N Istočasno lahko dodate / izbrišete več kanalov, jih dodate priljubljenim/izbrišete izmed priljubljenih ali jih zaklenete/odklenete. Če želite istočasno nastaviti vse izbrane kanale, izberite želene kanale in pritisnite rumeni gumb. N Levo od izbranih kanalov se prikaže znak c. N Možnost Deselect All je mogoče izbrati samo, če je kateri od kanalov izbran. „ Auto Store N Za podrobnosti o nastavitvah možnosti si oglejte poglavje oglejte si stran11. N Če je kanal zaklenjen s funkcijo Child Lock, se prikaže okno za vnos kode PIN. ❑ Meni z orodji seznama kanalov (v možnosti Programmed) Rezervacijo si lahko ogledate, jo spremenite ali izbrišete. N Za uporabo menija Tools pritisnite gumb TOOLS. • Change Info : Za spreminjanje rezervacije oddaje. • Cancel Schedules : Za preklic rezervacije oddaje. • Information : Za ogled rezervacije oddaje. (Lahko tudi spremenite podatke o rezervaciji.) • Select All / Deselect All : Za izbiro ali preklic izbire vseh rezerviranih oddaj. Programmed 1 / 1 / 2009 13:59 5 TV1 Quincy, M.E 18:59 2 TV3 The Equalizer 20:59 2 TV3 McMillan & Wife 21:59 2 TV3 M.Spillane’s mike Hammer Change Info Cancel Schedules Information Select All All „ Zoom „ Select Tools Information 824 UKTV Gold 825 UKTV style A 1 C -- A 2 C -- A 3 C -- A 4 C -- A 5 C -- A 6 C -- A 7 C -- A 8 C -- All Channels All „ Channel Type „ Zoom „ Select Page Tools Delete Add to Favourite Lock Timer Viewing Edit Channel Name Sort ▼ BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 14 10/20/2009 4:54:13 PMSlovenščina - 15 Spreminjanje slikovnih nastavitev ❑ Mode Izberete lahko vrsto slike, ki najbolj ustreza vašim zahtevam. „ Dynamic / Standard / Eco / Movie T Pritisnite gumb TOOLS, da prikažete meni Tools. Slikovni način lahko nastavite tudi z izbiro možnosti Tools → Picture Mode. ❑ Cell Light / Contrast / Brightness / Sharpness / Colour / Tint (G/R) Televizor ima več možnosti nastavitev za nadzor kakovosti slike. • Cell Light : Nastavitev svetlosti slikovnih pik. • Contrast : Prilagoditev ravni kontrasta slike. • Brightness : Prilagoditev ravni svetlosti slike. • Sharpness : Prilagoditev nastavitve robov slike. • Colour : Prilagoditev nasičenosti barv slike. • Tint(G/R) : Prilagoditev barvnega odtenka slike. N Če spremenite možnosti Cell Light, Contrast, Brightness, Sharpness, Colour ali Tint (G/R), se prikaz na zaslonu ustrezno prilagodi. N Prilagojene vrednosti se shranijo za vse slikovne načine. N Funkcije Tint ni mogoče uporabiti v analognih načinih TV, Ext., AV sistema PAL. N V načinu PC je mogoče spreminjati samo možnosti Cell Light, Contrast in Brightness. N Vsaka prilagojena nastavitev se shrani ločeno glede na način vhoda. N Količino porabljene energije lahko opazno zmanjšate, če znižate raven svetlosti slike, s čimer boste tudi znižali celotne tekoče stroške. ❑ Advanced Settings Lahko prilagodite napredne nastavitve zaslona, vključno z barvo in kontrastom. N Advanced Settings je na voljo v načinih Standard in Movie. N V načinu PC je med elementi Advanced Settings mogoče spreminjati samo Dynamic Contrast, Gamma in White Balance. „ Black Tone → Off / Dark / Darker / Darkest Globino slike lahko povečate tako, da prilagodite gostoto črne barve. „ Dynamic Contrast → Off / Low / Medium / High Prilagodite lahko kontrast zaslona, tako da je optimalen. „ Gamma Nastavite lahko intenzivnost primarnih barv (rdeča, zelena, modra). „ Colour Space Barvni prostor je barvna matrika, ki je sestavljena iz rdeče, zelene in modre barve. Izberite najljubši barvni prostor za prikaz najnaravnejših barv. • Auto : Samodejna nastavitev barvnega razpona glede na vhodni video vir. • Native : Nastavitev širšega barvnega razpona od vhodnega video vira. • Custom : Prilagoditev barvnega razpona po vaših željah. N Prilagajanje barvnega prostora - Prilagodi barvni obseg po vaših željah. Možnost barve je na voljo, če je možnost Color Space nastavljena na Custom. - Colour → Red / Green / Blue / Yellow / Cyan / Magenta - Red / Green / Blue: Za prilagajanje vrednosti RGB za izbrano barvo. - Reset: Za ponastavitev barvnega prostora na privzete nastavitve. Upravljanje slike se nadaljuje … Mode : Standard ► Cell Light : 4 Contrast : 95 Brightness : 45 Sharpness : 50 Colour : 50 Tint (G/R) : G50/R50 Advanced Settings Picture Colour : 50 Tint (G/R) : G50/R50 Advanced Settings ► Picture Options Picture Reset Picture BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 15 10/20/2009 4:54:13 PMSlovenščina - 16 „ White Balance Prilagodite lahko barvno temperaturo za naravnejše barve slike. • R-Offset / G-Offset / B-Offset / R-Gain / G-Gain / B-Gain : Če spremenite vrednost nastavitve, se osveži prilagojeni zaslon. • Reset : za ponastavitev privzete izravnave belin. „ Flesh Tone Prilagodite lahko rožnati ton, da je bolj ali manj rdeč. N Če spremenite vrednost nastavitve, se osveži prilagojeni zaslon. „ Edge Enhancement → Off / On Poudarite lahko robove predmetov na sliki. „ xvYCC → Off / On Nastavitev načina xvYCC na On poveča količino podrobnosti in barvni prostor pri gledanju filmov iz zunanje naprave (npr. predvajalnika DVD). N xvYCC je na voljo, če je slikovni način nastavljen na Movie in če je zunanji vhod nastavljen na način HDMI ali Component. N Funkcija morda ni podprta, odvisno od zunanje naprave. ❑ Picture Options Prilagodite lahko dodatne slikovne nastavitve po vaših željah. N V načinu PC je med elementi v Picture Options mogoče spreminjati samo možnosti Colour Tone, Size in Screen Burn Protection. „ Colour Tone → Cool / Normal / Warm1 / Warm2 / Warm3 Izberete lahko barvni ton, ki je najudobnejši za vaše oči. N Prilagojene vrednosti se shranijo v skladu z izbranim slikovnim načinom. N Možnost Warm1, Warm2, ali Warm3 je aktivna samo, če je slikovni način filmski. „ Size → Auto Wide / 16:9 / Wide Zoom / Zoom / 4:3 / Screen Fit Izberete lahko velikost slike, ki najbolj ustreza vašim zahtevam. • Auto Wide : Za nastavitev slike v samodejnem širokem formatu. • 16:9 : Nastavi sliko na široki način 16:9. • Wide Zoom : Povečava slike nad 4:3. • Zoom : Navpična povečava slike na zaslonu. • 4:3 : Sliko postavi v običajni način 4:3. • Screen Fit : Za prikaz izvornega signala polne visoke ločljivosti, ki ga ni mogoče gledati na običajnem televizorju. N Možnosti velikosti slike se lahko razlikujejo glede na vhodni vir. N Razpoložljivi elementi se lahko razlikujejo glede na izbrani način. N V načinu PC lahko prilagodite samo načina 16:9 in 4:3. N Če ste v možnosti PIP nastavili dvojni način ( , ) velikosti slike ni mogoče nastaviti. N Spreminjate in shranjujete lahko nastavitve vseh zunanjih naprav, ki so priključene na vhod televizorja. N Če je na televizorju več kot dve uri prikazana negibna slika, se lahko pojavi začasno zadržanje slike. N Wide Zoom : S pritiskanjem gumba ► izberite Position, nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE. S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼ pomaknite zaslon navzgor ali navzdol. Nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE. N Zoom : S pritiskanjem gumba ► izberite Position, nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE. S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼ pomaknite sliko navzgor ali navzdol. Nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE. S pritiskanjem gumba ► izberite Size, nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE. Pritiskajte gumb ▲ ali ▼, da povečate ali zmanjšate velikost slike v navpični smeri. Nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE. N Po izbiri možnosti Screen Fit v načinu HDMI (1080i/1080p) ali Component (1080i/1080p) : s pritiskanjem gumba ◄ ali ► izberite Position. S pritiskanjem gumba ▲, ▼, ◄ ali ► pomaknite sliko. N Reset : Pritisnite gumb ◄ ali ►, da izberete Reset, nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE. Nastavitev lahko inicializirate. N Če funkcijo Screen Fit uporabite pri vhodu HDMI 720p, bo odrezana po 1 vrstica zgoraj, spodaj, levo in desno, kot pri funkciji zmanjšanja prevelike slike. „ Screen Mode → 16:9 / Wide Zoom / Zoom / 4:3 Ko pri širokozaslonskem televizorju 16:9 velikost slike nastavite na Auto Wide, lahko določite velikost za sliko 4:3 WSS ali pa ne določite teh nastavitev. V posameznih evropskih državah so zahtevane različne velikosti slike, zato to funkcijo izbere uporabnik. N Funkcija je na voljo v načinu Auto Wide. N Funkcija ni na voljo v načinih PC, Component in HDMI. se nadaljuje … Tint (G/R) : G50/R50 Advanced Settings Picture Options ► Picture Reset Picture BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 16 10/20/2009 4:54:14 PMSlovenščina - 17 „ Digital NR → Off / Low / Medium / High / Auto Če je sprejeti televizijski signal šibak, lahko aktivirate funkcijo digitalnega odpravljanja šumov za zmanjšanje statičnih motenj in odsevov na zaslonu. N Če je signal šibak, izberite eno od ostalih možnosti, tako da je slika prikazana z največjo kakovostjo. „ HDMI Black Level → Normal / Low Na zaslonu lahko neposredno izberete raven črne in tako prilagodite globino zaslona. N Funkcija je aktivna samo, kadar je zunanji vhod povezan s HDMI-jem (signali RGB). „ 1080 Full HD Motion Demo → Off / On Nova generacija Samsungovih zaslonov PDP zagotavlja osupljivo jasnost posnetkov polne visoke ločljivosti med gledanjem športnih oddaj, filmov in iger. N Funkcija ni na voljo v načinu PC, Game ali Media Play. „ Film Mode Optimizirate lahko slikovni način za gledanje filmov. • Off : Za izklop filmskega načina. • Auto1 : Za samodejno prilagoditev slike na najboljšo kakovost, ko gledate film. • Auto2 : Za samodejno optimiranje video besedila, ko gledate film. • Cinema Smooth : Za najboljše kinematografsko doživetje. N Možnost Film Mode je podprta v načinih TV, Video, Component (480i/1080i) in HDMI (1080i). „ Real 100Hz Demo → Off / On Razlika med možnostma dejanskih 100 Hz in 50 Hz je očitna, posebej pri gledanju hitrih prizorov. Zato pri gledanju počasnih filmskih prizorov ne boste opazili razlike med možnostma dejanskih 100 Hz in 50 Hz. Predstavitveni način s 100 Hz deluje samo pri 50 Hz signalu. Predstavitveni način z dejanskimi 100 Hz je na voljo za predstavitve v trgovinah s posebnimi slikami. „ Blue Only Mode → Off / On Ta funkcija je namenjena strokovnjakom za merjenje naprav AV. Ta funkcija prikazuje modri signal samo, če iz video signala odstranita rdeč in zelen signal, da ustvarite učinek modrega filtra, ki se uporablja za prilagajanje barve in obarvanosti video opreme, kot je predvajalnik DVD, domači kino itd. N Blue Only Mode je na voljo, če je slikovni način nastavljen na Movie ali Standard. „ Screen Burn Protection V napravo je vgrajena tehnologija za preprečevanje ožiga zaslona, ki zmanjša možnost ožiga. Ta tehnologija omogoča nastavitev premikanja slike v smeri navzgor/navzdol (navpično) in od ene strani do druge (vodoravno). Časovne nastavitve vam omogočajo določanje števila minut med premiki slike. • Pixel Shift : Pri tej funkciji se slikovne pike na zaslonu PDP neznatno premikajo v vodoravni ali navpični smeri, kar zelo zmanjša možnost pojava zakasnele slike. N Optimalne razmere za pomikanje slikovnih pik. Možnost TV/Ext./AV/Component/HDMI/PC Vodoravno 0~2 2 Navpično 0~4 4 Čas (minuta) 1~4 min 2 min N Vrednost pomika slikovne pike je odvisna od velikosti monitorja (palcev) in načina. N Funkcija ni na voljo v načinu Screen Fit. • Scrolling : Ta funkcija pomaga pri odstranjevanju zakasnele slike z zaslona, tako da vse slikovne pike na zaslonu PDP premika po določenem vzorcu. Še posebej je uporabna, če je na zaslonu bila zelo dolgo prikazana mirujoča slika. • Side Grey : Če televizor gledate v razmerju slike 4:3, se s prilagoditvijo izravnave belin na skrajnje levi in skrajnje desni strani televizorja prepreči škoda. - Light : Ko gledate televizor z razmerjem slike 4:3, s to možnostjo posvetlite levo in desno stran. - Dark : Ko gledate televizor z razmerjem slike 4:3, s to možnostjo potemnite levo in desno stran. se nadaljuje … BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 17 10/20/2009 4:54:14 PMSlovenščina - 18 Nastavitev televizorja z računalnikom N Prednastavitev : Pritisnite gumb SOURCE, da izberete način računalnika. ❑ Auto Adjustment Samodejna prilagoditev omogoča računalniškemu zaslonu, da se samodejno prilagodi vhodnemu video signalu računalnika. Vrednosti za fino, grobo in položaj se samodejno prilagodijo. N Ta funkcija ne deluje v načinu DVI-HDMI. T Pritisnite gumb TOOLS, da se prikaže meni Tools. Lahko pa nastavite tudi Auto Adjustment tako, da izberete Tools → Auto Adjustment. ❑ Screen S prilagajanjem kakovosti slike odstranite ali zmanjšate šum slike. Če šum ni odstranjen s fino naravnavo, čim bolje nastavite frekvenco (grobo) in znova fino naravnajte. Po zmanjšanju šumov znova nastavite sliko tako, da bo poravnana na sredino zaslona. „ Coarse Za prilagoditev frekvence, ko se na zaslonu pojavi navpični šum. „ Fine Za prilagoditev jasnosti zaslona. „ PC Position Nastavite položaj računalniškega zaslona, če se ta ne prilega televizijskemu zaslonu. S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼ prilagodite navpični položaj. S pritiskanjem gumba ◄ ali ► prilagodite vodoravni položaj. „ Image Reset Vse slikovne nastavitve lahko zamenjate s tovarniškimi vrednostmi. ❑ Picture Reset → Reset Picture Mode / Cancel Ponastavitev vseh slikovnih nastavitev na privzete vrednosti. N Izberite slikovni način, ki ga želite ponastaviti. Ponastavitev se izvede za vse slikovne načine. Brightness : 45 Sharpness : 50 Auto Adjustment ► Screen Advanced Settings Picture Options Picture Reset Picture Picture Advanced Settings Picture Options Picture Reset ► Picture BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 18 10/20/2009 4:54:14 PMSlovenščina - 19 Računalniški zaslon ❑ Nastavitev programske opreme računalnika (v okolju Windows XP) Spodaj so prikazane nastavitve zaslona za tipični računalnik v operacijskem sistemu Windows. Dejanski prikazi na računalniškem zaslonu bodo najbrž drugačni, odvisno od različice operacijskega sistema Windows in grafične kartice. Četudi se dejanski prikazi na zaslonu razlikujejo, v večini primerov veljajo iste osnovne nastavitvene informacije. (Sicer se obrnite na proizvajalca računalnika ali Samsungovega trgovca.) 1. Najprej kliknite možnost ‘Nadzorna plošča’ v meniju Start v operacijskem sistemu Windows. 2. Ko se prikaže okno nadzorne plošče, kliknite ‘Videz in teme’ in prikazalo se bo pogovorno okno zaslona 3. Ko se prikaže okno nadzorne plošče, kliknite ‘Zaslon’ in prikazalo se bo pogovorno okno zaslona. 4. Pomaknite se na zavihek ‘Nastavitve’ v pogovornem oknu zaslona. Ustrezna nastavitev velikosti (ločljivost) Optimalno: 1920 X 1080 slikovnih pik Če je v pogovornem oknu nastavitev zaslona na voljo možnost za navpično frekvenco, je njena ustrezna vrednost ‘60’ ali ‘60 Hz’. Sicer samo kliknite ‘V redu’ in zaprite pogovorno okno. ❑ Načini zaslona Položaj in velikost zaslona se razlikujeta glede na vrsto računalniškega monitorja in njegovo ločljivost. Priporočene so ločljivosti v tabeli. N Če uporabljate kabel HDMI/DVI, uporabite vtičnico HDMI IN 2(DVI). N Način prepletanja ni podprt. N Če izberete nestandardno obliko video zapisa, televizor morda ne bo deloval pravilno. N Podprta sta načina za ločeno in kompozitno. SOG ni podrt. N Če je kabel VGA predolg ali nizke kakovosti, lahko v načinih visoke ločljivosti (1920x1080) povzroči šum slike. „ Vhod D-Sub in HDMI/DVI Način Ločljivost Vodoravno Frekvenca (kHz) Navpična frekvenca (Hz) Točkovna ura Frekvenca (MHz) Polariteta sinhr. (V/N) IBM 640 x 350 31.469 70.086 25.175 + / - 720 x 400 31.469 70.087 28.322 - / + MAC 640 x 480 35.000 66.667 30.240 - / - 832 x 624 49.726 74.551 57.284 - / - 1152 x 870 68.681 75.062 100.000 - / + VESA CVT 720 x 576 35.910 59.950 32.750 - / + 1152 x 864 53.783 59.959 81.750 - / + 1280 x 720 44.772 59.855 74.500 - / + 56.456 74.777 95.750 - / + 1280 x 960 75.231 74.857 130.000 - / + VESA DMT 640 x 480 31.469 59.940 25.175 - / - 37.861 72.809 31.500 - / - 37.500 75.000 31.500 - / - 800 x 600 37.879 60.317 40.000 + / + 800 x 600 48.077 72.188 50.000 + / + 800 x 600 46.875 75.000 49.500 + / + 1024 x 768 48.363 60.004 65.000 - / - 56.476 70.069 75.000 - / - 60.023 75.029 78.750 + / + 1152 x 864 67.500 75.000 108.000 + / + 1280 x 800 49.702 59.810 83.500 - / + 62.795 74.934 106.500 - / + 1280 x 960 60.000 60.000 108.000 + / + 1280 x 1024 63.981 60.020 108.000 + / + 79.976 75.025 135.000 + / + 1360 x 768 47.712 60.015 85.500 + / + 1440 x 900 55.935 59.887 106.500 - / + 70.635 74.984 136.750 - / + 1680 x 1050 65.290 59.954 146.250 - / + VESA DMT / DTV CEA 1920 x 1080p 67.500 60.000 148.500 + / + VESA GTF 1280 x 720 52.500 70.000 89.040 - / + 1280 x 1024 74.620 70.000 128.943 - / - BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 19 10/20/2009 4:54:15 PMSlovenščina - 20 Spreminjanje zvočnega standarda ❑ Mode Izberete lahko vrsto posebnih zvočnih učinkov, ki se uporabijo ob gledanju določene oddaje. „ Standard / Music / Movie / Clear Voice / Custom T Pritisnite gumb TOOLS, da se prikaže meni Tools. Zvočni način lahko nastavite tudi z izbiro možnosti Tools → Sound Mode. ❑ Equalizer Zvočne nastavitve lahko prilagodite, kot vam najbolj ustreza. • Mode : Izberete lahko zvočni način, ki vam najbolj ustreza. • Balance : Nadzor ravnovesja med desnim in levim zvočnikom. • 100Hz / 300Hz / 1KHz / 3KHz / 10KHz (nastavitev pasovne širine) : Za nastavitev stopnje frekvenc različnih pasovnih širin. • Reset : Za ponastavitev nastavitev izenačevalnika na privzete vrednosti. ❑ SRS TruSurround HD → Off / On SRS TruSurround HD združuje tehnologije TruSurround, FOCUS in TruBass. SRS TruSurround HD proizvaja zvočni učinek navideznega 5.1-kanalnega prostorskega zvoka, ki prihaja iz dveh zvočnikov televizorja. Ta funkcija ne zagotavlja samo bogatih globokih nizkih tonov, ampak obenem izboljša tudi visoko frekvenčno ločljivost. T Pritisnite gumb TOOLS, da se prikaže meni Tools. Funkcijo SRS TruSurround HD lahko nastavite tudi z izbiro možnosti Tools → SRS TS HD. TruSurround HD, SRS in simbol so blagovne znamke podjetja SRS Labs, Inc. Tehnologija TruSurround HD je vgrajena pod licenco podjetja SRS Labs, Inc. N Če med predvajanjem glasbe na televizorju zvok ni normalen, nastavite izenačevalnik in SRS TruSurround HD (Off/On). ❑ Audio Language (samo pri digitalnih kanalih) Spremenite lahko privzeto vrednost za jezik avdia. Prikaže informacije o jeziku za dohodni tok. N Izbirate lahko samo med jeziki, ki so dejansko oddajani. ❑ Audio Format → MPEG / Dolby Digital (samo pri digitalnih kanalih) Pri istočasnem oddajanju zvoka iz glavnega zvočnika in avdio sprejemnika lahko pride do odmeva zaradi različne hitrosti odkodiranja za glavni zvočnik in avdio sprejemnik. V tem primeru uporabite funkcijo zvočnika televizorja. N Izbirate lahko samo med jeziki, ki so dejansko oddajani. Izdelano pod licenco podjetja Dolby Laboratories. Dolby in dvojni simbol D sta blagovni znamki podjetja Dolby Laboratories. ❑ Audio Description (samo pri digitalnih kanalih) To je dodatna funkcija za zvok, ki omogoča dodatne zvočne posnetke za slabovidne. Ta funkcija je namenjena zvočnemu toku za AD (Audio Description), če jo oddajnik pošlje skupaj z glavnim zvokom. Uporabniki lahko možnost Audio Description vklopijo ali izklopijo ter upravljajo glasnost. O Te možnosti lahko enostavno izberete s pritiskom gumba AD na daljinskem upravljalniku. „ Audio Description → Off / On Vklop ali izklop funkcije zvočnega opisa. „ Volume Za nastavitev glasnosti zvočnega opisa. N Možnost Volume je aktivna, če je možnost Audio Description nastavljena na On. Nadzor zvoka Mode : Custom ► Equalizer SRS TruSurround HD : Off Audio Language : ---- Audio Format : ---- Audio Description Auto Volume : Off Speaker Select : TV Speaker Sound BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 20 10/20/2009 4:54:15 PMSlovenščina - 21 ❑ Auto Volume → Off / On Stanje signalov posameznih postaj se razlikuje, zato ni enostavno prilagajati glasnosti ob vsaki zamenjavi kanala. Ta funkcija omogoča samodejno regulacijo glasnosti želenega kanala z znižanjem glasnosti v primeru visokega modulacijskega signala ali zvišanjem glasnosti v primeru nizkega modulacijskega signala. ❑ Speaker Select → External Speaker / TV Speaker Če želite slišati zvok iz ločenih zvočnikov, izklopite notranji ojačevalnik. N Gumba – +, M MUTE ne delujeta, če je možnost Speaker Select nastavljena na External Speaker. N Če izberete External Speaker v meniju Speaker Select, bodo zvočne nastavitve omejene. Notranji zvočniki televizorja Avdio izhod (optični, izhod L/D) v zvočnem sistemu TV/Ext. /AV/Component/PC/HDMI TV/Ext. /AV/Component/PC/HDMI Zvočnik Televizorja Izhod zvočnikov Izhod Zvoka Zunanji Zvočnik Nemo Izhod Zvoka Ni Video Signala Nemo Nemo ❑ Sound Select Ko je aktivirana funkcija PIP, lahko poslušate zvok podslike (PIP) • Main : Za poslušanje zvoka glavne slike. • Sub : Za poslušanje zvoka podslike. T Pritisnite gumb TOOLS, da prikažete meni Tools. Zvok podslike lahko nastavite tudi z izbiro možnosti Tools → PIP → Sound Select. N To možnost lahko izberete, ko je možnost PIP nastavljena na On. ❑ Sound Reset „ Reset All / Reset Sound Mode / Cancel : Zvočne nastavitve lahko obnovite na tovarniške vrednosti. Izbira zvočnega načina Če nastavite na Dual l ll, se na zaslonu prikaže trenutni zvočni način. Vrsta oddajanja Indikator na zaslonu NICAM Stereo Običajno oddajanje (standardni avdio) Mono (normalna uporaba) Običajno + NICAM Mono NICAM Mono (normalno) NICAM-Stereo NICAM Stereo Mono (normalno) NICAM Dual-I/II NICAM Dual-1 NICAM Dual-2 Mono (normalno) A2 Stereo Običajno oddajanje (standardni avdio) Mono (normalna uporaba) Dvojezično ali DUAL-I/II Dual I Dual II Stereo Stereo Mono (prisilni mono) N Če je stereo signal šibak in pride do samodejnega preklopa, preklopite na Mono. N Ta funkcija je aktivirana samo pri stereo zvočnem signalu. V mono zvočnem signalu je deaktivirana. N Ta funkcija je na voljo samo v načinu TV. T Pritisnite gumb TOOLS, da prikažete meni Tools. Zvočni način lahko izberete tudi z izbiro možnosti Tools → Dual l ll. Speaker Select : TV Speaker Sound Select : Main Sound Reset ► Sound BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 21 10/20/2009 4:54:16 PMSlovenščina - 22 Opis funkcij Nastavitev časa ❑ Clock Uro morate nastaviti, da lahko uporabljate različne funkcije časovnika televizorja. N Ob vsakem pritisku gumba INFO se bo prikazal trenutni čas. N Če izključite napajalni kabel, morate uro znova nastaviti. „ Clock Mode Trenutni čas lahko nastavite ročno ali samodejno. • Auto : Za samodejno nastavitev trenutnega časa z uporabo digitalno oddajanega časa. • Manual : Za ročno nastavitev trenutnega časa. „ Clock Set Trenutni čas lahko nastavite ročno. N Ta element nastavite, če ste možnost Clock Mode nastavili na Manual. N Nastavitve Day, Month, Year, Hour, Minute lahko nastavite neposredno s pritiskanjem številskih gumbov na daljinskem upravljalniku. ❑ Sleep Timer → Off / 30 min / 60 min / 90 min / 120 min / 150 min / 180 min Izklopni časovnik samodejno izklopi televizor po prednastavljenem času (30, 60, 90, 120, 150 in 180 minut). N Ko časovnik doseže 0, se televizor samodejno preklopi v stanje pripravljenosti. N Če želite preklicati delovanje funkcije Sleep Timer, izberite Off. T Pritisnite gumb TOOLS, da prikažete meni Tools. Izklopni časovnik lahko nastavite tudi z izbiro možnosti Tools → Sleep Timer. ❑ Timer 1 / Timer 2 / Timer 3 Televizor lahko nastavite tako, da se bo vklopil ali izklopil ob želenem času. • On Time : Za nastavitev časa vklopa televizorja. • Off Time : Za nastavitev časa izklopa televizorja. • Volume : Za izbiro glasnosti. • Source : Za izbiro naprave TV, USB. N Če izberete TV, lahko nastavite možnosti Antenna in Channel. - Antenna : Za izbiro običajnega ali kabelskega kanala. - Channel : Za izbiro želenega kanala. N Če izberete USB, lahko nastavite vsebino. - Contents : Za izbiro želene vsebine v USB. N Če na ključu USB ni glasbene datoteke ali mapa z glasbeno datoteko ni izbrana, funkcija časovnika ne deluje pravilno. • Repeat : Izberite Once, Everyday, Mon~Fri, Mon~Sat, Sat~Sun ali Manual. N Če je izbrana možnost Manual, s pritiskanjem gumba ► izberite želeni dan v tednu. Za želeni dan pritisnite gumb ENTERE in prikazala se bo oznakac. N Celotna mapa v USB-ju je podprta za angleških 64 znakov. N Najprej morate nastaviti uro. N Uro, minute in kanal lahko nastavite s pritiskanjem številskih gumbov na daljinskem upravljalniku. N Auto Power Off Če vklopite časovnik, se bo televizor izklopil, če tri ure potem, ko je časovnik vklopil televizor, ni bila pritisnjena nobena kontrola. Ta funkcija je na voljo samo, ko je vklopljen časovnik, in preprečuje pregrevanje, do katerega lahko pride, če je televizor predolgo vklopljen. Time Clock : -- : -- ► Sleep Timer : Off Timer 1 : Inactivated Timer 2 : Inactivated Timer 3 : Inactivated U Move E Enter R Return Setup Plug & Play Menu Language : Slovenian Time ► Broadcast Security Network General BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 22 10/20/2009 4:54:16 PMSlovenščina - 23 Konfiguriranje menija Setup ❑ Menu Language Za nastavitev jezika menija. ❑ Broadcast „ Subtitle Za aktiviranje in deaktiviranje podnapisov. S tem menijem nastavite način podnapisov. Menijska možnost Normal predstavlja osnovne podnaslove, možnost Hard of hearing pa podnapise za osebe z okvaro sluha. • Subtitle → Off / On : Za izklop ali vklop podnapisov. • Mode → Normal / Hard of hearing : Za nastavitev načina podnapisov. • Subtitle Language : Za nastavitev jezika podnapisov. N Če program, ki ga gledate, ne podpira funkcije Hard of hearing, se samodejno vklopi način Normal, čeprav je izbran način Hard of hearing. N Če program ne omogoča izbranega jezika, je privzeti jezik angleščina. O Te možnosti lahko enostavno izberete s pritiskom gumba SUBT. na daljinskem upravljalniku. „ Digital Text → Disable / Enable Ta funkcija je omogočena, če je program oddajan z digitalnim besedilom. N MHEG (Multimedia and Hypermedia Information Coding Experts Group) Mednarodni standard za sisteme za kodiranje podatkov, ki se uporablja za večpredstavnost in hiperpredstavnost. Je na višjem nivoju kot sistem MPEG in vključuje hiperpredstavnost s povezanimi podatki, kot so slike, znakovne storitve, animacije, grafike in video datoteke ter večpredstavnostne podatke. MHEG je tehnologija, ki omogoča sodelovanje uporabnika med delovanjem, in se uporablja na različnih področjih, kot so VOD (video na zahtevo), ITV (interaktivna televizija), EC (elektronsko poslovanje), teleizobraževanje, telekonference, digitalne knjižnice in omrežne igre. „ Teletext Language Nastavite lahko jezik teleteksta, in sicer tako, da izberete vrsto jezika. N Če program ne omogoča izbranega jezika, je privzeti jezik angleščina. „ Preference • Primary Audio Language / Secondary Audio Language / Primary Subtitle Language / Secondary Subtitle Language / Primary Teletext Language / Secondary Teletext Language S to funkcijo lahko uporabnik izbere enega od jezikov. Tukaj izbrani jezik je privzeti jezik, ko uporabnik izbere kanal. Če spremenite nastavitev jezika, se možnosti menija Language Subtitle Language, Audio Language in Teletext Language samodejno spremenijo v izbrani jezik. Možnosti menija Language Subtitle Language, Audio Language in Teletext Language prikazujejo seznam jezikov, ki jih podpira trenutni kanal; izbor je označen. Če spremenite to nastavitev jezika, nov izbor velja samo za trenutni kanal. S spremembo nastavitve se ne spremenijo nastavitve menija Preference: Primary Subtitle Language, Primary Audio Language in Primary Teletext Language. „ Common Interface • Namestitev CI(CI+) kartice za splošni vmesnik 1. Modul CI(CI+) CAM kupite pri najbližjem prodajalcu ali po telefonu. 2. Kartico za splošni vmesnik vstavite v CI(CI+) CARD CAM v smeri puščici, da se zaskoči na mestu. 3. CAM z nameščeno CI(CI+) kartico za splošni vmesnik vstavite v režo za splošni vmesnik. N CAM vstavite v smeri puščice do konca, tako da je vzporeden z režo. 4. Preverite, ali na kanalu z motenim signalom vidite sliko. • CI(CI+) Menu Uporabniku omogoča izbiro iz menija, ki ga omogoča CAM. Meni splošnega vmesnika CI(CI+) izberite glede na računalniško kartico. • Application Info. Za prikaz informacij o CAM-u, ki je vstavljen v režo za splošni vmesnik CI(CI+). Informacije o aplikaciji se nanašajo na CI(CI+) kartico splošnega vmesnika. CAM lahko namestite kadar koli, ne glede na to, ali je televizor VKLOPLJEN ali IZKLOPLJEN. N Kartica za splošni vmesnik (CI+) ni podprta v nekaterih državah, regijah in pri nekaterih oddajnih postajah. Preverite pri pooblaščenem prodajalcu. se nadaljuje … Setup Plug & Play Menu Language : Slovenian ► Time Broadcast Security Network General BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 23 10/20/2009 4:54:17 PMSlovenščina - 24 ❑ Security N Pri nekaterih modelih je potrebno za uporabo funkcije Plug & Play izbrati nastavljeno številko PIN. „ Child Lock → Off / On Ta funkcija preprečuje gledanje neprimernega programa nepooblaščenim uporabnikom (na primer otrokom) tako, da prepreči predvajanje slike in zvoka. N Preden se prikaže nastavitveni zaslon, se prikaže zaslon za vnos kode PIN. Vnesite 4-mestno kodo PIN. N Privzeta koda PIN novega televizorja je ‘0-0-0-0’. Kodo PIN lahko spremenite tako, da v meniju izberete Change PIN. N Zaklenete lahko nekatere kanale na seznamu kanalov. (oglejte si 14. stran) N Child Lock je na voljo samo v načinu TV. „ Parental Lock Ta funkcija nepooblaščenim uporabnikom, na primer otrokom, preprečuje gledanje neprimernega programa, in sicer s 4-mestno kodo PIN (osebna identifikacijska številka), ki jo določi uporabnik. N Oznaka starševskega nadzora se razlikuje od države do države. N Preden se prikaže nastavitveni zaslon, se prikaže zaslon za vnos kode PIN. Vnesite 4-mestno kodo PIN. N Privzeta koda PIN novega televizorja je ‘0-0-0-0’. Kodo PIN lahko spremenite tako, da v meniju izberete Change PIN. N Ko so oznake starševskega nadzora nastavljene, se prikaže simbol “\”. N Allow All / Block All : Pritisnite, da odklenete ali zaklenete vse oznake televizorja. „ Change PIN Spremenite lahko osebno identifikacijsko številko, ki je potrebna za nastavitev televizorja. N Preden se prikaže nastavitveni zaslon, se prikaže zaslon za vnos kode PIN. Vnesite 4-mestno kodo PIN. (Privzeta koda : ‘0-0-0-0’). N Če PIN pozabite, pritisnite gumbe na daljinskem upravljalniku v naslednjem zaporedju, s čimer PIN ponastavite na ‘0-0-0-0’: POWER (izklop), MMUTE, 8, 2, 4, POWER (vklop). ❑ General „ Game Mode → Off / On Pri povezavi z igralno konzolo, kot je PlayStation TM ali Xbox TM , lahko uživate v bolj realistični izkušnji tako, da izberete meni iger. • Ko je možnost Game Mode nastavljena na On - Picture Slikovni način se samodejno spremeni v način Standard in ga ni mogoče spremeniti. - Zvočni način se samodejno spremeni v način Custom in ga ni mogoče spremeniti. Z izenačevalnikom prilagodite zvok. - Aktivira se možnost Reset v meniju zvoka. Funkcija Reset inicializira nastavitve izenačevalnika na tovarniške nastavitve. N Možnost Game Mode ni na voljo v običajnem načinu TV ali Game Mode nastavljen na Off. N Če je ob priključeni zunanji napravi kakovost slike slaba, preverite, ali je možnost Game Mode nastavljena na On. N Če meni televizorja prikazujete z možnostjo načina iger, zaslon rahlo miglja. N Na zaslonu se prikaže oznaka , ki pomeni, da je za izbrani vir vklopljen način Game Mode. N Ta funkcija podpira samo funkcijo igre. N Način Game Mode ni na voljo v načinu računalnika. „ BD Wise → Off / On Wise je funkcija, ki omogoča samodejno nastavitev optimalnih pogojev za vse povezane Samsungove naprave, ki podpirajo funkcijo BD Wise. N Ta funkcija je aktivna samo, če je zunanja naprava na televizor priključena prek vhoda HDMI. N Ko je možnost BD Wise nastavljena na On, se slikovni način samodejno spremeni glede na razmere. „ Energy Saving → Off / Low / Medium / High / Picture Off Ta funkcija prilagodi svetlost televizorja, tako da se zmanjša poraba energije. Če televizor gledate ponoči, nastavite možnost načina Energy Saving na High, da zmanjšate utrujanje oči in tudi porabo energije. Če izberete Picture Off, se izklopi slika in predvaja se samo zvok. Za izklop funkcije Picture Off pritisnite kateri koli gumb. N V meniju Tools funkcija Picture Off ni podprta. T Pritisnite gumb TOOLS, da prikažete meni Tools. Možnost Energy Saving lahko nastavite tudi z izbiro možnosti Tools → Energy Saving. BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 24 10/20/2009 4:54:17 PMSlovenščina - 25 „ Menu Transparency Nastavite lahko prosojnost menija na zaslonu. • Bright: : Za nastavitev običajnega menija na zaslonu. • Dark : Za preklop menija na zaslonu v neprosojnega. „ Melody → Off / Low / Medium / High Prilagodite lahko melodijo ob vklopu ali izklopu televizorja. N Melodija se ne predvaja - Ko iz televizorja ne prihaja zvok, ker ste pritisnili gumb M MUTE. - Ko iz televizorja ne prihaja zvok, ker ste pritisnili gumb – (Glasnost). - Ko se televizor izklopi s funkcijo Sleep Timer. „ Light Effect (samo PS58B680/PS63B680) Glede na okoliščine lahko vklopite ali izklopite modri indikator LED na sprednji strani televizorja. Uporabite ga za varčevanje z energijo ali če indikator LED utruja vaše oči. • Off : Modri indikator LED je vedno izklopljen. • In Standby : Modri indikator LED sveti v načinu pripravljenosti, ob vklopu televizorja pa se. • Watching TV : Modri indikator LED sveti, ko gledate televizijo, ob izklopu televizorja pa se izklopi. • Always : Modri indikator LED vedno sveti. N Nastavite Light Effect na Off da zmanjšate porabo energije. Ogled slike v sliki (PIP) V glavni sliki lahko prikažete podsliko televizijskega programa ali video vhoda. Tako lahko gledate sliko televizijskega programa ali video vhoda iz katere koli priključene opreme, medtem ko gledate glavno sliko. N Ko na glavnem zaslonu gledate igro ali karaoke, lahko slika v oknu PIP postane malce nenaravna. T Pritisnite gumb TOOLS, da prikažete meni Tools. Nastavitve funkcije PIP lahko konfigurirate tudi z izbiro možnosti Tools → PIP. ❑ PIP → Off / On Za aktiviranje ali deaktiviranje funkcije PIP. Glavna slika Podslika Component HDMI 1, HDMI2/DVI, HDMI 3, HDMI 4 PC TV „ Size → / / / Za izbiro velikosti podslike. N Če je glavna slika v načinu HDMI, je na voljo možnost Size. „ Position → / / / Za izbiro položaja podslike. N V dvojnem načinu ( , ) možnosti Position ni mogoče izbrati. „ Channel Izberete lahko kanal podslike. PIP PIP : Off ► Size : Position : Channel : ATV 1 E Enter R Return General Game Mode : Off BD Wise : Off Energy Saving : Off Menu Transparency : Bright Melody : Medium PIP ► U Move E Enter R Return BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 25 10/20/2009 4:54:17 PMSlovenščina - 26 Podprti program ❑ Legal Notice Ogledate si lahko pravno obvestilo in splošno izjavo o zavrnitvi odgovornosti glede vsebine in storitev tretje osebe. „ General Disclaimer To je celotna storitev pravnega obvestila za Internet@TV. N Splošna izjava o zavrnitvi odgovornosti se lahko razlikuje, odvisno od države. N S pritiskom gumba ◄ ali ► se lahko pomaknete na prejšnjo ali naslednjo stran. ❑ Product Guide V navodilih za uporabo izdelka so opisane najpomembnejše funkcije televizorja. N Za podrobnejše informacije izberite želeni element. ❑ Self Diagnosis „ Picture Test Če menite, da imate težave s sliko, izvedite preskus slike. Oglejte si barvni vzorec na zaslonu, da preverite, ali težava še vedno obstaja. N Na zaslonu se prikaže Does the problem still exist with this test photo?. Če se poskusni vzorec ne prikaže ali pa je na njem šum, izberite Yes. Če je poskusni vzorec pravilno prikazan, izberite No. • Yes : Vzrok težave je morda televizor. Za pomoč pokličite Samsungov klicni center. • No : Vzrok težave je morda zunanja oprema. Preverite povezave. Če težave niste odpravili, si oglejte uporabniški priročnik za zunanjo napravo. „ Sound Test Če menite, da imate težave s sliko, izvedite preskus slike. Oglejte si barvni vzorec na zaslonu, da preverite, ali težava še vedno obstaja. N Na zaslonu se prikaže Does the problem still exist with this test photo?. Če se poskusni vzorec ne prikaže ali pa je na njem šum, izberite Yes. Če je poskusni vzorec pravilno prikazan, izberite No. • Yes : Vzrok težave je morda televizor. Za pomoč pokličite Samsungov klicni center. • No : Vzrok težave je morda zunanja oprema. Preverite povezave. Če težave niste odpravili, si oglejte uporabniški priročnik za zunanjo napravo. N Če iz zvočnikov televizorja ne prihaja zvok, pred izvedbo preskusa zvoka preverite, ali je možnost Speaker Select v meniju zvoka nastavljena na TV speaker. N Med preskusom se melodija predvaja tudi, če je možnost Speaker Select nastavljena na External Speaker ali če je bil zvok izklopljen s pritiskom gumba M MUTE. „ Signal Information (samo pri digitalnih kanalih) Lahko prilagodite anteno, da izboljšate sprejem digitalnih kanalov, ki so na voljo. N Če merilnik jakosti signalov kaže, da je signal šibek, fizično prilagodite anteno, da povečate jakost signalov. Nadaljujte s prilagajanjem antene, dokler ne najdete najboljšega položaja z najmočnejšim signalom. Podprti / Vhod BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 26 10/20/2009 4:54:17 PMSlovenščina - 27 Seznam virov / urejanje imena ❑ Source List Za izbiro televizorja ali drugih zunanjih vhodnih virov, ki so povezani s televizorjem, na primer predvajalnikov DVD ali kabelskih/satelitskih sprejemnikov. Uporabite za izbiro želenega vhodnega vira. „ TV, Ext.1, Ext.2, AV, Component, PC, HDMI1, HDMI2/DVI, HDMI3, HDMI4, USB. N Izberete lahko samo zunanje naprave, ki so povezane s televizorjem. Na seznamu virov se bodo povezani vhodi označili in pomaknili na vrh. Nepovezani vhodi pa se bodo pomaknili na dno. N Uporaba barvnih gumbov na daljinskem upravljalniku za seznam virov. - Rdeči (Refresh) : Za osvežitev povezanih zunanjih naprav. - T TOOLS (Tools) : Za prikaz menijev Edit Name in Information. O Da si ogledate zunanji signalni vir, pritisnite gumb SOURCE na daljinskem upravljalniku. ❑ Edit Name Poimenujte lahko napravo, ki je priključena na vhodne vtičnice, da boste lažje izbrali vhodni vir. „ VCR / DVD / Cable STB / Satellite STB / PVR STB / AV Receiver / Game / Camcorder / PC / DVI / DVI PC / TV / IPTV / Blu-ray / HD DVD / DMA N Če je na vrata HDMI IN 2(DVI) povezan računalnik z ločljivostjo 1920 x 1080 pri 60 Hz, nastavite način HDMI2/DVI na PC v možnosti Edit Name načina Input. ❑ Software Upgrade Da bi bil izdelek opremljen z najnovejšimi funkcijami digitalne televizije, so nadgradnje programske opreme redno oddajane kot del običajnega televizijskega signala. Televizor samodejno zazna take signale in prikaže obvestilo o nadgradnji programske opreme. Imate možnost namestitve nadgradnje. „ By USB Pogon USB, na katerem je nadgradnja vdelane programske opreme, vstavite v televizor. Pazite, da med posodobitvijo ne odklopite napajanja ali odstranite pogona USB. Ko bo nadgradnja vdelane programske opreme končana, se bo televizor samodejno izklopil in znova vklopil. Po končani nadgradnji preverite različico vdelane programske opreme. Ko je programska oprema nadgrajena, se uporabniške nastavitve videa in zvoka vrnejo na privzete (tovarniške) vrednosti. „ By Channel Nadgradnja programske opreme z uporabo oddajnega signala. N Če med časom prenosa programske opreme izberete to funkcijo, zaženete iskanje in prenos razpoložljive programske opreme. N Koliko časa se prenaša programska oprema, je odvisno od stanja signala. „ Standby Mode Upgrade Da nadaljujete nadgradnjo programske opreme z vklopljenim glavnim napajanjem, s pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼ izberite On. 45 minut po preklopu v stanje pripravljenosti se samodejno izvede ročna nadgradnja. Ker je napajanje izdelka vklopljeno notranje, lahko zaslon rahlo sveti. Ta pojav lahko traja več kot 1 uro, dokler se nadgradnja programske opreme ne dokonča. „ Alternative Software Zamenjava trenutne programske opreme z novejšo. N Če ste zamenjali programsko opremo, je prikazana trenutna. N Trenutno programsko opremo lahko zamenjate z drugo z uporabo možnosti Alternative Software. ❑ HD Connection Guide Prikažejo se kratka navodila, kako optimalno izkoristiti novi HDTV. Nudimo način povezave za naprave HD. N S pritiskom gumba ◄ ali ► se lahko pomaknete na prejšnjo ali naslednjo stran. ❑ Contact Samsung Na voljo vam je Samsungov klicni center, spletno mesto in informacije o izdelku. Stranska plošča televizorja Pogon USB Source List Edit Name Input BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 27 10/20/2009 4:54:18 PMSlovenščina - 28 Omrežna Omrežna povezava Omrežna povezava se uporablja za DLNA, prenos knjižnice vsebin iz interneta, Internet@TV in središče domačega omrežja. ❑ Omrežna povezava – kabelska „ Povezava LAN-a za omrežje DHCP-ja Spodaj so opisani postopki za nastavitev omrežja z uporabo protokola za dinamično konfiguracijo gostitelja (DHCP). Naslov IP, maska podomrežja, prehod in DNS se samodejno dodelijo, ko je izbran DHCP, zato jih ni treba ročno vnesti. 1. S kablom LAN povežite vrata LAN na hrbtni plošči televizorja in zunanji modem. 2. S kablom za modem priključite zunanji modem na vrata LAN na steni. N Priključki (mesto in vrsta vrat) zunanje naprave se lahko razlikujejo, odvisno od proizvajalca. N Če strežnik DHCP ni uspel dodeliti naslova IP, izklopite zunanji modem, ga znova vklopite po vsaj 10 sekundah in poskusite znova. N Za povezavo med zunanjim modemom in delilnikom (usmerjevalnikom) si oglejte navodila za uporabo ustreznega izdelka. N Televizor lahko z LAN-om povežete neposredno, brez povezave prek delilnika (usmerjevalnika). N Modema ADSL za ročno povezavo ni mogoče uporabiti, ker ne podpira DHCP-ja. Uporabite modem ADSL za samodejno povezavo. Hrbtna plošča televizorja Vrata za modem na steni 2 Kabel za modem Zunanji modem (ADSL/VDSL/kabelska televizija) 1 Kabel LAN Vrata LAN in televizor lahko povežete neposredno, odvisno od stanja omrežja. Hrbtna plošča televizorja Kabel LAN Vrata za modem na steni LAN lahko povežete prek delilnika (usmerjevalnika). Hrbtna plošča televizorja Vrata za modem na steni unanji modem (ADSL/VDSL/ kabelska televizija) Delilnik IP Kabel LAN Kabel za modem Kabel LAN BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 28 10/20/2009 4:54:20 PMSlovenščina - 29 „ Povezava LAN-a za okolje statičnega IP-ja Spodaj so opisani postopki za nastavitev omrežja z uporabo statičnega naslova IP. Ročno vnesite naslov IP, masko podomrežja, prehod in DNS, ki jih dobite pri vašem internetnem ponudniku (ISP-ju). 1. S kablom LAN povežite vrata LAN na hrbtni plošči televizorja in vrata LAN na steni. N Priključki (mesto in vrsta vrat) zunanje naprave se lahko razlikujejo, odvisno od proizvajalca. N Če uporabljate statični naslov IP, vas bo vaš ISP obvestil o naslovu IP, maski podomrežja, prehodu in DNS-ju. Te vrednosti morate vnesti, ko določate omrežne nastavitve. Če ne poznate vrednosti, se obrnite na skrbnika omrežja. N Za informacije o konfiguriranju in povezavi delilnika (usmerjevalnika) si oglejte navodila za uporabo ustreznega izdelka. N Televizor lahko z LAN-om povežete neposredno, brez povezave prek delilnika. N Če uporabljate delilnik IP (usmerjevalnik IP), ki podpira DHCP, lahko napravo nastavite kot DHCP ali statični IP. N Za postopke uporabe statičnega naslova IP se obrnite na vašega internetnega ponudnika. ❑ Omrežna povezava – brezžična V omrežje se lahko povežete brezžično prek brezžičnega delilnika IP. 1. Namestite ‘Samsungovo kartico za brezžični LAN‘ v priključek USB1(HDD) ali USB2 na televizorju. N Če želite uporabljati brezžično omrežje, uporabite ‘Samsungovo kartico za brezžični LAN‘. N Samsungova kartica za brezžični LAN je naprodaj posebej. Kartica za brezžični LAN WIS09ABGN je na voljo pri izbranih trgovcih, v spletnih trgovinah in na spletnem mestu Samsungparts.com. N Da lahko uporabljate brezžično omrežje, mora biti televizor povezan z brezžičnim delilnikom IP. N Če brezžični delilnik IP podpira DHCP, se lahko televizor poveže z brezžičnim omrežjem prek DHCP-ja ali statičnega naslova IP. N Samsungova kartica za brezžični LAN podpira IEEE 802.11A, IEEE 802.11B, IEEE 802.11G, IEEE 802.11N. Pri predvajanju videa DLNA prek povezave IEEE 802.11B/G lahko pride do motenj. N Če brezžični delilnik IP omogoča vklop/izklop funkcije preverjanja dosegljivosti (ping), jo vklopite. N Za brezžični delilnik IP izberite kanal, ki trenutno ni v uporabi. Če kanal, nastavljen za brezžični delilnik IP, uporablja druga naprava, ki se nahaja v bližini, bo to povzročilo motnje in komunikacija morda ne bo uspešna. se nadaljuje … Hrbtna plošča televizorja 1 Kabel LAN Vrata za modem na steni Hrbtna plošča televizorja Kabel LAN Delilnik IP Kabel LAN Vrata za LAN na steni LAN lahko povežete prek delilnika (usmerjevalnika). Stranska plošča televizorja Samsungova kartica za brezžični LAN Kabel LAN Brezžični delilnik IP Vrata za LAN na steni BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 29 10/20/2009 4:54:23 PMSlovenščina - 30 N Če uporabite varnostni sistem, ki ni naveden spodaj, ne bo deloval pri televizorju. - Če za AP (brezžični usmerjevalnik IP) uporabite varnostni ključ, je podprto samo naslednje. 1) Način preverjanja pristnosti : OPEN, SHARED, WPAPSK, WPA2PSK 2) Vrsta šifriranja : WEP, TKIP, AES - Če za začasni način uporabite varnostni ključ, je podprto samo naslednje. 1) Način preverjanja pristnosti : SHARED, WPANONE 2) Vrsta šifriranja : WEP, TKIP, AES N Če AP podpira WPS (zaščiteno nastavitev omrežja Wi-Fi), se lahko v omrežje povežete prek PBC-ja (konfiguracije s pritiskom gumba) ali PIN-a (osebne identifikacijske številke). WPS bo samodejno konfiguriral ključa SSID in WPA v ustreznem načinu. N Če naprava ni potrjena, je s televizorjem ni mogoče povezati prek ‘Samsungove kartice za brezžični LAN‘. Nastavitev omrežja ❑ Network Type Za povezavo v omrežje izberite možnost kabelske ali brezžične povezave. N Meni je aktiviran samo, če je nameščena ‘Samsungova kartica za brezžični LAN’. • Cable : V omrežje se povežite s kablom. • Wireless : V omrežje se povežite brezžično. ❑ Network Setup „ Cable Network Setup (če je možnost Network Type nastavljena na Cable) N Preverite, ali je priključen kabel LAN. • Internet Protocol Setup → Auto / Manual • Network Test : Ko nastavite omrežje, lahko preskusite ali potrdite stanje omrežne povezave. N Če je internetni ponudnik registriral naslov MAC naprave Če je internetni ponudnik registriral naslov MAC naprave, ki se uporabi pri prvi povezavi z internetom, in preverja naslov MAC ob vsaki povezavi z internetom, se televizor morda ne bo mogel povezati z internetom, saj se njegov naslov MAC razlikuje od naslova naprave (računalnika). V tem primeru internetnega ponudnika povprašajte po postopkih povezave naprave, ki ni računalnik (na primer televizorja), z internetom. Če internetni ponudnik za povezavo z internetom (omrežjem) zahteva ID ali geslo, se televizor morda ne bo mogel povezati z internetom. V tem primeru pri povezavi z internetom prek internetnega delilnika (usmerjevalnika) vnesite ID ali geslo. Internetna povezava morda ne bo uspela zaradi požarnega zida. V tem primeru se obrnite na internetnega ponudnika. Če se z internetom ne uspete povezati, čeprav ste izvedli postopke, ki jih je navedel internetni ponudnik, se obrnite na družbo Samsung Electronic „ Cable Network Setup-Auto Če povežete kabel LAN in ta podpira DHCP, se samodejno konfigurirajo nastavitve internetnega protokola (IP-ja). 1. Nastavite Network Type na Cable. 2. Izberite Cable Network Setup. 3. Nastavite Internet Protocol Setup na Auto. N Internetni protokol se samodejno nastavi. 4. Izberite Network Test da preverite povezljivost omrežja. „ Cable Network Setup-Manual Da boste lahko povezali televizor in LAN prek statičnega naslova IP, nastavite internetni protokol (IP). N Preverite, ali je priključen kabel LAN. (oglejte si 28. stran) 1. Nastavite Network Type na Cable. 2. Izberite Cable Network Setup. 3. Nastavite Internet Protocol Setup to Manual. 4. Nastavite možnosti IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway in DNS Server. N Če omrežje nastavljate ročno, pritisnite številske gumbe na daljinskem upravljalniku. 5. Izberite Network Test da preverite povezljivost omrežja. Setup Broadcast Security Network ► General se nadaljuje … BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 30 10/20/2009 4:54:24 PMSlovenščina - 31 „ Wireless Network Setup (če je možnost Network Type nastavljena na Wireless) N Meni je aktiviran samo, če je nameščena ‘Samsungova kartica za brezžični LAN’. (oglejte si 29. stran) - Internet Protocol Setup → Auto / Manual - Network Test: Ko nastavite omrežje, lahko preskusite ali potrdite stanje omrežne povezave. N Ko povezava z AP-jem ni mogoča Televizor morda ne bo uspel najti AP-ja ki je konfiguriran kot zasebni SSID. V tem primeru spremenite nastavitve AP-ja in poskusite znova. Če je internetni ponudnik registriral naslov MAC naprave, ki se uporabi pri prvi povezavi z internetom, in preverja naslov MAC ob vsaki povezavi z internetom, se televizor morda ne bo mogel povezati z internetom, saj se njegov naslov MAC razlikuje od naslova naprave (računalnika). V tem primeru internetnega ponudnika povprašajte po postopkih povezave naprave, ki ni računalnik (na primer televizorja), z internetom. Če se z internetom ne uspete povezati, čeprav ste izvedli postopke, ki jih je navedel internetni ponudnik, se obrnite na družbo Samsung Electronic, tel. 1-800-SAMSUNG. • Select a network - Dostopna točka : Izberete lahko delilnik IP, ki naj se uporabi, ko uporabljate brezžično omrežje. N Če brezžične vstopne točke ni na seznamu za izbiro omrežja, pritisnite rdeči gumb. N Ko je povezava vzpostavljena, se boste samodejno vrnili na zaslon. N Če ste izbrali vstopno točko s preverjanjem varnosti : Prikaže se zaslon za vnos varnostnega ključa. Vnesite varnostni ključ in pritisnite modri gumb na daljinskem upravljalniku. N Če je varnostno šifriranje vrste WEP, bo ob vnosu varnostnega ključa na voljo 0–9, A–F. Gumb Delovanje ▲/▼/◄/► Pomik izbora navzgor/navzdol/levo/desno. ENTER Vnos izbranega znaka. Rdeči gumb Preklop med velikimi in malimi črkami. Zeleni gumb Brisanje vnesenega znaka. Modri gumb Ta gumb pritisnite, da končate vnašanje varnostnega ključa. ❑ Povezava z uporabo WPS-ja (zaščitena nastavitev omrežja Wi-Fi) „ Če je varnostni ključ že nastavljen : Na seznamu dostopnih točk izberite WPS. N Izberete lahko PBC, PIN, Security Key. • Povezava z uporabo možnosti PBC : Izberite PBC (Konfiguracija s pritiskom gumba). V dveh minutah pritisnite gumb PBC na AP-ju (dostopni točki) in počakajte, da se vzpostavi povezava. • Povezava z uporabo možnosti PIN : Izberite PIN (osebna identifikacijska številka). N Prikaže se sporočilo s kodo PIN. V dveh minutah vnesite kodo PIN v napravo AP. Izberite OK in počakajte, da se vzpostavi povezava. N Če se povezava ne vzpostavi, poskusite znova. N Če povezava ni vzpostavljena, čeprav ste znova poskusili, ponastavite dostopno točko. Oglejte si priročnike za posamezne dostopne točke. • Povezava z uporabo možnosti Security Key : Če izberete Security Key, se prikaže okno za vnos. Vnesite varnostni ključ in pritisnite Modri gumb. N Če se povezava ne vzpostavi, poskusite znova. Wireless Network Setup Security Key n Move Number EEnter R Return _ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 0~9 Number Lowercase Delete Done * * Wireless Network Setup Select a network n Move EEnter R Return Search Ad-hoc AP_1 AP_2 AP_3 AP_4 PBC PIN Security Key 3/9 Press the PBC button on the access point. Access Point Name : AP_3 Cancel Press OK After input TV’s Pincode in the access point’s setup. Access Point Name : AP_3 PIN Code : 12345678 OK Cancel Wireless Network Setup Security Key n Move Number EEnter R Return _ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 0~9 Number Lowercase Delete Done BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 31 10/20/2009 4:54:26 PMSlovenščina - 32 „ Če varnostni ključ ni nastavljen : Če je varnostna nastavitev AP-ja, ki podpira WPS, NONE (BREZ), lahko izberete PBC, PIN, None Security. None Security omogoča povezavo z AP-jem neposredno brez uporabe funkcije WPC. N Postopek za PBC, PIN je enak zgornjemu. Oglejte si ga, če je varnostni ključ že nastavljen. N Če se povezava ne vzpostavi, poskusite znova. „ Ad-hoc : Z mobilno napravo se lahko povežete brez dostopne točke prek brezžičnega zaščitnega ključa USB z uporabo enakovrednega omrežja. • Povezava z novo napravo Ad-hoc 1. Izberite Select a network in prikaže se seznam naprav. 2. Ko ste na seznamu naprav, pritisnite modri gumb na daljinskem upravljalniku ali izberite Ad-hoc. N Prikaže se sporočilo The existing network system may have limited functionality. Do you want to change the network connection?. 3. V napravo, ki jo želite povezati, vnesite generirani Network Name(SSID) in Security Key. • Povezava obstoječe naprave Ad-hoc 1. Izberite Select a network, in prikaže se seznam naprav. 2. Na seznamu naprav izberite želeno napravo. 3. Če je bil uporabljen varnostni ključ, ga znova vnesite. N Če omrežje ne deluje normalno, znova preverite Network Name(SSID) in Security Key. Če je Security Key nepravilen, je morda vzrok za nepravilno delovanje. „ Wireless Network Setup - Auto Če želite povezati AP, mora podpirati DHCP. Brez DHCP-ja je mogoče povezati samo naprave, ki podpirajo začasni način. 1. Nastavite Network Type na Wireless. 2. Izberite Wireless Network Setup. 3. Nastavite Internet Protocol Setup na Auto. N Internetni protokol se samodejno nastavi. 4. uporabo možnosti Select a network izberite omrežje. 5. Izberite Network Test da preverite povezljivost omrežja. „ Wireless Network Setup - Manual Za brezžično povezavo z omrežjem z uporabo statičnega naslova IP morate nastaviti internetni protokol (IP). (Oglejte si 29. stran) N Za podrobnejše informacije o statičnem naslovu IP si oglejte uporabniški priročnik za vaš brezžični delilnik IP. 1. Nastavite Network Type na Wireless. 2. Izberite Wireless Network Setup. 3. Nastavite Internet Protocol Setup na Manual. 4. Nastavite možnosti IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway in DNS Server. N Če omrežje nastavljate ročno, pritisnite številske gumbe na daljinskem upravljalniku. 5. Z uporabo možnosti Select a network izberite omrežje. 6. Izberite Network Test da preverite povezljivost omrežja. * * Wireless Network Setup Select a network n Move EEnter R Return Search Ad-hoc AP_1 AP_2 AP_3 AP_4 PBC PIN Security Key 3/9 The existing network system may have limited functionality. Do you want to change the network connection? Yes No BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 32 10/20/2009 4:54:26 PMSlovenščina - 33 Priključitev naprave USB 1. Za vklop televizorja pritisnite gumb POWER. 2. Napravo USB, v kateri so foto in glasbene datoteke, priključite na vtičnico USB ob strani televizorja. N Vtičnica USB 1(HDD) se uporablja tudi kot vtičnica HDD. HDD (trdi disk) je naprava, ki shranjuje digitalno šifrirane podatke. N Media Play podpira samo naprave USB MSC (Mass Storage Class). MSC je samo masovna prenosna naprava. MSC-ji so ključi in bralniki pomnilniških kartic MSC-ji so ključi, bralniki pomnilniških kartic, trdi diski USB itd. (zvezdišča USB niso podprta.) N Protokol MTP (Media Transfer Protocol) ni podprt. N Datotečni sistem podpira samo FAT16/32 (datotečni sistem NTFS ni podprt). N Priključite trdi disk USB na namenska vrata USB1 (HDD). Če pa priključena naprava potrebuje visoko moč, je USB1 (HDD) morda ne bo podpiral. N Nekatere vrste digitalnih fotoaparatov in avdio naprav z USB-jem morda ne bodo združljive s tem televizorjem. N Priključite neposredno na vrata USB na televizorju. Če uporabljate ločeno kabelsko povezavo, lahko pride do težav pri združljivosti z USB-jem. N Preden napravo priključite na televizor, naredite varnostno kopijo datotek, da se ne poškodujejo ali izgubijo. Podjetje SAMSUNG ne odgovarja za poškodbe ali izgubo datotek. N Med nalaganjem naprave USB ne izključite. N Naprava MSC podpira datoteke MP3 in JPEG, naprava PTP pa samo datoteke JPEG. N Zaporedna oblika zapisa JPEG je podprta. N Višja kot je ločljivost slike, dalj časa se bo slika nalagala na zaslon. N Največja podprta ločljivost datotek JPEG je 15360 x 8640 slikovnih pik. N Pri nepodprtih ali poškodovanih datotekah se prikaže sporočilo Not Supported File Format. N Če je foto datotek več kot 4000 (ali glasbenih datotek več kot 3000), datoteke, ki presegajo omejitev 4000, morda ne bodo prikazane na seznamu fotografij (ali glasbe). N Datotek MP3 z DRM-jem, prenesenih z mesta, ki ni brezplačno, ni mogoče predvajati. N Upravljanje digitalnih pravic (DRM) preprečuje nezakonito uporabo digitalne predstavnosti zaradi zaščite avtorskih pravic. N Ko se giblje na sliko, nakladanje, lahko traja nekaj sekund. ❑ Uporaba funkcije predvajanja predstavnosti Gumb Delovanje ▲/▼/◄/► Za premikanje kazalca in izbiro elementa. ENTERE Za izbiro trenutno izbranega elementa. Za predvajanje ali začasno ustavitev diaprojekcije ali glasbenih datotek. Za predvajanje ali začasno ustavitev diaprojekcije ali glasbene datoteke. RETURN Za vrnitev v prejšnji meni. TOOLS Za izbiro različnih funkcij v menijih fotografij in glasbe. Za zaustavitev trenutne diaprojekcije ali glasbene datoteke. Za skok na prejšnjo/naslednjo skupino. INFO Za prikaz informacij. MEDIA.P Za preklop v način Media Play ali iz njega. DivX® Certified to play DivX® video, including premium content. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX,Inc. This is an official DivX Certified device that plays DivX video. Visit www.divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX video. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified® device must be registered in order to play DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) content. To generate the registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in the device setup menu. Go to vod.divx.com with this code to complete the registration process and learn more about DivX VOD. Predvajanje predstavnosti Stranska plošča televizorja Pogon USB BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 33 10/20/2009 4:54:27 PMSlovenščina - 34 Uporaba funkcije predvajanja predstavnosti TTa funkcija omogoča ogled oziroma poslušanje foto in glasbenih datotek, ki so shranjene v napravi USB MSC (Mass Storage Class). Morda ne bo mogoče predvajati večpredstavnostnih datotek brez veljavnih licenc. ❑ Odpiranje menija predvajanja predstavnosti 1. Pritisnite gumb MENU. S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼ izberite Application in nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE. 2. S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼ izberite Media Play (USB & DLNA), in nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE. O Pritisnite gumb MEDIA.P na daljinskem upravljalniku, da prikažete meni Media Play. O S pritiskanjem gumba SOURCE na daljinskem upravljalniku izberite USB ali DLNA in nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE. 3. Pritisnite rdeči gumb in nato s pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼ izberite ustrezni pomnilnik USB (v primeru priključitve prek zvezdišča). Pritisnite gumb ENTERE. N Ta funkcija je odvisna od pomnilniške naprave USB ki je povezana s televizorjem. N Ime izbrane naprave USB se prikaže na spodnjem levem delu zaslona. 4. S pritiskanjem gumba ◄ ali ► izberite ikono (Photo, Music, Movie, Setup) in nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE. N Za izhod iz načina Media Play pritisnite gumb MEDIA.P na daljinskem upravljalniku. N V tem načinu lahko uživate v filmskih izrezkih, ki so na voljo v možnosti igre, ni pa mogoče predvajati same igre. ❑ Varno odstranjevanje pomnilniške naprave USB Napravo lahko varno odstranite s televizorja. 1. Na zaslonu s seznamom datotek za predvajanje predstavnosti ali med predvajanjem diaprojekcije, glasbene ali filmske datoteke pritisnite gumb TOOLS. 2. S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼ izberite Remove Safely in nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE. 3. Odstranite napravo USB s televizorja. ❑ Screen Display 1. Trenutni standard razvrščanja : V tem polju je prikazan trenutni standard razvrščanja datotek. 2. Ogled skupin : Označeni sta razvrščena skupina in trenutno izbrana fotografija. 3. Trenutno izbrana datoteka : Označena je trenutno izbrana datoteka. 4. Informacije o izbiri elementov : Prikazuje število fotografij, ki ste jih izbrali z rumenim gumbom. 5. Trenutna naprava : Prikazuje ime trenutno izbrane naprave. N Rdeči gumb (Device) : Za izbiro priključene naprave. 6. Elementi pomoči • Zeleni (Favourites Setting) gumb : Za spremembo nastavitve priljubljenih za izbrano datoteko. Gumb pritiskajte, dokler se ne prikaže želena vrednost. • Rumeni gumb (Select) : Za izbiro datoteke s seznama datotek. Izbrane datoteke so označene s simbolom c. Če želite izbiro datoteke preklicati, ponovno pritisnite rumeni gumb. • Gumb TOOLS (Tools) : Za prikaz menijev z možnostmi. (Meni orodij se spremeni glede na trenutno stanje.) • Gumb R RETURN (Return) : Za vrnitev na prejšnji meni. Folder Preference Basic View Timeline Colour IMG_0335.JPG 4/6 IMG_0349. JPG ▶ ▶ Folder 2 1 Folder 1 1 Slide Show Play Current Group Information Remove Safely ../ folder name/ Photo USB „ Device Select T Tools R Upper Folder Media Play Photo Music Setup PHOTO USB : USB 851.98MB/995.00MB Free Movie USB „ Device RReturn Preference Basic View Timeline Color Folder Mar.01.2009 IMG_0343 .JPG ▶ ▶ IMG_03496 .JPG IMG_03496 .JPG Mar Apr Jun Nov IMG_0335.JPG 1/67 ▶ ▶ 2009 ◀ IMG_03496 .JPG 3 1 2 1File(s) Selected 4 5 6 Photo USB „ Device Favorites Setting Select T Tools R Return c BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 34 10/20/2009 4:54:32 PMSlovenščina - 35 Urejanje seznama fotografij / glasbe / filmov „ Basic View Za prikaz map v pomnilniški napravi USB. Če izberete mapo in pritisnete gumb ENTERE, se prikažejo samo foto datoteke v izbrani mapi. N Če so datoteke razvrščene po standardu Basic View, datotek priljubljenih ni mogoče nastaviti. „ Folder Za razvrstitev datotek po mapah. Če je v USB-ju več map, so foto datoteke prikazane po posameznih mapah. Prva je prikazana datoteka v korenski mapi, ostale pa so prikazane po abecednem redu. „ Preference → ★ ★ ★ , ★ ★ ★ , ★ ★ ★ , ★ ★ ★ Za razvrstitev datotek po pomembnosti (Priljubljene). N Spreminjanje nastavitev priljubljenih Na seznamu fotografij izberite želeno in pritiskajte zeleni gumb, dokler se ne prikaže želena nastavitev. N Zvezdice se uporabljajo samo za združevanje. Na primer nastavitev 3 zvezdic nima prednosti pred nastavitvijo 1 zvezdice. „ Timeline (Photo / Movie) Za razvrstitev in prikaz naslovov glasbene ali filmske po simbolih/številkah/abecedi/v posebnem zaporedju. „ Title (Music / Movie) Za razvrstitev naslovov glasbenih datotek po simbolih/številkah/abecedi/v posebnem zaporedju ter prikaz glasbene datoteke. ❑ Photo „ Colour → Red / Yellow / Green / Blue / Magenta / Black / Gray / Unclassified Za razvrstitev fotografij po barvi. Informacije o barvah fotografij lahko spremenite. N Pred razvrščanjem fotografij po barvah nastavite Use Colour View na On v meniju Setup. ❑ Music „ Artist Za razvrstitev glasbenih datotek glede na izvajalca po simbolih/številkah/abecedi/v posebnem zaporedju. „ Mood → Energetic / Rhythmical / Sad / Exciting / Calm / Unclassified Za razvrstitev glasbenih datotek po vzdušju. Informacije o vzdušju glasbe lahko spremenite. „ Genre Za razvrstitev glasbenih datotek po žanru. Folder Preference Basic View Title Artist 1 When I Dream 3/4 Carol kidd Mr A-Z 2009 Pop usermanual Heaven NPKI ▶ 1 ▶ ▶ ▶ ▶ ../ folder name/ Music USB „ Device Select T Tools R Upper Folder ▶ ▶ Preference Basic View Timeline Tiltle Folder Apr Apr.27.2009 Movie USB „ Device Favorites Settings Select T Tools R Upper Folder MOVIE_003 .avi MOVIE_000 .avi MOVIE_004 .avi MOVIE_001.avi 1/5 ▶ ▶ ◀ MOVIE_005 .avi Preference Basic View Timeline Color Folder Mar.01.2009 IMG_0343 .JPG ▶ ▶ IMG_03496 .JPG IMG_03496 .JPG Mar Apr Jun Nov IMG_0335.JPG 1/67 ▶ ▶ 2009 ◀ IMG_03496 .JPG Photo USB „ Device Favorites Setting Select T Tools R Return BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 35 10/20/2009 4:54:38 PMSlovenščina - 36 Meni z možnostmi za seznam fotografij / filmov / glasbe 1. Pritisnite gumb MEDIA.P. 2. S pritiskanjem gumba ◄ ali ► izberite Photo, Music, Movie, nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE. 3. S pritiskanjem gumba ◄ ali ► izberite želeno datoteko. N Izbiranje več datotek - S pritiskanjem gumba ◄ ali ► izberite želeno datoteko. Nato pritisnite rumeni gumb. - Če želite izbrati več datotek, ponovite zgornji postopek. - Poleg izbrane datoteke se prikaže oznaka c. 4. Pritisnite gumb TOOLS. N Meni z možnostmi se spremeni glede na trenutno stanje. „ Play Current Group V tem meniju lahko predvajate diaprojekcijo, sestavljeno samo iz foto datotek v trenutno izbrani skupini razvrščanja. „ Deselect All (če je izbrana vsaj ena datoteka) Za preklic izbire vseh datotek. N Oznaka c ki pomeni, da je določena datoteka izbrana, se skrije. „ Information Prikaz informacij o foto/glasbeni/filmski datoteki. Na enak način si lahko ogledate informacije o datotekah tudi med diaprojekcijo. O Za ogled informacij pritisnite gumb INFO. „ Remove Safely Za varno odstranjevanje naprave s televizorja. ❑ Photo „ Slide Show V tem meniju lahko predvajate diaprojekcijo foto datotek, shranjenih v pomnilniški napravi USB. „ Change Group (če je ključ razvrščanja Colour) Spremenite lahko informacije o barvah izbrane foto datoteke (ali skupine datotek), da jo premaknete iz ene barvne skupine v drugo. N S tem ne spremenite dejanskih barv fotografije. N Informacije o skupini trenutne datoteke se posodobijo in fotografije se premaknejo v novo barvno skupino. N Če želite spremeniti informacije za več datotek, s pritiskom rumenega gumba izberite želene datoteke. ❑ Music „ Change Group (če je ključ razvrščanja Mood) Informacije o vzdušju glasbenih datotek lahko spremenite. Informacije o skupini trenutne datoteke se posodobijo in datoteka se premakne v novo skupino. Če želite spremeniti informacije za več datotek, izberite datoteke s pritiskanjem rumenega gumba. Select T Tools R Upper Folder Folder Preference Basic View Title Artist 1 1 ▶ ▶ ../ folder name/ Sky When I Dream 3/4 Carol kidd Mr A-Z 2009 Pop NPKI usermanual Heaven ▶ NPKI Play Current Group Information Remove Safely Music USB „ Device Select T Tools R Upper Folder MOVIE_004 MOVIE_003 .avi .avi MOVIE_000 .avi MOVIE_005 .avi MOVIE_007 .avi MOVIE_001.avi 1/5 MOVIE_006 .avi ▶ ▶ Preference Basic View Timeline Tiltle Folder Apr Apr.27.2009 Movie USB „ Device Favorites Settings Select T Tools R Upper Folder Play Current Group Information Remove Safely Basic View Timeline Colour Folder Preference IMG_0335.JPG 4/6 IMG_0349 .JPG ▶ ▶ Folder 2 1 Folder 1 1 Slide Show Play Current Group Change Group Information Remove Safely Photo USB „ Device Favorites Settings Select T Tools R Upper Folder BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 36 10/20/2009 4:54:43 PMSlovenščina - 37 Meni z možnostmi za diaprojekcije / predvajanje glasbe / predvajanje filmov 1. Med predvajanjem diaprojekcije (ali ogledom fotografije) ali glasbe ali filma pritisnite gumb TOOLS, da nastavite možnost. 2. S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼ izberite želeno možnost, nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE. „ Picture Setting / Sound Setting Za izbiro slikovnih in zvočnih nastavitev. „ Information Za prikaz informacij o datoteki. „ Remove Safely Za varno odstranjevanje naprave s televizorja. ❑ Meni z možnostmi za diaprojekcijo „ Stop Slide Show / Start Slide Show Diaprojekcijo lahko zaženete ali ustavite. „ Slide Show Speed → Slow / Normal / Fast Za izbiro hitrosti diaprojekcije. N Ta funkcija je na voljo samo med diaprojekcijo. N Med predvajanjem diaprojekcije lahko hitrost spremenite tudi s pritiskanjem gumba π (REW) ali μ (FF). „ Slide Show Effect Za izbiro učinka prehoda zaslona, ki naj se uporabi v diaprojekciji. • None / Fade1 / Fade2 / Blind / Spiral / Checker / Linear / Stairs / Wipe / Random N Ta funkcija je na voljo samo med diaprojekcijo. „ Rotate Fotografije, shranjene v pomnilniški napravi USB, lahko zasukate. N Vsakič ko pritisnete gumb ◄, zasukate sliko za 270˚, 180˚, 90˚ ali 0˚. N Vsakič ko pritisnete gumb ►, zasukate sliko za 90˚, 180˚, 270˚ ali 0˚. N Zasukana fotografija se ne shrani. „ Zoom Fotografije, shranjene v pomnilniški napravi USB, lahko povečate. (x1 → x2 → x4) N Če želite povečano fotografijo premakniti, najprej pritisnite gumb ENTERE, nato pa pritiskajte gumbe ▲/▼/◄/►. Če je povečana slika manjša od originalne velikosti zaslona, slike ni mogoče premakniti na drugo mesto. N Povečana fotografija se ne shrani. „ Background Music Med ogledom diaprojekcije lahko izberete glasbo za ozadje. N To funkcijo je mogoče uporabiti samo, če so v napravi USB shranjene glasbene in foto datoteke. N Za spremembo načina glasbe za ozadje morate naložiti glasbene datoteke. Za nalaganje predvajajte glasbene datoteke v kategoriji glasbe. ❑ Meni z možnostmi za predvajanje glasbe „ Repeat Mode → On / Off Za ponavljajoče se predvajanje glasbenih datotek. ❑ Meni z možnostmi za predvajanje filmov „ Picture Size → Fit / Original Za predvajanje videa v velikosti zaslona ali v izvirni velikosti. „ Caption Setting Za nastavitev napisov za film. Tools Tools Stop Slide Show Slide Show Speed : Normal Slide Show Effect : Fade1 Rotate Zoom Background Music Picture Setting Sound Setting Information › U Move E Enter eExit Tools Repeat Mode ◄ On ► Picture Setting Sound Setting Information Remove Safely U Move š™ Adjust eExit Tools Picture Setting Sound Setting Picture Size : Fit Caption Setting Information Remove Safely U Move  Enter eExit BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 37 10/20/2009 4:54:44 PMSlovenščina - 38 Ogled fotografije ali diaprojekcije ❑ Ogled diaprojekcije N V diaprojekcijo bodo vključene vse datoteke iz razdelka s seznamom datotek. N Med diaprojekcijo so datoteke prikazane v zaporedju od trenutno prikazane datoteke naprej. N Fotografije v diaprojekciji si sledijo tako, kot so razvrščene v razdelku s seznamom datotek. N Med diaprojekcijo se lahko samodejno predvajajo glasbene datoteke, če je možnost Background Music nastavljena na On. N Ko je prikazan seznam fotografij, za začetek diaprojekcije pritisnite gumb ∂(Predvajaj)/ENTERE na daljinskem upravljalniku. N Kontrolni gumbi za diaprojekcijo. ENTERE Za predvajanje/začasno zaustavitev diaprojekcije. Za predvajanje diaprojekcije. Za začasno zaustavitev diaprojekcije. Za ustavitev diaprojekcije in vrnitev na seznam fotografij. / Za spremembo hitrosti predvajanja diaprojekcije. T TOOLS Za izbiro različnih funkcij v menijih za fotografije. ❑ Predvajanje trenutne skupine 1. S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ se pomaknite na razdelek s ključi razvrščanja. 2. S pritiskanjem gumba ◄ ali ► izberite standard razvrščanja. 3. S pritiskanjem gumba ▼ se pomaknite na razdelek s seznamom skupin. 4. S pritiskanjem gumba ◄ ali ► izberite skupino. 5. Pritisnite gumb ∂ (Predvajaj). Zažene se diaprojekcija z datotekami izbrane skupine. „ Druga možnost 1. Izberite ključ razvrščanja in nato v razdelku s seznamom datotek izberite fotografije, ki so v želeni skupini. N Za pomik na prejšnjo/naslednjo skupino pritisnite gumb π (REW) ali μ (FF). 2. Pritisnite gumb TOOLS. 3. S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali▼ izberite Play Current Group, nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE. N V diaprojekciji se bodo predvajale samo fotografije iz izbrane skupine, vključno z izbranimi datotekami. ❑ Za predvajanje diaprojekcije, sestavljene samo iz izbranih datotek 1. S pritiskanjem gumba ▼ izberite razdelek s seznamom datotek. 2. S pritiskanjem gumba ◄ ali ► izberite želeno fotografijo v razdelku s seznamom datotek. 3. Pritisnite rumeni gumb. 4. Če želite izbrati več fotografij, ponovite zgornji postopek. N Levo od izbrane fotografije se prikaže oznaka c. N Če izberete eno datoteko, diaprojekcija ni mogoča. N Če želite preklicati izbiro vseh izbranih datotek, pritisnite gumb TOOLS in izberite Deselect All. 5. Pritisnite gumb ∂ (Predvajaj)/ENTERE. N Izbrane datoteke se bodo predvajale v diaprojekciji. „ Druga možnost 1. Ko se premaknete v razdelek s seznamom datotek, s pritiskanjem rumenim gumbov izberite želene fotografije. 2. Pritisnite gumb TOOLS. 3. Z gumbom ▲ ali ▼ izberite Slide Show, nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE. N Izbrane datoteke se bodo predvajale v diaprojekciji. ▶ ▶ Preference Basic View Timeline Tiltle Folder Apr Apr.27.2009 Movie USB „ Device Favorites Settings Select T Tools R Upper Folder MOVIE_003 .avi MOVIE_000 .avi MOVIE_004 .avi MOVIE_001.avi 1/5 MOVIE_005 .avi Basic View Timeline Colour Folder Preference IMG_0335.JPG 4/6 IMG_0349 .JPG ▶ ▶ Folder 2 1 Folder 1 1 Slide Show Play Current Group Change Group Information Remove Safely Photo r Normal IMG_0335.JPG 3648x2432 2009/3/15 1/4 USB E Pause lr Previous/Next T Tools R Return USB „ Device Favorites Settings Select T Tools R Upper Folder BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 38 10/20/2009 4:54:49 PMSlovenščina - 39 Predvajanje glasbe ❑ Predvajanje glasbene datoteke 1. S pritiskanjem gumba ▼ izberite razdelek s seznamom datotek. 2. S pritiskanjem gumba ◄ ali ► izberite glasbeno datoteko za predvajanje. 3. Pritisnite gumb ∂ (Predvajaj)/ENTERE. N Ta meni prikazuje samo datoteke s končnico za datoteke MP3. Datoteke z drugimi končnicami niso prikazane, tudi če so shranjene v isti napravi USB. N Izbrana datoteka je prikazana na vrhu, skupaj s časom predvajanja. N Glasnost glasbe prilagodite z gumbom za glasnost na daljinskem upravljalniku. Za izklop zvoka pritisnite gumb M MUTE na daljinskem upravljalniku. N Če zvok pri predvajanju datotek MP3 ni sprejemljiv, prilagodite Equalizer in SRS TruSurround v meniju zvoka. (Preveč modulirana datoteka MP3 lahko povzroči težave z zvokom.) N Trajanje predvajanja glasbene datoteke bo morda prikazano kot ‘00:00:00’, če na začetku datoteke ni informacij o času predvajanja. N Gumba π (REW) in μ (FF) med predvajanjem ne delujeta. N Kontrolni gumbi za predvajanje glasbe ENTERE Za predvajanje/začasno zaustavitev filmske datoteke. Za izhod iz načina predvajanja in vrnitev na seznam glasbe. Za predvajanje glasbene datoteke T TOOLS Za izbiro različnih funkcij v menijih za glasbo. Za začasno zaustavitev glasbene datoteke N Ikona za informacije o glasbenih funkcijah Če se ponovijo vse glasbene datoteke v mapi (ali izbrani datoteki). Možnost Repeat Mode je nastavljena na On. Če se vse glasbene datoteke v mapi (ali izbrani datoteki) predvajajo enkrat. Možnost Repeat Mode je nastavljena na Off. ❑ Predvajanje glasbene skupine 1. S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ se pomaknite na razdelek s ključi razvrščanja. 2. S pritiskanjem gumba ◄ ali ► izberite standard razvrščanja. 3. S pritiskanjem gumba ▼ ali ENTERE se pomaknite na razdelek s seznamom skupin. 4. Pritisnite gumb ∂ (Predvajaj). Datoteke izbrane skupine se bodo začele predvajati. „ Druga možnost 1. Izberite ključ razvrščanja in nato v razdelku s seznamom datotek izberite datoteke, ki so v želeni skupini. N Za pomik na prejšnjo/naslednjo skupino pritisnite gumb π (REW) ali μ (FF). 2. Pritisnite gumb TOOLS. 3. S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali▼ izberite Play Current Group, nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE. N Predvajajo se glasbene datoteke v skupini razvrščanja, vključno z izbrano datoteko. ❑ Predvajanje izbranih glasbenih datotek 1. S pritiskanjem gumba ▼ izberite razdelek s seznamom datotek. 2. S pritiskanjem gumba ◄ ali ► izberite želeno glasbeno datoteko. 3. Pritisnite rumeni gumb. 4. Če želite izbrati več glasbenih datotek, ponovite zgornji postopek. N Levo od izbrane glasbene datoteke se prikaže oznaka c. N Če želite preklicati izbiro vseh izbranih datotek, pritisnite gumb TOOLS in izberite Deselect All. 5. Pritisnite gumb ∂ (Predvajaj)/ENTERE. N Predvajale se bodo izbrane datoteke. r 00:00:02 / 00:04:55 r 1/3 When I Dream r r Geek In The Pink Heaven USB E Pause lr Previous/Next T Tools R Return BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 39 10/20/2009 4:54:49 PMSlovenščina - 40 Predvajanje filmske datoteke ❑ Predvajanje filmske datoteke 1. S pritiskanjem gumba ▼ izberite razdelek s seznamom datotek. 2. S pritiskanjem gumba ◄ ali ► izberite film, ki ga želite predvajati. 3. Pritisnite gumb ∂ (Predvajaj)/ENTERE. N Izbrana datoteka se začne predvajati. N Izbrana datoteka je prikazana na vrhu, skupaj s časom predvajanja. N Trajanje predvajanja filmske datoteke bo morda prikazano kot ‘00:00:00’, če na začetku datoteke ni informacij o času predvajanja. N Gledate lahko zanimive večpredstavnostne datoteke iger, funkcija igranja pa ni podprta. N Podprte oblike napisov Ime Datotečna pripona Programski jezik Besedilo na osnovi časa MPEG-4 .ttxt XML SAMI .smi HTML SubRip .srt Na osnovi niza SubViewer .sub Na osnovi niza Micro DVD .sub ali .txt Na osnovi niza N Podprte oblike video zapisa N Kontrolni gumbi za predvajanje videov ENTERE Za predvajanje/začasno zaustavitev filmske datoteke Za predvajanje filmske datoteke Za začasno zaustavitev filmske datoteke Za izhod iz načina predvajanja in vrnitev na seznam filmov. T TOOLS Za zagon različnih funkcij v menijih za filme. ◄/► Za preskok filma naprej ali nazaj. ▲/▼ Za pomik na prvo/zadnjo datoteko. Datotečna pripona Vsebnik Video dekoder Zvočni kodek Največja ločljivost sti *.avi AVI Divx 3.11/4.x/5.1/6.0 MP3 AC3 LPCM ADPCM 720x576 XviD 1920x1080 H.264 BP/MP/HP 1920x1080 MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080 Motion JPEG 800x600 *.mkv MKV Divx 3.11/4.x/5.1/6.0 MP3 AC3 LPCM ADPCM 720x576 XviD 1920x1080 H.264 BP/MP/HP 1920x1080 MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080 Motion JPEG 800x600 *.asf ASF Divx 3.11/4.x/5.1/6.0 MP3 AC3 LPCM ADPCM WMA 720x576 XviD 1920x1080 H.264 BP/MP/HP 1920x1080 MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080 Motion JPEG 800x600 *.wmv (VC1) ASF VC1 WMA 1920x1080 *.mp4 MP4 (SMP4) H.264 BP/MP/HP MP3 ADPCM AAC 1920x1080 MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080 XVID 1920x1080 *.3gp 3GPP H.264 BP/MP/HP ADPCM AAC 1920x1080 MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080 *.vro VRO VOB MPEG2 AC3 MPEG LPCM 1920x1080 MPEG1 1920x1080 *.mpg *.mpeg PS MPEG1 AC3 MPEG LPCM 1920x1080 MPEG2 1920x1080 *.ts *.tp *.trp TS MPEG2 AAC MP3 1920x1080 H.264 1920x1080 VC1 1920x1080 ▶ r r 00:00:02 / 00:01:55 1/3 MOVIE_000.avi USB E Pause lr Jump T Tools R Return BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 40 10/20/2009 4:54:50 PMSlovenščina - 41 ❑ Predvajanje skupine filmov 1. S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ se pomaknite na razdelek s ključi razvrščanja. 2. S pritiskanjem gumba ◄ ali ► izberite standard razvrščanja. 3. S pritiskanjem gumba ▼ ali ENTERE se pomaknite na razdelek s seznamom skupin. 4. Pritisnite gumb ∂ (Predvajaj). Predvajati se bodo začele samo datoteke izbrane skupine. „ Druga možnost 1. Izberite ključ razvrščanja in nato v razdelku s seznamom datotek izberite datoteke, ki so v želeni skupini. N Za pomik na prejšnjo/naslednjo skupino pritisnite gumb π (REW) ali μ (FF). 2. Pritisnite gumb TOOLS. 3. S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali▼ izberite Play Current Group, nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE. N Predvajajo se filmske datoteke v skupini razvrščanja, vključno z izbrano datoteko. ❑ Predvajanje izbranih filmskih datotek 1. S pritiskanjem gumba ▼ izberite razdelek s seznamom datotek. 2. S pritiskanjem gumba ◄ ali ► izberite želeno glasbeno datoteko. 3. Pritisnite rumeni gumb. N Levo od izbrane filmske datoteke se prikaže oznaka c. N Če želite preklicati izbiro vseh izbranih datotek, pritisnite gumb TOOLS in izberite Deselect All. 4. Če želite izbrati več filmskih datotek, ponovite zgornji postopek. 5. Pritisnite gumb ∂ (Predvajaj)/ENTERE. N Predvaja se samo izbrana datoteka. ❑ Neprekinjeno predvajanje filma (nadaljevanje predvajanja) Če zapustite funkcijo predvajanja filma, je film mogoče pozneje predvajati od mesta, kjer ste ga zaustavili. 1. Z gumbom ◄ ali ► v razdelku s seznamom datotek izberite film, ki ga želite predvajati neprekinjeno. 2. Pritisnite gumb ∂ (Predvajaj)/ENTERE. 3. S pritiskom modrega gumba izberite neprekinjeno predvajanje Play Continuously (nadaljevanje predvajanja). N Film se začne predvajati na mestu, kjer ste ga zaustavili. N Če je funkcija Cont. Movie Play Help (pomoč za neprekinjeno predvajanje filmov) nastavljena na On (vklop) v meniju Setup (namestitev), se ob nadaljevanju predvajanja prikaže pojavno sporočilo. Uporaba menija nastavitve V meniju nastavitve so prikazane uporabniške nastavitve menija Media Play. 1. Pritisnite gumb MEDIA.P na daljinskem upravljalniku, da prikažete meni Media Play. 2. S pritiskanjem gumba ◄ ali ► izberite Setup in nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE. 3. S pritiskanjem ▲ ali ▼ izberite želeno možnost. 4. Z gumbom ◄ ali ► izberite možnost. N Za izhod iz načina Media Play pritisnite gumb MEDIA.P na daljinskem upravljalniku. „ Use Color View → On / Off Za izbiro razvrščanja fotografij po barvi. N Če je ta možnost nastavljena na On, se lahko čas nalaganja podaljša zaradi zbiranja informacij o fotografijah. „ Music Repeat Mode → On / Off Za ponavljajoče predvajanje glasbenih datotek. „ Cont. movie play help → On / Off Za prikaz pojavnih sporočil s pomočjo za neprekinjeno predvajanje filmov. „ Get the DivX® VOD registration code Za prikaz registracijske kode, ki je dodeljena televizorju. Če se povežete s spletnim mestom podjetja DivX in prek osebnega računa registrirate registracijsko kodo, lahko prenesete registracijsko datoteko za video na zahtevo. Če zaženete registracijo videa na zahtevo z uporabo funkcije predajanja predstavnosti, se izvede registracija. Za več informacij o videu na zahtevo DivX® obiščite www.DivX.com. „ Get the DivX® VOD deactivation code Če video na zahtevo DivX® ni registriran, se prikaže koda za deaktiviranje registracije. Če to funkcijo izvedete, ko je video na zahtevo DivX® registriran, se trenutna registracija videa na zahtevo DivX® deaktivira. „ Screen Saver Run Time → 10 min / 20 min / 1 hour Za nastavitev časa, po preteku katerega naj se prikaže ohranjevalnik zaslona. „ Information Za ogled informacij o priključeni napravi. „ Remove Safely Za varno odstranjevanje naprave s televizorja. Media Play USB : USB 851.98MB/995.00MB Free SETUP Photo Music Movie Setup USB „ eExit Device Setup Move Adjust Return Use Color View ◄ Off ► Music Repeat Mode On Cont. movie play help On Get the DivX® VOD registration code Get the DivX® VOD deactivation code Screen Saver Run Time 10 min Information Remove Safely USB „ Device BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 41 10/20/2009 4:54:50 PMSlovenščina - 42 Nastavitev omrežja DLNA Omrežje DLNA omogoča, da si videe in slike, shranjene v računalniku, ogledate prek omrežne povezave na televizorju v načinu Media Play mode. Tako vam datotek ni treba več kopirati v pomnilnik USB in priključevati naprave na televizor. Če želite uporabiti DLNA, morate televizor priključiti v omrežje in v računalnik namestiti aplikacijo DLNA. ❑ Diagram omrežne povezave – kabelske ❑ Diagram omrežne povezave – brezžične 1. Za več informacij o konfiguriranju omrežja si oglejte razdelek ‘Nastavitev omrežja’. N Priporočamo, da televizor in računa. Prvi 3 deli naslova maske podomrežja televizorja in naslova IP računalnika morajo biti enaki, spremenite samo zadnji del (naslov gostitelja. (npr. naslov IP : 123.456.789.**) 2. Računalnik, v katerega boste namestili program Samsung PC Share Manager, priključite na zunanji modem s kablom LAN. N TV lahko z računalnikom povežete neposredno, brez povezave prek usmerjevalnika. Namestitev aplikacije DLNA Preden lahko predvajate vsebine v računalniku ali na televizorju, morate namestiti aplikacijo. Če želite funkcijo DLNA uporabljati brez težav, uporabite program na CD-ROM-u, ki je priložen televizorju, ali program Samsung PC Share Manager, ki je primeren za vaš model televizorja in ki ga lahko prenesete s spletnega mesta podjetja Samsung. TV Zunanji modem (ADSL/VDSL/kabelska televizija) LAN PC LAN Media Play-DLNA TV LAN PC ali 1 Stranska plošča televizorja Samsungova kartica za brezžični LAN BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 42 10/20/2009 4:54:52 PMSlovenščina - 43 Uporaba aplikacije DLNA Vsebina zaslona programa 1. Meniji : V aplikaciji so na voljo naslednji : File, Share, Server, in Help. 2. Kliknite, če želite dati izbrano strežniško mapo v skupno rabo. 3. Kliknite, če želite preklicati skupno rabo. 4. Kliknite, če želite osvežiti računalniško mapo in datoteke. 5. Kliknite, če želite sinhronizirati status skupne rabe. 6. Navedene so računalniške mape in datoteke za skupno rabo. 7. Navedene so uporabnikove mape, ki so v skupni rabi. 8. Ime strežnika osebnega računalnika, prikazano na seznamu naprav funkcije predvajanja predstavnosti. „ Sistemske zahteve 1. V računalnik vstavite programski CD, ki ste ga dobili s televizorjem. 2. Namestitev programa zahteva 30MB prostora na trdem disku. N Če imate datoteke v skupni rabi, je za 100 datotek potrebnega do 30 MB prostora na trdem disku. N Če prekličete skupno rabo datotek, se na trdem disku sprosti tudi prostor, ki je bil prej napolnjen z informacijami o sličicah. „ Podprte oblike zapisa • Slika : JPEG/ Audio: MP3/ Video: AVI, MKV, ASF, MP4, 3GPP, PS, TS Vsebnik. Za podrobnosti o podprtih oblikah video zapisa si oglejte navodila ‘Predvajanje filmske datoteke’. „ Namestitev aplikacije ► ► ► 1. Zaženite datoteko Setup.exe na programskem CD-ju, ki ste ga prejeli z izdelkom. N Sicer pa lahko datoteko prenesete tudi s spletnega mesta www.samsung.com. 2. Namestite program SAMSUNG PC Share Manager, kot prikazujejo spodnje slike. 3. Po končani namestitvi se na namizju prikaže ikona PC Share Manager. N Za zagon programa dvokliknite ikono. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 43 10/20/2009 4:54:53 PMSlovenščina - 44 ❑ Share „ Mapa v skupni rabi Mapo, ki je shranjena v računalniku, lahko daste v skupno rabo za TV. „ Preklic mape v skupni rabi Skupno rabo mape v računalniku lahko prekličete. V podoknu Shared Folder izberite mapo, nato pa izberite Unshare Folder. „ Uveljavitev trenutnih nastavitev Ta postopek izvedite, kadar je potrebna sinhronizacija zaradi skupne rabe nove mape ali preklica skupne rabe. Meni Set Changed State uveljavi spremembe za mape v skupni rabi, shranjene v računalniškem programu za skupno rabo. Ker je uveljavljanje sprememb za notranje podatke zamudno, lahko s to funkcijo uporabnik uveljavi spremembe le, kadar je to zares potrebno. Dokler ne izberete menija Set Changed State, se spremenjeno stanje za mapo v skupni rabi ne posreduje v strežnik. Spremembe za mape v skupni rabi se ne posredujejo v računalnik, dokler ne izberete menija Set Changed State. „ Nastavitev dovoljenja za dostop Da lahko najde računalnik, mora biti TV v oknu Access Permission Settings (Nastavitve dovoljenja za dostop) nastavljen na Set Device Policy. Poleg tega morata biti računalniški strežnik in TV priključena v isto podomrežje. • Način : Najprej izberite meni Share in nato Set Device Policy. Zavrnjeni elementi so obarvani sivo. Dovoljenja za dostop lahko spreminjate z gumbom Allow Accept/Deny. Če želite element izbrisati, ga izberite in izbrišite z možnostjo Delete Item. ❑ Server „ Server Računalnik lahko uporabljate ali nehate uporabljati kot strežnik. „ Avviamento del server all’avvio di Windows Lahko določite, ali naj se računalniški strežnik samodejno zažene ob zagonu programa Windows. „ Change server name Raèunalniški strežnik lahko preimenujete. Uporaba funkcije DLNA ❑ Uporaba menija DLNA Standard DLNA (Digital Living Network Alliance) omogoča predvajanje vsebine, shranjene v strežniku DLNA (običajno računalnik), ki je priključen na televizor, ali prek omrežja.Predvajanje predstavnosti omogoča predvajanje vsebine, shranjene v pomnilniški napravi USB, ki je priključena na televizor, DLNA pa omogoča predvajanje vsebine, shranjene v strežniku DLNA (v računalniku), ki je povezan s televizorjem ali prek omrežja. Postopki za uporabo vsebine so enaki kot pri predvajanju predstavnosti. 1. Pritisnite gumb MEDIA.P na daljinskem upravljalniku, da prikažete meni DLNA. 2. S pritiskanjem gumba ◄ ali ► izberite ikono (Photo, Music, Movie, Setup), in nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE. N Za izhod iz načina DLNA pritisnite gumb MEDIA.P na daljinskem upravljalniku. N DLNA ne podpira naslednjih funkcij. - Glasbe za ozadje in nastavitve glasbe za ozadje. - Razvrščanja datotek po nastavitvah v mapah s fotografijami, glasbo in filmi. - Spreminjanja informacij o skupinah. - Kopiranje/brisanje. - Varna odstranitev. - Funkcije gumba REW/FF (π/μ) med predvajanjem filma. - Playing Movie Continuously (Resume Play) function. N Funkcija preskoka morda ne bo delovala pri nekaterih vsebnikih, kot sta asf in mkv. N Divx DRM, večkanalni zvok in vdelani napisi niso podprti. N Program Samsung PC Share manager mora biti dovoljen s strani požarnega zida računalnika. N Pri DLNA drugih proizvajalcev funkcija preskoka (tipki ◄/►) ali začasne zaustavitve med predvajanjem filma morda ne bo delovala; odvisno od informacij o vsebini. N Čas predvajanja med samim predvajanjem filma morda ne bo prikazan. Media Play Photo Music Setup PHOTO USB : USB 851.98MB/995.00MB Free Movie USB „ Device Return BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 44 10/20/2009 4:54:54 PMSlovenščina - 45 Anynet + Povezava naprav, ki podpirajo Anynet + Anynet + je funkcija, ki omogoča upravljanje vseh povezanih Samsungovih naprav, ki podpirajo Anynet +, z daljinskim upravljalnikom Samsungovega televizorja. Sistem Anynet + lahko uporabljate pri Samsungovih napravah, ki imajo funkcijo Anynet +. Prepričajte se, da ima vaša Samsungova naprava to funkcijo, in sicer tako, da preverite, ali je na njej logotip Anynet + . ❑ Povezava s televizorjem 1. Vtičnico HDMI IN (1, 2(DVI), 3 ali 4) na televizorju in vtičnico HDMI OUT na ustrezni napravi, ki podpira Anynet+, povežite s kablom HDMI. ❑ Povezava z domačim kinom 1. Vtičnico HDMI IN (1, 2(DVI), 3 ali 4 na televizorju in vtičnico HDMI OUT na ustrezni napravi, ki podpira Anynet + , povežite s kablom HDMI. 2. Vtičnico HDMI IN na domačem kinu in vtičnico HDMI OUT na ustrezni napravi v sistemu Anynet + povežite s kablom HDMI. N Z optičnim kablom povežite (optično) vtičnico za digitalni avdio izhod na televizorju in digitalni avdio vhod na domačem kinu. N Če uporabite zgornjo povezavo, omogoča optična vtičnica samo izhod 2-kanalnega zvoka. Slišali boste samo zvok iz sprednjega levega in desnega zvočnika ter globokotonca domačega kina. Za 5.1-kanalni zvok povežite (optično) vtičnico za digitalni avdio izhod na predvajalniku DVD ali kabelskem/satelitskem sprejemniku (npr. naprava, ki podpira Anynet + , 1 ali 2) neposredno z ojačevalnikom ali domačim kinom in ne s televizorjem. N Povežite samo en domači kino. N Napravo, ki podpira Anynet + , lahko povežete s kablom HDMI 1.3. Nekateri kabli HDMI morda ne podpirajo funkcij Anynet + . N Anynet + deluje, ko je naprava AV, ki je združljiva s sistemom Anynet + , v stanju pripravljenosti ali pa vklopljena. N Anynet + podpira skupno največ 12 naprav AV. Povežete lahko do 3 naprave iste vrste. N Anynet + istočasno podpira do 3 naprave. Naprava, ki podpira Anynet +, 1 Naprava, ki podpira Anynet +, 2 Naprava, ki podpira Anynet +, 3 Televizor Kabel HDMI 1.3 Kabel HDMI 1.3 Kabel HDMI 1.3 Televizor Naprava, ki podpira Anynet+, 1 Naprava, ki podpira Anynet +, 2 Naprava, ki podpira Anynet +, 3 Kabel HDMI 1.3 Kabel HDMI 1.3 Kabel HDMI 1.3 Kabel HDMI 1.3 Domači kino Optični kabel Naprava, ki podpira Anynet +, 4 Kabel HDMI 1.3 Naprava, ki podpira Anynet +, 4 Kabel HDMI 1.3 BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 45 10/20/2009 4:54:55 PMSlovenščina - 46 Nastavitev sistema Anynet + ❑ Nastavitev funkcije Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) T Pritisnite gumb TOOLS, da prikažete meni Tools. Meni Anynet + lahko prikažete tudi tako, da izberete Tools → Anynet + (HDMI-CEC). „ Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) → Off / On Da lahko uporabite funkcijo Anynet + , mora biti možnost Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) nastavljena na On. N Ko je funkcija Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) onemogočena, so deaktivirane vse operacije, ki so povezane s sistemom Anynet + . „ Auto Turn Off → No / Yes Nastavitev samodejnega izklopa naprave, ki podpira Anynet+, ob izklopu televizorja. N Da lahko uporabljate funkcijo Anynet+, mora biti aktivni vir na daljinskem upravljalniku televizorja nastavljen na TV. N Če nastavite Auto Turn Off na Yes, se bodo ob izklopu televizorja izklopile tudi povezane zunanje naprave. Če zunanja naprava še snema, se morda ne bo izklopila Preklapljanje med napravami, ki podpirajo Anynet + 1. Pritisnite gumb TOOLS. Pritisnite gumb ENTERE, da izberete Anynet + (HDMI-CEC). 2. S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼ izberite Device List, in nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE. N Prikaže se seznam naprav, ki podpirajo Anynet + in ki so povezane s televizorjem. Če ne uspete najti želene naprave, pritisnite rdeči gumb za iskanje naprav. N Samo če nastavite Anynet + (HDMI-CEC) na On v meniju Setup se prikaže meni Device List. 3. S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼ izberite določeno napravo in nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE Izvede se preklop na želeno napravo. N Preklop na izbrane naprave traja največ 2 minuti. Operacije preklopa, ki poteka, ni mogoče preklicati. N Čas, ki je potreben za iskanje naprav, je odvisen od števila povezanih naprav. N Če ste zunanjo napravo izbrali s pritiskanjem gumba SOURCE, funkcije Anynet + ni mogoče uporabiti. Ne pozabite preklopiti na zunanjo napravo v sistemu Anynet + z uporabo gumba TOOLS. ❑ Meni Anynet + Vsebina menija Anynet + je odvisna od vrste in stanja naprav, ki podpirajo Anynet + in ki so priključene na televizor. Meni Anynet + Opis View TV Način Anynet + se preklopi v način televizijskega oddajanja. Device List Za prikaz seznama naprav, ki podpirajo Anynet +. (ime_naprave) MENU Za prikaz menijev povezane naprave. Npr. če je priključen snemalnik DVD, se prikaže meni diska snemalnika DVD. (ime_naprave) INFO Za prikaz menija predvajanja povezane naprave. Npr. če je priključen snemalnik DVD, se prikaže meni predvajanja snemalnika DVD. Recording: (*snemalnik) Za zagon snemanja. (Meni deluje samo za naprave, ki podpirajo snemanje.) (*snemalnik) Reserve Recording Za omogočanje rezerviranja snemanja za snemalnik. (Na voljo samo za naprave, ki podpirajo funkcijo rezerviranja snemanja.) Stop Recording: (*snemalnik) Za ustavitev snemanja. Receiver Zvok se predvaja prek sprejemnika. se nadaljuje … Application Media Play (USB & DLNA) Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) ► Content Library Internet@TV Home Network Centre U Move EEnter R Return Anynet+(HDMI-CEC) : On ▶ Auto Turn Off : Yes U Move EEnter R Return View TV Device List Recording : DVDR DVDR MENU DVDR INFO Receiver : On Setup BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 46 10/20/2009 4:54:56 PMSlovenščina - 47 ❑ Gumbi na daljinskem upravljalniku televizorja, ki so na voljo v načinu Anynet+ Vrsta naprave Stanje delovanja Gumbi na voljo Naprava, ki podpira Anynet + Po preklopu na napravo, ko se na zaslonu prikaže meni ustrezne naprave. Številski gumbi ▲/▼/ Gumb ◄/►/ENTERE Barvni gumbi/gumb EXIT Po preklopu na napravo, medtem ko se predvaja datoteka. (previjanje nazaj) / (previjanje naprej) (ustavi) / (predvajaj) / (začasno ustavi) Naprava z vgrajenim kanalnikom Po preklopu na napravo, ko gledate televizijski program Gumb P / Avdio naprava Ko je sprejemnik aktiviran Gumb = / Gumb M MUTE N Funkcija Anynet + deluje samo, če je aktivni vir na daljinskem upravljalniku televizorja nastavljen naTV. N Gumb deluje samo v stanju za snemanje. N Naprav v sistemu Anynet + ni mogoče upravljati z gumbi na televizorju. Naprave, ki podpirajo Anynet + je mogoče upravljati samo z daljinskim upravljalnikom televizorja. N Daljinski upravljalnik televizorja v določenih razmerah morda ne bo deloval. V tem primeru znova izberite napravo, ki podpira Anynet + . N Funkcije sistema Anynet + niso združljive z izdelki drugih proizvajalcev. N Delovanje , se lahko razlikuje, odvisno od naprave. N Če je povezanih več snemalnih naprav, so prikazane kot (*snemalnik), če pa je povezana samo ena , pa je prikazana kot (*ime_naprave). Snemanje S Samsungovim snemalnikom lahko posnamete televizijski program. 1. Pritisnite gumb TOOLS. Pritisnite gumb ENTERE, da izberete Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC). 2. S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼ izberite Recording (snemalnik) in nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE. Snemanje se začne. N Če je več snemalnih naprav Če je povezanih več snemalnih naprav, so navedene. S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼ izberite snemalno napravo in nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE Snemanje se začne. N Če snemalna naprava ni prikazana izberite Device List in pritisnite rdeči gumb, da poiščete naprave. N S pritiskom gumba posnamete, kar trenutno gledate. Če gledate video vsebino iz druge naprave, se posname ta vsebina. N Pred snemanjem preverite, ali je vtičnica za anteno ustrezno povezana s snemalno napravo. Da anteno pravilno povežete s snemalno napravo, si oglejte uporabniški priročnik za snemalno napravo. U Move EEnter R Return View TV Device List Recording : DVDR DVDR MENU DVDR INFO Receiver : On Setup BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 47 10/20/2009 4:54:56 PMSlovenščina - 48 Poslušanje prek sprejemnika Zvok lahko poslušate prek sprejemnika namesto prek zvočnikov televizorja. 1. Pritisnite gumb TOOLS. Pritisnite gumb ENTERE, da izberete Anynet + (HDMI-CEC). 2. S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼ izberite Receiver. S pritiskanjem gumba ◄ ali ► izberite On ali Off. N Če snemalnik podpira samo zvok, morda ni prikazan na seznamu naprav. N Sprejemnik bo deloval, če ste ustrezno povezali optično vhodno vtičnico sprejemnika in optično izhodno vtičnico TV-ja. N Če je sprejemnik (domači kino) nastavljen na On, zvok prihaja iz optične vtičnice na televizorju. Kadar televizor prikazuje običajne signale (DTV), pošilja 5.1-kanalni zvok v sprejemnik domačega kina. Če je vir digitalna komponenta, kot je predvajalnik DVD, in je s televizorjem povezan prek vhoda HDMI, bo sprejemnik domačega kina predvajal samo 2-kanalni zvok. N Pri uporabi funkcije Media Play fse zvok prek sprejemnika morda ne bo predvajal pravilno. N Ko zvok poslušate prek sprejemnika, je uporaba menijev za zvok omejena. N Če pride do prekinitve napajanja televizorja, ko je možnost Receiver nastavljena na On, je lahko možnost Speaker Select nastavljena na External Speaker, ko znova vklopite televizor. (oglejte si 21. stran) Odpravljanje težav s funkcijo Anynet + Težava Rešitev Anynet + ne deluje. • Preverite, ali naprava podpira Anynet + . Sistem Anynet + podpira samo naprave, ki podpirajo Anynet + . • Povežite samo en sprejemnik (domači kino). • Preverite, ali je napajalni kabel naprave, ki podpira Anynet + , pravilno povezan. • Preverite, ali je video kabel/avdio kabel/kabel HDMI 1.3 za napravo, ki podpira Anynet + ,